Submitted  f«-  ExaojjR.' 
THE  WHITAKER  \  nw  CO. 


GILDERSLEEVE'S 


LATIN^    QKAMMAE 


THIRD  EDITION,  REVISED  AND  ENLARGED 


BY 

B.   L.   GILDERSLEEVE 

PROFESSOR  OF  GREEK  IN  THE  JOHNS  HOPKINS  UNIVERSITY 
AND 

GONZALEZ   LODGE 

PROFESSOR   OF  LATIN   IN   BRTN   MAWR   COLLEGE 


UNIVERSITY  PUBLISHING  COMPANY 

NEW  YORK  BOSTON  NEW  ORLEANS 

AND  LONDON 

1900 


Copyright,  18^4,  by 
UNIVERSITY   PUBLISHING   CO, 


Entered  at  Stationers'  Hall 
«*♦  2204 


Press  of  J.  J.  Little  &  Co. 
Astor  Place,  New  York 


PREFACE. 


In  the  preparation  of  this  third  edition  of  Gilder- 
SLEEVE^s  Latin  Grammar,  the  office  of  the  senior  collabo- 
rator has  been  chiefly  advisory,  except  in  the  Syntax.  In 
the  Syntax,  Professor  Lodge  is  responsible  for  nearly  every- 
thing that  pertains  to  the  history  of  usage,  but  for  all 
deviations  from  the  theory  of  the  old  grammar  we  bear  a 
joint  responsibility.  During  the  progress  of  the  work  we 
have  been  cheered  and  aided  by  the  encouragement  and 
advice  of  distinguished  scholars  and  experienced  teachers, 
and  whereas  the  Preface  of  the  old  grammar  mentioned 
but  two  faithful  helpers,  Professor  Thomas  R.  Price  and 
Professor  William  E.  Peters,  the  present  work  has  had 
the  advantage  of  liberal  cooperation. 

Especial  acknowledgment  must  be  made  of  the  attention 
paid  to  every  detail  by  W.  Gordon  McCabe,  Esq.,  Head- 
master of  the  University  School,  Richmond,  Va.,  himself  a 
Latinist  of  exact  and  penetrating  scholarship,  and  by  his 
accomplished  assistant,  Mr.  0.  W.  Bain.  Professor  Minton 
Warren,  of  the  Johns  Hopkins  University,  has  lent  us 
the  aid  of  his  wide  and  accurate  knowledge  of  the  history 
of  the  Latin  language,  and  Professor  Chapman  Maupin, 
one  of  the  revisers  of  Gilderslep^ve's  Latin  Primer, 
has  given  us  the  benefit  of  his  practical  experience  and 
his  acute  observation.  Professor  E.  M.  Pease,  of  Leland 
Stanford  Junior  University,  whose  removal  to  the  distant 
AVest  interrupted  a  collaboration  which  promised  valuable 
results,  has,  in  spite  of  his  arduous  labors  as  teacher  and 
editor,  put  at  our  service  his  notes  on  the  Grammar  of  1872. 

Among  the  scholars  who  have  read  the  book  in  proof 
or  advance  sheets,  and  who  have  suggested  improvements 


Rn7453 


IV  PREFACE. 

here  and  corrections  there^,  we  would  gratefully  mention 
Principal  Bajs^croft,  of  Phillips  Andover  Academy,  Presi- 
dent Jesse,  of  the  University  of  Missouri,  Professor  M.  W. 
Humphreys,  of  the  University  of  Virginia,  E.  W.  Tun- 
stall,  M.A.,  of  Norfolk,  Va.,  Professor  Wm.  C.  Lawton", 
of  Philadelphia,  Professor  W.  P.  Mustard,  of  Haverford 
College,  Professor  J.  E.  Goodrich,  of  the  University  of 
Vermont,  Professor  Jas.  H.  Dillard,  of  Tulane  University, 
and  Professor  J.  W.  Redway,  of  New  York.  Finally  we 
desire  to  express  our  joint  thanks  to  Dr.  C.  W.  E.  Miller, 
Associate  of  the  Johns  Hopkins  University,  who  has  laid  us 
both  under  especial  obligations  by  his  careful  studies  in  the 
difficult  chapter  of  Versification. 

As  in  the  Preface  to  the  old  grammar,  so  in  the  Preface 
to  the  new,  it  is  considered  out  of  place  to  enlarge  on  the 
excellence  of  the  methods  followed  ;  but  as  the  new  gram- 
mar embraces  a  multitude  of  details  that  were  not  taken  up 
in  the  old  grammar,  it  has  been  thought  fit  that  Professor 
Lodge  should  indicate  the  sources  of  the  notes  with  which 
he  has  enriched  a  manual  that  has  held  its  modest  place  for 
more  than  a  quarter  of  a  cei^tury. 

B.  L.  Gildersleevb, 
.     _^^  Gonzalez  Lodge. 

August  1,  1894. 


The  following  supplementary  note  may  serve  io  embody  a  partial 
bibliography  of  the  more  important  works  used  in  this  revision,  and 
some  necessary  explanations  of  the  method  : 

Fairly  complete  bibliographies  of  works  on  Latin  Etymology 
and  Syntax  may  be  found  in  Reisig's  Vorlesungen  uber  lateinische 
Spr'achnrissenschaft  (new  edition,  by  Hagen,  Schmalz,  and  Landgraf, 
1881-1888),  and  in  the  Lateinische  Grammatik  of  Stolz  and  Schmalz 
(in  MtJLLER's  Handbuch  der  klassisehen  AUertumsunssenschaft;  2d 
edition,  1800).  Important  also  are  the  Grammars  of/KiJHNER  (1877, 
1878)*  and  Roby  (1881,  1882);  though  many  statements  in  both,  but 
especially  in  the  former,  must  be  corrected  in  the  light  of  more  recent 
study.     Some  indications  of  more  modern  theories  may  be  found  in 


*  A  new  Historical  Grammar,  by  Stolz,  Schmalz,  Landgraf,  and  Wagener,  was 
announced  by  Teubner  in  1891. 


PREFACE.  V 

the  Uriduterungen  zur  lateinischen  Qrammatilc  of  Deecke  (1893). 
Many  matters  of  importance  both  in  Etymology  and  Syntax  are 
treated  in  the  Archiv  fur  lateinisclie  Lexihographie,  and  the  construc- 
tions with  individual  words  are  often  well  discussed  in  Krebs'  Anti- 
barbarus  der  lateinischen  Sprache  (fitli  edition,  by  Schmalz,  1886). 

For  the  accentuation  and  pronunciation  of  Latin  we  have  also 
Corssen's  Aussprache,  Vocalismus  und  Betonung  der  lateinischen 
Sprache  (1868,  1870),  and  Seelmann's  Die  Aussprache  des  Latein  (1885). 

For  the  Etymology  we  must  refer  to  Bijcheler's  Grundriss  der 
lateinischeii  Declination  (2d  edition,  by  Wixdekilde,  1879)  and  to 
Schweizer-Sidler's  Lateinisclie  Grammatik  (1888)  ;  also  to  many 
articles  in  various  journals,  most  of  which  are  given  by  Stolz.  Indis- 
pensable is  Neue's  Formenlehre  der  lateinischen  Sprache,  of  which  the 
second  volume  of  the  third  edition  has  already  appeared  (1893)  and  the 
first  parts  of  the  third  volume  (1894),  under  the  careful  revision  of 
Waoener;  also  Georges'  Lexikon  der  lateinischen  Wortformen  (1890). 

For  the  Formation  of  Words  and  the  relation  of  Latin  forms  to  those 
of  the  related  languages  we  have  Henry's  Precis  de  Grammaire  Com- 
paree  and  Brugmann's  Grundriss  der  vergleichenden  Gra7nmatik,  both 
now  accessible  in  translations.  On  these,  in  connection  with  Schweizer- 
SiDLER,  the  chapter  on  the  Formation  of  Words  has  been  based. 

In  the  historical  treatment  of  the  Syntax  we  must  still  rely  in  large 
measure  on  Draeger's  Historische  Syntax  der  lateinischen  Sprache 
(2d  edition,  1878,  1881),  faulty  and  inaccurate  though  it  often  is  : 
many  of  the  false  statements  have  been  corrected  on  the  basis  of  more 
recent  individual  studies  by  Schmalz  ;  but  even  Schmalz  is  not  always 
correct,  and  many  statements  of  his  treatise  have  been  silently  emended 
in  the  present  book.  For  the  theoretical  study  of  some  problems  of 
Latin  Syntax  IIaase's  Vorlesnugen  uber  lateinisclie  Sprachivissenschaft 
(1880)  should  not  be  overlooked.  Since  the  appearance  of  the  second 
edition  of  Schmalz,  in  1890,  considerable  progress  has  been  made  in 
the  various  journals  and  other  publications,  as  may  be  seen  from 
Deecke's  summary  in  Bursian's  Jahresbericht  for  18913.  Every  etfort 
has  been  made  to  incorporate  in  this  grammar  the  main  results  of 
these  studies  as  far  as  practicable.  We  may  also  draw  attention  to 
the  following  important  articles,  among  others,  some  of  which  are 
mentioned  in  the  books  above  referred  to  : 

Wolfflin's  numerous  articles  in  the  ^rcA*v;^HiELMANN's  articles 
in  the  Archiv  on  habgre  with  Perfect  Participle  Passive,  and  on  the 
Reciprocal  Relation  ;i^jANDgraf's  articles  on  the  Figura  Etyinologica, 
in  the  second  volume  of  the  Acta  Seminarii  Erlaiigensis,  and  on  the 
Future  Participle  and  the  Final  Dative,  in  the  A/*c/ify,-^lALE's  treatise 
on  The  Cum  Constructions,  attacking  the  theories  ofjIIoFFMANN  (Latein- 
ische  Zeitpartikehi,  1874)  ancWLtJUBEiiT  {Die  Syntax  von  Quom,  1869); 


VI  PREFACE. 

Hoffmann's  reply  to  Hale  (1891),  and  Wetzel's  Der  Streit  zmischen 
Hoffmann  und  Hale  (1892)rC>AHL's  Die  laieinische  Partikel  ut  (1882), 
withrGrUTJAHR-PROBST's  Der  Gebrauch  von  nt  bei  Tere7iz  (1888)  ,^Zim- 
mermann's  article  on  quod  und  quia  im  dlteren  Latein  (1880)-^cherer's 
article  on  quando,  in  Stiidemund's  Studien  ;  Morris's  articles  on  the 
Sentence  Question  in  Flautus  and  Terence  in  the  A.J. P.  (vols.  x.  and 
xi.) ;  Hale's  articles  on  the  Sequence  of  Tenses  in  the  A.J. P.  (vols.  viii. 
and  ix.),  containing  a  discussion  of  the  earlier  Literature  ;  Elmer's 
articles  on  the  Latin  Prohibitive  in  A.J.  P.  (vol.  xv.) 

A  bibliography  of  the  treatises  on  Prosody  and  Versification  may 
be  found  in  Gleditsch's  treatise  in  the  second  volume  of  Muller's 
Handbuch ;  this,  with  Plessis'  Metrique  Orecque  et  Latine  (1889),  has 
been  made  tlie  basis  of  the  chapter  on  Prosody  ;  but  in  the  treatment 
of  early  metres,  regard  has  been  had  to  Klotz  (Altromische  Metrik, 
1890),  and  to  Lindsay's  recent  papers  on  the  Saturnian  in  the  A.  J. P. 
(vol.  xiv.).  In  the  matter  of  the  order  of  words  we  have  followed 
r*  Weil's  treatise  on  the  Order  of  Words,  translated  by  Super  (1887). 

The  question  of  the  correct  measurement  of  hidden  quantities  is 
still  an  unsettled  one  in  Latin  ;  for  the  sake  of  consistency  the  usage 
of  Marx,  HiJUfshuchlein  fur  die  Aussprache  der  lateinischen  Vokale 
%n posit ionslangen  Silben  (2d  edition,  1889)  has  been  followed. 

The  quotations  have  been  made  throughout  from  the  Teubner  Text 
editions  except  as  follows  :  Plautus  is  cited  from  the  Triumvirate 
edition  of  Ritschl  ;  Vergil  from  the  Editio  Maior  of  Ribbeck  ;  Ovid 
and  Terence  from  the  Tauchnitz  Texts ;  Horace  from  the  Editio  Minor 
of  Keller  and  Holder  ;  Lucretius  from  the  edition  of  Munro; 
Ennius  and  Luciliiis  from  the  editions  of  L.  MUller  ;  fragmentary 
Scenic  Poets  from  the  edition  of  Ribbeck.  Special  care  has  been 
taken  to  make  the  quotations  exact  both  in  spelling  and  wording  ;  and 
any  variation  in  the  spelling  of  individual  words  is  therefore  due  to 
the  texts  from  which  the  examples  are  drawn. 

Where  it  has  been  necessary  to  modify  the  quotations  in  order  to 
make  them  suitable  for  citation,  we  have  enclosed  within  square 
brackets  words  occurring  in  different  form  in  the  text,  and  in  paren- 
theses words  that  have  been  i ii.se rted  ;  wliere  the  passage  would  not 
yield  to  such  treatment,  Cf.  has  been  inserted  before  the  reference. 
We  have  not  thought  it  necessary  to  add  the  references  in  the  Prosody 
except  in  the  case  of  some  of  tlie  citations  from  early  Latin. 

In  the  spelling  of  Latin  words  used  out  of  quotation,  as  a  rule  u 
and  V  have  been  followed  by  o  rather  than  by  u  ;  but  here  the  require- 
ments of  clearness  and  the  period  of  the  language  have  often  been 
allowed  to  weigh.  Otherwise  we  have  followed  in  the  main  Bram- 
bach's  IMfsbuchlein  fUr  laieinische  Rechtschreibung  (translation  by 
McCabe,  1877).  '  G.  L. 


CONTENTS. 

ETYMOLOGY. 

SECTION 

lietters  and  Syllables 1-15 

Alphabet,  1;  Vowels,  2,  3;  Diphthongs,  4;  Conso- 
nants, 6,  7  ;  Phonetic  Variations,  8,  9;  Syllables,  10, 
11  ;  Quantity,  12-14  ;  Accentuation,  15. 

Parts  of  Speech 16 

Inflection  of  the  Substantive 17-71 

Definitions,  18 ;  Gender,  19-21  ;  Number,  22 ; 
Cases,  23-25  ;  Declensions,  36  ;  Endings,  27  ;  First 
Declension,  29,  30  ;  Second  Declension,  31-34  ;  Third 
Declension,  35-60  ;  Fourth  Declension,  61,  62  ;  Fifth 
Declension,  63,  64  ;  Greek  Substantives,  65,  66  ;  Ir- 
regular Substantives,  67-71. 

Inflection  of  the  Adjective 72-90 

Definition,  72  ;  First  and  Second  Declension,  73- 
76;  Pronominal  Adjectives,  76;  Third  Declension, 
77-83  ;  Irregular  Adjectives,  84,  85 ;  Comparison  of 
Adjectives,  86-90. 

Adverbs 91-93 

Formation  of  Adverbs,  91,  92  ;  Comparison,  93.  ' 

Numerals 94-98 

Cardinals,  94  ;  Ordinals,  94  ;  Distributives,  97  ; 
Adverbs,  98. 

Pronouns 99-111 

Personal,  100-102  ;  Determinative,  103  ;  Demon- 
strative, 104  ;  Relative,  105  ;  Interrogative,  106  ;  In- 
definites, 107;  Adjectives,  108;  Correlative,  109-111. 

Inflection  of  the  Verb 112-175 

Definitions,  112,  113;  Endings,  114,  115;  Inflection 
of  esse,  116,  117;  of  prSdesse,  118;  of  posse,  119.  Reg- 
ular Verbs,  120-167;  Division,  120;  Rules  for  forming 
Tenses,  121.  First  Conjugation,  122;  Second  Conju- 
gation, 123, 124;  Third  Conjugation,  125, 126;  Fourth 


Vlll  CONTENTS. 

SECTION 

Conjugation,  127  ;  Deponents,  138 ;  Periphrastic, 
129;  Notes,  130,  131.  Formation  of  the  Stems,  132- 
135;  Change  in  Conjugation,  136;  List  of  Verbs, 
137-1G7.  Irregular  Verbs,  168-174;  ire,  169,  2;  quire, 
nequire,  170;  ferre,  171;  edere,  172;  fieri,  173;  velle, 
nolle,  malle,  174;  Defective  Verbs,  175. 

Formation  of  Words 176-200 

Simple  Words,  179-192;  Substantives,  180,  181; 
Adjectives,  182;  Substantives  without  Suffixes,  183; 
Suffixes,  184-189;  Verbs,  190-192 ;  Compound  Words, 
193-200;  Substantives,  194-198;  Verbs,  199,200. 

SYNTAX. 

Simple  Sentence 202-471 

Subject,  203,  204;  Predicate,  205-209;  Concord, 
210,  211;  Voices,  212-221.  Tenses,  222-252;  Present, 
227-230;  Imperfect,  231-234;  Perfect,  235-240;  Plu- 
perfect, 241;  Future,  242,  243;  Future  Perfect,  244, 
245;  Periphrastic,  246-251;  Tenses  in  Letters,  252. 
Moods,  253-283;  Indicative,  254;  Subjunctive,  255- 
265 ;  Imperative,  266-275 ;  Tenses  in  Moods  and  Verbal 
Substantives,  276-283. 

Simple  Sentence  Expanded 284-471 

Multiplication  of  the  Subject 285-287 

Qualification  of  the  Subject 288-325 

Adjectives,  289-303;  Numerals,  292-295;  Compara- 
tives and  Superlatives,  296-303;  Pronouns,  304-319; 
Personal,  304;  Demonstrative,  305-307;  Determina- 
tive and  Reflexive,  308-311;  Possessive,  312  •  Indefi- 
nite, 313-319;  Apposition,  320-325;  Predicative  Attri- 
bution and  Apposition,  325. 

Multiplication  of  Predicate 386 

Qualification  of  Predicate 327-449 

The  Cases 328-418 

Accusative,  328-343;  Dative,  344-359;  Genitive, 
360-383;  Ablative,  384-410;  Locative,  411;  Preposi- 
tions, 412-418;  with  Accusative,  416;  with  Ablative, 
417;  with  Accusative  and  Ablative,  418. 

Infinitive 419-424 

Subject,  422;  Object,  423;  Predicate,  424. 


CONTENTS.  IX 

SECTION 

Gerund  and  Gerundive 425-433 

Genitive,  428;  Dative,  429;  Accusative,  430;  Abla- 
tive, 431 ;  with  Prepositions,  432,  433. 

Supine    434-436 

Accusative,  435;  Ablative,  436. 

Participles 437,  438 

Adverbs 439-449 

Negatives,  441-449. 

Incomplete  (Interrogative)  Sentence 450-471 

Direct  Simple  Questions,  453-457;  Direct  Disjunc- 
tive Questions,  458,  459  ;  Indirect  Questions,  460; 
Moods  in  Direct,  462-466 ;  Moods  in  Indirect,  467. 

Compound  Sentence .  472-670 

Coordinate  Sentence 473-503 

Copulative,  474-482;  Adversative,  483-491  ;  Dis- 
junctive, 492-497;  Causal  and  Illative,  498-503. 

Subordinate  Sentences 504-670 

Moods  in,  508;  Sequence  of  Tenses,  509-519;  Re- 
flexive in,  520-522. 

Object  Sentences 523-537 

Introduced  by  quod,  524,  525  ;  in  Accusative  and 
Infinitive,  526,  527,  532-535;  in  Nominative  and 
Infinitive,  528;  in  Participle,  536,  537. 

Causal  Sentences 538-542 

Introduced  by  quod,  quia,  etc.,  539-541  ;  by  quod, 
with  verbs  of  Emotion,  542. 
Sentences  of  Design  and  Tendency         ...        .     ^  .  543-558 
Final,  544-550;    Pure  Final,  545;  Complementary 
Final,  546-549;  After  verbs  of  Fear,  550. 

Consecutive,  551;  Pure  Consecutive,  552;  Comple- 
mentary Consecutive,  553-557;  Exclamatory  Ques- 
tions, 558. 

Temporal  Sentences 559-588 

Antecedent  Action,  561-567;  Iterative  Action,  566, 
567;  Contemporaneous  Action,  568-573;  Subsequent 
Action,  574-577 ;  Sentences  with  cum,  578-588. 

Conditional  Sentences 589-602 

Logical,  595;  Ideal,  596;  Unreal,  597;  Incomplete, 
598-601 ;  Of  Comparison,  602. 
Concessive  Sentences 603-609 


X  CONTENTS. 

SECTION 

Relative  Sentences 610-637 

Concord,  614-621  ;  Tenses,  622,  623  ;  Moods,  624- 
637. 

Comparative  Sentences 638-644 

Correlative,  642 ;  with  atque  or  ac,  643 ;  with  quam, 
644. 

The  Abridged  Sentence 645-663 

Historical  Infinitive,  647 ;  Oratio  Obliqua,  648 ; 
Moods  in,  650-652;  Tenses  in,  653-655;  Conditional 
Sentences  in,  656-659  ;  Pronouns,  660  ;  Partial  Ob- 
liquity, 662,  663. 

Participial  Sentences 664-670 

Arrangement  of  Words  and  Clauses      .         .        .        .  671-687 

Figures  of  Syntax  and  Rhetoric 688-700 

Principal  Rules  of  Syntax         .        .         .Pp.  437-444 

PROSODY. 

Quantity 702-717 

General  Rules,  702-706  ;  of  Final  Syllables,  707- 
713;  of  Stem  Syllables,  714  ;  of  Compounds,  715  ;  in 
Early  Latin,  716,  717. 

Figures  of  Prosody 718-738 

Versification 729-827 

Definition,  729-754;  Versus  Italicus,  755;  Saturnian 
Verse,  756 ;  Iambic  Rhythms,  757-767;  Trochaic 
Rhythms,  768-776  ;  Anapaestic  Rhythms,  777-782; 
Dactylic  Rhythms,  783-789  ;  Logaoedic  Rhythms, 
790-805  ;  Cretic  and  Bacchic  Rhythms,  806-814 ; 
Ionic  Rhythms,  815-819  ;  Compound  Verses,  820- 
823  ;  Cantica,  824,  825  ;  Metres  of  Horace,  826,  827. 


PAGES 

Appendix 491-493 

Roman  Calendar,  Roman  Weights  and  Measures, 
Roman  Money,  Roman  Names. 

Index  of  Verbs 494-502 

General  Index o        .        .        .  503-546 


LATIN    GRAMMAR. 


ETYMOLOGY. 


Alphabet. 

1.  The  Latin  alphabet  has  twenty-three  letters  : 

abcdefghiklmnopqrstvxy;^ 

Remarks. — i.  The  sounds  represented  by  C  and  K  were  originally 
distinct,  C  having  the  sound  of  G,  but  they  gradually  approximated 
each  other,  until  C  supplanted  K  except  in  a  few  words,  such  as 
Kalendae,  Kaes5,  which  were  usually  abbreviated,  Kal.,  K.  The  orig- 
inal force  of  0  is  retained  only  in  C.  (for  Gaius)  and  Cn.  (for  Gnaeus). 

2.  J,  the  consonantal  form  of  I,  dates  from  the  middle  ages.  V repre- 
sented also  the  vowel  u  in  the  Latin  alphabet  ;  and  its  resolution  into 
two  letters — V  for  the  consonant,  and  U  for  the  vowel — also  dates  from 
the  middle  ages.  For  convenience,  V  and  U  are  still  distinguished  in 
this  grammar. 

3.  Y  and  Z  were  introduced  in  the  time  of  Cicero  to  transliterate 
Greek  v  and  X,.  In  early  Latin  v  was  represented  by  u  (occasionally 
by  i  or  oi),  and  \  by  ss  or  s.  Z  had  occurred  in  the  earliest  times,  but 
had  been  lost,  and  its  place  in  the  alphabet  taken  by  G,  which  was 
introduced  after  C  acquired  the  sound  of  K. 

Note.— The  Latin  names  for  the  letters  Avere :  a,  be,  ce,  de,  e,  ef,  ge,  ha,  i,  ka,  el, 
em,  en,  0,  pe,  qu  (=  cu),  er,  es,  te,  u,  ex  (ix),  to  be  pronounced  according  to  the 
rules  given  in  3,  7.    For  Y  the  sound  was  used,  for  Z  the  Greeii  name  (zeta). 

Vowels. 

2.  The  vowels  are  a,  e,  i,  0,  u,  (y)  ;  and  are  divided : 

1.  According  to  their  quality  {i.  e.,  the  position  of  the  organs  used 
in  pronunciation),  into 

guttural  (or  back),  a,  0,  u ;  palatal  (or  front),   e,  i,  (y). 

2.  According  to  their  quaiitity  or  prolongation  (^.  e.,  the  time 
required  for  pronunciation),  into 

long,  (  — ) ;  short,  ( -^  ). 


2  VOWELS — DIPHTHOi^GS — CONSONANTS. 

Remark. — Vowels  whose  .^ndr.tiLy  shifts  in  poetry  are  called  com- 
mon (see  13);.  aod, are  .distinguished  thus  : 

^■^>  by,  jrre'^ereyee  ^J\orf-j      ,  •       ^  by  prefei-ence  hmg. 

3.  Sounds  of  the  Vowels. 

a     =     a    in    father.  0     =     o     in  bone. 

5     =     e    in     prey.  u     =     oo   in  moon, 

i     =     i     in     caprice.  y     =     u    in  sur  (French),  German  ii. 

Eemark. — The  short  sounds  are  only  less  prolonged  in  pronuncia- 
tion than  the  long  sounds,  and  have  no  exact  English  equivalents. 

Diphthongs. 

4.  There  are  but  few  diphthongs  or  double  sounds  in  Latin.  The 
theory  of  the  diphthong  requires  that  both  elements  be  heard  in  a  slur. 
The  tendency  in  Latin  was  to  reduce  diphthongs  to  simple  sounds  ; 
for  example,  in  the  last  century  of  the  republic  ae  was  gliding  into  e, 
which  took  its  place  completely  in  the  third  century  A.  D,  Hence 
arose  frequent  variations  in  spelling  :  as  glaeba  and  gleba,  sod;  so 
oboedire  and  obedire,  obey  ;  faenum  (foenum)  and  fSnum,  hay. 

ae     =     aye  (S,h-eh).  ei     =     ei      in  femt  (drawled). 

oe     =:     oy     in     hoy.  eu    =     eu     in  Spanish  dewda  (Sli-oo). 

au     =     ou     in     ouw  (ui     =     we,   almost). 

Note.— Before  the  time  of  the  Gracchi  we  find  ai  and  oi  instead  of  ae  and  oe. 

5.  The  sign  ••  (Diceresis — Greek=separatiou)  o\er  the  second  vowel 
shows  that  each  sound  is  to  be  pronounced  separately  :  S6r,  air  ; 
Oenomatis,  aloS. 

Consonants. 

6.  Consonants  are  divided  : 

1.  According  to  the  principal  organs  by  which  they  are  pronounced, 
into 

Labials      (lip-sounds):        b,  p,  (ph),   f,  v,   m. 

Dentals      (tooth-sounds):    d,  t,  (th),    1,    n,  r,   s. 

Gutturals  (throat-sounds) :  g,  c,  k,  qu,    (ch),  h,  n  (see  7). 
Note.— Instead  of  dental  and  guttural,  the  terms  lingual  and  palatal  are  often  used 

2.  According  to  their  pro/o^j^ra^tow,  into 
A.  Semi-voivels :  of  which 

1,  m,  n,  r,  are  liquids  (m  and  n  being  nasals), 
h  is  a  breathing. 

•  is  a  sibilant. 


CONSONANTS — PHONETIC   VARIATIONS. 


B.  Mutes:  to  which  belong 

P-mutes,    p,             b,    (ph),    i 

;     labials. 

T-rautes,     t,              d,     (th), 

dentals. 

K-mutes,    k,  c,  qu,  g,     (ch), 

gutturals. 

Those  on  the  same  line  are  said  to  be  of  the  same  organ. 
Mutes  are  further  divided  into 

Tenu6s         (thin,  smooth):         p,     t,     k,  c,  qu,     Aar^Z  (surd). 
Mediae        (middle) :  b,     d,    g,  soft  (sonant). 

[Aspiratae    (aspirate,  rough):     ph,  tb,  cb,]  aspirate. 

Those  on  tlie  same  line  are  said  to  be  of  the  same  order. 

The  aspirates  were  introduced  in  the  latter  part  of  the  second  cen- 
tury B.  C.  in  the  transliteration  of  Greek  words,  and  thence  extended  to 
some  pure  Latin  words  ;  as,  pulcber,  Gracchus. 

3.  Double  consonants  are  :  z  —  dz  in  adze  ;  x  =  cs  (ks),  gs  ;  i  and  u 
between  two  vowels  are  double  sounds,  half  vowel,  half  consonant. 

Sounds  of  the   Consonants. 

7.  The  consonants  are  sounded  as  in  English,  with  the  following 
exceptions  : 

C  is  hard  throughout  =  k. 

Cb  is  not  a  genuine  Latin  combination  (6,  2).  In  Latin  words  it  is  a 
k  ;  in  Greek  words  a  kh,  commonly  pronounced  as  cb  in  German. 

G  is  hard  throughout,  as  in  get,  give. 

H  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  is  but  slightly  pronounced  ;  in  the 
middle  of  a  word  it  is  almost  imperceptible. 

I  consonant  (J)  has  the  sound  of  a  broad  y ;  nearly  like  y  in  yule. 

N  has  a  guttural  nasal  sound  before  c,  g,  q,  as  in  a^ichor,  anguish. 

Qu  =  kw  (nearly)  ;  before  0,  qu  =  c.  In  early  Latin  qu  was  not  fol- 
lowed by  u.  Later,  when  0  was  weakened  to  u,  qu  was  replaced  by  c  ; 
thus  quom  became  cum.     Still  later  qu  replaced  c,  yielding  quum. 

K  is  trilled. 

S  and  X  are  always  hard,  as  in  hiss.  aa;e. 

T  is  hard  throughout;  never  like  t  in  nation. 

U  consonant  (V)  is  pronounced  like  the  vowel,  but  with  a  slur.  In 
the  third  century  A.  D.  it  had  nearly  the  sound  of  our  w.  In  Greek  it 
was  frequently  transliterated  by  Ov  ;  so  OvaX^pios  =  Valerius. 

Phonetic  Variations  in  Vowels  and  Consonants. 

8,  Vowels. 

I.  Weakening. — In  the  formation  of  words  from  roots  or  stems 
short  vowels  show  a  tendency  to  weaken  ;  that  is,  a  tends  to  become  e 


4  PHOXETIC    VARIATION'S. 

and  then  i,  or  o  and  then  u,  while  o  tends  towards  e  or  i,  and  n  towards  i, 
This  occurs  most  frequently  in  compound  words,  to  a  less  degree  in 
words  formed  by  suffixes.  Diphthongs  are  less  frequently  weakened 
and  long  vowels  very  rarely.  The  principal  rules  for  these  changes  are 
as  follows,  but  it  must  be  remembered  that  to  all  there  are  more  or  less 
frequent  exceptions  : 

A.— I.  In  the  second  part  of  compound  words,  and  in  reduplicated 
words,  the  root-vowel  k  is  weakened  to  6,  which  usually  passes  over 
into  1  in  open  syllables  (11,  r.),  and  often  to  u  before  1  and  labial 
mutes  :  con-scendo  (scando) ;  con-cido  (cado) ;  dS-sulto  (salto) ;  fefelli  (fallo). 
2.  As  final  vowel  of  the  stem  k  is  weakened  in  the  first  part  of  a  com- 
pound word,  usually  to  i,  rarely  to  6  or  u:  aquili-fer  (aquila-);  causi-dicus 
(causa-).     3.  In  or  before  suffixes,  &  becomes  i :  domi-tus  (doma-). 

Note.— A  frequently  resists  change,  especially  in  verbs  of  the  First  and  Second 
Conjugations :  as,  sS-parare  (parare) ;  circmn-iac6re  (iac6re) ;  so  satis-facere 
(facere)  and  others. 

E. — I.  In  the  second  part  of  compound  words,  root  vowel  6  is  usu- 
ally retained  in  a  close  (11,  R.)  syllable,  and  weakened  to  i  in  an  open 
syllable  ;  but  it  is  invariably  retained  before  r:  In-flecto  (flectO);  ob^ 
tineo  (teneo);  ad-verto  (verto).  2.  In  or  before  suffixes,  and  in  the  final 
syllable  of  a  word,  it  also  becomes  i  :  geni-tor  (gene-) ;  un-decim  (decern). 

I. — At  the  end  of  a  word  i  is  changed  to  6  :  mare  (marl). 

0. — I.  In  composition  final  stem -vowel  6  is  usually  weakened  to  i  ; 
before  labials  sometimes  to  ii :  agri-cola  (agro-) ;  auru-fex  (usually  anri- 
fex).  2.  In  sullixcs,  and  in  final  syllables,  it  is  weakened  to  i :  amici-tia 
(amico-) ;  gracili-s  (also  gracilu-s). 

TJ. — In  composition  final  ^l(nn-vowel  il  is  usually  weakened  to  I; 
the  same  weakening  occuis  sometimes  within  a  word  or  l)e  fore  a  suffix  : 
mani-fSstus  (also  manxi-fSstus) ;  lacrima  (early  lacrtima). 

AE,  ATI. — In  tlio  second  part  of  a  compound  word  root-diphthong  ae 
is  usually  weakened  to  I,  but  often  there  is  no  change  ;  au  is  occasion- 
ally changed  to  ii :  ex-qulr3  (quaero) ;  con-clfldO  (claud5). 

2.  Omission. — Vowels  are  fre(juently  omitted  both  in  simple  and 
comj)ound  words,  either  within  the  woi-d  {si/ncope)  or  at  tlie  end  {apo- 
cope) :  dextera  and  dextra  ;  princeps  (for  primceps,  from  prlmiceps) ;  pergO 
(for  perregS) ;  ut  (uti) ;  neu  (n6ve). 

3.  Epenthesis. — Vowels  are  sometimes  inserted  to  ease  the  pronun- 
ciation, but  usually  before  liquids  or  in  foreign  words  :  ager  (agro-) 
see  31  ;  DaphinS  (=  DaphnS) ;  drachuma  (=  drachma). 

4.  Assimitation. — Two  vowels  in  adjoining  syllables  tend  to  become 
like  each  other;  tins  assimilation  is  usually  regressive  {%.  e.,  of  the 
first  to  the  second),  especially  when  1  separates  them  :  it  is  rarely  pro- 
gressive.   Compare  facilis  with  facul, familia  with  famulus,  bene  with  bonus. 


PHONETIC    VARIATIONS.  5 

5.  A  vowel  before  a  liquid  tends  to  become  u,  less  often  0  or  e  : 
adulgscgns  and  adolgsc6ns ;  vulgus  and  volgus ;  decumus  (decern) ;  com- 
pare tempus  with  temporis ;  peperi  (from  pario),  etc. 

9.  Consonants. 

1.  Assimilation. — When  two  consonants  come  together  in  Latin, 
they  tend  to  assimilate  one  to  the  other.  This  assimilation  is  nsii- 
ally  regressive  ;  sometimes  it  is  progressive.  It  is  either  complete,  that 
is,  the  two  consonants  become  the  same  ;  or  partial,  that  is,  the  one 
is  made  of  the  same  order  or  same  organ  as  the  other.  These  changes 
occur  both  in  inflection  and  in  composition,  but  they  are  especially 
noteworthy  in  the  last  consonant  of  prepositions  in  composition. 

Scrip-tum  for  scrib-tum  (regressive  partial) ;  ac-c6dere  for  ad-cSdere 
(regressive  complete) ;  cur-sum  for  cur-tum  (progressive  partial) ;  celer- 
rimus  for  celer-simus  (progressive  complete). 

2.  Partial  Assimilation. — (a)  The  sonants  g  and  b,  before  the  surd  t, 
or  the  sibilant  s,  often  become  surds  (c,  p  ) ;  the  surds  p,  c,  t  before 
liquids  sometimes  become  sonants  (b,  g,  d) ;  the  labials  p,  b  before  n 
become  m;  the  labial  m  before  the  gutturals  c,  q,  g,  h,  i  (j),  the  dentals 
t,  d,  s,  and  the  labials  f,  v,  becomes  n  ;  the  dental  n  before  labials  p,  b, 
m,  becomes  m  ;  rSc-tum  (for  rSg-tum) ;  scrip-si  (for  scrib-si)  ;  seg-mentum 
(for  sec-mentum) ;  som-nus  (for  sop-nus) ;  prin-ceps  (foi-  prim-ceps). 

Note.— Similar  is  the  change  of  q  (qu)  to  c  before  t  or  s  ;  coc-tum  (for  coqu-tum). 

(&)  After  1  and  r,  t  of  the  suffixes  tor,  tus,  turn,  becomes  s  by  progres- 
sive assimilation :  cur-sum  (for  cur-tum). 

3.  Complete  Assimilation. — There  are  many  varieties,  but  the  most 
important  principle  is  that  a  mute  or  a  liquid  tends  to  assimilate  to 
a  liquid  and  to  a  sibilant  :  puella  (puer) ;  cur-rere  (for  cur-sere) ;  c6s-si 
(for  ced-si) ;  corolla  (corona),  etc, 

4.  Prepositions. — Ab  takes  the  form  a  before  m  or  v,  and  in  a-fui ; 
appears  as  au  in  au-fero,  au-fugio  ;  as  abs  before  c,  t ;  as  as  before 
p.  Ad  is  assimilated  before  c,  g,  1,  p,  r,  s,  t,  with  more  or  less 
regularity  ;  before  gn,  sp,  sc,  st,  it  often  appears  as  a.  Ante  appears 
rarely  as  anti.     Cum  appears  as  com  before  b,  m,  p ;  con  before  c,  d,  f,  g, 

A,  q,  s,  V  ;  co  before  gn,  n  ;  assimilated  sometimes  before  1  and  r.  Ex 
becomes  6  before  b,  d,  g,  i  (j),  1,  m,  n,  r,  v  ;  ef  or  ec,  before  f.  In  usually 
becomes  im  before  b,  m,  p ;  before  1,  r  it  is  occasionally  assimilated  ; 
the  same  holds  good  of  the  negative  prefix  in.  Ob  is  usually  assimi- 
lated before  c,  f,  g,  p  ;  appears  as  0  in  o-mitto,  o-perio,  obs  in  obs-olesc5, 
and  OS  in  ostendo.  Sub  is  assimilated  before  c,  f,  g,  p,  r  ;  appears  as  sus 
in  a  few  words,  as  sus-cipi5  ;  occasionally  su  before  s,  as  su-spici5.  Trans 
sometimes  becomes  tra  before  d,  i  ( j),  n ;  tran  before  s.  Amb-  (insepa- 
rable) loses  b  before  a  consonant,  and  am  is  sometimes  assimilated.  Cir- 
cum  sometimes  drops  m  before  i.    Dis  becomes  dif  before  f  j  dir  before  a 


6  PHONETIC   VARIATIONS — SYLLABLES. 

vowel ;  dl  before  consonants,  except  c,  p,  q,  t,  s,  followed  by  a  vowel, 
when  it  is  usually  unchanged.  The  d  of  red  and  s6d  is  usually  dropped 
before  consonants. 

Note.— In  early  Latin  assimilation  is  much  less  common  than  in  the  classical 
period. 

5.  Dissimilation. — To  avoid  the  harshness  of  sound  when  twd  sylla- 
bles begin  with  the  same  letter,  the  initial  letter  of  the  one  is  often 
changed ;  this  is  true  especially  of  liquids,  but  occasionally  ot  other 
letters  :  singu-la-ris  (for  singu-la-lis) ;  meri-di6  (for  medi-dig). 

Note.— This  principle  often  regulates  the  use  of  -brum  or  -bulum,  and  of  -crum 
or  -culum  in  word  formation  (181,  6)  :  compare  perlculum  with  simulacrum. 

6.  Omission. — («)  When  a  word  closes  with  a  doubled  consonant  or 
a  group  of  consonants,  the  final  consonant  is  regularly  dropped  in 
Latin  ;  sometimes  after  the  preceding  consonant  has  been  assimilated 
to  it.  In  the  middle  of  a  word,  after  a  long  syllable,  ss  and  11  are  sim- 
plified ;  11  is  sometimes  simplified  after  a  short  vowel,  which  is  then 
lengthened  if  the  syllable  is  accented  {compe7isatory  lengthening)  ;  but 
if  the  syllable  is  unaccented,  such  lengthening  need  not  take  place.  In 
this  case  other  doubled  consonants  may  also  be  simplified. 

fel  (for  fell) ;  lac  (for  lact) ;  vigil  (for  vigils) ;  lapis  (for  lapid-s,  lapiss) ; 
misi  (for  mIs-si) ;  villa  and  vilicus  ;  but  currus  and  curulis. 

Note.— X  is  retained,  even  after  1  and  r,  as  in  calx,  arx ;  also  ps,  bs,  as  in  stirps, 
tubs ;  ms  is  found  in  hiems  only. 

{h)  In  the  tendency  to  easier  pronunciation  consonants  are  often 
dropped  both  at  the  beginning  and  in  the  middle  of  a  word  : 
stimulus  (for  stigmulus) ;  pastor  (for  pasctor) ;  aiS  (for  ahiS) ;  natus  (for 
gnatus,  retained  in  early  Latin,  rarely  later);  latus  (for  tlatus),  etc. 

7.  Epenthesis. — Between  m  and  1,  m  and  s,  m  and  t,  a  p  is  generated : 
ez-em-p-lum  (ex-im6) ;  cQm-p-si  (c5m5) ;  6m-p-tus  (emO). 

8.  3Ietathesis  or  transposition  of  consonants  occurs  Sometimes  in 
Latin,  especially  in  Perfect  and  Supine  forms  :  cemO  ;  Pf .  crS-vI,  etc. 

Syllables. 

10.  The  syllable  is  the  unit  of  pronunciation  ;  it  consists 
of  a  vowel,  or  a  vowel  and  one  or  more  consonants. 

A  word  has  as  many  syllables  as  it  contains  separate  vowels 
and  diphthongs. 

In  dividing  a  word  into  syllables,  a  consonant,  between 
two  vowels,  belongs  to  the  second  :  a-mo,  /  love  ;  li-xa,  a 
sutler. 


SYLLABLES — QUANTITY.  ^ 

Any  combination  of  consonants  that  can  begin  a  word 
(including  mn,  under  Greek  influence)  belongs  to  the  fol- 
lowing vowel  ;  in  other  combinations  the  first  consonant 
belongs  to  the  preceding  vowel  :  a-sper,  rough ;  fau-stus, 
hicli/  ;  li-bri,  books  ;  a-mnis,  river. 

Remarks. — i.  The  combinations  incapable  of  beginning  a  word  are 
(a)  aOubled  consonants  :  sic-cus,  dry ;  (b)  a  liquid  and  a  consonant  : 
al-mus,  fostering  ;  am-bo,  hoih ;  an-guis,  snalie  ;  ar-bor,  tree. 

2.  Compounds  are  treated  by  the  best  grammarians  as  if  their  parts 
were  separate  words  :  ab-igO,  I  drive  off ;  r6s-publica,  commonivealth. 

11.  The  last  syllable  of  a  word  is  called  the  ultimate 
(ultima,  last)  ;  the  next  to  the  last  the  penult  (paene,  almost, 
and  ultima)  ;  the  one  before  the  penult^  the  antepenult 
(ante,  before,  and  paenultima). 

Remark. — A  syllable  is  said  to  be  open  when  it  ends  with  a  vowel ; 
close,  when  it  ends  with  a  consonant. 

Quantity. 

12.  I.  A  syllable  is  said  to  be  long  by  nature,  when  it 
contains  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong :  mos,  custom  ;  caelum, 
heaven. 

Remarks. — i.  A  vowel  before  nf,  ns,  gm,  gn,  is  long  by  nature  : 
infgllz,  unlucky ;  mgnsa,  table ;  agmen,  trahi ;  agnus,  lamb.  In  many 
cases,  however,  the  n  has  disappeared  from  the  written  word  ;  so  in 
some  substantival  terminations  :  os  (Ace.  PL,  2d  decL),  us  (Ace.  PL, 
4th  decl.)  ;  in  adjectives  in  osus  (formosus,  shapely,  for  formonsus)  ;  in 
the  numerical  termination  gsimus  (=  gnsimus).     See  95,  n.  5. 

2.  Before  i  eonsona?it  (j)  a  vowel  is  long  by  nature  :  Pompgius, 
Pompey ;  except  in  compounds  of  iugum,  yoke  (bi-iugus,  two-horse), 
and  in  a  few  other  words. 

Note.— From  about  134  to  about  74  B.  C.  a,  g,  U,  were  often  represented  by  aa,  ee, 
UU ;  I  by  ei.  From  the  time  of  Augustus  to  the  second  century  i  was  indicated  by  a 
leugthened  I.  From  Sulla's  time  until  the  third  century  long  vowels  (rarely,  however,  i) 
were  mdicated  by  an  Apex  ('). 

2.  A  syllable  is  said  to  be  long  by  position,  when  a  short 
vowel  is  followed  by  two  or  more  consonants,  or  a  double 
consonant :  ars,  art ;  c6llum,  neck ;  ^brumpo,  /  break  off ; 
per  mare,  through  the  sea  ;  nex,  ^nurder. 


8  ACCENTUATION". 

3.  A  syllable  is  said  to  be  short  when  it  contains  a  short 
vowel,  which  is  not  followed  by  two  or  more  consonants : 
locus,  place  ;  tabula,  picture. 

Remark. — A  vowel  is  short  hy  nature  when  followed  by  another 
vowel,  or  by  nt,  nd :  d6u8,  Ood ;  innoc6iitia,  innocence ;  amandus,  to  he 
loved. 

13.  A  syllable  ending  in  a  short  vowel,  followed  by  a  mute 
with  1  or  r,  is  said  to  be  common  (anceps,  douUful)  :  ten6- 
brae,  darkness. 

Remark. — In  prose  such  syllables  are  always  short.  In  poetry  they 
were  short  in  early  times,  common  in  the  Augustan  period. 

14.  Every  diphthong,  and  every  vowel  derived  from  a 
diphthong,  or  contracted  from  other  vowels,  is  long:  saevus, 
cruel;  concltido,  I  shut  up  (from  claudo,  I  shut);  cogo  (from 
co-ago),  /  drive  together. 

Accentuation. 

15.  T.  Dissyllabic  words  have  the  accent  or  stress  on  the 
penult :  6quus,  horse. 

2.  Polysyllabic  words  have  the  accent  on  the  penult,  when 
the  penult  is  long ;  on  the  antepenult,  when  the  penult  is 
short  or  common  :  mandare,  to  commit ;  mand^re,  to  chetv  ; 
intfignim,  entire;  circumdare,  to  surround;  sup6rstit6s, 
survivors.  , 

Remarks. — i.  The  little  appendages  (enclitics),  que,  ve,  ne,  add  an 
accent  to  the  ultimate  of  words  accented  on  the  antepenult :  luminaque, 
and  lights ;  fldminave,  or  rivers  ;  v6merene  ]  from  a  plowshare  ^  Dis- 
syllables and  words  accented  on  the  penult  are  said  to  shift  their  accent 
to  the  final  syllable  before  an  enclitic  :  egomet,  I  indeed  ;  amfireve,  or 
to  love  ;  hnt  it  is  more  likely  that  the  ordinary  rule  of  accentuation 
was  followed. 

2.  Compounds  (not  prepositional)  of  facere  and  dare  retain  the 
accent  on  the  verbal  form  :  calefacit,  vfinumdare. 

3.  Vocatives  and  genitives  of  substantives  in  ios  of  the  second  de- 
clension, as  well  as  genitives  of  substantives  in  ium,  retain  the  accent 
on  the  same  syllable  as  the  nominative  :  Vergfll. 

Note.— Other  exceptions  will  be  noted  ae  they  occur.  In  the  older  language  the 
accent  was  not  bounded  by  the  antepenult :  accipiO  (accfpiO),  concutiO  (COnc6ti5). 


PARTS   OF   SPEECH — IN^FLECTION. 


Parts  of  Speech, 

16.  The  Parts  of  Speech  are  the  Noun  (Substantive  and 
Adjective),  the  Pronoun,  tlie  Verb,  and  the  Particles  (Ad- 
verb, Preposition,  and  Conjunction),  defined  as  follows  : 

1.  The  Substantive  gives  a  name:  vir,  a  man;  Codes, 
Cocks  ;  donum,  a  gift, 

2.  The  Adjective  adds  a  quality  to  the  Substantive  :  bonus 
vir,  a  good  ma7i, 

3.  The  Pronoun  points  out  without  describing  :  hie,  this  ; 
ille,  that ;  ego,  /. 

4.  The  Verb  expresses  a  complete  thought,  whether  asser- 
tion, wish,  or  command  ;  amat,  lie  loves  ;  amet,  may  he  love  ; 
ama,  love  thou  ! 

5.  The  Adverb  shows  circumstances, 

6.  The  Preposition  shows  local  relation. 

7.  The  Conjunction  shows  connection. 

Remarks. — i.  Substantive  is  short  for  noun-substantive,  and  ad- 
jective for  noun-adjective.    Substantives  are  often  loosely  called  nouns. 

2.  The  Interjection  is  either  a  mere  cry  of  feeling  :  all !  ah  !  and  does 
not  belong  to  language,  or  falls  under  one  of  the  above-mentioned 
classes. 

3.  The  Particles  are  mainly  mutilated  forms  of  the  noun  and  pro- 
noun. 

Notes.— 1.  The  difference  between  substantive  and  adjective  is  largely  a  difference 
of  mobility  ;  that  is,  the  substantive  is  fixed  in  its  application  and  the  adjective  is  general. 

2.  Noun  and  pronoun  have  essentially  the  same  inflection  ;  but  they  are  commonly 
separated,  partly  on  account  of  the  difference  in  signification,  partly  on  account  oi 
certain  peculiarities  of  the  pronominal  forms. 

Inflection. 

17.  Inflection  (inflexio,  bending)  is  that  change  in  the 
form  of  a  word  (chiefly  in  the  end)  which  shows  a  change  in 
the  relations  of  that  word.  The  noun,  pronoun,  and  verb  are 
inflected  ;  the  particles  are  not  capable  of  further  inflection. 

The  inflection  of  nouns  and  pronouns  is  called  declension^ 
and  nouns  and  pronouns  are  said  to  be  declined. 

The  inflection  of  verbs  is  called  conjugation ^  and  verbs 
are  said  to  be  conjugated. 


lO  THE   SUBSTANTIVE — GENDER. 


The  Substantive. 


18.  A  Substantive  is  either  concrete  or  abstract  ;  concrete 
when  it  gives  the  name  of  a  person  or  thing  ;  abstract  when 
it  gives  the  name  of  a  quality  ;  as  amicitia,  friendsliip. 

Concrete  substantives  are  either  proper  or  common  : 
Proper  when  they  are  proper,  or  peculiar,  to  certain  per- 
sons, places,  or  things:  Horatius,  Horace;  Neapolis,  Naples; 
Padus,  Fo. 

Common  when  they  are  common  to  a  whole  class  : 
dominus,  a  lord  ;  urbs,  a  city  ;  amnis,  a  river. 

Gender  of  Substantives. 

19.  For  the  names  of  animate  beings,  the  gender  is  deter- 
mined by  the  signification  ;  for  things  and  qualities,  by  the 
termination. 

Names  of  males  are  masculine  ;  names  of  females,  femi- 
nine. Masculine :  Romulus;  luppiter;  vir,  inaii;  equus,  horse. 
Feminine  :  Cornelia;  Itino ;  femina,  uwman;  equa,  7nare. 

20.  Some  classes  of  words,  without  natural  gender,  have 
their  gender  determined  by  the  signification  : 

1.  All  names  of  months  and  winds,  most  names  of  rivers, 
and  many  names  of  motmtains  are  masculine  ;  as  :  Aprllis, 
April,  the  opening  month ;  Aqnilo,  the  north  ivind ;  Albis, 
the  River  Elbe ;  AthOs,  Mou7it  Athos. 

Remarks. — i.  Names  of  months,  winds,  and  rivers  were  looked 
upon  as  adjectives  in  agreement  with  masculine  substantives  under- 
stood (mgnsis,  month ;  ventus,  ^vind  ;  fluvius,  amnis,  river). 

2.  Of  .he  rivers,  AUia,  LgthS,  Matrona,  Sagra,  Styx  are  feminine  ; 
Albula,  AcherOn,  Garumna  vary,  being  sometimes  masculine,  some- 
times feminine. 

3.  Of  the  mountains,  Alpgs,  the  Alps,  is  feminine  ;  so,  too,  sundry 
(Greek)  names  in  a  (G.  ae),  S  (G.  6s)  :  Aetna  (usually),  Calp6, 
CyllenS,  Hybla,  Ida,  Ossa  (usually),  Oeta  (usually),  BhodopS,  PholoS,  PyrSnS, 
and  Carambis,  Peloris.  Pfilion  and  Soracte  (usually),  and  names  of  moun- 
tains in  a  (G.  5rum),  as  Maenala  (G.  MaenalOnun),  are  neuter. 

II.  Names  of  countries  (terrae,  feni.),  islands  (insulae, 
fern.),  cities  (urbes, /cv/z.),  plants  (plantae, /em.),  and  trees 


GEN"DER — NUMBER.  1 1 

(arbores,  fern.),  are  feminine:  Aegyptus,  Egypt;    Ehodus, 
llliodes  ;  pirus,  a  pear-tree  ;  abies,  a  fir-tree. 

Remarks. — i.  Names  of  countries  and  islands  in  us  (os)  (G.  i)  are 
masculine,  except  Aegyptus,  Chius,  Chersonesus,  Cyprus,  Dglos,  Epirus, 
Lemnos,  Lesbos,  Peloponnesus,  Rhodus,  Samos,  Bosporus  (the  country). 

2,  Many  Greek  names  of  cities  follow  the  termination.  Towards 
the  end  of  the  republic  many  feminine  names  change  the  ending  -us 
to  -um  and  become  neuter  :  Abydus  and  Abydum,  Saguntus  and 
Saguntum. 

3.  Most  names  of  trees  with  stems  in  -tro  (N.  -ter)  are  masculine  : 
oleaster,  ivild  olive  ;  pinaster,  wild  pine.  So  also  most  shrubs  :  dumus, 
hramble-hush  ;  rhus,  sumach.  J^Teuter  are  acer,  maple  ;  laser,  a  plant  ; 
papaver,  poppy  (also  mase.  in  early  Latin)  ;  rQbur,  oak ;  slier,  willow  ; 
siser,  skirret  (occasionally  masc.)  ;  suber,  cork-tree  ;  tuber,  mushroom. 

III.  All  indeclinable  substantives^  and  all  words  and 
plirases  treated  as  indeclinable  substantives,  are  neuter :  fas, 
right;  a  longum,  a  long;  scire  tuum,  thy  knowi7ig ;  triste 
vale,  a  sad  ^' farewell.'^ 

21.  1.  Substantives  which  have  but  one  form  for  mascu- 
line and  feminine  are  said  to  be  of  common  gender :  civis, 
citizen  (male  or  female)  ;  comes,  companion  ;  itidex,  pidge. 

2.  Substantiva  mobilia  are  words  of  the  same  origin,  whose 
different  terminations  designate  difference  of  gender  :  ma- 
gister,  master,  teacher ;  magistra,  mistress;  servus,  serva, 
slave  (masc.  and  fem.)  ;  victor,  victrix,  conqueror  (masc.  and 
fem.). 

3.  If  the  male  and  female  of  animals  ha,ve  but  one  desig- 
nation, mas,  male,  and  femina,  female,  are  added,  when  it  is 
necessary  to  be  exact :  pavO  mas  (masculus),  peacock ;  pavo 
femina,  pealien.  These  substantives  are  called  epicene 
(eiTLKoiva,  utrlque  generi  communia,  common  to  each 
gender). 

Number. 

22.  In  Latin  there  are  two  numbers :  the  Singular, 
denoting  one  ;  the  Plural,  denoting  more  than  one. 

Remark. — The  Dual,  denoting  iwo,  occurs  in  Latin  only  in  two 
words  (duo,  iwo;  ambo,  both),  in  the  nominative  and  vocative  of  the 
masculine  and  neuter,     A  similar  formation  is  oct5,  eight  (two  fours). 


12  CASES. 

Cases. 

23.  In  Latin  there  are  six  cases  : 

1.  Nominative  (Case  of  the  Subject). 

Answers  :  who  9  what  9 

2.  Genitive  (Case  of  the  Complement), 

Answers  :  ivhose  9  ivhereof  9 

3.  Dative  (Case  of  Indirect  Object  or  Personal  Interest). 

Answers  :  to  whom  9  for  whom  9 

4.  Accusative  (Case  of  Direct  Object). 

Answers  :  whom  9  tvhat  9 

5.  Vocative  (Case  of  Direct  Address). 

6.  Ablative  (Case  of  Adverbial  Relation). 

Answers  :  where  9  whence  9  wheretvith  9 

Note. — These  six  cases  are  the  remains  of  a  larger  number.  The  Locative  (answers : 
where?),  is  akin  to  the  Dative,  and  coincident  with  it  in  the  Ist  and  3d  Declengions  ; 
in  the  2d  Declension  it  is  lost  in  the  Genitive  ;  it  is  often  blended  with  the  Ablative  in 
form,  regularly  in  ayntax.  The  Instrumental  (answers:  wherewith?),  which  is 
found  in  other  members  of  the  family,  is  likewise  merged  in  the  Ablative. 

24.  I.  According  to  their  /orw,  the  cases  are  divided  into 
strong  and  wealc :  The  strong  cases  are  Nominative,  Accusa- 
tive, and  Vocative.  The  weak  cases  are  Genitive,  Dative, 
and  Ablative. 

2.  According  to  their  st/ntactical  7ise,  the  cases  are  divided 
into  Casus  Recti,  or  Independent  Cases,  and  Casus  ObllquI,  or 
Dependent  Cases.  Nominative  and  Vocative  are  Castis 
Recti,  the  rest  Casus  Obliqui. 

25.  The  case-forms  arise  from  the  combination  of  the  case- 
endings  with  the  stem. 

1.  The  stem  is  that  which  is  common  to  a  class  of  forma- 
tions. 

Notes.— 1.  Tlie  stem  is  often  so  much  altered  by  contact  with  the  case-ending,  and 
the  cafse-ending  so  much  altered  by  the  wearing  away  of  vowels  and  consonants, 
that  they  can  be  determined  only  by  scientific  analysis.  So  in  the  paradigm  mSnsa, 
the  stem  is  not  mSns,  but  mSnsS,  the  final  a  having  been  absorbed  by  the  ending  in 
the  Dative  and  Ablative  Plural  niSnsIs.  So  -d,  the  ending  of  the  Ablative  Singular, 
has  nearly  disappeared,  and  the  loctitive  ending  has  undergone  many  changes  (6,  ei,  I, 
6).    The  "  cnide  form  "  it  is  often  impossible  to  ascertain. 

2.  The  root  is  an  ultimate  stem,  and  the  determinatioD  of  the  root  belongs  to  comp 


DECLENSIONS.  I  ^ 

parative  etymology.  The  stem  may  be  of  any  length,  the  root  was  probably  a  mono- 
syllable. In  penna  the  stem  is  penna- ;  in  pennula,  pennula- ;  in  pennatulus, 
pennatulo- ;  the  root  is  pet  (petna,  pesna,  penna),  and  is  found  in  pet-ere,  tofalL 
upon,  tojtyat;  Greek,  Trer-oMai,  nTepov  ;  English,  feather. 

2.  The  case-endings  are  as  follows,  early  forms  being  printed  in 
parenthesis  : 

Sg.— N.V.  Wanting orra.  f.-s;n. -m.  Pl.— N.V,  -es(eis,  is);  -i;  n. -a. 

G.       -is  (-OS, -us, -es) ;  -i.  G.       -um  (om) ; -rum  (som). 

J.       -i  (-e,  -ei).  D.       -bus ;  -is. 

Ac.     -m,  -em.  Ac.     -s  (for  -ns) ;  n.  -a. 

Ab.     Wanting  (or  -d) ;  -e.  Ab.     -bus ;  -is. 


Declensions. 

26.  There  are  five  declensions  in  Latin,  which  are  charac- 
terized by  the  final  letter  of  their  respective  stems  {stem- 
characteristic). 

For  practical  purposes  and  regularly  in  lexicons  they  are  also  im- 
properly distinguished  by  the  ending  of  the  Genitive  Singular. 


Stem  Characteristic.     Ge 

NITIVE   ^ 

I. 

a  (a). 

ae. 

II. 

6. 

I. 

III. 

i,  a,  a  consonant. 

is. 

IV. 

il. 

us. 

V. 

6. 

%l. 

Remark. — The  First,  Second,  and  Fifth  Declensions  are  called 
Vowel  Declensions  ;  the  Third  and  Fourth,  which  really  form  but  one, 
the  Consonant  Declension,  i  and  u  being  semi-consonants. 

27.  The  case-endings  in  combination  with  the  stem-char- 
acteristics give  rise  to  the  following  systems  of  terminations : 


Singular. 

I. 

II. 

III. 

K 

a. 

us  (os)  ;  wanting  ;  um  (om). 

s;  wanting. 

G. 

ae  (as,  ai. 

ai). 

I  (el). 

is  (us,  es). 

D. 

ae  (ai). 

0  (oi). 

I  (e-i,  i). 

Ac. 

am. 

um  (om). 

em,  im. 

V. 

a. 

e  ;  wanting  ;  um  (om). 

8. 

AO. 

a  (ad). 

6  (Od). 

e,  I  (ed,  id). 

14  FIRST   DECLENSIOIS', 


IV. 

V. 

N.V. 

us;  u. 

es. 

G. 

lis  (uos,  uis). 

&,  6  (es). 

- 

D. 

ui,  ti  (uei). 

il,6. 

Ac. 

urn;  a. 

em. 

Ab. 

Plural. 

6. 

I. 

II. 

III. 

N.  V. 

ae. 

3  (oe,  e,  el) ;  ft. 

Ss  (e-is,  is)  ;  a,  ia. 

G. 

arum. 

urn  (om),  orum. 

um,  ium. 

D.  A. 

is(eis);  abus. 

is  (eis),  ibus. 

ibus. 

Ac. 

Ss. 

5s;  ft. 

is,es;  a,ia. 

IV. 

V. 

N.V. 

lis  (lies,  uus)  ;  ua. 

es. 

G. 

uum. 

6rum. 

D.  A. 

ubus,  ibus. 

Sbus. 

Ac. 

us;  ua. 

es. 

Note.— Final  -s  and  -m  are  frequently  omitted  in  early  inscriptions. 

28.  General  Rules  of  Declensio7i. 

I.  For  the  strong  cases  . 

Neuter  substantives  have  the  Nominative  and  the  Vocative  like  the 
Accusative  ;  in  the  Plural  the  strong  cases  always  end  in  ft. 

In  the  Third,  Fourth,  and  Fifth  Declensions  the  strong  cases  are 
alike  in  the  Plural. 

The  Vocative  is  like  the  Nominative,  except  in  the  Singular  of  the 
Second  Declension  when  the  Nominative  ends  in  -us. 

II.  For  the  weak  cases  : 

The  Dative  and  the  Ablative  Plural  have  a  common  form. 

FIRST    DECLENSION. 

29.  The  stem  ends  in  S,,  which  is  weakened  from  an 
original  a.     The  Nominative  has  no  ending. 

Sg. — N.      mensa  (f.),    the  table,  a  table. 

of  the  table,  of  a  table. 

to,  for  the  table^  to,  for  a  table, 

the  table,  a  table. 

0  table  !  table  ! 

from,  with,  by,  the  table,  from,  ivith,  by,  a  table. 


G. 

mensae, 

D. 

mgnsae, 

Ac. 

mgnsam, 

V. 

mensa, 

Ab. 

mensS, 

SECOND    DECLENSION. 
Pl.. 


-N. 

mSnsae, 

the  tables, 

tables. 

G. 

mensarum, 

of  the  tables, 

of  tables. 

D. 

mensis, 

to,  for  the  tables, 

to,  for  tables 

Ac. 

mSnsas, 

the  tables, 

tables. 

V. 

mgnsae, 

0  tables/ 

tables  ! 

Ab. 

mensis, 

from,  with,  by,  the  tables. 

from,  with,  I 

Remarks. — i.  The  early  ending  of  the  Gen.,  as,  found  in  a  few  cases 
in  early  poets,  is  retained  in  the  classical  period  (but  not  in  Caesar  or 
Livy)  only  in  the  form  familias,  of  a  family,  in  combination  with  pater, 
father,  mater,  mother,  filius,  son,  fflia,  daughter,  viz. :  paterfamilias, 
materfamilias,  filius  familias,  filia  familias. 

2.  The  Loc.  Sing,  is  like  the  Genitive:  Romae,  at  Rome;  militiae, 
abroad. 

3.  The  Gen.  PI.  sometimes  takes  the  form  -um  instead  of  -arum; 
this  occurs  chiefly  in  the  Greek  words  amphora  {amphora,  measure  of 
tonnage),  and  drachma,  franc — {Oreelc  coin).  The  poets  make  frequent 
use  of  this  form  in  Greek  patronymics  in  -da,  -das,  and  compounds  of 
-cola  (from  colo,  I  inhabit)  and  -gena  (from  root  gen,  beget). 

4.  The  ending  -abus  is  found  (along  with  the  regular  ending)  in  the 
Dat.  and  Abl.  PI.  of  dea,  goddess,  and  fllia,  daughter.  In  late  Latin 
the  use  of  this  termination  becomes  more  extended. 

Notes.— 1.  A  very  few  raasc.  substantives  show  Nom.  Sing,  in  as  in  early  Latin. 

2.  A  form  of  tlie  Gen.  Sing,  in  ai,  subsequent  to  tiiat  in  as,  is  found  in  early 
inscriptions,  and  not  unfrequently  in  early  poets,  but  only  here  and  there  in  classical 
poetry  (Verg.,  A.,  3,  354,  etc.)  and  never  in  classical  prose. 

3.  The  early  ending  of  the  Dat.  ai  (sometimes  contracted  into  a),  is  found  occa- 
sionally in  inscriptions  throughout  the  whole  period  of  the  language. 

4.  The  older  ending  of  the  Abl.,  ad,  belongs  exclusively  to  early  Latin.  Inscriptions 
show  eis  for  is  in  Dat.  and  Abl.  PI.,  and  once  as  in  the  Dat.  Plural. 

30.  Rtile  of  Gender. — Substantives  of  the  First  Declen- 
sion are  feminine,  except  when  males  are  meant. 

Hadria,  the  Adriatic,  is  masculine. 

SECOND    DECLENSION. 

31.  The  stem  ends  in  6,  which  in  the  classical  period  is 
weakened  to  u,  except  after  u  (vowel  or  consonant),  where  5  is 
retained  nntil  the  first  century  A.D.  In  combination  with 
the  case-endings  it  merges  into  o  or  disappears  altogether. 
In  the  Vocative  (except  in  neuters)  it  is  weakened  to  6. 

The  Nominative  ends  in  s  (m.  and  f.)  and  m  (n.).  But 
many  masculine  stems  in  which  the  final  vowel,  6,  is  preceded 
by  r,  drop  the  (os)  us  and  e  of  the  Nominative  and  Vocative, 
and  insert  e  before  the  r  if  it  was  preceded  by  a  consonant. 


i6 


SECON^D   DECLENSIOK. 


32.  I.  Stems  in  -ro.  The  following  stems  in  -ro  do  not  drop  the(os) 
us  and  e  of  the  Nom.  and  Voc. :  erus,  master  ;  hespenis,  evening  star  ; 
icterus,  jaundice  ;  itiniperus,  juniper  ;  morus,  mulberry  ;  numems,  num- 
her ;  taurus,  bull ;  virus,  venom;  umerus,  sJioulder ;  uterus,  ivomb. 


Note.— Socerus  is  found  in  early  Latin 
2.  In  the  following  words  the 


Plautus  uses  uterum,  (n.)  once. 

ends  in  -ero  and  the  e  is  there- 
fore retained  throughout  :  adulter,  adulterer ;  gener,  son-in-law;  Liber, 
god  of  wine ;  puer,  boy;  socer,  father-in-law;  vesper,  evenifig ;  and  in 
words  ending  in  -fer  and  -ger,  from  fer5,  /  bear,  and  gero,  /  carry,  as, 
signifer,  standard-bearer,  armiger,  armor-bearer. 

Also  Ibgr  and  Celtibfir  (names  of  nations)  have  in  the  Plural  Ib6ri 
and  Celtiben. 

33.  Hortus  (m.),  garden;   puer  (m.),   boy;    ager  (m.), 
field  ;  bellum  (n.),  tvar  ;  are  thus  declined  : 


Sg.-K 

hortus, 

puer. 

ager, 

bellum, 

G. 

horti. 

pueri. 

agri, 

belli. 

D. 

horto. 

puerO, 

agro. 

belie. 

Ac. 

hortum. 

puerum, 

agrum. 

bellum, 

V. 

horte. 

puer. 

ager. 

bellum, 

Ab. 

hortS. 

puerS. 

agrS. 

bells. 

IL.-N. 

horti. 

puerl, 

agri, 

bella. 

G. 

hortorum, 

puerQrum, 

agrorum, 

bellonim, 

D. 

hortis. 

pueris. 

agris, 

bellis. 

Ac. 

hortOs, 

puerOs, 

agros, 

bella. 

V. 

horti, 

pueri, 

agri. 

bella. 

Ab. 

hortis. 

pueris. 

agris. 

bellis. 

Remarks. — i.  Stems  in  -io  have  Gen.  Sing,  for  the  most  part  in  i  until 
the  first  century  A.  D.,  without  change  of  accent :  ingeni  (N.  ingenium), 
of  genius,  Vergili,  of  Vergil.     See  15,  r.  3. 

2.  Proper  names  in  -ius  (stems  in  -io)  have  Voc.  in  i,  without  change 
of  accent :  AntSni,  TuUi,  Gai,  Vergili.  Fllius,  son,  and  genius,  genius, 
form  their  Voc.  in  like  manner  :  fili,  geni.  In  solemn  discourse  -us  of 
the  Nom.  is  employed  also  for  the  Vocative.  (See  Liv.  i.  24,  7.)  So 
regularly  deus,  God  ! 

3.  The  Loc.  Sing,  ends  in  i  (apparent  Genitive),  as  Bhodi,  at  Rhodes, 
Tarenti,  at  Tarentum. 

4.  In  the  Gen.  PI.  -tun  instead  of  -Orum  is  found  in  words  denoting 
coins  and  measures  ;  as,  nummum,  of  moneys  (also  -5rum)  =  sSstertium,  of 
sesterces;  dSnSrium  (occasionally  -Orum) ;  talentum  (occasionally  -5rum); 
tetrachmum;  medium  (also  -Orum),  of  nieasures ;  iugerum;  medimnum; 
stadium  (also  -Orum).    Likewise  in  some  names  of  persons  :  deum  (also 


THIRD    DECLENSION.  1/ 

-omm) ;  fabrtun  (in  technical  expressions  ;  as  praefectus  fabrum,  other- 
wise -5rtim) ;  liberum  (also  -Snun) ;  virum  (poetical,  except  in  technical 
expressions,  as  triumvirum) ;  socium  (also  -onun).  Some  other  examples 
are  poetical,  rare  or  late.. 

5.  The  Log.  PI.  is  identical  with  the  Dative  :  Delphis,  at  Delphi. 

6.  Deus,  Ood,  is  irregular.  In  addition  to  the  forms  already  men- 
tioned, it  has  in  Nom.  PI.  dei,  diij  di ;  in  Dat.  and  Abl.  PI.  deXs, 
diis,  dis. 

Notes.— 1.  The  ending  -ei  for  -I  in  the  Gen.  Sing,  is  found  only  in  InscrlptionB  sub- 
sequent to  the  third  Punic  War. 

2.  Puer,  boy^  forms  Voc.  puere  in  early  Latin. 

3.  The  original  Abl.  ending  -d  belongs  to  early  inscriptions. 

4.  In  early  inscriptions  the  Nom.  PI.  ends  occasionally  in  6s,  eis,  Is  :  magistrSs 
(for  magistrl)  vireis  (for  viri).  The  rare  endings  oe  and  g  <,ploirumS  for  pltiriml) 
and  the  not  uncommon  ending  ei  belong  to  the  same  period. 

5.  Inscriptions  often  show  eiS  for  is  in  Dat.  and  Abl.  Plural. 

34.  Rule  of  Gender. — Substantives  in  -us  are  masculine ; 
in  -um  neuter. 

Exceptions. — Feminine  are  :  1st.  Cities  and  islands,  as,  Corinthus, 
Samus.  2d.  Most  trees,  as,  fagus,  heech ;  pirns,  pear-tree.  3d.  Many 
Greek  nouns,  as,  atomus,  atom ;  dialectus,  dialect ;  methodus,  method  ; 
paragraphus,  paragraph ;  periodus,  period.  4th.  Alvns,  helly  (m.  in 
Plaut.)  ;  colus  (61,  N.  5),  distaff  {silso  m.)  ;  humus,  groimd ;  vannus, 
wheat-fan. 

Neuters  are  :  pelagus,  sea  ;  virus,  venom  ;  vulgus,  the  rabble  (some- 
times masculine). 

THIRD    DECLENSION. 

35.  I.  The  stem  ends  in  a  consonant,  or  in  the  close 
vowels  1  and  u. 

2.  The  stems  are  divided  according  to  their  last  letter, 
called  the  stem-characteristic,  following  the  subdivisions  of 
the  letters  of  the  alphabet : 

I. — Consonant  Stems.  II. —  Vowel  Stems. 

A.  Liquid  stems,  ending  in  1,  m,  n,  r.  1.  Ending  in  i. 

B.  Sibilant  stems,  ending  in  s.  2.  Ending  in  u, 

(  1.  Ending  in  a  P-mute,  b,p.      (Compare  the  Fourth 

C.  Mute  stems,  ■<  3.  Ending  in  a  K-mute,  g,  c.  Declension.) 

(  3.  Ending  in  a  T-mute,  d,  t. 

36.  I.  The  Nominative  Singular,  masculine  and  femi- 
nine, ends  in  s,  which,  however,  is  dropped  after  1,  n,  r,  s, 
and  combines  with  a  K-mute  to  form  x.  The  final  vowel  of 
the  stem  undergoes  various  changes. 


1 8  THIRD    DECLEKSION. 

The  Vocative  is  like  the  Nominative. 

In  the  other  cases,  the  endings  are  added  to  the  unchanged 
stem. 

2.  Neaiters  always  form  : 

The  Nominative  without  the  case-ending  s. 

The  Accusative  and  Vocative  cases  in  both  numbers  like 
the  Nominative. 

The  Nominative  Plural  in  a. 

Notes  on  the   Cases. 

37.  Singular. 

1.  Genitive.— In  old  Latin  we  find  on  inscriptions  the  endings  -uS  (Gr.  -os)  and 
•es. 

2.  Dative.— The  early  endings  of  the  Dat.  are  -gi  and  -g.  These  were  succeeded 
by  I  after  the  second  century  B.  C,  6  being  retained  in  formulas  lilce  iurS  dicundd 
(Liv.,  42, 28,  6),  in  addition  to  the  usual  form. 

3.  Accusative.— The  original  termination  -im,  in  stems  of  the  vowel  declension, 
loses  ground,  and  stems  of  tliis  class  form  their  Ace.  more  and  more  in  -em,  after  the 
analogy  of  consonant  stems.     For  tlic  classical  usage  see  57,  r.  i. 

4.  Ablative.— In  inscriptions  of  the  second  and  first  centuries  B.  C.  we  find  -ei, 
-I,  and  -e.  But  -ei  soon  disappears,  leaving  e  and  i.  In  general  e  is  the  ending  for  the 
consonant  stems  and  I  for  the  vowel.  But  as  in  the  Ace,  so  in  the  Abl.,  the  e  makes 
inroads  on  the  i,  though  never  to  the  same  extent.  (See  57,  R.  2.)  On  the  other 
hand,  some  apparently  consonant  stems  assume  the  ending  i.  Thus  some  in  -as, 
-atis :  hSrgditati  (200  B.  C),  aetati  (rare) ;  litl  (rare),  supellSctili  (classical ; 
early  e) ;  also  the  liquid  stems  which  syncopate  in  the  Gen,,  as  imber.  The  ending 
-d  is  rare  and  confined  to  early  inscriptions. 

5.  Locative.— Originally  coincident  in  form  with  the  Dat.,  the  Loc.  of  the  Third 
Declension  was  finally  blended  with  Abl.,  both  in  form  and  in  syntax.  In  the  follow- 
ing proper  names  the  old  form  is  frequently  retained  :  Karthagini,  at  Carthage,  Sul- 
mdnl,  at  Sulmo^  Lacedaemoni,  at  Lacedaemon,  Sicyoni,  Troezfinl,  Anxorl, 
Tiburl.  Also  Acherunti.  I"  the  case  of  all  except  Anxur,  Tibur,  Acheiiiiis,  the 
regular  form  is  more  common. 

The  following  Loc.  forms  of  common  nouns  are  found  :  herl,  IticI,  noctu  (prin- 
cipally in  early  Latin),  orbi  (Cic),  peregrl  (early  Latin),  praefiscini  (early  Latin), 
rOrl,  temperl  (the  usual  form  in  early  Latin),  vesperi.  In  all  cases  the  Abl.  forn» 
in  e  is  also  found. 

38.  Plural. 

1.  Nominative.— Early  Latin  shows  -gls,  -Is  in  the  masc.  and  feminine.  The  latter 
was  usually  confined  to  vowel  stems,  but  also  occurs  occasionally  in  consonant  stems 
(ioudicls).    Later  the  ending  was  -6s  for  all  kinds  of  stems. 

2.  Genitive.— The  ending  -tun,  uniting  with  the  vowel  in  vowel  stems,  gives 
-ium.  But  many  apparently  consonant  stems  show  their  original  vowel  form  by  tak- 
ing -ium  :  (1)  Many  fern,  stems  in  -tSt-  (N.  tas)  with  -ium  as  well  as  -um.  (2)  Mon- 
osyllabic and  polysyllabic  stems  in  -t,  -c,  with  preceding  consonant.  (3)  Monosyllables 
in  -p  and  -b,  sometimes  with,  sometimes  without,  a  preceding  consonant.  (4)  Stems  in 
-ss- ;  see  48,  r. 

3.  Accusative.— Old  Latin  shows  also  -els.  The  classical  form  is  -gs  for  conso- 
nant and  -Is  for  vowel  stems.  But  -gs  begins  to  drive  out  -Is  in  some  vowel  stems  and 
wholly  supplants  it  in  the  early  Empire.  On  the  other  hand,  some  apparently  original 
consonant  stems  show  -Is  in  early  Latin,  but  the  cases  are  not  always  certain. 


CONSONANT   STEMS.  I9 

l.-CONSONANT    STEMS. 
A.— Liquid  Stems. 
1.  Liquid  Stems  in  1. 

39.  Form  the  Nominative  without  s  and  fall  into  two 
divisions*  : 

A.  Those  in  which  the  stem  characteristic  is  preceded  by  a  vowel  : 

1.  'Ul,  'Ulis  :  sal  (with  compensatory  lengthening),  salt;  Punic 
proper  names  like  Adherbal,  Hannibal. 

2.  -«7,  "Uis  :  mtigil  (mugilis  is  late),  mullet ;  pugil  (pugilis  in  Varro), 
boxer ;  vigil,  watchman.  'il,  -Ills :  sil,  ochre ;  Tanaquil  (with 
shortened  vowel),  a  proper  name. 

3    -olf  -oils  :  sol,  sun, 

4.  'Ulf  -nils :  consul,  consul;  exsul,  exile;  praesul,  dancer. 

B.  Two  neuter  substantives  with  stems  in  -11,  one  of  which  is  lost  in 


the  Nominative  :  mel. 

mellis, 

honey  ; 

fel. 

fellis. 

gall. 

Sg.— N. 

consul,    consul  ( 

m.). 

Pl. 

— N. 

consulSs,  the  consuls. 

G. 

consulis. 

G. 

consulum. 

D. 

consul!. 

D. 

consulibus, 

Ac. 

consulem, 

Ac. 

cSnsules, 

V. 

cSnsul, 

V. 

consulSs, 

Ab. 

cSnsule. 

Ab. 

consulibus. 

Rules  of  Gender. — i.   Stems  in  -1  are  masculine. 

Exceptions  :  Sfl,  ochre,  and  sal,  salt  (occasionally,  but  principally  in 
the  Sing.),  are  neuter. 

2.   Stems  in  -11  are  neuter. 

2.  Liquid  Stems  in  m. 

40.  Nominative  with  s.  One  example  only  :  liiem(p)s, 
tuinter  (f.) ;  Gen.,  Mem-is,  Dat.,  hiem-i,  etc, 

3.  Liquid  Stems  in  n. 

41.  Most  mascuHfie  and  feminine  stems  form  the  Nomi- 
native Singular  by  dropping  the  stem-characteristic  and 
changing  a  preceding  vowel  to  0. 

*  Tn  the  following  enumerations  of  stem-varieties,  Greek  substantives  are  a&  a  rule 
omitted. 


20 


THIRD    DECLENSION. 


Some  masculine  and  7nost  neuter  stems  retain  the  stem- 
characteristic  in  the  Nominative  and  change  a  preceding 
i  to  e. 

The  following  varieties  appear  ; 

1.  -eUy  •enis :  the  masculine  substantives  li6n,  splSn,  spleen;  r6n6s 
(pi.),  kidneys. 

2.  'Of  •itiis :  homo,  man;  nemo,  no  one ;  turbS,  ivliirlwind ;  Apoll6, 
Apollo.  Also  substantives  in  -do  (except  praedo,  G.  -onis,  robber)  ;  and 
in  -go  (except  harpago,  G.  -oids,  gi'appling-hook ;  ligo,  G.  -onis,  mattock)  ; 
as,  grands,  hail;  virgo,  virgin.  "en,  inis :  the  mase.  substan- 
tives flamen,  priest ;  oscen  (also  f.),  divining  bird;  pecten,  comb ;  musical 
performers,  cornicen,  fidicen,  liticen,  tibicen,  tubicen.  Also  many 
neuters  :  as  nomen,  name. 

3.  -o  (in  early  Latin  6,  in  classical  period  weakened),  •onis :  le5, 
lion  ;  and  about  seventy  others.        -o,  -onis  :  Saxo,  Saxon  (late). 

4.  Irregular  formations  :  carS,  G.  carnis,  flesh  ;  AniS,  G.  Anienis,  a 
river  ;  N6ri6,  G.  Nerienis,  a  proper  name.  Sanguis,  blood,  and  poUis, 
flour,  drop  the  stem  characteristic  and  add  s  to  form  nominative  ;  G. 
sanguinis,  pollinis. 


42.                MAS(:ULINE. 

FEMININE. 

NEUTER. 

Sg.— X.     leS,  lion(m.). 

imag5,  likeness  (f.). 

n5men,  name  (n.). 

G.     leonis, 

imaginis, 

nominis. 

1).     leoni, 

imagini, 

nSmini, 

Ac,  leonem, 

imaginem, 

nomen, 

V.     leg, 

imago, 

nomen, 

Ab.  leOne, 

imagine, 

n5mine, 

Pl.— N.     leOnSs, 

imagines, 

nOmina, 

G.     leonnm, 

imaginum, 

nominum, 

D.     leonibus, 

imaginibus, 

nominibus, 

Ac.  Ie5nes, 

imagines, 

nOmina, 

V.     leOngs, 

imagines, 

nSmina, 

Ab.  leOnibus, 

imaginibus. 

nSminibus. 

Note.— Early  Latin  shows 

hom5nem,  etc.,  occasionally. 

43.  Eules  of  Oeiider. — i.  Substantives  in  -6  are  mascu- 
iiue,  except  carO,  flesh,  and  those  in  -do,  -go,  and  -16. 

Exceptions. -Masculine  arc  cardS,  Idnge ;  6rd5,  rank;  harpagS,  grappling- 
hook  ;  ligO,  mattock  ;  marg5,  harder  (occasionally  fern,  in  late  Latin)  ;  and  concrete 
nouns  like  ptlgiO,  dagger,  titiO,  firebrand,  vespertiliO,  bat. 

2.  Substantives  in -en  (-men)  are  neuter.  See  exceptions, 
41,  I,  2. 


COKSOKANT   STEMS,  21 

4.  Liquid  Stems  in  r, 
44.  Form  Nominative  without  s. 
Stems  fall  into  the  following  classes  : 

I.  -aVf  'arts:  salax,  tt'out ;  proper  names  like  Caesar,  Hamilcar; 
the  neuters  baccar,  a  plant  ;  iubar,  radiance ;  nectar,  nedar.        "dVf 
-aris:  Lar,  a  deity.        -dr,  arts  :  Nar  (Enn.,  Verg.),  a  river. 
•dVf  arris  :  far  (n.)  spelt. 

2.  -er,  'Cris :  acipgnser,  a  fish  ;  agger,  mound;  anser,  goose-;  asser, 
pole ;  aster,  a  plant ;  cancer,  the  disease  ;  career,  prison;  later,  brick; 
mnlier  (f.),  woman;  jpsisser,  sparroiv ;  tuber  (m.  and  f.),  apple;  vesper, 
evening  (QS,  lo)  ;  vomer,  plowshare  (47,  2).  The  neuters  axiev,  maple ; 
cadaver,  dead  body  ;  cicer,  pea;  laser,  a  plant  ;  laver,  a  plant  ;  papaver, 
poppy ;  piper,  pepper ;  siler,  willow ;  siser,  skirret ;  suber,  cork;  tuber, 
tumor ;  fiber,  teat ;  [verber],  thong.  -<?/*,  -H.s  ;  four  words,  accipiter, 
hawk ;  frater,  broflier ;  mater,  mother;  -psiter,  father.  Also  some  proper 
names,  as  Di6spiter,  Falacer,  and  the  names  of  the  months,  September, 
October,  November,  December.  Also,  imber,  shower,  linter,  skiff,  fiter, 
bag,  venter,  belly,  which  were  probably  vowel  stems  originally  (see  45, 
R.  i).  -er,  -eris:  agr,  air;  aether,  ether.  -er,  -eris :  vSr, 
spring. 

3.  'Or,  'Oris  :  arbor  (f.),  tree  (stem  originally  in  -os)  ;  some  Greek 
words  in  -tor,  as  rhstor,  rhetorician  ;  slave  names  in  -por,  as  Marcipor ; 
the  neuters  :  ador,  spelt ;  aequor,  sea  ;  marmor,  marble.  'Or,  -oris  : 
very  many  abstract  words,  as  amor,  lore  ;  color,  color  ;  clamor,  outcry ; 
soror,  sister  ;  uxor,  wife  ;  these  may  come  from  stems  in  5s  (see  47,  4)  ; 
also  verbals  in  -tor,  as  victor. 

4.  -Mi*,  'iiris :  augur,  augur ;  furfur,  bran  ;  turtur,  dove  ;  vultur, 
vulture;  lemurgs  (pi.),  ghosts,  and  a  few  proper  names;  also  the 
neuters  fulgur,  lightning ;  guttur,  throat ;  murmur,  murmur ;  sulfur, 
sulphur.        -MJ',  -ilris  ;  fur,  thief. 

5.  Four  neuters,  ebur,  ivory  ;  femur,  thigh;  iecur,  liver  ;  robur,  oak, 
show  Gen.  in  -oris  ;  two  of  these,  femur,  iecur,  have  also  the  irregular 
forms  feminis  and  iecineris,  iecinoris,  iocinoris.  Iter,  way,  has  G.  itineris ; 
and  supellgx,  furniture,  has  G.  supellectilis. 

46.       SINGULAR.  PLURAL.  SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

N.     labor,  toil  (m.),  Iab5rgs,  pater,  father  (m.),  patrgs, 

G.     laboris,  laborum,  patris,  patrum, 

D.     labori,  laboribus,  patrl,  patribus, 

Ac.  laborem,  labSrgs,  patrem,  patrgs, 

V.     labor,  lab5res,  pater,  patrgs, 

Ab.  labdre.  labSribus.  patre.  patribus. 


22  THIRD    DECLENSIOI^. 

Remarks. — i.  Imber,  shower,  linter,  sldff,  uter,  hag,  venter,  helly, 
show  the  vowel  nature  of  their  stems  by  having  Gen.  Ph  in  -ium, 
Imber  has  also  sometimes  Abl.  Sing,  in  I.     (See  37,  4.) 

2.  Robur,  strength,  also  forms  a  Nom.  robus  (47,  4),  and  v5mer,  plow- 
share, vomis  (47,  2). 

Note.— Arbor,  and  many  stems  in  -or,  were  originally  stems  in  -s  ;  the  s  became  r 
(47)  between  two  vowels  in  the  oblique  cases,  and  then  reacted  upon  the  Nominative. 
But  many  Nominatives  in  -os  are  still  found  in  early  Latin  ;  and  some  are  still  retained 
in  the  classical  times  :  arbos  (regularly  in  Verg.,  frequently  in  Lucr.,  Hor.,  Ov.), 
honos  (regularly  in  Verg.,  commonly  in  Cic,  Livy),  and  others. 

46.  Rules  of  Gender. — i.  Substantives  in  -er  and  -or  are 
masculine.     2.  Substantives  in  -ar  and  -ur  are  neuter. 

Exceptions. — Masculine  are  salar,  trout,  and  proper  names  in  -ar ;  augur, 
augur ;  furfur,  bran  ;  names  of  animals  in  -ur  and  a  few  proper  names  in  -ur. 

Feminine  are  arbor,  tree ;  mulier,  woman  ;  soror,  sister ;  uxor,  tvife.  Neuter 
are  acer,  maple ;  ador,  spelt ;  aequor,  sea ;  cadaver,  dead  body ;  cicer.  pea ; 
iter,  way ;  laser,  a  plant ;  laver,  a  plant ;  marmor,  marble ;  papaver,  iwppy ; 
piper,  i^epper ;  siler,  willow ;  siser,  skirret ;  stiber,  co?'k ;  tuber,  tumar ;  uber, 
teat ;  ver,  spring  ;  [verber],  thong. 

B. -Sibilant  Stems. 

47.  The  Nominative  has  no  additional  s,  and  changes  in 
masculines  e  to  i,  and  in  neuters  e  or  0  to  u  before  s. 

In  the  oblique  cases,  the  s  of  the  stem  usually  passes  over> 
between  two  vowels,  into  r  (rJiotacism). 

There  are  the  following  varieties  of  stems  : 

I.  'dSf  "arts  :  mas,  male.  'ds,  -dsis  :  vas  (n.),  vessel.  'ds, 
»assis :  as  (m.),  a  copper  (vowel  long  in  Nom.  by  compensatory- 
lengthening),  and  some  of  its  compounds  (with  change  of  vowel),  as 


2.  "CS,  "eris :  Cergs,  Ceres.  -is,  'Cris :  cinis,  ashes;  cucumis, 
cucufnber  {see  57,  r.  i),  pulvis  (occasionally  pulvis),  dust ;  v5inis,  ploiv- 
share  (see  45,  r.  2).  •ivs,  -eris  :  Venus,  and  occasionally  pignus, 
pledge  (see  4). 

3.  "Is,  •iris  :  glis,  dormouse. 

4.  'dSf  -osis  :  old  Latin  ianitSs,  labQs,  clamSs  (see  45,  n.).  'OS, 
•ossis:  08  (n.),  bo7ie.  'OSf-oris:  flSs,  flower;  glOs,  sister-in-law; 
lepos,  charm  ;  mos  (m. ),  custom. ;  -5s  (n.),  mouth  ;  rOs,  dew.  'US,  -oris  : 
corpus,  hody  ;  decus,  grace  ;  pignus,  pledge,  and  twelve  others  ;  on  robus 
(see  45,  r.  2). 

5.  'USf  'Uris :  Ligus,  Ligurian.  •us,  -uris :  tellus  (f.),  earth  ; 
mUs  (m.),  mouse;  the  neuters:  crtis,  leg;  ias,  right;  pus,  pus;  rOs, 
country  ;  tils,  incense. 

6.  aes,  aeriSy  brass. 


CONSONANT   STEMS. 


23 


48.  SINGULAR.  PLURAL.  SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

N.  A.  V.     genus,  kind  (n,),  genera,  corpus,  hody  (n.),    corpora, 

G.     generis,  generum,        corporis,  corporum, 

D.     generi,  generibus,      corpori,  corporibus, 

Ab.  genere.  generibus.      corpore.  corporibus. 

Remark. — As,  a  copper,  and  os,  hone,  form  the  Gen.  PI.  in  -ium,  after 

the  usage  of  vowel  stems  (see  38,  2).     So  also  mus,  mouse. 

49.  Rule  of  Gender. — Masculine  are  substantives  in  -is 
(-eris),  and  -6s,  -oris:  except  os,  mouth  (Gr.  oris),  which  is 
neuter. 

Neuter  are  substantives  in  -us  (G.  -eris,  -oris),  and  in  -us 
(G.  -iiris) ;  except  tellus,  earth  (G.  telluris),  which  is  femi- 
nine ;  and  the  masculines,  lepus,  hare  (G.  leporis) ;  mus, 
mouse  (G.  muris). 

C— Mute  stems. 

60.  All  masculines  and  feminines  of  mute  stems  have  s  in 
the  Nominative.  Before  s  a  P-mute  is  retained,  a  K-mute 
combines  with  it  to  form  x,  a  T-mute  is  dropped. 

Most  polysyllabic  mute  stems  change  their  final  vowel  i 
into  e  in  the  Nominative. 

The  stems  sliow  variations  as  follows  : 

51.   Stems  ill  a  P-nmte. 

1.  'dbs,  -ahis  :  trabs,  beam  ;  Arabs.        -aps, -apis :  [daps],  feast. 

2.  ~ebs,  ebis  :  plebs,  commons. 

3.  -ejjs,  -ipis:  princeps,  chief,  and  fourteen  others.  -ips^ 
-ipis:  stips,  dole. 

4.  ~ops,-ojjis:  [ops],  2)0 wer. 

5.  -62>8,  upis  :  auce]^,  fowler,  and  the  old  Latin  manceps,  contractor. 

6.  -1*68,  'Vbis  :  urbs,  city. 

7.  'VpSf  -rpis  :  stirps,  stock. 

So. — N.     princeps,     chief  (m.),  Pl. — princip5s, 

G.     principis,  principum, 

D.     principi,  principibus, 

Ac.  principem,  principSs, 

V.     princeps,  principSs, 

Ab.  principe.  principibus. 

62.  Stems  in  a  K-mute. 

I.  -aXf  'Ucis:  fax,  torch,  and  many  Greek  words  in  -ax,  Atax, 
proper  name,  -fla:^  -acts  :  tomix^  furnace  ;  limSx,f  snail ;  ■]^,jpeace; 
and  Greek  cordax,  thOrax. 


24  THIRD    DECLENSION". 

2.  -ca?,  'CCis :  faenisex,  mower ;  nex,  murder ;  [prex],  prayer ; 
[resex],  stump.       -eoCf  »ecis  :  allex  (also  allgc),  brine  ;  verv6x,  wether. 

'CX,  "egis  :  grex,  herd  ;  aquilex,  water-inspector.        -ex,  ^egis : 
interrSx ;  lex,  law  ;  rex,  ki7ig. 

3.  'CXf  '•ids :  auspex,  soothsayer,  and  about  forty  others.  -ex, 
•igis :  rgmex,  rower.  -tx^  ids  :  cervix,  neck,  and  about  thirty- 
others  ;  verbals  in  -ix,  as  victrix.  -ix,  -ids  :  appendix,  appendix,  and 
ten  others.  -ix^  -igis  :  strix,  screech-owl ;  also  many  foreign  proper 
names,  as  Dumnorix,  which  may,  however,  be  forms  in  -ix,  -igis. 

4.  'bx,  'bds  :  celox,  cutter  ;  vox,  voice.  -ox,  'Ods  :  Cappadox, 
Cappadocian.       -ox,  -ogis  :  Allobrox,  Allohi^ogian. 

5.  'UXf  'Ucis  :  crux,  cross  ;  dux,  leader  ;  nux,  7mt.  •fix,  'Uds  : 
lux,  light ;  hallux,  gold-dust ;  Pollux.  'iix,  -ugis  :  coniux  (-unx), 
spouse.        'iix,  'Ugis  :  frux,  fruit. 

6.  'VXf  'Vcis  :  arx,  citadel ;  merx,  ivares.  -Ix,  'Ids  :  falx, 
sickle  ;  calx,  heel,  lime.  -nx,  -nds  :  lanx,  dish  ;  compounds  of  -unx, 
as  quincunx,  and  a  few  names  of  animals  ;  phalanx  has  G.  phalangis. 

7.  Unclassified  :  nix  (G.  nivis),  snow;  bos  (G.  bovis ;  see  71),  ox;  [faux] 
(G.  faucis),  throat ;  faex  (G.  faecis),  dregs, 

Sg. — N.    rex,      king  (m.).  Pl.— reg6s, 
G.     regis,  rggum, 

D.     r6gX,  rggibus, 

Ac.  rggem,  rgggs, 

V.     r6x,  r6g6s, 

Ab.  rgge,  rggibus. 

53.  stems  in  a  T-mute 

1.  "as, 'Otis:  many  feminine  abstracts,  as  aetas,  o^e  ;  some  proper 
names,  as  Maecgnas.  'US,  'Utis  :  anas,  duck.  -as,  -adis  :  vas, 
bail ;  lampas,  torch. 

2.  '•es,-etls  :  iadigea,  patron  deity  ;  interpres,  interpreter;  praepes, 
bi7'd ;  seges,  crop ;  teges,  mat.  -es,  -etis  :  abigs,  fir  ;  arigs,  ram  ; 
parigs,  wall.  -es,  -etis  :  quiSs,  quiet  ;  requigs,  rest.  -es,  -edis  : 
pg3,  foot,  and  its  compounds.        -es,  -edis  :  hgrgs,  heir  ;  mercgs,  hire. 

3.  -€S,  -itis  :  antistes,  overseer  ;  caespes,  sod,  and  some  fifteen  oth- 
ers, -es,  -idis  :  obses,  hostage  ;  praeses,  protector.  -is,  -itis  : 
USy  suit.  -is,  -idis:  capis,  bowl;  cassis,  helmet,  and  nearly  forty 
others,  mostly  Greek. 

4.  -OS,  -Otis  :  c3s,  whetstone  ;  d5B,  dowry  ;  nep5s,  grandson  ;  sacer- 
d5s,  priest.        -os,  -odis  :  custOs,  guard. 

5.  -Us,  "litis:  gltis,  glue,  and  some  abstracts:  inventus,  youth; 
salfls,  safety ;  senecttis,  old  age ;  servitOs,  servitude  ;  virtfis,  maiiliness. 

-US,  -udis:   pecus,  slieep.        -Us, -Udis :  incOs,  anvil;  paliis, 
marsh;  subscUs,  tenon. 


CONSONANT   STEMS.  2^ 

6.  -aeSf -aedis  :  T^r&es,  sui-ety.  -aus,  -audis  :  I&ms,  praise; 
fraus,  fraud. 

7.  -ISf-ltis:  puis,  porridge.  -ns^  -ntis :  in&ns,  infant ;  d6ns, 
tooth;  ions,  fountain  ;  mons,  mo unt ai?b ;  fraas,  b7'ow ;  •pQns,  bridge ;  g^ns, 
tribe;  lens,  lentil;  m6ns,  mind;  rudgns,  rope;  torrgns,  torrent.  -s, 
-nils  :  latinized  Greek  words  like  gigas,  giant.  -r«,  -rtis :  ars,  art ; 
cohors,  cohort;  fors,  chance  ;  Mars;  mors,  death  ;  sors,  lot. 

S.  Unclassified  :  cor  (G.  cordis),  heart;  nox  (G.  noctis),  night ;  caput 
(G.  capitis),  head ;  lac  (G.  lactis),  milk. 

Sg.— X.     aetas,  a</e  (f .)•  Pl.— aetatgs,     SG.—p6s, /oo/ (in.).  PL.—pedSs, 


G.     aetatis. 

aetatum. 

pedis. 

pedum, 

D.     aetati, 

aetatibus, 

pedi, 

pedibus, 

Ac.  aetatem, 

aetates, 

pedem, 

pedgs. 

V.     aetas. 

aetatgs, 

pes, 

pedes. 

Ab.  aetate. 

aetatibus. 

pede, 

pedibus. 

54.  Many  substantives  of  this  class  were  originally  vowel  stems 
(see  56),  and  show  their  origin  by  having  the  termination  -ium  in  the 
Gen.  PI.  and  -i  in  the  Abl.  Singular.  Some  not  originally  vowel  stems 
do  the  same.     (See  88,  2.) 

Monosyllabic  mute  stems,  with  the  characteristic  preceded  by  a 
consonant,  have  the  Gen.  PL  in  -ium :  urbium,  of  cities ;  arcium,  of 
citadels  ;  montium,  of  mou7itai?is  ;  partium,  of  parts  ;  noctium,  of  the 
nights.     But  -urn  is  also  found  in  gentum  (Attius),  partum  (Ennius). 

Monosyllabic  mute  stems,  with  characteristic  preceded  by  a  long 
vowel  or  diphthong,  vaiy  :  dot-ium,  lit-ium,  fauc-ium,  fraud-um  (-ium), 
laud-um  (-ium).     But  praed-um,  vocum. 

Monosyllaljic  mute  stems  with  characteristic  preceded  by  a  short 
vowel  have  -um  ;  but  fac-ium,  nuc-um  (-ium),  niv-ium  (-urn). 

The  polysyllabic  stems  in  -nt  and  -rt  have  more  frequently  -ium,  as 
clientium  (-um),  of  clients  ;  cohortium  (-um),  of  companies.  So  adulg- 
scentium  (-um),  amantium  (-um),  infantium  (-um),  parentum  (~ium),  serpen- 
tium  (-um),  torrentium  (-um) ;  rudentum  (-ium) ;  but  only  quadrantum. 

Of  other  })olysyllabic  stems  feminine  stems  in  -at  have  frequently 
both  -um  and  -ium,  as  aetatum  and  aetatium,  civitatum  and  civitatium, 
etc.  ;  the  rest  have  usually  -um  :  but  artifex,  (li)aruspex,  extispex,  iudex, 
supplex,  coniux,  rgmex,  and  usually  fomax  have  -ium.  Forceps,  manceps, 
municeps,  princeps  have  -um.     Paliis  has  usually  paludium. 

Notes.— I.  The  accusative  lentim  from  [I6ns]  is  occasionally  found,  and  partim 
from  pars,  as  an  adverb. 

2.  Sporadic  ablatives  in  -i  occur  as  follows  :  animantl  (Cic),  bidenti  (Luck.), 
tridenti  (Sil.,  Vekg.).  capiti,  consonant!  (sram.),  hgrgdi  (inscr.),  Iggi  (inscr.), 
lenti  (TiTiN.,  Col.),  luci  (early),  menti  (CoL.),  occipiti  (Pers.,  Aus.),  pacS 
(Varro),  parti,  rudenti  (Vitr.),  sorts,  torrenti  (Sen.). 


26  THIRD   DECLENSION". 

55.  Ride  of  Gender. — Mute  stems,  with  Nominative  in  fi^ 
are  feminine. 

1.  Exceptions  m  a  k-mufe. 

Masculines  are  substantives  in  -ex,  -gx,  -ix,  and  -unx ;  except  cortex, 
bark,  forfex,  shears,  frutex,  shrub,  imbrex,  tile,  latex,  Jiuid,  obex,  bolt, 
silex,  flint,  varix,  varicose  vein,  which  are  sometimes  masculine,  some- 
times feminine  ;  and  faex,  dregs,  forpex,  to7igs,  lex,  law,  nex,  slaughter, 
vlb6x,  weal,  and  forms  of  [prex],  prayer,  which  are  feminine.  Calx, 
heel,  and  calx,  chalk,  are  sometimes  masculine,  sometimes  feminine. 

2.  Exceptions  in  a  t-mute. 

Masculine  are  substantives  in  -es,  -itis,  except  merges  (f.),  sheaf; 
also  pgs,  foot,  and  its  compounds  ;  parigs,  wall ;  lapis,  sto7ie. 

Masculines  in  -ns  are  :  dgns,  tooth,  and  its  compounds;  fons,  sprifig ; 
m5ns,  mountain  ;  pons,  bridge  ;  rudgns,  rope  ;  torrgns,  torrent ;  also  some 
substantivized  adjectives  and  participles. 

Neuters  are  only  :  cor,  heart,  lac,  milk,  and  caput,  head, 

II.-VOWEL  STEMS. 
1  .—Vowel  Stems  in  1. 

56.  Masculines  and  feminines  form  their  Nominative  in  s. 
Some  feminines  change,  in  the  Nominative,   the   stem- 
vowel  i  into  e. 

Neuters  change,  in  the  Nominative,  the  stem-vowel  i  into 
e.  This  e  is  generally  dropped  by  polysyllabic  neuters  after 
1  and  r. 

Stems  in  i  have  Genitive  Plural  in  -ium. 

Neuter  stems  in  i  have  the  Ablative  Singular  in  i,  and 
Nominative  Plural  in  -la. 

The  varieties  of  stems  are  : 

1.  ^iSf  "is  :  nearly  one  hundred  substantives,  like  civis,  citizen. 

2.  -eSf  -is  :  thirty-five,  like  vulpgs,  fox.  Some  of  these  have  also 
variant  nominatives  in  -is  in  good  usage. 

3.  -e^  'is  :  some  twenty  neuters,  as  mare,  sea. 

4.  — ,  'is  :  twenty-four  neuters,  wliich  form  Nominative  by  dropping 
the  stem  charjulcristic  and  shortcniu-^  tlic  preceding  vowel  :  animal, 
-aiis,  animal ;  calcar  ((c.  calcaris),  syy/^y. 

5.  For  substantives  in  -e/*,  -ris,  see  44,  2.  Irregular  is  senex, 
((j.  senis ;  sec  57,  r.  3),  old  man. 


VOWEL   STEMS. 


27 


M.  r.  F.  N.  X. 

Sg.—N.    collis,  Z^?//.  twrris,  fofcer.    viiipSs,  fox.  maxe,  mt.  a.mma.1,  living 


G. 

collis, 

turris, 

vulpis, 

maris, 

animalis. 

D. 

colli, 

turri, 

vulpi, 

marl, 

animali, 

Ac. 

collem, 

turrim(ein), 

vulpem, 

mare. 

animal, 

V. 

collis, 

turris, 

vulpgs, 

mare, 

animal, 

Ab. 

colle, 

turriCe), 

vulpe, 

mari, 

animal!, 

Pl.— N.    colles,  turrSs, 

G.    coUium,  turri-um, 

D.    collibus,  turri-bus, 

Ac.  collis(gs),  turrisCSs), 

V.    collSs,  turrgs, 

Ab.  collibus.  turri-bus. 


vulpgs,  maria,       animalia, 

vulpium,  marum,     animalium, 

vulpibus,  maribus,   animalibus, 

vulpis(6s),  maria,       animalia, 

vulpes,  maria,       animalia, 

vulpibus.  maribus.  animalibus. 


67.  Remarks. — i.  The  proper  ending  of  the  Ace.  Sing,  -im,  is  re- 
tained akvays  in  amussis,  buris,  cucumis  (see  47,  2),  futis,  mephitis, 
ravis,  rumis,  sitis,  tussis,  vis ;  and  in  names  of  towns  and  rivers  in  -is, 
as  Neapolis,  Tiberis  ;  usualUj  in  febris,  puppis,  pelvis,  restis,  seciiris,  turris ; 
occasionaUi/  in  bipennis,  clavis,  cratis,  cutis,  len(ti)s  (see  54,  n.  i),  messis, 
navis,  neptis,  praesaepis,  sementis,  strigilis. 

2.  The  Abl.  in  -i  is  found  in  substantives  that  regularly  have  -im 
in  Ace.  (except  perhaps  restis) :  also  not  unfrequently  in  amnis,  avis, 
bipennis,  canalis,  civis,  classis,  finis  (in  forraulai),  fustis.  Ignis  (in  phrases), 
orbis,  sementis,  strigilis,  unguis  ;  occasionally  in  anguis,  bills,  clavis, 
collis,  convallis,  corbis,  messis,  neptia ;  regularly  in  neuters  in  e,  al,  and  ar, 
except  in  rgte,  and  in  the  towns  Caere,  Praeneste. 

Note.— So  also  the  adjectives  of  this  class,  when  used  as  substantives  by  ellipsis  : 
annaiis  (sc.  liber,  book),  chronicle ;  natalis  (sc.  digs,  day),  birthday;  Aprllis  (sc. 
mensis,  month),  and  all  the  other  months  of  the  Third  Declension  :  Abl.,  annall, 
natali,  Aprili,  SeptembrI,  etc.  But  iuvenis,  young  man;  and  aedllis,  aedUe, 
have  Abl.,  iuvene,  aedile  ;  adjectives  used  as  proper  nouns  have  generally  Abl.  in 
-e,  as,  luvenalis,  luvenale. 

3.  In  the  Gen.  PL,  instead  of  the  ending  -ium,  -um  is  found  always 
in  canis,  dog,  iuvenis,  yoim.g  man,  panis,  bread,  senex,  old,  struSs,  heap, 
volucris,  bird;  usually  in  apis,  bee,  sgdes,  seat,  vates,  bard  ;  frequently 
in  mensis,  month.  On  imber,  etc.,  see  45,  r.  i.  Post-classical  and  rare 
are  ambagum,  caedum,  cladum,  veprum,  and  a  few  others  ;  marum  (the 
only  form  found)  occurs  once. 

4.  In  the  Nom.  PI.  -eis  and  -Is  are  found  in  early  Latin.  So  occa- 
sionally in  consonant  stems  (see  38,  i),  but  in  classical  times  such  usage 
is  doubtful. 

5.  The  proper  ending  of  the  Ace.  PI.,  -Is (archaic,  -eis),  is  found  fre- 
quently in  the  classical  period  along  with  the  later  termination  -gs,  which 
supplants  -Is  wholly  in  the  early  empire.  On  the  other  hand,  -is  for  -gs 
in  consonant  stems  is  confined  to  a  few  doubtful  cases  in  early  Latin. 


28 


THIRD    DECLENSION". 


58.  Rule  of  Gender. — i.  Vowel  stems,  with  Nomiuative 
in  -es  are  feminine  ;  those  with  Nominative  in  -is  are  partly 
masculine,  partly  feminine. 

Masculine Kve  :  amnis,  rive?-  (f.,  early) ;  antgs  (pl.)^  '^ows ;  axis,  axle :  huxis, 2>low- 
tail;  cass6s  (pi),  toils;  cauliS;  stalk;  coliis,  hill;  crinis,  hair;  gnsis,  glaive; 
fascis,  fagot ;  follis,  bellows  ;  funis,  rope  (f.,  Lucr.)  ;  fustis,  cudgel ;  ignis,  fire; 
manes  (pi-).  Manes ;  mSnsis,  month  ;  mvL^ilds),  mullet ;  orbis,  circle ;  panis,  bread ; 
postis,  door-post ;  torr is,. fire-brand ;  unguis,  nail ;  vectis,  lever ;  vermis,  nvrm. 

Com77ion  are  :  callis,/oo/;;a//i  ,•  canalis,  canal ;  cltinis,  haunch ;  corbis,  basket; 
finis,  end ;  rStis,  net  (also  r6te,  n.) ;  sentis  (usually  pi.),  bi-amble ;  scrobis,  ditch  ; 
torquis  (es),  necklace  ;  tolgs  (pi.),  goitre ;  veprgs  (pi.),  bramble. 

Remark. — Of  the  names  of  animals  in  -is,  some  are  mascuHne  ;  tigris, 
ilger  (fern,  in  poetry)  ;  canis,  dog  (also  fern.)  ;  piscis,  j^sA  ;  others  fem- 
inine :  apis,  hee  ;  avis,  hird  ;  ovis,  sheep  ;  fglis,  cat  (usually  feles). 

2.  Vowel  stems,  with  Nominative  in  -e,  -al,  -ar,  are  neuter. 


2.    Vowel  Stems  in  u. 


59.  Of  stems  in  u,  the  monosyllabic  stems,  two  in  num- 
ber, belong  to  the  Third  Declension. 


Sg.— N.    grtis,  crane  (f.) 

Pl.— grugs 

G.     gruis 

gruum 

D.     grui 

gruibus 

Ac.  gruem 

gru6s 

V.     grus 

grugs 

Ab.  grue 

gruibus. 

Sas,  swine  (commonly  f.),  usually  subus,  in  Dat.  and  Abl.  Plural. 

Table  of  Nominativk  and  Genitive  Endings  op  the  Third  Declensiok. 

The  *  before  the  ending  denotes  that  it  occurs  only  in  the  one  word  cited. 


60. 


A.    NOMINATIVES   ENDING    WITH   A    LIQUID. 


^OM. 

Gen. 

NoM.    Gen. 

-al 

-ali-s 

animal,      animal. 

-ar  *-arr-is 

far, 

spdt. 

■ai-is 

Hannibal,  proper  name. 

-er     -er-is 

anser. 

goose. 

-al 

*.ai.is 

sal,              salt. 

-r-is 

pater, 

father. 

-el 

-ell-is 

mel,            Jioney. 

*-iner-is 

iter. 

journey. 

-il 

-il-is 

pugil,         boxer. 

-6r    *-gr-is 

vgr. 

spring. 

-n-is 

Tanaquil,  proper  name. 

-or     -5r-is 

color, 

color. 

-01 

*-51-is 

s51,              the  sun.. 

-or-is 

aequor, 

expanse. 

-ul 

-ul-is 

consul,        consul. 

*-ord-is 

cor, 

heart. 

-Sn 

-gn-is 

rgngs  (pl.),  kidneys. 

-ur    -ur-is 

fulgur. 

lightning. 

-en 

-in-is 

n5men,       name. 

-or-is 

rSbur, 

oak. 

-ar 

-ari-8 
-ari-s 

calcar,       spiir. 
nectar,       nectar. 

-Or    -Or-is 

fur, 

thitf. 

VOWEL   STEMS. 


29 


B.    NOMINATIVES   ENDING   WITH   S,   OR   X  (CS,   gs). 


NOM. 

Gen. 

NOM. 

Gen. 

-as 

*-as-is 

vas, 

dish. 

-Is 

*.lt-is 

puis, 

porridge. 

*-ar-is 

mas, 

male. 

-m(p)s 

*-m-is 

hiems, 

winter. 

-at-is 

aetas, 

age. 

-ns 

-nd-is 

frSns, 

leafy  branch. 

-as 

*-ad-is 

vas. 

surety. 

-nt-is 

frons. 

foreliead. 

*ass-is 

as, 

a  copper. 

-IS 

-rd-is 

concors, 

concordant. 

-at-is 

anas, 

duck. 

-rt-is 

pars. 

part. 

-aes" 

-aed-is 

praes, 

surety. 

-bs 

-b-is 

urbs, 

cUy. 

*aer-is 

aes, 

brass. 

-ps 

-p-is 

stirps, 

stalk. 

•aus 

-aud-is 

fraus, 

cJieatery. 

-eps 

-ip-is 

princeps, 

chief. 

-6s 

-is 

nubes, 

cloud. 

*-up-i8 

auceps, 

fowler. 

-ed-is 

pes. 

foot. 

-ax 

-ac-is 

pax. 

peace. 

-ed-is 

heres, 

heir. 

-ax 

=:=-ac-is 

fax. 

toixh. 

*-er-is 

Ceres, 

Ceres. 

-aex 

-aec-is 

faex, 

dregs. 

-et-is 

abigs. 

fir. 

-aux 

-auc-is 

[faux,] 

throat. 

-6t-is 

quigs. 

rtsf. 

-ex 

-ec-is 

nex. 

death. 

es 

-et-is 

seges, 

crop. 

-ic-is 

iiidex, 

judge. 

-id-is 

obses. 

hostage. 

-eg-is 

grex. 

flock. 

-it-is 

miles. 

soldier. 

*.ig-is 

rgmex. 

rower. 

•is 

-is 

amnis, 

river. 

-ex 

*-5c-is 

allgx. 

jnckie. 

-id-is 

lapis. 

stone. 

*-ic-is 

vibgx(ix5 

(,  weaJ: 

-in-is 

sanguis, 

blood. 

-gg-is 

rgx. 

king. 

-er-is 

cinis, 

ashes. 

-Ix 

-ic-is 

cervix, 

neck. 

-is 

*-it-is 

lis, 

suit  at  laiv. 

-ix 

-ic-is 

calix, 

cup. 

*-ir-is 

glis, 

dormouse. 

*4g-is 

strix, 

screech-owl. 

-OS 

*-od-is 

custos, 

keeper. 

*-iv-is 

nix. 

snow. 

-or-is 

^os. 

flower. 

-5x 

-oc-is 

vox. 

voice. 

-6t-is 

cos. 

whetstone. 

-ox 

*-oc-is 

praecox. 

eaHy-Hpe. 

*-ov-is 

bos, 

ox. 

*-0g-i8 

AUobrox,  AUoinogian. 

-OS 

*oss-is 

OS, 

bone. 

*-oct-is 

nox. 

night. 

-US 

*-ud-is 

pecus. 

cattle,  sheep. 

-ux 

-c-is 

crux, 

ovss. 

*-ur-is 

Ligus, 

a  Ligurian. 

-ug-is 

cSniux, 

s])ouse. 

-or-is 

corpus, 

body. 

-ux 

-iic-is 

lux, 

light. 

-or-is 

scelus, 

crime. 

-ug-is 

[frux,] 

f7^iL 

-fis 

-u-is 

sus, 

swine. 

-Ix 

-Ic-is 

falx, 

sickle. 

-fid-is 

incus, 

anvil. 

-nx 

-nc-is 

lanx, 

dish. 

-ur-is 

ius, 

right. 

-rx 

-re-ifi 

arx. 

citadel. 

-ut-is 

salus, 

weal. 

C.    NOMINATIVES   ENDING  WITH   A   MUTE. 

-ut    *-it-is   caput, 


-ac  *-act-is   lac,       milk. 

=Sc    *-€C-is   allgc,    pickle  (OS,  12). 


head. 


D.    NOMINATIVES    ENDING    WITH    A   VOWEL. 


-€ 

-i-s 

mare,  sea. 

-0 

-on-is 

Saxo,  Saxon, 

^ 

-6n-is 

pav3,  peacock. 

-in-is 

homo,  mail. 

*-n-is 

cars,  flesh. 

30  VOVHTK  DECOINSION'. 

FOURTH    DECLENSION, 

61.  The  Fourth  Declension  embraces  only  dissyllabic  and 
polysyllabic  stems  in  u. 

The  endings  are  those  of  the  Third  Declension. 

In  the  Genitive  and  Ablative  Singular,  and  in  the  Nomi- 
native, Accusative,  and  Vocative  Plural  (sometimes,  too,  in 
the  Dative  Singular),  the  u  of  the  stem  absorbs  the  vowel  of 
the  ending,  and  becomes  long.  In  the  Dative  and  Ablative 
Plural  it  is  weakened  to  i  before  the  ending  -bus. 

The  Accusative  Singular,  as  always  in  vowel  stems,  has 
the  ending  -m,  without  a  connecting  vowel  (compare  the 
Accusative  in  -i-m  of  the  stems  in  i),  hence  -u-m. 

MASCULINE.  NEUTER. 

Sti.— N.    fructus,  fruit.      Pi>.— fructus,  Sg.  -cornu,  /u)rn.  Pi>.— comua, 

G.    fructus,                        fructuum,           corniis,  cornuum, 

I),    frtictui  (fruetti),          friictibus,           cornu,  cornibus, 

Ac.  fructum,                     fructus,              cornu,  comua, 

V.    frUctus,                        fructus,               cornu,  cornua, 

Ab.  fructu.                         friictibus.           cornu.  cornibus. 

Remarks. — i.  Dat.  AIL  The  original  form  -u-bus  is  retained 
always  in  acus,  arcus,  quercus,  tribus,  and  in  classical  times  in  partus. 
But  artus,  genu,  lacus,  portus,  specus,  tonitru,  veru,  have  both  forms. 

2.  Domus,  ^owse,  is  declined  :  G.  domu-os  (archaic),  domu-is  and  dorai 
(early),  domu-us  (late),  domus.  D.  domo  (early),  domul.  Ac.  domum. 
Y.  domus.  Ab.  dom-u  (sporadic),  domo.  Loc^  domi.  PI.  N.  domtis. 
G.  domorum  (Lucr.  always,  Verg.,  Flor.),  domuiim  (late).  D.  Ab. 
domibus.  Ac.  domos,  domus.  Classical  forms  are  those  in  black-faced 
type,     A  classical  variant  for  domi  (Loc.)  is  domul. 

Notes.— 1.  Singrular:  Genitive.  In  early  inscriptions  we  find  the  ending -os,  as 
senatuos  ;  and  in  early  autliors  not  unfrequently  -is,  along  with  the  contraction  -us 
(-uis),  wliich  becomes  the  regular  form  in  classical  times.  In  inscriptions  under  the 
empire  -us  is  occasionally  found,  as  exercituus.  The  termination  -i,  after  the  analogy 
of  the  Second  Declension,  is  common  ii.  early  Latin,  and  is  still  retained  in  some 
words  even  into  the  classical  period  ;  as  senatl  (Cic,  Sall.,  Livy),  tumult!  (Sall.). 

2.  Dative.  In  the  early  time  -uei  is  found  very  rarely  for  -ul.  Also  u,  as  senatti, 
fructu,  which  became  the  only  form  for  neuters.  In  classical  times  -u  in  masc.  and 
fern,  is  poetical  only  (Caesar  uses,  however,  casu,  exercitti,  magistratu,  senatG, 
quaestu),  but  extends  to  prose  in  the  Augustan  age  and  later. 

3.  Plural :  Norn..,  Ace,  Voe.    In  imperial  inscriptions  -uus  occurs. 

4.  Genitive.  The  poets  frequently  (-ontract  -uum  iuto  -um  for  metrical  reasons, 
and  this  usage  was  sometimes  extended  to  prose  (not  by  Ciceko)  in  common  words  ;  as 
passflm  for  passuum. 

5.  Colus,  distaff,  belongs  properly  to  tte  Second  Declension,  but  has  variants  :  Q. 
COltlS,  Ab.  colli,  P1-,  N.,  Ac,  colus,  from  the  Fourth. 


FIFTH    DECLEKSION".  3 1 

62.  Rule  of  Gender. — Substantives  in  -us  are  masculine  ; 
those  in  -u  are  neuter. 

Exceptions. — Feminines  are  acus,  needle  (usually),  domus,  house, 
idus  (pi.),  ihe  Ides,  manus,  hajid,  penus,  victuals  (also  m.),  porticus, 
piazza,  quinquatrus  (pL),  festival  of  Jlinerva,  tribus,  ti'ibe.  Eai'ly  and 
late  Latin  show  some  further  variations. 

FIFTH    DECLENSION. 

63.  The  stem  ends  in  -6 ;  Nominative  in  s. 

In  the  Genitive  and  Dative  Singular  -e  has  been  shortened 
after  a  consonant. 

In  the  Accusative  Singular  we  find,  always  e. 

The  ending  in  the  Genitive  Singular  is  that  of  the  Second 
Declension,  -i ;  the  other  endings  are  those  of  the  Third. 


MASCULINE. 

FEMININE. 

k~N. 

digs,  day. 

Pl.- 

-dies, 

Sq.- 

-rgs. 

thing. 

Pl.- 

-res. 

G. 

diet, 

dieruin, 

rei. 

rgrum, 

D. 

diei, 

diebus, 

rei. 

rgbus, 

Ac. 

diem, 

dies, 

rem 

> 

rgs, 

V. 

dies, 

digs, 

rgs. 

rgs, 

Ab. 

die. 

digbus. 

r6. 

rgbus. 

Remarks. — i.  Plural :  Gen.,  Dat.,  AM.  Common  in  but  two  substan- 
tives, dies,  rgs.  Late  Latin  shows  also  specigbus,  and  very  rarely  spgbus 
and  acigbus. 

2.  Many  words  of  the  Fifth  Declension  have  a  parallel  form,  which 
follows  the  First  Declension,  us  mollitigs,  softness,  and  moUitia.  Where 
this  is  the  case,  forms  of  the  Fifth  Declension  are  usually  found  only 
in  the  Nom.,  Ace,  and  Abl.  Singular. 

Notes.— 1.  Singular :  Genitive.  The  older  ending  -g-s  is  found  sporadically  in 
early  Latin,  but  usually  the  ending  -g-i,  which  became  later  -§-i  after  consonants, 
though  early  poets  show  numerous  examples  of  rgi,  spgl,  fidgl.  gl  was  occasionally 
scanned  as  one  syllable,  whence  arose  the  contraction  g,  which  is  retained  not  unfre- 
quently  m  the  classical  period  ;  so  acig  (Caes.,  Sall.),  dig  (Pl.,  Caes.,  Ball.,  Livr, 
later),  fidg  (Pl.,  Hok.,  Ov.,  late  Prose),  and  other  less  certain  cases;  ioccursvery  rarely, 
principally  in  early  Latin  (but  dil,  Verg.,  pemicil,  Cic).  Plgbgs,  in  combination 
with  tribunus,  aedilis,  scitum,  often  shows  a  Gen.  plgbi  (plebei). 

2.  Dative.  The  contraction  -g  is  found,  but  less  often  than  in  the  Gen.  ;  acie 
(8all.)  ;  dig,  facie  (early  Latin) ;  fidg  (early  Latin,  Caes.,  Sall  ,  Livy),  perniciS 
(LrvY),  and  a  few  other  forms.    The  Dat.  in  -i  is  found  very  rarely  in  early  Latin. 

64.  Rule  of  Gender. — Substantives  of  the  Fifth  Declension 
are  feminine  except  dies  (which  in  the  Sing,  is  common, 
and  in  the  PI.  masculine),  and  meridies  (m.),  midday. 


32 


DECLEJS^SION    OF    GREEK    SUBSTANTIVES. 


Declension  of  Greek  Substantives. 

66.  Greek  substantives,  especially  proper  names,  are  com- 
monly Latinized,  and  declined  regularly  according  to  their 
stem-characteristic.  Many  substantives,  however,  either 
retain  their  Greek  form  exclusively,  or  have  the  Greek  and 
Latin  forms  side  by  side.  These  variations  occur  principally 
in  the  Singular,  in  the  Plural  the  declension  is  usually  regular. 


Singular  Forms  < 

of  Greek  Substantives. 

First 

Declension. 

N. 

Penelopg, 

Leonidas, 

Anchises, 

G. 

PSnelopgs, 

Leonidae, 

Anchisae, 

D. 

Penelopae, 

Leonidae, 

Anchisae, 

Ac. 

Penelopen, 

Leonidam,  an. 

Anchisgn,  am, 

V. 

PSnelopg, 

Leonida, 

Anchisg,  a,  ft, 

Ab. 

Pgnelopa. 

Leonida. 

Anchisa. 

Second  Declension. 

N. 

Delos 

,  us.           Ilion,  urn, 

Panthus, 

Androgeos,  us, 

G. 

D§li, 

Ilii, 

Panthi, 

Androgei, 

D. 

Dglo, 

Ilio, 

PanthO, 

Androgeo, 

Ac. 

Delon 

,  um,         Ilion,  um. 

Panthun, 

AndrogeSn,  5,  5na, 

V. 

DSle, 

Ilion,  um. 

Panthu, 

Androgeos, 

Ab. 

Delo. 

ilio. 

Third 

Panth5. 
Declension. 

Androgeo. 

N. 

Solon 

,  Solo,         a6r,  air. 

Xenophon, 

Atlas, 

G. 

Solonis,               aeris, 

Xenophontis, 

Atlantis, 

D. 

Soloni,                aeri, 

Xenophonti, 

Atlanti, 

Ac. 

Solona,  em,         aera,  em, 

Xenophonta,  em. 

,     Atlanta, 

V. 

Solon 

a6r. 

Xenophon, 

Atla, 

Ab. 

Solone.                aere. 

Xenophonte. 

Atlante. 

N. 

Thalgs, 

Paris, 

hgros,  hero^ 

G. 

Thal-etis,  -is, 

Paridis,  os. 

hgrois, 

D. 

Thal-eti,  -i. 

Paridi,  i, 

hgroi. 

Ac. 

Thal-gta,  -6n,  -em. 

Par-ida,  -im,  -in, 

hgroa,  em, 

V. 

Thais, 

Pari,  Paris, 

hgros, 

Ab. 

Thais. 

Mixed 

Paride. 
Declensions. 

hgroe. 

n.    m. 

11.     in. 

II.    in. 

N. 

Orpheus, 

Athds, 

Oedipus, 

G. 

Orphei,  ei. 

Ath5,  5nis, 

Oedip-odis,  -I, 

D. 

Orpheo, 

Ath6, 

Oedipodi, 

Ac. 

Orpheum,  ea^ 

Athd,  On,  dnem, 

Oedip-um,  -oda, 

V. 

Orpheu, 

Athos, 

Oedipe, 

Ab. 

OrpheO. 

Ath5ne. 

Oedip-ode,  -5. 

IRREGULAR   SUBSTANTIVES. 


33 


11.    III. 

II.    III. 

III.    ly. 

Achilles,  eus, 

Socratgs, 

Did5, 

Achillis,  ei,  I,  eos, 

Socratis,  i, 

Didus,  onis, 

Achilli, 

Socrati, 

Dido,  oni, 

Achillem,  ea,  en, 

Socraten,  em, 

Dido,  onem, 

Achilles,  e,  eu,  e, 

Socrate,  es, 

Dido, 

Achille,  e,  I. 

Socrate. 

Dido,  one. 

N. 

G. 

D. 

Ac. 

V. 

Ab. 

Remarks. — r.  In  the  Gen.  PI.  -on  and  -eon  are  found  in  the  titles  of 
books  ;  as,  Georgicon,  Metamorphoseon. 

2.  Many  Greek  names,  of  tlie  Thii'd  Declension  in  Latin,  pass  over 
into  the  First  Declension  in  the  Plural  ;  as,  Thucydidas,  Hyperidae,  and 
many  names  in  -cratSs  ;  as  Socrates  ;  PL,  Socratae  (also  SocratSs). 

3.  In  transferring  Greek  words  into  Latin,  the  Accusative  Singular 
was  sometimes  taken  as  the  stem: 

So  Kpari^p,  Ace.  KpaTTJpa,  {punch)  howl. 

cratgr,  cratgris  (masc),  and  cratSra  (crSterra)  crat6rae  (fem.). 
2a\a|iCs,  Ace.  SaXa^jiiva,  Salamis. 
Salamis,  Salaminis,  and  Salamina,  ae. 

66.  Notes.— 1.  Swgular :  Genitive.  The  Greek  termination  oeo  (oto)  appears 
rarely  in  early  Latin,  but  Q,  (ow)  is  more  frequent,  esjiecially  in  geographical  names,  etc. 
The  termination  -os  (o?)  is  rare  except  in  feminine  patronymics  in  -is,  -as,  (G.  -idos, 
-ados). 

2.  Dative.  The  ending  -i  is  very  rare  ;  and  rarer  still  is  the  Dat,  in  -0  from  femi- 
nines  in  -5,  and  Dat.  in  -y  from  Nominatives  in  -ys. 

3.  Accusative.,  -a  is  the  most  common  termination  in  the  Third  Declension,  and  is 
found  regularly  in  some  words  otherwise  Latinized  ;  as  aera,  aethera.  Stems  in  -5 
usually  have  -5,  very  rarely  -Sn. 

4.  Plural.  In  the  Second  Declension  oe  is  found  occasionally  in  the  Nom.,  in  early 
Latin  ;  as,  adelphoe.  The  Third  Declension  shows  frequently  6s  in  the  Nom.  and  is 
in  the  Accusative  ;  also  occasionally  g  in  the  Nom.  and  Ace.  of  neuters,  and  -si  (but 
only  in  the  poets)  in  the  Dative. 

5.  For  other  i)eculiaritie8,  not  observable  in  the  paradigms,  the  dictionaries  should 
be  consulted.    Sometimes  the  forms  are  merely  transliterations  of  Greek  cases. 


IRREGULAR    SUBSTANTIVES. 
1.    Redundant  Substantives.    (Abundantia.) 

67.  A.  Heterogeneous  Substantives,  or  those  whose  gender  varies  : 
I.  The  variation  occurs  in  several  cases  in  either  number  or  in  both. 


ahrotonum,     -us,  a  plant  (rare),  clipeus, 

aevom  (urn),    -us,  age,  collura, 

baculum,         -us,  staff,  costum, 

balteus,  -um,  girdle,  forum, 

buxus,  -um,  box-wood  (rare),  gladius, 

[calamister],  -um,  curlirig-iron  (rare),  intihus, 

caseus,  -um,  cheese,  iugulum, 

cavom  (um),    -us,  cavity^  nardum, 

cingulum,       -us,  belt,  uasus, 
3 


-um, 

-us, 

-us, 

-us, 

-um, 

-um, 

-us, 

-us, 

-um, 


shield, 

neck, 

a  plant  (rare), 

market, 

sivord, 

succory  (rare), 

collar-boue, 

nard  (rare), 

nose. 


palatum, 

-us, 

palate, 

pileus, 

-um, 

cap, 

sagum, 

-us, 

cloak. 

tergum, 

-us, 

hack, 

34  IRREGULAR   SUBSTAKTIYES. 

thgsaurus,     -um,     treasure, 
uterus,  -um,    womb, 

vallus,  -um,    palisade, 

and  many  others. 

2.  The  gender  varies  in  Singular  and  Plural,  a.  The  Plural  has 
-a  sometimes,  while  the  Singular  ends  in  -us  (or  -er)  :  clivus,  hill,  locus, 
jest,  locus  (loca,  localities  ;  loci,  usually  passages  in  books,  topics),  and 
many  others,  especially  names  of  places. 

b.  The  Plural  has  -i,  while  the  Singular  ends  in  -um :  Slum,  thread, 
frgnum,  bit,  rastrum,  hoe,  and  many  others. 

68.  B.  Heteroclites,  or  substantives  which  show  diiferent  stems  with 
the  same  Nominative  ;  Jletaplasts,  or  those  which  have  certain  forms 
from  another  than  the  Nominative  stem. 

list,  2d.     esseda,  -um,  chariot,  margarita,    -um,     jyearl, 

ostrea,  -um,  oyster, 

2.  1st,  5tli.  duritia,  -gs,  hardness,  materia,  -5s,  matter, 
and  many  others.     See  G3,  R.  2. 

3.  2d,  1st.    mendum,      -a,      favlt,  sertum,         -a,       u-reath. 
The  following  form  their  Plural  according  to  the  First  Declension  only  :  balneum, 

bath,     delicium,  pleamre,     epulum,  banquet,    fulmentum,  prop. 

4.  2d,  3d.      sequester,  trustee,    Mulciber,  Vulcan. 

5.  2d,  4th.  Many  names  of  trees  of  the  Second  Declension  have  certain  cases 
according  to  the  Fourth  ;  never,  however,  the  Gen.  and  Dut.  PI.,  and  very  rarely  the 
Dat.  Sing. ;  as  cornus,  cupressus,  fagus,  ficus,  laurus,  myrtus,  pinus,  and  a 
few  others. 

Also  angiportus,  allej/,  colus,  distaff,  domus,  Jvouse,  and  a  large  number  of  sub- 
stantives of  the  Fourth  Declension  which  have  one  or  two  cases  of  the  Second ;  so 
arcus  has  G.  arcl;  conatus  (-um),  itissus  (-um),  vultus  have  Nom.  Pi.  in  a; 
senatus  has  Gen.  Sing,  senatl.    See  61,  rr,  nn. 

Finally,  some  substantives  of  the  Second  Declension  form  individual  cases  accord- 
ing to  the  Fourth  :  fasti  (Ac.  PL  fasttis),  fretum  (N.  fretus,  Ab.  fretu),  lectus  (G. 
lectus),  tributum  (N.  tributus),  and  others. 

c.  2d,  5tli.    diluvium, -es, /oof^. 

7.  3d.  2d.  Vas,  vessel,  and  vasum ;  palumbes,  pigeon,  and  palumbus ;  liiiger], 
acre,  and  iugerum ;  all  Greek  nouns  in  -a  (G.  atis),  as  poSma,  poem  (G.  poSmatis), 
but  PI.  Gen.  poSmatSrum,  Dat.  Abl.  poSmatls. 

8.  3d,  5th.  Fames,  hunger,  tabes,  cormption,  have  Abl.  fam6,  tabS ;  requigs, 
qmel  ''G.  -gtis)  has  Ace.  requiem,  Abl.  requie ;  satias  (G.  atis)  is  early  and  late  for 
satietas,  sufficiency,  and  a  form  satigs  is  cited  from  late  authors  ;  plgbs  (G.  plgbis), 
cmmnons,  and  plgbes  (G.  plgbel). 

9.  4th,  3d.    Specus,  cave,  has  occasionally  forms  of  the  Third  Declension. 

10.  2d,  3d,  1st.  Vesper,  evening,  has  Ace.  vesperum;  Dat.  Abl.  vespero;  PI. 
Nom.  vespera  of  the  Second  Declensioii ;  Ace.  vesperam ;  Abl.  vesperaof  the  First ; 
Gen.  vesperis ;  Abl.  vespere ;  Loc.  vespere,  vesperi  of  the  Third. 

11.  4th,  2d,  3d.  PenuS,/oorf,  (G.  tis).  Forms  of  the  Second  Declension  are  rare  ; 
of  the  Third  early  and  late. 

12.  Variations  in  the  same  Declension  :  femur  (G.  femoris,  feminis,  etc:) ;  iecur 
(G.  iecoris,  iecinoris,  etc.) ;  pecus,  early,  also  pecu  (G.  pecoris,  pecudis,  etc.). 

Also  allgc  and  allSx,  baccar  and  baccaris,  cassis  and  cassida,  lac  and  lacte 
(early),  panis  and  pSne  (early),  r6te  and  rStis,  satias  and  satietas. 


IRREGULAR   SUBSTANTIVES. 


35 


II.    Defective    Substantives. 


I.    SUBSTANTIVES    DEFECTIVE   IN   NUMBER. 

69.  A.  Substantives  used  in  Singular  only  :  Singularia  tantum. 
Most  abstract  substantives,  and  names  of  materials  ;  such  as 
iHstitia,  justice,  aurum,  gold. 

B.  Substantives  used  in  Plural  only  :  Pluralia  tantum. 


altaria,  ium, 

altar  (sing.  late). 

insidiae, 

ambuscade. 

ambages, 

round  about. 

lactes. 

intestines. 

angustiae, 

straits. 

lamenta, 

lamentations. 

antae, 

door-posts. 

lautomiae, 

stone-quarries. 

antes, 

rows  (of  vines). 

liberi, 

children. 

arma,  5rum, 

arms. 

manes, 

shades  of  the  dead. 

armamenta,  orum 

I,  tackle. 

manubiae, 

spoils. 

bellaria,  orum, 

desse7i. 

minae. 

threats. 

bigae,  quadrigae, 

t  wo-horse,  four-hors> 

e  moenia,  ium. 

town-wall. 

chariot  (sing.  late),  nundinae  (-num), 

market. 

cancelli, 

lattice. 

nuptiae. 

ivedding. 

casses, 

foils  (snare). 

palpebrae. 

eyelids  (sing,  late). 

caulae, 

opening. 

parentalia, 

festival  for  dead  rdcb- 

cervicSs, 

neck  (sing,  early,  late, 

tions. 

and  poet.). 

parietinae, 

ruins. 

cibaria. 

victuals. 

penates, 

the  Penates. 

claustrum, 

lock  (sing.  late). 

plialerae. 

trappings. 

clitellae. 

pack-saddle. 

praecordia,  orum, 

diaphragm. 

codicilli. 

a  short  note. 

praestrigiae. 

jugglers'  t?icks. 

compedes, 

fetters. 

preces,  -um. 

prayer. 

crepundia,  orum, 

rattle. 

primitiae. 

first-fruits. 

cunae. 

cradle. 

quisquiliae, 

i-ubbish. 

divitiae, 

nches. 

reliquiae. 

remains. 

dumeta,  orum, 

thorn-bush. 

renes. 

kidneys. 

epulae  (epulum), 

banquet. 

salinae. 

salt-pits. 

excubiae. 

watching. 

scalae. 

stairway. 

exsequiae, 

funeral  procession . 

sentes, 

brambles. 

exta,  orum, 

the  internal  organs. 

spolia,  orum. 

spoils  (sing,  late,  and 

exuviae, 

equipments. 

poet.). 

facetiae. 

■intlicism  (sing,  ear- 

sponsalia, ium. 

betrothal. 

ly  and  late). 

suppetiae, 

succo)^  (early  and  late). 

fasti  (fastus), 

calendar. 

talaria,  ium. 

winged  sandals. 

fauces. 

gullet. 

tenebrae, 

darkness. 

fSriae, 

holidays. 

thermae, 

warm  baths. 

flabra, 

breezes. 

tonsillae. 

tonsils. 

fores, 

door    (sing,   early, 

tormina. 

colic. 

late  and  poet.). 

tricae, 

tricks. 

fraga,  drum, 

straicber7i.es. 

utensilia,  ium. 

necessaries. 

grates, 

thanks. 

valvae, 

folding-doors. 

hiberna, 

winter  quarters. 

verbera,  um. 

scourging  (sing,  poet 

Idus,  Kalendae, 

Ides,  Calends, 

and  late). 

Nonae, 

Nones. 

vindiciae, 

a  legal  claim. 

incunabula, 

swaddling-clothes. 

virgulta,  orum, 

shmbbery. 

xndutiae. 

truce. 

viscera. 

entrails   (sing,    poet 

Inferisie, 

sacHJicesfor  the  dead. 

and  late). 

36 


lEKEGULAR   SUBSTANTIVES. 


Notes.— 1.  Four  of  these  have  the  Abl.  Sing,  in  -e:  ambage,  COmpede,  fauce, 
prece. 

2.  Names  of  persons  or  towns,  and  collectives  and  the  like,  may  be  either  singu- 
laria  tantum,  as  liippiter ;  Roma ;  capillus,  hair ;  or  pluralia  tantum,  as 
maiSrSs,  ancestors ;  Quirites ;  liberi,  children  ;  pulmones,  lungs.  Many  of  these 
are  not  included  in  the  above  list,  which  is  meant  to  contain  only  the  principal  forms. 

Akin  to  pluralia  tantum  are  : 


C.  Substantives  used  in  Plural 

with  a  special  sense  :  Heterologa. 

aedSs,  is, 

(em2)le  (better  aedis), 

aedes. 

house,  2mlace. 

aqua, 

water. 

aquae. 

mineral  sjnings. 

auxilium, 

help, 

auxilia, 

auxilianes,  reinforcements. 

career. 

j)rison. 

carceres, 

barriers. 

castrum, 

fori. 

castra, 

camp. 

csra, 

tvax. 

c5rae. 

waxen  tablets. 

comitium, 

place  of  assemblage. 

comitia. 

assemblage  for  voting. 

copia, 

abundance. 

copiae. 

forces,  troops. 

dSlicium, 

pleasure. 

deliciae, 

pet. 

facultas, 

capability. 

facultatgs. 

goods. 

finis. 

end,  limit. 

fings. 

territory,  borders. 

forttina, 

fortune. 

fortunae. 

2X)ssessions. 

habSna, 

strap. 

habenae. 

reins. 

imDedimentum, 

hindrance. 

impedimenta,  baggage. 

littera, 

letter  (of  the  alphabet),  litterae, 

ejnstle,  literature. 

ludus, 

game,  school. 

ludi. 

p^iblic  games. 

opera. 

work. 

operas. 

workmen. 

pars. 

part. 

partes. 

also  rde. 

rostrum, 

beak. 

rostra. 

the  tmbunal  at  Rome. 

sors. 

lot. 

sortgs. 

also  oracle. 

tabula. 

board,  iat^let. 

tabulae. 

also  accounts. 

vigilia, 

a  night-watch, 

vigiliae, 

inchets. 

2.  SUBSTANTIVES  DEFECTIVE  IN  CASE. 
70.  A.  Substantives  occurring  in  only  one  case  :  (Jen.  dici8,/wvw  ;  Ace.  InfitiSs 
(Ire),  (to)  lie ;  pessum  (Ire),  (to)  jwrish :  Abl.  pond5,  in  weight ;  sponte,  of  free  will ; 
tabs,  corruption  (Gen.  late) ;  and  many  verbals  in  ti,  as  accltti,  admonitti,  arcessltti, 
coactu,  compressu,  concgssu,  domitu,  inductu,  interpositH,  invitatti,  iussu 
(other  forms  late),  iniussii,  mandatti,  missti,  natu,  permissu,  promptu,  rogatu. 
A  few  others  occur  occasionally  in  ante-classical  and  post-classical  Latin. 

B.  Substantives  with  only  two  cases  :  fgs,  ne^,  Sing.  N.  Ac. ;  Instar,  Sing.  N.  Ac. ; 
interneciS,  Sing.  Ac.  Ab. ;  naucum,  Sing.  G.  Ac. ;  secus,  Sing.  N.  Ac. ;  spinter,  Sing. 
N.  Ac;  suppetiae,  Plur.  N.  Ac,  and  a  few  others.  Some  verbals  in  -ns  have  in  Plural 
only  Noni.  and  Ace,  a8  impetus,  monitOs.  Greek  neuters  in  -os  have  only  Nom.  and 
Ace.  Singular. 

C.  Substantives  with  three  cases  :  faez,  Sing.  N.,  D.,  Plur.  Ab. ;  virus,  slime  ;  Sing, 
N.,  G.,  Ab. 

D.  Defective  substantives  with  more  than  three  cases  are  numerous,  but  in  the 
classical  period  the  most  importimt  are  :  calx,  lime,  c5s,  [dapsl ,  dica,  { dicio] ,  flamen, 
blast,  forum,  [tiixl,  [indago],  later,  liix,  [ops],6s,/?wyw7//,  pax,  rgmex,  vis,  [vix], 
and  most  substantives  of  the  Fifth  Dccleusiou.  The  Noaiiaalivcs  in  brackets  do  not 
occur,  but  only  oblique  cases. 

E.  N6m8,  nobody,  substitutes  for  Gen.  and  Abl.  ntillius  hominis,  and  nW@ 
homine.    in  the  rat.  and  Ace.  it  is  normal ;  nSminI,  nfiminem. 


ADJECTIVES. 


37 


71. 


III.    Peculiarities. 


as,  assis  (m.),  a  ccrprper. 

auceps,  aucupis,  fmder. 

bos  (for  bovs),  bovis  (c),  ox,  cmo. 

G.  PI.  bourn. 

D.  Ab.  btibus,  bobus. 
caput,  capitis  (n.))  head. 
anceps,  ancipitis,  two-headed. 
TOraeceps,  -cipitis,  headlong. 
caro,carnis  {L),  flesh. 

PI.  G.  carnium. 
Cer6s,  Cereris,  Ceres. 
far,  farris  (n.)  spelt. 
fel,  felUs  (n.),  gall. 
femur,  femoris  (n.),  thigh. 
femiuis. 


iter,  itineris  Cn.),  way,  route 
iecur,  iecoris  (n.),  liver. 

iecinoris,  ieciueris,  iocineris. 
luppiter,  lovis. 
mel,  mollis  (n.),  Jioney. 
nix,  nivis  (f.),  enow. 
OS,  ossis  (n.),  bone  (48  r.). 
5s,  oris  (n.),  mouth. 
pollis,j)olliiiis  {m.\florir. 
sanguis,  sanguinis  (m.),  blood. 
senex,  senis,  old  man. 
supellgx,  supellectilis  (f .).  furniture. 
Venus,  Veneris,  Yenm. 


ADJECTIVES. 

72.  The  adjective  adds  a  quality  to  the  substantive.  Ad- 
jectives have  the  same  declension  as  substantives,  and  accord- 
ing to  the  stem-characteristic  are  of  the  First  and  Second,  or 
Third  Declension. 

Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second   Declension. 

73.  Stems  in  -o  for  masculine  and  neuter,  -a  for  feminine  ; 
nominative  in  -us,  -a,  -urn ;  (er),  -a,  -um.  The  same  variations 
in  termination  occur  as  in  the  substantives  ;  except  that 
adjectives  in  -ius  form  Singular  Genitive  and  Vocative  regu- 
larly.    See  33,  E.  i  and  2. 

Bonus,  bona,  bonum,  good. 


M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

Sg.— N.  bonus. 

bona. 

bonum. 

Pl.— boni. 

bonae. 

bona. 

G.  boni. 

bonae. 

bonl. 

bonorum, 

bonarum, 

bonorum. 

D.  bono, 

bonae. 

bonS. 

bonis. 

bonis. 

bonis. 

Ac.  bonum. 

bonam. 

bonum. 

bonos, 

bonas. 

bona. 

V.  bone. 

bona, 

bonum. 

boni. 

bonae. 

bona. 

Ab.  bonS, 

bona, 

bono. 

bonis. 

bonis, 

bonis. 

Miser,  misera,  miserum,  wretched. 


Sg.— N.  miser, 
G.   miseri 

D.   misero,     miserae,  misero. 
Ac.  miserum,  miseram,  miserum. 
V.  miser,      misera,    miserum. 
Ab.  misero,     misera,    misero. 


misera,     miserum.  Pl.— miseri,        miserae,      misera. 
miserae,  miseri.  miserorum,  miserarum,  miserorum, 

miseris,       miseris,       miseris. 

miseros,       miseras,       misera. 

miseri,        miserae,       misera. 

miseris,       miseris,       miseris. 


pigris, 

pigris, 

pigris. 

pigros, 

pigras, 

pigra. 

pigri, 

pigrae, 

pigra. 

pigris, 

pigris, 

pigris. 

38  ADJECTIVES. 

Piger,  pigra,  pigrum,  sloto. 

Sg.— N.  piger,  pigra,  pigrum.  Pl.— pigrI,  pigrae,        pigra. 

G.  pigri,  pigrae,  pigri.  pigrorum,   pigrarum,  pigrorunic 

D.   pigro,  pigrae,  pigro. 

Ac.  pigrum,  pigram,  pigrum. 

V.  piger,  pigra,  pigrum. 

Ab.  pigro,  pigra,  pigro. 

Remark. — For  irregularities  in  the  declension  of  ambS,  both,  duo, 
two,  see  95  ;  for  meus,  my,  see  100,  R.  i. 

74.  Stems  in  -ro  follow  tlie  same  principle  in  the  forma- 
tion of  the  Nominative  masculine  as  the  substantives,  except 
that  -us  is  retained  in  ferus,  ivild,  properus,  quivh,  praepro- 
perus,  praeposterus,  absurd,  inferus,  loiver  (infer  is  early), 
superus,  upper  (super  is  early),  and  a  few  others  in  late  Latin  ; 
also  when  -ro  is  preceded  by  a  long  vowel ;  as,  austerus, 
harsh,  maturus,  early,  procerus,  tall,  purus,  jmre,  severus, 
seriotts,  sincerus,  sincere,  serus,  late,  verus,  true. 

Remarks. — i.  Dextera,  dexterum,  etc.,  right,  are  found  side  by  side 
with  dextra,  dextrum,  etc.,  throughout  the  language  (see  8,  2).  Caesar 
uses  only  the  shorter  form. 

2.  A  few  adjectives  of  this  class  lack  the  Nom.  Sing,  wholly  or  in 
part  ;  so  there  is  no  cSterus  or  posterus  in  the  classical  period. 

75.  Notes  on  the  Cases.— 1.  The  Gen.  Sing,  in -I  from  adjectives  in -ius  occurs 
occasionally  in  inscriptions  and  in  late  authors.  The  Gen.  Sing.  fern,  in  early  Latin 
had  sometimes  ai,  and  in  inscriptions  occasionally  -aes  and  -es. 

2.  The  Dat.  Sing.  fem.  in  early  Latin  occasionally  ended  in  -al,  and  in  the  oldest 
inscriptions  in  -a, 

3.  In  early  inscriptions  the  -d  of  the  Abl.  is  occasionally  retained. 

4.  Very  rarely  in  early  inscriptions  does  the  Nom.  PI.  masc.  end  in  -eis,  and  in  one 
case  the  Nom.  PI.  fern  of  a  perfect  participle  ends  in  -ai. 

5.  In  poetry,  but  at  all  periods,  we  find  -um  alongside  of  -5rum  and  -grum  in  the 
Gen.  Plural. 

C.  In  the  Dat.  and  Abl.  PI.  -iJs  from  adjectives  in  -ius  is  often  contracted  to  is ; 
usually  in  names  of  months  and  ia  adjectives  formed  from  proper  names.  In  early 
inscriptions  -abus  is  found  occasionally  for  -Is  in  the  Dat.  and  Abl.  I'l.  feminine. 

76.  The  so-called  pronominal  adjectives  alter,  one  of  the 
two ;  alteruter  (a  combination  of  alter  and  uter),  either  of 
the  two ;  alius,  other ;  neuter,  7ieither ;  nuUus,  none;  solus, 
sole;_  totus,  tohoU  ;  uUus,  any  ;  unus,  one  ;  uter,  tvhicli  of  the 
two,  and  their  compounds,  show  the  following  variations  in 
declension  : 


ADJECTIVES.  39 

1.  They  usually  make  the  Gen.  Sing,  in  -lus  for  all  genders. 

Remarks. — i.  The  Gen.  alius  is  very  rare,  and  as  a  possessive  its 
place  is  usually  taken  by  alignus. 

2.  The  I  of  the  ending  -ius  (except  in  alius)  could  be  shortened  in 
poetry.  This  was  usually  the  case  with  alter,  and  regularly  in  the 
compounds  of  uter ;  as,  utriusque. 

Note. — The  regular  forms  are  early  and  rare  ;  in  classical  prose  only  nulli  (Cic. 
Rose.  Com.  i6,  48)  and  occasionally  aliae. 

2.  They  usually  make  the  Dat.  Sing,  in  -I. 

Note.— Regular  forms  are  Bometimes  found,  but  in  classical  prose  only  alterae, 
nuUo,  t5tO,  and  perhaps  t5tae.    All  is  found  in  early  Latin  for  alii. 

3.  In  the  compound  alteruter  we  find  usually  both  parts  declined  ; 
sometimes  the  second  only. 

4.  Alius  makes  Noni.  and  Ace.  Sing,  neuter  irregularly  :  aUud. 

Note.— Alis  and  alid,  for  alius  and  aliud,  are  early  and  rare  ;  the  latter,  however, 
occurs  several  times  in  Luck,  and  once  in  Catullus. 

Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension. 

77.  The  declension  of  the  adjectives  of  the  Third  Declen- 
sion follows  the  rules  given  for  the  substantives. 

Most  adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension  are  vowel  stems 
in  -1,  with  two  (rarely  three)  endings  in  the  Nominative. 

The  remaining  adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension  are  con- 
sonant stems  and  have  one  ending  only  in  the  Nominative. 

ADJECTIVES  OF   TWO   ENDINGS. 

78.  I.  These  have  (except  stems  in  -ri)  one  ending  in  the 
Nominative  for  masculine  and  feminine,  one  for  neuter. 

Most  stems  in  -1  form  the  masculine  and  feminine  alike, 
with  Nominative  in  s;  but  the  Nominative  neuter  weakens 
the  characteristic  i  into  e.     (Compare  mare,  sea.) 

2,  Several  stems  in  -i,  preceded  by  r  (cr,  tr,  br),  form  the 
Nominative  masculine,  not  by  affixing  s,  but  by  dropping  the 
i  and  inserting  short  e  before  the  r,  as,  stem  acri,  sharp, 
Nom.,  acer  (m.),  acris  (f.),  acre  (n.). 

These  adjectives  are  acer,  alacer,  campester,  celeber,  celer,  equester, 
paluster,  pedester,  puter,  saltiber,  Silvester,  terrester,  volucer,  and  the  last 
four  months  ;  and  are  sometimes  called  adjectives  of  three  endings. 

The  6  belongs  to  the  stem  in  celer,  celeris,  celere,  swifty  and  therefor© 
appears  in  all  cases. 


40 


ADJECTIVES. 


M.  and  F. 

N. 

M. 

P. 

N. 

Sq.— N. 

facilis,  easy. 

facile, 

acer,  sharp. 

acris, 

acre, 

G. 

facilis, 

facilis, 

acris, 

acris, 

acris. 

D. 

facili, 

facili, 

acri, 

acri, 

acri, 

Ac. 

fEtcilem, 

facHe, 

acrem. 

acrem. 

acre, 

V. 

faciUs, 

facile. 

acer. 

acris, 

acre. 

Ab. 

fadU. 

facili. 

acri. 

acrt 

acri. 

Pu— N. 

fafiilSs, 

facilia, 

acres, 

acres. 

acria. 

G. 

fEunliimi) 

facilium, 

acrinm, 

acrium, 

acrium, 

D. 

feciUbiis, 

facilibus, 

acribus. 

acribus. 

acribus, 

Ac. 

faciles  (is), 

facilia. 

acres  (is), 

acres  (is) 

,  acria, 

V. 

facilgs, 

facilia, 

acres, 

acrgs. 

acria, 

Ab. 

facilibiis. 

facilibus. 

acribus. 

acribus. 

acribus. 

Remark. — Stems  in  -ali  and  -ari  differ  from  the  substantival  declen- 
sion in  not  suffering  apocope  in  the  Nom.  Sing,  neuter,  except  occa- 
sionally capital.     See  56. 

79.  Remarks. — i.  Many  adjectives  of  two  endings  (except  stems 
in  -ri)  have  also  -e  in  the  Ablative.  This  is  found  chiefly  in  the  poets, 
very  rarely,  if  ever,  in  classical  prose,  occasionally  in  early  and  pre- 
Augustaii  prose,  and  more  often  in  inscriptions.  When,  however, 
these  adjectives  become  proper  names,  -e  is  the  i-ule.     See  57,  r.  2,  n. 

2.  The  Gen.  PI.  in  -um  is  found  occasionally  in  inscriptions,  fre- 
quently in  the  poets.  In  classical  prose  are  found  only  Titiensum  and 
familiarum. 

Notes.— 1 .  The  Nom.  PI.  has  in  early  Latin  not  nnfrequently  -is. 

2.  In  the  Ace.  PI.,  maec.  and  fern.,  of  adjectives,  the  ending  -is  (eis)  is  found  along- 
tjide  of  -Ss  in  every  period  of  the  language,  though  in  decreasing  proportion,  and  after 
the  Augustan  period  principally  in  ormpTi^, 


ADJECTIVES  OF   ONE   ENDING. 

80.  Adjective  stems  of  one  ending  (consonant  stems)  close 
with  1,  r,  s,  a  p  mute,  a  k  mute,  or  a  t  mute.    Examples  are  : 

vigil,  «^er<,  meinor,  mim^ul,  pauper, /ww,  cicur,  tame,  ptib6s,  adult,  veins,  dd, 
vigilis.        memaris.  pauperis.       cicuris.         puberis.         veteris. 


rarticeps,  sharing^ 
participis. 


caelebs,  "unmarried, 
caelibis. 


mops,  voor, 
iuopis. 


audax,  hold,        fSlIx,  htcky,        duplex,  doMe,        fsst^^Ly  fierce,       trux,  savage, 
audacis.  felicis.  duplicis.  ferocis.  trucis. 

dives,  rich,  dSses,  ^Mhfvl,  compos,  possessed  of,  pr1id6ns,  wise,  concoiis,  harmwiiom, 
divitia.      desidis.  compotis.  prfldentis.      concordis. 


ADJECTIVES. 


41 


Present  active  participles  are  ?.lso  consonant  stems  and 
follow  the  same  declension. 

81.  The  stem  varieties  are  : 

1.  Liquid  stems  in  (a)  -1:  vigil  (G.  vigil-is),  alert,  pervigil ;  (&)  -r:  par(G. 
par-is),  equal,  impar  (these  two  lengthen  the  vowel  in  the  Nom.),  compar,  and  three 
others ;  pauper  (G.  pauper-is),  poor,  uber ;  memor  (G.  memor-is),  mindful,  im- 
memor ;  concolor  (G.  -6r-is),  and  three  other  compounds  of  color ;  dggener  (G. 
-er-is),  from  genus  (G.  gener-is). 

2.  Sibilant  stems  in  («)  -s :  exos  (G.  exoss-is),  boneless  (Lucr.)  ;  {b)  -r :  gnarus 
(G.  gnarur-is ;  Plaut),  Ligus,  vetus ;  pubgs  (G.  puber-is),  impubgs. 

3.  Mute  stems  in  («)  a  K-mute  :  audax  (G.  audac-is),  bold,  and  four  others  ;  felix 
(G.  felic-is),  pernix,  atrSx  (G.  atroc-is),  ferox,  velox ;  exlex  (G.  -Igg-is) ;  trux 
(G.  truc-is),  redux ;  the  multiplicativcs  in  -plex  (G.  -plic-is),  as  simplex,  etc.  (b)  A 
p-mute :  inops  (G.  inop-is) ;  caelebs  (G.  caelib-is) ;  compounds  of  -ceps  (G.  -cip-is, 
from  capere),  as  particeps,  and  of  -ceps  (G.  -cipit-is,  from  caput),  as  anceps,  prae- 
ceps  (Plaut.  sometimes  uses,  in  the  Nom.,  ancipes,  praecipes,  etc.).  (c)  A  T-mute  : 
hebes  (G.  hebet-is)  and  three  others  ;  locuples  (G.  -pl6t-is)  and  three  others  ;  dives 
(G.  divit-is),  for  which  in  poetry  dis  (G.  dit-is),  sospes  ;  compos  (G.  compot-is), 
impos ;  superstes  (G.  -sti-tis),  ales ;  exhergs  (G.  6d-is)  ;  d6ses  (G.  desid-is), 
reses ;  compounds  from  substantives  :  consors  (G.  -sort-is),  exsors ;  concors,  dis- 
cors,  misericors,  sScors,  v5cors ;  expers  ((t.  -ert-is),  iners,  sollers ;  amgns  (G. 
ament-is),  dgmgns ;  intercus  (G.  cut-is) ;  pernox  (G.  -noct-is) ;  bipgs  (G.  -ped-is), 
quadrupgs,  alipgs  ;  adjectives  and  participles  in  -ans,  -ens  (G.  -ant-is,  -ent-is) ; 
and  proper  names  in  -as  (G.  at-is),  -IS  (G.  -It-is),  -ns  (G.  -nt-is),  -rs  (G.  -rt-is), 
Arpinas,  Samnis,  Veigns,  Gamers. 

82.  The  consonant  stems  have  the  same  forms  in  all  the 
genders,  except  that  in  the  Accusative  Singular,  and  in  the 
Nominative,  Accusative,  and  Vocative  Plural,  the  neuter  is 
distinguished  from  the  masculine  and  feminine. 

In  the  oblique  cases  they  follow  in  part  the  declension  of 
vowel  stems  ;  thus, 

1.  In  the  Ablative  Singular  they  have  i  and  e — when  used 
as  adjectives  commonly  i ;  when  used  as  substantives  com- 
monly e. 

The  participles,  as  such,  have  e  ;  but  used  as  substantives 
or  adjectives,  either  e  or  i,  with  tendency  to  I. 

2.  In  the  neuter  Plural  they  have  ia  ;  except  vetus,  old, 
which  has  Vetera.     Many  have  no  neuter. 

3.  In  the  Genitive  Plural  they  have  :  ium,  when  the  stem- 
characteristic  is  preceded  by  a  long  vowel  or  a  consonant ; 
um,  when  the  characteristic  is  preceded  by  a  short  vowel. 
The  participles  have  ium. 


42 

ADJECTIVES. 

M.  and  F.           N. 

M.  and  F.              N. 

M.  and  F.       N. 

So.- 

-N. 
G. 
D. 
Ac. 
Y. 

fSlix,^«c^?/,fSlIx, 
felicis,       felicis, 
felici,        fglici, 
fglicem,     felix, 
feUx,         fglix. 

prudgns,?f'i?(',  prudgns, 
prudentis,      prudentis, 
prMenti,        prtidenti, 
prudentem,    prudens, 
prudgns,         prudens. 

vetus,  old,  vetus, 
veteris,      veteris, 
veteri,       veteri, 
veterem,    vetus, 

vetus,        vetus. 

]\r.  and  F. 

N. 

M. and  F. 

N. 

-N. 

amans,  loving. 

amans, 

PL.-amantgs, 

amantia. 

G. 

amantis, 

amantis, 

amantium. 

amantium, 

D. 

amanti, 

amanti, 

amantibas. 

amantibus, 

Ac. 

amantem, 

amans, 

amantgs  (is), 

amantia. 

y. 

amans, 

amans. 

amantes. 

amantia, 

Ab. 

amante  (i). 

amante  (i). 

'     amantibus. 

amantibus. 

Ab.  fglici  (e)  felici  (e)    prudenti  (e)   prudenti  (e)  vetere  (i)    vetere  (i) 

Pl.— N.  fgliogs,  fglicia,      prudentes,     prudentia,     vetergs,      Vetera, 

G.  felicium,  fglicium,  prudentium,  prMentium,  veterum,   veterum, 

D.  fglicibus,  fglicibus,  prudentibus,  prudentibus,  veteribus,  veteribus, 

Ac.  fglicgs,  fglicia,      prudentgs,     prudentia,     vetergs,     vetera, 

V.  fglicgs,  fglicia,      prudentgs,     prudentia,     vetergs,     vetera, 

Ab.  fglicibus,  fglicibus.  prudentibus,  prudentibus.  veteribus,  veteribus. 


Sg. 


83.  Remark. — In  early  and  late  Latin,  and  at  all  periods  in  the 
poets,  -e  is  often  found  for  -i  in  the  Abl.  Singular.  In  classical  prose 
-"Ne.  find  regularly  compote,  dgside,  imptibere,  participe,  paupere,  pubere, 
euperstite,  v^ere,  and  frequently  divite  (but  always  diti),  quadrupede, 
sapiente.  With  participles,  -i  is  usual  when  they  are  nsed  as  adjectives, 
but  classical  prose  shows  -e  also  in  antecgdgns,  candSns,  consentigns, 
dgspicigns,  efflugns,  Mans,  immingns,  infiugns,  profluens,  consequgns  (but 
sequgns  not  before  Livy),  titubans,  vertgns. 

Notes. — 1.  In  the  Nom.  and  Ace.  PI.  -is  for§s  belongs  to  early  Latin  and  the  poets, 
but  a  few  cases  of  the  Ace.  are  still  found  in  CicEito.  In  the  case  of  participles  -is  is 
very  common,  and  is  the  rule  in  Vergil  and  Horace.  In  the  neuter,  -a  for  -ia  is 
found  only  in  ubera,  vetera ;  ditia  is  ahvays  used  for  the  unsyncopated  form 
divitia. 

2.  Compound  adjectives,  whose  primitives  had  -um  in  Gren.  PL,  have  usually  -um 
instead  of  -ium ;  quadrupes,  quadrupedum,  and  other  compounds  of  pgs  ;  inops, 
inopum ;  supplex,  supplicum.  Also,  cicur,  cicurum ;  vetus,  veterum ;  dives, 
divitum;  locuplgs,  locuplgtum  (rare,  usually  -ium).  In  the  poets  and  in  later 
writers,  -um  is  not  uufrequcntly  found  where  classical  prose  uses  -ium. 


Irregular  Adjectives. 
84.  A.  Abundantia. 

I.  Some  adjectives  which  end  in  -us,  -a,  -um,  in  the  classical  times, 
sliow  occasionally  in  early  Latin,  in  ilio  poets,  and  in  later  Latin,  forms 
in  -is,  -e,  e.  g.,  imbgcillus  and  imbgcillis;  infrgnus  and  Infrgnis;  biiugus 
and  biiugis ,  violentus  and  violgns ;  indecorus  and  indecoris ;  so  also 
perpetuus  and  perpes.  In  a  number  of  other  adjectives  the  variant 
iorms  are  very  rare  or  disputed. 


ADJECTIVES.  43 

2.  Many  adjectives  which  end  in  -is,  -e,  in  the  classical  times,  show 
parallel  forms  in  -us,  -a,  -um,  in  early  Latin,  and  more  rarely  in  late 
Latin.  Adjectives  in  -us,  -a,  -um,  in  early  Latin,  seem  to  have  had  a 
tendency  to  go  over  into  forms  in  -is,  -e.  Thus,  hilarus  is  the  regular 
form  in  early  Latin  ;  in  Cicero  it  is  used  side  by  side  with  hilaris, 
and  later  hilaris  is  universal.  Other  examples  in  the  classical  period 
are  inermis  and  inermus  ;  imberbis  and  imberbus ;  alaris  and  alarius ; 
auxiliaris  and  auxiliarius ;  intercalaris  and  intercalarius ;  talaris  and 
talarius. 

85.  B.  Defective. 

1.  Several  adjectives  lack  a  Nom.  Singular,  wholly  or  in  part  :  as, 
cetera  (f),  ceterum,  perperum  (u.),  nuperum  (n.),  primoris  (G.),  bimaris 
(G.),  bimatris  (G.),  tricorporis  (G.),  and  a  few  others. 

2.  Some  adjectives  are  defective  in  other  cases  :  thus,  exspes  and 
perdius,  -a  are  found  only  in  the  Nom. ;  exlgx  only  in  the  Noin.  and  Ace. 
(exlegem) ;  pernox  only  in  Nom.,  Abl.  (pernocte),  and  Nom.  PI.  (pernoctgs, 
rare)  ;  centimanus  has  only  the  Ace.  Sing.  (Hor.,  Ov.)  ;  also  unimanus 
(Liv.),  and  a  few  others. 

C.  Indeclinables. 

Ngquam  ;  potis,  and  pote  (early)  ;  frugl ;  macte  (mactus,  -um,  very 
rare)  ;  necesse,  necessum,  and  necessus  (early  and  poetical)  ;  volup  and 
volupe  (early)  ;  and  the  judicial  damnas. 

COMPARISON    OF   ADJECTIVES. 

86.  The  Degrees  of  Comparison  are  :  Positive,  Compara- 
tive, and  Superlative. 

The  Comparative  is  formed  by  adding  to  the  consonant 
stems  the  endings  -ior  for  the  masculine  and  feminine,  and 
-ius  for  the  neuter. 

The  Superlative  is  formed  by  adding  to  the  consonant 
stems  the  endings  -is-simus,  -a,  -um  (earlier  -is-sumus). 

Vowel  stems,  before  forming  the  Comparative  and  Super- 
lative, drop  their  characteristic  vowel. 


Positive. 

COMrAKATIVE. 

M.  and  F.              N. 

SUPEKLATIVE. 

altus,a,um,  high. 

altior,  higher,  altius, 

altissimus,  a,  um,  highest 

fortis,  e,        brave, 

fortior,            fortius, 

fortissimus. 

utilis,  e,        usefuU 

utilior,            utilius, 

titilissimus. 

audax,           bold, 

audacior,         audacius, 

audacissimus. 

prudgns,        wise. 

prudentior,     prudentius, 

prudentissimus. 

Note.— In  early  Latin  we  find  very  rarely  -iQs  for  ior ;  also  -ior  used  for  the  neuter 
as  well. 


44  ADJECTIVES. 

Peculiarities. 

87.  I.  Adjectives  in  -er  add  the  Superlative  ending  (-rumus)  -rimus 
(for  -simus  by  assimilation  ;  see  9,  i)  directly  to  the  Nominative  mascu- 
line.    The  Comparative  follows  the  rule. 

Positive.  Comparative.  Superlative. 

miser,  a,  um,         wretched,  miserior,  miserius,  miserrimus. 

celer,  is,  e,  sivift,  celerior,  celerius,  celerrimus. 

acer,  acris,  acre,  sharp,  acrior,  acrius,  acerrimus. 

Remarks. — i.  Dexter,  right,  and  sinister,  left,  have  always  dexterior 
and  sinisterior  in  the  Comparative.  Deterior,  worse,  deterrimus,  lacks  a 
Positive. 

2.  Vetus,  old,  has  Comp.  veterior  (archaic)  or  vetustior ;  Sup., 
veterrimus.  Matums,  ripe,  has  occasionally  Sup.  maturrimus  in  addi- 
tion to  the  normal  maturissimus. 

Note. — In  early  Latin  and  in  inscriptions  tliis  rule  is  occasionally  violated.  Thus 
celerissimus  in  Ennius  ;  integrissimus,  miserissimus,  in  inscriptions. 

2.  Some  Comparatives  in  -er-ior,  whose  Positive  is  lacking  or  rare, 
form  the  Superlative  either  in  -rgrans  by  metathesis  ;  or  in  -imus  or 
-umus  ;  or  in  both.  These  are  :  citerior,  on  this  side,  citimus  (rai-e)  ; 
exterior,  outer,  extrgmus,  extimus  (hitter  not  in  Cic.)  ;  dexterior  (87, 
I,  R.  I  ;  once  in  Cic.\  dextimus  (rare  ;  not  in  Cic.)  ;  inferior,  lower, 
infimns,  Imus ;  interior,  inner,  intimus ;  posterior,  hinder,  postr6mus, 
postumns ;  superior,  upper,  suprgmus,  summus. 

3.  Six  adjectives  in  -ilis  add  -limus  to  the  stem,  after  dropping  -i,  to 
form  the  Superlative  ;  perhaps  by  assimilation  :  facilis,  easy ;  diificilis, 
Aar(^;  similis,  like  ;  dissimilis,  unlike  ;  gracilis,  slerider,  and  humilis, /oz^. 

facilis,  Comp.  facilior.  Sup.  facillimus. 

4.  Adjectives  in  -dicus,  -ficus,  -volus,  borrow  the  Comparative  and 
Superlative  from  the  participial  forms  in  -dicens,  -ficgns,  and  -volens. 

t)enevolus,   benevolent,        Comp.  benevolentior.         Sup.  benevolentissimus. 
maledicus,  scwtrilom.  maledicentior,  maledicentissimus. 

magnificus,  distinguished.  magnificentior,  magnificentissimus. 

Note.— Benevolgns,  malevolgns,  maledlcSns,  still  occur  in  early  Latin. 

5.  In  like  manner  eggnus  and  prOvidus  form  their  Comparative  and 
Superlative. 

eggnus,       needy,  egentior,  egentissimus. 

prOvidus,  far-sighted,  prSvidentior,  prSvidentissimus. 


ADJECTIVES.  45 

6.  Adjectives  in  -ns  (os),  preceded  by  a  vowel  (except  those  in  -qnos), 
form  the  Comparative  and  Superlative  by  means  of  magis  and  maximg, 
more  and  most. 

id5neus,./?i^,  Comp.  magis  idSneus,  Sup.  maximS  idoneus. 

But 

antiques,  old,  Comp.  antiquior,  Sup.  antlquissimus. 

Remark. — But -pivis,  pious,  which  lacks  the  Comparative,  forms  the 
Superlative  regularly,  piissimus  (in  inscriptions  also  pientissimus) ;  like- 
wise in  late  Latin,  impius. 

Notes.— 1.  A  few  words,  chiefly  in  early  Latin,  show  the  normal  comparison.  In 
Cic.  only,  assiduissimS  (adv.)  and  alsius. 

2.  Comparison  by  means  of  plus  and  pljirimum  is  late. 

7.  Some  Comparatives  and  Superlatives  are  in  use,  whilst  the  cor- 
responding Positive  is  either  lacking  or  rare. 

So  deterior  (87,  i,  r.  1) ;  Ocior,  swif(,  Scissimus ;  potior,  better,  potissimus ; 
exterior,  outer  (87,  2),  from  exterus,  on  the  outside,  and  prep,  extra,  without; 
superior,  upper  (87,  2),  from  superus,  on  the  top,  and  prep,  supra,  atiorn ;  Inferior, 
loiver  (87,  2),  from  inferus,  below,  and  prep,  infra,  beloiv  ;  posterior,  hinder  (87,  2), 
from  posterns,  coming  after,  and  prep,  post,  after  ;  citerior,  on  this  side  (87,  2), 
from  citer,  and  prep,  cltra,  on  this  side. 

8.  The  Positive  stem  of  existing  Comparatives  is  sometimes  met  with 
only  in  a  preposition  or  an  adverb  ;  as,  ante,  before  ;  anterior,  that  is 
before  ;  prope,  near  ;  propior,  proximus ;  Ulterior,  further,  ultimus,  from 
ultra,  beyond  ;  interior,  inner,  intimus,  from  intra,  withiti ;  prior,  former, 
primus,  first,  from  pro,  before  ;  sequior  (late),  icorse,  from  secus. 

9.  Many  adjectives  lack  one  or  both  of  the  degrees  of  comparison  ; 
especially  those  denoting  material,  relationship,  time,  etc. 

NOVUS,  new,  falsus,  untrue,  meritUS,  deserved,  have  no  Comparative. 
Longinquos,  afar,  propinquos,  near,  saltitaris,  healthful,  iuvenis,  young  (Com- 
parative iunior),  and  senex,  old  (Comparative  senior),  have  no  Superlative. 
"  Youngest "  and  '•'■oldest "  are  expressed  by  minimus,  maximus  (natti). 

Note.— The  Plautine  and  late  medioximus,  middlemost,  lacks  Positive  and  Com- 
parative. 

10.  Dives,  rich,  shows  in  Cic.  only  divitior  and  divitissimus  ;  otherwise 
the  Comparative  and  Superlative  are  found  principally  in  poetry  and 
later  prose,  the  more  usual  forms  being  the  syncopated  ditior,  ditissimus. 

88.  Participles  used  as  adjectives  are  subject  also  to  the 
same  laws  of  comparison  :  as,  amans,  loving,  amantior, 
amantissimus ;  apertus,  ope7if  apertior,  apertissimus. 


46 


ADJECTIVES. 


89.  The  Superlative  follows  the  declension  of  adjectives 
of  Three  Endings  of  the  First  and  Second  Declensions.  The 
Comparative  is  declined  according  to  the  Third  Declension, 
thus  : 


M.  and  F. 

N. 

M. and  F. 

N. 

Sg.-N. 

altior, 

altius. 

PL.-altiorgs, 

altiora. 

G. 

altioris, 

altioris. 

altiorum, 

altiorum. 

D. 

altiori, 

altiori. 

altioribus, 

altioribus. 

Ac. 

altiorem, 

altius. 

altiorgs, 

altiora. 

V. 

altior, 

altius. 

altiorgs, 

altiora. 

Ab. 

altiore  and  -i, 

altiore  and  -i. 

altioribus, 

altioribus. 

Remarks. — i.  In  classical  prose  the  Abl.  Sing,  ends  in  -e.  In  the 
poets  and  in  early  and  late  prose,  often  in  -I. 

2.  Extremely  rare  is  the  ending  -is  for  -6s  in  the  Nom.  Plural.  In 
the  Aec.  PI.  this  ending  -is  (-eis)  is  more  common  but  still  not  fre- 
quent, and  confined  mainly  to  pluris,  minoris,  mai5ris,  melioris.  The 
neuter  in  -ia  is  found  rarely  in  compluria,  and  perhaps  once  in  pluria, 

3.  The  Gen.  PI.  in  -ium  is  found  in  plurium  and  complurium  only. 


90. 

bonus, 

malus, 

magnus, 

parvus, 

multus, 


nSquam, 

frugi  (iadecl.),  frugal. 


Irregular  Comparison. 


good, 

bad, 

great, 

small, 

much. 


melior, 
peior, 
maior, 
minor, 

plllres, 
complurSs, 
nSquior, 
frugaliox". 


melius, 

pSius, 

mains, 

minus, 

pliis  (no  Dat.  nor  Abl.), 

plura. 

complura  and  -ia. 

ngquius. 


optimus. 

pessimus. 

maximus. 

minimus. 

plurimus. 


nSquissimus. 
frugalissimus. 


ADVERBS. 

91.  Most  adverbs  are  either  oblique  cases  or  mutilated 
forms  of  oblique  cases  of  nominal  or  pronominal  stems. 

The  cases  from  which  they  are  derived  are  principally  the 
Accusative  and  the  Ablative. 

I.  (a)  From  the  Accusative  are  Substantival  Adverbs  in  -tim.  This 
was  a  favorite  formation,  nnd  is  used  very  often  in  all  periods.  In  the 
classical  times  the  adverbs  of  this  form  are  : 

Acervatim,  articulatim,  centuriatim,  certatim,  generatim,  gradatim, 
gregatim,  membratim,  paulatim,  privatim,  sSparatim,  singulatim,  statim, 
summatim,  viritim,  tributim,  strictim,  pedetemptim,  raptim,  furtim,  partim, 
praesertim,  confgstim,  and  a  tew  others  ;  disguised  forms  of  -tim  are  :  caesim,  in- 
clsim,  sensim,  cursim,  passim,  vicissim,  for  caed-tim  (9, 1-3),  etc..-  also  interim. 


ADVERBS.  47 

(b)  A  few  very  common  adverbs  are,  perhaps,  from  Accusative  Sin- 
gular feminine  of  adjectives  and  pronominal  stems.  Chiefly  clam, 
secretly,  coram,  i7i  one's  presence,  palam,  openly,  perperam,  wrongly,  tarn, 
so,  quam,  as,  aliquam,  some,  iam,  already ;  and  forms  in  -fariam,  as  bi- 
fariam,  multifariam,  etc. 

(c)  The  Accusative  Singular  neuter  of  many  adjectival  and  prono- 
minal stems  is  used  as  an  adverb.     This  is  true  of  all  Comparatives. 

Multum,  7nucli ;  paulum,  «  little;  nimium,  too  much ;  cgterum, /or  the 
rest ;  primum,  first ;  postremum,  finally ;  potissimum,  chiefiy ;  facile, 
easily ;  dulce,  sweetly;  triste,  sadly ;  impune,  scot-free;  aliquantum, 
somewhat,  and  others. 

To  the  Comparatives  belong  magis,  more  ;  nimis,  too  ;  satis,  enough. 

(d)  The  Accusative  Plural  feminine  is  found  in  alias,  at  other  times, 
perhaps  in  foras,  o^d-of-doors.  The  Accusative  Plural  neuter  is  found 
in  alia,  cetera,  omnia,  and  occasionally  in  reliqua  and  a  few  others. 

2.  {a)  From  the  Ablative  are  some  substantival  adverbs  ;  the  princi- 
pal ones  in  classical  Latin  being  domS,  at  home;  imgeniio,  greatly ; 
initio,  at  the  outset ;  modo,  only  ;  oppido,  very;  prlncipio,  in  the  begin- 
ning; -pTivsLto, privately  ;  wdgo,  commonly  ;  forte,  by  cha7ice  ;  msigno^re, 
greatly,  and  other  compounds  of  -opere  ;  gratiis,  for  nothing,  and  ingra- 
tils,  and  a  few  others. 

(b)  Ablatives  are  also  adverbs  in  5  from  adjectives  in  -us  and  -er : 
altus,  lofty,  alte ;  pulcher,  beautiful,  pulchrg ;  miser,  wretched,  miserg. 

Also  fer6  and  fermS  (Sup.),  almost. 

(c)  The  Ablative  of  some  adjectives  and  pronouns  serves  as  an 
adverb  : 

tuts,  safely;  falso,  falsely  ;  perpetuO,  ceaselessly  ;  continuO,  forthwith; 
improviso,  unexpectedly  ;  primS,  at  first ;  hSc,  here;  isto,  there,  etc. 

{d)  In  a  few  cases  the  adverbial  form  is  the  Abl.  Sing,  feminine  : 
alia,  otherwise;  2i\l(i\x&,  somehoiv ;  dextera  and  dextra,  ifo  the  right; 

sinistra  and   laeva,   to   the  lejt    liand ;     qua,    on   which    side;  rScta, 

straightway ,  and  some  others. 

{e)  A  large  number  of  these  adjectives  show  adverbs  in  two  end- 
ings, sometimes  with  a  difierence  in  meaning  : 

consultg  and  consults,  purposely ;  cert6,  at  least,  and  certo,  certainly 
(certs  scio,  /  certainly  know ;  certo  scio,  /  know  for  certaiti) ;  rare,  thinly, 
and  raxo,  seldom;  v5r6,  i7i  truth,  and  vSrS,  tr7ie  but ;  rSctS,  correctly,  and 
rScta,  straightway ;  dextera  or  dextra,  to  the  right ;  and  dexterS,  skill  fully. 

(/)  Ablatives  are  also  qui,  hoiv  (archaic),  nSquIquam,  to  no  purpose; 
alioqui,  otherwise ;  perhaps  also  diu,  by  day  and  its  compounds. 


48  ADVERBS. 

3.  Locative  in  origin  are  the  following,  in  addition  to  those  men- 
tioned under  37,  5  :  dig  (in  combination  with  numeral  adjectives  in 
early  Latin,  as  dig  septirai)  and  its  compounds  cottidie,  daily,  hodiS,  to- 
day, pridie,  the  day  before,  postridie,  the  day  after  ;  quotannis,  yearly ; 
fori3,  outside.  Also  many  forms  from  tlie  pronominal  stems,  ashic,  illic, 
istic  (isti  belongs  to  early  Latin  and  Veiig.);  sic,  so,  ut  (uti,  utei),  as; 
ill,  there,  and  its  compounds  alibi,  ibidem ;  ubi  (cubi),  ivhere,  and  its 
compounds. 

4.  A  number  of  adverbs  cannot  be  referred  to  a  definite  case,  as  : 
adverbs  of  separation  :  hinc,  hence,  illinc  (illim),  istinc  (istim),  thence; 
temporal  adverbs  :  tunc,  tJien,  cum,  when,  quondam,  once,  quando,  ivhen  ? 
and  its  compounds;  also,  ante,  before ;  post  (poste),  after;  paene,  almost ; 
prope,  propter,  near ;  saepe,  often  ;  circiter,  around;  praeter,  past ;  ergo, 
therefore;  eras,  to-morroiv  ;  baud  (hau, haut),  no^ ;  item,  likewise ;  susque 
dgque,  up  and  down;  vix,  scarcely. 

92.  I-  Adjectives  and  participles  of  the  Third  Declension  form  their 
adverbs  by  adding  -ter  (-iter)  to  the  stem  ;  stems  in  -nt  dropping  the  t, 
and  stems  in  a  k-mute  inserting  the  connecting  vowel  i  before  the  end- 
ing ;  also  a  few  adjectives  of  the  Second  Declension  : 
fortis,  brave,  fortiter ;  ferox,  loild,  ferociter ;  •grM.^n^^foi'eseeing,  prudenter. 

Exceptions  :  audax,  bold,  audac-ter  (seldom  audaciter) ;  difficilis,  hard 
to  do,  difficulter,  difficiliter  (but  generally,  non  facile,  vix,  aegrg),  and  others. 

2.  A  large  number  of  adjectives  of  the  Second  Declension  in  -us,  -a, 
-um,  and  -er,  -era,  -erum,  form  in  early  and  late  Latin  their  adverbs  by 
dropping  the  stem  vowel  and  adding  -iter  (those  in  -tus  added  -er 
only).  Many  of  these  occur  in  classical  Vvriters  alongside  of  the  normal 
form  in  -6 :  humaniter  and  htimang,  humanely ;  largiter  and  largg, 
lavishly ;  turbulenter  and  turbulentS,  riotously. 

3.  Some  adverbs  of  origin  arc  formed  from  substantival  or  adjectival 
stems  by  the  ending  -tu3.  In  classical  Latin  mainly  antiquitus,  fro?n 
early  time  ;  divinitus,  from  the  gods;  funditus,  from  the  foundation  ;  peni- 
tus,  from  the  depths;  radicitus,  from  the  roots  ;  also  intus,  from  within. 

4.  The  termination  -versus,  -vorsum,  is  used  to  show  direction  whither  ; 
but  in  classical  Latin  it  is  found  principally  in  the  adverbs  :  intrSrsus 
(intrOvorsus),  inwards;  prorsus  (-um),  onwards;  rursus  (-um,  rusum), 
hack ;  sursum  (susum),  np ;  vorsum,  towards. 

5.  A  very  large  number  of  adverbs  are  formed  by  adding  various 
other  terminations;  as,  -de:  inde,  thence,  unde,  ivhence ;  -detn: 
pridem,  long  ag ),  itidem,  liketvise,  etc.;  'do:  quando,  when,  etc.; 
'darn  :  quondam,  once  ;  -diini :  dudum,  a  while  ago  ;  vixdum,  hardly 
yet,  etc.;  'per :  nuper,  lately,  parumper,  a  little,  semper,  always,  etc.; 
'quani:  umquam,  ever,  numquam,  never,  etc.;  •secus:  extrinsecus, 
outside,  etc.;  -tenus:  quatenus,  how  far  ?  etc. 


NUMERALS. 


49 


6.  Syntactical  and  miscellaneous  :  admodum,  very  {to  a  degree),  denuo, 
anew,  imprimis;  super,  above,  and  its  compounds,  desuper,  insuper;  ex- 
templo,  at  once;  usque,  to,  and  its  compounds  ;  invicem,  in  turn  ;  adeo, 
so  ;  antea,  he  fore ;  interea,  meanwhile ;  postea,  after  ;  praeterea,  besides  ; 
propterea,  on  that  account,  and  a  few  otliers. 

COMPARISON     OF    ADVERBS. 

93.  The  Comparative  of  the  adverb  is  the  Accusative 
neuter  of  the  Comparative  of  the  adjective.  The  Superla- 
tive ends  in  -is-sime,  -er-rim6,  etc.,  according  to  the  Super- 
lative of  the  adjective. 


Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

alte, 

lofiUy, 

altius, 

altissimS. 

pulchrg, 

beautifully. 

pulchrius, 

pulcherrimS. 

misere, 

jworly. 

miserius, 

miserrimg. 

fortiter, 

bravely. 

fortius. 

fortissimg. 

audacter, 

boldly. 

audacius, 

audacissimg. 

tuto, 

safely. 

tutius. 

tutissimg. 

facile. 

easily, 

facilius. 

facillimg. 

bene, 

well. 

melius, 

optime. 

male, 

ill. 

pgius, 

pessiaig. 

[parvus], 

small. 

minus,  less. 

minimg,    least. 

[magnus] , 

great. 

magis,  more, 

maxim  g,  taost. 

multum. 

much. 

plus,      more. 

plurimum. 

cito. 

quickly. 

citius. 

citissimg. 

diu, 

long. 

diutius. 

dititissimg. 

saepe. 

often. 

saepius, 

saepissimg. 

nuper, 

recently. 

nuperrimg. 

J 

satis, 

enough. 

satius,    better. 

NUMERALS. 
NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES. 

94.  The  Cardinal  numerals  answer  the  question  quot, 
how  many  9  and  are  the  numbers  used  in  counting.  The 
Ordinal  numerals  are  derived  from  these  and  answer  the 
question  quotus,  ivldcli  one  in  the  scries  9  They  are  as  fol- 
lows : 


1.  Cardinal  Numbers. 

2.  Ordinal  Numbers. 

1 

I 

tinus,  una. 

unum 

primus,  -a,  -um  (prior) 

2 

II 

duo,  duae. 

duo 

secundus  (alter) 

3 

III 

trgs,  tria 

tertius 

4 

IV  (IIII)  quattuor 

quartus 

5 

V 

quinqne 

quintus 

6 

VI 

sex 

sextus 

7 

VII 

4 

septem 

Septimus 

50 


NUMERALS, 

1.  Cardinal  Numbers. 

2.  Ordinal  Numbers. 

8 

VIII 

octo 

octavus 

9 

IX 

novem 

nonus 

10 

X 

decern 

decimus 

11 

XI 

undecim 

undecimus 

12 

XII 

duodecim 

duodecimus 

13 

XIII 

tredecim 

tertius  decimus 

14 

XIV 

quattuordecim 

quartus  decimus 

15 

XV 

quindecim 

quintus  decimus 

IG 

XVI 

sedecim 

sextus  decimus 

17 

XVII 

septendecim 

Septimus  decimus 

18 

XVIII 

duodeviginti 

duodevicesimus 

19 

XIX 

Undeviginti 

undgvicesimus 

20 

XX 

viginti 

vicesimus 

21 

XXI 

vigintii  unus 

vicesimus  primus 

22 

XXII 

viginti  duo 

vicgsimus  secundus 

23 

XXIII 

viginti  tres 

vicesimus  tertius 

24 

XXIV 

viginti  quattuor 

vicesimus  quartus 

25 

XXV 

viginti  quinque 

vicesimus  quintus 

26 

XXVI 

viginti  sex 

vicgsimus  sextus 

27 

XXVII 

viginti  septem 

vicesimus  septimus 

28 

XXVIII 

duodetriginta 

duodgtricgsimus 

29 

XXIX 

undetrigin-a 

findgtricgsimus 

30 

XXX 

triginta 

tricesimus 

40 

XL 

quadrJginta 

quadraggsimus 

50 

L 

quinquJginta 

quinquaggsimus 

60 

LX 

sex/7ginta 

sexaggsimus 

70 

LXX 

septwaginta 

septuaggsimus 

80 

LXXX 

oct(>ginta 

octoggsimus 

90 

xc 

nonJginta 

nonagesimus 

100 

c 

centum 

centgsimus 

101 

CI 

centum  et  unus 

centgsimus  primus           [mus 

115 

cxv 

centum  et  quindecim 

centgsimus  (et)  quintus  deci- 

120 

cxx 

centum  et  viginti 

centesimus  vicesimus 

121 

CXXI 

centum  viginti  unus 

centgsimus  vicesimus  primus 

200 

CO 

ducenti,  -ae,  -a 

ducentesimus 

300 

ccc 

trecenti 

trecentgsimus 

400 

cccc 

qua,dr///genti 

quadringentgsimus 

500 

D(IO) 

qulngentl 

quingentgsimus 

600 

DC 

8('scenti 

sgscentgsimus 

700 

DCC 

8ept<?/gentl 

septingentgsimus 

800 

DCCC 

octi^fgentl 

octingentgsimus 

900 

DCCCC 

iimgentl 

nSngentgsimus 

1000 

M  (CIO) 

mllle 

mlllgsimus 

NUMERALS. 

51 

1.  Cardinal  Numbers. 

2.  Ordinal  Numbers. 

1001 

MI 

mllle  et  tinus 

mTllesimus  primus 

1101 

MCI 

mllle  centum  unus 

millesimus  centesimus  primus 

1120 

MCXX 

mille  centum  viginti 

millesimus    centgsimus  vice- 

[tinus 

1      simus             [simus  primus 

1121 

MCXXI 

mille  centum  viginti 

millgsimus    centesimus  vice- 

1200 

MCC 

mille  ducenti 

millesimus  ducentesimus 

2000 

MM 

duo  milia  (millia) 
bina  mIlia 

bis  millesimus 

2222 

duo  mTlia  ducenti  vi- 

bis millesimus  ducentSsimus 

ginti  duo 

vicesimus  secundus 

5000 

100 

quinque  milia 
quina  milia 

quinquies  millesimus 

10,000 

CCIOO 

decem  milia 
dena  milia 

deciSs  millgsimus 

21,000 

unum  et  viginti  milia 

semel  et  vicigs  millesimus 

100,000 

centum  milia 
centena  milia      [mflia 

centigs  millgsimus 

1,000,000 

decies  centena  (centum)  decies  centiSs  mTllesimus 

95.  The  Cardinal  numerals  are  indeclinable,  except :  tinus, 
one,  duo,  hco,  tres,  three,  the  hundreds  beginning  with 
ducenti,  two  hundred,  and  the  plural  milia,  thousands,  which 
forms  milium  and  milibus. 


M  and  F. 

N. 

N.      duo, 

two, 

duae, 

duo. 

trgs,  three, 

tria. 

G.      duomm, 

duanim, 

duorum. 

trium, 

trium. 

D.      duobus, 

duabus, 

duobus. 

tribus, 

tribus. 

A.      duos,  due 

duas, 

duo. 

trgs,  tris, 

tria. 

Ab.    duobus, 

duabus, 

duobus. 

tribus, 

tribus. 

Like  du6  is 

declined  ambo, 

-ae, 

-0,  hoth. 

Remarks. - 

-I. 

For  the  declension  of  unus  see 

76 

.     It  occurs 

also  in 

plural  forms  in  connection  with  pltiralia  tantum,  as  unis  litteris  (Cic. 
Att.,  V.  g.  2),  or  with  another  numeral  in  the  sense  only ;  in  the  latter 
sense  also  with  substantives. 

2.  The  Gen.  of  the  hundreds,  ducenti,  etc.,  ends  in  -umand  not-orum. 
This  must  be  distinguished  from  the  use  of  the  neuter  singular  in  -um 
as  a  collective,  as  argenti  sgscentum  (Luc),  a  six  Jumdred  of  silver. 

3.  The  PI.  milia,  milium,  milibus,  are  treated  almost  always  as  sub- 
stantives, the  adjectival  form  being  the  Singular. 

Notes.— 1.  The  form  oinos  for  tinus  is  for.nd  in  early  Latin.  A  Voc.  une  is  occa- 
sional (Cat.,  37,  17). 

2.  For  duae  late  Latin  shows  occasionally  duO,  and  in  Inscriptions  dua,  for  neuter 


52 


NUMERALS. 


duo,  is  sometimes  found.  The  Gen.  duum  (old  duom.)  for  duoruin  is  not  unfre- 
quent.  In  the  Dat.  and  Abl.,  duO  is  found  in  inscriptions,  and  for  ambobus  occasion- 
ally ambis.  in  the  Ace.  PI.  masc,  duo  and  ambo  for  duOS  and  ambos  are  quite  com- 
mon in  early  Latin,  and  also  in  classical  times,  but  the  better  forms  are  duos,  ambos. 

3.  Quattor  is  found  for  quattuor  occasionally  in  inscriptions,  and  in  early  poetry 
quattuor  was  sometimes  scanned  as  a  dissyllable. 

4.  In  inscriptions  the  forms  meilia.  and  millia  are  also  found. 

5.  In  regard  to  spelling  of  the  Ordinals  we  find  in  early  Latin  quinctus  as  well  as 
quintus ;  septumus  and  decuraus  regularly,  and  often  the  enuings  -ensimus  and 
-ensumus  in  ordinals  from  vicesimus  on. 

96.  1.    Compound    Numerals. 

1.  From  10  to  20,  as  in  the  tables,  or  separately  :  decern  et  tres. 

2.  The  numbers  18,  19,  28,  29,  etc.,  are  commonly  expressed  by 
subtraction  ;  occasionally,  as  in  English,  but  never  in  Cicero,  and  very 
rarely  in  other  classical  authors,  duodgcentum  is  not  found,  and  undg- 
centum  but  once  (Plin.  Mai.). 

3.  From  20  to  100,  the  compound  numerals  stand  in  the  same  order 
as  the  English  :  twenty-one,  viginti  unus ;  or,  one  and  twenty,  unus  et 
(atque)  viginti  ;  as,  twenty-one  years  old  :  ann5s  unum  et  viginti  (viginti 
finum),  unom  et  viginti  annos  natus.  But  compounds  like  septuaginta  et 
tr6s  are  not  uncommon,  though  avoided  by  good  writers. 

4.  From  100  on,  et  may  be  inserted  after  the  first  numeral,  if  there 
be  but  two  numbers  ;  as,  centum  quattuor,  or  centum  et  quattuor.  If 
the  smaller  number  precedes,  the  et  should  be  inserted ;  likewise  in  all 
cases  where  a  word  is  inserted  within  the  compound  numeral,  as 
ducenti  anni  et  viginti.  If  there  be  three  numerals,  the  et  is  regularly 
omitted  ;  exceptions  are  very  rare. 

5.  In  compound  ordinah^  alter  is  preferred  to  secundus. 

6.  CentSna  milia  is  often  omitted  after  the  numeral  adverb  deciSa 
=  1,000,000  ;  especially  in  stating  sums  of  money. 

7.  Fractions  are  expressed  by  pars  (omitted  or  expressed)  in  com- 
bination with  dimidia  (^),  tertia  (-J),  quarta  {^),  etc.  A  Plural  numera- 
tor is  expressed  by  a  Cardinal  ;  as,  duae  quintae  (|).  The  fraction  is 
often  broken  up  ;  as,  pars  dimidia  et  tertia  (^  =  |  +  §).  The  even  de- 
nominators could  be  divided  ;  as,  dimidia  tertia  (-i-  x  -^  =  ^).  Instead 
of  dimidia  without  pars,  dimidium  is  used. 

2.    Numeral    Signs. 

D  is  short  for  10,  M  for  CIO.  Adding  0  on  the  right  of  10  multiplies  by  10 ; 
100  -  5000  ;  1000  =  50,000.  Putting  C  before  as  oftcMi  as  O  stands  after  nniltiplies  the 
right-hand  number  by  2  ;  CIO  =  1000  ;  CCIOO  =  10,000  ;  CCCIOOO  =  100,000.  A  line 
above  multiplies  by  1000  ;  V  =  5000.  A  line  above  and  at  each  side  multiplies  by 
100,000_:  IxTlYl!  =1,400,000.  These  signs  may  be  combined  :  thus,  |xill|  XXXVIID 
or  IXIIll  XXXVII  MI)  =  1,337,500.  Pun.,  N.  II.  iv.,  12,  24.  Other  signs  are  d* »  L 
(inscr.)  for  50,  -^^  <x>,  Q  (inscr.)  for  1000,  and  (3)  for  100,000  (inscr.),  and  q  for 
500,000  (inscr.). 


N^UMERALS. 


53 


97. 


3.    Distributive   Numerals. 


1  singuli,  -ae,  -a,  owe  each.  30 

2  bini,  -ae,  -a,      two  each,  40 

3  terni  (trini)  50 

4  quaternl  60 

5  quini  70 

6  sSni  80 

7  septSni  90 

8  octoni  100 

9  novSni  102 

10  d6ni  125 

11  undeni  200 

12  duodeni  300 

13  terni  dSni  400 

14  quatemidgnl  500 

15  quini  d6ni  600 

16  s6ni  deni  700 

17  septeni  d6ni  800 

18  octoni  deni,  duodSvicenl  900 

19  noveni  d6ni,  undevicgnl  1000 

20  vicgni  2000 

21  vicSni  singuli  3000 

22  vicSni  bini,  bin!  et  vlc6nl  10,000 

28  duodgtricgni  100,000 

29  undgtriceni 


triceni 

quadraggni 

quinquaggni 


septuaggni 

octogeni 

nonagen! 

centeni 

centgni  bini 

centgni  vicgni  quini 

ducgni 

trecgni 

quadringgnl 

quinggni 

sexcgni  (sgscSni) 

septinggni 

octinggni 

n5nggnl 

singula  milia 

bina  milia 

trina  milia 

dgna  milia 

centgna  milia 


These  answer  the  question  quotgnl,  how  many  each  ? 


Remarks, — i.  The  Gen.  PI.  masc.  and  neuter  ends  usually  in  -um, 
except  that  singulus  has  always  singulorum,  and  Cicero  uses  binorum. 

2.  The  Distributives  are  used  with  an  exactness  which  is  foreign  to 
our  idiom,  whenever  repetition  is  involved,  as  in  the  multiplication 
table.     But  when  singuli  is  expressed,  the  Cardinal  may  be  used, 

3.  The  Distributives  are  used  with  pliiralia  tantum :  binae  litterae, 
hm  epistles.  But  with  these  tini  is  used  for  one,  trini  for  three  :  unae 
litterae,  trinae  litterae. 

4.  The  same  rules  as  to  the  insertion  or  omission  of  et  apply  to  the 
Distributives  as  to  the  Ordinals  (96,  1.  3,  4). 

Notes.— 1.  The  poets  and  later  prose  writers  occasionally  use  the  Distributives  for 
Cardinals,  with  words  other  than  pluralia  tantum  (n.  3)  ;  also  some  forms  of  the 
Singular.  Especially  noteworthy  is  the  combination  trinum  nundinum,  which  is 
technical,  and  therefore  found  also  in  model  prose. 

2.  Parallel  forms  not  found  in  classical  times  are  quadrini  (early,  late),  and  the 
late  du(o)centgni,  trecent6ni,  quadringenteni,  quingentgni,  ses(x)cent6ni, 
millgni^  etc. 


54 


NUMERALS. 


4.    Multiplicative  Numerals. 

Only  the  following  forms  occur  : 

1  simplex,            single,  5    quincuplex 

2  duplex,              double,  7    septemplex 

3  triplex,             triple,  10    decemplex 

4  quadruplex,      quadruple.  100    centuplex 
These  answer  the  question,  /toiv  many  fold  f 

5.    Proportional    Numerals. 

Only  the  following  forms  occur  : 

1  simplus,  -a,  -um,    single,  4    quadmplus 

2  duplus,                    double.  7    septuplus 

3  triplus  8    octuplus 
These  answer  the  question,  hoiv  many  tim£S  as  great  ? 


98. 


NUMERAL   ADVERBS. 


1 

semel,    once. 

22 

bis  et  vlci6s,  vici6s  et  bie, 

2 

bis,         twice. 

vicies  bis  * 

3 

ter 

30 

tricies 

4 

quater 

40 

quadragies 

5 

quinquigs    (-6ns) 

50 

quinquagigs 

C 

sexiSs          (-6ns) 

60 

sexagigs 

7 

septies        (-6ns) 

70 

septuagigs 

8 

octi53           (-6ns) 

80 

octogies 

D 

novigs          (-6ns) 

90 

n6nagi6s 

10 

decigs          (-6n8) 

100 

centies 

11 

undeciS3      (-6ns) 

200 

ducenti6s 

12 

duodecies,        etc. 

400 

quadringenti6s 

13 

ter  decies,  tredecigs 

500 

quingenties 

14 

quater  decies,  quattuordecigs 

600 

sexcentigs  (sgscenti6s) 

15 

qolnquigs  decies,  quindecigs 

700 

septingenties 

10 

sexigs  decigs,  sgdecigs 

800 

octingentigs 

17 

septigs  decigs 

900 

nongentigs 

18 

duodgvicigs,  octi6s  deci6s 

1,000 

millies 

19 

und5vici6s,  novi6s  deci6s 

2,000 

bis  milligs 

20 

vici63 

100,000 

centigs  mlUigs 

21 

semel  at  vlci6s,  vicies  et  semel, 

1,000,000 

mllligs  milligs,  deci6s  cem 

vicies  semel  - 

ti6s  mnii6s 

These  answer  the  question  quotiSns  (68) :  how  often  ? 

*  Not  semel  Vlci6s,  bis  Vlci6s,  etc.,  because  that  would  be,  once  twenty  times  =  30 
times  ;  twice  twenty  times  =  40  times  ;  this,  however,  does  not  hold  for  numerals  be- 
tween 10  and  20. 


PRONOUNS.  55 

Remarks. — i.  These  adverbs,  from  quinquies  on,  have  an  older  form 
in  -ens ;  quinquiens.  In  toti§ns,  so  often,  and  quotigns,  how  often,  this 
remained  the  more  usual  form  in  classical  times. 

2.  The  combination  of  an  adverb  with  a  distributive  adjective  was 
much  liked  by  the  Romans  :  as  bis  bina  for  quatema,  etc.  But  the 
normal  forms  are  not  unfrequent. 

Note. — For  the  adverbs  from  undeciSs  on,  examples  are  very  rare,  and  some  are 
cited  only  from  the  grammarians.  So,  when  two  forms  are  given,  one  is  often  due  to 
the  grammarians  ;  thus  quinquiBs  deciSs,  sexiBs  deciSs,  are  cited  only  from  Pris- 
ciAN.    The  order,  too,  of  compound  adverbs  varies. 

PRONOUNS, 

99.  Pronouns  point  out  without  describing. 

Note.— The  pronoun  is  not  a  word  used  instead  of  a  noun.  The  noun  says  too 
much,  for  all  nouns  (proper  as  well  as  common)  are  originally  descriptive  ;  the  pronoun 
simply  points  out.  The  noun  says  too  little,  because  it  cannot  express  person,  as  ego, 
/,  tu, 

A.    PERSONAL    PRONOUNS. 

100.  I.    Personal    Pronouns    of   the    First    Person. 

Possessive. 
Sg. 

meus,  -a,  -um,  mine  or  my. 


Substantive, 

-N. 

ego, 

/, 

G. 

mei, 

of  me. 

D. 

mihi, 

to,  fo7'  me^ 

Ac. 

me, 

me. 

Ab. 

me. 

from,  with,  by  me. 

-N. 

n5s, 

we. 

G. 

nostri, 

of  us. 

nostrum. 

D. 

nobis, 

to,  for  m. 

Ac. 

nos, 

us. 

Ab. 

nobis, 

from,  with,  by  us. 

G.       nostri,      of  us, 

noster,  nostra,  nostrum,  ovt  or  ours. 


Remarks. — i.  The  Voc.  Sing.  masc.  of  meus  is  mi,  except  when 
meus  is  used  with  a  substantive  which  does  not  change  its  form  in  the 
Voc. ;  thus,  meus  ocellus  (Plaut.  ;  possibly,  however,  appositional),  but 
mi  anime. 

2.  Nostrum  in  the  Gen.  PI.  is  the  form  for  the  Partitive  Genitive. 

Notes.— 1.  Early  Latin  shows  the  following  :  Sg.,  N.  ego  ;  G.  mis  ;  D.  mi,  mihel 
(inscr.) ;  mih6  (inscr.)  ;  Ac.  m6d,  meme;  Ab.  m6d  (meme  is  doubtful) ;  PL,  N.  Ac. 
6nos  (in  Carman  ArvcUe  only) ;  G.  nostrorum,  nostrarum  (for  nostrum) ;  D.  Ab. 
nobeis  (inscr.). 

2.  In  late  Latin  ml  also  serves  for  the  Voc.  Sing.  fern,  and  Voc.  PI.  masc.  Meum, 
nostrum,  in  the  Gen.  PI.  of  the  Possessives,  are  not  unfrequent  in  early  Latin. 

3.  The  forms  of  meus,  of  tui  and  tuOS,  of  sul  and  SUOS,  very  frequently  suffer  Syn- 
izesis  (727)  in  early  Latin. 

4.  On  the  combination  of  these  pronouns  with  -met  and  -pte  see  102,  N.  2,  8, 


56  PKOi^OUKS. 


101.     11.    Personal   Pronouns  of  the   Second   Person. 

Substantive.  Possessive. 

Sg.— N.  V.  tu,  thou, 

G.       tui,  of  thee, 

D.       tibi,         to,  fo)' thee,  tuns  (-os), -a, -mn  (-om),  ;!^y  or  iAine 

Ac.      t§,  thee, 

Ab.     t6,  from,  with,  by  thee. 

Pl.— N.        VOS,  ye  or  you, 

G-       vestri,     of  you, 

vestnun,  vester  (archaic  voster),  vestra,  vestmin, 

D.        vobis,        to,  for  you,  your  ox  yours. 

Ac.      VOS,  you, 

Ab.     vobis,       from,  with,  by  you. 

Notes.— 1.  Early  forms  are  :    G.  tis  ;  D.  tibei  (inscr.),  tib6  (inscr.)  ;  Ac.  Ab.  t5d, 
t6t§;  PI.  G.  vostri,  vostrSrum,  -arum. 

2.  Vestmni  is  for  the  Partitive  Genitive. 

3.  Tuom  and  vostrom  in  the  Gen.  PI.  of  the  Possessives  are  rare  and  confined  to 
early  Latin. 

4.  On  Synizesis  Bee  100,  N.  3.    On  combination  with  -met  or  -pte  see  102,  N.  2,  3. 


III.    Personal    Pronouns   of  the   Third    Person. 

102.  The  original  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person, 
together  with  its  possessive,  is  used  only  as  a  reflexive  in 
Latin,  and  therefore  lacks  a  Xominative.  Its  place  is  taken 
in  the  oblique  cases  by  the  Determinative  is  (103), 

DETERMINATIVE. 
Substantive.  Possessive. 

Sg.— N.      [is,  ea,  id],    he,  she,  it,  supplied  by  the  Genitive. 

G.       6ius,  of  him,  SivLB,  his,  hers,  its. 

etc. 

Pl.— N.     [el,  11, 1 ;  eae,  ea],  the?/, 

G.      eOrum,  earum,  eOrum,  of  them,  eSrum,  earum,  eSnun,  their  or  theirs. 

etc. 

REFLEXIVE. 
Sttbstantive.  Posresbite. 

So.-N.       

G.       sul,  of  him,  her,  itisdf),  gnus  (-08),  -a,  -tun  (-om),  hi$^ 

T).       sibi,  to,for,him{se{f),her{sey),  her{s),  its  {own). 

Ac.      se,  sSsS,    him{self),  her{se^f), 
Ab.     se,  S6s6,  from,  with,  by  him{seif). 


P1..-N. 


G.  sulj  of  them{selves),  8XIT1S  (-OS), -a,  -tUU  (-om),  ^A^/* 

D.  sibl,  to,  for  fhetn{selves),  {ow?i),  theirs. 

Ac.  s6, 8686,  themiselves), 

Ab.  86, 8686,  from,  with,  by  them(selvM\ 


PRONOUNS. 


57 


Notes.— 1.  Inscriptions  show  sibei.  The  use  of  sSs§  in  classical  prose  is  regulated 
mainly  by  artistic  reasons.     Suom  in  Gen.  PI.  from  SUUS  is  rare  and  early. 

2.  The  enclitic  -met  niay  be  added  to  ail  the  forms  of  ego  (except  nostrum),  to  all 
the  forms  of  til  (except  tu  and  vestrnm),  to  sibi,  S6,  and  some  forms  of  suus-; 
egomet,  /  myself.  Instead  of  ttimet,  ttite  is  found  ;  from  which  early  poets  formed 
occasionally  ttltemet,  tutimet.  Met  is  also  occasionally  appended  to  forms  Of  meus 
(early)  and  tUUS  (late). 

3.  The  enclitic  -pte  is  joined  very  rarely  to  forms  of  the  Personal  P*ronoun  (m§pte, 
Pl.,  Men.  1059) ;  more  often  to  the  Abl.  Sing,  of  the  Possessives  ;  it  is  especially  com- 
mon with  su5 ;  sudpte  ingenio,  hy  his  own  genius. 

4.  From  noster  and  vester  and  also  from  ctlius,  whose  f  are  formed  the  Gentile 
adjectives  of  one  ending  :  nostras,  of  our  country  ;  vestras,  of  your  country  ;  cuias, 
of  whose  country  ?    G.  nostratis,  vestratis,  ctiiatis. 


103. 


B.    DETERMINATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


I.  is. 

he, 

that 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N. 

is, 

ea, 

id, 

ii,  ei,  i 

eae. 

ea. 

G. 

eius, 

gius, 

eius, 

eorum. 

earum, 

eorum, 

D. 

ei. 

ei, 

ei. 

iis,  eis,  is. 

Ac. 

eum, 

earn, 

id. 

eos. 

eas. 

ea, 

Ab. 

e5, 

ea, 

eo. 

iis,  eis,  is. 

Note.— The  following  variations  in  the  forms  are  found  :  N.  it  for  id  (post-cl.) ; 
G.  eiius  (inscr.),  eiUS  (early  poetry)  ;  D.  eiel  (inscr.),  61,  el  (early  poetry),  eae 
(f .) ;  Ac.  em,  im  (early),  for  eum ;  Pl.  N.  eis,  eels,  ieis,  iel  (early  and  rare),  for  ei ; 
the  usual  classical  form  is  ii;  G.  eum  (inscr.)  for  eorum  ;  D.  eieis,  SelS,  ieiS  (inscr.), 
ibus  (early  poetry  and  rare) ;  the  usual  classical  form  is  iis.  The  early  forms  sum, 
sam,  SOS,  sas,  for  eum,  eam,  eos,  eas,  are  cited  by  Pestus.  Ace.  and  Abl.  Sing,  and 
Gen.  Pl.  often  suiler  Synizesis  in  early  poetry. 


N. 
G. 
I). 

Ac. 


2.  idem  (is  +  dem),  the  same. 
Singular.  Plural. 

idem,        eadem,      idem,       idem,  eidem,  iidem,  eaedem,      eadem, 
eiusdem,  eiusdem,  eiusdem,  eorundem,  earundem,  eorundem, 


eidem,       eidem,      eidem 
eundem,    eandem. 


Abl.  eodem,      eadem, 


idem, 
eodem. 


isdem,  eisdem,  iisdem, 
eosdem,  easdem,      eadem, 

isdem,  eisdem,  iisdem. 


Note. —Variations  in  form  :  N.  eidem,  isdem  (inscr.,  early)  for  Idem;  D,  Idem 
(inscr.)  for  eidem  ;  Pl.  N.  Idem  (more  usual  in  poetry),  eisdem,  Isdem  (inscr.); 
D.  Ab.  iisdem  (rare),  eisdem  (uncommon  in  classical  prose).    Synizesis  is  common. 


I 


3.  ipse 

(perhaps 

is  +  pse),  he 

,  self. 

SINGUX.AR. 

Plural. 

N. 

ipse. 

ipsa, 

ipsum, 

ipsi. 

ipsae. 

ipsa, 

G. 

ipsius. 

ipsius. 

ipsius. 

ipsorum. 

ipsarum, 

ipsorum, 

D. 

ipsi. 

ipsi. 

ipsi. 

ipsis. 

ipsis. 

ipsis, 

Ac. 

ipsum. 

ipsam. 

ipsum, 

ipsos. 

ipsas. 

ipsa, 

Ab. 

ips5, 

ipsa. 

ipso. 

ipsis, 

ipsis, 

ipsis. 

58 


PRONOUNS. 


Sg. 

-N. 

hic, 

haec, 

G. 

huius, 

huius, 

D. 

huic, 

huic, 

Ac. 

hunc, 

hanc, 

Notes.— 1.  In  the  earlier  time  the  first  part  of  ipse  wag  also  declined,  thus:  N. 
eapse ;  Ac.  eumpse,  eampse ;  Ab.  eopse,  eapse.    other  forms  are  doubtful. 

2.  For  ipse  the  form  ipsus  was  very  commonly  employed  in  early  Latin,  but  fades 
out  with  Terence,  and  later  is  only  sporadic. 

3.  Inflectional  variations  are  :  D.  ipso,  ipsae  (late) ;  PL  N.  ipsel  (inscr.).  The  few 
other  forms  are  uncertain.    IpsiUS  is  dissyllabic  twice  in  Terence. 

4.  Plautus  shows  ipsissimus  (comp.  Gr.  avTOTaro?),  and  in  late  Latin  ipsimus 
and  ipsima  are  found.    A  post-Ciceronian  colloquialism  was  isse,  issa. 

5.  Ipse  combines  with  -met :  ipsemet  and  ipsimet  (N.  Pi.),  both  rare. 

104.  C.    DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

I.    Demonstrative  Pronoun  for  the  First  Person. 

hIc,  this. 

hoc,       Pl. — hi,  hae,  haec,    these, 

huius,  horum,  harum,  horum, 

huic,  his,  his,  his, 

hoc,  hos,  has,  haec, 

Abl.  hoc,         hac,  hdc.  his,  his,  his. 

Notes.— 1.  The  full  forms  of  hIC  in  -ce  are  still  found  in  limited  numbers  in  early 
Latin  ;  G.  hOiusce  (in  the  phrase  huiusce  modi,  the  form  is  common  in  the  classical 
period  and  later)  ;  D.  hoice  (inscr.) ;  PI.  N.  helsce,  hisce  (not  uncommon) ;  G. 
h5runco  (rare) ;  D.,  Ab.  hISCe  (in  Plaut.  and  Teb.  usually  before  vowels);  Ac.  hosce, 
hasce  (not  uncommon  ;  occasionally  in  Cic). 

2.  Other  variations  in  form  are  :  G.  huiuS  and  huIus  (in  early  poetry  for  metrical 
reasons);  D.  hae  (rare  and  early);  Ac.  honc ;  PL  N.  hei,  heis  for  hi,  haec  for  hae  (in 
Plaut.  and  Ter.  regularly  before  vowels  or  h,  occasionally  before  consonants  ;  occa- 
sionally also  in  classical  times  and  later) ;  G.  horunc,  harunc  (early).  PL  N.  hiC 
for  hi  and  D.  Ab.  hlhus  for  his  are  doubtful. 

3.  Hie  combines  with  -ne.  Usually  -ne  was  appended  to  hice,  etc.,  and  the  e 
weakened  to  i.  Sometimes  -ne  is  added  directly  to  the  regular  forms.  The  examples 
are  frequent  in  early  Latin,  but  occur  also  in  Cic.  and  later  writers  :  hlcine,  haecine, 
hScine,  huicine,  huncine,  hancine,  h5cine,  hScine,  haecine  (N.  PL  fem.), 
haecine  (N.  PL  neut.),  hiscine,  hSscine,  hascine;  also  hicne,  haecne,  hocne, 
htiiusne,  huncne,  hancne,  hocne,  hacue,  haecne,  hosne,  hasne. 

II.    Demonstrative  Pronoun  for  the  Second  Person, 
iste,  that. 

Sg. — N.      iste,        ista,        istud,      Pl. — isti,  istae,        ista, 

G.      istlus,      istius,     istlus,  istorum,  istarum,  istdrum, 

D.      isti,         istI,         isti,  istis,  istis,         istis, 

Ac.     istum,     istam,     istud,  istds,  istas,        ista, 

Abl.  ist5,        istS,        istO.  istis,  istis,         istis. 

Notes.— L  The  Dat.  Sing,  shows  istS  in  late  and  istae  in  early  Latin. 

2.  Iste  combines  with  -ce.  In  a  very  few  cases  (three  times  in  early,  once  in  late 
Latin)  this  -ce  is  retained  unchanged,  but  usually  it  is  shortened  to  -c.  The  following 
forms  occur,  all  except  istuc  (more  common  than  istud  in  classical  Latin)  and  istaec 


PRONOUNS. 


59 


(neuter,  occasionally  in  Cic,  Ep.  and  later),  being  wholly  confined  to  early  and  late 
Latin.  N.  istic,  istaec,  istuc  (istoc,  once) ;  D.  istic ;  Ac,  istunc,  istanc ;  Ab. 
istOc,  istac.    Pi.  N.  istaec  (f.),  istaec  (n.). 

3.  In  a  few  cases  in  Plaut.  and  Ter.  -ne  is  appended  to  istice,  etc.,  the  preceding 
e  being  weakened  to  i  ;  istucine,  istocine,  istacine,  istoscin'. 

III.    Demonstrative  Pronoun  for  the  Third  Person. 

Sg.— N.     iUe,  ilia,  illud,      Pl. 

G.     illius,  illius,  illius, 

D.    illi,  illi,  iUl, 

Ac.  ilium,  illam,  illud, 

Ab.  illo,  ilia,  illo. 

Notes.— 1.  The  older  forms  from  stem  oUo-  occur  on  early  inscriptions,  in  laws,  and 
in  the  poets  (except  Plaut.  and  Ter.),  even  to  a  very  late  period,  as  follows  :  N.  oUus, 
-e  (early) ;  D.  oUi ;  PI.  N.  oUi,  oUa ;  G.  oUom,  oUarum  (early) ;  D.  oUeis,  oUis ; 
Ac.  olios  (early). 

2.  Inscriptions  show  illut  occasionally  for  illud.  Other  rare  forms  are  :  G.  illi 
(doubtful);  D.  illae  ;  PI.  N.  illei.    Illius  is  often  dissyllabic  in  early  Latin. 

3.  IUe  often  combines  with  -ce,  which  is,  however,  usually  shortened  to  -c : 
illiusce,  illace,  illoce,  illosce,  illasce,  illisce,an  in  early  Latin  ■,  shortened  forms  : 
N.  illic,  illaec,  illuc ;  D.  illic ;  Ac.  illunc,  illanc ;  Ab.  ill5c,  iliac ;  PI.  N. 
illaec  (f.),  illaec  (n.),  all  with  rare  exceptions  confined  to  Plautus  and  Terence. 

4.  A  few  cases  of  combination  with  -ne  :  illicine,  illancine  occur  in  Plautus  and 
Terence. 


-illi, 

illae, 

ilia, 

illorum, 

illarum. 

illSrum, 

iUis, 

illis. 

illis. 

illes. 

illas. 

ilia. 

illis, 

illis, 

illTs, 

105. 


D.    RELATIVE   PRONOUNS. 


Pl. — qui,  quae,  quae, 

quorum,  quarum,  quorum, 

quibus,  quibus,  quibus, 

quos,  quas,  quae, 

quiDus,  quibus,  quibus. 

quidquid,     quicquid,    whatever. 


Sg. — N.     qui,  quae,  quod, 

G.     cuius,  cuius,  cuius, 

D.     cui,  cui,  cui, 

Ac.  quem,  quam,  quod, 

Ab.  quo,  qua,  quo. 

General  Relatives  are  : 

Substantive,     quisquis,  whoever, 

Adjective.        (quiqui,         quaequae,       quodquod),  whosoever. 

quicunque,  quaecunque,    quodcunque,  whichever. 

Notes.— 1.  Archaic  and  legal  are  quis  and  quid  as  relatives. 

2.  The  prevalent  form  of  Gen.  on  inscriptions  of  the  Republican  period  and  in  early 
Latin  is  quoius  ;  quius,  cuiius,  and  other  variations  are  also  found.  Other  archaic 
forms  are  :  D.,  quoi.  D.  PL,  quels.  D.  Ab.  PL,  quis  is  common  in  the  poets  at  all 
periods ;  and  also  in  prose  wrilers  ;  but  not  cited  from  Caesar,  and  only  from  the 
letters  of  Cicero. 

3.  The  Abl.  Sing,  qui  foT  all  genders  is  the  prevalent  form  in  early  times,  and  in 
combination  with  cum  is  preferred  to  quo,  qua  by  Cicero. 

4.  Quisquis  is  occasionally  used  as  an  adjective,  but  not  in  classical  Latin.  Occa- 
sionally, also,  but  rarely  in  Cicero,  it  is  used  for  quisque,  quidque.  The  Nom.  Sing. 
of  the  adjective  quIquI,  etc.,  probably  does  not  occur.   In  the  other  cases  the  forms  are 


60  PRON^OUKS. 

the  same  as  those  of  qnisquis  and  can  be  distinguished  only  by  the  usage.  In  combi- 
nation with  modi  we  find  culcui  in  Gen.  sometimes  in  Cicero.  In  the  Plural  the 
only  form  found  is  quibusquibus.    (Liv.  xli.,  8, 10.) 

5.  In  quicumque  the  -cumque  is  often  separated  by  tmesis.  The  only  variations 
in  form  are  queiquomque,  quescumque  in  early  Latin,  and  occasionally  quiscumque 
for  quibuscumque  (several  times  in  Cicero). 


106.  E.    INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

Substantive.        quis  ?   who  ?  quid  ?      ivhat  ? 

Adjective.  qui  ?  quae "?        quod  \     which  9 

Subst.  and  Adj.  uter  ?  utra  ?        utrum  ?  ivho^  which  of  two  f 

Sg.  N.  quis  ?  quid "?  who  9  what  9  Possessive. 

G.  cuius  ?  cuius  ?  whose 9  cuius,  cuia,  cuium,  whose  9 

T>.  cui  ?  cui  ?  to,  for  whom  9 

Ac.  quern  ?  quid  ?  whom  9  what  9 

Ab.  quS  ?  quo  ?  from,  with,  by  whom  or  what  9 

The  plural  of  the  sitbstantive  interrogative  pronoun  and  both  num- 
bers of  the  adjective  interrogative  pronoun  coincide  with  the  forms  of 
the  relative  qui,  quae,  quod,  who,  which. 


Strengthened  Interrogatives. 

Substantive,  quisnami  who, pray?  quidnam?  what, pray? 

ecquis  1       is  (here  any  one  who  ?  ecquid  ? 

Adjective.      quinami  quaenaml  quodnam?  which, pray? 

ecquil  ecqual  (ecquae)?  ecquod? 

Remark. — In  the  poets  qui  is  sometimes  found  as  a  substantive 
for  quis  in  independent  sentences.  In  dependent  sentences  the  use 
always  fluctuates.  A  difference  in  meaning  can  hardly  be  made  other 
than  that  qui  is  generally  used  in  much  the  same  sense  as  qualis.  On 
the  other  hand,  quis  is  often  used  as  an  adjective  for  qui ;  usually,  how- 
ever, the  substantive  which  follows  is  best  looked  upon  as  in  apposi- 
tion. In  the  classical  period  qui  is  the  normal  form  for  the  adjective 
in  dependent  questions. 

Notes.— 1.  Inecriptions  show  here  and  there  quit  and  quot  for  quid  and  quod. 
Quid  is  sometimes  used  for  quod,  but  usually  in  the  phrase  quid  n5m.en  tibi  est  and 
only  in  early  Latin.  Sometimes  quae  seems  to  be  used  as  a  substantive,  but  another 
explanation  is  always  possible. 

2.  In  the  obli(iue  cases  the  same  variations  occur  as  in  the  oblique  cases  of  the  rela- 
tive.   The  Abl.  qui  means  haw  f 

3.  For  the  dcclerRion  of  uter  see  76. 

4.  The  possessive  cuius  (quOius),  -a,  -um  was  UBed  both  as  relative  and  as  interroga- 


PRONOUNS.  6l 


live.  It  is  frequent  in  Plaut.  and  Ter.,  but  rare  in  other  authors.  Besides  the  Nom. 
the  only  forntis  found  are  Ac.  quoium,  qudiam ;  Ab.  quoia ;  PI.  N.  quoiae,  and, 
perhaps,  G.  PI.  quoium. 

5.  Quisnam  is  sometimes  used  as  an  adjective  for  qulnam  and  quinam  occasion- 
ally for  quisnam  as  a  substantive.  The  -nam  may  be  separated  by  tmesis.  Ecquis 
and  ecqui  are  not  common,  and  are  subject  to  the  same  fluctuations  as  quis  and  qui. 
Ecquis  combines  with  -nam  to  form  ecquisnam  and  a  few  other  occasional  forms, 
as  :  ecquaenam,  ecquidnam,  ecquodnam,  ecquonam,  ecquosnam. 


107.  F.     INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 

I.  Substantive,     aliquis,  aliqna  (rare),  aliquid,  \  somebody,  some  one 

quis,  qua,  quid,  f     or  otlier. 

Adjective.         aliqui,  aliqua,  aliquod,  \ 

qui,  quae,  qua,  quod,  )  ^ 

Remark. — The  common  rule  is  that  quis  and  qui  occur  properly  only 
after  si,  nisi,  n6,  num,  or  after  a  relative  ;  otherwise  aliquis,  aliqui. 

Notes.— 1.  Aliquis  and  qnis  are  not  unfrequently  used  as  adjectives  instead  of 
aliqui,  qui,  but  rarely  in  early  Latin.  Occasionally  (not  in  early  Lathi)  aliqui  is  used 
as  a  substantive.    Qui  is  also  so  used,  but  only  after  si,  sin,  sive,  n6. 

The  use  of  quid  and  aliquid  for  quod  and  aliquod,  and  of  aliquod  for  aliquid, 
is  very  rare  and  late. 

2.  Besides  the  variations  in  form  mentioned  under  the  relative  and  interrogative,  the 
indefinitive  quis  shows  qu§S  as  an  early  form  for  qui  (N.  PI.),  and  in  PI.  Nom.  Ace. 
neut,  quae  and  qua  in  etpially  good  usage.  Aliqxds  shows  in  Abl,  Sing,  aliqui  (rare 
and  early),  in  the  PI.  Nom.  Ace.  neut.  always  aliqua,  and  not  unfrequently  in  post- 
classical  Latin  aliquis  for  aliquibus. 

2.  quidam,  quaedam,  quiddam  (and  quoddam),  a  certain,  certain  one. 

Remark. — Quidam,  quaedam  occur  both  as  substantives  and  adjec- 
tives, but  quiddam  is  always  substantive,  quoddam  always  adjective. 
The  Plural  is  rare  in  early  Latin  (never  in  Plautus). 

3.  quispiam,  quaepiam,  quidpiam  (and  quodpiam),  some  one,  some. 
quisquam, ,  quicquam,  any  one  (at  all).     No  plural. 

Notes.— 1.  quispiam,  quaepiam  are  rare  as  adjectives.  In  the  neuter,  quippiam 
and  quoppiam  occur  rarely.  The  comic  poets  do  not  use  the  Plural,  and  it  is  rare 
elsewhere. 

2.  Quisquam  is  seldom  used  as  an  adjective,  except  with  designations  of  persons  ; 
scriptor  quisquam,  anj/  writer  (at  all),  Gallus  quisquam,  any  Gaul  (at  all).  The 
corresponding  adjective  is  uUus.  The  use  of  quisquam  as  a  feminine  is  only  in  early 
Latin.  Quidquam  is  a  poor  spelling  for  quicquam.  In  Abl.  Sing,  quiquam  occurs 
occasionally.  In  Sing.  Gen.  Dat.  Ace.  frequently,  and  in  Plural  always,  forms  of  ullus 
were  used. 


62  CORRELATIVES. 

4.  quivis,     quaevis,     quidvis     (and  quodvis),     ]  any  one  you  please, 
quilibet,  quaelibet,  quidlibet  (and  quodlibet),  f     you  like. 

Note.— QuIvis,  quaevis,  quilibet  (archaic  -lubet),  quaelibet  may  be  used  either 
as  gubstantives  or  adjectives,  but  quidviS,  quidlibet  are  substantives  only,  quodviS, 
quodlibet  are  adjectives  only.  Peculiar  forms  of  quiviS  are  G.  quoivis  in  quoivis- 
modi  (Plaut.)  ;  D.,  quovis  (late) ;  Ab.,  quivis  (Plaut.,  Ter.),  and  the  compounds 
cuiusviscumque  (Lucr.  hi.,  388)  and  quoviscumque  (Mart,  xiv.,  2, 1).  Quilibet 
may  be  separated  by  tmesis  into  qui  and  libet  (Sall.,  Cat.  5,  4). 

5.  quisque,  quaeque,  quidque  and  quodque,  each  one, 
unusquisque,  unaquaeque,  tinumquidque  and  unumquodque,  each  one 

severally. 

Note.— Quisque  occurs  occasionally  in  early  Latin  as  a  feminine,  and  with  its  forms 
is  not  unfrequenlly  found  in  early  and  late  Latin  for  quisquis,  or  quicumque.  Quid- 
que is  substantive,  quodque  adjective.  In  the  Abl.  Sing,  quique  occurs  occasionally. 
The  Plural  is  regular,  but  rare  until  post-classical  times.  In  Norn.  PI.  quaeque  is  either 
fem.  or  neuter. 

108.  The  declension  of  the  pronominal  adjectives  has  been 
given  in  76.     They  are  : 

tillus,  -a,  -um,  any  ;  nullus,  -a,  -um,  no  one,  not  one.  The  correspond- 
ing substantives  are  ngmS  (76)  and  nihil,  the  latter  of  which  forms 
only  nihili  (Gen.)  and  nibilo  (AbL),  and  those  only  in  certain  combina- 
tions. 

n5nnullus,  -a,  -um,  some,  many  a,  dechned  like  nullus. 

alius,  -a,  -ud,  another;  the  Possessive  of  alius  is  aliSnus. 

alter,  -era,  -erum,  the  other,  one  {of  two). 

neuter,  neutra,  neutrum,  neither  of  two. 

alteruter,  alterutra,  alterutrum,  the  one  or  the  other  of  the  two. 

uterque,  utraque,  utrumque,  each  of  two,  either,     ambo,  -ae,  -5,  both. 

utervis,    utravis,    utrumvis,      )     j,  •  7,  ,  ^  ±t.    i 

,.^'      ^    ,.,'       ^       ,,,'      \  whichever  you  please  of  the  two. 
uterlibet,  utralibet,  utrumlibet,  \  i>      jr  j 


CORRELATIVES. 
109.    I.    CORRELATIVE   PRONOMINAL  ADJECTIVES. 


INTERROGATIVES. 

Dejionstratives. 

Relatives. 

quis  %        who  9 

is,             that. 

qui,           who. 

quaUs?     of  what 

talis,       such  (of  that 

qualis,      as  {of  which 

kind  9 

kind),. 

kind). 

quantuBl  how  much  ? 

tantus,    80  much. 

quantus,  as  much. 

quot  1       how  many  f 

tot,         so  many. 

quot,        as  many. 

CORRELATIVES. 


63 


110.      II.    CORRELATIVE   PRONOMINAL  ADVERBS. 


I.  Pronominal  adverbs  of  7j/«<?e. 


ub!? 
qaa? 


unde? 


quo? 


istiic,  (istoc,)  thither. 

illuc,  (illoc,)    thither,  yonder. 

2.  Pronominal  adverbs  of  ti7ne. 

quand0 1    when  ?         turn,  then. 

tunc,  at  that  time 

nunc,  now. 

quotiSns  1  how  often  9  totigns,  so  often. 

-i.  Pronominal  adverbs  of  manner. 


where  ? 

ibi, 

there.                 ubi. 

where. 

where, 

hic,  hac. 

here,  this  way.  qua. 

where,  which 

which  way 

9 

way. 

istic,  istac, 

there,  that  way. 

illic,  iliac. 

there,  yonder  ivay. 

whence  9 

inde, 

thence.                unde, 

ivhence. 

hinc, 

hence. 

istinc. 

thence. 

illinc. 

thence,  from  yonder. 

whither  9 

eS, 

thither.               qu6, 

whither. 

hue,  (hoc,) 

hither. 

quQmodo  ?  qui  ?  how  9 


quam! 


how  much  9 


ita,  sic, 
tarn, 


so,  thus, 
so  much. 


quandO,  when. 
quom,  cum. 

quotigns,  as  often  as. 


ut,  uti,  as. 
quam,     as. 


111.    III.    COMPOUNDS  OF  THE   RELATIVE    FORMS. 

1.  The  relative  pronouns  become  indefinite  by  prefixing 
all-: 

aliquantus,  someivhat  great;  aliquot,  several,  some;  alicubi,  some- 
where ;  alicunde,  from  somewhere  ;  aliquandS,  at  some  time. 

2.  The  simple  relatives  become  universal  by  doubling 
themselves,  or  by  suffixing  -cunque  (-cumque),  sometimes  -que : 

quantuscunque,  however  great  ;  qualiscunque,  of  whatever  Jcind;  quot- 
quot,  however  maiiy  ;  ubicunque,  wheresoever ;  quandocunque,  quandSque, 
whenever  ;  quotiSscunque,  however  often  ;  utut,  in  whatever  way  ;  utcun- 
que,  howsoever  ;  quamquam,  however,  although. 

3.  Many  of  the  relatives  are  further  compounded  with  -vis 
or  -libet : 

quantuslibet,  quantusvis,  as  great  as  you  please ;  ubivis,  where  you 
will ;  quamvis,  as  you  please,  though. 


64  THE    VERB. 


THE  VERB. 

112.  The  inflection  given  to  the  verbal  stem  is  called  Con- 
jugation, and  expresses  : 

1 .  Person  and  Number  ; 

2.  Voice — Active  or  Passive. 

The  Active  Voice  denotes  that  the  action  proceeds  from  the 
subject  :  amo,  /  love. 

The  Passive  Voice  denotes  that  the  subject  receives  the 
action  of  the  Verb  :  amor,  /  am  loved. 

3.  Tense — Present,  Imperfect,  Future, 

Perfect,  Pluperfect,  Future  Perfect. 

The  Present,  amo,  /  love  ;  Future,  amabo,  /  shall  love ; 
Pure  Perfect,  amavi,  /  have  loved  ;  Future  Perfect,  amavero, 
I  shall  have  loved,  are  called  Principal  Tenses. 

The  Imperfect,  amabam,  /  was  loving  ;  Historical  Perfect, 
amavl,  /  loved  ;  Pluperfect,  amaveram,  /  had  loved,  are  called 
Historical  Tenses. 

Remark. — The  Pure  and  Historical  Perfects  are  identical  in  form. 

4.  Mood — Indicative,  Subjunctive,  Imperative. 

The  Indicative  Mood  is  the  mood  of  the,  fact :  amo,  Hove. 

The  Subjunctive  Mood  is  the  mood  of  the  idea :  amem, 
may  I  love,  I  may  love  ;  amet,  may  he  love,  he  may  love  ;  si 
amet,  if  he  should  love. 

The  Imperative  Mood  is  the  mood  of  command :  ama,  love 
thou  ! 

For  further  distinctions  see  Syntax. 

5.  These  forms  belong  to  the  Finite  Verb.  Outside  of  the 
Finite  Verb,  and  akin  to  the  noun,  are  the  vei'bal  forms  called 

Infinitive,  Supine,  Participle,  Gerund. 

The  Infinitive  active  and  the  Supine  are  related  to  the  noun,  the 
former  being  originally  a  Dative  or  Locative  and  the  Supine  showing 
two  cases.  Accusative  and  Ablative. 

No  adequate  uniform  translation  can  be  given,  but  for  the  general 
meaning  see  paradigms. 

113.  A  large  number  of  Verbs  have  the  passive  form  but 


Active. 

Sg.- 

—I. 

-m  (or  a  vowel,    coalescing  with 
the  characteristic  ending) ;  Pf .  i, 

-r. 

2. 

-s;  Pf.  -s-ti;  Impv.  -t5(d)  or  want- 
ing, 

-ris  or 

3- 

-t ;  Impv.  t5(d), 

-tur ; 

Pl. 

— I. 

-mus, 

-mur. 

2. 

-tis ;  Pf.  -s-tis- ;  Impv.  -te  or  -t5te, 

•mini. 

THE   YERB.  65 

are  active  in  meaning  :  hortor,  /  exhort.     These  are  called 
deponent  (from  deponere,  to  lay  aside). 

114.  The  Inflection  of  the  Finite  Verb  is  effected  by  the 
addition  of  personal  endings  to  the  verb  stems. 

I.  The  personal  endings  are  mostly  pronominal  forms,  which  serve 
to  indicate  not  only  person,  but  also  number  and  voice.    They  are  : 

Passive. 


ris  or  -re ;  Impv.  -re  or  -tor. 
Impv.  -tor. 


3.  -nt ;  Pf.  Srunt  or  6re ;  Impv.  -nto(d),     -ntur ;  Impv.  -ntor. 

2.  The  personal  endings  are  added  directly  to  the  stem  in  the  Pres- 
ent Indicative  and  Imperative  only,  except  in  the  third  conjugation,  in 
some  forms  of  the  Future  Indicative.  In  the  other  tenses  certain 
modifications  occur  in  the  stem,  or  tense  signs  are  employed  : 

(«)  In  the  Present  Subjunctive  final  a  of  the  stem  is  changed  toS(e)  ; 
final  g  to  ea  (ea) ;  final  I  to  ia  (ia) ;  final  e  to  a  (a).  In  the  Future  In- 
dicative final  e  is  changed  to  a  or  3  (e) ;  final  i  to  ia  (ie,  ie). 

(6)  The  tense  signs  are  :  for  the  Imperfect  Indicative,  ba  (ba) ;  for 
the  Imperfect  Subjunctive,  rg  (re) ;  for  the  Future  Indicative  in  a  and  S 
verbs  b!  (b,  bu);  for  the  Perfect  Indicative,  I  (i);  for  the  Perfect  Sub- 
junctive, -eri ;  for  the  Pluperfect  Indicative,  era  (era) ;  for  the  Pluper- 
fect Subjunctive,  issS  (isse) ;  for  the  Future  Perfect  Indicative,  er!  (er). 

3.  The  stem  itself  is  variously  modified  ;  either  by  change  of  vowel 
or  by  addition  of  suffixes,  and  appears  in  the  following  forms  : 

(a)  The  Present  stem ;  being  the  stem  of  the  Present,  Imperfect,  and 
Future  tenses.     These  forms  are  called  the  Present  System. 

(b)  The  Perfect  stem ;  being  the  stem  of  the  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and 
Future  Perfect  tenses.     These  forms  are  called  the  Perfect  System. 

(c)  The  Supine*  stem ;  being  the  stem  of  the  Future  Active  and  Per- 
fect Passive  Participles  and  of  the  Supine.  These  forms  are  called  the 
Supine  System. 

Note.— For  details  as  to  the  formation  of  these  stems,  see  132  ff. 

*  This  designation  is  retained  because  it  is  an  established  terminus  technicm  ;  as  a 
matter  of  fact  the  Supine  stem  is  not  the  stem  of  the  Participles. 


66 


THE    VERB. 


115.  1-  The  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  find  Future  Perfect  tenses  in  the 
Passive  are  formed  by  the  combination  of  the  Perfect  Passive  Parti- 
ciple with  forms  of  the  verb  sum,  /  am. 

2.  The  Future  Passive  Infinitive  is  formed  by  the  combination  of 
the  Supine  with  the  Present  Passive  Infinitive  of  eo,  I  go. 

3.  The  infinite  parts  of  the  verb  are  formed  by  the  addition  of  the 
following  endings  to  the  stems  : 


Active. 
Infinitive.      Pr.     -re, 

Pf.     -isse, 

Fut.  -turum  (-am,  -um)  esse, 
Participles.    Pr.     -ns  (G.  -ntis), 

Pf.     

Fut.  -turus  (-a,  -um). 

Gerund.  Gerundive. 

-ndi  (-do,  -dum,  -do).  -ndus  (-a,  -um). 


Passive. 

ri,i. 

-turn  (-tarn,  -turn)  esse. 

-tum  iri. 

-tus  (-ta,  -tum). 

Supine. 
-tum  ;  -tu. 


116. 


The  Verb  sum,  I  cmi. 
(Pres.  stem  es-,  Perf.  stem  fu-) 


INDICATIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

Sg.- 

— I. 

sum, 

/  am, 

sim. 

I  be, 

2. 

es, 

thou  art, 

sis. 

thou  be, 

3. 

est. 

he,  she,  it  is 

sit. 

he,  she,  it  be. 

Pl.- 

—I. 

sumus, 

we  are, 

simus. 

ive  be. 

2. 

estis. 

you  are, 

sitis. 

you  be, 

3. 

sunt, 

they  are. 

sint. 

they  be. 

Imperfect. 

Sg.- 

—I. 

eram. 

I  was. 

essem. 

I  were 

(forem). 

2. 

eras, 

thou  wast, 

essSs, 

thou  wert 

(forgs), 

3. 

erat. 

he  was. 

esset, 

he  were 

(foret). 

Pl.- 

—I. 

eramus. 

tve  ivere, 

essgmus. 

we  were. 

2. 

eratis. 

you  were. 

essetis. 

you  were, 

3. 

erant. 

they  ivere, 

essent. 

they  were 

(forent). 

Sg.- 

—I. 

2. 

3. 

erO, 
eris, 
erit, 

I  shall  be, 
thou  u'ilt  be, 
he  will  be. 

Future. 

Pl.- 

2. 
3- 

erimus, 

eritis, 

erunt, 

we  shall  be, 
you  will  be, 
they  will  be. 

THE   VERB. 


67 


Perfect. 

Sg. — I.  fai,         I   have  been,   I       fuerim,  I  have,  may  have,  been, 
was, 

2.  fuisti,      thou  hast  beeir,        fuerls,  thou  have,  may  est  have, 

thou  wast,  been, 

3.  fuit,        he  has  been,  he        fuerit,  he  have,  may  have,  bee7i. 

was. 

Pl. — I.  fuimus,    we  have  been,  we        fuerimus,  we  have,  may  have,  been, 
were, 

2.  fuistis,    you   have    been,        fuerltis,  you    have,    may    have, 

you  were,  been, 

3.  fuerunt,  fu6re,  they  have        faerint,  they    have,    may   have, 

been,  they  were.  been. 

Pluperfect. 

Sg. — 1.  fueram,       1  had  been,           fuissem,  I  had,  might  have,  been, 

2.  fueras,        thou  hadst  been,  fuissgs,  thou  hadst,  mi ghtst  have, 

been, 

3.  faerat,        hehadbeeii.          fuisset,  he  had,  anight  have,  been. 

Pl. — I.  fueramus,  we  had  been,         faissgmus,  we  had, might  have,  been, 

2.  fueratis,     you  had  been,       faiss5tis,  yoii   had,    might    have, 

been, 

3.  fuerant,      they  had  been.      faissent,  they  had,   might   have. 


Future  Perfect. 
Sg. — I.  faer5,  I  shall  have  been, 

2.  fueris,         thou  wilt  have  been, 

3.  fuerit,        he  will  have  been. 


Pl. — I.  fuerimus,    ive  shall  have  been, 

2.  fueritis,      you  will  have  been, 

3.  fuerint,       they  will  have  been. 


IMPERATIVE.  INFINITIVE. 

Present.  Future.  Pres.  esse,     to  be, 

Sg. — I.  ,  ,  Perf.  fuisse,  to  have  been, 

2.  es,     be  thou,  est5,  thou  shall  be,    Fut.    futtirtim  (-am,  -um)  esse 

3.  ,  est5,  he  shall  be.  (fore),  to  be  about  to 

be. 
Pl.— I.  ,  PARTICIPLE. 

2.  este,  be  ye,      estote,  you  shall  be, 

3.  ,  sunto,  they  shall  be.    Fut.  futtirus,  -a,  -um,  about 

to  be. 


68 


THE   VERB. 


regularly  in  Plautus  and  Terence,  but  the 


Notes.— 1.  Early  forms  are  : 

(a)  In  the  Pres.  Ind.  gs  for 
quantity  of  the  vowel  is  disputed. 

(6)  In  the  Pres.  Subjv.  siem,  sigs,  siet,  sient ;  regular  in  inscriptions  until  the 
first  century  B.  C.  and  common  in  early  poets  chiefly  for  metrical  reasons  ;  side  by 
side  with  this  occur  fuam,  fuas,  fuat,  fuant  (also  Lucr.  iv.,  637,  Verg.  x.,  108,  Liv. 
XXV.,  12,  6),  which  are  taken  up  again  by  very  late  poets.     Sit  is  also  common. 

(c)  In  the  Impf .  Subjv.  the  forms  forem,  forSs,  foret,  forent  were  probably  in  very 
early  times  equivalent  to  futurus  essem,  etc. ;  and  occasionally  this  force  seems  to  be 
still  present  in  the  later  period,  especially  in  Sallust  ;  usually,  however,  they  are 
equivalent  to  essem,  ess5s,  esset,  essent;  in  the  Inf.  fore  always  remained  the 
equivalent  of  futumm  esse. 

((0  In  all  the  Perfect  forms  the  original  length  was  fu-,  which  is  still  found  occa- 
sionally in  early  Latin. 

(e)  Early  and  principally  legal  are  the  rare  forms  escit,  escet,  esit,  for  erit ; 
-essint  for  erunt. 

2.  The  Pres.  Part,  is  found  only  in  the  compounds  ;  ab-s6us,  absent,  and  prae- 
S6ns,  present. 


117. 

ab-sum, 

(abfui)  afui. 
ad-sum,      I  am  present.   Pf.  afful 
d6-sum,      /  am  wanting. 
In-sum,       1  am  in. 
inter-sum,  /  am  between. 


Compounds  of  sum,  /  am. 
I  am  away,  absent.   Pf.    ob-sum,  I  am  against,  Ihurt.     Pf. 
obful  or  oifui. 
pos-sum,      /  am  able. 
prae-sum,    I  am  over,  I  superintend. 
pro-sum,     I  am  for,  I  profit. 
sub-sum,     /  am  under.     No  Pf . 
super-sum,  I  am,  or  remain,  over. 

These  are  all  inflected  like  sum ;  but  prosum  and  possum 
require  special  treatment  by  reason  of  their  composition. 


Prosum,  I  iwofit. 
118.  In  the  forms  of  pr5sum,  prod-  is  used  before  vowels. 


INDICATIVE. 
Present.  pr5-sum,  pr5d-es,  prOd-est, 

prO-sumus,  prQd-estis,  pr5-sunt, 
Imperfect.  prOd-eram, 

Future.  pr5d-er3, 

Perfect.  pr5-ful, 

Pluperfect.        pr5-fueram, 
FuT.  Perf.  pro-fuerO, 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
pr9-sim, 

prdd-essem, 

pr5-fuerim, 
prd-fuissem. 


INFINITIVE.    Pres.  prSd-esse ;  Put.  prS-fatflrum  esse  (-fore) ;  Perf.  pr5-fuissft 

Possum,  /  am  able,  I  can. 
119.  Possum  is  compounded  of  pot  (potis,  pote)  and  sum ; 
t  becomes  8  before  s ;  in  the  perfect  forms,  f  (pot-fui)  is  lost. 


THE   VERB.  69 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 
Sg. — I.  pos-sum,  I  am  able,  can,  pos-sim,  Ihe  able, 

2.  pot-es,  pos-sis, 

3.  pot-est.  pos-sit. 

Pl. —  I.  pos-sumus,  pos-simus,  • 

2.  pot-estis,  pos-sitis, 

3.  pos-sont.  pos-sint. 

Imperfect. 
Sg. — I.  pot-eram,  I  was  able,  could,      pos-sem,  I  ivere,  might  be,  able. 


2. 

3. 

pot-eras, 
pot-erat. 

P0S-S6S, 
pos-set. 

Pl.- 

—I. 
2. 
3. 

pot-eramus, 

pot-eratis, 

pot-erant. 

pos-semus, 

pos-setis, 

pos-sent. 

Sg.- 

—I. 

2. 
3. 

pot-er5, 1  shall  be  able, 

pot-eris, 

pot-erit. 

Future. 

Pl.. 

—I. 
2. 
3. 

pot-erimus, 

pot-eritis, 

pot-erunt. 

Perpbct. 
Sg.— I.  pot-ui,  /  have  been  able,  pot-uerim,  /  have,  may  have,  been 

able. 

2.  pot-uisti,  pot-ueris, 

3.  pot-uit.  pot-uerit. 

Pl. — I.  pot-uimus,  pot-uerimus, 

2.  pot-uistis,  pot-ueritis, 

3.  pot-uSrunt.  pot-uerint. 

Pluperfect, 
Sg.— I.  pot-ueram,  /  Aowi  6ecw  aWe.       pot-uissem,  /  had,  might  havet 

been  able. 

2.  pot-uerSs,  pot-uissgs, 

3.  pot-uerat.  pot-uisset. 

Pl. — I.  pot-ueramus,  pot-uiss6mus, 

2.  pot-uerStis,  pot-uiss6tis, 

3.  pot-uerant.  pot-uissent. 


70 


REGULAR    VERBS. 


Future  Perfect. 
Sg. — I.  -pot-uevo,  I  shall  have  been    Pl. — i. 

2.  pot-ueris,  [able,  2. 

3.  pot-uerit.  3- 

INFINITIVE.    Pres.,  posse,  to  be  able.    Perf. 


pot-uerimus, 

pot-ueritis, 

pot-uerint. 

potuisse,  to  have  been  aUe. 


Notes.— 1.  In  the  early  Latin  the  fusion  of  the  two  parts  of  the  compound  has  not 
fully  taken  place  ;  we  accordingly  find  not  unfrequently  :  potis  sum,  potis  es,  potis 
est,  potis  sunt ;  potis  siem,  potis  sis,  potis  sit,  potis  smt ;  potis  erat ;  pote 
fuisset ;  and  sometimes  (even  in  classical  and  Augustan  poets)  potis  and  pote  alone, 
the  copula  being  omitted.     Partial  fusion  is  seen  in  Inf.  pot-esse,  potisse ;  Subjv. 

poti-sit  (inscr.),  poti-sset. 

2.  Occasional  passive  forms  (followed  by  a  passive  infinitive)  are  found  in  early 
Latin  (not  in  Plaut.  or  Ter.)  and  Lucretius  :  potestur,  possStur,  possitur,  poter- 
Stur.    Foteriut  for  poterunt  is  doubtful. 

REGULAR   VERBS. 
SYSTEMS  OF   CONJUGATION. 

120.  I.  There  are  two  Systems  of  Conjugation,  the  The- 
matic and  the  Non-thematic  (132).  The  Non-thematic  is 
confined  to  a  small  class.  The  Thematic  System  comprises 
four  Conjugations,  distinguished  by  the  vowel  characteristics 
of  the  present  stem,  a,  e,  ^,  i,  which  may  be  found  by  drop- 
ping -re  from  the  Present  Infinitive  Active.  The  consonant 
preceding  the  short  vowel  stem-characteristic  is  called  the 
consonant  stem-characteristic. 

2.  From  the  Present  stem,  as  seen  in  the  Present  Indica- 
tive and  Present  Infinitive  active  ;  from  the  Perfect  stem, 
as  seen  in  the  Perfect  Indicative  active ;  and  from  the 
Supine  stem,  can  be  derived  all  the  forms  of  the  verb. 
These  tenses  are  accordingly  called  the  Principal  Parts; 
and  in  the  regular  verbs  appear  in  the  four  conjugations  as 
follows  :* 


III 


IV 


Prks.  Ind. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perf.  Ind. 

Supine. 

1.  am-o, 

ama-re. 

ama-vi, 

ama-tum, 

to  love. 

I.  dgle-S, 

dgl6-re. 

dSle-vi, 

dels-turn. 

to  blot  out. 

mone-5, 

monS-re, 

mon-ul, 

mon-i-tum. 

to  remind. 

I.  em-5, 

erne-re. 

6in-i, 

6m(p)-tuin, 

to  buy. 

statu-3. 

statue-re. 

statu-I, 

statu-tum, 

to  settle. 

scrib-5, 

scribe-re. 

scrip-sl, 

scrip-tum. 

to  write. 

capi-5, 

cape-re. 

C6p-i, 

cap-turn, 

to  take. 

V.  audi-5, 

audi-re, 

audl-vl, 

audi-tum, 

to  hear. 

REGULAR   TERES. 


Rules  for  forming  the  Tenses. 


121.  I.  The  Present  System.  From  the  Present  stem  as  obtained 
by  dropping  -re  of  the  Pres.  Inf.  Active,  form 

a.  Pres.  Subj'v.  by  changing  final  a  to  e,  6  to  ea,  e  to  a  (or  -ia),  i  to  ia, 
and  adding  -m  for  active,  -r  for  passive  ;  Pres.  Impv.  Passive  by  adding 
-re;  Fut.  Impv.  by  adding  -to  for  Active  and  -tor  for  the  Passive  ;  Pres.- 
Part,  by  adding  -ns  and  lengthening  preceding  vowel  ;  Gerund  by 
adding  -ndl  after  shortening  a  and  6,  changing  i  to  ie,  and  in  a  few  verbs 
e  to  ie.  Pres.  Impv.  Active  is  the  same  as  the  stem  ;  Pres.  Indie.  Passive 
may  be  formed  from  Pres.  Indie.  Act.  by  adding  -r  (after  shortening  5). 

h.  Impf.  Indie,  by  adding  -bam  for  active  and  -bar  for  passive  to  the 
stem  in  the  first  and  second  conjugations  ;  to  the  lengthened  stem  in 
the  third  and  fourth  (e  to  6  or  iS,  I  to  iS)  ;  Impf.  Suhjv.  by  adding  the 
endings  -rem  and  -rer,  or  by  adding  -m  and  -r  respectively  to  the  Pres. 
Inf.  Active. 

c.  Future,  by  adding  -bO  and  -bor  to  the  stem  in  the  first  and  second 
conjugations  ;  -m  and  -r  in  the  third  and  in  the  fourth  (e  being  changed 
to  a  (ia) ;  I,  to  ia). 

2.  The  Perfect  System.  From  the  Perfect  stem  as  obtained  by  drop- 
ping final  I  of  the  Perfect,  form 

a.  Perf.  Suhjv.  Active  by  adding  -erim ;  Perf.  Inf.  Active  by  adding 
-isse. 

h.  Plupf.  Indie.  Active  by  adding -eram ;  Plup.  Suhjv.  Active  by 
adding  -issem. 

c.  Fut.  Perf.  Active  by  adding  -er6. 

3.  The  Supine  System.  From  the  Supine  stem  as  obtained  by  drop- 
ping final  -m  of  the  Supine,  form 

a.  Perf.  Part.  Passive  by  adding  -s. 

h.  Fut.  Part.  Active  by  adding  -rus  (preceding  u  being  lengthened 
tou). 

c.  The  Compound  Tenses  in  the  Passive  and  the  Periphrastic  forms 
by  combining  these  Participles  with  forms  of  esse,  to  he. 

Remark. — Euphonic  changes  in  the  consonant  stem-characteristic. 
Characteristic  b  before  s  and  t  becomes  p ;  g  and  qu  before  t  become 
c ;  c,  g,  qn,  with  s,  become  x ;  t  and  d  before  s  are  assimilated,  and 
then  sometimes  dropped.     See  further,  9. 

8crIb-5,  scrip-sl,  scrlp-tum ;  legO,  iSc-tum ;  coqn-C,  coc-tum  ;  dIc-0,  dixl 
(dic-sl) ;  iung-5,  iunx-I  (iung-sl) ;  coqu-Q,  ooxi  (coqu-sl) ;  ed-5,  6-sum  (ed- 
sum) ;  c€d-5,  c6s-si  (c6d-8l) ;  xnitt-5,  ml-si  (mit-sl),  mis-sum  (mit-sum). 


n 


REGULAR   VERBS. 


First  Conjugration. 

Conjugation  of  amare,  to  love, 
PRIN.  Parts  :  am-5,  ama-re,  amS-vI,  ama-tnm. 


ACTIVE. 


Present. 


iMPEBrECT. 


INDICATIVE. 

Am  loving^  do  love,  love, 
Sg. — I.  am-5, 

2.  ama-g, 

3.  ama-t, 

Pl. — I.  ama-mus, 

2.  ama-tis, 

3.  ama-nt, 

Was  loving,  loved. 
Sg. — I.  ama-ba-m, 

2.  ama-ba-s, 

3.  araa-ba-t, 

Pl. — I.  ama-ba-mus, 

2.  ama-ba-tis, 

3.  ama-ba-nt, 

FUTURB. 

Shall  he  loving,  shall  love. 
Sg. — I.  ama-b-S, 

2.  ama-bi-s, 

3.  ama-bi-t, 

Pl. — I.  ama-bi-mus, 

2.  ama-bi-tis, 

3.  ama-bu-nt. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Be  loving,  may  love, 
ame-m, 
ame-8, 
ame-t. 

ame-mus, 

ame-tis, 

ame-nt. 

loving,  might  love, 
ama-re-m, 
ama-re-8, 
ama-re-t. 

ama-r6-mus, 

ama-rS-tis, 

ama-re-nt. 


Perfect. 


Mave  loved,  did  love. 
Sg. — I.  ama-v-I, 

2.  ama-v-isti, 

3.  ama-v-it, 

Pl. — I.  ama-v-imuB, 

2.  ama-v-istis, 

3.  amfi-v-firunt  (-Sre), 


Have,  may  have,  loved, 
ama-v-eri-m, 
ama-v-eri-s, 
ama-v-eri-t. 

ama-v-erl-mus, 

araa-v-eri-tis, 

amfi-v-erl-nt. 


REGULAR   VERBS. 


73 


First  Conjugration. 

ACTIVE. 

INDICATIVE.                                     SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Sg.- 

Pluperfect. 
Had  loved.                              Had,  might  have,  loved. 
—I.  ama-vera-m,                                 ama-v-isse-m, 

2.  ama-v-era-s,                                    ama-v-is85-s, 

3.  ama-v-era-t,                                   ama-v-isse  t. 

Pl. 

—I.  ama-v-era-mus,                              ama-v-issg-mns, 

2.  ama-v-era-tis,                                ama-v-issS-tis, 

3.  ama-v-era-nt,                                ama-v-isse-nt. 

Sg.- 

Future  Perfect. 
Shall  have  loved. 
—I.  ama-v-er-5, 

2.  ama-v-eri-s, 

3.  ama-v-eri-t. 

Pl. 

—I.  ama-v-eri-mus, 

2.  ama-v-eri-tis, 

3.  ama-v-eri-nt. 

IMPERATIVE. 
Present.                                 Future. 

Sg 

.— 1.  ,                          , 

2,  araa,      love  thou,  ama-t5,     thou  shall  love, 

3.  .                       araa-tO,     he  shall  love. 

ama-t5te,  ye  shall  love. 
ama-nt5,  they  shall  love. 


Pl.— I. , 

2.  araa-te,  love  ye, 

3.  ,. 

INFINITIVE. 
pREs.    ama-re,  to  love. 
Perf.    ama-v-isse,  to  have  loved. 
Put.      ama-ttlr-um,  -am,  -um  esse,  to  he  about  to  love. 

GERUND.  SUPINE. 

N.     [ama-re],  loving. 
G.     ama-nd-I,  of  loving^ 
D.     ama-nd-3,  to  loving. 
Ac.  [ama-re],  Ac.  ama-tiun,  to  love. 

(ad)  ama-nd-um,  loving,  to  love. 
Ab.  ama-nd-5,  ly  loving.  Ab.  ama-ttl,  to  love,  in  the  loving. 

PARTICIPLES.  -      - 

Present.   N.  ama-n-s  (G.  ama-nt-is),  loving. 
Future,     ama-ttlr-us,  -a,  -um,  being  about  to  love. 


74 


BEGTTLAR   VERBS. 


First  Conju^ration. 
PASSIVE. 


INDICATIVE. 

Am  loved. 
Sg. — I.  amo-r, 

2.  ama-ris  (-re), 

3.  ama-tur, 


Pl.- 


-I.  amS-mur, 

2.  ama-minXy 

3.  ama-ntur, 


Present. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Be,  may  be,  loved, 
ame-r, 

ara5-ris  (-re), 
ame-tur. 

am5-mur, 
ame-minl, 
ame-ntur. 


Imperfect. 


Was  loved. 

Se. — I.  ama-ba-r, 

2.  amS-ba-ris  (-re), 

3.  am5-ba-tur, 

Pl. — I.  ama-ba-mur, 

2.  ainS-ba-minl, 

3.  ama-ba-ntur, 


Shall  he  loved. 

Sg. — I.  ama-bo-r, 

2.  ama-be-ris  (-re), 

3.  amS-bi-tiir. 

Pl. — I.  am5-bi-mur, 

2.  ama-bi-minl, 

3.  amS-ba-ntur. 


Future. 


Were,  migJit  be,  loved, 
ama-re-r, 
amS-rg-ris  (-re), 
amS-re-txir. 

ama-rg-mnr, 
ama-r5-minl, 
ajna-re-ntnr. 


Perfect. 


Have  been  loved,  was  loved. 

Sg. — I.  ama-t-QS,  -a,  -nm  sum, 

2.  es, 

3.  est, 

Pl. — I.  ama-t-1,  -ae,  -a  sumus, 

2.  estis, 

3.  sunt 


ffdve,  may  have,  been  loved, 

amS-t-us,  -a,  -um  siin, 
sis, 
sit, 

amS-t-I,  -ae,  -a      simus, 
sitis, 
sint. 


REGULAR   VERBS.  75 


First  Conjugation. 

PASSIVE. 
INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pluperfect. 

Had  been  loved.  Had,  might  have,  been  loved, 

Sg. — I.  amS-t-us,  -a,  -um  eram,  amil-t-us,  -a,  -um    essem, 

2.  eras,  ess68, 

3.  erat,  esset, 

Pl. — I.  ama-t-i,  -ae,  -a       eramus,  amti-t-I,  -ae,  -a        essgaius, 

2.  erStis,  essStis, 

3.  erant.  essent. 

Future  Perfect. 
Shall  have  been  loved. 
Sg. — I.  ama-t-u8,  -a,  -um   erO, 

2.  eris, 

3.  erit. 

Pl. — I.  ama-t-I,  -ae,  -a       erimus, 

2.  eritis, 

3.  erunt. 

IMPERATIVE. 
Present.  *  Future. 

Sg.— I.  ,  , 

2.  ama-re,      be  thou  loved.  ama-tor      ihou  shall  he  loved. 

3.  ,  ama-tor,     he  shall  be  loved. 

2.  a  ma-mini,  be  ye  loved.  , 

3,  .  ama-ntor,  they  shall  be  lowd. 

INFINITIVE. 
Pres.         ama-rl,  to  be  loved. 

Perf.        ama-t-um,  -am,  -um  esse,       to  have  been  loved. 
FuT.  ama-tum  iri,  to  be  about  to  be  loved. 

FuT.  Pf.  ama-t-um,  -am,  -um  fore. 

PARTICIPLE.  GERUNDIVE. 

Perf.     amS-t-us,  -a,  -um,  loved.  ama-nd-us,  -a,  -um,  {one)  to  be  loved. 


76 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


123.  Second  Conjugration. 

CoNJUGATioi?^  OF  delfire,  to  destroy  (Not  out), 
Prin.  Parts  :  dele-0,  d6l6re,  d6l6-vi,  d6l6-tum. 
ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 


INDIC. 


SUBJV. 


INDIC. 


SUBJV. 


Present. 

Sg.— d5le-«S 
dele-8, 
dele-t, 

delea-m, 

delea-s, 

delea-t, 

dele-o-r, 
dele-ris  (-re), 
dele-tur, 

delea-r, 
delea-ris  (-re), 
delea-tur, 

Pl.— dele-mus, 
dele-tis, 
dele-nt. 

delea-mus, 

delea-tis, 

delea-nt. 

dele-mur, 
dele-mini, 
dele-ntur. 

dele-a-mur, 
dele-a-mini, 
dele-a-ntur. 

iMPERrECT. 

Sg.— dele-ba-m, 
dele-ba-8, 
dele-ba-t. 

dele-re-m, 
dele-r6-s, 
dele-re-t, 

dele-ba-r, 
dele-ba-ris  (-re), 
dele-ba-tur, 

dele-re-r, 
dele-r6-ris  (-re), 
dele-r6-tur, 

Pl.— dele-ba-mus, 
dele-ba-tis, 
dele-ba-nt. 

dele-r6-mus, 

dele-r5-tis, 

dele-re-nt. 

dele-ba-mur, 
dele-ba-mini, 
dele-ba-ntur, 

dele-r6-mur, 
dele-r6-minl, 
dele-re-ntur. 

Future. 

Sg.— dele-b-5, 
dele-bi-s, 
dele-bi-t, 

dele-bo-r, 
dele-be-ris  (re), 
dele-bi-tur, 

Pl. — dele-bi-mus, 
dele-bi-tis, 
dele-bu-nt. 

dele-bi-mur, 
dele-bi-mini, 
dele-bu-ntur. 

Perfect. 

Sg.— dele-v-I, 
dele-v-isti, 
dele-v-it, 

del6-v-eri-m, 

dele-v-eri-s, 

dele-v-eri-t. 

dele-t-us  sum, 
es, 
est. 

dgl6-t.U8  Sim, 
sis, 
sit. 

Pl.— dele-v-imus, 
dele-v-istis, 

delC-v-erl-mus, 
dele-v-eri-tis, 

dele-t-I     sumus, 
estis, 

dele-t-I     simus, 
sitis, 

d6l5-v-8runt  (-ere),  dele-v-eri-nt. 


font, 


Bint. 


EEQULAE    VERBS. 


77 


SUBJV. 


Second  Conjugation. 
AOTIVR  PASSIVE. 

mDIC.  SUBJV.  INDIC. 

Pluperfect. 

Sg. — dele-v-era-m,        dele-v-isse-m,        dele-t-us  eram,       dele-t-us  essem, 

dele-v-era-s,         dele-v-iss6-8,  erSs, 

dele-v-era-t,         dele-v-isse-t.  erat, 

Pl. — dele-v-era-mus,    dele-v-issO-mus,     dele-t-I    eramus,    dele-t-i     essOmus, 


dele-v-era-tis, 
dele-v-era-nt. 

dele-v-isse-tis, 
dele-v-isse-nt. 

erStis, 
erant, 

essetis, 
essent. 

Sg.— dele-v-er-O, 
dele-v-eri-s, 
dele-v-eri-t, 

Future  Perfect. 

dele-t-us 

erO, 
eris, 
erit. 

Pl.— dele-v-er!-mu8, 
dele-v-erl-tis, 
dele-v-eri-nt, 

dele-t-I 

erimus, 

eritis, 

erunt. 

Present. 

IMPERATIVE. 
Future.                   Present. 

FUTUBK. 

Sg.    , 

dele, 
» 

dele-to, 
dele-to, 

dele.r«, 

> 

> 

dele-tor, 
dele-tor. 

Pl.    , 

dele-te, 

» 
dele-tote, 
dele-ntO. 

dele-mini, 
> 

dele-ntor 

1      Pres.  dele-re. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres. 

dele-rl. 

Perf.  dele-v-isse. 

Fut.    dele-tar-um,  -am,  -urn  esse. 


Perf.     dele-t-um,  -am,  -um  esse. 

Put.        dele-tum  Irl. 

Fut.  Pf.  dele-t-um,  -am,  -um  fore. 


GERUND. 

N.     [dele-re]. 
G.      dele-nd-f 
D.      dele-nd-0. 
Ac.  [dele-re] 

(ad)  dele-nd-um. 
Ak.    dele-nd-0. 


SUPINE. 

Ac.     dele-tum. 
Ab.     dele-ta. 


PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  N.  dele-n-s ;  G.  dsle-nt-ia. 
Fut.    dele-tur-us,  -a,  -um. 
Perf.  dele-t-us,  -a,  -um. 

GERUNDIVE. 

dele-nd-us,  -a,  -um. 


78' 


REGULAR   VERBS. 


124.  Like  delere,  to  destroy ,  are  conjugated  only,  nere,  to  spin, 
flere,  to  toeep,  and  the  compounds  of  -plere,  filly  and  -olere  grotv 
(the  latter  with  Supine  in  -itum);  also  ciere,  to  stir  up.    See  137(^). 

All  other  verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation  retain  the  character- 
istic e  in  the  Present  System,  but  drop  it  in  the  Perfect  System, 
changing  vi  to  ui,  and  weaken  it  to  i  in  the  Supine  System. 


Second  Conjugation. 

Coi^^JUGATioiS'  OF  monere,  to  remind. 
PRIN.  Parts  :  mone-0,  monS-re,  mon-ul,  moni-tum. 


ACTIVE. 


Sg. 


Pl  — 


Sg.- 


Pl. 


Sg.- 


Pl. 


Sg. 


Pl.- 


INDIC. 

mone-C, 

mone-s, 

mone-t, 

raone-mus, 

monS-tis, 

mone-nt. 

-mone-ba-m, 
raone-ba-8, 
mone-ba-t, 
-mone-bS-mus, 
mone-ba-tis, 
monS-ba-nt. 

-raone-b-0, 
mone-bi-s, 
mone-bi-t, 
-mone-bi-mus, 
mone-bi-tis, 
monS-bu-nt. 

-mon-u-I, 
mon-u-istl, 
mon-u-it, 

-mon-u-imu8, 
mon-u-istis, 


SUBJV. 


monea-m, 

monea-s, 

monea-t, 

raonea-mus, 

monea-tis, 

monea-nt. 


INDIC. 

Present. 
mone-o-r, 
mone-ris  (-re), 
mone-tur, 
inone-mur, 
raone-mini, 
mone-ntur. 

Imperfect. 


PASSIVE. 

SUBJV. 

monea-r, 

raonea-ris  (-re), 

raonea-tur, 

mone-a-mur, 

mone-a-minl, 

mone-a-ntur. 


mone-re-m,  inon5-ba-r, 

inone-r6-s,  mone-ba-ris  (-re), 

raone-re-t,  mone-ba-tur, 

mone-r6-mus,      mone-ba-nmr, 
mone-rS-tis,        mone-ba-mini, 
raone-re-nt.         mone-ba-ntur. 
Future. 

mone-bo-r, 
mone-be-ris  (-re), 
mone-bi-tur, 
raone-bi-mur, 
inone-bi-minl, 
mone-bu-ntur. 
Perfect. 
mon-u-eri-m,      moni-t-us  sum, 
mon-u-eri-s,  es, 

raon-u-eri-t,  est, 

mon-u-eri-mus,    moiii-t-I     sumus, 
inon-u-eri-tis,  estis. 


raone-re-r, 

mone-r6-ris  (-re), 

raoiie-rS-tur, 

raone-r6-mur, 

mone-rS-minI, 

mone-re-ntur. 


mon-u-6rant  (-fire),  raoii-u-eri-nt. 


sunt. 


moni-t-us  Sim, 
sis, 
sit, 

inoni-t-I     simus, 
sitis, 
sint. 


REGrMR  VERBS. 


79 


Second  Conjugation. 
ACTIVE.  "  PASSIVE. 


INDIC. 


SUBJV. 


mDic. 


SUBJV. 


Pluperfect. 


Sg 


-mon-u-era-m, 

mon-u-era-s, 

mon-u-era-t, 


mon-u-isse-m. 


raoni-t-us   essem, 


Pr..— 


moni-t-us  eram, 
eras, 
erat, 

mon-u-era-mu8,  mon-u-iss6-nius,    moni-t-I    eraxnus,    moni-t-I      essSmus, 


mon-u-iss5-s, 
mon-u-isse-t. 


mon-u-era-tis, 

iDon-u-issS-tis, 

eratis. 

essStis 

mon-u-era-nt. 

mon-u-isse-nt. 

erant. 

essent. 

Future  Perfect. 

Sg.— mon-u-er-5, 

moni-t-us  erfl, 

mon-u-eri-8, 

eris, 

mon-u-eri-t, 

erit, 

Pl. — mon-u-eri-mus, 

moni-t-I    erimus, 

mon-u-eri-tis, 

eritis, 

raon-u-eri-nt. 

erunt. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present. 

Future. 

Present. 

Futubb. 

mone, 

mon5-t5, 

mone-re, 

mone-tor, 



mone-t5, 

mone-tor, 

Pl.    

mone-te, 

mone-tOte, 

mone-mini, 

mone-ntO. 

mone-ntor. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.    mon5-re. 

Pres.        monS-rl. 

Perf.  mon-u-isse. 

Perf.        moni-t-um. 

-am,  -um  esse. 

FuT.     moni-tur-um, 

-am,  um  esse 

Fut.         raoni-t-um 

Iri. 

Fut.  Pf.  raoni-t-um,  -am,  -um  fore. 


SUPINE. 


N. 
G. 
D. 
Ac. 

Ah. 


GERUND. 

[mon5-re]. 

mone-nd-I. 

mone-nd-5. 
[mone-re]  Ac.  moni-tum. 

(ad)  mone-nd-um. 

mone-nd-O.  Ab.   moni-ttl. 


PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.    N.  mon6-n-8  ;  G.  mone-nt-is, 
Fut.     moni-tur-us,  -a,  -um. 
Perf.    moni-t-us,  -a,  -am. 

GERUNDIVE. 
mone-nd-u8,  -a,  -um. 


8o 


REGULAR  YF'RBS. 


125,  Third  Conjugation. 

Conjugation  of  emere,  to  buy, 
Prin.  Parts  :  em-o,  erne-re,  6in-I,  6m(p)-tuin. 


ACTIVE. 

PASSIVE. 

INDIC. 

SUBJV. 

INDIC. 
Present. 

SUBJY. 

Sg.— em-o, 

emi-8, 
emi-t, 

ema-m, 
ema-8, 
ema-t, 

em-o-r, 
eme-ris  (-re), 
emi-tur, 

ema-r, 

ema-ris  (-re), 
ema-tur. 

Pl.— emi-mus, 
erai-tis, 
emu-nt. 

ema-mus, 

ema-tis, 

ema-nt. 

emi-mur, 
emi-minl, 
emu-ntur. 

Imperfect. 

ema-mur, 
ema-mini, 
ema-ntur. 

Sg.— eme-ba-m, 
eme-ba-8, 
eme-ba-t, 

eme-re-m, 

eme-rS-s, 

eme-re-t. 

eme-ba-r, 

eme-ba-ris(-re,) 

eme-ba-tur, 

eme-re-r, 

eme-r6-ris  (-re), 
eme-re-tur, 

Pl.— eme-ba-mus, 
eme-ba-tis, 
eme-ba-nt. 

eme-r6-mus,          eme-ba-mur, 
eme-r6-tis,             eme-ba-mini, 
eme-re-nt.             eme-ba-ntur. 

eme-r6-mur, 
eme-rg-mini, 
eme-re-ntur. 

Future. 

Sg.— ema-m, 
eme-s, 
eme-t. 

ema-r, 

eme-ris  (-re), 
eme-tur, 

Pl.— eme-mus, 
eme-tis, 
eme-nt. 

eme-mur, 
eme-mini, 
eme-ntur. 

Perfect. 

Sg.— em-I, 
em-isti, 
era-it. 

6m-eri-m, 
Cm-eri-8, 
6m-eri-t, 

emp-t-U8  sum, 
es, 
est. 

6rap-t-U8    sim, 
sis, 
sit, 

Pl.— em-imus, 
em-istis, 
em-6runt  (-&€ 

em-erl-mus, 
em-eri-tis, 
>).  em-eri-nt. 

6mp-t-I     sumus, 
estis, 
sunt. 

emp-t-I     simua, 
sitis, 
•int. 

REGULAR   VERBS. 


8l 


Third  Conjugation. 

ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

INDIC.  SUBJV.  INDIC.  SUBJV. 

Pluperfect. 

5mp-t-U8 


Sg.— em-era-m, 

em-isse-m, 

erap-t-us  eram, 

em-era-8, 

ein-issg-s, 

eras, 

em-era-t, 

em-isse-t, 

erat. 

Pl.— em-era-mus, 

em-issS-mus, 

emp-t-I     eramus, 

em-era-tis, 

em-iss6-tis, 

eratis, 

em-era-nt. 

em-isse-nt. 

erant. 

Future  Perfect. 

Sg. — era-er-5. 

emp-t-us  era. 

em-eris, 

eris. 

em-eri-t, 

erit, 

Pl.— em-eri-mus, 

emp-t-I     erimus. 

5m-eri-tis, 

eritis. 

em-eri-nt. 

erunt. 
IMPERATIVE. 

Present. 

Future. 

Present. 

Sg.    

erne, 

enu-tO, 

eme-re, 

Pl. 

emi-te. 

emi-t5, 

emi-tOte, 

emi-minl. 

eniu-ntO. 

esses, 
eiset, 

essSmtu 
essStis, 
essent. 


Pres.  erae-re. 
Perp.  em-isse. 
FuT.    erap-ttir-um,  -am,  -urn    esse. 


FUTURB. 

emi-tor, 
erai-tor, 


emu-ntor, 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.      em-I. 

Perf.     5mp-t-um,  -am,  -um 

FuT.        eraptum  Iri. 

FuT.  Pf.  emp-t-um,  -am,  -um  fore. 


GERUND. 
N.    [eme-re]. 
G.     era-e-nd-I. 
D.     em-e-nd-o. 
Ac.  [era-e-re] 

(ad)  em-e-ndum. 
Ab.  era-e-nd-5. 
6 


SUPINE. 


Ac.  emp-tum. 
Ab.  emp-ttl. 


PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  N.  em5-n-s ;  G.  eme-nt-iSi 
FuT.     5mp-tur-us,  -a,  -um. 
Perf.  Crap-t-us,  -a,  -um. 

GERUNDIVE. 

em-e-nd-us,  -a,  -um- 


82 


REGULAR   VERBS. 


126.  Many  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  with  stem  in  ie  (Pres. 
Indie,  in  io)  weaken  this  ie  to  e  before  -re,  and  to  i  before  m,  s, 
and  t  in  all  tenses  of  the  Present  System  except  the  Future. 
Otherwise  they  follow  the  inflection  of  eme-re. 

These  verbs  are  capio,  cupio,  facio,  fodio,  ftigio,  iacio,  pario, 
quatio,  rapid,  sapio,  and  their  compounds  ;  also  compounds  of 
-licio,  -spicio,  and  the  deponents  gradior  and  its  compounds, 
morior  and  its  compounds,  patior  and  its  compounds. 


Synopsis  of  Present  System  of  cape-re,  to  take, 
Prin.  Parts  :  capi-5,  cape-re,  c6p-I,  cap-tom. 
ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 


INDIC. 


SUBJV. 


INDIC. 


SUBJV. 


Present. 

Sg.- 

-capi-5, 
capi-8, 
capi-t. 

capia-m, 
capia-s, 
capia-t. 

capi-o-r, 
cape-ris  (-re), 
capi-tur, 

capia-r, 
capia-ris  (-re), 
capiii-tur. 

Pl.- 

-capi-mus, 
capi-tis, 
capiu-nt. 

capia-mus,             capi-mur, 
capia-tis,                capi-minl, 
capia-nt.                capiu-ntur. 

capia-mur, 
capia-mini, 
capia-ntur. 

Imperfect. 

Sg.- 

-capie-ba-m, 
etc. 

cap-e-re-m,            capi-6-ba-r, 
etc.                         etc. 

cape-re-r, 
etc. 

Future. 

Sg.- 

-capia-m, 

capi5-8, 

etc. 

capia-r, 
capi5-ris  (-re), 
etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Prbs. 

Put. 

Pres. 

Put. 

Sg.- 

-cape, 
capi-te. 

cap-i-tO, 
cap-i-tO, 
capi-tOte, 
capiu-ntC 

cape-re, 
capi-minl. 

INFINITIVE. 

capi-tor, 
capi-tor, 

capiii-ntor. 

Pres.  cape-re. 

cap- 

•I. 

PARTICIPLE. 

GERUND. 

GERUNDIVE. 

Prbs 

1.   capie-n-s. 

G. 

capie-nd-I. 

capie-nd-us,  -a,  -un. 

REGULAR  VERBS. 


H 


127. 


Fourth  Conjugration. 

Conjugation  of  audire,  to  hear. 


Prin.  Parts  :  audi-3,  audi-re,  audi-vi,  audl-tum. 
ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

ETOIC.  SUBJV.  INDIC.  SUBJV. 


Sg. — audi-5, 

audi-s, 
audi-t, 

Pl. — audi-mus, 
audi-tis, 
audiu-nt. 


Sg. — audie-ba-m, 
audi5-ba-s, 
audie-ba-t, 

Pl. — audie-ba-mu8, 
audi5-ba-tis, 
audie-ba-nt. 


So. 


-audia-m, 
audie-s, 
audie-t, 


Pl. — audie-mus, 
audie-tis, 
audie-nt. 


audia-m, 

audia-s, 

audia-t, 

audia-mus, 

audiS-tis, 

audia-nt. 


Present. 

audi-o-r, 
audi-ris  (re), 
audl-tur, 

audl-mur, 
audi-mini, 
audi-u-ntur. 


audia-r, 
audia-ris  (-re), 
audia-tur, 

audia-mur, 
audia-mini, 
audia-ntur. 


Imperfect. 


audl-re-m, 

audI-rS-8, 

aiidi-re-t, 

audi-r6-mus, 

audl-rS-tis, 

audi-re-nt. 


audie-ba-r,  audl-re-r, 

audie-ba-ris  (re),  audi-r6-ris  (-re), 
audie-ba-tur,         audi-r6-tur, 


audie-ba-mur, 
audie-ba-minl, 
audie-ba-ntur, 


audi-r6-mur, 
audi-re-minl, 
audl-re-ntur. 


Future. 


audia-r, 
audie-ris  (-re), 
audie-tur, 

audie-mur, 
audiS-minl, 
audie-ntur. 


Sg. — audi-v-I, 
audi-v-isti, 
audi-v-it, 

Pl. — audl-v-imus, 
audi-v-istis, 


Perfect. 
audl-v-eri-m,       audl-t-us  sum. 


audl-t-as  sim, 
sis, 
sit, 


audl-v-erl-s,  es, 

audl-v-eri-t,  est, 

audl-v-erl-mu8,  audl-t-I    sumus,     audi-t-f    simurf, 
audl-v-eri-tis,  estis,  sitis, 


audi-v-erunt  (-ere),    audi-v-eri-nt. 


sunt. 


8int» 


84 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


Fourth    Conjugratfon. 
ACTIVE.  PASSIYB. 


INDIC.  SUBJV.  INDIC. 

Pluperfect. 

audl-v-isse-m,         audi-t-us  eram, 
audi-v-is86-s,  eras, 

audi-v-isse-t,  erat, 


SUBJV. 


Sg. — audi-v-era-m, 
audi-v-era-s, 
audl-v-era-t, 


audl-tu-s  essem, 
essSs, 
esset, 

Pl. — audl-v-era-mu8,   audl-v-issS-mns,      audl-t-I    erfimus,      audl-t-I   essSmus, 


audl-v-erS-tis,      audi-v-issS-tis, 
audl-v-era-nt.      audl-v-isse-nt. 


eratis, 
erant. 


essStis, 
essent. 


Sg. — audI-v-er-(J, 
audl-v-erl-s, 
audl-v-eri-t, 

Pl.  — audi-v-eri-mus, 
audi-v-eri-tis, 
audi-v-eri-nt. 


Future  Perfect. 

audi-t-us  er6, 
eris, 
erit, 

audl-t-I    erimus, 
eritis, 
enmt. 


IMPERATIVE. 


Present. 


Sg. 


Pl. 


audi, 


audi-te. 


Future. 

audi-tO, 
audi-tO, 


audl-t5te, 
audiu-nt6. 


Present. 
audl-re, 

audl-mint 


FUTURI. 

audl-tor, 
audi-tor, 


audiu-ntor. 


Pres.  audl-re. 

Perf.  audl-v-isse. 

FuT.   audi-ttlr-uin,  -am,  -um 

GERUND. 
N.   [audi-rej. 
G.     audie-nd-I. 
D.     audie-nd-5. 
Ac.  [audl-rej 

(ad)  audie-nd-ttm. 
Ab.  audie-nd'O. 


INFINITIVE. 

Pres.      audl-rl. 

Perf.      audl-t-um,  -am,  um       esse, 
esse.  FuT.       audi-tum  Irl. 

Fut.Pf.  audi-t-um,  -am,  -um     fore. 

SUPINE.  PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  N.  audien-s,  G.  audie-nt-is, 
FuT.    audi-ttlr-us,  -a,  -um. 
Perf.  audl-t-us,  -a,  -um. 


Ac.  audi-tum. 
Ab.  audl-tfU 


GERUNDIVE. 

audie-nd-us,  -a,  -um. 


DEPONENT   VERBS. 


DEPONENT   VERBS. 


128.  Deponent  verbs  have  the  passive  form,  but  are  active 
in  meaning.  They  have  also  the  Present  and  Future  Active 
Participles,  and  the  Future  Active  Infinitive.  Thus  a  depo- 
nent verb  alone  can  have  a  Present,  Future,  and  Perfect 
Participle,  all  with  active  meaning.  The  Gerundive,  how- 
ever, is  passive  in  meaning  as  well  as  in  form. 

The  conjugation  differs  in  no  particular  from  that  of  the 
regular  conjugation. 


I.  First  Conjugratlon. 
Conjugation  of  hortan,  to  exhort. 
Prin.  Parts  :  hort-or,  hortS-rl,  horta-tus  sum. 


INDICATIVE. 

Exhort, 
So. — hort-o-r, 

horta-ris  (-re), 

horta-tur, 
Pl.— horta-mur, 

horta-minl, 

horta-ntur. 

WaB  exhorting. 

So. — horta-ba-r, 

horta-ba-ris  (-re), 
horta-ba-tur, 

Pl.  — horta-ba-mur, 
horta-ba-minl, 
horta-ba-ntur. 

Shall  exhort. 

Sg. — horta-bo-r, 

horta-be-ris  (-re), 
horta-bi-tur, 

Pl. — horta-bi-mur, 
horta-bi-mini, 
horta-bu-ntuy. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 

Be  exhorting,  may  exhort 
horte-r, 
horte-ris  (-re), 
horte-tur, 
horte-mur, 
horte-mini, 
horte-ntur. 
Imperfect. 

Were  exhorting,  might  exhoT 
horta-re-r, 
horta-r6-ris  (-re), 
horta-r6-tur, 
horta-rB-mnr, 
horta-re-minl, 
horta-re-ntur. 
Future. 


86  DEPONENT   VERBS. 

Perfect. 

Have  exhorted,  exhorted.  Have,  may  have,  exhorted^ 

Sg. — horta-t-us,  -a,  -um  sum,  horta-t-us,  -a,  -urn  sim, 
es,  sis, 

est,  sit, 

Pl. — horta-t-I,  -ae,  -a      sumus,  hortat-I,  -ae,  -a       slmus, 
estis,  sitis, 

sunt.  sint. 

Pluperfect. 

Had  exhorted.  Had,  might  have,  exhorted^ 

Sg.— horta-t  us,  -a,  -um  eram,  horta-t-us,  -a,  -um  essem, 
eras,  essSs, 

erat,  esset, 

Pl.— horta-t-I,  -ae,  -a       eramus,  horta-t-I,  -ae,  -a      essSmus. 
erStis,  essetis. 

erant.  essent. 

Future  Perfkct. 
Shall  have  exhorted. 

Sg. — horta-t-us,  -a,  -um  er5, 

eris, 

erit, 
Pl.— horta-t-I,  -ae,  -a       erimus, 

eritis, 

erunt. 

IMPERATIVE. 
Present.  PuTtrBi!. 

Sg.    

horta-re,  exhort  thou.  horta-tor,  thou  shalt  exhort, 

•  horta-tor,  he  shall  exhort. 

Pl.    

horta-mini,  exhort  ye.  

horta-ntor,  they  shall  exhort. 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  horta-rl,  to  exhort.  Pres.  horta-n-s,  exhorting. 

FuT.   horta-ttlr-um,     am,  -um  esse,  Fut.   horta-tiir-us,  -a,  um,  ahoui 

to  he  about  to  exhort.  to  exhort. 

Perf.  hortat-um,  -am,  -um  esse,  to  Perf.  horta-t-us,  -a,  -um,  having 

have  exhorted.  exhorted. 

F.  P.  hortat-um,  -am,  -um  fore.  .                   GERUNDIVE. 

SUPINE.  horta  nd-us,  -a,  -um,  \one\  to  he 

Ac.     horta-tum,  to  exhort,  for  ex-  exhorted. 

horting.  GERUND. 

Ab.    horta-tfl,  to  exhort,  m  the  ex-  G.  horta-nd-I,  of  exhorting. 

horting. 


DEPONENT   VERBS. 


87 


2.     Second,  Third,  Fourth  Conjugations. 

Synopsis  of  vereri,  to  fear;  loqui,  to  speak;  mentiri,  to  lie, 

Pein.  Parts  :  vere-or,  ver6-ri,  veri-tus sum;    loqu-or,  loqu-i,  locu-tus  sum; 
menti-or,  mentl-ri,  mentl-tus  sum. 

INDICATIVK 


Imperf. 

FUT. 

Perf. 
Plupf. 
FuT.  Pf. 


n. 

vere-o-r, 

ver5-ris  (-re),  etc, 
vei€-ba-r, 
vere-bo-r, 
veri-t-us  sum, 
veri-t-us  eram, 
veri-t-us  ero. 


ni. 

loqii-o-r, 

loque-ris  (-re),  etc. 
loqu5-ba-r, 
loqua-r, 
locu-t-us  sum, 
locu-t-us  eram, 
locQ-t-us  ero. 


17. 

menti-0-r, 
mentl-ris  (-re),  c^c, 
mentie-ba-r, 
raentia-r, 
mentl-t-us  sum, 
menti-t-us  eram» 
menti-t-us  erS. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Imperf. 

Perf. 
Plupf. 


verea-r, 

verea-ris  (-re),  etc. 
verG-re-r, 
veri-t-us  sim, 
veri-t-us  essem. 


loqua-r, 

loquS-ris  (-re),  etc, 
loque-re-r, 
locu-t-us  sim, 
locu-t-us  essem. 


mentia-r, 
mentia-ris  (-re),  etc. 
meitti-re-r, 
menti-t-us  sim, 
menti-t-us 


Pres. 

FUT. 


Pres. 

FUT. 

Perf. 
FuT.  P5 


vere-re, 
ver5-tor. 


IMPERATIVE, 
loque-re, 
loqui-tor. 

INFINITIVE, 


ver5-ri,  loqu-i, 

veri-tur-um  esse,  locu-tur-um  esse, 

veri-t-um  esse,  locu-t-um  esse, 

veri-t-um  fore,  locu-t-um  fore. 


menti-re, 
menti-tor. 


mentl-rl, 

menti-tur-um  esse; 
menti-t-um  esse, 
menti-t-um  fore. 


Pres. 

FUT. 

Perf 

GERUND. 

GERUNDrV^E, 

SUPINE. 


vere-n-s, 

veri-ttir-us, 

veri-t-us. 

vere-nd-i,  etc., 
vere-nd-us, 
vcri-tum, 
veri-ta. 


PARTICIPLES. 

loque-n-8, 

locu-tur-us, 

locu-t-us. 

loque-nd-i, 
loque-nd-us, 
locu-tum, 
locu-ta. 


mentie-n-s, 

menti-ttir-us, 

menti-t-us. 

mentie-nd-I, 
mentie-nd-us, 
mentl-tum, 
menti-tti. 


88  PERIPHRASTIC   CONJUGATION. 


Periphrastic  Conjugation. 

129.  The  Periphrastic  Conjugation  arises  from  the  com- 
bination of  the  Future  Participle  active  and  the  Gerundive 
with  forms  of  the  verb  sum. 

ACTIVE. 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.  amaturus  (-a,  -am)  sum,  amaturus  (-a,  -urn)  sim, 

Am  about  to  love.  Be  about  to  love. 

Ikpf.  amaturus  eram,  amaturus  essem, 

Was  about  to  love.  Were  about  to  love. 

FuT.  amaturus  ero, 

Shall  be  about  to  love. 

Pkbf.  amatiirus  ful,  amaturus  fuerim, 

Have  been,  was,  about  to  love.     Have,    may    have,    been 

about  to  love. 

Plupf.  amaturus  fueram,  amaturus  fuissem, 

Had  been  about  to  love.  Had,   might   have,   been 

about  to  love. 
FcT.  Pekp.    amatiirus  fuer5, 

Shall  have  been  about  to  love. 

INFINITIVE.    Prks.        amatur-um  (-am,  -um)  esse,  To  be  about  to  love. 
Perp.        ajtnatur-um  fuisse,  2h  have  been  about  to  love. 

PASSIVE. 


Pkbs. 

amandus  (-a,  -um)  sum, 
Have  to  be  loved. 

Have  to  be  loved. 

IHW. 

amandus  eram, 
Had  to  be  loved. 

amandus  essem,  forem, 
Had  to  be  loved. 

FUT. 

amandus  er5,  Shall  have  to  be  loved. 

VVRV. 

amandus  ful, 

Have  had  to  be  loved. 

amandus  fuerim, 
Have  had  to  be  loved. 

Plupp. 

amandus  fueram, 

Had  had  to  be  loved. 

amandus  fuissem. 
Should  have  had  to  he 
loved. 

INFINITIVE.    Pkes.      amandum  (-am,  -um)  esse,  To  have  to  be  loved. 

Perp.      amandum  fuisse,  To  have  had  to  be  loved. 


NOTES   ON   THE   CONJUGATIONS.  89 

Notes  on  the  Four  Conjugations. 
130.   The  Present  System, 

1.  Present  Indicative.— (a)  In  the  third  person  Singular  active,  early  Latin,  and 
occasionally  later  poets,  often  retain  the  original  length  of  vowel  in  the  endings  -at,  -6t, 
and  -it  of  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  conjugations.  Final  -it  in  the  third  conjuga- 
tion is  rare,  and  due,  perhaps,  to  analogy  or  to  metrical  necessity.  In  the  first  person 
Plural  the  ending  -mus  is  found  a  few  times  m  poetry.  In  third  person  Plural  an 
earlier  ending,  -onti,  is  found  only  in  a  Carmen  Saliare,  and  is  disputed.  The  ending 
-ont  is  frequent  m  early  Latin  for  -unt. 

(6)  In  the  second  Singular,  passive,  in  all  tenses  of  the  Present  stem,  the  ending  -re 
is  much  more  common  in  early  Latin  than  -ris,  and  is  regular  in  Cic.  except  in  the  Pr. 
Indie,  where  he  prefers  -ris  on  account  of  confusion  with  Pr.  Inf.,  admitting  -re  only 
in  deponents,  and  then  but  rarely.  In  general,  in  the  Pr.  Indie,  -re  is  rare  in  the  first 
and  second  conjugations,  more  rare  in  the  third,  and  never  found  in  the  fourth,  in  prose 
authors.  Post-Ciceronian  prose  writers,  e.  g.,  Livy,  Tacitus,  prefer  -ris,  even  in  the 
other  tenses  of  the  Present  stem.    The  poets  use  -ris  or  -re  to  suit  the  metre. 

2.  Imperfect  Indicative.— In  the  fourth  conjugation,  instead  of  -ig-,  we  find  m 
early  times  -i-.  This  is  common  in  early  Latin  (especially  scibam),  in  the  poets  to  suit 
the  metre,  and  occasionally  in  later  prose.  In  the  verb  eo,  and  its  compounds  (but 
ambire  varies),  this  form  was  regular  always. 

3.  Future  Indicative.— Plautus  shows  sporadic  cases  of  -it,  as  erit,  vSnibit 
(vgneS).  In  the  fourth  conjugation  -ib5  for  -iam  is  very  connnon  in  early  Latin 
(especially  scibo),  and  forms  in  -ibo  of  the  third  conjugation  are  occasional. 

4.  Present  Subjunctive.— Final  -at  of  the  third  person  Singular  active  is  occa- 
sional in  early  Latin  and  also  in  later  poets.  In  early  Latin  the  active  endings  -im,  -is, 
-it,  -int  are  found  in  dare  (and  some  compounds),  which  forms  very  often  duim, 
duis,  duit,  duint.    On  similar  forms  from  esse,  see  IIG  ;  from  edere,  see  172. 

.5.  Imperative.— (rt)  Four  verbs,  dicere,  ducere,  facere,  ferre  (171),  form  the  Pr. 
Impv.  active  die,  due,  fae,  fer.  But  in  early  Latin  dice,  duee,  faee  are  not  uncommon. 
The  compounds  follow  ihe  usage  of  the  simple  verbs,  except  prepositional  compounds 
of  facio.     Scire,  to  knoiv,  lacks  the  Pr.  Impv.  sci. 

{b)  The  original  ending  of  the  Fut.  Impv.  active  -tSd  is  found  in  early  inscriptions, 
but  very  rarely. 

(c)  The  Pr.  Impv.  passive  (second  and  third  Singular)  ends  occasionally  in  early  Latin 
in  -mino.    Appellamino  (Cic.  Leg.  hi.  3,  8)  as  third  Plur.  is  a  blunder. 

G.  Presknt  Infinitive  Passive.— The  early  ending  -rier  (-ier)  is  very  common  in 
early  Latin  and  occasionally  in  poetry  at  all  periods.  Plautus  shows  about  140  such 
formations.    In  literary  prose  it  does  not  appear  till  very  late. 

7.  The  Present  Participle  occurs  sporadically  in  early  Latin  with  the  ending 
-as,  -es,  the  n  having  been  omitted  owing  to  its  weak  sound  ;  see  12,  R.  1. 

8.  The  older  ending  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  in  the  third  and  fourth  conju- 
gations was  -undus  ;  and  -endus  was  found  only  after  u.  In  classical  times  -undus 
is  frequent,  especially  in  verbs  of  third  and  fourth  conjugations.  Later,  -endus  is  the 
regular  form. 

,    131.   Tlie  Perfect  System. 

I.  Syncopated  Forms.— The  Perfects  in  -Syl,  -Svl,  -ivi,  often  drop 
the  V  before  s  or  r,  and  contract  the  vowels  throughout,  except  those  in 
-ivi,  which  admit  the  contraction  only  before  s. 

The  syncopated  forms  are  found  in  all  periods,  and  in  the  poets  are 
used  to  suit  the  metre. 


90 


NOTES   ON   THE   CONJUGATIONS. 


audivisti,  audistl. 


Perfect. 

Sing.  1.  

2.  amavisti,  amasti.         delevisti,  dglesti. 

Plur.  1.  

2.  amavistis,  amastis.     delevistis,  delestis.  audlvistis,  audistis. 

3.  aiiiavenint,amarunt.  delSverunt,  delerunt.  audiverunt,  audiemiitc 
SuBJv.    amaverim,  amarim,     deleverim,  delerim,  audiverim,  audierim, 

etc.  etc.  etc. 

Pluperfect. 

Indic.  amaveram,  amaram,      dglSveram,  dglSram,  audiveram,  audieram, 

etc.  etc.  etc. 

SuBjv.  amavissem,  amassem,    delgvissem,  delessem,  audivissem,  audissem, 

etc.  etc.  etc. 


amaverd,  aiuard, 

etc. 


amavisse,  amasse. 


Future  Perfect. 
delevero,  d6l6ro, 

etc. 

Infinitive  Perfect. 
delSvisse,  delesse. 


audlverS,  audiero, 
etc. 


audivisse,  audisse. 


2.  In  the  first  and  third  persons  Sing,  and  in  the  first  person  PI. 
of  the  Perfect,  syncope  occurs  regularly  only  in  Perfects  in  Ivi,  and 
no  contraction  ensues.  It  is  most  common  in  the  Perfects  of  ire 
(1G9)  and  petere.  In  other  verbs  this  syncopation  is  post-Ciceronian, 
except  in  a  few  forms.  So  Cicero  uses  dormiit,  erudiit,  expediit,  moUiit, 
cupiit  (also  Plautus)  ;  Caesar,  communiit,  resciit,  quaesiit.  Desinere 
forms  desii  and  desiit,  once  each  in  early  Latin  (Cicero  uses  destiti 
and  destitit  instead),  and  then  in  post- Augustan  Latin  ;  dgsiimus  is 
cited  once  from  Cicero.  The  unsyncopated  forms  are  always  common 
except  those  of  Ire  (169),  which  are  very  rare  in  classical  prose,  but 
occur  more  often  in  the  poets  for  metrical  reasons. 

Note.— The  forms  nomus  (Enn.  =  nSvimus"),  gnarramus  (Ter.,^c?.,365),  flg- 
mus,  mutamus,  and  narramus  (Prop.),  suemus  (Lucr.),  iu  the  Perfect,  are  sporadic 
and  sometimes  doubtful. 

3.  nQvI,  I  Jcnow,  and  movi,  1  have  moved,  are  also  contracted,  in 
their  compounds  especially. 

Sing.— 2.  nOstl.    Plur.— 2.  nostis.    3.  norunt.    SuB.rv.  nSrim,  etc. 
Plupp.  nSram,  etc.    Subjv.  nSssem,  etc.    Inf.  nosse. 
But  the  Fnt.  Perf .  nQro  is  found  only  in  compounds. 

Similar  contractions  are  seen  in  mSvi,  but  not  so  often  ;  iHvI  shows  also  a  few 
cases  of  syncope  in  poetry. 

4.  (a)  In  the  early  Latin  poets  frequently  and  occasionally  in  later,  syncope  takes 
place  in  Perfects  in  -si.  These  drop  the  s  and  contract.  A  few  cases  are  found  in 
Cicero,  especially  in  the  letters.  Examples  are  dixti  (found  also  in  Cic.  and  probably 
an  earlier  formation,  and  not  by  syncope  for  dixisti) ;  duxti,  principally  in  compounds; 
intellextl (once  in  Cic);  scilpstl ;  mistl  (misistr  iuid  s(!venil  others  ;  also  scripstis. 

ib)  Akin  to  these  are  a  niiniber  of  forms  in  -so  for  Fiit.  Perfect ;  -sim  for  Pf. 
Subjv.  and  more  rarely  -sem  for  Plupf.  Siibjv.  These  foinis  are  most  usual  in  the 
tJiird  conjugation,  but  arc  also  not  uufieyui^ut  in  the  other  three  ;  thus, 


THE    STEM.  91 

1.  Fxiture  Perfect :  faxQ  (facere) ;  capso  (capere)  and  compounds  :  iussodubSre ; 
Verg.)  ;  amasso  (amare) ;  servasso  (servare)  and  compounds,  together  with  some 
others. 

2.  Perfect  Subj^inctlve :  faxim  and  compounds  ;  duxim ;  ausim  ( audere,  also 
used  by  Cic.) ;  iussim ;  empsim  (emere) ;  locassim  (locare) ;  negassim  (negare). 
In  the  second  and  thkd  persons  Sing.,  where  the  Fut.  Pf .  Indie,  and  the  Pf.  Subjv.  are 
identical,  the  forms  are  much  more  common.    The  plural  forms  are  much  less  frequent. 

3.  Pluperfect  SubjitncHre :  faxem ;  pro-missem ;  intel-lexes ;  re-cSsset  and  a 
few  other  forms  ;  ergpsemus  (IIor  ,  >§.,  i.  5,  79).    These  forms  are  rare. 

4.  Infinitive :  dixe ;  de-spexe ;  ad-duxe,  etc. ;  intel-lexe ;  de-traxe,  etc.  ,•  ad- 
vexe ;  ad-misse,  and  a  few  others.  Also  the  Future  forms  averuncassere,  reconcili- 
assere,  impetrassere,  oppugnassere. 

The  exact  origin  of  these  forms  is  still  a  matter  of  dispute,  but  the  common  view  is 
that  they  are  aoristic  formations. 

5.  From  the  earliest  times  the  third  Plural  of  the  Pf.  Indic.  active  shows  two  end- 
ings, -gront  (later  -grant)  and  -gre.  The  form  in  -grunt  ^^as  always  preferred,  and 
in  classical  prose  is  the  normal  form.  The  form  in  -gre  seems  to  have  been  the  popu- 
lar form,  and  is  much  liked  by  Livy  and  later  writers.  Tacitus  seems  to  have  pre- 
ferred -erunt  for  the  Pure  Perfect,  and  -gre  for  the  Historical  Perfect.  The  poets 
scan,  according  to  the  exigencies  of  the  metre,  at  all  periods  also  grunt. 

6.  In  regard  to  the  other  endings,  we  have  to  notice  in  early  Latin  -is  occasionally 
in  the  Pf .  Subjv.  and  Fut.  Pf.  Indic.  active  ;  Perfects  in  -if  are  always  written  with  -iei- 
on  inscriptions  ;  in  other  Perfects  the  third  person  Singular  in  -git  (older  -gt),  or  -it ; 
as  dedet ;  occasionally  the  first  person  ends  in  -ei  and  the  second  in  -istei.  Peculiar 
forms  are  dedrot  (dedyo),  (for  dederunt),  fgced  (for  fecit),  and  a  few  others. 

THE    STEM. 

132.  With  the  exception  of  the  verbs  sum,  /  a7)ij  edo,  lent, 
eo,  I  go,  fero,  /  bear,  vol5,  I  ivish  (perhaps  do,  I  give),  and 
their  compounds,  most  of  whose  forms  come  directly  from 
the  root,  all  verbs  in  Latin  form  their  stems  from  the  root  by 
the  addition  of  a  vowel  or  of  a  combination  of  a  vowel  with  a 
consonant.    This  vowel  is  called  the  thematic  vowel ;  see  190. 

In  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  conjugations,  and  in  some 
verbs  of  the  third  conjugation,  the  stem  thus  formed  is  found 
throughout  the  whole  conjugation  ;  in  other  verbs  the  present 
stem  shows  different  forms  from  the  other  stems. 

1.    THE    PRESENT    STEM. 

133.  I-  Th^  Stem  or  Thematic  class :  To  this  class  belong  those  verbs 
whose  stems  are  formed  by  the  addition  of  a  thematic  vowel  (usually  i, 
sometimes  u)  to  the  root,  as  in  the  third  conjugation,  or  to  a  stem 
formed  by  the  addition  of  a,  g,  or  i  to  the  root,  as  in  the  first,  sec- 
ond, and  fourth  conjugations.  The  stem  thus  formed  is  seen  (with 
lengthened  vowel'  sometimes)  in  all  forms  of  the  verb.  To  this  class 
belong  verbs  of  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  conjugations,  and  in  the 


92  THE   STEM. 

third  (a)  verbs  formed  from  a  strong  root,  ?'.  e.,  verbs  with  I,  u,  a,  g,  5, 
ae,  au  ;  and  with  e  in  the  stem  ;  as  dico  (=  deico;,  duco  {=  douco),  rado, 
c6do,  rodo,  caedo,  plaudo;  veho,  vergo,  pendo,  etc.;  {b)  verbs  formed  from 
a  weak  i-oot,  i.  e.,  those  with  vowel  i,  u,  6,  and  probably  those  with  a: 
as  dl-vido,  furo,  olo  (olere),  ago. 

II.  The  Reduplicated  class:  The  Present  stem  is  formed  by  redupli- 
cation, with  i  in  the  reduplicated  syllable  : 

gen-,  gi-gno  (for  gi-gen-o),  gi-gne-re,  to  beget ;  sta-,  si-sto,  si-ste-re,  to 
set,  stand.  Compare  stare,  to  stand.  Other  forms,  as  sido(for  si-s(e)do), 
serS  (for  si-so),  and  perhaps  bibo,  have  the  Reduplication  concealed. 

III.  The  T  class  :  The  root,  which  usually  ends  in  a  guttural,  is 
strengthened  by  to,  te  :  flecto  (flec-),  flecte-re,  to  bend. 

IV.  The  Nasal  class:  In  this  class  the  root  is  strengthened  by 
no,  ne,  the  nasal  being  inserted 

A.  In  vowel-stems  :  sino  (si-),  sine-re,  to  let ;  lin5  (li-),  line-re,  to  be- 
smear. 

B.  After  the  characteristic  liquid  :  cerno  (cer-),  cerne-re,  to  sift, 
separate  ;  tenmo  (tem-),  tenme-re,  to  scorn. 

Notes.— 1.  After  1  assimilation  takes  place  :  pello  (for  pel-no),  pelle-re,  to  drive. 

2.  In  a  few  verbs  tlie  strengthened  forms  (-no  after  a  vowel,  -ino  after  a  liquid)  are 
confined  mainly  to  the  third  person  Plural  active  of  the  Present,  and  arc  found  not  later 
than  the  close  of  the  sixth  century  of  the  city :  danunt  (=  dant\  explenunt 
(=  explent),  nequinont  (=  nequeunt),  and  a  few  others. 

C.  Before  the  characteristic  mute  :  vinco  (vie-),  vince-re,  to  conquer  ; 
frango  (frag),  frange-re,  to  break;  funds  (fud-),  funde-re,  to  pour. 

Before  a  p-mute  n  becomes  m:  rumpo  (RUP-),  rumpe-re,  to  rend; 
Climbs  (cub-),  cumbe-re,  to  lie  doivn. 

D.  Here  belong  also  those  verbs  in  which  the  root  is  strengthened 
by  -nuo,  nue ;  as  sternuo  (ster-),  sternue-re,  to  sneeze. 

Note.— In  verbs  like  tingUO,  I  soak ,  the  consonantal  n  disappears  before  a  conso- 
nant in  the  Pf.  and  Supine  :  tinxi,  tinc-tum. 

V.  The  Inchoative  class :  The  Present  stem  has  the  suffix  -sco,  -see. 
ira-scor,  I  am  in  a  rage  ;  crg-sc5,  I  grow  ;  ob-dormi-sco,  I  fall  asleep  ; 

api-scor,  I  reach  ;  pro-fici-scor,  I  set  out ;  nanci-scor  (nac-),  I  get ;  no-sco 
(=  gno-sco),  I  become  acquainted  ;  po-sco  (=  presto),  I  demand  ;  mis-ceo 
(—  mic-sc-e5),  I  mix;  disco  (=  di-dc-sc6),  /  learn.  A  number  of  Incho- 
atives are  derivative  formations  from  substantives  ;  as,  lapidgsco  (from 
lapis),  /  become  stone. 

VI.  The  I  class :  Instead  of  the  simple  thematic  vowel  i  the  root  is 
increased  by  the  form  ie.  In  some  forms  of  the  Present  stem,  i.  e.,  the 
Pr.  Inf.,  Impf.  Subjv.,  second  Sing.,  Pr.  Impv.,  this  appears  in  the 
form  e ;  in  some  other  forms  it  appears  as  i :  capi-G  (cap-),  cape-re,  to 
take. 


THE   STEM.  93 

NoTT?.— Verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation  also  belong  to  the  i  claee ;  but  for  con- 
venience the  i  class  is  here  restricted  as  above. 

VII.  TJie  Mixed  class  :  Some  verbs  that  originally  belong  to  the 
i-class  have  gone  over  in  the  Present  stem  to  the  forms  of  the  stem 
class  :  as  venio  (ven-),  veai-re,  lo  come;  video  (vid-),  vide-re,  to  see;  sonO 
(S0x\-),  sona-re,  to  sound. 

II.    THE    PERFECT    STEM. 

134.  I.  Perfect  in  -vl  (or  -ui)  :  These  are  formed  by  the  addition 
(«)  Of  -vi  to  the  stem  as  it  appears  in  the  Present  Inf.  in  combina- 
tion with  the  thematic  vowel.     To  this  class  belong  the  Perfects  of  the 
first  and  fourth  conjugations,  and  the  few  vei'bs  of  the  second  conjuga- 
tion mentioned  in  124  ;  ama-re,  ama-vl;  audi-re,  audi-vi  ;  del6-re,  del5-vf . 

{h)  Of  -ul  to  the  Present  stem  after  its  characteristic  vowel  is 
dropped.  Here  belong  the  majority  of  the  verbs  of  the  second  conjuga- 
tion ;  mon6-re,  mon-ui. 

II.  Perfect  in  -si:  These  are  formed  by  the  atldition  of  -si  to  the 
root ;  which  is,  as  a  rule,  long  either  by  nature  or  position  This  class 
comprises  a  large  number  of  verbs  in  tlie  third  conjugation  in  which 
the  stem-characteristic  consonant  is  a  mute  ;  three  in  which  it  is  -m 
(preme-re,  to  press ;  sume-re,  to  take  ;  con-tein(n)e-re,  to  scorn)  ;  and  a  few 
in  which  it  is  -s,  as  ur-5,  /  hurri,  us-sl;  haereo,  I  stick,  haesi  (=haes-si). 

Examples  are  r6po,  I  creep,  rep-si ;  scrib5,  /  ivrite,  scrip-si ;  dico,  /  say, 
dixi  (=:  dic-si) ;  carpQ,  I  pluck,  carp-si  ;  rad5,  J  scrape,  rasi  (=  rad-si). 

Note.— But  verbs  in  -ndS,  take  I  in  the  Perfect :  dSfend-O,  /  strike  (ward)  of, 
defend-i ;  perhaps  because  they  formed  originally  a  reduplicated  perfect ;  m,  mandd, 
Jc/iew,  manCdi)di;  so  (fe)fendi,  I  have  sti^uck. 

III.  Reduplicated  Perfects  :  These  are  formed  by  prefixing  to  the 
unstrengthened  root  its  first  consonant  (or  consonantal  combination) 
together  with  the  following  vowel,  a  and  ae  being  weakened  to  e,  or,  if 
the  root  began  with  a  vowel,  by  prefixing  e,  and  adding  the  termination 
-i.  In  Latin  but  few  of  these  forms  remain,  and  they  have  been  vaii- 
ousiy  modified  :  discS,  I  learn,  di-dici ;  spondeS,  /  pledge,  spo(s)poiidi ; 
tangS,  /  touch,  te-ti-gl ;  tundS,  /  strike,  tu  tiid-I ;  ago,  /  act,  eg! 
(=  e-ag-i)  ;  emo,  I  bmj,  gmi  (=  e-em-I). 

In  composition  the  reduplication  is  in  many  eases  dropped  ;  so 
always  in  compounds  of  cade-re,  to  fall ;  caede-re,  to  fell ;  cane-re,  to 
sitig  ;  falle-re,  to  deceive  ;  pange-re,  to  fix  ;  parce-re,  to  spare  ;  pare-re. 
to  hear ;  pende-re,  to  hang ;  punge-re,  to  prick  ;  tange-re,  to  touch ; 
tende-re,  to  stretch  (occasionally  retained  in  late  Latin)  ;  tondg-re,  to 
shear  (but  occasionally  retained  in  late  Latin)  ;  tunde-re,  to  strike. 
Disce-re,  to  learn,  always  retains  it,  and  so  p6sce-re,  to  demand,  and  ad- 
mordere,  to  bite.     Of  compounds  of  curre-re,  to  run,  succurrQjre  always 


94  THE   STEM. 

drops  the  reduplication,  praecurrere  always  retains  it  :  the  others  vaiy. 
Of  compounds  of  dare,  abscondere  usually  drops  it,  but  all  trisyllabic 
compounds  that  change  the  a,  and  all  quadrisyllable  compounds,  retain 
it.     Compounds  of  sistere,  to  sei,  and  stare,  to  stand,  retain  it. 

IV.  Perfect  in  I.  Verbs  of  the  third  conjugation,  with  a,  short  stem- 
syllable,  take  i  in  the  Perfect,  after  lengthening  the  stem-syllable  and 
changing  a  into  g.  In  many  cases  these  Perfects  are  the  remains  of 
reduplicated  forms  :  lego,  /  read,  leg-i ;  vide-o,  /  see,  vid-i ;  fodi-6,  1 
stab,  fod-i ;  fugi-o,  I  flee,  fvLQ-1 ;  frang-o,  /  hreak,  frgg-i. 

V.  Denominative  verbs  in-uS,  like  acn5, 1  sharpen;  metuo,  I  fear ; 
also  sternuo,  /  sneeze,  form  the  Perfect  in  -u-i  after  the  analogy  of  pri- 
mary verbs,  and  the  formation  in  -ui  gradually  extended  in  Latin. 

in.    THE    SUPINE    STEM. 

135.  I-  Supine  in  -turn,  Perfect  Passive  Participle  in  -tus:  The 
stems  are  formed  by  tlie  addition  of  -tu  or  -to 

(a)  To  the  stem  as  it  appears  in  the  Present  Infinitive  active.  Here 
belong  most  verbs  of  the  fu-st  and  fourth  conjugations,  and  those  verbs 
of  the  second  conjugation  that  are  mentioned  in  124  :  ama-tum,  dele- 
tmii,  audi- turn.  Those  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  which  form 
Perfect  in  -•oi,  form  the  Supine  stem  by  weakening  the  thematic  vowel 
e  to  i,  and  adding  -tu,  -to,  except  cgnsS-re,  to  deem,  doeg-re,  to  teach, 
miscfe-re,  to  mix,  teng-re,  to  hold,  torre-ra,  to  scorch,  which  omit  the  the- 
matic vowel,  and  form  cgnsum,  doctum,  mixtum,  (tentum),  tostmn. 

{h)  To  the  unstrengthened  stem.  Here  belong  most  verbs  of  the 
third  conjugation  and  the  five  verbs  of  the  second  just  given,  with 
sporadic  forms  in  the  other  conjugations  :  cai)-tuin  (capio,  /  take), 
rgp-tum  (r6p5, 1  creep),  dio-tom  (dic5, 1  say),  fac-tum  (facio,  I  do). 

In  combinations  of  -t-with  a  dental,  assimilation  took  place,  giving 
usually  S3  after  a  short  vowel  and  s  after  a  long  vowel :  scissum  (scindO, 
I  cleave),  caesum  (caedS,  I  fell).  On  the  analogy  of  this  and  under  the 
influence  often  of  Perfect  in  -si,  we  find  -s-  »lso  in  some  other  stems  : 

1.  In  stems  with  a  gvittural  characteristic  ;  as,  flx-um  (figo^  /^^)  ,*  often  with  a 
preceding  liquid  :  mersum  (mergS,  /  dip:  Pf.  mcrsi);  tersnm  (targeS,  /  ivipe; 
Pf .  tersi) ;  parsum  (parc5,  /^7>«r« ;  Pf .  parsi,  old) ;  spar-sum  (spargo,  /  <^imnkle  ; 
Pf.  sparsi) ;  mul-sum  (mulgeO,  I  milk ;  VL  mul-si) ;  hut  far-turn  (farci5,  /  stuff; 
Pf.  farsi) ;  tortum  (torque5,  /  twist ;  Pf .  torsi) ;  indul  turn  (nire  and  post-classical, 
from  indulges,  /  indulge ;  Pf .  indulsD. 

2.  In  one  witli  a  lalaal  characteristic  :  lap-stun  (labor,  I  slip). 

3.  In  some  stems  wit^  characteristic  s ;  at?,  censum  (cSnseS,  /  deem ;  see  I.  a.) ; 
haesum  (liaere5, 1  stick) ;  pinsum  (pinsO,  I  pound). 

4.  In  some  stems  with  a  nasal  characteristic  :  pressum  (prem5,  l press ;  Pf .  press!) ; 
mSnsum  (maneO,  I  remain ;  Pf.  mansi). 

5.  In  stems  where  11,  rr  lias  arist'u  by  assiuiilation  :  pulsum  (pellS,  /  (Mve) ; 
falsum  (falls,  I  falsify) ;  vulsum  (vello,  I  i)luck) ;  cursum  (currO,  I  run) ;  versum 
Cverro,  /  swteij). 


CHAIs^GE   OF   COXJUCtATIOJT.  95 

IT.  Future  Active  Participle  in  -turns. — The  same  changes  occur 
in  the  stem  as  are  found  in  the  case  of  the  Supine. 

1.  In  some  stems  ending  in  -u  a  thematic  vowel  i  is  inserted  ;  as 
arguiturus  (arguere,  to  prove);  luiturus  (luere,  to  loose);  abnuiturus 
(abnuere,  fo  de7iy) ;  ruittirus  (ruere,  to  rush) ;  gruittirus  (eruere,  io  root 
out)  ;  fruittirus  (frui,  to  enjoy). 

2.  Some  Future  Participles  are  found  without  corresponding  Per- 
fect :  Galiturus  (calgre,  to  he  ^varm) ;  cariturus  (carere,  to  lack) ;  doliturus 
(dolere,  to  grieve) ;  iacittirus  (iacere,  to  lie) ;  paritiirus  (pargre,  to  obey); 
valiturus  (valgre,  to  be  well). 

3.  Irregular  are:  agnottirus,  agnittirus  (agnoscere,  to  hnow  well); 
disciturus  (discere,  to  learn) ;  hausurus,  hausttirus  (haurire,  to  drain) ; 
nisurus  (niti,  to  lean) ;  moriturus  (mori,  to  die)  ;  nosciturus  (nOscere,  to 
know);  orittirus  (oriri,  to  arise) ;  pariturus  (parere,  to  bear). 

Change    of    Conjugation. 

136.  A  change  of  Conjugation  occurs  in  verbs  which  show 
a  long  thematic  vowel  in  the  Present  stem,  but  not  in  the 
Perfect  stem,  or  the  reverse. 

1.  Verbs  with  Perfect  and  Supine  formed  regularly,  according  to 
the  third  conjugation,  have  the  Present  stem  formed  according  to  one 
of  the  other  three  : 

auge-o, 
senti-o, 
saepi-o, 
veni-6, 
vide-o, 
vinci-o, 

2.  Verbs  with  Perfect  and  Supine  formed  according  to  the  first, 
second,  or  fourth  conjugations,  have  the  Present  stem  formed  according 
to  the  third,  in  consequence  of  strengthening: 


augg-re, 

auz-I, 

auc-tum, 

to  increase. 

senti-re, 

sgn-si, 

sgn-sum, 

to/eel. 

saepi-re, 

saep-si, 

saep-tum, 

to  hedge  about. 

veni-re, 

ven-i, 

ven-tum, 

io  come. 

vide-re, 

vid-i, 

vi-sum, 

to  see. 

vinci-re, 

vinx-i, 

vinc-tum, 

to  bind. 

ster-n-o, 

ster-ne-re, 

stra-vi, 

stra-tum, 

to  strew. 

crg-sc-o, 

crg-sce-re, 

crg-vi, 

cre-tum, 

to  gro2v. 

li-n-o, 

line-re, 

Ig-vi  (li-vi), 

li-tum, 

to  smear. 

3.  Verbs  with  the  Present  formed  regularly  according  to  the  third 
conjugation,  have  the  Perfect  and  Supine  formed  according  to  {a)  the 
second,  or  (/>)  the  fourth  conjugation  : 

(rt)  accumbere,  to  recline^  fremere,  to  rage,  gemere,  to  groan,  gignere,  to  beget, 
molere,  to  grind.,  strepere,  to  resound,  vomere,  to  vomit,  form  Perfect  in  -ui,  Supine 
in  -itum. 

alere,  to  nourish,  colere,  to  aiUivate,  consulere,  to  consult,  frendere,  to  show  the 
teeth,  occulere,  to  conceal,  rapere,  to  snatch,  and  its  compounds  form  Perfect  in  -ui, 
Supine  in  -turn  (-SUm).    ^^^  ali-tUS,  see  142,  3. 


96  LIST   OF   VERBS 

COmpSscere,  to  check,  con-cinere,  /o  sing  iogethfr,  and  other  compounds  of  canerOr 
to  sing,  excellere,  to  excel,  stertere,  to  snore,  tremere,  to  tremble,  form  Perfect  in 
-Ul,  but  no  Supine. 

(J))  arcessere,  to  minmm,  incessere,  to  enter,  cupere,  to  desire,  petere,  to  seek, 
quaerere,  to  search,  and  its  compounds,  rudere,  to  roar,  sapere,  to  savor,  form  Per- 
fect in  -ivi,  Supine  in  -itum. 

4.  Stems  vary  among  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  conjugations. 
{a)  Verbs  with  the  Present  formed  according  to  the  first,  and  Per- 
fect and  Supine  accorditig  to  the  second  conjugation  : 

crepare,  to  craclde,  cubare,  to  lie,  domare,  to  conquer,  micare,  to  flash, 
plicare,  io  fold,  sonare,  to  sound,  tonare,  to  thunder,  vetare,  to  forbid,  with 
Perfect  in  -ul,  Supine  in  -itum  : 

fricare,  to  rub,  necare,  to  kill,  secare,  to  cut,  with  Perfect  in  -ui, 
Supine  in  -turn (but  participles  in  atus  arc  occasional,  principally  in  later 
Latin). 

(b)  Verbs  with  Present  formed  according  to  fourth,  and  Perfect  and 
Supine  according  to  the  second  :  amicire,  to  tvrap,  aperire,  to  opeti, 
operire,  to  cover,  salire,  to  leap,  and  compounds. 

(c)  Of  the  second  and  fourth  conjugations  is  cie-o  (ci-o),  cie-re  (ci-re), 
civi,  citum  (ci-tum),  to  stir  up,  and  its  compounds  ;  while  poto,  potare,  to 
drink,  forms  Sup.  p5-tum  or  p5-tatuin,  and  Fut.  Part,  po-ttirus  or 
pota-turus. 

5.  dare,  to  give,  and  stare,  to  stand,  pass  over  to  the  third  conjuga- 
tion in  the  Perfect,  in  consequence  of  reduplication. 

LIST    OF    VERBS    ACCORDING    TO    THE    PER- 
FECT   FORM. 

PEKFECT:-vi;    SUPINE : -turn. 

137.  Stem  class  : 

(a)  Verbs  of  first  and  fourth  conjugations,  except  those  mentioned 
in  136,  4.     Irregular  in  Supine  is 
sepeli-o,  sepeli-re,  sepeli-vl,  sepul-tum,        to  bury. 

(&)  In  the  second  conjugation  : 


d5le.5, 

dSlS-re, 

dglS-vi, 

dglS-tiim, 

to  destroy. 

fle-O, 

flS-re, 

fle-vi, 

flg-tum, 

to  iveep. 

ne-3, 

nS-re, 

nS-vI, 

ng-tum, 

to  spin. 

-ole-5  (ab-. 

,  in-),  -olg-re, 

-OlS-Vl, 



to  gixnjo. 

Ttiese  compounds  form  Supine  in  itum ;  abolitum,  iuolitus. 
-ple5,  -pl5-re,  plg-vi,  plg-tum,  tojilL 

So  the  compounds  vvitli  com-,  in-,  ex-,  re-,  sup-. 
vie-6,  vig-re,  vig-tus,  to  plait. 

Irregular  is 
cie-5  (ci-3),        cig-re  (cire),       cl-vl,  cl-tum  (ci-tum\    to  stir  vp. 

In  the  compounds  we  And  the  Participles  concitus  or  concitus,  percitus,  excltuf 

or  ezcitus,  but  accltus. 


ACCORDING   TO   THE    PERFECT   FORM. 


97 


(c)  In  the  third  conjugation  ; 

arcess-o,  arcesse  re,         arcessi  vi,         arcessi-tmn,      to  send  for. 

So,  too,  lacess-0,  /  tease,  capess  O,  /  toy  hold  of.  In  early  Latin  we  often  find 
accerso,  the  ri'lation  of  which  to  arceSSO  iis  variously  explained.  The  forms  arcessiri, 
and  later  arcessiretUT,  from  the  fourth  conjugation,  also  occur. 


in-cess-0,  in-cesse-re,       in-cessi-vi  (cessi), 

So  facess  o,  Icau&e,  make  off- 


to  attack. 


pet-0,  pete  re,  peti-vi, 

quaero,  quaere  re,         quaesivi, 

con  quir-5,      con-quire-re,     conquisi  vi, 

So  other  compounds  of  -quiro  (quaero). 

rud-o,  rude-re,  rudi-vi, 

ter-o,  tere-re,  tri-vi, 


peti-tum,  to  seek  ijly  at). 

quaesi-tum,       to  seek. 
con-quisi-tum,  to  hunt  up. 


rudi-tum, 
tri-tum, 


Tib.,  I.  4,48,  has  at-teruisse,aud  Apuleius  has  similar  forms. 
138.   Reduplicated  class : 


ser-5,  sere-re,  sS-vi, 

So  c5nser5,  but  witli  Sup.  c5n-situm. 

139.  Nasal  class  : 

A.  li-n-0,  line-re,  16-vi, 

So  compounds  of  lino.    Pf-  ll  Vl  is  rare. 


si-n-0, 


si-vi, 


sa-tum, 


li-tum. 


si-tum, 


to  roar, 
to  rub. 


to  sow. 


to  besmear. 


to  let. 


So  d6-sino.  Heave  off,  and  in  early  Latin,  p6no  (=  po-sino),  I  put. 


B.  cer-n-o, 


cer-ne-re, 


crg-vi, 


So  d6cemo,  /  decide. 


(cr6-tum), 

to  separate. 

sprg-tum. 

to  despise. 

stra  turn. 

to  strew. 

sper-n-0,  sper-ne-re,         spre-vl, 

ster-n-o,  ster-ne-re,         stra-vi, 

140.  Ifichoative  class  : 
invetera-sc-o,    invetera-sce-re,  invetera-vi,    invetera-tum,  to  grow  old. 


pa-sc-o, 


pa  see  re. 


pa-vi, 


pas  turn, 


vespera-sc-6,      vespera-sce-re,  vesperavi, 
So  advesperasco. 


crS-sc-o, 


cr6-sce-re,         crB-vI, 


crStum, 

-cup J  turn, 
-dormi  turn, 


to  graze  (trans.). 
to  become  evening. 

to  grmv. 

to  long  for. 
to  fall  asleep. 


S(j  the  compounds. 

con-cupisc  0,    -cupi-sce-re,      -cupi-vi, 
ob-dormi  SCO,   -dormi  sce-re,    -dormi-vi, 
So  condormisco^  edormisco. 

ex-oIe-sc-6,  olg  see  re,         -0l6-vi,  -ol6-tum,         to  get  one's  growth. 

So  ob-sol6sc5, 1  grow  old.  But  ab  olgsco,  I  disappear,  has  abolitum;  co-alesc5, 
/  grmv  together,  co-alitum ;  ad-olesco,  /  grow  up,  ad-ultum  in  the  Sup.  ;  and 
inolesco  lacks  the  Supine. 


qui6-sc-o,           qui6-sce-re, 

quiS-vi, 

quiS-tum, 

to  rest. 

8Ci-sc-o,             sci-sce-re. 

sci-vl, 

sci-tum, 

to  decree. 

So  ad-8Cl8cO,  /  take  on. 
7 

LIST   OF   VERBS 


SU-6SC-5,  sue-sce-re,          sug-vi,  su§-tum,      to  accustom  one's  sdf^ 

So  compounds  as-,  con-,  de-,  man-. 

(g)no-sc-5,         no-sce-re,  no-vi,  (no-tum),  to  know. 

So  ignOSCO,  I  pardon  ;  but  co-gnosco,  I  recognize,  and  other  compounds  of  nosco, 
have  Sup.  in  -itum. 

re-sip-isc-0,        -sipi-sce-re,  -sipi-vi,  to  come  to  one's 

141.  1-class : 
cupi-o,               cupe-re,  cupi-vi,  cupi-tum,  to  desire. 
sapi-o,                sape-re,  sapi-vi  (-ui),            to  have  a 

PERFECT  :  -ui ;    SUPINE  :  (Dtum. 

142.  8tem  class  : 

1.  The  majority  of  the  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation;  see  134, 1,  &, 
and  185,  a.     But 

sorbe-o,  sorb6-re,  sorb-ui,  —  to  sup  up. 

Pf .  sorp-si  occurs  in  Val.  Max.  and  Lucan. 

2.  Of  the  first  conjugation  : 

crep-o,  crepa-re,  crep-ui,  crepi-tnm,        to  rattle. 

So  the  compounds,  but  in  early  and  late  Latin  the  regular  forms  of  dis-crepare 
and  in-crepare  are  occasional. 

cub-5,  cuba-re,  cub-ui,  cubi-tum,  to  lie. 

Occasional  regular  forms  in  post-Ciceronian  Latin. 

dom-0,  doma-re,  dom-ui,  domi-tum,  to  tame, 

fric-5,  frica-re,  fricui,  fric-tum  (-a- turn),   to  rub. 

Occasionally  in  early  and  more  often  iu  post-classical  Latin,  the  regular  forms  are 
found  in  the  compounds  ;  so  always  -frica-turus. 

mic-6,  mica  re,  mic-ul,  to  quiver,  flash. 

But  dl-micare,  to  fight  (out),  is  regular,  except  occasionally  in  Ovid. 

nec-0,  necare,      neca-vi  (nee  ui  rare),  neca-tum,      to  kill. 

The  compound  eneca-re,  to  kill  off,  has  gnecavi  in  early  Latin,  otherwise  Snecul 
(rare) ;  and  enectus  (but  Plin.  Mai.,  gnecatus). 

plic-5,  plica-re,  (plica  vl),  plici-tum,         to  fold. 

The  simple  forms  of  plicare  are  rare.  The  compounds  ap-,  COm-,  ex-,  im-,  vary 
between  -avi  and  -ui  in  the  Pf.,  and  atum  and  -itum  in  the  Sup.  ;  but  Cicero  uses 
always  applicavi,  applicatum;  complicavi,  complicatum;  and  usually  expli- 
cavl,  always  explicatum ;  always  implicatum ;  circumplieare  is  always  regular ; 
forms  of  replicaro  arc  rare. 

sec-5,  seca-re,  sec-ul,  sec-tum,  to  cut. 

Regular  forms  are  early,  late,  and  rar6. 

son-5,  sona-re,  son-ul,  soni-tum,  to  sound. 

But  regularly  sonSturus.  Regular  lorins  are  late,  in  early  Latin  the  forms  sonerOj 
sonit,  sonunt,  resonit,  resonunt,  show  that  the  simple  verb  was  sonere. 

ton-5,  tona-re,  ton-ul,  to  thunder. 

But  at-tonitu8  and  intonatus  (Hok.,  K/wd.  2,  51). 


ACCORDING    TO  THE    PERFECT   FORM. 


99 


vet-5,  veta-re,  vet-ui, 

But  Persius  (5,  90)  uses  veta-Vl. 


veti-tum, 


ioforUd. 


frem-o, 

freme-re, 

frem-ui. 

— 

to  roar,  rage. 

gem-o, 

geme-re, 

gem-ui, 

to  groan. 

vom-o, 

vome  re, 

vom-ui. 

vomi-tum, 

to  vomit. 

al-5, 

ale-re, 

al-ul. 

al-tum, 

to  ?wt(ri.'ih. 

Participle  ali-tUS  occurs  from  Livy  on. 

COl-0, 

cole-re, 

col-ul. 

cul-tum. 

to  cultivate. 

con-cin-0, 

-cine-re, 

-cin-ul, 

to  sifig  together. 

So  occinere, 

,  praecinere. 

con-sul-5, 

con-sule-re. 

con-sul-ui, 

c5n-sul-tum, 

to  consult. 

deps-o, 

depse-re. 

deps-ui, 

deps-tus, 

to  knead. 

mol-o, 

mole-re, 

mol-ul. 

moli-tum. 

to  grind. 

occul-o, 

occule-re, 

occul-ui, 

OCCUl-tllTTI, 

to  conceal. 

pins-o, 

pmse-re, 

pins-ui. 

pinsi-tum, 

to  pound. 

Sup.  also  pinsum,  pistum.  Collateral  forms  of  piso,  pisere,  are  eaily  and  rare ; 
so  also  is  pinsibant. 

ser-o,  sere-re,  (ser-tum\  to  .string  {out). 

Common  in  compounds :  as,  deser5,  dSserere,  deserui,  dgsertum,  to  desert. 
The  same  forms  are  found  occasionally  in  compounds  of  serere,  to  sow  (138),  but  not 
in  classical  Latin. 


stert-5. 

sterte-re. 

stert-ul. 

to  snore. 

Btrep-o, 

strepe-re. 

strep-ui, 

(strepi-tum). 

to  make  a  din. 

tex-o, 

texe-re. 

tex-ui. 

tex-tum. 

to  iveave. 

1  rregular 

are 

raet-o, 

mete-re, 

mess-ul, 

mes-siun. 

to  7)vnv. 

vol-o. 

vel-le. 

vol-ui, 

to  ivish. 

So  nolo,  malo ;  see  174. 

4.  In  the  fourth  conjugation  : 

amici-5,  amici-re,        amic-ui  (amixi),  amic-tum, 

aperi-o,  aperi-re,         aper-ui,  aper-tum, 

operi-o,  operi-re,         oper-ui,  oper-tum, 

sali-o,  sali-re,  sal-ui,  sal-tum, 


to  clothe, 
to  open, 
to  cover  up. 


to  leap. 
The  regular  Perfects  salivi,  salii,  are  found  in  compounds,  but  usually  in  post- 
classical  writers,  and  often  syncopated. 

143.  Redvplicated  class : 

gl-gn-S  (gen-),  gl-gne-re,  gen-ui,  geni-tum,  to  beget. 

Early  Latin  has  the  Present  forms  genit,  genunt,  genat,  genitur,  genuntur, 
genendi,  genl. 


ICX) 


LIST   OF   VERBS 


144,  Nasal  class : 

frend-o,  frende-re,  — 

Also  in  the  form  £rende-o,  frend6-re. 

ac-cumb-o,        -cumbe-re,  cub-ui, 


fr6-sum,  frgs-sum,   to  gnash. 


cubi-tum, 


to  lie  down. 


So  also  the  compounds  con-,  dis-,  in- ;  but  re-cumbo  lacks  the  Supme, 

ex-cell-o,  -celle-re,  (cell-ui),         (cel-sus),  to  surpass. 

Butper-cellere,  tobeat  down,  has  Pf.  per-culi,  Sup.  per-culsum.  Excelluenint 
is  found  in  Gell,  xiv.  3,  7,  and  in  Augustine  ;  otherwise  forms  of  Pf.  and  Sup.  do 
not  occur. 


145.  The  Inchoative  class : 

dispSsc-S,  dispgsce  re,       dispgsc-ul. 

So  compgscere,  to  check. 


to  let  loose. 


A  large  number  of  verbs  are  formed  from  verbs  of  the  second  con- 
jugation, or  from  substantives  or  adjectives,  and  tal^e  Pf .  in  -ui ;  as, 


oo-alesc-5, 

alesce-re. 

al-nl, 

ali-tum, 

to  groiv  together. 

See  140. 

6-van6sc-5, 

vangsce-re, 

van-ul. 

to  disappear. 

con-val6sc-o, 

.  valgsce-re, 

val-ul. 

vali-tum, 

to  get  well. 

in-gemisc-o, 

gemisce-re, 

gem-ui. 



to  sigh. 

not6sc-S, 

notgsce-re, 

not-ui, 

to  become  known. 

incaiesc-o, 

incalesce-re, 

incal-ul. 



to  get  ivarrn. 

146.  The 

I-class  : 

rapi-5, 

rape-re. 

rap-ul, 

rap-tum. 

to  snatch. 

cor-ripiS, 

ripe-re. 

rip-ui, 

rep-tum, 

to  seize. 

So  other  compounds.  In  early  Latin,  surripere  syncopates  some  of  its  forms,  as 
surpuit,  surpere  ;  surpuerat  occurs  in  Hon. ;  aoristic  forms,  as  rapsit,  surrepsit, 
belong  also  to  the  early  period.     131,  4,  b.  2. 


PERFECT  :  -si ;    SUPINE  :  -turn,  -sum. 
147.  Stem  class : 
I.  In  the  second  conjugation  : 


iube-5. 

iubg-re. 

iussi. 

ius-sum, 

to  order. 

On  sorbeO  see  142,  1. 

arde-5, 

Srd6-re, 

ar-sl, 

ar-sum, 

to  be  on  fire. 

rIde-6, 

ridg-re, 

rl-sl, 

rl-sum. 

to  laugh  (at). 

haere-3. 

haerg-re, 

hae-si, 

(hae-sum), 

to  stick  (to). 

mane-Q, 

mang-re, 

man-sI, 

man-sum. 

to  remain. 

8uade-5, 

8uadg-re, 

8ua-sl, 

8ua-sum, 

to  counsel. 

With  dental 

dropped  before  ending  of  Pf. 

and  Supine. 

auge-9, 

augg-re, 

auxl, 

auc-tum, 

to  cause  to  wax. 

frige-0, 

frigg-re, 

(frixl), 

— 

to  be  chilled. 

lace-0. 

Iflcg-re, 

laxj, 



CO  give  light. 

ACCORDING   TO   THE   PeE'Ft5CT   FORM. 


lOI 


lUge-0,  lugS-re,  llixl,  to  is  in  mourning. 

alge-5,  algg-re,  al-si,  -.-  "o/i^'/^j?. 

fulge-o,  fulg6-re,  ful-si,  —  to  glow. 

In  early  Latin,  forms  of  the  third  conjugation  occur  :  fulgit,  fulgere,  effulgere 
(Verg.,  a,  VIII.  677). 

indulge-5,         indulg6-re,       indul-si, 
mulce-o,  mulce-re,  mul-si, 

Rarely  mulc-tus  in  compounds. 

mulge-0,  mulgS-re,         mul-sI, 

terge-5,  tergg-re,  ter-si, 

Forms  of  the  third  conjugation  :  tergit,  tergitur,  terguntur,  are  occasionally 
found  ;  and  so  too  in  some  late  compounds.    Varro  has  tertus. 


(indul-tum), 
mul-sum, 


to  give  xvay. 
to  stroke. 


iniil-sum(ctuin),   to  milk. 
ter-sum,  to  wipe. 


torque-5, 

torqu5-re, 

tor-si, 

tor-turn. 

to  twist. 

turge-3, 

turgg-re, 

tur-si. 

— 

to  swell. 

urge-e, 

urg6-re, 

ur-si. 

: 

to  press. 

co-nive-5  (gnig" 

7),  -niv6-re, 

-nixl  (IvD, 

to  close  the  eyes. 

2.  In  the  third  conjugat 

ion  : 

carp-o, 
de-cerp-S, 

carpe-re, 
d6-cerpe-re, 

carp-sl, 
dS-cerp-si, 

carp- turn, 
de-cerp-tnm, 

to  pluck, 
to  pluck  off. 

clep-5,               clepe-re, 

Rare  and  ante-classic. 

clep-sl  (cl6p-i), 

,  clep-tum, 

tofilch. 

nfib-o, 

nube-re, 

nup-sl, 

nup-tum, 

to  put  on  a  veil 
(as  a  bride). 

r6p-5, 

r6pe-re, 

r«p-sl, 

rSp-tum, 

to  creep. 

8calp-5, 

scalpe-re, 

scalp-si. 

scalp-tum, 

to  scrape. 

scrib-o, 

scribe-re, 

scrip-si, 

scrip-tum. 

to  write. 

sculp-o, 

sculpe-re. 

sculp-si, 

sculp-tum. 

to  chisel. 

serp-o, 

serpe-re, 

serp-si, 

serp-tum, 

to  creep. 

prem-o  (-primo\  preme-re, 

pres-si, 

pres-sum. 

to  press. 

Some  compounds  of  emo,  /  iake,  buy,  have  Pf 
before  which  a  euphonic  p  develops  : 
cSm-p-si, 


c3m-5,  c5me-re, 

d6m-o,  deme-re, 

prom-o,  prome-re, 

Bum-5,  sume-re, 

On  contemn-o  see  149,  c. 

dic-5,  dice-re, 


d6m-p-si, 

pr5m-p-si, 

sum-psi, 


c5m-p-tum, 
d§m-p-tum, 
prom-p-tum, 
sum-p-tum. 


-si.  Sup.  in  -turn, 


to  adorn, 
to  take  away, 
to  take  out. 
to  take. 


dixi  (dic-sD,       dic-tum, 


Impv.  die,  see  130,  5.    Occasionally  in  old  Latin  dlcSbO  for  Future. 


duxl. 


due  turn, 


duc-5,  duce-re, 

Imperative  due,  see  130,  5. 

fIg-5,  fige-re,  flxl,  fixum. 

Part,  fictus  for  fixus  is  occasional  in  early  Latin. 
-flig-5(con-,af-,in-),     -flige-re,      -flixi,  -flic-tum, 

Simple  verb  is  found  occasionally  in  early  Latin. 

frig-5,  frige-re,  frixi,  fric-tum, 


to  lead. 


tofasten. 


to  strike. 


to  parch. 


I02 


J8T   OF   VERBS 


Sfig-5, 


suge-rC;       silxl, 


t'lt,  cXSUg'obO  i?  found  m  P^^aut.,  Ep.  188. 

merg-o,  merge-re,  mer-si, 

sparg-o,  sparge-re,         spar-si, 

c6n-sperg-o,   con-sperge-re,   con-sper-sl, 


suc-tum, 


mer-sum, 
spar-sum, 


tositck. 


to  plunge, 
to  strew. 


con-sper-sum,    to  besprinkle. 


coqu-0, 


coque-re, 


coxi, 

-lexi, 
di-lexi, 


[-lig-o  (leg-),  -lige-re, 

di-lig-o,  di-lige-re, 
intelligo,  or 

intellego,  intellege-re,     intel-lexi, 
negligS,  or 

neg-leg-o,  neg-lege-re,      neg-l6xi, 


coc-tum, 

-I6c-tum.] 
dilec-tum 


to  cook. 


to  lore. 

intel-l6c-tum,    to  iinderstand. 
neg-lgc-tum,      to  neglect. 


Other  compounds  have  l6gi.    Sall.,  J.  40,  1,  has  neglSgisset. 

reg-o,  rege  re,  r6xi,  r6c-tum, 

di-rig-o,         di  rige-re,         di-rgxl,  di-r6c-tum, 

per-g-o,  per-ge-re,         per-r6xi,  per-rgc-tum, 

su-rg-o,  su-rge-re,  sur-rexi,  sur-rec-tum. 

But  expergo  formed  expergitus  in  cany  and  late  Latin. 


teg-5,  tege-re,  texi, 

claud-5,  Claude  re,       clau  si, 

con-,  ex-clud-6,       ex  elude -re,    ex-clti-si. 

Early  Latin  shows  alt^o  cludo,  cludere. 


to  keep  rigi 
to  guide, 
to  go  on. 
to  rise  up. 

to  cover, 
to  shut. 


tec-tum, 

clau-sum, 

ex-clu-sum,    to  shut  up.,  out. 


laed-o, 
col-lid-o, 

lud-o. 


laede  re, 
col-lide-re, 

lude-re, 


lae  si, 
col-li-si, 

lu-si, 


lae-sum, 
col-li-sum, 

lu-sum, 


to  harm. 

to  strike  together 

to  play. 


plaud-0  (ap-plaud-5),  plaude  re,       plau-si, 
ex-plod-o,  ex-plode-re,    ex-pl6-si, 

rade-re, 

rSde-re, 

trude-re, 

-vade-re, 

c6de-re, 


plau-sum,       to  clap. 
ex-plo-sum,    to  hoot  off. 


rad-5, 

lod-o, 

trud-o, 

vad-o  (in-,  6-), 

c6d-5, 

quati-6. 


quate-re, 


ra-si, 

ro-si, 

trti-sl, 

-va-si, 

ces-si, 

(quas-si), 


ra-sum, 

ro-sum, 

trti-sum, 

-va-sum, 

c6s-suni, 


to  scratch, 
to  gnaw, 
to  push, 
to  go. 

to  give  way. 
to  shake. 


con-cuUd  (per-,  ex-),  con-cute-re,    con  cus-si. 


niitt-5, 
dl-vid-o, 

iir-5, 

coni-bur-5, 
ger-5, 

flu-5  (flugv-), 
stru-5  (strugv-), 
trah-o  (tragh-), 
veli-5  (vcgh), 

VlV-5  (vigv-), 


mitte-re, 
di- vide  re, 
tire-re, 


mi-si, 

di-vi-si, 

US-si, 


quas-sum, 
con-cus-sum,  to  shatter. 
mis-sum,         to  send. 
di-vi-sum,       to  part. 
tis-tum,  to  bum. 


com-bure  re,  com -bus-si,     com-bus-tum,  to  burn  up. 


gere-re, 

flue-re, 

strue-re, 

trahe-re, 

vehe-re, 

vIve-re, 


ges-si, 

fluxi, 

struxl, 

traxi, 

vexi, 

vixi, 


ges-tum, 

(flux-US), 

struc-tum, 

trac-tum, 

vec-tum, 

vic-tum, 


to  carry. 

to  flow. 

to  build. 

to  drag, 
to  carry, 
to  live. 


ACCORDING   TO   THE   PERFECT   FORM. 


lO' 


148.   The  T-class: 

flect-o,                  flecte-re,            flexi, 

flexum, 

fo  bend. 

nect-o,                  necte-re,            nexi  (nexui), 
The  Pf.  forms  :  in-nexui  (Verg.,  A.  v.,  425). 

nexum, 

lo  knot. 

pect-5,                  pecte-re,            pexi, 

pexum, 

to  comb. 

plect-o,                 plectere,           (plexl), 

plcxum, 

ioptaU. 

149.   T/ie  Nasal  class : 
(a)  Supine  without  N  : 


fing-5, 

finge-re, 

flnxl, 

fic-tum, 

to/orm. 

ming-S, 

minge-re, 

minxl, 

mic-tum, 

to  urinate. 

ping^o, 

pinge-re, 

pinxi, 

pic-tura, 

to  paint. 

string-6, 

stringe-re, 

strinxi, 

stric-tum, 

lo  draw  tighi. 

(b)  Supine 

with  N  ; 

ang-5, 

ange-re, 

anxl, 

to  throttle.,  vex. 

cing-3, 

cinge-re, 

cinxi, 

cinc-tum, 

to  gird. 

6-mung-o, 

6-munge-re, 

6-munxi^ 

6-munc-tum, 

to  wipe  Ui^  noss 

iung-o, 

iunge-re, 

iunxi, 

iunc-tum, 

to  yoke,  join. 

ling-5, 

linge-re, 

linxi, 

linc-tum, 

to  lick. 

mng-5, 

ninge-re, 

ninxi, 

to  snoiv. 

pang-o, 

pange-re, 

panxi, 

pane- turn, 

to  drive  in. 

Perfect  also  pggi,  and  Supine  pactiuu.    Cf>mpare  155  and  paclscor,  16.5. 
plang-6,  plange-re,         planxi,  planc-tum,        to  smite. 

-stingu-O,  -stingne-re,       nstinxi,  -stinc-tum,        to  put  out. 

So  the  compounds  ex-,  dis-,  re- ;  the  simple  verb  is  ante-classic. 

ting-5  (tingu-6),  ting(u)e-re,        tinxl,  tinc-tum,  to  wet,  dye. 

ung-5  (ungu-o),    ung(u)e  re,        unxl,  unc-tum,  to  anoint. 

(c)  tem-n-S  (rare)  and  its  compounds  form  the  Pf.  with  a  euphonic  p; 
con-tem-n-5,         -temne-re,  -tem-p-si,        -tem-p-tum,       to  despise. 

150.   The  I-class  : 

I.  In  the  third  conjugation  : 

F-lici-o  (I  AC),         lice-re,  -lexl,  -lec-tuml,  to  lure. 

pel-lici-o,  pel-lice-re,         pel-lexl,         pel-lec-tum,      to  allure. 

So  allicere,  illicere,  which,  however,  have  early  Pf.  in  -ui,  as  does  pellicere  also 
But  6-licere  has  -ul  regularly  in  claesical  times,  and  S-lexI  only  later. 

[-spici-0  (spec),     -spice-re,  -spexl,  -spec-tuml,        to  peer. 

per-spici-6,        per-spice-re,      per-spexi,       per-spec-tum,    toseethwngh. 
So  the  compounds  v\'ith  ad-,  con-,dS-,  in-. 


I04 


LIST   OF   VERBS 


2.  In  the  fourth  conjugation  : 

saepi-d,  8aepl-re>  saep-sX, 

8anci-5,  sand-re,  sanxl, 

The  Sup.  sanci-tum  is  rare. 

Tinci-5,  vincI-re,  vinzX, 

£arci-o  (-fcrci-6),  farci-re,  far-sl, 

falci-5,  fulci-re,  ful-si, 

8arci-5,  sarci-re,  sar-sS, 

senti-oy  sentX-re,  s6n-8i, 

haiiri-5y  baorl-re,  hau-si, 


saep-tum, 

sanc-tum, 

vinc-tum, 

far-turn, 

ful-tum, 

sar-tum, 

sSn-sum, 

haus-tiun, 


to  hedge  in. 

to  hallow. 

to  bind, 
to  stuff. 
to  prop, 
to  patch, 
to/eel. 
to  drain. 


Verg.,  a.  iv.,  383,  has  hattsoms.     Early  Latin  shows  hauribant  (Lucr.)  and 
haurierint ;  hauritOrns  is  very  late. 

rauci-o,  rauci-re,         rau-sl,  raa-sum,  to  be  hoarse. 

This  verb  is  very  rare. 


PERFECT :  -I  WITH  REDUPLICATIOH ;    SUPINE :  -sum,  -turn. 
151,  In  the  Jirst  conjugation  : 

I.  d-5,  da-re,  ded-i,  da-tum,  to  give,  put^  do. 

Everywhere  fL,  p"scept  in  das,  thou  givest,  and  da,  giije  thote. 

1 .  Like  d5,  are  conjugated  the  compounds  with  dissyllabic  words,  snch  as  :  circum- 
d-5,  Imiroumi ;  satis-d6,  Igive  bail ;  pessum-do,  I?^/^ ;  v6num-d5,  Isell ;  thus : 

drcmn-d-o,        circum-da-re,       circum-de-di,       circum-da-tum,  to  sttrround. 

2.  The  compounds  of  da-re  ^^'ith  monosyllalHC  words  pass  over  wholly  into  the 
Third  Conjugation, 


ab-d-5,  ab-de-re,  ab-did-i, 

ad-d-o,  ad-de-re,  ad-did-l, 

coD-d-8,  con-de-re,  con-did-i, 

abs-con-d5,  abs-cou-de-re,  abs-con-d-i, 


ab-di-tum,  topuiaztay. 

ad-di-tum,  to  put  to. 

con-di-tum,  toputtip  {found}. 

abs- con -di- turn,  to  put  far  away. 


Pf .  abscondidi  is  found  in  Pl.,  Mer.  360,  then  not  until  late  Latin. 


cr5^d-5y 

crS-de-re, 

crS-did-I, 

crg-di-tum. 

to  pnt  faith. 

d6-d-5, 

de-de-re, 

d6-did-i, 

d6-di-t.um. 

to  give  up. 

e-d-Q, 

«-de-re. 

6-did-i, 

6-di-tum, 

to  put  out. 

in-d-o, 

in-de-re, 

in-did-f. 

in-di-tum. 

to  jntt  in. 

per-d-5v 

per-de-re, 

per-did-I, 

per-di-tum. 

i4) fordo  {ruiny. 

prod-S, 

ia:o-de-re, 

pr6-did-i. 

pr5-di-tum. 

to  betray. 

red-d-6, 

red-de-re, 

red-did-i, 

red-di-tum. 

to  give  back. 

tra-d-6, 

tra-de-re, 

tra-did-r, 

tra-di-tum, 

to  give  oner. 

v6n-d-5, 

v6n-de-re, 

v8n-did-I, 

v6n-di-tuni, 

topfut  vp  to  sale. 

NoTB.— In  early  Latin  dare  formed  the  Pr.  Subjv.,  also  dtlim.    So  in  some  of  its 
compounds,  as  perduim.    See  130,  4. 

2.  st-5,  stS-re,  stet-I,        (sta-tS-rus),  ^o #/o»rf. 

So  the  compounds : 


ad-8t-5, 
c0n-8t-5, 


ad-8ta-re, 
c5n-8ta-re, 


ad-stit-I, 
cGn-stit-X, 


to  stand  by. 
to  standfast. 


ACCORDING    TO   THE    PERFECT   FORM. 


105 


In-st-0,  In-sta-re,  in-stit-I,  to  stand  ujwn. 

ob-st-6,  ob-sta-re,  ob-stit-i,  to     stand     out 

against. 

per-st-o,  per-sta-re,  per-stit-i,  to  stand  firm. 

prae-st-o,  prae-sta-re,  prae-stit-i,  to  stand  ahead. 

re-st-6,  re-sta-re,  re-stit-i,  to  stand  over. 

di-st-o,  di-sta-re,  to  stand  apart. 

ex-st-o,  ex-sta-re,  to  stand  out. 

All  compounds  of  slare  with  dissyllabic  prepositions  have,  however,  -steti  in  the 
Perfect,  as  :  ante-sto,  /  am  svperior ;  inter-sto,  /  am  between ;  super-sto,  /  stand 
vjjon  ;  thus : 

circum-st-5,  circum-sta-re,  circum-stet-I,  to  stand  round. 

Note.— Compare  sisto  and  its  compounds  ;  154,  i. 

152.  In  the  second  conjugation  : 

morde-5,  mord5-re,  mo-mord-i,        mor-sum,  to  bite. 

pende-o,  pend6-re,  pe-pend-i,  to  hang  (intr.). 

sponde-o,  spondg-re,  spo-pond-i,        spSn-sum,  to  pledge  oneself  . 

Compounds  omit  the  reduplication,  but  Plaut.  shows  also  dS-spo-pondisse  and 
dS-spo-ponderas. 

tonde-o,  tondS-re,  to-tond-i,  tOn-sum,  to  shear, 

153.  In  the  third  conjugation  : 
(a)  Stem  class. 

Reduplication  lost  in  the  compounds  : 

cad-0,  cade-re,  ce-cid-I,  ca-sum,  (ofaH. 

oc-cid-o,         oc-cide-re,         oc-cid-I,  oc-ca-sum,         to  perish. 

re-cidere  sometimes  forms  reccidi,  as  well  as  recidi,  in  the  Perfect. 

caed-o,  caede-re,  ce-cid-i,  cae-sum,  tofeU. 

oc-cid-o,         oc-cide-re,         oc-cid-i,  oc-ci-sum,         to  kill. 

can-o,  cane-re,  ce-cin-i,  (can-turn),         losing. 

Compounds  form  the  Pf.  in  -ui.    For  (cantum),  cantatum  was  used. 

parc-o,  parce-re,  peperc-i  (par-si),  (par-stirus),     to  spare. 

com-parco  (-perco),  com-parce-re,    com-pars-i,  com-par-sum,  to  save. 

parsi  is  common  in  early  Latm,  and  is  the  only  form  used  by  Plautus.  Early 
Latin  shows  rarely  parcui.    Ter.  uses  compersit,  ^ 

154.  ip)  Reduplicated  class  : 

I.  sisto  (=r  si-st-o),  as  a  simple  verb,  has  the  transitive  meaning, 
1  {cause  to)  standi  but  in  its  compounds,  the  intransitive  meaning,  / 
stand.     Compare  sto,  I  stand,  and  its  compounds  (151)  : 

sist-o,  siste-re,  (stit-I),        sta-tum,    to  {cause   to) 

stand. 
So  the  compounds : 

con-sist-0,         c5n -siste-re,         c5n-stit-i,  cOn-sti-tum,  to  come  to  a  stand. 

de-sist-o  (ab-),  dg-siste-re,  dg-stit-i,  dg-sti-tum,     to  stand  off. 


io6 


LIST   OF   VERBS 


re-siste-re,  re-stit-i, 

ad-siste-re,  ad-stit-i, 

in-siste-re,  in-stit-i, 

circum-siste-re,  circum-stet-i, 

bi-be-re,  bi-bi, 

The  Pf.  Part,  is  late. 


ex-sti-tum, 
ob-sti-tum, 

re-sti-tum, 


(bi-bi-tus), 


to  stand  up. 

to   take  a  stand 

against, 
to  ivithstand. 
to  stand  near, 
to  stand  upon, 
to  take  a  stand 

round. 
to  drink. 


ex-sist-6,  ex-siste-re,  ex-stit-i, 

ob-sist-o,  ob-siste-re,  ob-stit-i, 

re-sist-(5, 
ad-sist-o, 
in-sist-o, 
circum-sist-o, 

2.  bi-bo, 

No  Supine. 

165.  (c)  Nasal  class: 

fall-5,  falle-re,  fe-fell-i,  fal-sum,  to  cheat. 

Tiie  compound  refello  has  the  Perfect  refelli,  and  lacks  Supine. 

pell-0,  pelle-re,  pe-pul-I,  pul-sum,        to  push,  drive  hack, 

repello  loses  the  reduplicating  vowel  in  Pf.  reppuli. 

toll-6,  toUe-re,  —  —  to  lift  up. 

Pf.  and  Sup.  are  formed  sus-tull  (from  reduplicated  Pf.  tetuli,  171,  n.  1)  and  snb- 
latum  (for  t'la-tum.)  ;  a  recent  view  makes  su-Stuli  from  (Sjtollo. 
(pang-0),  (pange-re),        pe-pig-i,  pac-tum,  (o  drive  a  bargain. 

The  Pr.  forms  are  supplied  by  paciscor,  1G5.    The  Pf.  pegi,  rare  in  the  simple 
form,  is  regular  in  the  compounds  com-,  im-,  op-.    See  149,  b. 


to  touch. 

to  border  upon. 

to  hang  (trans.). 
to  stretch. 


tang-5  (tag),     tange-re,  te-tig-i,  tac-tum, 

at-ting-o,       at-tinge-re,       at-tig-i,  at-tac-tum, 

So  with  other  compounds. 

pend-0,  pende-re,         pe-pend-i,  pgn-sum, 

tend-5,  tende-re,  te-tend-i,    t5n-sum  and  -turn, 

ex-tend-5,       ex-tende-re  ex-tend-i,    ex-ten-sum  and  -tum,  to  stretch  out. 
os-tend-o,       os-tende-re,  os-tend-i,    os-ten-sum  (-tus),        to  stretch  at,  shotc. 
The  compounds  prefer  the  Sup.  in  -tum ;  so  always  attentus,  contentus,  usually 
distentus  and  intentus. 

pung-5,  punge-re,  pu-pug-i,        punc-tum,  toimck. 

inter-pung5,  inter-punge-re,  inter-punxi,  inter-punc-tum,    to  place  points 

betiveen. 
tund-5,  tunde-re,  tu-tud-i,         tun-sum,  tu-sum,  to  thump. 

Simple  form  has  usually  tunsus  in  the  Participle  ;  in  the  compounds  more  often 
ttisus.    The  reduplicating  vowel  is  lost  in  rettudl. 

curr-5,  curre-re,  cu-curr-I,  cur-sum,  tot^n. 

The  compounds  vary  in  their  use  of  tlie  reduplication  ;  praecurrere  always  has 
the  redupliculion,  succurrere  always  omits  it ;  other  compounds  vary.    See  134,  iii. 

156.  {d)  Inchoative  class: 

dlsc5  (=  di-d(e)c-sc5),        disce-re,       di-dic-i,         to  learn. 

A  late  form  is  Fut.  Part,  discitiirus.  Compounds  retain  reduplication.   See  134,  m. 

p68c-5  (=  porc-sco),  posce-re,      po-p5sc-I,       to  claim. 

Compounds  retain  the  reduplication.    See  134,  m. 

157.  (^)  Thel-class: 

pari-9,  pare-re,  pe-per-I,      par-tum  (paritflrus\  to  bt^ngfoi-th. 

The  compounds  drop  the  reduplication  and  form  the  Inf.  in  -Ire.    Butreperlre^ 
i4>find,  forme  its  Pf.,  repperl,  with  omission  of  the  vowel  of  reduplication. 


ACCORDING  TO  THi:  PERFECT  FORM. 


107 


I 


iu-tum  (iuvattirus),  to  help. 
-iti-tum  (-iu-turus),   to  standby  as  aid. 
lau-tum  ilo-tum),      to  wash. 
lava-turn,  to  icash. 


PEEFECT:  -i;    SUPINE:  -turn,  -sum, 

158.  In  the^rs^  conjugation  : 

mv-5,  iuva-re,  iuv-i, 

ad-iuv-S,        -iuva-re,         -iuv-i, 
(lav-o),  (lav-ere),        lav-i, 

lav-o,  lava-re,  dava-vi), 

The  Present  forms  of  lavere  belong  principally  to  early  Latin,  with  occasional 
forms  in  Augustan  poets  and  lute  writers  ;  lautum  and  lotum  are  both  used  in  class- 
ical times  ;  but  lautum  belongs  rather  to  early,  lotum  to  post-classical  Latin.  The 
form  lavatum  is  early  and  poetical. 

159.  In  the  second  conjugation  ; 

cave-o,  cav§-re,  cav-I,  cau-tum,       to  take  heed. 

fave-o,  fave-re,  fav-i,  fau-tum,       to  be  well-disposed. 

ferve-o  (0),         fervS-ro  (ere),    ferv-i  (ferb-ui),        — ■        to  seethe. 

Tlie  Pr.  forms  of  the  third  conjugation  belong  to  early  Latin  and  the  poets.  The 
Pf.  in  -ui  is  post-Ciceronian. 

fove-0,  fov6-re,  fSv-I,  fo-tum,  to  keep  wat-m. 

move-o,  movg-ro,  mov-i,  mo-tum,  to  move. 

pave-o,  pav6-re,  pav-i,  to  quake  {with  fear). 

prande-o,  prand6-re,  prand-i,  prau-sum,  tobreakfaet. 

sede-o,  sedS-re,  sgd-i,  ses-sum,  to  sit. 

stride-o  (-do),  stride-re(-e-re),  strid-i,  to  whistle,  screech. 

vove-o,  vov§-re,  v5v-i,  v3-tum,       to  vow. 

The  Present  forms  of  the  third  conjugation  belong  almost  entirely  to  Augustan  poets 
and  later  writers. 


vide-0,  vidg-re,  vid-I, 

160.  Ill  the  third  conjugation  : 
With  long  vowel  in  the  Perfect. 
I.   The  Stem  class: 


vl-8um, 


to  see. 


ag-o, 

age-re. 

6g-I, 

Sc-tum, 

to  do,  drive. 

co-g-o, 

co-ge-re. 

CO-gg-i, 

co-ac-tum. 

to  compel. 

dg-g-5. 

de-ge-re, 

to  pass  (time). 

red-ig-5, 

red-ige-re, 

red-gg-I, 

red-ac-tum, 

to  bring  back. 

em-o, 

eme-re, 

gm-I, 

emp-tum, 

to  take,  to  buy. 

inter-im-o. 

-ime-re. 

-gm-i. 

-gmp-tum. 

to  make  away  tvith. 

CO-em-6,  /  buy  np,  is  conjugated  like  em-0.    But  the  compounds  with  ad-,  ex-, 
inter-,  red-,  take  -im-5.    So,  too,  dir-im-o,  /  sever. 

ed-5,  ede-re,  ed-i,  g-sum,  to  eat. 

Note.— In  agere,  edere,  emere,  the  reduplication  has  coalesced  with  the  root ;  as, 
ggi  =  eagi. 

cud-5,  cade-re,  (cud-i), 

The  Pf.  and  Sup.  occur  in  compounds  only. 


(ctl-sum),         to  hammer. 


io8 


LIST   OF   VERBS 


leg-o,  lege-re,  leg-i,  16c-tum,  to  pick  up,  read. 

col-lig-6,         col-lige-re,        col-lgg-i,  col-16c-tum,       to  gather. 

So  the  other  compounds,  except  di-lig-0,  intel-leg-0,  neg-leg-0,  see  147, 2. 

ic-o  (defective),   ice-re,  ic-i,  ic-tum,  to  strike. 

Present  stem  rare :  ic-it,  ic-itur,  ic-imur. 


8id-5,                side-re,             sid-i. 

The  Pf .  was  originally  reduplicated  as  the  Present ;  see  133, 11. 
Pf.  is  -sgdi,  -sessum, /rom  sede-o,  thus  : 
con-sld-o,       con-side-re,       con-sed-i,             con-ses-sum 

to  sit  doxcn. 
In  composition  the 

,,      to  settle  down. 

scab-o, 

scabe-re, 

scab-i, 

to  scratch. 

solv-o, 

solve-re, 

solv-i. 

solu-tum, 

to  loose,  pay. 

vert-o, 
re-vert-or, 

verte-re, 
re-vert-i, 

vert-i, 
revert-i  (active). 

ver-sum, 
re-ver-sum, 

to  turn. 

to  turn  back. 

verr-o, 

verre-re, 

verr-I  (rare), 

ver-sum, 

to  siveep. 

vis-o, 

vise-re, 

vis-I, 

to  visit. 

volv-o, 

volve-re, 

volv-i, 

volu-tum. 

to  roll. 

On  percello,  perculi,  see  144.    On  toUo,  sustull,  see  155. 


2.   The  Nasal  class : 


psall-o,  psalle-re,  psall-I, 

sall-o,  salle-re,  (sall-i), 

Very  rare  except  in  the  past  participle  salsus. 

vell-0,  velle-re,  vell-i  (vul-si). 

The  Pf.  vulsl  is  post  Augustan. 


lamb-0, 
rump-o, 
ac-cend-5, 
dS-fend-o, 

fund-5  (fud) 
iiiaud-5, 
pando, 
pan-f 


lambe-re, 
rumpe-re, 
ac-cende-re, 
ds-fende-re, 

funde-re, 

mande-re, 

pande-re, 

in  Supine  is  late. 


lamb-i, 
rup-i, 
ac-cend-I, 
de-fend-i, 

fud-i, 

mand-I, 

pand-I, 


to  play  on  the  cithern, 

sal-sum,       to  salt. 


vul-sum, 


rup-tum, 

ac-c6n-sum, 

dg-fgn-sum, 

fti-sum, 

man-sum, 

pas-sum, 


prehend-5,        prehende-re,     prehend-i, 
Often  shortened  to  pr6ndo,  prfindere,  pr6ndi, 


scand-5,  scande-re, 

a(d)-,  d5-8cend-5,  d6-scendere. 


scand-i, 
de-scend-i, 


frang-5, 

per-firing-6, 
linqu-5, 

re-linqu-5, 
(pang-5), 

com-ping-5, 
See  149,  b,  155. 

vino-5  (VIC), 


frange-re,         fr6g-I, 
per-fringe-re,   per-fr6g-I, 


to  pluck. 

to  lick, 
to  break, 
to  kindle, 
to  strike 
defend, 
to  j)om\ 
to  chew, 
to  spread  out. 


away. 


preh6n-sum,      to  seize. 
prSnsum. 


linque-re, 
re-linque-re, 
(pange  re), 
com-pinge  re, 

yince-re, 


llqu  t, 
re-liqu  I, 

(p6g-i), 
corn-peg  I, 

vic-l, 


scan-sum, 
de-scSn-sum, 
frac-tum, 
per-frac-tum, 

re-lic-tum, 
(pac-tum), 
com-pac-tum, 

vic-tum. 


to  climb, 
toclbnb  up,  down 
to  break, 
to  shiver, 
to  leave, 
to  leave  behind, 
to  drive  in. 
to  drive  tight. 

to  conquer. 


ACCORDING  TO  THE  PERFECT  FORM. 


109 


3.   The  T-class. 

(a)  With  long  vowel  in  the  Perfect. 


capi-o  (cap-),           cape-re, 

cep-k, 

cap-turn, 

to  take. 

ac-cipi-o,             ac-cipe-re. 

ac-cep-i, 

ac-cep-tum. 

to  receive. 

faci-o,                    face-re, 

fec-i, 

fac-tum, 

totnake. 

cale-faci-o(calf.),  cale  face-re. 

cale-fec-i, 

cale-fac-tum, 

to  make  warm. 

per-fici-o,            per-fice-re, 

per-feci, 

per-fec-tum, 

to  acldeve. 

The  Pf .  was  originally  reduplicated  ;  on  Impv. 

,  fac,  see  130,  5. 

fodi-0,                    fode-re, 

f5d-i, 

fos-siim, 

to  dig. 

fagi-5,                    fuge-re, 

fug-i, 

(fug-i-turus), 

to  flee. 

iaci-o,                    iace-re, 

i6c-i, 

lac  turn, 

to  cast. 

con-ici-5,             con-ice-re. 

con-i6c-f. 

con-iec-tum, 

to  gather. 

(b)  With  short  vowel  in  the  Pf.  due  to  the  loss  of  the  reduplication 

to  cleave. 
to  split,. 


find-S,  finde-re,  fid-i,  fis-sum, 

scind-6,  scinde-re,         scid-i,  scis-snm, 

The  reduplicated  form  sci-cidi  is  found  in  early  Latin. 


161.  In  the  fourth  conjugation  : 
amici-5  forms  rarely  in  late  Latin  amid ;  see  142,  4. 


com-per-tum,    toflnd  out. 
re-per-tum,       to  find. 


com-peri-5,        com-peri-re,      com-per-i, 
re-peri-5,  re-peri  re,         rep-per-I, 

See  the  simple  verb  parere,  157. 

veni-o,  veni-re,  v6n-I,  ven-tum,  to  come. 

lu  early  Latin  sporadic  tenses  from  a  form  venere  occur,  ak  advenat,  6venat. 

162.  A  number  of  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  have  a  character- 
istic -u- ;  these  form  the  perfect  in  -I, 


ab-lu-5. 

ab-lue-re, 

ab-nu-5, 

ab-nue  re. 

acu-o, 

acue-re, 

ad-nu-6(an- 

nu-6),adnue-re, 

argu-5, 

argue-re, 

batu-5, 

batue-re, 

con-gru-O, 

con-grue-re, 

d6-libu-5, 

d6-Iibue-re, 

ex-u-5. 

ex-ue-re, 

im-bu-6. 

im-bue-re, 

in-du-5, 

in-due-re, 

lu-o, 

lue-re. 

metu-5. 

metue-re, 

minu-5, 

minue-re. 

plu-o. 

plue-re, 

ru-o, 

rue-re. 

spu-o, 

spue-re, 

statu-5, 

statue-re, 

sternu-5, 

sternue-re, 

su-o, 

sue-re, 

tribu-6, 

tribue-re, 

ab-lu-I, 

ab-nu  i, 

acu-I, 

ad-nu-I, 

argu-I, 

batu-i, 

congru-I, 

d5-Ubu-i, 

exu-i, 

im-bu-i, 

in-du-I, 

lu-i, 

metu-I, 

minu-i, 

plu-it,  pliiv 

ru-i, 

spu-i, 

statu-I, 

sternu-i, 

su-i, 

tribu-i, 


it, 


ab-lu-tum, 

(ab-nu-itur-tts), 

acu-tum, 

argu-tum, 


dS-libu-tum, 

ex-u-tum, 

im-bu-tum, 

in-du-tum, 

lu-ittir-us, 

xninfl-tum, 

ru-tum(ruitaru8)| 

spu-tum, 

stata-tum, 

sQ-tum, 
tribu-tum, 


to  wash  off. 
to  dissent. 
to  sharpen, 
to  nod  assent. 
to  accuse, 
to  beat, 
to  agree. 
to  anoi?if. 
to  ]mt  off,  dof. 
to  dip,  dye. 
tojmt  on.,  don, 
to  atone/or. 
to/ear. 
to  lessen, 
to  rain, 
to  rush  dawn, 
to  spetc. 
CO  settle, 
to  sneeze, 
to  sew. 
to  allot. 


I  lO  DEPONENTS. 


DEPONENTS. 

163.  The  majority  of  the  deponent  verbs  belong  to  the  first  conju- 
gation. In  many  instances  they  have  parallel  active  forms  in  early  or 
in  late  Latin.     The  principal  verbs  are  as  follows  : 

In  the ^rs^  conjugation  : 

adul-or,  adula-rl,  adula-tus  sum,  tofawnicpon. 

Occubionally  active  in  aute  classical  Latin  (Lucr.  v.,  1070)  and  more  often  in  later 
I>atin. 

alterc-or,  alterca-rf ,  alterca-tus  sum,  to  wrangle. 

In  early  Latin  altercasti  (Ter,,  And.  C53),  altercas.  Active  forms  more  common 
in  late  Latin. 

arbitr-or,  arbitra-ri,  arbitra-tus  sum,  to  think. 

Plaut.  uses  tiiis  verb  also  as  an  active,  but  later  this  nsage  is  rare. 

aucup-or,  aucupa-ri,  aucupa-tus  sum,  to  try  to  catch. 

Active  forma  are  common  in  early  Latin. 

augur-or,  augura-ri,  augura-tus  sum,  to  take  the  auguries. 

Active  forms  are  early,  legal,  and  late.  Vse  as  a  passive  is  occasional  in  the  clas- 
sical period. 

aiispic-or,  auspica-ri,  auspica-tus  sum,  to  take  the  auspices. 

Active  forms  are  early  and  late.  Cic.  ar.d  Livy  use  the  verb  as  a  passive  in  a  few 
instances. 

comit-or,  comita-ri,  comita-tus  sum,  to  accompany. 

Poets  (Ov.,  Prop.,  etc.)  use  the  active  forms  frequently.  The  Perfect  Part.  comitS- 
tu8  is  common  as  a  passive,  also  in  classical  Latin. 

comment-or,       commenta-ri,      commenta-tus  sum,       to  discuss. 
Cic.  uses  commentatus  as  a  passive  in  7>y.  88,  301,  Fam.  xvi.,  26, 1. 

cQnfllct-or,  c3nfllcta-rl,        c5nflicta-tus  sum,  to  struggle. 

Occasionally  found  for  confllctare.    See  Ter.,  And  ,  93. 

cSnspic-or,  conspica-ri,        conspica-tus  sum,         to  descry. 

So  dSspicor,  sQspicor.  But  a  few  forms  are  occasionally  (usually  in  early  Latin) 
used  as  passives,  especially  dSspicatUS  (Plaut.,  Ter.),  compared  dgspicStissimus 
by  C;ic.  {Sest.  16,  36,  Verr.  in.,  41,  98).    Plaut.,  Cas.  394,  suspicSs. 

contempl-or,       contempla-rl,     contempla-tus  sum,      to  survey. 
The  active  forms  are  used  frequently  in  early  Latin  (regularly  by  Plaut.). 

cOpul-or,  c5pula-ri,  copula-tus  sum,  to  join. 

So  Plaut.,  Aul.  IIG.    Otherwise  everywhere  copulare. 

crimin-or,  crimina-ri,         crimina-tus  sum,  to  charge. 

Plaut.  uses  criminaret,  Ennius  criminat. 

cunct-or,  cuncta-ri,  cuncta-tus  sum,  to  delay. 

Active  forms  are  occasional  in  early  and  late  Latin. 

dign-or,  dIgnS-fi,  digna-tus  sum,  to  deem  ivorthy. 

This  verb  is  predominantly  post-classical  and  poetical.  The  active  forms  are  earlj 
and  rare  ;  perhaps  onoc  iu  Cicero. 


DEPONENTS.  Ill 

fat)rIc-or,  fabrica-ri,  fabrica-tus  sum,  to  forge. 

Tlie  active  forms  belong  to  poetry  and  to  post- Augustan  prose. 

faener-or,  faenera-ri,  faenera-tus  sum,  to  lend  on  interest. 

Active  forms  occasional  in  early  Latin  and  more  frequent  in  late  Latin. 

fluctu-or,  fluctua-rl,  fluctua-tus  sum,  to  undulate. 

Active  forms  are  rare  in  Plaut.  and  in  Cic,  but  not  uncommon  later.     The  do« 
ponent  forms  are  post-Ciceronian. 

(for),  fii-ri,  fa-tussum,  to  speak. 

See  175,  3. 

frastr-or,  frtistra-ri,  frustra-tus  sum,  to  deceive. 

Active  forms  rare,  but  at  all  periods. 

illacrim-or,        illacrima-ri,       illacrima-tus  sum,        to  weep  over. 
In  Cic.  and  IIoR.  ;  otlierwise  active. 

interpret-or,       interpreta-ri,      interpreta-tus  sum,       to  interpret. 
Cic.  uses  interpretatus  occasionally  as  a  passive  ;  likewise  Livy  and  others. 

luct-or,  lucta-rl,  lucta-tus  sum,  to  wrestle. 

Plaut.,  Teu.,  Ennius,  Vakro  show  sporadic  forms  of  the  active. 

ludific-or,  ludifica-rl,  ludifica  tus  sum,  to  make  sport. 

Active  frequent  in  Plaut.,  and  occasionally  later, 

medic-or,  medica-ri,  medica-tus  sum,  to  heal. 

The  active  is  once  in  Plaut.,  and  frequent  in  poets  and  post-Augustan  prose. 

medit-or,  medita-rl,  medita-tus  sum,  to  think  over. 

The  form  meditatUS  is  very  commonly  found  as  a  passive. 

mfiner-or,  mtinera-ri,  mtinera-tus  sum,  to  l^estow. 

Active  forms  in  early  Latin  and  occa>^ionally  in  Cic.  and  later. 

nutric-or,  nutrica-rl,  nutrica-tus  sum,  to  sucMe. 

Active  forms  in  early  Latin. 

odOr-or,  odora-ri,  odora-tus  sum,  to  smell. 

Active  form^  occasional  at  all  periods. 

opin-or,  opina-ri,  opina-tus  sum,  to  think. 

Opino  is  frequent  in  early  Latin,  and  opinatus  as  passive  is  common  in  Cicero. 

palp-or,  palpa-rl,  palpa-tus  sum,  to  stroke. 

Is  occasional  (principally  in  early  Latin)  for  palpare. 

popul-or,  popula-ri,  popula-tus  sum,  to  ravage. 

Active  forms'in  simple  verb  and  compounds  are  early,  poetical,  and  post-classic. 

sciscit-or,  sciscita  ri,  sciscita-tus  sum,  to  inquire. 

Plaut.,  Merc.  380,  sciscitare  (active). 
scrlit-or,  scruta-ri,  scruta-tus  sum,  to  search. 

Plaut.,  Aul.  657,  perscrutavi.    The  use  as  a  passive  occurs  first  in  Seneca, 
sect-or,  secta-ri,  secta-tus  sum,  to  pursue. 

Active  forms  and  passive  usages  are  early. 
8tabul-or,  stabula-ri,  stabula-tus  sum,  to  stable. 

Active  forms  begin  with  Vergil. 

t^t-or,  ttita-rl,  tilta-tus  sum,  to  protect. 

Active  fpriug  aud  passive  usages  are  early  and  rare. 


112  DEPONENTS. 

tumultu-or,        tumultua-rl,       tumultua-tus  sum,        to  raise  a  riot 
But  Plautus  uses  active  forms  ;  and  passive  uses  are  occasional  later. 

vag-or,  vaga-ri,  vaga-tus  sum,  to  wander. 

Active  forms  belong  to  early  Lati.;. 

vener-or,  venera-rl,  venera-tus  sum,  to  reverence. 

But  Plaut  uses  venerS,  venerem ;  Veug.,  Hok.,  and  later  writers  show  passive 
uses. 

164.  Iri  the  second  conjugation  : 

fate -or,  fat§-ri,  fas-sus  sum,  to  confess. 

con-fite-or,       con-fit6-ri,  con-fes-sus  sum,  to  confess. 

Both  fateor  and  confiteor  are  used  occasionally  as  passives  by  Cic.  and  later. 

lice-or,  licS-ri,  lici-tus  sum,  to  bid  (at  a  sale). 

mere-or,  mere-ri,  meri-tus  sum,  to  deserve. 

Especially  in  the  phrases  merSrl  bene  d5  aliqu5,  to  desene  well  of  any  one. 
Otherwise  the  active  is  usual. 

misere-or,  miserS-ri,  miseri-tus  sum,  to  pity. 

In  early  Latin  the  active  forms  are  found  occasionally,  e.  j/.,  Lucr.  hi.,  881. 

poUice-or,  pollic6-ri,  poUici-tus  sum,  to  promise. 

Occasionrlly  used  as  a  passive  in  post  classical  Latin. 

re-or,  rS-rl,  ra-tus  sum,  to  think. 

Pr.  Part.  Active  is  wanting. 

tue-or,  tu6  rl,  tui-tus  (tutus)  sum,       to  protect. 

In  early  Latin  and  occasionally  later,  a  parallel  form,  tuor,  tul,  tuitus  sum, 
occurs.    For  tuitus  usually  tutatus. 

vere-or,  verS-ri,  veri-tus  sum,  to  fear. 

165.  In  the  third  conjugation  : 

aplsc-or,  aplsc-i,  ap-tussum,  to  get. 

Simple  verb  is  frequent  in  early  and  late  Latin  Of  the  compounds,  adiplscor, 
adipisci,  adeptus  sum,  is  usually  deponent  in  classical  times,  but  occurs  occasionally 
as  a  passive  in  Sall.  and  later  writers.    The  compounds  ind-,  red-,  are  rare. 

am-plect-or,        am-plect-i,  am-plex  us  sum,  to  twine  round,  embrace. 

So  the  compounds  complector,  circumplector.  in  early  Latin  active  forms  are 
occasionally  found  ;  e.  j/.,  amplectitSte,  circumplecte  (Plaut  ). 

com-min-Isc-or,  com-min-isc-i,    com-mentus  sum,         to  think  vp,  devise. 
Ovid  and  later  writers  use  commentus  as  a  passive. 

experg-isc-or,  (-reg-)     ex-perg-Isc-i,      ex-per-r6c-tus  sum,     to  (right  one's  self 

zip)  awake. 

fung-or,  fang-I,  fClnc-tus  sum,  to  discharge. 

This  verb  is  used  passively  very  rarely  :  Tek.,  Ad.  508.  Lucr.  hi.,  968.  Cic,  Sett. 
4,10. 

fru-or  (frugv-),  fru-I,  frfic-tus  (fru-i-tus)  sum,    to  enjoy. 

The  form  finiitus  is  rare  and  late. 


DEPONENTS.  113 

gradi-or,  grad-I,  gres-sus  sum,  to  step, 

ag-gredi-or,     ag-gred-i,  ag-gres-sus  sum,  to  attack. 

Occasionally  active  forms  of  the  fourtli  conjugation  are  found  in  early  Latin. 

lab-or,  lab-i,  lap-sus  sum,  to  glide. 

loqu-or,  loqu-i,  locii-tus  sum,  to  speak. 

mori-or,  mor-i,  mortu-ussum,  to  die. 

Early  Latin  sliows  parallel  forms  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  as  moriri,  Smorlrl. 
Fut.  Part,  moriturus ;  see  i;35, 11.,  3. 

nanc-isc-or,         nanc-isc-i,  nac-tus  (nanc-tus)  sum,  to  get. 

nasc-or  (gna-),    nasc-i,  nS-tus  sum,  .  to  be  bom. 

Fut.  Part,  nasciturus. 

nit-or  (gnict- 1  nit-i,  ni-sus  (nix-us)  sum,  t    to  stay  one's  self  on, 

from  genu),   *  ni-surus,  ^ 

ob-liv-isc-or,       ob-liv-isc-I,         ob-li-tus  sum,  to  forget. 

pac-isc-or,  pac-!sc-i,  pac-tus  sum  (pepigl),     to  drive  (a  bargain). 

Occasionally  active  forms  are  found  in  early  Latin  ;  in  Cic.  pactus  is  frequently 
used  as  a  passive.    See  pangS. 

pati-or,  pat-I,  pas-sus  sum,  to  suffer. 

per-peti-or,      per-pet-i,  per-pes-sus  sum,  to  endure  to  the  end. 

pro-fic-isc-or,      pro-flc-isc-i,        pro-fec-tus  sum,  to  (get  forward)  set  out. 
But  Plaut.,  31.  G.  1329,  proficiSCO. 

quer-or,  quer-i,  ques-tus  sum,  to  complain. 

sequ-or,  sequ-i,  secu-tus  sum,  to  follow. 

ulc-Isc-or,  ulc-Isc-i,  ul-tus  sum,  to  avenge. 

Active  forms  are  rare  ;  so  once  in  Ennius.  But  Sall.,  Livy,  and  later  writers  use 
the  verb  as  a  passive  sometimes. 

flt-or,  Gt-I,  u-sussum,  to  use. 

Plaut.  shows  the  compound  abusa  as  a  passive  {Asin.  196). 

veh-or,                veh-i,                   vec-tus  sum,  to  (wagon)  ride. 

vesc-or,  vesc-i,  

166.  In  the  fourth  conjugation  : 

assenti-or,  assenti-rl,  assSn-sus  sum,  to  1 

Active  forms  are  not  uncommon  in  early  Latin.  Cic.  uses  the  Pf .  active  forms  fre- 
quently ;  likewise  later  writers. 

com-peri-or,        comperi-ri,  to  find  out. 

Occasionally  found  (but  rarely  in  classical  Latin  ;  as,  Sall.,  J.,  45,  1  ;  108,  3)  for 
comperio,  comperire.  But  experior,  experiri,  expertus  sum,  to  try,  is  regularly 
deponent ;  though  Cic.  and  others  use  often  the  Pf.  active  forms. 

largi-or,  largi-ri,  largi-tus  sum,  to  bestow. 

meati-or,  menti-ri,  menti-tus  sum,  to  lie. 

The  poets  and  later  prose  writers  use  this  as  a  passive  also. 

m6ti-or,  mSti-rl,  mSn-sus  sum,  to  measure. 

Passive  usage  is  common,  especially  in  the  compounds :  dSmSnsus,  dImSnsu8| 
emSnsus,  permgnsus,  remSusus. 

8 


1 14  SEMI-DEPONENTS. 

6rdi-or,  5rdl-rl,  6r-sus  sum,  to  begin. 

Orsus,  and  more  commonly  exorsus,  are  also  found  as  passives. 

ori-or,  ori-ri,  or-tus  sum,  to  anse. 

The  Pr.  Indie,  is  usually  formed  according  to  the  third  conjugation  ;  the  Impf. 
Subjv.  always  orerer;  but  the  Put.  Part,  is  oriturus,  The  compounds  follow  the 
same  usage  except  adoriri,  to  tise  up  at,  attack,  which  follows  the  fourth  conjugation. 

parti-or,  parti-ri,  parti-tus  sum,  to  share. 

Active  forms  and  passive  uses  are  found  in  early  Latin,  and  sporadically  in  Cio. 
and  later. 

poti-or,  poti-ri,  poti-tus  sum,  to  get  possession  of. 

The  Pr.  Indie,  Impf.  Subjv.,  and  occasionally  other  forms,  are  also  found  in  early 
Latin  and  the  poets,  inflected  according  to  the  third  conjugation  ;  so  regularly  after 
Plaut.  potitur,  frequently  poteretur,  potergmur. 

puni-or,  pfinl-ri,  puni-tus  sum,  to  punish. 

Occasionally  in  Cic.  and  late  writers  for  ptinxre. 

sorti-or,  sorti-ri,  sortl-tus  sum,  to  cast  lots. 

Active  occasionally  in  early  Latin,  and  passive  uses  later  of  the  Pf.  Participle. 


SEMI-DEPONENTS. 

167.   I.  A  few  verbs  form  ilie  Perfect  forms  only  as  deponents  : 

aude-5,  aude-re,  au-sus  sum,  to  dare. 

On  the  aorist  forms  ausim,  etc.,  see  131,  4,  b. 

fid-5,  fid-ere,  fl-sus  sum,  to  trust. 

gaude-o,  gaud6-re,  gav-isus  sum,  to  rejoice. 

8ole-o,  80l6-re,  sol-itus  sum,  to  be  ivont. 

The  K.  active  is  found  in  early  Latin  ;  but  rarely. 

2.  The  reverse  usage  is  found  in  : 

re-vert-or,  re-vert-I,  re-vert-I,  to  turn  back. 

So  also  deverti,  but  without  Pf .  Part.  Beversus  is  also  used  actively,  but  revOT- 
BUS  sum  for  reverti  is  post-classic. 

See  also  assentior,  etc.,  166. 

Notes.— 1.  Some  active  verbs  have  a  Perfect  Participle  passive  with  active  mean- 
ing, as  :  cSnatus,  one  uho  has  dined,  from  cSnare,  to  dine ;  pransus,  having  break- 
fasted, from  prandeS,  /  breakfast ;  potus,  drunken,  from  p5t5,  /  drink ;  iuratus, 
hating  taken  the  oath,  sworn,  from  itlrS,  I  swear ;  coniuratus,  a  conspirator,  from 
wni^^,  I  conspire.  Many  such  are  used  purely  as  Adjectives:  c5nsideratU8,  «r- 
cumspect,  from  cSnslderSj  cautUS,  wanj,  from  caveo,  I  beware. 

2.  The  Perfect  Participle  of  many  deponent  Verl)3  has  both  active  and  passive  mean- 
ing :  adeptus  (adipiSCOr),  har.ing  acquired,  or  being  acquired  :  comitStus  (COmitor, 
I  accompany) ;  efEatus  feffor,  I  speak  out) ;  expertus  (experior,  itnj) :  exsecratus 
(exsecror,  /curse) ;  imitatus  (imitor,  Icopi/) :  meritus  (mereor,  Idese?re)  :  opl- 
natus,  necopinatus  (opinor,  /  think);  pactus  (paciscor,  /  contract):  partitua 
(partior,  J  distribute) ;  sortltus  (sortior,  least  lots) ;  tueor,  /protect ;  tutus,  sqfe. 

For  others,  see  the  list  of  deponentii. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS.  II5 

IRREGULAR    VERBS. 

168.  Irregular  in  the  formation  of  the  tense-stems  : 

1.  Nine  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation,  which  have,  in  spite  of  the 
short  stem-syllable,  the  Pf .  in  -si,  viz. : 

Clep5,  Iflhh  ;  rego,  I  keep  right ;  tego,  I  cover  in  ;  coqu5,  Tbake  ;  and  the  com- 
pounds of  lego,  Ipickvp ;  laciS,  Ilnre  ,■  specie,  Isp?/(-]igo,  -licio,  -spicio) ;  divido, 
I  part ;  quatio,  I  shake.    See  147,  2. 

From  lego,  however,  only  dlligo,  Ilove ;  intellego,  I  understand ;  and  neglego, 
neglect^  are  irregular.    The  other  compounds  are  regular.    See  147,  2. 

2.  Five  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation,  which,  in  spite  of  long  stem- 
syllable,  have  the  Pf .  in  -I,  viz. : 

lambQ  I  lick;  cud5,  I  hammer ;  sid5,  I  sit  (160,1);  stride^,  I  ivhisfle (\59)  \ 
vertQ,  I  turn  {WO,  1). 

3.  Assimilation  between  bs  and  ms  occurs  in  the  Pf.  and  Sup.  of 

iube-5,  I  order.  See  147,  1. 

prem-o  (-prim-5),  I  press.  See  147, 2. 

4.  Special  irregularities  occur  in  : 

bib-5,  Idnnk.  154,  2. 

mane-o,  I  remain.  147,  1. 

meti-or,  I  measure.  166. 

met-o,  I  mow.  142,  3. 

mori-or,  /  die.  165. 

rauci-o,  /  am  Jioarse.  150,  2. 

re-or,  /  think.  164. 

5.  Formed  from  different  tense-stems,  are  the  tenses  of 

fer-3,  I  bear.  171. 

toU-o,  Ilift-  155- 

169.  Irregular  in  the  conjugation  of  the  Present-stem  : 

1 .  ori-or,  ori-ri,  or-tus  sum,  to  arise. 

See  166. 

2.   i-re,  to  go. 
The  stem  is  i,  which,  before  a,  0,  u,  becomes  e. 

Prin.  Parts  :  eo,  Ire,  ivi  (iii,  itum. 
INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

I  go.  Ibegoi7ig. 

Pres.  Sg.— I.  e-5,  Pl.  — I-mus,  Sg.— ea-m,       Pl.— ea-mus, 

2.  1-8,  i-tis,  ea-s,  ea-tis, 

3.  i-t,  eu-nt.  ea-t,  ea-nt. 


Il6  IRREGULAR   VERBS. 

Impf.      I-ba-m,  I  went.  I-re-m,  /  were  going. 

FuT.       i-b-o,  /  shall  go. 

Perf.     i-v-i  (i-i),  /  have  gone.  i-v-eri-m  (i-eri-m). 

Plupf.    i-v-era-m  (i-era-m),  /  had  gone.        i-v-isse-m  (i-isse-m,  i-sse-m), 

Fut.Pf.  I-v-er-o  (i-er-5),  I  shall  have  go7ie. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Sg. — 2.  i,  go  thou.  I-t5,  thou  shall  go. 

3-  I- to,  he  shall  go. 

Pl. — 2.  i-te,        go  ye.  i-tote,  ye  shall  go. 

3.  eu-nto,  they  shall  go. 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  i-re.  Pres.  ig-ns  (G.  eu-nt-is). 

FuT.    i-tur-um  esse.  Fut.  i-tur-us. 
Perf.  l-v»isse  (i-sse). 

GERUND.  SUPINE. 

eu-nd-i,  etc.  i-tum,  to  go. 

Remarks. — i.  Like  the  simple  verb  are  inflected  most  of  the  com- 
pounds, except  in  the  Perfect  system,  where  syncope  regularly  takes 
place  (see  131,  2).  Ven-eo,  /  am  for  sale,  and  per-eo,  /  perish,  serve  as 
passives  to  v6n-d6,  /  sell,  and  per-d5,  /  destroy,  whose  regular  passives 
occur  only  in  the  forms  vgnditus,  v6ndendus,  and  perditus  (but  see  Hor., 
Sat.,  ii.  6,  50).  Amb-io,  I  solicit,  follows  the  fourth  conjugation  through- 
out, but  in  post-Ciceronian  writers  (Livy,  Tac,  Plin.  Min.)  shows  occa- 
sional forms  like  those  of  eS.  Some  compounds  show  occasionally  Fut. 
in  -earn  after  the  time  of  Seneca. 

2.  The  ])as.^ivc  of  the  simple  verb  is  found  only  in  the  impersonal 
forms  itur,  ibatur,  itum  est,  iri  (in  combination  with  the  Supine).  But 
compounds  with  transitive  force  are  conjugated  regularly  ;  so,  prae- 
ter-eS  forms  praeter-eor,  -iris,  Itur,  -imur,  -imini,  -euntur,  ibar,  etc.,  -itus 
sum,  eram,  erS,  -euntor,  -Itor,  -iri,  -eundus. 

3.    quire,  to  he  ahh  ;  nequire,  to  he  unable. 

170.  («)  que-O,  I  am  able,  is  found  in  the  following  forms,  of  which 
those  in  parenthesis  are  unclassical,  occurring  in  early  and  late  Latin 
and  the  poets  ;  C/Esar  uses  no  form  of  queO. 

Pr.  Indic.  queO,  (quis),  (quit),  quimus,  (quitis),  queunt.  Pr.  Suijjv.  queam, 
queas,  queat,  queamus,  queatis,  queant.  Impf.  (quibam),  (quirem).  Fut. 
(quIbO).  Pf.  quivi,  etc.;  quiverim,  etc.  Plupf.  quiverara,  < /c. ;  quivissem, 
etc.     Fut.  Pf.  quIverO,  etc.     Pr.  Inf.  quire.     Pf.  quivisse.     Part,  quiens. 

{h)  neque-6,  I  am  unable,  has  the  same  forms,  all  of  which  seem  tob8 
classic  excepting  the  Future  Indicative,  which  is  not  cited. 


IRKEGULAR   VERBS. 


117 


4.  fer-re,  to  bear. 
171.  The   endings   beginning  with  t,  s,  and  r  are  added 
directly  to  the  root  (132).     Some  parts  are  supplied  by  tul- 
(tol-,  tla-). 

Prin.  Parts  :  fer5,  ferre,  tuli,  latum. 


ACTIVE. 

INDICATIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres. 

/  hear. 

/  he  hearing. 

Sg.— I. 

fer-o,         Pl— fer-i-mus,        Sg. 

—fera-m,          Pl.— fcra-mus, 

2. 

fer-8,                  fer-tis, 

fera-s,                     fera-tis, 

3. 

fer-t,                  fer-u-nt. 

fera-t,                     fera-nt. 

Impf. 

ferS-ba-m,  /  was  hearing. 

fer-re-m,  /  were  hearing. 

Put. 

fera-m,       I  shall  hear. 

Perf. 

tul-i,          /  have  home. 

tul-eri-m. 

Plupf. 

tul-era-m. 

tul-isse-m. 

FuT.  Pf. 

tul-er-5. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Sg.— 2. 

fer,             hear  thou. 

fer-t5,          thou  shall  hear. 

3- 

fer-to,          he  shall  hear. 

PL.-2. 

fer-te,        hear  ye. 

fer-tote,       ye  shall  hear. 

3. 

feru-ntS,      they  shall  hear. 

INFINITIVE. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  fer-re. 

Pres.  fer6-ns,     hearing. 

FuT.    la-tur-um  esse. 

FuT.    la-tur-us. 

Perf.  tul-isse. 

GERUND. 

SUPINE. 

fere-nd-i,  etc. 

Ifi-ttun  (t(o)la-tum). 

PASSIVE. 

INDICATIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

I  am  home. 

I  he  home. 

PRE3.        1 

Sg. — I.  fer-o-r,     Pl. — feri-mur, 

Sg.— fera-r,    Pl  — fera-mur, 

2.  fer-ris,               feri-mini, 

fera-ris,            fera-mini, 

3.  fer-tur,             feru-ntur. 

fera-tur,           fera-ntur. 

Impf. 

fer6-ba-r. 

fer-re-r. 

Put. 

fera-r. 

Perf. 

la-tus  sum. 

la-tus  sim. 

Plupf. 

la-tus  eram. 

la-tus  essem. 

FuT.  Pf. 

la-tus  erS. 

Il8  IRREGULAR   VERBS. 

IMPERATIVE. 
Sg. — 2.  fer-re,  he  thou  home.         fer-tor,        thou  shalt  he  home. 

3.  fer-tor,        he  shall  be  home. 

Pl. — 2.  feri-mini,     he  ye  home.  

3.  feru-ntor,     thei/  shall  he  home. 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres.       fer-ri,  to  he  home.  Perf.  la-t-us,  -a,  -tun,  hor?ie. 

FuT.         la-tum  Irl.  GERUNDIVE. 

Perp.       la-tum  esse,  to  have  heen  home.  fere-nd-us. 

COMPOUNDS. 

af-fer-5,  af- fer-re,  at-tul-i,  al  la-tum,  to  bear  to. 

au-fer-o,  au-fer-re,  abs-tul-i,  ab-la-tum,  ta  bear  away. 

con-fer-6,  con-fer-re,  con-tul-i,  col-la-tum,  toadied. 

dif-fer-o,  dif-fer-re,  dis-tul-i,  dila-tum,  to  put  off. 

ef-fer-o,  ef-fer-re,  ex-tul-i,  6-la-tum,  to  carry  out. 

of-fer-o,  of-ferre,  ob-tul-i,  ob-la-tum,  to  offer. 

Notes.  1.  The  Pf.  tull  was  originally  reduplicated  te-tuli.  See  134,  iii.,  155. 
Traces  of  this  are  seen  in  rettull. 

2.  Suf-fero,  I  undergo,  has  the  Pf.  sus-tin-ui  (sus-tul-I,  Bub-la-tum,  being 
appropriated  to  toll-5).    (155.) 


5.  ed-ere,  to  eat. 

172.  In  certain  forms  the  endings  beginning  with  s,  t,  and 
r  are  added  directly  to  the  root  (132)  ;  d  before  s  (r)  is 
dropped  or  assimilated  (as  ss),  and  before  t  becomes  s. 

Pkin.  Parts  :  edS,  edere  (esse),  6di,  Ssum. 


ACTIVE. 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 

I  eat.  I  he  eating. 

Sg. — I.  ed-3,            Pl. — edi-mus,  Sg. — eda-m,        Pl. — eda-mus, 

2.  edi-s,  e-s,               edi-tis,  6s-tis,  eda-s,                   eda-tis, 

eda-nt. 


3- 

edi-t,  e-st. 

edu-nt. 

eds 

Impp. 

edS-ba-m, 

late. 

ede-re-m,  \ 

Fut. 

eda-m. 

Pkrf. 

6d-I. 

6d-eri-m. 

Plupf. 

6d-era-m. 

gd-isse-m. 

Fut.  Pp. 

6d-er.5. 

IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


119 


Sg.- 

-2.  ede,  68, 

IMPERi 
eat  thou. 

^TIVE. 

edi-to,  gs-t5,           thou  shalt  eat. 

3-  

edi-to,  es-to,            he  shall  eat. 

Pl.~ 

-2.  edi-te,  es-te, 

eat  ye. 

edi-tote,  gs-tote,     ye  shall  eat. 

3-  

edu-nto,                  tliey  shall  eat 

INFINITIVE. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Pres, 

ede-re,  6s-se, 

toeai. 

Pees,    (edg-ns). 

Put. 

es-ur-um  esse. 

Fur.      es-ur-us. 

Perf. 

6d-isse. 

GERUND. 

SUPINE. 

ede-nd-I,  etc. 

es-um,  6s-tU 

PASSIVE. 

In  the  passive  voice  the  only  peculiarities  are  as  follows:  Pr.  Indie. 
Sin?.  Third,  editur  and  Sstur.  Impf.  Subjv.  Sing.  Third,  ederStur  and 
essetur.    The  Pf.  Part,  is  6sus  and  the  Gerundive  edendus. 

Note.— In  the  Pr.  Subjv.  Active,  early  Latin  sbows  edim,  edis,  edit,  edimus, 
editis,  edint.  Also  gssum  and  gssu  in  the  Sup.,  gssurns  in  the  Fut,  Part.  Come- 
dere  also  siiov\  s  comestus  for  comSsus. 

6.  fi-eri,  to  become, 

173.  K-5  is  conjugated  m  the  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future, 
according  to  the  fourth  conjugation,  but  in  the  Subjunctive  Imperfect 
and  in  the  Infinitive  tlie  stem  is  increased  by  e;  thus,  fi-e-rem,  I  were 
becoming ;  fi-e-ri,  to  become.  In  these  forms  the  i  is  short,  but  else- 
wliere  it  is  long  even  before  another  vowel. 

The  Infinitive  ends  in  -11,  and  the  whole  Verb  in  the  Present-stem 
is  treated  as  the  Passive  to  facio,  /  make.  The  rest  of  the  Passive  is 
formed  regularly  from  faei5. 

Prin.  Pakts  :  flS,  fieri,  factus  sum. 


ACTIVE. 

PASSIVE. 

Pres,       faciS,         I  make. 

INDIC. 

fI5,  I  am  made,  I  become. 
fig,  fit  (fimus,  fitis),  fiunt. 

Impf.      faciebam,  I  made. 

figbam,  I  was  made,  I  became. 

Fut,        faciam,     I  shall  make 

fiam,  /  shall  be  made  (becomei 

Perf.       fgci. 

factus  sum. 

Plupf.    fgceram. 

factus  eram. 

Fut.  Pf.  fgcerO. 

factus  ero. 

SUBJV.  faciam,  etc. 

SUBJV. 

fiam,  fias,  fiat,  etc. 

facerem,  etc. 

fierem,  fiergs,  etc. 

INFINITIVE. 

INFINITIVE. 

facere,  etc. 

Pres. 

fieri. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Perf. 

factum  esse,  to  have  become. 

(fi),            (fi-to). 

Fut. 

futlirum  esse  or  fore. 

(fi-te). 

Fut.  Pf. 

factum  fore. 

I20 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


Notes.— 1.  Occasionally  in  early  Latin  the  form  fiere  is  found  for  the  Tnfinltivfl^ 
which  indicates  that  the  verb  was  originally  active.  The  forms  fieri  and  flerem  are 
very  common  in  early  Latin,  along  with  the  normal  forms.  01  the  forms  in  parenthe- 
sis flmus  and  fitis  do  not  certainly  occur,  and  the  Imperative  forms  are  early.  Pas- 
give  forms  of  fio  are  very  rare  ;  never  in  Plautus  or  Terence. 

2.  The  compounds  of  facio  with  Prepositions  change  the  a  of  the  stem  into  i,  and 
form  the  Passive  in  classical  Latin  regularly  from  the  same  stem  :  perficio,  /  achieve^ 
Pass,  perficior ;  interficio,  Pass,  interficior,  lam  destroyed.  But  interheri,  cSn- 
fierent,  confieri,  and  several  other  forms  are  found  in  early  Latin,  and  occasionally 
in  classical  times.  When  compounded  with  words  other  than  prepositions,  faciS 
retains  its  a,  and  uses  fio  as  its  Passive : 

patefacio,  I  lay  open,  Pass.  pateflS ;  calefaciS,  /  warm.  Pass.  calefiS. 

For  the  accent,  see  15,  2,  r.  2. 


174. 


PRIN. 


7.  veUe,  to  he  loilling. 
nolle,  to  he  tinivilling  ;  malle,  to  he  williiig  rather. 

Parts  :  V0I8,  velle,  volul ;  n513,  nSlle,  nSluI ;  maW,  malle,  maluL 


INDICATIVE. 

Pres. 

voia, 

n5l5, 

mal9, 

vis, 

nSn  vis, 

mavis, 

TUlt, 

non  vult, 

mavult. 

volumus, 

nolumus, 

malumus, 

vultis, 

non  vultis. 

mavultis, 

voltuit. 

aolunt. 

malunt. 

Impt. 

volebanSj, 

ndlsbam, 

malebam. 

FlTT. 

volam, 

nolam, 

malam. 

▼oles,  etc. 

nolgs,  etc. 

males,  etc. 

pKRy. 

Tolni, 

nOlu!, 

malul,  etc. 

Plupt. 

Tolueram, 

n5lueram, 

malueram,  eto» 

FUT.  Pf. 

.  voluerO, 

nSluerO, 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 

maluer5,  etc. 

Pwe». 

velim. 

n5Um, 

malim, 

veils, 

nOlIs, 

malls, 

velit, 

nSlit, 

malit. 

yelimufr. 

nSlimus, 

mallmuff, 

velitis, 

nOlitis, 

malitis, 

reUnt. 

nOlint. 

malint. 

Impf. 

▼ellem. 

nOllem, 

mSllem. 

PERr. 

voluerim, 

nDluerim, 

maluerim,  etc. 

Fluff. 

voluissem, 

nOluissem, 

m&luissem,  etCc 

DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 


12 


IMPV.      (fac  velis\ 

Sg. 

—noli,  nolito. 

Pl. 

— nolite,  nolitote,  noluntS. 

INF.  Pr.  velle, 

nolle,                            malle. 

Pf.  voluisse, 

nSlnisse,                       maluisse. 

PART,      volens, 

nolSns. 

Notes.— 1.  To  the  time  of  Cicero,  and  occasionally  later,  volt,  voltis,  are  employea 
for  vult,  vultis.  In  familiar  language  si  viS,  si  vultis,  were  contracted  to  sis, 
sultis  ;  vis  was  further  combined  with  -ne  Into  vin. 

2.  Nolo  is  a  contraction  of  nevolo  (=  n5n  volo),  and  in  early  Latin  we  find,  along 
with  the  forms  given  above,  also  nevis,  nevolt ;  also  occasionally  we  find  non  velis, 
nQn  velit,  non  velint,  non  vellem,  for  nolis,  etc. ;  but  the  feeling  is  slightly  different. 

3.  Malo  =  ma  volo,  from  niag(niage,  magis)-volo.  Frequently  in  Plaut.,  but 
iarely  in  Ter.,  we  find  mavolo,  mavolunt,  ma  volet,  mavelim,  -is,  -it,  ma  vellem, 
instead  of  malo,  malim,  malis,  etc. 


176.  DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 

I.  aid,  I  say  aye. 

INDIC.    pREs.  Sg. — I.  aiO,  2.  ais,  3.  ait,         Pl. — 3.  aiunt. 

Impf.  aiSbam,  etc. 

Perf.  3-   ait. 

SUBJV.   Pres.  Sg. —  2.  aias,         3.  aiat,  3.  aiant. 

PART.     aiSns  (as  adj.),  affirmative.  IMPV.  aj^ 

Note.— In  early  Latin  ain  (=  aisne  V)  was  scanned  often  as  a  monosyllable  ;  and 
in  the  Impf.,  aibam,  aibS>S,  aibat,  aibant  were  frequently  employed  along  with  the 
normal  forms.  The  Impv.  is  rare,  and  found  only  in  early  Latin.  Pr.  Subjv.  aiam  is 
emended  into  Pl.,  Ep.,  281. 


2.   inquam,  /  say,  quoth  I. 


I.  mquam, 
I.  inquimus, 


INPIC.    Pres.     Sg 
Pl 

Impf.     Sg. — 

FuT.      Sg. — 

Perf.    Sg. — I.  inquii, 
IMPV.  inque,  inquitO. 


2.  mquis, 

2.  inquitis, 

2.  inquigs, 

2.  inquisti. 


3.  inquit. 
3.  inquiunt. 
3.  inquiebat, 
3.  inquiet. 
3.  inquit. 


3.  fa-ri,  to  speak. 

INDIC.  Pres.  fatur.  Fut.  fabor,  fabitur.  Pert,  fatus  sum,  e^(?.  IMPV.  fare. 
PART.  Pres.   fans,  fantis,  fanti,  fantem.     GER.  fandi,  fando.     SUP.   fata. 

Note.— In  addition  to  these,  compounds  show  also  Pres.  :  -faris,  -famur,  -famini, 
-fantur ;  Impf.  :  -fabar,  -fabantur ;  Fut.  :  -fabere,  -fabimur ;  Part.  :  -fante 

and  others.  These  foni:s,  r.s  well  as  the  uncom pounded  forms,  though  occasionally 
found  in  prose,  are  pecidiar  to  the  poets  until  post-Augnstan  limes.  The  Pf.  Part,  iu 
eometimes  used  passively  ;  so  eej^ecially  fStum,/i7/<; ;  effStus,  dengnated. 


122  DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 


4.  have-re  (ave-re),  salve-re. 

IMPV.  havg,  salvS,  salvebis,  hail  thou  ! 

havgtd,  salvetd. 

havSte,  salvgte,  hail  ye ! 

INF.     havere,  salv6re. 

Corresponding  to  these  are  the  forms  of  valire,  viz. :  val5,  valete, 
valSre,  farewell. 

5.  coepi,  memini,  odi,  novl. 

In  use  only  in  the  Perfect-stem  are  coepi,  / /mt'e  begun,  which  serves 
as  a  Perfect  to  incipiS,  and  memini,  /  remember,  5di,  /  hate,  novi  (from 
nosco,  see  131,  3,  140),  /  k7ioiv,  am  aware,  cSnsuevi  (from  consugscS),  / 
am  wont,  which  have  the  force  of  Presents. 

a.  INDIC.  coepi,         /  have  begun.        SUBJV.  coeperim. 
coeperam.  coepissem. 

coepero.  INF.        coepisse,     to  have  begun. 

Note.— Early  Latin  shows  coepio,  coepias,  coepiat,  coepiam,  coepere,  coeperet. 
Future  Participle  coeptUTUS  is  Post-Augustiui.    Incepi  is  ante-classical. 

Passive  forms  coeptus  sum,  ete.,  occur  with  the  same  meaning  in  combination  with 
a  Passive  Infinitive.    Sec  423,  n.  3. 

f 
h.  INDIC.  memini,         I  remember,      SUBJV.  meminerim. 
memineram.  meminissem. 

meminero.  INF.       meminisse,     to  remember, 

IMPV.    Sg. — memento.  Pl. — mementote. 

c.  INDIC.  5di,  I  hate,  SUBJV.  oderim. 

5deram.  odissem. 

OderO.  INF.       5disse,     to  hate. 

FUT.  PART,  osurus. 

Note.— Occasionally  in  early  Latin,  the  poets,  and  later  prose,  deponent  forms  of  the 
Perfect  are  found,  OSUS  sum,  etc.    For  the  Passive  the  phrase  odi5  esse  is  used. 

d.  INDIC.  n5vl.  SUBJV.  noverim  (norim). 

nOveram  (noram).  novissem  (nossem). 

nOverS  (n5r5).  INF.       nOvisse  (nosse)      to  hioio. 

6.  cedo,  quaeso. 
Other  defective  forms  are  : 

Sg. — cedo,       give  I  (old  Impv.)  Pl. — cette. 

INDIC.  Pres.  quaes5,  please  (i.  e.,  I  seek,  beg),  quaesumus. 

Note.— Other  forms  of  quaesO  are  found  occasionally  in  early  Latin,  and  sporadl- 
cally  in  Cic,  Sali..,  and  later  ;  the  Pf .  forms  have  been  attached  to  quaerere,  137,  c. 


K/RMATIOJ^   OF   WORDS.  1 23 

FORMATION    OF    WORDS. 

176.  By  the  formation  of  words  is  meant  the  way  in  which 
stems  are  made  of  roots,  new  stems  of  old,  and  in  which 
words  are  compounded. 

177.  All  roots  of  the  Latin  language  are  probably  mono- 
syllabic. *    They  can  be  ascertained  only  by  scientific  analysis. 

The  difference  between  Root  and  Stem  has  been  set  forth  in  25,  nn. 
Sometimes  the  Stem  is  the  same  as  the  Hoot  ;  so  especially  in  the  Root 
Verbs  (182).     But  it  is  usually  different. 

178.  Words  are  either  simple  or  compound. 

A  simjile  word  is  one  that  is  formed  from  a  single  root : 
sol,  sun;  sta-re,  stand,  staij. 

A  compound  word  is  one  that  is  mado  up  of  two  or  more 
roots  :  s5l-stiti-um,  sun-staying ,  solstice. 

A.— Simple  Words. 

179.  Simple  words  are  partly  jprimitive,  partly  derivative 
or  secondary. 

1.  Primitive  words  come  from  the  root,  and  as  this  usually  appears 
in  the  simplest  form  of  tlie  verb-stem,  primitive  words  are  called 
verbals.  Examples  are  the  root- verbal  forms  (134,  11.,  182,  135,  i.), 
some  substantives  of  the  third  declension,  as  dux  (duc-s),  leader,  root 
due  (see  183,  i),  many  substantives  of  the  first,  second,  and  fourth 
declensions,  as  :  scrib-a  (scribo,  /  write),  scribe. 

2.  Derivative  words  are  formed  from  a  noun-stem  ;  hence  called 
denominatives :  vetus-tas,  at/e,  from  vetes-  (N.  vetus),  old. 

Note.— Denominative  verbs  include  many  verbs  vv-hich  cannot  definitely  be  referred 
to  any  substantive  ;  such  as  many  frequentatives  and  intensives.  In  its  narrower  sig- 
nification the  term  refers  to  the  special  class  of  verbs  made  from  substantives  in  use. 

180.  Substantives  are  generally  formed  by  means  of  a  suf- 
fix. A  suffix  is  an  addition  to  a  stem,  and  serves  to  define  its 
meaning  or  show  its  relations.  So  from  the  verbal  stem  scrib- 
(scribo,  I  tvrite)  comes  scrip-tor,  wr it-er ;  scTVp'tio(ii),  writ-ing. 

*  The  theory  of  monosyllabic  roots  is  adopted  here  as  being  somewhat  more  con- 
venient than  the  theory  of  polysyllabic  roots,  now  held  by  some  important  scholars. 
Of  course  it  will  be  understood  that  the  actual  existence  of  mere  roots  can  be  assumed 
only  for  a  very  early  period  in  the  development  or  language,  long  before  the  indepen- 
dent existence  of  Latin. 


124  FORMATION    OF   WORDS. 

Suffixes  are  either  primary  or  secondary.  A  primary  suffix  is  one 
added  to  a  root  (or  verb  stem)  to  form  primitive  words.  A  secondary 
suffix  is  one  used  in  the  formation  of  derivative  words.  Thus,  -tor  in 
scrip-tor  is  a  primary  suffix  ;  -tas  in  vetus-tas  is  secondary. 

Notes.— 1.  By  the  fading  out  of  the  difEerence  between  primarj-  and  secondary  suf- 
fixes, primary  suffixes  come  to  be  used  sometimes  to  form  secondary  derivatives. 

2.  Consonant  stems  before  consonant  suffixes  undergo  the  usual  changes  (9).  So 
scrib-tor  becomes  scrip-tor ;  reg-s  becomes  rex,  Stems  are  sometimes  extended  by 
a  vowel,  usually  i,  less  often  u,  to  facilitate  pronunciation  :  val-i-dus,  strong ;  doc- 
U-meiituni,  proof;  sometimes  they  change  the  stem  vo\\  el :  teg,  cover  ;  tog-a,  for/a ; 
tug-uriura,  hut. 

3.  Vowel  stems  lengthen  the  final  vowel :  acu-,  shai^ien ;  acu-men,  sharp  part^ 
point. 

The  final  vowel  often  disappears  before  the  suffix  :  opta-,  choose  ;  opt-io,  choice. 

181.  FORMATION    OF    SUBSTANTIVES. 

The  suffixes,  as  applied  to  various  roots,  have  often  special  func- 
tions, and  form  words  of  definite  meaning.  The  most  important  are 
as  follows : 

1.  Agency  is  indicated  by 

-tor,  -trie  (N.  tor  (m.),  trix  (/.)):  ama-tor,  lover;  vic-trix,  con- 
qiieress  ;  occasionally  -ter  (N.  ter,  G.  -tri)  :  ar-bi-ter  (=  ad  +  ba,  step\ 
umpire;  -on  (N.  o,  G.  onis):  com-bib-o  {fellow-drinker),  boon  compan- 
ion; occasionally -o,  -«  (N.  -us, -a)  :  serv-os,  slave;  scrib-a,  scribe; 
-OHO,  -on a  (N.  6nu-s,  -ona) :  col-onu-s,  settler  ;  -(/)^  (N.  es,  G.  itis): 
xnil-es,  soldier,  and  a  few  others. 

2.  Action,  Activity,  and  Event  are  indicated  by 

a.  -tu  (N.  tu-s,  su-s,  G.  -us)  :  ad-ven-tus,  arrival ;  -tri-iia  (N. 
trina) :  doc-trina,  instructiori;  -Iti-a  (N.  -Ina)  :  rap-ina,  rapi7ie;  -men 
(N.  men,  G.  min-is) :  ag-men,  train;  'inento  (N.  mentum) :  tor-mentu-m, 
torture;  S'la  {ella) ;  loqu-ela,  speech;  quer-6la,  complaint;  "Cinio 
(N.  -u-m) :  latro ciniu-m,  highway  robbery;  -mbnio,,  "inonia  (N. 
m5iiia,  m5niu-m) :  queri -raonia,  complaint ;  testi-moniu-m,  testimony. 

b.  Abstracts.  Mascuhne  :  -os  (N".  -or,  G.  -or-is) :  ang-or,  anguish. 
Feminine  :  -on  (N.  do,  g5,  G.  in-is) :  ima-?^5,  image;  cup-i-do,  desire; 
-ia  :  audac-ia,  boldness;  -idn(S.  i5) :  leg-iQ,  lcgio7i;  -f  m  ;  avari-tia, 
avarice;  collateral  are  some  with  Nom.  in  -ties,  as  diiri-ti5s,  hard- 
ness; -tioii  (N.  tiS,  sio) :  ainb-i-ti5,  ambition  ;  c5n-fu-sio,  confusion;  -tat 
(N.  tas) :  aequali-tas,  equality;  -ttira  :  ]^ic-tui&,  painting;  -tut-(N.  tiia, 
sus):  iuven-tus,  youth;  -ta  {-su)  (N.  tu-s,  su-s),  s5n-sus,  perception; 
-tudon  (N.  tud-o,  G.  -inis):  a,egn'tVii!5,  sickness  of  heart.  ^Neuter:  -tio 
(N.  tiu-m) :  servi-tiu-m,  bondage. 

3.  An  Artisan  or  Tradesman  is  indicated  by 
-di'io  (N.  ariu-s) :  argent-ariu-s,  money  changer. 


FORMATION   OF   WORDS.  125 

4.  The  Trade  is  indicated  by 
-aria  :  argent-aria,  silver  mine,  hank. 

5.  The  Locality  of  the  work  (or  trade)  is  indicated  by 

-drio  (X.  ariu-m) :  semin-ariu-m,  seed-plot  ;  -bnio  (N.  Oniti-m) :  Ml- 
onium,  fuller's  shop;  -iua  :  ofiac-ina,  workshop;  -cro,  -eulo  (X.  -cru-m, 
-culu-m) :  lava-cru-m,  hath;  -trlno,  -fritia  (J^.  trina,  trinu-m) :  su- 
trina,  shoemaker'' s  shop  ;  pls-trlnu-m,  7nill. 

6.  Instrument  and  3Ieans  are  indicated  by 

-brOf  -bra  (N.  bra,  bru-m):  ll-bra,  balance  ;  crl-bmm,  sieve;  -crOf 
-culo  (N.  cru-m,  culu-m) :  ba-culu-m,  walking  stick;  -lo,  -la  (N.  -la, 
-lu-m) :  ^i-\^^  pillar  ;  tB-ln-m,  tveapon;  -nlo,  -ula  (N.  ulu-s,  ula,  ulu-m)  : 
cap-ulu-s,  handle;  rgg-ula,  rule;  cing-ulu-m,  girdle;  -mento  (N. 
mentu-m):  al-i-mentu-m,  nourishment ;  -tro,  -tra  (N.  tra,  tru-m): 
fenes-tra,  window  ;  ara-tru-m,  jsJwzo. 

7.  Relationship  is  indicated  by 

-ter  (N.  ter,  G.  tr-is) :  ^-ixx^fatJier;  ma-ter,  mother. 

8.  Condition  or  Relation  by 

-ina  :  discipl-Ina,  discipline;  medie-fna,  medicine, 

9.  Function  is  indicated  by 
-tura  {sura) :  cul-tura,  cidtivation. 

10.  Office  is  indicated  by 

-dta  (X.  atus,  G.  atus) :  cSnsul-atus,  consxdship;  -tura  (sura)  : 
dicta-ttira,  dictatorship. 

1 1.  Dense  Growths  are  indicated  by 

-efo  (X.  gtu-m) :  murt-etu-m,  myrtle  grove;  -to  (X.  tu-m) :  virgul- 
tn-m,  hrusliwood. 

12.  Diminutives  are  indicated  by 

-lo,  -la  (X.  lu-8,  etc.),  before  which  a  liqnid  is  assimilated  (0,  3)  : 
(ager),  agel-lu-s,  little  field  ;  (tabul-a\  tabel-la,  tablet ;  (coron-a),  corol-la, 
chaplet ;  Catul-Iu-s  ( -- Caton-lu 6; ;  homul-Iu-s  (=  homon  lu-s),  manikin; 
-olo^  -nlo  :  olo  after  e,  i,  v,  otiierwise  -ulo  (X.  olu-s,  ola,  ulu-s,  ula): 
(alve-us),  alve-olu-8,  little  holloio;  (fili-a),  flli-ola,  little  daughter  ;  (valv-a), 
valv-olae,  pod  {little  flaps);  (circu-s),  circ  ulu-s,  little  ring,  -v.ulo,  -vula 
(X.  culu-s,  etc\  after  e,  i,  u,  and  consonant  steins  :  (spgs\  sp€-cula,  slight 
hope;  (amni-s),  amni-culu-s,  streamlet;  (versu-s),  versi-culu-s,  versicle; 
(homo,  homin-),  homun-culu-8,  manikin  ;  (flOs),  fl5s-culu-s,  floweret ;  (cor, 
cord-),  cor -culu-m,  dear  heart. 

Note.— Diminutives  have,  a«  a  rule,  the  gender  of  their  primitivee.  ExcepUong 
gre  sometimes  due  to  difference  iu  signification. 


126  FOKMATIOK   OF   WORDS. 

182.  FORMATION    OF    ADJECTIVES. 

The  significance  of  the  most  important  adjective  suffixes,  which  are 
often  identical  with  the  substantive  suffixes,  are  as  follows  : 

1.  Action  is  indicated  by 

-hundOf  -httnda  :  cuncta-'biindu-s,  lingering.  Repeated actionhy 
-ulo^  -ula  :  cred-ulu-s,  quick  to  believe;  quer  ulu-s,  complaining.  Pas- 
sive action  is  indicated  by  -bill  :  ama-bili-s,  lovable,  v6nd-i-bili-s,  to  be 
sold. 

2.  Capacity  and  Inclination  are  indicated  by 

-cundOf  -cunda :  fa-cundu-s,  of  ready  speech ;  vere-cundu-s, 
modest.  Passive  Capacity  hy -ili  :  ag-ili-s,  readily  moved,  quick; 
doc-ili-s,  teachable.  The  Capacity  and  Resulting  Condition  by  -till  : 
duc-tili-s,  ductile  ;  fic-tili-s,  capable  of  being  moulded^  of  clay. 

3.  Tendency  is  indicated  by 

-aci  (N.  ax)  :  aud-ax,  hold ;  rap-ax,  greedy. 

4.  Likeness  and  Composition  or  JIaterial  are  indicated  by 
-aceOf  -acea  :  arundin-acen-s,  reedy  ;    cr6t-aceu-s,  chalky;  -icio  : 

later-iciu-s,  made  of  brick;  -no,  -nu  :  acer-nu-s,  of  maple;  ~neo^ 
-nea :  ae-neu-s,  brazen. 

5.  Belonging  to  is  indicated  by 

-4o^  -ia  :  imperatSr-iu-s,  helo7iging  to  a  general ;  -icio,  -icia  : 
aedil-iciu-s,  belonging  to  ari  cedile;  -duo,  -ana  :  hum-aim-s,  human; 
urb-anu-s,  iirbane,  city. 

6.  Appurtenance  and  Jledium  are  indicated  by 

-ficOf  -tica  :    aqua-ticu-s,  aquatic;  -till-:  aqua-tili-s,  aquatic; 

pluma-tili-s,  {embroidered)  like  feathers. 

7.  Origin  is  indicated  by 

-io,  -ia  :  Cornel-ia  (lex),  Corinth-iu-s  ;  -dno,  -ana,  -Ino,  -ina  : 
Eom-anu-s,  Lat-inu-s. 

8.  2'ime  is  indicated  by 

-lino,  -tina  :  cras-tinu-s,  of  to-morrow;  -ferno,  -terna  :  hes- 
ternu-s,  of  yesterday;  -umo,  -urna  :  noct-umu-s,  by  niglit;  -tlno, 
-tlna  :  matH-tinu-s,  of  early  morning. 

9.  Locality,  where,  whence,  is  indicated  by 

-ia  :  Gall-ia,  Gaul;  -tlno:  intes-tinu-s,  inner,  intestine;  -ensi: 
cire-ensi-s,  fro7n  the  circus ;  Sicili-finsi-s,  Sicilian;  -dti  (N.  -as)  :  cQi- 
2s,  of  what  country  ^ 


FORMATION    OF    WORDS.  12/ 

10.  Fullness  is  indicated  by 

-o.so,  -osa  :  anim-osn-s,  full  of  spirit ;  verb-osu-s,  luordy  ;  'lento, 
lenta  :  sanguin-o-lentu-s,  bloody  ;  op-u-lentu-s,  with  abundant  means. 

11.  Descent  and  Relationship  are  indicated  in  Latin  mainly  by  Greek 
adjectives,  made  by  the  addition  of  Greek  suffixes  to  proper  names. 
Tliese  suffixes  are 

M.  'ides  (G.  idae),  F.  -«s  (G.  idis),  from  Nominatives  in  us,  or,  os, 
and  s  preceded  by  a  consonant  ;  M.  -ides  (G.  idae),  F.  -els  (G.  eidis), 
from  Nominatives  in  -eus  ;  M.  -ades  (G.  adae),  F.  -eis  (G.  gidis),  from 
Nominatives  in  as  (G.  ae)  arid  -g3  (G.  -ae)  ;  M.  ^iades  (G.  iadae),  F. 
-ias  (G.  iadis),  from  Nominatives  in  ius,  es,  on,  o  ;  F.  -tiie,  from  Nom- 
inatives in  -us  and  -eus;  F.  -/owe, from  Nominatives  in  ius  :  (Tantalus) 
Tantal-id6s,  son  of  Tantalus  ;  Tantal-is,  daughter  of  Taiitalus  ;  (Pelops) 
Pelopides ;  (Thes-eus)  Th6s-ides,  ThgsSis ;  (Aengas)  Aene-adgs (Aeneadae also); 
(Laertgs)  Laert-iadgs  ;  (Neptiinus)  Neptun-ing ;  (Acrisius)  Acrisiong,  etc. 

12.  Diminutive  adjectives  are  formed  by  the  same  suffixes  as 
diminutive  substantives  (181,  12)  :  albus,  white^  alhvL-hxs,  whitish  ;  miser, 
xvretched,  mis-ellus,  poor  {little)  ;  acer,  sharp,  acri-culu-s,  somewhat  sharp. 

183.  SUBSTANTIVES    WITHOUT    SUFFIXES. 

(Root  Substantives.) 

A  few  substantives  are  formed  from  roots  without  a  suffix  : 

1.  With  weak  root  :  duc-s  (dux),  leader,  from  root  due,  lead ;  nec-s 
(nex),  killing,  from  root  nee.  Mil. 

2.  With  strong  root  :  lue-s  (lux),  light,  from  root  lue,  light ;  rgg-s 
(rgx),  Idng,  from  root  rgg,  ride. 

3.  With  reduplication:  cox-cev^  jail ;  mar-mor,  marble;  mur-mur, 
murmur. 

THE    SUFFIXES    IN    DETAIL. 

184.  Vowels. 

-Of  -a  (N.  u-s,  a,  u-m).  Primary  and  secondary  adjectives,  and 
primary  substantives.  The  primary  adjectives  resemble  somewhat 
active  participles  in  meaning  ;  fer-u-s,  wild  ;  vag-u-s,  ivandering.  Sec- 
ondary are  especially  adjectives  in  -orus,  as  dec-oru-s,  graceful,  from 
decor,  grace,  and  many  others.  Masculine  substantives  in  -u-s  are  often 
nouns  of  agency,  sometimes  nomina  actionis  and  concretes  therefrom: 
eoqu-o-s,  cook  ;  rog-u-s,  pyre.  Those  in  -a  (a)  are  regularly  mmina  agen- 
lis,  especially  in  composition  ;  scrib-a,  scribe ;  agri-eola,  husbandman 
(land-tiller).  Feaiinines  are  in  -0  (which  are  principally  names  of 
trees :  pir-us,  pear  tree)  and  in  -a :  lup-a,  she-wolf,  as  well  as  lup-u-s. 
Neuters  are  those  in  -u-m,  especially  names  of  fruits  :  pir-u-m,  pear. 


128  FORMATION   OF   WORDS. 

-i  (N.  i-s,  e).  Substantives  :  M .  orb-i-s,  circle  ;  pisc-i-s,  fish,  etc.  ; 
F.  av-i-s,  bird ;  nav-i-s,  ship  ;  N.  mar-e,  sea  ;  conclav-e,  room.  Adjec- 
tives :  dulc-i-s,  sweet ;  turp-i-s,  ugly. 

Note.— In  adjectives  especially,  i  is  often  weakened  from  -o,  as  inermis  and  iner- 
mus,  etc.  Sometimes  in  substantives  the  Nom.  shows  es  instead  of  is,  as  caed§S  and 
caedis,  etc. 

-iOf  -ia  (N.  iu-s,  la,  iu-m). — i.  This  is  the  principal  secondary  suf- 
fix, and  is  found  in  many  combinations  ;  but  it  is  also  found  as  prim- 
ary in  substantives:  M.  gen-iu-s,  genius;  gladius,  sword;  F.  pluv-ia, 
rain;  tib-ia,  fife;  N.  fol-iu-m,  leaf ;  od-iu-m,  hate;  and  in  adjectives 
ex-im-iu-s,  pre-eminent  {taken  out) ;  sauc-iu-s,  ivounded,  pluv-iu-s,  rainy. 

2.  The  suffix  occurs  as  secondary  in  the  forms  -6io  (-aeo\  -io,  eo,  io,  in 
a  large  number  of  Gentile  names  :  Flav-giu-s,  Flav-iu-s  ;  Ltic-eiu-s,  Luc- 
iu-s,  Ltic-iu-s  ;  similar  to  these  are  those  in  ed-iu-s,  id-iu-s,  id-iu-s,  -gl-iu-s, 
il-iu-s,  as  Luc-id-iu-s,  Corn-gl-iu-s,  Luc-fl-iu-s.  Also  in  some  adjectives  of 
material  in  eu-s,  as  aur-eu-s,  golden  ;  ferr-eu-s,  iron.  It  occurs,  moreover, 
in  many  compound  adjective  and  substantive  endings,  to  be  discussed 
later,  and  in  many  abstract  substantives  in  -antia,  -entia,  as  abund- 
ant-ia,  abundance  ;  sci-ent-ia,  knowledge,  etc. 

Note.— Instead  of  -ia,  we  find  -ea  in  a  few  words  :  cav-ea,  cage  ;  cochl-ea,  snail. 

-u  (N.  u-s,  u).  M.  arc-u-s,  boiv  ;  curr-u-s,  chariot ;  F.  ac-u-s,  needle  ; 
man-u-s,  hand;  N.  gel-ti,  frost;  gen-u,  knee.  Secondary  is  socr-u-s, 
mother-in-law.  This  suffix  is  found  occasionally  in  adjectives  com- 
pounded with  manus,  as  centi-manus,  hundred-handed  ;  also  in  the  form 
-ui  in  a  few  adjectives,  as  ten-ui-s,  thin. 

Note.— The  snftix  -o  often  alternates  with  -u. 

-iiOf  -iia  (N.  uo-s,  ua,  uo-m).  Primary  and  secondary  substantives 
and  adjectives.  Primary  :  M.  eq-uo-s,  horse ;  F.  al-vo-s,  belly ;  X. 
ax-vo-m, field ;  par-vo-s,  stnall.  Secondary  :  M.  patr-uo-s,  uncle;  cer-vo-s, 
stag  ;  F.  ian-ua,  gate  ;  cern-uo-s,  stooping  ;  aesti-vo-s,  of  the  summer. 

Note.— Ivo-s  is  found  in  voc-ivo-S  (vacuos),  rediv-Ivo-s,  etc.  -vo  is  weakened 
to  -vi  in  pel-vi-s,  basin. 

185.  Suffixes   with    Gutturals. 

1.  -co,  -ca  (N.  cu-s,  ca,  cu-m).  This  forms  both  adjectives  and 
substantives,  but  is  usually  secondary.  As  primary  it  is  found  in  : 
io-CM-s^  jest  ;  lo-cu-s,  pZace  ;  as  secondary  in  :  medi-cvi-s,  physician  ;  ped- 
i-ca,  fetter.  Adjectives  are  primary  :  cas-cu-s,  very  old  ;  or  secondary  : 
civi-cu-8,  civic. 

2.  -dcOf  -aca  (N.  gcu-s,  aca,  acu-m).  Primary  in  clo-aca,  sewer; 
secondary  in  ver-b6n-aca,  vervain,  and  in  adjectives,  as  mer-acu-s,  j^wre. 


FORMATIOX    OF   WORDS.  1 29 

3.  -IcOf  -lea  (N.  Icu-s,  ica,  icu-m).  In  substantives,  such  as  :  M. 
umbil-icu-s,  7iavel ;  F.  lect-ica,  Utter  ;  urt-ica,  nettle.  In  adjectives,  as  : 
am-icu-s,  friendly,  etc. 

4.  -ucOf  -ilea  (N.  ucu-3,  uca,  ucu-m).  Primary  in  the  adjectives  : 
cad-ucu-s,  tottering ;  mand-ucu-s,  voracious ;  secondary  in  alb-ucu-s,  as- 
phodel ;  and  in  substantives  in  -uca,  as  er-uca,  caterpillar  ;  verr-uca,  wart. 

Note.— Similar  is  the  secondary  suffix  -inquo  in  long-inquo-S,  distant;  pro- 
pinquo-s,  near. 

5  -ac  (N.  ax)  forms  substantives  and  adjectives  ;  the  latter  ex- 
pressing nic/twaiiow.  Primary:  SMd-six,  bold  ;  fxig-six,  fleei?ig.  Second- 
ary :  F.  forn-ax,  furnace  ;  lim-ax,  snail ;  v6r-ax,  truthful. 

6.  -ec  (N.  Sx)  is  found  in  verv-ex,  wether. 

7.  -ic  (N.  ex)  forms  a  number  of  substantives  that  are  mainly  mas- 
culine, except  names  of  plants  and  trees.  Primary  :  M.  ap-ex,  point ; 
cort-ex,  hark  ;  F.  il-ex,  holm-oak.     Secondary  :  F.  imbr-ex,  gutter-tile. 

8.  -Ic  (N.  ix)  forms  substantives  and  adjectives.  Primary  :  F.  rad- 
ix, root;  fgl-ix,  happy.  Secondary:  corn-ix,  crow,  and  feminines  in 
-trix. 

9.  -de  (N.  ox)  is  found  in  the  substantive  cel-ox,  yacht,  and  in  a 
number  of  adjectives  :  atr-ox,  ferocious. 

10.  -deeOf  -deea  (X.  aceu-s,  acea,  aceu-m),  forms  adjectives  of 
material  or  likeness  :  crgt-aceu-s,  chalk-like. 

Note.— Notice  aho  tlie  suffix  -ac-io,  especially  in  proper  names  :  Ver-acia, 

11.  -ie-eOf  -ie-io(N.  iceu-s,  etc.,  iciu-s,  etc.),  form  adjectives  in- 
dicating material,  the  latter  suffix  also  some  indicating  relation  :  palm- 
iceu-s,  of  palms  ;  tribun-iciu-s,  proceeding  from  a  tribune. 

12.  -le-io  (X,  Iciu-s,  etc.)  is  found  in  nov-Iciu-s,  7iew,  and  in  words 
of  participial  meaning  coming  from  forms  in  -to,  as  advent-iciu-s, 
strajiger. 

13.  -ue-eOf  -uc-io,  occurs  in  pann-uceu-s  or  pann-uciu-s. 

14.  -ci-no  and  ei-n'-io  occur  (perhaps)  in  vati-cinu-s,  prophetic, 
and  in  some  secondary  neuter  substantives,  which  denote  action  or 
event,  as  latro-ciniu-m,  robbery. 

15.  -cro,  -eri,  -elo,  -culo  (N.  car,  cris,  clu-m,  culu-m)  are  found 
in  some  adjectives  with  participial  force,  and  in  a  few  neuter  substan- 
tives indicating  instrument  or  locality ;  as  ala-cer,  quick ;  medio-cris, 
mediocre  ;  peri-clum  (-culu-m),  danger  ;  ba-culu-m,  stick  (also  m.)  ;  sepul- 
crum,  grave.  Also  the  primary  ridi-culu-s,  laughable,  and  the  secondary 
anni-culu-s,  aged. 

9 


130  FORMATIOK   OF    WORDS. 


186.  Suffixes  with  a  Dental. 

1.  'd  (N.  (d)s).  Substantives  only  :  frau-s,  c7i.ea^efy ;  merce-s,  jpay ; 
custo-s,  guard. 

2.  -do,  -di  (N.  du-s,  etc.,  di-s).  A  secondary  suffix  used  especially 
for  the  formation  of  adjectives  :  frig-i-du-s,  cold  ;  vir-i-dis,  blooming. 

3.  -to  {-so)  (N.  tu-s,  ta,  tu-m).  This  forms  substantives  and  ad- 
jectives, and  is  both  primary  and  secondary.  Primary  :  M.  cub-i-tu-s, 
elhoiv ;  dig-i-tus,  finger  ;  also  substantives  in -ta  after  Greek  analogy  : 
po§-ta,  poet ;  F.  has-ta,  spear ;  am-i-ta,  amit ;  N,  lu-tu-m,  mud  ;  tSc- 
tum,  roof ;  ap-tu-s,  ^/;  bea-tu-s,  fi^esset?.  Secondary  :  M.  nau-ta,  saiYor  ; 
F.  iuven-ta,  youth;  N.  dense  growths  in  g-tu-m:  £nitic-e-tu-m,  co^se ; 
ius-tu-s,  y^s^ ;  and  passive  adjectives  like  barb-a-tus,  bearded. 

4.  -ti  {-si)  [N,  tis  (sis)]  forms  primary  and  secondary  substantives 
and  adjectives.  Primary  :  M.  fus-ti-s,  club  ;  cas-si-s,  hunting-net ;  F. 
cu-ti-s,  sldn  ;  si-ti-s,  thirst ;  for-ti-s,  brave  ;  mi-ti-s,  7nild,  Secondary .: 
(i)  in  adjectives  and  substantives  indicating  home,  origin,  usually 
preceded  by  a,  i,  more  rarely  e:  Camer-s  (Camer-ti-s), /rom  Camerinum; 
Arpina-s  (A.rplna-ti-s),  of  Arpinum  ;  nostr-as,  from  our  country  ;  (2)  in 
the  form  -gnsi  (for  ent-ti)  in  adjectives  of  origin  and  locality  :  Sicili-en- 
si-s,  from  Sicily  ;  castr-ensi-s,  belonging  to  a  camp. 

5.  -t  (N.  (t)s)  forms  primary  and  secondary  substantives  and  ad- 
jectives. Primary  :  M.  com-e-s,  companion  ;  d§n-s,  tooth  ;  F.  qui-e-s, 
rest ;  ar-s,  art ;  locupl-6-s,  ivealthy ;  with  preceding  e :  div-e-s,  rich. 
Note  also  the  Participles  in  -ns.  Secondary  :  M.  al-e-s,  bird;  eque-s, 
horseman. 

6.  -ento-  (X.  -entu-s,  et<i.)  forms  substantives  and  adjectives  ;  the 
latter  are  participial  in  nature.  i\l.  v-entu-s,  ivi7id  ;  F.  pol-enta,  cluster  ; 
N.  ungu-entu-m,  salve ;  cru-entu-s,  bloody.  Secondary  adjectives  : 
graclLentu-s,  slender  ;  and  by  false  analogy  corpul  entu-s,  corpulent,  and 
the  like. 

7.  -tat,  -tut  (M.  ta-s,  tti-s),  forms  secondary  feminine  abstracts  and 
collectives  :  civ-i-ta-s,  citizenship ;  liber-ta-s, //'cetZom  ;  iuven-tu-s,  youth; 
vir-tti-s,  maydiness. 

8.  -tiOf  -tia,  -tie  (N.  tiu-m,  tia,  ti§-s),  likewise  form  abstracts  and 
collectives,  some  neuter,  most  masculine  :  servi-tiu-m,  slavery ;  molli- 
tia  and  molli-ti6-3,  gentleness,  etc. 

Notes.— 1.  In  in-i-tiu-m,  heginning,  and  spa-tiu-m,  room,  the  snflix  is  primary. 
2.  Many  roots  form  various  derivatives  of  similar  meaning,  tlius  :  dur-i-tia,  dur- 
i-ti§-8,  dtir-i-tS-s,  hardness,  etc. 

9.  -ti-co  (N.  ti-cu-s,  etc.)  forms  secondary  adjectives  signifying 
pertaining  to  :  domes-ticu-s,  domestic ;  aqua-ticu-s,  aquatic. 


FORMATION    OF    WORDS.  I3I 

Note.— In  such  substantives  as  canti-CU-m,  triti-C-um,  the  ending  -co  has  been 
!ftdded  to  a  participial  form  in  -to  (cantO,  tritO). 

10.  -ter  forms  primary  substantives  of  kinship ;  as,  pa-ter,  etc. 
Different  in  formation  is  soror,  which,  like  ux-or,  has  no  feminine  ending. 

11.  -tor  {sor),  F.  -fi"Ac*(N.  tor,  trix),  form  substantives  of  agency, 
those  in  trix  being  all  secondary  :  aud-i-tor,  hearer  ;  vena-trix,  huntress  ; 
-tor  is  secondary  in  gladia-tor,  etc. 

12.  -faro-,  -tur-a  (N.  turu-s,  etc.),  forms  participles  in  taru-s,  as 
ama-turu-s,  and  feminine  substantives  denoting  activity  or  office  :  cul- 
tur-a,  cultivation  ;  cen-sur-a,  censors] tip. 

13.  -tor-io  (sdr-io)  (N.  toriu-s,  etc.),  form  neuter  substantives  of 
place  and  instrument,  and  adjectives  denoting  that  which  pertains  to 
the  actor :  audi-tor-ium,  lecture  hall ;  alea-tor-iu-s,  pertaining  to  a  dice- 
player. 

14.  -tro,  -tra  (N.  tra,  trxi-m),  forms  substantives,  mostly  neuter, 
of  means:  ara-tru-m,  ploio ;  fenestra  (f.),  window.  From  words  like 
mon-S'tru-m,  monster,  come  by  false  analogy  those  in  -ster,  as  pin-aster, 
wild  pi?ie. 

15.  -ter Of  -ter a  (N.  ter,  tra,  tru-m)  forms  comparatives:  al-ter, 
other ;  dex-ter,  right ;  nos-ter,  our  ;  perhaps  also  adjectives  of  relation, 
appurtenance,  or  locality  in  -s-ter  (G.  stris),  such  as  :  palus-ter  (=  palud- 
ter),  sivampy ;  eques-ter,  equest7'ian ;  campes-ter,  champaign;  terres-ter, 
of  the  earth,  terrestrial. 

16.  -trinOf  -trina  (N.  trina,  trinu  m),  forms  substantives  of  activ- 
ity (f.),  or  of  locality  (f.,  n.)  :  doc-trina,  instruction  ;  pis-trina,  bakery  ; 
pis-trinu-m,  {pounding)  mill. 

17.  -tili  i-sili)  (X.  till  s,  tile)  forms  primary  adjectives  of  capacity 
and  adaptation,  and  with  preceding  a  secondary  adjectives  of  relation 
or  belonging  :  duc-tili  s,  ductile ;  mis-sili-s,  tnissile ;  aqua-tili-s,  belong- 
ing to  the  water. 

18.  -ter-no  (N.  ternu-s,  etc.)  forms  adjectives  indicating  time  : 
hes-ternu-s,  of  yesterday. 

19.  -tur-no{^L  turnu-s,  etc.)  forms  substantives  and  adjectives 
indicating  cordmuance,  from  which  come  proper  names  :  Sa-turnu-s, 
Vol-tnrnu-s,  tac-i  turnu-s,  silent. 

20.  -tinOf  -fiiio  (N.  tinus,  tinu-s,  e/c),  forms  adjectives  of  time, 
the  latter  also  of  place  :  eras  tinu-s,  of  to-morrow  ;  intes-tinu-s,  inner, 
intestine;  matu-tinu-s,  of  early  morning. 

21.  -tn  (sii)  (N.  tu-s,  su-s)  forms  substantives  of  action  and  its 
result :  adven-tu-s,  arrival ;  cur-su-s,  course ;  or-tu-s,  rising. 

22.  -d-tu  (N.  a-tu-s)  forms  secondary  substantives  of  office  :  consul- 
a-tu-s,  consulship  ;  sen-a-tu-s,  senate. 


132  FORMATION   OF   WORDS. 


187.  Suffixes  with  a  Labial. 

1.  'hOf  -ha  (N.  bu-s,  etc.),  forms  substantives  and  adjectives  :  M. 
mor-bu-s,  disease  ;  F.  bar-ba,  heard  ;  N.  ver-bu-m,  icovd  ;  pro-bu-s,  up- 
right. 

2.  -hro,  -bra  (N.  bra,  bru-m),  forms  substantives  indicating  means 
oi  instrument.  Primary  :  F.  dola-bra,  celt ;  li-bra,  balance  ;  ter-e-bra, 
borer ;  N.  cri-bru-m,  sieve.     Secondary  :  candela-bru-m,  candlestick. 

Note.— Very  rare  are  masculines;  as,  fa-ber,  wn^-y^i! ;  Mulci-ber,  Yulcan. 

3.  -hiilOf  -hula  (N.  bula,  bulu-m),  form  substantives  :  F.  fa-bula, 
iale ;  fi-bula  (fig-),  brooch  ;  N.  pa-bulu-m,  fodder  ;  sta-bulu-m,  stall. 

4.  -hili  (N.  bili-s)  forms  adjectives,  mostly  of  passive  meaning  in 
classical  prose  :  ama-bili-s,  lovable  ;  no-bili-s,  noble ;  flg-bili-s,  tearful. 

188.  Suffixes  with!  an  original  S. 

1.  -is  (N.  is,  G.  er-is)  forms  a  few  substantives  :  vSm-is  (also  vom-er), 
plowshare ;  cin-is,  ashes  ;  pulv-is,  dust ;  cucum-is,  cucumber. 

2.  -us  (N.  us,  G.  er-is,  or-is)  forms  primary  and  secondary  neuter 
substantives.  Primary  :  foed-us,  bond  ;  gen-us,  race  ;  temp-us,  tivie. 
Secondary  :  pect-us,  breast ;  fun-us,  funeral. 

Note.— Some  such  words  have  become  monosyllabic,  as  aes,  i&S,  rus. 

3.  -OS  (-or)  (N.  Ss,  or,  G.  5r-is)  forms  many  primary  and  a  few 
secondary  masculine  abstracts.  Primary  :  fl-5s,  flower ;  am-or,  love. 
Secondary  :  aegr-or,  sickness. 

Note.— Noteworthy  arc  M.  lep-U8,  hare  ;  F.  arb-os,  tree  (45  n.);  Ven-us  (G.  Ven- 
eris), and  the  adjective  vet-US  (G.  veteris),  old. 

4.  -es  (N.  es,  5s,  G.  is,  6I)  forms  a  few  substantives  of  the  third  and 
fifth  declension  :  vat-Ss,  bard  ;  fam-gs,  hunger  ;  plgb-6s,  people. 

5.  'Or^o  (N.  5ru-8,  etc.)  forms  secondary  adjectives,  as  :  can-Oru-s, 
sounding ;  hon-oru-s,  honorable ;  and  a  few  substantives,  as  :  aur-5ra, 
morning ;  FlSra,  etc. 

189.  Suffixes  with  a  Liquid. 

1.  -lo^  -la  (N.  lu-8,  etc.),  forms  many  feminine  and  neuter,  and  a 
few  masculine  substantives:  M.  ma-lu-s,  mast;  F.  pMa,  pillar;  N. 
cae-lu-m  (=  caed-lu-m),  chisel ;  fi-Iu-m,  thread. 

2.  -i-lo,  -i-la  (N.  ilu-8,  etc.),  forms  primary  and  secondary  su'c 


FORMATION    OF  WORDS.  1 33 

stantives  and  adjectives.      M.  sib-i-lu-s,  hissing;    N.  oae-lu-m  (=  cav- 
i-lu-m,  hollow),  heaven  ;  nub-i-lii-s,  cloudy. 

3.  {-o-lo)f-u-lo,  -u-la  (N,  ulu-s,  etc.),  form  primary  and  second- 
ary substantives,  most  of  which  indicate  instrument,  and  primary  adjec- 
tives indicating  repeated  action  or  tendeticy :  M.  ang-u-lu-s,  corner; 
oc-u-lu-s,  eye  ;  F.  reg-u-la,  rule  ;  t§g-u-la,  tile  ;  N.  iac-u-lu-m,  javelin  ; 
spec-u-lu-m,  mirror;  bib-u-lu-s,  hihulous  ;  cred-u-lu-s,  ^?a'cA;  to  believe; 
quer-u-lu-s,  complaining  ;  caer-u-lu-s,  hlae  (secondary),  and  caer-u-leu-s. 
Also  fam-u-lu-s,  servant,  and  the  extension  fam-ili-a,  family. 

4.  -It  (N.  li-s,  le)  occurs  in  the  substantive:  M.  cau-li-s,  stalk ;  and 
in  adjectives:  subtMi-s,  fine;  incMi-s,  cut  in.  Secondary  in  fidS-li-s, 
faithful. 

5.  -i-li  (N.  ili-s,  ile)  forms  a  few  substantives  and  many  adjectives 
indicating  passive  capacity :  F.  strig-i-li-s,  scraper  ;  N.  teg-i-le,  roof. 
Also  vig-il,  watchman ;  ag-i-li-s,  readily  moved ;  doc-ili-s,  teachable. 
Secondary  in  hum-i-li-s,  low,  and  in  the  terminations  -tili-s,  -sili-s. 

6.  -olo^  -ola  (after  e,  i,  v),  -iilo,  -iila  (N.  olu-s,  ulu-s,  etc.),  form 
diminutives  :  alve-olu-s,  little  belly  ;  fili-olu-s,  little  son  ;  riv-ulu-s,  brook- 
let ;  r6g-ulu-s,  chief ;  voc-ula,  voice  ;  gran-ulu-m,  grain  ;  alb-ulu-s,  whit- 
ish; parv-olu-s,  small. 

7.  -ello,  -ella  (N.  ellu-s,  etc.),  forms  diminutives  after  1  and  by 
assimilation  after  n,  r  :  pop-ellu-s,  tribelet;  tab-el-la,  tablet;  pu-el-la,  girl; 
bel-lu-s  (bonus),  good ;  misel-lus  (miser),  wretched.  Doubly  diminutive 
are  catel-lu-s,  puppy  ;  cistel-la,  basket ;  capitel-lu-m,  head. 

8.  -illOf  'ilia  (N.  illu-s,  e/c),  forms  diminutives,  and  is  formed  like 
ello,  but  usually  after  a  preceding  i :  pulv-illu-s,  srnall  cushion  ;  pistr- 
illa,  small  mill;  sig-illu-m,  small  image  ;  bov-illu-s,  bovine.  Also  c5dic- 
illf,  hillets  ;  paux-illu-s,  slight;  pus-illu-s,  tiny. 

9.  -olla  is  found  in  cor-ol-la,  tvreath  ;  51-la,  jar  (aula). 

10.  -ullOf  -tlllaf  occurs  in  ul-lu-s,  any,  Sul-la  ( =  Sur-u-la),  Catul- 
lu-s  (Caton-lus),  homuUus  (=  homon-lu-s). 

11.  {-cO'lo),  -cu-lo  (N.  culu-s,  etc.),  forms  diminutives,  especially 
after  consonantal  and  e,  i,  u  stems  :  M.  fios-cvlvi-s,  floweret  ;  homun-culu-s, 
manikin  (irregular)  ;  avu-n-culu-s,  uncle  {1. collier's  brother,  irregular)  ; 
F.  sp6-cula,  little  hope;  auri-cula,  ear;  arbus-cula,  liUle  tree  (irregular)  ; 
domu-n-cula,  little  house  (irregular)  ;  N.  cor-culu-m,  {dear)  ^^Mrt ;  munus- 
culu-m,  little  gift.  Adjectives  are  dulci-culu-s,  sweetish,  and  especially 
diminutives  from  comparative  stems,  melius-culu-s. 

12.  -cello  (-cillo)  (N.  cellu-s,  etc.)  stands  to  culo  as  ello  to  ulo:  M. 
p5ni-cillu-s,  -m,  painter's  brush  ;  Ss-cillu-m,  little  mouth  ;  molli-cellu-s, 
softish. 


134  FORMATION    OF   WORDS. 

13.  -nleo  (N.  nleu-s)  forms  substantives  that  were  originally  adjec- 
tival :  aculeu-s,  sting. 

14.  -dlif-ari  (N.  ali-s,  ari-s,  etc.),  form  secondary  adjectives,  some 
of  which  are  substantivized  ni  the  neuter,  and  a  few  substantives  :  ven- 
alis,  i'ew«/;  m.ov\.-dM-&y  mortal;  singul-ari-s,  wnigwe;  vulg-ari-s,  common; 
can-ali-s,  canal;  animal,  living  heing;  calc-ar,  spur. 

15.  -elii  {-ella)  forms  primary  and  secondary  substantives,  most  of 
which  indicate  action:  loqu-6la  (loqu-ella),  talking;  cand-gla,  candle; 
custod-ela,  watching. 

16.  -ell  (N".  gli-s,  etc.)  forms  secondary  substantives  and  adjectives: 
cardu-eli-s,  linnet;  crud-eli-s,  cruel. 

Remark. — A  further  development  of  -6li  is  -elio,  -elia :  Aur-eli-us, 
contum-eli-a,  contumely. 

17.  -lit  (N.  ili-s,  He)  forms  secondary  substantives  and  adjectives  : 
M.  aed-ili-s,  opdile;  N.  cub-ile,  couch;  sed-ile,  seat;  civ-ili-s,  civic;  eri-li-s, 
masters. 

18.  -yno,  -tna  (N,  mu-s,  etc^,  forms  primary  substantives  and  pri- 
mary and  secondary  adjectives.  The  feminine  substantives  express 
usually  the  result  of  an  action:  M.  an-i-mu-s,  spirit;  cal  mu-s,  cal-a-mu-s, 
stalk;  F.  fsi-ma,,  fame ;  Ham-ma.,  Jla?ne;  N,  ar-ma,  arms;  po-mum,  fruit. 
Adjectives,  primary:  al-mu-s,  fostering;  fir-mu-s,  strong.  Secondary: 
op-i-mu-s,  fat ;  patr-i-mu-s,  matr-i-mu-s,  with  father,  mother,  living. 

19.  -in en  Qs.  men,  G.  min-is)  forms  primary,  neuter  substantives, 
mostly  indicating  activity  or  results  of  activity :  ag-men,  train;  flu-men, 
river  ;  but  M.  fla-men,  priest. 

20.  -meu-to  (N.  mentu-m)  forms  substantives  (mostly  primary) 
indicating  instrument:  al-i-mentu-m,  nourishment;  tor -mentu-m,  tor- 
ture. 

Note?.— 1.  -men  and -mentum  are  of  ten  formed  from  the  same  radical.  In  that 
case  mentu-m  i«  the  more  common  :  teg-u-men,  teg-u-mentu-m,  corering. 

2.  Eare  and  archaic  are  feminines  in  -menta ;  armenta  -  armentu-m. 

3.  -menti  occurs  in  sgmenti-s  (f),  fited  -  sgmen  (n  ). 

21.  -met  (N.  mes,  G.  mit-is)  forms  a  few  masculine  substantives: 
tra-mes,  pa/A  ;  fo-mes,  fuel ;  li  mes,  cross-path. 

22.  -niinOf  -niiua,  -tnno,  -mna  (N.  minu-s,  etc.),  form  sub- 
stantives :  M.  ter-minu-s,  houndary ;  F.  al-u-mna,  foster-daughter;  fg- 
mina,  ivoman  ;  N.  da-mnu-m,  loss. 

23.  -tnofi  (N.  m5,  G.  m5n-is)  forms  primary  and  secondary  masculine 
substantives  :  pul-mo,  lung  ;  ser-m5,  discourse ;  tB-mQ, pole  (of  a  chariot). 

24.  -nidn-iOf  -mon-ia  (N.  mOnia,  m6niu-m),  forms  primary  and 


FORMATION   OF   WORDS.  1 35 

secondary  substantives.  Primary  :  F.  al-i-monia,  nourishment ;  quer-i- 
mama.^  complaint ;  N.  al-i-moniu-m,  Tiowris/miert^.  Secondary:  F.  acri- 
monia,  tartness  ;   N.  matr-i-moniu-m,  marriage. 

25.  -mor  forms  primary  masculine  substantives  ;  cre-mor,  broth  ; 
ru-mor,  rumor. 

26.  -tnic  (N,  mex,  G.  mic-is)  fonns  a  few  substantives  :  cl-mex,  bug  ; 
pu-mex,  pumice. 

27.  a.  -no,  -via  (N.  mi-s,6'/e,),  forms  primary  and  secondary  adjec- 
tives ;  the  primary  are  participial  in  meaning  ;  the  secondary  indicate 
material  or  relation,  and  occasionally  locality ;  when  added  to  local 
comparatives  and  adverbs,  distributive  numerals  are  also  formed  with 
this  suffix.  Primary:  6ig-nvi-s,  u'orthy ;  plg-nu  s  /w/^.  Secondary: 
diur-nu-s,  dailij ;  fraternu-s,  brotherly;  acer-nus,  maple;  ex-ter-nu-a, 
outer  ;  bi-ni,  two  each. 

Note.— Adjectives  denoting  malerial  have  also  -neo  (=  n'-eo),  as  ae^eu-S, 
brazen  ,•  ilig-neu-s,  quer-neu-s. 

b.  -nOf  -na  (N.  nu-s,  etc.),  forms  primary  and  a  few  secondary  sub- 
stantives. Primary  :  M.  fur-nu-s,  oven  ;  pug-nu-s,  fist;  F.  c€-na,  meal ; 
la-na,  ivool.  N.  d5-nu-ni,  gift ;  rgg-nu-m,  kingdom.  Secondary :  M. 
tribti-nu-s,  tribune  ;  F.  fortu-na,  fortune  ;  albur-nu-m,  sap-wood. 

Note. — This  sufiix  is  extended  in  pecti-nia,  "ritoney. 

28.  -bundo-f  -eiiudo  (N.  bundu-s,  etc.,  cundu-s,  etc.),  form  ad- 
jectives of  activity :  cunct-a-bundu-s,  delaying;  fa-cundu-s,  eloquent. 

29.  -ni  (N.  ni-s)  forms  primary  substantives  and  adjectives:  am-ni-s, 
stream ;  pe-ni-s,  tail ;  pa-ni-s,  bread  ;  im-ma-ni-s,  ivild  ;  sgg-ni-s,  lazy. 

30.  -ino,  -iua  (X,  inu-s,  etc.),  forms  primary  and  secondary  sub- 
stantives and  adjectives.  Primary  :  M.  dom-inu-s,  lord ;  F.  pag-ina, 
fage ;  lic-inu-s,  curled  upwards.  Secondary  :  M.  ped-ic-inu-s,  foot ; 
F.  fisc-ina,  basket ;  N.  suc-inu-m,  amber  ;  faec  inu-s,  making  dregs. 

Note.— The  sufrix  is  extended  in  the  proper  name  Lic-iniu-8. 

31.  -dnOf  -una  (N,  anu-s,  etc.),  forms  secondary  adjectives,  some 
of  which  are  substantivized.  They  indicate  origin  or  appurte7iance  ; 
decum-anu-s,  belonging  to  the  tenth;  lmm-&nn-s,  human  ;  alt-sinvi-B,  sea- 
wind.    Primary  in  Volc-anu-s,  Di-ana. 

32.  -dn-eo  (N.  aneu-s,  etc.)  forms  primary  and  secondary  adjec- 
tives. Primary  :  c6nsent-aneu-s,  harmonious.  Secondary  :  snbit-aneu-s, 
sudden.  This  suffix  becomes  anio  (=  an'io)  in  proper  names  :  Afr-aniu-s, 
Fund-aniu-s. 

33.  -enOf  -ena  (N.  6nu-s,  etc.),  forms  secondary  substantives  and 


136  FORMATIOK   OF   WORDS. 

adjectives  :    M.  Vlbidi-Snn-s  ;    F.    cat-ena,  chain ;    hab-6na,  m» ;  N. 
ven-6nu-m,  poison  ;  eg-enu-s,  needy  ;  ali-6nu-s,  strange. 
Note.— This  is  extended  to  gn-on  in  toll  eno,  {well)  siceep. 

34.  -InOf  ~ina  (N.  inu-s,  etc.),  forms  primary  and  secondary  sub- 
stantives and  adjectives.  Primary  :  M.  cat-inu-s,  -m,  dish  ;  F.  rap-ina, 
rapine ;  ru-Ina,  ruin ;  nec-op-inu-s,  unexpected.  Secondary  :  jM.  pulv- 
Jnu-s,  cushion  ;  sal-inu-m,  salt-cellar,  and  many  feminines,  especially 
those  denoting  shops  and  factories;  r6g-ina,  queen  ;  cul-ina,  kitchen  ; 
ofB.c-ina,  ivorkshop  ;  j^n-inu-s,  'belonging  to  a  lamb  ;  div-inu-s,  divine. 

Note.— An  extension  of  this  sufRx  is  found  in  riC-iniu-m,  veil. 

35.  -en  (N.  -en,  G.  -in-is)  forms  a  few  substantives  :  M.  pect-en,  comb  f 
N.  glut-en,  glue. 

36.  -on  (N.  8,  G.  in-is)  forms  a  few  substantives  :  M.  card-o,  hinge ; 
marg-o,  rim  ;  5rd-o,  row ;  F.  a-sperg-o,  sprinkling  ;  virg-o,  maid  ;  car-8, 
fiesh. 

Notes.— 1.  Noteworthy  is  liOm-8,  hom-in-is,  man, 

2.  This  suffix  occurs  very  commonly  in  compounds  forming  feminine  abstracts  : 
-edon  (N.  6do),  dulc-6do,  sweetness ;  -idou  (N.  ido),  cnp-idS,  desire ;  form- 
Id5,/enT  ;  -udon  (N.  udo),  tSst-udo,  tortoise  ;  -tudon  (N.  tudo),  aegri-tiidO, 
sickness ;  -dgbn  (N.  ago),  im-ago,  image ;  -Uf/on  (N.  ugo),  aer-ugo,  ?'ust  ; 
-igon  (N.  igS),  cal-Igo,  thick  darkness ;  or-igo,  oriffin,  etc. 

37.  -on  (N.  0,  G.  onis)  forms  primary  and  secondary  substantives. 
The  primary  are  nouns  of  agency :  combib-o,  felloiv-drinker  ;  prae-c-o, 
herald  ;  tl-r5,  recniit.  The  secondary  indicate  often  the  possession  of 
some  bodily  or  mental  peculiarities ;  ale-5,  dice-player ;  centiiri-5, 
centurion. 

38.  -ion  (N.  io)  forms  a  few  masculine  and  many  feminine  primary 
and  secondary  substantives.  Primary  :  M.  ptig-io,  dagger ;  F.  opin-i5, 
opinion;  reg-iS,  region.  Secondary:  M.  pell-io,  furrier;  vespertil-i3, 
bat ;  F.  com-miin-i6,  communion. 

Note.— EsptK-ially  frequent  are  feminine  abstracts  in  t-i5  (s-io) :  amb-i-tio,  ambi- 
tion ;  op-pHgna-tid,  siege.  Noteworthy  are  the  secondary  diminutives,  homunc-iS, 
senec-iS. 

39.  -OHOf  -6na  (X,  5nti-s,  5na),  forms  few  primary  and  many  sec- 
ondary substantives  ;  the  masculines  indicate  agents,  especially  ja^rso/i 
employed  :  M.  col-5nu-s,  settler ;  F.  matr-ona,  matron ;  Bell-5na. 

40.  -onio,  -bnia  (N.  Qnin-s,  etc.),  forms  substantives  and  adjec- 
tives:  M.  Fav-5niu-s,  zephyr;  Pomp-5niu-s,  etc.;  caup-5niu-s,  belonging 
to  a  hosi.     Neuters  indicate  tlie  trade  or  shop  :  foll-Sniu-m,  fuller'' s-shop. 

41.  -ro,  -ra  (N.  (e)r,  -ra,  ru-m),  forms  primary  substantives  and  ad- 
jectives: IM.  &g-e-Tf  field ;  cap-e-r, ^o«^ ;  mft-ni-a,  wall ;  F.  la.n-ra-B,  laurel; 


FORMATION    OF    WORDS.  1 3/ 

ser-ra,  saw ;  N.  flag-ru-m,  tvhip ;  lab-ru-m,  lip  ;  cla-ru-s,  bright ;  pu-rus, 
clean. 

Often  a  short  vowel  precedes  :  M.  num-e-ru-s,  number ;  F.  cam-era, 
vault ;  N.  itig-eru-m,  measure  of  land.  So  hil-aru-s,  joyous  ;  lib-er, 
free  ;  cam-uru-s,  vaulted  ;  sat-ur,  full. 

Notes.— 1.  Esteusions  are  Mer-curiu-s,  tug-uriu-m,  hut. 

2.  In  a  number  of  primary  substantives  and  adjectives  simple  r  is  preceded  by  a 
short  vowel :  M.  late-r,  Vile ;  ans-er,  goo^e ;  F.  mul-i-er,  tvoman  ;  N.  ac-er,  maple; 
ver  (=  ves-er),  sprincy ;  cic-ur,  iame. 

42.  -ri  (N.  -(e)-r,  -ris,  G.  ris)  forms  substantives  and  adjectives  :  M. 
imb-e-r,  ram-storm;  ac-e-r,  sharp;  faneb-ri-s,  funeral;  perhaps 
celeb-er,  thronged. 

43.  -dro  forms  adjectives,  as  :  av-aru-s,  greedy  ;  am-aru-s,  bitter. 

44.  -drif  ~dli  (N.  ari-s,  ali-s,  etc.),  forms  secondary  substantives  and 
adjectives  ;  -arrwhen  the  stem  has  1,  -ali  when  it  has  an  r  :  pugill-are-s, 
tablets  ;  primipil- ari-s,  one  who  has  been  primipilus  ;  some  neuters  in  ar 
(from -are):  calc-ar,  67;^^;•,•  ex-em-p-l-ar,p«^(fer«,  pulvin-ar,  (sacrec?)  cowc/t; 
auxili-ari-s,  auxiliary  ;  milit  an-s,  military  ;  consul  ari-s,  consular. 

45.  -driOf  -aria  (N.  ariu  s,  etc.),  forms  substantives  and  adjec- 
tives. There  are  sometnnes  collateral  forms  in  -ari-s.  The  substantives, 
when  masculine,  indicate  artisans;  when  feminine,  business  ov pro- 
fession ;  when  neuter,  the  place  where  the  work  is  carried  on.  M. 
argent-ariu-s,  money-changer ;  ferr-ariu-s,  iron-ivorker ;  F.  argent-aria, 
silver  mine,  bank  or  banking ;  N.  api-ariu-m,  beehive  ;  p5m-ariu-ni,  apple 
orchard. 

46.  -ero  (X.  6ru-s,  etc.)  forms  sev-5rus,  earnest,  and  the  substantive 
gal-eru-s,  -m,  bonnet. 

47.  -uri  forms  the  substantive  sec-uri-s,  axe,  and  by  extension  pgn- 
uria,  tcant. 

48.  The  letter  r  appears  often  in  combination  with  other  suffixes,  as  : 
-er-co  in  lup-ercu-s.  Pan  ;  nov-erca,  step-mother  ;  -er-to  in  lac-ertu-s,  arm  ; 
lac-ertu-s,  a  lizard;  -er-bo  in  ac-erbu-s,  .so?/r ;  sup-erbu-s,  _proiJcZ  ;  -er-vo  in 
ac-ervo-s,  heap  ;  cat-erva,  croivd ;  -er-na  in  cav-erna,  hollow  ;  lu-cerna, 
lamp  ;  -ter-na  in  lan-ter-na,  lantern  ;  -ur-no  in  alb-urnu-s,  white  fish ; 
lab-urnu-m,  laburnum. 

190.  FORMATION     OF    VERBS. 

1.  Primitives  are  confined  to  the  Third  Conjugation,  to  some  forms 
of  the  Irregular  verbs,  and  to  some  Inchoatives.  The  various  stem- 
formations  are  shown  in  138. 

2.  Derivatives  comprise  the  verbs  of  the  First,  Second,  and  Fourth 


138  FORMATION    OF    WORDS. 

Conjugations,  and  some  verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation.  They  are  aU 
(except  the  Inchoatives  and  the  Meditatives)  formed  with  the  suffix  io, 
ie  (yo,  ye),  which  is  added  either  to  simple  verbal  stems,  or  to  noun 
(IG)  slenis  already  existing  or  presupposed.  The  i  in  io,  ie,  contracts 
with  the  preceding  vowels  a,  e,  i,  u,  leaving  the  ordinary  forms  of  the 
regular  conjugations.  Certain  categories  of  these  verbs  have  obtained 
special  names  according  to  their  various  meanings  : 

The  Causatives,  formed  by  a  change  in  the  stem-vowel. 

The  Desideratives,  formed  by  the  addition  of  -io  to  nomina  agetifis 
in  -tor ;  afterwards  a  desiderative  force  was  associated  with  the  com- 
bination -tor-io  (-tar-io),  and  it  was  applied  indiscriminately. 

The  Freq^ientatives  come  originally  probably  from  participial  stems 
in  -to ;  Latin  developed  also  the  suffix  -ito ;  further,  this  being  added 
again  to  -to  gave  rise  to  -tito  (-sito). 

The  Inchoatives,  formed  by  a  special  suffix,  -sco  (sko),  are  treated  in 
conjugation  as  primitives  belonging  to  the  Tliird  Conjugation. 

The  Meditatives  have  not  been  explained. 

Note.— Theoretically  the  Verbdlia  are  all  Dertoniinafiva,  but  owing  to  the  wide 
working  of  Analogy,  it  has  been  impossible  in  many  cases,  as  in  ama-re,  monS-re,  to 
discover  an  original  noxva  ;  while  in  other  cases,  as  the  verbal  is  formed  from  a  part  of 
a  denominative  verb,  it  is  convenient  to  retain  the  division. 

191.  A.    Verhcilia  (derived  from  verb-stems,  190,  N.): 

1.  Frequent atives  or  Intensives,  denoting  repeated  or  in- 
tense Action.  These  verbs  end  in  -tare  (-sare),  -itare,  -titare  (-sitare), 
and  follow  the  supine  stem  (perfect  passive  form). 

(a)  cantare,  sing  :  compare  cano  (cantum) :  cursare,  rim  to  and  fro; 
compare  curr5  (cursum) :  dictare,  dictate  ;  compare  dico  (dictum) :  dor- 
mitare,  be  sleep g  ;  compare  dormiS  (dormitum) :  habitare,  l-eep,  dwell; 
compare  habeo  (habitum) :  j^lUcitaiYi,  pi^omise  freely  ;  compare  poUiceor 
(poUicitus):  pulsare,  heat;  compare  pellS  (pulsum). 

(b)  agitare  (ago),  noscitare  (nosco),  sciscitare  (scisco),  visitare  (visS), 
vocitare  (voco),  volitare  (volo). 

(c)  cantitare  (cantare),  dictitare  (dictare),  cursitare  (cursare). 

Notes.— 1  The  simple  verb  presuppose  1  by  the  frequentative  or  intensive  is  often 
out  of  use,  as  in  the  case  of  :  gus-tare,  fanfe  ;  hor-tari,  exhort.  The  frequentative  or 
intensive  iu  -tare  is  often  out  of  use  :  actitare,  repeatedly  or  zealoudy  agitate  (no 
actare),  from  ago,  actum:  iSctitare,  read  carefully  (no  Igctare),  from  legS, 
iSctum. 

2.  The  verbs  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation  form  no  freqnentatives  excei)t  dormiS, 
sleep,  dormitS ;  mtinio,  fwtkfy,  munitS  (rare) ;  salio,  leap,  salto ;  aperto,  lay 
hare^  and  operto,  cover,  and  compounds  of  veiltO  (venio,  ccme). 

2.  Inchoatives  indicate  entrance  upon  an  action.  For  their 
formation  see  133,  V. 

3.  Desider atives  denote  Desire  or  Tendency.     They  are  formed 


FORMATION   OF    WORDS.  1 39 

by  means  of  the  suffix  -turio  (-surio) :  gsurire  (for  ed-t),  to  he  sharp-set 
for  eating,  hungrij  ;  em-p-turire,  to  he  all  agog  for  huying. 

4.  Causatives  signify  the  Effecting  of  the  Condition  indicated  by 
their  original  verb.  They  are  found  maudy  in  the  Second  Conjugation, 
and  show  usually  a  change  in  the  stem-vowel. 

Change:  cadere,  fall,  and  caedere,  fell;  liquere,  melt  (trans.),  and 
liquere,  melt  (intr.)  ;  from  root  men-  (as  in  me-men  to)  comes  monere, 
remind;  necare,  Idll,  and  nocere,  he  death  to;  placere,  please,  and 
placare,  cause  to  he  pleased,  appease  ;  sedere,  sit,  and  sgdare,  settle. 

No  change  ;  fugere,  flee,  and  fng&re,  put  to  Jlight ;  iacere,  throiv,  and 
iacere,  {lie)  thrown;  pendere  {hang)  weigh,  and  pend6re,  Itang  (intr.). 

5.  Meditatives :  (verbs  that  look  forward  to  an  action).  These 
end  in  -essere  :  arcessere,  to  summon  ;  capessere,  to  catch  at ;  facessere, 
to  do  eagerly  ;  incessere,  to  enter  ;  lacessere,  to  irritate  (136,  3,  h). 

192.   B.  Denominatives  (derived  from  uotm-stems)  : 

1.  These  are  most  commonly  found  in  the  First  Conjugation,  even 
though  the  stem-vowel  of  the  noun  is  i  or  u. 

{a)  acerva-re,  heap  up  (from  acervo-s);  aestua-re,  seethe  (aestu-s) ; 
corona-re,  ivreathe  (corona)  ;  leva-re,  Ugh  /en  (lev-i-s) ;  macula-re,  he- 
smirch  (macula)  ;  nomina-rc,  name  (nomen,  nomin-is) ;  onera-re,  load 
(onus,  oner-is). 

The  Deponents  signify  Condition,  Employment :  ancilla-ri,  he  maid 
(ancilla) ;  aqua-ri,  he  a  draiver  of  ivater  (aqua)  ;  fura-ri,  thieve  (fur) ; 
laeta-ri,  he  glad  (laetu-s). 

{h)  albe-re,  he  white  (albu-s) ;  flore-re,  he  i?i  hloom  (flos,  floris) ;  fronde-re, 
he  in  leaf  (frons,  frondi-s) ;  luc6-re,  he  light  (lux,  luc-is). 

(c)  argue-re  {he  bright,  sharp),  prove  ;  laede-re,  hurt ;  metue-re,  he  in 
fear  (metu-s). 

{d)  custodi-re,  guard  (custos,  custod-is)  ;  fini-re,  end  (fini-s) ;  lenl-re 
soften  (Igni-s) ;  vesti-re,  clothe  (vesti-s). 

3.  Noteworthy  are  the  Diminutives  formed  by  the  suffix  -illare  : 
st-illare,  drop  (st-illa) ;  scint-illare,  sparkle  (scint-illa)  ;  osc-illare,  to  siving 
(osc-illum).  Similar  in  function  but  of  different  formation  are  puUu- 
lare,  sprout  (pul-lus) ;  fodic-are,  punch  (fodere,  dig) ;  albicare,  whiten 
(albu-s). 

Notes.— 1.  The  Denominatives  of  the  First,  Third,  and  Fourth  Conjugations  are 
regularly  transitive,  those  of  the  Second  Conjugation  are  regularly  iidransitive. 

2.  These  verbs  are  often  found  orfty  in  combination  with  prepositions  :  ab-undare, 
mri  over,  abound  (from  unda,  tvave) ;  ac-cusare,  accuse  (from  causa,  ca^e)  ;  ex-ag- 
gerare,  pile  up  (from  agger) ;  ex-stirpare,  root  out  (stirp-s) ;  il-ltiminSre,  illumine 
(from  Itimen,  lumin-is). 


140  FORMATION    OF    WORDS. 

B.— Compound  Words. 

I.    FORMATION   OF   COMPOUND  WORDS. 

193.  I.  By  composition  words  are  so  put  together  that  a 
new  word  is  made  with  a  signification  of  its  own.  The 
second  word  is  regularly  the  fundamental  word,  the  first 
the  modifier. 

Note.— Properly  speaking,  composition  occurs  only  in  the  case  of  substantives,  i.  e., 
where  two  or  more  simple  stems  come  together.  In  verbs,  there  is  either  juxtaposition, 
where  the  parts  still  retain  their  original  force,  or  the  combination  of  a  verb  with  a 
preposition.  Broadly  speaking,  however,  composition  applies  to  all  combinations  of 
words. 

2.   Composition  is  eithev  projjer  or  improper. 

194.  Suhstantive. 

In  Compos itio 71  Improper  ihero  are  either  traces  of  con- 
struction or  the  first  part  is  still  inflected  ;  e-normis  =  ex  norma,  out  of 
all  rule  ;  legis-lator,  lawgiver  ;  Senatus-consultum,  decree  of  the  Senate. 

Many  of  these  compounds  liave  gradually  become  inflectional  :  deli- 
rus  {dB-lir&)j  crazy  from  fear ;  egregius  (6-grege),  distmguished  {from 
the  crowd)  ;  proconsul  (for  pro  consule; ;  trium-vir  (from  trium  virum),  etc. 

Note.— From  composition  we  must  distinguish  juxtaposition.  So  a  preposition  is 
brought  into  juxtaposition  with  a  substantive,  or  a  substantive  with  a  substantive : 
ad-modum,  to  a  degree^  very ;  ob-viam,  in  the  wmj,  meeting ;  tisusfructus,  usu- 
fruct ;  liippiter,  Father  Jove.  Noteworthy  are  the  Copulative  compounds  ;  such  are 
compound  numerals  like  un-decim,  duo-decim,  ete.,  and  occasional  others  :  su-ove- 
taur-ilia,  offerings  of  swine ^  sheep^  and  bulls. 

195.  Composition  Proper . 

I.  The  first  part  of  the  compound  may  be  a  particle,  as  ne-far-iu-s, 
nefarious  ;  ve-sanu-s,  mad,  out  of  one's  sound  senses  :  or  a  substantive. 

If  it  is  a  substantive — 

(a)  The  stems  in  -a,  -o,  -u  regularly  weaken  these  vowels  into  -i 
before  the  consonants  of  the  second  part,  which  i  may  vanisli  :  causi- 
dicus,  pleader,  lawyer  (causa) ;  signi-fer,  standard-hearer  (signu-m) ; 
corni-ger,  horn-ivearer  (cornu) ;  man-ceps  (manu-  and  cap-),  one  who  takes 
in  hand,  contractor.  The  i-stems  retain  i  or  drop  it  :  Igni-vomu-s,  fire- 
vomiting  (igni-s) ;  nau-fragu-s,  shipwrecked  (nfivi-s). 

{h)  Vowel-stems  drop  their  vowel  before  the  vowel  of  the  second 
part  :  magn-animu-s,  great-souled  ;  iin-animu-s,  of  one  ?nind. 

(c)  Consonant-stems  either  drop  their  consonants  or  add  i:  liomi- 
cid-a,  manslayer  (hoirun-) ;  lapi-cid-a,  stone-cutter  (lapid-) ;  matr-i-cid-a, 
mother-murderer,  matricide. 

Note.— The  first  part  is  rarely,  if  ever,  a  verb.  Apulkius  uses  the  form  pOsci> 
nuuunius. 


FORMATION    OF    WORDS.  I4I 

2,  The  second  part  of  the  composition  is  a  noun  :  tri-enn-iu-m,  space 
of  three  years  (annus) ;  miseri-cor-s,  tender-hearted  (cor). 

When  the  second  part  ends  in  a  vowel,  it  adapts  itself,  if  an  adjec- 
tive, to  changes  of  gender,  as  flavi-comus,  yellow-haired  (coma,  hair), 
but  more  often  this  final  vowel  becomes  i  and  tlie  adjective  follows  the 
third  declension  :  tri-rgmi-s,  trireme  (rgmu-s,  oar) ;  ab-normi-s,  abnormal 
(norma,  norm). 

When  the  second  part  ends  in  a  consonant,  the  last  term  usually 
undergoes  no  change  :  bi-den-s,  two-pronged  ;  simplex  (sim-plec-s),  simple. 

Note.— From  genus  (G.  generis),  is  formed  dS-gener. 

II.    SIGNIFICATION    OF    COMPOUNDS. 

196.  Compound  substantives  and  adjectives  are  divided  according 
to  their  signification  into  two  main  cla.sses  :  Determinative  and  Pos- 
sessive. 

In  Determinative  compounds  one  of  the  terms  is  subordinate  to  the 
other.  They  fall  into  two  classes  :  Attributive  or  Appositional,  and 
Dependent. 

197.  !•  Attributive  compounds.  The  first  part  is  the  attribute  of 
the  second. 

The  first  word  is,  (i)  a  substantive  :  ali-pes,  ioing-foot{ed) ;  (2)  an  ad- 
jective :  magn-animus,  great-hearted  ;  lati-fundium,  large  estate ;  (3)  a 
numeral :   bi-enni-um  {i.  e.,  spatium),  space  of  two  years. 

2.  Dependent  compounds.  In  these  the  second  word  is  simply  limited 
by  the  other,  its  signification  not  being  altered. 

{a)  The  first  word  is  :  (i)  an  adjective  :  meri-di6s  (from  medi-di6  = 
medio  diS),  mid-day  ;  (2)  an  adverb  :  bene-ficus  {well-doing),  beneficent ; 
male-ficus,  evil-doing ;  (3)  a  numeral  :  ter-geminus,  triple;  (4)  a  par- 
ticle :  dis-sonus,  harsh-sounding ;  per-magnus,  very  large ;  in-dignus, 
unworthy ;  (5)  a  verb-stem  :  horr-i-ficus,  horrible  {horror-stirnng). 

(b)  The  first  word  gives  a  case  relation,  such  as  (i)  the  Accusative  : 
armi-ger  =  arma  gerens,  armor-bearer;  agri-cola  —  agrum  colens  (land- 
tiller),  husbandman ;  (2)  the  Genitive  :  s51-stitium  =  solis  statiQ  {smi- 
•  staying),  solstice;  (3)  the  Locative  :  ali6ni-gena  {born  elsewhere),  alien ; 
(4)  the  Instrumental  :  tibi-cen  =  tibia  canens,  flute-player. 

198.  Possessive  Compounds  are  adjectival  only,  and  are  so  called 
because  they  imply  the  existence  of  a  Subject  possessing  the  quality 
indicated. 

The  first  term  is,  (i)  a  substantive  :  angui-manus,  (having  a)  snake- 
hand  {elephant) :  (2)  an  adjective  :  flavi-comus,  {havirig)  yellow  hair  ; 
(3)  a  numeral  :  bi-fr6ns,  {having)  tivo  front{s)  ;  (4)  a  particle  :  dis-cors, 
discordant;  in-ers,  inactive. 


1^2  FORMATION    OF    WORDS. 

Note.— Notice  that  these  divisions  run  into  each  other ;  thus  magn-animus  ia 
possessive,  attributive,  and  dependent. 

199.  Verb. 

In  Composi  tion  Imp  r  o per  the  verb  is  joined  to  a.  verb,  sub- 
stantive, or  adverb.  In  C ompo sition  Proper  the  verb  is  com- 
bined v^rith  a  preposition. 

200.  I-   Composition  Improper . 

(a)  Verb  wit?i  verb :  This  only  takes  place  when  the  second  part  of 
the  compound  is  facio  orfio  (178,  n.  2).  The  first  part  of  the  compound 
is  regularly  an  intransitive  of  the  second  conjugation  :  cale-facio,  cale- 
fio,  warm,  am  warmed. 

{b)  Verb  iviih  substantive :  anim-adverto  =  animum  adverto,  take 
notice  ;  manii-inittS,  set  free  ;  iisu-capio,  acquire  by  use. 

(c)  Verb  with  adverb  :  bene-dico,  bless ;  male-dico,  curse  ;  malo,  nolS 
(for  mage  (magis)  vol5,  ne-  volo),  satis-facio,  satisfy. 

2.  Composition   Proper. 

The  verb  combines  with  separable  or  inseparable  prepositions. 
Compare  413,  r.  3. 

(a)  With  inseparable  prepositions  :  amb-io,  go  about  ;  am-plector,  en- 
fold;  an-helo,  draw  deep  breath,  pant;  dis-curro,  run  apart;  dir-imS, 
160,  T,  and  715,  R.I ;  por-tendo,  hold  forth,  portend;  red-do,  give  back; 
re-solv6,  resolve  ;  s6-iungo,  separate. 

(b)  Willi  separable  prepositions ;  ab  e5,  go  away ;  ad-eS,  come  up ; 
ante-curro,  run  in  advance  ;  com-pono,  put  together ;  d6-curro,  run  down, 
finish  a  course  ;  ex-c6do,  overstep ;  in-clud5,  shut  in ;  ob-duc5,  draio 
over ;  per-agro,  ivander  through  ;  post-habe5,  keep  in  the  background ; 
prae-dico,  foretell ;  praeter-e5,  pass  by ;  prod-eo,  go  forth ;  prae-video, 
foresee  ;  sub-icio,  put  under  ;  subter-fugio,  flee  from  under  ;  super-sum, 
remain  over  ;  trans-gredior,  pass  beyond. 


Syntax. 


201.  Syntax  treats  of  the  formation  and  combination  of 
sentences. 

A  sentence  is  tlie  expression  of  a  thought  (sententia)  in 
words. 

Sentences  are  divided  into  simple  and  compound. 

A  simple  sentence  is  one  in  which  the  necessary  parts 
occnr  but  once ;  for  the  compound  sentence  see  472. 

The  necessary  parts  of  the  sentence  are  tlie  subject  and  the 
predicate. 

The  predicate  is  that  which  is  said  of  the  subject. 

The  subject  is  that  of  which  the  predicate  is  said. 

Luna  fulget,  The  moon  shines. 

Luna  is  the  subject ;  fulget,  the  predicate. 

Remarks. — i.  The  Interjection  (IG,  r.  2)  and  the  Vocative  case  (23, 
5)  stand  outside  the  structure  of  the  sentence,  and  therefore  do  not 
enter  as  elements  into  Syntax,  except  that  the  Vocative  is  subject  to 
the  laws  of  Concord.     See  r.  3. 

2.  The  Vocative  differs  from  the  Nominative  in  form  in  the  second 
declension  only,  and  even  there  the  Nominative  is  sometimes  used 
instead,  especially  in  poetry  and  solemn  prose. 

Almae  filius  Maiae,  H.,  0.,  I.  2,43  ;  son  of  mild  Maia  !  Audi  tu, 
populus  Albanus,  L.,  i.  24,  7  ;  hear  thou,  people  of  Alia  ! 

0  is  prefixed  to  give  emphasis  to  the  address: 

6  formose  puer,  nimium  nS  cr6de  colori,  V.,  Ec.  2,  ir ;  o  shapely  boy!  trust  not 
complexion  all  too  much. 

The  Vocative  is  commonly  interjected  in  prose,  except  in  higlily  emotional  pas- 


3.  On  the  use  of  the  Vocative  of  an  adjective  or  participle  in  appo- 
sition, attribution,  or  predication,  see  289,  325,  R.  i. 

SYNTAX    OF    THE    SIMPLE    SENTENCE. 

202.  The  most  simple  form  of  the  sentence  is  the  finite 
verb  :  su-m,  /  am  ;  doce-s,  thou  teachest ;  scrlbi-t,  he  writes. 


144  SYNTAX    OF   THE    SIMPLE   SENTENCE. 

Remark. — Here  the  form  contains  in  itself  all  the  necessary  ele- 
ments (compare  114),  the  persons  being  indicated  by  the  endings. 
From  tiie  expansion  and  modification  of  the  finite  verb  arise  all  the 
complicated  forms  of  the  compound  sentence. 

203.  Subject. — The  subject  of  the  finite  verb  is  always  in 
the  Nominative  Case,  or  so  considered. 

Remarks.— I.  The  subj.  of  the  Inf.  is  in  the  Accusative  (343,  2). 
2.  The  use  of  the  Nom.  in  Latin  is  the  same  as  in  English. 

204.  The  subject  may  be  a  substantive  or  a  pronoun,  or 
some  other  word,  j^^^i^^se,  or  clause  used  as  a  substantive  : 

Deus  mundum  gubernat,  God  steers  the  universe.  Ego  rgges  giecl, 
[C]  ad  Her.,  iv.  53,  6G  ;  I  drove  out  kings.  Sapiens  res  adversas  non 
timet,  THE  SAGE  does  not  fear  adversity.  Victi  in  servitutem  redi- 
guntur,  THE  VANQUISHED  are  reduced  to  slavery.  Contendisse  de- 
corum est,  Ov.,  31.,  IX.  6  ;  to  have  struggled  is  lionorahle.  Magnum 
beneficium  [est]  naturae  quod  necesse  est  mori.  Sen.,  E.3L,  lor,  14; 
it  is  a  great  boon  of  nature,  that  we  must  needs  die,  Vides  habet  duas 
syllabas,  (the  word)  "vides"  has  tivo  syllables. 

Notes — 1.  Masculine  and  feminine  adjectives,  and  to  a  less  degree  participles, 
arc  used  as  substantives,  but  with  the  following  limitations  : 

(«)  Many  adjectives  in  -aiiuS  and  -icus  (the  latter  mostly  Greek),  designating 
office  or  occupation,  and  words  expressing  friendship,  kinship,  or  otlier  relationship, 
are  used  often  as  substantives  both  in  the  Sing,  and  the  PI.  of  the  masculine  and  femi- 
nine :  aquarius,  waterman ;  librarius,  lookman  {-seller,  writer,  etc.)  ,•  grammati- 
CUS,  grammarian  ;  amicus,  friend  ;  cognatus,  kinsman  ;  socius,  partner.  Many  of 
theso  have  becomealmost  wholly  fixed  i;s  substantives,  as  amicus, /rienrf.  See  16,  N.  1. 

(&)  Adjectives  are  very  often  used  r.s  substantives  in  the  masc.  Fl.  when  they  desig- 
nate a  class :  pauperSs,  the  poor  ;  divitSs,  the  rich.  In  the  oblique  cases  of  tlie  Sing., 
this  use  is  also  not  uncommon  ;  but  in  the  Nom.  the  substantive  is  generally  expressed  : 
vir  bonus,  a  good  man  ;  mulier  peregrina,  a  foreign  ivoman.  So  regularly,  if  used 
with  a  proper  name  :  Plato,  doctissimus  IlomS,  the  learned  Plato.  Exceptions  are  rare 
and  scattering  in  prose  :  egO  et  SUavissimu3  CicerO  val6mus,  C,  Fa?n.,  xiv.  5, 1. 

(c)  On  the  use  of  participles  as  substantives  see  437,  n. 

(d)  When  persons  are  not  meant,  a  substantive  is  understood  :  cani  (capilli),  groT/ 
hairs ;  calida  (aqua),  warm  water ;  dextra  (manus),  right  hand. 

2.  Neuter  adjectives  and  participles  arc  freely  employed  as  substantives  in  both  num- 
bers ;  in  the  PI.  usually  in  Nom.  and  Ace,  in  the  Sing,  in  all  cases,  butespecially  in  con- 
nection with  prepositions :  medium,  the  midst ;  eztrSmum,  theend ;  reliquom,  the 
residite  .•  futurum,  the  future  ,•  bonum,  good  .•  bona,  h'essuigx,  possessions  ;  malum, 
evil ;  mala,  misfortunes.  The  Pl:ir;U  is  frequently  e;nploye  1  when  tlie  Engiisli  idiom 
prefeis  the  Singular  :  v6ra,  the  truth  ;  omnia,  everything. 

3.  Adjectives  of  the  Second  Declension  are  soiiietimcs  used  as  neuter  substantives  in 
the  Gen.,  after  words  of  (luantity  or  pronouns  :  aliquid  boni,  something  good  ;  nihil 
mall,  nothing  bad.  Adjectives  of  the  Third  Decleii8i>)n  lue  thus  employed  only  in 
combination  with  those  of  the  Second,  and  even  then  very  rarely  (369,  R.  i). 

Usually  the  adjective  of  the  Third  Declension  draws  the  adjective  of  the  Second 


SUBJECT — PREDICATE — COPULA.  I45 

into  it8  own  construction  :    Quid  habet  ista  res  aut  laetabile  aut  gloriosum  1 

C,  Tusc,  1.  21,  49  ;  what  is  ihert  to  be  glad  of  or  to  brag  about  in  that? 

4.  Instead  of  the  neuter  adjective,  the  word  rgs,  Oilng^  is  frequently  used,  especially 
in  forms  which  are  identical  for  different  genders,  and  consequently  ambiguous ;  so 
bonarum  rerum,  of  blessings,  rather  than  bonorum  (masc.  and  neut.). 

5.  In  Lalin  the  PI.  of  abstract  substantives  occurs  more  frequently  than  in  English  ; 
adventus  iraperatorum,  the  nrrivalis)  of  the  generals  (because  there  were  several 
generals,  or  because  they  arrived  at  different  times).  Pluralizing  abstract  substantives 
often  makes  them  concrete  :  fortitudinSs,  gallant  actions ;  formidines,  bugbears  ; 
Irae,  quarrels. 

6.  Other  PI.  expressions  to  be  noted  are :  niv6s,  snmvi-flakes) ;  grandings,  hail 
(-stones) ;  pluviae,  {streams  of)  rain  ;  ligua,  (Jogs  of)  wood  ;  carnSs,  pieces  of  meat ; 
aera,  articles  of  bronze  ;  also  Bymmetrical  parts  of  the  human  body  :  cervic6s,  neck  ; 
pectora,  bjrxist. 

The  PI.  is  freely  used  in  poetry  and  in  later  prose  :  Otia  Si  toUas,  perigre  Cu- 
pidinis  arctis,  Ov.,  Bern. Am.,  139  ;  if  you  do  atvaij  with  holidays,  Ciq/ui's  boiu  (and 
arrows)  are  ruined. 

7.  The  rhetorical  Roman  often  uses  the  First  Person  PL  for  the  First  Person  Singular. 
The  usage  originates  in  modesty,  but  mock  modesty  is  the  worst  form  of  pomposity. 
It  is  never  very  common,  and  is  not  found  before  Cicero  :  Librum  ad  te  d5  senec- 
tute  misimus,  C.,  Cat.  J/.,  i,  3  ;  u-e  (I)  have  sent  you  a  treatise  on.  old  age. 

In  poetry  there  is  often  an  element  of  shyness  ;  Sitque  memor  nostri  necne,  re- 
ferte  mihi,  Ov.,  Tr.,  iv.  3, 10  ;  bnug  ine  back  (word)  whether  she  thinks  of  its  (me 
among  others)  or  no. 

8.  (a)  The  Sing.,  in  a  collective  sense,  is  also  used  for  the  PI.,  but  more  rarely:  faba, 
beans  ;  porcus,  pig  (meat) ;  gaUina.,  fowl  (as  articles  of  food) ;  vestis,  clothing. 

(b)  The  use  of  the  Sin2;.  i:i  designations  of  nationalities  and  divisions  of  troops  is 
introduced  by  LivY  :  Romanus,  the  lioman  forces ;  Poenus,  the  Carthaginians  ; 
hostis,  the  enemy  ;  miles,  the  soldiery  ;  pedes,  the  infantry  ;  eques,  the  cavalry. 

205.  Predicate  and  Copula. — When  the  predicate  is  not 
in  the  form  of  a  verb,  but  in  the  form  of  an  adjective  or 
substantive,  or  equivalent,  the  so-called  copula  is  generally 
employed,  in  order  to  couple  the  adjective  or  substantive 
with  the  subject. 

The  chief  copula  is  the  verb  sum,  I  am. 

Fortuna  caeca  est,  C,  Lael.,  15,  54  ;  fortune  is  Mind.  Usus  magister 
est  optimus,  C,  Rah.  Post.,  4,  9  ;  practice  is  the  best  teacher. 

Note.— Strictly  speaking,  the  copula  is  itself  a  predicate,  as  is  shown  by  the  trans- 
lation when  it  stands  alone  or  with  an  adverb  :  est  Deus,  there  is  a  God,  God  exists  ; 
rectS  semper  erunt  rSs,  things  will  always  be  (go  on)  well ;  sic  vita  homiuum  est, 
C,  Rose.  Am.,  30,  84  ;  such  is  human  life  ;  "  So  runs  the  world  away.''' 

206.  Other  copulative  verbs  are  :  videri,  to  seem;  nasci, 
to  he  horn;  fieri,  to  hecome;  evadere,  to  turn  out;  creari,  to 
he  created;  deligi,  to  be  chosen;  putari,  to  he  thought;  baberl, 
to  he  held;  did,  to  he  snid;  appeilari,  to  he  called;  nominari, 
to  he  named.     Hence  the  rule  : 

Verbs  of  seeming,  becoming,  with  the  passive  of  verbs  of 
10 


146  SUBJECT   OMITTED. — IMPERSONAL   VERBS. 

making,  choosing,  shoiving,  tliinlcing,  and  calling,  take  two 
Nominatives,  one  of  the  subject,  one  of  the  predicate  : 

Nemo  nascitur  dives,  Sen.,  i^.J/.,  20,  13;  no  one  is  horn  rich.  Aris- 
tides  iustus  adpellatur,  Aristides  is  called  just.  [Servius]  rex  est  declara- 
tus,  L.,  I.  46,  1 ;  Servius  ivas  declared  king.  [Thucydid§s]  numquam  est 
numeratus  orator,  C,  0.,  9,  31  ;  Thucydides  has  never  been  accounted  an 
orator. 

Remarks. — i.  With  esse,  ser^-e  as;  vidSri,  seem;  habgri,  he  held;  duci, 
be  deemed,  and  rarely  with  other  verbs,  instead  of  the  Predicate  Norn., 
a  phrase  may  be  employed,  as  :  pro  with  xVbl.,  (in)  loco,  in  numero,  with 
Gen.,  etc. 

Audacia  pro  mtiro  habetur,  S.,  C,  58,  17  ;  boldness  is  counted  as  a  bul- 
wark.    In  filii  loco,  C,  Hed.  in  Sen.,  14,  35  ;  as  a  son. 

2.  The  previous  condition  is  given  by  ex  or  dS  and  the  Abl,  (396, n.  2). 
Ex  oratore  arator  factus,  C,  Ph.,  in.  9,  23;  a  pleader  turned ploivman. 

3.  All  copulative  verbs  retain  the  Nom.  with  the  Inf.  after  auxiliary 
verbs  (423). 

Beatus  esse  sine  virttite  nem3  potest,  C,  N.D.,  1.  18,  48  ;  no  one  can  be 
happy  u'ithout  virtue. 

4.  On  the  Double  Ace.  after  Active  Verbs,  see  340. 

Notes.— 1.  The  verbs  mentioned,  with  some  others,  arc  found  in  good  prose.  Others 
are  either  poetical  or  unclassical,  thus  :  perhiberi,  to  he  held,  is  eai  ly  ;  apparere,  to 
ajyfiear,  is  poetic  and  post-classical  for  videri ;  reddi  i'?  not  used  for  fieri ;  sisti,  to  be 
set  down,  is  Plautine  :  manSre,  to  remain,  is  late  (permanere  once  in  Cicero). 

2.  Noteworthy  is  the  use  01  audire,  like  the  Greek  d/couei«/,  to  be  called,  which  is 
confined  to  Horace  ;  rgxque  paterque  audisti,  Ep.,  i.  7,  38  ;  S.,  u.  6, 20,  just  as 
•'  hear  "  in  this  sense  is  said  to  be  conllned  to  Milton. 

207.  Subject  Omitted. — The  personal  pronoun  is  not 
expressed  in  classical  prose,  unless  it  is  emphatic,  as,  for 
example,  in  contrasts  : 

Amamus  parent6s,  We  love  {our)  payments.  Ego  reggs  gieci,  vos  tyran- 
nos  introducitis,  [C]  ad  Her.,  iv.  53,  66  ;  I  drove  out  kings,  ye  are  bring- 
iiig  in  tyrants. 

Note.— The  insertion  of  the  pronoun  without  emphasis  is  very  common  in  the 
comic  poets,  and  seems  to  have  been  a  colloquialism.  Also  common  in  Catullus,  Sal- 
lust  (as  an  archaism),  and  Petromus. 

208.  Impersonal  Verbs. — Impersonal  Verbs  are  verbs  in 
which  the  agent  is  regularly  implied  in  the  action,  the  sub- 
ject in  the  predicate,  so  that  the  person  is  not  expressed. 
Chief  of  these  are  : 

I.  Verbs  pertaining  to  the  state  of  the  weather  :  tonat,  it  thunders, 
the  thunder  thunders,  or  rather,  the  Thunderer  thunders;  fulget,  fulgn- 


COPULA    OMITTED.  ,  I47 

rat  Oess  common),  fulminat  (poet.),  it  lightens;  pluit  (poet.),  it  rains; 
ningit,  it  snows,  etc. 

Nocte  pluit  tota,  V.,  (Poet.  Lat.  Min.,  iv.  155,  B.)  ;  all  night  it  {he, 
Jupiter)  rains. 

Note.— The  divine  ngent  is  sometimes  expressed  ;  so,  naturally,  in  religious  or  popu- 
lar language  :  love  tonante,  fulgurante,  c,  Div.,  11. 18, 43  ;  love  fulgente,  C, 

N.  D.^  II.  25,  C5. 

2.  The  passive  of  intransitive  verbs  is  often  used  impersonally  ;  so 
regularly  of  verbs  winch  in  the  active  are  construed  with  the  Dat.  (217): 
vivitur,  people  live ;  curritur,  there  is  a  running ;  pugnatur,  there  is  a 
battle ;  mihi  invidetur,  /  am  envied.  The  subject  is  contained  in  the  verb 
itself  :  sic  vivitur  =  sic  vita  vivitur,  such  is  life ;  pugnatur  =  pugna  pugna- 
tur, a  battle  is  {being)  fought.  In  the  same  way  explain  taedet,  it  wearies  ; 
miseret,  it  moves  to  pity ;  piget,  it  disgusts  ;  pudet,  it  puts  to  shame. 

Notes. — 1.  With  all  other  so-called  Impersonal  Verbs  an  Inf.  (42?,  53.5)  or  an  equiv- 
alent (.52.3)  is  conceived  as  a  subject :  Non  lubet  mihi  deplorare  vitam,  C,  Cat. 
J/.,  23,  84.     Sed  accidit  perincommod6  quod  eum  nusquam  vidisti,  C,  j^L, 

I.  17,  2. 

2.  other  uses  coincide  with  the  English.  So  the  .Third  Person  PI.  of  verbs  of 
Saying,  Tliinking,  and  Calling.  Also  the  ideal  Second  Person  Singular  (258).  To  be 
noticed  is  the  occasional  use  of  inquit,  qyoth  he.,  of  an  imaginary  person,  but  not  by 
Caesar,  Sali.iist,  or  Tacitus  :  Non  concido,  inquit,  Epicuro,  C.,  Ac,  11.  32, 101 ; 
I  do  not  yield  the  jmiit,  quoth  he  {07ie),  to  Epicurus. 

209.  Copula  Omitted. — Est  or  sunt  is  often  omitted  in 
saws  and  proverbs,  in  short  statements  and  questions,  in 
rapid  changes,  in  conditional  clauses,  and  in  tenses  com- 
pounded with  participles  : 

Summum  ius  summa  iniuria,  C,  Off.,  1.  10,  33  ;  the  height  of  right  {is) 
the  height  of  icrong.  Ngmo  malus  fglix,  Juv.,  iv.  8  ;  no  bad  man  {is) 
happy.  Quid  dulcius  quam  habere  quicum  omnia  audeas  loqui  ?  C,  LaeL, 
7,  23  ;  what  sweeter  than  to  have  some  one  with  whom  you  can  venture 
to  talk  about  everything  ?    Sed  haec  vetera ;  illud  vSrS  recens,  C,  Ph.,  n. 

II,  25.     Aliquamdiu  certatum,  S.,  lug.,  74,  3.     Cur  hostis  Spartacus,  si  tu 
civisl  C,  P«r«(/.,  4,  30. 

So  also  esse,  with  participles  and  the  like  : 

Caesar  statuit  exspectandam  classem,  Caes.,  B.G.,  iii.  14, 1  ;  Caesar 
resolved  that  the  fleet  must  be  icaited  for. 

Notes.- 1.  The  omission  of  esse  is  not  common  with  the  Nom.  and  Infinhive. 

2.  Popular  speech  omits  freely  ;  so,  mirum  ni,  mirum  quin,  factum,  in  Latin 
comedy  ;  likewise  potis  and  pote  for  forms  of  posse.  To  a  like  origin  are  due  mirum 
quantum,  nimium  quantum,  etc.,  found  at  all  periods. 

3.  The  ellipsis  of  other  forms  of  the  copula  is  unusual.  Thus  Cicero  occasionally 
omits  sit  ill  the  Indirect  Question,  and  Tacitus  other  forms  of  the  Subjv.  besides. 

is  omitted  by  Livy,  and  not  unfrequently  by  Tacitus. 

4.  The  Ellipsis  of  eSSe  was  Bometitnes  due  to  the  desire  of  avoiding  the  heaping  up 


148  .AGREEMEN^T   OF    PREDICATE    WITH    SUBJECT. 

of  Infinitives.  Thus  sentences  like  non  dubito  te  esse  sapientem  dicere  {to  declare 
you  to  he  wise)  were  regularly  cut  down  to  non  dubito  t6  sapientem  dioere  (^0  de- 
dare  you  tvise). 

5.  The  ellipsis  of  other  verbs,  such  as  facere,  Ire,  venire,  dicere,  etc.,  is  charac- 
teristic of  popular  speech  ;  it  is  therefore  not  uncommon  in  Cicero's  letters  (ad  AU.\ 
in  Pliny's  letters,  and  in  works  involving  dialogue,  such  as  Cicero's  philosophical 
wriifiugs.    The  historians  avoid  it,  and  it  never  occurs  in  Caesar  and  Velleius. 

CONCORD. 

210.  The  Three  Concords. — There  are  three  great 
concords  in  Latin  : 


.  The  agreement  of  the  predicate  with  the  subject  (211). 

.  The  agreement  of  attributive  or  appositive  with  the  substantive 
)o,  321). 
3.  The  agreement  of  the  relative  with  antecedent  (614). 


2 

(285,  321). 


211.  Agreement  of  the  Predicate  with  the  Subject, 

in  number  and 


The  verbal  predicate  aarrees  with  its  subiect 

^  ^  *'        ( person. 

i  in   number. 
The  adjective  predicate  agrees  with  its  subject  •<  gender,  and 

(  case. 
The  substantive  predicate  agrees  with  its  subject  in  case. 

Substantiva  mobilia  (21,  2)  are  treated  as  adjectives,  and  follow  the 
number  and  gender  of  the  subject. 

Ego  reges  eieci,  vos  tyrannos  introducitis,  [C]  ad  Her.,  iv.  53,  66  (207). 
Verae  amicitiae  senipiternae  sunt,  C,  Lael,,  g,  32  ;  true  friendships  are 
abiding.  Dos  est  decern  talenta,  Ter.,  And.,  950  ;  the  dowry  is  ten  talents. 
Usus  magister  est  optimus,  C . ,  Rah.  Post. ,  4,  9  (205).  Arx  est  monosyllabum, 
''Arx"  2s  a  monosyllable.  Compare  Ignis  confector  est  et  consumptor 
omnium,  C,  N.D.,  11.  15,  41  ;  fire  is  the  doer-up  {destroyer)  aiid  eater-up 
{consumer)  of  everything,  with  confectrixrSrum  omnium  vetustas,  C,  Frag. 

IIemarks. — I.  The  violation  of  the  rules  of  agreement  is  due  chiefly 
to  one  of  two  causes;  either  the  natural  relation  is  preferred  to  the 
artificial  (c5nstructi5  ad  sgnsum,  per  synesin,  according  to  the  sense),  or 
the  nearer  is  preferred  to  the  more  remote.     Hence  the  following 

Exceptions. — {a)  Substantives  of  multitude  often  take  the  predi- 
cate in  the  Plural:  t^&ts, part ;  vis  {poiver),  quantity ;  multitude, cro/i't/; 
organized  bodies  more  rarely.  Also,  but  not  often,  such  words  as 
quisque,  uterque,  n6m6,  etc. 

Pars  maior  recgperant  sSsS,  L.,  xxxiv.  47,  6  ;  the  greater  part  had  re- 
tired.    Omnia  multitude  abeunt,  L.,  xxiv.  3,  15  ;   all  the  crowd  depart. 


AGREEMENT    OF    PREDICATE    WITH   SUBJECT.  I49 

Magna  vis  gminus  missa  telorum  multa  nostris  vulnera  inferebant,  Caes., 
B.C.,  II.  6,  5.  Uterque  ooruin  ex  castris  exercitum  educunt,  Caes.,  B.C.y 
III.  30,  3. 

Note.— This  usage  is  very  common  in  comedj%  but  extremely  rare  in  model  prose. 
LivY  shows  a  greater  variety  and  a  larger  number  of  substantives  than  any  other 
author,  and  poets  and  late  prose  writers  are  free.  Yet  Horace  uses  regularly  the  Sing, 
with  a  collective,  while  Vergil  varies,  often  employing  first  a  Sing,  and  then  a  PI.  verb 
with  tlie  same  substantive  (as  A.,  11.  C4).    Tacitus  often  uses  quisque  witli  a  Plural. 

(b)  The  adjective  predicate  often  follows  the  natural  gender  of  the 
subject  ;  so  especially  with  milia.  This  usage  belongs  pre-eminently 
to  the  historians. 

Capita  coniiirationis  virgis  caesi  (sunt),  L.,  x.  i,  3  ;  the  heads  of  the 
conspiracy  were  flogged.  Samnitium  caesi  tria  milia,  Cf.  L.,  x.  34,8  ; 
of  the  Samnites  {there)  were  slain  three  thousand. 

The  passive  verb  often  agrees  in  gender  with  the  predicate  :  Non 
omnis  error  stultitia  dicenda  est,  C.,Div.y  11.  43,  90  ;  not  every  false  step 
is  to  be  called  folly. 

(c)  The  copula  often  agrees  with  the  number  of  the  predicate  ("  the 
wages  of  sin  is  death  ") : 

Amantium  irae  (204,  n,  5) amoris  integratio  est,  Ter. ,  And.,  555 ;  lovers* 
quarrels  are  lovers  renewal. 

2.  A  superlative  adjective  defined  by  a  Partitive  Gen.  follows  the 
gender  of  the  subj.  when  it  precedes: 

Indus,  qui  est  omnium  fluminum  maximus,  C,  iY./>.,  11,  52, 130  ;  the 

Indus,  which  is  the  greatest  of  all  rivers. 

Otherwise  it  follows  the  Genitive;  but  this  usage  is  post-classic  : 
Velocissimum  omnium  animalium  est  delphinus,  Plin.,  N.U.,  ix.  8,  20  ; 

the  dolphin  is  the  swiftest  of  all  animals. 

3.  The  Voc.  is  sometimes  used  by  the  poets  in  the  predicate,  either 
by  anticipation  or  by  assimilation.     (See  325,  r.  i.) 

4.  The  neuter  adjective  is  often  used  as  the  substantive  predicate  of 
a  masculine  or  feminine  subject : 

Triste  lupus  stabulis,  V.,  Ec,  3,  80  ;  the  tvolf  is  a  baleful  thing  to  the 
folds.  Varium  et  mutabile  semper  femina,  V.,  A.,iy.  569  ;  "a  thi7ig  of 
moods  and  fancies  "  is  woman  ever. 

This  construction  is  poetical;  in  Cicero  it  is  used  with  a  few  words 
only;  such  as  extremum,  commune: 

Omnium  rerum  (204,  n.  4)  mors  [est]  extrSmum,  Cf.  C,  Fam.,  vi.  21, 1; 
death  is  the  end  of  all  thirigs. 

5.  The  demonstrative  pronoun  is  commonly  attracted  into  the  gen- 
der of  the  predicate: 

Negat  Epicurus ;  hoc  enim  vostrum  lumen  est,  C,  Fi7i.,  11.  22,  70  ;  Fpi- 
curus  says  No  ;  for  he  is  your  great  light.  Ea  non  media  sed  nulla  via 
est,  L.,  xxxii.,  21,  33  ;  that  is  not  a  middle  course,  but  no  course  at  all. 


ISO 


FORMS   OF   THE    VERBAL    PREDICATE. 


But  in  negative  sentences,  and  when  the  pronoun  is  the  predicate, 
there  is  no  change.    So  in  definitions  : 

Quid  aut  quale  [est]  Deus  ?  Cf.  C,  N.D.,  i.  22,  GO  ;  what  or  what  man- 
ner of  thing  is  God  ?  Nee  sopor  illud  erat,  V.,  A.,  iii.  173,  Quod  ita  erit 
gestum,  id  lex  erit,  C,  PIl.,  i.  10,  2G. 

Exceptions  are  but  apparent.     C,  0.,  11.  38, 157. 

6.  The  adjective  predicate  sometimes  agrees  with  a  substantive  in 
apposition  to  the  subject.  So  especially  when  the  appositive  is  oppidum, 
civitas,  and  the  like  : 

Corioli  oppidum  captum  [est],  L.,  11. 33,  9;  Corioli-town  was  taken. 
Corinthum,  tStius  Graeciae  lumen,  exstinctum  esse  voluerunt,  C,  Imp.,  5, 
11  ;  they  would  have  Corinth,  the  eye  of  all  Greece,  put  out. 

Note?;.— 1.  Peculiar  is  the  occasional  nee  of  the  Fut.  participle  in  -urum  for 
feminines  in  early  Latin  :  Altero  (gladio)  t§  occisurum  ait  (Casina),  altero 
vilicum.    Pl.,  C'«5.,693.    ^o  True,  400 

~-  Age  if*  often  used  in  early  Latin  as  if  it  were  an  adverb,  with  the  Plural ;  occa- 
sionally also  cav§ :  Age  modo  fabricamini.    Pl.,  Cus.,  488. 

Akin  is  the  use  of  a  Voc.  Sing,  with  a  PI.  verb,  which  is  occasionally  found  in  clas- 
sical prose  also  ;  Turn  Scaevola ;  quid  est,  Cotta  %  inquit,  quid  tac6tis  ?    C,  0., 

1.  35.  IGO. 

The  use  of  aliquis,  sanie  one  of  you,  in  this  way  is  early  :  Aperite  aliquis  actutum 
ostium,  Teu.,  .!(/.,  634. 

3.  Other  less  usual  constructions  ad  sensum  are  :  the  use  of  a  neuter  demonstrative 
where  a  substantive  of  a  different  gender  is  expected,  and  the  construction  of  r6s  as  if 
it  were  neuter  (both  found  also  in  Cicero)  ;  the  neuter  Singular  summing  up  a  preced- 
ing Plural : 

In  Graecia musici  floruerunt,  discSbantque  id  (^Aa<  [accofnplishme?/f])  omn6s, 
C,  7V6Y-.,  I.  2,  4.  Servitia  repudiabat,  ciiius  (of  which  [dasi<])  initio  ad  eum 
magnae  copiae  concurrebant,  S-,  6'-,  56, 5.    See  also  C,  Div.,  11. 57, 117. 


Forms  of  the  Verbal  Predicate. 

VOICES   OF  THE   VERB. 

212.  There  are  two  Voices  in  Latin — Active  and  Passive. 

Remark. — The  Latin  Passive  corresponds  to  the  Greek  Middle,  and, 
like  the  Greek  Middle,  may  be  explained  in  many  of  its  uses  as  a 
Reflexive. 

213.  Active. — The  Active  Voice  denotes  that  the  action 
proceeds  from  the  subject.  Verbs  used  in  the  Active  Voice 
fall  into  two  classes,  as  follows  : 

Verbs  are  called  Transitive  when  their  action  goes  over  to 
an  object  (transeo,  /  go  over)  ;  InlransUive  when  their  ac- 
tion does  not  go  Itegond  the  subject  :  occidere,  to  fell  —  to  kill 
(Transitive)  ;  cccidere,  to  fdll  (Intransitive). 


PASSIVE   VOICE.  151 

Remark. — Properly  speaking,  a  Transitive  Verb  in  Latin  is  one  that 
forms  a  personal  p^issive,  but  the  traditional  division  given  above  has 
its  convenience,  though  it  does  not  rest  upon  a  difference  of  nature, 
and  a  verb  may  be  trans,  or  intrans.  according  to  its  use.     So 

(a)  Transitive  verbs  are  often  used  intransitively,  in  which  case  they 
serve  simply  to  characterize  the  agent.  This  is  true  especially  of  verbs 
of  movement ;  as  declinare,  inclinare,  movere.  mutare,  vertere,  and  the 
like,  and  is  found  at  all  periods. 

(fi)  On  the  other  liand,  many  intrans.  verbs  are  often  used  transi- 
tively. This  occurs  also  at  all  periods,  but  the  Ace.  is  usually  the  inner 
object  (332). 

(c)  On  the  use  of  the  Inf.  active,  where  English  uses  the  passive, 
see  532,  n,  2. 

214.  Passive. — The  Passive  Voice  denotes  that  the  sub- 
ject receives  the  action  of  the  verb. 

The  instrument  is  put  in  the  Ablative. 

Virgis  caedetur,  C,  Fen*.,  iii.  28,  G9  ;  he  shall  be  beaten  with  rods. 
[Ignis]  lumine  proditur  su5,  0 v., //<?;•.,  15,  8  ;  the  fire  is  betrayed  by 
its  own  light. 

The  agent  is  put  in  the  Ablative  with  ab  (a). 

Ab  amicis  prodimur,  C,  Cluent.,  52, 143  ;  ive  are  betrayed  by  friends. 
Virgis  caesi  tribuni  ab  legato  sunt,  L.,  xxix.  18, 13  ;  the  tribunes  were 
beaten  with  rods  by  the  lieutenafit. 

Remarks. — i.  Intrans.  verbs  of  passive  signification  are  construed  as 
passives  :  fameperire,  C,  Inv.,  11.  57,  172,  to  perish  of  hunger.  So  v6nire, 
to  be  sold  ;  vapulare  (chiefly  vulgar),  tobe  beaten^  ab  aliquo,  by  some  one. 

Abreofustibus[vapulavit],  Cf.  Quint.,  ix.  2,  12;  lie  was  whacked  with 
cudgels  by  the  defendant.  Salvgbis  a  meo  Cicerone,  C,  Ait.,  vi.  2,  10  ; 
greeting  to  you  from  Cicero. 

2.  When  the  instrument  is  considered  as  an  agent,  or  the  agent  as 
an  instrument,  the  constructions  are  reversed  : 

Vinci  a  Voluptate,  C,  Off.,  i.  20,  68  ;  to  be  overcome  by  Dame  Pleasure. 
Patriciis  iuvenibus  saepserant  latera^  L.,  in.  37,  6  ;  they  had  flanked  him 
tvith  a  guard  of  patrician  youths- 

The  latter  construction  is  very  rare  in  Cicero,  and  seems  to  belong 
pre-eminently  to  the  historians. 

Animals,  as  independent  agents,  are  treated  like  persons. 

A  cane  non  magno  saepe  tenetur  aper,  Ov.,  Bern. Am.,  422  ;  a  boar  is 
often  held  fast  by  a  little  dog. 

Animals,  as  instruments,  are  treated  like  things. 

Compare  equ5  vebi,  to  ride  a  horse  (to  be  borne  by  a  horse),  with  in 
etuo,  on  horseback. 


152  VOICES   OF   THE    VERB. 

215.  The  person  in  whose  interest  an  action  is  done  is  put 
in  the  Dative.  Hence  the  frequent  inference  that  the  person 
interested  is  the  agent.     See  354. 

1.  With  the  Perfect  passive  it  is  the  natural  inference, 
and  common  in  prose. 

Mihl  r6s  tota  provisa  est,  C,  Verr.,  iv.  42,  91  ;  /  have  had  the  whole 
thing  provided  for.  Carmina  nulla  mihi  sunt  scripta,  Ov.,  Tr.,  v.  12,  35; 
poems — /  have  none  written  (I  have  written  no  poems). 

2.  With  the  Gerundive  it  is  the  necessary  inference,  and 
the  Dative  is  the  reigning  combination. 

Nihil  [est]  homini  tarn  timendum  quam  invidia,  C,  Cluent.,  3,  7  ;  there 
is  nothing  that  one  has  to  fear  to  the  same  extent  as  envy. 

216.  The  Direct  Object  of  the  Active  Verb  (the  Accusa- 
tive Case)  becomes  the  Subject  of  the  Passive. 

Alexander  Bar  Sum  vicit,  Alexander  conquered  Darius. 

Dargus  ab  Alexandro  victus  est,  Darius  was  conquered  by  Alexander. 

217.  The  Indirect  Object  of  the  Active  Verb  (Dative  Case) 
cannot  be  properly  used  as  the  Subject  of  the  Passive.  The 
Dative  remains  unchanged,  and  the  verb  becomes  a  Passive 
in  the  Third  Person  Singular  (Impersonal  Verb).  This 
Passive  form  may  have  a  neuter  subject  corresponding  to  the 
Inner  object  (333,  i). 

Active :    Miseri  invident  bonis,  The  wretched  envy  the  well-to-do. 
Passive :  mih](  invidetur,. ./  am  envied, 

tibi  invidetur,  thou  art  envied, 

ei  invidetur,  he  is  envied, 

nobis  invidetur,  we  are  envied, 

v5bls  invidetur,  you  are  envied, 

ils  invidetur,  they  are  envied. 

Nihil  facile  persuadetur  invltis.  Quint.,  iv.  3, 10  ;  people  are  not  easily 

persuaded  of  anything  against  their  will.   Anulls  nostrls  plus  quam  animls 

creditur.  Sen,,  Ben.,  iii.  15,  3  ;  our  seals  are  more  trusted  than  our  souls. 

Remarks. — i.  In  like  manner  a  Gen.  or  Abl.  in  dependence  upon  an 
active  verb  cannot  be  made  the  subj.  of  the  passive. 

2.  On  the  exceptional  usage  of  personal  Gerundives  from  intrans. 
verbs  see  427,  n.  5. 

Notes.— 1.  The  poets  and  later  prose  writers  sometimes  violate  the  rule,  under 
Greek  influence  or  in  imitation  of  early  usage :  Cflr  invideor  1  (for  cSr  invidetur 
mihi?),  H.,  A. P., 56 ;  vixe^uidem  credar,  Ov.,  Tr.,  m.  lo, 35 ;  persuasus  videtur 


•  ab  aliquO,  hy  some  one. 


REFLEXIVE — DEPONENT.  1 53 

esse,  [C]  ad  Her  ,1. 6,  9.     (Persuadeo  hospitem,  Petr  ,  62,  2,  is  perhaps  an  inten- 
tional solecism.) 

2.  Similar  liberties  are  taken  by  -poets  and  late  prose  writers  with  the  passive  of 
other  intrans.  verbs,  such  as  concedere,  permittere,  praecipere,  pronuntiare :  Fa- 
tis  numquam  conc6ssa  (=  cui  concessum  est)  moveri  Camarina,  V.,  A.,  m.  700. 

218.  Reflexive. — Reflexive  relations,  when  emphatic, 
are  expressed  as  in  English  : 

Omne  animal  sS  ipsum  diligit,  C,  Fin.,  v.  9,  24,  Every  living  creature 
loves  itself. 

But  when  the  reflexive  relation  is  more  general,  the  pas- 
8ive  (middle)  is  employed  :  lavor,  /  bathe,  I  bathe  myself. 

Ptirgari  [nequlvgrunt],  Cf.  L.,  xxiv.  18,  4  ;  they  could  not  clear  them- 
selves. Cum  in  mentem  vSnit,  p6nor  ad  scrlbendum,  C,  Fam.,  ix.  15,  4  ; 
when  the  notion  strikes  me  I  set  myself  to  writing. 

Note.— Some  of  these  verbs  approach  the  deponents,  in  that  the  reflexive  meaning 
of  the  passive  extends  also  to  some  active  forms  ;  thus,  from  vehor,  I  title,  we  get  the 
form  veh6ns,  Hding  (rare) :  Adulgscentiam  per  medias  laudgs  quasi  quadrigis 
vehentem,  c,  Br.,  97,  asi. 

219.  As  the  active  is  often  used  to  express  what  the  subject 
suffers  or  causes  to  be  done,  so  the  passive  in  its  reflexive 
(middle)  sense  is  often  used  to  express  an  action  which  the 
subject  suffers  or  causes  to  be  done  to  itself  :  trahor,  /  let  my- 
self be  dragged  ;  tondeor,  I  have  myself  shaved. 

Duos  Mysos  [insuisti]  in  culeum,  Cf.  C,  Q.F.,  i.  2,  2,  5  ;  you  sewed  two 
Mysians  into  a  sack  {had  them  sewn).  Sine  gemitu  aduruntur,  C,  Tusc.^ 
Y.  27,  77  ;  they  let  themselves  he  burned  without  a  moan.  Diruit,  aedi- 
ficat,  H.,  Ep.,  I.  I,  100  ;  he  is  pulling  down,  he  is  building.  Ipse  docet 
quid  agam ;  fas  est  et  ab  hoste  doc6rI,  Ov.,  M.,  iv.  428  ;  he  himself  teaches 
(me)  what  to  do  ;  it  is  (but)  right  io  let  oneself  be  taught  even  by  an 
enemy  (to  take  a  lesson  from  a  foe). 

220.  Deponent. — The  Deponent  is  a  passive  form  which 
has  lost,  in  most  instances,  its  passive  (or  reflexive)  significa- 
tion. It  is  commonly  translated  as  a  transitive  or  intransi- 
tive active  :  hortor,  /  am  exhorting  (trans.)  ;  morior,  /  am 
dying  (intrans.). 

Notes.— 1.  A  number  of  intrans.  verbs  show  also  a  Perfect  Part,  passive  used 
actively  ;  not,  however,  in  classical  prose  combined  with  esse  to  take  the  place  of  the 
regular  Perfect.     On  the  use  of  such  participles  as  substantives,  see  167,  N.  i. 

Quid  causae  excogitari  potest,  cur  t6  lautum  voluerit,  cSnatum  nSluerit 
occidere  ?  c,  Dei.,  7, 20. 

2.  Many  verbs  show  both  active  and  deponent  forms  side  by  side.  In  this  case  the 
active  forms  belong  more  often  to  early  authors.    See  163-167. 


154 


TENSES. 


221.  Eeciprocal. — Reciprocal  relations  {''one  another") 
are  expressed  by  inter,  among,  and  the  personal  pronouns, 
nos,  %is ;  vos,  you  ;  se,  themselves. 

Inter  s6  amant,  C,  Q.  F.,  in.  3,  1;  They  love  one  another. 

Remarks. — i.  Combinations  of  alter  alterum,  alius  alium,  uterque 
alteram,  and  the  like,  also  often  give  the  reciprocal  relation  :  some- 
times there  is  a  redundancy  of  expression. 

Placet  Stoicis  homings  hominum  causa  esse  generates,  ut  ipsi  inter  sS 
alii  aliis  prodesse  possent,  C,  Off.,  i.  7,  23  ;  it  is  a  tenet  of  the  Stoics 
that  men  are  brought  into  the  world  for  the  sake  of  men,  to  he  a  blessing 
to  one  another. 

2.  Later  writers  use  invicem  or  mutuo,  inter  s5,  vicissim ;  and  early- 
Latin  shows  occasionally  uterque  utrumque. 

Quae  omnia  hue  spectant,  ut  invicem  ardentius  diligamus,  Plix.,^j9., 
VII.  20,  7  ;  all  these  things  look  to  our  loving  one  another  more  fervently. 
"Uterque  utrlquest  cordi,  Ter.,  Ph.,  800  ;  either  is  dear  to  other. 

TENSES. 

222.  The  Tenses  express  the  relations  of  time,  embracing : 

1.  The  stage  of  the  action  (duration  in  time). 

2.  The  period  of  the  action  (position  in  time). 

The  first  tells  whether  the  action  is  going  on,  or  finished. 
The  second  tells  whether  the  action  is  past,  present,  ox  future. 

Both  these  sets  of  relations  are  expressed  by  the  tenses  of 
the  Indicative  or  Declarative  mood — less  clearly  by  the  Sub- 
junctive. 

223.  There  are  six  tenses  in  Latin  : 

1.  The  Present,  denoting  continuance  in  the prese7it. 

2.  The  Future,  denoting  continuance  in  the  ftitiire. 

3.  The  Imperfect,  denoting  continuance  in  \ki%  past. 

4.  The  Perfect,  denoting  completion  in  i\\%  present. 

5.  The  Future  Perfect,  denoting  completion  in  iheftiture, 

6.  The  Pluperfect,  denoting  completion  in  the  past. 

224.  An  action  may  further  be  regarded  simply  as  attained, 
without  reference  to  its  continuance  or  completioii.  Contin- 
uance and  completion  require  a  point  of  reference  for  defini- 
tion ;  attaimnent  does  not.  This  gives  rise  to  the  aoristic  or 
indefinite  stage  of  the  action,  which  has  no  especial  tense- 


TABLE  OF  TEMPORAL  RELATIONS. 


155 


form.  It  is  expressed  by  the  Present  tense  for  the  present ; 
by  the  Future  and  Future  Perfect  tenses  for  the  future ; 
and  by  the  Perfect  tense  for  the  past. 

Of  especial  importance  are  the  Indefinite  or  Historical 
Present  and  the  Indefinite  or  Historical  Perfect  (Aorist), 
which  differ  materially  in  syntax  from  the  Definite  or  Pure 
Present  and  Perfect. 

225.  The  Tenses  are  divided  into  Pr%ncii)al  and  Histori- 
cal. The  PrincijKil  Tenses  have  to  do  with  the  Present  and 
Future.     The  Historical  Tenses  have  to  do  with  the  Past. 

The  Present,  Pure  Perfect,  Future,  and  Future  Perfect  are 
Principal  Tenses. 

The  Historical  Present,  Imperfect,  Pluperfect,  and  His- 
torical Perfect  are  Historical  Tenses. 

The  Historical  Tenses  are  well  embodied  in  the  following  distich  : 
Talia  tentabat,  sic  et  tentaverat  ante, 
Vixque  dedit  victas  utilitate  manus.     Ov.,  Tr.,  i.  3,  87, 


226.  Table  of  Temporal  Relations, 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

ACTIVE. 


Continuance. 
pREs,    scribo, 

/  am  writing. 
FuT.     scribam, 

/  shall  he  writing. 
Past,    scribebam, 

/  was  writing. 


Completion. 
scrips!, 

I  have  written. 
scripsero, 

/  shall  have  written. 
scripseram, 

/  had  written. 


Attainment. 
scribo, 

/  write. 
scribam  (scripserO), 

/  shall  write. 
scripsi, 

/  wrote. 


PASSIVE. 

Continuance.                   Completion.  Attainment. 

pREs.    scribitur  (epistula),        scripta  est,  scribitur. 

The  letter  is  written      has  been  written,  is  written, 
{writing).                      is  written. 

scribetur,                       scripta  erit,  scrlbetur, 

27ie  letter  will    he     will  have  heen,  will  he  written, 
written  {writing).         will  he  written. 

scrlbebatur,                   scripta  erat,  scripta  est, 

The  letter  was  writ-     had  heen  written^  was  vyritten. 
ten  {writing).               was  written. 


FUT. 


Past. 


156  PRESENT  TENSE. 


Remark. — The  English  passive  is  ambiguous.     The  same  form  is  cur- 
rently used  Jor  continuance,  attainment,  and  completion.    The  context 
alone  can  decide.     A  convenient  test  is  the  substitution  of  the  active. 
{  Continuance,  Some  one  was  writing  a  letter. 
A  letter  ivas  written  :  \  Completion,  Some  one  had  written  a  letter. 
(  Attainment,  Some  one  wrote  a  letter. 


Present  Tense. 

227.  The  Present  Tense  is  used  as  in  English  of  that 
which  is  going  on  now  (Specific  Present),  and  of  statements 
that  apply  to  all  time  (Universal  Present). 

Specific  Present  : 

Auribus  teneo  lupum,  Ter.,  Ph.,  506  ;  lam  holding  a  ivolf  hy  the  ears. 
Universal  Present : 

Probitas  laudatur  at  alget,  Juv.,  i.  74  ;  honesty  is  bepraised  and  freezes. 
Dulce  et  dec5rum  est  pro  patria  mori,  II.,  0.,  ni.  2,  13  ;  sweet  and  seemly 
^tis  to  die  for  fatherland, 

50  regularly  of  the  quoted  views  of  authors,  the  inscriptions  of 
books,  etc. : 

D6  iuvenum  amore  scribit  Alcaeus,  C,  Tusc,  iv.  33,  71 ;  Alcaeusivrites 
concerning  the  love  of  youths. 

Notes.— 1.  The  Specific  Pr.  is  often  to  be  translated  by  the  English  Progressive 
Present.    The  Universal  Pr.  is  Aoristic,  true  at  any  point  of  time. 

2.  As  continuance  involves  the  notion  of  incompleteness  the  Pr.  (sec  233)  is  used  of  at- 
tempted and  intended  action  (Present  of  Endeavor).  But  on  account  of  the  double  use 
of  the  Pr.  this  signification  is  less  prominent  and  less  important  than  in  the  Impf.  Do 
not  mistake  the  Endeavor  which  lies  in  iheverb  for  the  Endeavor  which  lies  in  the  tense. 

Ferlculum  vltant,  C,  Rose. Am.,  i.  1 ;  they  are  trying  to  avoid  danger.  In  the 
example  sometimes  cited  :  Qulntus  frater  Tusculanum  v6nditat,  C,  Att.,  1. 14, 7 ; 
Brother  Quintus  is  "  trying  to  sell "  his  Tmculan  villa  ;  vSnditare  itself  means  to 
offer  for  sale.    Translate  :  intejids  to  offer  for  scde,  if  the  notion  lies  in  the  Tense. 

3.  ThePr.  when  usetl  with  a  negative  often  denotes  Eesistance  to  Pressure  (233) ;  this 
is,  however,  colloquial  :  Tac6;  nQn  tace5  Pl., C'a«,  826  ;  keeji  quiet!  I  won't. 

4.  The  ambiguity  of  our  English  passive  often  suggests  other  translations.  Use  and 
Wont  make  Law  ;  hence  the  frequent  inference  that  what  is  done  is  wliat  ought  to  be 
done  ;  what  is  not  done  is  not  to  be  done :  (Deus)  nec  bene  pr5meritls  capitur,  neo 
tangitur  Irfi,  Lucb.,  11. 651 ;  God  is  not  to  be  inveigled  by  good  se^rice,  nor  touched  by 
anger. 

228.  The  Present  Tense  is  used  more  rarely  than  in  English 
in  anticipation  of  tlie  future,  chiefly  in  compound  sentences  : 

51  vincimus,  omnia  tftta  erunt,  S.,  6'.,  58,  9  ;  if  we  conquer  (=  shall  con- 
quer) ererythiiig  will  he  safe.  Antequam  ad  sententiam  redeS  dS  mS 
pauca  dicam,  C,  Cat.,  iv.  10,  20  ;  before  I  return  to  the  subject,  I  will 


IMPERFECT   TENSE.  I  5/ 

my  a  few  things  of  myself .     Exspectabo  dum  venit,  Ter.,  Emi.,  206  ;  I 
will  wait  all  the  time  that  he  is  coining,  or,  U7itil  he  com,es. 

Notes.— 1.  This  construction  is  archaic  and  familiar.  It  is  very  common  in  the 
Comic  Poets,  very  rare  in  Cicero  and  Caesak,  but  more  common  later.  Some  usages 
have  become  phraseological,  as  si  viVO,  if  Hive,  as  Hive. 

2.  On  the  Pr.  Indie,  for  the  Deliberative  Subjv.,  see  254,  n.  2, 

229.  The  Present  Tense  is  used  far  more  frequently  than 
in  English,  as  a  lively  representation  of  tlie  past  (Historical 
Present)  : 

Cohortis  incedere  iubet,  S.,  C ,  60, 1  ;  Ae  orders  the  cohorts  to  advance. 
Maturat  proficisci,  Caes.,  B.  G.,  i  7,  1  ;  he  hastens  to  depart. 

Remark. — Dum,  while  {yet),  commonly  takes  a  Pr.,  which  is  usually 
referred  to  this  head.  Dtim,  so  long  as,  follows  the  ordinary  law,  571,  ft. 

Dam  haec  in  coUoquid  gerunttir,  Caesari  nuntiatom  est,  Caes  ,  BO.,  i. 
46, 1  ;  while  these  things  ivere  transacting  in  the  confereiice,  word  was 
brought  to  Caesar. 

230.  The  Present  is  used  in  Latin  of  actions  that  are  con- 
tinued into  the  present,  especially  with  iam,  noio  ;  iam  diu, 
now  for  a  long  time  ;  iam  pridem,  noio  long  since.  In  Eng- 
lish we  often  translate  by  a  Progressive  Perfect. 

(Mithridates)  annum  iam  tertium  et  vicgsimum  iggnat,  C,  Imp  ,  3,  7  ; 
Mithridates  has  been  reigning  now  going  on  twenty-three  years.  Libe- 
rare  yds  a  Fhilippo  iam  diu  magis  vultis  quam  audStis,  L  ,  xxxii.  21,  86; 
you  have  this  long  time  had  the  wish  rather  than  (=  though  not)  the 
courage  to  deliver  yourselves  from  Philip. 

"  Ilowdoes  your  honor  for  this  many  a  day?  "  Shak  ,  Ham.,  in.  i,  91. 

Notes.— 1.  The  Pr.  sometimes  gives  the  resulting  condition  : 

Qui  mortem  nSn  timet,  magnum  is  sib!  praesidium  ad  beatam  vltam  com- 
parat,  C.,  Tv^c,  11.  i,  2  ;  Jie  wJio  fears  not  death  gets  for  himself  great  warrant  for  a 
happy  life.   (Dicunt)  vincere  (=  victSrem  esse)  bell5  Bomanum,  L.,  11.  7, 2. 

2.  More  free  is  this  usage  in  the  poets,  sometimes  under  Greek  influence  : 

Auctore  Phoebo  gignor  {yi.yvoiJ.ax  =  yovoi  eifii) ;  baud  generis  pudet.  Sem., 
Ag.,  295. 

Vergil  is  especially  prone  to  use  a  I*r.  after  a  Past,  denoting  by  the  Past  the  cause, 
by  the  Pr.  the  effect :  Postquam  altum  tenu6re  rates  nee  iam  ampiius  lillae 
adparent  terrae,  A.,  in.  193. 

Imperfect  Tense. 

231.  The  Imperfect  Tense  denotes  continuance  in  the 
past :  pugnabam,  /  tvas  fighting. 

The  Imperfect  is  employed  to  represent  manners,  customs, 
situations;  to  describe  and  to  particularize.  A  good  ex- 
am.ple  is  Tek.;,  And.,  74  ff. 


158  IMPERFECT   TENSE. 

The  Imperfect  and  the  Historical  Perfect  serve  to  illus- 
trate one  another.  The  Imperfect  dwells  on  the  process; 
the  Historical  Perfect  states  the  result.  The  Imperfect 
counts  out  the  items;  the  Historical  Perfect  gives  the  sum, 
A  good  example  is  Nep.,  ii.  i,  3. 

232.  The  two  tenses  are  often  so  combined  that  the  general 
statement  is  given  by  the  Historical  Perfect,  the  particulars 
of  the  action  by  the  Imperfect : 

(VerrSs)  in  forum  vfinit ;  ardgbant  oculi  ;  toto  ex  ore  crudeiitas  eminSbat, 
C,  Verr.,  v.  62, 161  ;  Verves  came  into  the  forum,  his  eyes  were  blazint/y 
cruelty  was  standing  out  from  Ms  whole  countenance. 

233.  The  Imperfect  is  used  of  attempted  and  interrupted, 
intended  and  expected  actions  {Imperfect  of  Endeavor).  It 
is  the  Tense  of  Disappointment  and  (with  the  negative)  of 
Resistance  to  Pressure.    (Mere  negation  is  regularly  Perfect. ) 

Curiam  relinqugbat,  Tac,  ^mi.,  11. 34, 1;  he  was  for  leaving  the 
senate-house.  [Lgx]  abrogabatur,  Cf.  L.,  xxxiv.  i,  7  ;  the  law  was  to  he 
abrogated.  Simul  ostendebatur  (an  attempt  was  made  to  show)  quomodo 
cOnstitutionem  reperiri  oporteret,  [C]  ad  Iler.^  11.  i,  2.  Dicebat  (positive) 
melius  quam  scripsit  (negative)  Hortgnsius,  C,  Or.,  38, 132  ;  Ilortensius 
spoke  better  than  he  wrote.  Aditum  non  dabat,  Nep.,  iv.  3,  3  ;  Ae  would 
not  grant  access  (dedit,  did  not).     Sec  also  Mart.,  xi.  105. 

Notes.— 1.  The  Impf.  as  the  Tense  of  Evolution  is  a  Tense  of  Vision.  But  in  Eng- 
lish, Impf .  and  Hist.  Pf.  coincide  ;  hence  tlie  various  translations  to  put  the  reader  in 
tlie  place  of  the  sj^ectator. 

2.  The  contniuance  is  m  the  mind  of  the  narrator ;  it  has  nothing  to  do  with  the 
absolute  duration  of  the  action.  The  mind  may  dwell  on  a  rapid  action  or  hurry  over 
a  slow  one.  With  definite  numbers,  however  large,  the  Eist.  Pf.  must  bo  used,  unless 
tliere  is  a  notion  of  continuance  into  another  stage  (overlapping). 

(Gorgias)  centum  et  novem  vixit  annSSj  (^uint.,  hi.  i,  9 ;  c&rfjius  lived  one 
kitndied  and  nine  years.  Biennium  ibi  perpetuom  misera  ilium  tull,  Ter.,  Ilec.^ 
87  ;  I  bore  him  there— }mir  me  .'—for  two  long  years  iorjethcr. 

3.  As  the  Teuse  of  Disappointment,  the  Impf.  is  occasionally  used,  as  in  Greek,  to 
express  a  startling  appreciation  of  the  real  state  of  thiugs  (Imperfect  of  Awakening). 
Greeli  influence  is  not  unlikely. 

Tu  aderSs,  Tin.,  PA.,  858;  (so  it  turns  out  that)  yo^i  were  here  (all  the  time). 
Peream  male  si  nOn  optimum  erat,  n.,  S.,  n.  i,6 ;  perdition  catch  me  if  that  was 
not  the  best  course  (after  ail). 

Hence  the  modal  use  of  dSbSbam  and  poteram  (254,  r.  2). 

234.  The  Imperfect  is  used  as  the  English  Pluperfect, 
which  often  takes  a  progressive  translation ;  especially  with 
iam,  lam  diti,  iam  dudnm. 


PERFECT  TENSE.  I  59 

lam  dudum  tibi  adversabar,  Pl.,  Men.,  420  ;  Ihad  long  been  opposing 
you.  (Archias)  domicilium  Eomae  multos  iam  annos  [habebat],  Cf.  C, 
Arch.,  4,  7  ;  Archias  had  been  domiciled  at  Rome  now  these  many  years. 

Remark. — As  the  Hist.  Pr.  is  used  in  lively  narrative,  so  the  Hist. 
Inf.  is  used  in  lively  description,  parallel  with  the  Imperfect  (647). 

Perfect  Tense, 

The  Perfect  Tense  lias  two  distinct  nses  : 

I.  Pure  Perfect.  2.  Historical  Perfect  (Aorist). 

1.    PURE    PERFECT. 

235.  The  Pure  Perfect  Tense  expresses  completion  in  the 
Present,  and  hence  is  sometimes  called  the  Present  Perfect. 

1.  The  Pure  Perfect  differs  from  the  Historical  Perfect,  in  that  tlie 
Pure  Perfect  gives  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  Present  an  instan- 
taneous view  of  the  development  of  an  action  from  its  origin  in  the 
Past  to  its  completion  in  the  Present,  that  is,  it  looks  at  both  ends  of  an 
action,  and  the  time  between  is  regarded  as  a  Present.  The  Historical 
Perfect  obliterates  the  intervening  time  and  contracts  beginning  and 
end  into  one  point  in  the  Past. 

2.  An  intermediate  usage  is  that  in  which  the  Perfect  denotes  an 
action  in  the  Past  (Historical),  whose  effect  is  still  in  force  (Pure). 

236.  Accordingly,  the  Perfect  is  used  : 

1 .  Of  an  action  that  is  now  over  and  gone. 

Viximus,  C,  i^«7W.,  xiv.  4,  5  ;  we  have  lived  {life  for  us  has  been). 
FUium  unicum  habeo,  immo  habui,  Ter.,  Ileaut.,  94  ;  I  have  an  only 
son — nay,  have  had  an  only  son.  Tempora  quid  faciunt :  banc  volo,  t§ 
volui,  Mart.,  vi.  40,  4  ;  what  difference  times  mahe  !  (Time  is)  I  want 
HER,  (Time  has  been)  I  wanted  you. 

2.  Far  more  frequently  of  the  present  result  of  a  more 
remote  action  (res2iltin(/  conditioii)  : 

Equum  et  mulum  Brundisii  tibi  reliqui,  C,  Fam.,  xvi.  9,  3 ;  I  have  left  a 
horse  and  inrde  for  you  at  Brundusium — (they  are  still  there).  Perdidi 
spem  qua  me  oblectabam,  Pl.,  Rnd.,  222;  I^ve  lost  the  hope  ivith  which  1 
entertained  myself.  Actumst,  peristi,  Ter.,  ^M?i.,  54  ;  it  is  all  over; 
you'' re  undone . 

Remark.— The  Pure  Pf.  is  often  translated  by  the  English  Pres- 
ent :  novi,  /  have  become  acquainted  with,  I  know ;  memini,  /  have 
recalled,  I  remember ;  odi,  /  have  conceived  a  hatred  of,  J  hate  ;  csSa- 
snevi,  /  have  made  it  a  rule,  I  am  accustomed,  etc. 


l6o  HISTORICAL    PERFECT. 

Oderunt  Mlarem  tristes  tristemque  iocosi,  H.,  Ep.,  1. 18,  89;  the  long* 

faced  hate  the  lively  man,  the  jokers  hate  the  long-faced  man. 

But  the  Aorist  force  is  sometimes  found  : 

Tacg,  inquit,  ante  hoc  novl  quam  tu  natus  es,  Phaed.,  v.  9,  4  ;  silence, 
guoth  he,  I  knew  this  ere  that  you  were  born. 

Note.— The  Pf .  is  used  of  that  which  has  been  and  shall  be  (Sententious  or  Gnomic 
Perfect,  242,  n.  t),  but  usually  in  poetry,  from  Catullus  on,  and  frequently  with  an 
indefinite  adjective  or  adverb  of  number  or  a  negative     It  is  seldom  an  Aorist  (Greek). 

Evertere  domos  totas  optantibus  ipsis  di  facil6s,  Juv.,  x.  7  ;  n-hole  houses  at 
the  masters''  own  request  the  {too)  compliant  gods  o''erturn.  Nemo  repente  fuit  tUT- 
pissimus,  Juv.,  11. 83  ;  none  of  a  sudden  (hath  ever)  reach{ed)  Uie  depth  of  baseness. 

237.  As  the  Present  stands  for  the  Future,  so  the  Perfect 
stands  for  the  Future  Perfect. 

(Brutus)  si  c5nservatus  erit,  vicimus,  C,  Fam.,  xii.  6,  2  ;  Brutus  f — if 
HE  is  saved,  we  are  victorious,  ive  (shall)  have  gained  the  victory, 

238.  Habeo  or  teneo,  /  hold,  I  have,  with  the  Accusative 
of  the  Perfect  Participle  Passive,  is  not  a  mere  circumlocu- 
tion for  the  Perfect,  but  lays  peculiar  stress  on  the  'ina'uite- 
nance  of  the  result. 

Habeo  statutum,  Cf.  C,  Verr.,  in.  41,  95  ;  I  have  resolved^  and  hold  to 
my  resolution.  Perspectum  habeo,  Cf.  C,  Fam.,  iii.  10,  7  ;  /  have  per- 
ceived, and  I  have  full  insight.  Excusatum  habeas  m6  rogo,  c6no  doml, 
Mart.,  ii.  79,  2  ;  I  pray  you  have  me  excused,  I  dine  at  home. 

2.   HISTORICAL   PERFECT. 

239.  The  Historical  or  Indefinite  Perfect  (Aorist)  states  a 
past  action,  without  reference  to  its  duration,  simply  as  a 
thing  attained. 

Mil5  domum  vgnit,  calceos  et  vestimenta  mutavit,  paulisper  commoratus 
est,  C,  3Iil,,  10,  28;  3Iilo  came  home,  changed  shoes  arid  garments,  tar- 
ried a  little  while.  (Gorgias)  centum  et  novem  vixit  annSs,  Quint.,  iii.  i, 
9  (233,  N.  2).     Vgni,  vidi,  vici,  Suet.,  /?<?.,  37  ;  I  came,  saw,  overcame. 

Note.— The  Pf.,  as  the  "short  hand  "  for  the  Plupf.,  is  mainly  post-Ciceronian,  but 
ixigins  with  Caesak.  It  is  never  common:  superi5ribu8  dlSbus  nona  Caesaris 
legiO  castra  e3  locO  posuit,  Caes.,  B.  C,  m.  66, 2. 

240.  The  Historical  Perfect  is  the  great  narrative  tense  of 
the  Latin  language,  and  is  best  studied  in  long  connected 
passages,  and  by  careful  comparison  with  tlie  Imperfect. 
See  C,  Off.,  III.  27, 100  ;   Tusc,  i.  2,  4. 


PLUPEKFECT   TENSE. — FUTURE   TEifSE.  l6l 


Pluperfect  Tense. 

241.  The  Pluperfect  denotes  Com^jletion  in  the  Past,  and  is 
used  of  an  action  that  was  completed  before  another  was  be- 
gun. It  is,  so  to  speak,  the  Perfect  of  the  Imperfect.  Hence 
it  is  used  : 

1 .  Of  an  action  just  concluded  in  the  past. 

Modo  Caesarem  rSgnantem  videramus,  C,  Ph.,  ii.  42, 108  ;  we  had  just 
seen  Caesar  on  the  throne. 

2.  Of  an  action  that  was  over  and  gone. 

Fuerat  inimlcus,  C,  Red.  in  Sen.,  10, 26  ;  he  had  been  my  enemy. 

3.  Of  a  resulting  condition  in  the  past. 

MassilignsSs  portas  Caesari  clauserant,  Caes.,  B.C.,  t.  34,  4  ;  the  Ma/r- 

seillese  had  shut  their  gates  against  Caesar.     {Their  gates  were  shut.) 

Kemark. — When  the  Pf.  of  Resulting  Condition  is  translated  by 
an  English  Pr.  (28G,  2,  r.),  the  Plupf.  is  translated  by  an  English  Im- 
perfect :  nSveram,  I  had  become  acquainted  with,  I  knew ;  memineram, 
J  remembered  ;  oderam,  /  hated  ;  cSnsueveram,  /  loas  accustomed,  etc. 

Notes.— 1.  Not  unfrequently  in  early  Latin,  rarely  in  classical  prose,  but  more  often 
in  the  poets,  the  Plupf.  seems  to  be  used  as  an  Aorist ;  bo  very  often  dixerat : 
Nil  equidem  tibi  abstuli.  EV.  At  illud  quod  tibi  abstuleras  cedo,  Pl., 
Aul,  635.    N5n  sum  ego  qui  fueram,  Prop.,  i.  12, 11.    See  Ov.,  7V.,  in.  n,  25. 

2.  The  Periphrastic  Plupf.  with  habe5  corresponds  to  the  Perfect  (2;S8).  It  is 
rare,  and  shows  two  forms,  one  with  the  Imperfect  and  one  with  the  Plupf.,  the  latter 
being  post-classical. 

Equitatum,  quem  ex  omni  provincia  coactum  habSbat,  praemittit,  Cabs., 
B.  G.,  1. 15, 1.    Multorum  aur6s  ilia  lingua  attonitas  habuerat,  Val.  M.,  ui.  3. 

Future  Tense. 

242.  The  Future  Tense  denotes  Co7itinuance  in  the  Fut- 
ure :  scribam,  /  shcdl  he  loriting. 

The  Future  Tense  is  also  used  to  express  indefinite  action 
in  the  Future  :  scribam,  /  shall  ivrite. 

Eemarks. — I.  In  subordinate  clauses  the  Latin  language  is  more 
exact  than  the  English  in  the  expression  of  future  relations. 

Donee  eris  fSlix,  multos  numerabis  amicos,  Ov.,  Tr.,  i.  q,  5  ;  so  long  as 
you  shall  be  (are)  happy,  you  will  count  many  friends. 

2.  Observe  especially  the  verbs  volo,  I  will,  and  possum,  lean. 

Odero  si  potero;  si  non,  invitus  amabo,  Ov.,  Am.,  iii.  11,  35  ;  I  will 
hate  if  I  shall  be  able  (can) ;  if  not,  I  shall  love  against  my  will.  Qui 
11 


1 62  FUTURE  PERFECT  TEXSE, 

adipisci  vSram  gloriam  volet,  iustitiae  fungatur  officiis,  C,  Off.,  ii.  13, 43  ; 

whoso  shall  wish  to  obtain  true  glory,  let  him  discharge  the  calls  of 

justice. 

3.  The  Flit,  is  often  used  in  conclusions,  especially  in  Cicero  : 
Sunt  ilia  sapientis ;  aberit  igitur  a  sapiente  aegritudQ,  C,  Tusc,  iii.  8,  18. 
Notes.— 1.  The  Fut.  is  used  sometimes  as  a  gnomic  (236,  n.)  tense  : 
Haut  facul femina invenietur  bona,  Afr.,  7;  unneth  (=  hardly)  a  ivoman  shall  be 

found  that's  good.    Et  tremet  sapiens  et  dolebit,  et  expallescet,  Sen.,  E.JL,  71, 29. 
2.  Observe  the  (principally  comic)  use  of  the  Future  to  indicate  likelihood  : 
Verbum  hercle  hoc  verum  erit,  Ter.,  Eun.,  732  ;  this  will  be  God's  oivn  truth. 

243.  The  Future  is  used  in  an  imperative  sense,  as  in 
English,  chiefly  in  familiar  language. 

Tu  nihil  dicSs,  IT.,  A. P.,  385  ;  you  will  {are  to)  say  nothing  {do  you 
say  nothing).  Cum  volet  accgdes,  cum  t5  vitabit  abibis,  Ov.,  ^.^1.,  11. 
529  ;  tvheii  she  wants  you,  approach  ;  and  when  she  avoids  you,  iegone, 
sir.  Non  mSappellabis,  si  sapis,  Pl.,  Host.,  515  ;  see  C,  Fain.,  v.  12, 10. 
Compare  ut6tur  and  utatur,  [C.J  ad  Her.,  11.  3,  5. 

Similar  is  the  Future  in  Asseverations  (comic). 

Ita  mS  amabit  Itippiter,  Pl.,  Trin.,  447  ;  so  help  me  Ood  ! 

Future   Perfect  Tense. 

244.  The  Future  Perfect  is  the  Perfect,  both  Pure  and 
Historical,  transferred  to  the  future,  and  embraces  both 
completion  and  attainmeyit :  fecero,  Ter.,  Pli.,  882  ;  I  shall 
have  done  it,  or  /  shall  do  it  (once  for  all)  ;  videro,  Ter., 
^d.,  538  ;  I tvill  see  to  it;  profecerit,  C,  Fin.,  in.  4,  14; 
it  will  prove  profitable. 

Remarks. — i.  Hence,  when  the  Pf.  is  used  as  a  Pr.,  the  Fut.  Pf. 
is  used  as  a  Future  :  nOverS,  /  shall  knoiv;  consugvero,  /  shall  be  ac- 
customed;  5dero,  si  potero,  Ov.,  Am.,  ni.  11,  35  (242,  r.  2). 

2.  In  subordinate  sentences,  the  Latin  language  is  more  exact  than 
the  English  in  the  use  of  the  Fut.  Perfect ;  hence,  when  one  action  pre- 
cedes another  in  the  future,  the  action  that  precedes  is  expressed  by  the 
Fut.  Perfect. 

Qui  prior  strinxerit  ferrum,  gius  victoria  erit,  L.,  xxiv.  38,  5  ;  who  first 
drau's  the  sword,  his  shall  be  the  victory. 

3.  The  Fut.  Pf.  is  frequently  used  in  volO,  7  will;  nol5,  T 2vill  not; 
possum,  I  can ;  licet,  it  is  left  free  ;  libet,  it  is  agreeable ;  placet,  it  is  the 
pleasure  ;  whereas  the  English  idiom  familiarly  employs  the  Present. 

SI  potuerO,  faciam  vobis  satis,  C,  Br.,  5,  21;  if  I  can,  I  shall  satisfy 
you. 


PERIPHRASTIC   TE:fTSES.  1 63 

4.  The  Fut.  Pf.  in  both  clauses  denotes  simultaneous  accomplish- 
ment or  attainment  ;  one  action  involves  the  other. 

Qui  Antonium  oppresserit,  is  bellum  confgcerit,  C,  Fam.,  x.  ig,  2  ; 
he  who  shall  have  crushed  {crushes)  Antoiiij,  will  have  finished  {will 
finish)  the  tear.  [Ea]  vitia  qui  fugerit,  is  omnia  fer§  vitia  vitaverit,  C. , 
Or.,  69,  231  ;  he  who  shall  have  escaped  these  faults,  ivill  have  avoided 
almost  all  faults. 

Sometimes,  however,  the  first  seems  to  denote  antecedence,  the  second 
finality.     An  Impv.  is  often  used  in  the  first  clause. 

Immuta  (verborum  collocationem),  perierit  tota  rgs,  C,  0;-.,  70,  232  ; 
change  the  arrangement  of  the  tcords,  the  ivhole  thing  falls  dead. 

Notes.— 1.  The  independent  use  of  the  Fut.  Pf.  is  characteristic  of  Comedy,  but 
occurs  occasionally  later  in  familiar  style.    Sometimes  it  gives  an  air  of  positiveness  : 

Bene  merenti  bene  profuerit,  male  merenti  par  erit,  Pl.,  Capt.,  r^is ;  good 
desert  shall  hare  good  issue ;  ill  desert  shall  have  its  due.  Ego  eras  hie  erS :  eras 
habuero,  uxor,  ego  tamen  convivium,  Pl.,  Cas.,  786.  NHsquam  facilius  banc 
miserrimam  vitam  vel  sustentabo  vel  abi6cero,  C,  Alt.,  m.  19, 1.  See  also  c, 
Ac,  II.  44, 135  ;  L.,  i.  58,  10. 

2.  The  Periphrastic  Fut.  Pf.  with  habe5  is  rare.  It  corresponds  to  the  Pf.  and 
Pluperfect. 

Quod  sifSceris,  me  maximo  beneficio  dSvinctum  habebis,  C,  Att.,  xvi.  16  b.  9. 

245.  As  the  Future  is  used  as  an  Imperative,  so  the  Future 
Perfect  approaches  the  Imperative. 

D6  t6  tu  videris  ;  ego  dS  mg  ipse  profitSbor,  C,  Ph.,  11.  46,  118  ;  do  you 

see  to  yourself;  I  myself  will  define  my  position. 

Note.— This  is  confined  in  Cicero  almost  entirely  to  videris,  which  is  suspiciously 
like  the  familiar  Greek  future  o>ei,  and  is  used  in  the  same  way. 

Periphrastic  Tenses. 

246.  The  Periphrastic  Tenses  are  formed  by  combining 
the  various  tenses  of  esse,  to  he,  with  participles  and  verbal 
adjectives.     See  129. 

I.    PERIPHRASTIC  CONJUGATION-ACTIVE   VOICE. 

247.  The  Periphrastic  Tenses  of  the  Active  are  chiefly  com- 
binations of  esse  and  its  forms  with  the  so-called  Future  Par- 
ticiple Active.  The  Future  Participle  is  a  verbal  adjective 
denoting  capability  and  tendency.  Compare  amator  and 
amaturus.     The  translation  is  very  various  : 

1.  Scripturus  sum,  I  am  about  to  write,  I  am  to  tvrite,  I  purpose  to 
write,  I  am  likely  to  write. 

2.  Scripturus  eram,  I  zvas  about  to  write,  etc. 


164  PERIPHRASTIC   TENSES. 

3.  ScrlptHrus  ful,  I  have  been  or  ivas  about  to  ivrite  (often  =  I  should 
have  written). 

4.  Scripturus  fueram,  I  had  been  about  to  write,  etc. 

5.  Scripturus  ero,  1  shall  be  about  to  write,  etc. 

6.  Scripturus  fuero,  /  shall  have  made  up  my  mind  to  write,  etc.  (of 
course  very  rare). 

1.  Fiet  illud  quod  futurum  est,  C,  Div.,  11.  8,  21 ;  what  is  to  be,  will  be. 

2.  [Egx]  non  interfuturus  navall  certamini  erat,  L.,  xxxvi.  43,  9  ;  the 
king  did  not  i7itend  to  be  present  at  the  naval  combat. 

3.  Fascis  ipsi  ad  mS  dSlaturi  fugrunt,  C,  Ph.,  xiv.  6,  15  ;  they  them- 
selves were  ready  to  tender  the  fasces  to  me.  Deditos  ultimis  cruciatibus 
adfecturl  fu6runt,  L.,  xxi.  44,  4  ;  they  would  have  put  the  surrendered  to 
extreme  tortures. 

4.  MaiDr  Romanorum  gratia  fuit  quam  quanta  futura  Carthaginiensium 
fuerat,  L.,  xxii.  22, 19  ;  the  Romans'  credit  for  this  was  greater  than  the 
Carthaginians'  ivould  have  been. 

5.  ESrum  apud  quos  aget  aut  erit  acttirus,  mentgs  s6nsusque  dSgustet, 
C,  Or.,  I.  52,  223  ;  he  must  taste-and-test  the  state  of  mind  of  those  be- 
fore whom  he  will  plead  or  will  have  to  plead. 

6.  (SapiSns)  n5n  vivet,  si  fuerit  sine homine  victurus,  Sen.,  E.M.,  9, 17; 
The  wise  man  unll  not  continue  to  live,  if  he  finds  that  he  is  to  live 
without  human  society.     (The  only  example  cited,  and  that  doubtful.) 

Remarks. — i.  The  forms  with  sum,  eram,  and  the  corresponding 
Subjv.  forms  with  sim,  essem,  are  much  more  common  than  those  with 
ful,  etc.,  probably  for  euphonic  reasons. 

2.  The  Subjv.  and  Inf.  scripturus  sim,  essem,  fuerim,  fuissem,  scripturum 
esse,  fuisse,  are  of  great  importance  in  subordinate  clauses.    (656.) 

Notes.— 1.  The  use  of  forem  for  essem  appears  first  in  Sallust,  but  is  not  uncom- 
mon in  LtvY,  and  occurs  sporadically  later.    Fore  for  esse  is  post-classical. 

DIcit  se  vSnisse  quaesitum  pacem  an  bellum  agitaturus  foret,  S.,  Tug.,  109, 2. 

2.  The  periphrastic  use  of  the  Pr.  Part,  with  forms  of  esse  is  rare,  and  in  most 
cases  doubtful,  as  the  question  always  arises  whether  the  Part,  is  not  rather  a  virtual 
substantive  or  adjective.  So  with  the  not  uncommon  ut  SiS  scigns  of  the  Comic  Poets. 
The  effect  of  this  periphrasis  is  to  emphasize  the  continuance. 

N6m8  umquam  tarn  sui  d6spici6ns  {despiser  of  self,  self-depredator)  fuit  quin 
spgraret  melius  sg  posse  dicere,  C,  Or.,  11.89,3(54. 

II.    PERIPHRASTIC  TENSES  OF  THE   PASSIVE. 
A.— Of  Future  Relations. 

248.  The  periphrases  faturum  esse  (more  often  fore)  ut, 
{that)  it  is  to  he  that,  and  futurum  fuisse  ut,  {that)  it  teas 
to  he  that,  with  the  Subjunctive,  are  very  commonly  used  to 
take  the  place  of  the  Future  Infinitive  active  ;  necessarily  so 


PERIPHRASTIC  TElSs^SES.  IO5 

when  the  verb  forms  no  Future  Participle.      In  the  passive 
they  are  more  common  than  the  Supine  with  iri. 

Spero  fore  ut  contingat  id  nSbIs,  C,  Tusc,  i.  34,  82  ;  /  liope  that  we 
shall  have  that  good  fortune.  In  Stis  scriptum  V6ient6s  [habebant]  fore 
ut  brevi  a  Gallis  RQma  caperStur,  C,  Div.,  i.  44,  100  ;  the  Veientes  had 
it  written  doini  in  their  prophetic  books  that  Rome  would  shortly  he 
taken  by  the  Oauls. 

Remark. — Posse,  to  be  able,  and  velle,  to  will,  on  account  of  their 
future  sense,  do  not  require  a  periphrasis.  In  the  absence  of  peri- 
phrastic forms,  the  forms  of  posse  are  often  used  instead.     (656,  r.) 

Notes.— 1.  These  periphrases  do  not  occur  in  early  Latin. 

2.  Fore  ut  is  used  chiefly  with  Pr.  and  Impf.  Subjv.  ;  Pf.  and  Plupf.  are  very 
rare.    (C,  AH.,  xvi.  16 e.  16.) 

3.  The  form  futUTum  fuisse  Ut  is  used  with  passive  and  Supineless  verbs,  to  ex- 
press the  dependent  apodosis  of  an  unreal  conditional  sentence. 

Nisi  eo  ipso  tempore  nuntil  dS  Caesaris  victoria  essent  allati,  ezlstima- 
bant  plSrique  futurum  fuisse  uti  (oppidum)  amittergtur,  Caes.,  b.  C,  hi.  ioi,  3. 

(65G,  2.) 

4.  The  Subjv.  forms  futurum  sit,  esset,  fuerit  ut,  are  used  in  the  grammars  to 
supply  the  periphrastic  Subjv.  of  passive  and  Supineless  verbs  (see  515,  r.  2).  Warrant 
in  real  usage  is  scarce. 

An  utique  futurum  sit  ut  Carthaginem  superent  R5manl  ]  Quint,  hi.  8, 17 
(not  merely  periphrastic). 

249.  In  eo  est,       it  is  on  the  point,  |  ^^^  ^J^^^  (^^^^  ^^i^l^ 

^^*'  [  ims  (Impersonal),  J       the  subjunctive. 

In  eo  [erat]  ut  (Pausanias)  comprehendergtur,  Nep.,  iv.  5,  1  ;  it  was 
on  the  point  that  Pausanias  should  be  (P.  was  on  the  point  of  being) 
arrested. 

Note. — This  phrase  occurs  in  Nepos  and  Livy,  seldom  in  earlier  writers. 

B.— Of  Past  Relations. 

250.  The  Perfect  Participle  passive  is  used  in  combination 
with  sum,  /  am,  and  ful,  /  have  teen,  I  ivas,  to  express  the 
Pure  Perfect  and  Historical  Perfect  of  the  Passive  Voice. 
Eram,  /  %vas,  and  faeram,  /  had  been,  stand  for  the  Pluper- 
fect ;  and  ero,  /  shall  ie,  and  fuero,  /  shall  have  been,  for  the 
Future  Perfect. 

Remarks. — i.  Fui  is  the  favorite  form  when  the  participle  is  fre- 
quently used  as  an  adjective  :  convlvium  ex5rnStum  fuit,  the  banquet 
was  furnished  forth ;  fui  is  the  necessary  form  when  the  Pf .  denotes 
that  the  action  is  over  and  gone  :  amatus  fui,  /  have  been  loved  (but  I 


1 66  TENSES   IN"   LETTERS. 

am  loved  no  longer).  The  same  principle  applies  to  fueram  and  faerS, 
though  not  so  regularly. 

Simulacrum  6  marmore  in  sepulcro  positum  fuit ;  hoc  quidam  homS 
nobilis  deportavit,  C,  Z)om.,  43,  111  ;  a  marble  effigy  was  deposited  in 
the  tomb  ;  a  certain  man  of  rank  has  carried  it  off.  Arma  quae  fixa 
in  parietibus  fuerant,  ea  sunt  humi  inventa,  C,  Div.,  i.  34,74  ;  the  arms 
which  had  been  fastened  to  the  ivalls  were  found  on  the  ground.  Quod 
tibi  fuerit  persuasum,  huic  erit  persuasum,  C,  Rose.  Com.,  i,3  ;  ivhat  is 
(shall  have  proved)  acceptable  to  yon  will  be  acceptable  to  him. 

2.  To  be  distinguished  is  that  use  of  the  Pf .  where  each  element  has 
its  full  force,  the  Participle  being  treated  as  an  adjective.  In  this  case 
the  tense  is  not  past. 

Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in  partes  tr6s,  Caes.,  B.G.,  1, 1. 

Notes.— 1.  Tbe  fui,  etc.,  forms  are  rarely  found  in  Cicero,  never  in  Caesar,  but 
are  characteristic  of  Ltvy  and  Sallust. 

2.  Forem  for  essem  is  common  in  the  Comic  Poets,  occurs  twice  in  Cicero's  letters 
(Att.,  VII.  21,2  ;  X.  14,3),  never  in  Caesar,  but  in  Livv  and  Nepos  is  very  common, 
and  practically  synonymous  Avith  essem. 

C— Periphrastic  Conjugation— Passive  Voice. 

251.  I .  The  combination  of  the  Tenses  of  esse,  to  he,  with  the 
Gerundive  (verbal  in  -ndus),  is  called  the  Periphrastic  Conju- 
gation of  the  Passive,  and  follows  the  laws  of  the  simple  conju- 
gation (129).    The  idea  expressed  is  usually  one  of  necessity. 

Praeponenda  [est]  divitiis  gloria,  C,  Top.,  22,84  ;  glory  is  to  be  pre- 
ferred to  riches. 

2.  According  to  the  rule  (217)  the  Gerundive  of  intransi- 
tive verbs  can  be  used  only  in  the  Impersonal  form  : 
Parcendum  est  victis,  The  vanquished  must  be  spared. 

Notes.— 1.  The  Gerundive  is  a  verbal  adjective,  which  produces  the  effect  of  a  Pro- 
gressive Participle.  Whenever  a  participle  is  used  as  a  predicate  it  becomes  character- 
istic, and  good  for  all  time.  As  amans  not  only  =  qui  amat,  but  also  =  qui  amet, 
so  amandus  -  qui  ametur.    Compare  438,  r. 

2.  Forem  for  essem  is  post-classical  and  comparatively  uncommon. 

TENSES    IN    LETTERS. 

252.  The  Roman  letter-writer  not  unfrequently  puts  him- 
self in  the  position  of  the  receiver,  more  especially  at  the 
beginning  and  at-  the  end  of  the  letter,  often  in  the  phrase 
Nihil  erat  (habebam)  quod  scriberem,  /  have  nothing  to  write. 
This  permutation  of  tenses  is  never  kept  up  long,  and  applies 
only  to  temporary  situations,  never  to  general  statements. 


MOODS.  167 


Table  of  Permutations. 

scribo,  lam  writing,  becomes  scrlbebam. 

/  write,  **  scrips!, 

scripsi,  /  have  written,  **  scripseram. 

I  wrote,  **  scripseram. 

or  remains  unchanged, 
scribam,         /  sJtall  write,  "  scripturus  eram. 

The  adverbial  designations  of  time  remain  unchanged — or 
heri,  yesterday,     becomes    pridie. 

hodiS,  to-day,  "  quo  die  has  litteras  dedi,  dabam. 

eras,  to-morrow,         **  postero  dig,  postridie. 

nunc,  now,  "  turn. 

Jonnias  m6  continue  recipere  cogitabam,  C.,Ait.,  vii.  is,  S;  lam  think- 
ing of  retiring  forthwith  to  Formiae.  Cum  mifal  dixisset  Caeeilius 
puerum  s6  Eomam  mittere,  haec  scripsi  raptim,  C,  Att.,  11.  9, 1  ;  as  Caeeil- 
ius ha^  told  me  that  he  is  sending  a  servant  to  Rome,  I  write  in  a 
huryy.  (Litteras)  eram  daturus  postridiS  ei  qui  mihi  primus  obviam 
vSnisset,  C,  Ait.,  11.  12,  4  ;  I  will  give  IJie  letter  to-morrow  to  the  first 
man  that  comes  my  way. 

Note.— Cicero  is  much  more  consistent  in  this  tense-shifting  than  Flint  ;  and 
exceptions  are  not  numerous  proportionally  :  Ego  etsi  nihil  habeo  quod  ad  tS 
scribam,  scrlbd  tamen  quia  tecum  loquf  videor,  C,  Att,  xii.  53. 

MOODS. 

253.  Mood  signifies  manner.  The  mood  of  a  verb  signifies 
the  manner  in  which  the  predicate  is  said  of  the  subject. 

There  are  three  moods  in  Latin : 

1.  The  Indicative. 

2.  The  Subjunctive. 

3.  The  Imperative. 

Note.— The  Infinitive  form  of  the  verb  is  generally,  but  imiwoperiy,  called  a  mood. 

The  Indicative  Mood. 

254.  The  Indicative  Mood  represents  the  predicate  as  a 
reality.  It  is  sometimes  called  the  Declarative  Mood,  as  the 
mood  of  direct  assertion. 

The  use  of  the  Latin  Indicative  differs  little  from  the  English. 

Remarks. — i.  The  Latin  language  expresses  possibility  and  power, 
obligation  and  necessity,  and  abstract  relations  generally,  as  facts ; 
whereas,  our  translation  often  implies  the  failure  to  realize.     Such  ex- 


1 68  INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

pressions  are  :  dSbeo,  /  ought,  it  is  my  duty  ;  oportet,  it  ieJiooves ; 
necesse  est,  it  is  absolutely  necessary  ;  possum,  /  can,  1  have  it  in  my 
power ;  convenit,  it  is  fitting ;  par,  aequom  est,  it  is  fair ;  infinitum, 
endless;  difficile,  hard  to  do ;  longum,  tedious;  and  many  others  ;  also 
the  Indie,  form  of  the  passive  Periphrastic  Conjugation.  Observe  the 
difference  between  the  use  of  the  Inf.  in  Eng.  and  in  Latin  after  past 
tenses  of  debeo,  possum,  oportet,  etc. 

Possum  persequi  permulta  oblectamenta  rSrum  rusticarum,  C,  Cat. 31., 
i6,  55  ;  /  might  rehearse  very  many  delights  of  country  life.  Longum 
est  persequi  utilitates  asinorum,  C,  N.D.,  ii.  64,  159  ;  it  ivould  he  tedious 
to  rehearse  the  useful  qualities  of  asses  (I  will  not  do  it).  Ad  mortem 
t6  dtici  oportebat,  C,  Cat.,  i.  i,  2  ;  it  behooved  you  to  be  (you  ought  to 
have  been)  led  to  execution  (you  were  not).  Volumnia  debuit  in  t6 
officaosior  esse,  et  id  ipsum,  quod  fgcit,  potuit  diligentius  facere,  C,  Fam., 
XIV.  16  ;  it  ivas  VolumnicCs  duty  to  be  {V.  ought  to  have  been)  more  at- 
tentive to  you  ;  and  the  little  she  did  do,  she  had  it  in  her  potver  to  do 
{she  might  have  done)  more  carefully.  Quae  eondicio  non  accipienda  fuit 
potius  quam  relinquenda  patrial  C,  Alt.,  viii.  3,  3  ;  what  terms  ought 
not  to  have  been  accepted  in  preference  to  leaving  thy  cmmtry  f  [Eum] 
vivum  illinc  ezire  non  oportuerat,  C,  Mur.,  25,  51  ;  he  might  never  to 
have  gone  out  thence  cdive. 

The  Pf.  and  Phipf.  always  refer  to  a  special  case, 

2.  The  Impf.  as  the  Tense  of  Disappointment  is  sometimes  used  in 
these  verbs  to  denote  opposition  to  a  present  state  of  things  :  dSbg- 
barn,  /  ought  (but  do  not)  ;  poteras,  you  could  (but  do  not).  These  may 
be  considered  as  conditionals  in  disguise.     (See  r.  3.) 

Foteram  morbos  appellare,  sed  non  conveniret  ad  omnia,  C,  Fiii.,  iii.  10, 
35  ;  I  might  translate  (that  Greek  word)  ^^  disea^ses,^''  but  that  would  not 
suit  all  the  eases  (poteram  si  conveniret).  At  poteras,  inquis,  melius 
mala  ferre  silendS,  Ov.,  Tr.,  v.  i,  49  ;  "  But,^^  you  say,  "  you  coidd  {yow  do 
not)  bear  your  misfortunes  better  by  keeping  silent''  (poteras  si  sil6r6s). 

3.  The  Indie,  is  sometimes  used  in  the  leading  clause  of  condi- 
tional sentences  (the  Apodosis),  thereby  implying  the  certainty  of  the 
result,  had  it  not  been  for  the  interruption.  The  Indie,  clause  gener- 
ally precedes,  which  is  sufficient  to  show  the  rhetorical  character  of  the 
construction. 

With  the  Impf.  the  action  is  often  i*eally  begun  : 

LabSbar  longius,  nisi  mS  retinuissem,  C,  Leg.^  i.  19, 52  ;  I  was  letting 
myself  go  on  {should  have  let  myself  go  on)  too  far,  had  J  not  checked 
myself.  Omnino  supervacua  erat  doctrlna,  si  natiira  sufficeret,  Quint., 
II.  8,  8  ;  training  were  wholly  superfluous,  did  nature  suffice.  Prae- 
clSre  viceramus,  nisi  Lepidus  recSpisset  AntOnium,  C,  Fam. ,  xii.  10, 3  ;  we 
had  {should  have)  gained  a  bHlliaut  victory,  had  not  Lepidus  received 
Antony. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD.  169 

In  all  these  sentences  the  English  idiom  requires  the  Subjv.,  which 
is  disguised  by  coinciding  with  the  Indie,  in  form,  except  in  "  were." 

4.  In  general  relative  expressions,  such  as  the  double  formations, 
quisquis,  no  matter  ivho,  quotquot,  no  matter  hoiv  many,  and  all  forms  in 
-cumque,  -ever,  the  Indie,  is  employed  in  classical  Latin  where  we  may 
use  in  English  a  Subjv.  or  its  equivalent  :  quisquis  est,  7ho  matter  who  he 
is,  be,  may  he ;  qualecumque  est,  whatever  sort  of  thing  it  is,  he,  may  he. 

Quidquid  id  est,  timeo  Danaos  et  dona  ferentes,  V.,  A.,  11.  49  ;  whatever 
it  (may)  he,  I  fear  the  Danai  even  when  they  bring  presents. 

Cicero  has  occasional  exceptions  (Ideal  Second  Person  or  by  attraction)  to  this  rule, 
and  later  writers,  partly  under  Greek  influence,  frequently  violate  it.  Exceptions  in 
early  Latin  are  not  common. 

Notes.— 1.  Cicero  introduces  (n5n)  putaram,  "■  I  should  {not)  have  thovght  so,'''' 
and  malueram,  /  could  have  preferred.  Lucan  and  Tacitus  alone  imitate  the  latter ; 
the  former  was  never  followed. 

Malueram,  quod  erat  susceptum  ab  illis,  silentio  transirl,  C,  Alt.,  u.  19,3. 
Feriam  tua  viscera.  Magna ;  malueram  soceri,  Lucan,  vm.  521. 

2.  In  early  Latin,  occasionally  in  the  more  familiar  writings  of  Cicero,  and  here  and 
there  later  we  find  the  Pr.  Indie,  (in  early  Latin  occasionally  the  Fut.)  used  in  place 
of  the  Subjv.  in  the  Deliberative  Question. 

Compressan  palma  an  porrecta  ferio '?  Pl.,  Cas.,  405.  AdvolQne  an  maneol 
C,  Ati.,  xiii.  40, 2.    Quoi  d5no  lepidum  novom  libellum,  Cat.,  i,  l. 


Subjunctive  Mood. 

255.  The  Subjunctive  Mood  represents  the  predicate  as  an 
idea,  as  something  merely  conceived  in  the  mind  (abstracts 
from  reality). 

Remark. — The  Latin  Subjv.  is  often  translated  into  English  by  the 
auxiliary  verbs  may,  can,  must,  might,  could,  would,  should.  When 
these  verbs  have  their  full  signification  of  possibility  and  poiver,  obliga- 
tion and  necessity,  they  are  represented  in  Latin  by  the  corresponding 
verbs,  thus  :  may,  can,  might,  could  by  the  forms  of  posse,  to  be  able, 
licet,  it  is  left  free  ;  ivill  and  would  by  velle,  to  will,  to  be  willing  ;  must, 
by  debeo  or  oportet  (of  moral  obligation),  by  necesse  est  (of  absolute 
obligation). 

Nostras  iniurias  nee  potest  nee  possit  alius  ulcisci  quam  vos,  L.,  xxix. 
18,  18  ;  our  wrongs  no  other  than  you  has  the  power  or  can  well  have 
the  power  to  avenge.* 

Note.— In  the  Latin  Subjv.  are  combined  two  moods,  the  Subjv.  proper,  and  the 
Optative,  sometimes  distinguished  as  the  moods  of  ihQwill  and  the  wish.  This  fusion 
has  rendered  it  difficult  to  define  the  fundamental  conceptions  of  certain  constructions. 

*  In  this  unique  passage  nec  potest  denies  with  the  head,  nec  possit  refuses  to 
believe  with  the  heart. 


I/O  POTENTIAL   SUBJUNCTIVE. 

256.  I.  The  realization  of  the  idea  may  be  in  suspense,  or  it 
may  be  beyond  control.  The  first,  or  purely  Ideal  Subjunc- 
tive, is  represented  by  the  Present  and  Perfect  Tenses ;  the 
second,  or  Unreal,  is  represented  by  the  Imperfect  and  Plu- 
perfect. 

Notes.— 1.  The  Subjv.,  as  the  name  implies  (subiungo,  /  subjoin),  is  largely  used 
in  dependent  sentences,  and  will  be  treated  at  length  in  that  connection. 

2.  The  following  modifications  of  the  above  principles  must  be  carefully  observed  : 

(a)  The  Romans,  in  lively  discourse,  often  represent  the  unreal  as  ideal,  that  which 
is  beyond  cohtrol  as  still  in  suspense.    (596,  R.  i.) 

{b)  In  transfers  to  the  past,  the  Impf .  represents  the  Pr.,  and  the  Plupf.  the  Pf.  Sub- 
junctive.   (510.) 

2.  The  idea  may  be  a  view,  or  a  wish.  In  the  first  case 
the  Subjunctive  is  said  to  be  Potential,  in  the  second  case 
Optative.  The  Potential  Subjunctive  is  nearer  the  Indica- 
tive, from  which  it  differs  in  tone  ;  the  Optative  Subjunc- 
tive is  nearer  the  Imperative,  for  which  it  is  often  used. 

Potential  Subjunctive. 

257.  I.  The  Potential  Subjunctive  represents  the  opinion 
of  the  speaker  as  an  opinion.  The  tone  varies  from  vague 
surmise  to  moral  certainty,  from  ^' may '"  and  '^  might  ^'  to 
*'  must."    The  negative  is  the  negative  of  the  Indicative,  non. 

2.  The  Potential  of  the  Present  or  Future  is  the  Present 
or  Perfect  Subjunctive.  The  verification  is  in  suspense,  and 
so  future;  the  action  may  be  present  or  future :  with  Perfect 
sometimes  past. 

Velim,  I  should  wish  ;  nolim,  I  should  he  unwilling ;  malim,  /  should 
prefer  ;  dicas,  you  would  say  ;  credas,  you  would  believe,  you  must  he- 
lieve  ;  dicat,  dixerit  aliquis,  some  ojie  may  undertake  to  say,  go  so  far  as 
to  say. 

Caedi  discipulos  miniing  velim.  Quint.,  i.  3,  13;  I  should  by  no  means 
like  pupils  to  be  flogged.  Tu  Platonem  nee  nimia  valdS  nee  ninds  saepe 
laudaveris,  C,  Leg.,  in.  i,  1  ;  you  cant  praise  Plato  too  much  nor  too 
often. 

Notes.— 1.  The  Pf.  Subjv.  as  a  Potential  seems  to  have  been  very  rare  in  early  Latin. 
CicEKo  extended  the  usage  slightly  and  employed  more  persons  ;  thus  First  Person  PI. 
and  Second  Sing,  occur  first  in  Cicero.  From  Cicero's  time  the  usage  spreads,  per- 
haps under  the  influence  of  the  Greek  Aorist.  It  was  always  rare  with  Deponents  and 
Passives.    Another  view  regards  this  dlxsrit  as  a  Fut.  Pf.  Indicative. 

2.  The  Potential  Subjv.  is  sometimes  explained  by  the  ellipsis  of  an  Ideal  or  of  an 


OPTATIVE   SUBJUNCTIVE.  I/I 

Unreal  Conditional  Protasis.  But  the  free  Potential  Subjv.  differs  from  an  elliptical 
conditional  sentence  in  the  absence  of  definite  ellipsis,  and  hence  of  definite  translation. 
Compare  tlie  two  sentences  above  with  : 

Eum  qui  palam  est  adversariiis  facile  cavendo  (si  caveas)  vitare  possis, 
C,  Vert:,  i.  15,  •^'^^ ;  an  open  adversary  you  can  readily  avoid  by  caution  {if  you  are  cau- 
tious). Nil  ego  contulerim  iucundo  sanus  (=  dixm  sanus  ero)  amico,  H.,  6'.,  i.  5, 
44  ;  there  is  naught  I  should  compare  to  an  agreeable  friend,  while  I  can  in  my  sound 
senses. 

3.  The  Potential  Subjv,,  as  a  modified  form  of  the  Indie,  is  often  found  where  the 
Indie,  would  be  the  regular  construction.   So  after  quanquam  (007,  r.  i). 

268.  The  Potential  of  the  Past  is  the  Imperfect  Subjunc- 
tive, chiefly  in  the  Ideal  Second  Person,  an  imaginary  ''  you." 

Cr6der63  victos,  L.,  11.  43,9  ;  yoii  would,  might,  have  thought  them 
beaten.  Haud  facile  discernergs  utruin  Hannibal  imperatSri  an  exercitui 
carior  esset,  L.,  xxi.  4,  3  ;  not  readily  could  you  have  decided  ichether 
Hannihal  was  dearer  to  general  or  to  army.  MirarStur  qui  turn  cerneret, 
L.,  XXXIV.  9,  4  ;  aiiy  one  ivho  saiv  it  then  must  liave  been  astonished. 

Vellem,  1  should  have  wished  ;  noUem,  I  should  have  been  unwilling ; 
mallem,  I  should  have  preferred  (it  is  too  late). 

Notes.— 1.  With  vellem,  n5llem,  mallem,  the  inference  points  to  non-fulfilment 
of  the  wish  in  the  Present  (-261,  r.)  ;  witli  other  words  there  is  no  such  inference. 

2.  The  Unreal  of  the  Present  and  the  Ideal  of  the  Past  coincide.  What  is  unrea!  of 
a  real  person  is  simply  ideal  of  an  imaginary  person.  The  Impf.  is  used  as  the  tense 
of  Description, 

The  Aoristic  Pf.  Subjv.  and  the  Plnpf.  Subjv.  are  rarely  used  as  the  Ideal  of  the  Past: 

Hi  ambo  saltiis  ad  Libuos  Gallos  dSduxerint  (var.  deduxissent),  L.,  xxi.  38,  r. 
Ea  qua  minimum  credidisset  (consul)  resistebant  hostSs,  L.,  xxxii.  17, 4. 

259.  The  Mood  of  the  Question  is  the  Mood  of  the  ex- 
pected or  anticipated  answer  (462).  Hence  the  Potential 
Subjunctive  is  used  in  questions  which  serve  to  convey  a 
negative  opinion  on  the  part  of  the  speaker. 

Quis  dubitet  (=  ngmS  dubitet)  quin  in  virtute  divitiaesint  ?  C.,Parad., 

VI.  2,  48  ;  ivho  can  doubt  that  true  ivealth  consists  in  virtue  ?  (No  one.) 
Quis  tulerit  Gracchos  dg  sgditione  querentSsI  Juv.,  ii.  24  ;  who  could  bear 
the  Gracchi  complaining  of  rebellion  ?  (No  one.)  Apud  exercitum 
fuerfs?  C,  Mur.,  9,  21 ;  can  you  have  been  with  the  army  ?  Hoc  tantum 
bellum  quis  umquam  arbitrarStur  ab  uno  imperatore  confici  posse?  C, 
Imp.,  II,  31  ;  who  would,  could,  should  have  thought  that  this  great  tvar 
could  be  brought  to  a  close  by  one  general  9 

Optative  Subjunctive. 

260.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  as  an  Optative  or  wishing 
mood. 


1/2  OPTATIVE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 

The  regular  negative  is  ng.  Non  is  used  chiefly  to  negative  a  single 
word  ;  but  very  rarely  in  the  classical  period.  A  second  wish  may  be 
added  by  neque  or  nee  (regularly  if  a  positive  wish  precedes),  but  this  is 
also  rare  in  the  classical  period,  and  is  denied  for  Caesar. 

The  Pr.  and  Pf.  Subjv.  are  used  ivlien  the  decision  is  in  suspense, 
no  matter  how  extravagant  the  wish  ;  the  Impf.  and  Plupf.  are  used 
n^hen  the  decision  is  adverse.     The  Pf.  is  rare  and  old. 

Stet  haec  urbs,  C,  31iL,  34,  93  ;  may  this  city  continue  to  stand  !  Quod 
di  omen  avertant,  C,  Ph.,  iii.  14,  35  ;  which  omen  may  the  gods  arot. 
Ita  di  faxint  (=  fgcerint),  Pl.,  Poen.,  911  ;  the  gods  grant  it  !  Ne  isluo 
Itippiter  optimus  maximus  sirit  (=  siverit) !  L.,  xxxiv.  24,  2 ;  may  Jupiter, 
supremely  great  and  good,  suffer  it  not  I 

261.  The  Optative  Subjunctive  frequently  takes  utinam, 
utinam  ne,  utinam  non ;  ut  is  archaic  and  rare  ;  6  si,  oh  if, 
poetical  and  very  rare  ;  qui,  lioiv,  occurs  chiefly  in  early 
Latin  and  in  curses. 

Valeas  beneque  ut  tibi  sit,  Pl.,  Poen.,  912 ;  farewell  !  God  bless  you  ! 
Utinam  modo  conata  efficere  possim,  C,  Alt.,  iv.  16;  may  I  hut  have  it 
in  my  power  to  accomplish  my  endeavors.  Utinam  reviviscat  frater ! 
Gell.,  X.  6,  2;  would  that  my  brother  would  come  to  life  again  !  Utinam 
Inserere  iocos  moris  esset,  Quint.,  ii.  10, 9;  tvould  that  it  ivere  usiml  to  in- 
troduce Jokes  !  lUud utinam  ne  vere  scriberem,  C,  Fa?n.,Y.  17, 3 ;  umild 
that  what  I  am  writing  were  not  true  !  Utinam  susceptus  non  essem,  C, 
Att.,  HI.  II,  8;  would  I  had  not  been  born  !  (Cicero's  only  example  of 
non.)  0  mihi  praeteritos  referat  si  luppiter  annos,  V.,  A.,  viii.  560;  0  if 
Jove  were  to  bring  me  hack  the  years  that  are  gone  by  ! 

Remark. — For  the  wish  with  adverse  decision,  vellem  and  mallem 
(theoretically  also  noUem)  may  be  used  with  the  Impf.  and  sometimes 
(especially  vellem)  with  the  Plupf.  Subjunctive. 

Vellem  adesse  posset  Panaetius!  C,  Tusc.,i.  33,  81;  would  that  Pa- 
naetius  could  he  present  !  Vellem  mS  ad  cSnam  invItassSs,  C,  Fam.,  xii. 
4,  1  ;  would  that  you  had  invited  me  to  your  dinner-party. 

So  velim,  nolim,  etc.,  for  the  simple  wish  (54G,  r.  2). 

Tuam  milu  dari  velim  eloquentiam,  C,  N.  D.,  11.  59,  147  ;  I  could  wish 
your  eloquence  given  to  me. 

Notes.— 1.  Utinam  was  perhaps  originally  an  interrogative,  IMiu  prayf  If  so, 
it  belongs  partly  to  the  potential  ;  hence  the  frequent  occurrence  of  nOn.  0  sl  (occasion- 
ally SI,.V.,  A.,  VI.  187)  introduces  an  elliptical  conditional  sentence,  which  is  not  intended 
to  have  an  Apodosis.  When  the  Apodosis  comes,  it  may  come  in  a  different  form  ;  as 
in  the  example  :  V.,  A.,  viii.  560,  568. 

2.  The  Impf.  Subjv.  is  occasionally  used  in  early  Latin  to  give  an  unreal  wish  in  the 
Past.    This  is  almost  never  found  in  the  later  period. 

Utinam  t5  di  prius  perderent,  quam  periisti  6  patria  tuS,  Pl.,  Capt.,  537. 
Tunc  mibi  vita  foret,  Tib.,  i.  10, 11. 


OPTATIVE   SUBJUNCTIVE.  1/3 

262.  The  Optative  Subjunctive  is  used  in  asseMrations : 

Ita  vivam  ut  maximos  sumptus  facio,  C,  ^^^.,  v.  15,  2  ;  «s  Hive,  lam 
spending  very  largely  (literally,  so  may  I  live  as  I  am  making  very  great 
outlay).  Moriar,  si  magis  gaudgrem  si  id  mihi  accidisset,  Q.,Att.,  viii. 
6,  3  ;  may  I  die  if  I  could  he  more  glad  if  that  had  ha2yiJe7ied  to  me. 

Note.— The  Fut.  Indie,  in  this  sense  is  rare :  Sic  mg  di  amabunt  ut  mS  tuarom 
miseritumst  fortunarum,  Teu.,  Heaul.,  463. 

263.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  as  an  Imperative : 

1.  In  the  First  Person  Plural  Present,  which  has  no  Im- 
perative form  : 

Arngmus  patriam,  C, /Ses/.,  68,  143;  let  us  love  our  country.  N3 
difficilia  opt6mus,  C,  Verr.,  iv.  7, 15  ;  let  us  not  desire  what  is  hard  to  do. 

Note.— In  the  First  Person  Singular,  the  command  fades  into  the  wish. 

2.  In  the  Second  Person. 

{a)  In  the  Present  chiefly  in  the  Singular,  and  chiefly  of  an 
imaginary  '^  you  '' : 

IstQ  bono  utare,  dum  adsit,  cum  absit,  nS  requiras,  C,  Cat.M.,  10,  83  ; 
you  must  enjoy  that  blessing  so  long  as  His  here,  when  it  is  gone  you 
must  not  pins  for  it. 

NoTK.— The  Comic  Poets  use  the  Pr.  negatively  very  often  of  a  definite  person, 
sometimes  combining  it  with  an  Impv.:  igndsce,  irata  nS  si6s,  Pl.,  Am.,  924  ;  but 
in  the  classical  period  such  usage  is  rare,  and  usually  open  to  otlier  explanations  ;  a 
definite  person  may  be  used  as  a  type,  or  the  sentence  may  be  elliptical. 

{h)  In  the  Perfect  negatively  : 

N6  transieris  Hiberum,  L.,  xxi,  44,  6;  do  tiot  cross  the  Ehro.  NS  vos 
mortem  timueritis,  C,  Tusc,  i.  41,  98;  have  no  fear  of  death  I 

3.  In  the  Third  Person  Present  (regularly)  : 

Suum  quisque  noscat  ingenium,  C,  Off.,  i.  31,  114  ;  let  each  one  know 
his  own  mind.  Donls  impiX  n§  placare  audeant  deos,  C,  Leg.,  11.  16,  41  ; 
let  the  wicked  not  dare  to  fry  to  appease  the  gods  ivith  gifts. 

NoTK.— The  Pf.  in  this  usage  is  very  rare.    S.,  lug..,  85, 47  ;  Tac,  Ann.,  iv.  32, 1. 

264.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  as  a  Coricessive  : 

Sit  fur,  C,  Verr.,  v.  i,  4  ;  (granted  that)  he  be  a  thief.     Fuerit  (malus 
civis),  C,  Verr.,  i.  14,  37;  (suppose)  that  he  was  a  bad  citizen. 
For  other  examples  with  ut  and  ng,  see  608. 

Note.— The  past  tenses  are  very  rarely  used  concessively  ;  see  C,  7Wc.,iii.  i9,75 
(Impf.) ;  Sest.,  19,  43  (Plupf.). 


174  IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

265.  Tha  Subjunctive  is  used  in  Questions  which  expect 
an  Imperative  answer  (coniimctivus  deliberativus). 

Genuine  questions  are  commonly  put  in  the  First  Person, 
or  the  representative  of  the  First  Person  : 

Utrxmi  super biam  prius  commemoreni  an  crudelitatem,  C,  Verr.,  i.  47, 
122  ;  shall  I  mention  the  insolence  first  or  the  cruelty  9  Magna  fuit  con- 
tentio  utrum  moenibus  sg  defenderent  an  obviam  irent  hostibus,  Nep.,  i.  4, 
4  ;  there  was  a  great  dispute  whether  they  should  defend  themselves 
behind  the  walls  or  go  to  meet  the  enemy.  (TJtrom  nos  dgfendamus  an 
obviam  eSmus  ?)     [Example  of  Third  Person,  428,  n.  i.] 

Ehetorical  questions  (questions  which  anticipate  the 
answer),  under  this  head,  are  hardly  to  be  distinguished 
from  Potential. 

Quo  mg  nunc  vertam'?  Fndique  custodier,  C,  Att.,  x.  12, 1  ;  whither 
shall  1 7101V  turn  ?  Sentinels  on  every  side.  Quid  agerem'?  Q.,  Sest.^ 
19,  42  ;  what  was  I  to  do  ? 

Remark. — The  answer  to  the  Deliberative  Question  is  the  Impv.  or 
the  Imperative  Subjv.  of  the  Present  (263,  2)  or  Past  (272,  3). 

Imperative  Mood. 

266.  The  Imperative  is  the  mood  of  the  will.  It  wills 
that  the  predicate  be  made  a  reality.  The  tone  of  the  Im- 
perative varies  from  stern  command  to  piteous  entreaty.  It 
may  appear  as  a  demand,  an  order,  an  exhortation,  a  per- 
mission, a  concession,  a  prayer. 

Abl  in  malam  rem,  Pl.,  Capt.,  877  ;  go  {to  the  mischief),  and  he 
hanged.  Compesce  mentem,  IP,  0.,  i.  16,  22  ;  curb  your  temper.  Da  mihl 
hoc,  mel  meum!  Pl.,  Trin.,  244  ;  give  me  this,  honey  dear  ! 

267.  The  Imperative  has  two  forms,  known  as  the  First 
and  the  Second  Imperative  (also,  but  less  accurately,  as  the 
Present  and  Future  Imperative).  The  First  Imperative  has 
only  the  Second  Person ;  the  Second  Imperative  has  both 
Second  and  Third  Persons.  The  First  Person  is  represented 
by  the  Subjunctive  (263,  i). 

Remark. — Some  verbs  have  only  the  second  form.  This  may  be  due 
to  tlie  signification  :  so  sclto,  knoio  thou  ;  memento,  remember  thou; 
and  habgtO,  in  the  sense  of  know,  remember. 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD.  1^5 

On  violation  of  Concord  with  the  Imperative,  see  211,  n.  2. 

Note.— The  use  of  the  Pronouns  tu,  VOS,  etc.,  with  the  Impv.,  is  colloquial,  hence 
common  in  Comedy  ;  or  solemn  :  see  V.,  A.,  vi.  95,  365, 675, 834,  etc. 

268.  I.  The  First  Imperative  looks  forward  to  immediate 
fulfilment  (Absolute  Imperative)  : 

Special :  Patent  portae  ;  proficiscere,  C,  Cat.,  i.  5, 10,  Open 
8tand  the  gates;  depart. 

General:  lustitiam  cole  et  pietatem,  Q.,  Rep.,\i.  16,  IG, 
Cultivate  justice  and  piety. 

2.  The  Second  Imperative  looks  forward  to  contingent 
fulfilment  (Relative  Imperative),  and  is  chiefly  used  in  laws, 
legal  documents,  maxims,  recipes,  and  the  like  ;  likewise  in 
familiar  language. 

Regio  imperio  duo  sunto  ;  iique  cOnsules  appellamino  (180,  5,  c); 

NEMINI   PARENTO;    OLLIS  (104,  IH.  N.  1)  SALOS    POPULI    SUPREMA    LEX  ESTO, 

C,  Leg.,  III.  3,8  ;  there  shall  he  two  {officers)  with  royal  power  ;  they 
shall  he  called  consuls  ;  they  are  to  obey  no  one  ;  to  them  the  ivelfare  of 
the  people  must  he  the  paramount  law.  Eem  vobis  proponam  :  vos  earn 
penditote,  C,  Verr.,  iv.  i,  1  ;  I  iv ill  propound  the  matter  to  yon  ;  do  you 
thereupon  perpend  it.  Percontatorem  fugito,  nam  garrulus  idem  est,  H., 
Ep.,  1. 18,  G9  ;  avoid  your  qiiestioner,  for  he  is  a  tell-tale  too. 

269.  Strengthening  Words.— The  Imperative  is  often  strengthened  and  em- 
phasized by  the  addition  of  Adverbs,  fossilized  Imperatives,  Phrases,  etc. :  age,  agite, 
agedum,  agitedum,  came ;  enclitic  dum,  then ;  modo,  o?)l]/  :  iamdudum,  at  once ; 
proinde,  well,  then;  quin,  toh>/  not?  sduTie^  certainly ;  amabo,  obsecro,  quaes5, 
please ;  sis  (-  si  vis),  saltis  (-  si  voltis),  sod6s  (=  si  audes),  if  you  please.  Most 
of  these  belong  to  familiar  language,  and  are  therefore  found  in  great  numbers  in 
Comedy  and  in  Cicero's  letters.  In  the  classical  prose,  and  even  later,  they  are  not 
common.  Dum  in  classical  times  is  confined  to  agedum ;  quin  is  cited  tw  ice  in 
Cicero  (Mil.,  29,  79  ;  Base.  Com.,  9, 25),  and  rarely  later.  Iamdudum  begins  with  Ver- 
gil, and  belongs  to  poetry  and  late  prose.  Sang  is  not  cited  for  the  classical  period, 
Sultis  is  confined  to  early  Latin  ;  and  sodSs  occurs  but  once  in  Ciceuo  {Alt.,  vn.  3, 13). 

Mittite,  agedum,  lSgat5s,  L.,  xxxvm.  47, 11.    Quin  tti  i  mod5,  Pl.,  Cas.,  755. 

Note.— On  the  violation  of  Concord  with  age,  see  211,  n.  2. 

270.  Negative  OF  THE  Imperative. — i.  The  regular  neg- 
ative of  the  Imperative  is  n6  (neve,  neu),  which  is  found  with 
the  Second  Imperative  ;  with  the  First  Imperative,  it  is 
poetical  or  colloquial. 

Hominem  mortuum  in  urbe  ng  sepelito  ngve  urito,  C,  Leg.,  11.  23,  58; 
one  shall  not  hury  nor  hum  a  dead  man  in  the  city.  Impius  ng  audgtO 
plftcSre  dQnis  Iram  deorum,  C,  Leg.,  11.  9,  23  ;  the  impious  man  must  not 


176  IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

dare  attempt  to  appease  hy  gifts  the  anger  of  the  gods.  Tu  ng  cSdo 
malis,  sed  contra  audentior  It5,  V.,  yl.,  vi.  95  ;  yield  not  thou  to  misfor- 
tunes, but  go  more  boldly  (than  ever)  to  meet  them. 

Remarks. — i.  Non  may  be  used  to  negative  a  single  word: 
A  Iggibus  non  recgdamus,  C,  Cluent.,  57,  155  ;  let  us  not  recede  from 

{let  us  stick  to)  the  laws.    Opus  poliat  lima,  non  exterat,  Cf.  Quint.,  x.  4, 

4  ;  let  the  file  rub  the  ivork  up,  not  rub  it  out. 

2    Instead  of  n6  with  the  First  Imperative  was  employed  either  noli 

with  the  Infinitive  (271,  2)  ;  or  n5  with  the  Pf.  Subjv.,  but  the  latter  is 

very  rare  in  elevated  prose  (263,  2,  b).    On  ng  with  Pr.  Subjv.  see  263,  2,  a. 

Note.— The  use  of  n5n  with  the  actual  Impv.  is  found  only  in  Ovid  ;  but  the  addi- 
tion of  a  second  Impv.  by  neque,  nec,  instead  of  ngve,  nen,  begins  in  classical  times 
(C,  Ait.,  XII.  22,  3),  and  becomes  common  later.  The  use  of  neque  (nec),  nihil, 
ngmo,  ntillus  witli  the  Subjv.  in  an  Impv.  sense  has  recently  been  claimed  for  the 
Potential  ISubjv.  {must,  257,  i)  on  account  of  the  negative. 

271.  Periphrases. — i.  Cfira  (curato)  ut,  take  care  that ; 
fac  (facito)  ut,  cause  that ;  fac  (facito),  do,  with  the  Sub- 
junctive, are  common  circumlocutions  for  the  Positive  Im- 
perative. 

Cura  ut  quam  primum  (305,  r.  i)  venias,  C,  Fam.,  iv.  10, 1  ;  manage 
to  come  as  soon  as  possible.     Fac  cogitgs,  C,  Fam.,  xi.  3,  4,  Do  reflect  I 

Notes.— 1.  Facitd  is  almost  wholly  confined  to  early  Latin,  especially  Plautus  ; 
Bo  also  ctiratS. 

2.  Early  Latin  also  shows  vidg  and  vidgtO  with  Subjv.  Terence  introduces 
VOlo,  velim,  with  Subjv.,  which  is  found  also  in  later  times  ;  as,  C,  Fam.,  ix.  12, 2. 

2.  Cavl  and  cave  (caveto)  ne,  leimre  lest,  with  the  Sub- 
junctive, and  noli,  he  unwilling,  with  the  Infinitive,  are  cir- 
cumlocutions for  the  Negative  Imi^erativc  (Prohibitive).  Fac 
ne  is  also  familiarly  used. 

CavS  festings,  C,  Fam.,  xvi.  12,  6  ;  do  not  be  in  a  hurry.  Tantum 
cum  finggs  ng  sis  manifgsta  cavgtS,  Ov.,  ^.J.,  111.  801;  only  ivhen  you 
pretend,  beivare  that  you  be  not  detected.  Noli,  amabo,  verberare  lapidem, 
ng  perdas  manum,  Pl.,  Cure,  197  ;  don't  beat  a  stone,  I  pray  you,  lest 
you  spoil  your  hand.  Fac  ng  quid  aliud  ctirgs  li5c  tempore,  C.,Fam., 
xvL  II,  1;  see  that  you  pay  no  attention  to  anything  else,  at  this  time. 

Notes.— 1.  Rare  and  confined  to  early  Latin  is  the  use  of  cav8  with  any  but  the 
second  i)erson.    Cf.  Pl.,  Aul,  660  ;  Ter.,  And.,  403. 

2.  Other  phrases  are  those  with  vidg  ng  and  ciirat5  ng,  with  Subjv. ;  comperce, 
compgsce  with  Inf.  (all  ante-classical)  ;  parce,  mitte,  omitte  with  Inf.  (poetical  and 
post-classical) ;  n6lim  with  Subjv.  (Cic.) ;  fuge  with  Inf.  (Hor.)  ;  absiste  with  Inf. 
(Verg.). 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD.  IJJ 

272.  Represen^tatives  of  the  Imperative. — i.  Instead 
of  the  Positive  Imperative,  may  be  employed  : 

(a)  The.  Second  Person  of  the  Present  Subjunctive  (263,  2). 
(Z>)  The  Second  Person  of  the  Future  Indicative  (243). 
(c)  The  Third  Person  of  the  Present  Subjunctive  (2G3,  3). 

2.  Instead  of  the  Negative  Imperative  (Prohibitive)^  may 
be  employed  : 

(a)  The  Second  Person  of  the  Present  Subjunctive,  with  ne  (263,  2,  n.). 

(b)  Tiie  Second  Person  of  the  Perfect  Subjunctive,  with  ne  (263,  2). 

(c)  The  Second  Person  of  the  Future,  with  non  (243). 

{d)  The  Third  Person  of  the  Present  or  Perfect  Subjunctive,  with 
nB  (263,  3). 

Remark. — The  Pr.  Subjv.  is  employed  when  stress  is  laid  on  the 
continuance  of  the  action  ;  the  Pf.,  when  stress  is  laid  on  the  completion. 
Hence  the  use  of  the  Pf.  Subjv.  in  total  prohibitions  and  passionate 
protests. 

3.  Tlie  Imperative  of  the  Past  is  expressed  by  the  Im- 
perfect and  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  (unfulfilled  duties). 
Compare  2G5,  R. 

DOtem  daretis  ;  quaereret  alium  vimm,  Ter.,  P/t.,  297  ;  you  should 
have  given  her  a  portion  ;  she  should  have  sought  another  match.  Cras 
Ir6s  potius,  hodig  hie  cenares.  Val6,  Pl.,  Pers.,  710;  you  ought  rather  to 
have  x>ut  off  going  till  to-morrow,  you  ought  to  {have)  dine{d)  with  us 
to-day.  Good-bye.  (Anything  decided  is  regarded  as  past.)  Potius 
docSret  (causam)  non  esse  aequam,  C,  Off.,  in.  22,  88  ;  he  should  rather 
have  shown  that  the  plea  ivas  not  fair.  Ng  poposcissgs  (libros),  C,  Att.^ 
II.  I,  3  ;  you  ought  not  to  have  asked  for  the  books. 

Observe  the  difference  between  the  Unfulfilled  Duty  and  the  Unreal 
of  the  Past  (597). 

Morergtur;  fScisset  certe  si  sine  maximo  dgdecore  potuisset,  Q.,Rab. 
Post.,  10,  29;  he  ought  to  have  died  ;  he  would  certainly  have  done  so, 
could  he  have  {done  so)  without  the  greatest  disgrace. 

Note. — The  Plupf .  tense  in  this  usage  is  not  ante-classical. 

273.  Passionate  questions  are  equivalent  to  a  command  : 

N6n  tacSs  ?  Pl.,  A7n.,  700  ;  wo7i't  you  hold  your  tongue  9  Quin  tacSsI 
Wliy  don't  you  hold  your  tongue  9  Quin  datis,  si  quid  datis?  Pl.,  Cas., 
765  ;  why  donH  you  give,  if  you  are  going  to  do  it  9  (Compare  Fac,  si 
quid  facis,  Mart.,  i.  46, 1.)  Ctir  non  ut  plgnus  vitae  convlva  recgdisT 
LucR.,  III.  938  ;  why  do  you  not  withdraw  as  a  guest  sated  with  life  9 
13 


178  TEXSES  OF  THE  MOODS. 

274.  Puta,  Ut  puta,  for  example,  begins  with  [C]  ad  Her.,  11.  11,  16  (reading 
doubtful) ;  tiien  H.,  6'.,  11.  5,  32,  Quinte,  puta,  aut  Publl.  Later  it  becomes  more 
common,  especially  with  the  Jurists.    See  C,  Ph.,  11.  6, 15. 

275.  Summary  of  Imperative  Constructions, 

Positive. 

2d  P.  Audi,  liear  thou  ;  audito  (legal  or  contingent)  ;  audigs  (famil- 
iar) ;  audias  (ideal  Second  Person  chiefly). 
3d  P.  Audito  (legal),  let  Mm  hear  ;  audiat. 

Negative. 

2d  P.  Ne  audi,  hear  not  (poetic):  ng  audito  (legal)  ;  n6n  audi6s  (famil- 
iar) ;  ne  audias  (chiefly  ideal)  ;  noli  audire  (common) ;  n6  audiveris  (rarer). 
3d  P.  Ng  audito  (legal),  let  him  not  hear ;  ng  audiat ;  ng  audiverit. 

Tenses  of  the  Moods  and  Verbal  Substantives. 

276.  The  Indicative  alone  expresses  with  uniform  direct- 
ness the  period  of  time. 

277.  I.  The  Present  and  Imperfect  Subjunctive  have  to 
do  with  continued  action,  the  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  with 
completed  action.  The  Perfect  Subjunctive  is  also  used  to 
express  the  attainment. 

2.  In  simple  sentences  Present  and  Perfect  Subjunctive 
postpone  the  ascertainment  of  the  Predicate  to  the  Future. 
The  action  itself  may  be  Present  or  Future  for  the  Present 
Subjunctive  ;  Present,  Past,  or  Future  for  the  Perfect  Sub- 
junctive. 

Crgdat.     He  may  believe  (now  or  hereafter). 

Crgdiderit.  Let  him  have  had  the  belief  (heretofore),  he  may  have 
come  to  the  belief  (now),  he  may  come  to  the  belief  {hei'eatter). 

3.  In  simple  sentences  the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  Sub- 
junctive are  Past  Tenses,  and  regularly  serve  to  indicate  un- 
reality.    (See  597.) 

Note.— A  Snbjv.  of  the  Past,  being  a  future  of  the  past,  gives  a  prospective  (or 
future)  action  the  time  of  which  is  over  (or  past),  so  that  the  analysis  of  the  past  tenses 
of  the  Snbjv.  shows  the  same  elements  as  the  Periphrastic  Conjugation  with  eram  and 
ful.    Hence  the  frequent  parallel  use.    See  254,  r.  2,  and  597,  R.  3. 

4.  In  dependent  sentences  the  Subjunctive  is  future  if  the 
leading  verb  has  a  future  significtiJ;ion  (515,  R.  3)  ;  otherwise 


TENSES    OF   THE    MOODS.  1/9 

the   Subjunctive   represents   the  Indicative.     The   tense  is 
regulated  by  the  law  of  sequence.     (See  509o) 

278.  The  Imperative  is  necessarily  Future. 

279.  The  Infinitive  has  two  uses  : 

1.  Its  use  as  a  Substantive. 

2.  Its  use  as  a  representative  of  the  Indicative. 

280.  The  Infinitive  as  a  Substantive.— As  a  Sub- 
stantive the  Infinitive  has  two  tenses,  Present  and  Perfect. 
(See  419.) 

1.  The  Present  Infinitive  is  the  common  form  of  the  In- 
finitive, used  as  a  Substantive.  It  has  to  do  with  continued 
action. 

(a)  The  Present  Infinitive  is  used  as  a  subject  or  predi- 
cate.    (See  423,  424.) 

Quibusdam  totum  hoc  displicet  philosopharl,  C,  Fin.,  i.  i,  1  ;  to  some 
this  wliole  business  of  7netaphysics  is  a  nuisance. 

(b)  The  Present  Infinitive  is  used  as  the  object  of  Verbs  of 
Creation  {Auxiliary  Verbs,  Verbs  that  help  the  Infinitive 
into  being  ;  see  423.) 

Cats  servire  quam  pugnare  mavult,  C,  Aft.,  vii.  15,  2  ;  Cato  prefers  to 
he  a  slave  rather  than  to  fight  (being  a  slave  to  fighting). 

2.  The  Perfect  Infinitive  is  comparatively  little  used  as  a 
Substantive.  It  has  to  do  with  completed  action,  and  is  also 
used  to  express  attainment. 

(a)  As  a  subject,  it  is  used  chiefly  in  fixed  expressions  or 
in  marked  opposition  to  the  Present. 

Plus  proderit  demonstrasse  rgctam  protinus  viam  quam  revocare  ab 
err5re  iam  lapsos,  Quint.,  11.  6,  2  ;  it  ivill  be  more  profitable  to  have 
pointed  out  the  right  path  immediately  than  to  recall  from  wa7idering 
those  that  have  already  gone  astray.  [Non]  tam  turpe  fuit  vinci  quam 
contendisse  decSrum  est,  Ov.,  J/.,  ix.  5  ;  Hwasnot  so  much  dishonor  to  be 
beaten  OjS  ^tis  an  lionor  to  have  struggled. 

Remarks. — i.  By  a  kind  of  attraction  decuit,  became,  takes  occa- 
sionally a  Pf.  Inf.  {emotional). 

Tunc  flgsse  decuit,  L.,  xxx.  44,  7  ;  that  ivas  the  time  ivhen  it  ivould 
have  been  becoming  to  iveep  {to  have  ivept).  Et  grubuisse  decSbat,  Ov., 
M.,  IV.  330  ;  the  very  flush  of  shame  ivas  becoming. 


l80  TENSES   OF   THE    MOODS. 

2.  So  oportuit,  behooved,  is  frequently  followed  by  the  Pf.  Part,  pas- 
sive, with  or  without  esse.  This  seems  to  have  belonged  to  familiar 
style  ;  it  is  accordingly  very  common  in  early  Latin. 

[Hoc]  iam  pridem  factum  esse  oportuit,  C,  Cat.,  i.  2,  5  ;  this  ought  to 
have  been  doiie  long  ago. 

(b)  As  an  object,  the  Perfect  Infinitive  is  seldom  found 
in  the  active,  except  after  velle,  to  wish,  which  seems  to  have 
been  a  legal  usage. 

Neminem  nota  strgnui  aut  ignavi  militis  notasse  volui,  L.,  xxiv.  16,  11  ; 

J  wished  to  have  marked  {to  mark  finally,  to  brand)  no  soldier  with  the 
mark  of  bravery  or  of  cowardice.  Annales,  quibus  credidisse  mails,  L., 
XLii.  II,  1.     Neiquis  eorum  bacanal  habuise  velet,  S.  C.  de  Bag. 

Otherwise  it  is  found  mainly  in  the  poets  (after  the  fashion  of  the 
Greek  Aorist  Inf.),  and  usually  with  the  Pf.  and  Plupf.  tenses,  volui, 
etc.,  potui,  dSbueram  (debui). 

Fratres  tendentSs  opaco  Pelion  imposuisse  Olympo,  H.,  0.,  in.  4,  52  ;  IVie 
brothers  striving  to  pile  Pelion  on  shady  Olympus. 

Notes.— 1.  This  usage  with  velle  seems  to  have  approached  often  the  Fut,  Pf.  in 
force.  A  Pf.  Inf.  after  the  Pr.  of  posse  occurs  very  rarely  :  Non  potes  probasse 
nugas,  Pl.,  Aul.,  828  ;  see  V.,  A.,  vi.  78,  and  several  cases  in  Ovid  and  Maktial. 

2.  The  Pf.  Inf.  act.  (siibj.  or  obj.)  is  often  found  in  the  poets,  especially  in  elegiac 
poetry,  as  the  first  word  in  the  second  half  of  a  pentameter,  where  it  can  hardly  be  dis- 
tinguished from  a  Present.  This  usage  may  be  due  partly  to  analogy  with  verbs  of  wish- 
ing, partly  to  the  exigencies  of  the  metre,  partly  to  the  influence  of  the  Greek  Aorist.  It 
must  be  distinguished  from  the  normal  use  of  the  Perfect :  Quam  luvat  immltSs 
ventds  audire  cubantem  Et  dominam  tenero  d§tinuisse  sinu !  Tib.,  i.  i,  45. 

3,  Noteworthy  is  the  occasional  use  of  debeo  with  the  Pf.  Inf.  act.  in  the  Fenec 
"must  have":  statim  vicisse  d6be5,  C.,/^o«c. ^m.,23,73;  d6b6s  adnotasse, 
Plin.,  Ep.,  VII.  20,  G. 

{c)  In  the  Passive,  the  Perfect  Infinitive  is  used  after 
verbs  of  Will  and  Desire,  to  denote  impatience  of  anything 
except  entire  fulfilment.     See  537. 

[Patriam]  exstinctam  cupit,  C,  Fin.,  iv.  24,  60  ;  he  desires  his  country 
blotted  out. 

Here  the  Infinitive  esse  is  seldom  expressed. 

Corinthum  patr6s  vestri  totlus  Graeciae  lumen  exstinctum  esse  voluerunt, 
C,  Imp.,  5,  11  (211,  R.  6). 

Note.— This  usage  is  common  in  Comedy  and  in  Cicero,  rare,  it  at  all,  in  Caesar 
and  Sallust  ;  and  later  also  it  is  rare,  surviving  chiefly  in  phrases.  The  principal  verb 
is  VOlO,  less  often  cupiO,  very  rarely  ezpetO  and  nOlo. 

281.  The  Infinitive  as  the  Representative  of  the 
Indicative. — iVs  the  representative  of  the  Indicative,  the 


TENSES   OF   THE   MOODS.  l8l 

Infinitive  has  all  its  Tenses  :   Present,   Past,  Future,  and 
Future  Periphrastics. 

1.  The  Present  Infinitive  represents  contemporaneous 
action — hence  the  Present  Indicative  after  a  Principal  Tense, 
and  the  Imperfect  after  a  Historical  Tense  : 

Dico  eum  venire,  /  say  that  he  is  coming  ;  dicsbam  eum  venire,  /  said 
that  he  icas  comirig. 

2.  The  Perfect  Infinitive  represents  Prior  Action — hence 
the  Perfect  and  Imperfect  Indicative  after  a  Principal 
Tense,  and  the  Pluperfect,  Imperfect,  and  Historical  Perfect 
Indicative  after  a  Historical  Tense  : 

Dico  eum  vSnisse,  /  say  that  he  came,  has  come,  used  to  come. 
Dixi  eum  vSnisse,  I  said  that  he  had  come,  used  to  come,  did  come. 

Note.— Memini,  1  rememher,  when  used  of  personal  experience,  commonly  takes 
the  Present :  Tum  mg  rSgem  appellari  a  vobis  memini,  nunc  tyrannum  vocari 
video,  L.,  XXXIV.  31, 13 ;  /  remember  being  ctyled  by  you  a  king  then,  I  see  that  I  am, 
called  a  tyrant  now. 

So  also  rarely  memoria  tened,  recordor,  I  remember,  I  recall,  and  fagit  m6, 1  do 
not  remember.  When  the  experience  is  not  personal,  the  ordinary  construclion  is  fol- 
lowed :  Memineram  Marium  ad  infimorum  hominum  misericordiam  c5n- 
fugisse,  C,  Sest.,  22, 50  ;  I  remembered  that  Marius  had  thrown  himself  on  the  mercy 
of  a  eet  of  low  creatures. 

The  peculiar  construction  with  the  Pr.  arises  from  the  liveliness  of  the  recollection. 
When  the  action  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  bygone,  the  Pf .  may  be  used  even  of  personal 
experience:  M6 memini Iratum  dominae  turbasse  capill5s, Ov.,^.^.,u. i6q;  / 
remember  in  my  anger  having  tousled  my  sweethearVs  hair. 

282.  The  Present  Participle  active  denotes  contimiance ; 
the  Perfect  passive,  completion  or  attainment. 

Note.— The  Latin  is  more  exact  than  the  English  in  the  use  of  the  tenses.  So 
the  Pf.  Part,  is  frequently  employed  when  we  use  the  Present ;  especially  in  clas- 
sical prose,  with  verbs  that  indicate  a  condition,  mental  or  physical,  where  the  action 
of  the  participle  is  conceived  as  continuing  up  to,  and  sometimes  into,  that  of  the  lead- 
ing verb,  as  ratus,  thinking ;  veiitus,  fearing  ;  gavisus,  r^oicing,  etc.  This  usage 
spreads  later  :   complexus,  embracing ;  hortatus,  cxhaiiing. 

283.  The  Future  Participle  (active)  is  a  verbal  adjective, 
denoting  capability  and  tendency,  chiefly  employed  in  the 
older  language  with  sum,  /  am,  as  a  periphrastic  tense.  In 
later  Latin  it  is  used  freely,  just  as  the  Present  and  Perfect 
Participles,  to  express  subordinate  relations. 

Notes.— 1.  The  so-called  Fut.  Part,  passive  is  more  properly  called  the  Gerundive, 
and  has  already  been  discussed  (251). 

2.  The  Supine,  being  without  tense  relations,  does  not  belong  here. 


l82  SIMPLE   SENTENCE   EXPANDED. 


SIMPLE    SENTENCE    EXPANDED. 

284.  The  sentence  may  be  expanded  by  the  multiplication 
or  by  the  qualfiication,  A,  of  the  subject,  B,  of  the  predicate. 


1.   Multiplication   of  the  Subject. 
Concord. 

285.  Number. — The  common  predicate  of  two  or  more 
subjects  is  put  in  the  Plural  number  : 

Lucius  Tarquinius  et  Tullia  minor  iunguntur  nuptils,  L.,i.  46,  9; 
Lucius  Tarquinius  and  Tullia  the  younger  are  united  in  marriage. 
Pater  et  mater  mortui  [sunt],  Ter.,  Eun.,  518  ;  father  and  mother  are 
dead. 

Exceptions. — i.  The  common  predicate  may  agree  with  a  Sing, 
subject  when  that  subject  is  the  nearest  or  the  most  important:  "  My 
flesh  and  my  heart  faileth,"  Psa.,"lxxiii.  2G. 

Aetas  et  forma  et  super  omnia  Romanum  nomen  te  ferociorem  facit,  L., 
XXXI.  18,  3  ;  your  youth  and  heauty,  a7id,  above  all,  the  name  of  Roman, 
makes  you  too  mettlesome.  Latagum  saxo  occupat  os  faciemque  adversam 
v.,  J.,  X.  698(323,  N.  2). 

The  agreement  depends  largely  also  upon  the  position  of  the  verb. 
If  it  precedes  or  follows  the  first  subj.,  the  Sing,  is  more  apt  to  stand. 

2.  Two  abstracts  in  combination,  when  conceived  as  a  unit,  take  a 
Sing,  verb  :  "  When  distress  and  anguish  cometh  upon  you,"  Prov.,  i. 
27. 

ReligiS  et  fidSs  anteponatur  amicitiae,  C,  Off.,  in.  10,  46  ;  let  the 
religious  obligation  of  a  promise  be  preferred  to  friendship. 

So  any  close  union  :  "  Your  gold  and  silver  2*5  cankered,"  Jas.,  v.  3. 

Senatus  populusque  Romanus  intellegit,  C, -Fam.,  v.  8,  2;  the  senate 
and  people  of  Rome  perceives  {—  Rome  perceives).  Tua  fiima  et  gnatae 
vita  in  dubium  veniet,  Ter.,  Ad.,  340  ;  your  good  name  will  be  jeoparded 
and  your  daughter's  life. 

3.  When  the  same  predicate  is  found  with  two  or  more  subjects, 
who  are  conceived  as  acting  independently,  classical  usage  requires 
that  the  predicate  be  in  the  Singular.  LivY  introduces  the  PL,  which 
grows,  and  becomes  the  rule  in  Tacitus  :  Palatium  EOmulus,  Eemus 
Aventlnum  ad  inaugurandum  templa  capiunt,  L.,  i.  6,  4. 

Notes.— 1.  Neque-  neque,  ncUfier—nor.  allows  the  PI.  chiefly  wlicn  the  Persona 
are  different :  Haec  neque  ego  neque  tti  fScimus,  Ter.,  Ad.,  103  ;  neither  you  nor  1 
did  this. 


CONCORD.  183 

The  same  is  true,  but  not  so  common,  of  et  -  et  (ns  well  as),  ant— ant,  either—^. 

2.  A  Sing.  subj.  combined  with  another  word  by  cum,  wWi^  is  treated  properly  as 
a  Singular.  It  is  treatetl  as  a  PI  once  each  by  Cato,  Terekce  (Ileaut.,  473),  Cicero 
(by  anacoluthon),  Caksar  {B  C  ■,  in.  88),  more  often  by  Sallust  and  his  imitators, 
LivY,  and  later  writers.    Vblleius,  Valerius  M.,  and  Tacitus  follow  the  classical 


Snlla  cum  Sclpione  ....  16g§s  inter  s6  contnlerunt,  C.,i%.,xn.  11,27.  Ipse 
dux  cum  aliquot  principibus  capiuatur,  L.,xxi.6o,  7;  i/ie  general  himself  wit/t 
some  of  the  leading  men  are  capiuied. 

3.  In  the  Abl.  Abs.  the  Part,  stands  usually  in  the  PI.  with  persons,  usually  in  the 
Sing,  with  things,  c.  Graccho  et  M.  Fulvio  Flacco  interfectis,  S.,  lug.,  16, 8. 
Caritate  benevolentiaque  sublata,  C,  Lad.,  27, 102. 

286.  Gender. — When  the  Genders  of  combined  subjects 
are  tlie  same,  tlie  adjective  predicate  agrees  in  gender ;  when 
the  genders  are  different,  the  adjective  predicate  takes  either 
the  strongest  gender  or  the  nearest. 

1.  In  things  with  life,  the  masculine  gender  is  the 
strongest ;  in  tilings  without  life,  the  neuter. 

(«)  The  strongest : 

Pater  et  mater  mortui  [sunt],  Ter.,  3un.,  518  (285),  Mums  et  porta  dS 
caelo  tacta  erant,  L.,  xxxii.  29, 1 ;  icall  and  gate  had  been  struck  by  light- 
ning.   H5c  anima  atque  animus  vincti  sunt  foedere  semper,  Lucr.,  hi.  416. 

(b)  The  nearest  : 

Convicta  est  Messalina  et  Silius,  Cf.  Tac,  Ann.,  xii.  65  ;  Messalina 
was  convicted  and  {so  teas)  Silius.  Hippolochus  LarissaeSrumque  dSditum 
est  praesidium,  L.,  xxxvi.  9,  14  ;  Hippolochus  and  the  Larissaean  gar- 
rison {were)  surrendered. 

2.  AVhen  things  with  life  and  things  without  life  are  com- 
bined, the  gender  varies. 

{a)  Botli  as  persons  : 

Bgx  rSgiaque  classis  profecti  (sunt),  L.,  xxi.  50, 11  ;  tlie  king  and  the 
king's  fleet  set  out. 

(h)  Botli  as  things  : 

Natura  inimica  [sunt]  libera  civitas  et  rgx,  Cf.  L.,  xliv.  24,  2;  a  free 
state  and  a  king  are  natural  enemies. 

3.  Wlien  the  subjects  are  feminine  abstracts  the  predicate 
may  be  a  neuter  Plural  (211,  r.  4). 

Stultitiam  et  intemperantiam  dicimus  esse  fugienda,  C,  Fin.,  iii.  iij 
39  ;  folly  and  want  of  self-control  {we  say)  are  {things)  to  be  avoided. 

Note. —This  usage  does  not^  appear  in  early  Latin,  nor  in  Caesar  or  Sallust. 


l84  ADJECTIVE    ATTRIBUTE. 

287.  Persons. — When  the  persons  of  combined  subjects 
are  different,  the  First  Person  is  preferred  to  the  Second, 
the  Second  to  the  Third  : 

Si  tu  et  Tullia,  lux  nostra,  valgtis,  ego  et  suavissimus  Cicero  valgmus, 
C,  Fam.,  XIV.  5,  1 ;  if  Tullia,  light  of  my  life,  and  you  are  well,  dearest 
Cicero  and  I  are  well. 

Remark. — {a)  In  contrasts,  and  when  each  person  is  considered 
separately,  the  predicate  agrees  with  the  person  of  the  nearest  subject. 

Et  ego  et  Cicero  meus  flagitabit,  C,  ^;'^.,  iv.  18,  5  ;  my  Cicero  ivill 
demand  it  and  (so  will)  1.  Beat§  vivere  alii  in  aliS,  vOs  in  voluptate 
ponitis,  C,  Fin.,  11.  27,  86  ;  some  make  a  blessed  life  to  rest  on  one  thing, 
so7ne  on  another,  you  on  pleasure. 

So  regularly  with  disjunctives,  see  285,  n.  1. 

(b)  The  order  is  commonly  the  order  of  the  persons,  not  of  modern 
politeness  :  Ego  et  uxor  mea,  Wife  and  I. 

2.    Qualification  of  the  Subject. 

288.  The  subject  may  be  qualified  by  giving  it  an  attribute. 
An  attribute  is  that  which  serves  to  give  a  specific  character. 

The  chief  forms  of  the  attribute  are  : 

I.  The  adjective  and  its  equivalents  :  amicus  certns,  a  sure  friend. 

Remark. — The  equivalents  of  the  adjective  are  :  i.  The  pronouns 
hic,  this,  ille,  that,  etc.  2.  Substantives  denoting  rank,  age,  trade: 
servus  homS,  a  slave  person  ;  homS  senex,  an  old  fellow  ;  hom8  gladiator, 
a  gladiator-fellow ;  mulier  ancilla,  a  servant-wench.  3.  The  Genitive 
(360,  i).  4.  The  Ablative  (400).  5.  Preposition  and  case  :  excessus  a 
vita,  departure  from  life.  6.  Adverbs,  chiefly  with  substantival  par- 
ticiples :  rgctS  facta,  good  actions.     7.  Relative  clauses  (505). 

II.  The  substantive  in  apposition  :  CicerS  Orator,  Cicero  the  orator. 

I.    ADJECTIVE    ATTRIBUTE. 
Concord. 

289.  Tlie  Adjective  Attribute  agrees  with  its  substantive 
in  gender,  number,  and  case  : 

Gender,  Number. 

Vir  sapiens,  a  ivise  man,  virl  sapientfis,  ^v^se  men. 

Mulier  pulchra,  a  beautiful  woman,  muliergs  pulchrae,  beautiful  women. 
BSgium  dOnum,  royal  gifty  rfigia  dOna,  royal  gifts. 


ADJECTIVE   ATTRIBUTE.  185 

Case. 
Virl  sapientis,  of  a  wise  man.  bone  flli !  good  son  ! 

Mulieri  pulchrae,  for  a  beautiful  woman,     rggio  doii5,  hij  royal  gift. 
Virum  sapientem,  wise  man.  mulieres    pulchras,   beautiful 

women. 

290.  The  common  attribute  of  two  or  more  substantives 
agrees  with  the  nearest  ;  rarely  with  the  most  important. 

Volasgnus,  vir  et  cOnsilii  magni  et  virtuti3,  Caes.,  B.O.,  in.  5,  2  :  Volu- 
senus,  a  man  of  great  wisdom  and  valor.  Cuncta  maria  terraeque  pate- 
bant,  S.,  C,  10,  1  ;  all  seas  a?id  lands  lag  open.  Multa  alia  castella 
vicique  aut  deleta  hostiliter  aut  Integra  in  potestatem  v6n6re,  L.,  ix.  38, 1. 

Remarks —I.  For  emphasis,  or  to  avoid  ambiguity,  the  adj.  is  re- 
peated with  every  substantive.  Sometimes  also  for  rhetorical  reasons 
simply. 

(SemprOniae)  multae  fac§tiae,  multusque  lepos  inerat,  S.,C.,  25,  5  ;  Sem- 
pronia  had  a  treasure  of  ivitticisms,  a  treasiire  of  charmi7ig  talk. 

2.  When  a  substantive  is  construed  with  several  similar  adjectives 
in  the  Sing.,  it  may  be  in  agreement  with  ohe  in  the  Sing,  or  may 
stand  in  tlie  PI.,  according  to  its  position  : 

ftuarta  et  Martia  legiongs,  C,  Fam.,  xi.  ig,  1,  but  Legi5  Martia  quar- 
taque,  C  ,  P/t ,  v.  17,  46,  The  fourth  arid  Martian  legions. 

Notes.  -1.  A  common  surname  is  put  in  the  Plural :  M.  (et)  Q.  Cicer5n68,  Marcus 
and  Quintus  Cicero;  C,  Cn.,  3ML,  CarbdnSs,  Gains,  Gnaeus  (and)  Marcus  Varbo ; 
otherwise,  M.  Cicero  et  Q-  CicerS,  Marcus  and  Quinlus  Cicero. 

2.  Poets  are  free  in  regard  to  the  position  of  tlic  adjective :  Semper  honos  nomenque 
tuum laudSaque manSbunt,  V, ^  , i. 6og. 

291.  Position  of  the  Attrihde. — t.  When  the  attribute 
is  emphatic,  it  is  commonly  put  before  the  substantive,  other- 
wise in  classical  Latin  ordinarily  after  it.     But  see  676. 

1.  Fugitivus  servus,  a  runaivay  slave  (one  complex). 

2.  Servus  fugitivus,  a  slave  (that  is)  a  runaway  (two  notions). 
Many  expressions,  however,  have  become  fixed  formuhx3,  such  as 

civis  R5manus,  Roman  citizen  ;  populua  R5manus,  people  of  Rome. 
Compare  body  politic,  heir  apparent  in  English. 

Remarks. — i.  Variation  in  the  position  of  the  adj.  often  causes 
variation  in  the  meaning  of  the  word.  Thus  rSs  bonae,  good  things  ; 
bonae  r6s,  articles  of  value,  or  good  circumstances  ;  r§s  urbanae,  city 
matters ;  urbanae  rgs,  witticisms  ;  mgnsa  secunda,  a  second  table ;  secunda 
mgnsa,  dessert. 


l86  NUMERALS. 

2.  Superlatives  whicli  denote  order  and  sequence  in  time  and  space 
are  often  used  partitively,  and  then  generally  precede  their  substan- 
tive  :  summa  aqua,  the  surface  of  the  water  ;  summus  mons,  the  top  of 
the  mountain ;  vere  primo,  primo  vSre,  in  the  heginning  of  spring. 
Similarly  in  media  urbe,  in  the  midst  of  the  city  ;  reliqua,  cetera  Graecia, 
the  rest  of  Greece,  and  the  like. 

2.  When  the  attribute  belongs  to  two  or  more  words,  it  is 
placed  sometimes  after  tliem  all,  sometimes  after  the  first, 
sometimes  before  them  all. 

Divitiae,  nSmen,  opSs  vacuae  consilio  dedecoris  plSnae  sunt,  C,  Rap.,  i. 
34,  51  :  riches,  name,  resources  {when)  void  of  wisdom  are  full  of  dis- 
honor. 

For  examples  of  the  other  positions  see  290. 

Numerals. 

292.  Duo  means  simply  two,  ambo,  hotJi  (two  considered 
together),  uterque,  either  (two  considered  apart,  as,  "  They 
crucified  two  other  with  him,  on  either  side  one,"  Johk, 
XIX.  18)  : 

Supplicatio  ambonim  n5mine  et  triumphus  utrique  dScrgtus  est,  L., 
XXVIII.  9,  9  ;  a  thanksgiving  in  the  name  of  both  and  a  triumph  to 
either  {each  of  the  two)  ivas  decreed.  Qui  utrumque  probat,  ambQbus  de- 
buit  uti,  C,  Fin.,  ii.  7,  20  ;  he  who  approves  of  either  ought  to  have 
availed  himself  of  both. 

Kemark. — Uterque  is  seldom  PI.,  except  of  sets  ;  so  witii  pluralia 
tantum. 

Utrique  {i.e.,  pl6bis  fautOrgs  et  senatus)  victSriam  crudeliter  exercebant, 
S.,  C,  38,  4  ;  either  party  (democrats  and  senate)  made  a  cruel  use  of 
victory.  Duae  fuSrunt  Ariovisti  uxor6s :  utraeque  in  ea  fuga  perierunt, 
Caes.,  J5.6'^.,  I.  53,  4  ;  Ariovistus' s  wives  were  two  in  number  ;  both  jjer- 
ished  in  that  flight.  Proximo  di6  Caesar  6  castrls  utrlsque  copias  suas 
eduxit,  Caes.,  5. 6^.,  i.  50,  1. 

On  uterque  with  the  PL,  see  211,  r.  i  ;  with  Gen.,  see  371,  R. 

293.  Mille,  a  thousand,  is  in  the  Sing,  an  indeclinable  adj.  and  is 
less  frequently  used  with  the  Genitive:  mille  militSs,  rather  than  mille 
militum,  a  thousatid  soldiers;  in  the  PI.  it  is  a  declinable  substantive, 
and  must  have  the  Genitive  :  duo  milia  militum,  turn  thousand{s  of) 
soldiers  —  two  regiments  of  soldiers.  If  a  smaller  number  comes 
between,  the  substantive  usually  follows  the  smaller  number  ; 


3500  cavalry, 


NUMERALS.  1 8/ 

tria  milia  quingenti  equit6s, 
tria  milia  equitum  et  quingenti,  but 
equites  tria  milia  quingenti,  or 
equitum  tria  milia  quingenti. 

But  duo  milia  quingenti  hostium  in  acie  periSre,  L.,  xxii.  7, 3. 

Note.— The  use  of  mlUe  ns  a  substantive  with  the  Part.  Gen.  is  found  mostly  in 
ante-classical  and  post-classical  Latin.  CicEno  and  Caesar  use  it  but  rarely,  and  in 
phrases  such  as  mllle  nummum,  mille  passuum.    Livy  is  fonder  of  it. 

294.  Ordinals. — The  Ordinals  are  used  more  often  in 
Latin  than  in  English  ;  thus  always  in  dates  :  anno  ducente- 
simo  quarto,  in  the  year  20 J^.  Sometimes  they  are  used  for 
the  cardinals  with  a  carelessness  that  gives  rise  to  am- 
biguity : 

Quattuor  anni  sunt,  ex  quo  te  non  vidl, 

It  is  four  years,  that  I  have  not  seen  you  {since  I  saw  you). 
Quartus  annus  est,  ex  quo  tg  non  vidl. 

It  is  the  fourth  year  {four  years,  going  on  four  years). 

Note.— To  avoid  this  ambiguity  forms  of  incipere,  to  begin,  and  exigere,  to 
finish,  seem  to  have  been  used.     Cf.,  Pl.,  CapL,  980  ;  Cist.,  161. 
On  quisque  with  the  ordinal,  see  318,  2. 

295.  Distributives. — The  distributives  are  used  with  an 
exactness  which  is  foreign  to  our  idiom  wherever  repetition 
is  involved,  as  in  the  multiplication  table. 

Bis  bina  quot  [sunt]  1  Q.,  JSf.D.,  n.  18,  49;  hoiv  many  are  twice  two  9 
Scriptum  eculeum  cum  quinque  pedibus,  pullos  galllnaceos  tris  cum  temis 
pedibus  natos  esse,  L,,  xxxii.  i,  11  ;  a  letter  was  ivritten  to  say  that  a  colt 
had  been  foaled  ivith  five  feet  (and)  three  chickens  hatched  with  three 
feet  {apiece). 

With  singuli  the  distributive  is  preferred,  but  the  cardinal  may  be 
used. 

Antonius  (pollicitus  est)  d§nario3  quinggnos  singulis  militibus  daturum, 
C,  Fam.,  X.  32,  4  ;  Antonius  promised  to  give  five  hundred  denarii  to 
each  soldier.  Singulis  cSnsoribus  dSnarii  trecenti  (so  all  MSS  )  imperati 
sunt,  C,  Verr.,  n.  55,  137  ;  the  censors  ivere  required  to  pay  three 
hundred  denarii  apiece. 

Note.— Poets  and  later  prose  writers  often  use  the  distributive  when  the  cardinal 
would  be  the  rule  ;  thus  bini  is  not  unfrcquently  used  of  a  pair  even  in  Cicero  :  blnos 
(SCjrpbos)  habebam,  Verr.,  iv.  14,  32.  When  there  is  an  idea  of  grouping,  the  distribu- 
tive is  often  broken  up  into  a  multiplicative  and  a  distributive  ;  as, 

Carmen  ab  ter  novSnls  virginibus  cani  iussSrunt,  L.,  xxxi.  12, 9 ;  they  ordered 
a  chant  to  be  sung  by  thrice  nine  virgins. 


l88  COMPAEATIVES   AND   SUPERLATIVES. 

On  the  other  hand,  prose  sometimes  shows  a  cardinal  when  exact  usage  would 
require  a  distributive.     So  regularly  milia. 

Milia  talentum  per  duodecim  annos  (dabitis),  L ,  xxxvn.  45, 15. 
On  the  distributives  with  pluralia  tantum,  see  97,  r.  3. 

Comparatives  and  Superlatives. 

296.  Comparative. — The  comparative  degree  generally 
takes  a  term  of  comparison  either  with  quam,  tJiaii,  or  in  the 
Ablative  : 

Ignoratio  futurorum  malorum  utilior  est  quam  scientia,  C,  Div.,  11.  g, 

23 ;  ignorance  of  future  evils  is  better  than  knowledge  (of  them).  Nihil 
est  virtute  amabilius,  C,  Lael.,  8,  28  ;  nothing  is  more  lovable  than 
virtue. 

Rejiarks. — I.  (a)  The  Abl.  is  used  only  when  the  word  with  quam 
would  stand  in  the  Nom.  or  Ace.  (644). 

Caesar  minor  est  j  ^^^"^^  o^P  ^^s,  /  ^^^^^^^  ^^  younger  than  Pompey. 

Caesarem  plus  amamus  \  '1^^"'  I'ompeium,  )  we  love  Caesar  more  than 
(  Pompeio,  )       Pomp)ey. 

In  the  second  example  the  use  of  the  Abl.  may  give  rise  to  am- 
biguity, as  the  sentence  may  also  mean  "«fe  love  Caesar  more  than 
Pompey  loves  Mm.'''  This  ambiguity  is  always  present  when  adverbs 
are  used,  and  hence  good  prose  avoids  using  a  comparative  adv.  with 
an  Ablative.     See  IL,  /S".,  i.  i,  97. 

{b)  With  cases  other  than  Nom.  or  Ace,  quam  is  regularly  used  to 
avoid  ambiguity. 

Anulis  nostris  plus  quam  animis  creditur,  Sen.,  Ben.,  11 1  15,  3  (217). 

2.  The  Abl.  is  very  common  in  negative  sentences  and  is  used  ex- 
clusively in  negative  relative  sentences. 

Polybium  sequamur,  quo  nemo  fuit  diligentior,  C  ,  Rep  ,  11  14,  27  ;  let 
us  follow  Polybius,  than  ivhom  no  one  was  more  careful. 

3.  Measure  of  difference  is  put  in  the  Ablative  (403). 

4.  Quam  is  often  omitted  after  plus,  amplius,  more,  and  minus,  less, 
and  the  like,  without  affecting  the  construction  : 

Homini  misero  plus  quingentSs  colaphos  infrggit  mihi,  TER.,ylfZ.,  199  ; 
he  has  dealt  me,  lucMess  creature,  more  than  five  hundred  crushing 
boxes  on  the  ear.  Spatium  est  non  amplius  pedum  sescentSrum,  Caes., 
B.C.,  I.  38,  5  ;  the  space  is  not  more  than  (of)  six  hundred  feet. 

But  the  normal  construction  is  not  excluded  : 

Pallis  nOn  latior  pedibus  quinquaginta,  Caes.,  B.G.,  vii.  19,  1 ;  a  swamp 
not  broader  than  fifty  feet  (or  pedes  quinquaginta).  Nostri  mllitSs  amplius 
h5ris  quattuor  pugnaverunt,  Caes.,  B.G.,  iv.  37,  3. 


COMPARATIVES.  1 89 

5.  In  statements  of  age  we  may  have  a  variety  of  expressions  ;  thus, 
more  than  thirty  years  old  may  be  : 

1.  Natus  plus  (quam)  triginta  annSs.    3.  Maior  (quam)  trig^ntaannosnatus. 

2.  Natus  plus  trigintaannis  (rare).      4.  Maior  triginta  annis  (natus). 

5.  Maior  triginta  annorum, 

6.  On  the  combination  of  the  comparative  with  opinione,  opinion, 
sp6,  hope,  and  the  like,  see  398,  n.  1. 

Notes. — 1.  Verbs  and  other  words  involving  comparison  sometimes  have  the  Abl. 
where  another  constnietion  \"/ould  be  moi-e  natural.  Thus,  mSlle,  to  jn^efer  {\>oeL  and 
post-classical),  aeque,  adaequS,  equalbj  (early  and  late),  alius,  other  (mainly  poetic 
and  rare):  Ntillos  his  mallem  ludos  spectasse,  H.,  5.,  11.  8, 79.  Qui  me  in  terra 
aequg  fortunatus  erit?  Pl.,  6'«m,  141.  N5  put6s  alium  sapiente  bonoque 
beatum,  Ep.,  1. 16, 20. 

2.  Instead  of  the  Abl.,  the  Gen.  is  found  occasionally  in  late  Latin. 

3.  Instead  of  quam  or  the  Abl.,  prepositionr.1  uses  with  the  positive  are  often  found; 
as  prae,  in  comparison  ivith,  praeter,  ante,  beyond ;  also  supra  quam.  Poetical 
is  the  circumlocution  with  quails,  as  Hor.,  Epod.^  5,  59.  Inferior  is  sometimes  con- 
strued with  the  Dat.,  according  to  the  sense  ;  inferior  to 'wi&XeSi^  ol  lower  than, 

4.  Atque  for  quam  is  mainly  poetical ;  see  644,  n.  2. 

297.  Standard  of  Comparison  omitted. — When  the  stand- 
ard of  comparison  is  omitted,  it  is  supplied :  i.  By  the  con- 
text ;  2.  By  the  usual  or  proper  standard  ;  3.  By  the  opposite, 

1 .  By  the  context : 

Solent  rgges  Persarum  plures  ux5rg3  liabSre,  Cf.  C,  Verr.,  in.  33,  76; 
the  lings  of  Persia  zisually  have  more  tvives  [than  one]. 

2.  By  the  proper  standard  : 

Senectus  est  nattira  loquacior,  C,  Cat.M.,  16,  55,  Old  age  is  naturally 

rather  (or  too)  talkative. 

3.  By  the  opposite  : 

Quiesse  erit  melius,  L.,  iii.  48,  3  ;  it  will  he  better  to  he-perfectly- 
quiet  (than  to  make  a  disturbance). 

298.  Disproportion. — Disproportion  is  expressed  by  the 
comparative  with  quam  pro,  than  for,  and  the  Ablative,  or 
with  quam  ut,  tliat,  or  quam  qui,  wlio,  and  the  Subjunctive  ; 

Minor  caedgs  quam  pro  tanta  victoria  fuit,  L.,  x,  14,  21  ;  the  loss  was 
(too)  small  for  so  great  a  victory.  Quis  non  intellegit  Canaehi  signa  ri- 
gidiora  esse  quam  utimitentur  vgritatem"?  C,  Br.,  18,  70  ;  who  does  not 
perceive  that  Canachu^  figures  are  too  stiff  to  imitate  the  truth  of 
nattire  ?  Maior  sum  quam  cui  possit  Forttina  nocere,  Ov.,  Jf.,  vi.  195;  / 
am  too  great  for  Fortune  possibly  to  hurt  me. 


190  COMPARATIVES. 

Remark. — Disproportion  may  also  be  expressed  by  the  positive  in 
combination  with  prepositional  phi-ases,  etc. :  pro  multitudine  angusti 
fines,  Caes.,  B.G.,  i.  2,  5  ;  boundaries  too  small  for  their  multitude. 

Notes.— 1.  The  constructions  quam  pro  and  quam  qui  are  both  poBt-Ciceronian. 

2.  The  nt  is  frequently  omitted  after  quam,  as  :  Dolabella  eelerius  Asia  [ex- 
cgssit],  quam  eo  praesidium  addHei  potuisset,  C  ,  Fam ,  xii.  15, 1.  This  is  espe- 
cially common  after  potius  quam. 

299.  Tivo  Qualities  compared. — When  two  qualities  of  the 
same  substantive  are  compared,  we  find  either  magis  and 
quam  with  the  positive,  or  a  double  comparative  : 

Celer  tuus  disertus  magis  est  quam  sapiens,  C,  ^##.,  x.  i,  4  ;  your 
(friend)  Celer  is  eloquent  rather  than  tvise — more  eloquent  than  wise. 
Acutierem  sS  quam  ornatiorem  [vult],  C,  Opt.  Gen.,  2,  6  ;  he  wishes  to  he 
acute  rather  than  ornate. 

Notes. — 1.  There  is  no  distinction  to  he  made  between  the  two  expressions.  In  the 
latter  turn,  which  is  found  first,  but  rarely,  in  Cicero,  the  second  comparative  is  merely 
attracted  into  the  same  form  as  the  first.  Tlie  same  rule  applies  to  the  adverb : 
fortius  quam  fglicius,  with  moiv  bravery  than  good  luck. 

2.  Post-Augustan  Latin  show  s  occasionally  the  comparative  followed  l)y  quam,  and 
the  positive :  Nimiapietas  vestra  acrius  quam  considerate  excitavit,  Tac,  H.y 
1.83. 

300.  Restriction  to  tJie  Comparative. — When  but  two 
objects  are  compared,  the  comparative  exhausts  the  degrees 
of  comparison,  whereas,  in  English,  the  superlative  is  em- 
ployed, unless  the  idea  of  duality  is  emphatic. 

Katu  maior,  the  eldest  (of  two),  the  elder  ;  natti  minor,  the  youngest, 
the  younger.     Prior,  the  first  ;  posterior,  the  last. 

Posteriores  cogitationes,  ut  aiunt,  sapientiorgs  solent  esse,  C,  P/i.,xn. 
2,  5  ;  afterthougJitSy  as  the  saying  is,  are  usually  the  wisest. 

Remakk. — The  same  rule  applies  to  the  interroe:ative  uter,  which 
of  two  9  {whether  ?)  :  Ex  duSbus  uter  dignior  ?  ex  pluribus,  quis  dlgnis- 
simusl  Quint.,  vn.  4,  21  ;  of  two,  which  is  the  worthier  ?  of  more  (than 
two),  which  is  the  worthiest  ? 

Note.— Quis  is  rarely  used  instead  of  uter,  r.s  C, Fani.,xi.  3, 1  ;  V.,  A., xit.  725. 

301.  Comparative  Strengthened.  The  comparative  is  often  strength- 
ened during  the  classical  period  by  the  insertion  of  etiam,  even  ;  later 
also  by  adhtic,  still.  Multo  is  properly  the  Ablative  of  difference,  and 
is  the  normal  form  until  the  time  of  Veegil,  when  its  place  is  taken 
largely  by  longe,  except  in  Horace,  who  retains  multS.  Ante-classical 
and  post-classical  Latin  occasionally  doubles  the  comparative  :  magis 
dulcius,  Pl.,  Stich.,  699.      Nihil  invenies  magis  hoc  certS  certius,  Pl,, 


PRONOUNS.  igi 

Capt.,  643.     Even  in  Cicero  a  word  involving  Preference  is  sometimes 
strengthened  by  potius : 

[ThemistocH  fuit]  optabilius  oblivisci  posse  potius  quam  meminisse,  C, 
Or.,  II.  74,  800  ;  Themistocles  thought  it  (more)  preferable  to  be  able  to 
forget  (rather)  than  to  be  able  to  remember. 

302.  Superlatwe. — The  Latin  superlative  is  often  to  be 
rendered  by  the  English  positive,  especially  of  persons : 

Quintus  Fabius  Maximus,  Quintus  Fabius  the  Great.  Maximo  impetu, 
maiore  fortuna,  L.,  xxviii  36,2  ;  ivith  great  vigor,  ivith  greater  luck. 
Tain  feUx  ess5s  quam  formosissima  vellem,  Ov.,  Am.^  i.  8, 27  ;  would  thou 
wert  fortunate  as  (thou  art)  fair. 

303.  Superlative  Strengthened.— '\!\\Q?,w^Qv\B.ivfe  is  strengthened  by 
multo,  much  (especially  in  early  Latin);  longS,  by  far  {the  normal  usage 
in  the  classical  period);  vel,  even;  unus,  unus  omnium,  one  above  all 
others ;  quam  (with  adverbs  and  adjectives),  quantus  (with  maximus),  ut 
(with  adverbs) — potest,  potuit,  as— as  possible. 

£x  Britannis  omnibus  longe  sunt  humanissiml  qui  Cantium  incolunt, 
Caes.,  B.G.,  V.  14,  1;  of  all  the  Britons  bg  far  the  most  cultivated  are 
those  that  inhabit  Kent.  Protagoras  sophistes  illls  temporibus  vel  maxi- 
mus, C,  N.D.,  1.  23,  G3;  Protagoras,  the  very  greatest  sophist  (=  pro- 
fessor of  wisdom)  in  those  times.  Urbem  unam  mihl  amicissimam  dgclinavi, 
C,  Plane,  41,97;  I  turned  aside  from  a  city  above  cdl  others  friendly 
to  me.  (Caesar)  quam  aequissimo  loco  potest  castra  commtinit,  Caes.  ,B.G., 
V.  49,  7;  Caesar  fortifies  a  camp  in  as  favorable  a  position  as  possible. 

RExMarks. — I.  The  omission  of  potest  leaves  quam  with  the  super- 
lative, which  becomes  a  regular  combination :  as  (great)  as  possible, 

2.  For  tam,  tantum,  with  positive  followed  by  quam,  quantum  qui,  and 
the  superlative,  see  G42,  r.  5. 

PRONOUNS. 
I.     Personal  Pronouns. 

304.  I .  The  personal  Pronoun  is  usually  omitted  when  it 
is  the  subject  of  a  verb  ;  see  207. 

2.  The  Genitive  forms,  mei,  tui,  sui,  nostri,  vestri,  are  used 
mainly  as  Objective  Genitives ;  see  364,  n.  2. 

(Marcellinus)  s6  acerrimum  tui  dgfSnsorem  fore  ostendit,  C,  Fam.,  1.  1, 
2  ;  llarcellinus  shoived  that  he  would  be  your  keenest  defender. 

NoTEs.-^l.  Nostrum  and  vestrum  for  nostri,  vestri,  are  very  rare  :  [luppiter, 
custosl  htiius  urbis  ac  vestrum,  Cf.  C,  Cat.,  in.  12, 29. 

2.  The  Possessive  pronouns  sometimes  are  found  in  place  of  this  Genitive  :  Neque 
neclegentia  tua  neque  odio  id  fgcit  tuo,  Tek.,  Ph.,  1016 ;  he  did  this  neither  from 


192  PRONOUNS. 

neglect  of  thee  nor  from  hatred  of  the£.    Vester  c5nspectus  reficit  et  recreat  men- 
tem.  meam,  C,  Plane. ^  i,  2  ;  the  sight  of  you  refreshes  and  reneges  my  spirits. 
"  If  I  be  a  master,  where  is  my  fear  ?  "    Mal.,  i.  6. 

3.  The  Genitive  forms,  nostrum  and  vestrum,  are  used  par- 
titively  ;  see  364,  r. 

T8  ad  m6  venire  uterque  nostrum  cupit,  C,  Att.,  xiii.  33,  2  ;  each  of 
us  two  desires  that  you  should  come  to  me. 

Notes.— 1.  So  regularly  also  in  certain  phraseological  uses  which  may  be  partitive 
at  basis.  Frequentia  vestrum,  COnsSnSUS  vestrum,  regularly  in  combination  with 
omnium  (364,  r.),  and  occasionally  when  the  Possessive  is  more  natural ;  is  enim 
splendor  est  vestrum,  C,  Att.,  vii.  13A,  3. 

2.  For  a  Part.  Gen.  of  the  third  person  (reflexive)  a  circumlocution  must  be  used,  such 
as  ex  s5  or  the  Possessive  suorum. 

2.    Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

305.  Hie,  this  (the  Demonstrative  of  the  First  Person), 
refers  to  that  ivhich  is  nearer  the  speaker,  and  may  mean  : 

1.  The  speaker  liimself  :  hie  hom8  —  ego,  Pl.,  Trin.,  11 15. 

2.  The  persons  with  whom  the  speaker  identifies  himself,  e.  g.,  the 
judges  in  a  suit  at  law:  si  ego  hos  novi,  if  I  know  these  men  {=  the  jury). 

3.  The  most  important  subject  immediately  in  hand  :  hie  sapiens 
de  quo  loquor,  C,  Ac,  ii.  33,  105  ;  this  (imaginary)  wise  man  of  ichom 
I  am  speaking. 

4.  That  in  which  the  speaker  is  peculiarly  interested  :  hoc  studium, 
this  pursuit  of  mine,  of  ours. 

5.  That  which  has  just  been  mentioned:  haec  hactenus,  these  things 
thus  far  =  so  much  for  that. 

6.  Very  frequently,  that  which  is  about  to  be  mentioned :  his  con- 
dicionibus,  on  the  following  terms. 

7.  The  current  period  of  time  :  hie  diSs,  to-day  ;  haec  nox,  the  night 
just  past  ov  just  coming  ;  hie  mgnsis,  the  current  month. 

306.  Iste,  tliat  (of  thine,  of  yours),  refers  to  that  which 
helomjs  more  pecvliai'ly  to  the  Second  Person  (Demonstrative 
of  the  Second  Person)  : 

Perfer  istam  militiam,  Q.,  Fam.,\u.  11,  2 -,  endure  that  military 
service  of  yours.  Adventti  tu5  ista  subsellia  vacu6facta  sunt,  C,  Cat.,  i. 
7,  16  ;  at  your  approach  the  benches  in  your  neighborhood  ivere  vacated. 

Note.— The  supposed  contemptuous  character  of  iste  arises  from  the  refusal  to 
take  any  direct  notice  of  the  person  under  discussion,  "  the  person  at  whom  one  speaks 
or  points,"  and  precisely  the  same  thing  is  true  of  hic  and  ille,  but  less  common. 

307.  Hie,  that  (the  Demonstrative  of  the  Third  Person), 
denotes  that  which  is  more  remote  from  the  speaker,  and  is 
often  used  in  contrast  to  hic,  this. 


PRONOUNS.  193 

Sol  mg  ille  admonuit,  C,  Or.,  iii.,  55,  209  ;  that  {yon)  sun  reminded  me. 
Q.  Catulus  non  antiquS  ill5  more  sed  hoc  nostro  eruditus,  C,  Br.,  35, 132; 
Q.  Catulus,  a  cultivated  man,  not  after  the  old-fashioned  standard  of  a 
hy-gone  time  (illo)  hut  hy  the  standard  of  to-day  (li5c). 

Ille  may  mean  : 

1.  That  whicli  has  been  previously  mentioned  (often  ille  quidem): 
illud  qnodinitiS  vobisproposul,  C,  Font.,  7,  17;  that  which  I  propounded 
to  you  at  first. 

2.  That  which  is  well  known,  notorious  (often  put  after  the  substan- 
tive) :  tgstula  ilia,  that  (notorious)  potsherd  =  institutioii  of  ostracism  ; 
illud  Solonis,  that  (famous  saying)  of  Solon's. 

3.  That  which  is  to  be  recalled  :  illud  imprimis  mirabile,  that  (which 
I  am  going  to  remind  you  of)  is  especially  wonderful. 

4.  That  wliich  is  expected  : 

Ilia  dies  veniet  mea  qua  lugubria  ponam,  Ov.,  Tr.,  iv.  2,  73  ;  the  day 
ivill  come  when  I  shall  lay  aside  {cease)  my  inournful  strai?is. 

Remarks. — i.  Hic  and  ille  are  used  together  in  contrasts  :  as,  the 
latter — the  former,  (he  former — the  latter. 

(a)  When  both  are  matters  of  indifference  the  natural  signification  is 
observed  :  hic,  the  latter  ;  ille,  the  former. 

ignavia  corpus  hebetat,  labor  firmat ;  ilia  maturam  senectutem,  hic 
longam  adolgscentiam  reddit,  Cels.,  i.  i;  laziiiess  iveakens  the  body,  toil 
strengthens  it ;  the  one  (the  former)  hastens  old  age,  the  other  (the  lat- 
ter) prolongs  youth. 

{b)  When  the  former  is  the  more  important,  hic  is  the  former,  ille,  the 
latter  : 

Melior  tutiorque  est  certa  pax  quam  spgrata  victoria ;  haec  in  nostra, 
iUa  in  deorum  manuest,  L.,  xxx.  30,  19  ;  better  and  safer  is  certain  peace 
than  hoped-for  victory ;  the  former  is  in  our  hand{s),  the  latter  in  the 
hand{s)  of  the  gods. 

2.  Hic  et  ille ;  ille  et  ille  ;  ille  aut  ille,  this  man  and  (or)  that  man  = 
one  or  two. 

Non  dicam  hoc  signum  ablatum  esse  et  illud ;  hoc  dico,  nullum  tg 
signum  reliquisse,  C,  Verr.,i.  20,  53  ;  I  will  not  say  that  this  statue  was 
taken  off  and  that ;  (what)  I  say  (is)  this,  that  you  left  no  statue  at  all. 

3.  The  derived  adverbs  retain  the  personal  relations  of  hic,  iste,  ille: 
hic,  here  (where  I  am)  ;  hinc,  hence  (from  where  I  am)  ;  hue,  hither 
(where  I  am)  ;  istic,  there  (where  you  are)  ;  illic,  there  (where  he  is),  etc. 

4.  The  Demonstratives  hic,  iste,  ille,  and  the  Determinative  is,  are 
often  strengthened  by  quidem,  irideed.  The  second  member  is  then  in- 
troduced by  sed,  sed  tamen  (more  rarely  tamen,  vgrum,  autem,  vgro),  vgrum- 
tamen,  and  sometimes  is  added  asyndetically.  The  sentence  often  re- 
quires that  either  the  demonstrative  or  the  particle  be  left  untranslated. 

13 


194  PRONOUNS. 

Optare  hoc  quidem  est,  non  docere,  C,  Tusc  ir.  13,  30  ;  that  is  a 
(pious)  iidsli,  not  a  (logical)  proof.  Nihil  perfertur  ad  nos  praeter  rUmores 
satis  istos  quidem  constantgs  sed  adhuc  sine  auctore,  C'.,  Fain.xn.  9,  1  ; 
nothing  is  brought  to  us  exaqjt  reports,  consistent  enough,  it  is  true,  hut 
thus  far  not  authoritative. 

lUe  is  most  often  used  thus  ;  is,  iste,  hie,  more  rarely. 

Notes.— 1.  HiC  and  ille  arc  sometimes  employed  to  add  a  qualification  to  a  sub- 
stantive by  means  of  a  contrast :  Orator  non  ille  vulgaris  sed  hie  excellens,  C, 
Or.,  14,  45  ;  an  orator,  not  of  the  iyon)  common  type,  hvt  of  the  ideal  exceUence  {we  seek). 

2.  Not  unfrequently  in  poetry,  very  rarely  in  prose,  in  a  lonj;^  sentence  a  substan- 
tive is  repeated  by  means  of  ille  :  V.,  .4.,  i.  3,  ille  et  terris  iactatus ;  H.,  0.,  iv.  9, 51. 

3.  Sometimes  two  forms  of  hic,  ille,  or  is  are  found  in  the  same  clause  referring  to 
diffeicnt  substantives  :  Svolve  diligenter  6ius  [^.  e.,  Platonis]  eum  lihrum,  qui 
est  d6  animO,  C,   Tusc,  i.  n,  24. 

4.  Ille  may  refer  to  an  oblique  form  of  is :  Non  est  amici  talem  esse  in  eum, 
qualis  ille  in  se  est,  C,  Lael,  16, 59. 

5.  Ille  is  found  cliieliy  in  poetry  with  the  personal  pronouns  ego,  tu,  and  occasion- 
ally with  hie,  and  when  so  used  takes  its  fullest  force.  Hunc  iUum  fatis  externa 
ab  sgde  profectum  portendi  generum,  V.,  A.,  vu.  255. 

3.     Determinative  and  Reflexive  Pronouns. 

308.  Is,  tliat,  is  the  determinative  pronoun,  and  serves  as 
the  lacking  pronoun  of  the  Third  Person.  It  furnishes  the- 
regular  antecedent  of  the  relative  : 

Mild  venit  ohviam  tuus  puer  ;  is  mih!  litteras  ahs  te  reddidit,  C.,  Alt., 
II.  I,  1  ;  I  ivas  7nd  hy  your  servant ;  he  delivered  to  me  a  letter  from  you. 
Is  minimo  eget  mortalis  qui  minimum  cupit,  Syrus,  286  (Fr.);  that  mortal 
is  i7i  want  of  least,  ivho  ivanteth  least. 

Remarks. — i.  Is,  as  the  antecedent  of  the  relative,  is  often  omitted, 
chiefly  in  the  Nom.,  more  rarely  in  an  oblique  case  (G19). 

Bis  dat  qui  dat  celeriter,  Syrus,  235  (Fr.);  he  gives  twice  who  gives  in 
a  trice. 

Often  it  has  the  force  of  talis  (631,  i)  in  this  connection: 

Ego  is  sum  qui  nihil  umquam  mea  potius  quam  meorum  civium  causa 
fScerim,  C,  Fani.,  v.  21,  2;  /  am  a  ?nan  never  to  have  done  anything 
for  my  own  sake,  rather  than  for  the  sake  of  my  fellow-citizens. 

2.  Is,  with  a  copulative  or  adversative  particle,  is  used  as  he  or  that 
in  English,  for  the  purpose  of  emphasis.  Such  expressions  are:  et  is, 
atque  is,  isque,  and  he  too,  and  that  too  ;  neque  is,  et  is  non,  and  he  not, 
and  that  not;  sed  %hut  he,  further  strengthened  by  quidem,  mtZeeJ. 
To  refer  to  the  wliole  action  id  is  employed. 

Exempla  quaerimus  et  ea  non  antiqua,  C,  Verr.,\i\.  90.  210  ;  ice  are 
looking  for  examples,  and  those,  too,  not  of  ancicitt  date.  Epiciirus  ana 
in  domS  et  ea  quidem  angusta  quam  magnos  tenuit  amicorum  greggs,  C. , 
Fin.,  I.  20,  65  ;  ivhat  shoals  of  friends  Epicurus  had  in  one  house,  and 


PRONOUJTS.  195 

ihat  a  ptnched-up  one  !  Negotium  magnum  est  navigaie  atque  id  mSnse 
Quinctill,  C,  Att.  v.  12,  1;  it  is  a  big  job  to  take  a  voyage  and  that  in 
the  month  of  July. 

3.  Is  does  not  represent  a  substantive  before  a  Gen.,  as  in  the  Eng- 
lish that  of.  In  Latin  the  substantive  is  omitted,  or  repeated,  or  a 
word  of  like  meaning  substituted. 

Non  iudicio  discipulorum  dicere  debet  magister  sed  discipuli  magistri, 
Quint.,  ii.  2,  13;  tlie  master  is  not  to  speak  according  to  tha  judgment  of 
the  pupils ;  but  the  pupils  according  to  that  of  the  master.  Nulla  est 
celeritas  quae  possit  cum  animi  celeritSte  contendere,  C,  Tusc,  i.  19,  43  ; 
there  is  no  speed  tliaf  can  possibly  vie  with  that  of  the  mind.  M.  Coelius 
tribunal  suum  iuxta  C.  Treboni  sellam  coUocSvit,  Caes.,  B.C.,  in.  20,  1; 
Marcus  Coelius  placed  his  chair  of  office  next  to  that  of  Oaius  Trehonius. 

Of  course  hie,  ille,  and  iste  can  be  used  with  the  Gen.  in  their  proper 
sense. 

309.  Reflexive.  Instead  of  forms  of  is,  the  Reflexive 
Pronoun  sui,  sibi,  se,  together  with  the  Possessive  of  the 
Reflexive  suos  (-us),  sua,  suom  (-um)  is  used.     (See  521.) 

1.  Rcgularhj  \^'\\Gi\  reference  is  mSi&Q  to  i\\Q  grainmatical 
subject  of  the  sentence  : 

Ipse  sg  quisque  diligit  quod  sib!  quisque  carus  est,  C,  Lael.,  21,  80; 
every  one  loves  himself,  because  every  one  is  dear  to  himself.  (Fadius)  a 
me  diligitur  propter  summam  suam  humanitatem,  C.,Fam.,  xv.  14,  1; 
Fadius  is  a  favorite  of  mine  by  reason  of  his  exceeding  kindliness. 

The  subject  may  be  indefiuite  or  (occasionally)  impersonal. 

Contentum  suis  r§bus  esse  maximae  sunt  divitiae,  C,  Par.,  vi.  3,  51 ; 
io  be  content  ivith  o)i.e\'i  own  things  {with  what  one  hath)  is  the  greatest 
riches.     Perventum  ad  suos  erat,  1j.,  xxxiii.  8,  C. 

"  Puro  religion  and  mideliled  is  this  ...  to  keep  himself  unspotted  from  the 
world."    Jambs',  i.  27. 

2.  Frequently  when  reference  is  made  to  the  actual  sub- 
ject (521,  K.  2)  : 

Suos  rex  reginae  placet,  Vh.,  St.,  133;  every  queen  favors  her  own 
king  {every  Jill  loves  her  own  Jack).  Osculatur  tigrim  suus  custos,  Sex., 
E.M.,  85,  41 ;  her  own  keeper  kisses  the  tigress  {the  tigress  is  kissed  by 
her  oivn  keeper).  Cui  proposita  sit  conservatio  sui  necesse  est  hulc  partes 
quoque  sui  caras  esse,  C,  Fin.,  v.  13,  37;  he  who  has  in  view  the  preser- 
vation of  himself  {self-preservation)  must  necessarily  hold  dear  the 
parts  of  {that)  self  also. 

This  is  especially  common  with  suos,  which  when  thus  employed 
has  usually  its  emphatic  sense:  own,  peculiar,  proper. 


19^  PROKOUKS. 

3.  Sui,  sibi,  sS  are  the  regular  complements  of  the  infinitive 

and  its  equivalents  when  a  reflexive  idea  is  involved  ;  and 
se  is  also  used  with  prepositions  erga,  inter,  propter,  per,  for 
especial  emphasis. 

(RomanI)  sui  colligendl  hostibus  facultatem  (non)  rtlinquunt,  Caes., 
B.O.,  III.  6,  1  ;  the  Romans  do  not  leave  the  enemy  a  chance  to  rally. 
Ipsum  Furnmm  per  s§  vidi  libentissime,  C,  Fam.,  x.  3, 1. 

4.  Suos  (-us)  is  also  used  in  prepositional  phrases  that  are 
joined  closely  with  the  substantives  ;  so  after  cum,  inter,  and 
more  rarely  after  in,  intra,  and  ad. 

MagSnem  cum  classe  sua  in  Hispaniam  mittunt,  L.,  xxiil,  32,  11  ;  they 
sent  Mago  with  his  fleet  to  Spain.  Helvetios  in  fines  suos  reverti  iussit, 
Caes.,  B.G.,  i.  28,  3  ;  he  ordered  the  Helvetians  to  return  to  their  own 
country. 

So  the  phrases  su5  tempore,  at  the  right  time  ;  suo  loco,  at  the  right 
'place. 

Comoediae  quem  tisum  in  pueris  putem  suo  loco  dicam,  Quint.,  i.  8,  7  ; 
what  I  consider  to  he  the  good  of  comedy  in  the  case  of  hoys  I  will  men- 
tion in  the  proper  place. 

Notes.— 1.  The  writer  may  retain  forms  of  is,  if  he  deeiros  to  emphasize  his  own 
point  of  view.    So  too  in  prepositional  combinations, 

(Caesar)  Ciceronera  pro  Sius  merito  laudat,  Cae?.,  b.  6'.,  v.  52, 4 ;  ('(w.mr praises 
Cicero  according  to  his  desert.  [Pompeiusj  cum  decrgtum  d6  m6  Capuae  fgcit, 
ipse  cunctae  Italiae  6ius  fidem  implOranti  signum  dedit,  c,  Mil.,  15, 39. 

2.  In  early  comedy  and  tiien  asriiin  iu  late  Latin,  suOS  is  eometimes  strengthened  by 
sibi:  Su5  sibi  gladi5  hunc  iugulO,  TER.,ylc;.,g58  ;  very  rarely  in  claesical  Latin 
(C,  i%.,  II.  37,  96).    Similarly  mea  mihl,  Pl.,  True.,  698. 

3.  On  suum  quisque,  see  318,  3. 

4.  In  dependent  clauses  the  reflexive  is  used  with  reference  either  to  the  principal  or 
to  the  subordinate  subject.    See  for  fuller  treatment  521. 

310.  Idem,  the  same,  serves  to  unite  two  or  more  attributes 
or  predicates  on  a  person  or  thing  ;  it  is  often  to  be  trans- 
lated by  at  the  same  time;  liheivise,  also;  yet,  notioith- 
standing. 

(Cimon)  incidit  in  eandem  invidiam  quam  pater  suus,  Nep.,v.  3,  1; 
Cimon  fell  into  the  same  odium  as  his  father.  Quidquid  honestum  [estj 
idem  [est]  tltile,  C,  Off.,  11.  3, 10;  ivhatever  is  honorahle  is  also  (at  the 
same  time)  useful.  Nil  prOdest  quod  nOn  laedere  possit  idem,  Ov.,  Tr.,  11. 
266;  nothing  helps  that  may  not  likeivise  hurt.  (Epicurus),  cum  optimam 
et  praestantissimam  naturam  dei  dicat  esse,  negat  idem  esse  in  deo  gratiam, 
C,  N.D.,  1.43,  121;  although  Epicurus  says  that  the  nature  of  God  ia 


PROKOUS"S. 


197 


transcendently  good  and  great,  yet  (at  the  same  time)  he  says  that  there 
is  no  sense  of  favor  in  God.  Difficilis  facilis,  iucundus  acerbus,  es  idem, 
Mart.,  XII.  47, 1  ;  crabbed  (and)  kindly,  sweet  {and)  sour,  are  you  at  once. 

Remarks. — i.  When  a  second  attribute  is  to  be  added  to  a  substan- 
tive it  is  often  connected  by  Idemque,  et  idem,  atque  Idem :  Vir  doctissimua 
Plats  atque  Idem  gravissimus  philosopborum  omnium,  C,  Leg.,  ir.  6,  14  ; 
Plato,  a  most  learned  man,  and  at  the  same  time  weightiest  of  all  the 
philosophers. 

2.  The  same  as  is  expressed  by  Idem  with  qui,  with  atque  or  Sc,  with 
ut,  with  cum,  and  poetically  with  tlie  Dative.     See  359,  n.  6,  643,  G43, 

Tibi  mecum  in  eSdem  est  plstrln3  vivendum,  C,  Or.,  11.  33, 144  ;  you 
have  to  live  in  the  same  treadmill  with  me. 

3.  idem  cannot  be  used  with  is,  of  wrhich  it  is  only  a  stronger  form 
(is  +  dem). 

311.  I.  Ipse,  self,  is  the  distinctive  pronoun,  and  separates 
a  subject  or  an  object  from  all  others  : 

Ipse  f5ci,  /  myself  did  it  and  none  other,  I  alone  did  it,  I  did  it  of 
my  0W71  accord,  I  am  the  very  man  that  did  it.  Nunc  ipsum,  at  this 
very  instant,  at  this  precise  moment. 

Valvae  subito  sg  ipsae  aperuSrunt,  C,  Z)iV.,  i.  34,  74  ;  the  folding- 
doors  suddenly  opened  of  their  own  accord.  (Cato)  mortuus  est  annis 
octoginta  sex  ipsis  ante  [Ciceronem]  cSnsulem,  Q.,Br.,  15,  CI  ;  Cato  died 
just  eighty-six  years  before  Cicero^s  consulship.  Huic  rei  quod  satis  esse 
visum  est  militum  rellquit  (Caesar) ;  ipse  cum  legionibus  in  finSs  TrSve- 
rSrum  proficiscitur,  Caes.,  B.G.,  v.  2,  4. 

Remarks. — i.  Owing  to  this  distinctive  character,  ipse  is  often  used 
oi  persons  in  opposition  to  things  ;  riders  in  opposition  to  horses  ;  in- 
habitants in  opposition  to  the  towns  which  they  inhabit  ;  the  master  of 
the  house  in  opposition  to  his  household,  etc. 

ES  quS  me  ipsa  mlsit,  Pl.,  Cas.,  ygo  ;  I  am  going  where  mistress 
sent  me.     Ipse  dixit,  C,  N.D.,  i.  5,  10  ;  the  master  said  (avros  €<^a). 

2.  Et  ipse,  likewise,  as  well,  is  used  when  a  new  subject  takes  an  old 
predicate  : 

[Locrl  urbs]  dSsciverat  et  ipsa  ad  Poenos,  L.,  xxix,  6,  1 ;  Locri-city  had 
likewise  (as  well  as  the  other  cities)  revolted  to  the  Carthaginians. 
[Camillus]  ex  Volscis  in  AequSs  transiit  et  ipsos  bellum  molientSs,  L.,  vi. 
2, 14  ;  Camillus  went  across  from  the  Yolscians  to  the  Aequians,  who 
were  likewise  (as  well  as  the  Volscians)  getting  up  war. 

Cicero  prefers  in  this  meaning  ipse  alone,  but  et  ipse  occurs  occasionally  (not  in 
Caesar  or  Sallust),  and  becomes  the  prevailing  forai  in  Livy  and  later. 

2.  Ipse  is  used  to  lay  stress  on  the  reflexive  relation ;  in 


198  PRONOUN'S. 

the  Nominative  when  the  subject  is  emphatic,  in  the  Oblique 
Cases  when  the  object  is  emphatic. 

S6  ipse  laudat,  lie  (and  not  another)  praises  himself.  Se  ipsum  laudat, 
he  praises  himself  (sind  not  another). 

Piger  ipse  sibi  obstat,  Prov.  (Sex,  jEJ  J/.,  94,  28)  ;  ihe  lazy  man 
stands  in  his  own  way,  is  his  own  obstacle.  Non  egeo  medicina ;  mg 
ipse  c5ns51or,  C,  Lael.,  3,  10  ;  J  do  ?wt  need  medicine;  I  comfort  my- 
self (I  am  my  only  comforter).  EQdem  modo  sapiens  erit  affectus  ergS 
amicum  quo  in  se  ipsum,  C,  Fm.,  i.  20,  08  ;  the  ivise  mati  will  feel  to- 
wards his  friend  as  he  feels  towards  himself. 

Exceptions  are  common  : 

Quique  aliis  cavit,  non  cavet  ipse  sibI,  Ov.,  ^.^.,  i.  84  ;  a7id  he  ivho 

cai'edfor  others,  cares  not  for  himself. 

Note.— LiVY  seems  to  use  sometimes  ipse  in  connection  with  a  reflexive  as  if  it  were 
indeclinable  or  absolute  :  cum  dies  venit,  causa  ipse  pro  se  dicta,  damnatur,  L., 
IV.  44, 10  ;  ivhen  the  appointed  dmj  came  he  pleaded  his  oxon  cause  and  was  condemned. 

4.    Possessive  Pronouns. 

312.  The  Possessive  Pronouns  are  more  rarely  used  in  Latin 
than  in  English,  and  chiefly  for  the  purpose  of  contrast  or 
clearness. 

Manus  lava  et  cena,  C,  Or.,  11.  60,  246  ;  ivash  {your)  hands  and  dine. 
Praedia  mea  tti  possides,  e^o  aliena  misericordia  vivo,  C,  Rose.  Am.,  50, 
143  ;  you  are  in  possession  of  my  estates,  {while)  I  live  on  the  charity 
of  others. 

Remarks. — i.  Observe  the  intense  use  of  the  Possessive  in  the  sense 
of  property,  peculiarity,  fitness  :  suum  esse,  to  belong  to  one's  self,  to 
he  one's  own  man. 

Tempore  tuo  ptlgnasti,  L.,  xxxvin.  45,  10  ;  you  hare  fov.ghf  at  your 
own  time  (=  when  you  wished).  Hoc  honore  mS  adfScistis  anno  meS, 
C,  Leg.  Agr.,  11,  2,  4  ;  you  visited  me  ivi.th  this  honor  in  my  own  year 
{—  tlie  first  year  in  which  I  could  be  made  consul).  Pugna  suum  finem, 
cum  iacet  hostis,  habet,  Ov.,  Tr.,  iii.  5,  34;  a  fight  has  reached  its  fit  end 
tvhen  the  foe  is  doirn. 

2.  On  the  use  of  the  Possessive  Pronouns  for  the  Gen.,  see 304. 

5.     Indefinite  Pronouns. 

313.  Qnidam  means  one,  a,  a  certain  one,  definite  or  indefi- 
nite to  the  speaker,  but  not  definitely  designated  to  the  hearer. 
In  the  Plural,  it  is  equivalent  to  some,  sundry,  without  em- 
phasis. 


PRON^OUNS. 


199 


Interea  mulier  qnaedam  commigravit  hue,  Ter.,  And.,  69  ;  meanwhile 
a  certain  woman  took  up  her  quarters  here.  Intellegendum  est  quibusdam 
quaestionibus  alios,  quibusdam  alios  esse  aptiorgs  looos,  C,  Top.,  21,  79  : 
it  is  to  he  observed  t/iat  some  grounds  are  more  suitable  for  some  questions, 
for  some,  others,  Tam  nescire  quaedam  militSs  quam  scire  oportet,  Tag., 
//.,  I.  83. 

Remarks. — i.  With  an  adjective  quidam  often  serves  to  heighten  tlie 
attribute  by  adding  a  vagueness  to  it.     (Gr.  ns)- 

Est  quodam  incredibili  rSbore  animl,  C,  Mil.,  37,  101  ;  really  he  is  en- 
doived  ivith  a  strange  strengtti  of  mind  {one  that  is  past  belief ). 

2.  Quidam  is  often  used  with  or  without  quasi,  as  if,  to  modify  an 
expression  : 

N5n  sunt  isti  audiendi  qui  virtutem  duram  at  quasi  ferream  esse  quandam 
volunt,  C,  Lael.,  13,  48  ;  ttiose  frietids  of  yours  are  not  to  be  listened  to 
tvho  will  have  it  (maintain)  that  virtue  is  hard,  and,  as  it  were,  made  of 
iron.  Est  quaedam  virtutum  vitiSrumque  viclnia,  Quint.,  ii.  12,  4  {cf. 
III.  7,  25)  ;  there  is  a  certain  neighborly  relation  between  virtues  and 
vices. 

3.  Quidam  may  bo  strengthened  by  the  addition  of  certus  or  tlnus: 

Vita  agenda  est  certo  genere  quodam,  nQn  quolibet,  C,  Fin.,  in.  7,  24. 
Est  eloquentia  una  quaedam  dS  sununis  virttitibus,  C,  Or.,  iii.  14,  55. 

314.  Aliquis  (aliqui)  means,  sotne  one,  some  one  or  other, 
wholly  indefinite  to  the  speaker  as  well  as  to  the  hearer  : 

[Dgclamabam]  cum  aliquo  cottldiS,  C,  Br.,  90,  310  ;  I  used  to  declaim 
with  somebody  or  other  daily. 

In  the  predicate  it  is  often  emphatic  (by  Litotes,  700)  :  sum  aliquis, 
aliquid,  /  am  somebody  =  a  person  of  importance,  something  =  of 
some  weight;  opposed  to  :  nullus  sum,  nihil  sum,  lam  a  nobody,  nothing. 

This  force  is  often  heightened  by  a  following  contrast  : 

Est  hoc  aliquid,  tametsi  n5n  est  satis,  C,  Div.  in  Caec,  15,  47  ;  this 
is  something,  although  it  is  not  eyiough.  Fac,  ut  m6  veils  esse  aliquem, 
quoniam,  qui  fui  et  qui  esse  potui,  iam  esse  non  possum,  C,  Alt.,  11  r.  15,  8  ; 
do  make  out  that  I  am  somebody,  since  I  can  no  longer  be  the  man  I  was 
and  the  man  I  might  have  been. 

Remarks. — r.  Aliquis  and  aliqui  are  distinguished  as  substantive  and 
adjective;  accordingly,  when  aliquis  is  used  with  a  substantive  the  rela- 
tion is  appositional.  This  always  occurs  with  Proper  names;  and  even 
with  other  substantives  the  Romans  seem  to  have  preferred  aliquis  to 
aliqui.     (See  107,  n.  i.) 

2.  With  numerals,  aliquis  is  used  like  English  some.  Occasionally 
also  it  has  the  force  of  many  a.  So  in  Caes.,  B.C.,  i.  2,  2,  dixerat  aliquis 
Ifiniorem  sententiam,  where  aliquig  refers  to  three  persons,  named  later. 


20O  PRONOUNS. 

315.  ftuis  (qni),  fainter  than  aliquis,  is  used  chiefly  after 
si,  if;  nisi,  unless ;  ne,  lest ;  num,  ivliethery  and  in  lelative 
sentences.     See  107,  k. 

NS  quid  nimis !  'V^vi.,  And.,6i',  nothing  in  excess!  Fit  pl6rumque 
at  if  qui  boni  quid  voluut  adferre,  adfingant  aliquid,  quo  faciant  id,  quod 
nuntiant,  laetius,  C,  Ph.,  i.  3,  8;  it  often  happens  that  those  who  wish  to 
bring  (some)  good  tidings^  invent  something  more,  to  make  the  7iews  more 
cheering. 

Notes.— 1.  AKquis  is  used  after  si,  etc.,  when  there  is  stress  :  si  quis,  if  any ;  si 
aliquis,  ifso?ne  ;  si  quid,  ?/  anything ;  si  quidquam,  {f  anything  at  all. 

Si  aliquid  dandnm  est  voluptati,  senectus  modicis  conviviis  delectari  po- 
test, C.,  Caio.  M.,  14,  44  ;  if  something  is  to  be  given  tojyleasure  (as  something  or  other 
must),  old  age  can  take  delight  in  mild  festivities. 

Aliquis  is  regular  if  the  sentence  contains  two  negatives :  [VerrSs]  nihil  umquam 
fecit  sine  aliquo  quaestu,  C,  Verr.,  v.  5. 11.    (446.) 

2.  "Quis  and  qui  are  distinguished  as  aliquis  and  aliqui,  but  the  distinction  is  often 
neglected,  even  in  classical  Latin.    See  107,  n.  1. 

316.  Quispiam  is  rarer  than  aliquis,  but  not  to  be  distin- 
guished from  it,  except  that  quispiam  never  intimates  impor- 
tance.  Dixerit  quispiam,  C,  Cat.M.,  3,  8  ;  some  one  may  say. 

317.  I.  ftuisquam  and  ullus  (adjective)  mean  any  owe  (at 
all),  and  are  used  chiefly  in  negative  sentences,  in  sentences 
that  imply  total  negation,  and  in  sweeping  conditions  : 

[lustitia]  numquam  nocet  cuiquam,  C,  Fin.,  i.  16,  50  ;  justice  never 
hurts  anybody.  Quis  umquam  Graecorum  rhStorum  a  Thucydide  quidquam 
duzit?  C,  Or.,  9,  317;  lohat  Greek  rhetorician  ever  dreiv  anything  from 
Tfiucydides?  [None].  Si  quisquam,  ille  sapiens  fuit,  C,  Lael.,  2,  9  ;  if 
any  one  at  all  (was)  wise,  he  ivas.  Quamdiu  quisquam  erit  qui  te  defen- 
dere  audeat,  vivSs,  C,  Cat.,  i.  2,  C  ;  so  long  as  there  shall  be  any  one  to 
dare  defend  you,  live  on.  Hostem  esse  in  Syria  negant  ullum,  C,  Fam., 
III.  8,  10  ;  they  say  that  there  is  not  any  enemy  in  Syria.  OmninO  nSmS 
miius  rei  fuit  emptor  cui  defuerit  hie  venditor,  C,  Ph.,  11.  38,  97  ;  gen- 
erally there  was  never  a  buyer  of  anythirig  who  lacked  a  seller  in  him 
{no  one  ever  wanted  to  buy  anything  that  he  was  not  ready  to  sell). 

So  after  comparatives  : 

SOlis  candor  inlQstrior  est  quam  fiUius  ignis,  C,  N.D.,  11.  15,  40  ;  the 
brilliancy  of  the  sun  is  more  radiant  than  that  of  any  fire. 

Notes. — 1.  Quisquam  is  occasionally  (principally  in  Livy)  strengthened  by  unus, 
especially  after  a  negative  :  Cum  multl  magis  fremerent,  quam  quisquam  iinus 
recflsare  audfiret,  L-,  m.  45,  4. 

2.  After  sine,  irithoiit,  omnI  is  often  used  ir.stead  of  ull6  (tllla)  i"  early  Latin  : 
Sine  omnicttra  dormias,  Pi-.,  THn.,  621. 

3.  On  quisquam  as  an  adj.,  see  107,  3,  n.  2.    Ullus  is  occasionally  a  subst.  in  Livy. 


PRONOUNS.  2GI 

2.  The  negative  of  quisquam  is  nemS,  nohody  ;  nihil,  noth- 
ing (108).  The  negative  of  tillus  is  ntillus,  no,  none,  which 
is  also  used  regularly  as  a  substantive  in  the  Genitive  and 
Ablative  instead  of  neminis  and  nemine. 

Uemd  is  also  sometimes  used  apparently  as  an  adjective, 
though  the  conception  is  usually  appositional. 

Nemo  vir  magnus,  C,  N.D.,  ii.  66,  167  ;  no  great  man,  no  one  {who  is) 
a  fjreat  man. 

Notes.— 1 .  On  neque  quisquam  and  et  n6m5,  see  480. 

2.  Nullus  is  used  in  familiar  language  instead  of  nOn  (so  sometimes  in  English)  : 
Fhilippus  nullus  usquam,  L.,  xxxir.  35, 2  ;  no  Philip  anywhere.  Quis  is  also  used 
familiarly  :  Prospectum  petit,  Anthea  si  quern  videat,  V.,  J..,  1. 181 ;  anAnthms, 
i.  e.,  Aritheus  or  iicmiebody  ivho  would  answer  for  him. 

3.  NemQ  and  nullus  are  occasionally  strengthened  by  Unus, 

318.  I.  duisque  means  each  one,  as  opposed  to  omnis,  every, 
and  is  usually  post-positive. 

Mens  cuiusque,  is  est  quisque,  C,  Rep.,  vi.  24,  26  ;  each  man's  mind 
is  each  man's  self.  Laudati  omnSs  sunt  donatique  pro  merits  quisque, 
L.,  xxxviii.  23  ;  all  were  praised  and  rewarded,  each  one  accord'mxj  to 
his  desert.  Quam  quisque  norit  artem  in  hac  sg  exerceat,  [C],  Tusc.,i. 
i8,41.     (616.) 

2.  With  superlatives  and  ordinals  quisque  is  loosely  trans- 
lated every : 

Optimum  quidque  rarissimum  est,  C,  i^m.,  11.  25,  81  ;  every  good 
thing  is  rare ;  more  accurately,  the  better  a  thing,  the  rarer  it  is.  (645, 
R.  2.)     Qulnto  quoque  anno  Sicilia  tota  cSns6tur,  C,  Verr.,  11.  56, 139  ; 

every  fifth  year  all  Sicily  is  assessed. 

3.  duisque  combines  readily  with  the  reflexives,  sul,  sibi, 
se,  SUU3,  in  their  emphatic  sense  (309,  2).  Here,  except  for 
special  reasons,  the  reflexive  precedes.  Suum  cuique  has  be- 
come a  standing  phrase. 

Sua  quemque  fraus  et  suus  terror  vexat,  C,  Rose. Am.,  24,  67  ;  it  is 
his  own  sin  and  Ids  own  alarm  that  harasses  a  man. 

Notes.— 1.  After  Cicero's  time,  owing  to  the  phraseological  character  of  the  com- 
bination, sui  etc.  quisque,  we  find  it  used  without  agreement. 

Exercitus  amisso  duce  ac  passim  multis  sibi  quisque  imperium  petentibus 
brevi  dilabitur,  S.,/m^.,  i8,3.  Instigando  suos  quisque  populos  effScere  ut 
omne  Volscum  nomen  deficeret,  L.,  n.  38, 6. 

2.  Classical  but  not  connnon  is  the  attraction  of  quisque  into  the  case  of  the 
reflexive.  Haec  proclivitas  ad  suum  quodque  genus  a  similitudine  corporis 
aegrotatio  dicatur,  c,  Tusc,  iv.  12, 28. 


202  PRONOUNS. 

3.  Quisque  combined  with  primus  has  two  meanings  :  (a)  as  early  as  possible.,  (6> 
one  after  the  other  in  order  (deinceps)- 

Primo  quoque  tempore,  C,  Ph.,  m.  15, 39  ;  at  the  earliest  time  possible.  Primum. 
quidque  (each  thing  in  order)  coasid,era  quale  sit,  C,  N.D.,  i.  27,  77. 

4.  The  various  uses  of  quisqae  are  well  summed  up  in  Nagelsbach's  formulae  : 

a.  Non  omnia  omnibus  tribuenda  sunt,  sed  suum  cuique ; 

b.  Omnes  idem  faciant,  sed  optimus  quisque  optime ; 

c.  Non  omnibus  annis  hoc  fit,  sed  tertio  quoque  anno ; 

d.  Non  omnes  idem  faciunt,  sed  quod  quisque  vult. 

319.  Alter  and  alius  are  both  translated  other,  another,  but 
alter  refers  to  one  of  two,  alius  to  diversity.  They  are  used 
in  various  phraseological  ways,  which  can  be  best  shown  by 
examples  : 

Solus  aut  cum  altero,  alone  or  with  (only)  one  other ;  alter  Nero,  a 
second  Nero. 

Alter  alterum  quaerit,  one  (definite  person)  seeks  the  other  (definite 
person)  ;  alius  alium  quaerit,  one  seeks  one,  another  another ;  alter! — 
alteri,  one  party — another  party  (already  defined)  ;  alii— alii,  so)7ie — 
others.  Alter  often  means  neighbor,  brother,  fellow-man  ;  alius,  third 
person. 

Alter : 

(AgSsilalis)  fuit  claudus  altero  pede,  Nep.,  xvii.  8,  1  ;  Agesilaiis  was 
lame  of  one  foot.  Altera  manu  fert  lapidem,  panem  ostentat  altera,  Pl., 
Aul.,  195;  171  one  hand  a  stone  he  carries,  in  the  other  holds  out  bread. 
Mors  nee  ad  vivos  pertinet  nee  ad  mortuos  :  alteri  nulli  (317,  2,  n.  2)  sunt, 
alteros  non  attinget,  C,  Tusc,  i.  38,  91  ;  death  concerns  neither  the  liv- 
ing nor  the  dead  :  the  latter  are  not,  the  former  it  will  not  reach. 

Alius : 

Fallacia  alia  aliam  trudit,  Ter.,  And  ,  779  ;  one  lie  treads  on  the  heels 
of  another  (indefinite  series).  Alii  voluptatis  causa  omnia  sapientSs 
facere  dixSrunt ;  alii  cum  voluptate  dignitatem  coniungendam  putavSrunt, 
C,  Gael.,  15,  41  ;  some  have  said  that  wise  men  do  every  thing  for  the 
sake  of  pleasure,  others  have  thought  that  pleasure  is  to  be  combined 
with  dignity.  Divitias  alii  praeponunt,  alii  honores,  C,  Lael.,  6,  20;  some 
prefer  riches,  others  honors.  Alii  vestrum  anserSs  sunt,  alii  cangs,  C-., 
Rose.  Am.,  20,  57  ;  some  of  you  are  geese,  others  dogs.  Aliud  alii  nattira 
iter  ostendit,  S.,  C,  2,  9  ;  nature  shows  one  path  to  one  man,  another 
path  to  another  man. 

Alter  and  alius : 

Ab  alio  expectSs  alteri  quod  fSceris,  Syrus,  2  (Fr.)  ;  you  may  look  for 
from  another  ivhat  you've  done  unto  yo^ir  brother  (from  No.  3,  what 
No.  I  has  done  to  No.  2), 


APiOSITION".  203 

NoTBS.— 1.  Alius  is  found  occasionally,  especially  in  late  Latin,  for  alter :  alius 
KerO,  Suet.,  Tit.  7  ;  but  in  CAEs.,i^.G^.,  1. 1, 1,  alius  follows  tinus.  Alii  for  re- 
liqui  or  cSterl  is  occasional,  in  the  earlier  times,  but  more  common  in  Livy  and  later. 

2.  The  Greek  usage  of  alius  in  the  meaning  besides,  is  post-Ciceronian  and  rare. 

£0  missa  plaustra  iumentaque  alia,  L.,  iv.  41, 8. 

APPOSITION. 

3.20.  By  apposition  one  substantive  is  placed  by  the  side  of 
another,  which  contains  it : 

Cicero  orator,  Cicero  the  orator.     Rhgnus  flumen,  the  river  Rhine. 

CONCORD. 

321.  The  word  in  apposition  agrees  with  the  principal  wo/d 
(or  words)  in  case,  and  as  far  as  it  can  in  gender  and  number  : 

Noni.  Herodotus  pater  historiae,  Herodotus  the  father  of  historj-; 
Gen.  Herodoti  patris  historiae  ;  Dat.  Herodoto  patri  historiae. 

Cnidus  et  ColophSn,  nobilissimae  urbes,  captae  sunt,  Cf.  C,  Imj}.,  12,  33; 
Cnidus  and  Colophon,  most  nohle  cities,  ivere  taken.  Omnium  doctrina- 
rum  inventrices  Athgnae,  Cf.  C,  Or.,  i.  4, 13;  Athens,  the  inve7itor  of  all 
branches  of  learning. 

Remarks. — i.  Exceptions  in  number  are  due  to  special  uses,  as,  for 
example,  when  deliciae  or  amorgs,  etc.,  are  used  of  a  Singular  : 

Pompgius,  nostri  amorgs,  ipse  sg  alflixit,  C,  Att.,  ir.  19,  3  ;  Pompey,  our 
special  passion,  has  wrecked  himself. 

2.  The  Possessive  Pronoun  takes  the  Gen.  in  apposition  : 

Tuum,  hominis  simplicis,  pectus  vidimus,  C,  PA.,  11.  43,  111  ;  we  have 
seen  your  bosom  bared,  you  open-hearted  creature  !  Urbs  mea  tinius  opera 
fuit  salva,  Cf.  C,  Pis.,  3,  C  ;   the  city  ivas  saved  by  my  exertions  alone. 

3.  On  the  agreement  of  the  predicate  with  the  word  in  apposition, 
see  211,  R.  C. 

Notes.— 1.  In  poetry,  insteaf]  of  tlie  Voc.  in  apposition,  the  Nom.  is  often  found. 
Semper  celebrabere  d5nis,  Corniger  Hesperidum,  fluvius  rSgnator  aquarum, 
v.,  A.,  VIII.  77.    In  prose  not  before  Pliny. 

2.  Very  rarely  persons  are  lool^ed  upon  as  tilings,  and  the  Appositivcs  used  in  the 
neuter :  Dum  patrgs  et  pl6bem,  invalida  et  inermia,  liidificgtur,  Tac,  Ann.,  i.  46. 

322.  Partitive  A2)positio}i. — Partitive  Apposition  is  tliat 
form  of  Apposition  in  which  a  part  is  taken  out  of  the  whole. 
It  is  sometimes  called  Restrictive  Apposition. 

Maxuma  pars  ferg  mSrem  hunc  homings  habent,  Pl  ,  Capt.,  232  ;  man- 
kind— 2^''^ify  niucJi  the  greatest  part  of  them — have  iJiis  way.  Cetera 
multitUdo  sorte  decumus  quisque  ad  supplicium  lecti  (sunt),  L.,  11.  59,  11  ; 
(of)  the  rest  of  the  crowd  every  tentli  man  ivas  chosen  by  lot  for  punish- 
ment. 


204  APPOSITION". 

323.  Distrihtitive  Apposiiioii. — Distributive  Apposition  is 
that  form  of  Apposition  in  which  the  whole  is  subdivided 
into  its  parts,  chiefly  with  alter — alter,  the  one — tlie  other  ; 
quisque,  uterque,  each  one  ;  alii — alii,  pars — pars,  mme — 
others.     (It  is  often  called  Partitive  Apposition.) 

Duae  filiae  altera  occisa  altera  capta  est,  Caes.,  B.G.,  i.  53,  4  ;  {of) 
two  daughters,  the  one  ivas  killed,  the  other  captured. 

Remark. — The  Part.  Gen.  is  more  commonly  employed  than  cither 
of  these  forms  of  apposition. 

Notes.— 1.  Partitive  Apposition  is  not  found  in  Cicero  or  Caesar,  and  Distributive 
Apposition  rarely.    Tlicy  are  more  frequent  in  Sallust,  and  not  uncommon  in  Livy. 

2.  Tlic  Greelv  figure  of  the  tvJiole  and  the  part  (,(txvi^<^  «a^'  oAov  xal  fiepo^)  is  rare  and 
poetical  in  Latin.  Latagum  saxo  occupat  OS  faciemque  adversam,  v..  A.,  x.  698  ; 
87}iites  Latagus  nnfh  a  bowlder,  full  (irt)  mouth  and  face  {(f.  Eng.  '■'■hand  and  foot'"). 

324.  Apposition  to  a  Sentence. — Sometimes  an  Accusative 
stands  in  apposition  to  a  whole  preceding  sentence  ;  either 
explaining  the  contents  of  the  sentence  or  giving  the  end  or 
the  aim  of  the  action  involved  in  the  sentence.  The  latter 
usage,  however,  is  not  found  in  Cicero  or  Caesar. 

Admoneor  ut  aliquid  etiam  dS  sepultura  dicendum  existimem,  rem  non 
difficilem,  C,  Tusc,  i.  43,  102  ;  /  am  reminded  to  take  into  considera- 
tiun  tltat  something  is  to  he  said  about  burial  also— an  easy  matter, 
Deserunt  tribunal,  ut  quis  praetorianorum  militum  occurreret  manus  inten- 
tantes,  causam  discordiae  et  initium  armorum,  Tag.,  Ann.,  i.  27. 

If  the  main  verb  is  passive  the  Appositive  may  be  in  the  Nominative: 
Tag.,  Ann.,  in.  27. 

Notes.— 1.  Neuter  adjectives  and  participles  are  occasionally  used  in  the  same  way, 
and  some  regard  such  neuters  as  Nominatives. 

2.  This  Ace.  is  to  be  regarded  as  the  object  effected  (330)  by  the  general  action  of  the 
sentence. 

Predicative  Attribution  and  Predicative  Apposition. 

325.  Any  case  may  be  attended  by  the  same  case  in  Pred- 
icative Attribution  or  Apposition,  which  differ  from  the 
ordinary  Attribution  or  Apposition  in  translation  only. 

Nominative  :  Filius  aegrStus  rediit. 

Ordinary  Attribution  :  Tlie  sick  son  returned. 
Predicative  Attribution  :  77ie  -sou  retarned  sick  =  he  was  sick 
when  he  returned. 
Hercules  iuvenis  le6nem  interfgcit. 
Ordinary  Apposition  :   T/16  young  man  Hercules  slew  a  Hon. 


APPOSITION".  205 

Predicative  Apposition  :  Hercules,  when  a  young  man,  sleiv  a 
lion  =  he  ivas  a  young  inan  when  he  slew  a  lion. 
Genitive  :  Potestas  6ius  adhibendae  uxoris,  the  permission  to  take  her 

to  wife. 
Dative  :  Amlco  vlv5  non  subvenisti,  you  did  not  Itelp  your  friend 

{while  he  ivas)  alive. 
Accusative  :  Hercules  cervam  vivam  cepit. 

Ordinary  Attribution  :  Hercules  caught  a  living  doe. 
Predicative  Attribution  :  Hercules  caught  a  doe  alive. 
Ablative  :  Aere  iituntur  importato,  they  use  imported  copper  =  the 
copper  which  they  use  is  imported. 

Remarks. — i.  The  Voc,  not  being  a  case  proper,  is  not  used  piedi- 
catively.     Exceptions  are  apparent  or  poetical. 

Quo,  moriture,  ruisi  V.,  A.,  x.  810  ;  "  whither  dost  thou  rush  to  die^^ 
(thou  doomed  to  die)  9    Sic  venias,  hodierne,  Tib.,  i.  7,  53. 

Notice  here  the  old  phrase  :  Macte  virtute  estO,  H.,  8.,  i.  2,  31  ;  m- 
crease  in  virtue  —  heaven  speed  thee  in  thy  high  career. 

Macte  is  regarded  by  some  as  an  old  Voc.,  from  the  same  stem  as  magnus;  by- 
others  as  an  adverb.  A  third  view  is  that  macte  with  est6  is  an  adverb,  and  only 
when  used  absolutely  a  Vocative. 

2.  VictorSs  redierunt  may  mean,  the  conquerors  returned,  or,  they  re- 
turned conquerors ;  and  a  similar  predicative  use  is  to  be  noticed  in 
Idem,  the  same:  lidem  abeunt  qui  vSnerant,  C,  Fin.,  iv.  3,  7  ;  they  go 
away  just  as  they  had  come  (literally,  the  same  persons  as  they  had  come). 

3.  Predicative  Attribution  and  Apposition  are  often  to  be  turned 
into  an  abstract  substantive  : 

Defend!  rem  ptiblicam adulescens,  non  deseram  senex,  C,  Ph.,  11.  46, 118; 
J  defended  the  state  in  my  youth,  I  will  not  desert  her  in  my  old  age. 

So  with  prepositions  : 

Ante  Ciceronem  consulem,  before  the  consulship  of  Cicero ;  ante  urbem 
conditam,  before  the  building  of  the  city. 

4.  Do  not  confound  the  "  as"  of  apposition  with  the  "as"  of  com- 
parison—ut,  quasi,  tamquam,  sicut,  velut  ((>02,  n.  1,  C42):  Hanc  (virtfltem) 
vobi3  tamquam  hereditatem  maiores  vestrl  reliqjierunt,  C,  Ph.,  iv.  5, 13  ; 
your  ancestors  left  you  this  virtue  as  (if  it  icere)  a  legacy. 

5.  When  especial  stress  is  laid  on  the  adjective  or  substantive  pred- 
icate, in  combination  with  the  verbal  predicate,  the  English  langUcage 
is  prone  to  resolve  the  sentence  into  its  elements  : 

Fragilem  truci  commisit  pelagO  ratem  primus,  H.,  0.,  i.  3,  10 ;  his  frail 
bark  to  the  wild  waves  he  trusted  first  =  to  trust  his  frail  bark  to  the 
wild  waves  he  was  first.  Una  salus  victis  nuUam  sperare  salutem,  V.,  J.., 
II-  353  >  sole  safety  for  the  vaiiquished  His,  to  hope  for  iione — the  only 
safety  that  the  vanquished  have,  is  to  hope  for  none. 


2o6  PREDICATE. 

6.  The  English  idiom  often  uses  the  adverb  and  adverbial  expressions 
instead  of  the  Latin  adjective  :  so  in  adjectives  of  inclination  and  dis- 
inclination, knowledge  and  ignorance,  of  order  and  position,  of  time  and 
season,  and  of  temporary  condition  generally  :  libgns,  with  pleasure; 
volens,  zvilling{l}j)  ;  nol6ns,  unwilling{ly)  ;  invitus,  against  one's  ivill ; 
prudgns,  aware  ;  imprudens,  unawares ;  sciens,  knowing{hj)  ;  prinms,  prior, 
first;  nltimus, /as/ ;  medius,  in,  about  the  middle;  hodiernus,  to-da.y  ; 
matutinus,  in  the  mor^iing  ;  frequSns,  frequent{ly)  ;  sublimis,  aloft ;  totus, 
wholly ;  solus,  unu3,  alone,  and  many  others. 

Ego  eum  a  mg  invitissimus  dimisi,  C,  Fam.,  xiii.  63,  1  ;  7  dismissed 
Mm  most  unwillingly.  Plus  hodig  boni  fgci  imprudens  quam  sciens  ante 
hunc  diem  nmquam,  Ter.,  Ilec,  880;  /  have  done  more  good  to-day 
unawares  than  I  have  ever  done  knowingly  before.  Adcurrit,  mediam 
mulierem complectitur,  Ter.,  And.,  133  ;  he  runs  up,  puts  his  arms  about 
the  ivoman's  waist.  Qui  prior  strinxerit  ferrum  eius  victoria  erit,  L.,  xxiv. 
38,  5  (244,  R.  2).  Vespertinus  pete  tectum,  II.,  Ej) ,  i  6,  20  ;  seek  thy  dwell- 
ing at  eventide.  Rarus  venit  in  cgnacula  mUes,  Juv.,  x.  18  ;  the  soldiery 
rarely  comes  into  the  garret.  Sg  totos  tradidgrunt  voluptatibus,  C, 
Lael.,  23,  86  ;  they  have  given  themselves  wholly  to  pleasure.  Soli  hoc 
contingit  sapienti,  C,  Par.,  v.  i,  34  ;  this  good  luck  happens  to  the  wise 
man  alone  =  it  is  only  the  wise  man  who  has  this  good  hick. 

7.  Carefully  to  be  distinguished  are  the  uses  of  primus,  and  the  ad- 
verbs primum,  first,  for  the  first  time,  and  primo,  at  first.  Primum  means 
first  in  a  series  ;  primo,  first  in  a  contrast.  But  these  distinctions  are 
not  always  observed. 

Primum  docent  esse  deos,  deinde  qualgs  sint,  turn  mundum  ab  iis  admi- 
nistrari,  postrgmo  consulere  eos  rgbus  humanis,  Q.,N.D.,n.  i,  3  ;  first, 
they  teach  us  that  there  are  gods,  next  of  ivhat  7iature  they  are,  then 
that  the  world  is  ruled  by  them,  finally,  that  they  take  thought  for 
human  affairs.  PrimS  StoicSrum  more  agamus,  deinde  nostro  institutS 
vagabimur,  C,  Tusc,  iii.  6,  13  ;  let  us  treat  the  subject  at  first  after  the 
manner  of  the  Stoics,  afterwards  ice  will  ramble  after  our  own  fashion. 

B. 

1.  Multiplibation   of  the    Predicate. 

326.  The  Multiplication  of  tlie  Predicate  requires  no  fur- 
ther rules  than  those  that  have  been  given  in  the  general 
doctrine  of  Concord. 

2.  Qualification   of  the   Predicate. 

327.  The  Qualification  of  the  Predicate  may  be  regarded 
as  an  External  or  an  Internal  change  : 


EXTERNAL   CHANGE— ACCUSATIVE.  20/ 

I.  External  change  :  combination  with  an  object. 

I.  Direct  Object,  Accusative.   2.  Indirect  Object,  Dative. 

II.  Internal  change  :  combination  with  an  attribute  which 
may  be  in  the  form  of 

1.  The  Genitive  case.         3.  Preposition  with  a  case. 

2.  The  Ablative.  4.  An  Adverb. 

Note.— The  Infinitive  forme  (Infinitive,  Genind,  Gerundive,  and  Supine)  appear 
now  as  objects,  now  as  attributes,  and  require  a  separate  trcatiuer.t. 

1.    External    Change. 
Accusative. 

The  great  function  of  the  Accusative  is  to  form  temporary  compounds  with  the  verb, 
as  the  great  function  of  the  Genitive  is  to  form  temporary  compounds  with  the  noun. 
Beyond  this  statement  everything  is  more  or  less  extra-grammatical,  and  sharp  sub- 
divisions are  often  unsatisfactory.    Still  it  may  be  said  that 

328.  The  Accusative  is  the  case  of  the  Direct  Object. 

The  Direct  Object  is  the  object  which  defines  directly  the 
action  of  the  verb. 

Remark. — The  Dative  defines  indirectly  because  it  involves  an  Ac- 
cusative ;  and  the  Genitive  with  the  verb  depends  upon  the  nominal 
idea  contained  in  the  verb. 

1.  (a)  The  Object  may  be  contained  in  the  verb  (Inner 
Object,  Object  Effected)  : 

Dens  mundum  creavit,  God  made  a  creation — the  universe. 

(b)  Akin  to  this  is  the  Accusative  of  Extent  : 

A  recta  cSnscientia  trSversum  unguem  nOn  oportet  disc6dere,  C,  A  ft., 

xiTT.  20,  4  ;  one  ought  not  to  swerve  a  naithi'eadth  from  a  right  conscience. 
Decern  annos  (Troia)  oppugnata  est,  L.,  v.  4,  11  ;  ten  years  ivas  Troy 
besieged.  Maximam  partem  lacte  vivunt,  Caes.,  B.O.,  iv.  i,  8  ;  for  the 
most  part  they  live  on  milk. 

2.  The  object  may  be  distinct  from  the  verb  (Outer  Ob- 
ject, Object  Affected)  : 

Deus  mundum  gubernat,  God  steers  the  universe. 


208  ACCUSATIVE. 


General   View   of   the   Accusative. 

329.  I.  Inner  Object :  Object  Effected  : 

Cognate  Accusative. 
Accusative  of  Extent. 

1.  In  Space. 

2.  In  Time. 

3.  In  Degree. 

Terminal  Accusative  (Point  Reached). 
II.  Outer  Object :  Object  Affected  : 

1.  Whole. 

2.  Part  (so-called  Greek  Accusative). 
III.  Inner  and  Outer  Objects  combined  : 

1.  Asking  and  Teaching. 

2.  Making  and  Taking. 

rV.  Accusative  as  tlie  most  general  form  of  the  object  (object 
created  or  called  up  by  the  mind)  : 

1.  In  Exclamations. 

2.  Accusative  and  Infinitive, 

DIRECT  OBJECT  (Inner  and  Outer). 

Note.— The  Accusative  is  the  object  reached  bj'  the  verb.  This  object  is  either  in 
apposition  to  the  result  of  the  action  of  the  verb,  and  then  it  is  called  the  Inner  Object 
or  Object  Effected  ;  or  it  is  in  attribution  to  the  result  of  the  action,  and  then  it  is  said 
to  be  the  Outer  Object  or  Object  Affected.  The  Inner  Object  is  sometimes  called  the 
Voluntary  Accusative,  because  it  is  already  contained  in  the  verb  ;  the  Outer  Object  is 
sometimes  called  the  Necessary  Accusative,  because  it  is  needed  to  define  the  character 
of  the  action  ;  both  verb  and  substantive  contribute  to  the  result ;  compare  hominem 
caedere  (occidere),  lo  slay  a  man  (Object  Affected),  with  homicidium  facere  (6J. 
Quint.,  v.  9,9),  io  commit  manslaughter  (Object  Effected). 

330.  Active  Transitive  Verbs  take  the  Accusative  case  : 

Eomulus  TTrbem    BSmain  condidit,    0/.  C,  Dt'f.,  i.  17,  30  ;    Romulus 

founded  the  City  of  Rome.     (Object  Effected.) 

[M6ns]  regit  corpus,  C,  Rep.,  vi.  24,  3G  ;  mind  governs  body.  (Object 
Affected.) 

Remark. — Many  verbs  of  Emotion  which  are  intrans.  in  English  are 
trans,  in  Latin,  as  :  dol6re,  to  grieve  (for) ;  d6sp5r5re,  to  despair  (of); 
horrgre,  to  shudder  (at) ;  mirarl,  to  ivonder  (at) ;  rid6re,  to  laugh  (at). 

HonSrgs  dgspgrant,  C,  Crt/.,  11.  9. 10  ;  they  despair  of  honors  (give 
them  up  in  despair).  Necata  est  Vitia  quod  filii  necem  flevisset  (541), 
Tag.,  Ann.,  vi.  lo.  1  ;  Vitia  was  executed  for  having  ivept  (for)  her  son's 
execution.  COnscia  mens  rSctI  Famae  mendacia  risit,  Ov.,  i^.,  iv.  311  ; 
conscious  of  right,  her  soul  (but)  laughed  (at)  the  falsehoods  of  Rumor. 


ACCUSATIVE.  209 

Notes.— 1.  From  the  definition  of  transitive  given  above  (213,  B.)  it  will  be  seen  that 
this  traditional  rule  reverses  the  poles  ;  it  is  retained  merely  for  practical  purposes. 

2.  This  Ace.  with  verbs  of  Emotion  is  very  rare  in  early  Latin,  and  is  not  widely 
extended  even  in  the  classical  period.  With  most  verbs  an  Abl.  of  C:mse  or  a  preposi- 
tional phrase  is  much  more  common,  as  :  Ciir  dg  sua  virtute  d6spSrarent  ?  Caes., 
£.6.,  1. 40,4. 

3.  The  Ace.  with  verbal  substantives  is  confined  to  Plautus  :  quid  tibi  nos 
tactiSst,  mendlce  homS  1  Aul.,  423. 

4.  The  Ace.  with  verbal  adjectives  in  -undus  is  rare  and  mainly  post-classical : 
Haec  prope  contionabundus  circumibat  homings,  L.,  m.  47, 2. 

331.  Verbs  compounded  with  the  prepositions  ad,  ante, 
circum,  con,  in,  inter,  ob,  per,  praeter,  sub,  subter,  super,  and 
trans,  which  become  transitive,  take  the  Accusative. 

All  with  circum,  per,  praeter,  trans,  and  subter. 

Many  with  ad,  in,  and  super. 

Some  with  ante,  con,  inter,  ob,  and  sub.     See  347. 

Pythagoras  Persarum  magQs  adiit,  C,  Fm.,  y.  2g,  87  ;  Pythagoras 
applied  to  (consulted)  the  Persian  magi.  Stella  Veneris  antegreditur 
Bolem,  C,  K.D.,  ii.  20, 53  ;  the  star  Venus  goes  in  advance  of  the  sun. 
Omngs  Domitium  circumsistunt,  Caes.,  B.C.,  i.  20,5  ;  all  surround  Do- 
mitius.  Earn,  si  opus  esse  vidgbitur,  ipse  conveniam,  C,  Fam.,  v.  11,  2  ; 
/  will  go  to  see  her,  myself,  if  it  shall  seem  expedie?it.  Convivia  cum 
patre  non  inibat,  C,  Rose.  Am.,  18,  52  ;  he  ivould  not  go  to  banquets  with 
his  father.  Fretum,  quod  Naupactura  et  Patras  interfluit,  Ij.  ,  xxvir.  29,  9  ; 
the  frith  tliat  flows  between  Naupactus  and  Patrae.  Alexander  tertiS 
et  tricgsimo  anno  mortem  obiit,  C,  Ph.,  v.  17,  48  ;  Alexander  died  in  his 
thirty -third  year.  Caesar  omnem  agrum  Picgnum  percurrit,  Caes.,  B.C., 
I.  15.  1  ;  Caesar  traversed  rapidly  cdl  the  Pice?iian  district.  [Populus] 
Bolet  dignos  praeterire,  C,  Plane,  3,  8  :  the  people  is  ivont  to  pass  by  the 
worthy.  Epaminondas  poenam  subiit,  Cf.  Nep  ,  xv.  8,  2  ;  Epaminondas 
submitted  to  the  punishment.  Criminum  vim  subterfugere  nullo  mods 
poterat,  C,  Verr.,  i.  3,  8  ;  he  coidd  in  no  way  evade  the  force  of  the 
charges.  R5mani  ruinas  muri  supervadgbant,  L.,  xxxn.  24,  5  ;  the 
Romans  marched  over  the  ruins  of  the  wall.  Crassus  Euphratem  niilla 
belli  causa  transiit,  Cf.  C,  Fi7i.,  in.  22,  75;  Crassus  crossed  the  Euphrates 
without  any  cause  for  war. 

Remarks. — 1.  If  the  simple  verb  is  trans.,  it  can  take  two  Accusa- 
tives :  Equitum  magnam  partem  flumen  traigcit,  Caes.,  B.C.,  i.  55,  1;  he 
(hrew  a  great  part  of  the  cavalry  across  the  river. 

2.  With  many  of  these  verbs  the  preposition  may  be  repeated  ;  but 
never  circum  :  Copias  traigcit  Rhodanum,  or  trans  Rhodanum,  he  threw  his 
troops  across  the  Rhone. 

3.  Sometimes  a  difference  of  signification  is  caused  by  the  addition 
of  the  preposition  : 

14 


2IO  ACCUSATIVE. 

Adire  ad  aliquem,  to  go  to  a  man  ;  adire  aliquem,  to  apply  to  {to  con* 
suit)  a  man. 

INNER    OBJECT. 

332.  Any  verb  can  take  an  Accusative  of  the  Inner  Object, 
when  that  object  serves  to  define  more  narrowly  or  to  explain 
more  fully  the  contents  of  the  verb. 

The  most  common  form  of  this  object  is  a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjec- 
tive. 

The  most  striking  form  is  the  so-called  Cognate  Accusative. 

333.  I.  Neuter  Pronouns  and  Adjectives  are  often  used 
to  define  or  modify  the  substantive  notion  that  lies  in  the 
verb. 

Xenophon  eadem  ferS  peccat,  C.,N.D.,  i.  12,  31  ;  Xenophon  makes 
very  much  the  same  mistakes.  Vellem  equidem  idem  possem  glSriari  quod 
Cyrus,  C,  Cat.M.,  10,  32  ;  for  my  part  I  could  wish  that  it  were  in  my 
power  to  make  the  same  boast  as  Cyrus. 

With  trans,  verbs  an  Ace.  of  the  person  can  be  employed  besides: 

Discipulos  id  unum  moneo  ut  praeceptorSs  suds  non  minus  quam  ipsa 
studia  ament,  Quint.,  ii.  9,  1  ;  /  give  pupils  this  one  piece  of  advice, 
that  they  love  their  teachers  no  less  than  their  studies  themselves. 

Remarks. — i.  The  usage  is  best  felt  by  comparing  the  familiar  Eng- 
lish it  after  intrans.  verbs,  "  to  walk  it,  to  foot  it,"  etc.,  where  "  it" 
represents  the  substantive  that  lies  in  "walk,  foot,"  etc. 

2.  In  many  cases  the  feeling  of  the  case  is  lost  to  the  consciousness, 
so  especially  with  the  interrogative  quid,  which  has  almost  the  foi-ce  of 
ciir.  Quid  ridSs  ?  what  (laughter)  are  you  laughing  =  what  means  your 
laughter  ? 

Id  nOs  ad  t§,  si  quid  vellSs,  v§nimus,  Pl,,  M.G.,  1158  ;  thaVs  why  we 
have  come  to  you,  to  see  if  you  wanted  anything. 

N0TE8.— 1.  With  verbs  of  Emotion  this  Ace,  gives  the  ground  of  the  emotion  : 

TJtrumque  laetor  (I  have  a  •double  gladness.,  I  am  doubly  glad),  et  sine  dolore  tS 
fuisse  et  anim5  valuisse,  C,  Fam.,  vii.  i,  1.  Laetae  exclamant :  vSnit !  id  quod 
{in  this  that,  /w  this  that)  mS  repente  aspexerant,  Teu.,  Ilec,  368. 

From  this  arises  the  causal  force  of  quod,  in  that  =  because. 

2.  Occasionally,  but  at  all  periods,  the  relative  is  used  thus,  to  facilitate  connection 
with  a  demonjitriitlve  clause  : 

Quae  hominSs  arant  {.what  men  do  in  the  way  of  plowing,  etc.),  navigant,  aedifi- 
cant,  omnia  virttiti  parent,  S.,  C,  2, 7.  Id  ipsum  quod  maneam  in  vita  U«  the 
vei-yfact  of  my  remaining  in  life)  peccare  mS  [existimo],  C,  Fam.,  iv.  13, 2. 

2.  Cognate  Accusative. — When  the  dependent  word  is  of 
the  same  origin  or  of  kindred  meaning  with  the  verb,  it  is 
called  the  Cognate  Accusative,  and  usually  has  an  attribute 


ACCUSATIVE.  211 

Faciam  ut  mel  memineris  dum  vitam  vivas,  Pl.  ,  Pers. ,  494  ;  TU  make 
you  think  of  me  the  longest  day  you  live.  Mirum  atque  inscitum  somniavi 
somniuin,  Pl.,  Rud.,  597 ;  a  marvellous  and  uncanny  dream  Tve  dreamed. 
luravi  verissimum  itis  iurandum,  C,  Fam.,  v.  2,  7;  I  swore  the  truest  of 
oaths. 

Remark. — After  the  analogy  of  the  Cognate  Ace.  are  many  phrase- 
ological usages,  such  as  rem  certare,  to  fight  a  case  ;  foedus  ferire,  to  make 
a  treaty  (compare,  to  strike  a  bargain);  itis  respondgre,  to  render  an 
opinion ;  causam  vincere,  to  win  a  case,  etc.  Also  the  phrases  with 
ire  :  exsequias  ire,  to  attend  a  funeral ;  infitias  ire,  to  deny,  etc. 

Notes.— 1.  The  omission  of  the  attribute  is  found  most  often  in  legal  phraseology, 
proverbs,  and  the  like  : 

Maiorum  nSmS  servitutem  servivit,  C.,  Top..,  6,  29  ;  of  our  ancestors  no  one  ever 
slaved  {what  you  would  call)  a  slavery.  Si  servos  furtuiu  faxit  noxiamve  noxit, 
XII.  Ta?j. 

2.  When  the  Cognate  Ace.  is  replaced  by  a  word  of  similar  meaning,  but  of  a  differ- 
ent root,  the  effect  is  much  the  same  as  when  an  adjective  is  employed  with  the  normal 
Accusative.     This  usage,  however,  is  rare,  and  mainly  poetical. 

Tertiam  iam  aetatem  homimun  (Nestor)  vivSbat,  C,  Cat.M.,  10,31  (reading 
doubtful).    Omne  militabitur  bellum,  H.,  Epod.,  i,  23. 

8.  Interesting  extensions  are  found  in  the  poets,  and  rarely  in  prose. 

Qui  CuriSs  simulant  et  Bacchanalia  vivunt,  Juv.,  n.  3.  Nunc  Sat3rrum, 
nunc  agrestem  Cyclopa  movetur,  H.,  Ep.,  11. 2, 125. 

4.  Instead  of  the  Inner  Ace.  the  Abl.  is  occasionally  found  :  lapidibus  pluere,  to 
rain  stones  ;  sanguine  sUdare,  to  siveat  blood. 

Herculis  simulacrum  mult5  sudore  manavit,  C,  Dtv.,  i.  34, 74 ;  the  statue  of 
Hercules  ran  freely  with  sweat. 

5.  Verbs  of  Smell  and  Taste  have  the  Inner  Object,  which  is  an  extension  of  the 
Cognate  variety. 

Fiscis  sapit  ipsum  mare,  Cf.  Sen.,  N.  Q.,  hi.  18, 2 ;  the  fish  tastes  of  the  very  sea. 
Non  omnes  possunt  olSre  unguenta  exotica,  Pl.,  Most.,  42  ;  it  is  not  every  one  can 
smell  of  foreign  perfumes. 

6.  A  poetical  and  post-classical  construction  is  that  which  makes  a  substantival 
neuter  adjective  the  object  of  a  verb.  This  occurs  chiefly  with  verbs  of  sound  :  nec 
mortale  sonans,  V.,  ^1.,  vi.  50 ;  magna  sonattirum,  II.,*S'.,  i.  4, 44.  Yet  bolder  is 
nec  vox  hominem  sonat,  V.,^4.,i.  328.  A  verb  of  sight  is  found  in  tam  cernis 
acutum,  H.,  aS'.,  i.  3, 26.    Cf.  dulce  ridentem,  ll.,  0.,  i.  22,  23. 

Accusative  of  Extent. 

The  Accusative  of  Extent  has  to  do  with  Degree^  Space, 
or  Time. 

334.  The  Accusative  of  Extent  in  Degree  is  confined  to 
neuter  adjectives  and  pronouns  used  substantively,  multum, 
plus,  tantum,  quantum,  etc. 

Si  mS  amas  tantum  quantum  profecto  amas,  C,  Att.,  11.  20,  5  ;  if  you 
love  me  as  much  as  in  fact  you  do  love  me. 


212  ACCUSATIVE. 

"Remarks. — i.  The  number  of  adjectives  and  pronouns  so  used  is 
large,  and  in  many  cases  the  form  is  felt  more  as  an  adverb  than  as  a 
substantive. 

2.  Here  belong  the  adverbial  Accusatives  tuam,  etc.,  partem,  vicem, 
which  occur  occasionally  at  all  periods. 

335.  The  Accusative  of  Extent  in  Space  is  used  properly 
only  with  words  that  involve  a  notion  of  space.  When  space 
is  not  involved  in  the  governing  word  the  idea  of  extent  is 
given  by  the  use  of  per,  through. 

Trabes,  distantes  inter  se  binos  pedgs,  in  solo  collocantur,  Caes.,  E.G., 
VII.  23,  1  ;  beams  two  feet  apart  are  planted  in  the  ground.  A  rScta  con- 
scientia  traversum  unguem  non  oportet  discedere,  C.  Att.,  xiii.  20,  4  (328, 
b).  Equitgs  per  6ram  maritimam  dispositi  sunt,  Cf.  Caes.,  B.C.,  iii.  24, 
4  ;  cavalry  were  posted  along  the  sea  shore.  Phoebidas  iter  per  Thebas 
[fgcit],  Nep.,  XVI.  I,  2  ;  Phoebidas  marched  through  'Thebes.  Milites 
aggerem  latum  pedes  trecentos  triginta  altum  pedSs  octoginta  exstruxe- 
runt,  Caes.,  B.G.,  vii.  24,  1;  the  soldiers  raised  an  embankment  three 
hundred  and  thirty  feet  wide  (and)  eighty  feet  high. 

Kemarks. — I.  The  adjectives  in  most  common  use  with  this  Accusa- 
tive are  longus,  long,  latus,  wide,  altus,  deep,  high.  Thick?iess,  which 
was  indicated  in  early  times  by  crassus,  is  expressed  by  phrases  with 
crassitudo.  Similarly  occur  phrases  with  magnitudo,  longitude,  latitudo, 
altitudo.     Profundus,  deep,  never  occurs  with  the  Accusative. 

2.   Witii  abesse  and  distare,  an  Abl.  of  Measure  may  also  be  used  : 
Milibus  passuum  quattuor  et  viginti  abesse,  Caes.,  B.G.,  i.  41,  5  ;  to 
be  twenty-four  miles  from 

Note.— When  the  point  of  reference  is  taken  for  granted,  ab  (a)  with  the  Abl.  is 
occasionally  used  ;  but  only  by  Caesar  and  Livy.  Here  it  has  been  suggested  that  ab 
is  used  adverbially,  and  the  Abl.  is  one  of  Measure. 

(Hostes)  ab  milibus  passuum  minus  duobus  castra  posuSrunt,  Caes.,  B.  G., 
II.  7, 3  ;  the  enemi/  pitched  their  camp  less  than  two  miles  off. 

336.  The  Accusative  of  Extent  in  Time  accompanies  the 
verb,  either  with  or  without  per,  in  answer  to  the  question. 

How  long  9 

Duodgquadraginta  annos  tyrannus  SyracGsanSrum  fuit  Dionysius,  C, 
Tusc,  V  20,  57  ;  thirty-eight  years  was  Dionysius  tyrant  of  Syracuse. 
(Gorgias)  centum  et  novem  vixit  annOs,  Quint.,  hi.  i,  9  (233,  n.  2).  Ludi 
per  decern  dies  facti  sunt,  C,  Cat.,  iii.  8,  20  ;  games  were  performed  for 
ten  days.  Est  m6cum  per  diem  tOtum,  Plin.,  Ep.,  i.  16,  7  ;  he  is  with  me 
the  livelong  day.  Sedet  aeternumque  sedSbit  infglix  TbSseus,  V.,  A.,  vi. 
617  ;  there  sits  and  shall  forever  sit  imhappy  Theseus. 


AO'OU-S^ATIVE.  213 

Remarks. — i.  In  giving  definite  numbers  with  iam,  iam  dia,  lam 
dudum,  etc.,  the  Ijatin  often  employs  the  ordinal  where  the  English 
prefers  the  cardinal.     Compare  the  Ablative  of  Pleasure  (408). 

Mithridates  annum  iam  tertium  at  vicgsimum  regnat,  C. ,  Imp. ,  3,  7  (230). 

2.  Per  with  the  Ace.  is  frequently  used  like  the  Abl.  of  Time  Within 
Which.     Per  ilia  tempora  =  illis  temporibus,  in  those  times. 

So  especially  with  the  negative  : 

Nulla  r6s  per  triennium  nisi  ad  nutum  istius  iudicata  est,  C,  Verr.,  i. 
5, 13  ;  710  matter  was  decided  during  {in)  the  three  years  except  at  his 
heck. 

3.  With  an  Aoristic  tense  the  dating  point  is  given  by  abhinc,  which 
usually  precedes  the  temporal  designation. 

Abhinc  annos  factumst  sgdecim,  Pl.,  Cas.,  39  ;  Hivasdone  sixteen  years 
ago.  Demosthenes  abhinc  annos  prope  trecentos  fuit,  C,  Div.,  11.  57,  118; 
Demosthenes  lived  nearly  three  hundred  years  ago. 

The  use  of  an  Ace.  with  an  Aoristic  tense  without  a  dating  word,  like  abMnc,  is 
very  rare  and  doubtful.    Caes.,  B.  G.,  ii.  35, 4,  has  been  emended. 

4.  Natus,  old  (bom),  seems  to  be  an  exception  to  r.  3,  but  it  is  only 
an  apparent  one,  as  the  dating  point  is  involved  in  the  verb  with  which 
it  is  construed.     For  various  constructions  with  natus,  see  206,  r.  5. 

Puer  decern  annos  natus  est,  the  boy  is  ten  years  old.  Quadraginta 
annos  natus  regnare  [coepit],  C,  i>w.,  i.  23,  46  ;  (he  was)  forty  years 
old  (when)  he  began  to  reign. 

Notes.— 1.  The  use  of  the  indefinite  substantival  adjective  is  rare.  Plautus  uses 
sempiternum,  Vergil  introduces  aeternum  (see  example  above),  while  perpetuum 
does  not  appear  until  Apuleius. 

2.  Here  belong  the  phraseological  uses  id  temporis,  id  aetatis,  which  belonged  to 
the  popular  speech,  and  never  became  firmly  rooted  in  literature.  Thus  Cicero  rarely 
uses  them,  except  in  his  earliest  works  and  his  letters.  Id  genus  is  used  after  the  same 
general  analogy,  but  is  not  temporal.  This  occurs  in  Cicero  but  once,  Alt.,  xiii.  12,  3. 
Caesar  never  uses  any  of  these  forms. 

3.  Poetical  and  rare  is  the  extension  which  makes  the  Accusative  of  Extent  the  sub- 
ject of  a  passive  verb. 

Nunctertia  vivitur  aetas,  Ov.,  M.,  xii.  188  =  nunc  tertiam  vivitur  aetatem. 
Tota  mihi  dormitur  hiems,  Mart.,  xiii.  59,  i  =  tStam  dormio  hiemem. 

Normally  the  verb  becomes  impersonal  or  is  re2;ularly  used  with  a  proper  subject, 
and  the  Accusative  of  Extent  is  unchanged  :  [Bellum]  quo  duodecimum  annum 
Italia  urgbatur,  L.,  xxvii.  39, 9. 

Accusative  of  the  Local  Object. 

Terminal  Accusative. 

337.  The  activity  of  a  verb  may  be  defined  by  the  Point 
Reached.  Hence  tlie  rule  :  Names  of  Towns  and  small 
Islands,  when  used  as  limits  of  Motion  Whither^  are  put  in 
the  Accusative. 


214  ACCUSATIVE. 

So  also  rns,  into  the  country,  domum,  domos,  home. 

Miss!  legati  Athenas  sunt,  L.,  iii.  31,  8  ;  envoys  were  sent  to  AthenSc 
Latona  confugit  D6lum,  Cf.  C,  Verr.,  i.  18, 48  ;  Latona  took  refuge  in 
Delos.  Ego  rus  ibo  atque  ibi  mangbo,  Ter,,  Eun.,  216;  I  shall  go  to 
the  country  and  stay  tJiere.  Innumerabilgs  (philosophi)  numquam  domum 
reverterunt,  C,  Tusc,  v.  37, 107  ;  innumerable  philosophers  never  re- 
turned home. 

Remarks. — i.  Countries  and  large  islands  being  looked  upon  as 
areas,  and  not  as  points,  require  prepositions,  such  as  :  in,  into  ;  ad,  to  ; 
versus,  -ward  ;  in  Graeciam  proficisci,  to  set  out  for  Greece. 

2.  When  urbem,  city,  or  oppidum,  town,  precedes  the  name  of  the 
city  or  town,  tlie  idea  of  area  is  emphasized,  and  the  preposition  in  or 
ad  is  prefixed  ;  if  urbem  or  oppidum  follows,  in  or  ad  may  be  omitted  : 
In  (ad)  oppidum  Cirtam,  to,  in  {at)  the  town  (of)  Cirta. 

When  urbem  or  oppidum  is  qualified  by  an  adjective,  it  regularly  fol- 
lows the  name  of  the  town,  and  has  the  preposition : 

lugurtha  Thalam  perv6nit  in  oppidum  magnum  et  opulentum,  S.,  Jug., 
75,  1  ;  Jugurtha  arrived  at  Thala,  a  great  and  wealthy  town. 

3.  Domum,  with  a  possessive  pronoun,  or  Gen.,  may  mean  house 
as  well  as  hom,e,  and  accordingly  may  or  may  not  have  in  before  it  : 
domum  meam,  or,  in  domum  meam,  to  my  house  ;  domum  Pompeii,  or,  in 
domum  Pompgii,  to  Pompey^s  house  ;  also  domum  ad  Pompeium.  Other- 
wise :  in  magnificam  domum  venire,  to  come  into  a  grand  house. 

4.  Ad  means  to  the  neighborhood  of,  often  before,  of  military  op- 
erations. Ad  Mutinam,  to  the  neighborhood  (siege  of)  Mutina  (Mo- 
dena). 

5.  The  fiimple  Ace.  will  suffice  even  for  extent : 

OmniF  ilia  mtinicipia,  quae  sunt  a  VibSne  Brundisium,  C,  Plane.,  41,  97; 
all  the  free  towns  from  Vibo  to  Brundisium. 

6.  Motion  to  a  place  embraces  all  the  local  designations  : 
Phalara  in  sinum  Maliacum  pr5c6sserat,  L.,  xxxv.  43,  8  ;  he  had  ad- 

vancad  to  Phalara  on  the  Maliac  Gulf.     Tarentum  in  Italiam  inferiOrea: 
proficisci,  to  set  out  for  Tarentum  in  Lower  Italy. 

Notes.— 1.  The  omission  of  the  preposition  before  countries  and  large  islands  is 
poetical  and  post-classical.  Caesar  shows  such  omission  with  Aegyptus  only,  Cicero 
not  at  all. 

2.  Poets  and  later  prose  writers  extend  the  Ace.  also  to  names  of  peoples  and  streams. 
Beginnings  of  this  are  seen  in  CicEno  :  cum  Bosphorum  confiigisset,  Mirr.,  16, 34. 

3.  The  insertion  of  the  preposition  with  names  of  towns  and  small  islands  is  rare  in 
good  prose,  but  is  always  legitimate  when  the  preposition  is  to  be  emphasized, 

4.  The  use  of  Usque  with  this  Ace.  to  emphasize  the  continuity  of  the  motion  is 
found  first  in  Terence,  occasionally  in  Cicero.  From  Liyy  on  it  spreads  and  is  used 
also  with  other  local  designations. 

5.  Verbal  substantives  are  also  occasionally  followed  by  this  Accusative  :  BedltUB 
BOmam,  C,  Ph.,  n.  42, 108 ;  return  to  Rome. 


ACCUSATIVE.  215 

OUTER    OBJECT. 
Accusative  of  Respect. 

338.  The  Accusative  of  the  object  affected  sometimes  specifies  that 
in  respect  to  which  the  statement  of  a  passive  or  intransitive  verb, 
or  an  adjective,  applies.     There  are  two  varieties  : 

1.  Definite:  The  Accusative  of  tlie  part  affected. 

Percussa  nova  mentem  formidine,  V.,  G.,  iv.  357;  her  mi^id  stricken 
with  a  new  dread.  lam  vulgatum  actis  quoque  saucius  pectus,  Quint., 
IX.  3, 17  ;  bi/  this  time  '' breast- wounded^'  is  actually  becoine  a  common 
newspaper  phrase. 

2.  Indefinite :  cetera,  alia,  reliqua,  omnia,  plgraque,  cuncta ;  in  other 
respects,  in  all  respects,  in  most  respects. 

Cetera  adsentior  Crasso,  C,  Or.,  i.  g,  35  ;  in  all  other  points  I  agree 
with  Crassus.  Omnia  Mercuric  similis,  V.,  A.,  iv.  558  ;  in  ail  respects 
like  unto  Jlercury. 

Notes.— 1.  This  is  commonly  called  the  Greek  Accusative,  because  it  is  so  much 
more  common  in  Greek,  and  because  its  extension  in  Latin  is  due  to  Greek  influence. 
The  first  variety  is  very  rare  in  early  Latin.  ;  introduced  into  prose  by  S/xlust,  it  is 
rare  in  Livy  and  later,  and  is  applied  usually  to  wounds.  It  is  much  more  common 
ill  the  poets.  Of  the  second  variety  cStera  is  found  here  and  there  at  all  periods  ;  the 
others  are  very  rare.  Good  prose  uses  the  Ablative  for  the  first  variety,  and  for  the 
second,  ad  cetera,  in  ceteris,  per  cetera,  cte. 

2.  Billcrent  is  the  Accusative  with  induor,  Tdon ;  exuor,  Idqf;  cingor,  /  gird  on 
myself,  and  other  verbs  of  cMMng  and  unclothing,  as  well  as  2}(^ssives,  where  the 
Subject  is  also  the  Agent ;  in  which  verbs  the  reflexive  or  middle  signification  is  retained. 
These  uses  are  poetical  or  i>ost-classical. 

Inutile  ferrum  cingitur,  v..  A.,  u.  510  ;  he  girds  on  (himself)  a  uMess  blade. 
Loricam  induitur  fidoque  accingitur  6nse,  V.,  A.,  vii.  640 ;  he  dons  a  corselet  and 
begirds  himself  with  his  trv.^tij  glaive.  (Arminius)  impetu  equi  pervasit  oblitus 
faciem  suo  cruore  nS  nosceretur,  Tac,  Arm.n.  17,7  ;  Hermann  pushed  his  way 
through.,  thanks  to  the  onset  of  his  charger,  having  smeared  his  face  with  his  own  gore, 
to  keep  from  being  recognized. 

DOUBLE   ACCUSATIVE   (Inner  and  Outer). 

When  two  Accusatives  depend  on  the  same  verb,  one  is  the  Inner  and  the  other  the 
Outer  object.  Theoretically  any  combination  of  Inner  and  Outer  objects  is  allowable  ; 
practically  the  language  has  restricted  its  usage  to  varieties  a  and  b. 

339.  (a)  Active  verbs  signifying  to  Inquire,  to  Require, 
to  Teach,  and  celare,  to  conceal,  take  two  Accusatives,  one 
of  the  Person,  and  the  other  of  the  Thing. 

PiisiQnem  quendam  Socrates  interrogat  quaedam  ge5metrica,  C,  Tusc, 
I.  24,  57  ;  Socrates  asks  an  urchin  sundry  questions  in  geometry. 
Caesar  AeduOs  frumentum  flagitabat,  Caes.,5. 6^.,  i.  16,  1  ;  Caesar  kept 
demanding  the  corn  of  the  Aediii.  Quid  nunc  te,  asine,  litteras  doceam? 
(265),  C,  Pis.,  30,  73  ;  why  should  I  noiv  give  you  a  lesson  in  literature, 


2l6  ACCUSATIVE. 

you  donkey  ?  Non  te  celavi  sermonem  Ampii,  C,  Fam. ,  ii.  i6, 3,  I  did  not 
keep  you  in  the  dark  about  my  talk  with  Ampius. 

Remarks. — i.  The  expressions  vary  a  good  deal.  Observe  : 
This  then  is  not  the  only  way,  Fdsc5,  1  claim,  and  flagito, 
For  it  is  also  right  to  say,  And  always  pet5,  p5stiil5, 

Docere  and  c6lare  dS,  Take  aliquid  ab  aliquQ, 

Interrogare  de  qua  re.  While  quaere  takes  ex,  ab,  dg,  qu3. 

Adherbal  Bomam  legates  miserat,  qui  senatum  docSrent  dS  caede  fra- 
tris,  S.,  Iiig.,  13,  3  ;  Adherbal  had  sent  envoys  to  Borne  to  inform  the 
seriate  of  the  murder  of  his  brother.  Bassus  noster  mg  d6  li5c  librS  c6la- 
vit,  C,  Fam.,  vii.  20,  3  ;  onr  friend  Bassus  has  kept  me  in  the  dark 
about  this  hook.  Aquam  a  pumice  nunc  pOstulas,  Pl.,  Pers.,  41  ;  you  are 
noiv  asking  water  of  a  pumice-stone  (blood  of  a  turnip). 

2.  With  doceo  the  Abl.  of  the  Instrument  is  also  used :  docSre  fidibus, 
equ5,  to  teach  the  lyre,  to  teach  riding ;  with  grudire,  the  Abl.,  in  with 
the  Abl.  or  (rarely)  dg.  Doctus  and  gruditus  generally  take  the  Abl. : 
Dcctus  Graecis  litteris,  a  good  Grecian. 

3.  With  cglari  the  Ace.  of  the  Thing  becomes  the  subject,  and  the 
Ace.  of  the  Person  is  retained  ;  or  the  Ace.  of  the  Person  is  made  the 
subject,  and  instead  of  the  Ace,  of  the  Thing,  d5  with  the  Abl.  is  used. 

Notes.— 1.  There  is  a  great  deal  of  difference  in  the  relative  frequency  of  these 
verbs.  So  doceS  and  its  compounds,  rogo,  pdsc5,  reposcG,  Cgl5,  are  common  ;  in- 
terrog5,  orS,  expSscO,  p5stulo,  flagitS,  consulO,  are  rare,  exigS  (in  passive),  per- 
center, are  ante-classical  and  post-classical.  So,  too,  the  classical  Latin  in  general 
avoids  two  Accusatives,  unless  one  is  a  neuter  pronoun. 

2.  The  construction  with  ab,  with  verbs  of  Requiring,  is  much  more  common  than 
the  double  Ace,  and  in  some  cases  is  necessary  ;  so,  too,  the  construction  with  dg  after 
verbs  of  Inquiring. 

3.  Other  verbs  of  teaching  than  doced  and  its  compounds,  and  grudire,  always  have 
dg  until  late  Latin,  as  instruere,  etc.    So  docgre,  when  it  means  to  inform. 

4.  The  Passive  form,  with  the  Nom.  of  the  Person  and  the  Ace.  of  the  Thing,  is 
sparingly  used.  Discere  is  the  prose  word  for  docgri,  except  that  the  past  participle 
doctus  is  classical  but  rare. 

Motus  decgri  gaudet  ISnicSs  mattlra  virg3,  H.,  0.,in.  6,21 ;  the  rare  ripe 
maid  delights  to  learn  Ionic  dances.  Vir  omngs  belli  artgs  gdoctus,  L.,  xxv.  40, 5  ; 
one  who  had  learned  (been  taught)  thoroughly  all  the  arts  of  war. 

340.  (b)  Verbs  of  Naming,  Making,  Taking,  Choosing, 
Showing,  may  have  two  Accusatives  of  the  same  Person  or 
Thing  : 

[Iram]  bene  Ennius  initium  dixit  insSniae,  C. ,  Tusc,  iv.  23,  52  ;  well  did 
Fnnius  call  anger  the  beginning  of  madness.  Ancum  Marcium  rggem 
populus  creavit,  L.,  i.  32, 1  ;  the  people  made  Ancus  Marcius  king.  Cat3 
ValeriumFlaccumhabuitcoUggam,  Of.  Nep.,  xxiv.  i,2;  Catohad  Valerius 
Flaccus  (as)  colleague.  Eum  simillimum  de3  iMico,  C,  3Iarc.,  3,  8  ;  .? 
Judge  him  {to  be)  very  like  unto  a  god.     Atbgnignsibus  Pythia  praecgpit  ut 


ACCUSATIVE.  217 

Miltiadem  sib!  imperatorem  sumerent,  Nep.,  i.  i,  3  ;  the  Pythia  instructed 
the  Athenians  to  take  MUtiades  (as)  their  commander.  Fraesta  tg  eum 
qui  mihi  es  cognitus,  C,  Fam.,  i.  6,  2  ;  show  yourself  the  mail  that  I 
know  you  to  he.  Quern  intellegimus  divitera  ■?  C,  Par.,  vi.  i,  42  ;  ivhom 
do  we  understand  hy  the  rich  man  9 

Remarks. — i.  The  Double  Ace.  is  turned  into  the  Double  Nom. 
with  the  Passive  (206).  Keddo,  I  render,  is  not  used  in  the  Passive,  but, 
instead  thereof,  fio,  /  become. 

Habeo,  with  two  Accusatives,  commonly  means  to  have  ;  in  the  sense 
of  hold,  regard,  other  turns  are  used  ;  usually  pro. 

Utrum  pro  ancilla  me  habSs  an  pro  filia  ?  Pl,,  Pers.,  341  ;  do  you  look 
upon  me  as  a  maid-servant  or  as  »  daughter  f 

Similarly  habgre  servorum  loco,  (in)  numero  deSrum,  to  regard  as  slaves, 
as  gods. 

2.  With  verbs  of  Taking  and  Choosing  the  ejid  is  indicated  by  the 
Dat.  or  ad  with  Accusative. 

(BQmulus)  trecentgs  armatSs  ad  custOdiam  corporis  habuit,  L.,  i.  15,  8  ; 
Romulus  had  three  hundred  armed  men  as  a  body-guard. 

341.  (c)  Double  Accusatives,  where  one  is  the  cognate,  are  very 
uncommon  : 

Tg  bonas  precgs  precor,  Cato,  R.R.,  i.  3,  4.  Tarn  tg  basia  multa  basiare 
vgsano  satis  et  super  Catullost,  Cat.,  vii.  9. 

Notes. — 1.  Curions  extensions  occasionally  occur  : 

Idem  ius  iurandum  adigit  Afranium,  Caes.,  5.  C,  i.  76. 

2.  In  early  Latin  frequently,  and  in  later  times  occasionally,  the  Inner  object  is 
given  by  a  neuter  pronoun,  in  the  simplest  form.  Quid  mg  viS  %  what  do  you  ivant 
of  me?  what  do  you,  want  me  for  ?  So  with  prohibgre  ;  also  with  iubgre  (once  in 
Cicero  and  Caesar),  admongre,  etc. 

Neque  mg  Itippiter  neque  di  omngs  id  prohibgbunt,  Pl.,  Am.,  1051.  LItterae 
quae  tg  aliquid  iubgrent,  C,  Fam.,  xiii.  26,  .3. 

342.  {d)  In  early  Latin  we  find  cases  of  two  Accusatives  with  a 
single  verb,  where  the  verb  forms  a  single  phrase  with  one  of  the  Accu- 
satives, and  the  second  Accusative  is  the  object  of  the  phrase  :  animum 
advertere,  to  perceive  ;  ludos  facere,  to  make  game  of ;  manum  inicere,  to 
lay  hands  on,  etc.  In  classical  Latin  these  phrases  have  been  usually, 
where  possible,  formed  into  a  single  word  :  animadvertere,  ludificari. 

Animum  advertit  Gracchus  in  contione  PisSnem  stantem,  C,  Tusc,  in. 
20,  48  ;  Gracchus  perceived  Piso  standing  in  the  assembly. 
Note.— On  the  Double  Accusative  with  compound  verbs,  see  331,  r.  i. 

ACCUSATIVE    AS   A    GENERAL    OBJECTIVE    CASE. 

343.  The  iVccusative  as  the  Objective  Case  generally  is 
used  as  an  object  of  Thought,  Perception,  Emotion  ',  an  ob- 


2l8  DATIVE. 

ject  created  by  the  mind,  evoked  or  deprecated  by  the  will. 
Hence  the  use  of  the  Accusative  : 

(a)  In  Exclamations.  (5)  With  the  Infinitive. 

1.  The  Accusative  is  used  in  Exclamations  as  the  general 
object  of  Thought,  Perception,  or  Emotion  : 

M6  miserum,  C,  Fam.,  xiv.  i,  1 ;  poor  me  !  Mg  caecum  qui  haec  ante 
nSn  viderim,  Q.,  Att.y  x.  lo,  1  ;  hlind  me  !  not  to  have  seen  all  this  before. 

So  in  Exclamatory  Questions  : 

Qu5  mihi  fortunam,  si  non  concgditur  uti  ?  H.,  Ep.,  i.  5,  12  ;  what  (is 
the  object  of)  fortune  to  we  if  Tm  not  allowed  to  enjoy  it  9 

Interjections  are  used  : 

Heu  mg  miserum!  Alas!  poor  me!  5  miseras  hominum  mantes,  6 
pectora  caeca,  Lucr.,  ii.  14 ;  oh,  the  wretched  minds  of  men,  oh,  the 
blind  hearts  ! 

So,  in  apposition  to  a  sentence,  see  324. 

Notes.— 1.  5  with  the  Voc.  is  an  address  ;  with  the  Nom.  a  characteristic;  with 
the  Ace.  an  object  of  emotion. 

2.  Em,  Lo!  and  Ecce,  Lo  here  !  have  the  Ace.  in  the  earlier  language  : 

Em  tibi  hominem!  Pl.,  Asin.,  880  ;  here's  your  man  !  Ecce  mg !  Pl.,  Ep.,  680 ; 
here  am  I! 

So  eccum,  ellum,  eccam,  eccillam,  in  comic  poetrj-. 

Ecce  takes  only  the  Nom.  in  classical  Latin.  Distinguish  between  em  and  gn,  the 
latter  of  which,  in  the  sense  lo !  does  not  appear  until  Cicero's  time,  and  takes  the 
Nominative,  rarely  the  Accusative. 

Pro  takes  the  Vocative  :  Pr5  di  immortalgs !  Ye  immortal  gods  !  The  Accusative 
occurs  in  :  Pro deum atque hominum fidem!  C,  Tusc,  v.  16, 48 ;  for heavev!' s sake ! 
and  similar  phrases. 

Ei  (hei)^!  and  Vae !  take  the  Dative. 

Ei  mihi !  Ah  me  !  Vae  victis !  Woe  to  the  conquered  ! 

2.  The  Accusative  and  the  Infinitive  are  combined  so  as 
to  present  the  notion  of  Subject  and  Predicate  as  an  object 
of  thought  or  perception  (527).  Hence  the  Accusative  with 
the  Infinitive  is  used  : 

[a)  In  Exclamations.     (See  534.) 

lb)  As  an  Object.     (See  527.) 

{c)  As  a  Subject,     (See  535.) 

DATIVE. 

344.  The  Dative  is  the  case  of  the  Indirect  Object,  and 
always  involves  a  Direct  Object,  which  may  be  contained  in 
the  verb  or  expressed  by  the  complex  of  verb  and  object. 


DATIVE.  219 

NSm8  errat  Unl  sibi,  Sen.,  E.M.,  94,  54  ;  no  one  er?-s  (makes  mistakes) 
to  {for)  1  dm  self  alone.  Non  omnibus  dormio,  C,  Fam.,  vir,  24, 1  ;  it  is 
not  for  everybody  that  I  am  asleep.  Tibi  exercitum  patria  pr5  sS  dedit, 
C,  Ph.,  XIII.  6,  14  ;  your  country  gave  you  an  army  for  its  own  defence. 
Mulier  sibI  fglicior  quam  viris,  C,  Ph.,  v.  4, 11. 

Note.— In  English  the  form  of  the  Indirect  Object  is  the  same  as  that  of  the 
Direct :  "  He  showed  me  (Dat.)  a  pure  river  ;  "  "  he  showed  me  (Ace.)  to  the  priest." 
Originally  a  case  of  Personal  Interest,  it  is  used  freely  of  Personified  Things,  sparingly 
of  Local  Relations,  and  this  despite  the  fact  that  Locative  and  Dative  are  blended  in  the 
First  and  Third  Declensions.    If  a  Locative,  the  Dative  is  a  sentient  Locative. 


Dative  with  Transitive  Verbs. 

345.  The  Indirect  Object  is  put  in  the  Dative  with  Transi- 
tive verbs,  which  already  have  a  Direct  Object  in  the  Accusa- 
tive. Translation,  to,  for,  from.  This  Accusative  becomes 
the  Nominative  of  the  Passive.  The  Dative  depends  on  the 
complex. 

Active  Form  : 

To  :  Facile  omngs,  quom  valSmus,  r6cta  cSnsilia  aegrOtIs  damus,  Ter., 
And.,  309  ;  readily  all  of  us,  ivhen  well,  give  good  counsel  to  the  sick. 

For  :  Frangam  tons5ri  crura  manusque  simul,  Mart.,  xi.  58,  10  ;  Td 
break  the  harher's  legs  for  him  and  hands  at  once. 

From  :  Somnum  mihi  [adSmit],  C,  Att.,  11. 16, 1 ;  it  took  my  sleep  away 
from  me. 

Passive  Form  : 

Merc6s  mihi  gl5ria  dstur,  Ov.,  F.,  in.  389;  let  glory  be  given  to  me  as  a 
reward.  Immeritis  franguntur  crura  caballis,  Juv.,x,  60  ;  the  innocent 
hacks  get  their  legs  broken  for  the?n.  Arma  [adimuntur]  mflitibus,  L., 
xxn.  44,  6;  the  soldiers  have  their  arms  taken  from  them.  Domus  pul- 
chra  dominis  aediiicatur  n5n  mtiribus,  Cf.  C,  N.D.,  in.  10,  26 ;  a  handsome 
house  is  built  for  its  owners,  not  for  the  mice. 

Remarks. — i.  These  constructions  are  found  with  more  or  less  fre- 
quency at  all  periods.  But  the  Dat.  with  verbs  of  Taking  Away,  Pro- 
hibiting, and  the  like,  is  mostly  confined  to  poetry  and  later  prose. 
The  translation  from  is  merely  approximate,  instead  of  for.  When  the 
idea  of  Personal  Interest  is  not  involved,  the  Abl.  is  necessary. 

Isfrater,  qui  eripuit  fratrem carcere,  non  potuit  eripere  ^to,  Sen.,  Dial., 
XI.  14,  4. 

A  good  example  of  a  play  on  construction  is  Pl.,  Aid.,  635  : 

St.  Nihil  equidem  tibi  abstuli.     Eu.  At  illud  quod  tib!  abstuleras  cede. 

2.  The  translation  For  is  nearer  the  Dat.  than  To.    It  is  the  regular 


220  DATIVE. 

form  when  the  Ace.  is  that  of  the  object  effected  ;  when  it  is  that  of  the 
object  affected  the  translation  is  more  often  to  ;  but  for  {in  defence 
of)  is  pr5 :  pro  patria  mori,  to  die  for  one's  country.  To  {with  a  view 
to)  is  ad  or  in,  and  when  tlie  idea  of  motion  is  involved,  the  preposition 
must  be  used,  even  with  dare,  which  gives  its  name  to  the  Dative  : 

Litteras  alicui  dare,  to  give  one  a  letter  (to  carry  or  to  have). 

Litteras  ad  aliquem  dare,  to  indite  a  letter  to  one. 

Rogas  ut  mea  tibi  scripta  mittam,  C,  Fam.,  i.  9,  23  ;  you  ask  me  to 
send  you  my  writings  (you  wish  to  have  them).  Libr5s  iam  pridem  ad 
te  mlsissem si  esse  Sdendos  putassem,  C,  Fam.,  i.  9,  23  ;  /  should  have  sent 
the  hooks  to  you  long  since  if  I  had  thought  they  ought  to  be  published. 

Dative  with  Intransitive  Verbs. 
346.  The  Indirect  Object  is  put  in  the  Dative  with  many 
Intransitive  Verbs  of  Advantage  or  Disadvantage,  Yielding 
and  Kesisting,  Pleasure  and  Displeasure,  Bidding  and  For- 
bidding. 

Fuit  mlrificus  in  CrassS  pudor,  qui  tamen  n5n  obesset  5ius  SrationI,  C, 
Or.,  I.  26,  122  ;  Crassus  had  a  marvellous  modesty,  not,  however,  such 
as  to  be  a  bar  to  the  effectiveness  of  his  oratory.  Ipsa  sib!  imbScillitas 
indulget,  C,  Tusc.,iv.  18,  42  ;  weakness  gives  free  course  to  itself.  Pro- 
bus  invidet  nSmini,  C,  Tim.,  3,  9  ;  your  upright  man  cherishes  envy  to 
710  one.  Catilina  litteras  mittit  s6  forttinae  cSdere,  S.,  C,  34,  2;  Catiline 
ivrites  that  he  gives  way  to  fortune.  Dies  stultis  quoque  medSri  solet,  C, 
Fam.,  VII.,  28,  3  ;  time  is  wont  to  prove  a  medicine  even  to  fools.  Mo- 
derari  at  animo  et  orationi  est  non  mediocris ingenil,  Q.,Q.F.,i.  11.  13,  38  ; 
to  put  boimds  both  to  temper  and  to  language  is  the  work  of  no  mean 
ability.  Sic  agam,  ut  ipsi  auctorl  hoius  discipllnae  placet,  C,  Fin.,  i.  9, 
29  ;  I  will  act  as  it  seems  good  to  the  head  of  this  school  {of  thought) 
himself.  [Mundus]  deo  paret  et  huic  oboediunt  maria  terraeque,  C,  Leg., 
III.  I,  3  ;  the  universe  is  obedient  to  God,  and  seas  and  lands  hearken 
unto  him.  Virtuti  suOrum  satis  credit,  Cf.  S.,  Ing.,  106,  3  ;  he  puts 
full  confidence  in  the  valor  of  his  men.  IllI  poena,  nSbis  libertas  [ap- 
propinquat],  C,  Ph.,  iv.  4, 10;  to  him  punishment,  to  us  freedom,  is  draw- 
ing 7iigh. 

Remarks. — i.  Of  course  the  passives  of  these  verbs  are  used  imper- 
sonally (208) : 

Qui  invident  egent,  iUls  quibus  invidStur,  I  rem  habent,  Pl.,  True,  745 ; 
those  who  envy  are  the  needy,  those  ivho  are  envied  have  the  stuff'. 

2.  The  verbs  found  with  this  Dat.  in  classical  Latin  are  :  prodesse, 
obesse,  noc6re,  condticit,  expedit ;  assentirl,  blandirl,  cupere,  favSre,  grati- 
ficSri,  gratularl,  Ignoscere,  iudulgSre,  m5rigerarl,  studSre,  sulfragarl;  ad- 
versarl,  Insidiarl,  invidSre,  irasci,  maledicere,  minarl,  minitarl,  obtrectSre, 


DATIVE.  221 

officere,  refragarl,  suscgnsSre  ;  c6dere,  concgdere  ;  resistere  ;  auxiliari,  c5n- 
sulere,  medSri,  opitulari,  parcere,  prospicere ;  moderari,  temperare  (sibi) ; 
placgre,  displicgre ;  auscultare,  imperare,  oboedire,  obsequi,  obtemperare, 
parere,  persuadere,  servire,  suadere  ;  credere,  Mere,  confidere,  diffidere, 
despgrare ;  accidit,  contingit,  gvenit ;  libet,  licet ;  appropinquare,  repugnSre. 
Also  nubere,  to  marry  (of  a  woman) ;  supplicare,  to  implore. 

Notes.— 1.  Some  other  verbs  are  used  occasionally  in  the  same  way,  as  incommo- 
dare,  which  Cicero  uses  once.  Also,  dolere,  with  Dat.  of  suffering:  person,  is  found 
sometimes  in  Cicero,  though  it  belongs  rather  to  the  Comic  Poets. 

2.  Some  of  these  words  have  also  other  constructions.  These  occur  usually  in  ante- 
classical  and  post-classical  Latin  ;  if  in  classical  Latin  a  different  meaning  is  usually 
found  in  the  new  construction.  Thus  indulggre  aliquid,  ^o  grant  a  thing,  invidere 
alicul  aliquid,  obtrgctare,  with  Ace,  suadgre,  persuadgre,  with  Ace.  of  the  Per- 
son, are  post-classical  and  late  ;  moderari,  with  Ace,  is  found  in  Lucretius  and  in 
Silver  Latin  ;  temperare,  meaning  mix,  takes  Ace.  at  all  .periods,  Fidere,  c5nfl- 
dere,  diffidere  are  found  also  with  Ablative. 

Sometimes  the  personal  interest  is  emphasized  when  the  Dat.  is  employed,  as  over 
against  the  Accusative.  So  regularly  with  verbs  of  Fearing,  as  :  metuere  aliquem, 
to  dread  s&ine  one,  but  metuere  alicul,  fo  fear  for  some  one  ;  cavEre  alicui,  io  take 
■precautions  for  some  one,  but  cavgre  aliquem  (also  d§,  ab  aliqu5),  to  take  precau- 
tions against  some  one ;  cavgre  aliqua  rg  (early),  to  beware  of  a  thing.  Consulere 
aliquem,  to  consult  a  persoit ;  cSnsuiere  alicul,  to  consult  for  a  person.  On  con- 
venire,  see  347,  n.  2. 

Noteworthy  are  the  constructions  of  invidgre  and  vacare : 

Invidgre  alicui  (in)  aliqua  rg  (Cic  uses  prep.)     I  fol^egrudgeamanathing. 
alicul  aliquid  (V  erg.,  Hou.,  Livy,  etc.)  \        J      J  "^ 

alicuius  rei  (once  in  Horace,  S.^  ii.  6, 84),  to  begrudge  a  thing. 
(alicuius)  alicui  rei  (common),  to  envy  something  belonging  to  a  man. 
Vacare  rei,  to  be  at  leisure  for,  to  attend  to\  . 

rg,  a  re,  to  be  at  leisure  from         ' 
Sometimes  there  is  hardly  any  difference  in  meaning : 

Comitor  aliquem,  /  accompany  a  man  ;  comitor  alicul,  I  act  as  companion  to  a 
man  ;  praestolor  alicui  (better)  or  aliquem,  /  wait  for. 

3.  Some  words  with  similar  meanings  take  the  Accusative  ;  the  most  notable  are : 
aequare,  to  be  equal ;  decgre  {to  distinguish),  to  be  becoming  ;  deficere,  to  be  want- 
ing ;  delectare,  to  please ;  iuvare,  to  be  a  help ;  iubgre,  to  order ;  laederc,  to  in- 
jure ;  and  vetare,  to  forbid.    The  Dat.  also  occurs  after  aequSre  and  dgficere. 

Eam  picturam  imitati  sunt  multi,  aequavit  ngmo,  Plin.,  iV.//.,xxxv,ii, 
126  ;  that  style  of  paifding  many  have  ijnitated,  none  equalled.  Forma  viros  neglgcta 
decet,  Ov.,  A.  A.,  i.  509 ;  a  careless  beauty  is  becoming  to  men.  Me  digs  dgficiat,  Cf. 
C,  Verr.,  11.  21, 52  ;  the  day  would  faU  me,  Fortis  fortlina  adiuvat,  Tbr.,  Ph.^  203 ; 
fortune  f avoids  Vie  brave. 

Tacitus  is  tiie  first  to  use  iubgre  with  Dative  ;  Ann.,  iv.  73,  etc. 

4.  The  Dat.  use  is  often  obscured  by  the  absence  of  etymological  translation.  So 
nubere  alicul,  to  marry  a  man  (to  veil  for  him) ;  medgri  alicul,  to  heal  (to  take 
one's  measures  for)  a  man  ;  supplicare,  to  beg  (to  bow  tlie  knee  to) ;  persuSdgre,  to 
persuade  (to  make  it  sweet). 

6.  After  the  analogy  of  verbs  the  phrases  audientem  esse,  to  hear,  i.e.,  to  obey, 
supplicem  esse,  to  entreat,  auctorem  esse,  to  advise,  fidem  babgre,  to  have  faith  iri, 
are  also  found  with  the  Dative  : 

Si  potest  tibi  dicto  audigns  esse  quisquam,  C,  Verr.,  i.  44, 114. 

6.  The  poets  are  very  free  in  their  use  of  the  Dat.  with  verbs  of  the  same  general 


222  DATIVE. 

meaning  as  those  given.  So  gg  misc6re,  io  mingle  with  :  coire,  concurrere,  (o  meet', 
verbs  of  contending,  as  contendere,  bellare,  piignare,  certare ;  verbs  of  disagree- 
ment, as  differre,  discrepare,  distare,  dissentire.  Here  belongs  haerere  with  the 
Dat.,  as  v..  A.,  iv.  73,  which  may,  however,  be  a  Locative  construction. 

Dative  and  Verbs  Compounded  with  Prepositions. 

347.  Many  verbs  compounded  with  the  prepositions  ad, 
ante,  con,  in,  inter,  ob,  (post),  prae,  sub,  and  super,  take  the 
Dative,  especially  in  moral  relations. 

Transitive  Verbs  have  an  Accusative  case  besides. 

PlebSs  clincta  comitiis  adfnit,  C,  Plane,  8,  21  ;  the  entire  commonalty 
was  preseyit  at  the  election,  Onmis  s6nsus  hominnm  mnlto  antecellit  sSn- 
sibus  bestiarum,  C,  N.D.,  11.  57, 145  ;  every  sense  of  man  is  far  superior 
to  the  senses  of  beasts.  (Ennius)  equi  fortis  et  victoris  senectiitl  comi>arat 
suam,  C,  Cat.M.y  5, 14  ;  Ennius  compares  his  {old  age)  to  the  old  age 
of  a  gallant  and  winning  steed.  Imminent  duo  reges  toti  Asiae,  C, 
Imp.,  5, 12  ;  two  kings  are  menaces  to  all  Asia.  Interes  consiliis,  C, 
Att.,  XIV.  22,  3  ;  you  are  in  their  councils,  arepj'ivy  io  their  plans.  Piger 
ipse  sibi  obstat,  Prov.  (311,  2).  Omnibus  Druidibus  praeest  unus,  Caes., 
JB.G.,  VI.  13,  8  ;  at  the  head  of  all  the  Druids  is  one  man.  Anatum  ova 
gallinis  saepe  supponimus,  C,  j\\D.,  11.  48, 124  ;  we  off  en  put  ducks'  eggs 
under  hens  (for  them  to  hatch).  Neque  deesse  neque  superesse  rei  piibli- 
cae  vols,  C.  (Pollio),  Fam.,  x.  33,  5;  no  life  that  is  not  true  to  the  states 
no  life  that  outlives  the  state's — that  is  my  motto. 

Remarks. — i.  The  Dat.  is  found,  as  a  rule,  only  when  these  verbs 
are  used  in  a  transferred  sense.  In  a  local  sense  tlie  preposition  should 
be  employed,  although  even  classical  Latin  is  not  wholly  consistent  in 
this  matter.  In  poetry  and  later  prose  the  Dat.  is  extended  even  to 
the  local  signification.  In  early  Latin  the  repetition  of  the  preposition 
is  the  rule. 

So  incumbereingladium,  C,  Inv.,  11.  51, 154,  io  fall  upon  one's  sivord, 
2.  The  principal  intrans.  verbs  with  the  Dat.  in  classical  Latin  are: 
Accgdere  {to  join,  or,  to  le  added  ;  otherwise  usually  preposition  ad) ; 
accumbere  (once  in  Cic.)  ;  adesse  (also  with  ad,  in,  and,  in  Plaut.,  apud); 
adhiaergscere  (ad  of  local  uses)  ;  arridSre  (once  in  Cic.)  ;  annuere  (occa- 
sionally with  Ace.)  ;  assentiri ;  assidgre ;  antecedere  (also  with  Ace.) ; 
anteire  (also  with  Ace.)  ;  antecellere  (with  Ace.  from  Livv  on)  ;  con- 
gruere  (also  with  cum);'  consentire  (also  with  cum) ;  c5nstare  ;  convenire  {to 
suit ;  with  cum,  to  agree  with,  especially  in  the  phrase  convenit  mihf 
cum  aliqu5,  /  agree  unth) ;  illildere  (also  with  Aec.  and  occasionally  in 
and  Ace.) ;  impendgre  (with  Ace.  is  archaic  ;  occasionally  in) ;  incgdere 
(Sall.,  Livy,  etc.) ;  incidere  (twice  in  Cic;  regularly  in);  incubare  (but 
incumbere  regidarly  with  in  or  ad) ;  inesse  (once  in  Cic.)  ;  inhaergre  (occar 


DATIVE.  223 

sionally  ad  or  in  with  Abl.)  ;  inhiare  (Plaut.  has  Ace.  only)  ;  innasci 
(innatus) ;  Inservire ;  insinuare  (once  in  Cic. ;  usually  in) ;  insistero 
(locally,  in  with  Abl.;  occasionally  Ace.)  ;  instare;  invadere  (once  in 
Cic.  ;  occasionally  Ace. ;  regularly  in) ;  intercedere  ;  intercurrere  ;  inter- 
esse  (also  with  in  and  Abl.)  ;  intervenire  ;  obesse  ;  obrgpere  (usually  in, 
ad) ;  obsistere  ;  obstare  ;  obstrepere  ;  obtingere  ;  obvenire ;  obversari ; 
occurrere  ;  occursare  ;  praestare  ;  praesidere  ;  snbasse  ;  subvenire  ;  suc- 
cedere  ;  succumbere  ;  succrescere  (once  in  Cic.)  ;  succurrere ;  superesse. 

3.  The  same  variety  of  construction  is  found  with  transitive  verbs,  in 
composition. 

4.  After  the  analogy  of  praestare,  excellere,  to  excel,  is  also  found 
with  the  Dative. 

5.  Some  trans,  verbs,  compounded  with  d5  and  ex  (rarely  with  ab), 
take  the  Dat.,  but  it  properly  comes  under  345. 

Caesar  DgiotarS  tetxarchian  6ripuit,  eidemque  dgtraxit  Armeniam,  Cf. 
C,  Div.,  II.  37,  79  ;  Caesar  wrested  from  Dejotarus  his  ietrarchy,  and 
stripped  from  him  Armenia. 

Dative  with  Verbs  of  Giving  and  Putting. 

348.  A  few  verbs,  chiefly  of  Giving  and  Putting,  take  a 
Dative  with  an  Accusative,  or  an  Accusative  with  an  Abla- 
tive, according  to  the  conception. 

Praedam  militibus  donat,  Caes.,  B.G.,  vii.  11,  9;  he  presents  the  booty 
to  the  soldiers.  But  Rubrium  corona  dOnasti,  C,  Verr.  in.  80,  185;  thou 
didst  present  Ruhrius  with  a  crow7i. 

Natura  corpus  animo  circumdedit,  Sen.,  E.M.,  92, 13  ;  Nature  has  put 
a  lody  around  the  mirid.  But  Deus  animum  circumdedit  corpore,  Cf.  C, 
Tim.,  6,  20  ;  God  has  surrounded  the  mind  with  a  body. 

Remarks. — i.  These  are:  aspergere,  to  besprinkle  and  to  sprinkle  on ; 
circumdare,  circumfundere,  to  surround  ;  donare,  to  prese?it ;  impertire,  to 
endoiv  and  to  give  ;  induere,  to  clothe  and  to  put  on  ;  exuere,  to  strip  of 
and  to  strip  off ;  intercludere,  to  shut  off  ;  miscere,  to  7nix  and  to  mix  in. 

2.  In  general,  classical  Latin  here  prefers  the  Dat.  of  the  person, 
but  no  fixed  rule  is  followed. 

Dative  of  Possessor. 

349.  Esse,  to  he,  with  the  Dative,  denotes  an  inner  connec- 
tion between  its  subject  and  the  Dative,  and  is  commonly 
translated  by  the  verb  to  have  : 

[Controversia]  mihi  fuit  cum  avunculo  tu6,  C,  Fin.,  iii.  2,  6;  7  had  a 
debate  with  your  uncle.    An  nescis  longas  rggibus  esse  mantis  %  Ov.,  Her., 


224  DATIVE. 

XVI.  i66  ;  or  perhaps  you  do  not  hioiv  that  Icings  have  long  arms  9 
Compare  non  habet,  ut  putamus,  fortiina  longas  manus,  Sen.,  E.M.,  82,  5. 
Kemarks. — I.  The  predicute  of  esse,  with  the  Dat.,  is  translated  in 
the  ordinary  manner  :  Caesar  amicus  est  mihi,  Caesar  is  a  friend  to  me 
(amicus  meus,  my  friend,  friend  of  mine). 

2.  The  Dat.  is  never  simply  equivalent  to  the  Genitive.  The  Dat.  is 
the  Person  interested  in  the  Possession,  hence  the  Possession  is  em- 
phatic ;  the  Gen.  characterizes  the  Possession  by  the  Possessor,  hence  the 
Possessor  is  emphatic.  The  Gen.  is  the  permanent  Possessor,  or  owner ; 
the  Dat.  is  the  temporary  Possessor.     The  one  may  include  the  other: 

Latini  concSdunt  Romam  caput  Latio  esse,  Cf.  L.,  viii.  4,  5;  the  Latins 
concede  that  Laiium  has  its  capital  in  Home.  (Latii :  that  Latium's 
capital  is  Ro?ne.) 

3.  Possession  of  qualities  is  expressed  by  esse  with  in  and  the  Abl., 
by  inesse  with  Dat.  or  with  in,  or  by  some  other  turn  : 

Fuit  mirificus  in  Crasso  pudor,  C,  Or.,  i.  26,  122  (346),     Cim5n  habgbat 
satis  eloquentiae,  Nep.,  v.  2,  1  ;  Cimon  had  eloquence  enough. 
Sallust  introduces  the  Dat.  also  for  these  relations. 

4.  Abesse  and  dSesse,  to  he  luanting,  to  fail,  take  also  the  Dat.  of 
Possessor. 

5.  The  Dat.  of  the  person  is  regular  with  the  phrases  nomen  (cogn5- 
men)  est,  inditum  est,  etc.  Here  the  name  is  in  the  Nom.  in  apposition 
to  nomen,  in  the  best  usage.  Rarely  in  Cicero,  always  in  Sallust,  never 
in  Caesar,  more  often  in  early  and  post-Ciceronian  Latin,  the  name  is 
found  in  the  Dat. ;  either  by  attraction  with  the  Dat.  of  the  person 
or  on  the  analogy  of  the  Double  Dative.  The  Appositional  Genitive 
(361)  is  first  cited  from  Velleius.  The  undeclined  Nom.  after  an 
active  verb  appears  first  in  Ovid;  then  in  Suetonius. 

F5ns  aquae  dulcis,  cui  nomen  Arethusa  est,  C,  Fe/r.,  iv.  53, 118  ;  a 
fountain  of  sweet  water  named  Arethusa.  Apollodoms,  cui  PyragrS  cog- 
nSmen  est,  C,  Verr.,  iii.  31,  74  ;  Apollodorus,  surjiamed  Fyragrus  {fire- 
tongs).  N3men  ArcturS  est  mihf,  Pl.,  Bud.,  5  ;  my  name  is  Arcturus. 
Tibi  nomen  insanS  posugre,  IT.,  S.,  11.  3,  47  ;  tliey  called  you  "  cracked." 
[Samnitgs]  Maleventum,  cui  nunc  urbi  Beneventum  nSmen  est,  perfugSrunt, 
L.,  IX.  27,  14  ;  tlie  Samnites  fled  to  JIaleventum  (Ileome),  a  city  ivhich 
now  hears  the  7iame  Beneventum  (Welcome).  Aetas,  cui  fgcimus  '  aurea' 
nOmen,  Ov.,  M.,  xv.  96 ;  the  age  to  which  we  have  given  the  7iame  '  Golden.'' 

Dative  of  Personal  Interest. 

In  its  widest  sense  this  category  includes  the  Dative  with  Transitive  and  Intransi- 
tive Verbs,  already  treated,  and  the  Ethical  Dative,  Dative  of  Reference,  and  Dative  of 
Agent,  to  follow.  In  its  narrower  sense  it  applies  only  to  persons  or  their  eqnivalents 
who  are  essential  to,  but  not  necessarily  participant  in  or  affected  by,  the  result,  and 
differs  from  the  Dative  with  Transitive  and  Intransitive  Verbs,  in  that  the  connection 
with  the  verb  is  much  more  remote. 


DATIVE.  225 

850.  I-  The  person  from  whose  point  of  view  the  action  is  observed, 
or  towards  whom  it  is  directed,  may  be  put  in  the  Dative.  A  conve- 
nient but  not  exact  translation  is  often  tlie  English  Possessive  {Datwus 
Energicus). 

EI  libenter  mS  ad  pedes  abigci,  Cf.  C,  Att.,  viii.  9,  1  ;  7  gladly  cast 
myself  at  Ms  feet.  In  conspectum  vSnerat  hostibus,  Hirt.,  viii.  27  ;  he 
had  come  into  the  sight  of  the  enemy.  Tuo  viro  oculi  dolent,  Cf.  Ter., 
Ph.,  1053;  your  husband's  eyes  ache;  nearer,  your  husband  has  a 
pain  in  his  eyes  (tui  viri  oculi,  your  husband's  eyes). 

Note.— This  Dat.  is  denied  by  some  for  early  Latin  and  is  rare  in  Cicero.  Bnt 
it  becomes  common  from  Livy  on.  With  Relative  and  Demonstrative  pronouns  it  is 
often  used  by  Ciceronian  and  Augustan  poets.  In  the  case  of  many  of  the  examples 
we  have  parallel  constructions  with  the  Geu.  of  Possessor,  which  is  the  normal  usage. 

2.  The  Dative  is  used  of  the  person  in  whose  honor,  or  interest,  or 
advantage,  or  for  whose  pleasure,  an  action  takes  place,  or  the  reverse 
{Dativus  Comm,odl  et  Incommodl) : 

Consurrgxisse  omngs  [Lysandro]  dicuntur,  C,  Cat.M.,  18,  63  ;  all  are 
said  to  have  risen  up  together  in  honor  of  Lysander.  [Deo]  nostra 
altaria  famant,  V.,  Ec,  i.  43  ;  our  altars  smoke  in  honor  of  the  god. 
Si  quid  peccat  miM  peccat,  Ter.,  Ad.,  115  ;  if  he  commits  a  fault,  it  is 
at  my  cost. 

Ethical  Dative. 

351.  The  Ethical  Dative  indicates  special  interest  in  the 
action.  It  may  be  called  the  Dative  of  Feeling,  and  its  use 
is  confined  to  the  personal  pronouns  {Dativus  Etliicus.) 

Tti  mihi  Antonii  exemplo  istius  audaciam  dgfendis?  C,  Verr.,  m.  91, 
213  ;  do  you  defend  me  {to  my  face)  by  Antony's  example  that  fellow's 
audacity  ?    Ecce  tibi  Sgb5sus !  C,  Att.,  11.  15  ;  here's  your  Sebosus  ! 

"  She's  a  civil  modest  wife,  one  (I  tell  you)  that  will  not  miss  you 
morning  nor  evening  prayer." — Shakespeare. 

Notes.— 1.  This  is  essentially  a  colloquialism,  common  in  comedy,  especially  with 
ecce  and  em,  frequent  in  Cicero's  letters,  occasionally  found  elsewhere.  In  poetry, 
notably  Augustan,  it  is  almost  wholly  absent ;  but  there  are  several  cases  in  Horace. 
Cicero  does  not  use  em.    Livy  does  not  use  ecce. 

2.  Especially  to  be  noted  is  sib!  velle,  to  vmriU  to  mean :  Quid  tibi  vis,  insane, 
C,  6>r..  II.  67,  269  ;  what  do  yoti  want,  madman  9  Quid  volt  sibi  haec  oratiol 
Ter.,  Heaiit.,  615  ;  what  does  all  this  holding  fvrth  mean  ? 

Dative  of  Reference. 

352.  This  indicates  the  person  in  whose  eyes  the  state- 
ment of  the  predicate  holds  good  {Dativus  ludicantis). 

Ut  mihi  deformis,   sic  tibi  magnificus,   Tac.  ,  H. ,  xii.  37  ;    to  me  a 
monster,  to  yourself  a  prodigy  of  splendor.     Quintia  formosa  est  multis, 
Cat.  ,  86,  1  ;  Quintia  is  a  beauty  in  the  eyes  of  many. 
15 


226  DATIVE. 

NoTE.—This  Dative  is  characteristic  of  the  Augustan  poets,  but  it  is  also  common 
enough  in  Cicero  and  the  prose  authors. 

363.  N'oteworthy  is  the  use  of  this  Dative  in  combination  with  par- 
ticiples, which  shows  two  varieties,  one  giving  the  local  point  of  view, 
the  other  the  mental,  both  post-Ciceronian  and  rare.  Caesar  gives 
the  first  local  usage,  Livy  the  first  mental; 

[Hoc]  est  oppidum primum  Thessaliae  venientibus  ab  Epiro,  Caes.,  B.C., 
III.  80  ;  this  is  the  first  town  of  Thessaly  to  those  coming  {as  you  come) 
from  Epirus.  Vgr6  aestimanti,  L.,  xxxvii.  58,  8  ;  to  one  whose  judg- 
ment was  true. 

NoT.ES.— 1.  This  construction  is  probably  drawn  from  the  Greek,  although  Vitru- 
VI  us  shows  several  examples. 

2.  Certainly  Greek  is  the  Dat.  of  the  person  with  volenti,  cupienti,  invito  (est), 
etc.,  which  is  found  first  in  Sallust,  once  in  Livy,  and  sporadically  in  Tacitus,  and 
later. 

Dative  of  the  Agent. 

364.  The  Dative  is  used  with  Passive  Verbs,  in  prose 
chiefly  with  the  Perfect  Passive,  to  show  the  interest  vviiich 
the  agent  takes  in  the  result.  That  the  person  interested  is 
the  agent  is  only  an  inference.     (See  215.) 

Mihi  rgs  tota  provisa  est,  C,  Verr.,  iv.  42,  91  ;  /  have  had  the  ivhole 
matter  provided  for.  Cui  non  sunt  auditae  Dgmosthenis  vigiliael  C, 
Tusc,  IV.  19,  44  ;  to  whom  are  not  Demosthenes'  long  ivatchings  a  famil- 
iar hearsay  ? 

Notes.— 1.  Instances  of  this  Dat.  with  the  Tenses  of  Continuance  are  poetical,  or 
admit  of  a  different  explanation  : 

Barbarus  hie  ego  sum  qui  non  intellegor  ulli,  Ov.,  TV.,  v.  10, 37  ;  I  am  a  bar- 
barian here  because  I  can't  make  myself  intelligible  to  any  one. 

Whenever  an  adj.  or  an  equivalent  is  used,  the  Dat.  PI.  may  be  an  Ablative  : 

Sic  dissimillimis  bgstiolis  communiter  cibus  quaeritur,  c,  iV.Z).,  n.  48, 123  ; 
«o,  though  these  little  creatures  are  so  very  unlike,  their  food  is  sought  in  common.  Car- 
mina  quae  scribuntur  aquae  potoribus,  H.,  Ep.,  i.  iq,  3  ;  poems  tvMch  are  ivritteu 
xvhen  people  are  ivater-drinkers.  Cena  ministratur  puerls  tribus,  H.,  S.,  i.  6, 116 ; 
Dinner  is  served,  {the  waiters  being)  the  tvaiters  are  (but)  three. 

2.  This  Dat.  is  rare  in  early  Latin,  rare,  if  ever,  in  Caesar,  not  uncommon  in  Cicero. 
But  it  is  much  liked  by  the  poets  and  by  some  prose  writers,  notably  by  Tacitus. 

355.  The  agent  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  is  put  in 
the  Dative,  at  all  periods. 

Dlligentia  praecipuS  colenda  est  nSbIs,  C,  Or.,  11.  35, 148  ;  carefulness 
is  to  be  cultivated  by  us  first  and  foremost.  DgspSranda  tibi  salva  Con- 
cordia socru,  Juv.,  VI.  231  ;  you  must  despair  of  harmony  while  Mother- 
in-law's  alive. 


DATIVE.  227 

Remark. — To  avoid  ambiguity,  especially  when  the  verb  itself  takes 
the  Dat.,  the  Abl.  with  ab  (a)  is  employed  : 

Civibus  a  vobis  consulendum,  C,  Imp.,  2,  6  ;  the  interest  of  the  citi- 
zens must  he  consulted  by  you.  Supplicatio  ab  eo  decernenda  non  fuit, 
C,  Ph.,  XIV.  4,  11. 

Where  there  is  no  ambiguity  there  is  no  need  of  ab  : 

Linguae  moderandum  est  mihi,  Pl.,  Cure,  486  ;  I  must  put  hounds  to 
my  tongue. 

Note.— Poets  are  free  in  their  use  of  this  Dative ;  so  with  verbals  in  bills ;  as, 
multisille  bonis  flebilisocciditjll.,  0.,i.  24,9;  nulli  exorabilis,  8il.  Ital,  Y.131. 

Dative  of  the  Object  For  Which. 
356.  Certain   verbs   take   the   Dative  of  the  Object  For 
Which  (to  what  end),  and  often  at  the  same  time  a  Dative 
of  the  Personal  Object  For  Whom,  or  To  Whom. 

Ngmini  mens  adventus  labor!  aut  sumptui  fuit,  C,  Verr.,  i.  6,  16  ;  to 
710  one  ivas  my  arrival  a  burden  or  an  expense.  Virtus  sola  neque  datur 
d5nS  neque  accipitur,  S.,  lug.,  85,  38  ;  virtue  alone  is  neither  given  nor 
taken  as  a  present.  Habere  quaestui  rem  publicam  turpe  est,  C,  Off.,  11., 
22,  77  ;  it  is  base  to  have  the  state  for  one's  exchequer. 

RexMARKS. — I.  Noteworthy  is  the  legal  phrase  cui  bono?  to  whom  is 
it  for  an  advantage  ?  =  who  is  advantaged  ? 

2.  In  the  classical  times  the  principal  verbs  in  this  construction  are 
esse,  dare,  ducere,  habere,  vertere,  and  a  few  others  which  occur  less  fre- 
quently. Later  Latin  extends  the  usage  to  many  other  verbs,  and 
especially  to  Gerundive  constructions.  Dare  is  used  principally  in  the 
phrase  dono  dare. 

3.  The  Double  Dative  is  found  principally  with  esse,  but  occasion- 
ally with  other  verbs.  Here  there  seems  to  have  been  a  tendency, 
mainly  post-Ciceronian,  to  use  the  predicative  Nom.  instead  of  the 
Dative.  Interesting  sometimes  is  the  shift  in  usage  ;  thus,  Cicero  says 
est  turpitudo,  Nepos,  fuit  turpitudinl. 

Notes.— 1.  In  the  same  category,  but  with  the  idea  of  finality  more  clearly  indi- 
cated, are  the  agricultural  usages,  alimentO  serere,  condltui  legere  ;  the  medical, 
remedio  adhibSre ;  the  military  terms,  praesidi5,  auxiliS,  mittere,  esse,  etc. 

2.  With  LiVY  we  notice  the  great  extension  of  this  Dat.  with  verbs  of  seeking,  choos- 
ing, etc.,  where  classical  Latin  would  prefer  some  other  construction.  So  locum  insi- 
diis  (insidiarum  is  classical)  circumspectare  Poenus  coepit,  L-,  xxi.  53, 11.  Taci- 
tus goes  furthest  in  such  usages.  Caesar,  however,  shows  a  few  instances  {B.  G.,  i. 
30,3). 

3.  The  Final  Dative  with  intrans.  verbs  is  military  and  rare.  So  receptui  canere, 
to  sound  a  retreat,  is  found  first  in  Caes.,  B.  G.,  vii.  47.  Sallust  shows  a  few  exam- 
ples.. The  Dat.,  with  similar  substantives,  is  an  extension,  and  is  very  rare.  Cicero, 
Ph.,  XIII.  7, 15,  says  receptui  signum. 


228  DATIVE. 


4.  The  origin  of  this  usage  may  have  been  mercantile  (Key).    In  English  we  treat 
Profit  and  Loss  as  persons  :  Quem  fors  difirum  cmnque  dabit  lucro  appone,  H.,  0., 

I.  9, 14  ;  "  Every  day  that  Fate  shall  give,  set  down  to  Profit..''^ 

On  the  Dative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  in  a  similar  sense,  see  429. 


Dative  with  Derivative  Substantives. 

357.  A  few  derivative  substantives  take  the  Dative  of  their 
primitives  : 

Itistitia  est  obtemperatio  legibus,  C,  Leg.,  i.  15,  42  ;  justice  is  obedi- 
ence to  the  laws. 

Note.— We  find  a  few  examples  in  Plautus,  several  in  Cicero,  and  only  sporadi- 
cally elsewhere.  Usually  the  verbal  force  is  very  prominent  in  the  substantives  ;  as, 
insidias  consul!  maturare,  S.,  C,  32,  2. 

Local   Dative. 

358.  The  Dative  is  used  in  poetry  to  denote  the  7J?«ce 
whither. 

Kartbagini  iam  non  ego  niintios  mittam  superbos,  H.,  0.,  iv.  4,  C9; 
(to)  Carthage  710  more  shall  I  send  haughty  tidings.  Iam  satis  terris  nivis 
atque  dirae  grandinis  misit  pater,  H.,  0.,  i.  2, 1  ;  full,  full  etiough  ofsnoiv 
and  dire  hail  the  Sire  hath  sent  the  Land. 

Notes.— 1.  This  construction  begins  with  Accius,  and  is  not  uncommon  in  the 
Augustan  poets.  No  examples  are  cited  from  Plautus  or  Terence,  hence  the  infer- 
ence is  fair  that  it  was  not  a  colloquialism.  As  a  poetical  construction  it  seems  to  have 
sprung  from  personification. 

2.  Occasionally  the  substantive  is  also  thus  construed  ;  as  in  the  facilis  dSscSnsns 
AvernS  of  Vergil  (^4.,  vi.  126). 

The  extreme  is  reached  when  the  Dative  follows  ire  and  the  like  : 
It  caelO  clamorque  vinim  clangorque  tubarum,  V.,^.,  xi.  192  ;  mmints  to 
High  Heaven  warrioj's''  shout  and  truinpets''  blare. 

3.  Tendere  rnanlis  has  a  few  times,  even  in  Cicero  and  Caesar,  the  Dat.  of  the 
person,  which  is  sometimes  referred  to  this  head.     But  the  usual  construction  is  ad. 

Matrgs  familiae  Romanis  d6  murS  manus  tendebant,  Caes.,  B.  G.,  \n.  48, 

Dative  with  Adjectives. 

359.  Adjectives  of  Likeness,  Fitness.,  FriendHness,  Near- 
ness, and  the  like,  with  their  opposites,  take  the  Dative  : 

Canis  similis  lupO  est,  C.,N.D.,  i.  35,  97  ;  the  dog  is  like  unto  the  wolf. 
Castrls  idOneus  locus,  Caes.,  B.  G.,  vi.  10,  2  ;  a  place  suitable  for  a  camp. 
Utile  est  rei  publicae  nObilBs  homines  esse  dIgnOs  maiOribus  suls,  C,  Sest., 
9,  21  ;  it  is  to  the  advantage  of  the  state  that  men  of  rank  should  be 
worthy  of  their  ancestors.  Vir  mihi  amlcissimus,  Q,.  Fabricius,  C,  Sest.. 
35,  75  ;  my  very  great  friend,  Q.  Fabricius.  Proxumus  sum  egomet  mihi, 
Ter.,  And.,  636  ;  myself  am  nearest  to  me.     Omni  aetati  mors  est  com- 


DATIVE.  229 

mtinis,  Cf.  C,  Cat.  31.,  19,  68  ;  death  is  common  to  every  time  of  life. 
(Testis)  id  dicit  quod  illi  causae  maximS  est  aliSnum,  C,  Caec,  g,  24  ;  the 
tvitness  says  what  is  especially  damaging  to  that  case  {side). 

Remarks. — i.  Many  adjectives  which  belong  to  this  class  are  used 
also  as  substantives,  and  as  such  are  construed  with  the  Genitive  : 
amicus,  friend ;  affinis,  cotmection ;  aequalis,  co7itemporary ;  alignus 
(rare),  foreign,  strange  ;  cognatus,  Uinsman ;  commlmis,  common  ;  con- 
trarius,  opposite  ;  par,  match  ;  proprius,  peculiaris,  own,  peculiar  ;  similis, 
like  ("we  ne'er  shall  look  upon  his  like  again  "),  especially  of  gods  and 
men,  and  regularly  with  personal  pronouns,  and  in  early  Latin  ;  sacer, 
set  apart,  sacred  ;  superstes  (rare),  survivor.  Comparatives  have  regu- 
larly the  Dative  ;  Superlatives  vary. 

[Ille], cuius  paucSs pares haec  civitas  tulit,  C,  Pis.,  4,  8  ;  {he  was)  a  man 
few  of  whose  peers  the  state  hath  home.  XJtinam  t5  non  solum  vitae,  sed 
etiam  dignitatis  meae  superstitem  reliquissem,  C,  ^.i^.,  i.  3,  1  ;  would 
that  I  had  left  thee  survivor  not  only  of  my  life  hut  also  of  my  position. 

2.  The  ohject  toivard  which  is  expressed  by  the  Ace.  with  in,  erga, 
adversus : 

Manlius  (fuit)  sev6rus  in  filium,  C,  Off.,  iii.  31, 112  ;  Manlius  was  severe 
toward  his  son.  M6  esse  scit  s5sS  erga  benivolum,  Pl.,  Capt.,  350  ;  he 
knows  that  I  am  kindly  disposed  toward  him.  Vir  adversus  merita 
Caesaris  ingratissimus,  Cf.  Vell.,  ii.  69,  1  ;  a  man  most  ungrateful  tow- 
ards Caesa?''s  services  (to  him). 

3.  The  ohject  for  which  may  be  expressed  by  the  Ace.  with  ad,  to  : 
Hom8  ad  ntillam  rem  utilis,  C,  0^.,  in.  6, 29  ;    a  good-for-nothing 

fellow. 

This  is  the  more  common  construction  with  adjectives  of  Fitness. 

Notes.— 1.  Propior,  neare7\  proximus,  next,  are  also  construed  (like  prope,  riear) 
occasionally  with  the  Ace.  (principally  by  Caesak,  Sallust,  Livy),  the  adverbial 
forms  also  with  the  Abl.  with  ab,  off : 

Crassus  proximus  mare  Oceanum  hiemarat,  Caes.,  b.  g.,  hi.  7, 2 ;  Crassus  had 
wintered  next  the  ocean.  Id  propius  fidem  est,  L.,  11. 41, 11 ;  that  is  nearer  belief, 
i.e.,  more  likely. 

2.  AliSnus,  foreign,  strange,  is  also  construed  with  the  Abl.,  with  or  without 
ab(a);  so  commonly- absonus. 

Homo  sum,  bumanl  nil  a  mS  aliSnum  putd,  Ter., /reaw^.,  77;  I  am  a  man, 
and  nothing  that  pertains  to  man  do  I  consider  foreign  to  me. 

3.  lunctus,  cdniunctus,  joined,  are  also  construed  frequently  with  cum  and  the 
Abl.;  sometimes  with  the  Abl.  only  :  improbitas  scelere  iuncta,  C,  Or.,  11.  58,237. 

4.  Similis  is  said  to  be  used  with  the  Gen.  when  the  likeness  is  general  and  com- 
prehensive ;  with  the  Dat.  when  it  is  conditional  or  partial ;  hence,  in  classical  prose, 
always  vSrl  simile,  Livy  being  the  first  to  say  vSro  simile. 

5.  Adversus,  opponent,  seems  to  be  construed  with  the  Gen.  once  in  Sallust  (C, 
52,  7)  and  once  in  Quintilian  (xii.  i,2).  Invidus,  envious,  is  cited  with  the  Gen. 
once  in  Cicero  {Flac,  i,  2),  then  not  till  late  Latin  ;  with  the  Dat.  it  is  poetical ;  other- 
wise the  possessive  pronoun  is  used,  as  tul  invidi  (C,  Fam.,  i.  4, 2).  Pr5nus, 
inclined,  with  the  Dat.,  occurs  in  Sallust  {lug.,  114,2),  then  not  till  Tacitus  ;  the 
usual  construction  is  ad.    Intentus,  intent  upon,  has  Abl.  in  Sallust  (C,  2,  9,  «:<:.) ; 


230  GENITIVE. 

otherwise  Dat.,  or  ad  (in)  with  Ace.    Notice  the  use  of  aversus  with  Dat.  in  Tag., 
Ann.,  1. 66, 2  ;  some  other  examples  are  doubtful. 

6.  In  poetrj',  idem,  ihemme,  is  often  construed  after  Greek  analogy,  with  the  Dative. 
Invitum  qui  servat  idem  facit  occidenti,  H.,  A.P,  467  ;  he  who  saves  a  manCs 

life)  agamst  his  will  does  the  same  thing  as  one  who  kills  him  («.s  if  he  had  killed  Mm). 

7.  Adverbs  of  similar  meaning  sometimes  take  the  Dative  :  Congruenter  naturae 
convenienterque  vivere,  c,  Fin.,  m.  7, 26. 

II.    Internal    Change. 

Genitive. 

360.  I.  The  Genitive  Case  is  the  Case  of  the  Complement, 
and  is  akin  to  the  Adjective^  with  which  it  is  often  parallel. 
It  is  the  substantive  form  of  the  Specific  Characteristic. 

The  chief  English  representatives  of  the  Genitive  are  : 

(a)  The  Possessive  case  :  Domus  regis,  the  king's  f)ci^ace. 

(b)  The  Objective  case  with  of :  Domus  rggis,  the  palace  of  the  king. 

(c)  Substantives  used  as  adjectives  or  in  composition  :  Arbor  abietis, 
fir-tree. 

Remarks. — i.  Other  prepositions  than  of  are  not  unfrequently  used, 
especially  with  tlic  Objective  Genitive.     (3G^,  11.  i.) 

Patriae  quis  exsul  se  quoque  fugit  "i  11.,  0.,  11.  16,  19  ;  ivhat  exile  from 
his  country  ever  fled  himself  as  ivell  ?  Boiorum  triumphi  spem  coUegae 
reliquit,  L.,  xxxiii.  37,  10  ;  he  left  the  hope  of  a  triumph  over  the  Boii 
to  his  colleague. 

Via  mortis  may  be  considered  the  umy  {mode)  of  death  or  the  death- 
path,  instead  of  via  ad  mortem  (L.,  xliv.  4.  14). 

2.  An  abstract  substantive  with  the  Gen.  is  often  to  be  translated 
as  an  attribute  : 

Verni  temporis  suavitas,  C,  Cat.M.,  19,  70  ;  the  sweet  spring-time. 
Fontium  gelidae  perennitat6s,  C,  N.D.,  11.  39,  98  ;  cool  springs  that  never 
fail.     Compare  S.,  C,  8,  3. 

And,  on  the  other  hand,  the  predicative  attribute  is  often  to  be 
translated  as  an  abstract  substantive  with  of : 

Ante  Romam  conditam,  before  the  founding  of  Rome.     (825,  r.  3.) 

Notice  also  hie  metus,  this  fear  =  fear  of  this,  and  kindred  expres- 
sions :  Quam  similitudinem  =  cuius  rei  similitudinem,  C,  N.D.,  11.  10, 27. 

2.  The  Genitive  is  employed  : 

I.  and  11.  Chiefly  as  the  complement  of  Substantives  and 
Adjectives. 

III.  Occasionally  as  the  complement  of  Verbs. 

NoTK.— As  the  Accusative  forms  a  complex  with  the  verb,  so  the  Genitive  forms  a 
complex  with  the  Substantive  or  equivalent.  No  logical  distribution  can  be  wholly 
satisfactory,  and  the  following  arrangement  has  regard  to  convenience. 


GENITIVE.  231 

I.    GENITIVE  WITH   SUBSTANTIVES. 

Adnominal  Genitive. 

Appositive  Genitive,  or  Genitive  of  Specification. 

361.  The  Genitive  is  sometimes  used  to  specify  the  con- 
tents of  generic  words  instead  of  Apposition  in  the  same 
case  ;  there  are  two  varieties  : 

1.  Appositiorml  Genitive, — Genitive  after  such  words  as,  vox,  expres- 
sion ;  nomen,  iiame,  noun  ;  verbum,  ivord,  verb  ;  rSs,  thing,  etc. 

Nomen  amlcitiae,  C,  Fin.,  11.  24,  78  ;  the  name  friendship. 

2.  Epexegetical  Genitive. — Genitive  after  such  words  as  genns,  class  ; 
vitium,  vice  ;  culpa,  fault,  etc. 

[Virtutes]  continentiae,  gravitatis,  iustitiae,  fidel,  C,  Mur.,  10,  23  ;  the 
virtues  of  self-control,  earnestness,  justice,  honor. 

Notes.— 1.  The  former  variety  is  very  rare  in  Cicero,  the  latter  much  more  com- 
mon. A  special  variety  is  tlie  use  of  the  Gen.  after  such  words  as  urbs,  oppidum, 
flumen,  etc.  This  is  not  found  in  Plautus  and  Tehence,  occurs  perhaps  but  once 
in  CicEuo,  and  seems  to  be  confined  to  a  few  cases  in  poetry  and  later  prose.  Often 
personification  is  at  work  ;  thus,  in  fons  Tlmavl  (V.,  A.,  i.  244),  Timavus  is  a  river 
god,  and  fonS  is  not  equal  to  Tlmavus.  Clf.  V.,  A.,  viii.  72. 

2.  Examples  like  arbor  abietis  (L.,  xxiv.  3,  A),  fir-tree ;  arbor  fici  {Cf.  C,  Flac., 
ij,  41),  fig-tree,  etc.,  occur  only  here  and  there. 

3.  Colloquial,  and  probably  belonging  here,  arc:  scelus  viri  (Pl.,  3/. (?.,  1434),  a 
scoundrel  of  a  man  ;  flagitium  hominis  (Pl-,  ^*in.,473), ''  scamp  of  a  fellow,  and 
the  like.    Quaedam  p§st6s  hominum^  C,  Fam.,  v.  8, 2 ;  certain  liestilentfelloxvs. 

Possessive  Genitive,  or  Genitive  of  Property. 

362.  The  Possessive  Genitive  is  the  substantive  form  of  an 
adjective  attribute  with  which  it  is  often  parallel  ;  it  is  used 
only  of  the  Third  Person, 

Domus  rSgis  —  domus  regia,  the  palace  of  the  king,  the  king's  palace  — 
the  royal  pcdace. 

Remarks. — i.  The  Possession  in  the  First  and  Second  Person  (and 
in  the  Reflexive)  is  indicated  by  the  Possessive  Pronouns  (until  after 
Livy):  amicus  meus,  a  friend  of  mine  ;  gladius  tuus,  a  sword  of  thine. 
But  when  omnium  is  added,  vestrum  and  nostrum  are  used ;  axis  et  focis 
omnium  nostrum  inimicus,  C,  Ph.,  xi.  4,  10.  Sometimes  the  adjective 
form  is  preferred  also  in  the  Third  Person:  canis  alienus,  a  strange  dog, 
another  man's  dog  ;  fllius  erflis,  master's  son^ 

2.  The  attention  of  the  student  is  called  to  the  variety  of  forms 
which  possession  may  take.  Statua  Mjrronis,  3Iyron's  statue,  may  mean: 
I.  A  statue  which  Myron  owns;  2.  Which  Myron  has  made;  3.  Which 
represents  Myron. 

3.  Sometimes  the  governing  word  i^  omitted,  where  it  can  be  easily 


232  GENITIVE. 

supplied,  so  especially  aedes  or  templum,  after  ad,  and  less  often  after 
other  prepositions  :  Pecunia  utinam  ad  Opis  mangret,  C,  Ph.,  i.  7,  17  ; 
would  that  the  money  were  still  at  Ops's  (temple). 

Notes.— 1.  The  Family  Genitive,  as  Hasdrubal  Gisgonis  (L.,xxviii.,  12, 13), 
Gisgo's  Hasdrubal,  llasdi^bal,  Gisgo's  son  (as  it  were,  Hasdrubal  O'  Gisgo),  Hectoris 
AndromacliS  {v.,  A. ,111.319),  Hector's  (wife)  Andrmjiache,  is  found  twice  onlj^  in 
Cicero,  otlierwise  it  is  poetical  and  post-Ciceronian.  ServOS,  however,  is  regularly 
omitted  ;  Flaccus  Claudi,  Flaco/s,  Claudius''  slave. 

2.  The  C/ur/wgrajMc  {geographic)  Genitive  is  rare  and  post-Ciceronian  :  R6x 
Chalcidem  Euboeae  vgnit,  L.,  xxvii.  30, 7;  the  king  came  to  Chalcis  of  (in)  Euboea. 

The  Chorographic  Genitive  is  not  found  with  persons.  Here  an  adjective  or  a  prep- 
ositional phrase  is  necessary  :  Thales  Mllesius,  or  ex  MilStS,  Thales  of  Miletm. 

Active  and  Passive  Genitive. 

363.  When  the  substantive  on  which  the  Genitive  depends 
contains  the  idea  of  an  action  (nomen  actionis),  the  possession 
may  be  active  ov passive.     Hence  the  division  into 

1.  The  Active  or  Subjective  Genitive  :  amor  Dei,  the  love 
of  God,  the  love  ivhich  God  feels  (God  loves) ;  patriae  beneficia, 
the  benefits  of  (conferred  hy)  one's  country  (376,  r.  2). 

2.  Passive  or  Objective  Genitive  :  amor  Dei,  love  of  Gody 
love  toivard  God  (God  is  loved). 

Remarks. — i.  The  English  form  in  o/is  used  either  actively  or  pas- 
sively :  the  love  of  women.  Hence,  to  avoid  ambiguity,  other  preposi- 
tions than  of  are  often  substituted  for  the  Passive  Genitive,  such  as  for, 
toward,  and  the  like.  So,  also,  sometimes  in  Latin,  especially  in  Livy, 
and  later  Historians  generally: 

Voluntas  Servflii  erga  Caesarem,  Cf.  C,  Q.F.,  iii.  i.  6,  26  ;  the  good- 
will of  Servilius  toward  Caesar.  Odium  in  bonos  inveteratum,  C,  Vat.y 
3,  G  ;  deep-seated  hate  toward  the  conservatives. 

2.  Both  Genitives  may  be  connected  with  the  same  substantive : 

VeterSs  HelvSti5rum  iniuriae  populi  ESmani,  Cf.  Caes.,  B.G.,  i.  30,  2  ; 
the  ancient  injuries  of  the  Roman  people  hy  the  Helvetians. 

NoTK.— The  use  of  the  Genitive  with  substantives  whose  corresponding  verbs  take 
other  cases  than  the  Accusative,  gradually  increases  in  Latin,  beginning  with  the 
earliest  times,  but  it  is  not  very  common  in  the  classical  language. 

364.  The  Subjective  Genitive,  like  the  Possessive,  is  used 
only  of  the  Third  Person.  In  the  First  and  Second  Persons 
the  possessive  pronoun  is  used,  thus  showing  the  close  rela- 
tionship of  Agent  and  Possessor. 

Amor  mens,  my  love  (the  love  which  I  feel).  D6siderium  tuum,  your 
longing  {the  longing  which  you  feel). 


GEIS^ITIVE.  233 

Additional  attributives  are  put  in  the  Genitive  (321,  r.  2): 
Itiraivi  hanc  urbem  mea  unius  opera  salvam  esse,  C,  Pis.,  3,  6  ;  I  swore 
that  this  city  owed  its  salvation  to  my  exertions  alone. 

Remark. — Nostrum  and  vestrum  are  used  as  Partitive  Genitives: 
Magna  pars  nostrum,  a  great  part  of  us  ;  uterque  vestrum,  eitJier  (both) 
of  you. 

Nostri  melior  pars  means  the  better  part  of  our  being,  our  better  part. 
With  omnium,  the  forms  nostrum  and  vestrum  must  be  used  (362,  r.  i). 

Notes.— 1.  Occasionally,  however,  in  Latin,  as  in  English,  the  Gen.  is  nsed  instead 
of  the  possessive  pronoun;  so  Cicero  says  splendor  vestrum  (Att.,  vii.  13  a,  3),  and 
cSnsSnsus  vestrum  (P/i-,  v.  i,  2),  and  one  or  two  others  ;  but  other  examples  are  very 
rare  until  after  Tacitus,  when  the  Singular  forms,  after  the  example  of  Ovid  {31.,  i. 
30),  become  not  uncommon.    See  304,  3,  n.  1.     "  For  the  life  of  me  "  =  "  for  my  life." 

2.  On  the  other  hand  the  Genitives  of  the  personal  pronouns  are  used  regularly  as 
the  Objective  Genitive : 

Amor  mei,  love  to  me.  Desiderium  tui,  longi7ig  for  thee.  Memoria  nostri, 
memory  of  us  (our  memory). 

Occasionally  the  possessive  pronoun  is  used  even  here  ;  see  304,  2,  n.  2,  and  compare 
"The  deep  damnation  of  his  taking  off." 

Genitive  of  Quality. 

365.  The  Genitive  of  Quality  must  always  have  an  adjec- 
tive or  its  equivalent. 

Vir  magnae  auctoritatis,  Caes.,  B.G.,  v.  35,  6;  a  man  of  great  influ- 
ence. Hom8  nihili  (=  nullius  pretil),  Pl.,  B.,  1188  ;  a  fellow  of  no  ac- 
count. Tridui  via,  Caes.,  E.G.,  i.  38,  1;  a  three  days'  journey.  N5n 
multi  cibi  hospitem  accipigs,  multi  ioci,  C,  Fam.,  ix.  26,  4;  you  will 
receive  a  guest  ivho  is  a  small  eater  but  a  great  joker. 

Remarks. — i.  The  Genitive  of  Quality,  like  the  adjective,  is  not 
used  with  a  proper  name.  Exceptions  are  very  rare  in  classical  Latin 
(Caes.  ,  B.G.,  v.  35,  6,  Quintus  Lflcanius,  giusdem  ordinis).  But  later  they 
are  more  common. 

2.  The  Genitive  of  Quality  is  less  common  than  the  Ablative,  being 
used  chiefly  of  the  essentials.  The  Genitive  always  of  Number,  Meas- 
ure, Time,  Space ;  the  Ablative  always  of  externals,  so  of  parts  of  the 
body.     Often  the  use  seems  indifferent.     (400.) 

Note.— The  omission  of  the  adjective  is  not  found  before  Apuleius,  in  whom, 
as  in  English,  a  man  of  influence  may  be  for  a  man  of  great  influence. 

Genitive  as  a  Predicate. 

366.  The  Genitives  of  Possession  and  Quality  may  be  used 
as  Predicates. 

Hie  versus  Plauti  n6n  est,  hie  est,  C,  Fam.,  ix.  16,  4;  this  verse  is  not 


234  GENITIVE. 

hy  Plautus,  this  is.  Omnia  quae  mulieris  fuSrunt,  viri  fiunt  d5tis  nomine, 
C,  Top.,  IV.  23;  everything  that  was  the  woman^s  becomes  the  husband's 
under  the  title  of  dowry.  Virtus  tantarum  virium  est  ut  sg  ipsa  tueatur,  C. , 
Tusc,  V.  I,  2;  virtue  is  of  such  strength  as  to  be  her  own  protector. 

Eemarks. — I.  The  Possession  appears  in  a  variety  of  forms,  and 
takes  a  variety  of  translations  : 

Huius  ero  vivus,  mortuus  huius  er5,  Prop.,  ii.  15,  35;  hers  I  shall  be, 
living;  dead,  hers  I  shall  be.  Nolae  senatus  Romanorum,  plebs  Hanni- 
balis  erat,  L.,  ixiii,  39,  7;  at  Nola  the  senate  was  (on  the  side)  of  the 
lionums,  the  common  folk  (on)  Ilannibcd's.  Damnatio  est  iudicum,  poena 
iSgis,  C,  Sull.,  22,  63;  condemning  is  the  judges'  (business),  punishment 
the  law's.  Est  animi  ingenui  cui  multum  dgbeas  eidem  plurimum  velle 
debgre,  C,  Fam.,  11.  6,  2  ;  it  shoivs  the  feeling  of  a  gentleman  to  be  will- 
ing to  owe  very  much  to  him  to  ivhom  you  already  owe  much.  Pau- 
peris est  numerare  pecus,  Ov.,  31.,  xiii.  823  ;  'tis  only  the  poor  man  that 
counts  his  flock  {'tis  the  mark  of  a  poor  man  to  count  the  flock). 

Observe  the  special  variety,  Oenitlvus  Auctoris :  Is  [Herculgs]  dlcg- 
baturesse  Myronis,  C,  Verr.,  iv.  3,  5;  that  (statue  of)  Hercules  was  said 
to  be  Myron's  (work),  by  Ifyron. 

So  also  with  facere,  to  make  (cause  to  be),  which  is  common  in  Livy 
especially  : 

Romanae  dicionis  facere,  L.,  xxi.  60,  3  ;  to  bring  under  the  Roman 
sway.  Summum  imperium  in  orbe  terrarum  Macedonum  fecerant,  L. ,  xlv. 
7,  3 ;  the  paramount  authority  of  the  world  they  had  brought  {into  the 
hands)  of  the  Macedonians. 

2.  For  the  personal  representative  of  a  quality,  the  quality  itself  may 
be  used  sometimes  with  but  little  difference,  as  :  stultitiae  est,  it  is  the 
part  of  folly  ;  stulti  est,  it  is  the  part  of  a  fool.  So,  too,  stultum  est, 
it  is  foolish.  But  when  the  adj.  is  of  the  Third  Declension,  the  neuter 
should  not  be  used,  except  in  combination  with  an  adj.  of  the  Second. 

Temporl  cgdere  semper  sapientis est  habitum,  C,  Fam.,  iv.  9,  2  ;  ^0  yield 
to  the  pressure  of  the  times  has  always  been  held  ivise.  Pigrum  et  iners 
vidgtur  sudSre  adquirere  quod  possis  sanguine  parare,  Tac,  O.,  14,  17  ;  it 
is  thought  slow  and  spiritless  to  acquire  by  sweat  what  you  cari  get  hy 
blood. 

Some  combinations  become  phraseological,  as  :  consugtudinis,  mOris 
est  (the  latter  post-classical),  it  is  the  custom. 

3.  The  same  methods  of  translation  apply  to  the  Possessive  Pro- 
noun in  the  Predicate  ("Vengeance  is  mine")  :  meum  est,  it  is  my 
property,  busiriess,  way. 

N5n  est  mentiri  meum,  Ter.,  Ileaut.,  549  ;  lying  is  not  my  way  (I  do 
not  lie).  His  tantis  in  rfibus  est  tuura  vidgre,  quid  agatur,  C,  Mur.,  38, 
83  ;  in  this  important  crisis  it  is  your  business  to  see  what  is  to  be  done. 


GEXITIYE.  235 

Partitive  Genitive. 

367.  The  Partitive  Genitive  stands  for  the  Whole  to  which 
a  Part  belongs.  It  is  therefore  but  an  extension  of  the  Pos- 
sessive Genitive.  It  may  be  used  with  any  word  that  involves 
partition,  and  has  the  following  varieties  (368-372)  : 

368.  The  Partitive' Genitive  is  used  with  substantives  of 
Quantity,  Number,  Weight. 

Maximus  vini  numerus  fuit,  permagnum  pondus  argenti,  C,  Ph.,  11.  27, 
6G  ;  there  ivas  a  large  amount  of  wine,  an  enormous  mass  of  silver.  In 
iugerS  Leontlni  agri  medimnum  tritici  seritur,  C.  Verr.,  in.  47,  112  ;  on  a 
jnger  of  the  Leontine  territory  a  medimnus  of  wheat  is  sown.  Campano- 
mm  alam,  quingentos  ferS  equitSs  excgdere  acig  iubet,  L.,  x.  29,  2  ;  he  or- 
ders a  squadron  of  Campanians,  about  500  horsemen,  to  leave  the  line. 

Remark. — This  is  sometimes  called  the  Oenitlvus  Generis,  Whether 
the  conception  be  partitive  or  not,  depends  on  circumstances. 

Medimnus  tritici,  a  medimnus  of  wheat,  may  be  a  medimnus  of 
WHEAT  {Genitivus  Generis)  or  a  medimnus  of  wheat  {Partitive). 

Note.— The  reversed  construction  is  occasionally  found.  Sex  dies  ad-  earn  rem 
conficiendam  spatii  postulant,  Caes.,  B.  6'.,  i.  3, 6,  instead  of  spatium  sex  dierum. 

369.  The  Partitive  Genitive  is  used  with  the  Neuter  Sing- 
ular of  the  following  and  kindred  words,  but  only  in  the 
Nominative  or  Accusative. 

tantum,  so  much,     quantum,  as  {how  much),    aliquantum,  somewhat, 
multum,  much,         plus,  7nore,  plurimum,  most, 

paulum,  little,  minus,  less,  minimum,  least, 

satis,  enough,  parum,  too  little,  nihil,  nothing, 

hoc,  this,  id,  illud,  istud,  that,  idem,  the  same, 

quod  and  quid,  which  and  what  ?  with  their  compounds. 

Quod  in  rSbus  honestis  operae  curaeque  ponetur,  id  itire  laudabitur,  C. , 

Off.,  I.  6, 19  ;  ivhat  {of)  effort  and  pains  shall  he  bestowed  on  reputable 
deeds,  will  receive  a  just  recompense  of  p'aise.  Is  locus  ab  omni  turba  id 
temporis  (336,  n.  2)  vacuus  [erat],  C,  Fin.,  v.  i,  1  ;  that  place  was  at  that 
{point  of)  time  free  from  anything  like  a  crowd.  Satis  Sloquentiae, 
sapientiae  parum,  S.,  C,  5,  4  ;  enough  {of)  eloquence,  of  ivisdom  too  little. 

Remarks. — i.  Neuter  adjectives  of  the  Second  Declension  can  be 
treated  as  substantives  in  the  Gen. ;  not  so  adjectives  of  the  Third, 
except  in  combination  with  adjectives  of  the  Second,  but  here  usually 
,the  Second  Declension  adjective  is  attracted  :  aliquid  bonum,  or  boni, 
something  good  ;  aliquid  memorabile,  something  memorable  ;  aliquid  bonI 


236  •  GENITIVE. 

et  memorabilis,  something  good  and  memorable  (better  aliquid  bonnm  et 
memorabile). 

Quid  habet  ista  res  aut  laetabile  aut  gloriosum?  C,  2'usc.,  1.  21,  49 
(204,  N.  3). 

2.  A  familiar  phrase  is  :  Nihil  reliqui  facere.  i.  To  leave  nothing 
{not  a  thing).     2.  (Occasionally),  to  leave  nothing  undone. 

Notes.— 1.  The  conception  is  often  not  so  much  partitive  as  characteristic.  So 
Quodcumque  hoc  rggni,  Y ..,  A.,\.  ^%  \  this  realm,  tvhat  (little)  there  is  of  it  {what  little 
realm  I  have).  Perhaps,  too,  such  combinations  as  flagitium  hominis  may  be  classed 
under  this  head.    See  361,  n.  3. 

2.  The  partitive  construction,  with  a  preposition,  is  not  found  in  Cicero  or  Caesar, 
but  begins  with  Sallust  : 

Ad  id  loci,  S.,  C,  45, 3 ;  ad  id  locorum,  S.,  lug.,  63,  6. 

370.  The  Partitive  Genitive  is  used  with  numerals,  both 
general  and  special. 

Special : 

Centum  militum,  a  hundred  (of  the)  soldiers,  a  hundred  (of)  soldiers, 

(Centum  militSs,  a,  the  hundred  soldiers.) 

Quintus  rggum,  the  fifth  (of  the)  ki?ig{s). 

(Quintus  rgx,  the  fifth  king.) 
Oerieral : 

Multi  militum,  many  of  the  soldiers,  many  soldiers. 

(Multi  militgs,  many  soldiers.) 

K-EMARKS. — I.  The  English  language  commonly  omits  the  partition, 
unless  it  is  especially  emphatic  : 

Multi  civium  adsunt,  many  citizens  are  present.  Multi  clv6s  adsunt, 
MANY  are  the  citizens  present. 

2.  When  all  are  embraced,  there  is  no  partition  in  Latin  : 

(N5s)  trecenti  coniuravimus,  L.,  11.  12,  15  ;  three  hundred  of  us  have 
hound  ourselves  hy  an  oath.  Volnera  quae  circum  plurima  muros  accSpit 
patrios,  V.,  A.,  11.  277 ;  wounds  which  he  received  in  great  numbers  before 
his  country's  walls. 

Qui  omngs,  all  of  whom.     Quot  estis  ?  how  many  are  {there  of)  you  ? 

So  always  quot,  tot,  totidem. 

Here  the  English  language  familiarly  employs  the  partition.  Ex- 
ceptions  are  very  rare. 

3.  On  mille  and  milia,  see  293.  On  prepositions  with  numerals,  see 
372,  R.  2. 

371.  The  Partitive  Genitive  is  used  Avith  Pronouns. 
li  militum,  those  (of  the)  soldiers.     li  militgs,  those  soldiers. 
lUi  GraecOrum,  those  (of  the)  Greeks. 

Fidgnatium  qui  supersunt,  ad  urbem  Fidgnas  tendunt,  L.,  iv.  33, 10  ;  the' 
surviving  Fidenates  take  their  way  to  the  city  of  Fidenae. 


GENITIVE.  237 

Remarks. — i.  TTterque,  either  {both),  is  commonly  used  as  an  adjec- 
tive with  substantives  :  uterque  consul,  either  consul  =  both  consuls;  as 
a  substantive  with  pronouns,  unless  a  substantive  is  also  used:  uterque 
horum,  both  of  these ;  but  uterque  ille  dux.  So,  too,  with  relatives  in 
the  neuter,  and  with  Plural  forms  of  uterque,  concord  is  the  rule.  Com- 
pare uterque  nostrum,  C,  Sull.,  4,  13,  with  utrique  nos,  C,  Fam.,  xi.  20, 
3.     See  292. 

2.  On  the  use  of  prepositions  instead  of  the  Genitive,  see  372,  r.  2. 

Note.— The  use  of  the  relative  with  the  Genitive  is  cliaracteristic  of  Livy. 

372.  The  Partitive  Genitive  is  used  with  Comparatives  and 
Superlatives  : 

Prior  horum  in  proelio  cecidit,  Nep.,  xxi.  i,  2  ;  the  former  of  these  fell 
in  an  engagement.  Indus  est  omnium  fluminum  maximus,  C,  N.D.,  11. 
52,  130  (211,  R.  2). 

Remarks. — i.  When  there  are  only  two,  the  comparative  exhausts 
the  degrees  of  comparison  (300). 

2.  Instead  of  the  Partitive  Genitive  with  Numerals,  Pronouns,  Com- 
paratives, and  Superlatives,  the  Abl.  may  be  employed  witli  ex,  out  of 
dg,  from  (especially  with  proper  names  and  singulars),  in,  among  (rare), 
or  the  Ace.  with  inter,  am,ong,  apud :  Gallus  provocat  unum  ex  Komanis, 
the  Oaul  challenges  one  of  the  Romans ;  unus  dS  multis,  one  of  the  many 
(the  masses) ;  Croesus  inter  rgges  opulentissimus,  Croesus,  wealthiest  of 
Icings.  With  unus,  ex  or  dS  is  the  more  common  construction,  except 
that  when  unus  is  first  in  a  series,  the  Gen.  is  common. 

3.  On  the  concord  of  the  Superlative  see  211,  r.  2. 

Notes.— 1.  The  Partitive  Genitive  with  positives  is  occasional  in  poetry  ;  in  prose 
it  begins  with  Livy  and  becomes  more  common  later. 

Sequimur  t6,  sancte  deorum,  v.,  A.,  iv.  576 ;  we  follow  thee,  holy  deity.  Canum 
dggeneres  (caudam)  sub  alvom  flectunt,  PLiN.,iV.zr.,xi.,  50,266;  currish  dogs 
ciirl  the  tail  up  under  the  belly. 

2.  Substantival  neuters,  with  no  idea  of  quantity,  were  rarely  followed  by  the  Gen. 
in  early  Latin.  Cicero  shows  a  few  cases  of  Plurals  of  superlatives,  and  one  case  of  a 
Plural  of  a  comparative  in  this  construction  :  in  interiora  aedium  SuUae  {A.tt.  iv., 
3, 3).  Caesar  shows  one  case  of  a  positive  :  in  occultis  So  reconditis  templi  {B.  C, 
III.  105, 5).  Sallust  shows  the  first  case  of  the  Singular  :  in  praerupti  montis  ex- 
trSmo  {lug.,  37,  4).  Then  the  usage  extends  and  becomes  common,  especially  in  Taci- 
tus.   In  the  poets  it  begins  with  Lucretius. 

Ardua  dum  metuunt  amittunt  vSra  viai  (29,  n.  2),  Lucr.,  i.  660 ;  the  tohile  they 
fear  the  steeper  road,  they  miss  the  true. 

So  amara  curarum,  n.,  0.,  iv.  12, 19  ;  hitter  elements  of  cares.  Utter  cares ;  strata 
viarum,  V.,  A.,  i.  422  =  stratae  viae,  the  paved  streets. 

3.  The  Partitive  Genitive  is  also  used  with  Adverbs  of  Quantity,  Place,  Extent :  ar- 
morum  adfatim,  L.,  xxvn.  17, 7  ;  oMndance  of  arms  •  ubi  terrarum,  gentium? 
where  in  the  world  ?  (Very  late  Latin,  tum  temporis,  at  that  time.)  The  usage  with 
hue,  eo,  as  hue,  eS  arrogantiae  procSssit,  tie  got  to  this,  that  pitch  of  presumption^ 
is  a  colloquialism,  which  begins  with  Sallust,  but  is  not  found  in  Cicero  or  Caesar. 


238  GEKITIVE. 

Notice  especially  the  phrase :  quod  (or  quoad)  eius  (facere)  possum,  as  far  as  I  can 
do  so:  C,  Fain.,  iii.  2, 2  ;  Att.,  xi.  12, 4  ;  Inv.,  11.,  6, 20. 

4.  The  Partitive  Genitive  with  proper  names  is  rare,  and  mostly  confined  to  LiVY  : 
Gonsulum  Sulpicius  in  dextro  Poetelius  in  laevo  cornu  consistunt,  L.,  ix.  27, 8. 

5.  The  Partitive  Genitive  as  a  Predicate  is  Greekish  :  Fi§S  nobilium  tu  quoque 
fontium,  H.,  0.,  m.,  13, 13  ;  tlum,  too  shall  count  among  the  famous  fountains. 

Genitive  with  Prepositional  Substantives. 

373.  Causa,  gratia,  ergo,  and  instar  are  construed  with  the 
Genitive. 

[SopMstae]  quaesttis  causa  pMlosopMbantur,  C,  Ac,  11.  23,  72  ;  the  pro- 
fessors of  ivisdom  dealt  in  philosophy  for  the  sake  of  gain.  Tu  me  amoris 
magis  quam  honoris  servavisti  gratia,  Enn.,  F.,  287  (m.);  thou  didst  save 
me  more  for  lovers  (sake)  than  (thou  didst)  for  honors  sake.  Virtiitis 
ergo,  C,  Opt.  Gen.,  7,  19;  on  account  of  valor,  instar  montis  equus,  V., 
^.,11.  15 ;  a  horse  the  bigness  of  a  mountain.  Plato  mihi  tinus  instar  est 
omnium,  C,  Br.,  51, 191  ;  Plato  by  himself  is  in  my  eyes  worth  them  all. 

Remarks. — i.  Causa  and  gratia,  for  the  sake,  commonly  follow  the 
Gen.  in  classical  Latin  and  also  in  the  Jurists.  In  Livy  and  later  they 
often  precede.  Ergo,  on  account,  belongs  especially  to  early  Latin, 
except  in  formulae  and  laws,  and  follows  its  Genitive.  It  is  rare  in  the 
poets.  Instar  is  probably  a  fossilized  Infinitive  (Instare),  meaning  •'  the 
equivalent, ^^  whether  of  size  or  value. 

2.  Except  for  special  reasons  causa  takes  the  possessive  pronoun  in 
agreement,  rather  than  the  personal  pronoun  in  the  Genitive  ;  more 
rarely  gratia : 

Vestra  reique  publicae  causa,  C,  Verr.,  v.  68,  173  ;  for  your  sake  and 
that  of  the  commonwealth.  But  in  antithesis,  multa  quae  nostri  causa 
numquam  faceremus,  facimus  causa  amIcSrum!  C,  Lael.,  16,  57  (disputed). 

II.    GENITIVE  WITH   ADJECTIVES. 

374.  Adjectives  of  Fulness,  of  Participation,  and  of  Power, 
of  Knowledge  and  Ignorance,  of  Desire  and  Disgust,  take 
the  Genitive. 

Plgnus  rimarum,  Ter.,  Eun.,  105  ;  full  of  chinks  ("a  leaky  vessel"). 
Particeps  consilii,  C,  Sidl.,  4,  12  ;  a  sharer  in  the  plan.  Mentis  compos, 
C. ,  Ph. ,  II.  38,  97;  in  possession  of  (one's)  mind.  Multarum  rgrum  peritus, 
C, -Fow^.,  II,  25 ;  versed  in  many  things.  Cupidus  pecuniae,  (/.  C.. 
Verr. ,  i.  3,  8  ;  grasping  after  money.  FastidiOsus  LatlnSrum  (litterarum), 
C,  Br.,  70,  247  ;  too  dainty  for  Latin.  Omnium  rerum  Inscius,  C,  Br., 
85,  292  ;  a  universal  igfwramus.  COr  n5n  ut  plSnus  vitae  conviva  recSdis  1 
Lucii.,  III.  938  (273).    Sitque memor  nostri  necne,  referte mihl,  Ov.,  TV.,  iv. 


GEN^ITIVE.  239 

3, 10  (204,  N.  7).  C5nsciamens  recti  Famae  mendacia  risit,  Ov.,  i^.,  iv.  31T 
(330,  R.).  Agricolam  laudat  iuris  Iggumque  peritus,  H.,  S.,i.  i,  9;  the  hus- 
bandman's lot)  is  praised  by  the  counsel  learned  in  the  law.  OnmSs  im- 
memorem  benelicii  oderunt,  C,  Off.,  11.  18,  63  ;  all  hate  a  man  loho  has  no 
memory  for  kindness.  (Bestiae)  sunt  rationis  et  orationis  expertes,  C,  Off. , 
I.  16,  50;  beasts  are  devoid  of  reason  and  speech  {lack  discourse  of  reason). 
Omnia  plgna  consiliorum,  inania  verbSrum  videmus,  C,  Or.,i.  g,  37;  ive  see 
a  ivorld  that  is  full  of  wise  measures,  void  of  eloquence.  Gallia  frugum 
fertilis  fuit,  L,,  v.  34,  2;  Gaul  was  productive  of  grain. 

Notes.— 1.  Of  adjectives  of  Fulness,  with  the  Gen.,  only  plenus,  repletus,  inops, 
and  inanis  are  classical  and  common  ;  single  instances  are  found  of  liberalis,  pro- 
fusus,  in  Sallust  (C,  7,  G  ;  5,  4),  and  ieiunus  occurs  once  in  Cicero.  Plautus  also 
uses  onustus  and  prodigus.  Poets  and  later  prose  writers  are  frce.  Plenus  occurs 
very  rarely  with  the  Abl.  in  Cicero  and  Caesar,  more  often  in  Livy.  Refertus  is 
used  by  Cicero  usually  with  the  Abl.  of  the  Thing  and  with  the  Gen.  of  the 
Person. 

2.  Participation :  Classical  are  particeps,  expers,  consors,  with  some  adjectives 
expressing  guilt,  as  manif  6stus  (archaic),  afiSnis,  reus.  Of  these  particeps  takes 
also  the  Dat.  in  post-classical  Latin,  and  expers  has  also  the  Abl.  (not  classical)  from 
Plautus  on.  (See  S.,  6'.,  33, 1.)  Aifinis  has  the  Dat.  in  Livv,  in  local  sense  also  ia 
Cicero  ;  reus  takes  Abl.  or  dS. 

3.  Pcnver :  Compos  alone  is  classical,  and  is  occasionally  found  with  Abl.  in  Sal- 
lust,  Vergil,  Livy.  Pot6ns  is  found  in  Plautus,  the  poets,  and  post-classical  prose  ; 
impos  in  Plautus,  and  then  not  until  Seneca. 

4.  Knoidedge  and  Ignorance :  Classical  are  some  eighteen.  Of  these  peritus  has 
also  Abl.,  and  rarely  ad ;  insuetus  takes  also  Dat.  as  well  as  dS ;  prudens  has  also 
ad  ;  rudis  has  Abl.  with  in  more  often  than  the  Gen.  in  Cicero,  but  also  ad.  Ante- 
classical  Latin  shows  a  few  more  adjectives. 

5.  JJesire  and  Disgust :  Classical  are  avidus,  cupidus,  fastidiosus,  studiosus. 
Of  these  avidus  has  also  in  with  Ace.  and  with  Abl. ;  studiosus  has  Dat.  in  Plautus 
{M.  G.,  801) ;  single  examples  are  cited  with  ad  and  in.  Fastidiosus  occurs  but  once 
in  Cicero  (see  above)  ;  see  H.,  (?.,  iii.  i,  37. 

6.  In  later  Latin  and  in  the  poets  almost  all  adjectives  that  denote  an  affection  of  the 
mind  take  a  Gen.  of  the  Thing  to  which  the  affection  refers,  where  model  prose  requires 
the  Abl.  or  a  preposition:  consilii  ambiguus,  Tac,  //.,  iv.  21 ;  daublful  of  purpose. 
Ingratus  salutis,  V.,  A.,  x.  665. 

The  analogy  of  these  adjectives  is  followed  by  others,  so  that  the  Gen.  becomes  a 
complement  to  the  adjective,  just  as  it  is  to  the  corresponding  substantive. 

Integer  vitae,  H.,  0.,  1. 22,  l ;  spotless  of  life ;  like  integritas  vitae.  (Compare 
l^ma  et  fortunis  integer,  S.,  //.,  11. 41, 5  D  ;  in  fame  and  fortunes  intact.) 

7.  The  seat  of  the  feeling  is  also  put  in  the  Gen.,  chiefly  with  animi  and  ingenii 
(which  were  probably  Locatives  originally).  Aeger  animi,  L.,  i.  58,  9  ;  sick  at  heart, 
heartsick.  Audax  ingenii,  Stat.,/?.,!!!.  2,  64  ;  daring  of  disposition.  The  PI.  is 
animls. 

8.  The  Gen.  with  adjectives  involving /S'epa/'a^zon  instead  of  the  Abl.  (390,  3)  begins 
with  the  Augustan  poets  ;  though  Sallust  shows  nudus  and  vacuus  (Tug.,  79,  G  ;  90, 
1);  liber  labonim,  H.,  A. P.,  212. 

9.  Classical  Latin  uses  certus  with  Gen.  only  in  the  phrase  certiorem  facere,  to 
inform,  which  has  also  d§  (always  in  Caesar). 

10.  Dignus,  worthy,  and  indignus,  unworthy,  with  Gen.  are  poetical  and  rare. 

11.  On  alienus,  strange,  see  359,  n.  2.  On  aequalis,  communis,  cdnscius,  con- 
trarius,  par,  proprius,  similis,  superstes,  and  the  like,  see  359,  r.  i. 


240  GENITIVE. 


Genitive  with  Verbals. 

375.  Some  Present  Participles  take  the  Genitive  when  they 
lose  their  verbal  nature  ;  and  so  occasionally  do  verbals  in 
-ax  in  poetry  and  later  prose. 

(Epaminondas)  erat  adeo  veritatis  dUigens  ut  ng  ioco  quidem  mentiretur, 
Nep.  ,  XV.  3,  1 ;  Epaminondas  ivas  so  careful  {such  a  lover)  of  the  truth 
as  not  to  tell  lies  even  in  jest.  Omnium  consgnsu  capax  imperii  nisi  im- 
perasset,  Tag.,  IT.,  i.  49  ;  by  general  consent  capable  of  empire,  had 
he  not  become  emperor. 

Notes.— 1.  The  participle  is  transient;  the  adjective  permanent.  The  simple  test 
is  the  substitution  of  the  relative  and  the  verb  :  amans  (participle),  loving  (ivho  is 
loving);  amans  (adjective), /or^t^,  (substantive),  lovei\-  patiens  (participle),  bearing 
(w/io  is  bea?'ing) ;  patiens  (adjective),  enduring.,  (substantive),  a  sufferer. 

2.  Ante-classical  Latin  shows  only  amans,  cupiens,  concupiens,  fugitans, 
gergns,  persequens,  scigns,  temperans.  Cicero  carries  the  usage  very  far,  and  it  is 
characteristic  of  his  style.   Caesar,  on  the  other  hand,  has  very  few  cases  (/?.  C,  i.  69, 3). 

Cicero  also  shows  the  first  case  of  a  Gen.  after  a  compared  participle.  Sumus 
nattlra  appetentissimi  honestatis,  C,  Tusc,  11.  24, 58.  These  participles  can  also 
revert  to  the  verbal  constructions. 

3.  Of  verbals  with  the  Gen.,  Plautus  shows  one  example  :  mendax  {Asin.,  855) ; 
Cicero  perhaps  one  :  rapax  {Lael.,  14, 50).  The  usage  in  later  Latin  and  the  poets  is 
confined  at  most  to  about  one  dozen  verbals. 


III.    GENITIVE   WITH   VERBS. 
Genitive   with    Verbs  of    Memory. 

376.  Verbs  of  Reminding,  Remembering,  and  Forgetting, 
take  the  Genitive. 

Tg  veteris  amicitiae  commonefScit,  [C]  ad  Her.,  iv.  24,  33 ;  he  reminded 
you  of  your  old  friendship.  Est  proprium  stultitiae  aliSrum  vitia  cernere, 
oblivisci  suSrum,  C,  Tusc,  iir.  30,  73;  the  fact  is,  it  shows  a  fool  to  have 
keen  eyes  for  the  faults  of  others,  to  forget  one's  own.  Ipse  iubet  mortis 
tg  meminisse  deus,  Mart.,  ii.  59;  a  god  himself  bids  you  remember  death. 

Remarks. — i.  Verbs  of  Reminding  take  more  often  the  Abl.  with 
d6  (so  regularly  in  Cicero),  and  the  Ace.  neut.  of  a  pronoun  or  Nu- 
meral adjective.     Tacitus  alone  uses  mongre  with  the  Gen.  (Ann.,  i. 

67,_1)- 

Oro  ut  Terentiam  moneatis  dg  tgstamento,  C,  Alt.,  xi.  16,  5;  I  beg  you 
to  put  Terentia  in  mind  of  the  will.  Discipulos  id  unum  moneo.  Quint., 
II.  9,  1  (333,  I). 

2.  Verbs  of  Remembering  and  Forgetting  also  take  the  Ace,  espe- 
cially of  Things : 


GENITIVE.  241 

Haec  olim  meminisse  iuvabit,  Y.,  A.,i.  203  ;  to  remember  these  things 
one  day  will  give  us  pleasure.  Qui  sunt  boni  civ6s,  nisi  qui  patriae  bene- 
ficia  meminSrunt  ?  C,  Plane,  33,  80  ;  wJw  are  good  citizens  except  those 
who  remember  the  benefits  conferred  by  their  country  ?  Oblivisci  nihil 
soles  nisi  iniurias,  C,  Lig.,  12,  35  ;  you  are  ivont  to  forget  nothing  except 
injuries. 

Eecordor  (literally  =  /  bring  to  heart,  to  mind)  is  construed  with  the 
Ace.  of  the  Thing,  except  in  three  passages  from  Cicero  ;  d6  is  found 
with  Persons. 

Et  v5cem  Anchisae  magni  voltumque  recorder,  Y.,  A.,  viii.  156  ;  and  I 
recall  (call  to  mind)  the  voice  and  countenance  of  Anchises  the  Great. 

Memini,  I  bear  in  mind,  I  (am  old  enough  to)  remember,  takes  the 
Accusative  : 

[Antipatrum]  tti  prob6  meministi,  C,  Or.,  iii.  50,  194  ;  you  remember 
Antipater  very  well. 

3.  Venit  mihi  in  mentem,  it  comes  into  (up  to)  my  mind,  may  be  con- 
strued impersonally  with  the  Gen.,  or  personally  with  a  subject  ;  the 
latter  by  Cicero  only  when  the  subject  is  a  neuter  pronoun. 

Venit  mihi  PlatSnis  in  mentem,  C,  Fin.,  v.  i,  2  ;  Plato  rises  before 
my  mind's  eye. 

Genitive  with   Verbs  of  Emotion. 

377.  Misereor,  /  pity,  takes  the  Genitive,  and  miseret,  it 
moves  to  pity,  paenitet,  it  repents,  piget,  it  irks,  pudet,  it 
wahes  ashamed,  taedet  and  pertaesum  est,  it  tires,  take  the 
Accusative  of  the  Person  Who  Feels,  and  the  Genitive  of  the 
Exciting  Cause. 

MisergminI  sociorum,  C,  Verr.,  i.  28,  72  ;  pity  your  allies  !  Suae  quem- 
que  forttinae  paenitet,  C,  Fam.,  vi.  i,  1 ;  each  man  is  discontented  with 
his  lot.  M@  non  solum  piget  stultitiae  meae,  sed  etiam  pudet,  C,  Bom., 
II,  29  ;  I  am  not  only  fretted  at  my  folly,  but  actually  ashamed  of  it. 

Remarks. — i.  Pudet  is  also  used  with  the  Gen.  of  the  Person  whose 
Presence  excites  the  shame  : 

Pudet  deorum  hominumque,  L.,  in.  19,  7  ;  it  is  a  shame  in  the  sight  of 
gods  and  men. 

2.  These  Impersonals  can  also  have  a  subject,  chiefly  a  Demon- 
strative or  Relative  pronoun  :  Non  t5  haec  pudent?  Ter.,  Ad.,  754  ;"  do 
not  these  things  put  you  to  the  blush  ? 

3.  Other  constructions  follow  from  general  rules.  So  the  Inf. 
(422)  and  quod  (542). 

Non  mS  vixisse  paenitet,  C,  Cat.M.,  23,  84  (540).     Quintum  paenitet 
quod  animum  tuum  offendit,  Cf.  C,  Att.^  xi.  13,  2;  Quintus  is  sorry  that 
he  has  wounded  your  feelings. 
16 


242  GEKITIVE. 

Notes.— 1.  With  the  same  construction  are  found  misereo  (early  Latin),  miseresco 
(poetical),  dispudet  (early  Latin),  distaedet  (early  Latin),  vereor  (mosDy  in  early 
Latin),  and  a  few  others. 

2.  Miserari  and  commiserari,  io  pity,  commiserate,  take  Ace.  until  very  late 
Latin. 

Genitive  with  Judicial  Verbs. 

The  Genitive  with  Judicial  Verbs  belongs  to  the  same  category  as  the  Genitive  with 
Verbs  of  Rating,  both  being  extensions  of  the  Genitive  of  Quality, 

378.  Verbs  of  Accusing,  Convicting,  Condemning,  and 
Acquitting  take  the  Genitive  of  the  Charge. 

(Miltiadgs)  acclisatus  est  proditionis,  Xep.,i.  7, 5;  Militiades  was 
accused  of  treason.  [Fannius]  C.  Verrem  insimulat  avaritiae,  (1,  Verr., 
I.  49,  128  ;  Fannius  charges  Oaius  Verres  with  avarice.  Video  non  t§ 
absoliitum  esse  improbitatis  sed  illos  damnatos  esse  caedis,  C,  Verr.,  i.  28, 
72  ;  /  see  not  that  you  are  acquitted  of  dishonor,  but  that  they  are  con- 
victed of  murder. 

Remarks. — i.  Judicial  Verbs  inchide  a  number  of  expressions  and 
usages.  So  capi,  teneri,  dSprehendi,  sg  adstringere,  s6  adligare,  se  obligare 
(ante-classical),  and  others,  mean  to  he  found  guilty  ;  increpare,  increpi- 
tare,  urggre,  dgferre,  arguere,  etc.,  mean  charge. 

So  also  kindred  expressions  :  reum  facere,  {to  make  a  party)  to  indict, 
to  bring  an  action  against ;  nomen  deferre  de,  to  bring  an  action 
against ;  sacrilegil  compertum  esse,  to  be  found  {guilty)  of  sacrilege. 

2.  For  thie  Gen.  of  the  Charge  may  be  substituted  nomine  or  crimine 
with  the  Gen.,  or  the  Abl.  with  de:  nomine  (crimine)  coniurationis 
damnare,  to  find  guilty  of  conspiracy  ;  accusare  de  vi,  of  violence  (Gen. 
vis  rare)  ;  dg  veneficio,  of  poiso7iing  ;  de  rebus  repetundis,  of  extortion. 
Postulare  always  has  dg  in  Cicero.  We  find  sometimes  in  with  Abl. ; 
convictus  in  crimine,  on  the  charge  ;  or,  inter :  inter  sicarios  damnatus  est, 
convicted  of  homicide  (C,  Cluent.,  7,  21  ;  Cf.  Ph.,  11,  4,  8). 

3.  Verbs  of  Condemning  and  Acquitting  take  the  Abl.  as  well  as  the 
Gen.  of  the  Charge  and  the  Punishment,  and  always  the  Abl.  of 
the  definite  Pine  ;  the  indefinite  Fine,  quanti,  dupli,  quadrupll,  etc.,  is 
in  the  Genitive. 

Accusare  capitis,  or  capite,  to  bring  a  capital  charge.  Damnare  capitis, 
or  capite,  to  condemn  to  death.  Damnari  decem  milibus,  to  be  fined  ten 
thousand. 

MultSre,  to  mulct,  is  always  construed  with  the  Ablative  :  Multare 
pecunia,  to  midct  in  (of)  money. 

Manlius  virtutem  filil  morte  multavit.  Quint.,  v.  ii,  7  ;  Ilanlius  puri' 
ished  the  valor  of  his  son  with  death. 

4.  Destination  and  Enforced  Labor  are  expressed  by  ad  or  in,  but  all 
examples  are  post-classical  :  damnari  ad  bgstias,  to  be  condemned  (to  be 


GENITIVE.  243 

thrown)  to  wild  beasts  ;  ad  (in)  metalla,  to  the  mities  ;  ad  (in)  opus  pub- 
licum, to  hard  labor.  Voti  damnari,  to  be  boiind  to  fulfil  a  vow,  is 
Livian  (except  Nep.,  xx.  5,  8,  where  it  has  a  different  sense). 

5.  Verbs  of  Accusing-  may  have  also  the  Ace.  of  the  Thing  and  the 
Gen.  of  the  Person  :  inertiam  accusas  adulescentium,  C,  Or.,  i.  58,  340. 

Genitive  with  Verbs  of  Rating  and  Buying. 

379.  Verbs  of  Eating  and  Buying  are  construed  with  the 
Genitive  of  the  general  value  or  cost,  and  the  Ablative  of  the 
particular  value  or  cost.     (404.) 

Verbs  of  Rating  are  :  aestimare,  existimare  (rare),  to  value  ;  putare, 
to  reckon ;  ducere  (rare  in  Cicero),  to  take  ;  habgre,  to  hold  ;  pendere 
(mostly  in  Comedy),  to  weigh  ;  facere,  to  make,  put ;  esse,  to  be  (worth) ; 
fieri,  to  be  considered. 

Verbs  of  Buying  are  :  emere,  to  buy  ;  vendere,  to  sell ;  vgnire,  to  be 
for  sale ;  stare  and  constare,  to  cost,  to  come  to  ;  prostare,  licgre,  to  be 
exposed,  left  (for  sale) ;  condticere,  to  hire  ;  locare,  to  let. 

380.  I.  Verbs  of  Eating  take  : 

Magni,  much,  pluris,  more,  pltirimi,  maximi,  most, 

Parvi,  little,  minoris,  less,  minimi,  least, 

Tanti,  tantidem,  so  quanti  (and  compounds),  nibili,  naught, 
mucli,                          how  much. 

Equivalents  of  nihili,  nothing,  are  flocci,  a  lock  of  wool,  nauci,  a  triflCf 
assis,  a  copper,  pili  (both  in  Catullus,  mainly),  and  the  like,  and  so  akjo 
huius,  that  (a  snap  of  the  finger),  all  usually  with  the  negative. 

Dum  n6  ob  malefacta,  peream ;  parvi  existumo,  Pl.,  Capt.,  6S2,  ;  so 
long  as  it  be  not  for  misdeeds,  let  me  die  ;  little  do  I  care.  [Voluptatemj 
virtus  minimi  facit,  C,  Fin.,  11.  13,  42  ;  virtue  makes  very  little  account 
of  the  pleasure  of  the  senses.  [ludices]  rem  publicam  flocci  non  faciunt, 
Cf.  C,  Att.,\v.iC),4:  ',  the  judges  do  not  care  a  fig  for  tlie  State.  Non 
habeo  nauci  Marsum  augurem,  C,  Div.,  i.  58,  132  ;  /  do  not  value  a 
Ifarsian  augur  a  baubee. 

Remark. — Tanti  is  often  used  in  the  sense  of  operae  pretium  est  =  *V 
is  ivorth  ivhile. 

Est  mihi  tanti  huius  invidiae  tempestatem  subire,  C,  Cat.,  n,  7, 15  ;  it 
is  worth  while  {the  cost),  in  my  eyes,  to  bear  this  storm  of  odium. 

Notes.— 1.  Aestim5  is  found  with  the  Abl.  as  well  as  with  the  Genitive.  So 
aestimare  magno  and  magni,  to  value  highly.    Cicero  prefers  the  Ablative. 

2.  Observe  the  phrases  :  boni  (aequi  bonique)  faciS  (a  colloquialism),  boni  con- 
suls (an  old  formula),  I jmt  vp  with,  take  in  good  part.  Non  pSnsi  habgre  (ducere), 
to  consider  not  worth  the_whUe,  is  post- Augustan  and  rare. 


244  GENITIVE. 

2.  Verbs  of  Buying  take  tanti,  quanti,  pluris,  and  minoris, 

The  rest  are  put  in  the  Ablative. 

Vendo  meum  (frumentum)  non  pluris  quam  ceteri,  fortasse  etiam  minoris, 
C,  Off.,  III.  12,  51  ;  I  sell  my  corn  not  dearer  than  everybody  else,  per- 
haps even  cheaper.  Magis  ilia  iuvant  quae  pluris  emuntur,  Juv.,  xi.  16  ; 
things  give  more  pleasure  ivhich  are  bought  for  more.  Emit  (Canius  hor- 
tos)  tanti  quanti  Pythius  voluit,  C,  Off.,  in.  14,  59  ;  Canius  bought  the 
gardens  at  the  price  Pythius  waiited. 

Quanti  cenas  ?     Wliat  do  you  give  for  your  dinner  f 

Quanti  habitas  %     ^Vhat  is  the  rent  of  your  lodgings  9 

But: 

Parvo  famgs  constat,  magno  ^stidium.  Sen.,  E.3I.,  17,  4  ;  hunger  costs 
little,  daintiness  much. 

An  instructive  shift: 

Emit?  peril  hercle:  quanti? — Viginti  minis,  Ti:r,,  ^mw.,  984  ;  he 
bought  her  9    Tm  undone.     For  how  much  ? — Twenty  minae. 

Kejiark. — Bene  emere,  to  buy  cheap ;  bene  vgndere,  to  sell  dear ;  male 
emere,  to  buy  dear  ;  male  vgndere,  to  sell  cheap.  So,  too,  other  adverbs: 
melius,  optimS,  peius,  pessime. 

Genitive  with   Interest  and   Refert. 

381.  Interest  and  Refert  take  a  Genitive  of  the  Person, 
seldom  of  the  Thing,  concerned. 

Interest  omnium  rgctS  facere,  C,  Fin.,  it.  22,  72  ;  it  is  to  the  interest 
of  all  to  do  right.  Refert  compositionis  quae  quibus  anteponas.  Quint., 
IX.  4,  44  ;  it  is  of  importance  for  the  arrangement  of  words,  which  you 
put  before  which. 

Instead  of  the  Genitive  of  the  personal  pronouns,  the 
Ablative  Singular  feminine  of  the  possessives  is  employed. 

Mea  interest,  mea  rgfert,  /  am  concerned. 

Notes.— 1.  Rgfert  is  commonly  used  absolutely,  occasionally  with  mea,  etc.,  sel- 
dom with  the  Gen.,  in  the  classical  language. 

2.  Instead  of  Apposition  use  the  Relative  : 

Vehementer  intererat  vestra,  qui  patrgs  estis,  liber5s  vestros  hie  potissi- 
mum  discere,  Plin.,  Ep.,  iv.  13, 4 ;  a  wei^e  vastly  to  the  interest  of  you  parents,  that 
your  children,  if  possible,  were  taught  at  home. 

3.  The  Nom.  as  a  subject  is  rare,  except  in  PLiNy''s  Natural  IRstory : 
Usque  adeo  magni  rgfert  studium  atque  voluptas,  Lucr.,  iv.  984. 
Occasionally  the  Nom.  of  a  neuter  pronoun  is  found  : 

Quid  (Ace.)  tua  id  (Nom.)  rgfert  ?  Teb.,  Ph.,  723  ;  what  business  is  that  of  yours? 

4.  Rgfert  is  the  more  ancient,  and  is  employed  by  the  poets  (interest  is  excluded 
from  Dactylic  poetry  by  its  ordinary  forms)  to  the  end  of  the  classical  period.  Inter- 
est is  peculiar  to  prose,  employed  exclneively  by  Caesar,  and  preferred  by  Cicero 
V  hen  ii  complement  is  added. 


GENITIVE.  245 

5.  No  satisfactory  explanation  has  been  given  of  this  construction.  One  view  is 
that  mea  rgfert  was  originally  [ex]  mea  r6  fert  (like  ex  mea  re  est),  it  is  to  my  ad- 
tantage,  and  that  the  ex  was  lost.  Interest  having  much  the  same  force,  but  being 
later  in  development,  took  the  constructions  of  rSfert  by  false  analogy.  The  Gen. 
would  be  but  parallel  to  the  possessive. 

382.  T.  The  Degree  of  Concern  is  expressed  by  an  Adverb, 
Adverbial  Accusative,  or  a  Genitive  of  Value. 

Id  mea  minume  rgfert,  Ter.,  Ad.,  881  ;  that  makes  no  diffei'ence  at  all 
to  me.  Theodori  nihil  interest,  C,  Tusc,  i.  43,  102  ;  It  is  no  concei-n  of 
Theodorus.  Magni  interest  mea  una  nos  esse,  C,  Att,,  xiii.  4  ;  it  is  of 
great  importance  to  me  that  we  he  together. 

2.  The  Object  of  Concern  is  commonly  put  in  the  Infini- 
tive, Accusative  and  Infinitive,  ut  or  ne  with  the  Subjunc- 
tive, or  an  Interrogative  Sentence. 

Quid  Milonis intererat  interfici ClSdium ?  C,  3Iil.,  13.84  ;  ivhat  interest 
had  3Iilo  in  Clodins'  being  killed  9  [Caesar  dicere  solebat]  n6n  tarn  sua 
quamrel  publicae  interesse  uti  salvus  esset.  Suet.,  lul.,  86  ;  Caesar  used  to 
say  that  it  was  not  of  so  much  importance  to  him{self)  as  to  the  State 
that  his  life  should  he  spared.  Vestra  interest  n6  imperatorem  pessimi 
faciant,  Tag.,  //.,  i.  30  ;  it  is  to  your  interest  that  the  dregs  of  creation 
do  not  make  the  emperor.  Quid  rgfert  tales  versus  qua  voce  legantur  1 
Juv.,xi.  182;  what  matters  it  what  voice  such  verses  are  recited 
with  f 

3.  The  Thing  Involved  is  put  in  the  Accusative  with  ad : 

Magni  ad  honorera  nostrum  interest  quam  primum  m6  ad  urbem  venire, 

C,  Fam.,  xvr.  I,  1  ;  it  makes  a  great  difference  touching  our  honor  that 
J  should  come  to  the  city  as  soon  as  possihle. 

Occasional   Uses. 

383.  I-  The  Genitive  is  found  occasionally  with  certain  Verbs  of 
Fulness  :  in  classical  Latin  principally  implgre,  complgre,  eggre,  indiggre. 

Piso  multos  codicgs  implgvit  earum  rerum,  C,  Verr.  i.  46,  119  ;  Piso 
fdled  many  books  full  of  those  things.  Virtus  plurimae  commentationis 
et  exercitationis  indiget,  Cf.  C,  Fin.,  in.  15,  50;  virtue  stands  in  need 
of  much  {very  much)  study  and  practice. 

Notes.— 1.  Classical  Latin  shows  in  all  cases  the  Abl.  much  more  frequently  than 
the  Gen.,  except  in  the  case  of  indiggre,  where  Ciceko  prefers  the  Genitive.  Livy 
Ukevvise  prefers  the  Gen.  with  implere. 

2.  Ante-classical  and  poetic  are  explgre  (Verg.),  abundare  (Luc),  scatere 
(LucR.),  saturare  (Plaut.),  obsaturare  (Ter.),  cargre  (Ter.).  Cargre  and  eggre 
have  the  Ace.  occasionally  in  early  Latin. 

3.  other  Grecisms   are   laborum  dgcipitur,  H.,  6>.,ii.  13.  38  (reading  doubtful). 


246  ABLATIVE. 

Regnavit  popul5ruin,  H.,  0.,  in.  30, 12.  Also  mirari  with  Gen.  in  Vergil  (A.,  XL 
126).  Noteworthy  is  the  occasional  use  of  crSdere  with  Gen.  in  Plautus  ;  so  once 
falli. 

2.  A  Genitive  of  Separation,  after  the  analogy  of  the  Greek,  is  found 
in  a  few  cases  in  tiie  poets. 

Tit  mg  omnium  iam  labOrum  levas,  Pl.,  Rud.  247  ;  how  you  relieve  me 
at  last  of  all  my  toils  and-  troubles.  DSsine  mollium  tandem  querellarnm, 
H.,  0.,  II.  9, 17  ;  cease  at  last  from  womanish  complainings. 

3.  The  Genitive  in  Exclamations  occurs  in  a  very  few  instances  in 
the  poets.  Cat.,  ix.  5  ;  Prop.,  iv.  (v.)  7,  21  ;  compare  Pl.,  Most.,  912  ; 
LucAN,  II.  45. 

On  the  Genitive  after  comparatives,  see  296,  n.  3. 

ABLATIVE. 

384.  The  Ablative  is  the  Adverbial,  as  the  Genitive  is  the 
Adjective  case.     It  contains  three  elements  : 

A.  Where  ?    B.  Whence  ?    C.  Wherewith  ? 

In  a  literal  sense,  the  Ablative  is  commonly  used  with  prepositions  ; 
in  a  figurative  sense,  it  is  commonly  used  without  prepositions. 

A.  The  xVblative  of  the  Place  Where  appears  in  a  figurative  sense  as 
the  Ablative  of  the  Time  When. 

B.  The  Ablative  of  the  Place  Whence  appears  as  : 

I.  The  Ablative  of  Origin.     2.  The  Ablative  of  Measure. 

C.  The  Ablative  of  the  Thing  Wherewith  appears  in  a  figurative 
sense,  as  : 

I.  The  Ablative  of  Manner.  2.  The  Ablative  of  Quality.  3.  The 
Ablative  of  Means. 

Remark. — It  is  impossible  to  draw  the  line  of  demarcation  with 
absolute  exactness.  So  the  Ablative  of  Cause  may  be  derived  from  any 
of  the  three  fundamental  significations  of  the  case,  which  is  evidently 
a  composite  one. 

To  these  we  add  : 

D.  The  Ablative  of  Cause,     E.  The  Ablative  Absolute. 

I.    The  Literal  Meanings  of  the  Ablative, 

A.    ABLATIVE  OF  THE   PLACE  WHERE. 
AbiatTvus  Localis. 

385.  The  Ablative  answers  the  question  Where  9  and  takes 
as  a  rule  the  preposition  in. 

In  porta  navig5,  Ter.,  And.,  480  ;  lam  sailing  in  harbor.  Pons  in 
HibgrO  prope  effectus  (erat),  Caes.,  ^.C,  i.  62,  3  ;  the  bridge  over  the 


ABLATIVE.  247 

Ebro  was  nearly  finished.  Histrio  in  scaena  [est],  Pl.,  Poen.,  20  ;  the 
actor  is  on  the  stage.  Haeret  in  equo  senex,  Cf.  C,  Dei.,  10,  28  ;  the  old 
man  sticks  to  his  horse. 

Remarks. — i.  Verbs  of  Placing  and  kindred  significations  take  the 
Abl.  with  in,  to  designate  the  result  of  the  motion  :  classical  are  ponere, 
io  place,  and  compounds  ;  locare,  collocare,  to  put ;  statuere,  constituere, 
to  set ;  considere,  to  settle  ;  defigere,  to  plant ;  demergere,  to  plunge  ; 
imprimere,  to  press  upon  ;  insculpere,  to  engrave  (figurative)  ;  inscribere, 
to  write  upon ;  incidere,  io  carve  upon  ;  includere,  to  shut  into, 

Plato  rationem  in  capite  posuit,  iram  in  pectore  locavit,  C,  Tusc,  i.  10, 
20  ;  Plato  has  put  reaso?i  in  the  head,  has  placed  anger  in  the  breast, 
(Lucretia)  cultrum  in  corde  dSflgit,  L.,  i.  58,  11  ;  Lucretia  plants  a  knife 
in  {thrusts  a  knife  down  into)  her  heart.  Philosophl  in  lis  libris  ipsis 
qu5s  scrlbunt  dS  contemnenda  gloria  sua  nomina  inscribunt,  C,  Tusc,  i. 
15,  34  ;  philosophers  ivrite  their  oivn  names  on  (the  titles  of)  the  very 
books  which  they  write  about  contempt  of  glory.  (Foedus)  in  columna 
agnea  inclsum,  C,  Balb.,  23,  53  ;  a  treaty  cut  upoii  a  brazen  colunm. 

The  same  observation  applies  to  sub : 

Pone  sub  curru  nimium  propinqui  solis  in  terra  domibus  negata,  H.,  0., 
I.  22,  21 ;  put  (me)  under  the  chariot  of  the  ail-too  neighboring  sun,  in  a 
land  denied  to  dwellings. 

2.  Verbs  of  Hanging  and  Fastening  take  ex,  ab,  or  d§. 

Culspgs  omnis  pendet  exfortuna,  huic  nihil  potest  esse  certi,  C,  Par.,  11. 
17  ;  to  him  who  has  all  his  hojyes  suspended  on  fortune,  nothing  can  be 
certain. 

3.  Here  and  there  in  is  often  rendered  by  per :  C.,Fam.,  i.  7,  6,  per 
provlncias,  here  and  there  in  the  provinces  ;  V.,  A.,  iii.  236. 

Notes.— 1.  In  classical  pro^e  the  use  of  the  Abl.  without  in  is  confined  to  a  few 
M'ords,  mostly  phraseological.  So  terra,  on  land  ;  marl,  Ay  f<ea  ;  usually  in  the  phrase 
terra  marique  (rarely  in  the  reversed  order),  on  land  and  sea.  In  terra  is  more 
common  otherwise  than  terra.  Loco  and  locis,  especially  when  used  with  adjectives, 
usually  omit  in.  The  same  is  true  of  parte  and  partibus  ;  so  regularly  dextra 
(parte),  sinistra,  laeva,  etc.,  on  the  right,  on  the  left.  Livt  uses  regio  like  locus. 
The  tendency,  however,  is  observable  as  early  as  Cicero's  time  to  omit  the  in  when 
an  adjective  is  employed,  even  in  words  other  than  those  given  above  ;  this  tendency 
becomes  more  marked  in  Livy  and  is  very  strong  in  later  Latin.  The  poets  are  free. 
Regard  must  always  be  had  to  389. 

2.  The  Ace.  with  in  after  verbs  of  Placing  is  very  rare  in  classical  prose.  In  early 
Latin  it  is  more  common  ;  so  with  ponere,  imponere,  CoUocare.  The  examples  with 
Ace.  in  classical  Latin  are  principally  with  compounds  of  ponere,  as  imponere  (usu- 
ally), reponere,  exp5nere.  Collocare  with  in  and  Ace.  in  Caes.,  b.  G.,  i.  18, 7,  is  not 
in  a  local  sense.     Sometimes  the  Dat.  is  found  with  imponere. 

3.  With  a  verb  of  Rest  the  motion  antecedent  to  the  rest  is  often  emphasized  by  con- 
struing the  verb  with  in  and  the  Ace.  instead  of  wnth  in  and  the  Abl.  This  occurs 
most  often  with  esse  and  Jiab§re,  and  seems  to  have  been  colloquial,  as  it  is  very  rare 
in  classical  prose. 

Numero  mihi  in  mentem  fuit  dis  advenientem  gratias  agere,  Pl.,  Am.,  180. 


248  ABLATIVE. 

Adesse  in  senatum  itissit,  c,  Ph.,  v.  7, 19  {Cf.  hQc  ades,  come  hither).   Parcere 
victis  in  animum  habSbat,  L.,  xxxm.  10, 4. 

386.  Names  of  Towns  in  the  Singular  of  the  Third  Declen- 
sion, and  in  the  Plural  of  all  Declensions,  take  the  Ablative 
of  Place  Where  without  in. 

Ut  Romae  consules  sic  Carthagine  quotannis  binlrgges  creabantur,  Nep., 
XXIII.  7,  4  ;  as  at  Rome  (two)  consuls,  so  in  Carthage  tivo  Icings,  were 
created  yearly.  Talis  (Romae  Fabricius),  qualis  Aristidgs  Athgnis,  fait,  C, 
Off.,  III.  22,  87;  Fabricius  was  just  such  a  man  at  Rome  as  Aristides 
was  at  Athens. 

Eemarks. — I.  Appositions  are  put  in  the  Abl.  commonly  with  in; 
when  the  appoi^itive  has  an  attribute,  the  proper  name  regularly  pre- 
cedes :  Neapoli,  in  celeberrimo  oppidO,  C,  Rah. Post.,  10,  26;  at  Naples, 
a  populous  town. 

2.  In  the  neighborhood  of,  at,  is  ad  with  Ace,  especially  of  military 
operations:  pugna  ad  Cannas  (better  Cannensis).  the  battle  at  Cannae; 
p5ns  ad  Genavam,  Caes.,  B.G.,i.  7;  the  bridge  at  Geneva. 

Note.— The  Abl.  in  names  of  Towns  of  the  Second  Declension  is  found  once  in  Cae- 
sar {£.  C,  in.  35,  but  the  reading  is  questioned)  ;  more  often  in  Vitruvius  and  later 
Latin,  but  in  Greek  words  only.  Apparent  exceptions  in  Caesar  and  Cicero  are  to  be 
referred  to  the  Abl.  of  Separation.    The  poets,  however,  are  free. 

387.  In  citations  from  Books  and  in  Enumerations,  the 
Ablative  of  the  Place  Where  is  used  without  in. 

LibrS  tertio,  third  booh  ;  versu  decimS,  tenth  verse  ;  alio  loc5,  elsewhere. 

But  in  is  necessary  when  a  passage  in  a  book  and  not  the  whole  book  is 
meant  :  Agricultiira  laudatur  in  eo  libro  qui  est  d6  tuenda  rg  familiari,  C, 
Cat,  31.,  17,  59;  agriculture  is  praised  in  the  work  on  domestic  economy. 

388.  In  designations  of  Place,  with  totus,  cUnctus,  whole  ; 
omnis,  all ;  medius,  middle,  the  Ablative  of  the  Place  Where 
is  generally  used  without  in. 

Menippos,  me5  iMiciS,  tota  Asia  disertissimos,  C,  Br.,  91,  815  ;  Menip- 
pus,  in  my  judgment,  the  most  eloquent  man  in  all  Asia  (Minor). 
Battiadgs  semper  totocantabitur  orbe,  Ov.,  Am.,  i.  15,  13;  Battiades  (Cal- 
liraachus)  ivill  always  be  sung  throughout  the  world. 

Remark. — In  is  not  excluded  when  the  idea  is  throughout,  in  which 
case  per  also  may  be  used.  Nego  in  Sicilia  tOta  {throughout  the  whole  of 
Sicily)  O-llum  argenteum  vas  fuisse,  etc.,  C,  Verr.,  iv.  i,  1. 

389.  In  all  such  designations  of  Place  as  may  be  regarded 
in  the  light  of  Cause,  Manner,  or  Instrument,  the  Ablative 
is  used  without  a  preposition. 


ABLATIVE.  249 

Xrt  terra  Thermopylarum  angustiae  Graeciam,  ita  marJ  fretum  EurlpI 
claudit,  L.jXXXi.  23,  12  ;  as  the  pass  of  Thermopylae  bars  Greece  by 
land,  so  the  frith  of  Euripus  by  sea.  Ariovistus  exercitum  castris  conti- 
nuit,  Caes.,  B.G.,  i.  48,  4  ;  Ariovistus  kept  his  army  withiii  the  camp. 
Egressus  est  non  vils  sed  tramitibus,  C,  Ph.,  xiii.  g,  19^  he  ivent  out  not 
by  high  roads  but  by  cross-cuts.  Nemo  ire  quemquam  publica  prohibet 
via,  Pl.,  Cure,  35  ;  no  man  forbiddeth  {any  one  to)  travel  by  the  public 
road.  Matris  cinergs  Romam  Tiber!  subvecti  sunt,  Cf.  Suet.,  Cal,  15; 
his  mother's  ashes  ivere  brought  u])  to  Pome  by  the  Tiber. 

So  recipere  aliquem  t6cto,  oppido,  portu,  to  receive  a  man  into  one's 
house,  town,  harbor;  where,  however,  the  Ace.  with  in  is  not  excluded: 
recipe  mg  in  tectum.     Pl.,  R.,  574. 

B.    ABLATIVE    OF   THE    PLACE   WHENCE. 
Ablatlvus  SeparatTvus. 

390.  I.  The  Ablative  answers  the  question  Whence?  and 
takes  as  a  rule  the  prepositions  ex,  out  of,  de,from,  ab,  of. 

(Eum)  exturbasti  ex  aedibusl  Pl.,  Trin.,  137  ;  did  you  hustle  him  out 
of  the  house  ?  Araneas  deiciam  d6  pariete,  Pl.,  aS/.,  355  ;  /  ivill  get  the 
cobwebs  down  from  the  wall.  Alcibiadem  Athgniensgs  g  civitate  expulg- 
runt,  Cf.  Nep.,  vii.  6,  2  ;  the  Athenians  banished  Alcibiades  from  the 
sfrrfe.  Dgcgdit  ex  Gallia  RQmam  Naevius,  C,  Quinct.,  4.  IG  ;  Naevius 
withdrew  from  Gaul  to  Rome.  Unde  dgigcisti  sive  ex  quo  loco,  sive  a 
quo  loc5  {whether  out  of  or  from  which  place),  eo  restituas,  C,  Caec, 
30,  88. 

2.  The  prepositions  are  often  omitted  with  Verbs  of  Ab- 
staining, Removing,  Relieving,  and  Excluding  ;  so  regularly 
with  domo,  from  home,  rure,  from  the  country. 

With  Persons  a  preposition  (chiefly  ab)  must  be  used. 

(Verrgs)  omnia  domo  gius  abstulit,  C,  Fe/r.,  n.  34,  88  ;  Verres  took 
every thi7ig  away  from  his  house.  Ego,  cum  TuUius  rtire  redierit,  mittam 
eum  ad  tg,  C,  Fam.,  v.  20,  9  ;  when  Tullius  returns  from  the  country,  I 
will  send  him  to  you. 

Compare  Aligno  manum  abstineant,  Cato,  Ayr.,  5,  1  ;  let  them  keep 
their  hand{s)from  other  people's  property,  with  [Alexander]  vix  a  sg  manus 
abstinuit,  C,  Tusc,  iv.  37,  79  ;  Alexander  hardly  kept  (could  hardly 
keep)  his  hands  from  himself  {from  laying  hands  on  himself). 

Compare  Lapidibus  optimos  viros  foro  pellis,  C,  Har.Res.,  18,  39;  you 
drive  men  of  the  best  classes  from  the  forum  with  stones,  with  Istum 
aemulum  ab  ea  pellito,  Ter.,  Eun.,  215  ;  drive  that  rival  from  her. 

Compare  Omnium  rgrum  nattira  cognita  liberamur  mortis  metti,  C, 
Fin.,  I.  19,  63;  by  the  knowledge  of  universal  nature  we  get  rid  of  the 


250  ABLATIVE. 

fear  of  death,  with  T5  ab  eo  libero,  C,  Q.F.,  iii.  i.  3,  9;  I  rid  you  of 
Mm. 

Compare  Amicitia  nullo  loco  excluditur,  C,  Lael.,  6,  22  ;  friendship  is 
shut  out  from  noplace,  with  Ab  ilia  exoludor,  hoc  concludor,  cy.  Ter., 
And.,  386 ;  /  am  shut  out  from  her  (and)  shut  up  here  {to  live  with  her). 

Notes.— 1.  In  classical  Latin  the  preposition  is  usually  employed  in  local  relations, 
and  omitted  in  metaphorical  relations  ;  though  there  are  some  exceptions. 

2.  It  is  to  be  noted  that  in  the  vast  majority  of  cases  the  separation  is  indicated  by  a 
verb  ;  hence  this  Abl.  is  found  commonly  with  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions. 
Thus,  classical  Latin  shows  but  few  simple  verbs  with  the  Abl.,  as  follows  :  mov6re, 
chiefly  in  general  or  technical  combinations  :  movere  loco,  senatu,  tribu  (Caesar, 
however,  has  no  case) ;  pellere,  in  technical  language  with  civitate,  domo,  foro, 
patria,  possessionibus,  suis  sgdibus ;  cedere  is  found  with  patria,  vita,  me- 
moria,  possessione,  Italia;  cadere,  technical  with  causa;  solvere  with  lege 
(legibus),  religione,  etc.,  somno;  levare  and  liberare  are  found  cliiefly  in  meta- 
phorical combinations,  and  especially  in  Cicero  ;  arcSre  has  peculiarly  ab  with 
metaphorical,  Abl.  with  local  forces.  In  the  case  of  most  of  these  verbs,  the  preposi- 
tion with  the  Abl.  is  also  found. 

3.  Of  compound  verbs  with  the  Abl.,  Cicero  shows  only  s6  abdicare  (principally 
technical),  abesse  (rarely),  abhorrSre  (once) ;  abire  (in  technical  uses  —  sS  abdicare), 
abrumpere  (once),  absolvere,  abstinere  (intrans.  without,  trans,  more  often  with, 
preposition),  dSicere  (with  aedilitate,  etc.),  dgmovere  (once),  dgpellere,  dgsistere, 
deturbare ;  gdticere  (rare) ;  efferre  (rare) ;  egredi ;  gicere ;  61abi  (rare) ;  emit- 
tere  (Caes.)  ;  gripere  (rare;  usually  Dat.) ;  gvertere;  excgdere ;  excliidere; 
exire  (rare) ;  expellere ;  exsolvere  ;  exsistere  (rare) ;  exturbare ;  intercludere  ; 
interdicere  (alicui  aliqua  rg ;  also  alicui  aliquid) ;  praecipitare  (Caes*.)  ;  probi- 
bgre ;  supersedgre. 

Early  Latin  shows  a  few  more  verbs  witli  this  construction.  The  poets  are  free  with 
the  Abl.,  and  also  later  prose  writers,  beginning  with  Livy. 

4.  H■llIno,/rw/^  the  ground,  begins  with  Vergil.  The  preposition  a  is  found  occar 
sionally  with  domO  ;  necessarily  with  a  word  (adjective  or  adverb)  involving  measure- 
ment, as ;  longinqug,  longg,  procul. 

5.  Compounds  with  di  (dis)  also  take  the  Dative  (in  poetry) : 

Paulum  sepultae  distat  inertiae  cglata  virtas,  H.,  0.,iv.  9,29;  little  doth 
hidden  worth  differ frmn  buried  doth. 

6.  The  Place  Whence  gives  the  Point  of  View  from  which.  In  English  a  different 
translation  is  often  given,  though  not  always  necessarily  :  a  tergo,  in  the  rear ;  ex 
parte  dextra,  on  the  right  side ;  ab  oriente,  on  the  east :  a  tanto  spatid,  at  such  a 
distance ;  ex  fuga,  on  the  flight ;  a  rg  friimentaria  laborare,  to  be  e/nbarrassed  in 
the  matter  of  i^rovisions. 

3.  The  prepositions  are  also  omitted  with  kindred  Adjec- 
tives. 

Animus  excelsus  omni  est  liber  ciirS,  C,  Fin.,  i.  15,  49  ;  a  lofty  mind 
is  free  from  all  care.  (Cato)  omnibus  hamanis  vitiis  immunis,  semper  for- 
tfinam  in  sua  potestate  babuit,  Vell.,ii.  35,2  ;  Cato,  exempt  from  all 
human  failings,  always  had  fortune  in  Jiis  own  potver.  lugurtha  (Ad- 
herbalem)  extorrem  patria  eflfgcit,  S., /wi^r.,  14,  11  ;  Jugurtha  rendered 
Adherhal  an  exile  from  his  country.  Utrumque  (fraus  et  vis)  homine 
aiignissimum,  C,  Off.,  1. 13,  41. 


ABLATIVE.  251 

Notes.— 1 .  The  preposition  is  more  usual  in  most  cases.  PUms  and  immtlnis,  with 
simple  Abl.,  are  poetical  and  post- Augustan.  Expers,  with  Abl.  instead  of  with  Gen., 
belongs  to  early  Latin  and  Sallust.  BecSns,  fresh  from,  with  Abl.,  belongs  to 
Tacitus. 

2.  Procul,  far  from,  regularly  takes  the  preposition  ab,  except  in  the  poets  and 
later  prose. 

3.  The  Abl.  of  the  Supine  is  early  and  late,  as  Cato,  Agr..,  5  ;  Vllicus  primus  cu- 
bitti  surgat,  postrgmus  cubitum  eat.    See  436,  n.  4. 

391.  Names  of  Towns  and  Small  Islands  are  put  in  the 

Ablative  of  the  Place  Whence. 

Dgmaratus  fugit  Tarquinios  Corintho,  C,  Tusc,  v.  37,  109  ;  Demaratus 
fled  to  Tarquinii  from  Corinth.  Dolabella  Delo  proficiscitur,  C,  Yerr., 
I.  18,  46  ;  Dolabella  sets  out  from  Delos. 

Remarks. — i.  The  prepositions  ab  (a)  and  ex  (6)  are  sometimes  used 
for  the  sake  of  g^reater  exactness,  but  rarely  in  model  prose.  So  regu- 
larly ab  with  tlie  Phice  from  which  distance  is  measured  : 

[Aesculapii  templum]  quinque  milibus  passuum  ab  urbe  [Epidauro]  distat, 
Cf  L.,XLV.  28,  a  (403,  N.l). 

When  the  substantives  urbe,  city,  and  oppido,  town,  are  employed,  the 
use  of  the  preposition  is  the  rule,  as  also  when  not  the  town,  but  the 
neighborhood  is  intended  ;  also  always  with  longS.  When  the  Apposi- 
tivc  has  an  attribute  the  ])roper  name  regularly  precedes. 

Aulide,  ex  oppido  Boeotiae,  from  Aulis,  a  town  of  Boeotia.  Ex  Apol- 
lOnia  Ponti  urbe,  from  Apollonia,  a  city  of  Pontus.  Ex  oppido  Gergovia, 
Caes.,  B.G.,\u.  4,  2  ;  from  the  toivn  of  Gergovia. 

Early  Latin  is  free  in  the  use  of  prepositions  ;  and  also  from  Livy 
on  the  usage  seems  to  increase. 

2.  The  Place  Whence  embraces  all  the  local  designations  : 
Agrigento  ex  Aesculapii  fano  whereas  we  should  say,  from  the  temple 

of  Aesculapius  at  Agrigentum.    Unde  domo  ?  V.,  A.,  vni.  1 14;  from  what 
home  ? 

3.  Letters  are  dated  froryi  rather  than  at  a  place. 

Note.— Names  of  countries  are  but  rarely  used  in  the  Ablative.  Cicero,  Sallust, 
and  LiVY  show  no  instance,  Caesar  only  one  {B.  C,  in.  58, 4).  Occasional  examples 
are  found  in  early  Latin  and  in  old  inscriptions  ;  then  in  later  historians,  beginning 
with  Velleius.  The  use  of  prepositions  with  towns  seems  in  general  to  have  been  a 
colloquialism,  Cf.  Suet.,  Aug.,  86.    The  poets  are  free  in  their  usage. 

C.    ABLATIVE    OF   THE   THING   WHEREWITH. 
AblatTvus  SociatTvus. 

392.  The  Ablative  of  Attendance  takes  the  preposition 
cum,  with. 

Cum  febri  domum  rediit,  C,  Or.,  in.  2,  6 ;   he  returned  home  ivith  a 


252  ABLATIVE. 

fever.  Catilina  stetit  in  comitio  cum  t6lo,  Cf.  C,  Cat.,  i.  6, 15  ;  CatiUiu 
stood  v,i  the  place  of  election  with  a  weapon  {on  him).  Cum  baculo  pera- 
que  [senex],  Mart.,  i\.  53,  3  ;  an  old  man  with  stick  and  wallet.  Nee  te- 
cum possum  vivere  nee  sine  te,  Mart.,  xii.  47,  2;  /  can't  live  either  with 
you  or  without  you. 

Remarks. — i.  In  military  phrases,  the  troops  with  which  a  march 
is  made  are  put  in  the  Ablative,  with  or  without  cum  ;  generally  with- 
out cum  when  an  adjective  is  used  (Ablative  of  Manner),  with  cum  when 
no  adjective  is  used  (Ablative  of  Attendance).  With  definite  numbers, 
however,  cum  is  regularly  employed. 

Albani  ingenti  exercitu  in  agrum  Romanum  impetum fecere,  L.,  i.  23,  3  ; 
the  Albans  attacked  the  Roman  territory  with  a  huge  army.  Caesar  cum 
equitibus  DCCCC  in  castra  pervenit,  Caes.,  ^.C,  i.  41,  1;  Caesar  arrived 
in  camp  with  nine  hundred  cavalry. 

2.  Not  to  be  confounded  with  the  above  is  the  Instrumental  Abla- 
tive : 

Navibus  profectus  est,  C,  Fam.,  xv.  3,  2  ;  he  set  out  by  ship. 

So  also  with  verbs  which  denote  other  military  actions  : 

Hasdrubal  mediam  aciem  Hispanis  firniat,  L.,  xxiii.  29,  4 ;  Hannibal 
strengthens  the  centre  with  Spanish  troops.  Actum  nihil  est  nisi  Poeno 
milite  portas  frangimus,  Juv.,  x.  155  ;  naught  is  accomjjlished  unless  we 
break  the  gates  with  the  Punic  soldiery  (as  if  with  a  battering-ram). 

II.  The  Figurative  Meanings  of  the  Ablative. 

A.  The  Place  Where  is  transferred  to  the  Time  When. 

Ablative  of  Time.     AblatTvus  Temporis. 

393.  Time  When  or  Within  Which  is  put  in  the  Ablative. 

Qua  nocte  natus  Alexander  est,  eadem  Dianae  Ephesiae  templum  d€fla- 
gravit,  Cf.  C,  N.D.,  11.  27,  69  ;  on  the  same  night  on  which  Alexander 
was  born,  the  temple  of  Diana  of  Ephesus  burned  to  the  ground.  SatumI 
Stella  triginta  ferg  annis  cursum  suum  cSnficit,  C,  iV^.D.,  n,  20,  53  ;  the 
planet  Saturn  completes  its  period  in  about  thirty  years. 

Many  adverbial  forms  of  time  are  really  Locative  Ablatives  : 
So  hodie,  to-day  ;  heri(e),  yesterday  ;  mane,  in  the  morning. 

Remarks. — i.  Time  Within  Which  may  be  expressed  by  per  and  the 
Accusative  : 

Per  eOs  ipsSs  diSs  quibus  Philippus  in  Achaia  fuit,  Philocles  saltum 
CithaerSnis  trSnscendit,  L.,  xxxi.  26, 1  ;  during  those  very  days,  while 
Philip  was  in  Achaia,  Philocles  crossed  the  range  of  Cithaeron. 

2.  Time  Within  Which  may  embrace  both  extremities ;  so  usually 
with  tOtus,  all,  whole : 


ABLATIVE.  253 

Kocte  pluit  tSta,  redennt  at  mane  serSna,  V.  (Poet.  Lat.  Min.,  iv.  155 

B)  ;  all  night  (Jupiter)  rains;  clear  skies  come  back  in  the  morning. 
Cf.CAES.,B.G.,i.26,5. 

So  with  definite  numbers ;  but  rarely,  until  the  post- Augustan 
period  : 

Scriptum  est  triginta  annis  vixisse  Fanaetiam,  posteaquam  ill5s  libr5s 
edidisset,  C,  Off.,  iii.  2,  8  ;  it  is  written  that  Panaetius  lived  for  thirty 
years  after  he  had  published  those  books  (not  to  be  confounded  with  the 
Abl.  of  Difference,  403).  Apud  Pythagoram  discipulis  quinque  annis 
tacendum  erat,  Sen.,  ^.3/.,  52,  10;  in  the  school  of  Pythagoras  the 
disciijles  had  to  keep  sile?ice  five  years. 

3.  When  the  Notion  is  Negative,  the  English  Time  For  Which  is  the 
Latin  Within  Which. 

[RosciusJ  RSmam  multis  annis  n5n  v6nit,  C,  Rose. Am.,  27,  74  ;  Ros- 
cius  has  not  come  to  Rome  in  (for)  ma7iy  years.  Not  always,  however; 
compare  Sex  mgnsis  iam  hie  ngmS  habitat,  Pl.,  Most.,  954 ;  no  one  has 
been  living  here  these  six  montJis. 

4.  Especially  to  be  noted  is  the  Abl.  of  Time  with  hie,  this  ;  ille,  that : 
Cui  viginti  his  annis  snpplicatiS  decr6ta  est?   C,  Ph.,  xiv.  4,  11 ;  to 

whom  diiring  these  last  ticenty  years  has  a  supplication  been  decreed  ? 

[Karthaginem]  hoc  biennis  gvertSs,  C,  Rep.,  vi.  11,  11  ;   Carthage  you 

will  overturn  in  the  next  two  years. 

Transferred  to  OratiS  Obliqua,  hie  becomes  ille  (660.  3)  : 

DiodSras  [respondit  j  illud  argentum  se  panels  illis  diSbns  misisse  Lily- 

baeum,  C,  Verr.,  iv.  18,  39  ;  Diodorus  answered  that  he  had  sent  that 

silver  plate  to  Lilybaeum  within  a  few  days  (a  few  days  before). 

5.  The  Abl.  of  Time  is  regularly  accompanied  by  an  attribute  in 
classical  Latin,  except  in  the  case  of  a  number  of  common  designations, 
as  aestate,  dig,  hieme,  nocte,  vespere  (vesperi).  Exceptions  are  rare,  such 
as  eomitiis,  luce,  pace,  militia,  and  some  names  of  games. 

394.  The  Ablative  with  the  preposition  in  is  used  of  points 
within  a  period  of  time,  or  of  the  character  of  the  time. 

Bis  in  dis,  twice  a  day ;  in  pueritiS,  in  boyhood ;  in  adulgseentili,  in 
youth. 

Nullo  modo  mihi  placuit  bis  in  diS  satnmm  fieri,  C,  Tusc,  v.  35,  100  ; 
it  did  not  suit  me  iti  any  way  to  eat  my  fill  twice  a  day.  Feci  ego  istaec 
itidem  in  adulgscentia,  Pl.,  B.,  410  ;  I  did  those  things  too  in  my  youth. 

Remark.— The  use  or  omission  of  in  sometimes  changes  the  meaning. 
So  bello  Persico,  at  the  time  of  the  Persian  war ;  but  in  bello,  in  war 
times  ;  in  pace,  in  peace  times.  Phraseological  is  in  tempore,  more  fre- 
quent than  tempore,  at  the  right  time.  But  in  illo  tempore  means  in 
those  circumstances,  at  that  crisis.  At  present,  for  the  present ^  is 
always  in  praesentia  or  in  praesentl  (rare). 


254  ABLATIVE. 

Notes.— 1.  Classical  Latin  confines  the  use  of  in  to  designations  of  Time  of  Life 
(though  here,  when  an  adjective  is  employed,  in  is  usually  omitted)  and  to  the  periods 
of  time.  Later  in  is  used  much  more  extensively.  With  numerals  in  is  the  rule.  Cato 
and  the  poets  have  sometimes  bis  die,  as  di§S  =  unus  di6s. 

2.  D§,  from,  is  also  used  in  designations  of  time  :  principally  in  the  phrase  d§  diS, 
dS  nocte.  Ut  iugulent  hominem  surgunt  dg  nocte  latrongs,  H.,  Ep.,  i.  2, 32 ;  to 
kill  a  man,  highwaymen  nse  by  night,  i.  e.,  ivhile  it  is  yet  night. 

Inter,  between:  Quae  prandia  inter  continuom  perdidi  triennium,  Pl.,  St., 
213  ;  what  luncheons  I  have  lost  dunng  three  years  together. 

Intra,  tvithin:  Subggit  solus  intra  viginti  digs,  Pl.,  Cwrc,  448;  he  quelled 
them  all  alone  in  less  than  twenty  days. 

On  per,  through,  see  336,  r.  2. 

Cum,  with,  is  found  occasionally  in  phrases,  as  cum  prima  luce,  ivith  daybreak. 

B.  The  Place  Whence  is  transferred  : 

I.  To  Origin.         2.  To  Respect  or  Specification. 

I.    Ablative  of  Origin. 

395.  Participles  which  signify  Birth  take  the  Ablative  of 
Origin  ;  sometimes  with  the  prepositions  ex  and  de. 

Amplissima  familia  nati  adulescentgs,  Caes.,  i?.6r.,  vii.  37,  1;  young 
men  horn  of  a  great  house.  Numae  Pompilii  regis  nepos,  Mia  ortus,  Ancus 
Marcius  erat,  L.,  i.  32,  1 ;  King  Numa  Pompilius''s  grandson,  a  daugh- 
ter's issue,  was  Ancus  Marcius.  Maecenas  atavis  gdite  regibus,  H.,  0.,  i. 
I,  1;  Maecenas,  offshoot  of  great-grandsire  kings.  Dis  genite  et  geni- 
tiire  deos,  V.,  ^.,ix.  639  ;  begotten  of  gods,  and  destined  to  beget  gods  / 
Sate  sanguine  divum !  V.,  ^.,  vi.  125  ;  seed  of  blood  divine  !  Ex  mg 
atque  ex  hoc  natus  es,  Ter.,  TIeaut.y  1030  ;  you  are  his  son  and  mine. 
Oderunt  natos  dg  paelice,  Juv.,vi.  627;  they  hate  the  offspring  of  the 
concubine. 

Ab,  and  occasionally  ex,  are  employed  of  remote  progenitors  : 
Plgrique  Belgae  sunt  orti  ab  Germanis,  Cf.  Caes.,  B.G.,  11.  4,  1 ;  Bel- 
gians are  jnostly  of  German  descent.    Oriundi  er  Etruscis,  Cf.  L.,  11.  9, 1 ; 
of  Etruscan  origin. 

Notes.— 1.  The  principal  participles  thus  used  are  natus,  prognatus,  oriundus  ; 
ortus,  genitus,  and  satus  begin  in  prose  with  Livy  ;  editus  ami  cretus  are  poetic  ; 
procreatus  is  late.    Cicero  nses  oriundus  but  once  ;  it  denotes  remote  origin. 

2.  With  names  of  Places  the  preposition  is  the  rule  (362,  n.  2)  ;  but  there  are  a  few 
exceptions  in  early  Latin  and  in  Cicero,  and  a  couple  of  examples  in  Caesar.  Later 
the  simple  Abl.  disappears.    The  Abl.  was  the  rule  with  names  of  Tribes. 

Periphangs  Rhod5  mercator,  Pl.,  Asia.,  499.  Magius  CremSna,  Caes.,  B.  C, 
I.  24, 4.    Q.  Verrgs  Romilia,  C,  Ven\,  i.  8, 23 ;  Q.  Vcrres  of  the  Romilian  tribe. 

3.  With  finite  verbs  denoting  Origin,  the  preposition  is  regular,  except  occasionally 
with  nasci. 

4.  The  Ablative  of  Agent  properly  belongs  here.  But  for  convenience  of  contrast  it 
is  treated  under  401. 

396.  The  Ablative  of  Material  takes  ex  in  classical  Latin. 


ABLATIVE.  255 

Ex  animo  constamus  et  corpore,  Cf.  C,  Fin.,  iv.  8,  19  ;  ive  consist  of 
mind  and  hody. 

Statua  ex  auro,  ex  aere,  facta,  a  statue  made  of  gold,  of  bronze.  Often 
an  adjective  is  used  :  aureus,  golden ;  ligneus,  wooden. 

Notes.— 1.  After  Cicero  constare  is  used  more  often  with  the  Abl.;  consistere 
(with  the  Abl.)  is  poetical.  Contineri,  to  be  contained  in,  i.e.,  almost  "  to  consist  of,'"'' 
takes  the  Abl.  only,  but  with  a  different  conception. 

Medicina  tota  constat  experimentis,  Quint.,  ii.  17, 9 ;  all  medicine  is  made  up 
of  experiments  {is  empirical). 

2.  With  fieri  the  previous  state  is  indicated  by  d6  as  well  as  by  ex. 

De  templo  carcerem  fieri!  C,  P/i.,v.  7, 18  ;  f707n  a  temple  to  become  a  jail. 
FiSs  d6  rhetore  consul,  Juv.,vii.  197;  from  (having  been)  rhetoi^cian  you  will 
become  consid.    Ex  oratore  arator  factus,  C.  PA.,  iii.  g,  22  (200,  r.  2). 

3.  Otherwise  the  simple  Ablative  of  Material  is  poetic  or  late  : 
Mayors  caelatus  ferro,  V.,  A.,  viii.  700 ;  Mars  carven  of  iron. 
Melidre  luto  finxit,  Juv.,  xiv.  35  ;  Jie  fashioned  it  of  better  clay^ 

2.    Ablative  of  Respect. 

397.  The  Ablative  of  Kespect  or  Specification  gives  the 
Point  From  AV'hich  a  thing  is  measured  or  treated,  and  is 
put  in  answer  to  the  questions  From  What  Point  of  View  ? 
According  to  What  ?     By  What  ?     In  Respect  of  What  ? 

Discriptus  populus  censti,  ordinibus,  aetatibus,  C,  ie^.,  in,  19,  44  ;  a 
people  drawn  off  according  to  income,  rank,  (and)  age.  Ennius  ingenio 
maximus,  arte  rudis,  Ov.,  Tr.,  n.  424  ;  Ennius  iii  genius  great,  in  art 
unskilled.  Anim5  ignavus,  procax  ore,  Tag.,  JT.,  n.  23, 18  ;  coward  of 
soul,  saucy  of  tongue. 

Noteworthy  are  the  phrases  :  crine  ruber,  red-haired ;  captus  oculis 
(literally,  caught  in  the  eyes),  blind;  captus  mente,  irisane  ;  mea  sen- 
tentia,  according  to  my  ojnnion  ;  iure,  by  right ;  iSge,  by  law,  etc. ;  and 
the  Supines  in  -u  (430). 

Notes.— 1.  Prepositions  are  also  used,  which  ser\-e  to  show  the  conception  : 

(Caesaris)  adventus  ex  colSre  vestitus  cognitus,  c/.  Caes.,s.6^.,  vn.  88, 1 ; 
the  arrival  of  Caesar  was  known  by  the  color  of  his  clothing.  D§  gestu  intellego 
quid  respondeas,  C,  Vat.,  15, 35  ;  I  understand  by  your  gesture  what  answer  you  are 
giving.  Ab  animo  aeger  fui,  Pl.,  Ep.,  129 ;  at  heart  I  was  sick.  Otiosum  ab 
animo,  Ter.,  Ph.,  340  ;  easy  in  mind. 

Similarly  ex  iSge,  according  to  law  ;  ex  pacto,  according  to  agreement ;  ex  (d§) 
more,  according  to  custom  ;  ex  animi  sentertia,  according  to  {my)  hearVs  desire  ; 
ex  usti,  tisefuL 

2.  A  special  category  is  formed  by  words  indicating  eminence  or  superioi'ity  ;  so  ex- 
cellere,  antecellere,  praestare,  superare,  vincere ;  and  the  adjectives :  insignis, 
illustris,  dignus ;  excellSns,  praecellens.  Praecellere  is  found  in  early  and  late 
Latin,  while  dignari  is  poetic  and  post- Augustan. 

Maxims  populus  Romanus  animi  magnitudine  excellit,  c,  Off.,  1. 18, 61 ;  (h« 
Roman  people  excel  most  in  loftiness  of  mind. 

On  dignus  with  Gen.,  see  374,  n.  10. 


256  ABLATIVE. 

A  curious  usage  is  that  of  decoras  and  decSre,  with  Abl.,  in  Pl.,  Jf.  G.,  619;  Asin., $77' 
3.  The  origin  of  these  constructions  is  still  undetermined.     They  may  be  deduced 
also  from  the  Instrumental  side  of  the  Abl.,  or  from  the  Locative  side. 

398.  The  Ablative  of  Respect  is  used  with  the  Compara- 
tive instead  of  quam,  than,  with  the  Nominative  or  Accusa- 
tive ;  but  in  the  classical  language  mainly  after  a  negative, 
or  its  equivalent.     {Abldtlvus  Compardiionis.) 

Tunica  propior  palliost,  Pl,  ,  Trin. ,  1 1 54  ;  the  shirt  is  nearer  thaii  the 
cloak.  Nihil  est  vlrtute  amabilius,  C,  Xfle?.,  8,  28  ;  nothing  is  more 
attractive  than  virtue.  Quid  est  in  homine  ratiSne  divinius  ?  C,  Leg.,  i. 
7,  22  ;  what  is  there  in  man  more  godlike  than  reason  ? 

So  also  after  adverbs,  but  not  so  freely  in  prose  : 

Lacrima  nihil  citius  arSscit,  Q.,Inv.,i.  56, 109  ;  nothing  dries  more 
quickly  than  a  tear.  N6ni8  est  qui  tibi  sapientius  suadere  possit  te  ipsS, 
C,  Fam., 11.'], 1  ;  there  is  no  one  who  can  give  you  iviser  advice  than 
you  yourself.  Fulcrum  ornatum  turpes  morgs  pgius  caeno  conlinunt,  Pl., 
Most.,  291  ;  foul  behavior  doth  bedraggle  fine  apparel  icorse  than  mud. 

Remark. — When  the  word  giving  the  point  of  view  is  a  relative,  the 
Abl.  must  be  used.     See  29G,  r.  2. 

Fhldiae  simulacrls  quibus  nihil  in  illo  genere  perfectius  videmus,  cogitare 
tamen  possumus  pulchriora,  C,  Or.,  2,  8  ;  the  statues  of  Pheidias,  than 
which  we  see  7iothing  more  perfect  in  their  kind,  still  leave  room  for  us 
to  imagine  those  that  are  more  beautiful. 

Notes.— 1.  The  comparative  is  also  employed  with  the  Abl.  of  certain  abstract 
substantives  and  adjectives  used  as  substantives  ;  so  opini5ne,  sp6,  exspectatione  ; 
aequ5,  iusto,  solitS,  and  the  like,  all  post-Ciceronian  except  aequo,  opinione. 

(Consul)  s6rius  sp6  (=  quam  spgs  fuerat)  Romam  vSnit,  L.,  xxvi.  26,4  ;  the 
consul  came  to  Rome  later  than  was  hoped.  Solito  citatior  amnis,  L.,  xxiii.  19, 11; 
the  Hver  imnning faster  than  usual. 

2.  AequS  and  a^aequS  are  found  once  each  in  PLAUTUSwith  the  Abl.;  and  then 
not  till  the  time  of  the  elder  Pliny. 

3.  For  other  details,  see  296  and  644. 

C.    ABLATIVE    OF    THE    THING    WHEREWITH. 

AblatTvus  SociStlvus.    Ablative  of  Attendance. 

1 .  Ablative  of  Manner. 

399.  The  Ablative  of  Manner  answers  the  question  How  ? 
and  is  used  with  the  Preposition  cum  when  it  has  no  Adjec- 
tive ;  with  or  without  cum  Avhen  it  has  an  Adjective  or  its 
equivalent.     {Abldtlvus  Modi.) 

[Stellas]  circulSs su6s  orbSsque  cOnficiunt  celeritSte  mirabill,  C,  Rep.,  vi. 
15, 15  ;  the  stars  complete  their  orbits  with  ivonderful  swiftness.      V3s 


ABLATIVE.  257 

6r5  ut  attentS  bonaque  cum  venia  verba  mea  audiatis,  C,  Rose.  Am.,  4,  9  ; 
/  beg  you  to  hear  my  words  attentively  and  with  kind  indulgence. 
Beats  vivere,  honeste,  id  est  cum  virtute,  vivere,  C,  Fin.,  iii.  8,  29  ;  to 
live  liappily  is  to  live  honestly,  that  is,  virtuously. 

Notes.— 1.  The  simple  Abl.  without  an  attribute  is  confined  to  a  few  substantives, 
which  have  acquire(iadverbial  force  ;  early  Latin  shows  astu,  CUrriculo,  dolo,  ergO, 
gratiis  and  ingratiis,  ioculo,  merfto,  numero,  optato,  ordine,  sortito,  volun- 
tate,  vulgo.  Terence  adds  :  vi,  itire,  iniuria.  Classical  Latin  shows  some  of 
these,  also  ratione,  ratione  et  via,  moribus,  oonsuetudine,  silentio,  casti,  I6ge, 
fraude,  vitio,  sacramentO  (beginning  with  Livy),  and  a  few  others.  Sometimes  the 
idea  of  Specification  is  prominent,  as  in  lege,  iure  (397) ;  sometimes  it  is  hard  to  dis- 
tinguish between  the  Manner  and  the  Instrument :  vi,  violently  and  by  violence ;  vi  et 
armis,  by  force  of  arm^ ;  pedibus,  afoot ;  navibus,  by  ship.  Notice,  also,  the  use  of 
per,  throngh,  with  the  Accusative  :  per  vim,  by  violence ;  per  litteras,  by  letter. 

2.  The  post-Ciceronian  Latin  extends  the  use  of  the  Abl.  without  an  attribute. 

3.  The  phrases  sub  condicione,  sub  l§ge,  etc.,  begin  with  Livy. 

2.  Ablative  of  Quality. 

(Descriptive  Ablative.) 

400.  The  Ablative  of  Quality  has  no  Preposition,  and  al- 
ways takes  an  Adjective  or  an  equivalent. 

[Hannibalis]  n5men  erat  magna  apud  omngs  gloria,  C,  Or.,  11.  18,  75  ; 
the  name  of  Hatmibal  was  glorious  in  the  esteem  of  all  the  world. 
(Aggsilaus)  statura  fuit  humili,  Nep.,  xvn.  8,  1 ;  Agesildus  ivas  (a  man) 
of  low  stature.  Ista  turpiculo  puella  naso,  Cat.,  41,  3  ;  that  girl  of  yours 
with  the  ugly  nose.  Clavi  ferrei  digiti  poUicis  crassitudine,  Cf.  Caes., 
B.G.,  HI.  13,  4  ;  iron  nails  of  the  thickness  of  your  thumb. 

Remarks. — i.  External  and  transient  qualities  are  put  by  prefer- 
ence in  the  Ablative  ;  Measure,  Number,  Time,  and  Space  are  put  in 
the  Genitive  only  ;  parts  of  the  body  in  the  Ablative  only.  Otherwise 
there  is  often  no  difference. 

2.  Of  unnatural  productions  cum  may  be  used  :  agnus  cum  suillo 
capite,  L.,  xxxi.  12,  7  ;  a  lamb  with  a  sivirie's  nead. 

3.  Ablative  of  Means. 

401.  The  Means  or  Instrument  is  put  in  the  Ablative 
without  a  Preposition. 

The  Agent  or  Doer  is  put  in  the  Ablative  with  the  Prepo- 
sition ab  (a).  The  Person  Through  Whom  is  put  in  the 
Accusative  with  per. 

Xerxgs  certior  factus  est,  (  '•  ^^^t^^'  ^'^  ^^^^«^'- 
Xerxes  was  informed,  ]  ^-  ^  ^^^^i°'  ^^  ^^^^^'^'^^^r 

I  3.  per  nuntium,  by  means  of  a  messenger. 

17 


258  ABLATIVE. 

Qui  sunt  homings,  a  quibus  ille  se  lapidibus  adpetitum,  etiam  percussum 
esse  dixit  ?  C,  Dom.,  5,  13  ;  who  are  the  men  by  ivhom  he  said  he  had  been 
thrown  at  with  stones,  and  even  hit  9  Vulg-o  occidgbantur  ?  Per  quos 
et  a  quibus  ?  C,  Rose. Am.,  29,  80;  ivere  they  cut  down  openly  ?  Through 
ivhose  iyistrumentality  and  by  whose  agency  ?  Nee  bene  promeritis  capi- 
tur  neque  tangitur  ira,  Lucr.,  ii.  651  (227,  n.  4).  Ipse  docet  quid  agam: 
fas  est  et  ab  hoste  doc6ri,  Ov.,  M.,  iv.  428  (219).  Discite  sanari  per  quern 
didicistis  amare,  Ov.,  Rem.  Am.,  43;  learn  to  be  healed  by  means  of  (him 
by)  whom  you  learned  to  love. 

Remarks. — i.  When  the  Instrument  is  personified  and  regarded  as 
an  Agent,  or  the  Agent  is  regarded  as  an  Instrument,  the  constructions 
are  reversed  ;  when  an  adjective  is  used,  the  construction  may  be 
doubtful;  see  854,  n.  i,  and  214,  r.  2. 

So  iacent  suis  testibus,  C,  il/i/.,  18,  47  ;  they  are  cast  by  their  own 
witnesses  ;  or,  they  are  cast,  their  oivn  men  being  ivitnesses. 

2.  A  quality,  when  personified,  has  the  construction  of  the  person. 
So  deseri  a  mente,  a  spe. 

Vobis  animus  ab  ignavia  atque  socordia  conruptus  [est],  S.,  lug.,  31,  2; 
you  have  had  your  soid{s)  debauched  by  sloth  cmd  indifference. 

Notes.— 1.  The  number  of  verbs  construed  with  this  Abl.  is  very  large  and  com- 
prises several  categories  ;  so  verbs  of  Clotliing  and  Providing,  Adorning  and  Endow- 
ing, Training  (grudire  also  takes  in ;  others  take  Ace,  see  339),  Living  and  Nour- 
ishing, etc. 

2.  Of  special  importance  are  assugsco,  assuefacio,  assugtus ;  (Catilina)  sce- 
lerum  exercitatione  assugfactus,  C,  Cat.,  u.  5, 9.  The  Dat.  is  found  first  in  Livy 
in  prose.    Ad  with  the  Ace.  is  also  classical. 

3.  AflScere,  to  treat,  with  the  Ablative,  is  a  favorite  turn  ;  see  the  Lexicons. 

4.  Verbs  of  sacrificing,  such  as  sacrificare,  sacrum  facere,  divinam  rem  facere, 
facere  and  fieri  (mostly  poetical),  immolare,  litare  (poetical),  have  the  Abl.  of  Means. 
But  immolare  usually  has  Ace.  and  Dat.,  and  so  the  others  occasionally,  except 
facere. 

Quinquaginta  capris  sacriiicavgrunt,  L.,  xi.v.  16, 6  ;  they  sacrificed  fifty  she- 
goats. 

5.  Here  belong  also  verbs  like  pluere,  sudare  (not  classic),  stillare  (not  classic), 
fiuere,  manare,  and  the  like  :  sanguine  pluisse,  L.,  xxiv.  10, 7.  The  Ace.  is  also 
common. 

C.  "Nitor,  I  stay  myself,  is  construed  with  the  Abl.;  occasionally  with  in.  Fid5, 
c5nndo,  /  t?''ust,  rely  on,  have  tlie  Abl. ;  but  with  persons  the  Dat.,  sometimes  also  with 
tilings.  On  the  other  hand,  diffido,  I  distrust,  always  has  the  Dat.  in  classical  Latin, 
but  Tacitus  shows  Abl.,  and  so  do  other  later  writers.  Stare,  to  abide  by,  usually 
has  the  Abl.,  but  occasionally  in ;  manere  l>as  usually  in ;  the  Abl.  is  poetical.  Acqui- 
gscere,  to  acquiesce  in,  with  Abl.  is  rare.  FrgtUS,  siippoi'ted,  takes  the  Abl.  regularly; 
Livy  alone  uses  the  Dative.  Contentus,  satisfied  with  (by),  is  used  only  of  one's  own 
possessions  (rgbus,  fortiina,  etc.),  and  has  the  Ablative. 

SalGs  omnium  n5n  vgritate  sQlum  sed  etiam  fama  nititur,  Cf.  c,  Q.F.,  i.  ii. 
1, 2;  the  welfare  of  all  rests  not  on  truth  alone,  but  also  on  repute.  Eius  iudicio  stare 
n51im,  C,  Tusc,  11.  36,  G3  ;  J  should  not  like  to  abide  by  his  judgment. 

7.  A  remnant  of  the  old  usage  is  found  with  fI5,  faciO,  and  esse  : 

Quid  fgcisti  scIpiOne  1  Pl.,  Cas.,  975 ;  what  have  you  done  ivith  the  wand?  Quid 


ABLATIVE.  •  259 

mSflef?  Pl.,  Most.,  1 166  ;  what  will  become  of  me?  Quid  t6  futurumsf?  Ter., 
Ph.,  137  ;  what  is  to  become  of  you  ?  Quid  hoc  homine  facias  ?  C,  Verr.,  11. 16, 39  ; 
Iww  will  you  dispose  of  this  man?  Quid  huic  homini  facias?  C,  Caecin.,  ii,30; 
what  will  you  do  to  this  man  ?  Quid  de  nobis  futurum  lestj  %  C,  Fam.,  ix.  17, 1  ; 
what  is  to  hajypen  in  our  case  ? 

The  use  of  the  Dative  is  rare,  and  still  more  rare  the  use  of  dS. 

The  construction  is  colloquial,  and  never  found  in  Caesar  and  Tacitus  ;  it  is 
always  in  an  interrogative  sentence,  except  in  Cato  and  Ovid. 

4-.    Ablative  of  Standard.    Ablatlvus  Mensurae. 

402.  The  Standard  of  Measure  is  put  in  the  Ablative  with 
verbs  of  Measurement  and  Judgment. 

Benevolentiam  non  ardore  amoris  sed  stabilitate  iudicemus,  C,  Off.,  i. 
15.  47  ;  good  will  we  are  to  judge  not  hy  ardor  hut  by  steadfastness. 
Magnos  homings  virttite  metiniur,  non  forttina,  Nep.,  xviii.  1, 1  ;  we  meas- 
ure great  men  hy  worth,  not  by  fortune.  Sonis  homings  ut  aera  tinnitti 
dignOscimus,  Quint.,  xi.  3, 31  ;  ice  distinguish  men  hy  sound,  as  coppers 
by  ring. 

Remarks. — i.  It  is  often  hard  to  distinguish  the  Measure  from  tlie 
Kespect  (see  397). 

2.  Ex  with  the  Abl.  is  frequently  found  with  these  verbs  ;  so  regu- 
larly with  aestimare,  existimare,  spectare,  in  the  sense  of  judge,  value. 

Dicendum  erit  non  esse  ex  fortuna  fidem  ponderandam,  (J.,  Part. Or.,  34, 
117;  the  plea  u'ill  have  to  he  made  that  faith  is  not  to  he  iveighed  hy 
fortune.  Sic  est  vulgus :  ex  vgritate  pauca,  ex  opinione  multa  aestimat,  C. , 
Rose.  Com.,  10,  29  ;  this  is  the  way  of  the  rahhle  :  they  value  few  things 
by  {the  standard  of)  truth,  many  hy  {the  standard  of)  opinion. 

403.  Measure  of  Difference  is  put  in  the  Ablative. 

Sol  multis  partibus  maior  (est)  quam  terra  universa,  C,  N.D.,  11.  36,  92 ; 
the  sun  is  many  parts  larger  than  the  whole  earth.  (Via)  altero  tanto 
longiorem  habgbat  anfractum,  Nep.,  xviii.  8,  5;  the  road  had  a  bend  {that 
made  if)  longer  hy  as  much  again,  as  long  again.  Quinquigns  tanto  am- 
plius  Verrgs,  quam  licitum  est,  civitatibus  imperavit,  Cf.  C'.,  Verr.,  iii.  97, 
225;  Yerres  levied  on  the  various  cities  jive  times  more  than  ivas  cdlowed 
by  law.  Turrgs  dgnis  pedibus  quam  mtirus  altiorgs  sunt,  Curt. ,  v.  i  ,  26 ;  the 
toicers  are  (by)  ten  feet  higher  than  the  wall.  Tanto  est  accilsare  quam 
dgfendere,  quanto  facere  quam  sanare  vulnera,  facilius,  Quint.,  v.  13,  3;  it 
is  as  much  easier  to  accuse  than  to  defend,  as  it  is  easier  to  inflict  woimds 
than  to  heal  them.  Perfer  et  obdura  :  multo  graviora  tulisti,  Ov.,  Tr.,  v. 
II,  7;  endure  to  the  end  and  he  firm  :  you  have  borne  much  more  grievous 
burdens. 

Notes.— 1.  This  rule  applies  to  verbs  involving  diflference  (such  as  abesse,  distare, 
malle,  praestare,  excellere,  etc.),  as  well  as  to  comparatives,  with  which  must  be 
reckoned  infra,  supra,  ultra. 


26o  ABLATIVE. 

[Aesculapii  templum]  quinque  milibus  passuum  ab  urbe  [Epidauro]  distat, 

Cf.  L.,  XLV.  28,  3  ;  the  temple  of  Aesculapius  is  five  miles  from  the  city  ofEpidaurus. 

2.  The  Ace.  is  sometimes  employed  (see  335)  ;  especially  with  neuter  adjectives  mul- 
tum,  tantum,  etc.,  but  this  is  not  common  except  with  verbs. 

3.  The  Plautine  Abl.  nimio,  vvith  the  comparative,  is  not  classical  (compare  [C], 
Att.,  X.  8  A,  1),  but  reappears  in  Livy.  Aliter  with  this  Abl.  is  very  rare  and  is  not  clas- 
sical. So  also  the  Abl.  with  the  positive,  of  whicli  a  few  examples  are  cited  from  early 
Latin,  as  Ter.,  Heaut.,  205. 

4.  {(i)  Especially  to  be  noted  is  the  use  of  the  Abl.  of  Measure  with  ante,  before, 
and  post,  after  : 

Paucis  ante  diSbus,  Panels  digbus  ante,  afeio  days  before. 
Paucis  post  digbus,  Paucis  diebus  post,  a  few  darjs  after,  afterward. 
Duobus  annis  postquam  Roma  condita  est,  two  years  after  Borne  was  founded. 
Pauls  post  Troiam  captam,  a  little  tvhile  after  the  taking  of  Troy. 
The  Ace.  can  also  be  employed :  post  paucos  annos,  after  a  few  years ;  ante  pauc5s 
annos,  a  few  years  before  ;  and  the  ordinal  as  well  as  the  cardinal  numbers  (but  only 
when  quam  follows)  :  tivo  hundred  years  after{ward)  may  be  : 

Ducentis  annis  post      or      Ducentgsimo  anno  post. 
Post  ducentos  annos      or      Post  ducentgsimum  annum. 

{b)  Ante  and  post  do  not  precede  the  Abl.  in  classical  Latin  except  with  aliquantO 
(rare)  and  paul5.  Ante  and  post,  with  the  Ace.  followed  by  quam,  instead  of  ante- 
quam  and  postquam  with  the  Abl.,  belong  preeminently  to  post-classical  Latin  ; 
classical  examples  are  rare.    Cicero  never  has  ante. 

{c)  Ante  hos  sex  mSnsgs,  six  months  ago  (compare  393,  R.  4),  more  frequently 
abhinc  sex  mgnses  (336,  r.  3) ;  abhinc  sex  mgnsibus,  means  six  months  before. 

(d)  With  a  relative  sentence  the  Abl.  of  the  relative  may  be  used  alone,  instead  of 
ante  (post)  quam : 

Mors  Roscii  quadriduS  quo  is  occlsus  est,  Chr^sogonO  ntintiatur,  c,  Eosc. 
Jm.,37, 105;  the  death  of  lioscius  was  announced  to  Vhrysogonus  four  days  after  he 
was  killed  (in  the  course  of  the  four  days  within  which  he  was  killed).    See  393. 

(e)  Hence  is  ad  :  ad  sex  mgnsgs,  six  months  hence. 

(f)  Do  not  confuse  the  Ace.  with  ante  and  post  with  the  Ace.  of  Duration  of  Time. 

5.    Ablative  of  Price. 

404.  Definite  Price  is  put  in  the  Ablative. 

Eriphyla  aur5  viri  vltam  vgndidit,  C,  Inv.,  i.  50,  94;  Eriphyle  sold  her 
husband's  life  for  gold.  Viginti  talentis  unam  oratiSnem  Isocratgs  vSn- 
didit,  Plin.,  N.IL,  vii.  31,  110;  Isoerales  sold  one  speech  for  twenty  tal- 
ents. Emit  morte  immortalitatem.  Quint,,  ix.  3,  71 ;  he  purchased  death- 
lessness  with  death.  Argentum  accgpl,  dote  imperium  vgndidi,  Pl.,  Asin.^ 
87;  the  cash  I  took,  (and)  for  a,  dowry  sold  my  sway. 

Notes.— L  HQtare,  to  exchange,  is  sometimes  Give,  sometimes  Get;  sometimes 
Sell,  sometimes  Buy.    The  latter  use  is  confined  to  poetry  and  later  prose. 

NSm6  nisi  victor  pace  bellum  mutavit,  S.,  ('.,  58, 15  ;  no  one  wdess  victorious 
(ever)  exchanged  ivar  for  peace.  Misera  pax  vel  bell5  bene  mtltatur,  Cf.  Tac, 
Ann.,  III.  44, 10  ;  a  wretched  peace  is  well  exchanged  even  for  war. 

But  car  valle  permtitem  Sablna  divitias  operQsiQrSs  ?  IL,  0.,  m.  i,  47 ;  why 
sTwuld  I  exchange  my  Sabine  vale  for  riches  sure  to  breed  (nie)  greater  trouble  f 

2.  So  venSlis,  vilis,  cheap ;  ckrus,  dear.  NSn,  edepol,  minis  trecentis  carast, 
Pl.,  Pers.,  668  ;  stie  is  not  dear,  foi'e  George,  at  three  hundred  minae. 

3.  For  Genitive  of  Price,  see  379. 


ABLATIVE.  261 


6.    Ablative  with  Verbs  of  Plenty  and  Want. 

405.  Verbs  of  Depriving  and  Filling,  of  Plenty  and  Want, 
take  the  Ablative. 

[Dgmocritus]  dicitur  oculis  s6  privasse,  C,  Fin.,  v.  29,  87;  Democritus 
is  said  to  have  deprived  himself  of  his  eyes.  Deus  bonis  omnibus  explgvit 
mundum,  Cf.  C,  Univ.,  3,  9;  God  has  filled  the  universe  with  all  bless- 
ings.  Capua  fortissimorum  virQrum  multitudine  redundat,  C. ,  Pis. ,  1 1,  25 ; 
Capua  is  full  to  overflowing  with  a  multitude  of  gallant  gentlemen.  Non 
caret  effectti  quod  voluSre  duo,  Ov.,  Am.,  11.  3,  16;  ivhat  two  have  resolved 
on  never  lacks  exemition.  Quo  maior  est  in  [animis]  praestantia,  eomaiore 
indigent  diligentia,  C,  Tusc,  iv.  27,  58. 

Notes.— 1.  Verbs  of  Depriving  are  commonly  referred  to  the  Ablative  of  Separation, 
rather  than  to  the  Instrumental  Ablative,  and  are  put  here  for  convenience  of  contrast. 
But  it  must  be  remembered  that  in  the  classic  tongues  the  construction  of  opposites  is 
identical. 

2.  Egeo  and  (more  frequently)  indigeS  also  take  the  Genitive  : 

Non  tarn  artis  indigent  quam  laboris,  C,  Or.,  i.  34, 15G  ;  t/iey  are  not  so  much 
in  need  of  skill  (is  of  industry.    So  impleri,  V.,  A.,  i.  214. 

3.  Adjectives  of  Plenty  and  Want  take  the  Gen.,  but  some  of  them  follow  the 
analogy  of  the  verb  (374,  n.  1).  So  onustus,  orbus,  have  Abl.  more  often  than  Gen.; 
indigUS,  egSnus,  and  inops  have  the  Gen.  more  commonly.  Plgnus  has  usually 
the  Gen.;  the  Abl.  in  increasing  proportion  from  Lucretius  on.  Frequ6ns  and  va- 
lidus  do  not  take  the  Gen.  until  the  post-Augustan  period.    See  374. 

Asellus  onustus  aurS,  Q.,  Atf..,i.\6,\2;  a  donkey  laden  witli  (fold.  PoUicitis 
dives  quilibet  esse  potest,  Ov.,  J.^.,i.  444  ;  anybody  can  be  ricJi  in  lyroniises. 
Amor  et  melle  et  felle  est  f§cundissimus,  Pl.,  Cist.,  69 ;  love  is  {ver-y)fi'uitful  botli 
in  honey  and  in  gall  (of  acrimony). 

406.  Opus  and  usus  take  the  Dative  of  the  Person  who 
Wants  and  the  Ablative  of  the  Thing  Wanted  ;  but  the  Thing 
AYanted  may  be  the  subject,  and  opus  (not  usus)  the  predicate. 

Novo  consilio  mihi  nunc  opus  est,  Pl.,  Ps.,  601  ;  a  new  device  is  what 
J^m  needing  now.  Viginti  iam  usust  filio  argent!  minis,  Pl.,  Asin.,  8g; 
my  son  has  urgent  iieed  of  twenty  minae  silver.  Nihil  opus  est  simula- 
tione  et  fallaciis,  C,  Or.,  n.  46, 191  ;  there  is  no  need  of  making  believe, 
and  of  cheating  tricks.  Non  opus  est  verbis  sed  fustibus,  C,  Pis.,  30, 
73;  there  is  need  not  of  ivords,  but  of  cudgels.  Emas  non  quod  opus  est, 
sed  quod  necesse  est ;  quod  non  opus  est  asse  carum  est,  Cato  (Sen.,  E.3I., 
94,  27);  buy  7iot  what  you  want,  but  ivhat  is  absolutely  needful ;  what 
you  do  not  want  (have  no  use  for)  is  dear  at  a  penny. 

So  with  the  Perfect  Participle  Passive. 

Quod  parat5  opus  est  para,  Ter.,  And.,  523  ;  what  must  be  got  ready, 
get  ready.     Vicino  conventost  opus,  Pl.,  Cas.,  502  ,  the  neighbor  must 


262  ABLATIVE. 

be  called  on.    Citius  quod  non  factost  usus  fit  quam  quod  factost  opus,  Pl., 

Am.,  505. 

jSTotes.— 1.  Opus  est  means  properly  :  there  is  work  to  be  done  with  ;  usus  est, 
there  is  making  use  of  {like  utor)  ;  hence  the  Ablative.  Some  think  that  opus  takes 
Abl.  by  analogy  with  usus. 

2.  Opus  est  is  common  throughout ;  usus  est  is  very  rarely  found  after  the  early 
period.    It  belongs  especially  to  comedy. 

3.  The  Gen.  with  opus  est  occurs  twice  in  Livy  ;  also  in  Pkopertius,  Quintii.ian, 
and  Apuleius. 

4.  The  neut.  Ace.  is  usually  adverbial  (333,  i) : 

Quid  (Ace.)  digitos  opus  est  graphic  lassare  tenendo?  Ov.,  Am.,  i.  n,  23  ; 
what  is  the  use  of  tiring  the  fingers  by  holding  the  stylus  r 

5.  Besides  the  Pf.  Part,  pass.,  we  find  the  Infin.  and  sometimes  ut ;  in  this  case  the 
Person  is  usually  in  the  Dat.  with  opus  (tisus)  est,  but  may  be  in  the  Ace.  with  the 
Inf.,  or  may  be  omitted. 

Opus  est  te  animo  valgre  ut  corpore  possis,  C,  Fa?n.,  xvi.  14, 2 ;  yon  must  be 
tvell  in  mitid  in  order  to  be  well  in  body.  An  quoiquamst  tisus  hoiuini  s6  ut 
eruciet  %  Ter.,  Heaut.,  81  ;  of  what  good  is  it  to  any  man  to  torture  himself? 

The  Supine  is  found  occasionally  ;  in  Cicero  only  scitu  {Inv.,i.  20,  28  ;  disputed). 

6.  In  Plautus  and  Lucretius  are  occasional  examples  of  tisUS  as  a  predicate,  with 
the  Thing  Wanted  as  the  subject. 

7.    Ablative  with  Sundry  Verbs. 

407.  The  Deponent  Verbs  utor,  abutor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior, 
and  vescor,  take  the  Ablative. 

Victoria  uti  nescis,  L.,  xxn.  51,  4  ;  hoiv  to  make  use  of  victory  you 
know  not.  Quo  usque  tandem  abiit6re  patientia  nostra,  C.  Cat.,  i.  i,  1  ; 
how  long,  tell  me,  will  you  abuse  our  patience  ?  Lux  qua  fruimur  a  DeO 
nobis datur,  Cf.  C,  llosc.  Am.,  45,  131 ;  the  light  which  we  enjoy  is  given 
to  us  by  God.  Funguntur  oificio  ;  dgfendunt  suos,  C,  Gael.,  9,  21  ;  they 
acquit  themselves  of  a  duty ;  they  defend  their  own  people.  Fungar 
vicecotis,  II.,  J^.P.,304;  I  shall  acquit  myself  of ,  discharge,  theoffice  of 
a  ivhetstone.  Tutius  esse  arbitrabantur  sine  ull5  vulnere  victoria  potirl, 
Caes.,  B.O.,  III.  24,  2;  they  thought  it  safer  to  make  themselves  masters 
of  the  victory  ivithout  any  wound.  Numidae  lacte  vesc6bantur,  S.,  lug., 
89,  7  ;  the  Numidians  made  their  food  of  milk  {fed  on  milk). 

Notes.— 1.  These  Ablatives  are  commonly  regarded  as  Ablatives  of  the  Instrument : 
but  fruor,  I  get  fruit,  and  yescor,  I  feed  myseJf  from,  and  perhaps  fungor,  "ay  take 
the  Abl.  as  a  Whence-case. 

2.  These  verbs  seem  to  have  been  originally  construed  with  the  Ace.  :  bui  ilii>  (  ase 
is  not  found  in  classical  Latin  except  in  the  Gerundive  constniction  (427.  n.  5). 

(a)  TJtor  with  Ace.  is  very  common  in  Pi.autxts,  less  so  in  Tep.enck.  but  only  wiili 
neuter  pronouns.  Cato  uses  also  the  neuter  of  substantives.  Abfltor  is  coinliiued  only 
with  Ace.  in  early  Latin. 

{I))  Fruor  with  Ace.  is  not  in  Plautus,  but  occasionally  in  Terence  and  Cato. 
Fruniscor  (rare)  is  transitive  in  Plautus  and  Quadrigarius  (ap.  Gell.). 

{(•^  Fungor  with  Ace.  is  the  rule  in  early  Latin  (Ter.,  Ad.,  603,  is  disputed),  then 
in  Nepos,  Tacitus,  Suetonius,  and  later. 

{d)  Potior  has  Gen.  at  all  periods  (rare  in  Cicero  ;  once  in  Caesar)  ;  the  Ace. 


ABLATIVE.  263 

occasionally  in  earlj'  and  late  Latin,  in  the  b.  Afr.,  the  b.  Z/Isp.,  and  in  Sallust.  Note- 
worthy is  the  use  of  an  act.  potire  with  Gen.  in  Pl.,  Am.,  178,  and  a  paes.  potitus  with 
Gen.  in  several  places  in  Plautus. 

(e)  Vescor  takes  the  Ace.  rarely  in  early  Latin,  in  the  poets,  and  in  later  Latin. 
Vivere,  hSUuari,  take  Abl.  like  vesci. 

3.  Utor  is  a  favorite  word,  and  has  a  most  varied  translation  : 

tJti  aliquo  amico,  to  avail  one's  silf  of  {toenjoy)  a  man'' s  friendship  (to  have  a 
friend  in  him) ;  titi  consilio,  to  follow  advice ;  litl  bond  patre,  to  Mve  t/ie  advantage 
of  having  a  good  father ;  uti  iSgibus,  to  obey  the  laws.    See  the  Lexicons. 

D.  ABLATIVE    OF    CAUSE. 

408.  The  Ablative  of  Cause  is  used  without  a  preposition, 
chiefly  with  Verbs  of  Emotion.     Abldtlvus  Causae. 

In  culpa  sunt  qui  officia  dSserunt  mollitia  animi,  C,  Fin.,  i.  10,  33  ; 

theu  are  to  blame  tvho  shirk  their  duties  from  effeminacy  of  temper. 
Odgrunt  peccare  boni  virtutis  amore,  II.,  Ep.,  1. 16,  52  ;  the  good  hate  to 
sin  from  love  of  virtue.  Delicto  dolere,  correctione  gaudgre  (oportet),  C, 
Lael.,  24,  90  ;  one  ought  to  he  sorry  for  sin,  to  be  glad  of  chastisement. 
N5n  did  potest  quam  flagrem  desiderio  urbls,  C,  Att.^y.  11, \  \  I  hum 
(am  afire)  beyond  expressio7i  with  longing  for  Rome. 

Notes. — 1.  A  mimber  of  combinations  l)ecome  phraseological,  as  the  verbals  :  arbi- 
tratu,  hortatu,  imputeu,  iussu,  missu,  rogatti,  etc.;  also  consilio,  auctoritaite, 
with  a  Gen.  or  possessive  i)rononn  :  iflssti  civium,  at  Uie  bidding  of  the  citizens  ;  meH 
rogatu,  at  my  request. 

2.  Tlie  moving  cause  is  often  expressed  by  a  participle  with  the  Abl.,  which  usually 
precedes  :  adductus,  led ;  ardSns,  fired ;  commotus,  stined  up ;  incitatus,  egged 
on  ;  incensus,  inflamed  ;  impulsus,  dnven  on  ;  motus,  moved,  and  many  others  ; 
amore,  by  loce ;  ira,  by  anger ;  odid,  by  hate ;  metu,  by  fear ;  sp6,  t^y  luope,  etc. 
Metu  perterritos,  sore  frightened :  verScundia  d§territus,  attashed,  etc. 

3.  Instead  of  the  simple  Abl.  the  prepositions  d6  and  ex  (sometimes  in),  with  the 
Abl.,  ob  and  propter  with  the  Ace,  are  often  used  ;  perhaps  occasionally  ab. 

4.  The  preventing  cause  is  expressed  by  prae,  for  (417,  9) :  Prae  gaudio  ubi  sim 
Iiesci5,  Ter.,  lleaut.,  308  ;  Iknoiv  not  where  lamfoi'joy. 

5.  On  causa  and  gratia  with  the  Gen.,  see  373. 

6.  The  use  of  tlie  Abl.  for  the  external  cause,  as  regale  genus  nSn  tam  r6gni 
quamrSgis  vitiis  repudiatum  est  (C,  Leg.,  nr.  7, 15),  tlie  kingly  form  of  gozern- 
ment  was  rejected  not  so  much  by  reason  of  the  faults  of  the  kingly  form,  as  by  reason 
of  tlie  faults  of  the  king,  is  not  common  in  the  early  and  in  the  classical  period,  except 
in  certain  formulye  ;  but  it  becomes  very  common  later. 

7.  The  Ablati\e  of  Cause  may  have  its  origin  in  the  Instrumental  Ablative,  in  the 
Ablative  of  Source,  or  in  the  Comitative  Ablative. 

E.  ABLATIVE    ABSOLUTE. 

409.  The  so-called  Ablative  Absolute  is  an  Ablative  com- 
bined with  a  participle,  and  serves  to  modify  the  verbal 
predicate  of  a  sentence.  Instead  of  the  participle,  a  predi- 
cative substantive  or  adjective  can  be  employed. 


264  ABLATIVK 

Note.— This  Ablative,  which  may  be  called  the  Ablative  of  Circnmstance,  springs 
from  the  Temporal  Use  of  the  Ablative— the  Temporal  from  the  Local.  Another  view 
regards  it  as  an  Ablative  of  Manner,  with  a  predicate  instead  of  an  attribute. 

410.  The  Ablative  Absolute  may  be  translated  by  the  Eng- 
lish so-called  Xominative  (originally  Dative)  Absolute,  which 
is  a  close  equivalent ;  but  for  purposes  of  style,  it  is  often 
well  to  analyze  the  thought,  to  change  Passive  into  Active, 
to  make  use  of  an  abstract  substantive.    . 

Xerxe  rSgnante  (=  cum  Xerxes  regnaret),  Xerxes  reigning.  When 
Xerxes  was  reigning.     In  the  reign  of  Xerxes. 

Xerxe  victO  (=  cum  Xerxgs  victus  asset),  Xerxes  being,  having  been, 
defeated.    When  Xerxes  had  been  defeated.    Aftei'  the  defeat  of  Xerxes. 

Xerxe  rSge  (=  cum  Xerxes  rgx  esset),  Xerxes  [being^  kiiig.  Wlien 
Xerxes  was  king. 

Patre  vivo,  while  father  is,  luas  alive  {in  father's  lifetime), 

Urbe  expugnata  imperator  rediit : 

Passive  Form  :  The  city  [being]  taken  (after  the  city  was  taken),  the 
general  returned. 

Active  Forjh  :  Having  taken  the  city  (after  he  had  taken  the  city), 
the  general  returned. 

Abstract  Form  :  After  the  taking  of  the  city.  After  taking  the 
city. 

Maximas  virtutgs  iacSre  omnes  necesse  est  voluptate  dominante,  C, 
Fin.,  II.  35, 117  ;  all  the  great(est)  virtues  must  necessarily  lie  prostrate, 
IF  (or  WHEN)  the  pleasure  (of  the  senses)  is  mistress.  Eomani  veterSs 
rSgnari  omnSs  voI0bant  Ubertatis  dulcSdine  nondum  experta,  L.,  i.  17,  3  ; 
the  old  Romans  all  wished  to  have  a  king  over  them  (because  they  had) 
not  yet  tried  the  sweetness  of  liberty. 

Remarks. — i.  As  the  Latin  language  has  no  Pf.  Part,  active,  ex- 
cept when  the  Deponent  is  thus  used,  the  passive  construction  is  far 
more  common  than  in  English  : 

luvengs  veste  posits  corpora  ole5  perunxSrunt,  C,  Tusc.,  i.  47, 113  ;  the 
youths,  (having)  laid  aside  their  clothing,  anointed  their  bodies  with  oil; 
or,  laid  as-ide  their  clothing,  and  anointed  their  bodies  loith  oil. 

2.  The  Abl.  Abs.,  though  often  to  be  rendei*ed  by  a  coordinate  sen- 
tence, for  convenience'  sake,  always  presents  a  subordinate  conception: 

(Lysander)  suadet  Lacedaemonils  ut  rggia  potestate  dissolfita  ex  omnibus 
dux  deligatur  ad  bellum  gerendum,  Xep.,  vi.  3,  5  ;  Lysandei"  advises  the 
Lacedaemonians  that  the  royal  poiver  be  done  away  with,  and  a  leader 
he  chosen  from  all,  to  conduct  the  ivar.  Here  the  one  is  necessary  to  the 
other. 

3.  As  a  rule,  the  Abh  Abs.  can  stand  only  when  it  is  not  identical 


LOCATIVE.  265 

with  the  subject,  object,  or  dependent  case  of  the  verbal  predicate. 
Manlius  slew  ilie  Gaul  and  stripped  him  of  his  necklace  is  to  be  ren- 
dered :  Manlius  caesum  Grallum  torque  spoliavit. 

This  rule  is  frequently  violated  at  all  periods  of  the  language,  for 
the  purpose  either  of  emphasis  or  of  stylistic  effect.  The  shifted  con- 
struction is  clearer,  more  vigorous,  more  conversational. 

Neque  ilium  m6  vivo  corrumpi  sinam,  Pl.,  ^.,419  ;  fior  will  I  snffer 
him  to  he  debauched  while  I  am  alive. 

The  violation  is  most  frequent  when  the  dependent  case  is  in  the 
Genitive  : 

lugurtha  fratre  meo  interfecto  regnum  5iu8  sceleris  sui  praedam  fecit, 
S.,  lug.,  14, 11  ;  Jugmiha  killed  ?ny  brother,  and  (=  after  killing  my 
brother)  made  his  throne  the  booty  of  his  crime. 

Notes.— 1.  The  Pf.  Part,  of  Deponents  and  Semi-deponents  as  an  active  in  the 
Abl.  Abs.  is  not  found  in  early  Latin,  and  is  not  common  in  classical  Latin,  where 
it  is  always  without  an  object  and  is  confined  to  verbs  of  Growth  (principally  ortus, 
coortus,  natus).  Death,  and  Motion.  It  becomes  common  later,  being  used  with  an 
object  from  Sallust  on. 

2.  The  Pf .  Part,  of  Deponents  as  a  passive  in  the  Abl.  Abs.  is  confined  in  classical 
Latin  to  gmeritus,  pactUS,  partltUS.  Sallust  and  Livy,  as  well  as  later  writers, 
extend  the  usage.  Tacitus,  however,  shows  but  two  cases  :  adeptUS  (Ann.,  i.  7, 8)  and 
ausus  {A?in.,  III.  67,  4). 

3.  The  Fut.  Part.  act.  in  tlie  Abl.  Abs.  is  post-Ciceronian,  beginning  with  Pollio 
and  LivY. 

4.  The  impersonal  use  of  the  Abl.  Abs.  is  found  not  unfrequently  in  early  Latin 
and  Cicero,  rarely  in  Caesar  and  Sallust.  Most  of  the  forms  so  used  have  become 
adverbial  in  character,  as  optato,  SOrtitQ,  intestato.  consulto,  auspicato,  dirgct5, 
merito,  etc.  The  use  of  a  following  clause  dependent  upon  the  Abl.  is  begun  in 
Cicero  :  aditincto  ut  (Off..,  11. 12, 42).  Sallust  uses  audito  and  comperto  with  the 
Infinitive.  But  Livy  extends  this  construction  very  greatly,  and  introduces  the  use  of 
neuter  adjectives  in  the  same  way  :  incerto  prae  tenebris  quid  aut  peterent  aut 
Vitarent,  L.,  xxvm.  36, 12.    It  is  frequent  in  Tacitus.  * 

5.  The  use  of  adjectives  and  substantives  in  the  Abl.  is  not  common  in  early  Latin, 
but  is  a  favorite  usage  of  tlie  classical  period  and  later  :  mS  auctore,  C,  Or.,  iii. 
14,54. 

6.  A  predicate  substantive,  with  the  participle,  is  rare,  but  occurs  in  good  prose : 
PraetOre  designatS  mortuo  filio,  c,  Tusc,  m.  28, 70. 

LOCATIVE. 

411.  In  the  Singular  of  the  First  and  Second  Declensions, 
names  of  Towns  and  Small  Islands  are  put  in  the  Locative 
of  the  Place  Where. 

Pompgius  hiemare  Dyrrhachii,  ApoUoniae  omnibusque  oppidis  constitu- 
erat,  Caes.,  5.C'.,  in.  5,  i  ;  Pompey  had  determined  to  uinter  at  Dyr- 
rhachium,  Apollonia,  arid  all  the  towns.  Timotbeus  Lesbi  (vixit),  Nei'., 
XI r.  3,  4 ;  Timotheus  lived  at  Lesbos.  Rhodi  ego  non  fui,  sed  fui  in 
Bitbynia,  C,  Plane,  34,  83 ;  Fivas  not  at  Rhodes,  but  I  was  in  Bithynia. 


2^  PREPOSITIONS. 

Remarks. — i.  A  few  substantives  of  the  Third  Declension  also  form 
sporadic  Locatives;  so  Carthagini,  in  Plautus,  Cicero,  and  later; 
Tiburi  in  Cicero,  Livy,  and  later,  and  a  few  others.     See  386. 

2.  Other  Locative  forms  are,  domi,  at  liome  (61,  r.  2),  humi,  on  the 
ground  (first  in  Cicero),  belli,  and  mllitiae,  in  the  combinations  domi 
militiaeque,  belli  domique,  in  peace  and  in  war,  at  home  and  in  the  field  ; 
ruri,  in  the  country  (but  riire  meo,  on  my  farm). 

Parvi  sunt  foris  arma  nisi  est  consilium  domi,  C,  Off.,\.  22,76;  of 
little  value  are  arms  abroad  unless  there  is  wisdom  at  home.  lacere 
humi,  C,  Cat.,  i.  10,  26  ;  to  lie  on  the  ground.  Humi  prosternere,  L., 
XLV.  20,  9;  to  throw  flat  on  the  ground. 

Belli  is  found  alone  occasionally  in  Terence  and  Cicero  ;  Ennius, 
Vergil,  and  Ovid  have  terrae  ;  Vergil  also  campi. 

3.  Appositions  are  put  in  the  Ablative,  commonly  with  in,  and  regu- 
larly follow  wlien  qualified  by  an  attribute  : 

Militgs  Albae  constitgrunt  in  urbe  opportuna,  C,  Ph.,  iv.  2,  6;  the  sol- 
diers halted  at  Alba,  a  conveniently  situated  toivn.  Archias  Antiochiae 
natus  est  celebri  quondam  ujbe,  C,  Arch.,  3,  4  ;  Archias  was  born  at 
Antioch,  once  a  populous  city. 

When  urbe,  city,  oppido,  toivn,  or  insula,  island,  precedes,  the  prep- 
osition is  always  employed  : 

In  urbe  Roma,  in  the  city  (of)  Rome.  In  oppido  Citio,  in  the  town  of 
Citium.     In  insula  Samo,  in  the  island  (of)  Samos. 

4.  Domi  takes  the  possessive  pronoun  in  the  Genitive  : 

Domi  suae  senex  est  mortuus,  C,  N.D.,  iii.  32,  81;  the  old  man  died 
at  his  oivn  house.  Metuis  ut  meae  domi  ctirgtur  diligenter,  Ter.,  Hec, 
257;  you  fear  that  she  ivill  not  be  carefully  7iursed  at  m/y  house.  Also 
alignae  domui  (61,  r.  2),  C,  Tusc,  i.  22,  51;  in  a  strange  house;  domi 
illius,  C,  J)iv.  in  Caec,  18,  58  ;  in  his  house. 

But  in  dom5  Pericli  (65),  Nep.,  vii.  2,  1 ;  in  the  house(\\o\A)  of  Pericles. 
In  domO  casta,  in  a  pure  house.     In  domS,  in  the  house  (not,  at  home). 

Notes.— 1.  Early  Latin  shows  a  number  of  Locative  forms  that  have  disappeared 
for  the  most  part  in  the  classical  period.  So  temperi  (tempori)  replaced  by  tempore 
in  Cicero  (Livy  and  Tacitus  only  in  tempore) ;  mani,  replaced  by  mane  ;  vesper! 
and  herl ;  and  rare  forms  like  di6,  crastini,  proximi.    See  37,  5. 

2.  On  Locative  forms  of  the  pronouns,  see  t)l,  3.    Ou  animi,  see  374,  n.  7. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

412.  The  Prepositions  are  originally  local  adverbs,  which 
serve  to  define  more  narrowly  the  local  ideas  involved  in  the 
cases.  The  analogy  of  the  local  adverbs  is  followed  by  other 
adverbs,  which  are  not  so  much  prepositions  as  prepositional 
adverbs.     Of  the  Prepositions  proper,  that  is,  Prepositions 


PREPOSITIOKS.  267 

used  in  composition  (see  Note),  as  well  as  in  the  regimen  of 
cases,  cum  (con)  does  not  clearly  indicate  a  local  relation. 

The  only  cases  that  involve  local  ideas  are  the  Accusative 
and  Ablative.  The  Accusative,  as  the  case  of  the  Direct 
Object,  ]'epresents  the  relation  lohither  ?  the  Ablative  repre- 
sents the  relations  ivUence  ?  and  zvhere  ? 

Remarks. — i.  In  verbs  of  Motion,  the  Result  of  the  Motion  is  often 
considered  as  Rest  in  a  place  (where).     See  385,  n.  2. 

2.  In  verbs  of  Rest,  the  Rest  is  sometimes  conceived  as  the  Result 
of  Motion  (whither).     See  385,  n.  3. 

Note.— Prepositions  derive  their  name  from  the  fact  that  they  are  prefixed  in  com- 
position. Many  of  the  Latin  Prepositions  are  not  used  in  composition,  and  these  may 
be  called  improper  Prepositions.  The  prefixes  amb-  (am-  an-),  dis  (di),  por-  (porr-, 
pol-),  red-  (re-),  sed-  (sg-)  and  v6-  are  sometimes  called  inseparable  prepositions. 

413.  Position  of  the  Preposition. — The  Preposition  gener- 
ally precedes  the  case. 

Remarks. — i.  Cum  always  follows  a  personal  pronoun,  and  may  or 
may  not  follow  a  relative  pronoun  :  mScum,  with  me;  quocum  or  cum 
quo,  ivith  whom.  Dg  is  not  uncommonly  placed  after  quo  and  qua,  rarely 
after  quibus.  Position  after  the  relative  is  found  here  and  tlierc  also 
in  -the  case  of  other  Prepositions,  but  principally  in  early  Latin  or  the 
poets,  as  follows :  ab,  ad  (also  in  Cicero),  ex,  in,  per,  post  (after  hunc, 
C,  Tiisc,  n.  6,  15),  and  pro. 

Dissyllabic  Prepositions  are  postponed  more  often,  but  Cicero  re- 
stricts this  to  pronouns,  with  the  following  Prepositions  :  ante,  circa, 
contra,  inter,  penes,  propter,  sine,  ultra.     Caesar  postpones  intra  also. 

Tenus,  as  far  as,  and  versus,  -ward,  always  follow. 

2.  When  the  substantive  has  an  attribute  the  Preposition  may  come 
between ;  banc  igitur  ob  causam  (C,  Br. ,  24 ,94),  for  this  reason,  therefore. 

3.  The  Preposition  may  be  separated  from  its  case  by  an  attributive 
adjective  or  its  equivalent,  or  other  modifier  of  the  case:  post  vgro  Sullae 
victoriam,  hut  after  Sulla^s  victory ;  ad  beate  vivendum,  for  living  hap- 
pily. But  model  prose  usually  avoids  separating  the  Preposition  by 
more  than  a  word  or  two.     The  poets  have  no  scruples. 

Notes.— 1.  A  peculiarity  of  poetry,  Livy,  and  later  prose  is  the  post-position  of  both 
Preposition  and  attribute  :  metu  in  magno,  L.,  ix.  37, 11  ;  in  great  fear. 

2.  Especially  to  be  noted  is  the  position  of  per,  through  (by),  in  adjurations:  Lydia 
die  per  omnes  te  deos  oro,  H.,  0.,  i.  8, 1  ;  Lydia,  tell,  by  all  the  gods,  I  pray  thee. 
Per  ego  te  deos  oro,  Ter.,  And^  834 ;  I  pray  thee,  by  the  gods. 

3.  Between  the  Preposition  and  its  case  are  often  inserted  tlie  enclitics  que,  ne,  ve ; 
and  after  ante,  post,  and  practer  the  conjunctions  autem,  fnim,  quidem,  tamen, 
vgro,  occur,  but  not  frequently.     The  first  word  in  the  combinations  et— et,  aut— aut, 


268  PREPOSITIONS. 

simul-simnl,  vel— vel,  sometimes  follows  the  Preposition;  cum  et  diurno  et  nOC« 
turno  metu,  c,  Tusc,  v.  23, 66. 

414.  Rejjetitioii  and  Ornissioii  of  the  Preposition. — With 
different  words  which  stand  in  the  same  connection,  the  Prep- 
osition is  repeated,  when  the  Preposition  is  emphatic,  or  the 
individual  words  are  to  be  distinguished  ;  so  regularly  after 
aut — aut,  et — et,  nee— nee,  vel— vel,  n5n  modo— sed  etiam, 
sed,  nisi,  quam,  and  in  comparative  clauses  with  ut.  Other- 
wise it  is  omitted  ;  so  always  with  que. 

Et  ex  urbe  et  ex  agrJs,  C,  Cat.,  11.  10,  21  ;  both  from  (the)  city  and 
from  (the)  country.  De  honore  aut  de  dignitate  contendimus,  C,  Tiisc, 
III.  21,  50  ;  we  are  striving  about  office,  or  about  position. 

Remarks. — i.  When  a  relative  follows  in  the  same  construction  as  its 
antecedent,  the  Preposition  is  usually  omitted. 

(Cimon)  incidit  in  eandem  invidiam  (in)  quam  pater  suus,  Nep.,  v.  3,  1 ; 
Cimon  fell  into  the  same  disrepute  into  ivhich  his  father  had  fallen. 

2.  So  in  questions  :  Ante  tempus  mori  miserum.  Quod  tandem  tempus  ? 
C,  Tusc.,1.  39,93  ;  a  hard  case  'tis,  to  die  before  the  time.  (Before) 
what  time,  pray  9 

3.  After  quasi,  tamquam,  sicut,  the  Preposition  is  more  often  inserted. 
Rus  ex  urbe  tamquam  6  vinclis  6volav6runt,  Cf.  C,  Or.,  11.  6,  22  ;  they 

sped  from  the  city  to  the  country  as  if  from  a  jail. 

4.  Two  Prepositions  are  rarely  used  with  the  same  word.  Either  the 
word  is  repeated,  a  form  of  is  used,  or  one  Prep,  turned  into  an  adverb  : 

Pro  ScipiSne  et  adversus  Scipionem,  for  and  against  Scipio.  Ante  pfl- 
gnam  et  post  eam,  before  and  after  the  battle.  Et  in  corpore  et  extra  [sunt] 
quaedam  bona,  C,  Fin.,  11.  21,  68.  But  intra  extraque  munitiOngs,  Caes., 
^.a,  m.  72,  2. 

415.  As  adverbs  without  a  case  are  used  : 

Ad,  about,  with  numerals  in  Caesar,  Livy,  and  later  ;  adversus,  to 
meet,  especially  in  Plautus  and  Terence  ;  ante  and  post  of  Time  (403, 
N.  4)  ;  contra,  opposite,  on  the  other  hand  ;  circa,  round  about,  and 
circum  (rare)  ;  prae,  forward,  in  Plautus  and  Terence  ;  props,  near, 
and  propter  (rare);  iuxta,  near  by  (rare);  intra,  inside  (post-classical); 
extra,  outside;  Infra,  beloiv ;  supra,  above;  subter,  beneath,  and  super, 
above,  both  rare;  citra,  07i  this  side;  ultra,  beyond ;  coram,  in  the  pres- 
ence of;  clam,  secretly  ;  praeter,  e.rcept  (Sall.,  Livy  and  later). 

I.— Prepositions  Construed  witii  tiie  Accusative. 

416.  The  Prepositions  construed  with  the  Accusative  are  : 
Ad,  adversus,  ante,  apud,  circa,  circum,  circiter,  cis,  citra. 


PREPOSITIONS.  269 

clam,  contra,  erga,  extra,  infra,  inter,  intra,  iuxta,  ob,  penesi 
per,  post  (pone),  praeter,  prope,  propter,  secundum,  supra, 
trans,  ultra,  usque,  versus. 

1.  Ad.  Of  Motion  Whither,  to,  up  to.  Of  Direction,  foivards{a.d  ori- 
■entem\  Of  Respect,  for,  with  regard  to  (ad  has  rSs  perspicax) ;  found 
first  in  Terence.  Of  Manner,  after,  according  to  (ad  hunc  modum) ; 
colloquial  (in  Cicero's  speeches  only  quern  ad  modum).  Of  Place,  at 
(=  apud),  colloquial  (ad  montem,  C,  Fam.,  xv.  2,  2)  and  legal  (ad  forum, 
ad  te),  rare  in  Cicero's  speeches.  Of  Time,  at,  refers  only  to  future, 
and  gives  either  a  point  (ad  vesperum,  at  evening),  an  interval  (ad 
paucos  dies,  a  feic  days  hence),  or  an  approaching  time,  towards. 
With  Numerals,  about.  Of  Purpose,  for  (castra  hosti  ad  praedam  re- 
linquunt,  L.,  iii.  63,  4).  Also  in  phrases.  Post-Ciceronian  Latin  ex- 
tended the  sphere  of  ad,  and  colloquially  it  was  often  a  substitute  for 
the  Dative. 

2.  Adversus  (-um),  [i.e.,  turned  to].  Towards,  over  against,  against. 
Kare  in  early  Latin  and  in  Caesar  and  Sallust.  In  the  sense,  over 
against,  it  is  found  first  in  Livy.  In  the  transferred  sense,  towards,  it 
expresses  usually  hostile  disposition,  but  begins  to  indicate  friendly 
disposition  in  Cicero.  Exadversus  (-um)  is  found  occasionally,  begin- 
ning with  Cicero,  and  is  always  local. 

3.  Ante  [i.e.,  over  against,  facing].  Of  Place  Where,  before.  Of 
Place  Whither,  before  ;  rarely  (not  in  Cicero).  Of  Time,  before;  the 
most  frequent  use.     Of  Degree,  before  ;  not  in  Cicero  or  Caesar. 

4.  Apud  is  used  chiefly  of  Persons.  At  the  house  of  (characteristic 
locality).  In  the  presence  of  (iudicem).  In  the  writings  of  (Platonem). 
In  the  view  of.  Of  Place,  at,  in  (=  in) ;  common  in  comedy  (apud 
villam) ;  rare  elsewhere,  especially  with  proper  names,  where  ad  was 
preferred,  except  by  Sallust.  In  phrases  like  apud  s6  esse,  to  be  in 
one's  senses. 

5.  Circa  (circum).  Around.  Circum  is  exclusively  local  (except 
once  in  Vitruvius,  where  it  is  temporal).  Circa  in  the  local  sense  is 
found  first  in  Cicero  In  the  meaning  about,  of  Time  or  Number, 
it  is  found  first  in  Horace.  So,  too,  in  the  transferred  sense  of  the 
sphere  of  mental  action  :  circa  virentis  est  animus  campos,  H.,  0.,  iL 

6.  Circiter.  Of  Plfice,  about ;  once  in  Plautus.  Usually  of  Time, 
about,  especially  with  numerals  ;  but  the  prepositional  usage  is  on  the 
whole  small. 

7.  Cis.  citra.  This  side,  short  of.  Of  Place  ;  cis  found  first  in 
Varro,  citra  in  Cicero.  Cis  is  occasionally  temporal  in  Plautus,  Sal- 
lust, Ovid.  Citra,  of  Time,  ivithin,  this  side  of;  found  first  in  Ovid. 
Without  {stopping  short  of)  ;  found  first  in  Livy,  then  in  Ovid,  and 


270  PREPOSITIONS. 

the  post- Augustan  prose  writers.     In  C,  Or.,  18, 50,  citra  maybe  ren- 
dered/wW^er  hack ;  i.e.,  nearer  the  beginning. 

8.  Clam.  Secretly.  With  Ace.  in  early  Latin,  in  the  h.  Hisp.,  and 
in  the  Jurists.  With  Abl.  in  Caesar  {B.C.,  11.32,  8),  and  in  the  h. 
Afr.,  11,4  (both  passages  disputed).  Clanculum  with  Ace.,  only  in 
Terence. 

9.  Contra.  Opposite  to,  over  against,  opposed  to,  against.  It  appears 
as  a  Preposition  first  in  the  classical  period,  and  is  used  both  in  local 
and  transferred  senses.  In  the  latter  case  the  force  is  predominantly 
hostile. 

10.  Erga.  Opposite,  toivards.  Of  Place  ;  very  rarely,  in  early  and 
late  Latin.  Usually  in  the  transferred  sense  of  friendly  relations. 
The  hostile  sense  is  occasional  in  comedy,  Nepos,  and  later  writers. 
Erga  is  used  always  of  Persons  or  personified  Things  until  the  time  of 
Tacitus. 

11.  Extra.  Without,  outside  of,  heside.  It  is  used  of  local  and  trans- 
ferred relations  ;  rarely  in  the  sense  of  sine  (Tag.,  II.,  i.  49)  ;  occasion- 
ally in  sense  of  praeter,  except. 

12.  infra.  Beneath,  loiver  down.  Of  Space  ;  more  frequently  in 
classical  Latin,  of  Kank  or  Grade  ;  Temporal  but  once  (C,  Br.,  10,  40). 
It  occurs  but  rarely  in  later  Latin,  and  is  cited  only  once  from  early 
Latin  (Ter.,  Eun.,  4Sg). 

13.  Inter.  Between.  Of  Place  Where,  rarely  of  Place  Whither. 
Colloquial  were  phrases  like  inter  viam  (vias),  on  the  road,  inter  nos, 
between  ourselves.  Inter  paucos,  preeminently,  is  post-classical.  Of 
Time,  during ;  at  all  periods,  but  in  Cicero  principally  in  the  Let- 
ters. 

14.  Intra.  Within.  Of  Local  and  Temporal  (not  in  Cicero)  rela- 
tions. The  usage  in  transferred  relations  is  post-classical,  and  mainly 
poetical. 

15.  luxta  [i.e.,  adjoining^  Hard  by,  near,  next  to.  It  appears  as 
a  Preposition  first  in  Varro,  then  in  Caesar,  but  not  in  Cicero.  It  is 
used  locally  until  Livy,  who  employs  it  also  in  transferred  senses  of 
Time,  Order,  etc. 

16.  Ob  {i.e.,  over  against,  opposite  io^  Right  before.  Of  Place 
occasionally  at  all  periods  (not  in  Caesar,  Livy,  Curtius,  Tacitus). 
Of  Cause,  for  ;  found  in  early  Latin  (not  with  personal  pronouns  in 
Plautus),  in  classical  and  post-classical  Latin  in  increasing  propor- 
tion. Caesar  uses  it  only  in  formulae  with  rem  (r5s)  and  causam. 
Cicero  and  Caesar  do  not  use  ob  id  or  ob  ea,  which,  found  in  early 
Latin,  reappear  in  Sallust.  Ob  has  almost  completely  supplanted 
propter  in  Tacitus.  With  the  substantive  and  participle  (ob  dSfSnsum 
Capitolium)  ob  is  found  first  in  Livy. 

17.  Penes.     With  =  in    the   hands  of ;   of    Persons.     Applied  to 


PREPOSITIOJsTS.  271 

Things,  it  is  found  in  poetry  first  in  Horace  ;  in  prose  first  in  Tacitus. 
It  is  found  wholly  with  esse  until  later  Latin. 

18.  Per.  Of  Space,  through  ;  of  Time,  duri?ig ;  of  Cause,  owing  to  ; 
of  Instrument,  &?/  (both  persons  and  things)  ;  of  Manner,  hy,  in.  It 
is  used  phraseologically  in  oaths,  hy ;  also  with  persons  (sometimes 
things),  as  per  me  licet,  as  far  as  I  am  concerned  you  may.  Per  =  ab 
of  Agent  is  found  only  in  late  Latin. 

19.  P5ne.  Behind,  only  in  Local  relations;  it  is  most  frequent  in 
Plautus,  occurs  but  once  in  Cicero,  never  in  Caesar  or  Horace,  and 
is  rare  in  general. 

20.  Post.  Of  Place,  behind;  rare,  but  in  good  usage.  Of  Time, 
after.     Of  Rank,  subordinate  to  ;  in  Sallust,  poets,  and  late  prose. 

21.  Praeter.  Of  Place,  in  front  of,  on  before,  past.  In  a  transferred 
sense,  except ;  contrary  to  (opiniSnem  and  the  like).  Of  Rank,  beyond 
(praeter  omn6s  is  cited  only  from  Plautus  and  Horace  ;  usually  praeter 
cSteros). 

22.  Prope.  Of  Place,  near ;  found  first  in  the  classical  period.  It 
sometimes  has  the  constructions  of  adjectives  of  Nearness.  Of  Time, 
near ;  very  rare  and  post-classical,  as  Livv,  Suetonius.  Propius  is 
found  first  in  Caesar  as  a  preposition. 

23.  Propter.  Of  Place,  near.  Of  Cause,  on  account  of ;  very  com- 
mon in  early  and  classical  Latin,  but  avoided  by  many  authors,  notably 
Tacitus.  With  substantive  and  participle  it  appears  first  in  Varro  ; 
then  is  common  in  Livy,  and  later. 

24.  Secundum  [i.e.,  following^.  Of  Place,  along  (lltus),  close  behind; 
\erj  rare  (C,  Fam.,  iv.  12,  1).  Of  Time,  immediately  after ;  in  early 
Latin  and  Cicero,  common  in  Livy,  but  never  in  Caesar,  Sallust, 
Tacitus.  Of  Series,  7iext  to  ;  in  Plautus  and  Cicero.  Of  Reference, 
according  to  ;  at  all  periods.     Secus  is  ante-classical  and  rare. 

25.  Supra.  Of  Place,  above,  beyond  ;  so  Cicero  almost  exclusively. 
Of  Time,  beyond;  very  rare.  Of  Grade,  above.  Of  Authority,  in 
charge  of;  Vitruvius  and  later. 

26.  Trans.     O71  the  other  side,  beyond,  across  ;  only  in  Local  relations, 

27.  Ultra.  Of  Space  and  Measure,  on  that  side,  beyond.  Of  Time  ; 
only  in  late  Latin.  The  early  form  uls  is  very  rare  and  in  formulae,  as, 
Cis  Tiberim  et  uls  Tiberim.  In  late  Latin  ultra  supplants  praeter  almost 
wholly. 

28.  TJsque,  iip  to,  is  found  once  in  Terence,  several  times  in  Cicero, 
and  occasionally  later,  with  the  Ace.  of  the  name  of  a  town.  With 
other  names  of  localities  it  appears  first  in  Livy. 

29.  Versus,  -ward.  As  a  preposition  it  first  appears  in  the  classical 
period  and  is  found  usually  with  names  of  Towns,  and  small  Islands  ; 
with  other  words  it  is  regularly  combined  with  the  prepositions  ad  (not 
in  Cicero)  or  in. 


272  PREPOSITIONS. 

II.    Prepositions  Construed  with  tine  Ablative. 

417.  Prepositions  construed  with  the  Ablative  are  a  (ab, 
abs),  absque,  coram,  cum,  de,  e  (ex),  prae,  pro,  sine,  tenus; 
rarely  fine,  palam,  procul,  simul. 

1.  A  (ab,  abs).  Of  Place  Whence,  from,  especially  of  the  point  of 
departure  ;  so  in  phrases,  a  tergo,  a  capite,  etc.  Of  Cause,  from  (Ira) ; 
beginning  with  Livy.  Of  Agent,  by.  Of  Remote  Origin,  from.  Of 
Time,  from.  Of  Reference,  according  to,  after.  Of  Specification,  in 
(doleo  ab  oculis) ;  often  \/ith  compound  verbs. 

Note.— The  form  before  vowels  and  h  is  always  ab  ;  before  consonants  usually  a, 
though  ab  is  not  uncommon  before  consonants  other  than  the  labials  b,  f,  p,  v,  and  is 
frequent  before  1,  n,  r,  S,  and  i  ( j) ;  abs  is  found  only  before  t§  and  in  the  combination 
absque.    Cicero  uses  abs  te  in  his  early  writings,  but  prefers  a  tS  in  his  later  ones. 

2.  Absque  [i.e.,  off\  Without.  Peculiar  to  early  Latin,  where  it 
is  used  in  conditional  sentences  only.  Occasionally  in  later  Latin,  as, 
absque  sententia  (Quixt.,  vii,  2,  44),  for  praeter  sententiam. 

3.  Coram.  Face  to  face  with,  in  the  presence  of ;  it  is  used  with  Per- 
sons only,  and  is  found  first  in  Cicero,  and  then  in  later  writers,  but  in 
general  it  is  rare  until  the  time  of  Tacitus,  who  uses  it  very  often  in 
the  Annals  and  always  postpones. 

4.  Cum.  With ;  of  Accompaniment  in  the  widest  sense.  With 
Abl.  of  Manner  regularly  when  there  is  no  attributive  ;  often  when 
there  is  one.  Sometimes  it  is  used  of  mutual  action  :  5rare  cum,  plead 
with  (Plautus),  etc. 

5.  D6.  Of  Place,  down  from,  and  then  from;  especially  with  com- 
pounds of  de  and  ex.  Of  Source,  from;  with  verbs  of  Receiving  (actual 
and  mental).  Of  Origin;  but  mainly  in  poetry  and  later  prose.  Of 
Object,  concerning.  Of  Time ;  in  phrases  d6  nocte,  d6  dig  (diem  dS  die, 
day  after  day).  Of  the  Whole  from  which  a  part  is  taken.  Of  Refer- 
ence, according  to  (d6  sententia).     Of  Material  ;  poetical  and  late. 

6.  E  (ex).  Of  Place,  out  of,  from.  Often  in  phraseological  usages, 
as  ex  -psirte,  partly ;  ex  asse,  and  the  like.  With  verbs  of  Receiving, 
from.  01  Time,  from;  ex  tempore  is  phraseological.  Of  Origin, /row. 
Of  Reference,  according  to.  Of  Manner  ;  in  many  phrases,  as  ex 
aequo,  ex  Ordine.  E  is  used  before  consonants  only,  ex  before  both 
vowels  and  consonants. 

7.  Fine  (or  flnl).  Up  to  ;  found  in  Plautus  and  Cato,  then  not  un- 
til very  late  Latin.  With  the  Gen.  it  occurs  in  b.  Afr.  and  in  Sallust, 
Fr.;  then  not  until  Ovid  and  very  late  Latin. 

8.  Palam,  in  the  sense  of  c5ram,  in  the  presence  of,  is  found  first  in 
Horace  and  Livy,  and  is  rare. 


PREPOSITIONS.  273 

9.  Prae.  Of  Place,  in  front  of;  with  verbs  of  Motion  only,  in  clas- 
sical Latin.  In  early  Latin  in  the  phrase  prae  manti,  at  hand.  Of  the 
Preventive  Cause,  for ;  with  negatives  only,  in  and  after  the  classical 
period  ;  in  early  Latin,  also  in  positive  sentences.  Of  Comparison,  in 
comparison  with  ;  occasionally  at  all  periods. 

10.  Pro.  Of  Place,  before;  not  in  early  Latin,  but  found  first  in 
the  classical  period,  where  it  is  confined  to  certain  combinations,  as 
pro  rostris,  castris,  aede,  vallo,  etc.,  and  means  before  and  on.  In  behalf 
of ;  not  cited  for  early  Latin.  Instead  of;  very  common  at  all  periods. 
In  proportion  to;  at  all  periods.     Quam  pro;  found  first  in  Livy. 

11.  Trocvd,  far  from,  is  poetical,  and  begins  in  prose  with  Livy.  In 
classical  Latin  prose  always  with  ab. 

12.  Simul,  in  the  sense  of  cum,  belongs  to  poetry  and  Tacitus  (A7in., 
m.  64). 

13.  Sine,  without,  is  opposed  to  cum. 

14.  Tenus,  to  the  extent  of.  Of  Space  (actual  and  transferred),  as 
far  as.  It  is  found  occasionally  with  the  Gen.,  but  almost  wholly 
with  PI.,  and  perhaps  but  once  in  Cicero  {Arat.,  83) ;  otherwise  it  be- 
longs to  poetry,  making  its  first  appearance  in  prose  in  Cicero  {Dei., 
13,  3G)  and  Livy.  It  occurs  with  the  Ace.  in  late  Latin.  Tenus  is  al- 
ways postponed. 

III.   Prepositions   Construed   with   the   Accusative 
and   Ablative. 

418.  Prepositions  construed  with  the  Accusative  and  Ab- 
lative are  in,  sub,  subter,  super. 

1.  In  (the  forms  endo,  indu,  are  early  and  rare),  (a)  With  Accusative : 
Of  Place,  into,  into  the  midst  of.  Of  Disposition  and  Direction, 
towards.  Of  Time,  into  (multam  noctem),  for  (diem,  multos  annos,  poste- 
rum).  Of  Purpose  or  Destination,  for  ;  mostly  post-classical.  Of  Man- 
ner, in,  after.  Phraseologically  with  neuter  adjectives  :  in  deterius,  for 
the  worse ;  but  mainly  post-classical.     With  Distributives,  to,  among. 

(b)  With  Ablative :  Of  Place,  in,  on.  Of  Time,  within.  Of  Refer- 
ence, in  the  case  of,  in  regard  to,  in  the  matter  of.  Of  Condition,  iji 
(armis).  In  many  phrases,  especially  with  neuter  adjectives,  in  incerto, 
dubio,  integro,  ambiguo,  etc. 

2.  Sub.  (a)  With  Accusative  :  Of  Place  Whither,  under.  Of  Time 
Approaching,  about  (noctem,  vesperum) ;  just  Past,  immediately  after. 
Of  Condition,  under  (sub  potestatem  redigi). 

(b)  With  Ablative  :  Of  Place  Where,  under ;  also  in  phrases,  sub 
armis,  etc.  Of  Time  When,  about ;  rare,  and  first  in  Caesar.  Of  Posi- 
tion, under  (r5ge,  iudice,  etc.).  Of  Condition,  ww6?er  (ea  condiciQne) ;  first 
in  Livy. 

18 


274  INFINITIVE. 

3.  Subter.  (a)  With  Accusative  ;  rare,  and  locally  equal  to  sub. 

(b)  With  the  Ablative  ;  more  rare  and  almost  wholly  poetical  (Catui,- 
Lus  and  Vergil).  Cf.C,  Tusc.,y.  i,  4,  which  may  be  Ace.  Subtua 
occurs  only  in  Vitr.,  iv.  2,  5,  and  then  with  the  Accusative. 

4.  Super,  (a)  With  Accusative  but  once  before  the  classical  time  : 
Of  Place,  over,  above.  Of  Time,  during;  found  first  in  Pliny,  Epp. 
Metaphorically  of  Degree,  beyond  (super  modum) ;  post-classical. 

(b)  With  the  Ablative  :  Of  Space,  above.  Of  Time,  during  (not 
until  the  Augustan  poets).  Metaphorically  =  praeter ;  very  rare  : 
=  ds,  concerning;  colloquial;  hence  in  Plautus,  Cato,  Cicero's  Ze/- 
ters  {ad  Att.),  Sallust,  Horace,  Livy;  but  uncommon. 

INFINITIVE. 
The  Infinitive  as  a  Substantive. 

419.  The  Infinitive  is  the  substantive  form  of  the  verb. 

Note.— The  Infinitive  differs  from  a  verbal  substantive  in  that  it  retains  the  adver- 
bial attribute,  the  designations  of  voice  and  time,  and  the  regimen  of  the  verb  : 

Amare,  io  Ume ;  vald6  amare,  to  love  hugely ;  amari,  to  be  loved ;  amavisse,  to 
have  loved ;  amare  aliquem,  to  love  a  man  ;  noc6re  alicui,  to  hurt  a  ma)}. 

Bnt  the  great  claim  of  the  Infinitive  to  be  considered  a  verb  lies  in  the  involution  of 
predicate  and  subject.  Like  the  finite  verb,  the  Infinitive  involves  predicate  and  sub- 
ject ;  but  the  subj.  is  indefinite  and  the  predication  is  dependent. 

420.  The  Infinitive,  when  it  stands  alone,  involves  an  in- 
definite Accusative  Subject,  and  the  Predicate  of  tliat  Sub- 
ject is,  of  course,  in  the  Accusative  Case. 

Rggem  esse,  to  be  king.  Bonum  esse,  to  be  good.  Compare  quid  stultius 
quam  aliquem  eo  sib!  placgre  quod  ipse  non  f5cit.  Sen.,  E.3I.,  74,  17  ;  what 
is  more  foolish  than  for  a  man  to  (that  a  man  should)  pride  himself  on 
what  he  has  not  done  himself. 

So  in  the  paradigm  of  the  verb  : 

Amaturum  esse,  io  be  about  to  love. 

Note.— On  the  Nora,  with  the  Inf.  by  Attraction,  see  528. 

In  consequence  of  this  double  nature,  the  Infinitive  may  be  used  as 
a  substantive  or  as  a  verb. 

421.  The  Infinitive,  as  a  substantive,  is  used  regularly  in 
two  cases  only — Nominative  and  Accusative.  In  the  other 
cases  its  place  is  supplied  by  the  Gerund  and  the  Ablative 
Supine. 

Notes.— 1.  Traces  of  the  originiil  Dat.  (or  Loc.)  nature  of  the  Infinitive  are  elill 
apparent  in  many  constriictions,  which  are,  liowevcr,  mostly  poetical  : 


INFINITIVE.  275 

(a)  With  verbs  of  Motion  in  early  Latin  and  the  later  poets,  when  ut,  ad  with 
Gerundive  or  Sii]).  is  to  be  expected. 

Abilt  aedem  visere  Minervae,  Tl-,  ^ iQoo;  Khe  wentmrau  to  visit  the  temjM 
of  Minerva.  Semper  in  Oceanum  mittit  mg  quaerere  gemmas,  Prop,,  ii.  (hi.)  16 
(8),  17  ;  she  is  always  semling  me  to  the  Ocean  to  look  for  {in  quest  of)i)earls. 

if))  With  verbs  of  Giving,  Rendering,  and  the  lilce,  in  early  Latin  and  the  poets,  where 
the  Ace.  of  the  Gerundive  is  to  be  expected.  Classical  is  the  use  of  bibere  only,  in  this 
way.    (The  old  form  biber  points  to  the  effacement  of  the  final  sense  of  this  Inf.) 

iovi  bibere  ministrare,  Cf.  c,  Tusc,  i.  26.  Quern  virum  aut  heroa  lyra  vel 
acri  tibia  siimes  celebrare,  Clio'?  H.,  0.,  1. 12,1.  Different,  of  course,  are  cases 
like  di  tibi  posse  tuos  tribuant  dgfendere  semper,  Ov.,  Tr.,  m.  5, 21,  where  posse 
defendere  is  felt  as  potestatem  defendendi. 

(c)  With  many  adjectives  where  the  Sup.  in  u,  or  some  construction  of  Purpose,  is  to 
be  expected. 

In  early  Latin  the  adjectives  are  paratus,  COnsuetUS,  defessus.  But  this  usage  is 
widely  extended  by  the  Augustan  poets  Vergii.  and  Horace,  and  later. 

It  is  confined  principally,  however,  to  adjectives  of  capability,  ability.,  necessity,  etc., 
and  adjectives  like  facilis  (with  act.  as  well  as  pass.  Inf.,  first  in  Prop.),  difficilis,  and 
the  like :  Eoma  capi  facilis,  Lucan,  ii.  656.  Note  the  strange  usage  dissentire 
manifgstUS,  Tac,  Ami.,  n.  57,  4,  and  occasionally  elsewhere. 

2.  The  Inf.  may  take  an  adj.  attribute,  but  in  classical  prose  this  is  limited  to  ip- 
sum,  hSc  ipsum,  and  t5tum  h5c : 

Vivere  ipsum  turpe  est  nobis,  livimj  itself  is  a  disgrace  to  us.  Quibusdam 
tStum  hoc  displicet  philosopbari  (280,  i,  a). 

The  Infinitive  as  a  Subject. 

422.  The  Infinitive,  as  a  Subject,  is  treated  as  a  neuter 
substantive. 

Incipere  mult5  est  quam  inpetrare  facilius,  Pl.,  Poen.,  974  ;  heginning 
is  much  easier  (work)  than  winning.  Miserum  est  dgturbari  fortunis 
omnibus,  C,  Quinct.,  31,  95;  it  is  ivretched  to  find  oiie's  self  turned  rudely 
out  of  all  one's  fortunes.  N5n  tam  turpe  fuit  vinci  quam  contendisse  de- 
c5rum  est,  Ov.,  M.,  ix.  6  (280^  2,  a). 

Notes.— 1.  The  use  of  the  Inf.  as  a  subj.  grew  out  of  its  use  as  an  obj.,  but  the 
original  Dat.  (Loc.)  sense  was  lost  to  the  consciousness  just  as  the  prepositional  sense 
of  our  own  to  is  lost  when  our  Inf.  becomes  a  subj.;  as  in,  to  err  is  human,  to  forgive 
divine.  No  Roman  felt  turpe  fuit  vinci,  as,  there  was  disgrace  in  being  beaten  ; 
bonum  est  legere  was  to  him  another  bona  est  l§ctio  (see  Priscian,  408, 27). 

2.  Tlie  substantives  used  as  predicates  are  not  common  in  early  Latin.  Lubido  est 
is  confined  to  Plautus.  Stultitia  est,  consilium  est,  and  tempus  est  are  universal. 
Cicero  introduces  llie  not  uncommon  mOS  est,  and  many  others  with  est,  as  :  con- 
suettidO  (-inis),  vitium,  iiis,  fas,  nefas,  facinus,  fatum,  caput,  r§s  (Caesar), 
opus,  munus,  ofiicium,  onus,  sapientia,  and  a  few  others.  Still  more  are  found 
later.  Many  of  these  also  take  ut ;  so  ofl&cium  always  in  comedy  (except  Ter.,  And., 
331). 

3.  Neuter  adjectives  are  used  as  predicates  in  great  variety.  Ciceronian  are  certius 
(quam),  c5nsentaneum,  falsum,  incredibile,  integrum,  gloriosum,  mains 
(quam),  mirum,  novom,  optimum,  rgctum,  singulare,  tritum,  verisimile, 
vSrum.  Most  of  them,  however,  but  once.  ISome  of  these  also  take  ut,  but  not  often 
in  good  prose. 


276  INFINITIVE. 


4.  In  early  Latin  many  impersonal  verbs  are  used  as  predicates.  Classical  Latin 
retains  most  of  them,  but  drops  condecet,  dispudet,  subolet,  and  adds  some,  such 
as  paenitet,  dedecet,  displicet,  prodest,  obest,  attinet.  others  come  in  later. 
Some,  such  as  oportet,  also  take  ut  or  the  simple  Subjv.  Noteworthy  is  est,  ii  is  jws- 
dble,  found  first  in  Varko  and  Lucr.,  then  not  till  Verg.  and  Hor.,  and  never  common. 

5.  Certain  abstract  phrases,  whose  meanings  are  akin  to  the  words  already  men- 
tioned, take  the  Inf.  as  a  subject.  So  especially  predicate  Genitives,  as  COnsuetudinis 
and  moris  ;  or  combinations  like  quid  negotii,  nihil  negotii  est ;  predicate  Datives 
such  as  cordi  est,  ciirae  est,  both  unclassical ;  or  phrases,  as  operae  pretium,  in 
animo  esse,  in  mentem  venire,  of  which  the  last  two  were  introduced  by  Cicero. 


The  Infinitive  as  an  Object. 

423.  I.  The  Infinitive  is  used  as  the  Object  of  Verbs  of 
Creation,  commonly  known  as  Auxiliary  Verbs. 

These  Verbs  kelp  the  Infinitive  into  existence. 

2.  Such  verbs  denote  Will,  Power,  Duty,  Habit,  Inclination,  "Re- 
solve, Continuance,  End,  and  the  like,  with  their  opposites. 

Emori  cupio,  Ter.,  Heaut.,  971 ;  Iivant  to  die.  [Cato]  esse  quam  vidgri 
bonus  malebat,  S.,  C,  54,5  ;  Cato  'preferred  being  {good)  to  seeming 
good.  Sed  precor  ut  possim  ttitius  esse  miser,  Ov.,  Tr.,  v.  2,  78  ;  hut  1 
pray  that  I  may  be  more  safely  tvretched.  Vincere  scis,  Hannibal ;  victo- 
ria titi  nescis,  L.,xxii.  51  ;  how  to  ivin  victory,  you  know,  Hannibal ; 
how  to  make  use  of  victory,  you  know  not.  Qui  mori  didicit,  servire  dS- 
didicit,  Sen.,  E.M.,  26,  10  ;  he  who  has  learned  to  die  has  unlearned  to 
be  a  slave.  Maledictis  deterrgre  ng  scribat  parat,  Ter.,  Ph.,  3  ;  he  is 
preparing  (trying)  to  frighten  (him)  from  writing,  by  abuse.  Qui  men- 
tlri  solet,  pgierare  consugvit,  C,  Rose. Com.,  16,  40  ;  he  who  is  wont  to  lie 
is  accustomed  to  swear  falsely.  Vulnera  quae  fecit  dgbuit  ipse  pati,  Ov., 
J.m.,11.  3,  4;  the  tvounds  he  gave  he  should  himself  have  suffered. 
Vereor  laudare  praesentem,  C,  N.T).,  i.  21,  58  ;  I  feel  a  delicacy  about 
praising  a  man  to  his  face.  Rgligionum  animum  nSdis  exsolvere  pergS, 
Lucr.,  i.  932;  /  go  on  to  loose  the  spirit  from  the  bonds  of  superstitious 
creeds.  Tua  quod  nil  rgfert,  percontari  dgsinas,  Ter.,  Ilec,  810  ;  cease  (o 
inquire  ivhat  matters  naught  to  you. 

So  habe5,  I  have  (it  in  my  power). 

Tantum  habeo  poUicgri  mg  tib!  cumulatg  satisfacttirum,  C,  Fam.,  i.  5 a, 
3  ;  so  much  I  can  promise,  that  I  will  give  you  abundant  satisfaction. 

Notes.— 1.  The  original  force  of  the  Inf.  is,  in  most  of  these  constructions,  hard  to 
determine,  and  was  certainly  not  felt  by  the  Romans  themselves.  In  many  cases  the 
Inf.  seems  to  have  been  used  because  the  governing  \\  ord  or  phrase  was  felt  to  be  more 
or  less  equivalent  to  a  Verb  of  Creation. 

2.  The  principal  verbs,  construed  thus  with  the  Inf.,  are  as  follows  : 
Will :  velle,  malle,  nOUe,  cupere,  optare  (rare,  except  in  passive),  petere,  p5stu- 
Iftre,  avgre,  audgre,  dgsiderare  (first  in  Cic),  praegestire,  gestire,  ardere, 


INFINITIVE.  ^77 

metuere  (ante-class.),  vergri,  timSre,  formidare  (ante-class.),  reformldare,  hor- 
r6re,  horrgscere,  hortari  and  compounds,  monere  and  compounds,  suadSre  (fiist 
in  Cic),  persuadgre,  iubere,  imperare,  praecipere,  cogere,  permittere  (once  in 
Cic,  then  later),  concgdere  (first  in  Cic),  ciirare  (not  in  Caes.,  Sall.,  Livy),  vetare> 
rectisare  (first  in  Cic),  mittere,  omittere,  intermittere,  cunctari,  cessare, 
morari,  dubitare,  gravari,  prohibgre,  impedire,  deterrgre. 

Power :  posse,  quire,  nequire,  sustingre  (first  in  Cic),  valgre  (first  in  Cic), 
poUere  (first  in  Cic),  habgre  (rare,  except  in  Cic),  scire,  nescire. 

JJuty :  debgre,  necesse  habeo. 

Habit :  assugscere,  assugfacere  (first  in  Cic),  consugscere,  solgre. 

Inclination :  conari  (only  with  Inf.),  studgre,  contendere,  intendere  (Caes.), 
laborare  (always  with  neg.  in  Cic),  molirl  (rare),  aggredi,  ingredi,  adorirl,  niti 
(first  in  Caes.),  gniti  (ante-class,  and  post-class.),  quaerere  (first  in  Cic),  temptare 
(first  in  HiRTius). 

Resolve :  cogitare,  meditari,  memini  (mostly  poet.),  parare,  statuere  (first  in . 
Cic),  constituere  (first  in  Ter.),  dgcernere  (not  class,  in  pass.),  iudicare  (first  in 
Cic),  dgstinare  (first  in  Caes.),  certum  est,  dgliberatum  est,  propositum  est 
(first  in  Cic). 

Continuance:  stare  (first  in  Cic),  Instare,  perstare  (once  in  Cic,then  late),  per- 
sevgrare  (first  in  Cic),  properare  (only  word  used  in  early  Latin),  fgstinare  (first  in 
Cic),  mattirare  (first  in  Cic). 

Beginnirig  and  Etui :  coepi,  incipere  (first  in  Cic),  exgrdirl,  pergere,  dgsinere. 

Poets  are  free  in  using  the  Inf.  after  other  verbs. 

3.  Notice  that  coepi,  /  have  begun,  and  dgsinO,  /  cease,  are  used  in  Pf.  pass,  with 
passive  Infinitives,  in  early  Latin,  Cicero,  Caesar,  always  ;  later  the  construction 
varies,  and  Tacitus  does  not  observe  the  rule. 

Bell5  Atbgnignsgs  undique  premi  sunt  coepti,  Nep.,  xm.  3, 1  ;  the  Athenians 
began  to  feel  the  pressure  of  ivar  on  {from)  all  sides.  Vetergs  orationgs  leg!  sunt 
dgsitae,  C,  Br.,  32, 123  ;  the  old  speeches  have  ceased  to  be  7'ead. 

When  the  passives  are  really  reflexives  or  neuter,  the  active  forms  may  be  used. 

4.  Verbs  of  Will  and  Desire  take  ut  as  well  as  the  Infinitive.  So  regularly  optO,  1 
choose,  in  classical  prose. 

5.  Verbs  which  denote  Hope,  Promise,  and  Threat  are  treated  as  verbs  of  Saying  and 
Thinking  (5;B0),  but  also  occasionally  as  in  En<;lish  : 

Spgrant  sg  maximum  fructum  esse  capttiros,  C,  Lael.,  21, 79  ;  they  hope  that 
they  ivill  derive  great  advantage.  Subrupturum  pallam  promisit  tibi,  Pl-,  Asin.y 
930 ;  he  'promised  to  steal  the  mantle  from  you. 

6.  Doceo,  I  teach,  iubeS,  Ibid,  vet5, 1  forbid,  sino,  I  let,  take  the  Inf.  as  a  Second 
Accusative  (339)  : 

(Dionysius)  ne  collum  tOnsorl  committeret  tondgre  Alias  suas  docuit,  c, 
Tvsc,  v.  20,  58  ;  Dionysius,  to  keep  from  trusting  his  neck  to  a  barber,  taught  las 
daughters  to  shave  (taught  them  shaving).  Ipse  iubet  mortis  tg  meminisse  deus, 
Mart.,  ii.  59  (376).  Vitae  summa  brevis  spem  nos  vetat  inchoare  longam,  H., 
0.  I.  4, 15  ;  life's  brief  sum  forbids  us  open  (a)  long  {account  ivilh)  hope.  Neu  sinas 
Mgdos  equitare  inultSs,  H.,  0.,  i.  2, 51  ;  nor  let  the  Median  ride  and  ride  unpunished. 

The  Infinitive  as  a  Predicate. 

424.  The  Infinitive,  as  a  verbal  substantive,  may  be  used 
as  a  Predicate  after  the  copula  esse,  to  ie^  and  the  like. 

Docto  homini  et  grudito  vivere  est  cogitare,  C,  Tusc,  v.  38,  111  ;  to  a 

learned  and  cultivated  man  to  live  is  to  think. 


2/8  GERUKD   AISTD   GERUNDIVE. 

GERUND  AND  GERUNDIVE. 

425.  The  other  cases  of  the  Infinitive  are  supplied  by  the 
Gerund.  With  Prepositions,  the  Gerund,  and  not  the  Infin- 
itive, is  employed. 

N.  Legere  difficile  est,  reading  {to  read)  is  hard  to  do. 
G.  Ars  legendi,  the  art  of  reading. 

Puer  studiosus  est  legendi,  the  hoy  is  zealous  of  reading. 
D.  Puer  operam  dat  legendo,  the  boy  devotes  hi7nself  to  reading. 
Ac.  Puer  cupit  legere,  the  hoy  is  desirous  to  read. 

Puer  propensus  est  ad  legendum,  the  hoy  has  a  bent  toward  reading. 
Ab.  Puer  discit  legendo,  the  hoy  learns  by  reading. 

Note.— Of  course  the  Inf.  may  be  quoted  as  an  abstract  notion,  a  form  of  the  verb  : 
Multum  interest  inter  "  dare  "  et  "  accipere,"  Sen.,  lien.,  5, 10  ;  there  is  a  vast 

difference  between  '•'Give  "  and  ^'Ileceive.'''' 

426.  As  a  verbal  form,  the  Gerund,  like  the  Infinitive, 
takes  the  same  case  as  the  verb. 

Homines  ad  deos  nulla  rS  propius  accMunt,  quam  salutem  hominibus 
dando,  C,  Lig.,  12,  38  ;  men  draw  nearer  to  the  gods  hy  nothing  so 
much  as  by  bringing  deliverance  to  their  fellow-men. 

Notes.— 1.  The  Gerund  is  tlie  substantive  of  the  Gerundive  (251,  n.1).  The  most 
plausible  theory  connects  the  forms  in  -ndu-  with  those  in  -nt-  (Pr.  Part,  active)  as  being 
verbal  nouns  originally  without  any  distinction  of  voice.  The  signification  of  necessity 
comes  mainly  from  the  use  as  a  predicate,  i.e.,  through  the  characteristic  idea.  Thus, 
he  loho  is  being  loved,  implies  lie  wlw  is  of  a  character  to  be  loved  (qui  ani6tur),  and 
^hen  he  wlio  should  be  loved. 

The  Gerundive  is  passi\e  :  the  Gerund,  like  other  verbal  nouns  (363),  is  theoretically 
active  or  passive,  according  to  the  point  of  view.  Practically,  however,  the  passive 
signification  of  the  Gerund  is  rare. 

lugurtha  ad  imperandum  (=^  ut  ei  imperarStur,  i^erhaps  an  old  military  form- 
ula) Tisidium  vocabatur,  ('/■  W-,  hii/-,  62, 8. 

2.  Gerundive  and  Pf.  Part.  pa.ssive  are  often  translated  alike  ;  but  in  the  one  case  the 
action  is  i)rogressive  or  prospective,  in  the  other  it  is  completed. 

Caesare  interficiendo  Brutus  et  Cassius  patriae  llbertatSm  restituere  c5- 
nati  sunt ;  by  the  murder  of  Caesar  Q/y  murdering  Caesar),  Bnifus  and  Cassius 
eadeavored  to  restore  their  country' s  freed(ym  to  her.  Caesare  interfecto,  Brutus  et 
Cassius  patriae  libertatem  non  restituSrunt ;  by  murdenng  Caesar,  Bi-^xtus  and 
Cassius  did  not  restore  their  coinitry's  freedom  to  her. 

427.  Gerundive  for  Gerund. — Instead  of  the  Gerund, 
with  an  Accusative  Object,  the  object  is  generally  put  in  the 
case  of  the  Gerund,  with  the  Gerundive  as  an  Attribute, 

G.     Placandi  Dei,   of  appeasing  God. 
D.     PlacandS  De5,  for  appeasing  God. 
Aii.  PlacandO  De5,  by  appeasing  God. 


GERUKD   AND   GERUNDIVE.  2/9 

In  model  prose  this  construction  is  invariably  employed  with  Prep- 
ositions. 

Ad  placandos  Deos,  for  appeasing  the  gods  (C,  Cat.,  in.  8,  20). 
In  placandis  Diis,   in  appeasing  tlie  gods. 

Notes.— 1.  It  is  impossible  to  make  a  distinction  between  the  Gerund  and  the  Ge- 
rundive form.  Tiiey  are  often  used  side  by  side,  where  there  can  be  no  difference  (L., 
XXI.  5,  5  ;  XXV.  40,  6  ;  xxviii.  37, 1  ;  xxxi.  26, 6).  The  preference  for  tl:e  Gerundive  is 
of  a  piece  with  the  use  of  the  Pf.  Part.  pass,  in  preference  to  an  Abstract  Substantive 
(3C0,  R.  2). 

2.  The  impersonal  Gerundive  is  found  with  an  Ace.  obj.  once  in  Plautus  (agitan- 
dumst  vigilias,  7>"i?i.,  869),  and  occasionally  elsewhere  in  early  Latin  (principally 
Varro)  ;  very  rarely  in  Cicero  and  for  special  reasons  (^Cat.  ilf.,  2,  6)  ;  here  and  there 
later  (not  in  Caesar,  Horace,  Ovid,  and,  perhaps,  Livy). 

Aetemas  quoniam  poenas  in  morte  timendumst,  Lucr.,  i.  m  ;  since  we  must 
fear  eternal  punishments  in  death. 

3.  Neuter  adjectives  and  pronouns  are  not  attracted  :  aliquid  faciendl  ratiS, 
C,  /«t;.,  1. 25, 36  ;  metJiod  of  doing  something.  Cupiditas  plura  habendl,  greed  for 
having  more.  But  when  the  neuter  adjective  has  become  a  substantive  (304,  n.  2),  the 
Gerundive  form  may  be  used  :  cupiditas  v5ri  videndi,  C.,  Fin.,  11. 14, 46  ;  the  desire 
of  seeing  the  ti^th. 

4.  The  Gerundive  with  personal  construction  can  be  formed  only  from  Transitive 
Verbs,  like  other  passives  (217).  Hence  the  impersonal  form  must  be  used  for  all  verbs 
that  do  not  take  the  Ace,  but  with  such  verbs  prepositions  are  rarely  found. 

Ad  non  parendum  senatui,  L.,  xlii.  9  ;  for  not  obeying  the  senate. 

5.  But  the  Gerundives  from  utor,  fmor,  fungor,  potior,  vescor  (407)  have  the  per- 
sonal construction,  but  usually  only  in  the  oblique  cases  (C,  Fin.,  1. 1,  3,  is  an  excep- 
tion), as  a  remnant  of  their  original  usage.  The  poets  and  later  prose  writers  use  still 
more  forms  in  the  same  way,  as  laetandus,  dolendus,  medendus,  paenitendus,  etc. 
Cicero  also  shows  single  instances  of  gloriandus,  disserendus,  respondendus. 

6.  The  use  of  the  Nom.  of  the  Gerundive  follows  the  ordniary  rules  of  the  Nomina- 
tive. 

Genitive  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive. 

428.  The  Genitive  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  is  used 
chiefly  after  substantives  and  adjectives  which  require  a  com- 
plement : 

Sapientia  arg  Vivendi  putanda  est,  C,  Fin.,  i.  13,  42  ;  philosophy  is  to 
be  considered  the  art  of  living.  Et  propter  vitam  Vivendi  perdere  causas, 
Juv. ,  vni.  84 ;  and  on  account  of  life,  to  lose  the  reasons  for  living.  RaU' 
caque  garrulitas  studiumque  immane  loquendi,  Ov.,  M.,  v.  678 ;  and  hoarse 
chattiness,  and  a  motistrous  love  of  talking.  Triste  est  nomen  ipsum  ca- 
rtndi,  C,  Tusc,  i.  36,  87;  dismal  is  the  mere  word  "  carere  "  {go  without). 
Non  est  placandi  spes  mihi  nulla  Dei,  Ov.,  Tr.,  v.  8,  22  ;  /  am  not  with- 
out hope  of  appeasing  God.  ignorant  cnpidi  maledioendi  plus  invidiam 
quam  convicium  posse,  Quint.,  vi.  2, 16  ;  those  who  are  eager  to  abuse 
knoiv  not  thai  envy  has  more  power  than  billingsgate.  (Titus)  equitandi 
peritissimus  fuit,  Suet.,  ^V^.,3  ;  7'itus  ivas  exceedingly  skilful  m  rid- 
ing.   Neuter  sni  prQtegendi  corporis  memor  (erat),  L.,  11.  6,  9  ;  neither 


280  GERUND   Al>rD   GERUJ^DIVE. 

thought  of  shielding  his  own  body.  Qui  hie  mos  obsidendi  vias  et  viros 
alignos  appellandi  %  L.,  xxxiv.  2,  9  ;  what  sort  of  ivay  is  this  of  hlocking 
up  the  streets  and  calling  upon  other  ivomen's  husbands  ?  Summa  elu- 
dendi  occasiost  mihi  nunc  sen6s,  XeR-,  Ph-,  885;  I  have  a  tip-top  chance 
to  fool  the  old  chaps  now. 

Remarks. — i.  As  mei,  tui,  sui,  nostri,  vestri,  are,  in  their  origin, 
neuter  singulars,  from  meum,  my  being,  tuum,  tliy  being,  suum,  one's 
being,  etc.,  the  Gerundive  is  put  in  the  same  form  :  conservandi  sui,  of 
preserving  themselves;  vestri  adhortandi,  of  exhorting  you;  and  no 
regard  is  had  to  number  or  gender. 

Copia  placandi  sit  modo  parva  tui,  Ov.,  Her.,  20,  74  ;  let  (me)  only  have 
a  slight  chance  of  trying  to  appease  you  (feminine). 

2.  The  Gen.  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  is  used  very  commonly 
with  causa,  less  often  with  gratia,  and  rarely  with  (antiquated)  erg3, 
on  account  of,  to  express  Design  :  Dissimulandi  causa  in  senatum  v6nit, 
S.,  C.,2>i,  53;  he  came  into  the  senate  for  the  purpose  of  dissimulation. 

The  Gen.  alone  in  this  final  sense  is  found  once  in  Terence,  several 
times  in  Sallust,  occasionally  later,  especially  in  Tacitus. 

(Lepidus  arma)  c6pit  libertatis  subvortundae,  S.,  Phil.Fr.,  10;  Lepidus 
took  up  arms  as  a  matter  of  {for  the  purpose  of)  subvert  itig  freedom. 

More  commonly  ad,  rarely  ob.    See  432. 

Esse  with  this  Gen.  may  be  translated  by  serve  to  ;  this  is  occasional 
in  Cicero  ;  see  366,  429,  i. 

Omnia  discrimina  talia  concordiae  minuendae  [sunt],  L.,  xxxiv.  54,  5  ; 
all  such  distinctions  are  matters  of  {belong  to)  the  diminishing  of  con- 
cord {serve  to  diminish  concord).  Compare  Caes.,  B.  G.,  v.  8,  6:  [nav6s] 
quas  sui  quisque  commodi  fgcerat,  ships  which  each  one  had  {had)  made 
(as  a  matter)  of  personal  convenience. 

Notes.— 1.  In  early  Latin,  in  Cicero  (early  works,  Philippics  and  philosophical 
writings),  then  in  later  authors,  we  find  occasionally  a  Gen.  Sing,  of  the  Gerund,  fol- 
lowed by  a  substantive  in  the  Plural.  Here  it  is  better  to  conceive  the  second  Gen.  as 
objectively  dependent  upon  the  Gerund  form. 

Agitur  utrum  Ant5ni5  facultas  d§tur  agrSrum  suls  latrSnibus  cond5- 
nandi,  C.,  Ph..,  v.  3, 6  ;  the  question  is  whether  Antoiiy  shall  receive  the  power  0/ giving 
away  (of)  lands  to  his  pet  Mghtvaymen. 

2.  Fas  est,  nefeia  est,  ius  est,  fatum  est,  c5pia  est,  ratio  est,  cdnsilium  est, 
consilium  capere,  cdnsilium  inire,  and  a  few  others,  have  often  the  Inf.  where  the 
Gerund  might  be  expected.  Sometimes  there  is  a  difference  in  meaning  ;  thus  tem- 
pus,  with  Gerund,  the  proper  time  (season),  with  Inf.,  high  time. 

The  poets  and  later  prose  writers  extend  this  usage  of  the  Infinitive. 

3.  Another  peculiarity  of  the  poets  is  the  construction  of  the  adj.  or  subst.  like  the 
cognate  verb  with  the  Inf.,  instead  of  with  the  Gen.  of  the  Gerund.  (At)  s6cura  quigs 
at  nescia  fallere  (=quae  nesciat  fallere)  vita,  v.,  (7.,  11. 467;  Quiet  without  a 
care,  and  a  life  that  Tcnmveth  not  how  to  disappoint  (ignorant  of  disap^mntment). 

Later  prose  is  more  careful  in  this  matter. 

4.  The  Gen.  of  Gerund,  depending  upon  a  verb,  is  rare  and  Tacitean  (Ann.,  11.43). 
Tacitus  also  uses  the  appositionul  Gerund  with  a  substantival  neuter  (Ann.,  xiii.  26). 


GERUJS^D   AKD    GERUNDIVE.  28 1 

5.  Some  substantives,  like  auctor,  dux,  may  iiave  a  Dat.  instead  of  a  Gen.;  Liv.,  i. 
S3 :  mS  Albanl  gerendo  bello  ducem  creavgre. 

Dative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive. 

429.  The  Dative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  is  used 
chiefly  after  words  that  denote  Fitness  and  Function. 

1.  The  usage  is  rare  in  classical  Latin,  and  begins  with  a  few  verbs 
and  phrases  :  esse  (=  parem  esse),  to  he  equal  to  ;  praeesse  and  praeficere, 
to  he  {put)  in  charge  of;  studere  and  operam  addere,  laborem  impertire,  to 
give  one's  attention  to;  then  it  is  used  witli  a  few  substantives  and  adjec- 
tives to  give  the  object  for  ivhich,  and  with  names  of  Boards. 

Solvendo  civitatgs  non  erant,  Cf.  C,  Fam.,  iii.  8,  2  ;  the  communities 
were  not  equal  to  {ready  for)  payment.{were  not  solvent).  [Sapiens]  virgg 
suas  novit,  scit  s5  esse  oneri  ferendo,  Sen.,  E.M.,  71,  26  ;  the  wise  man  is 
acquainted  with  his  own  strength  ;  he  -knows  that  he  is  (equal)  to  hear- 
ing the  hurden. 

So  comitia  decemviris  creandis  (C,  Leg.Agr.,  2,8)  ;  triumvir  coloniis 
dediicendis  (S.,  Jug.,  42)  ;  reliqua  tempera  dSmetendis  fructibus  accommo- 
data  sunt,  C,  Cat.M.,  19,  70. 

2.  Classical  Latin  requires  ad  with  the  Ace,  but  from  Livy  on  the 
use  of  this  Dat.  spreads,  and  it  is  found  regularly  after  words  which 
imply  Capacity  and  Adaptation.  It  is  found  also  technically  with  verbs 
of  Decreeing  and  Appointing,  to  give  the  Purpose. 

Aqua  nitrosa  utilis  est  bibendo,  Cf.  Plix.,  JSf.H.,  xxxi.  32,  59;  alkaline 
water  is  good  for  drinking  {to  drink).  Lignum  aridum  materia  est  idonea 
gliciendis  i'gnibus,  Cf.  Sen.,  N.Q.,  11.  22,  1  ;  di-y  wood  is  a  fit  suhstance 
for  striking  fire  {drawing  out  sparks).  Eeferundae  ego  habeo  linguam 
natam  gratiae,  Pl.,  Pers.,  428  ;  I  have  a  tongue  thafs  horn  for  showing 
thankfulness. 

Notes.— 1.  In  early  Latin  the  use  of  this  Dat.  is  very  restricted,  it  being  found 
principally  after  stud§re ;  operam  dare,  or  siimere  (both  revived  by  Livy) ;  finem 
(or  modum)  facere ;  and  a  lew  adjectival  forms.  Of  the  latter,  Cicero  uses  only  ac- 
€ommodatus,  Caesak  only  par, 

2.  Rare  and  unclassical  is  the  Ace.  in  dependence  upon  a  Dat.  of  the  Gerund. 

Epidicum  operam  quaerendo  dabo,  Pl.,  Ejy.,  605. 

Accusative  of  the  Gerundive. 

430.  The  Gerundive  is  used  in  the  Accusative  of  the  Ob- 
ject to  be  Effected,  after  such  verbs  as  Giving  and  Taking, 
Sending  and  Leaving,  Letting,  Contracting,  and  Undertak- 
ing.    (Factitive  Predicate.) 

DIviti  homini  id  aurum  servandum  dedit,  Pl,  B  ,  338  ;  he  gave  that 


282  GERUND    AND    GERUNDIVE. 

gold  to  a  rich  man  to  keep.  Conon  mtiros  reficiendos  curat,  Nep.,  ix.  4, 5*, 
Conon  has  the  walls  rebuilt.  Patriam  diripiendam  reliquimus,  C,  Fam.y 
XVI.  12,1;  ive  have  left  our  country  to  he  plundered.  [Carvilius]  aedem 
faciendam  locavit,  L.,  x.  46, 14  ;  Carvilius  let  the  (contract  of)  building 
the  temple. 

Of  course,  the  passive  form  has  the  Nominative  : 

Filius  Philippi  Demetrius  ad  patrem  reducendus  legatis  datus  est,  L.p 
XXXVI.  35, 13  ;  the  son  of  Philip^  Demetrius,  was  given  to  the  envoys  to 
be  take7i  back  to  his  father. 

Notes.— 1.  Early  Latin  shows  with  this  constraction  dare,  condticere,  locare, 
rogare,  petere,  habere,  prSpinare.  Classical  Latin  gives  up  rogare,  petere,  propi- 
nare,  but  adds  others,  as  tradere,  obicere,  conc6dere,  committere,  curare,  relin- 
quere,  proponere.  Livy  introduces  suscipere.  The  use  of  ad  in  place  of  the  simple 
Ace.  is  not  common. 

[Caesar]  oppidum  ad  diripiendum  militibus  concgssit,  Caes.,  B.  C,  m.  80, 6. 
But  ad  is  necessary  in  nemini  se  ad  docendum  dabat,  C,  Bv.,  89,  30G  ;  he  would 
yield  to  no  one  for  teaching.,  i.e.,  ivould  accept  no  one  as  a  jnqnl. 

2.  Habeo  dicendum  and  the  like  for  habeo  dicere,  or,  habeS  quod  dicam, 
belongs  to  later  Latin  (Tac,  Dial..,  37  ;  Ann.  iv.  40,  etc.). 

Ablative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive. 

431.  The  Ablative  of  the  Gerund  or  Gerundive  is  used  as 
the  Ablative  of  Means  and  Cause,  seldom  as  the  Ablative  of 
Manner  or  Circumstauce. 

Unus  homo  nobis  cunctando  restituit  rem,  Ennius  (C,  Cat.M.,4,  10); 
o?ie  man  by  lingerifig  raised  our  cause  again.  Hominis  m6ns  discendo 
alitur  et  cogitando,  C,  Off,,  i.  30,  105;  the  human  mind  is  nourished  by 
learning  and  thinking.  Plausum  meo  nomine  recitando  dedgrunt,  Of. 
C.,Atf.,iy.  I,  (J  ;  they  clapped  ivhen  my  name  was  read.  Exercendo 
cottidig  mllite  hostem  opperigbatur,  L.,  xxxiii.  3,  5;  drilling  the  soldiers 
daily  he  waited  for  the  enemy. 

Notes.— I.  The  Abl.  with  adjectives  is  post-Ciceronian  :  digna  Stlrps  suscipi- 
endo  (instead  of  quae  susciperet)  patris  imperiS,  Tac,  .4///;.,  xai.  14.  So  too  with 
verbs :  continuandS  abstitit  magistratu,  L.,  ix.  34, 2. 

2.  The  Abl.  after  a  comparative  is  cited  only  from  C,  Off.,  1. 15, 47. 

3.  In  post-Augustan  Latin,  and  occasionally  earlier,  we  find  the  Abl.  of  the  Gerund 
paralleled  by  the  Pr.  participle  :  Bocchus,  seu  reputando  (=  reputans)  .  .  .  seu 
admonitus,  etc.,  S.,  lug.,  103, 2. 

Prepositions  with  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive. 

432.  The  Accusative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  follows 
the  preposition  ad,  seldom  ante,  circa,  erga,  in,  inter,  ob, 
propter,  and  super.     See  427. 

Nulla  rgs  tantum  ad  dicendum  prSficit  quantum  scriptig,  C,  Br.  24,  92; 


SUPINE.  283 

nothing  is  as  profitable  for  speaking  as  writing.  Atticus  pMlosophoriin* 
praeceptis  ad  vitam  agendam  non  ad  ostentationem  utebatur,  Of.  Nep.,  xxv. 

17,  8;  Atticus  made  use  of  the  precepts  of  pliilosopliers  for  the  conduct 
of  life,  not  for  display.  Inter  spoliandum  corpus  hostis  exspiravit,  Cf. 
L.,  II.  20,  9;  ivhile  in  t/te  act  of  stripping  tlie  body  of  tlie  enemy  he 
gave  up'tlie  ghost. 

Remark. — Ad  is  very  common  ;  noteworthy  is  its  use  with  verbs  of 
Hindering  (palus  Romanos  ad  insequendum  tardabat,  Caes., -B.  6^.,  vir. 
26,2);  with  substantives  to  give  tlie  End  (for);  with  adjectives  of 
Capacity  and  Adaptation  (aptus,  facilis,  etc.).     See  429,  2. 

Notes.— 1.  Ante  is  very  rare  (L  ,  Praef.,  6 ;  V.,  G.,  in.  206).  Circa  and  erga  are 
post- Augustan  and  very  rare.  In  gives  the  End  For  Which,  and  is  classical  but  not  com- 
mon. Inter  is  temporal,  cluriug,  uMle,  and  is  found  rarely  in  early,  more  often  in 
later,  but  not  in  classical  prose.  Ob  is  need  first  by  Cicero  (not  by  Caesar),  and  is 
rare.    Propter  occurs  first  in  Valerius  Maximus  ;  super  first  in  Tacitus. 

2.  On  the  Infinitive  after  a  Preposition,  see  425. 

433.  The  Ablative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  takes  the 
prepositions  ab,  de,  ex,  often  in,  but  seldom  pro.  Post- 
Ciceronian  and  rare  are  cum  arid  super. 

Prohibenda  maximg  est  ira  in  puniendS,  C,  Off.,  i.  25,  89;  especially  to 
be  forbidden  is  anger  in punisiiing.  [Bratus]  in  liberanda  patria  (=  dum 
liberat)  est  interfectus,  C,  Cat. 31.,  20,  75;  Brutus  teas  slain  in  the  effort 
to  free  his  country.  Philosophi  in  iis  libris  ipsis  quos  scribunt  de  con- 
temnenda  gloria  sua  nomina  Inscribunt,  C,  Tusc,  i.  15,  84  (385,  r.  i).  Ex 
discendo  capiunt  voluptatem,  CfC,  Fin.,  v.  18,  48  ;  they  receive  pleasure 
from  learning. 

Notes.— 1.  In  with  Abl.  is  eomcthncs  almost  equivalent  to  a  Pr.  participle :  In 
circumeundS  exercitu  animad vertit,  b.  Afr. ,  82. 

2.  Sine  is  used  once  in  Varko,  L.L.,  6, 75,  and  in  Donatus  (Ter.,  And.,  391). 

3.  Even  when  the  word  and  not  the  action  is  meant,  the  Gerund  is  the  rule  :  Dis- 
crepat  a  timendo  confidere,  C,  Tusc,  m.  7, 14 ;  the  Inf.  in  Varro,  L.L.,  6, 50. 

SUPINE. 

434.  The  Supine  is  a  verbal  substantive,  which  appears 
only  in  the  Accusative  and  Ablative  cases. 

The  Accusative  Supine. 

435.  The  Accusative  Supine  (Supine  in  -um)  is  used 
chiefly  after  verbs  of  Motion,  to  express  Design. 

Galliae  Iggati  ad  Caesarem  gratulatum  convgnSrunt,  Caes.,  B.  G.,  i.  30, 
1;  the  commissioners  of  Gaul  came  to  congratulate  Caesar.     Spectatum 


284  SUPTi^E. 

vfniunt ;  veniunt  spectentur  ut  ipsae,  Ov.,  A.  A.,  i.  99;  fJtey  come  to  sed 
the  show ;  they  come  to  he  themselves  a  show.  (Q-alli  gallinacei)  cum  sole 
eunt  cubitum,  Plin.,  N.  B.,x.  24,  46 ;  cocks  go  to  roost  at  sunset.  Stultitia 
est  vSnatum  dticere  in  vitas  canes,  Pl., /S^^.,  139;  His  foolishness  to  take 
unwilling  dogs  a-hunting. 

Notes.— 1,  Ire  and  venire  are  the  most  common  verbs  with  the  Supine,  and  they 
form  many  phraseological  usages,  as  :  ire  coctum,  cubitum,  dormitum,  pastum, 
snpplicatum,  sessum,  salutatum,  etc.  Similarly  dare  is  found  in  phrases  with 
nuptiim,  venum,  pessum. 

2.  Tiie  Supine  is  very  common  in  early  Latin,  less  so  m  Cicero,  comparatively  rare 
in  Caesar,  frequent  again  iu  Sallust  and  Livy.  Later  Latin,  and  especially  the  poets, 
show  bat  few  examples,  as  the  final  Inf.  takes  its  place. 

3.  The  Ace.  Supine  may  take  an  object,  but  the  construction  is  not  very  common  : 
(Hannibal)  patriam  dgfensum  (more  usual,  ad  defendendam  patriam)  revo- 

catus  (est),  Nep.,  xxiii.  6, 1  ;  Ilannihal  was  recalled  to  defend  hii<  country. 

4.  Tiie  Fut.  Inf.  passive  is  actually  made  up  of  the  passive  Inf.  of  ire,  to  go^  iri  {thai 
a  movement  is  made.,  from  itur  ;  208,  2),  and  the  Supine  : 

Kumor  venit  datum  iri  gladiatorSs,  Ter.,  Ilec,  39  ;  the  rumor  comes  that  glad- 
iators (gladiatorial  shows)  are  going  to  be  given. 

The  consciousness  of  this  is  lost,  as  is  shown  by  the  Nom.  (528). 

Reus  damnatum  iri  videbatur,  Quint.,  ix  2, 88  ;  tJte  accused  seemed  to  he  about 
to  be  condemned. 

The  Ablative  Supine. 
436.  The  Ablative  Supine  (Supine  in  -u)  is  used  chiefly 
with  Adjectives,  as  the  Ablative  of  the  Point  of  View  From 
Which  (397).     It  never  takes  an  object. 

Mirabile  dictu,  wonderful  (in  the  telling)  to  tell,  visu,  to  heliold. 
Id  dictu  quam  rS  facilius  est,  L.,  xxxi.  38,  4  ;  that  is  easier  in  the  say- 
ing than  in  the  fact  {easier  said  than  done). 

IfoTES.— 1.  Cicero  and  Livi'  are  the  most  extensive  users  of  this  Supine  ;  Caesab 
has  but  two  forms  :  factu  and  natu ;  Sallust  but  three  ;  Cicero  uses  twenty-four. 
In  early  Latin  and  in  the  iioets  the  usage  is  uncommon  ;  in  later  Latin  it  grows.  Alto- 
gether there  are  over  one  hundred  Supines,  but  only  about  twenty-five  Supines  occur  in 
Abl.  alone  ;  the  most  common  are  dicttl,  to  tell,  factti,  to  do,  audltti,  to  hear,  visli, 
to  see,  memoratu,  relatu,  tractatu ;  then,  less  often,  cognitu,  to  kncnv,  inventti, 
intellSctu,  scitu,  adspectti. 

2.  The  adjectives  generally  denote  Ease  or  Difficulty,  Pleasure  or  Displeasure,  Right 
or  Wrong  (fi[S  and  ne^S).  These  adjectives  are  commonly  used  with  Dative,  and  a 
plausible  theory  views  the  Supine  in  u  as  an  original  Dative  (ui). 

3.  Ad,  with  the  Gerundive,  is  often  used  instead  :  Cibus  facillimus  ad  conco- 
quendum,  C,  Fin.,  n.  20,  C4  ;  food  (that  is)  ve7ij  easy  to  digest. 

The  Infinitive,  facilis  concoqui,  is  poetical.    Common  is  facile  concoquitur. 
Other  equivalents  are  active  Infin.,  a  verbal  substantive,  a  Pf.  Part.  pass,  (with 
opus),  or  a  relative  clause  (with  dignus). 

4.  The  use  of  the  Abl.  Supine  with  verbs  is  very  rare. 

(Vllicus)  primus  cubitti  surgat,  postrgmus  cubitum  eat,  Cato,  Agr..  5. 5 ;  the 
steward  must  be  the  first  to  get  out  of  bed,  the  last  to  go  to  bed.  Obs5natu  reded,  PL., 
Men.,  277  ;  I  come  back  from  m^7'k(ting  (imitated  by  Statius). 


PARTICIPLE.  285 


PARTICIPLE, 

437.  The  Participle  may  be  used  as  a  substantive,  but  even 
then  generally  retains  something  of  its  predicative  nature. 

Nihil  est  magnum  somnianti,  C,  Div.,  ir.  68,  141  ;  nothing  is  great 
to  a  dreamer  (to  a  man,  when  he  is  dreaming).  Regia,  crgde  mihi,  r6s 
est  succurrere  lapsis,  Ov.,  Pont.,  11.  g,  11;  it  is  a  kingly  thing,  believe  me, 
{to  run  to  catch  those  who  have  slipped.)  to  succor  the  fallen. 

Remark. — The  Attribute  of  the  Participle,  employed  as  a  substan- 
tive, is  generally  in  the  adverbial  form  :  rgcte  facta,  right  actions  ;  facStS 
dictum,  a  witty  remark. 

Notes. — 1.  This  use  as  a  substantive  is  rare  in  classical  prose,  but  more  common  in  the 
poets  and  in  post-classical  prose.  In  the  Pr.  Part.,  principally  sapiSns,  adulSscens, 
amans  ;  in  the  Pf.  more  often,  but  usually  in  the  Plural  ;  docti,  the  learned,  victi, 
tJie  conquered.  The  first  examples  of  Fut.  Part,  used  as  substantives  are  nuntiaturl 
(Curt.,  vii.  4, 32),  peccaturos  (Tac,  Agr.,  19). 

2.  The  use  of  an  atlribntivo  or  predicative  Pf.  Part,  with  a  substantive  is  agrowth  in 
Latin.  Early  Latin  -hows  very  few  cases,  and  those  mostly  with  opuS  and  USUS,  Cato 
has  post  dimissum  bellum,  and  this  innovation  is  extended  by  Vauuo,  with  propter. 
CicKuo  is  cautious,  employing  the  prepositions  ante,  dg,  in,  post,  praeter,  but  Sal- 
lust  goes  much  farther,  as  the  strange  sentence  inter  haec  parata  atque  dgcrgta 
(G64,  R.  2)  indicates.  LiVY  and  Tacitus  are,  however,  characterized  by  these  preposi- 
tional uses  more  than  any  other  authors.  The  use  of  a  Part,  in  the  Norn,  in  this  way 
is  found  first  in  Livt. 

438.  The  Participle,  as  an  adjective,  often  modifies  its 
verbal  nature,  so  as  to  be  characteristic,  or  descriptive. 

(Epaminondas)  erat  temporibus  sapienter  titens,  Nep.,xv.  3,  1;  Epa- 

minondas  was  a  man  who  made  {to  make)  icise  use  of  opportunities 
(=:  is  qui  titer etur).  Senectus  est  operosa  et  semper  aggns  aliquid  et 
mSligns,  Cf.  C,  Cat. 31.,  S,  26;  old  age  is  busy,  and  always  doing  some- 
thing and  working  at  something. 

Remark. — Especial  attention  is  called  to  the  parallelism  of  the  par- 
ticiple or  adjective  with  the  relative  and  Subjunctive: 

Egs  parva  dictii,  sed  quae  studiis  in  magnum  certamen  excSsserit,  L. 
xxxiv.  i;  a.  small  thing  to  mention,  but  one  which,  by  the  excitement  of 
the  parties,  terminated  in  a  great  contest.  Miinsra  non  ad  dglicias  muli- 
ebrgs  quaesita  nee  quibus  nova  nupta  comatur,  Tac,  Germ.,  iB. 

Note.— The  Fiit.  Part,  active  is  rarely  used  adjectively  in  classical  Latin  except 
the  forms  futurus,  venturus.  The  predicate  use  after  verbs  of  Motion  to  express 
Purpose  is  found  first  in  Cicero  {Verr.,  i.  21,  56\  though  verj-^  rarely,  but  becomes  in- 
creasingly common  from  Livy's  time.  LrvY  is  the  first  to  use  the  Fut.  Part,  as  'an 
adjective  clause,  a  usage  which  also  l)ecomes  common  later, 

(Maroboduus)  misit  Iggatos  ad  Tiberium  oraturos  auxilia,  Tac,  Ann.,  n.  46; 
Marbod  sent  commissioners  to  Tiberius,  to  beg  for  reinforcements.    Ser villus  adest 


286  ADVERB. 

de  te  sententiam  laturus  (perhaps  due  to  est),  C,  rm\,  i.  21, 56.  Rem  ausus  pits 
famae  habituram  {that  was  likely  to  have)  quam  fidei,  L,  11. 10, 11.  (Dictator)  ad 
hostem  ducit,  ntillo  loco,  nisi  quantum  necessitas  cogeret,  forttinae  se  com- 
missurus  {with  the  intention  of  submitting),  L.,  xxii.  12,  2. 

ADVERB. 

439=   I.  The  Predicate  may  be  qualified  by  an  Adverb. 

2.  Adverbs  qualify  verbs,  adjectives,  and  other  adverbs, 
and  sometimes  substantives,  when  they  express  or  imply  ver- 
bal or  adjective  relations. 

Male  vivit,  he  lives  ill ;  bene  est,  it  is  iveJl ;  ferg  omn6s,  almost  all ; 
nimis  saepe,  too  often  ;  admodum  adulesc6ns,  a  mere  youth  ;  lat6  r6x  (V., 
A.,  J.  21),  wide-rulmg ;  bis  consul,  twice  consul;  duo  simul  bella,  two 
simultaneous  wai's. 

Notes.— 1.  The  form  of  the  Adverb  does  not  admit  of  any  further  inflection,  and 
therefore  the  Adverb  requires  no  rules  of  Syntax  except  as  to  its  position. 

2.  With  other  adverbs  and  with  adjectives,  adverbs  of  degree  only  are  allowable,  to 
which  must  be  reckoned  bene,  egregie,  and  (later)  insigniter.  Poetical  arc  such 
expressions  as  turpiter  ater,  spkndide  mendax  (H.,  A.P.,  3  ;  O.,  m.  n,  35).  Male 
as  a  negative  is  found  with  sanus  only  in  Ciceko  {Att.^  ix.  15, 5)  ;  other  combinations 
are  poetical,  or  post-classical. 

3.  The  translation  for  tenj  varies  at  different  periods ;  multum  is  common  in 
Plautus  and  in  Horace's /S'a/ires  and  ^is/Ze^s,  rare  elsewhere  ;  vald6  is  introduced  by 
Cicero,  but  did  not  survive  him,  to  any  extent.  Sane  is  also  frequent  in  Cicero,  espe- 
cially in  the  Letters  ad  Atticum.  Cornificius  affected  vehementer,  and  so  do  collo- 
quial authors,  as  Vitruvixjs;  fortiter  comes  in  later;  bene  is  occasional  in  Plautus 
and  Terence,  more  common  in  Cicero  ;  oppidS  is  characteristic  of  early  Latin,  and 
LivY  and  the  Archaists  ;  admodum  is  Ciceronian,  but  adfatim  comes  later  and  is  rare. 
Abund@ is  rare  before  the  lime  of  Sai.lust.  Nimium  (nimio)  belongs  to  early  Latin, 
as  do  impSnsS  and  impendio.  Satis  is  common  in  the  classical  period,  and  also 
nimis,  but  mainly  with  negatives. 

4.  The  Adverb  as  an  attribute  of  substantives  is  rare.  Cicero  shows  tum,  saeps, 
quasi,  tamqnam.    Livy  uses  more. 

440.  Position  of  the  Adverb. — Adverbs  are  commonly  put 
next  to  their  verb,  and  before  it  when  it  ends  the  sentence, 
and  immediately  before  their  adjective  or  adverb. 

Iniuste  facit,  he  acts  unjust li/.  Admodum  pulcher,  handsome  to  a  de- 
gree, very  handsome.     Vald§  diligenter,  ve7-y  carefully. 

Remark. — Exceptions  occur  chiefly  in  rhetorical  passages,  in  which 
great  stress  is  laid  on  the  adverV),  or  in  poetry : 

[Iram]  bene  Ennius  initium  diicit  Insaniae,  C,  7'usc.,  iv.  23,  52  ;  well 
did  Eniiius  call  anger  the  beginning  of  madness.  Vixit  dum  vixit  bene 
Ter.,  JTec,  461  ;  he  lived  while  he  lived  (and  lived)  well. 

One  class  of  Adverbs  demands  si)ecial  notice— the  Negatives. 


ADVERB,  287 


Negative  Adverbs. 

441.  There  are  two  original  negatives  in  Latin,  ne  and 
hand  (haut,  hau).    From  ne  is  derived  non  [ne-oinom  (unum), 

no-wldt,  not^.  Ne  is  used  chiefly  in  compounds,  or  with  the 
Imperative  and  Optative  Subjunctive.  The  old  use  appears 
in  ne — quidem.  Non  is  used  with  the  Indicative  and  Poten- 
tial Subjunctive  ;  hand  negatives  the  single  word,  and  is  used 
mainly  with  adjectives  and  adverbs. 

442.  Non  (the  absolute  not)  is  the  regular  Negative  of  the 
Indicative  and  of  the  Potential  Subjunctive. 

Quem  amat,  amat ;  qnem  non  amat,  non  amat,  Petr.,  37  ;  whom  she 
likes,  she  likes  ;  ivhom  she  does  not  like,  she  does  iiot  like. 
Non  ausim,  I  should  not  venture. 

Remarks. — i.  Non,  as  the  emphatic,  specific  negative,  may  negative 
anything.     (See  270,  r.  i.) 

2.  Non  is  the  rule  in  antitheses  :  Non  est  vivere  sed  valere  vita,  Mart., 
VI.  70,  15  ;  not  living,  hut  being  well,  is  life. 

Notes.— 1.  Non  in  comljination  with  adjectives  and  adverbs,  and  rarely  with  sub- 
stantives and  verbs,  takes  the  place  of  negative  in-  or  ne-.  Non  arbitrabatur  quod 
efficeret  aliquid  posse  esse  non  corpus  (ao-w/xaToi/),  c,  Ac,  i.  ii,39;  Cat. 31.,  14, 47. 

2.  Other  negative  expressions  are  neutiquam,  by  ?w  means ;  nihil,  nothing 
("  Adam,  with  such  counsel  nothing  swayed  ").    On  nuUus,  see  317,  2,  n.  2. 

3.  Nec  =  n3n  is  found  in  early  Latin,  here  and  there  in  Veiu;.,  Livy,  and  Tacitus. 
In  classical  Latin  it  is  retained  in  a  few  compounds,  as  :  necopinans,  negotium,  and 
in  legal  phraseology. 

443.  Hand  is  the  negative  of  the  single  word,  and  in  model 
prose  is  not  common,  being  used  chiefly  with  adjectives  and 
adverbs  :  hand  quisqaam,  not  any;  hand  magnus,  not  great  ; 
hand  male,  not  hadly. 

Notes.— 1 .  Hau  is  found  only  before  consonants,  and  belongs  to  early  Latin  and 
Vergil.    Haut  (early)  and  haud  are  found  indiscriminately  before  vowels. 

2.  Haud  is  very  rarely  or  never  found  in  Conditional,  Concessive,  Interrogative,  Rela- 
tive, and  Infinitive  sentences. 

3.  Caesah  uses  haud  but  once,  and  then  in  the  phrase  haud  SCi3  an  (457,  2). 
Cicero  says  also  haud  dubito,  haud  ignSro,  haud  srravero,  and  a  few  others  ; 
and  combines  it  also  with  adjectives  and  adverbs,  but  not  when  they  are  compounded 
with  negative  particles,  i.e.,  he  does  not  say  haud  difficilis,  and  the  like. 

4.  Haud  with  verbs  is  very  common  in  early  Latin,  and  then  again  in  Livy  and 
Tacitus.  In  antitheses  it  is  not  uncommon  in  comedy,  but  usually  in  the  second 
member :  inceptiost  amentium  haud  amantium,  Tek.,  And.  218 ;  the  undertaking 
isone  of  lunatics,  not  lovers. 

5.  A  strengthened  expression  is  haud  quaquam. 


288  ADVERB. 

444.  I .  Ne  is  the  Negative  of  tlie  Imperative  and  of  the 
Optative  Subjunctive. 

Tu  ng  cede  malis,  V.,  ^.,  vi.  95  ;  yield  not  thou  to  misfortunes.  N8 
transieris  fiiberum,  L.,  xxi,  44,  6  ;  do  not  cross  the  Ehro.  Ne  vivam, 
si  scio,  C,  Att.,  IV.  16,  8  ;  may  1  cease  to  live  (strike  me  dead),  if  I 
know. 

Notes.— 1.  On  the  negative  with  the  Imperative,  see  270,  N. 

2.  Ne  as  a  general  negative  particle,  =  non,  is  found  very  rarely  in  early  Latin, 
mostly  with  forms  of  velle  (ng  parcunt,  Pl-,  Most..,  124,  is  disputed).  Classical  Latin 
retains  this  only  in  ne— quidem,  in  compound  nSquaquam,  and  in  a  shortened  form 
in  nefas,  nego,  neque,  etc. 

2.  Ne  is  continued  by  neve  or  neu.     See  260. 

Ne  illam  vendas  neu  mg  perdas  hominem  amantem,  Pl.,  Ps.,  322  ;  do7i''t 
sell  her,  and  don't  ruin  me,  a  fellow  in  love. 

445.  Stihdivision  of  the  Negative. — A  general  negative 
may  be  subdivided  by  neque — neque,  as  well  as  by  aut — aut, 
or  strengthened  by  ne— quidem,  not  even. 

Nihil  umquam  neque  insolgns  neque  gloriosum  ex  ore  [Timoleontis]  pro- 
cgssit,  Nep.,  XX.  4,  2  ;  nothing  insolent  or  boastful  ever  came  out  of  the 
mouth  of  Timoleon.  Consciorum  ngni5  aut  latuit  aut  fUgit,  L.,  xxiv.  5, 
14  ;  of  the  accomplices  no  one  either  hid  or  fled.  Numquam  [Scipionem] 
ng  minima  quidem  rg  ofFendi,  C,  Lael.,  27, 103  ;  I  never  wounded  Scipio's 
feelings,  tio,  not  even  in  the  slightest  matter. 

("  I  will  give  no  thousand  crowns  w«i^/i«?'."— Shakespeare.) 

Note.— In  the  same  way  negO,  /  say  rw,  is  continued  by  neque— neque  (nec— 
nec) :  Negant  nec  virtutes  nec  vitia  crgscere,  C,  Fin.,  m.  15,48  ;  they  deny  that 
either  virtues  or  vices  increase  {that  there  are  any  degrees  in). 

446.  Negative  Combinations. — In  English,  we  say  either 
no  one  ever,  or,  7iever  any  one  ;  notliing  ever,  or,  never  any- 
thing ;  in  Latin,  the  former  turn  is  invariably  used  :  nemC 
umquam,  no  one  ever. 

Verrgs  nihil  umquam  fgcit  sine  aliquo  quaestti,  C,  Verr.,  v.  5, 11  ;  Yer- 
res  never  did  ariything  without  some  profit  or  other. 

Notes.— 1.  iVb  one  yet  is  nondum  quisquam ;  no  more,  no  longer,  is  iam  non. 

2.  The  resolution  of  a  negative  non  iillus  for  nuUus,  non  umquam  for  num* 
quam,  non  scio  for  nescio,  is  ijoetical,  except  for  purposes  of  empiiusis,  or  when  the 
lirst  part  of  the  resolved  negative  is  combined  with  a  coordinating  conjunction  (480) : 
N5n  Gila  tibl  facta  est  initiria,  Cf.  c,  Div.  in  Caec.,  18, 60. 

3.  Ngm8  often  equals  nS  quis :  NgmS  dg  nObis  unus  excellat,  C,  These. ,y, 
36,  105. 


POSITION    OF   THE    NEGATIVE.  289 

447.  Nego  {I  say  no,  I  deny)  is  commonly  used  instead  of 
dico  non,  /  say — not. 

Assem  sese  daturum  negat,  C,  Quinct.,  5,  19  ;  he  says  that  he  will 
not  give  a  copper.     Vel  ai  vel  nega,  Accius,  125  (R.) ;  say  yes  or  say  no  / 

Remark, — The  positive  (aio,  I  say)  is  sometimes  to  be  supplied  for  a 
subsequent  clause,  as  C,  Fin.,  i.  18,  61.  The  same  thing  happens  with 
the  other  negatives,  as  volo  from  nolo,  iubeo  from  veto,  scio  from  nescio, 
queo  from  nequeo,  quisquam  from  nemo,  ut  from  ne. 

POSITION    OF    THE    NEGATIVE. 

448.  The  Negative  naturally  belongs  to  the  Predicate^  and 
usually  stands  immediately  before  it,  but  may  be  placed 
before  any  emphatic  word  or  combination  of  words. 

Petes  non  reverti,  Sen.,^,J!/'.,  49, 10  ;  possibly  yon  may  not  return. 
(Non  potes  reverti,  you  cannot  possibly  i^eiurn.)  Saepe  viri  fallunt ;  tenerae 
non  saepe  puellae,  Ov.,  A.A.,Jii.  31 ;  often  do  men  deceive  ;  soft-hearted 
maidens  not  often.  Non  omnis  aetas,  Lyde,  ludo  convenit,  Pl.,  B.,  129  ; 
not  every  age,  (good)  Lydus  (Playfair),  sorts  ivith  play.  Non  ego  ven- 
tosae  plebis  suifragia  venor,  II.,  Fp.,  i.  19,  37;  I  do  not  hunt  the  voices  of 
the  windy  commons,  no,  not  I. 

Notes.— 1.  As  the  Copula  esSB,  to  be,  is,  strictly  speaking,  a  predicate,  the  Negative 
generally  precedes  it,  contrary  to  the  English  idiom,  except  in  contrasts.  The  differ- 
ence in  position  can  often  be  brought  out  only  by  stress  of  voice  :  f§lix  non  erat,  he 
wasn''t  happy ;  non  felix  erat,  he  ivas  not  hajypy-,  he  was  far  from  happy. 

2.  N§— quidem  straddles  the  emphatic  word  or  emphatic  group  (445) ;  but  very 
rarely  does  the  group  consist  of  more  than  two  words. 

3.  A  negative  with  an  Inf.  is  often  transferred  to  the  governing  verb  :  non  putant 
lugendum,  (esse)  viris,  C,  Tusc.,  in.  28, 70 ;  on  nego,  see  447. 

449.  Two  negatives  in  the  same  sentence  destroy  one 
another,  and  make  an  affirmative,  but  see  445  : 

Non  nego,  /  do  not  deny  {I  admit). 

RE3IARKS. — I.  Non  possum  non,  I  cannot  but  {I  must)- 

Qui  mortem  in  malis  ponit  non  potest  earn  non  timgre,  C,  Fin.,  in.  8, 
29 ;  he  who  classes  death  among  misfortunes  carmot  but  {must)  fear  it. 

2.  The  double  Negative  is  often  stronger  than  the  opposite  Posi- 
tive ;  this  is  a  common  form  of  the  figure  Litotgs,  understateme7it  (700), 

Non  indoctus,  highly  educated  ;  non  sum  nescius,  /  am,  well  aware. 

Non  indecoro  pulvere  sordidi,  11.,  0.,  ii.  i,  22;  sivart  (soiled)  with  (no 
dis)honorable  dust.  Non  ignara  mali  miseris  succurrere  disco,  'Y.,  A.,  i, 
630  ;  not  unacquainted  (=  but  too  well  acquainted)  with  misfortune,  1 
learn  to  succor  the  wretched. 


290  INCOMPLETE   SENTENCE. 

3.  It  follows  from  R.  2  that  nee  non  is  not  simply  equivalent  to  et, 
and ;  nee  belongs  to  the  sentence,  non  to  the  particular  word: 

Nee  hoe  [Z6noJ  non  vidit,  C,  Fin.,  iv.  22,  60;  nor  did  Zeno  fail  to  see 
this.  At  neque  non  (di)  diligunt  nos,  C,  Viv.,  11.  49,  102 ;  hut  neither  (is 
it  true  that)  the  gods  do  not  love  us,  etc 

In  the  classical  Latin  this  form  of  connection  is  used  to  connect  clauses  but  not  sin- 
gle words,  and  the  words  are  regularly  separated.  Varro,  the  poets,  and  later  prose 
use  necnon  like  et,  and  connect  with  it  also  single  ideas. 

4.  Of  especial  importance  is  the  position  of  the  Negative  in  the  fol- 
lowing combinations; 

Indefinite  Affirmative.  General  Affirmative. 

nonnihil,  somewhat;  nihil  non,  everything; 

nonnemS,  some  one,  some ;  nemo  non,  everybody; 

nonnuUi,  some  people ;  nUlli  non,  all ; 

nonnumquam,    sometimes ;  numquam  non,    ahcays ; 

nonnusquam,     somewhere;  nusquam  non,     everywhere. 

In  ipsa  curia  nonnemo  hostis  est,  C,  3Iur.,  39,  84  ;  in  the  senate-house 
itself  there  are  enemies  (nemo  non  hostis  est,  everybody  is  ati  enemy). 
Non  est  placandi  spes  mihi  nulla  Dei,  Ov.,  Tr.,  v.  8,  22  (428);  I  have  some 
hope  of  appeasing  God  (nulla  spes  non  est,  /  have  every  hope).  Ngm5 
non  didicisse  mavult  quam  discere,  Quint.,  iii.  i,  6;  everybody  prefers 
having  lear7ied  to  learning. 

INCOMPLETE    SENTENCE. 

Interrogative    Sentences. 

460.  An  interrogative  sentence  is  necessarily  incomplete. 
The  answer  is  the  complement. 

451.  A  question  may  relate  : 

{a)  To  the  existence  or  the  non-existence  of  the  Predi- 
cate :  Predicate  Question. 

Vivitne  pater  ■?  7s  my  father  alive  9 

[b)  To  some  undetermined  essential  part  of  the  sentence, 
such  as  Subject,  Object,  Adjective,  Adverbial  modifier : 
Nominal  Question. 

Quisest"?  Who  is  it  P  Quidais'?  Wh((t  do  yon  sny  ?  Qui  hie  mosT 
V/hat  sort  of  way  is  this  ?    Ciir  non  diseedis  ?    Why  do  you  not  depart  ? 

For  a  list  of  Interrogative  Pronouns  see  104. 

Remarks. — i.  The  second  class  requires  no  rules  except  as  to  mood 
(462). 

2.  The  form  of  the  question  is  often  used  to  imply  a  negative  opin- 


DIRECT   SIMPLE   QUESTIONS.  29I 

ion  on  the  part  of  the  speaker :  Quid  interest  inter  periurum  et  menda- 
cem'?  C,  Rose. Com.,  16,  46;  what  is  the  difference  between  a  perjured 
7nan  and  a  liar  ?    All  questions  of  this  kind  are  called  Rhetorical. 

452.  I.  Interrogative  sentences  are  divided  into  simple  and 
compound  (disjunctive).  Am  I?  (simple) ;  Am  I,  or-  am  I 
not  ?  (disjunctive). 

Note.  -Strictly  speaking,  only  the  simple  interrogative  sentence  belongs  to  this  sec- 
tion ;  but  for  the  sake  of  completeness,  the  whole  subject  will  be  treated  here. 

2.  Interrogative  sentences  are  further  divided  into  direct 
and  indirect,  or  independent  and  dependent.  Am  I?  (di- 
rect) ;  He  asks  ichether  1  am  (indirect). 


DIRECT    SIMPLE    QUESTIONS. 

453.  Direct  simple  questions  sometimes  have  no  inter- 
rogative sign.  Such  questions  are  chiefly  passionate  in  their 
character,  and  serve  to  express  Astonishment,  Blame,  Disgust. 

Infelix  est  Fabricius  quod  rtis  suum  fodit  ?  Sen.,  Dial.,  i.  3,  G;  Fahri- 
cius  is  unhappy  because  he  digs  his  oioi  field  ?  (Impossible  !)  Heus, 
inquit,  linguam  vis  meam  praecludere  %  Phaedr.,  i.  23,  5 ;  IIo  !  ho  !  qnoth 
he,  you  ivish  to  shut  my  tnouth,  you  do  ?  (You  shall  not.)  Tuom  para- 
situm  non  novistU  Pl.,  J/en..  505  ;  you  don't  know  your  own  parasite  9 
(Strange  !)  Hunc  tu  vitae  splendorem maculis  adspergis  istis  1  C,  Plane, 
12,  30;  you  bespatter  this  splendid  life  with  such  blots  as  those  9 

Notes.— 1.  Questions  of  this  kind  are  characteristic  of  the  Comic  Poets.  In  Cicero 
they  are  found  especially  in  expressions  of  doubt,  with  posse,  and  with  an  emphatic 
personal  pronoun. 

2.  Such  a  question  may  have  the  force  of  a  command.  So  in  the  phrase  etiam  tii 
tacSs?  ivorCt  you  keep  quiet?  common  in  comedy  (Pl.,  Trin-,  514). 

3.  Noteworthy  is  the  occasional  usage  of  the  question  in  place  of  a  cor.dition. 
Amat?  sapit,  Pl.,  ^4?n.,  90.5;  is  he  in  Ime?  he  is  sensible.  Tristis  es  ?  indignor 
quod  sum  tibi  causa  doloris,  Ov..  TV.,  iv.  3, 33  (542).    See  593,  4. 

4.  When  several  questions  follow  in  immediate  succession,  only  the  first  generally 
takes  the  Interrogative  Pronoun,  or  -ne.    Repeated  questioning  is  passionate. 

5.  On  ut  in  the  exclamatory  question,  see  558. 

454.  Interrogative  Particles. Ne  (enclitic)  is  always  ap- 
pended to  the  emphatic  word,  and  generally  serves  to  denote 
a  question,  without  indicating  the  expectation  of  the  speaker. 

Omnisne  pecunia  dissoluta  est  ?  C,  Yerr.,  in.  77,  180;  is  all  the  money 
'paid  out  ?    (Estne  oninis  pecunia  dissoluta  %  is  all  the  money  paid  out  9) 

Remarks. — i.  As  the  emphatic  word  usually  begins  the  sentence, 


292  DIRECT   SIMPLE    QUESTION'S. 

SO  -ne  is  usually  appended  to  the  first  word  in  the  sentence.  But 
exceptions  are  not  uncommon. 

2.  -Ne  is  originally  a  negative.  Questioning  a  negative  leans  to  the 
affirmative;  and  -ne  is  not  always  strictly  impartial. 

Notes.— 1.  -Ne  sometimes  cuts  off  a  precedmg  -s  (m  which  case  it  may  shorten  a 
preceding  long  vowel),  and  often  drops  its  own  e.  Viden  ?  Seesi?  TGn'?  Youf 
Satin  ?  Fw  certain  ?  Also  scin,  ain,  vln,  itan,  etc.  This  occurs  especially  ia  early 
Latin. 

2.  This  -ne  is  not  to  be  confounded  with  the  asseverative  -ne,  which  is  found  occa- 
sionally in  Plautus  and  Tekence,  Catullus,  Horace  (0  seri  studiorum,  qulne 
put§tis,  etc.,  H.,  -S'.,  1. 10,  21,  a  much  discussed  passage),  and  later  appended  to  per- 
sonal, demonstrative,  and  relative  pronouns. 

3.  In  poetry  -ne  is  sometimes  appended  to  interrogative  words,  to  heighten  the  effect : 
utrumne  (H.,  /S.,  il  3, 251),  quone  (H.,  ;S'.,  n.  3, 295). 

4.  -Ne  is  often  added  to  personal  pronouns  in  indignant  questions  :  tune  inane 
quicquam  putes  esse  \  C,  Ac,  11. 40, 125. 

5.  In  early  Latin  -ne  seems  to  be  used  sometimes  with  a  force  similar  to  that  later 
exercised  by  nonne ;  but  in  most  of  the  examples  the  expectation  of  an  affirmative 
answer  seems  to  be  due  rather  to  the  context  than  to  ne  ;  see,  however,  r.  2. 

455.  Nonne  expects  the  answer  Yes. 

Nonne  meministn  C,  Fin.,  11.  3,  10  ;  do  you  not  remember  ?  Nonne 
is  generosissimus  qui  optimus'?  Quint.,  v.  11,  4;  is  he  not  the  truest  gentle- 
man who  is  the  best  man  ? 

So  the  other  negatives  witli  -ne  :  nemone,  nihilne,  and  the  like. 

Note.— Nonne  is  denied  for  Plautus,  but  wrongly,  though  it  occurs  but  rarely, 
and  regularly  before  a  vowel.  It  is  also  rare  in  Terence.  In  classical  Latin  it  is  fre- 
quent, but  is  never  found  in  Catullus,  Tibullus,  and  Seneca  Rhetor. 

456.  Num  expects  the  answer  Xo. 

Numquis  est  hie  alius  praeter  mg  atque  t6  ?  Nemo  est,  Pl.  ,  Tr. ,  69 ;  is 
anybody  here  besides  you  and  me  f  No.  Num  tibi  cum  faucSs  urit  sitis, 
aurea  quaeris  pScula?  IL,  /S'.,  i.  2,  114  ;  when  thirst  burns  your  throat 
for  you,  do  you  ask  for  golden  cups  ?    [No.] 

Note.— Numne  is  found  very  rarely,  perhaps  only  in  C,  N.D.,  i.  31,  88,  and  Lael., 
II,  36.  Numnam  belongs  to  early  Latin.  In  many  cases  in  early  Latin,  num  seems 
to  introduce  a  simi)le  question  for  information,  without  expecting  a  negative  answer. 

457.  I.  An  {or)  belongs  to  the  second  part  of  a  disjunctive 

question. 

Sometimes,  however,  the  first  part  of  the  disjunctive  question  is  sup- 
pressed, or,  rather,  involved.  The  second  alternative  witli  an  serves  to 
urge  the  acceptance  of  the  positive  or  negative  i)roposition  involved  in 
the  preceding  statement.  Tliis  abrupt  form  of  question  [or,  then)  is  of 
frequent  use  in  h'cnioustrance,  Expostuhition,  Surprise,  and  Irony. 

N5n  raanum  abstings  1  An  tibi  iam  mSvIs  cerebrum  dispergam  hie  "i 
Ter.,  Ad.,  ySi  ;  are  you  not  going  to  keep  your  hands  off  '.^     Or  would 


DIRECT    DISJUNCTIVE   QUESTIONS.  293 

you  rather  have  me  scatter  your  brains  over  the  place  now  ?  (Vir  custodit 
absens,  my  husband  keejos  guard,  though  absent.  Is  it  not  so  ?)  An 
nescis  longas  rggibus  esse  manus'?  Ov.,  Her.,  16,  166  ;  or  perhaps  you  do 
not  know  {you  do  not  know,  then)  that  kings  have  long  hands  (arras). 

Notes.— 1.  This  usage  is  found  in  early  Latin,  but  is  a  cliaracteristic  of  Cicero 
especially. 

2.  An  is  strengthened  by  ne.  This  is  found  frequently  in  early  Latin,  more  rarely 
later.  Cicero  uses  anne  only  in  disjunctive  questions,  and  Horace,  Tibullus,  Pro- 
PERTius  not  at  all. 

3.  In  early  Latin  very  frequently,  less  often  in  the  poets  ;  occasionally  in  prose,  be- 
ginning with  LivY,  an  is  used  as  a  simple  interrogative  ;  so  nescio  an  =  nescio  num. 
There  seems  to  be  good  reason  for  believing  that  an  ^vas  originally  a  simple  interroga- 
tive particle,  but  became  identified  later  with  disjunctive  questions. 

2.  Especially  to  be  noted,  in  connection  with  an,  are  the  phrases, 
nescio  an  (first  in  Cicero,  and  not  common),  hand  scio  an  (this  is  the 
usual  phrase  :  hand  sciam  an  is  rare),  I  do  not  know  bat ;  dubito  an,  / 
doubt,  I  doubt  but  =:  I  am  inclined  to  think ;  incertum  an  (once  in 
Cicero),  and  rarely  dubitarim  and  dubium  an,  which  give  a  modest  affir- 
mation ;  very  rarely  a  negation.  Negative  particles,  added  to  these 
expressions,  give  a  mild  negation. 

Hand  scio  an  ita  sit,  C,  Tusc,  11.  17,  41 ;  I  do  not  knoiv  but  it  is  so. 
Hand  scio  an  nOlla  (senectus)  beatior  esse  possit,  C,  Cat.M.,  16.  56;  I  do 
not  know  but  it  is  impossible  for  any  old  age  to  be  happier.  Dubito  an 
[Thrasybulum]  primum  omnium  ponam,  Nep.,  viii.  i,  1;  I  doubt  but  I 
should  {=  1  am  inclined  to  think  I  should)  put  Thrasybulus  first  of  all. 

Note.— In  early  Latin  these  phrases  are  still  dubitative.  The  affirmative  force  comes 
in  first  in  Cicero,  and  seems  to  have  been  equivalent  to  forsitan,  perhaps,  with  the 
Potential  Subjunctive  :  F5rsitan  et  Priami  fuerint  quae  fata  requiras,  V.,  A.,  n. 

506  ;  perhaps  you  may  ask  what  was  the  fate  of  Priam,  too. 

DIRECT    DISJUNCTIVE    QUESTIONS. 

458.  Direct  Disjunctive  Questions  have  the  following 
forms  : 

First  Clause.  Second  and  Subseque7it  Clauses. 

utrum,  'whether,  an  (anne),  or 

•ne,  an, 

an  (anne). 

TJtrum  ncsci3  quam  alte  ascenderis,  an  pr5  nihilo  id  putas  ?  C,  Fam.,  x. 
26,  3;  are  you  not  awa7'e  hoiv  high  you  have  mounted,  or  do  you  count 
that  as  nothing  9  Vosne  Lucium  Domitium  an  vos  Domitius  dgseruit  ? 
Caes.,  B.C.,  II.  32,  8  ;  have  you  deserted  Lucius  Domitius,  or  has  Domi- 
tius deserted  you  ?  Eloquar  an  sileam  %  V.,  A.,  in.  39;  shall  I  speak,  or 
hold  my  peace  f  Utrum  hoc  tu  parum  commeministi,  an  ego  non  satis  in- 
tellgxi,  an  mutasti  sententiam?  C,  Att.,  ix.  2;  do  you  not  remember  this, 
or  did  I  misunderstand  you,  or  have  you  chcmged  your  view  ? 


294  INDIRECT    QUESTIONS. 

Notes.— 1.  Utrumne— an  is  found  once  in  Cicero  (lnv.,x.  31, 51),  not  in  CAESiT 
or  LiVY,  occasionally  elsewhere  (H.,^po(;.,  i,  7) ;  utrum— ne— an  is  more  common. 
Ne-an,  which  is  common  in  prose,  is  not  found  in  Cat.,  Tib.,  Prop.,  Hor.,  Lucan. 

2.  Ne  in  the  second  member,  with  omitted  particle  in  first  member,  occurs  only  h: 
H.,  Ep.,  I.  II,  3  (disputed),  in  the  direct  question,  except  in  the  combination  necne  (459). 

3.  Ne— ne  is  very  rare  ;  V.,  A.,  11.  738  ;  xi.  126. 

4.  Aut  (or),  in  questions,  is  not  to  be  confounded  with  an.  Aut  gives  another  part 
of  a  simple  question,  or  another  form  of  it  (or,  vi  other  ivords).  An  excludes,  aut 
extends. 

(Voluptas)  melioremne  efficit  aut  laudabiliorem  virum  ?  c.,  Parad.,  i.  3, 15 ; 
does  pleasicre  make  a  better  or  more  praiseworthy  man  ?  (Answer  :  neither^  Tu 
virum  me  aut  hominem  deputas  adeo  esse  ?  Ter.,  Hec,  524 ;  do  you  hold  me  to 
be  your  husband  or  even  a  man  ? 

459.  In  direct  questions,  or  not  is  annon,  rarely  necne;  in 
indirect,  necne,  rarely  annon. 

Isne  est  quern  quaero,  annon?  Ter.,  Ph.,  852;  is  that  the  man  I  am 
looking  for,  or  not  9  Sitque  memor  nostri  necne,  referte  mihi,  Ov.,  Tr., 
IV.  3,  10(204,  N.  7). 

Notes.— 1.  Necne  is  found  indirect  questions  in  Cicero,  Tusc.,ni.  i8,41  (sunt 
haec  tua  verba  necne  ?),  Flacc,  25, 59 ;  and  also  Lucr.,  hi.  713.  Annon  in  indirect 
questions  occurs  in  Cicero,  Inv.,  i.  50, 95  ;  11. 20,  60  ;  Cael.,  21, 52  ;  Balb.,  8, 22,  etc. 

2.  Utrum  is  sometimes  used  with  the  suppression  of  the  second  clause  for  whether 
or  no?  but  not  in  early  Latin.    So  C,  Flacc,  19,  45,  etc. 

INDIRECT  QUESTIONS. 

460.  Indirect  questions  have  the  same  particles  as  the 
direct,  with  the  following  modifications. 

1  .    Simple  Questions. 
(«)  Num  loses   its  negative   force,    and   becomes   simply 
whetlier.     It  decays  in  later  Latin. 

Specular!  (iiisserunt)  num  soUicitati  animi  sociorum  essent,  L.,  xlh.  19, 
8  ;  they  ordered  them  to  spy  out  whether  the  allies  had  been  tampered 
ivith. 

(h)  Si,  if,  is  used  for  ivhether,  chiefly  after  verbs  and  sen- 
tences implying  trial.     Compare  0  si  (261). 

Temptata  rgs  est  si  primo  impetu  capi  Ardea  posset,  L.,  i.  57,  3;  an  at- 
tempt was  made  (in  case,  in  liopes  that,  to  see)  if  Ardea  could  he  taken 
hy  a  dash  (coup-de-main).  Ibo,  visam  si  domi  est  (467,  n.),  Ter.,  Ileaut., 
170;  I IV ill  go  (to)  see  if  he  is  at  home. 

Notes.— 1.  An  is  sometimes  used  for  num  and  ne,  but  never  in  model  prose. 

COnsuluit  deinde  (Alexander)  an  t5tius  orbis  imperium  fatis  sibi  dgstina- 
retur,  Curt.,  IV.  7,20  ;  Alexander  then  asked  the  oracle  xohether  the  empire  of  the 
whole  world  was  destined  for  him  by  the  fates.  . 

2.  NSnue  is  cited  only  Trom  Cicero  ayl  only  after  quaerere  {Ph.,  xii.  7, 15). 


MOODS   IN   INTERROGATIVE  SENTENCES.  295 

2.    Disjunctive  Questions. 

In  addition  to  the  forms  for  Direct  Questions  (458),  a  form  with  -ne 
in  the  second  clause  only  is  found  in  the  Indirect  Question,  but  is 
never  common;  see  4o8,  n.  2. 

Tarquinius  Prisci  Tarquinii  regis  filius  neposne  fuerit  paruia  liquet,  L., 
I.  46,  4;  whether  Tarquiu  was  the  son  or  grandson  of  king  Tarquin  tJie 
Elder  does  not  appear. 

Notes.— 1.  The  form  -ne  is  not  found  in  Caesar  or  Sallust. 

2.  The  form  ne— ne  is  poetical,  except  once  in  Caesar  {E.G.,  vii.  141, 8). 

3.  Utrum— ne— an  is  rare  but  classical.  TJtranine  -  an  begins  with  Horace,  is  not 
found  in  Livy,  Vell.,  Val.  M.,  or  either  Pliny.     In  Tacitus  only  in  the  IHalogus. 

SUIVIMARY  OF   DIRECT  AND   INDIRECT   DISJUNCTIVE 
QUESTIONS. 

461.  Direct. 

Is  the  last  syllable  sJwrt  or  long  ?  Cf.  C-,  Or.,  64,  217. 
Postrgma  syllaba    utrum  brevis  est  an  longa  T 
brevisne  est  an  longa  ? 
Indirect. 

In  a  rer.'ie,  it  makes  no  difference  whetJier  the  last  syllable  be  slwrt  or 
long : 

utrum  postrema  syllaba  brevis  sit  an  longa. 
postrema  syllaba  brevisne  sit  an  longa. 
versu  ni      re  er  -^  postrgma  syllaba  brevis  an  longa  sit  (Ciceeo). 
postrgma  syllaba  brevis  sit  longane. 

MOODS   IN    INTERROGATIVE   SENTENCES. 
1.    In  Direct  Questions. 

462.  The  Mood  of  the  question  is  the  Mood  of  the  expected 
or  anticipated  answer. 

463.  Indicative  questions  expect  an  Indicative  answer, 
when  the  question  is  genuine. 

A.  Quis  homo  est "?  B.  Ego  sum,  Ter.,  Atid.,  965 ;  who  is  that  ?  It  is  I. 
A.  Vivitne  (pater)  ?    B.  Vivom  liquimus,  Pl.,  Capt.,  282;  is  his  father 
living  9     We  left  him  alive. 

464.  Indicative  questions  anticipate  an  Indicative  answer 
in  the  negative  when  the  question  is  rhetorical. 

Quis  non  paupertatem  extimescit  ?  C,  Tusc,  v.  31,  89  ;  who  does  not 

dread  poverty  ? 


296  MOODS   IN^   INTERROGATIVE  SEN^TENGES. 

Remark. — NOnne  and  num  in  the  direct  question  are  often  rhetorical 
(see  Pl.,  Am.,  539  ;  C,  Div.,  1.  14,  24).  With  nonne  a  negative  answer 
is  anticipated  to  a  negative,  hence  the  affirmative  character.  Compare, 
further,  451,  R.  2. 

465.  Subjunctive  questions  which  expect  Imperative  an- 
Bwers  are  put  chiefly  in  the  First  Person,  when  the  question 
is  deliberative. 

A.  Abeam  1     B.  A"bi,  Pl.,  3Ierc.,  749  ;  shall  I  go  away  ?     Go. 

A.  Quid  nunc  faciam  ?  B.  Tg  suspendito,  Pl.,  Fs.,  1229;  ivhat  shall  I 
do  now  9    Hang  yourself. 

Remark. — So  in  the  representative  of  the  First  Person  in  dependent 
discourse  (265). 

466.  Subjunctive  questions  anticipate  a  potential  answer 
in  the  negative,  when  the  question  is  rhetorical. 

Quis  h5c  crgdat  ?  who  tvould  believe  tJiis  9    [No  one  would  believe 
this.]     Quid  faceret  aliud?  what  else  ivas  he  to  do  9    [Nothing.] 
Quis  tulerit  Gracchos  de  s6ditione  querentes  \  Juv.,  11.  24  (259). 
Remark. — On  the  Exclamatory  Question  see  534,  558. 

2.    In   Indirect  Questions. 

467.  The  Dependent  Interrogative  is  always  in  the  Sub- 
junctive. 

The  Subjunctive  may  represent  the  Indicative. 

[C5nsiderabimus]  quid  fgcerit  (Indie.  fScit),  quidfaciat(lndic.  facit),  quid 
facturus  dt  (Indie,  faciet  or  facturus  est),  Cf.  C,  Inv.,  i.  25,  36;  ive  will 
consider  what  he  has  done,  what  he  is  doing,  what  he  is  going  to  do 
{ivill  do).  (Epaminondas)  quaesivit  salvusne  esset  clipeus,  C,  Fin.,  11.  30, 
97  ;  Epaminondas  asked  whether  his  shield  was  safe.     (Salvusne  est  ?) 

The  SubjunctiA^e  may  be  original.     See  2G5. 

Ipse  docet  quid  agam;  ^  est  et  ab  hoste  docSri,  Ov.,  M.,  iv.  428  (219); 
(Quid  agam,  what  I  am  to  do  ;  not  what  I  am  doing).  Quaero  a  tS  cur 
C.  Cornelium  n6n  dSfenderem,  C,  Vat.,  2,  5  ;  7  inquire  of  you  why  I  ivas 
not  to  defend  C.  Comeliiis.  (Cur  n6n  dSfenderem  ?  ivhy  was  I  not  to 
defend  ?) 

Remarks. — i.  NesciS  quis,  nesciS  quid,  nescis  qui,  nesci5  quod,  TIcnow 
not  who,  what,  which,  may  be  used  exactly  as  indefinite  pronouns,  and 
then  have  no  effect  on  the  construction.  This  usage  is  found  at  all 
periods. 

Nescio  quid  maius  nascitur  Iliade,  Prop.,  n.  (ni.)  32  (34),  6G  ;  some- 
thing, I  know  not  what,  is  coming  to  the  birth,  greater  than  the  Iliad. 


PECULIARITIES   OF   INTERROGATIVE   SENTENCES.       29/ 

2.  The  Relative  has  the  same  form  as  the  Interrogative  quis  ?  except 
in  the  Nom.  Sing. ;  hence  the  importance  of  distinguishing  between 
them  in  dependent  sentences.  The  interrogative  depends  on  the  lead- 
ing verb,  the  relative  belongs  to  the  antecedent.     (Oil,  R.  2.) 

Interrogative  :  die  quid  rogem,  tell  7ne  what  it  is  I  arn  ashing. 

Relative  :  die  quod  rogo,  Ter.,  And.,  764  ;  tell  me  that  ivhich  I  am 
asking  (the  answer  to  my  question). 

The  relative  is  not  unfrequently  used  where  we  should  expect  the 
interrogative,  especially  when  the  facts  of  the  case  are  to  be  empha- 
sized : 

Dicam  quod  sentio,  C,  Or.,  i.  44, 195  ;  I  will  tell  you  my  real  opinion. 

Incorporated  relatives  are  not  to  be  confounded  v^'ith  interrogatives: 

Patefacio  vobis  quas  isti  penitus  abstrusas  insidias  ( -  insidias  quas)  sS 
posuissse  arbitrantur,  C,  Agr.,  11.  18,  49;  1  am  exjjosirig  to  your  vieiv  the 
schemes  ivhich  those  people  fancy  they  have  laid  in  profound  secrecy. 

Note.— In  the  early  Latin  of  Comedy  the  leading  verb  is  very  frequently  discon- 
nected from  the  interrogative,  wiiich  consequently  appears  as  an  independent  sentence 
with  the  Indicative.    This  is  most  common  after  diC,  responde,  loquere,  and  kindred 

Imperatives;  vid§  (Plautus  also  ciicumspice,  respice);  t6  rogo,  interrogo, 
quaero,and  similar  phrases  ;  audire,  vidgre,  elc,  scin  ;  relative  worv.s,  ut,  quomodo, 
etc.,  where  the  modal  and  not  interrogative  force  is  prominent.  Classical  prose  has 
given  up  all  these  usages.  A  few  cases  in  Cicero  are  contested  or  differentlyexplained. 
In  poetry  and  later  prose  the  examples  are  found  only  here  and  there. 

Die,  quid  est  ?  Pl-,  Men.,  397;  tell  me,  what  is  itf  (Die  quid  sit,  tell  me  what  it 
is.)  Quin  tti  uno  verbo  die :  quid  est  quod  ni6  veils  1  Ter.,  And.,  45 ;  tcon't  you 
tell  me  in  one  ivord :  W/iai  is  it  you  want  of  me  ?  Die  mihi  quid  f§el  nisi  non  sapi- 
enter  amavi,  Ov.,  Her.,  11.  27;  tell  me  what  have  I  done,  save  that  I  have  loved 
unwisely. 

So  also,  neseio  quomod5, 1  know  not  how  =  strangely ;  and  mlrum  quantum,  it 
(is)  marvellous  how  much  —  n'onderfulhj,  are  used  as  adverbs  : 

Mirum  quantum  profuit  ad  eoneordiam,  L.,  11. 1,11 ;  it  seized  wonderfully  to 
promote  hamiony.  Neseio  quo  pacto  vel  magis  homings  iuvat  gloria  lata  quam 
magna,  Plin.,  Ep.,  iv.  12,  7  ;  someliow  or  oilier,  people  are  even  more  charmed  to  have 
a  ividespread  reputation  than  a  g7'and  one. 

Early  Latin  shows  also  perquam,  admodum  quam,  nimis  quam,  incredibile 
quantum ;  Cicero  mirum  (mire)  quam,  nimium  quantum,  sane  quam,  valde 
quam;  Caesar  none  of  these ;  Sallust  immane  quantum;  Livy  adds  oppido  quan- 
tum ;  Pliny  Mai.  immensum,  infinitum  quantum ;  Florus  plurimum  quan- 
tum.   The  position  excludes  a  conscious  ellipsis  of  the  Subjunctive. 

PECULIARITIES    OF    INTERROGATIVE    SENTENCES. 

468.  The  subject  of  the  dependent  clause  is  often  treated 
as  the  object  of  the  leading  clause  by  Anticipation  (Prolepsis). 

Nosti  Marcellum  quam  tardus  sit,  Caelius  (C,  Fam.,  viii.  10,  3);  you 
know  Marcellus,  what  a  slow  creature  he  is. 

Note.— This  usage  is  very  common  in  Comedy,  and  belongs  to  conversational  style 
in  general. 


298      PECULIARITIES    OF   INTERROGATIVE   SENTENCES. 

469.  Contrary  to  onr  idiom,  the  interrogative  is  often  used 
in  participial  clauses.  In  English,  the  participle  and  verb 
change  places,  and  a  Causal  sentence  becomes  Final  or  Con- 
secutive. 

Quam  utilitatem  petentSs  scire  cupimus  ilia  quae  occulta  nobis  sunt  ?  C, 

Fin. ,  HI.  1 1 ,  87  ;  irJiat  advantage  do  we  seek  ivhen  we  desire  to  knoiv  those 
things  which  are  hidden  from  us  F  [Solon  Pisistrato  tyranno]  quaerenti 
qua  tandem  re  frgtus  sib!  tarn  audaciter  resisteret,  respondisse  dicitur 
senectute,  C,  Cat.JI.,  20,  72  ;  Solon,  to  Pisistratus  the  usurper,  asking 
him  {—  vvhen  Pisistratus  the  usurper  asked  him)  on  what  thing  relying 
{=  on  wliat  he  relied  that)  he  resisted  him  so  boldly,  is  said  to  have 
answered  "  old  age.'^ 

Note.— The  Abl.  Abs.  with  the  interrogative  is  rare.    C,  Ve?T.,  iii.  80, 185. 

470.  Final  sentences  (sentences  of  Design)  are  used  in 
questions  more  freely  than  in  English. 

Sessum  it  praetor.  Quidut  itidicetur'?  C,  JV.D.,  iii.  30,  74  ;  the  Judge 
is  going  to  take  Jiis  seat.     What  is  to  be  adjudged  F    {To  adjudge  what  ?) 

Remark. — The  Latin  language  goes  further  than  the  English  in 
combining  interrogative  words  in  tlie  same  clause  ;  thus  two  interroga- 
tives  are  not  uncommon: 

CQnsidera  quis  quern  fraudasse  dicatur,  C,  Rose. Com.,  7,  31. 

Yes  and  No. 

471.  (a)   Yes  is  represented  : 

1.  By  sang,  (literally)  soundly,  sanS  quidem,  yes  indeed,  etiam,  even 
(so),  v5ro  (rarely  v6rum),  of  a  truth,  ita,  so,  omninS,  by  all  means,  certg, 
surely,  certo,  for  certain,  admodum,  to  a  degree,  etc. 

Aut  etiam  aut  n5n  respondere  [potest],  C, -4c.,  11.  32, 104  ;  he  can 
atiswer  either  yes  or  no. 

2.  By  cgnseo,  7  think  so  ;  scilicet,  to  be  sure. 

Quid  si  etiam  occentem  hymenaeum  ?  Cgnseo,  Pl.,  Cas.,  806  ;  ivhat  if 
I shoidd  also  sing  a  marriage-song  ?    I  think  you  had  better. 

3.  By  repeating  the  emphatic  word  eitlier  with  or  without  the  con- 
firmatory particles,  vgr5  (principally  witli  pronouns),  sang,  prorsus,  etc. 

Estisne  ?  Sumus,  are  you  9  We  are.  Dasne  "?  Do  sang,  C,  Leg.,  1.  7, 
21  ;  do  you  grant  ?    I  do  indeed. 

(h)  No  is  represented  : 

1.  By  n5n,  nSn  vgrO,  nSn  ita,  minimS,  by  no  means,  nihil,  nothing^ 
minimg  vgro,  nihil  sang,  nihil  minus. 

2.  By  repeating  the  emphatic  word  with  the  negative  : 


SYNTAX    OF   THE    COMPOUND    SENTENCE.  299 

Non  irata  es  1  Non  sum  irata,  Pl.,  Cas.,  1007  ;  you  are  not  angry  ? 
I  am  not. 

(c)  Yea  or  Xay.— iinni5  conveys  a  correction,  and  either  removes  a 
doubt  or  heightens  a  previous  statement:  yes  indeed,  nay  rather. 

Ecquid  placeant  (aedes)  mgrogas'?  Immo  perplacent,  Pl.,  Most.,  907  ; 
do  I  like  the  house,  yon  ask  me  ?  Yes  indeed,  very  nuich.  Causa  igitur 
non  bona  est  ?  Immo  optima,  C,  Att.,  ix.  7,  4  ;  the  cause,  then,  is  a  bad 
one  ?    Nay,  it  is  an  excellent  one. 

Remark. —  Yes,  for,  and  no,  for,  are  often  expressed  simply  by  nam 
and  enim  :  Turn  Antonius :  Heri  enim,  inquit,  hoc  mihi  proposueram,  C. , 
Or.,  ir.  10,  40  ;  tlien  quoth  Antony  :  Yes,  for  I  had  proposed  this  to 
myself  yesterday. 

SYNTAX    OF   THE    COMPOUND   SENTENCE. 

472.  I.  A  compound  sentence  is  one  in  wliicli  the  neces- 
sary parts  of  the  sentence  occur  more  than  once  ;  one  which 
consists  of  two  or  more  clauses. 

2.  Coordination  (Parataxis)  is  that  arrangement  of  the 
sentence  according  to  which  the  different  clauses  are  merely 
placed  side  hy  side. 

3.  Subordination  (Hypotaxis)  is  that  arrangement  of  the 
sentence  according  to  which  one  clause  depends  on  the  other. 

He  became  poor  and  we  became  ricli;  the  second  clause  is 
a  coordinate  sentence. 

He  became  poor  that  ice  might  be  rich;  the  second  clause 
is  a  subordinate  sentence. 

4.  The  sentence  which  is  modified  is  called  the  PrincijDal 
Clause,  that  which  modifies  is  called  the  Subordinate  Clause. 
*'  He  became  poor  "  is  the  Principal  Clause,  "  that  ice  might 
be  rich  "  is  the  Subordinate  Clause. 

Remark. — Logical  dependence  and  grammatical  dependence  are  not 
to  be  confounded.  In  the  conditional  sentence,  vivam  si  vivet,  let  me 
live  if  she  lives,  my  living  depends  on  her  living  ;  yet  *'  vivam  "  is  the 
principal,  "si  vivet"  the  subordinate  clause.  It  is  the  dependence  of 
the  introductory  particle  that  determines  the  grammatical  relation. 

COORDINATION. 

473.  Coordinate  sentences  are  divided  into  various  classes, 
according  to  the  particles  by  which  the  separate  clauses  are 
bound  together. 


300  COORDINATION". 

Remark. — Coordinate  sentences  often  dispense  with  conjunctions 
{Asyndeton).     Tlien  the  connection  must  determine  the  character. 

Copulative  Sentences. 

474.  The  following  particles  are  called  Copulative  Con- 
junctions :  et,  -que,  atque  (ac),  etiam,  quoque. 

Note.— The  Copulative  Conjunctions  are  often  omitted,  in  climax,  in  enumerations, 
in  contrasts,  in  standing  formulae,  particularly  in  dating  by  the  consuls  of  a  year,  if  the 
praenomina  are  added  ;  and  finally,  in  summing  up  previous  enumerations  by  such 
words  as  alii,  c6teri,  cuncti,  multi,  omngs,  reliqui. 

475.  Et  is  simply  and,  the  most  common  and  general  par- 
ticle of  connection,  and  combines  likes  and  unlikes. 

Panem  et  aquam  natura  desiderat,  Sen.,  E.M.,  25,  4  ;  hread  and  water 
(is  what)  nature  calls  for.  Probitas  laudatur  et  alget,  Juv.,  i.  74  ;  hon- 
esty is  bepraised  and — freezes. 

Notes.— 1.  We  find  sometimes  two  clauses  connected  by  et  where  we  should  expect 
et  tamen.  This  usage  is  characteristic  of  Tacitus,  but  is  found  all  through  the 
language.  Fieri  potest,  ut  rgcte  quis  sentiat  et  id,  quod  sentit,  polite  eloqui 
non  possit,  C,  Tusc,  1. 3, 6. 

2.  Et  sometimes  introduces  a  conclusion  to  a  condition  expressed  in  the  Imperative, 
but  only  once  in  early  Latin,  never  in  classical  prose.  DiC  quibus  in  terris ;  et  eris 
mibi  magnus  Apollo,  V.,  Ec,  in.  104. 

3.  Et,  instead  of  a  temporal  conjunction,  begins  with  Caesau  (T/.  IhG.,  i.  37, 1) 
and  Sallust  (lug.,  97,4)  ;  it  is  never  common. 

4.  On  neque  ullus  for  et  nuUus  and  the  like,  see  480.  On  et  after  words  indi- 
cating Likeness,  see  643.     On  et  for  etiam,  see  478,  N.  2. 

476.  -due  (enclitic)  unites  things  that  belong  closely  to 
one  another.  The  second  member  serves  to  complete  or  oq:- 
tend  the  first. 

Senatus  populusque  Romanus,  C,  Plane.,  yj,  90;  the  Senate  and  people 
of  Rome,  Ibi  mortuus  sepultusque  Alexander,  Ij.,  xxxvi.  20,  5  ;  there 
Ale.vander  died  and  was  buried.  [Soil  origns  et  occidgns  diem  noctemque 
conficit,  C,  N.D.,  n.  40,  102  ;  the  sun  by  its  rising  and  setting  makes 
day  and  night. 

Notes.— 1.  Que  was  very  common  in  early  Latin,  especially  in  legal  phraseology, 
where  it  was  always  letuined. 

2.  Que— que— que  is  ante-classical  and  poetic. 

3.  Que  is  always  added  to  the  first  word  in  the  clause  it  introduces,  in  Plautus,  as 
well  as  in  classical  prose  ;  but  the  Augustan  poets  are  free  in  their  position,  for  metrical 
reasons.  As  regards  prepositions,  que  is  never  ai)pended  to  ob  and  sub,  rarely  to  a  and 
ad,  but  frequently  to  other  monosyllabic  prepositions  ;  it  is  always  appended  to  dissyl- 
labic prepositions  in  -a,  and  often  to  other  dissyllabic  prepositions. 

4.  On  que  for  quoque  sec  479,  N.  2. 

5.  Combinations  : 
(a)  et-et; 

(6)  que  -   et;  »are  in  early  Latin,  never  in  Cicero,  Caesar;  begins  with  Sallust. 


COORDINATION".  3OI 

Sa;.iatst  and  Tacitus  always  add  the  que  to  the  pronoun,  LiVY  and  later  prose  writ- 
ers to  the  substantive. 

(c)  et— que ;  rare,  and  beginning  with  Ennius. 

{(l)  que— que  begins  with  Plautus,  ^Ennius.  Cicero  has  it  but  once  (noctesque 
diesque,  Fin..,  i.  16,  51) ;  it  enters  prose  with  Sallust,  ar  d  poets  are  fond  of  it. 

Et  domino  satis  et  nimium  furique  lupoque,  Tib.,  iv.  i,  187 ;  enough  for  owner ^ 
and  too  much  for  thief  and  icolf. 

477.  Atque  (compounded  of  ad  and  -que)  adds  a  more 
important  to  a  less  important  member.  But  the  second  mem- 
ber often  owes  its  importance  to  the  necessity  of  liaving  the 
complement  (-que). 

Ac  (a  shorter  form,  which  does  not  stand  before  a  vowel 
orh)  is  fainter  than  atque,  and  almost  equivalent  to  et. 

Intra  moenia  atque  in  sinu  urbis  sunt  hostgs,  S.,  C,  52,  35  ;  within  the 
walls,  ay,  and  in  the  heart  of  the  city^  are  the  enemies.  A.  Servos  ?  Ego  ■? 
B.  Atque  mens,  Pl.,  Cas.,  735  ;  a  slave  ?    I  ?    And  mine  to  hoot. 

Notes.— 1.  The  confirmative  force  of  atque,  as  in  the  second  example,  is  found 
especially  in  Plautus,  occasionally  later. 

2.  Atque  adds  a  climax,  and  then  is  often  strengthened  by  Scastor,  profectO,  V6r5, 
etc.,  Pl.,  B.,  86  ;  C,  Tusc,  i.  20, 4G. 

3.  In  comedy,  atque  has  sometimes  demonstrative  force  :  atque  eccum,  Pi-,  St.,  577. 

4.  Occasionally  in  Cicero,  then  in  the  Augustan  poets,  Livr  and  later  prose  writers, 
notably  Tacitus,  atque  or  ac  is  often  used  to  connect  the  parts  of  a  clause  in  which 
et  or  que  (sometimes  both)  has  been  already  employed  : 

Et  potentgs  sequitur  invidia  et  humiles  abiect5sque  contemptus  et  turp6s 
ac  nocent6s  odium,  (^uint.,  iv.  i,  14  ;  the  poiverfulare  folloioed  by  envy ;  theloivand 
grovelling,  by  contempt ;  the  base  and  hurtful,  by  hatred. 

5.  Atque— atque  is  found  occa.sionally  in  Cato,  Catullus,  Cicero,  and  Vergil. 
Que— atque  begins  in  poetry  with  Vergil,  in  prose  with  Livy,  and  is  very  rare. 

0.  Atque,  introducing  a  principal  clause  after  a  temporal  conjunction,  belongs 
exclusively  to  Plautus  :  Dum  circumspecto  m§,  atque  ego  lembum  cQnspicor,  B., 
279.    Also  Fp.,  217. 

7.  Atque  is  used  before  consonants,  as  well  as  aC,  to  connect  single  notions  :  when 
sentences  or  clauses  are  to  be  connected,  aC  only  is  allowable  ;  either  atque  or  ac  with 
expressions  of  Likeness.— Stamm. 

8.  On  atque,  after  words  indicating  Likeness,  se3G43.  Atque  follows  a  comparative 
only  after  a  negative  in  early  and  classical  Latin.  Horace  is  first  to  use  it  after  a 
positive. 

9.  Phraseological  is  alius  atque  alius,  one  or  another,  found  first  in  Livy,  and  rare. 

478.  Etiam,  evefi  (now),  yet,  still,  exaggerates  (heightens), 
and  generally  precedes  the  word  to  which  it  belongs. 

Nobis  rgs  familiaris  etiam  ad  necessaria  deest,  Cf.  S.,  C,  20, 11  ;  ive 
lack  means  even  for  the  necessaries  of  life.  Ad  AppI  Claudi  senectutem 
accgdebat  etiam  ut  caecus  esset,  C,  Cat. 31. ,  6,  16  (553,  4). 

Notes.— 1 .  Etiam  as  a  temporal  adverb  refers  to  the  Past  or  Present,  and  means 
still ;  it  is  sometimes  strengthened  by  tum  (tunc)  or  num  (nunc).  But  beginning  with. 


302  COORDINATION. 

LiVT,  adhtic,  which  properly  refers  only  to  the  Present,  is  extendeil  to  the  Past  and 
used  like  etiam  (turn). 

Non  satis  me  pernosti  etiam  qualis  sim,  Ter.,  And.,  503 ;  lou  still  do  not  Ivow 
well  eaougli  (=  little  know)  what  manner  of  i*erson  I  am.  Cum  iste  {i.e.,  Polemar- 
chus)  etiam  cubaret,  in  cubiculum  introductus  est,  C,  Veir.,  m.  23, 5G ;  -a  idle  the 
dej'endaui  {Polemarchus)  was  still  in  bed,  he  tvas  introduced  into  the  ledroom. 

2.  Instead  of  etiam,  et  is  occasional  in  Plautus,  in  a  change  of  person.  Cicepo 
uses  it  also  after  an  adversative  conjunction,  as  verum  et ;  also  after  nam  and  simul ; 
more  often  when  a  pronoun  follows,  as  et  iUe,  et  ipse.  Caesar  never  uses  it  so, 
Sallust  rarely,  but  it  becomes  common  from  Livy  on. 

3.  Phraseological  is  etiam  atque  etiam,  time  and  again.  On  etiam  for  ijes,  see 
471, 1. 

479.  Quoque,  so  also,  complements  (compare  que)  and 
always  follows  the  ^vorcls  to  which  it  belongs. 

Cum  patri  (Timothei)  populus  statuan  posuisset,  filio  quoque  dedit,  Cf. 
Nep.,  xni.  2,3;  f lie  people,  liaving  erected  a  statue  iv  honor  of  t lie  father 
of  Timotheus,  gave  one  to  the  son  also  (likewise). 

Remark. — The  difference  between  etiam  .ind  quoque  is  not  to  be 
insisted  on  too  I'igidly : 

Grande  et  conspicuum  nostro  quoque  tempore  monstrum,  Juv.,  iv.  115  ; 
a  huge  and  conspicuous  prod igy,  even  in  our  day. 

Notes.— 1.  In  ante-classical  and  post-classical  Latin  the  double  forms  etiam  — 
quoque,  etiam  quoque,  are  sometimes  found,  and  in  classical  Latin  also  quoque 
etiam  occasionally  :  nunc  vero  mea  quoque  etiam  causa  rogo,  c,  Or.,  i.  35, 1G4. 

2.  Que  in  the  sense  of  quoque  is  rare  (compare  m§que,  Cat.,  cir.  3  ;  me  too),  and  is 
found  chiefly  in  the  post- Augustan  hodieque,  to-day  also. 

480.  Copulation  hy  means  of  tlie  Negative. — Instead  of  et 
and  the  negative,  neque  (nee)  and  the  positive  is  the  rule  in 
Latin. 

Opinionibus  vulgl  rapimur  in  erroremnec  vera  cemimus,  C,  Leg.,  11.  17, 
43;  hy  the  prejudices  of  the  rabble  we  are  hurried  into  error,  and  do  not 
distinguish  the  truth.  (Caesar)  properans  noctem  diei  coniunxerat  neque 
iter  intermiserat,  Caes.,  ^. C,  ni.  13,  2;  Caesar  in  his  Jiaste  had  joined 
night  tvith  day  and  Jiad  not  broke?i  his  marcJi. 

Remarks. — i.  Et — non,  mid — not,  is  used  when  the  neg:ation  is 
confined  to  a  single  word,  or  is  otherwise  emphatic  ;  but  neque  is  found 
occasionally  here,  even  in  Cicero  (Off.,  ni.  10,  41). 

Et  militavi  non  sine  gloria,  II.,  0.,  ni.  26,  2  ;  and  J  liarr  hrcn  a  .sol- 
dier not  without  glory. 

On  nee  n5n,  the  opposite  of  et  nQn,  see  449,  r.  3. 

2.  In  combination  with  llio  negative  we  have  the  loiiowiiig 

Paradigms  :  Aiid  no  one,        neque  quisquam,       nor  any  07ie. 
And  no,  neque  ullus,  nor  any. 

And  notJiing,      neque  quidquam,      nor  anything. 
And  never,  neque  umquam,        7ior  ever. 


COORDINATION.  3O3 

Neque  amet  quemquam  nee  ametur  ab  uUo,  Juv.,  xii.  130  ;  wMy  he  love 

no  one,  and  he  loved  by  none. 

3.  Nee  is  often  nearly  equivalent  to  nee  tamen,  and  yet  not : 

Extra  invidiam  nee  extra  gloriam  erat,  Tag.,  Ayr.,  8,  3  ;  he  was  beyond 

the  reach  of  envy,  and  yet  not  beyond  the  reach  of  glory.     Cf.  Ter., 

Uun.,  249  ;  C,  Tusc,  11.,  25,  60. 

Notes.— 1.  Neque  =  n6  quidem,  is  ante-classical  and  post-classical :  nee  nunc, 
cum  m§  vocat  ultro,  aecgdam  1  ll-,  'S.,  11. 3, 262  (the  only  casj  in  Horace). 

2.  Caesar,  Lucretius,  Vergil,  and  Propeutius  use  neque  regularly  before 
vowels. 

3.  Combinations  : 

(a)  neque— neque ;  nee— nee ;  neque-nee ;  nee— neque.  Sometimes  the  first 
neque  has  the  force  of  and  neither  ;  but  this  is  limited  in  prose  to  Caesar,  Saliust, 
and  LivY  ;  in  poetry  to  Catullus  and  Propertius. 

(6)  neque— et ;  neque— que ;  neque— ae.  Of  these  neque— et  is  rare  in  early 
Latin,  but  more  common  in  Cicero  and  later  ;  neque— que  is  rare,  and  found  first  in 
Cicero  ;  neque— atque  (ac)  is  very  rare,  and  begins  in  Tacitus. 

(c)  et— neque  is  found  first  in  Cicero,  who  is  fond  of  it,  but  it  fades  out  after  him. 

4.  Neque  is  usually  used  for  non,  when  followed  by  the  strengthening  words 
enim,  tamen,  vSro,  etc. 

481.  I.  Insertion  and  Omission  of  Cojnilatives, — When 
multus,  much,  many,  is  followed  by  another  attribute,  the 
two  are  often  combined  by  copulative  particles  :  77i<:ni?/ re- 
noioned  deeds,  multa  et  praeclara  facinora ;  ma7iy  good  qual- 
ities, multae  bonaeque  artes. 

2.  Several  subjects  or  objects,  standing  in  the  same  rela- 
tions, either  take  et  throughout  or  omit  it  throughout.  The 
omission  of  it  is  common  in  emphatic  enumeration. 

Phryges  et  Pisidae  et  Ciliees,  C,  Div.,  i.  41,  92  ;  or,  PhrygSs,  Pfeidae, 
Ciliees,  Phrygians,  Pisidiaiis,  and  Cilicians. 

Note.— Et  before  the  third  member  of  a  series  is  rare,  but  occurs  here  and  there  at 
all  periods  ;  in  Cicero  it  usually  draws  especial  attention  to  the  last  member.  Atque 
(ae)  is  u,sed  thus  a  little  more  frequently  (mores  instittita  atque  vita,  C,  Fam.,  xv. 
4,14),  and  que  is  not  uncommon:  aegritudines,  irae  libidinSsque,  C,  Tusc.,i. 
33,  BO. 

3.  Et  is  further  omitted  in  climaxes,  in  antitheses,  in 
phrases,  and  m  formidcB. 

Viri  non  [est]  debilitari  dolore,  frangi,  succumbere,  C,  Fin.,  11.  29,  95  ; 
it  is  unmanly  to  allow  one's  self  to  be  disabled  (unnerved)  by  grief,  to  be 
broken-spirited,  to  succumb.  Diffieilis  faeilis,  iucundus  acerbus,  es  idem, 
Mart.,  XII.  47,  ]  (310). 

Patres  Conseripti,  Fatlters  (and)  Conscript  (Senators). 

luppiter  Optimus  Maximus,  Father  Jsva,  supremely  good  (and)  great. 


304  COORDINATIOIT. 


Other  Particles  Employed. 

482.  Other  particles  are  sometimes  emjoloyed  instead  of 
the  copulative  in  the  same  general  sense. 

1.  Temporal  :  turn— turn,  tlien — then;  alias— alias,  at  one  time — at 
another  ;  iam — iam,  nunc — nunc,  modo — modo,  ?ww — now ;  simul — simul, 
at  tJie  same  time. 

Turn  Graece — turn  Lating,  partly  in  Greek,  partly  in  Latin.  Horatius 
Codes  nunc  singulos  provocabat,  nunc  increpabat  omnes,  Cf.  L.,  ii.  lo,  8  ; 
IJuratiuH  Codes  noiv  challenged  tliem  singly,  now  taunted  them  all. 
Modo  hue,  modo  illuc,  C,  J^^.,  xiii.  25,  3  ;  now  hither,  noiv  thither 
(liitlier  and  thitlier).  Simul  spernebant,  simul  metu6bant,  tliey  despised 
and  feared  at  the  same  time  {they  at  once  despised  and  feared). 

Notes.— 1.  Of  these  tum— tum  is  not  ante-claspical,  nunc— nunc  is  found  first  in 
LucR.,  and  is  introduced  into  prose  by  Livy  :  simul — simul  is  found  first  in  Caesais, 
but  not  in  Cicero  ;  iam— iam  begins  with  Vergil  and  Livy.  Aliquando  ali- 
quando,  quandoque— quandoque,  are  post-Augustan ;  interdum— interdum  is 
rare,  but  occurs  in  CiCEUo. 

2.  The  combinations  vary  in  many  ways.  Ciceronian  are  tum— alias ;  alias— 
plgrumque ;  interdum— alias ;  modo— tum ;  modo— vicissim ;  niost  of  them  found 
tut  once.     Some  fifteen  other  combinations  are  post-Ciceronian. 

3.  On  cum— tum,  see  588. 

2.  Local :  In  Cicero  only  alio— alio ;  hinc — illinc.  Others  are  :  hie — 
illic  (first  in  Vergil);  hinc— hinc  (Vergil,  Livy);  hinc — inde  (Tacitus); 
illinc— hinc  (Livy)  ;  inde— hinc  (Tacitus)  ;  alibi— alibi  (Livy)  ;  aliunde — 
aliunde  (Pliny). 

3.  Modal :  alitor — aliter ;  qua— qua,  rare,  and  lacking  in  many  authors 
{e.g.,  Caesar,  Sallust).  Li  Cicero  only  four  times,  and  confined  to 
the  Letters  ;  pariter — pariter  is  poetical  and  post-classical ;  aequg — aeque 
is  found  once  in  Horace  and  once  in  Tacitus. 

4.  Comparative  :  ut — ita,  as — so  : 

Dolabellam  ut  Tarsgnsgs  ita  Laodicgni  ultr5  arcessigrunt,  C,  Fam.,  xii. 
13,  4  ;  as  the  people  of  Tarsus  so  the  people  of  Laodicea  {=  both  the 
people  of  Tarsus  and  those  of  Laodicea)  seiit  for  Dolahella  of  their  own 
accord. 

Often,  however,  the  actions  compared  are  adversative  ;  and  ut  may 
be  loosely  translated  although,,  while. 

Haec  omnia  ut  invitis  ita  non  adversantibus  patriciis  transacta,  T^.,  in. 
55,  15  ;  all  this  was  done,  the  patricians,  tliough  unwilling,  yet  not 
opposing  {—  against  the  wishes,  but  without  any  opposition  on  the  part 
of  the  j)atricians). 

Note.— There  are  also  many  other  similar  combinations,  as  :  quemadmodum— 
Sic  ;  ut— BiC ;  tamquam— sic,  etc.  The  adversative  use  of  ut  -ita  is  rare  in  tlie  clas- 
sical period,  but  extends  later. 


COORDTN-ATION".  305 

5.  Adversative  :  non  modo,  n5n  solum,  non  tantum,  not  only  ;  sed,  sed 
etiam,  sed — quoque,  verum  etiam,  hut  even,  hut  also  : 

Urbes  maritimae  non  solum  multis  periculis  oppositae  [sunt]  sed  etiam 
caecis,  C,  Rep.,  11.  3,  5  :  cities  on  the  seaboard  ai'e  liable  not  only  to 
many  dangers,  hut  even  (also)  to  hidden  (ones).  [Non]  doceri  tantum  sed 
etiam  delectari  volunt,  Quint.,  iv.  i,  57  ;  they  ivish  not  merely  to  he 
taught,  hut  to  he  tickled  to  hoot. 

Ill  the  negative  form,  non  mode  non,  7iot  only  7iot ;  sed  ne— quidem, 
hut  not  even  ;  sed  vix,  hut  hardly. 

Ego  non  modo  tibi  non  irascor,  sed  ne  reprehendo  quidem  factum  tuum, 
C,  Still.,  18,  50  ;  1  not  only  am  7iot  angry  ivith  you,  hat  I  do  not  even 
find  fault  with  your  action. 

Rf.marks. — I.  Instead  of  non  modo  (solum)  non— sed  ne— quidem,  the 
latter  non  is  generally  omitted,  when  the  two  negative  clauses  have  a 
verb  in  common,  the  negative  of  the  first  clause  being  supplied  by  the 
second;  otherwise  both  negatives  arc  expressed. 

Pis5ne  consule  senatui  non  solum  iuvaro  rem  ptiblicam  sed  nS  luggre 
quidem  licgbat,  Cf.  C,  Pis.  10,  23;  ichen  Piso  was  consid,  it  icas  not  only 
not  left  free  for  the  senate  (=  the  senate  was  not  only  not  free)  to  help 
the  commonwealth,  but  not  even  to  mourn  (for  her). 

2.  N§dum,  not  (to  speak  of)  yet,  much  less,  is  also  used,  either  with  or 
"without  a  verb  in  the  Subjunctive;  it  is  found  first  and  only  once  in 
Terence,  never  in  Caesar  and  Sallust,  in  Cicero  only  after  negative 
sentences;  fiom  Livy  on  it  is  used  after  affirmative  clauses  as  well. 

Satrapa  numquam  sufFerre  gius  sumptus  queat,  ngdum  tu  possis,  Ter.  , 
Jleaut.,  4^^;  a  nabob  could  never  stand  that  girVs  expenditures,  much 
less  could  you. 

Notes.— 1.  Non  tantum  i^  never  found  in  early  Latin,  Caesar  and  Saixust, 
rarely  in  Ci«ero.  Sed— quoque  is  found  first  in  Ciceuo  ;  so,  too,  sed  simply,  but 
rarely.  Livy  is  especially  free  in  his  use  of  sed.  Verum,  in  the  second  member,  is 
not  ante-classical  nor  Tacitean.  Non  alone  i:i  the  first  member  is  rare,  but  Ciceronian, 
it  is  usually  followed  by  sed  only  ;  occasionally  by  sed  etiam.  Sed  is  sometimes 
omiUed  from  Livy  on.     Cf.  L.,  xxviii.  39, 11  ;  Tac,  Ann.,  in.  19,  2,  etc. 

2.  Sed  et,  for  sed  etiam,  belongs  to  post-Augustan  Latin. 

Adversative  Sentences. 

483.  The  Adversative  particles  are  :  autem,  sed,  verum, 
vero,  at,  atqui,  tamen,  ceterum.     Of  these  only  sed  and  tamen 

are  really  adversative. 

Note.— The  Adversative  particles  are  often  omitted  :  as  when  an  afiirmative  is  fol- 
lowed by  a  negative,  or  the  reverse,  or  in  other  contrasts. 

484.  Autem  (post-positive)  is  the  weakest  form  of  hit,  and 
30 


306  COORDIXATION". 

indicates  a  difference  from  the  foregoing,  a  contrast  rather 
than  a  contradiction.  It  serves  as  a  particle  of  transition 
and  explanation  (=  moreover,  furthermore,  now),  and  of 
resumption  (=  to  come  hack),  and  is  often  nsed  in  syllo- 
gisms. 

Modo  accedgns,  turn  autem  recedSns,  C.  ,N.D.,  n.  40,  102 ;  now  approach- 
ing, then  again  receding.  Rumoribus  mgcum  pugnas,  ego  autem  a  tS 
ration63  require,  C,  N.D.,  in.  5,  lo;  you  fight  me  with  rumors,  whereas 
I  ask  of  you  reasons.  Quod  est  bonum,  omne  laudabile  est;  quod  autem 
laudabile  est,  omne  est  honestum ;  bonum  igitur  quod  est,  honestum  est, 
C,  Fin.,  lu.  S,  27;  everything  that  is  good  is  praiseivorthy  ;  hut  every- 
thing that  is  praiseworthy  is  virtuousj  therefore,  ivhat  is  good  is 
virtuous. 

Remark. — Autem  commonly  follows  the  first  word  in  the  sentence 
or  clause;  but  when  an  uneraphatic  est  or  sunt  occupies  the  second 
place,  it  is  put  in  the  third.     So  igitur  aad  enim. 

Notes.— 1.  Noteworthy  is  the  use  of  autem  in  lively  questions.  Cicero  employs 
it  in  this  way,  also  to  correct  his  own  previous  questions  {Epanorthosis), 

Egon  debacchatus  sum  autem  an  tu  in  me  ?  Tkr.,  Ad.,  185.  Num quis testis 
Postumium  appellavit  ?    Testis  autem  ?  non  accusator  1  C,  Rab.Post.,  5, 10. 

2.  Autem  is  a  favorite  word  witli  Cicero,  especially  in  his  philosophical  and  moral 
works,  but  not  with  the  Historians,  least  of  all  with  Tacitus,  who  uses  it  only  nine 
times  in  all. 

485.  Sed  (set)  is  nsed  partly  in  a  stronger  sense,  to  denote 
contradiction,  partly  in  a  weaker  sense,  to  introduce  a  new 
thought,  or  to  revive  an  old  one. 

N5n  est  vivere  sed  valere  vita,  Mart.,  vi.  70,  15  (442,  r.  2).  Domitius 
nulla  quidem  arte  sed  Latine  tamen  dic6bat,  C,  Br.,  yj,2Q7;*Domitins 
spoke  with  no  art  it  is  true,  hut  for  all  tliat,  in  good  Latin. 

Notes.— 1.  The  use  of  sed  to  carry  on  a  narrative  is  characteristic  of  the  historians, 
though  found  also  in  Cicero.    Sed  in  ea  conitiratiSne  fuit  Q.  Ctirius,  S.,  6'.,  23, 1. 

2.  Sed  is  repeated  by  anaphora  (682),  occasionally  m  Cicero  (rerr.,111.  72, 169), 
more  often  later. 

3.  Sed  may  be  strengthe  xkI  by  tamen ;  by  vSro,  enimvgro,  enim ;  by  autem, 
but  only  in  connection  m  ith  quid,  and  then  only  in  comedy  and  in  Vergil.  Some- 
times it  is  equal  to  sed  tamen,  as  in  V.,  A.,  iv.  660. 

486.  Verum,  it  /  <  lrui\  true,  always  takes  the  first  place 
in  a  sentence,  and  is  practically  eqnivalent  to  sed  in  its 
stronger  sense. 

SI  certum  est  facere,  faciam ;  vSrum  ng  post  c5nferas  culpam  in  m6,  Tcr., 
JS'tf^i.,  388;  if  you  are  determined  to  do  it,  I  will  arrange  it;  hut  you 
must  not  aftenvard  lay  the  hlame  on  me. 


COORDINATION^.  307 

■Note.— Vgrum.  gradually  gives  place  to  sed  in  Cicero.  It  is  used  occasionally  to 
return  to  the  subject  (v6rum  haec  quidem  hactenus,  C,  r^sc,  111.34,84),  and  in 
yielding  a  point  (vSruin  esto,  C,  Fin.,  11. 23,  75),  wliere  sed  is  the  usual  word. 

487.  Vero,  of  a  truth,  is  generally  put  in  the  second  place, 
asserts  with  conviction,  and  is  used  to  heighten  the  state- 
ment. 

[Platcnem]  Bion  adeo  admiratus  est  ut  se  totum  el  traderet.  Neque 
vgro  minus  Plato  delectatus  est  Dione,  Nep.,  x.  2, 3;  Dion  admired  Plato 
to  such  a  degree  that  he  gave  himself  wholly  up  to  him ;  and  indeed 
Plato  was  no  less  deliglded  with  Dion. 

Notes. — 1.  Vero  is  properly  an  affirmative  adverb,  and  such  is  its  only  use  in 
Plautus.  In  Terence  it  has  also  acquired  adversative  force,  which  it  preserves 
throughout  the  language  in  greater  or  less  degree  ;  so  in  the  historians  it  is  hardly  more 
than  autem. 

2.  The  combination  vSrum  v6ro  is  ante-classical ;  on  combinations  with  enim, 
see  498,  n.  6. 

3.  V§r5  is  also,  but  not  so  commonly,  usetl  in  transitions  ;  especially  in  the  formulae 
age  vSro,  iam  v6ro. 

488.  At  (another  form  of  ad  =  in  addition  to)  introduces 
startling  transitions,  lively  ohjections,  remonstrances,  ques- 
tions, wishes,  often  by  way  of  quotation. 

"Philocteta,  St!  brevis  dolor."  At  iam  decimum  annum  in  sp6lunca 
iacet,  C,  Fin.,  11.  29,  94  ;  "  Philoctetes,  still  !  the  pain  is  short.'"  But 
he  has  been  lying  in  his  cave  goiiig  on  ten  years.  "At  multis  malls 
affectus?"  Quis  negat?  (.'.,  F*7k,  v.  30,  92;  ''hut  he  has  suffered 
much?'"  Who  denies  it  ?  At  videte  hominis  intolerabilem  audaciam! 
C,  7)o??i.,  44,  115;  well,  hut  see  the  felloiv's  insufferahle  audacity!  At 
vobis  male  sit !  Cat.,  hi.  13 ;  and  ill  luck  to  you  I 

Notes. — 1.  Ast  is  the  archaic  form  of  at,  ^nd  is  found  occasionally  in  Cicero,  de 
Leg.  and  ad  Alt.,  but  more  often  in  the  poets  and  the  later  archaists. 

2.  At  is  used  in  anaphora,  and  also,  especially  in  the  poets,  in  continuing  the  narra- 
tive. Noteworthy  is  its  use  after  conditional  sentences  (in  Cicero  only  after  negatives, 
never  in  Sallust),  where  it  is  frequently  strengthened  by  certS,  tamen,  saltem:  sl 
minus  supplicio  adfici,  at  ctistodiri  oportebat,  C,  Terr.,  v.  27,  C9. 

489.  Atqui  {Imt  at  any  rate,  hut  for  all  that)  is  still 
stronger  than  at,  and  is  used  chiefly  in  argument. 

Vix  crSdibile.  AtquI  sic  habet,  11. ,  ^S".,  i.  9,  52  ;  scarce  credible.  But 
for  all  that,  'tis  so. 

Notes.— 1.  Atquin  is  occasional  in  early  Latin,  and  even  in  Cicero. 
2.  At  seems  sometimes  to  be  used  for  atqul.    C,  Tusc,  iii.  9, 19. 

490.  Tamen  (literally,  even  thus),  nevertheless,  is  often 
combined  with  at,  verum,  sed. 


308  COORDINATION. 

It  is  commonly  prepositive,  unless  a  particular  word  is  to 
be  made  emphatic. 

Nattiram  expelles  furca,  tamen  usque  recurret,  H.,  Ep.,  i.  lo,  24  ;  you 
may  drive  out  Dame  Nature  with  a  pitchfork,  for  all  that  she  ivill  ever 
he  returning.  Domitius  nulla  quidem  arte  sed  Lating  tamen  dicebat,  C, 
Br.,u.  77,267(485). 

Remark. — Nihilominus  (?iothing  the  less),  nevertheless,  is  used  like 
tamen,  by  which  it  is  occasionally  strengthened. 

491.  Ceterum, /or  the  rest,  is  used  by  the  Historians  as  an 
adversative  particle. 

Duo  imperatores,  ipsi  par6s  c6terum  opibus  disparibus,  S.,  Tug.,  52,  1  ; 
two  commajiders,  equal  in  personal  qualities,  hut  of  unequal  resources. 

Note.— Cgterum  is  found  once  in  Terence  {Eun.,  452),  once  in  Cicero  {Q.F.,  n. 
12, 1),  otherwise  not  before  Sallust. 

Disjunctive  Sentences. 

492.  The  Disjunctive  particles  are  aut,  vel,  -ve,  sive  (seu). 

Note.— The  Disjunctive  particles  are  but  rarely  omitted,  and  then  mainly  in  con- 
trasted opposites  like  pauper  dives,  plus  minus,  and  the  like. 

493.  I.  Aut,  or,  denotes  absolute  exclusion  or  substitution. 
Vinceris  aut  vincis.  Prop.,  n.  8,  8  ;  you  are  conquered  or  conquering. 

2.  Aut  is  often  corrective  =  or  at  least,  at  most,  rather 
(aut  saltern,  aut  potius). 

Cuncti  aut  magna  pars  fidem  mutavissent,  S.,  Itig.,  56,  5  ;  all,  or  at  least 
a  great  part,  would  have  changed  their  allegia7ice.  Duo  aut  summum 
trgs  iuvengs,  L.,  xxxni.  5,  8  ;  tdvo,  or  at  most  three,  youths. 

3.  Aut — aut,  either — or. 

Quaedam  terrae  partes  aut  frigore  rigent  aut  tiruntur  calore,  Cf.  C, 
Tusc,  I.  28,  08  ;  some  parts  of  the  earth  are  either  frozen  with  cold  or 
burnt  with  heat.  Aut  dJc  aut  accipe  calcem,  Juv.,  in.  295  ;  either  speak 
or  take  a  kick. 

Notes.— 1 .  The  use  of  aut  to  carry  on  a  preceding  negative  is  found  first  in  Cicero, 
but  becomes  more  common  later  :  nSmS  tribunos  aut  plebem  timSbat,  L-.  in- 16, 4. 

2.  Aut  is  sometimes  equivalent  io  2X(rtlij— partly  in  Tacitus  : 
Eausta  aut  obruta  Campaniae  5ra,  //.,  i.  2. 

3.  On  aut  ill  interrogative  sentences,  see  458,  n.4. 

494.  T.  Vel  (literally,  you  may  choose)  gives  a  choice, 
often  with  etiam,  even,  potius,  rather. 


co5rdin"ation-.  309 

Ego  vel  Cluvi§nus,  Juv.,  i.  80  ;  /,  or,  if  you  choose,  Cluvienus.  Per 
m§  vel  stertas  licet,  non  modo  quigscas,  C,  Ac,  11.  29,  93  ;  for  all  I  care, 
you  may  (even)  snore,  if  you  choose,  not  merely  take  your  rest  {sleep). 
Satis  vel  etiam  nimium  intilta,  C,  Fam,.,  iv.  14,  3  ;  enough,  or  even  too 
much.  Epicurus  homo  minime  malus  vel  potius  vir  optimus,  C,  Tusc,  11. 
19,  44  ;  Epicurus  (was)  a  person  hy  no  means  had,  or^  rather,  a  man  of 
excellent  character, 

2.  Vel — vel,  either — or  (whether — or). 

[Miltiades  dixit]  ponte  rescisso  regem  vel  hostium  ferro  vel  inopia  paucis 
digbus  interiturum,  Nep.,  i.  3,  4  ;  Jliltiades  said  that  if  the  bridge  ivere 
cut  the  king  ivould  perish  in  a  few  days,  whether  by  the  sivord  of  the 
enemy,  or  for  want  of  provisions. 

Notes.— 1.  Vel,  for  example,  is  rare  in  Plautus  and  Terence,  but  common  in 
Cicero,  especially  in  the  Letters. 

2.  Vel  in  the  sense  of  aut  is  rare  in  the  classical  period  (C,  Rep.,  11.  28, 50),  but  is 
more  common  later,  beginning  with  Ovid,    See  Tac,  Ann.,  i.  59. 

3.  Vel— vel  is  found  in  Plautus  occasionally  in  the  sense  us  well  us,  but  in  clas- 
sical Latin  is  rigidly  distinguished  from  et— et. 

4.  Aut  is  not  uncommonly  subdivided  by  vel— vel :  aut  canere  vel  voce  vel 
fidibus,  C,  Div.,  II.  59, 122. 

495.  -Ve  (enclitic)  is  a  weaker  form  of  vel,  and  in  Cicero 
is  used  principally  with  numerals,  in  the  sense  at  most^  or 
with  words  from  the  same  stem  or  of  similar  formation. 

Bis  terve,  C,  Fam.,  n.  i,  1  ;  twice  or  at  most  thrice  (bis  terque,  twice 
and  indeed  as  much  as  thrice,  if  not  more). 

car  timeam  dubitemve  locum  defendere?  Juv.,  i.  103  ;  ivhy  shoidd  I 
fear  or  hesitate  to  maintain  my  position  9  Aliquid  faciendi  n5n  faciendive 
ratio,  C,  Inv.,  11.  9,  31  ;  the  method  of  doing  something  or  not  doing  it. 

Notes.— 1.  In  early  I>atin  ve  is  more  often  copulative  than  adversative. 
2.  Ve— ve  is  poetical  only. 

496.  I.  Sive  (seu),  if  you  dioose,  gives  a  choice  hetween 
two  designations  of  the  same  object. 

TJrbem  matri  seu  novercae  relinquit,  L.,  i.  3,  3  ;  he  leaves  the  city  to  his 
mother  or  {if  it  seems  more  likely)  to  his  step-mother. 

2.  Slve — slve  (seu — seu),  wJiether — or  (indifference). 

Sive  medicum  adhibueris  slve  non  adhibueris  non  convalesces,  C,  Fat., 

12,  29  ;  whether  you  employ  a  physician,  or  do  not  employ  (one),  you 
will  not  get  well.  Seu  visa  est  catulis  cerva  fidelibus  seu  rupit  teretes 
Marsus  aper  plagas,  H.,  0.,\.  i,  27  ;  ivhether  a  doe  hath  appeared  to  the 
faitliful  hounds,  or  a  Marsian  boar  hath  burst  the  tightly -twisted  toils. 

Notes.— 1.  Single  sive  (=  or)  iy  not  found  in  Plautus  or  Terence  ( Cf.  Artd.,  190), 
but  it  occurs  in  Lucretius,  Lucilius,  and  is  common  ia  Cicero.    Caesar  and  Sai.- 


310  COORDINATIO:^^. 

LUST,  however,  do  not  use  it,  and  It  is  rare  in  the  Poets.    In  the  sense  of  give— Sive  it 
is  found  occasionally  in  poetry  ;  but  in  prose  only  three  times  in  Tacitus. 

2.  Sive-  sive  is  not  found  in  Terence,  but  from  Cicero  on  becomes  common. 

3.  No  distinction  seems  possible  between  sive  and  seu. 

497.  An  is  used  in  the  sense  of  or  not  uncommonly  in  Cicero, 
especially  in  the  Letters;  occasionally  in  Livy,  and  frequently  in  Taci- 
tus.    Elsewhere  it  is  rare.     See  457. 

Tiberius  casu  an  manibus  [Haterii]  impeditus  prociderat,  Tac,  Ann.^ 
I.  13,  7  ;  Tiberius  had  fallen  forward,  either  hy  chance  or  tripped  by 
Haterius'  hands. 

Causal  and  Illative  Sentences. 

498.  A.  The  Causal  particles  are  nam,  enim,  namque,  and 
etenim,  for. 

Nam  is  put  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  ;  enim  is  post-positive 
(484,  R.)  :  namque  and  etenim  are  commonly  put  in  the  first  place. 

Sensiis  mirifice  conlocati  sunt ;  nam  oculi  tamquam  speculatores  altissi- 
mum  locum  obtinent,  C,  N.D.,  11.  56,  140  ;  the  senses  are  admirnbly 
situated;  for  the  eyes,  like  watchmen,  occupy  the  higltest  post.  PiscSs 
5va  relinquunt,  facile  enim  ilia  aqua  sustinentur,  C,  N.D.,  11.  51,  129  ; 
fLsh  leave  their  eggs,  for  tJiey  are  easily  kept  alive  by  the  water.  [Themi^ 
stoclgs]  muros  Athenignsium  restituit  suo  periculo ;  namque  Lacedaemonii 
prohibere  conati  sunt,  Nep.,  ii.  6,  2  ;  Themistocles  restored  the  walls  of 
Athens  with  risk  to  himself;  for  the  Lacedaemonia7is  endeavored  to 
prevent  it. 

Notes.  1.  The  Augustan  poets  post[X)ne  both  nam  and  namque  according  to  the 
requirements  of  the  metre,  and  in  prose,  beginning  with  Livy,  namque  is  found  some- 
times in  the  second  place,  but  more  often  in  Livy  than  later. 

In  early  Latin  enim  is  often  first  in  the  sentence  ;  etenim  is  postponed  in  prose 
only  in  the  elder  Pliny  and  Apuleius  ;  iu  the  poets,  not  uncommonly,  so  in  Afranius, 
TiBULi.us,  PROPERTiUi^,  and  Horace. 

2.  These  particles  are  originally  asseverative,  and  are  often  used  not  only  to  furnish 
a  reason,  but  also  to  give  an  explanation  or  illustration  {as  for  ifistarice).  Quid  enim 
agasi  vchat,  for  insiance,  can  you  do?  This  is  especially  true  of  enim,  hut  is  also 
connnon  enough  with  nam  (n.  3),  and  a  broad  difference  between  nam  snid  enim 
(which  is  of  common  origin  with  nam)  cannot  be  proved.  Etenim  is  often  used  to 
carry  on  the  argument,  and  gives  an  additional  ground. 

3.  The  asseverative  forco  of  nam  is  retained  in  conversational  style  occasionally, 
even  in  Cicero  ( Yerr.,  i.  51, 133).  Enim  is  almost  wholly  asseverative  in  Pi-auti:s  and 
Terence.  Namque  is  very  rare  in  Plauti:s  and  Terence,  and  is  found  before  vowels 
only.  In  classical  Latin  it  is  also  rare,  and  found  usually  before  vowels.  With  Livy  it 
comes  into  general  use  before  vowels  and  consonants  equally  Etenim  is  found  l)ut  once 
in  Pi.AUTUs  {Am.,  26,  an  interpolation)  and  four  times  in  Terence  ;  in  post-classical 
Latin  also  it  is  not  common,  but  it  is  very  frequent  in  classical  Latin,  especially  in  Cicero. 

4.  Noteworthy  is  the  use  of  nam,  in  passing  over  a  matter :  nam  quid  ego  dS 
SCtiOne  ipsa  plQra  dicam  I  (C,  O.,  1.5, 18),  which  is  especially  comincm  in  Cicero. 

5.  Nam  shows  ,111  ntruiity  for  interrogative  particles.     Hen;  it  sometimes  precedes  in 


COORDINATION^. 


311 


the  early  language  (Ter.,  Ph.,  932),  but  becomes  firmly  attached  in  the  classical  period 
in  the  forms  quisnam,  ubinam,  etc.,  which,  however,  sometimes  su£fer  tmesis  and 
transposition  in  poetry  (V.,  (r.,  4, 445). 

6.  In  atenim  (first  in  Cicero),  nempe  enim  (ante-classical  and  post-classical), 
sed  enim  (rare),  vgrumenim,  enimvgro,  verum  enimvgrO,  as  in  etenim,  the  enim 
gives  a  ground  or  an  illustration  of  the  leading  particle,  but  translation  by  an  ellipsis 
would  be  too  heavy,  and  enim  is  best  left  untranslated  : 

A.  Audi  quid  dicam.  B.  At  enim  taedet  iam  audire  eadem  miliSns,  Ter., 
Ph.,  487  ;  A.  Hear  ti'hat  I  say.  B.  But  (/  iDon't,  for)  lam  tired  qf  Iiearing  the  same 
ihmgs  a  tlKmsand  times  already. 

7.  Enim  is  used  pleonastically  after  qaia  in  early  Latin,  and  then  again  in  Petro- 
Nius  and  Gellitts  ;  also  after  ut  and  n6  in  early  Latin. 

8.  Qulppe  is  originally  interrogative.  From  this  the  causal  force  develops,  which 
is  not  uncommon  in  Cicero.  In  Sallust,  and  especially  in  Livy  and  later  writers, 
quippe  is  equal  to  enim. 

499.  B.  Illative  particles  are  itaqne,  igitur,  erg5 ;  eo,  hinc, 
inde,  ideo,  idcirco,  quocirca,  propterea,  quapropter,  proin,  pro- 
inde. 

600.  Itaque  (literally,  and  so),  therefore,  is  put  at  the  be- 
ginning of  the  sentence  by  the  best  writers,  and  is  used  of 
facts  that  follow  from  the  preceding  statement. 

Ngmo  ausus  est  Phocionem  liber  sepelire  ;  itaqne  a  servis  sepultus  est, 
Cf.  Nep.,  XIX.  4,  4;  710  free  man  dared  to  hiiry  Phocion,  and  so  he  was 
buried  hy  slaves. 

Remark. — Itaque  in  early  and  classical  Latin  has  first  place  in  a  sen- 
tence. It  is  first  postponed  by  Lucretius,  then  by  Cornificius  and 
Horace,  and  more  often  later. 

601.  IgituT,  therefore,  is  used  of  opinions  which  have  their 
natural  ground  in  the  preceding  statement ;  in  Cicero  it  is 
usually  post-positive,  in  Sallust  never. 

Mihi  non  satisfacit.  Sed  quot  homings  tot  sententiae  ;  falli  igitur  possu- 
mus,  C,  Fin.,  1.  5,  15  ;  me  it  does  not  satisfy.  But  matiy  men  many 
minds.     I  may  therefore  he  mistaken. 

Note.— In  historical  writers  igitur  is  sometimes  used  like  itaque.  Occasionally 
also  (not  in  classical  Latin),  it  seems  to  have  the  force  of  enim  (Pi>.,  Most.,  1102,  mss.). 

602.  Ergo  denotes  necessary  consequence,  and  is  used  espe- 
cially in  arguments,  with  someAvhat  more  emphasis  than  igitur. 

Negat  haeo  filiam  mg  suam  esse;  n5n  ergo  haec  mater  mea  est,  Pl., 
J5/p.,  590  ;  she  says  that  I  am  not  her  daughter,  therefore  she  is  not  my 
mother. 

Notes.— 1.  In  the  Poets  ergO  sometimes  introduces  a  strong  conclusion  in  advance 
of  the  premise  (H.,  0.,  i.  24,  5).  In  the  classical  period,  however,  its  predominant  use  is 
to  introduce  the  logical  conclusion. 


312  SUBORDINATION. 

2.  Erg5  usually  comes  first,  but  its  position  is  apt  to  vary  in  accordance  with  the 
stress  laid  upon  it. 

3.  Itaque  erg5  is  found  in  Terence  and  Livr  ;  ergo  igituT  in  Plautus, 

603.  other  Coordinating  Conjunctions  :  hinc,  hence,  is  found  not 
unfrequently  :  hinc  illae  lacrumae,  Ter.,  And.,  126.  Inde,  thence,  there- 
fore, is  rare,  and  first  in  Cicero,  but  more  common  in  later  Latin.  E5, 
therefore,  is  found  in  early  Latin,  rarely  in  Cicero  {Fam.,  vi.  20,  1), 
not  in  Caesar  or  Sallust  ;  again  in  Livy  and  later  ;  so  ideo,  07i  that 
account,  but  atque  ideo  is  found  once  in  Caesar.  Idcirco,  on  that  ac- 
count, is  rare,  but  from  the  earliest  times.  Quocirca,  on  tvhich  account, 
is  found  first  in  the  classical  period  ;  quapropter  is  found  here  and  there 
in  early  Latin,  but  more  commonly  in  the  classical  time,  rarely  later; 
propterea,  on  that  account,  is  rare,  and  belongs  to  early  Latin.  Proin, 
proinde,  accordingly,  are  employed  in  exhortations,  appeals,  and  the  like. 

Quod  praeceptum  (nosce  tS  ipsum),  quia  maius  erat  quam  ut  ab  homine 
vidergtur,  idcirco  assignatum  est  deo,  C,  Fin.,  v.  16,  44  ;  this  precept 
{knoiv  thyself),  because  it  was  too  great  to  seem  to  he  of  man,  was,  on 
that  account,  attributed  to  a  god.  Proinde  aut  exeant  aut  quiSscant,  C, 
Cat.,  II.  5, 11 ;  let  them  then  either  depart  or  be  quiet. 

SUBORDINATION. 

504.  Subordinate  sentences  are  only  extended  forms  of  the 
simple  sentence,  and  are  divided  into  Adjective  and  Substan- 
live  sentences,  according  as  they  represent  adjective  and  sub- 
stantive relations. 

This  arrangement  is  a  matter  of  convenience  merely,  and  no  attempt 
is  made  to  represent  the  development  of  the  subordinate  sentence  from 
the  codrdinate. 

505.  Adjective  sentences  express  an  attribute  of  the  sub- 
ject in  an  expanded  form. 

Uxor  quae  bona  est,  Pl.,  Merc,  812  (634)  =  uxor  bona. 

606.  Substantive  sentences  are  introduced  by  particles, 
which  correspond  in  their  origin  and  use  to  the  Oblique 
Cases,  Accusative  and  Ablative. 

These  two  cases  furnish  the  mass  of  adverbial  relations,  and  hence 
we  make  a  subdivision  for  this  class,  and  the  distribution  of  the  subor- 
dinate sentence  appears  as  follows  : 

507.  A.         Substantive  sentences. 
I.  Object  sentences. 


SUBORDIKATIOIf.  313 

II.  Adverbial  sentences  : 

1.  Of  Cause.     (Causal.) 

2.  Of  Design  and  Tendency.     (Final  and 

Consecutive. ) 

3.  Of  Time.     (Temporal.) 

4.  Of  Condition  and  Concession.     (Condi- 

tional and  Concessive.) 
B.         Adjective  sentences.     (Relative.) 

Moods  in   Subordinate  Sentences. 

508.  I.  Final  and  Consecutive  Clauses  always  take  the 
Subjunctive.  Others  vary  according  to  their  conception. 
Especially  important  are  the  changes  produced  by  Oratio 
Obllqua. 

2.  Oratio  Obliqua,  or  Indirect  Discourse,  is  opposed  to 
Oratio  Recta,  or  Direct  Discourse,  and  gives  the  main  drift 
of  a  speech  and  not  the  exact  words.  Oratio  Obliqua,  proper, 
depends  on  some  Verb  of  Saying  or  Thinking  expressed  or 
implied,  the  Principal  Declarative  Clauses  being  put  in  the 
Infinitive,  the  Dependent  in  the  Subjunctive. 

Socrates  dicere  solgbat : 

0.  R.  Omngs  in  eo  quod  sciunt  satis  sunt  gloquentSs. 

Socrates  used  to  say :  ^'AIl  men  are  eloquent  enough  in  ivhat 

they  UNDERSTAND." 

6.  0.  Omngs  in  eo  quod  scirent  satis  esse  gloquentgs,  C,  Or.,  i.  14,  G8. 
Socrates  used  to  say  that  all  men  were  eloquent  enough  in  what 

they  UNDERSTOOD. 

3.  The  oblique  relation  may  be  confined  to  a  dependent 
clause  and  not  extend  to  the  whole  sentence.  This  may  be 
called  Partial  Obliquity. 

6.  E.  Ifova  nupta  dicit :  Fleo  quod  ire  necesse  est. 

The  hride  says :  I  weep  because  I  must  needs  go. 
6.  0.  Nova  nupta  dicit  sg  flgre  quod  ire  necesse  sit. 

The  hride  says  that  she  weeps  because  she  must  needs  go. 
6.  R.  Nova  nupta  flet  quod  ire  necesse  est,  Cf.  Cat.,  lxi.  81. 

The  bride  weeps  because  she  must  go. 
P.  0.  Nova  nupta  flet  quod  ire  necesse  sit. 

Tfie  bride  is  weeping  because  '^  she  must  go  "  (quoth  she). 


314  SEQUENCE   OF   TENSES. 

4.  Akin  to  0.  0.  is  the  so-called  Attraction  of  Mood,  by 
which  clauses  originally  Indicative  are  put  in  the  Subjunc- 
tive because  they  depend  on  Infinitives  or  Subjunctives. 
(663.) 

Non  dubito  quin  nova  ntipta  fleat  quod  ire  necesse  sit.  /  do  not  doubt 
that  the  hride  is  weepirig  because  she  must  go. 

Remark. — The  full  discussion  of  O.  0.  must,  of  course,  be  reserved 
for  a  later  period.     See  648. 


SEQUENCE    OF    TENSES. 

609.  I.  In  those  dependent  sentences  which  require  the 
Subjunctive,  the  choice  of  the  tenses  of  the  dependent  clause 
is  determined  largely  by  the  time  of  the  leading  or  principal 
clause,  so  that  Principal  Tenses  are  ordinarily  followed  by 
Principal  Tenses  ;  Historical,  by  Historical. 

Note.— As  the  subordinate  sentence  arose  out  of  the  coordinate,  hypotaxis  out  of 
parataxis,  the  tenses  of  the  Subjv.  had  originally  an  independent  value,  and  the  asso- 
ciation was  simply  the  natural  association  of  time.  But  in  some  classes  of  sentences  a 
certain  mechanical  levelling  has  taken  place,  as  in  the  Final  sentence  ;  and  in  others, 
as  in  the  Interrogative  sentence,  the  range  of  the  Subjv.  is  restricted  by  the  necessity  of 
clearness,  just  as  the  range  of  the  Inf.  is  restricted  by  the  necessity  of  clearness  (530) ; 
so  that  a  conventional  Sequence  of  Tenses  has  to  be  recognized.  To  substitute  for 
every  dependent  tense  a  corresponding  independent  tense,  and  so  do  away  with  the 
whole  doctrine  of  Sequence,  is  impossible.  At  the  same  time  it  must  be  observed  that 
the  mechanical  rule  is  often  violated  by  a  return  to  the  primitive  condition  of  para- 
taxis, and  that 

2.  This  rule  is  subject  to  the  following  modifications  : 

1.  Tense  means  time,  not  merely  tense-form,  so  that 

{a)  The  Historical  Present  may  be  conceived  according  to  its  sense 
(Past)  or  according  to  its  tense  (Present).     (229.) 

(&)  In  the  Pure  Perfect  may  be  felt  the  past  inception  or  origin 
(Past),  or  the  present  completion  (Present).     (235,  i.) 

2.  The  effect  of  a  past  action  may  be  continued  into  the  present  or 
the  future  of  the  writer  (513). 

3.  The  leading  clause  may  itself  consist  of  a  principal  and  dependent 
clause,  and  so  give  rise  to  a  conflict  of  tenses  with  varying  Sequence 
(511,  R.  2). 

4.  An  original  Subjunctive  (467)  of  the  past  (265)  resists  levelling, 
especially  in  the  Indirect  Question. 


SEQUENCE   OF   TEIfSES. 


315 


510. 

All  forms  that  relate  ^ 
to  the  Present  and  ! 
Future  (so  especially  j 
Principal  Tenses)        J 


are  followed  by 


All  forms  that  relate  to 
the  Past  (so  especially 
Historical  Tenses) 


the  Present  Subjunctive 
(for  continued  action) ; 

the  Perfect  Subjunctive 
(for  completed  action). 

the  Imperfect  Subjunctive 
(for  continued  action); 
-  are  followed  by  ■{  the   Pluperfect   Subjunc- 
tive (for  completed  ac- 
tion). 

Remark. — The  action  which  is  completed  with  regard  to  the  lead- 
ing verb  may  be  in  itself  a  continued  action.  So  in  English:  I  do  7iot 
know  what  he  has  been  doing,  I  did  not  know  ivhat  he  had  been  doing. 
The  Latin  is  unable  to  make  this  distinction,  and  accordingly  the 
Imperfect  Indicative  (7  ivas  doing)  is  represented  in  this  dependent 
form  by  the  Perfect  and  Pluperfect,  when  the  action  is  completed  as 
to  the  leading  verb. 

511. 

Pr.  (Pure    cognosco,  /  am  finding  out, 

OR  Hist.), 

FUT., 


cognoscam, 


Pure  Pf.,    cognovi, 
FuT.  Pf.,     cogn5ver6, 

Hist.  Pr.,    cogn5sc5, 

Impf., 
Hist.  Pf., 
Plupf., 


cognovi, 
cognoveram, 


I    shall    (try     to) 

fiiid  out, 
I  have  found    out 

(/  knoiv), 
I  shall  have  found 

out  (shall  know), 

lam  (ivas)  finding 

out, 
I  was  finding  out, 

I  found  out, 

I  had  found    out 
(I  knew), 


quid  facias, 

what  you  are  doing  ; 
quid  fgcerls, 

what  you  have  done, 
what  you  have  been 
doing  {what  you  did), 
what  you  were  doing 
ipefore). 

quid  facerSs, 

what  you  ivere  doing ; 
quid  fgcissSs, 

what  you  had  done,  what 
you  had  been  doing, 
ivhat  you  icere  doing 
{before). 


When  the  Subjunctive  is  original,  we  have  : 
c5gnosc5,  etc.,  I  am  finding  out,     |  "^^^  ^^^^^^^^ 


cSgnovI,  e/c,    I  knew. 


.quid  facergs, 


ivhat  you  are  to  do. 
ivhat  you  ivere  to  do. 
what  you  ivere  to  do. 


Principal  Tenses. 

Nihil  rgfert  postrgma  syllaba  brevis  an  longa  sit,  Cf  C,  Or.,  64,  317 
(461).     Ubii  (Caesarem)  Srant  (historical)  ut  sibi  parcat,  Caes.,  B  G.,  vi.  9, 


3l6  SEQUENCE   OF   TENSES. 

7  (546,  i).  N6m8  adeo  ferus  est  ut  non  mltSscere  possit,  H.,  Ep.,  i.  i,  39 
(552).  Nee  mea  qui  digitis  lumina  condat  erit,  Ov.,  Her.,  lo,  120  (681,  2). 
Eusticus  exspectat  dum  defluat  amnis,  H.,  Ep.,  i.  2,  43  (572).  Post  mortem 
in  morte  nihil  est  quod  metuam  mali,  Pl.,  Capt.,  741  (631,  2).  Ardeat  ipsa 
licet,  tormentis  gaudet  amantis,  Juv.,  vi.  209  (607). 

Utrum  nescis  quam  alte  ascenderis  an  pro  nihilo  id  putas  %  C,  Earn.,  x. 
26,  3  (458).  Laudat  Africanum  Panaetius  quod  fuerit  abstinens,  C,  Off., 
II.  22,  76  (542).  Non  is  es  ut  te  pudor  umquam  a  turpitudine  revocarit, 
C,  Cat.,  I.  9,  22  (552).  Quern  mea  Calliope  laeserit  unus  ego  (sum),  Ov., 
Tr.,  II.  568  (631,  i).  Sim  licet  extremum,  sicut  sum,  missus  in  orbem,  Ov., 
Tr.,  IV.  9,  9  (607).  Multi  fuerunt  qui  tranquillitatem  expetentgs  a  negotiis 
publicis  s6  remSverint,  C,  Off.,  i.  20,  69  (631,  2). 

Historical  Tenses. 

Epaminondas  quaesivit  salvusne  esset  clipeus,  C,  Fin.,  11.  30,  97  (467). 
Noctu  ambulabat  in  publico  Themistocles  quod  somnum  capere  non  posset, 
C,  'lusc,  IV.  19,  44  (541).  [Athenignses]  creant  decem  praetores  qui  exer- 
citui  praeessent,  Nep.,  i.  4,  4(545).  Accidit  ut  una  nocte  omngs  Hermae 
deicerentur,  Nep.,  vii.  3,  2  (513,  r.  2).  Ad  Appi Claudi senectutem accgdgbat 
etiam  ut  caecus  esset,  C,  Cat.  31.,  6,  16  (553,  4).  Hannibal  omnia  prius- 
quam  excgderet  pugna  (erat)  expertus,  L.,  xxx.  35,  4  (577).  (Agesilaus) 
cum  ex  Aegypto  reverteretur  dgcgssit,  Nep.,  xvii.  8,  6  (585). 

Tanta  opibus  Etruria  erat  ut  iam  non  terras  solum  sed  mare  etiam  fama 
nominis  sui  implgsset,  L.,  i.  2,  5  (521,  r.  i).  Cum  primi  ordings  hostium 
concidissent,  tamen  acerrimg  reliqui  resistgbant,  Caes.,  E.G.,  vii.  62,  4 
(587).  Dglgta  (est)  Ausonum  ggns  perinde  ac  si  interneclvo  bello  certasset, 
L.,  IX.  25,  9  (602). 

Original  Subjunctive  Retained. 

Ipse  docet  quid  agam  (original,  agam)  ;  fas  est  et  ab  hoste  docgri,  Ov., 
M.,  IV.  428  (219).  Quaero  a  tg  cur  ego  C.  Cornelium  non  defenderem 
(original,  dgfenderem),  C,  F«^.,  2,  5  (467).  Misgrunt  Delphos  consultum 
quid  facerent  (original,  faciamus),  Nep.,  ii.  2,  6  (518). 

Remarks. — i.  The  treatment  of  the  Hist.  Pr.  according  to  its  sense 
(past)  is  the  rule  in  classical  Latin,  especially  when  the  dependent  clause 
precedes.     But  there  are  many  exceptions. 

Agunt  gratias  quod  sibi  pepercissent ;  quod  anna  cum  hominibus  c5n- 
sanguineis  contulerint  queruntur,  Caes.,  B.  C,  i.  74,  2;  tliey  return 
thanks  to  them  for  having  spared  them,  and  complain  that  they  had 
crossed  swords  ivith  kinsmen. 

2.  Noteworthy  is  the  shift  from  the  primary  to  the  secondary  sequence; 
this  is  mostly  confined  to  clauses  of  double  dependence,  i.e.,  where  one 
subordinate  clause  is  itself  principal  to  a  second  subordinate  clause. 


SEQUENCE   OF   TEN^SES.  31/ 

Here  the  first  has  usually  the  primary,  the  second  the  secondary  se- 
quence. 

Rogat  ut  curat  quod  dixisset,  C,  Quinct.,  5, 18  ;  lie  asks  him  to  attend 
to  what  he  had  said  (he  would). 

So  of  authors : 

[Chrysippus]  disputat  aethera  esse  eum  quem  homings  lovem  appellarent, 
C,  N.D.,  I,  15,  40  ;  Chrysippus  maintains  that  to  be  aether  which  men 
call  Jove. 

3.  The  Pure  Pf.  is  usually  treated  as  a  Hist.  Pf .  in  the  matter  of 
sequence  : 

Quae  subsidia  habgrgs  et  habgre  possgs,  exposui,  Q.  Cicero,  4,  13  ;  what 
supports  you  have  or  can  have  I  have  set  forth. 

4.  The  reverse  usage,  when  an  Hist.  Pf.  is  followed  by  a  primary 
Subjv.,  is  not  common.  Many  of  those  cited  from  Cicero  are  from  the 
Letters,  where  the  shift  of  tense  might  be  influenced  by  the  letter-tense 
principle  (252). 

Sed  qu5  consilio  redierim,  initio audistis,  post  estis  experti,  C,  Ph.,  x.  4,  8. 
Quis  miles  fuit,  qui  Brundisii  illam  non  videriti  C,  Ph.,  11.  25,  61.  (The 
context  shows  that  fuit  cannot  be  Pure  Pf.) 

612.  Sequence  of  Tenses  in  Sentences  of  Design. — Seu- 
tences  of  Design  have,  as  a  rule,  only  the  Present  and  Im- 
perfect Subjunctive.  The  Roman  keeps  the  purpose  and 
the  process,  rather  than  the  attainment,  in  view. 


PR., 

edunt, 

they  are  eating, 

Pure  Pf., 

gdgrunt, 

thsy  have  eaten. 

ut  vivant, 

FUT., 

edent, 

they  ivill  eat. 

'  that  they  may  live  (to 

FuT.  Pf., 

gderint, 

they  will  have  eaten, 

live). 

Impf., 

edgbant, 

they  were  eating, 

ut  viverent, 

Plupp., 

gderant, 

they  had  eaten, 

y  that  they  might  live  (to 

Hist.  Pf., 

gderunt, 

they  ate. 

live). 

Spectatum  veniunt,  veniunt  spectentur  ut  ipsae,  Ov.,  A. A.,  i.  99  (435). 
Sed  precor  ut  possim  ttitius  esse  miser,  O v. ,  Tr. ,  v.  2,  78  (424).  Gallinae  pen- 
nis  fovent  pullos  ng  frigore  laedantur,  Cf.  C,  N.D.,  11.  52, 129  (545).  Legem 
brevem  esse  oportet  quo  facilius  ab  imperitis  teneatur,  Sen.,  E.M.,  94,  38 
(545).  Mg  praemisit  domum  haec  ut nuntiem  uxori  suae,  Pl,,  Am.,  195 ;  he 
has  sent  me  home  ahead  of  him,  to  take  the  news  to  his  wife.  Oculos 
ecfodiam  tibi  ng  mg  observare  possis,  Pl.,  Aid.,  53;  Twill  gouge  out  your 
eyes  for  you,  to  make  it  impossible  for  you  to  imtch  me. 

[Laelius]  venigbat  ad  cgnam  ut  satiaret  dgsideria  naturae,  C,  Fin.,  11. 
8,  25  ;  Laelius  used  to  go  to  table,  to  satisfy  the  cravings  of  nature. 
(Phagthon)  optavit  ut  in  currum  patris  tollergtur,  C,  Off.,  in.  25,  94  (546,  i). 


31 8  SEQUENCE   OF   TENSES. 

Remark. — Parenthetical  final  sentences  like  nt  ita  dicam,  nS  errStis, 
are  really  dependent  on  the  thought  or  utterance  of  the  speaker,  and 
have  the  present  sequence  everywhere. 

N6  longior  sim,  val6,  C,  Fain.,  xv.  19;  7iof  to  be  tedious,  farewell! 
NS  tamen  ignores,  virtute  Neronis  Armenius  cecidit,  II.,  Ep.,  i.  12,  25  ;  hut 
that  you  may  not  fail  to  know  it,  it  ivas  hy  the  valor  of  Nero  that  the 
Armenian  fell. 

Notes.— 1.  The  Pf.  and  Plupf.  Subjv.  are  sometimes  found  in  sentences  of  Design, 
chietiy  in  earlier  and  later  Latin  (no  example  is  cited  from  Caesau  or  Sallust),  when 
stress  is  laid  on  completion,  or  when  an  element  of  Hope  or  Fear  comes  in  :  Ut  SiC 
dixerim  (first  found  in  Quint.),  if  I  may  be  allowed  to  use  the  exjjression. 

Affirmare  andeo  me  omui  ope  adnisurmn  esse  nS  frustra  vos  hanc  spem  dS 
me  conceperitis,  L.,  xliv.  22  ;  I  dare  assure  you  that  I  will  strain  every  nerve  to  keep 
you  from  having  conceived  this  hope  of  me  in  rain.  (After  a  past  tense,  ne  concepis- 
setis.)  Nunc  agendum  est  nS  frustra  oppressum  esse  Antonium  gavisi  simus, 
C,  ad  Br.,  i.  4, 3.  Hie  obsistam,  ne  imprudent!  hue  ea  se  subrSpsit  (131, 4,  t>.  2) 
mihi,  Pl.,  M.G.,  333.  EfFecit  ne  cuius  alterius  sacrilegium  res  publica  quam 
Neronis  sgnsisset,  Tac,  Agr.,  6. 

Wlien  the  tense  is  comix)und,  the  participle  is  usually  to  be  considered  as  a  mere 
adjective. 

Patronus  extiti  uti  n5  [Sex.  Roscius]  omnino  dgsertus  esset,  C,  Bosc.Am.,  2, 
5  ;  where  d§sertUS  =  solus. 

2.  Occasional  apparent  exceptions  are  to  be  explained  in  various  ways.  Thus,  in  C, 
Sest.,  14, 32 :  etiamne  Sdicere  audeas  n§  maererent,  we  have  a  repetition  as  an 
indignant  question  of  the  precetling  statement :  gdicunt  (Hist.  Pr.)  duO  COnsulSs  ut 
ad  suum  vestitum  senatores  redirent. 

513.  Exceptional  Sequence  of  Tenses : — Sentences  of  Re- 
sult {Consecutive  Sentences).  In  Sentences  of  Result,  the 
Present  Subjunctive  is  used  after  Past  Tenses  to  denote  the 
continuance  into  the  Present,  the  Perfect  Subjunctive  to 
imply  final  result.  This  Perfect  Subjunctive  may  represent 
either  the  Pure  Perfect  or  Aorist,  the  latter  especially  with 
the  negative  :  the  action  happened  once  for  all  or  not  at  all. 

Present  Tense  : 

[Siciliam  VerrSs]  per  triennium  ita  vexavit  ut  ea  restitui  in  antiquum 
statum  ntillo  modo  possit,  C,  Yerr.,  I.  4, 12  ;  Verres  so  harried  Sicily  for 
three  years  as  to  make  it  ntierhj  impossible  for  if  to  be  restored  to  its 
original  condition.  In  [LucullS]  tanta  prudentia  fuit  ut  hodiS  stet  Asia, 
C,  Ac,  II.  I,  3  ;  Lucullus's  forethought  was  so  great  that  Asia  sta7ids 
firm  to-day. 

Perfect  Tense  (Pure)  : 

(MurSna)  Asiam  sic  obiit  ut  in  ea  neque  avSritiae  neque  luxuriae  vSstl- 
gium  rellquerit,  C,  Mur.,  9,  20  ;  Murena  so  administered  Asia  as  not  to 
have  (that  he  has  not)  left  in  it  a  trace  either  of  greed  or  debauchery 
(there  is  no  trace  there), 


SEQUENCE   OF  TEKSES.  319 

Perfect  Tense  (Aorist) .: 

Equites  hostium  asriter  cum  equitatu  nostr5  conflixerunt,  tamen  ut  nostri 
eosin  silvas  collgsque  compulerint,  Caes.,  B.G.,  v.  15,  1  ;  the  cavalry  of 
the  enemy  engaged  the  cavalry  on  our  side  briskly,  and  yet  {the  upsliot 
was  that)  our  men  forced  them  into  the  woods  and  hills.  Neque  vgro  tarn 
remisso  ac  languido  animo  quisquam  omnium  fuit  qui  ea  nocte  conquiSverit, 
Caes.,  B.C.,  i.  21,  5;  and  indeed  there  was  no  one  at  all  of  so  slack  and 
indifferent  a  temper  as  to  take  {a  wink  of)  sleep  that  night. 

Remarks. — i.  After  a  Pure  Pf.,  if  the  dependent  clause  is  affirma- 
tive, CiCEiio  prefers  the  Impf.  (he  has  but  iive  cases  of  Pf.);  if  negative 
the  Pf.  (in  the  proportion  2  to  1). 

2.  After  accidit,  contigit,  and  other  verbs  of  Happening,  the  Impf.  is 
always  used,  the  result  being  already  emphasized  in  the  Indie,  form. 

Accidit  ut  una  nocte  omngs  Hermae  deicerentur,  Nep.,  vii.,  3,  3  ;  it 
happened  that  in  one  night  all  the  Hermae  were  thrown  down. 

Notes.— 1.  The  use  of  the  Aoristic  Pf.  Siibjv.  after  an  Aoristic  Pf.  Indie,  seems  to 
have  been  an  attempt  of  the  Romans  to  replace  the  consecutive  Aor.  Inf.  in  Greek  with 
wffT€.  Examples  are  not  found  in  early  Latin,  are  rare  in  Cicero,  very  rare  in  Caesau, 
perhaps  not  at  all  in  Sallust  ;  more  frequent  in  Livy,  common  in  Tacitus,  very  com- 
mon in  Nepos  and  Suetonius,  etc. 

2.  In  two  coordinated  clauses  depending  on  the  same  verb  we  find  the  tenses  occa- 
sionally varying.  The  Pf.  in  the  first  subordinate,  with  Impf.  in  the  second,  is  doubtful 
in  any  case,  rare  in  Cicero,  and  is  cited  but  once  each  from  Caesar  (B.  G.,  vii.  17)  and 
Velleius  (i.  9, 1).  The  reverse  construction,  Impf.  followed  by  Pf .,  is  more  common, 
but  found  first  (though  rarely)  in  Livy,  and  belongs  mainly  to  late  Latin. 

ZSno  nuUo  modo  is  erat  qui  nervos  virtutis  inciderit,  sed  contra  qui  omnia 
in  virtute  poneret,  C,  Ac,  i.  10, 35.  Here  the  shift  is  due  to  the  negative.  TantUS 
pavor  omnes  occupavit  ut  non  modo  alius  quisquam  arma  caperet-  sed  etiam 
ipse  r§X  perfugerit,  L.,  xxiv.  40,  12.  Here  the  tenses  depend  on  the  ideas  of  continu- 
ance and  completion,  of  the  many  and  the  single  (non  capi6bant^r6x  perfugit). 

3.  In  relative  sentences  of  coincident  action  with  causal  coloring,  either  the  coinci- 
dence is  retained,  or  a  principal  clause  in  the  Past  is  followed  by  the  Impf.  Subjunctive. 

Tu  humanissimS  fScisti  qui  mg  certiorem  fgceris,  c.,Att.,xni.43,l.  Cum 
hoc  Pompeius  vehementer  egit  cum  diceret,  etc.,  c,  Att.,  11. 22, 2.  Videor  mihi 
gratum  fecisse  Siculis,  quod  eorum  iniurias  sim  persecutus,  C,  Verr.,  u.  6, 15 

(518,  R.). 

Representation  of  the  Subjunctive  in  the  Future  and 
Future  Perfect  Tenses. 

514.  The  Subjunctive  has  no  Future  or  Future  Perfect, 
which  are  represented  either  by  the  other  Subjunctives,  or 
in  the  Active  by  the  Subjunctive  of  the  Periphrastic  Conju- 
gation. 

Rule  I. — (a)  After  a  Future  or  Future  Perfect  Tense,  the 
Future  relation  (contemporary  with  the  leading  Future)  is 


320 


SEQUENCE   OF  TENSES. 


represented  by  the  Present  Subjunctive ;  the  Future  Perfect 
(prior  to  the  leading  Future)  by  the  Perfect  Subjunctive, 
according  to  the  rule. 


Cognoscam, 
/  shall  (try  to)  find  out, 

CognoverS, 
/  shall  have  found  out  (shall  know), 


quid  facias,  what  you  are  doing 
(will  be  doing). 
^quid  fgceris,  what  you  have  done 
(will  have  done). 


{V)  But  whenever  the  dependent  Future  is  subsequent  to 
the  leading  Future,  the  Periphrastic  Tense  must  be  employed. 


Cdgnoscam, 

I  shall  (try  to)  find  out, 

Cognover5, 

/  shall  have  found  out  (shall  know), 


quid  facturus  sis, 
"what  you  are  gomy  to  do  (what 
you  will  do). 


[Considerabimus],  [we  shall  consider'] . 

A.  Quid  fgcerit  aut  quid  ipsi  acciderit  aut  quid  dixerit,  ivhat  he  has 
done,  or  ivhat  has  happened  to  him,  or  what  he  has  said. 

B.  Aut  quid  faciat,  quid  ipsi  accidat,  quid  dicat,  or,  ivhat  he  is  doing, 
what  is  happening  to  him,  ivhat  he  is  saying. 

C.  A.ut  quid  facturus  sit,  quid  ipsi  casurum  sit,  qua  sit  usurus  oratione, 
C,  Inv.,  I.  25,  36;  or  what  he  is  going  to  do  (will  do),  what  is  going  to 
(will)  happen  to  him,  ivhat  plea  he  is  going  to  employ  (will  employ). 

Tti  quid  sis  acturus  pergratum  erit  si  ad  mg  scripseris,  C,  Fam. ,  ix.  2,  5 ; 
it  will  he  a  great  favor  if  you  will  write  to  me  what  you  are  going 
to  do. 


Remark, — In  some  of  these  forms  ambiguity  is  unavoidable, 
may  represent  a  real  Perfect,  B  a  real  Present. 


So  A 


515.  EuLE  II. — After  the  other  tenses,  the  Future  relation 
is  expressed  by  the  Active  Periphrastic  Subjunctive,  Present 
or  Imperfect. 


C5gnQsc9, 
I  am  finding  out, 

COgnovI, 
I  have  found  out  (know), 

C5gnQsc€bam, 
I  was  trying  to  find  out, 

Cogii5veram, 
/  had  found  out, 


quid  facturus  sis  (irhat  you   are  going  to 
do),  what  you  will  do. 


quid  facturus  ess6s  {what  you  were  going  to 
do),  what  you  would  do. 


SEQUEN'CE   OF   TENSES.  321 

Tarn  ea  rgs  est  facilis  ut  innumerabilis  natura  mundos  eflfectura  sit,  effi- 
ciat,  elfecerit,  Cf.  C,  N.D.,  i.  21,  53;  the  thing  is  so  easy  that  nature 
will  make,  is  making,  has  made,  innumerable  ivorlds. 

Incertum  est  quam  longa  cuiusque  nostrum  vita  futura  sit,  C,  Verr.,  i. 
58,  153  ;  it  is  uncertain  hoiv  long  the  life  of  each  one  of  us  is  goi?ig  to 
be  (will  be). 

Antea  dubitabam  venturaene  essent  legiongs  ;  nunc  mih!  non  est  dubium 
quin  venturae  non  sint,  C,  Fam.,  11.  17,  5 ;  before,  I  was  doiMful  whether 
the  legions  tvould  come  (or  no) ;  7iow  I  have  no  doubt  that  they  will  not 
come. 

Remarks. — i.  The  Pf.  and  Plupf.  Subjv.  of  the  Periphrastic  are  used 
only  to  represent  the  Apodosis  of  an  Unreal  Conditional  Sentence. 

C6gn6sc5,  Cognovi,  quid  facturus  fueris,       (whatyou  have  been 

lam  finding  out,    I  have  found  out    what  you  ■would  have  done,  going  to  do). 

(know), 

Cognoscgbam,  Cognoveram,  [quid  facttirus  fuiss6s,  {what  you  had  been 
I  was  trying  to  find  out,  I  had  found  out,    xohat  you  would  have  going  to  do). 

done,  rare.] 

2.  There  is  no  Periphrastic  for  the  Fut.  Pf.  active,  no  Periphrastic 
for  passive  and  Supineless  Verbs.  The  Grammars  make  up  a  Peri- 
phrastic for  all  these  from  futurum  sit,  esset  ut,  as  : 

-_-    j-u-i.-      -rx-  -i    I  Mt  redderit,  that  he  will  have  returned. 

Non  dubitoquin  futurum  sit,  J     ^  ^  .,   . ,      .„     . 

I  do  not  doubt  '^^  '**'''  i  ut  maereat,  that  he  will  grieve. 

[  ut  necStur,  that  he  will  be  killed. 

But  there  is  no  warrant  in  actual  usage. 

For  the  dependent  Fut.  Pf.  act.  Terence  says  {Hec,  618)  :  Tua  rgfert  nil  utrum 
illaec  fgcerint  quand5  haec  aberit. 

For  the  dependent  Fut.  Pf.  pass.  Cicebo  says  (Fam.,yi.  12, 3) :  Nec  dubito  quin 
C5nfecta  r6s  futura  sit,  nor  do  I  doubt  but  the  matter  will  have  been  settled. 

In  the  absence  of  the  Periphrastic  forms,  use  the  proper  tenses  of  posse.      (248,  R.) 

3.  When  the  preceding  verb  has  a  future  character  (Fear,  Hope, 
Power,  Will,  and  the  like),  the  simple  Subjv.  is  sufficient. 

Gain,  nisi  perfrSgerint  mtinitiongs,  d§  omni  salute  dSspgrant ;  RSmanI,  si 
rem  obtinuerint,  finem  laborum  omnium  exspectant,  Caes.,  b.  G.,  vn.  85, 3 ;  the 
Gauls  despair  of  all  safety  unless  they  break  through  {shall  have  broken  through)  the 
fortifications ;  the  Romans  lookfonvard  to  an  end  of  all  their  toils,  if  they  hold  their 
own  {shall  have  held).  Vgngrunt  querentSs  nee  spem  uUam  esse  resistendi,  nisi 
praesidium  Romanus  misisset,  I-^-,  xxxiv.  n,  2  ;  they  came  with  the  complaint  that 
there  was  no  hope  of  resistance  unless  the  Roman  sent  a  force  to  protect  them.  Intent! 
quando  hostis  inprudentia  rueret,  Tac,  H.,  u.  34. 

Of  cour!?e  the  Deliberative  Subjunctive  is  future  :  Examples,  265. 

Et  certamen  habentlSti,  quae  vivasequatur  coniugium,  Prop.,  iv.  12, 19  (M.). 

616.  Sequence  of  Tenses  in  Oratio  Obliqua  :  In  Oratio  Obli- 
qua  and  kindred  constructions,  the  attraction  of  tenses  ap- 
31 


322  SEQUENCE    OF   TENSES. 

plies  also  to  the  representatives  of  the  Future  and  Future 
Perfect  Subjunctive. 

In  [clava]  erat  scriptum  nisi  domum  revertergtur  sg  capitis  eum  damna- 
ttiros,  Nep.,  IV.  3,  4;  it  was  written  on  the  staff  that  if  he  did  not  re- 
turn home,  they  woidd  condemn  him  to  death.  (Oratio  Egcta :  nisi 
domum  revertgris,  tg  capitis  damnabimus,  imless  you  (shall)  return  home, 
we  ivill  condemn  you  to  death).  Pythia  praecgpit  ut  Miltiadem  sibi  im- 
peratorem  stimerent ;  id  si  fgcissent  (0.  R.,  fgceritis)  incepta  prospera  futura 
(0.  R.,  erunt),  Nep.,  i.  i,  3  ;  the  Pythia  instructed  them  to  take  Miltiades 
for  their  general ;  that  if  they  did  that,  their  undertakings  would  be 
successful.  lacedaemonii,  Philippo  minitante  per  litteras  sg  omnia  quae 
conarentur  (6.  R.,  conabimini)  prohibiturum,  quaesiverunt  num  sg  esset  eti- 
am  mori  prohibiturus  (0.  R.,  prohibgbis),  C.,Tusc.,  v.  14,  42;  the  Lacedae- 
monians, when  Philip  threatened  them  hy  letter  that  he  would  prevent 
everything  they  undertook  (should  undertake),  asked  whether  he  ivas 
going  to  (would)  preveiit  them  from  dying  too. 

517.  Sequence  of  Tenses  after  the  other  Moods. — The  Im- 
perative and  the  Present  and  Perfect  Subjunctive  have  the 
Sequences  of  the  Principal  Tenses ;  the  Imperfect  and  Plu- 
perfect have  the  Sequences  of  the  Historical  Tenses. 

[Ng]  compone  comas  quia  sis  venturus  ad  illam,  Ov.,  Rem. Am.,  679;  do 
not  arrange  (your)  locks  because  (forsooth)  you  are  going  to  see  her. 
Excellentibus  ingeniis  citius  defuerit  ars  qua  civem  regant  quam  qua  hostem 
superent,  L.,  11.  43, 10;  great  geniuses  woidd  be  more  likely  to  lack  the 
skill  to  control  the  citizen  than  the  skill  to  overcome  the  enemy.  Quid 
mg  proMbgret  Epicurgum  esse,  si  probarem  quae  ille  diceret?  C,  Fin.,  i. 
8,  27;  what  ivould  preve7it  me  from  being  an  Epicurean  if  I  approved 
ivhat  he  said  (says)  ?  Turn  ego  tg  primus  hortarer  diu  pgnsitargs  quem 
potissimum  gligergs,  Plin.,  Ep.,  iv,  15,  8;  in  that  case  I  should  be  the 
first  to  exhort  you  to  iveigh  long  whom  you  shoidd  choose  above  all 
others.  Quae  vita  fuisset  Friam5  si  ab  adulgscentia  scisset  quos  gventus 
senectutis  esset  habiturus  1  C,  Div.,  11.  9,  22  ;  what  sort  of  life  would 
Priain  have  led  if  he  had  known,  from  early  manhood,  what  were  to  be 
the  closing  scenes  of  his  old  age  9 

Remarks. — i.  Of  course,  when  the  Pf.  Subjv.  represents  an  Histor- 
ical Tense,  it  takes  the  historical  Sequence  : 

Magna  culpa  Pelopis  qui  nOn  docuerit  filium  quatenus  esset  quidque 
curandum,  C,  Tusc,  i.  44,  107;  greatly  to  blame  is  Pelops  for  not  having 
taught  his  son  how  far  each  thing  was  to  be  cared  for.  Qui  scis  an  ea 
causa  mg  Odisse  adsimulaverit,  ut  cum  matre  plus  una  esset  ?  Ter.,  Hec, 
235 ;  how  do  you  knoiv  but  she  has  pretended  to  hate  me  in  order  to  he 
more  with  her  (oivn)  mother  ? 


SEQUENCE   OF   TENSES. 


323 


So  also  in  the  Conditional  proposition,  when  the  action  is  past.  For 
varying  conception,  see  C,  Off.,  iii.  24,  92. 

2.  The  Impf.  Subjv.,  being  used  in  opposition  to  the  Present,  might 
be  treated  as  a  Principal  Tense,  but  the  construction  is  less  usual  : 

Vergrer  ne  immodicam  orationem  putares  nisi  esset  generis  eius  ut  saepe 
incipere  saepe  desinere  videatur,  Plin.,  Ep.,  ix.  4,  1;  /  should  be  afraid 
of  your  thinking  the  speech  of  immoderate  length,  if  it  were  ?wt  of  snch 
kind  as  to  produce  the  effect  of  often  beginning,  often  ending.  0  ego  nS 
possim  tales  sentire  dolores  quam  mallem  in  gelidls  montibus  esse  lapis ! 
Tib.,  II.  4,  7. 

618.  Sequence  of  Tenses  after  an  Infinitive  or  Participle. 
— When  a  subordinate  clause  depends  on  an  Infinitive  or 
Participle,  Gerund  or  Supine,  the  tense  of  that  clause  follows 
the  tense  of  the  Finite  verb,  if  the  Finite  verb  is  Past ;  if  the 
Finite  verb  is  Present,  it  follows  the  tense  that  the  dependent 
verb  would  have  had,  if  it  had  been  independent. 


Dicit  s6  interrogare  (original 

interrogo), 
He  says  that  he  is  asking, 

Dicit  se  interrogasse  (original 

interrogavi), 
He  says  that  he  asked. 
Dixit  86  interrogare  (original 

interrogo), 
He  said  that  he  was  asking. 


quid  agas, 
quid  ggeris, 
quid  acturus  sis, 


quid  ageres, 
quid  ggisses, 
quid  acturus  esses, 


what  you  are  doing, 
ivhat  you  have  done, 
what  you  are  going 
to  do  (will  do). 

what  you  were  doing. 

what  you  had  done. 

what  you  were  going 

to  do  (would  do). 


Mihi  interroganti, 

ivhen  I  ask  him, 

(literally  :  to  me  asking), 


Mihl  interroganti, 

ivhen  I  asked  him 

(literally  :  to  me 


quid  agat,      tvhaf  heis  doi?ig,    f  non   re- 
quid  ggerit,    what    he     has      spondet, 
done,  <   he  gives 

quid  acturus  what  he  is  going        no  an- 
sit,  to  do  (will  do),    [    siver. 

'  quid  ageret,  what  he  tvas  do-    '' 

ing,  non   re- 

quid  ggisset,  u)  h  a  t    he     had      spondit, 
done,  \   he  gave 

quid  acturus  ^0  an- 

esset,  what  he  was  go-        swer. 

ing  to  do, 

Apud  Hypanim  fluvium  Aristoteles  ait  bestiolas  quasdam  nasci  quae  unam 
diem  vivant,  C,  Tusc,  i.  39,  94  (G50).  Satis  mihi  multa  verba  fecisse  vi- 
deor  quare  esset  hoc  bellum  necessarium,  C,  Imp.,  10,  27;  /  think  I  have 
said  enough  (to  show)  why  this  war  is  necessary.     ApellSs  pictores  eos 


324     REFLEXIVE  IK  SUBORDINATE  SENTENCES. 

peccare  dIcSbat  qui  nSn  sentirent  quid  esset  satis,  C,  Or.,  22,  73;  Apelles 
used  to  say  that  those  painters  blundered  ivho  did  not  perceive  ivhat 
was  (is)  eiiough.  Ath6niens6s  Cyrsilum  quendam  suadentem  ut  in  urbe 
mangrent  lapidibus  obrugrunt,  C,  O/f.,  in.  11,  48  (546).  Cupido  incessit 
animos  iuvenum  sciscitandi  ad  quein  eorum  regnum  Romanum  esset  ventu- 
rum,  L.,  I.  56,  10;  the  minds  of  the  young  men  were  seized  by  the  desire 
of  inquiring  to  which  of  them  the  kingdom  of  Rome  would  come. 
Miserunt  Delphos  consultum  quid  facerent,  Nep.,  ii.  2,  6  ;  they  sent  to 
Delphi  to  ask  the  oracle  what  they  should  do.     See  265. 

Remark. — Nevertheless  examples  are  not  imfrequent  where  the 
sequence  of  the  governing  verb  is  retained  :  Videor  mih!  gratum  fgcisse 
Siculis  quod  eorum  iniurias  meo  periculo  sim  persecutus,  C,  Verr.,  11.  6,  15; 
/  seem  to  have  pleased  the  Sicilians,  in  that  J  have  followed  up  their 
injuries  at  my  own  risk  (on  account  of  the  coincidence,  513,  n.  3). 

619.  Oricii7ial  Subjunctives  in  Dependence. — i.  The  Po- 
tential of  Present  or  Future  after  a  Past  tense  goes  into  the 
Past ;  the  same  is  true  of  Deliberative  Questions  (465).  On 
the  other  hand,  the  Potential  of  the  Past  must  be  retained 
even  after  a  Present  tense  (467). 

VideS  causas  esse  permultas  quae  [Titum  Roscium]  impellerent,  C,  Rose. 
Am.,  33,  92;  I  see  that  there  are  very  many  causes  which  might  have 
impelled  Titus  Roscius.    QuaerS  a  tS  cur  Gaium  CornSiium  non  dSfenderem, 

C,  Fa^.,  2,  5(467). 

2.  On  the  behavior  of  Conditional  Subjunctives  in  depend- 
ence see  597j,  R.  4. 

Remark. — The  Sequence  of  Tenses  is  not  unfrequently  deranged  by 
the  attraction  of  parenthetic  clauses  or,  especially  in  long  sentences,  by 
the  shifting  of  the  conception.  Examples  are  C,  Balb.^  i.  2  ;  Ph.,  iii. 
15,  39  ;  Ac,  II.  18,  56,  and  many  others. 

USE  OF  THE   REFLEXIVE    IN   SUBORDINATE 
SENTENCES. 

520.  In  subordinate  clauses,  the  Reflexive  is  used  with 
reference  either  to  the  subject  of  the  principal,  or  to  the 
subject  of  the  subordinate,  clause  ;  and  sometimes  first  to 
the  one  and  then  to  the  other. 

521.  The  Reflexive  is  used  of  the  principal  subject  when 
reference  is  made  to  the  thought  or  will  of  that  subject ; 
hence,  in  Infinitive  Sentences,  in  Indirect  Questions,  in  Sen- 


REFIiEXIVE   IN   SUBORDINATE   SENTENCES.  325 

tences  of  Design,  and  in  Sentences  which  partake  of  the 
Oblique  Relation. 

Sentit  animus  sS  vi  sua,  non  aliSna  movSrI,  C,  Twsc,  i.  23,  55;  the 
mind  feels  that  it  moves  by  its  own  force,  (and)  not  by  that  of  another. 
QuaesivSrunt  num  s6  esset  etiam  mori  prohibitOrus,  C,  Tusc,  v.  14,  42 
(516).  Pompgius  a  ni6  petivit  ut  sgcum  et  apud  se  essem  cottidig,  Cf.C, 
Att.,  V.  6,  1 ;  Pompey  asked  me  to  be  with  him,  and  at  his  house,  daily. 
Paetus  omngs  libros  quOs  frater  suus  reliquisset  mihi  donavit,  C,  Att.,  11.  i, 
12;  Paetus  presented  to  me  all  the  books  (as  he  said)  that  his  brother  had 
left  (quos  frater  eius  reliquerat,  would  be  the  statement  of  the  narrator). 

Remarks. — i.  Sentences  of  Tendency  and  Result  have  forms  of  is, 
when  the  subj.  is  not  the  same  as  that  of  the  leading  verb ;  otherwise 
the  Reflexive  : 

Tarquinius  sic  Servium  dlliggbat  ut  is  gius  vulg5  habgrgtur  fflius,  C, 
Pep.  II.  21,  38;  2\irquin  loved  Servius  so  that  he  ivas  commonly  consid- 
ered his  son.  But  Tanta  opibus  Etruria  erat  ut  iam  nSn  terras  solum  sed 
mare  etiam  fama  nominis  sui  implgsset,  L. ,  i.  2,  5 ;  so  great  in  means  (=  so 
powerful)  ivas  Etruria  that  she  had  already  filled  not  only  the  land, 
but  even  the  sea,  with  the  reputation  of  her  7iame. 

2.  The  Reflexive  may  refer  to  the  real  agent,  and  not  to  the  gram- 
matical subj.  of  the  principal  clause.     (309,  2.) 

A  Caesare  invltor  sib!  ut  sim  Iggatus,  C,  Att.,  11.  18,  3;  /  am  invited 
by  Caesar  {=  Caesar  invites  me)  to  be  lieutenant  to  him. 

Especially  to  be  noted  is  the  freer  use  of  suus  (309,  4).  The  other 
forms  are  employed  chiefly  in  reflexive  formulae  (309,  3),  as  sg  recipere, 
to  withdraw,  etc. 

(Rgmani)  sui  colligendi  hostibus  facultatem  (non)  relinquunt,  Caes., 
^.6^.,  III.  6,  1(309,3). 

3.  The  Reflexive  is  used  in  general  sentences,  as  one,  one's  self,  etc. 
(309,  i):  DgfSrme  est  dg  sg  ipsum  praedicare,  C,  Off.,  i.  38, 137;  it  is  un- 
seemly to  be  bragging  about  one's  self. 

With  the  Inf.  this  follows  naturally  from  420. 

4.  In  Indie,  relative  sentences,  which  are  mere  circumlocutions  (505), 
is  is  the  rule: 

SScratgs  inhonestam  sib!  crgdidit  Orationem  quam  ei  Lysias  reo  compo- 
suerat,  Quint.,  ii.  15,  30;  Socrates  believed  the  speech  which  Lysias  had 
composed  for  Mm  when  he  was  arraigned,  dishonoring  to  him. 

Sometimes,  however,  the  Reflexive  is  put  contrary  to  the  rule: 

Metellus  in  ils  urbibus  quae  ad  sg  dgfgcerant  praesidia  imp5nit,  S., 
lug.,  61, 1;  Metelhis put  garrisons  in  those  towns  ivhich  had  gone  over 
to  him  ;  regularly,  ad  eum. 

lUe  babet  quod  sibi  debgbatur,  PETR.,43, 1;  he  has  his  due;  regu- 
larly, ei. 


326     REFLEXIVE  IN  SUBORDINATE  SENTENCES. 

5.  Sometimes  the  Demonstrative  is  used  instead  of  the  Reflexivej 
because  the  nan-ator  presents  his  point  of  view: 

Solon,  quo  tiitior  vita  gius  esset,  furere  se  simulavit,  C,  Off.,  i.  30, 108; 
Solon  feigned  madness  that  his  life  'might  be  the  safer.  (The  notion  of 
Result  intrudes.)  Pompeius  ignes  fieri  prohibuit,  quo  occultior  esset  eius 
adventus,  Caes.,  B.C.,  iii.  30,  5;  Pompey  forbade  fires  to  be  kindled  in 
order  that  his  approach  might  be  the  better  concealed. 

Notes.— 1.  Occasionally,  principally  in  early  Latin,  the  Reflexive  seems  to  be  used 
witli  the  force  merely  of  a  tliird  personal  pronou'.i : 

Vitis  si  macra  erit,  sarmenta  sua  concidito  minute,  Cato,  Agr.,  37, 3. 

But  sentences  like  eum  fecisse  aiunt  quod  sibi  faciundum  fuit  (Pl.,  Poen.,  956), 
where  the  relative  clause  is  but  a  circumlocution  for  olRcium.  suom,  belong  properly 
under  11.  4.  Similarly,  C.,7/?t;.,i.  33, 55.  In  the  sentence,  Cicero  tibi  mandat,  Ut 
Aristodemo  idem  de  se  respondeas  quod  dg  fratre  suo  respondisti  (C,  Att.,  n.  7, 
5),  dS  fratre  eius  would  jar  on  account  of  the  se  to  which  it  refers. 

2.  Examples  of  Reflexives  pointing  both  ways  : 

[Romani]  legates  miserunt  qui  a  [Prusial  peterent  ne  inimicissimum  suum 
(=  Romanorum)  apud  se  (=  Prilsiam)  haberet,  Nep.,  xxm.  12,  2 ;  the  Eomans  sent 
ambassadors  to  ask  Prvsias  not  to  keep  Iheir  bUtereH  enemy  at  Jm  covrt.  Agrippa 
Atticum  flens  orabat  atque  obsecrabat  ut  s6  sibi  suisque  reservaret,  Cf.  Nep., 
XXV.  22, 2  ;  Agrippa  begged  and  conjured  Atticus  ivith  tears  to  save  himself  [Atticus] 
foi' him  [Agrippa]  and  for  his  own  family  [Atticus]. 

Hopeless  ambiguity  : 

Hergs  mens  dare  ill!  damnas  esto  omnia  sua.  Quint.,  vii.  9, 12 ;  my  heir  is  to 
give  him  all  that  is  hi^. 

3.  For  the  sake  of  clearness,  the  subj.  of  the  leading  sentence  is  not  unfrequently 
referred  to  in  the  form  of  the  Demonstrative  nistead  of  the  Reflexive  : 

(Helvgtii)  AUobrogibus  sgse  vel  persuasuros  existimabant  vel  vi  coacturos 
ut  per  suos  fings  eos  ire  paterentur,  Caes.,  b.  G.,  i.  6, 3 ;  the  Helvetians  thought  that 
they  ivoidd  jiersuade  or  force  the  Allobroges  to  let  them  [the  Helvetians]  go  through 
their  territory. 

4.  Ipse  is  always  used  in  its  proper  distinctive  sense ;  so,  when  it  represents  the 
speaker  in  0.  0.    (660.) 

Eius  and   SuT. 

522.  Alexander  morigns  anulum  suum  dederat  Perdiccae,  Nep.,  xvirr. 
2,  1;  Alexander ,\y;\\(?VL\  dying,  had  given  his  ring  to  Perdiccas. 

Perdiccas  accgperat  gius  anulum,  Perdiccas  had  received  his  ring. 

Quarg  Alexander  dgclaraverat  se  regnum  ei  commendasse,  thereby, 
Alexander  had  declared  that  he  had  committed  the  kingdom  to  him. 

Ex  quo  Perdiccas  conigcerat  eum  rggnum  sibi  commendasse,  from  this 
Perdiccas  had  gathered  that  he  had  committed  the  kingdom  to  him. 

I,x  qu5  omngs  conigcerant  eum  rggnum  ei  commendasse,  from  this,  all 
had  gathered  that  he  had  committed  the  kingdom  to  him. 

•  Perdiccas  p5stulavit  ut  sg  rggem  habgrent  cum  Alexander  Snulum  sibi 
dedisset,  Perdiccas  demanded  that  they  should  have  him  for  king,  as 
Alexander  had  given  the  ring  to  him. 

Amici  pOstulavgrunt  ut  omngs  eum  rggem  habgrent  cum  Alexander  anu- 


OBJECT  SENTENCES.  32/ 

lum  ei  dedisset,  (bis)  friends  demanded  that  all  should  Jiave  him  for 
king,  as  Alexander  had  given  the  ring  to  him.  (Lattrnann  and  Mllller.) 
Ita  sg  gesserat  Perdiccas  ut  el  rggnum  ab  Alexandre  commendargtur, 
Perdiccas  had  so  behaved  himself  that  the  hingdom  was  intrusted  to 
him  by  Alexa?ider. 

OBJECT  SENTENCES. 

523.  Verbs  of  Doing,  Perceiving,  Conceiving,  of  Think- 
ing and  Saying,  often  take  their  object  in  the  form  of  a 
sentence. 

Notes.— 1.  These  sentences  are  regarded,  grammatically,  as  neuter  substantives. 
The  Accusative  of  neuter  substantives  is  employed  as  a  Nominative.  Hence,  a  passive 
or  intransitive  verb  may  take  an  obj<«t  sentence  as  a  subject. 

2.  To  object  sentences  belong  also  Dependent  Interrogative  clauses,  which  have 
been  treated  elsewhere  for  convenience  of  reference.    See  452,  i,  n  ,  4C0,  467. 

I.  Object  Sentences  introduced  by  QUOD. 

524.  Clauses  which  serve  merely  as  periphrases  (circumlo- 
cutions) or  expansions  of  elements  in  the  leading  sentence 
are  introduced  by  quod,  that. 

Notes.— 1.  This  usage  seems  to  be  in  orif^in  explanatory;  that  jb,  a  demonstrative 
in  the  leading  clause  is  explained  by  the  quod  clause.  But  as  the  relative  can  always 
include  the  antecedent  demonstrative,  tlie  prevailing  usage  is  without  an  antecedent. 
In  any  case,  however,  the  construction  is  essentially  relative. 

2.  The  original  rektion  of  quod  and  its  antecedent  is  adverbial.  They  are  Accusa- 
tives of  Extent,  fhat  =  in  that,  and  are  to  be  classed  under  the  Inner  Object  (332).  But 
after  transitive  verbs  qnod  and  its  antecedent  are  felt  as  Outer  Objects,  though  when- 
ever the  notion  of  Cause  intrudes  (m  thai  =  because),  the  original  relation  comes  back, 
as  in  causal  sentences  proper. 

3.  The  antecedent  demonstrative  (whether  omitted  or  inserted)  would  therefore  be 
either  tlie  direct  object  of  the  verb  or  it  would  be  in  adverbial  or  prepositional  relation. 
We  have  tlien  two  uses  of  the  explanatory  clause  ;  (a)  with  verbs,  with  or  without  an 
antecedent  demonstrative  ;  (6)  as  explanatory  of  an  antecedetU  (expressed  or  implied) 
in  adverbial  relation  to  the  verb  or  dependent  upon  a  prep  >6ition. 

525.  I.  Uuod  {tlie  fact  that,  the  cirt^umstance  that,  in 
that)  is  used  to  introduce  explanatory  clauses,  after  verbs  of 
Adding  and  Dropping,  and  after  verbs  of  Doing  and  Hap- 
pening with  an  adverb. 

Adde  hue  quod  perferri  litterae  nulla  condicione  potugrunt,  Pollio  (0., 
Fam.,  X.  31,  4);  add  to  this  the  fact  that  letters  could  mider  no  cir- 
cumstances be  got  through.  Adde  quod  ingenuas  didicisse  fidSliter  ai't^s 
Smollit  morSs  nee  sinit  esseferos,  Ov.,  Pont.,  ir.  9,  47;  add  {the  fact)  that 
to  have  acquired  faithfully  the  accomplishments  (education)  of  a  gentle- 
man, softetis  the  character,  and  does  not  let  it  he  savage.    Praetereo  quod 


328  OBJECT   SENTENCES. 

earn  sib!  domum  dglegit,  C,  Cluent.,  66,  188  ;  I  pass  over  tJie  fact  iJiat 
she  chose  that  house  for  herself.  Bene  facis  quod  me  adiuvas,  C,  Fiii., 
III.  4,  16  ;  7  is  kind  in  you  to  help  me.  Accidit  perincommods  quod 
eum  nusquam  vidisti,  C,  Ait.,  i.  17,  2  ;  it  happened  very  un fortunately 
that  you  saw  him  noivhei'e.  Bene  mihi  6venit  quod  mittor  ad  mortem,  Q., 
Tusc,  1.  41,  97;  it  is  fortunate  for  me  that  lam  sent  to  death  (execution). 

Notes. — 1.  Of  verbs  of  Adding  adicere  is  introduced  by  Livy,  addere  is  cited 
once  each  from  Accius  (209,  R.)  and  Terence  {Ph.,  168),  then  more  often  from  Lucre- 
tius, Horace,  and  Ovm,  but  not  from  Cicero  and  Vergil.  AccMere  is  the  passive 
of  addere  and  occurs  at  all  periods.  Of  verbs  of  Dropping,  only  praetereo,  mittO, 
and  omitto  (C,  Aft.,  viii.  3,  3)  are  cited  (all  classical). 

2.  Esse  is  found  mostly  in  the  combinations  quid  (hoc)  est  quod,  ^ohy  is  it  that, 
this  is  why,  which  are  confined  to  early  Latin  :  Scin  quid  est  quod  ego  ad  t§  venio  1 
Pl.,  Men.,  677 ;  hSc  est  quod  ad  v5s  venio,  Pl.,  St.,  127.  Est  quod,  nihil  est  quod, 
etc.,  occur  here  and  there  later,  but  the  effect  of  the  negative  on  the  mood  is  noteworthy. 
Compare  positive  sed  est  quodsuscSnset  tibi(TER.,yi7uZ.,  448) ;  the?-e  is  something 
that  niaJces  him  angry  iviih  yon,  with  negative  nihil  est  iam  quod  mihi  suscSnseas 
(Pl.,  Merc,  317)  ;  there  is  nothing  to  imtke  you  angry  with  me. 

3.  To  this  group  belongs  the  exclamatory  interrogation  QuidT  quod,  or  quid 
quod ?  -what  of  this,  that  ? 

Quid  quod  simulac  mihi  collihitum  est  praesto  est  imago  %  C,  N.B.,  i.  38, 108; 
what  is  to  be  said  of  the  fact  that  the  image  presents  itself  as  soon  as  I  see  Jit  f  {Nay, 
vtoes  not  t/ie  iinage  pi^esent  itself?) 

4.  The  nse  of  quod  after  verbs  of  Doing  and  Happening  is  found  first  in  Cicero  ; 
Plautus  uses  quia  in  this  construction. 

5.  With  several  of  the  above-mentioned  verbs  ut  can  be  employed,  as  well  as  quod 
(ut,  of  the  tendency — quod,  of  the  fact) : 

Ad  Appi  Claudi  senectutem  aco§debat  ut  etiam  caecus  esset,  C,  Cat.M..  6, 16 
(553, 4),  or,  quod  caecus  erat.  Accedit  quod  patrem  plus  etiam  quam  ipse  scit 
amo,  C,  Att.,  XIII.  21, 7  ;  besides,  J  love  the  fatJier  even  more  than  lie  himself  knmos. 

But  when  the  action  is  prospective  or  conditional,  ut  must  be  used  : 

Additur  ad  hanc  dSflnltionem  aZSnone  rSctg  ut  ilia  opIni5praesentis  mall 
sit  recgns,  C,  Tusc,  m.  31, 75. 

G.  Quod  with  verbs  of  Motion  as  an  adverbial  Ace.  is  confined  to  early  Latin  and  to 
veniS  (Pl-t  Men.,  677)  and  mittS  (Pl.,  Ps.,  639). 

7.  The  extension  of  quod  to  verba  sentiendi  et  dicendl  is  very  unusual.  One 
example  in  early  Latin  (Pl.,  Asin.,  52)  is  nuich  disputed  ;  suspicious  examples  are  C, 
Fam.,\\\.  8,6  ;  Caes.,  77.C.,i.  23,3,  but  a  certain  example  is  in  b.IIisp.  (10,  2),  re- 
nuntiarunt  quod  habSrent.  The  only  case  in  Augustan  poets  is  V.,  A.,  ix.  289  ;  it  is 
doubtful  in  Livy  ;  perhaps  twice  in  Tacitus  {Aim. ,111.  54;  xiv.  6).  In  later  Latin, 
from  Petronius  on,  it  becomes  frequent. 

2.  Quod  {in  that,  as  to  the  fact  that,  whereas)  introduces 
explanatory  clauses  after  demonstratives  (expressed  or  im- 
plied), independent  of  the  leading  verb.     See  627,  R.  2. 

Mih!  quidem  videntur  homines  hSc  rS  maximS  bSstiis  praestSre,  quod 
loqui  possunt,  C,  Inv.,  i.  4;  to  me  men  seem  to  excel  beasts  most  in  this, 
that  they  have  the  power  of  speech.  Praeterquam  quod  fieri  nOn  potuit,  nS 
fingi  quidem  potest,  C,  Div.,  11.  12,  28;  besides  the  fact  that  this  could 
not  be  done,  it  could  not  even  be  made  up.     Nil  habet  Infgllx  paupertas 


OBJECT   SENTENCES.  329 

dtirius  in  sg  quam  quod  (=  id  quod)  ridiculSs  homings  facit,  Juv.,  iii.  152  ; 
unhappy  poverty  hath  in  itself  nothing  harder  {to  bear)  than  that  it 
makes  people  ridiculous.  Magnum  beneficium  [est]  naturae  quod  necesse 
est  mori,  Sen. ,  E. 31. ,  loi ,  14  (204).    Quod  spiro  et  placeo,  si  placeo,  tuum  est, 

H.,  0.,  IV.  3,  24;  that  I  do  breathe  and  please,  if  that  I  please,  is  thine. 

Notes.— 1.  In  early  usage  the  antecedent  is  not  common,  but  it  is  emploj-ed  very 
often  by  Cicero,  for  the  purposes  of  argument. 

2.  Prepositional  usages  witli  the  Abl.  are  ex  e5,  d§  e5,  In  eO,  pro  e5,  Cum  e3 
quod.  Of  these  cum  eo  quod,  with  the  proviso  that,  is  very  rare,  occurring  but  once 
in  Cicero  (Att.,  vi.  i,  7).  The  prepositional  usages  with  the  Ace.  are  ad  id  quod 
(only  in  Livy)  ;  super  id  quod  (only  in  Tacitus)  ;  praeter  quod  (Florus  and  late 
writers);  prae  quod  (Plautus  only).  Similar  is  excepto  quod  (Hor.,  Quint.).  As 
praeter  and  super  are  comparative  in  force,  we  find  praeter  quam  quod  (early  Latin, 
Cic,  and  later),  super  quam  quod  (only  in  Livy).  Similar  to  praeter  quod  is  nisi 
quod  (Plaut.,  Cicero  [not  Orations],  Sall.,  Livy",  and  later).  Tantum  quod  =  nisi 
quod,  once  in  Cicero  ( Verr.,  1.  45, 116)  and  is  rare;  tantum  quod,  temporal,  "  just,"  is 
colloquial,  and  found  first  in  Cicero's  Letters,  then  not  till  the  post-Augustan  period. 

3.  Quod,  ''as  to  the  fact  that,''  is  combined  also  with  the  Subjv.  in  early  Latin: 
quod  ille  gallinam  sg  sectari  dicat,  etc.  (Pl.,  31.  G.,  162).  This  is  explained  as  being 
the  Potential  Subjv.,  inasmuch  as  all  the  examples  cited  involve  supposed  statements  or 
actions  of  a  second  or  third  (often  indefinite)  person,  which  the  speaker  merely  wishes 
to  anticipate.  The  usage  is  occasional,  also,  later  :  C,  Pis.,  27,  66  ;  Verr.,  v.  68, 175,  and 
sporadically  in  Fronto  and  Gaius.  Sometimes  the  idea  of  Partial  Obliquity  enters,  as 
in  c,  Br.,  18, 73,  quod  aequalis  fuerit  LIvius,  minor  fuit  aliquantO ;  Inv.,  n.  29, 
89,  (reading  doubtful). 

In  general  the  usage  of  quod,  "■  as  to  the  fact  that,''  is  familiar.  Cicero  uses  it  often 
in  his  Letters.    But  Caesar  is  fond  of  it  too.    Tacitus  has  it  but  once  {Dial.,  25). 

3.  The  reigning  mood  is  the  Indicative.  The  Subjunctive 
is  only  used  as  in  Oratio  Obliqua. 

Cum  Castam  accusarem  nihil  magis  pressi  quam  quod  accusator  eius  prae- 
varicationis  crimine  corruisset,  Plin.,  Ep.,  in.  9,  34  ;  whe7i  I  accused 
Casta  there  was  no  point  that  I  laid  more  stress  on  than  (what  I  stated) 
* '  that  her  accuser  had  gone  to  pieces  under  a  charge  of  collusion. " 

Remark. — Verbs  of  Emotion,  such  as  Rejoicing,  Sorrowing,  etc.^ 
take  quod  with  the  Indie,  or  Subjunctive.     See  Causal  Sentences,  539. 

II.    Object  Sentences,  with  Accusative  and  Infinitive. 

626.  Prelimmary  Observation. — On  the  simple  Infinitive 
as  an  object,  see  423. 

The  Inf. ,  as  a,  verbal  predicate,  has  its  subject  in  the  Accusative.  (420.) 

527.  Active  verbs  of  Saying,  Showing,  Believing,  and 
Perceiving  (verba  sentiendi  et  declarandi),  and  similar  ex- 
pressions, take  the  Accusative  and  Infinitive  : 

Thales  Milesius  aquam  dixit  esse  initium  r6rum,  C,  iV.i>.,  i.  lo,  25; 


330  OBJECT   SENTENCES. 

Thales  of  Miletus  said  that  water  was  the  first  principle  of  things. 
[Solon]  furere  s6  Simula vit,  C,  Off.,  i.  30,  108;  Solon  pretended  to  he  mad. 
Medici  causa  morbi  inventa  curationem  esse  inventam  putant,  C,  Tusc, 
III.  lo,  23;  physicians  think  that,  (when)  the  cause  of  disease  (is)  dis- 
covered, the  method  of  treatment  is  discovered.  Volucrgs  vidgmus  fingers 
et  construere  nidos,  C,  Or.,  11.  6,  23;  we  see  that  birds  fashion  and  build 
nests.  Audiet  cives  acuisse  ferrum,  H.,  0.,  i.  2,  21;  [the  youth]  shall 
hear  that  citizens  gave  edge  to  steel.  Timagenes  auctor  est  omnium 
in  litteris  studiorum  antiquissimam  musicgn  extitisse,  Quint.,  i.  10,  10  ; 
Timagenes  is  the  authority  (for  the  statement)  tJiat  of  all  intellectual 
pursuits  music  was  the  most  ancient. 

The  sentence  very  often  passes  over  into  the  Ace.  and  Inf.  (0.  O.) 
without  any  formal  notice. 

Remarks. — i.  Verba  sentiendi  comprise  two  classes,  those  of  {a) 
Actual  and  those  of  {b)  Intellectual  Perception.  Some  verbs,  such  as 
sentire,  videre,  cemere,  audire,  belong  to  both  classes.  Otherwise  the 
most  common  are : 

(«)  Conspicari,  conspicere,  aspicere,  suspicere,  prospicere,  also  rarely 
tueri  and  somniare  (early). 

{h)  Intellegere,  cognoscere,  comperire,  scire,  nescire,  and  less  commonly, 
but  Ciceronian,  discere,  ignorare,  accipere,  animadvertere,  perspicere, 
etc. 

2.  Verba  declarandi  can  likewise  be  divided  into  two  classes  :  (a) 
those  of  Actual  and  {h)  those  of  Intellectual  Representation;  but  the 
classes  often  fade  into  each  other,  or,  rather,  a  verb  of  Intellectual 
Representation  can  be  readily  used  as  one  of  Actual  Representation. 
In  general,  verbs  of  Intellectual  Representation  are  those  of  Thinking, 
Remembering,  Belief  and  Opinion,  Expectation,  Trust  and  Hope. 
Verbs  of  Actual  Representation  are  those  of  Saying,  Showing,  Approv- 
ing, Boasting,  Pretending,  Promising,  Swearing,  Threatening,  Accus- 
ing (the  last  have  more  often  quod).  Verbs  of  Concluding  belong 
always  to  both  classes.  The  principal  of  these  verbs  are  :  putare,  ducere, 
arbitrari,  cgns6re,  suspicari,  credere,  existiraare,  meminisse,  confidere,  spg- 
rare,  dgspgrare.  Then  dicere,  edicere,  affirmare,  confirmare,  aio  (rare), 
loqul  (rare),  negare,  fatgri,  narrare,  tradere,  scribere,  niintiare,  ostendere, 
probare,  gloriari,  dgmonstrare,  persuadere,  significare,  pollicgri,  promittere, 
minari,  simulare,  dissimulare,  etc.;  concludere,  colligere,  efficere.  Also 
ponere,  to  suppose  (rare),  facere,  to  represent.  Simihir  expressions  are 
spgs  est,  opinio  est,  ^ma  est,  auctor  sum,  tgstis  sum,  certiorem  aliquem 
facere,  etc. 

3.  When  the  subj.  of  the  Inf.  is  a  personal  or  reflexive  pronoun,  that 
subj.  may  be  omitted — chiefly  with  Fut.  Inf. — and  then  esse  also  is 
dropped.  This  occurs  rarely  in  Cicero,  more  frequently  in  early 
Latin,  Caesar,  and  later. 


OBJECT   SENTENCES.  33 1 

Refracturos  carcerem  minabantur,  L.,  vi.  17,  0  ;  they  threatened  to 
break  open  the  Jail. 

4.  The  simple  Inf.  is  often  used  in  English,  where  the  Latin  takes 
Ace.  and  Infinitive.  This  is  especially  true  of  verbs  of  Hoping  and 
Promising.  Spero  me  hoc  adepturum  esse,  /  hope  to  {that  I  shall)  obtain 
this.  Promittebat  se  venturum  esse,  he  p)romised  to  {that  he  would) 
come. 

5.  When  the  Ace.  with  the  Inf.  is  followed  by  a  dependent  Ace., 
ambiguity  may  arise  : 

Aio  te,  Aeacida,  Romanos  vincere  posse  (C,  Div.,  11.  56,  116),  in  which 
te  may  be  subject  or  object. 

Real  ambiguity  is  to  be  avoided  by  giving  the  sentence  a  passive 
turn  : 

Aio  a  te,  Aeacida,  Romanos  vinci  posse,  I  affirm  that  the  Romans  can 
be  conquered  by  thee,  son  of  Aeacus. 

Aio  te,  Aeacida,  a  Romanis  vinci  posse,  /  affirm  that  thou,  son  of 
Aeacus,  canst  be  conquered  by  the  Romans. 

When  the  context  shows  which  is  the  real  subj.,  formal  ambiguity 
is  of  no  importance.     But  see  Quint.,  vii.  g,  10. 

Notes.— 1.  Verbs  of  Perception  and  Representation  talce  the  Part,  to  express  the 
actual  condition  of  tlie  object  of  Perception  or  Representation  (536).  As  there  is  no  Pr. 
Part,  pass.,  the  Inf.  must  be  used,  and  thus  tlie  difference  between  Intellectual  and  Actual 
Perception  is  effaced,  sometimes  even  in  the  active,  and,  in  fact,  the  use  of  the  Part, 
is  confined  to  authors  who  are  consciously  influenced  by  a  rivalry  with  the  Greek. 

Audio  civ6s  acuent6s  ferrum,  Cf.  H.,  O.,  i.  2,21  ;  I  hear  citizens  sharpen(ing)  the 
steel.  Audio  a  civibus  acui  ferrum,  I  hear  that  the  steel  is  shai^ened  by  citizens  ; 
or,  the  steel  as  it  is  sharpened  by  citizens.  Octavium  (dolore)  confici  vidi,  C,  Fi7i., 
II.  28, 93 ;  /  have  seen  Octavius  (when  he  was)  ivearing  end  with  anguish.  VidI 
histriones  flent§s  egredi,  Quint.,  vi.  2, 35  ;  I  have  seen  actors  leave  the  stage  weep- 
ing. 

(Plato)  a  Deo  aedificari  mundum  facit,  C,  N.D.,  i.  8, 19  ;  Plato  makes  mit  that 
the  universe  is  built  by  God.  Polyphemum  Homerus  cum  ariete  conloquentem 
facit,  C,  Tusc,  V.  39, 115  (536).  Fac,  quaeso,  qui  ego  sum  esse  tS,  C,  Fayn.,  va.  23, 
1 ;  suppose,  I  pray.,  ycmrself  to  be  me. 

2.  The  (Greek)  attraction  of  the  predicate  of  the  Inf.  into  the  Nom.  after  the  Verb 
of  Saying  or  Thinking,  is  poetical ;  the  first  example  is  Pl.,  Asin.,  634. 

Phasglus  ille,  quem  videtis,  hospitSs,  ait  fuisse  navium  celerrimus,  Cat., 
IV.  I ;  that  pinnace  yonder,  tvhich  you  see,  my  stranger  guests,  declares  she  used  to  be 
(claims  to  have  beeti)  the  fastest  craft  afloat. 

There  is  one  example  in  Cicero  (Agr.,  11.  21,  57). 

3.  The  use  of  the  Ace.  and  Inf.  with  verba  dSclarandi  is  an  outgrowth  of  the  use 
after  verbs  of  Creation  (423),  just  as  in  English  "I  declare  him  to  be,"  is  an  extension 
of  "  I  make  him  to  be,"  in  which  Ace.  and  Inf.  have  each  its  proper  force.  This  is  the 
origin  of  the  so-called  Oratio  Obliqua,  or  Indirect  Discourse,  which  represents  not  the 
exact  language  used,  but  the  general  drift,  and  in  which  the  tenses  of  the  Inf.  seem  to 
represent  approximately  the  tenses  of  the  Indicative.  It  was  to  complete  the  sclieme  of 
the  Tenses  that  the  Fut.  Inf.  was  developed,  and  this  is  the  sole  use  of  that  tense.  The 
use  of  the  Ace.  and  Inf.  after  verba  sentiendi,  like  the  use  in  English  "  I  see  him  go." 
is  more  primitive,  but  tlie  original  case  of  the  Inf.  is  no  longer  felt. 


332  KOMIKATIVE    WITH    INFIN-ITIVE. 


Nominative    with    Infinitive. 

528.  Passive  verbs  of  Saying,  Showing,  Believing,  and 
Perceiving  : 

1.  In  the  Simple  tenses  prefer  the  personal  construction, 
in  which  the  Accusative  Subject  of  the  Infinitive  appears  as 
the  Nominative  Subject  of  the  leading  verb. 

2.  In  the  Compound  tenses  prefer  the  impersonal  con- 
struction, which  is  the  rule  with  Gerund  and  Gerundive. 

Thus,  instead  of 

Tradunt  Homgrum  caecum  fuisse,  they  say  that  Homer  ivas  blind, 

we  should  have, 

Traditur  HomSrus  caecus  fuisse,  Homer  is  said  to  have  heen  Mind, 
or, 

[Traditum]  est  Homerum  caecum  fuisse,  C,  Tusc,  ¥,.39,  114  ;  there  is 
a  tradition  that  Homer  was  bli^id. 

[Aristaeus]  inventor  olei  esse  dicitur,  C,  Verr.,  iv.  57,  128  ;  Aristaeus 
is  said  to  be  the  inventor  of  oil.  Terenti  fabellae  propter  glegantiam  ser- 
monis  putabantur  a  Laelio  scribi,  C,  Att.,  vii.  3,  10  ;  Terence's  plays,  on 
account  of  the  elegance  of  the  language,  ivere  thought  to  be  written  by 
Laelius.  [Si  VSios  migrabimus]  amisisse  patriam  vidSbimur,  L.,v.  53, 
b  ]  if  we  remove  to  Veji,  we  shall  seem  to  have  lost  our  country.  Reus 
damnatum  iri  videbatur,  Quint.,  ix.  2,  88  (435,  n.  4).  CrSditur  Pythago- 
rae  auditSrem  fuisse  Numam,  L.,  xl.  29,  8  ;  it  is  believed  that  Numa 
teas  a  hearer  of  Pythagoras. 

But: 

[Venerem]  AdOnidi  nflpsisse  pr5ditum  est,  C,  W.D.,  in.  23,  59  ;  it  is  re- 
corded that  Venus  married  Adonis.  (Philonem)  existimandum  est  diser- 
tum  fuisse,  C,  Or.,  i.  14,  62  ;  we  must  suppose  that  Philo  was  eloquent. 

Remarks. — i.  The  impersonal  construction  is  the  rule  if  a  Dat.  is 
combined  with  the  verb  :  mih!  nuntiabatur  Parthos  transisse  Euphratem, 
C,  Fam.,  XV.  i,  2  ;  it  was  announced  to  me  that  the  Parthians  had 
crossed  the  Euphrates. 

1.  Various  peculiarities  are  noteworthy  in  the  matter  of  these  verbs. 
Thus,  dicitur  usually  means  it  is  maintained,  dictum  est,  it  is  said. 
CrSditur,  etc.  (impersonal),  is  the  regular  form  in  classical  prose  ;  the 
personal  construction  is  poetical  and  late.  Vid6rl  is  used,  as  a  rule, 
personally  ;  the  impersonal  construction  vidStur  is  rare.  The  active 
forms  trSdunt,  crfidunt,  etc.,  are  everywhere  common. 


TENSES   OF  THE   IKFINITIVE.  333 

Notes.— 1.  In  early  Latin  the  i)ersonal  construction  is  found  with  argui,  cluSre  (a 
virtual  passive),  dici,  existimarl,  invenirl,  iuberi,  nuntiari,  perhibgri,  reperiri. 
All  these,  except  cluere,  are  retained  in  the  classical  period,  Cicero  and  Caesar 
add  twenty-five  new  verbs,  and  from  this  time  on  the  construction  increases. 

2.  Virtual  passives,  on  the  analogy  of  cluere,  are  rare  ;  apparSre,  constare,  venire 
in  suspicionem,  are  Ciceronian  ;  so  also  opus  est  in  [C],  Fam.,  xi.  n,  2,  and  perhaps 
Ter.,  A?id.,  337. 

3.  A  second  clause  following  a  Nom.  with  the  Inf.  takes  its  subj.  in  the  Accusative 
C,  Or.,  II.  74,299. 

4.  In  verbs  of  Saying,  except  dico  (compare  Tac,  Ann.,  iv.  34,  8;,  the  personal  con- 
struction is  confined  to  the  third  person.  The  poets  are  free  in  treating  verbs  under  this 
head. 

Tenses    of   the    Infinitive    with   Verba  SentiendT  et   Decla- 

randl. 

529.  The  Infinitive  denotes  only  the  stage  of  the  action, 
and  determines  only  the  relation  to  the  time  of  the  leading 
verb  (281). 

530.  After  verbs  of  Saying,  Showing,  Believing,  and  Per- 
ceiving, and  the  like. 

The  Present  Infinitive  expresses  contemporaneous  action  ; 
The  Perfect  Infinitive  expresses  prior  action  ; 
The  Future  Infinitive  expresses  future  action. 

Remark. — The  action  which  is  completed  with  regard  to  the  leading 
verb  may  be  in  itself  a  continued  action.  So  in  English:  /  have  been 
studying,  I  had  been  studying.  Hence,  the  Impf.  Indie.  (Twos  study- 
ing) is  represented  in  this  dependent  form  by  the  Pf.  Inf.,  because  it  is 
prior  to  the  leading  verb. 

^^  In  this  table  the  Present  is  taken  as  the  type  of  the  Principal, 
the  Imperfect  as  the  type  of  the  Historical,  Tenses. 

531.  Contemporaneous  Action. 
Active.  Passive. 

P.  T.  DIcit :  tS  errare,  tS  dScipI, 

He  says,  that  you  are  going  wrong,  that  you  are  {being)  deceived  (217,  R.). 

H.  T.  DIcebat :  t6  errare,  t§  dScipI, 

He  was  saying,  that  you  were  going  that  you  were  {being)  deceived, 

wrong. 

Prior  Action, 

P.  T.  DIcit :  tS  errasse,  tg  deceptum  esse, 

He  says,  that  you  hate  gone  wtvng,  that  you  have  been  {are)  deceived, 

that  you  went  wrong,  that  you  were  deceived  (Aor.), 

that .  you  have  been  going  {that  people  have  been  deceiving  you), 
wrong, 


334 


TEKSES   OF   THE   INFINITITE. 


H.  T.  Dicebat :  tg  errasse, 

He  was  saying^  thai    you   had  gone 
wrong, 
that  you  tvent  wrong, 
that    you    had    been 
going  wrong. 


te  deceptum  esse, 

that  you  had  been  deceived, 

that  you  ivere  deceived  (Aor.), 
iihat  people  had  been  deceiving  yon). 


Subsequent  Aciion. 


P.  T.  DIcit :  tg  erraturnm  esse, 

He  says,  that  yoic  {are  about  to  go 
wrong),  wiU  {be)  go{ing)  wrong. 


te  deceptum  iri, 

that  you  {are  going  to)  will  be  i 

ceived. 


H,  T.  DIcSbat :  tS  erraturum  esse, 

He  was  saying,  that  you  were  about 
to  {wovid)  go  ivrong. 


te  deceptum  iri, 

that  you  ivere  going  to  {would)  be 
deceived. 


Periphrastic  Future. 

The  following  form  (the  Periphrastic  Future)  is  necessary  when  the  verb  has  no 
Sup.  or  Fut.  participle.  It  is  often  formed  from  other  verbs  to  intimate  an  interval, 
which  cannot  be  expressed  by  other  forms,  and  is  more  common  in  the  passive  than 
the  Fut.  Inf.  pass,  of  the  paradigms. 


P.  T,  DIcit:  fore  (futurum  esse)  ut  er- 
r6s  (metuas), 
fore  (futurum  esse)  ut  erra- 

Veris  (rare), 


H.  T.  Dicgbat :  fore  (futurum  esse)  ut 
errares  (metueres), 
errassgs  (rare), 


fore  ut  dgcipiaris  (metuaris), 

fore  ut  deceptus  sis  (rare),  usually 
deceptum    fore    (not  futurum 


fore  ut  decipereris  (metuereris), 
deceptum  fore  (rarely :  fore  ut  d6- 
ceptus  essgs). 


Notes.— 1.  For  examples  of  the  Periphrastic,  see  248. 

Carthaginignsgs  debellatum  mox  fore  rgbantur,  L.,  xxm.  13, 6 ;  the  Cartha- 
ginians tlumght  that  the  war  tvould  soon  be  {have  been)  brought  to  an  end.  From 
dSbellatum  erit,  it  will  be  {have  been)  brought  to  an  end.  So  in  the  deponent  adep- 
tum  fore. 

2.  Ponderous  poriphrnstics  nro  of  rare  occurrence.  So  fgtiales  dgcrevSrunt 
ntrum  e5rum  fgcisset  rgctS  facturum  (L.,  x:::a.  8) ;  not  fore  ut  fecisset,  although 

the  O.  R.  requires  utrum  fgceris,  recte  fgceris.     (244,  n.  4.)     See  Weissenborn''a 
note. 

3.  Posse,  velle,  etc.,  do  not  require  the  Periphrastic,  and  seldom  take  it.    (248,  R.) 

4.  SpSrare,  to  Jvope,  promittere  (pollic6ri),  to  promise,  which  i-egularly  take  the 
Fut.  Inf.,  have  occasionally  the  Pr.  when  an  immediate  realization  of  the  hope  is  antici- 
pated.   With  spSs  est  the  Pr.  Inf.  is  more  common. 

Legati  veniunt  qui  poUiceantur  obsidSs  dare,  Caes.,  B.  O.,  iv.  21, 5;  ambassa- 
dors come  to  promise  the  giving  of  {to  give)  hostages. 

So,  too,  when  the  Fut.  Inf.  is  not  available,  sometimes  also  when  it  is.  posse  and 
the  Pr.  is  a  fair  substitute.  Totlus  Galliae  sgs5  potiri  posse  (=  potituros  esse) 
spgrant,  Caes..  B.G.,  i.  3,  8  ;  they  Iwpe  they  can  {will)  get  imsession  of  the  zohole  of 
Gaul.    See  423,  n.  .5. 

Of  course  spgrSre  u'-ay  b<!  ustd  simply  us  a  verb  of  Thinking. 


ACCUSATIVE   AND   II^FIN^ITIVE.  335 


Accusative  and  Infinitive  witii  Verbs  of  Will  and  Desire. 

532.  Verbs  of  Will  and  Desire  take  a  Dependent  Accusa- 
tive and  Infinitive. 

The  relation  is  that  of  an  Object  to  be  Effected. 

Si  vis  mS  flgre,  dolendum  est  primum  ipsi  tibi,  H,  ^.P.,  102;  if  you 
ivish  me  to  iveep,  you  must  first  feel  the  ^Jctng  yourself.  Utrum  [Milonis] 
corporis  an  Pythagorae  tibi  malis  vires  ingenii  dari  ?  C,  Cat.  31.,  10,  33; 
which  (whether)  ivould  you  rather  have  given  to  you,  Jlilo's  strength  of 
body  or  Pythagoras'  strength  of  mind  ?  Ipse  iubet  mortis  te  meminisse 
deus,  Mart.,  ii.  59  (376).  Vitae  summa  brevis  spem  nos  vetat  inchoare 
longam,  n.,0.,i.  4,  15  (423,  n.  G).  Ngmo  ire  quemquam  publica  pro- 
hibet  via,  PL.,Cwrc.,35  (389).  Germani  vinum  ad  se  omnino  impor- 
tari  non  sinunt,  Caes.,  B.G.,  iv.  2,  6;  the  Germans  do  not  permit  wine 
to  he  imported  into  their  country  at  all. 

Remarks.— I.  A  list  of  these  verbs  is  given  in  423,  n.  2. 

2.  When  the  subj.  of  the  Inf.  is  the  same  as  the  snbj.  of  the  leading 
verb,  the  subj.  of  the  Inf.  is  usually  not  expressed  : 

Ni  parere  velis,  pereundum  erit  ante  lucernas,  Juv.,  x.  339  ;  unless  you 
resolve  to  obey,  you  will  have  to  perish  before  candle-light.  Et  iam  mal- 
let equos  numquam  tetigisse  paternos,  Ov.,  M.,  u.  182;  a?id  noiv  he  could 
have  wished  rather  never  to  have  touched  his  father's  horses. 

But  the  subj.  may  be  expressed,  and  commonly  is  expressed,  when 
the  action  of  the  Inf.  is  not  within  the  power  of  the  subject  ;  so  espe- 
cially with  an  Inf.  passive : 

(Timoleon)  maluit  sS  diligi  quam  metui,  Nep.,  xx.  3,  4;  Timoleon  pre- 
ferred that  he  should  be  loved  rather  than  that  he  should  be  feared. 
Ego  rtis  abitaram  me  certo  dgcrgvi,  Ter.,  Hec,  586.  Principem  se  esse 
mavult  quam  vidSri,  C,  Off.,  i.  19,  65. 

Notes.— 1.  On  the  construction  of  this  class  of  verbs  with  ut  (n5,  quominus),  see 
546.  Impero,  I  command,  in  model  prose  takes  only  the  Inf.  passive  or  deponent;  in 
Sallust,  Hirtius,  Curtius,  Tacitus,  and  the  Poets  sometimes  the  active. 

(Hannibal)  imperavit  quam  plurimas  vengnatas  serpentgs  vivas  coUigi, 
Nep.,  23, 10  ;  Hannibal  ordered  as  many  jmsonoiis  serpents  as  ])ossible  to  be  caught 
alive. 

PermittO  seldom  takes  the  Inf.  (e.g.,  C,  Verr.,  v.  9,  22);  the  Ace.  with  Inf.  begins  in 
Tacitus  ;  concSdo  takes  Inf.  pass,  only,  in  classical  prose.  lubeo,  Ibid  ;  sino,  Il«t ; 
veto,  I  forbid  ;  prohibeo,  /  prohibit,  always  have  the  Inf.  of  passive  verbs.  With 
sino  and  veto  the  model  construction  is  Inf.  only.  SinO  takes  ut  occasionally  in 
early  and  late  Latin,  veto  does  not  have  ng  till  in  the  post-Ciceronian  period.  lubSre 
takes  ut  when  it  is  applied  to  decrees  of  the  Senate,  and  from  Livy  on  when  used  of  the 
orders  of  generals  ;  prohibgre  takes  ng  and  quominus.  These  verbs  may  themselves 
be  turned  into  the  passive  :  iubeor,  sinor,  vetor,  probibeor. 

2.  After  iubeo,  /  bid,  and  vet5,  I  forbid,  the  Inf.  act.  can  be  used  without  a  subj. 
(even  an  imaginary  or  indefinite  one)  : 

Xubet  yeddere,  he  bids  return  {orders  the  retvrning). 


336  ACCUSATIVE   AND   INFINITIVE. 

Vetat  adhibgre  medicinam,  C,  Att.,  xvi.  15,  5  ;  hefoiMds  the  administration  of 
medicine.  Infandum,  regina,  iubes  renovare  dolorem,  V.,  A.,  11.  3  ;  ujuj^akaUe, 
O  queen,  the  anguish  which  you  hid  (me,  us)  revive. 

3.  After  volo,  nolo,  malo  in  early  Latin,  ut  and  the  Subjv.  is  proportionally 
more  common  than  in  the  classical  time.  But  with  the  Potential  forms,  velim,  ma- 
lim,  vellem,  mallem,  Cicero  uses  only  the  Subjv.  (without  ut).  When  volo  means 
maintain,  it  takes  the  Inf.  only  ;  see  546,  R.  i. 

4.  It  is  noteworthy  that  in  classical  Prose  cupere  never  takes  ut,  vvhile  optare 
never  takes  the  Infinitive. 

5.  On  the  use  of  the  Pf .  Inf.  instead  of  the  Pr.  after  these  verbs,  see  537,  n.  i. 

6.  The  Poets  go  much  further  in  using  verbs  and  phrases  as  expressions  of  Will  and 
Desire.    See  423,  n.  4. 

Accusative  and  Infinitive  with  Verbs  of  Emotion. 

633.  Verbs  of  Emotion  take  a  dependent  Accusative  and 
Infinitive,  inasmuch  as  these  verbs  may  be  considered  as 
verbs  of  Saying  and  Thinking.     (542. ) 

Salvom  t6  advgnisse  gaudeo,  Ter.,  P^.,  286  ;  I.  rejoice  that  you  should 
have  arrived  safe  {to  think  that  you  have  arrived  safe,  at  your  arriving 
safe).  Quod  salvos  advSnistI,  that  you  have  arrived  safe.  Quod  salvos 
adveneris,  that  (as  you  say)  you  liave  arrived  safe. 

Inferiores  non  dolSre  [dSbent]  s5  a  suis  dignitate  superari,  C,  Lael.,  20, 
71 ;  inferiors  ought  not  to  consider  it  a  grievance  that  they  are  sur- 
passed in  rank  hy  their  own  {friends). 

Remarks. — i.  This  construction,  outside  of  a  few  verbs,  is  not  com 
mon,  though  found  in  a  wide  range  of  authors.  Gaudere,  laetarl,  dol6re 
queri  (beginning  in  Cic),  mlrari,  are  common  ;  in  addition  Cicero  uses 
rarely,  however,  more  than  once  each,  maergre,  ItigSre,  cQnficI,  discruciari 
angi,  soUicitari,  indignari,  fremere,  dSmirari,  admirari,  subesse  timorem 
Early  Latin  shows  ridgre  (Naev.),  gestire,  mih!  dolet  (Ter.),  maestus  sum 
(Plaut.),  cruciarl  (Plaut.),  lamentari  (Plaut.,  Hor.),  stispirare  (Lucr.), 
incendor  Ira  (Ter.),  ferox  est  (Plaut.),  invidSre  (Plaut.,  Hor.),  formidare, 
ver6ri,  in  addition  to  the  common  gaudgre,  etc.,  already  cited. 

2.  On  the  Participle  after  a  verb  of  Emotion,  536,  n.  2. 

Accusative  and  Infinitive  in  Exclamations. 

534.  The  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  is  used  in  Excla- 
mations and  Exclamatory  Questions  as  the  object  of  an  un- 
expressed thought  or  feeling. 

Hem,  mea  Itlx,  tg  nunc,  mea  Terentia,  sic  vexSrl,  C,  Fam.,  xiv.  2,  2; 
Vm,  light  of  my  life,  for  you  to  he  so  harassed  now,  Terentia  dear. 
Hominemne  ROmSnum  tam  Graecg  loqul  1  Plin.,  Ep.,  iv.  3,  5  ;  a  Roman 
speak  such  good  Greek  ?    {To  think  that  a  Roman  should  speak  such 


ACCUSATIVE   AI^TD   IKFINITIVE.  337 

good  Greek.)  Mgne  incepto  desistere —  ?  V.,  J^.,  i.  37;  I^desist  from  my 
undertaking  ?  Hinc  abire  matrem'?  Ter.,  Hec,  612  ;  mother  go  away 
from  here  9 

Remarks. — i.  Different  is  quod,  which  gives  the  ground. 

Ei  mihi  quod  nullis  amor  est  sanabilis  herbis,  Ov.,  M.,  i.  523;  woe^s  me 
that  {in  that,  because)  love  is  not  to  be  cured  by  any  herbs. 

2.  On  ut,  with  the  Subjv.  in  a  similar  sense,  see  558.  Both  forms 
offer  an  objection. 

Accusative  and  Infinitive  as  a  Subject. 

535.  The  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  may  be  treated  as 
the  Subject  of  a  sentence.  The  Predicate  is  a  substantive  or 
neuter  adjective,  an  impersonal  verb  or  abstract  phrase. 

In  the  English  "  for— to,"  the  '■'■for  "  belongs  not  to  the  case  but  to  the  Infinitive,  but 
the  object  relation  haa  been  effaced  here  as  it  has  been  in  Latin.    See  422,  n.  1. 

Est  inusitatum  rggem  reum  capitis  esse,  C,  Dei.,  i.  i  ;  it  is  an  extra- 
ordinary thing  that  a  king  should  {for  a  king  to)  be  tried  for  his  life. 
Facinus  est  vincire  civem  Romanum,  C. ,  Verr.,  v.  66,  170;  it  is  an  outrage 
to  put  a  Roman  citizen  in  chains.  Necesse  est  facere  sumptum  qui  quaerit 
(=  eum  qui  quaerit)  lucrum,  Pl.,  As.,  218;  need  is  that  he  make  outlay 
who  an  income  seeks.  Legem  brevem  esse  oportet,  quo  facilius  ab  imperitis 
teneatur,  Sen,,  E.M.,  94,  38;  it  is  proper  that  a  law  should  be  brief 
{a  law  ought  to  be  brief),  that  it  may  the  more  easily  be  grasped  by  the 
uneducated.  Quid  MilSnis  intererat  interfici  Clodium,  C,  Mil.,  13,  34 
(382,  2).    Opus  est  t§  animo  valgre,  C,  Fam.,  xvi.  14,  2  (406,  n.  5). 

Remarks. —  i.  A  list  of  expressions  taking  the  Inf.  as  a  subj.  is  given 
in  422,  NN. 

2.  Oportet,  it  is  proper,  and  necesse  est,  must  needs,  are  often  used 
with  the  Subjunctive.     So  also  many  other  phrases  with  ut.    (See  557.) 

Necesse  also  takes  the  Dat.  of  the  Person  : 

lit  culpent  alii,  tibi  m5  laudare  necesse  est,  Ov.,  Her.,  12, 131 ;  let  others 
blame,  but  you  must  give  me  praise. 

3.  When  the  indirect  obj.  of  the  leading  verb  is  the  same  as  the 
subj.  of  the  Inf.  the  predicate  of  the  subj.  is  put  in  the  same  case  as  the 
indirect  object  :  in  standard  prose  chiefly  with  licet,  it  is  left  (free)  ; 
in  poetry  and  later  prose  with  necesse,  with  satius  est,  it  is  better,  con- 
tingit,  it  happens,  vacat,  there  is  room. 

Licuit  esse  otioso  Themistocli,  C,  Tusc,  i.  15,  33  ;  Themistocles  ivas 
free  to  live  a  life  of  leisure. 

The  Ace.  is  occasionally  found  ;  always  if  the  Dat.  is  not  expresvsed. 

Medios  esse  iam  non  lic6bit  (nos),  C,  -4^^.,  x.  8,  4;  it  will  no  longer  be 
allowable  to  be  neutral. 
22 


33<S  CAUSAL  se:n'teitces. 


Object  Sentences  Represented  by  the  Participle. 

536.  The  Participle  is  used  after  verbs  of  Perception  and 
Representation,  to  express  the  actual  condition  of  the  object 
of  perception  or  representation. 

Catonem  vidi  in  bibliotheca  sedentem  multis  circumfusum  Stoicorum 
libris,  C,  Fin.,  in.  2,  7  ;  I saiv  Cato  sitting  in  the  library  with  an  ocean 
of  Stoic  books  about  him.  Prodiga  non  sentit  pereuntem  fgmina  censum, 
Juv.,  VI.  362  ;  the  lavish  woman  does  not  perceii^e  (how)  the  income  (is) 
dwindling.  Saepe  illam  audivi  furtiva  voce  loquentem,  Cat.,  lxvii.  41; 
I  have  often  heard  her  talking  in  a  stealthy  {in  an  under-)  tone.  Gauds 
quod  spectant  oculi  te  mllle  loquentem,  II.,  E}^.,  i.  6,  19  (542).  PolyphS- 
mum  Homgrus  cum  ariete  conloquentem  facit,  C,  Tusc,  v.  39, 115  ;  Homer 
represents  Polyphemus  (as)  tcdking  with  the  ram. 

Notes.— 1.  This  construction  is  found  but  once  in  early  Latin  (Piso),  then  in  Cicero, 
Sallust,  Nepos,  ViTRUVius,  LivY,  Horace.  Tlie  naturalization  of  it  is  due  to  Cicero, 
and  other  students  of  Greek  models.  The  poverty  of  Latin  in  participles  was  a  serious 
drawback  to  the  convenient  distinction  from  the  Infinitive  ;  and  it  may  be  said  that  the 
participle  was  never  perfectly  at  home. 

2.  On  the  Inf.,  see  527,  n.  1.  The  Greek  construction  of  Part,  agreeing  with  the 
leading  Nom.  after  verbs  of  Perception  and  Emotion,  is  rare  and  poetical  : 

Gaudent  scribentSs,  H.,  Ep.,  n.  2, 107  ;  they  have  joy  while  ivriting.  SSnsit 
medios  dglapsus  in  hostSs,  V.,  A.,  11.  377  ;  he  iierceited  (it)  having  fcdlen  {that  he  had 
fallen)  'midst  the  enemy.  Gaudent  perfusi  sanguine  fratrum,  V.,  G.,  11. 510 ;  they 
r^oice,  bedrenched  with  brothers''  blood. 

637.  The  Perfect  Participle  Passive  is  used  after  verbs  of 
Ca-usation  and  Desire,  to  denote  impatience  of  anything  ex- 
cept entire  fulfilment : 

SI  qui  voluptatibus  dticuntur  missos  faciant  honorgs,  C,  Sest.,  66,  138  ; 
if  any  are  led  captive  by  sensual  pleasures,  let  them  dismiss  honors  {at 
once  and  forever).  Huic  mandgs  si  quid  rgctg  curatum  veils,  Ter.,  Ad., 
372  ;  you  must  intrust  to  him  whatever  you  want  properly  attended  to. 

Notes.— 1.  After  verbs  of  Will  and  Desire,  the  Inf.  esse  is  occasionally  found  with 
this  Part.,  and  hence  it  may  be  considered  a  Pf .  Infinitive  (280,  2,  c).  Compare,  how- 
ever, Pf.  Part.  pass,  with  opus  est,  USUS  est  (406). 

2.  The  verbs  of  Causation  tiius  employed  are  cOrare,  dare,  facere,  reddere.  The 
usage  is  most  common  in  early  Latin.    In  the  classical  period  only  missum  facere. 

CAUSAL   SENTENCES. 

538.  Causal  sentences  are  introduced  : 

1.  By  quia,  because,  quod,  {in  that)  because.  -j 

2.  By  quoniam    (quom   iam),    now    that,   quandfi,  quandS-  [•  ^  ^^^® 

quidem,  since.  )  I'^'oper.) 


CAUSAL   SENTENCES.  339 

3.  By  cum  (quom),  as.     (Inference.) 

4.  By  the  Relative  Pronoun,  partly  alone,  partly  with  ut,  utpote, 
quippe,  etc.     (See  626,  634.) 

Notes.— 1.  Quod  is  the  Ace.  Sing,  neuter,  and  quia  is  probably  the  Ace.  PI.  neuter 
from  the  rehitive  stem.  They  have  accordingly  often  a  correlative  demonstrative  ;  so 
with  quod :  eo,  ea  re,  ideo,  idcirco,  ea  gratia  (in  Sallust  only),  hoc,  hac  mente 
(H.,  ti.,  u.  2,  DO),  propterea,  and  a  few  combinations  with  ob  and  propter ;  with  quia 
are  found  eo,  ea  re,  ideo,  idcirco,  propterea,  and  ergo  (in  Plautub  only). 

2.  Quod  ai'd  quia  differ  in  classical  prose,  chieliy  in  that  quod  is  used,  and  not 
quia,  when  the  causal  sentence  is  at  the  same  time  an  object  sentence. 

3.  Quoniam  is  originally  temporal,  and  as  such  is  still  found  in  Plautus.  The 
causal  use  of  it  becomes  much  more  extensive  in  classical  prose,  and,  like  quandO 
(quandSquidem),  it  is  used  of  evident  reasons. 

4.  Quando  is  used  principally  as  a  temporal  particle.  In  a  causal  sense  it  is  very 
rare  in  Cicero  (in  the  Orations  never,  unless  compounded  with  quidem),  and  is  not 
found  in  Caesar.    The  compound  with  quidem  is  more  common. 

5.  Quatenus,  in  so  far  as,  is  poetical  and  in  late  prose.  Horace  shows  first  ex- 
ample, 0.,  III.  24, 30.  Valerius  M.,  Quintilian,  Tacitus,  Pliny  Minor,  and  Sue- 
tonius show  occasional  examples. 

Causal  Sentences  with  QTJOD,  QUIA,  QUONIAM,  and  QUANd8. 

539.  Causal  sentences  with  quod,  quia,  quoniam,  and 
quando  are  put  in  the  Indicative,  except  in  oblique  relation 
(Partial  or  Total). 

Remark. — The  other  person  of  the  obhque  clause  may  be  imaginary, 
and  the  writer  or  speaker  may  quote  from  himself  indirectly  : 

Laetatus  sum,  quod  mihi  licgret  rScta  defendere,  C,  Fam.,  i.  9,  18  ;  1 
was  glad  (to  say  to  myself)  tliat  I  ivas  free  to  champion  the  right. 

540.  Causal  sentences  with  quod,  quia,  quoniam,  and 
quando  take  the  Indicative  in  Direct  Discourse. 

Torquatus  filium  suum  quod  is  contra  imperium  in  hostem  pugnavera-t 
necari  iussit,  S.,  C,  52,  30  ;  Torquatus  hade  his  son  he  put  to  death 
because  he  had  fought  against  the  enemy  contrary  to  order(s)  [quod 
pugnasset  =  because,  as  Torquatus  said  or  thought].  Amantes  de  forma 
itidicare  non  possunt,  quia  sSnsum  oculorum  praecipit  animus.  Quint.,  vi. 
2,  0  ;  lovers  cannot  Judge  of  beauty,  because  the  heart  forestalls  the  eye. 
Quia  natura  mutari  non  potest  idcirco  vgrae  amicitiae  sempiternae  sunt, 
C,  Lael.,  9,  32;  because  nature  cannot  change,  therefore  true  friend- 
ships are  everlasting.  Neque  mg  vixisse  paenitet  quoniam  ita  vixi  ut  non 
frtistra  m5  natum  existumem,  C,  Cat. 31.,  23,  84  ;  cmd  I  am  not  sorry 
for  having  lived,  since  I  have  so  lived  that  I  think  I  was  born  not  in 
vain.  S51u8  er5  quoniam  n5n  licet  esse  tuum,  Prop.,  11.  9,  46  ;  I  shall  be 
alone  since  I  may  not  be  thine.  Voluptas  sgmovenda  est  quandS  ad  maiora 
quaedam  nati  sumus,  Of.  C,  Fin.,  v.  8,  21;  pleasure  is  to  be  put  aside 


340  CAUSAL   SENTENCES. 

because  we  are  horn  for  greater  things.  Erant  quibus  appetentior  famae 
[Helvidius]  vid5r6tur  quandS  etiam  sapientibus  cupidQ  gloriae  novissima 
exuitur,  Tag.,  //.,  iv.  6,  1  ;  /Acre  ivere  some  to  whom  Uelvidms  seemed 
too  eager  for  fame,  since,  eveii  from  the  wise,  ambition  is  the  last 
(infirmity)  that  is  put  of .  Sequitur  ut  liberatorgs  (sint),  quandoquidem 
tertium  nihil  potest  esse,  C,  Ph.,  ii.  13,  31. 

541.  Causal  sentences  with  quod,  quia,  quoniam,  and 
quandO  take  the  Subjunctive  in  Oblique  Discourse  (Partial 
or  Total). 

Noctu  ambulabat  in  publico  Themistoclgs  quod  somnum  capere  non  pos- 
set, C,  Tusc,  IV.  19,  44  ;  Themistocles  used  to  ivalk  about  in  public 
at  night  because  (as  he  said)  he  could  not  get  to  sleep.  Aristides  nonne 
ob  earn  causam  expulsus  est  patria  quod  praeter  modum  iustus  esset? 
C,  Tusc,  V.  36,  105  ;  {there  is)  Aristides ;  was  he  tiot  ba?iished  his  couti- 
try  for  the  {alleged)  reason  "  that  he  was  unreasonably  just  "  ?  [N6l 
compone  comas  quia  sis  venturus  ad  illam,  Ov.,  Rem. Am.,  679  (517). 
Quoniam  (so  most  MSS.)  ipse  pro  sS  dicere  non  posset,  verba  fgcit  frater 
eius  Stesagoras,  Nep.,  i.  7,  5;  "as  [Miltiades]  could  not  speak  for  him- 
self,'' his  brother,  Stesagoras,  made  a  speech.  (Indirect  quotation  from 
the  speech  of  Stesagoras.) 

A  good  example  is  Pl.,  31.  G.,  1412-15. 

Notes. — 1.  Quia  is  the  usual  particle  in  the  causal  sense  in  Plautus,  quod  being 
very  rare  ;  but  quod  is  more  coramou  in  Terence,  and  is  the  regular  particle  in  clas- 
sical prose  (Caesar  has  but  one  case  of  quia),  though  the  use  of  quia  revives  in  post- 
classical  Latin.  Cicero  makes  a  point  on  the  difference  in  meaning  in  Bosc.Am..,  50, 
145 :  conc6do  et  quod  {by  reason  of  the  fact  that)  animus  aequus  est,  et  quia 
{because)  necesse  est. 

2.  A  rejected  reason  is  introduced  by  non  quod  with  the  Subjv.  (as  being  the  sug- 
gestion of  another  person).  The  Indie,  which  is  properly  used  of  excluded  facts,  is 
also  used  of  flat  denials,  like  the  negative  and  Indie,  in  the  independent  sentence,  but 
the  Subjv.  is  the  rule.  N8n  quia  is  the  rule  in  early  Latin,  but  classical  prose  shows 
very  few  examples.  From  Livy  on  it  becomes  common.  Other  equivalents  are  nSn 
qu5,  non  eo  quod,  non  eo  qu5 ;  further,  n5n  quin  for  non  quo  nQn.  All  of  these  are 
found  with  Subjv.  only.  The  corresponding  affirmative  is  given  by  sed  quod  or  sed 
quia  indiscriminately,  regularly  with  the  Indicative. 

Subjunctive  : 

Pugil6s  in  iactandis  caestibus  ingemlscunt,  nOn  quod  doleant,  sed  quia 
profundenda  voce  omne  corpus  intenditur  venitque  plaga  vehementior,  c, 

I'usc,  II.  23,5(3;  boxers  injdying  the  caestus  heave  groans,  notthat  (as  you  might  sup- 
pose) they  are  In  pain,  but  because  in  giving  full  vent  to  (he  voice  all  the  body  is  put  to 
the  stretch  and  the  bloiv  comes  with  a  greater  rush.  Mai5rSs  nostrl  in  dominum  d6 
serv5  quaerl  n51u5runt ;  n5n  quIn  posset  vSrum  invenirl,  sed  quia  vidgbatur 
indignum  esse,  C,  Mil.,  22, 59  ;  our  ancestors  ivould  not  allow  a  slave  to  be  questioned 
by  toiture  against  his  master,  not  because  (not  as  though  they  thought)  Ute  truth  could 
not  be  got  at,  but  because  such  a  course  seemed  degrading.  A  [LacedaemoniSrum 
exulibus]  praetor  vim  arcuerat,  nOn  quia  salvOs  vellet  sed  quia  perire  causa 
indicta  nOlSbat.  L.,  xxxviii.33, 11 ;  the  praetor  had  warded  off  violence  from  the 


CAUSAL   SENTEN-CES.  34I 

Lacedaemonian  exiles,  not  (as  you  might  have  supposed)  because  he  wished  them  to 
escape,  but  because  he  did  not  ivish  them  to  perish  rvith  their  case  not  pleaded  (unheard). 

The  same  principle  apphes  to  magis  quod  (quo),  quia— quam  quo  (first  in  Cicero), 
quod  (first  in  Sallust),  quia  (first  in  Livy),  witli  the  moods  in  inverse  order. 

Libertatis  originem  inde,  magis  quia  annuum  imperium  consulate  factum 
est  quam  quod  demintitum  quidquam  sit  ex  rSgia  potestate,  numerfis,  L.,  n. 
I,  7  ;  you  may  begin  to  count  the  origin  of  liberty  from  that  ])oint,  rather  because  the 
consular  government  was  limited  to  a  year,  than  because  aught  was  taken  away  from 
the  rayed  poiver. 

Indicative  : 

Sum  non  dicam  miser,  sed  certe  exercitus,  non  quia  multis  dsbeo  sed  quia 
saepe  concurrunt  aliquorum  bene  de  m6  meritorum  inter  ipsSs  contentionSs, 

C,  Plane  ,  32,78  ;  I  a?n,  I  will  not  say,  ^vretched,  but  certainly  warned,  not  because  I 
am  in  debt  to  many,  but  because  the  rived  claims  of  some  whohave  deserved  well  of  me 
often  conflict.    Compare  also  H.,  S.,  11.  2,  89. 

3.  Verbs  of  Saying  and  Thinking  are  occasionally  put  in  the  Subjv.  with  quod  by 
a  kind  of  attraction.    Compare  585,  N.  3. 

Impetrare  nOn  potui,  quod  rgligione  b5  impediri  dicerent,  C,  Fam.,  iv.  12, 3 ; 
I  could  not  obtain  permission,  because  they  said  they  ivere  embarrassed  (pj^evented)  by 
a  religious  scruple  (=  quod  impedirentur,  because  (as  they  said)  they  ivere prevented). 

This  attraction  is  said  to  occur  not  unfrequently  in  Cicero,  several  times  in  Caesar 
and  Sallust,  but  ia  not  cited  from  any  other  author.  Compare,  however,  crSderent, 
L.,  XXI.  1,3. 

4.  On  the  use  of  tamquam,  etc.,  to  indicate  an  assumed  reason,  see  602,  n.  4. 

5.  Quandoque  is  archaic  and  rare.  It  is  found  first  in  the  Twelve  Tables,  a  few 
times  in  Cicero  and  Livy,  three  times  in  Horace,  and  occasionally  later. 

6.  Causal  sentences  may  be  represented  by  a  participle  (069),  or  by  the  relative  (626). 


QUOD  with  Verbs  of  Emotion. 

542.  Quod  is  used  to  give  the  ground  of  Emotions  and  Ex- 
pressions of  Emotion,  such  as  verbs  of  Joy,  Sorrow,  Sur- 
prise, Satisfaction  and  Anger,  Praise  and  Blame,  Thanks 
and  Complaint. 

The  rule  for  the  Mood  has  been  given  already :  539. 

Indicative  : 

Gaude  quod  spectant  ocull  tS  mllle  loquentem,  H.,  Ep.,  i.  6,  19  ;  rejoict 
that  a  thousand  eyes  are  gazing  at  you  (while  you  are)  speaking.  Dolet 
mih!  quod  tii  nunc  stomacharis,  C,  ad  Br.,  i.  17,  6  ;  it  pains  me  that  you 
are  angry  now.  Quintum  paenitet  quod  animum  tuum  oifendit,  Cf.  C,  Att., 
XI.  13,  2  (877,  R.  3),  luvat  mg  quod  vigent  studia,  Plin.,  Fp.,  i.  13,  1 ;  / 
am  charmed  that  studies  are  flourishiiig .  Tristis  es  ?  indignor  quod  sum 
tibi  causa  doloris,  Ov.,  Tr.,  iv,  3,  33;  are  you  sad  ?  I  am  provoked  (with 
myself)  that  I  am  a  cause  of  pain  to  you.  Tibi  gratias  ago,  quod  m5 
omni  molestia  liberasti,  C,  Fam..,  xiii.  62;  /  thank  you,  that  you  freed 
me  from  all  annoyance. 

Subjunctive  : 

Gaudet  miles  quod  vicerit  hostem,  Ov.,  Tr.,  11.  49  ;  the  soldier  rejoices 


342  SENTENCES   OF   DESIGN    AND   TENDENCY. 

at  having  conquered  the  enemy.  Neque  mihi  umquam  veniet  in  mentem 
poenitSre  quod  a  mS  ipse  non  desciverim,  C,  Att.,  ii.  4,  3  ;  it  will  never 
occur  to  me  to  he  sorry  for  not  having  been  untrue  to  myself.  Laudat 
Africanum  Panaetius  quod  fuerit  abstinens,  C,  Off.,  11.  22,  76  ;  Panaetius 
praises  Africanus  for  having  been  abstinent.  NemS  est  oratorem  quod 
Latine  loquergtur  admiratus,  C,  Or.,  iii.  14,  52;  no  07ie{e\er)  admired  an 
orator  for  speaking  (good)  Latin.  S5cratSs  accusatus  est  quod  corrumpe- 
ret  iuventutein,  Quint.,  iv.  4,  5  ;  Socrates  ivas  accused  of  corrupting 
youth.  Memini  gloriari  solitum  esse  Quintum  HortSnsium  quod  numquam 
bello  civili  interfuisset,  C,  Fam.,  11.  16, 3;  I  remember  that  Quintus  Ilor- 
tensius  used  to  boast  of  never  having  engaged  in  civil  war.  Agunt  gra- 
tias  quod  sib!  pepercissent,  Caes.,  B.C.,  i.  74,  2  (511,  r.  i). 

Remark. — This  class  of  verbs  may  be  construed  with  the  Ace.  and 
Inf. :  salvom  t§  advgnisse  gaudeS  (533)  ;  also  with  quia,  principally  in 
early  Latin,  and  in  Cicero's  Letters,  then  occasionally  in  Livy,  Taci- 
tus, Suetonius,  and  later.  But  in  Expressions  of  Praise  and  Blame, 
Thanks  and  Complaint,  quod  is  more  common.     On  cum,  see  564,  n.  2. 

Amo  te  et  n6n  neglexisse  habeo  gratiam,  Ter.,  Fh.,  54  ;  /  love  you 
(=  mucli  obliged),  ayid  I  am  thankful  to  you  for  not  having  neglected 
(it).  Gratulor  ingenium  n5n  latuisse  tuum,  Ov.,  Tr.,  i.  9,  54;  I  congratu- 
late (you)  that  your  genius  has  not  laifi  hidden.  [TsocratSs]  queritur  plGs 
honoris  corporum  quam  animorum  virtutibus  darl.  Quint.,  hi.  8,  9  ;  Iso- 
crales  complai^is  that  more  lionor  is  paid  to  the  virtues  of  the  body  than 
to  those  of  the  mi7id. 

Notes.— 1.  Perplexing  Emotion  (Wonder)  may  be  followed  by  a  Conditional,  or  by 
a  Dependent  Interrogative,  as  in  English,  but  this  construction  is  not  found  in  Vergil, 
CAiifsAU,  Sallust,  and  is  never  common. 

Miror  si  [  Tarquinius]  quemquam  amlcum  habere  potuit,  C,  Lad.,  15, 54 ;  / 
wonder  if  Tarquin  could  ever  have  had  a  friend. 

Besides  mlror  (and  mirum),  there  is  one  case  of  gaudeo  si  in  C'iceko  ( VeiT.,  iv.  17, 
37),  and  a  few  cases  after  expressions  of  Fear  in  Tacitus.  There  are  also  sporadic  cases 
of  indignari  (indignitas)  si. 

2.  Noteworthy  is  tlie  phrase  mIrum  (-a)  nt  (nisi),  "'tis  a  wonder  that— not.,  which 
belongs  to  the  colloquialisms  of  early  Latin  (Pl.,  Capt.y  820),  but  reappears  once  in  Livy. 


SENTENCES  OF  DESIGN  AND  TENDENCY. 

543.  I.  Sentences  of  Design  are  commonly  called  Final 
Sentences.  Sentences  of  Tendency  are  commonly  called 
Consecutive  Sentences.  Both  contemplate  the  end — the  one, 
as  an  aim  ;  the  other,  as  a  consequence. 

2.  They  are  alike  in  having  the  Subjunctive  and  the  par- 
ticle ut  {hoiu,  that),  a  relative  conjunction. 


FINAL   SENTENCES.  343 

3,  They  differ  in  the  Tenses  employed.  The  Final  Sen- 
tence^ as  a  rule,  takes  only  the  Present  and  Imperfect  Sub- 
junctive. Consecutive  Sentences  may  take  also  Perfect  and 
Pluperfect. 

4.  They  differ  in  the  kind  of  Subjunctive  employed.  The 
Final  Sentence  takes  the  Optative.  The  Consecutive  Sen- 
tence takes  the  Potential.  Hence  the  difference  in  the 
Nega^tive. 

Final :  n6  (ut  ng),  Consecutive  :  ut  non,  Ihat  not. 

ne  quis,  ut  n6m6,  iliat  no  one. 

ne  ullus,  ut  nullus,  that  no. 

ne  umquam,  (ne  quandO,)         ut  numquam,  that  never, 

ne  usquam,  (necubi,)  ut  nusquam,  that  7wwhere. 

ne  aut — aut,  (ut  n6ve — neve,)  ut  neque — neque,  that  neither — nor. 

Remarks. — i.  Verbs  of  Effecting  have  the  Final  Sequence. 

2.  Verbs  of  Hindering  have  the  sequence  of  the  Final  Sentence,  but 
often  the  signification  of  the  Consecutive. 

3,  Verbs  of  Fearing  belong  to  the  Final  Sentence  only  so  far  as  they 
have  the  Optative  Subjunctive  ;  the  subordinate  clause  is  only  semi- 
dependent  upon  the  principal,  and  we  have  a  partial  survival  of  orig- 
inal parataxis. 

Note?.— 1.  Inasmuch  as  the  Sahjv.  cannot  express  a  fact,  the  Latin  Consecutive 
clause  does  not  properly  express  actual  result,  but  only  a  tendency,  which  may,  we 
infer.,  lead  to  a  result.  To  obviate  this  difliculty,  the  Latin  has  recourse  to  the  circum- 
locutions with  accidit,  gvenit,  ^tc. 

2.  It  is  to  be  remarked  that  the  difference  "between  Final  and  Consecutive  often  con- 
sists only  in  tlie  point  of  viev/.  What  is  final  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  doer  is 
consecutive  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  spectator  ;  hence  the  variation  in  sequence 
and  negative  after  verbs  of  Effecting.  A  frustrated  purpose  gives  a  negative  result ; 
hence  the  variation  in  negative  after  verbs  of  Hindering. 

3.  Here  and  there  in  Cicero,  more  often  in  Livy  and  later  writers,  instead  of  nSve 
(neu),  a  second  clause  is  added  by  neque,  the  force  of  the  final  particle  being  felt 
througliout  the  sentence. 

Monitor  tuus  suadebit  tibl  ut  hinc  discedas  neque  mihl  verbum  uUum 
respondeas,  C,  Mv.  in.  Caec,  i6, 52  ;  your  adviser  will  counsel  you  to  depart  hence  and 
answer  me  never  a  word. 

FINAL    SENTENCES. 

544.  Final  Sentences  are  divided  into  two  classes  : 

I.  Final  Sentences  in  which  the  Design  is  expressed  by 
the  particle ;  Pure  Final  Sentences  (Sentences  of  Design). 

Oportet  esse,  ut  vivas,  n5n  vivere  ut  edas,  [C],  ad  Her.^  iv.  28,  39;  you 

must  eat  in  order  to  live,  not  live  in  order  to  eat. 


344  FIKAL  SEKTENCES. 

This  form  may  be  translated  by,  {in  order)  to  ;  sometimes  by  thai 
may,  that  might,  that,  with  the  Subjunctive  and  the  like. 

II.  Final  Sentences  in  which  the  Design  lies  in  the  lead- 
ing verb  (verba  studii  et  voluntatis,  verbs  of  Will  and  Desire); 
Complementary  Final  Sentences. 

Volo  uti  mih!  respondeas,  C,  Vat.,  7, 17;  I ivish  you  to  answer  me. 
This  form  is  often  rendered  by  to,  never  by  in  order  to,  sometimes 
by  that  and  the  Subjunctive,  or  some  equivalent. 

Of  the  same  nature,  but  partly  Final  and  partly  Consecu- 
tive in  their  sequence,  are  : 
Verbs  of  Hindering. 

Peculiar  in  their  sequence  are  : 

III.  Verbs  of  Fearing. 

Remarks. — i.  The  use  of  the  Subjv.  with  Temporal  Particles  often 
adds  a  final  sense,  inasmuch  as  the  Subjv.  reg'ularly  looks  forward  to 
the  future.     So  dum,  dSnec,  quoad  (572),  antequam,  priusquam  (577). 
2.  The  general  sense  of  a  Final  Sentence  may  also  be  expressed: 
(i)  By  the  Relative  qui  with  the  Subjunctive.     (G30.) 

(2)  By  the  Genitive  of  Gerund  or  Gerundive,  with  (seldom  without) 
causa  or  gratia.     (428,  \i.  2.) 

(3)  By  ad  with  Gerund  and  Gerundive.     (433.) 

(4)  By  the  Dative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive.     (429,  2.) 

(5)  By  the  Accusative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  after  verbs  of 
Giving,  Wc.    (430.) 

(6)  By  the  Accusative  Supine  after  verbs  of  Motion.     (435.) 

(7)  By  the  Future  Participle  xYctive  (post-Ciceronian).     (438,  n.) 

(8)  By  the  Infinitive  (poetic  and  rare).     (421,  n.  1,  a.) 

I.    Pure  Final  Sentences. 
645.   Pure  Final  Sentences  are  introduced  by  : 

1.  Tit  (utl)  (how)  that,  and  other  relative  pronouns  and 
advei-bs.     (030.) 

lit  and  nS  are  often  preceded  by  a  demonstrative  expression,  such 
as:  idcircQ,  therefore;  e5,  to  that  end ;  propterea,  on  that  account ;  e3 
cSnsiliS,  'With  that  design  ;  ea  causa,  r6,  for  i/iat  reason. 

2.  Quo  =  ut  eo,  that  thereby;  with  comparatives,  that 
the  .  . ,  —  ; 


FINAL   SENTENCES.  345 

3.  Ne,  that  not,  lest,  continued  by  neve,  neu.     (444.) 

Oportet  esse,  ut  vivas,  non  vivere  ut  edas,  [C],  ad  Her.,  iv.  28,  39  (544, 
I.).  Inventa  sunt  specula,  ut  homo  ipse  se  nosset,  Sen.,  i\^.^.,  i.  17,  4; 
mirrors  ivere  invented,  to  make  man  acquainted  with  himself.  Ut 
amgris,  amabilis  esto,  Ov^,  A. A.,  11.  107;  that  you  may  he  loved  {to  make 
yourself  loved,  in  order  to  he  loved),  be  lovable.  Legem  brevem  esse 
oportet, quo faciliusabimperitisteneatur, Sen.,  E.M.,  94,  88(535).  [Senex] 
serit  arbores,  quae  alter!  saeclo  prosint,  Caecilius  (C,  Tusc.,i.  14,  31); 
the  old  man  sets  out  trees,  to  do  good  to  the  next  generation.  Semper  habe 
Pyladen  aliquem  qui  curet  Orestem,  Ov.,  Bern.  Am. ,  589 ;  ahvays  have  some 
Pylades,  to  tend  Orestes.  [AthgnignsSs]  creant  decern  praetorgs  qui  exer- 
citui  praeessent,  Nep.,  i.  4,  4  ;  the  Athenians  make  ten  generals  to  com- 
mand their  army.  [Magngsiam  Themistocli  Artaxerxgs]  urbem  donarat, 
quae  ei  panem  praebgret,  Nep.,  ii.  10,  3;  Artaxerxes  had  giveii  Themis- 
iocles  the  city  of  3Iagnesia,  to  furnish  him  with  bread.  Gallinae  pennis 
fovent  puUos,  n6  frigore  laedantur,  Cf.  C,  N.D.,u.  52,  129;  hens  keep 
(their)  chickens  warm  tvith  {their)  wings,  that  they  may  not  he  {to  keep 
them  from  being)  hurt  by  the  cold.  Dionysius,  ng  coUum  tonsori  commit- 
teret,  tondgre  filias  suas  docuit,  C,  Tusc,  v.  20,  58  (423,  n,  G). 

Remarks. — i.  Ut  ng  is  found  for  ng  with  apparently  no  difference  in 
signification,  occasionally  at  all  periods,  but  not  in  Caesar,  Sallust, 
LiVY.  Quo  without  comparative  is  rare  and  cited  only  from  Plautus, 
Terence,  Sallust,  Ovid,  and  later  Latin;  qu5ne  (=ut  ng)  is  not  found 
till  the  time  of  Dictys  ;  apparent  examples  in  classical  Latin  are  to  be 
otherwise  explained.     Quominus  and  quin  occur  in  special  uses. 

2.  Ut  non  is  used  when  a  particular  word  is  negatived : 

Confer  tg  ad  Mallium,  ut  non  giectus  ad  alignos  sed  invitatus  ad  tuos 
isse  videaris,  C,  Cat.,  i.  9,  23;  betake  yourself  to  Ilallius,  that  you  may 
seem  to  have  gone  not  as  an  outcast  to  strangers  but  as  an  invited  guest 
to  your  own  (friends). 

3.  Ut  and  ne  are  used  parenthetically  at  all  periods,  depending  on 
a  suppressed  word  of  Saying  or  tlie  like. 

Utque  magis  stupeas  ludos  Paridemque  reliquit,  Juv.,  vi.  87  ;  aiid  to 
stun  you  more  (I  tell  you  that)  she  left  Paris  and  the  games. 

The  verb  of  Saying  may  be  inserted:  atque  ut  omngs  intellegant  dicS, 
C,  Imp.,  8,  20  ;  and  that  all  may  under stayid,  I  say. 


II.   Complementary  Final  Sentences. 

A.    Verbs  of  Will  and  Desire. 

546.   Complementary    Final    Sentences    follow    verbs  of 
Willing  and  Wishing,  of  Warning  and  Beseeching,  of  Urg- 


346  FIJ^AL   SENTENCES. 

ing  and  Demanding,  of  Eesolving  and  Endeavoring  (verba 
studii  et  voluntatis). 

1.  Positive  :  ut. 

Vols  uti  mih!  respondeas,  C,  Vat.,  7, 17  (544,  II.).  (Phaethon)  optavit 
ut  in  currura  patris  tolleretur,  C,  Off.,ui.  25,94;  Phaethon  desired  4o 
be  lifted  up  into  his  fathefs  chariot.  Admoneo  ut  cottidie  meditere 
resistendum  esse  iracundiae,  C,  Q.F.,  1. 1.  13,  38;  I  admonish  you  to  reflect 
daily  that  resistance  must  be  made  to  hot-headedness.  Ubii  (Caesarem) 
orant,  ut  sib!  parcat,  Caes.,  B.G.,  vi.  q,  7  ;  the  Ubii  beg  Ca>sar  to  spare 
them.  Sed  precor  ut  possim  tutius  esse  miser,  Ov.,  Tr.,  v.  2,  78  (423,  2). 
Exigis  ut  Priamus  natorum  funere  ludat,  Ov.,  Tr.,  v.  12,  7;  you  exact  that 
Priam  sport  at  (bib)  sons'  funeral.  AtheniensSs  cum  statuerent  ut  navgs 
conscenderent,  Cyrsilum  quendam  suadentem  ut  in  urbe  manerent  lapidibus 
obru6runt,  C,  Off.,\u.  11,  48;  the  Athenians,  resolving  to  go  07i  board 
their  ships,  overwhelmed  with  stories  (=  stoned)  one  Cyrsilus,  who  tried 
to  persuade  them  to  remairi  m  the  city. 

So  also  any  verb  or  phrase  used  as  a  verb  of  Willing  or 
Demanding. 

Pythia  respondit  ut  moenibus  ligneis  s§  munirent,  Nep.,  it.  2,  6  ;  the 
Pythia  answered  that  they  must  defend  themselves  with  walls  of  wood. 

2.  Negative  :  ne,  ut  ne ;  continued  by  neve  (neu),  and  not, 

Caesar  suls  imperavit  ne  quod  omnino  telum  in  hostSs  reicerent,  Caes., 
B.  G.,  I.  46,  2 ;  Caesar  gave  orders  to  his  (men)  not  to  throw  back  any  mis- 
sile at  all  at  the  enemy.  Themistocles  [coUggis  suis]  praedixit  ut  n6  prius 
LacedaemoniOrum  legates  dimitterent  quam  ipse  esset  remissus,  Nep.,  ii.  7, 
3  ;  Themistocles  told  his  colleagues  beforeharid  not  to  dismiss  the  Lace- 
daemonian envoys  before  he  were  sent  bach.  Pompeius  suis  praedixerat 
ut  Caesaris  impetum  exciperent  n5ve  s6  loco  movSrent,  Caes  ,  B.C.,  in.  92, 
1  ;  Pompey  had  told  his  men  beforehand  to  receive  Caesar's  charge  and 
not  to  move  from  their  position. 

Remarks.  — I.  When  verbs  of  Willing  antl  Wishing  are  used  as 
verl)s  of  Saying  and  Thinking,  Knowing  and  Showing,  the  Inf.  must 
be  used.  The  English  translation  is  that,  and  the  Indie. :  vol5,  /  ivill 
have  it  (maintain),  moneo,  /  remark,  persuadeo,  I  convince,  decerns,  1 
decide,  c6g5,  1  conclude. 

[MoneoJ  artem  sine  ad^iduitate  diCDndi  r.:n  multum  iuvare,  Cf.  [C],  ad 
Her.,  T.  1, 1  :  J  rcr.iark  that  art  without  cov.stant  practice  in  speaking  is 
of  little  avail.  Vix  cuiquam  persuadebatur  Graecia  omni c6s8ur5s  (RSmanQs), 
L.,  XXXIII.  32,  3  ;  scarce  any  one  could  be  persuaded  that  the  Romans 
would  retire  from  all  Greece.  N5n  sunt  isti  audiendl  qui  virtuteni  duram 
ot  quasi  ferream  esse  quandam  volunt,  C,  Lael.,  13,  48  (313,  r.  2).     Est 


FINAL   SENTENCES.  347 

mos  hominum  ut  nolint  eundem  pluribus  r6bus  excellere,  C,  Brut.,  21,  84  ; 
it  is  the  ivay  of  the  world  not  to  alloiv  tliat  the  same  man  excels  in  more 
things  (than  one). 

2.  When  the  idea  of  Wislnng  is  emphatic,  the  simple  Subjv.,  with- 
out ut,  is  employed,  and  the  restriction  of  sequence  to  Pr.  and  Impf. 
is  removed  : 

Velim  existimes  ngminem  cuiquam  cariorem  umquam  fuisse  quam  te  mihi, 
C,  Fam.,  I.  9,  24 ;  /  ivish  you  to  think  that  no  one  was  ever  dearer  to 
any  one  than  you  to  me.  Malo  te  sapiens  hostis  metuat  quam  stulti  civgs 
laudent,  L.,  xxii.  39,  20  ;  1  had  rather  a  wise  enemy  should  fear  you 
til  an  foolish  citizens  shoidd  praise  you.  Excusatum  habeas  mg  rogo, 
cgno  doml,  Mart.,  ii.  79,  3  (238)-  Hue  ades,  insani  feriant  sine  litora 
fluctus,  v.,  Ec,  9,  43  ;  come  hither  (and)  let  tlie  mad  waves  lash  the 
shores.  Tam  fglix esses  quam  formosissima  vellem,  Ov.,  Am.,  i.  8,  27  (302). 
Vellem  me  ad  cenam  invitasses,  C,  Fam.,  xii.  4,  1  (261,  R.).  Occidit  occi- 
deritque  sinas  cum  nomine  Troia,  V.,  A.,  xii.  828  ;  'tis  fallen,  ajid  let 
Troy  be  fallen,  name  and  all. 

So  iubeo  in  poetry  and  later  pi-ose.  Compare  also  potius  quam,  577,  n.  6. 

3.  Ut  ne  is  not  used  after  verbs  of  negative  signification,  as  impediS, 
/  hinder,  recuse,  /  refuse  (548).  Otherwise  there  seems  to  be  no  differ- 
ence in  meaning  between  it  and  ne,  except  that  sometimes  the  n6  seems 
to  apply  more  to  a  single  word  in  the  sentence. 

4.  On  ngdum,  see  482,  5,  r,  2. 

Notes.— 1.  Such  verbs  and  phrases  are  :  Willing  ax\(\  Wishivg :  volo,  nol5,  mal5, 
opto,  studeo.  Warning  and  Beseeching:  hortor,  adhortor,  moneo,  admoneS, 
auctor  sum,  consilium  do,  orS,  rogo,  peto,  precor,  posco,  postulo,  fiagito,  ob- 
secro.  Urging  and  Demanding;  suadeo,  persuadeo,  censeo,  impero,  mando, 
praecipio,  6dico,  dico,  scribo  Resolving  and  Endeatoring .-  statuo,  constituo, 
decerno,  nitor,  contendo,  laboro,  pugno,  id  ago,  operam  do,  euro,  video,  pro- 
video,  prospiciS,  legem  fero,  Igx  est,  etc. 

2.  Substantives  of  kindred  meaning,  in  combination  with  the  copula  or  other  verbs, 
take  similar  constructions.  Such  are  voluntas,  cupiditas,  spgs,  ardor,  auctdritas, 
consilium  (especially  in  the  combination  eo,  hoc  consilio),  signum,  praeceptum, 
exemplum,  propositum,  officium,  negotium,  munus,  verba,  and  litterae  (with 
dare,  mittere,  etc.),  sententia,  animus  (especially  eo  animo),  condicio  (especially 
ea  condicione),  foedus,  itis,  Igx  (ea  Igge),  cura,  opera,  causa,  ratio. 

8.  Instead  of  ut  with  the  Subjv.,  the  Inf.  is  frequently  used  with  this  class  of  verbs. 
So,  generally,  with  iubeo,  Ij>rder,  532.  With  verbs  of  Asking,  however,  the  Inf.  ia 
not  common  until  Vergil.  Orare  has  Inf.  once  in  Plautus,  then  in  Vergil  and  later 
poets  ;  in  prose  first  in  Tacitus.  Rogare  has  ut  regularly,  Inf.  only  once  (Cat.,  xxxv. 
10).  Quaeso,  imploro,  obsecro,  obtestor,  never  have  Inf.,  flagitare  only  once 
(H.,*S'.,  11.4,  Gl)  until  Suetonius;  postulare  very  often,  especially  in  early  Latin  in 
the  sense  expect ;  poscere  not  till  the  Augustan  poets.  Authors  vary.  The  use  of  the 
Inf.  is  wider  in  poetry  and  silver  prose. 

B.    Verbs  of  Hindering. 

547.  The  dependencies  of  verbs  of  Hindering  may  be  regarded  as 
partly  Final,  partly  Consecutive.    Ng  and  quominus  are  originally  final, 


348  FINAL   SENTENCES. 

but  the  final  sense  is  often  effaced,  especially  in  quominus.  Quin  is  a 
consecutive  particle.  The  sequence  of  verbs  of  Hindering  is  that  of 
the  Final  Sentence. 

The  negative  often  disappears  in  the  English  translation. 

548.  Verbs  and  phrases  signifying  to  Prevent,  to  Forbid, 
to  Refuse,  and  to  Beware,  may  take  ne  with  the  Subjunc- 
tive, if  they  are  not  negatived. 

Impedior  ng  pltira  dicam,  C,  SulL,  33,  92  ;  I  am  hindered  from  say- 
ing more  (I  am  hindered  that  I  should  say  no  more).  "  Who  did  hinder 
you  that  ye  should  not  obey  the  truth  ?"    Gal.,  v.  7. 

Servitus  mea  mihi  interdixit  ng  quid  mirer  meum  malum,  Pl.,  Pers., 
621 ;  my  slavery  has  forbidden  me  to  marvel  aught  at  ill  of  mine.  Hi- 
stiaeus  ng  res  conficeretur  obstitit,  Nep.  ,  i  3,  5  ;  Histiaeus  opposed  the 
thing's  being  done.  (Rggulus)  sententiam  ng  diceret  recusavit,  C. ,  Off. ,  in. 
27,  100;  Regidus  refused  to  pronounce  an  opinion.  Maledictis  dgterrgre 
ng  scribat  parat,  Ter.,  Ph.,  3  (423,  2).  Tantum  cum  finges  ne  sis  mani- 
fgsta  cavgto,  Ov.,  A. A.,  in.  801  (271,  2).  Tantum  ng  noceas  dum  vis  pr5- 
desse  vidgto,  Ov.,  Tr.,  i.  r,  101;  only  see  {to  it)  that  you  do  not  do  harm 
while  you  wish  to  do  good. 

NoTKS.— 1.  The  most  important  of  these  words  are:  Preventing :  impedire,  im- 
pediments esse,  prohibgre,  tengre,  retingre,  dgterrgre,  intercludere,  interpel- 
lare,  deprecari,  obsistere,  obstare,  intercgdere,  interponere.  Forbidding: 
interdicere.  lief  using :  rectisare,  repugnare,  resistere,  sg  tengre,  sg  repri- 
mere,  sib!  temperare,  morari.  Beware:  cavgre,  vidgre,  and  a  few  others, 
especially  the  plirase  per  aliquem  Stare  (more  often  with  quominus). 

2.  Many  verbs  of  Preventing  and  Refusing  also  take  quominus  (549),  and  some  also 
the  Infinitive  (423,  2,  N.  2). 

3.  Cavgre,  to  beivare,  and  praecavgre  belong  to  verbs  of  Hindering  only  so  far  as 
action  is  contemplated.  Cavgre,  followed  by  ut,  means  to  be  sure  to ;  by  ng  or  ut 
ng,  to  see  to  it  that  not ;  by  ng,  to  take  2)recauti07is  against.  When  ng  is  omitted, 
cavg,  cavgto,  with  the  Siibjv ,  form  circumlocutions  for  the  negative  Imperative 
(271,  2).  So  with  vidg  ut,  ng.  Cavgre  also  has  the  Inf.  occasionally  as  a  verb  of 
negative  Will  (423,  2,  n.  2),  beginning  with  Plautus.  In  prose  it  is  cited  only  from 
Cato  (once),  Cicero  {Att.,111. 17,8),  Sallust  (/«{/.,  64, 2),  and  Pliny  Mai. 

4.  Vidg  ng  (ng  non),  see  to  it  lest,  is  often  used  as  a  polite  formula  for  dubito  an 
(457, 2),  /  aiii  inclined  to  think.  Credere  omnia  vidg  ng  non  sit  necesse,  c,  Div., 
11.13,31. 

549.  Verbs  of  Preventing  and  Refusing  may  take  quominus 
(=  ut  eo  minus),  that  therehy  the  less,  with  the  Subjunctive, 

Aetas  nOn  impedit  quSminus  agri  colendl  studia  tenesmus,  0.,  Cat. 31., 
17,  60  ;  age  does  not  hinder  oar  retaining  interest  in  agriculture.  Non 
dgterret  sapientem  mors  quominus  rei  publicae  c5nsulat,  C,  Tusc,  i.  38, 
91 ;  death  does  not  deter  the  sage  from  co?isulting  the  interest  of  the 
State.     Quid  obstat  quOminus  (Deus)  sit  beatus  ?  C,  N.D.,  i.  34,  95;  what 


FINAL  SENTENCES.  349 

is  in  the  way  of  God's  being  happy  ?  Caesar  cognSvit  per  AfrSnium 
stare  quominus  proelio  dimicargtur,  Caes.,  B.C.,  i.  41,  3  ;  Caesar  foutid 
that  it  was  A f ramus'' s  fault  that  there  was  no  decisive  fight  (stat,  there 
is  a  stand-still). 

Notes.— 1.  With  impedlre  and  proMbere  Caesar  never  uses  quSminiis ;  Cicero 
rarely.  Bnt  with  other  words  implying  Hindrance  Cicero  uses  quSminus  not  unfre- 
quently.  With  proMbSre  the  regular  construction  is  the  Inf.,  but  this  is  rare  with 
impedlre,  quSminus  being  the  rule.  Witli  reciisare,  the  Inf.  is  rare  (Cxes.,B.G., 
in.  22, 8)  but  classical,  becoming  more  frequent  from  Livy  on.  The  passive  of  deter- 
rgre  is  also  construed  with  the  Inf.  occasionally. 

2.  Plautus  does  not  use  qu.5m.imis,  Terence  first,  but  seldom.  It  is  eajjecially 
common  from  the  time  of  Cicero.  In  Terence  the  elements  are  sometimes  separated 
(quo  -minus),  thus  emphasizmg  the  relative  character.  But  it  is  not  so  used  in  the 
classical  Latin,  and  in  the  Silver  Age  the  force  of  its  origin  ceases  to  be  felt,  so  that  it  is 
construed  like  quin.  The  fact  that  it  is  not  found  in  Plautus  nor  in  Vitruvius  haa 
led  to  the  suggestion  that  it  is  a  book-word. 

.  3.  The  difference  in  usage  between  qu5minus  and  quln  seema  to  be  that  while 
quIn  is  always  used  with  negatives,  quOminus  occurs  sometimes  with  positives,  so  that 
according  to  the  connection  it  is  either  Final  or  Consecutive. 

4.  Qu5  setius  for  quominus  is  archaic,  but  occurs  twice  in  Cornipicius  and 
twice  in  Cicero  {Liv.,  11. 45,  Vi2  ;  57, 170). 

III.    Verbs  of   Fearing. 

550.  I.  Verbs  of  Fearing,  and  expressions  that  involve 
Fear,  take  the  Present  and  Perfect,  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect 
Subjunctive. 

The  Present  Subjunctive  represents  the  Present  and  Future 
Indicative.  The  Perfect  Subjunctive  regularly  represents 
the  Perfect  Indicative. 

Present  and  Perfect  Subjunctive  become  Imperfect  and 
Pluperfect  after  a  Past  Tense. 

These  constructions  are  survivals  of  the  original  parataxis,  when  n€  and  tit  were 
particles  of  wish.  Thus,  timeO  :  n6  veniat,  lam  afraid;  may  he  not  come  (i.e.,  lam, 
afraid  that  he  will),  becomes,  when  the  two  clauses  are  combined,  time5  nS  veniat, 
/  am  afraid  lest  (that)  he  may  ivdll)  com£.  Similarly  with  ut,  \\'hich  in  this  usage 
was  originally  how.    Hence, 

2.  With  verbs  of  Fearing,  ne,  lest,  shows  that  the  nega- 
tive is  wished  and  the  positive  feared  ;  ut  (ne  non)  shows 
that  the  positive  is  wished  and  the  negative  feared  :  ne  non 
is  used  regularly  after  the  negative,  or  an  interrogative  with 
negative  force. 

Vereor  nS  hostis  veniat,  I  fear  lest  the  enemy  come,  that  he  is  eomitig^ 
that  he  will  come.  ( /  ivish  he  may  not  come.) 

Vereor  n5  hostis  v6nerit,  /  fear  lest  the  enemy  have  come,  that  {it  will 
turn  out  that)  he  has  come. 


350  PIiq-AL   SENTENCES. 

Vereor  ut  amicus  veniat,  I  fear  (Jiow  my  friend  can  come)  lest  my  friend 
come  not,  that  he  is  not  coming,  will  not 
come.     {I  wish  he  may  come.) 

Vereor  ut  amicus  venerit,  /  fear  lest  my  friend  have  not  co?7ie,  that  he 
has  not  come. 

Non  vereor  ne  amicus  non  veniat,  /  do  not  fear  that  my  friend  is  not 
coming,  tvill  not  come. 

Non  vereor  n5  amicus  non  venerit,  /  do  not  fear  that  my  friend  has  not 
come. 

Id  pavgs,  ne  dticas  tu  illam,  tu  autem  ut  dtlcas,  Ter.,  A7id.,  349  ;  thafs 
what  you  dread,  you  lest  you  marry  her  (n§  ducam !) ;  you,  on  the  other 
hand,  lest  you  don't  (utinam  ducam!). 

Vereor  ne  dum  minuere  velim  laTaorem  augeam,  C. ,  Leg.,  i.  4, 12 ;  I  fear 
lest,  while  I  icish  to  lessen  the  toil,  I  increase  it  {that  I  am  increasing 
it).  Vergmur  nS  parum  hie  liber  mellis  et  absinthiS  multum  habere  vide- 
atur.  Quint.,  hi.  i,  5;  I  am  afraid  that  this  hook  ivill  seem  to  have  too 
little  honey  and  (too)  much  wormwood.  Timeo  ne  tibi  nihil  praeter  la- 
crimas  queam  reddere,  C,  Plane,  42,  101;  lam  afraid  that  I  can  give 
you  nothing  in  return  save  tears.  Aurum  inspicere  volt  ng  subruptum 
siet,  Pl.,  Aid.,  39  ;  he  wishes  to  inspect  the  gold  {for  fear)  lest  it  he 
filched. 

Times  ut  sustineas  (labores),  C,  Fam.,  xiv.  2,  3;  I  fear  that  you  will 
not  hold  out  wider  your  toils.  Vereor  ne  dum  defendam  meos,  non  parcam 
tuls,  C,  Att.,  I.  17,  3;  I  fear  lest  in  defending  my  own  I  may  not  spare 
thine.  Non  vereor  ng  tua  virtus  opini5ni  hominum  non  respondeat,  Cf.C, 
Fam.,  II.  5,  2;  J  do  not  fear  that  your  virtue  ivill  not  answer  to  (come 
up  to)  public  expectation.  Jl^tuo  ng  id  cSnsilii  egperlmus  quod  non  facile 
expUcare  possimus,  C,  Fam.,  xiv.  12 ;  I  fear  that  we  have  formed  aplayi 
that  we  cannot  readily  explain.  Unum  jllud  extimgscebam  ng  quid  turpius 
facerem,  vel  dicam,  iam  ^filgcissem,  C. ,  Att.,  ix.  7, 1 ;  the  only  thing  I  feared 
was,  lest  I  should  act  disgracefully,  or,  J  should  (rather)  say,  (lest)  / 
had  already  acted  disgracefully. 

Notes.— 1.  Ut  seems  to  be  used  only  after  metuS,  pave5,  timed,  and  vereor. 
Most  common  is  vQrepr ;  metu3  is  common  in  early  Ljvtiu,  but  is  cited  but  rarely  later 
(Horace,  Cicero)  ;  pave5  lias  to  be  supplied  once  with  ut  in  Tbr.,  And.,  349.  TimeS 
Ut  is  found  first  in  Cicero,  and  i^  very  r^re. 

2.  Ng  nSn  18  \ety  rare  in  early  Latin,  but  becomes  more  frequent  from  Cicero  on. 
Ut  ng  is  never  fonnd  for  nS. 

3.  Two  strange  cages  arc  cited  where,  instead  of  ng,  ut  seems  to  be  used,  viz.,  ITor., 
S.,  1. 3, 120,  nam  ut  ferula  caedSs  meritum  maiora  subire  verbera,  n6n  vereor, 
and  L.,  xxviii.  22, 12,  nihil  minus,  quam  ut  ggredl  obsessi  moenibus  audgrent, 
timgri  poterat.  I»  the  first  case  the  ut  clause  precedes,  and  the  non  vereor  is  used 
by  anacoluthon  ;  in  the  second  the  nt  clause  is  a  circumlocution  for  an  omitted  illud, 
parallel  to  nihil.    This  is  also  helped  by  the  antecedence  of  the  ut  clause. 

4.  When  a  verb  of  Fear  is  a  verb  of  Uncertainty  an  indirect  question  may  follow  : 
vereor  quO  modS  acceptOrl  sltis,  [C],  ad  Her.,  iv.  37, 49. 


CON^SECUTIYE   SENTENCES.  35  I 

5.  (a)  With  the  Inf.  verbs  of  Fear  are  verbs  of  (negative)  Will :  vereor  =  prae 
timSre  nolo. 

Vos  AUobrogum  testimoniis  non  credere  timetis?  c.,Fonf.,  12,26;  are  ye 
afraid  to  disbeliece  the  testimony  of  the  AUobrogect  y  Vereor  laudare  praesentem, 
C,  M.D..,  I.  21, 58  (428,  2).  Nil  metuunt  itirare,  Cat.,  lxiv.  146  ;  l/tey  have  no  fear  to 
take  an  oath. 

These  consti'uctions  are  found  at  all  periods  ;  chiefly,  however,  in  the  poets  and 
1  tcr  i^rose  writers.  Cicero  shows  reserve.  The  usage  of  the  Inf.  as  an  out-and-or.t 
ver'.al  snhst.  in  the  Ace.  is  poetical :  nec  mori  per  vim  (=  mortem  violentam) 
metuam,  n.,  c,  in.,  14, 15. 

(&)  With  the  Ace.  and  Inf.  verbs  of  Fear  are  verbs  of  Thinking  or  of  Perception  : 
vereor  =  cum  timore  puto  or  video. 

Vergbar  non  omnes  causam  vincere  posse  suam  [Ov.,  Her.,  16, 75].  T61um- 
que  instare  tremescit,  v.,  .4.,  xii.  qi6. 

This  construction  is  rare,  but  occurs  at  all  periods  ;  more  often,  however,  it  involves 
the  substantives  timer  and  metus,  especially  in  Livy,  who  shows  seven  cases  in 
all. 

CONSECUTIVE    SENTENCES. 

Sentences  of  Tendency  and  EesuU. 

551.  I.  Consecutive  Sentences  are  those  sentences  which 
show  the  Consequence  or  Tendency  of  x\ctions.  In  Latin, 
Eesult  is  a  mere  inference  from  Tendency,  though  often  an 
irresistible  inference.  In  other  words,  the  Latin  hxnguage 
uses  so  as  throughout,  and  not  so  that,  although  so  that  is 
often  a  convenient  translation.  The  result  is  only  implied, 
not  stated. 

2.   Consecutive  Sentences  are  divided  into  two  classes  : 

I.  Consecutive  Sentences  in  which  the  Tendency  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  Particle  :  Pure  Consecutive  Sentences. 

II.  Consecutive  Sentences  in  which  the  Tendency  lies  in 
the  leading  A^erb  :  (a)  after  verbs  of  Eifecting  ;  {b)  after 
negatived  verbs  of  Preventing,  Doubt,  and  Uncertainty  ; 
(6')  after  words  and  phrases  requiring  expansion. 

I.    Pure  Consecutive  Sentences. 

552.  Pure  Consecutive  Sentences  are  introduced  by 

1.  Ut  (uti),  that,  so  that,  and  other  relative  pronouns  and 
adverbs  (GSl). 

2.  Ut — non,  that,  so  that,  as — not,  continued  by  neque,  nec 
(543,  4). 

3.  Quin  =  ut  non,  after  a  negative  sentence  (554). 
Correlative  demonstratives  occur  very  often  :  ita  (sic),  tarn. 


352  CONSECUTIVE   SENTENCES. 

tantopere,  tanto,  tantum,  adeo,  eo,  hue ;  talis,  tantus,  tot,  ia^ 
eius  modi,  and  others  of  similar  meaning. 

In  virtute  multi  sunt  adscensus,  ut  is  maximS  gloria  excellat,  qui  vir- 
tute  plurimum  praestet,  C,  Plane,  25,  60  ;  in  virtue  there  are  many 
degrees,  so  that  he  excels  most  in  glory  ivho  is  most  advanced  in  virtue. 
Nequc  me  vixisse  paenitet  quoniam  ita  vixi  ut  non  frustra  mg  natum  exis- 
tumem,  C,  Cat.M.,  23,  84  (540).  Tanta  vis  probitatis  est,  ut  earn  in 
hoste  etiam  diligamus,  C,  Lael.,  q,  29  ;  so  great  is  the  virtue  of  upright- 
ness, that  toe  love  it  even  in  an  enemy.  Non  is  es  ut  t6  pudor  umquam  a 
turpittidine  revocarit,  C. ,  Cat. ,  i.  9,  23  ;  you  are  not  the  man  for  shame 
ever  to  have  recalled  you  {=  ever  to  have  been  recalled  by  shame)  from 
baseness.  N6ni5  adeo  ferns  est  ut  non  mitescere  possit,  H.,  Ep.,  i.  i,  89  ; 
no  one  is  so  savage  that  he  canriot  {be  made  to)  soften.  Nil  tarn  difficile 
est  quin  quaerendo  invSstigari  possiet,  Ter.,  Heaut.,  (>•]$',  naught  is  so 
hard  but  it  can  (=  that  it  cannot)  be  tracked  out  by  search.  Numquam 
tam  male  est  Siculis  quin  aliquid  facets  et  commode  dicant,  C,  Verr.,  iv. 
43,  95  ;  the  Sicilians  are  never  so  badly  off  as  not  to  (have)  something 
or  other  clever  and  pat  (to)  say. 

Remarks. — i.  Notice  especially  the  impersonal  tantum  abest,  afuit 
(rarely  aberat) — ut — ut.  The  phrase  originates  with  an  abstract  Abl. 
dependent  on  a  personal  absum,  which  abstract  Abl.  is  afterward  ex- 
panded into  a  consecutive  clause  with  ut. 

[Agesilaus]  tantum  afuit  ab  insolentia  gloriae  ut  commiseratus  sit  for- 
tunam  Graeciae,  Nep.,  xvii.  5,  2  ;  Agesilaus  was  so  far  from  the  inso- 
lence of  glory  that  he  pitied  the  {mis)fortune  of  Greece.  Tantum  abest 
ab  eo  ut  malum  mors  sit  ut  verear  ng  homini  sit  nihil  bonum  aliud,  C, 
Tusc,  I.  31,  76  ;  so  far  is  it  from  death  (—  so  far  is  death  from)  being 
an  evil  that  1  fear  man,  has  no  other  blessing.  Tantum  afuit,  ut  illorum 
praesidio  nostram  tirmargmus  classem,  ut  etiam  a  Rhodiis  urbe  prohiberen- 
tur  nostri  militgs,  Lentulus  [C,  Fam.,  xii.  15,  2]  ;  so  far  were  we  from 
strengthening  our  fleet  by  reinforcements  from  them  that  our  soldiers 
ivere  actually  kept  aivay  from  the  city  by  the  Rhodians.  Tantum  abest 
ut  nostra  mirgmur  ut  usque  e5  difficilgs  simus  ut  ngbis  n5n  satisfaciat  ipse 
Dgmosthengs,  C,  Or.,  29, 104  ;  so  far  are  we  from  admiring  our  oivn  (com- 
positions) that  we  are  so  hard  to  please  that  Demosthenes  himself  fails  to 
satisfy  us. 

The  personal  construction  is  extremely  rare. 

The  second  ut  may  be  omitted,  and  a  declarative  sentence  follow 
asyndetically  :  Tantum  aberat  ut  binSs  (libros)  scrlberent :  vix  singulos 
conf6c6runt,  C,  Att.,  xiii.  21,  5;  so  far  were  they  from  writing  two  copies 
of  each  book,  it  was  icith  difficulty  they  finished  up  one. 

2.  DIgnus,  ivorthy,  indlgnus,  unworthy,  aptus,  idoneus,  ^/,  take  a  con- 
secutive sentence  with  qui.     Occasionally  in  early,  more  often  in  later 


CONSECUTIVE   SENTENCES.  353 

Latin,  dignus  and  indignu3  take  ut.  In  poetry  all  these  words  are 
found  sometimes  with  the  Infinitive. 

Qui  modeste  paret,  videtur  qui  aliquando  imperet  dignus  esse,  C;  Leg., 
III.  2.  5  ;  he  ivho  obeys-duhj  seems  to  be  ivortluj  to  commcmd  some  day. 

3.  While  ita  (sic)  is  usually  antecedent  to  a  consecutive  ut,  it 
may  also  be  antecedent  to  a  final  ut  or  ne  when  the  design  or  wish 
intrudes.  Ita  me  gessi  116  tib!  pudori  essem,  L.,  xl.  15,  6  ;  I  behaved  my- 
self so  as  not  to  be  a  disgrace  to  you. 

So  not  unfrequently  wMien  a  restriction  or  condition  is  intended  : 
Ita  probanda  est  mansuetudo  ut  adhibeatur  rei  ptiblicae  causa  severitas, 
C,  0^.,i.  25,  88;  mildness  is  to  be  approved,  so  that  {prorided  that) 
strictness  be  used  for  the  sake  of  the  commonwealth.  Ita  frui  volunt 
voluptatibus  ut  nulli  propter  eas  cSnsequantur  dolorSs,  C,  Fin.,  i.  14,  48  ; 
they  wish  to  enjoy  pleasures  without  having  any  pain  to  ensue  on  ac- 
count of  tJiem.  [Pythagoras  et  Plato]  mortem  ita  laudant  ut  fugei;e  vitam 
vetent,  C,  Scaur.,  4,  5;  Pythagoras  and  Plato  so  praise  death,  that  tliey 
(\Nhile  they  praise  death)  forbid  fleeing  from  life.  Ita  tu  istaec  tua 
miscgto  nS  mS  admisceas,  Ter.,  TTeaut.,  783  ;  mix  up  your  mixings  so  you 
mix  me  not  withal.  Tantum  a  vallo  [PompSi]  prima  acigs  aberat,  uti  n6 
t6lo  adici  posset,  Caes.,  B.C.,  iii.  55. 

Ut  alone  may  also  be  used  thus  :  Rex  esse  nolim  ut  esse  crudelis  velim, 
Syr.,  577  ;  Icing  I  ivould  not  be,  if  I  must  school  myself  to  cruelty. 

4.  Ut  non  is  often  =  without,  and  the  English  verbal  in  -ing : 
(Octavianus)  numquam  filios  suos  populo  commendavit  ut  non  adiceret :  si 

merebuntur,  Suet.,  Aug.,  56;  Octavianus  (Augustus)  never  recommended 
his  sons  to  the  people  in  such  a  way  as  not  to  add  (=  without  adding)  : 
if  they  are  worthy.  Qui  ng  malum  habeat  abstinet  sg  ab  iniuria  certg 
malet  existimari bonus  vir  ut  non  sit  quam  esse  ut  non  putgtur,  C,  Fin.,  ir. 
22,  71  ;  he  who,  to  avoid  7nis for  tune,  abstains  from  injury,  will  certainly 
prefer  being  thought  a  good  man  without  being  such,  to  being  (a  good 
man)  ivithout  being  believed  (to  be  such). 

II.    Complementary  Consecutive  Sentences. 

A.     Verbs  of  Effecting. 

653.  Verbs  of  Effecting  belong  partly  to  the  Consecutive, 
partly  to  the  Final  Sentence.  The  negative  is  non  or  ne ;  the 
sequence,  final  or  consecutive. 

Such  verbs  are  : 

r.  Verbs  of  Causation  :  facere,  efficere,  perficere,  /  mahe, 
effect,  achieve  ;  assequi,  consequl,  /  attain,  accomplisli,  and 
ma,ny  others  (sequence,  final). 

The  following  are  cited  as  more  or  less  common  in  Cicero  :  prgficere, 
23 


354  C02?"SECUTIYE   SENTENCES. 

impetrare,  valgre,  committere,  tenere,  adipisci,  praestare,  ferre  (in  phrases 
consuettido,  natura,  fortuna  fert),  adferre,  adiuvare,  expugnare,  extorquere, 
exprimere,  and  a  few  others. 

Efficiam  ut  intellegatis,  C,  Clitent.,  3,  7;  /  will  cause  ijoii,  to  nnder- 
stand.     Sed  perfice,  ut  Crassus  haec  quae  coartavit  nobis  explicet,  C,  Or., 

I.  35,  I60  :  hut  bring  it  about  that  Crassus  {make  Crassus)  unfold  to  us 
ii'liat  he  has  condensed.  Non  conrniittam  ut  causam  aliquam  til!  recusandi 
dem,  C,  Or.,  11.  57,  233;  /  shall  not  make  the  blunder  of  giving  you  an 
excuse  for  refusing. 

Negatives  : 

Rerum  obscuritas  non  verborum facit  ut  non  intellegatur  orati5,  C,  Fin., 

II.  5,  15  ;  it  is  the  obscurity  of  the  subject,  not  of  the  words,  that 
causes  the  language  not  to  be  understood.  Potestis  efficere  ut  male  moriar, 
ut  non  moriar  non  potestis,  Plin.,  Up.,  iii,  16, 11 ;  you  may  make  me  die 
a,  hard  death,  keep  me  from  dying  you  cannot.  Efficiam  posthac  nS 
quemquam  voce  lacessas,  V.,  Ec,  3,  51;  /  will  bring  it  about  that  you 
cludlenge  no  one  hereafter  in  song. 

Facere  ut  is  often  little  more  than  a  periphrasis  ;  especially  in  the 
forms  fac  ut  and  faxo,  faxit  (both  peculiar  to  (Comedy). 

Fortuna  vestra  facit  ut  irae  meae  temperem,  L.,  xxxvi.  35,  3;  your  for- 
tune causes  that  I  {makes  me)  restrain  my  anger  (put  metes  to  my  anger). 
Invitus  (325,  r.  6)  facio  ut  recorder  ruinas  rei  publicae,  C,  Vat.,  9,  21 ;  (it 
is)  against  my  will  that  I  {am  doing  so  as  to)  recall  the  ruined  condition 
of  the  commonwealth. 

2.  Verbs  of  Compelling  and  Permitting  (sequence,  final)  : 

C5gere,  adigere,  impellere,  ducere,  with  its  compounds,  mov6re,  com- 
movgre,  to  which  nuist  be  added  exorare,  to  force  by  pleading.  Permit- 
tere,  sinere,  concMere,  dare,  (non)  pati,  and  less  often  largiri,  tribuere, 
ferre. 

TenSmus  memoria  Catulum  esse  coactum  ut  vitasg  ipse  privaret,  C,  Or., 
iiT.  3,  9  ;  we  rcmem'cer  that  Catulus  was  forced  to  fake  his  oim  life. 
Illud  natura  non  patitur,  ut  aliOrum  spoliis  nostras  cSpias  augeamus,  C, 
Off.,  III.  5,  22;  nature  does  not  allow  us  to  increase  our  wealth  by  the 
spoils  of  others.  Collggam  perpulerat  n6  contra  rem  publicam  sentiret,  S. , 
C,  26,  4;  he  had  prevailed  upon  his  colleague,  not  to  take  sides  against 
the  commonwealth. 

Note.-  C5gere  lias  iisunlly  the  Tiif.  (423,  2,  n.  2),  also  sinere  (423,  n.  6)  patl.  On 
permittere,  t'te  5.32,  n.  1.  Cogere  in  tlio  eense  eoitdude  is  a  verb  of  Sayii!j;j^51(),  r  i). 
Facere  Jind  efficere,  ii  tlu'  sc^jisj  r.7«w,  are  very  rarely  used  with  the  Infinitive.  Com- 
pare c,  Br.,  38, 142,  (actiS)  tales  5rat5r6s  vidSrl  facit,  quftlSs  ipsi  s6  vidSrl 
VOlunt.    This  becomes  more  coumion  in  very  late  Latin. 

3.  Passive   verbs   of    Causation,    and    their   equivalents. 


CONSECUTIVE    SENTENCES.  355 

luimely,  many  Impersonal  A^erbs  of  Happening  and  Follow- 
ing, of  Accident  and  Consequent  (sequence,  consecutive). 

Such  verbs  arc  conflci,  effici,  fit,  accidit,  contingit,  obtingit,  evenit,  it 
happens,  usu  venit,  it  occurs,  sequitur,  it  fotloirs,  and  many  others.  So 
also  est,  it  is  the  case.     For  the  sequence,  see  also  518,  r.  2. 

Ex  quo  efficitur,  non  ut  voluptas  ng  (the  design  of  the  arguer)  sit  vo- 
luptas,  sed  ut  voluptas  non  (the  result  of  the  argument)  sit  summum  bo- 
num,  C,  Fi)i.,  11.  8,  24;  from  ichich  it  results,  not  that  pleasure  is  not 
pleasure,  t)uf  that  pleasure  is  not  the  supreme  good.  Potest  fieri  ut  fallar, 
C,  Fam.,  xiH.  73.  2  ;  {it)  may  fje  {that)  I  am  mistaken.  Potest  fieri  ut 
is  unde  te  audisse  dicis  iratus  dixerit,  C,  Or.,  11.  70,  285;  {it)  may  l)e  {that) 
he  from  whom  you  say  you  heard  {it)  said  it  in  anger.  Persaepe  6venit 
ut  utilitas  cum  honestate  certet,  C,  Part. Or.,  25,89;  ii  very  ofte^i  {so) 
happens  that  profit  is  at  variance  with  honor. 

Note.— Noteworthy  is  the  early  Latin  use  of  (fieri)  potis  Ut  n§,  as  in  fieri  potis 
est  ut  n6  qua  exeat,  Ter.,  Ad.,t26. 

4.  Very  many  impersonal  verbs  and  combinations  of  neuter 
adjectives  with  est,  after  the  analogy  of  the  impersonals  just 
mentioned  (sequence,  consecutive). 

Such  are :  additur,  acc6dit,  it  is  added ;  restat,  reliquom  est,  it  remains  ; 
apparet,  it  is  plain.  Enumerations,  as,  proximum,  tertium,  extrgmum 
est;  intisitatum,  rarum  est,  it  rarely  happens  that;  novom,  singulare, 
mirum,  inauditum,  verum,  falsum,  (non)  vgrisimile,  consequgns,  etc.  Also 
rarely,  interest,  necesse  est,  necessarium est,  and  the  like. 

Ad  Appi  Claudi  senectutem  accgdgbat  etiam  ut  caecus  esset,  ('..  Cat. 31., 
6,  16;  to  the  old  age  of  Appius  Claudius  was  further  added  his  being 
blind.  Ei  n3  integrum  quidem  erat  ut  ad  iustitiam  remigraret,  C,  Tusc, 
V.  21.  62  ;  for  him  it  ivas  tiot  even  an  open  question  to  go  hack  to 
justice.  Rarum  (=  raro  accidit)  ut  sit  idoneus  suae  rei  quisque  defensor, 
Quint.,  iv.  i,  46;  it  is  rare  for  a  man  to  be  a  good  defender  of  his  own 
case. 

Remarks. — i.  Necesse  est,  it  is  necessary,  generally,  and  oportet,  it 
behooves,  always  omit  ut : 

[Leuctrica  pugna]  immortalis  sit  necesse  est,  Xep.,  xv.  10,  2  ;  the  battle 
of  Leu ctra  must  needs  be  immortal.  Sed  non  efFugigs  ;  mecum  moriaris 
oportet,  Prop.,  ii.  8,  25  ;  but  you  shall  not  escape;  yon  must  die  ivith 
me. 

2.  The  neuter  adjectives  are  rarely  used  with  ut  until  the  post-classi- 
cal period  and  are  far  more  commonly  construed  with  the  Infinitive. 

3.  Very  common  is  the  periphrasis  fore  (futurum)  ut,  which  gives  the 
common  form  of  the  Fut.  Infinitive.     See  248. 


35^  CONSECUTIVE   SENTENCES. 

B.    Verbs  of  Hindering. 

554.  Quin  is  used  like  quominus,  with  Verbs  of  Preventing, 
Refusing,  etc.,  but  only  when  they  are  negatived  or  ques- 
tioned. 

Notes.— 1.  Quin  is  compounded  of  qui— an  interrogative-relative  Ablative  or 
Locative— and  n6  (non).  Its  first  use  is  interrogative  :  "  why  not  "  in  an  indignant 
question  ;  almost  equivalent  to  an  indignant  Imperative,  with  which,  through  the  fad- 
ing out  of  its  composition,  it  is  occasionally  connected,  especially  in  early  and  later 
Latin,  rarely  in  Ciceuo  (269). 

2.  An  indignant  question  {Haw  not?  Wliy  not?)  objects  to  opposition,  and  is  there- 
fore naturally  construed  with  the  negative  of  a  verb  of  Hindering.  Hence  quin,  as  an 
interrogative  (flow  not  ?),  takes  the  sequence  of  the  Interrogative  Sentence.  But  this 
shows  itself  only  after  words  of  doubt ;  after  verbs  of  Preventing  the  sequence  coincides 
with  that  of  the  Final  Sentence,  and  after  other  negative  sentences  the  sequence  coin- 
cides with  that  of  the  Consecutive  Sentence. 

3.  By  its  combination  with  verbs  of  Preventing,  quin  came  to  be  felt  as  a  consecu- 
tive particle  =  ut  non,  and  was  then  used  in  other  consecutive  connections  for 
ut  non. 

555.  Quin  is  used  when  Verbs  and  Phrases  of  Preventing, 
Omitting,  Refraining,  Refusing,  and  Delaying,  Doubt,  and 
Uncertainty,  are  negatived  or  questioned. 

1.  Verbs  of  Preventing  and  the  like  (sequence  of  the 
Final  Sentence). 

Vix  nunc  obsistitur  illis  quin  lament  mundum,  Ov.,  J/.,  i.  58  ;  they 
are  now  hardly  to  he  kept  {that  they  should  riot  rend)  from  rending 
the  universe.  Antiochus  non  sg  tenuit  quin  contra  suum  doctSrem  librum 
ederet,  C,  Ac,  n.  4,  12;  Antiochus  did  ttot  refrain  from  publishing  a 
book  against  his  teacher.  Vix  repriraor  quin  tg  mangre  iubeam,  Pl., 
31.  G.,  1368;  I  am  scarcely  kept  back  {keep  myself  back)  from  bidding 
you  remain.  Neque  mg  liippiter  [prohibgbit]  quin  sic  faciam  uti  con- 
stitul,  Pl.,  A^n.,  105 1 ;  nor  will  Jupiter  prevent  me  from  doing  just  as 
I  determined  to  do. 

Remark. — The  list  of  verbs  is  given  in  548,  n.  1. 

2.  Verbs  of  Doubt  and  Uncertainty  (sequence  of  the 
Interrogative  Sentence). 

Non  dubium  est  quin  ux5rem  nQlit  Alius,  Ter.,  And.,  172  ;  there  is  no 
doubt  that  (ray)  S07i  does  not  want  a  ivife.  Quis  dubitet  (=  ngmO  dubi- 
tet)  quin  in  virtate  divitiae  sint  ?  C,  P«m(Z.,  vi.  2,  48  (259).  Non 
dubitari  dgbet  quin  fuerint  ante  Homgrum  pogtae,  C,  Br.,  18,  71 ;  it  is  not 
to  be  doubted  tJiut  there  were  poets  before  Homer.  Nunc  mihi  non  est 
dubium  quin  ventGrae  non  sint  (legi5ngs),  C,  Fam.,  u.  17,  5  (515). 


CONSECUTIVE   SENTENCES.  35/ 

Occasionally  verbs  of  Saying  and  Thinking  are  found  with  the  same 
construction,  because  they  are  near  equivalents. 

Negari  non  potest  quin  rectius  sit  etiam  ad  pacatos  barbaros  exercitum 
mitti,  Cf.  L.,  XL.  36,  2;  it  cannot  he  denied  (doubted)  that  it  is  better  for 
an  army  to  he  sent  to  the  harharians  even  though  they  he  quiet.  Non 
abest  suspicio  (Litotgs  [700]  for  dubitari  non  potest)  quin  (Orgetorix)  ipse 
sib!  mortem  consciverit,  Caes.,  E.G.,  i.  4.  4;  there  is  no  lack  of  ground 
to  suspect  (=:  there  is  no  doubt  tliat)  Orgetorix  killed  himself. 

Remarks. — i.  The  principal  gain  of  the  interrogative  sequence  is 
that  the  Periphrastic  Fut.  may  be  employed  (of  which,  however,  the 
first  example  is  cited  from  Cicero),  but  according  to  515,  r.  3,  n5n 
dubito  quin  may  have  the  simple  Subjv.  instead  of  the  Periphrastic  : 

Non  dubitare-  quin  de  omnibus  obsidibus  supplicium  sumat  (Ariovistus), 
Caes.,  E.G.,  i.  31,10  ;  "/<e  did  not  doubt  that  Ariovistus  would  put  all 
the  hostages  to  death.''    Compare  Cat.,  cviii.  3. 

So  when  there  is  an  original  Subjv.  notion  : 

N6n  dubito  quin  ad  te  statim  veniam,  C.,Att.,\'ni.  iib,3:  I  do  not 
doubt  that  I  ought  to  come  to  you  forthwith.    (Veniam  ?  Shall  I  come  9) 

2.  Of  course  dubito  and  n5n  dubito  may  have  the  ordinary  interroga- 
tive constructions  (467).     On  dubitS  an,  see  457,  2. 

3.  Non  dubito,  with  the  Inf.,  usually  means  /  do  not  hesitate  to: 
Non  dubitem  dicere  omnSs  sapient6s  semper  esse  beatos,  C,  Fin.,  v.  32, 

95;  I  should  not  hesitate  to  say  that  all  wise  men  are  alivays  happy. 
Et  dubitamus  adhuc  virtutem  extendere  factis  ?  V.,  A.,  vi.  806;  and  do  ive 
still  hesitate  to  spread  our  (fame  for)  valor  by  our  deeds  ?  Compare 
vereor,  times,  I  fear,  hesitate  to  (550,  2,  n.  5). 

So  occHsionally  non  dubito  quin.     See  r.  i. 

(Romani)  arbitrabantur  non  dubitaturum  fortem  virum  quin  cederet  ae- 
quo animo  I6gibus,  C,  J/<7.,  23,  63;  the  Romans  thought  that  a  brave 
man  would  not  hesitate  to  yield  ivith  equanimity  to  the  laivs. 

Note.— N5n  dubitS  with  the  Inf.  for  non  dubitO  quin  occurs  chiefij'^  in  Nepos, 
LivY,  and  later  writers. 

Sunt  multi  qui  quae  turpia  esse  dubitare  non  possunt  utilitatis  speciS 
ducti  probent.  Quint.,  m.  8, 3;  there  are  mavy  who,  led  on  by  the  appearance  of 
profit.,  approve  what  they  cannot  doubt  to  be  base. 

566.  Quin,  equivalent  to  ut  non,  may  be  used  after  any 
negative  sentence  (sequence  of  the  Consecutive  Sentence). 
Here  it  may  often  be  translated  ''  wWiotit." 

Nil  tam  difficile  est  quin  quaerendo  invgstigari  possiet,  Ter.,  Heaut., 
675  (552).  Nullum  adhuc  intermisi  diem  quin  aliquid  ad  te  litterarum 
darem,  C,  Alt.,  vii.  15,  1 ;  /  have  thus  far  not  allowed  a  day  to  pass  but 
I  dropped  you  {without  dropping  you)  something  of  a  letter  {a  line  or 
two). 


358  CONSECUTIVE   SENTENCES. 

Note  tlie  combination  (facere)  non  possum  quin,  /  cannot  hut,  and 
similar  combinations  ;  non  possum  non  with  Inf.  is  also  classical. 

Facere  non  possum  quin  cottidie  ad  te  mittam  (litteras),  C,  Att.,  xii.  27, 
2;  I  cannot  do  without  (/  cannot  help)  sending  a  letter  to  you  daily. 
Non  possum  quin  exclamem,  Pl.,  Triii.,  705;  I  cannot  but  (I  imisl)  cry 
out.  (Nullo  modo  facere  possum  ut  non  sim  popularis,  C,  Agr.,  11.  3,  7 
(reading  doubtful);  I  cannot  help  beiiig  a  7na7i  oj  the  people.) 

Nihil  abest  quin  sim  miserrimus,  C,  ^^^.,  xi.  15,  3;  there  is  nothing 
ivanting  that  I  should  he  (=  to  make  me)  perfectly  miserable.  Fieri 
nullo  modo  poterat  quin  Cleomeni parceretur,  C,  Verr.,  v.  40,  104;  it  could 
in  nowise  happen  but  that  Cleornenes  should  be  spared  (=  Cleomenes 
had  to  be  spared).  Paulum  afuit  quin  (Fabius)  Varum  interficeret,  Caes., 
B.C.,  II.  35,  2;  tltere  ivas  little  lacking  but  Fabius  (had)  killed  Varus 
(=  Fabius  came  near  killing  Varus). 

Explanatory  Ut. 
557.  A  Consecutive  Sentence  with  ut  is  often  used  to  give 
the  contents  or  character  of  a  j)receding  substantive^,  adjec- 
tive, or  pronoun. 

Est  m5s  hominum  ut  nolint  eundem  pluribus  r6bu3  excellere,  C.,Br., 

2 1 .  84  (540,  R.  i).  An  quoiquarast  usus  homini  se  ut  cruciet  ?  Ter. ,  Ileauf. , 
81  (406,  N.  5).  Est  miserorum  ut  malevolentes  sint  atque  invideant  bonis, 
Pl.,  Capt.,  583;  the  ivretched  have  a  way  of  being  ill-natured  and  envy- 
ing the  ivell-to-do.  Nee  meum  ad  t§  ut  mittam  gratiis,  Pl.,  Asin.,  190  ; 
nor  is  it  my  style  to  let  her  go  to  you  as  a  gracious  gift.  Id  est  proprium 
civitatis  ut  sit  libera,  C,  Off.,  ir.  22,  70  ;  it  is  the  peculiar  privilege  of  a 
state,  to  be  free.  lUud  ipsum  habet  consul  ut  oi  reliqui  magistratus  pareant, 
C,  Leg.,  in.  7,  IG  ;  theconsid  has  this  very  prerogative,  that  the  other 
magistrates  be  obedient  unto  him.  TOtum  in  eo  est,  ut  tibi  impergs,  C, 
Tusc,  II.  22,  53 ;  all  depends  itjjon  this  (one  thing),  your  self-command. 

Remark. — These  are  principally  mos,  consuStudo,  A«&i7,  ivoiit ;  opus, 
usus,  need  ;  many  substantives  of  opinion  and  perceptioji,  as  opinio,  sen- 
tentia,  cSgitatio,  mSns,  sapientia,  scientia,  cognitio ;  natflra,  genus,  status, 
and  others,  usually  with  a  demonstrative  attached  ;  adjectives  indi- 
cating possession  :  meum,  tuom,  suom  (all  mainly  ante-chiss.),  proprium, 
commune,  praecipuum  (Livy),  and  [)redicate  Genitives  with  cscc  :  id,  hoc, 
illud,  etc.     These  should  be  distinguished  from  final  usages. 

Notes.— 1.  Tendency  and  Character  lend  tlicnii^clvcs  readily  to  circiunlooution,  and 
ut  with  Siibjv.  becomes  a  manner  of  eqiiivalon;  i)  il.c  l:i!'.,  which,  howcvc:-,  is  by  far 
the  more  common  construction. 

2.  To  the  same  principle  is  to  be  referred  the  use  of  ut  after  maior  (magis)  quam, 
n5n  alitor  quam  {unthovl),  lirst  in  Livy  ;  after  nisi  (591,  b,  R.  3).     See  298. 

Praeceptum mains  erat  quam  ut  ab  liominc  vidSrStur,  c,  Fin.,  \.  16, 44  (503). 


TEMPORAL  SENTENCES.  359 

Exclamatory  Questions. 

558.  Ut  with  the  Subjunctive  is  used  in  Exclamatory 
Questions,  usually  with  the  insertion  of  -ne. 

Egone  ut  te  interpellem  ?  C,  Tusc,  ii.  i8,  42  ;  /  interrupt  you  ?  TfL 
ut  umquam  te  corrigas  ?  C,  Cat.^  r.  9,  22;  you — ever  reform,  yourself  f 
Di  magnif  ut  qui  civem  Bomanum  occldisset,  impunitatem  acciperet,  Sen., 
Ben.,  V.  16,  3  ;  Great  Gods  !  that  one  who  had  slain  a  Roman  citizen^ 
should  escape  unpunished  I 

Note.— The  expression  is  closely  parallel  with  the  Ace.  and  Infinitive.  The  one 
objects  to  the  idea ;  the  other,  to  any  state  of  things  that  could  produce  the  result. 
In  neither  case  is  there  any  definite  or  conscious  ellipsis.  Compare  Tbk.,  Uec..,  589, 
with  613. 

TEMPORAL  SENTENCES. 

559.  The  action  of  the  Temporal  or  Dependent  clause  may 
stand  to  the  action  of  the  Principal  clause  in  one  of  three 
relations  : 

1.  It  may  be  antecedent. 

CoNJuxcTioxs  :  Fostquam  (Postea  quam,  not  ante-class.),  after  that, 
after;  ut,  as ;  ubi,  wJien  (litx?rally,  where);  simulac,  as  soon  as ;  ut  prl- 
mum,  cum  prfnmTn,  the  first  moment  thai. 

II.  It  may  be  contemporaneous. 

Conjunctions  :  Dum,  donee,  while,  until ;  quoad,  up  to  (the  time)  thai; 
quamdiu,  as  long  as  ;  cum,  tvlie?i. 

III.  It  may  be  subsequent. 

Conjunctions  :  Antequam,  priusquam,  before  that,  before. 
A  special  chapter  is  required  by 

IV.  Cum  (qnom),  when. 

MOODS  IM  TEMPORAL  SENTENCES. 

560.  I.  The  mood  of  Temporal  clauses  is  regularly  the 
Indicative. 

2.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  only  : 

(i)  In  Oratio  Obliqua  (508),  Total  or  Partial.  So  also  in 
the  Ideal  Second  Person. 

(2)  When  the  idea  of  Design  or  Condition  is  introduced. 


360  TEMPORAL  SENTENCES. 


I.    ANTECEDENT    ACTION. 

561.  In  historical  narrative.  Temporal  Clauses  with  post- 
quam  (posteaquam),  ubi,  ut,  simulac,  ut  primum,  and  cum 
primum  commonly  take  the  Historical  Perfect  or  the  Histor- 
ical Present  Indicative. 

The  English  translation  is  not  unfreqiiently  the  Pluperfect. 

Fostquam  Caesar  pervSnit,  obsid§s  poposcit,  Caes.,  B.G.,  i.  27,  3  ;  after 
Caesar  arrived,  he  demanded  hostages.  Quae  ubi  nuntiantur  Bouiam, 
senatus  extemplo  dictatorem  dici  iussit,  L.,  iv.  56,  8  ;  wJien  these  tidings 
were  carried  to  Home,  the-  senate  forlhivith  ordered  a  dictator  to  be  ap- 
pointed. FompSius  ut  equitatum  suum  pulsum  vidit,  acig  excgssit,  Caes., 
B.C.,  III.  94,  5  :  as  Pompey  saw  his  cavalry  beaten,  he  left  the  line  of 
battle.  (Felopidas)  non  dubitavit,  simul  ac  conspexit  hostem,  confllgere 
(555,  2,  R.  3),  Nep.,  XVI.  5,  3  ;  as  soon  as  he  (had)  caught  sight  of  the 
enemy,  Felopidas  did  not  hesitate  to  engage  (him). 

Subjunctive  in  Oratio  Obliqua. 

Ariovistum,  ut  semel  Gallorum  copias  vicerit  (5.  R,  vicit),  superbS  im- 
perare,  Caes.,  B.G.,  i.  31,  12  ;  "  that  Ariovistus,  as  soon  as  he  had  once 
beateri  the  forces  of  the  Gauls,  exercised  his  ride  arroga7itly." 

562.  The  Imperfect  is  used  to  express  an  action  continued 
into  the  time  of  the  principal  clause  (overlapping). 

The  translation  often  indicates  the  spectator  (233,  n.  1). 

Ttt  postquam  qui  tibl  erant  amid  n5n  poterant  vincere,  ut  ainlcl  tibi 
essent  qui  vincebant  effecisti,  C,  Quinct.,  22,  70  ;  after  (you  saw)  that 
those  who  were  friendly  to  you  could  not  be  victorious  you  managed 
that  those  should  be  friendly  to  you  who  were  going  to  be  victorious. 
Ubi  nemo  obvius  ibat,  ad  castra  hostium  tendunt,  L.,  ix  45,  14  ;  when 
(they  saw  that)  no  one  was  coming  to  meet  them,  they  proceeded  to  the 
camp  of  the  enemy. 

Subjunctive  in  Oratid  Obliqua. 

Scrlpsisti  (eum)  posteaquam  nSn  auderet  (6.  E.  ndn  audebat)  reprehendere, 
laudare  coepisse,  C,  Alt.,  i.  13,  4  ;  you  wrote  that,  after  he  could  7wt  get 
up  the  courage  to  blame,  he  began  to  pi-aise. 

663.  I.  The  Pluperfect  is  used  to  express  an  action  com- 
pleted before  the  time  of  the  principal  clause  ;  often  of  the 
Resulting  Condition. 

Albinus  postquam  dficrSverat  ndn  Sgredi  prOvincia,  milites  stativis  castris 
habSbatjS.,  lug.,  44,  4  ;  after  Albinus  had  filUy  determined  not  to  depart 


TEMPORAL   SENTENCES.  361 

from  the  province,  lie  kept  his  soldiers  in  cantonments.  Posteaquam 
multitudinem  coll6gerat  emblgmatum,  instituit  officinam,  C,  Verr.,  iv.  24, 
54  ;  after  he  had  got  together  a  great  number  of  figures,  he  set  up  shop. 

2.  The  Pluperfect  is  used  with  postquam  when  a  definite 
interval  is  mentioned.  Rarely  also  the  Historical  Perfect 
(Aorist). 

Post  and  quam  are  often  separated.  With  an  Ablative  of  Measure, 
postmay  be  omitted ;  with  a  relative  both  post  (ante)  and  quam  (408,  n.4,6?). 

(Aristldgs)  decgssit  ferS  post  annum  quartum  quam  Themistocles  Athenis 
erat  expulsus,  Nep.,  hi.  3,  3  ;  Aristides  died  about  four  years  after 
Themistocles  had  been  (was)  banished  from  Athe^is.  Post  diem  tertium 
gesta  r6s  est  quam  dixerat,  C,  J/^7.,  16,  44;  the  matter  was  accomplished 
three  days  after  he  had  said  it  would  be.  [HamilcarJ  nono  anno  postquam 
in  Hispaniam  venerat  occisus  est,  Nep.,  xxit.  4,  2  ;  Hamilcar  was  killed 
7iine  years  after  he  came  to  Spain.  (Aristides)  sexto  ferS  anno  quam  erat 
expulsus  in  patriam  restitutus  est,  Nep.,  in.  i,  5  ;  Aristides  was  7'estored 
to  his  country  about  six  years  after  he  tvas  exiled.  Triduo  fer6  postquam 
Hannibal  a  ripa  Rhodani  movit,  ad  castra  hostium  venerat,  L.,  xxi.  32,  1  ; 
(within)  about  three  days  after  Hannibal  moved  from  the  banks  of  the 
Rhone  he  had  come  to  the  camp  of  the  enemy. 

Subjunctive  in  Oratio  Obliqua. 

Scriptum  a  PosidoniS  est  triginta  annis  vixisse  Panaetium  posteaquam 
libros  [d6  officiis]  gdidisset,  C,  Off.,  in.  2,  8;  it  is  recorded  by  Fosidonius 
that  Panaetius  lived  thirty  years  after  he  put  forth  his  books  on  Duties. 

The  attraction  is  sometimes  neglected. 

Notes.— 1.  The  most  common  of  these  conjunctions  is  postquam,  bnt  the  others 
also  occur  at  all  periods.  Simul  (atque)  is  rare  in  early  Latin.  In  the  following  notes 
the  usage  in  Iterative  action  is  excluded. 

2.  The  Irapf.  with  postquam  is  cited  but  once  from  early  Latin  (Pl.,  Most.,  640),  it 
becomes  more  common  in  Cicero,  but  is  distinctive  of  Livy,  who  shows  nearly  one 
hundred  examples.  The  Impf.  with  ubi  is  cited  once  in  early  Latin  (Tek.,  Eu7i.,  405), 
where,  however,  it  is  Iterative,  not  at  all  from  Cicero,  once  from  Caesar,  after  which 
it  is  found  more  frequently,  but  never  becomes  common.  The  Impf.  with  ut  is  found 
first  in  Cicero,  never  in  Caesar,  Sallust,  Vergil,  but  not  uncommonly  in  Livy  ; 
only  once  in  Tacitus  (//.,  in.  31),  where  it  is  Iterative.  The  Impf.  with  simul  (atque) 
is  not  cited  from  Cicero  and  Caesar,  but  appears  once  in  Sallust,  where  it  is 
Iterative  ;  it  is  very  rare. 

3.  The  Plupf,  with  postquam  is  not  cited  from  Plautus  or  Horace,  and  but  once 
from  Terence  {And.  \^^) ;  CxCERO  uses  it  but  rarely,  Caesar  but  once  (5. 6'.,  in.  58, 
5)  ;  Livy  uses  it  often,  and  Tacitus  is  fond  of  it.  The  Plupf.  with  ubi  is  found  once  . 
in  Plautus,  twice  each  in  Cicero  and  Caesar,  and  then  more  frequently.  The  Plupf. 
with  nt  (primum)  is  found  first  in  Cicero,  perhaps  but  once  in  Caesar  (fl.  C.,  in.  63,  6), 
more  often  later.  The  Plupf.  with  simul  (atque)  is  cited  once  from  Cicero,  not  at  all 
from  Caesar,  and  rarely  later. 

4.  Some  dozen  cases  are  cited,  princii)ally  from  Cicero,  of  the  Subjv.  with  post- 


362  TEMPORAL   SENTENCES. 

quam  not  in  0.0.  Mogt  of  these  are  disputed.  If  the  Subjv.  is  <o  remain  in  these 
passages  it  is  to  be  explained  as  due  either  to  Partial  Obliquity  or  to  the  intrusion  of  the 
cum  Subjv.  into  other  temporal  constructions.    The  Subjv.  appears  in  late  Latin. 

5.  The  Subjv.  with  ubi  occurs  occasionally  in  early  Latin,  but  only  once  in  Cicero, 
not  unfrequently  in  Livy  and  Tacitus.  This  is  usually  explained  as  either  the  Iterative 
or  Potential  Subjunctive.  The  Subjv.  with  ut  is  post-classical,  and  the  Subjv.  with 
simul  does  not  occur. 

664.  Postquam  and  the  like,  witli  the  Present  and  Perfect 
Indicative,  assume  a  causative  signification  (compare  quo- 
niam,  noiu  that  =  since). 

[Curia]  minor  mih!  videtur  posteaquam  est  maior,  C,  Fin.,  v.  i,  2  ;  the 
senate-house  seems  to  me  smaller  now  that  it  is  (really)  greater.  Tremo 
horreoque  postquam  aspexi  hanc,  Ter.,  Eun.,  84  ;  /  quiver  and  shiver 
since  I  have  seen  her. 

Notes.— 1.  The  use  of  temporal  conjunctions,  especially  postquam  in  the  Present 
Sphere,  is  much  more  common  in  early  Latin  than  later.  Ubi  and  ut  occur  at  all  peri- 
ods, but  rarely  ;  ubi  has  almost  the  same  force  as  si ;  ut  means  ex  quo,  since.  Simul 
is  rare,  and  found  first  in  Lucretius. 

2.  Cum,  also,  has  sometimes  the  causal  signification. 

Gratulor  tibi  cum  tantum  valgs,  C,  Fam.,  ix.  14, 3  :  /  ivish  you  joy  now  that 
you  have  eo  muck  injhience. 

665.  TJbi  and  simul  are  occasionally  found  with  the  Future 
and  Future  Perfect  ;  not  so  postquam  and  ut. 

Ubi  m6  aspiciet  ad  carnuficem  rapiet  continue,  Pl.,  B.,  689  ;  as  soon 
as  he  shall  catch  {catches)  sight  of  me  he  ivill  hurry  me  at  once  to  the 
hangman.  Id  tibi  quidem  hercle  fiet,  Demaenetum  simulac  conspexero, 
Pl.,  J.sm.,  477;  that  indeed  shall  certainly  he  your  fate,  as  soon  as  I 
shall  have  espied  Demaenetus. 

Note.— When  thus  used  ubi  and  simul  approach  almost  the  meaning  of  cum  (580). 
So  also  quand5  ;  see  580,  n.  3.  These  uses  should  be  distinguished  from  those  of  Itera- 
tive Action. 

Iterative  Action. 

566.  Rule  I. — When  two  actions  are  repeated  contempo- 
raneously, both  are  put  in  tenses  of  continuance. 

HumilSs  labOrant  ubi  potentgs  dissident,  Phaed.,i.  30,  1  :  the  lowly 
suffer  when  the  powerful  disagree.  Populus  m6  sibilat ;  at  mihi  plaud5 
ipse  domi  simul  ac  nummos  contemplor  in  area,  II.,  S.,  i.  i,  60  ;  the  people 
hiss  me  ;  but  I  clap  tu/jsclf  at  home  as  soon  as  I  gloat  o^er  my  cash  in 
the  strong  box.  Ubi  frumentS  opus  erat,  cohort6s  praesidium  agitabant, 
S.,  lug.,  55,  4  ;  ivhen  there  ivas  need  of  corn,  the  cohorts  would  serve  as 
an  escort. 


TEMPORAL   SENTENCES.  363 

The  Subjunctive  with  the  Ideal  Second  Person. 

Bonus  segnior  fit  ubi  neglegas,  S.,  lug.,  31,  38  ;  a  good  man  becomes 
more  sjnriiless  wh-en  you  neglect  Mm. 

567.  Rule  II. — When  one  action  is  repeated  before  an- 
other, the  antecedent  action  is  put  in  the  Perfect,  Pkiper- 
fect,  or  Futui'e  Perfect  ;  the  subsequent  action  in  the  Pres- 
ent, Imperfect,  or  Future,  according  to  the  relation. 

[H;^  As  this  use  runs  through  nil  sentences  involving  Jintecedent 
action,  all  the  classes  are  represented  in  the  following  examples. 

Observe  the  greater  exactness  of  the  Latin  expression.  Compare 
244,  R.  2. 

Quotigns  cecidit,       surgit,       As  often  as  he  falls,  he  rises. 

Quotiens  ceciderat,  surggbat,  As  often  as  he  fell,  he  rose. 

Quotiens  ceciderit,  surget,       As  often  as  he  falls,  he  will  rise. 

Siraul  inflavit  tibicen  a  perito  carmen  agnoscitur,  C,  Ac,  11.  27,  80;  as 
soon  as  the  jliiter  blows,  the  so?ig  is  recognized  by  the  connoisseur.  [Alci- 
biades]  simul  ac  s6  remiserat,  Itixuriosus  reperigbatur,  Nep..  vit.  i,  4;  as 
soon  as  Alcibiades  relaxed,  he  teas  found  a  debauchee.  Dociliora  sunt  in- 
genia  priusquam  obduruerunt,  Quint.,  i.  12,  9  ;  minds  are  more  teachafjle 
before  they  (have)  become  hardened,  [Agerl  cum  multos  annos  quigvit, 
uberiores  efferre  fruges  solet,  C,  Br.,  4,  16  ;  when  a  field  has  rested 
(rests)  ituniy  years,  it  visually  prodtices  a  more  abundant  crop.  Cum 
palam  gius  anuli  ad  palmam  converterat  (Gyggs)  antillo  vidgbatur,  C,  Off., 
in.  9,  38;  whe/L(eycr)  Gyges  turned  the  bezel  of  the  ring  toivard  the  palm 
{of  his  hand),  he  was  to  be  seen  by  no  one.  Si  pgs  condoluit,  si  dgns,  ferre 
non  possumus,  C,  Tusc,  11,  22,  52;  if  a  foot,  if  a  tooth  ache{s),  we  cannot 
endure  it.  Stomachabatur  senex,  si  quid  asperius  dixeram,  C,  N.  I).,  i.  33; 
9;J;  the  old  man  used  to  be  fretted,  if  I  said  anything  {that  was)  rather 
harsh.  Quos  laborantes conspexerat,  his  subsidia  submittgbat,  C aes.,  B.G., 
IV.  26,  4;  to  those  whom  he  .mw  {had  espied)  hard  pressed  he  icoidd  se?id 
reinforcements.  Haergbant  in  memoria  quaecumque  audierat  et  viderat 
(Themistoclgs),  C,  Ac,  ii.  i,  2  ;  whatever  Themidocles  had  heard  and 
seen  (=  heard  and  saw)  remained  fixed  in  his  memory.  Qui  timgre  dgsi- 
erint,  odisse  incipient,  Tac,  Agr.,  32;  those  who  cease  to  fear  will  begin 
to  hate. 

The  Subjunctive  with  the  Ideal  Second  Person. 

Ubi  consulueris,  mature  facto  opus  est,  S.,  6\,  1,6  ;  ivhen  you  have 
deliberated,  you  want  speedy  action. 

The  Subjunctive  in  Oratio  Obliqua. 

[Cats]  mirari  sg  aigbat  quod  non  ridgret  haruspex  baruspicem  cum  vidis- 


364  TEMPORAL   SENTEITCES. 

set,  C,  Div.,  II.  24,  51  ;  Cato  said  that  he  wondered  that  an  haruspex 
did  not  laugh  when  he  saiv  (another)  haruspex.     (Non  ridet  cum  vidit.) 

The  Subjunctive  by  Attraction. 

[Araneolae]  rete  texunt  ut  si  quid  inhaeserit  conficiant,  C,  N.D.,  11.  48, 
123  ;  spiders  weave  ivehs  to  despatch  anytJiing  that  gets  caught  (si  quid 
inhaesit,  conficiunt).  Quare  fiebat,  ut  omnium  oculos,  quotiescunque  in 
publicum  prodisset,  ad  se  converteret,  Nep.,  vii.  3,  5  ;  wherehy  it  hajj- 
pened  that  he  att7'acted  the  eyes  of  cdl  every  time  he  went  out  in  public 
(quotiescunque  prodierat,  convertebat). 

Note.— The  Subjunctive  in  Iterative  Tenses  may  be  accounted  for  on  the  principle 
that  a  repeated  action  which  is  retrospective  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  narrator,  and 
so  naturally  takes  the  Indicative,  becomes  prospective  from  the  point  of  view  of  the 
agent,  and  so  talies  tlie  Subjunctive.  But,  liovvever  the  construction  is  justified,  tlie  fact 
remains  that  the  Subjunctive  in  Iterative  Sentences  is  a  grow^th  in  Latin.  With  the 
principal  tenses  it  is  confined  mostly  to  the  Ideal  Second  Person.  Indefinite  quis  is  very 
near  to  this.  So  Cicero,  Eab.  Post.,  13, 36 :  ubi  semel  quis  pgieraverit- oportet. 
With  Impf .  and  Plupf.  the  first  examples  (excluding  cam)  are  in  Catullus  (lxxxiv.  i), 
and  Caesar  (e.g.  B.C.,n.  15,3).  Then  it  spreads,  probably  under  Greek  influence, 
and  is  very  common  in  the  historians,  especially  Livy  and  Tacitus.  Ubi  and  ut  are 
the  particles  employed  ;  also  very  often  si  and  relatives,  in  general  quicumque,  quo- 
tiSns,  etc.  With  cum,  Iterative  Subjunctives  are  found  to  a  limited  extent  also  in  Cicero 
and  Caesar  ;  but  all  cases  of  principal  tenses  in  third  person  have  been  emended,  and 
those  with  historical  tenses  are  not  common,  and  sometimes  doubtful. 

Cum  ferrum  s6  inflexisset,  neque  gvellere  neque  pugnare  poterant  (=  vidS- 
bant  S6  non  posse),  CAES.,ii.  ^'.,1.25,  3;  when  the  iron  had  bent,  they  found  that 
they  could  neither  pluck  it  out  nor  fight.  Incurrere  ea  gens  in  Macedoniam  solita 
erat  (as  if  cSnstituerat)  ubi  rSgem  occupatum  externo  bello  sgnsisset,  L.,  xxvi. 
25,  7  ;  tJiat  tribe  was  wont  to  make  a  raid  oti  Macedonia  whenever  they  perceived  the 
king  engrossed  in  foreign  war.  Qui  unum  eius  ordinis  oflfendisset  omnfis  ad- 
versSs  habSbat  (as  if  certS  sciSbat  se  habiturum),  L.,  xxxm.  46, 1 :  n^hoso  had 
offended  one  of  that  order  was  sure  to  have  all  again.^t  him.  Modum  adhibendS  ubi 
rfis  posceret,  priorgs  erant,  L.,iii.  19,3 ;  by  the  use  of  moderation,  witen  the  case 
,  demanded  it,  they  were  his  superiois. 

II.    CONTEMPORANEOUS    ACTION. 

568.  Conjunctions  used  of  Contemporaneous  Action  are  : 

Dum,  donee,  ivhile,  so  long  as,  until ;  quoad,  up  to  (the 
time)  Ihctt  ;  quamdiu,  as  long  as  ;  cum,  v:Jien. 

An  action  may  be  contemporaneous  in  Extent — so  long  as, 
ivhile. 

An  action  may  be  contemporaneous  in  Limit — until. 

Rkmark. — Dum,  {while)  yet,  denotes  duration,  which  may  bo  coex- 
tensive, so  long  as,  or  not.  It  is  often  causal.  Donee  (old  form  doni- 
cum,  used  only  in  the  sense  until),  is  parallel  with  dum  in  the  sense  so 
long  as,  until.     Cickko  uses  il  oiily  as  until. 


TEMPORAL   SENTENCES.  365 

1.    Contemporaneous  in  Extent. 

(So  long  as,  while.) 

569.  Complete  Coextension, — Dum,  donee,  quoad,  quamditi, 

so  long  as,  ivliile,  take  the  Indicative  of  all  the  tenses. 

Vita  dum  superest,  bene  est,  Maecenas  (Sen.,  E.M.,  lor,  11)  ;  w/nYe 
{so  long  as)  life  remains,  His  well.  Sibi  v§ro  banc  laudem  relinquont, 
"  Vixit,  dum  vixit,  bene,"  Ter.,  Hec,  461  ;  thei/  leave  indeed  this  praise 
for  themselves,  "  He  lived  well  while  he  lived''  {all  the  time).  Tiberius 
Graccbus  tam  diu  laudabitur  dum  memoria  rSrum  R5manarum  mangbit,  C, 
Off.,  II.  12,  43  ;  Tiberius  Gracchus  shall  he  praised  so  long  as  the 
memory  of  Roman  history  remains  {shall  remain).  Fuit  haec  gfens  fortis 
dum  Lycurgi  Igggs  vigSbant,  C,  Tusc,  i.  42,  101  ;  this  nation  was  brave 
so  long  as  Die  laws  of  Lycurgus  were  in  force.  D5nec  gratus  eram  tibi, 
Persarum  vigui  rSge  beatior,  II.,  0.,  iii.  9,  1  ;  while  I  was  pleasing  in 
your  sight,  I  throve  more  blessed  than  Persia's  king.  Quoad  potuit,  re- 
stitit,  Caes.,  B.G.,  iv.  12,  5  :  as  long  as  he  could,  he  withstood. 

Subjunctive  in  Oratio  Obliqua. 

(Rggulus  dixit)  quam  diu  iure  iurando  hostium  tengrgtur  non  esse  sS 
senatorem,  C,  Off.,  iir.  27,  100 ;  [Regulus  said]  that  as  long  as  he  was 
hound  by  his  oath  to  the  enemy  he  was  not  a  senator,  (Quamdiu  teneor 
ndn  sum  senator.)  -^ 

Subjunctive  by  Attraction. 

Faciam  ut  mei  memineris  dum  vitam  vivas,  Pl.,  Pers.,  494  (333,  2). 

Notes.— 1.  Dum.— In  the  Past  Sphere  we  have  the  Pf.  (Aor.),  Hist.  Pr.,  end  Imper- 
fect. Of  these  the  Hist.  P*r.  is  found  first  in  Sallust  (C,  36, 1),  and  the  Impf.,  while 
occurring  at  all  periods,  is  rare.  The  Pf.  is  not  in  Caesaii.  Dum  in  the  Present 
Sphere  is  rare  ;  the  Pure  Pr.  has  been  observed  in  Pl.,  B.,  737  :  mane  dum  scrlbit, 
which  looks  much  like  parataxis,  and  occasionally  in  Cicero  and  later  ;  the  Pure  Pf. 
is  cited  only  from  Terence  {And.,  556,  597),  and  is  only  apparent.  Several  examples 
of  the  Future  Sphere  are  cited,  Pl.,  B.,  225,  nSn  metu5  mibi  dum  b6c  valebit 
pectus  ;  Ter.,  Heaut.,  107  ;  C,  Rosc.Am.,  32,  991  ;  V.,  .4.,  1.  6c7,  etc. 

Donee  is  not  found  in  the  gsnse  "so  long  as,"  until  JAjcr.,  v.  178  ;  then  H.,  0.,  1.9, 
16  ;  III,  9, 1.  Also  Ov.,  Tr.,  i.  9,  5.  Livy  uses  it  occasionally,  but  Tacitus  affects  it, 
and  employs  Hist.  Pf.,  Impf.,  and  Fut.  tenses. 

Quoad  (correlative  with  adeo)  belongs  especially  to  the  classical  poeus,  but  is  also 
found  in  prose.  Compare  C,  PA.,  iii.  11,  28,  <2fc.  It  is  usually  found  in  the  Past 
Sphere  ;  in  the  Present  the  adverbial  force,  "  so  far  as,"  seems  to  preponderate  ;  Pl., 
Asin.,  296  :  quoad  virgs  valent.    The  Future  tenses  are  more  common. 

Quamdia  (correlative  with  tamdili)  is  found  with  this  usage  first  in  Cicero. 

2.  When  the  actions  are  coextensive,  the  tenses  are  generally  the  same  in  both  mem- 
bers, but  not  always. 

570.  Partial  Coextension. — Dum,  tvhile,  wJiile  yet,  dur- 


366  TEMPORAL   SENTENCES. 

ing,  commonly  takes  the  Present  Indicative  after  all  Tenses: 
so  especially  in  narrative. 

Cape  hunc  equum,  dum  tib!  virium  aliquid  superest,  L.,  xxii.  49,  7  ; 
take  this  horse,  while  you  have  yet  some  strength  left.  Bnin  haec  Romae 
aguntnr,  consulSs  ambd  in  Liguribus  gerebant  bellom,  L  ,  xxxix.  1,  1: 
while  these  tilings  were  going  on  at  Rome,  both  consuls  were  carrying  on 
war  in  Liguria.  Praetermissa  eius  rei  occasio  est,  dum  in  castellis  reci- 
piendis  tempos  teritur,  Ij.,  xxxiii.  18,  20  ;  the  opportunity  was  allowed 
to  slip  by,  while  time  was  wasted  in  recovering  miserable  forts. 

gW°  Dum  in  this  sense  often  resists  the  change  into  Subjv.  in  6.  0.,  especially  in 
post-classical  Latin.    (655,  k.  3.) 

Notes.— 1.  Quamdiu  and  quoad  are,  by  their  composition,  incapable  of  being 
used  in  this  sense,  and  as  donec  was  avoided,  dum  is  the  only  temporal  conjunction 
of  limit  that  is  loose  enough  in  its  formation  to  serve  for  partial  coextension.  The 
Pr.  after  it,  formally  an  Hist.  Pr.,  always  connotes  continuance,  and  the  construction 
becomes  practically  a  periphrasis  for  a  missing  Pr.  participle. 

2.  The  Pure  Pr.  of  the  Present  Sphere  is  found  occasionally,  principally  in  early 
Latin.  In  this  sense  the  relation  is  often  causal,  and  the  construction  is  paiallel  with 
the  I*r.  participle,  the  lack  of  which  in  the  passive  it  supplies. 

Ardua  dum  metuunt  ( = metuentSs)  amittunt  v6ra  vial,  Lucr.,  i.  660  (372,  n.  2). 
The  causal  relation  is  also  often  present  with  the  other  tenses. 

3.  Other  tenses  are  extremely  rare,  as  the  Future;  Pl.,  il/<e?i.,2i4,  dum  C0qu6tur, 
interim  pStabimus ;  the  Impf.,  Nep.,xxiii.2,4,  quae  divina  r6s  dum  conficig- 
batur,  quaeslvit  a  me. 

4.  LiVY,  xxxii.  24, 5,  shows  one  case  of  the  Plupf .  as  a  shorthand  to  express  the 
maintenance  of  the  result,  dum  averterat  =  dum  aversos  t6nebat. 


2.    Contemporaneous   in   Limit. 

(Until.) 

571.  Dnm,  donee,  quoad,  i(p  to  (the  time)  thatj  until,  have 
the  Present,  Historical  Present,  Historical  Perfect,  and 
Future  Perfect  Indicative. 

Tityre,  dum  redeo,  brevis  est  via,  pasce  capellas,  V.,  Ec,  9,  23;  Tity- 
rus,  while  I  am  retiirning  (=  till  1  return) — the  way  is  short — feed  my 
kids.  Epaminondas  ferrum  in  corpore  usque  eo  retinuit,  quoad  renuntiatum 
est  vicisse  Boeotios,  Cf.  Nep-.xv.q,  3;  Epaminondas  retained  the  iro?i 
in  his  body,  until  ivord  ivas  brought  back  that  the  Boeotians  had  con- 
quered. DSnec  rediit  Marcellus,  silentium  fuit,  L.,  xxiii.  31,  9  ;  until 
Marcellus  returned,  there  was  silence.  Hand  dfisinam  donee  perfScerO  hoc, 
Tkr.,  P/t.,  42c;  I  urill  not  cease  until  I  have  (shall  have)  accomplished 
it.     Exspectabo  dum  venit,  Ter.,  Eun.,  206  ;  I  will  ivait  until  he  comes. 

Subjunctive  in  6rati5  Obllqua. 

Scipi5ni  SilanSque  d5nec  revocati  ab  oenatu  forent  prorogatum  imperium 


TEMPORAL   SENTENCES.  36/ 

est,  L.,  XXVII.  7,  17;  Scipio  and  Silanus  had  their  command  extended 
until  "  they  should  have  been  recalled  by  the  senate.''' 

Notes.— 1.  With  the  Past  Sphere  the  idea  of  limit  precludes  the  employment  of  a 
tense  of  continuance,  which  would  naturally  involve  the  notion  of  Overlapping  Action. 
The  Impf.  is,  therefore,  not  found  until  the  time  of  Tacitus  (once  with  donec,  //-, 
1. 9).  With  the  Present  Sphere  the  tense  must  be  iterative  or  historical.  Otherwise  the 
Pr.  is  used  by  anticipation  for  the  Future. 

2.  The  Fut.  Indie,  is  found  occasionally  in  early  Latin,  usually,  however,  the  Present. 
In  the  classical  times,  and  afterwards,  the  Subjv.  takes  its  i)lace.  Thus  Cicero  uses  the 
Subjv.  regularly,  after  verba  exspectandi,  except  in  possibly  four  passages  of  tl.e 
earlier  Orations  and  Letters. 

3.  Donee  is  not  uncommon  in  early  Latin,  but  is  very  rare  in  Cicero,  and  never 
occurs  in  Caesar.  On  the  other  hand,  Tacitus  shows  one  hundred  and  thirty-eight 
cases  of  it. 

4.  Donicum  belongs  to  early  Latin,  but  is  not  found  in  Terence  ;  one  case  with  the 
Subjv.  is  found  in  Nepos.  Donique  is  found  in  Lucretius  four  times  with  the  Indie, 
always  before  vowels  ;  ia  Vituuvius  once  with  Indie,  three  times  with  Subjv.;  other- 
wise it  is  not  cited. 

5.  Quoad,  until.,  occurs  once  in  Plautus,  and  with  the  Subjunctive.  Otherwise  it  is 
found  with  both  moods  occasionally  throughout  the  language. 

G.  LivT  introduces  donec  inversum  like  cum  inversum  (581).  See  xxi.  46,  G ; 
XXXV.  so,  4,  etc. 

572.  Dum,  donee,  and  quoad,  until,  take  the  Subjunctive 
when  Suspense  and  Design  are  involved. 

Verginius  dum  collegam  consuleret  moratus  (est),  Ij.,iv.2i,  10;  Vergi- 
nius  delayed  until  he  could  (long  enough  to)  consult  his  colleague.  At 
tanti  tibi  sit  non  indulgere  theatris,  dum  bene  de  vacuo  pectore  cgdat  amor, 
Ov.,  Hem.  Am.,  751 ;  but  let  it  be  ivorth  the  cost  to  you  {=  deem  it  worth 
the  cost)  7iot  to  indulge  in  play-going,  until  love  be  fairly  gone  from 
(your)  imtenanted  bosom. 

Often  with  verba  exspectandi,  especially  exspecto,  /  waif. 

Rusticus  exspectat  dum  defluat  amnis,  H.,  Up.,  i.  2,  42;  the  cloiim  waits 
for  the  river  to  run  off  (dry). 

Remarks. — i.  The  Subjv.  is  sometimes  used  in  narrative  with  dum, 
while,  and  donee,  while,  until,  to  express  subordination.  The  prin- 
ciple is  that  of  Partial  Obliquity.  There  is  often  a  Causal  or  Iterative 
sense  (like  cum,  584,  ii.). 

Dum  intentus  in  eum  s§  rex  totus  Sverteret,  alter  6latam  securim  in 
caput  deiecit,  L.,  i.  40,  7;  while  the  king,  intent  upon  him,  was  turn- 
ing quite  away,  tlie  other  raised  his  axe  and  planted  it  in  his  skull. 
(Averteret  from  the  point  of  view  of  alter  =  dum  videt  avertentem.) 

2.  Verba  exspectandi  have  also  other  constructions,  as  ut,  si,  nuin,  but 
not  the  Infinitive. 

573.  Dunij  mods,  and  dammods,   if  onlij,  provided  only. 


368  TEMPORAL    SENTENCES. 

only,  are  used  with  tlie  Present  and  Imperfect  Subjunctive, 
rarely  the  other  tenses,  in  Conditional  Wishes. 

The  negative  is  ne  (dum  ng  =  ne  interim). 

Oderint  dum  metuant,  Accius  (C,  Off.,  i.  28,  97);  let  them  Kate  sc  long 
as  they  fear  (provided  that,  if  they  will  only  fear).  Quo  lubeat  nubant, 
dum  dos  ne  fiat  comes,  Pl.,  AiiL,  491  ;  let  them  marinj  where  (=  who/ii) 
tiiey  please,  if  hut  the  dowry  do  not  go  with  them.  Dummodo  morata 
recte  veniat,  dotata  est  satis,  Pl.,  Aid.,  229;  provided  only  she  come  with 
a  good  character,  she  is  eiidowed  (=  her  dowry  is)  enoiigh.  In  e5  multa 
admiranda  sunt:  gligere  modo  ctirae  sit,  Quint.,  x.  i,  131;  many  things 
in  him  are  to  be  admired ;  07ily  you  must  be  careful  to  choose.  Copia 
placandl  sit  modo  parva  tul,  Ov,,  Her.,  20,  74  (428,  r.  i). 

Notes.— 1.  It  has  been  noticed  that  Tacitus  uses  dummodS  only  in  the  Germania 
and  Dialogns,  otherwise  dum. 

2.  Dummodo  n§  and  mod5  n5  are  found  first  in  Cicero.  In  post- Augustan  Latin 
n5n  is  sometimes  used  for  nS ;  Juv.,  vii.  222,  dummodo  nOn  pereat. 

III.    SUBSEQUENT  ACTION. 
Antequam  and  Priusquam  with  the  Indicative. 

674.  Antequam  and  priusquam,  before,  take  the  Present, 
Perfect,  and  Future  Perfect  Indicative,  when  the  limit  is 
stated  as  a  fact.  The  Present  is  used  in  anticipation  of  the 
Future. 

Remarks. — i.  The  elements  ante,  antea,  prius,  and  quam  are  often 
separated. 

2.  As  prius  (ante) -quam  is  negative  in  its  signification  (=  necdum), 
the  Indie,  is  sometimes  found  where  we  sliould  expect  the  Subjunctive. 

Note.— Antequam  is  much  rarer  than  priusquam,  especially  in  early  Latin,  where 
it  is  cited  only  from  Cato,  Caelius,  Terence  {Hec,  146,  with  Subjv.  in  O.  O.),  and 
Varro.    Cicero  prefers  it  before  a  Pr.  Indie,  priusquam  elsewhere. 

675.  The  Present  Indicative  is  used  after  positive  sen- 
tences. 

Antequam  ad  sententiam  redeo,  ds  mS  pauca  dicam,  C,  Cat.,  iv.  10,  20  ; 
before  I  return  to  the  subject,  I  will  say  a  few  things  of  myself.  Omnia 
experiri  certum  est  prius  quam  pereo,  Ter.,  And.,  311;  I  am  determined  to 
try  everything  before  I  perish.  (Prius  quam  peream  —  sooner  than  perish, 
to  keep  from  perishing.) 

Notes.— 1.  The  Pure  Pf.  Indie,  is  used  of  Iterative  Action,  and  is  rare.    (567.) 
DociliSra  sunt  ingenia  priusquam  obd1iru6runt,  Quint.,  i.  12, 9(567). 
Instead  of  this,  the  Pr.  Subjv.  is  more  common  in  general  statements     (567,  N.) 
2.  Tacitus  shows  no  example  of  the  Pr.  Indicative. 


TEMPORAL   SENTEN^CES.  369 

576.  The  Perfect  (Aorist)  and  Future  Perfect  Indicative 
are  used  both  after  positive  and  after  negative  clauses,  chiefly 
the  latter. 

Heraclio,  aliquanto  ante  quam  est  mortuus,  omnia  tradiderat,  C,  Verr., 
II.  18,  40;  some  time  before  he  died  he  had  handed  over  everything  to 
Heraclius.  Legati  non  ante  profecti  quam  impositos  in  naves  militSs  vid§- 
nint,  L.,  XXXIV.  12,  8  ;  the  envoys  did  not  set  out  until  they  saw  the 
soldiers  on  hoard.  Neque  defatigabor  ante  quam  illorum  vias  rationgsque 
et  pro  omnibus  et  contra  omnia  disputandi  percgpero,  C,  Or.,  in.  36,  145  ; 
/  will  not  let  myself  grow  weary  before  (until)  /  learn  (shall  have  learned) 
their  methods  of  disputing  for  and  against  everything. 

Subjunctive  in  Oratio  Obliqua. 

Themistoclgs  [coll6gis  suis]  praedixit,  ut  n6  prius  LacedaemoniSrum 
iSgatos  dimitterent  quam  ipse  esset  remissus,  Nep.,  ii.  7,  3(540,  2).  (Non 
prius  dimittgtis  quam  ego  ero  remissus.) 

Remark. — After  negative  clauses  containing  a  historical  tense  the  Pf. 
is  the  rule  and  the  connection  is  always  close  :  non  priusquam  =.  dum. 
Violations  of  this  rule  are  very  rare  ;  see  577,  2. 

Notes.— 1.  The  Fnt.  is  found  occasionally  in  Plautus,  but  has  disappeared  by  the 
time  of  Terence.  The  Fut.  Pf.  is  never  common,  but  is  found  atall  periods.  Tacitus 
avoids  it,  and  so  do  fcther  authors. 

2.  The  Impf .  is  confined  to  LivY,  who  shows  four  examples,  and  to  one  case  in  late 
Latin.  The  Phipf.  is  found  once  in  Cicero  (Doni.,  30,  78),  where  it  may  be  Iterative, 
and  once  in  early  Latin   (Ter.,  Hec,  14c,). 

Antequam  and  Priusquam  with  the  Subjunctive. 

577.  Antequam  and  priusquam  are  used  with  the  Subjunc- 
tive when  an  ideal  limit  is  given  ;  when  the  action  is  expected, 
contingent,  designed,  or  subordinate. 

I.  An  ideal  limit  involves  necessary  antecedence,  but  not  necessary 
subsequence.  After  positive  sentences,  the  Subjunctive  is  the  rule, 
especially  in  generic  sentences  and  in  narrative.  (Compare  cum,  585.) 
After  Historical  Tenses  the  Subjunctive  is  almost  invariable  when  the 
action  does  not,  or  is  not  to,  take  place.  'J'he  translation  is  often  be< 
fore,  and  the  verbnl  in  -ing  (Greek  -rrptv  with  the  Infinitive). 

Ante  videmus  fulgSrem  quam  sonum  audiamus,  Sex.,  N.Q.,u.  12,  6; 
ice  see  the  flash  of  lightnirig  before  fiearing  the  sound  (we  may  never 
hear  it).  But  compare  Lucr.,  vi.  170.  In  omnibus  negotiis  prius  quam 
aggrediare  adhibenda  est  praeparatio  diliggns,  C,  Off.,i.  2i,7'S;  in  all 
affairs,  before  addressing  yourself  (tu  them),  you  must  make  use  of  care- 
ful preparation  (Ideal  Second  Person).     [Collem]  celeriter  priusquam  ab 


370  TEMPORAL   SEJ^TENCES. 

adversariis  sentiatur  communit,  Caes.,  B.C.,  i.  54,  4;  he  speedily  fortified 
the  hill  before  he  was  (too  soon  to  be)  perceived  by  the  enemy  (prius 
quam  =:  prius  quam  ut).  Hannibal  omnia  priusquam  excederet  pugna 
(erat)  expertus,  L.,  xxx.  35,  4  ;  Hannibal  had  tried  every thijig  before 
withdrawing  from  the  fight  (=  to  avoid  withdraiving  from  the  fight). 
Saepe  magna  indoles  virttitis  priusquam  rei  publicae  prodesse  potuisset 
ex3tincta  est,  C,  Ph.,  v.  17,  47;  ofteii  hath  great  native  worth  been  ex- 
tinguished before  it  could  be  of  service  to  tie  State.  Ducentis  annis  ante 
quam  urbem  Romam  caperent  in  Italiam  Galli  transcenderunt,  L.,  v.  33,  5; 
(it  ivas)  two  hundred  years  before  their  talcing  Rome  {that)  the  Gauls 
crossed  into  Italy  (here  the  Subjv.  gives  the  natural  point  of  reference). 

2.  After  an  historical  tense  in  the  negative,  the  Subjunctive  is  excep- 
tional.    (576,  11.) 

Inde  non  prius  egressus  est  quam  (=  ibi  manebat  dum)  r6x  eum  in  fidem 
reciperet,  Nep.,  ii.  8,  4;  he  did  not  come  out  until  the  hing  should  take 
him  under  his  protection  (he  stayed  to  make  the  king  take  him  under 
his  protection).     See  Caes.,  B.G.,  vi.  37,  2;  L.,  xlv.  ii,  3. 

Notes.— 1.  The  Pr.  Subjv.  is  common,  but  is  usually  generic;  the  few  cases  of  Final 
Subjv.  are  confined  to  early  Latin.  Very  rarely  the  Hist.  Pr.  is  found  after  a  Hist. 
Present.    See  Caes.,  B.  C,  i.  22. 

2.  The  Pf.  occurs  occasionally  ;  it  is  usually  in  a  final  sense. 

Non  prius  dimittunt  quam  ab  his  sit  concessum,  Caes.,  b.  G.,  hi.  18. 

3.  In  LivY  we  find  the  Inipf.  Subjv.  used  not  unfrequently,  where  the  idea  of  sus- 
pense or  design  is  very  slight,  much  after  the  manner  of  cum  nomdum  (as  C,  Ph.,  v. 
1,4). 

4.  The  Plupf .  Subjv.  is  cited  five  times  from  Cicero  and  four  times  from  Livy.  In 
these  passages  the  completion  rather  than  the  continuance  is  in  suspense. 

5.  PostridiSquam  is  found  in  Plautus,  Cicero  (Letters),  and  Suetonius  with 
the  Indicative.  In  Cicero,  Ac,  ii.  3,  9,  with  the  Subjunctive.  PridiSquam  is  found 
in  Plautus  and  Cicero  with  the  Indicative  ;  in  LivY,  Val.  Max.,  and  Suetonius 
with  the  Subjunctive.    Both  are  very  rare. 

6.  When  the  will  is  involved,  potius  quam  is  used  in  the  same  way  as  prius  quam. 
Depugna  potius  quam  servias,  C,  Alt.  vn.  7, 7  ;  fr/ht  it  mit  rather  than  be  a 

slave. 

IV.    CONSTRUCTIONS  OF  CUM  (QUOM). 

578.  Cum  is  a  (locative)  relative  conjunction. 

Note.— Originally  locative  (where),  quom  became  temporal  (when)  like  ubi.  When 
time  is  not  defined  by  a  fixed  date,  it  readily  becomes  circumstance,  and  this  circum- 
stance is  interpreted  as  cause,  condition,  and  the  like.  Compare  the  circumstantial 
relative  itself.  The  first  construction  was  with  the  Indicative  as  in  any  other  merely 
relative  clause,  and  this  is  the  sole  construction  in  earliest  Latin.  But,  beginning  with 
Terence,  we  can  observe  the  drift  ever  increasing  in  Latin  towards  the  expression  of 
character  by  tendency  (Subjv.)  rather  than  by  fact  (Indie),  so  that  the  relative  of  char- 
acter takes  more  and  more  the  Subjunctive,  and  cum  follows  the  lead  of  ut  nnd  of  the 
inflected  relative  pronoun. 

579.  There  are  two  great  uses  of  cum  : 

I.  Temporal  cum  {when,  then),  with  the  Indicative. 


TEMPORAL   SENTENCES.  3/1 

II.  Circumstantial  cum  {as,  ivhereas),  with  the  Subjunc- 
tive. 

In  the  second  usage  the  relation  is  still  purely  a  matter  of 
inference  ;  but  according  to  this  inferential  connection  we 
distinguish  : 

{a)  Historical  cum,  as,  giving  the  attendant  circumstances, 
mainly  temporal,  under  which  an  action  took  place. 

{b)  Causal  cum,  as,  wliereas,  since,  indicating  that  the 
main  action  proceeded  from  the  subordinate  one. 

(c)  Concessive  cum,  wliereas,  although,  indicating  that  the 
main  action  was  accomplished  in  spite  of  that  of  the  subor- 
dinate clause. 

I.  Cum  vSr  appetit,  militSs  ex  hibernis  movent,  when  spring  ap- 
proaches, soldiers  move  out  of  tcinter-quarters. 

II.  (rt)  Cum  ver  appeteret,  Hannibal  ex  hibernis  movit,  as  spring  was 
approaching  {spring  approaching),  Hannibal  moved  out  of  winter- 
quarters. 

(b)  Cum  vSr  appetat,  ex  hibernis  movendum  est,  as  (since)  spring  is 
approaching,  we  must  move  out  of  winter-quaiiers. 

(c)  Cum  v6r  appeteret,  tamen  hostgs  ex  hibernis  non  movSrunt,  whereas 
{although)  spring  was  approachitig,  nevertheless  the  enemy  did  not  move 
out  of  winter-quarters. 

1.    Temporal  Cum. 

580.  Cum,  tvhe?i,  is  used  with  all  the  tenses  of  the  Indica- 
tive to  designate  merely  temporal  relations. 

In  the  Principal  clause,  a  temporal  adverb  or  temporal  expression 
is  frequently  employed,  such  as  turn,  tunc,  theti ;  nunc,  now  ;  diSs,  day  ; 
tempus,  time  ;  iam,  already  ;  vix,  scarcely,  and  the  like. 

Animus,  nee  cum  adest  nee  cum  discgdit,  apparet,  C,  Cat. 31.,  22,  80; 
the  .'<onl  is  ?iot  visible,  either  ivhen  it  is  present,  or  when  it  dejmrts. 
Stomacher  cum  aliorum  n5n  me  digna  in  m6  conferuntur,  C,  Plane,  14,  35 ; 
/  get  fretted  when  other  people's  Jokes  that  are  not  worthy  of  me  are 
foisted  on  me.  [Sex  libros  d6  rS  publica]  tum  scripsimus  cum  gubernacula 
rel  publicae  tenebamus,  C,  Div.,  11.  i,  H;  I  wrote  the  six  books  about  the 
State  at  the  time  ivhen  I  held  the  helm  of  the  State.  Eecordare  tempus 
illud  cum  pater  Curi5  maerSns  iac6bat  in  lecto,  C,  Ph.,  n.  18,  45;  remem- 
ber the  time  when  Curio  the  father  lay  abed  from  grief.  Longum  illud 
tempus  cum  non  erS  magis  m6  movet  quam  h5c  exiguum,  C,  Att.,  xii.  18, 1 ; 
that  long  time  (to  come),  when  I  shall  not  crAst,  has  more  effect  on  me 
than  this  scard  {present  time).     Iam  dilucgscebat  cum  signum  cQnsul 


372  TEMPORAL   SENTENCES. 

dedit,  L.,  xxxvi.  24,  G;  by  this  time  day  ivas  beginning  to  dawn,  when 
the  consul  gave  the  signal.     (See  581.) 

Idea]  Second  Person  with  the  Subjunctive  : 

Pater,  hominum  inmortalis  est  inftimia.  Etiam  turn  vivit  quom  esse 
credas  mortuam,  Pl.,  Pers.,  355;  Father,  immortal  is  the  ill-fame  of  the 
u'orld.     It  lives  on  even  when  you  think  that  it  is  dead. 

But  the  presence  of  a  temporal  adverb  does  not  mean  necessarily  that 
the  cum  clause  is  merely  temporal. 

Remarks. — i.  Fuit  cum  commonly  follows  the  analogy  of  other 
characteristic  relatives  (631),  and  takes  the  Subjunctive  : 

Fuit  tempus  cum  (=  fuit  cum)  rura  colerent  homines,  Varro,  R.R.,  iii. 
I,  1 ;  there  was  a  time  when  all  mankind  tilled  fields  =  were  countrymen. 

The  Indie,  is  rare. 

2.  Memini  cum,  /  remember  the  time  when,  takes  the  Indie,  but 
audire  cum  takes  the  Subjv.  parallel  with  the  participle  : 

Memini  cum  mih!  dgsipere  vidgbare,  C,  Farn  ,  vii.  28,  1;  I  remember 
the  time  tvhen  you  seemed  to  me  to  show  the  worst  possible  taste.  Audivi 
Metrodorum  cum  de  iis  ipsis  rebus  disputaret,  C,  Or.,  11.  90,  365;  /  have 
heard  Met'rodorus  di§cuss{ini^)  these  very  matters. 

3.  Peculiar  is  the  use  of  cum  with  Lapses  of  Time.  Lapses  of  Time 
are  treated  as  Designations  of  Time  in  Accusative  or  Ablative  : 

Multi  anni  sunt  cum  {=  multos  annos)  in  aere  meo  est,  C,  Fam.,  xv. 
14,  1 ;  {it  is)  many  years  (that)  lie  has  been  (230)  m  my  debt.  Permulti 
anni  iam  erant  cum  inter  patricios  magistrates  tribunSsque  nulla  certa- 
mina  fuerant,  L.,  ix.  33,  3;  very  many  years  had  elapsed  since  there  had 
been  a?iy  struggles  between  the  patrician  magistrates  and  the  tribunes. 
Nondum  centum  et  decem  anni  sunt  cum  (=  ex  quo  =  abhinc  annos)  dS  pe- 
cuniis  repetundis  lata  lex  est,  C,  Off.,  11.  21,  75;  it  is  not  yet  one  hundred 
and  ten  years  since  the  law  concerning  extortion  was  proposed. 

Notes.— 1.  In  Plautus  cum  with  the  Indie,  may  be  explicative,  causal,  conceeeive, 
adversative.  Esrplicative :  salvos  quom  {that)  advenis,  gaudeO,  Most.,  1128.  Caus- 
al: salvos  quom  {since)  peregrg  advenis,  cgna  detur,  B.,  536-  Concessive :  [servi] 
quom  {although)  culpa  carent,  tamen  malum  metuont.  Most.,  859.  Advermlixe: 
insanire  m6  aiunt,  ultro  quom  {whereas)  ipsi  insaniunt,  Men.,  831. 

The  same  holds  true  for  Terence,  except  that  the  Subjv.  is  now  making  its  appear- 
ance in  cases  where  it  can  be  neither  potential,  ideal,  nor  attracted,  as  Ilec,  341  :  non 
visam  ux5rem  Pamphili,  quom  in  proxumo  hie  sit  aegra  *? 

Of  course,  tliis  prevalence  of  the  Indie,  does  not  exclude  the  attraction  into  the 
Subjv.,  nor  does  it  exclude  the  regular  potential  use. 

2.  The  explicative  use  dies  out,  except  where  it  is  akin  to  the  conditional ;  but  it 
always  retains  the  Indicative.  With  Causal  and  Concessive-Adversative  uses,  the 
Subjv.  is  used  more  and  more  in  place  of  the  Indicative. 

3.  In  early  Latin  we  find  quoniam  and  quandS,  need  sometimes  with  the  force  of 
quom.  In  the  case  of  quoniam  several  examples  are  cited  from  Plautus,  in  most  of 
which,  however,  the  causal  conception  lies  very  close  at  hand  ;  the  temporal  force  seems 
to  have  disappeared  by  the  time  of  I'erence,  and  only  reappears  in  Gellius.     The 


TEMPORAL   SENTENCES.  373 

temporal  usage  of  quando  is  still  the  prevailing  one  in  Plautus,  over  seventy  instances 
having  been  collected.  Of  these  the  majority  are  in  the  Present  and  Future  Spheres,  in 
which  the  shift  to  tlie  causal  conception  is  very  easy  ;  many  of  them  are  also  iterative. 
In  Tepence  the  temporal  usage  of  quandS  has  disappeared  unless  possibly  in  one 
passage  (AcL,  606),  but  sporadic  cases  are  found  later,  even  in  Ciceko. 

Quoniam  hinc  est  profecturus  peregre  thensaurum  demonstravit  mihi, 
Pl.,  Ti-in.,  149.    Turn,  quand5  Iggatos  Tjrrum  misimus,  C,  Leg.Agr.,  11. 16, 41. 

681.  Cum  hiversum.  When  the  two  actions  are  indepen- 
dent, cum  is  sometimes  used  with  the  one  which  seems  to  be 
logically  the  principal  clause,  just  as  in  English. 

lam  non  longins  bidui  via  aberant,  com  duas  vSnisse  legionSs  cognoscunt, 
Caes.,  B.G.,  VI.  7,  2  ;  they  tcere  noiv  distant  not  more  than  two  days' 
march,  when  they  learned  that  two  legions  were  come. 

Similar  is  tlie  addition  of  an  illustrative  fact,  often  causal  or  adversa- 
tive, by  cum  interea  (interim),  quidem,  tamen,  etc.,  with  the  Indicative. 

582.  Eoc2)lic(ttive  cum. — When  the  actions  of  the  two 
clauses  are  coincident,  cum  is  almost  equivalent  to  its  kin- 
dred relative  quod,  in  that. 

Aiacem,  hunc  quom  vid6s,  ipsum  vid6s,  Pl.,  Capt.,  615  ;  lohen  you  see 
him,  you  see  Ajax  himself.  Cum  tacent,  clamant,  C,  Cat.,  i.  8,  21 ;  ivhen 
(=  in  tliat)  they  are  silent,  they  cry  aloud.  Dixi  omnia  cum  hominem 
nominavl,  Plin.,  Ep.,  iv.  22,  4;  I  have  said  everything,  in  naming  the 
man. 

583.  Conditional  cum. — Cum  with  the  Future,  Future 
Perfect,  or  Universal  Present,  is  often  almost  equivalent  to 
si,  if,  with  which  it  is  sometimes  interchanged. 

Cum  posc6s,  posce  Lating,  Juv.,  xi.  148;  when  (if)  you  {shall)  ask  (for 
anything),  ask  in  Latin.  Cum  veniet  contra,  digito  compgsce  labellum, 
Juv.,  I.  160  ;  when  (if)  he  meets  you,  padlock  your  lip  ivith  your  finger. 

584.  Iterative  cum. — Cum  in  the  sense  of  quotiens,  as  often 
as,  takes  the  Tenses  of  Iterative  Action. 

Solet  cum  sg  purgat  in  mg  conferre  omnem  culpam,  C,  ^^/.,  ix.  2  a,  1; 
he  is  accustomed,  ivhen  he  clears  himself,  to  put  off  all  the  blame  on  me. 
[Ager]  cummultos  annos  requigvit  uberiorgs  eflferre  fruggs  solet,  C,  Br.,  4, 
1 C)  (567).  Cum  palam  eius  anuli  ad  palmam  converterat  (Gyggs)  a  nulls 
vidgbatur,  C,  Off.,  in.  9,  38  (507). 

Kemark. — The  Subjv.  is  also  found  (567,  n.)  : 

Cum  in  ius  duci  dgbitorem  vidissent,  undique  convolabant,  L.,  11.  27,  8  ; 

tvhenever  they  saw  a  debtor  taken,  to  court,  they  made  it  a  rule  to  hurry 
together  from  cdl  quarters. 


374  TEMPORAL   SENTENCES. 

2.    Circumstantial  Cum. 

585.  Historical  cum. — Cum,  when  (as),  is  used  in  narra- 
tive with  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  of  contemporaneous 
action,  with  the  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  of  antecedent  action, 
to  characterize  the  temporal  circumstances  under  which  an 
action  tool^  place. 

[AgesilausJcumexAegyptorevertergturdecessit,  Nep.,  xvii.  8,  G  ;  Agesi- 
laus  died  as  he  was  returning  from  Egypt.  Zenonem  cum  Athgnis  essem 
audiebam  frequenter,  C,  N.D.,  i.  21,  59;  when  I  was  {being)  at  Athens, 

1  heard  Zeno  {lecture)  frequently.  Athgnienses  cum  statuerent  ut  nav6s 
conscenderent,  Cyrsilum  quendam  suadentem  ut  in  urbe  manerent,  lapidibus 
cbruerunt,  C,  Off.,  ni.  11,  48  (540). 

Cum  Caesar  Anconam  occupavisset,  urbem  reliquimus,  C,  Fam.,  xvi.  12, 

2  ;  when  (as)  Caesar  had  occupied  Ancona  (Caesar  having  occupied 
Ancona),  I  left  the  city.  Attains  moritur  altero  et  septuaggsimo  anno, 
cum  quattuor  et  quadraginta  annos  rggnasset,  L.,  xxxni.  21,  1;  Attains 
died  in  his  sevejity-second  year,  having  reigned  forty-fonr  years. 

Remark. — The  subordinate  clause  generally  precedes.  The  circum- 
stantiality often  appears  as  causality,  but  sometimes  the  exact  shade 
cannot  be  distinguished.  Owing  to  this  implicit  character,  cum  with 
the  Subjv.  is  a  close  equivalent  to  the  participle,  and  often  serves  to 
supply  its  absence.     Compare  611  with  631,  2. 

Notes.— 1.  How  closely  allied  the  ideas  of  time  and  circumstance  are,  in  these 
constructions,  is  seen  from  such  examples  as  this  : 

Cum  varicgs  secabantur  C.  Mario,  dolgbat,  C,  Tusc,  11. 15, 35  (time).  Marius 
cum  secargtur,  ut  supra  dixi,  vetuit,  etc.,  C,  Tusc,  11.  22,  53  (circumstances). 
Cum  ad  tribum  Poiliam  ventum  est,  (date)  et  praeco  cunctargtur  (cir- 
cnrastanccs)  citare  ipsum  censorem;  Cita,  inquit  NerS,  M.  Livium,  L.,xxix. 
37,8. 

2.  The  use  of  Time  When  particles  with  the  Pr.  is  necessarily  limited  to  itt^rative  or 
causal  (adversative)  relations.  Hence  there  is  no  room  for  the  ciicumstantial  cum  with 
the  Subjv.  except  so  far  as  it  is  causal-adversative.  Fut.  and  Fut.  Pf.  are  found  chieJly 
in  general  or  iterative  relations. 

3.  By  attraction  similar  to  that  with  qnod  (541,  n.  3)  and  other  relatives,  cumdiceret, 
with  an  Inf.,  is  found  where  diceret  would  be  more  natiually  omitted  or  in!<eite;l  is 
(ut  dicgbat) ;  so  cum  adsentire  se  diceret  for  cum  adsentiret,  L.,  i.  54,  l.  Simi- 
larly with  cum  causal  :  '•  saying,  as  he  did,"  C,  Mil..,  5, 12. 

586.  Causal  CMm. — Cum,  ivlien,  whereas,  since,  seeing  that, 
with  any  tense  of  the  Subjunctive,  is  used  to  denote  the  rea- 
son, and  occasionally  the  motive,  of  an  action  (580,  N.  1). 

Quae  cum  ita  sint,  effectum  est  nihil  esse  malum  quod  turpe  n5n  sit,  C, 
Fin.,  III.  8,  29;  since  tliese  things  are  so,  it  is  made  out  (proved)  that 
nothing  is  bad  that  is  not  dishonorable.     Cum  [Athgnas]  tamquam  ad 


TEMPORAL  SENTENCES.  375 

mercaturam  bonarum  artium  sis  profectus,  inanem  redire  turpissimum  est, 

C.  Ojf.,  III.  2,  6;  as  {since)  you  set  out  for  Athens  as  if  to  7narket  for  ac- 
complishments, it  icould  be  utterly  disgraceful  to  return  empty  {handed). 
Dolo  erat  pugnandum,  cum  par  non  esset  armis,  Nep.,  xxiii.  io,  4  ;  he  had 
to  fight  hy  stratagem,  as  he  {seeing  that  he)  ivas  tiot  a  match  in  arms. 

Remarks. — i.  The  characteristic  nature  of  the  Siibjv.  with  cum 
comes  out  more  clearly  in  the  causal  connection,  owing  to  the  parallel 
with  utpote,  quippe,  and  the  relative  (G2G,  n.). 

2.  I'he  primary  tenses  are  more  common,  in  this  connection,  but  the 
historical  tenses  are  abundant  enough.  With  the  latter  the  causal 
relation  need  never  be  emphasized. 

687.  Concessive  and  Adversative  cum. — Causal  cum, 
whereas,  becomes  Concessive  cum,  whereas,  althougli,  with 
the  Subjunctive,  when  the  cause  is  not  sufficient ;  the  rela- 
tion is  often  adversative,  and  there  is  no  limitation  as  to 
tense. 

The  temporal  notion  is  still  at  work;  whether  the  times  are  for  or 
against  an  action  is  a  matter  outside  of  language  (580,  n.  1). 

Nihil  mS  adiuvit  cum  posset,  C,  Att.,  ix.  13,  3  ;  he  gave  me  710  assist- 
ance, altliough  {at  a  time  when)  he  had  it  in  his  power.  Cum  primi 
ordings  hostium  concidissent,  tamen  acerrimg  reliqui  resistebant,  Caes., 
B.G.,  VII.  62,  4;  although  the  first  ranks  of  the  enemy  had  fallen  {been 
cut  to  pieces),  nevertheless  the  rest  resisted  most  vigorously.  Perire  artem 
putamus  nisi  apparet,  cum  desinat  ars  esse,  si  apparet,  Quint.,  iv.  2,  127; 
we  think  that  {our)  art  is  lost  unless  it  shows,  whereas  it  ceases  to  be  art 
if  it  shoivs. 

Remarks. — i.  To  emphasize  the  adversative  idea,  tamen  is  often 
added  in  the  principal  clause. 

2.  Adversative  cum  non,  ivhereas  not,  is  often  conveniently  trans- 
lated without;  cum  non  Inferior  fuisset,  C,  Off.,  i.  32,  IIG  ;  without 
being  inferior. 

588.  Cum— tum.  i.  When  cum,  ivhen,  turn,  then,  have  the 
same  verb,  the  verh  is  put  in  the  Indicative.  Cum — tum  then 
has  the  force  of  both — and  especially,  and  a  strengthening* 
adverb,  such  as  maximg,  praecipue,  is  often  added  to  the 
latter. 

(Pausanias)  consilia  cum  patriae  tum  sibi  inimica  capigbat,  Nep.,  iv.  3,  3 ; 
Pausanias  conceived  plans  that  were  hurtful  both  to  his  country  and 
especially  to  himself 


3/6  CONDITIONAL   SENTENCES. 

2.  When  they  have  different  verbs,  the  verb  with  cum  is 
usually  in  the  Indicative,  but  may  be  in  the  Subjunctive, 
especially  when  the  actions  of  the  two  verbs  are  not  contem- 
porary ;  this  Subjunctive  often  has  a  concessive  force. 

[Sisennae  historia]  cum  facile  omngs  vincat  superior6s,  turn  indicat  tamen 
quantum  absit  a  summo,  C,  Br.,  64,  228;  although  the  history  of  Sisenna 
easily  surpasses  all  former  histories,  yet  it  shows  how  far  it  is  from  the 
highest  {mark). 

CONDITIONAL    SENTENCES. 

689.  In  Conditional  Sentences  the  clause  which  contains 
the  condition  (supposed  cause)  is  called  the  Protasis,  that 
which  contains  the  consequence  is  called  the  Apodosis. 

Logically,  Protasis  is  Premiss  ;  and  Apodosis,  Conclusion. 

Grammatically,  the  Apodosis  is  the  Princijjal,  the  Protasis 
the  Dependent,  clause. 

590.  Sign  of  the  Conditional. — The  common  conditional 
particle  is  si,  if. 

Notes.— 1.  SI  is  a  locative  case,  literally,  so,  in  those  circumstavces  (comp.  si-C,  so, 
and  the  English  :  "  I  would  by  combat  make  her  good,  so  were  I  a  man." — Shake- 
speare). Hence,  conditional  clauses  with  si  may  be  regarded  as  adverbs  in  the  Abl. 
case,  and  are  often  actually  represented  by  the  Abl.  Absolute. 

Sic  is  found  as  the  correlative  of  si  in  the  colloquial  language,  as  :  sic  ScribSs  all- 
quid,  si  vacabis  (C,  Att.,  xii.  38, 2) ;  sic  ignovisse  putato  mg  tibi,  si  c6nas  hodi6 
mecum  (H.,  Ep.,  i.  7,  69).  Instead  of  sic,  its  equivalent  tum  occurs  at  all  periods,  being 
in  the  Augustan  time  restricted  to  formal  uses.  Igitur  is  also  found  as  late  as  Cicero, 
who  likewise  uses  ita.    Other  particles  are  post-classical. 

2.  The  connection  with  the  Causal  Sentence  is  shown  by  si  quidem,  which  in  later 
Latin  is  almost  =  quoniam ;  see  595,  r.  5. 

3.  The  temporal  particles  cum  and  quandO,  tvhen,  and  the  locative  ubi,  are  also 
used  to  indicate  conditional  relations  in  which  the  idea  of  Time  or  Space  is  involved. 

591.  Negative  of  si. — The  negative  of  si  is  si  non  or  nisi. 

{a)  With  si  non,  if  not,  the  non  negatives  the  single  word  ; 
hence  an  opposing  positive  is  expected,  either  in  a  preceding 
condition,  or  in  the  conclusion.    Therefore,  si  non  is  the  rule  : 

I.  When  the  positive  of  the  same  verb  precedes. 

Si  fSceris,  mfignam  habSbO  gratiam  ;  si  n6n  fSceris,  IgnOscam,  C.,  Fam.^ 
V.  19  ;  if  you  do  it,  I  will  be  very  grateful  to  you  ;  if  you  do  not,  I  will 
forgive  {you). 


CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES.  377 

2.  When  the  Condition  is  concessive  ;  in  this  case  the  prin- 
cipal clause  often  contains  an  adversative  particle. 

Si  mill!  bona  r6  publica  frui  non  licuerit,  at  car§bo  mala,  C,  Mil.,  34, 
93  ;  */  /  shall  not  he  allowed  to  enjoy  good  government,  1  shall  at  least 
he  rid  of  had. 

(b)  With  nisi,  unless,  the  negative  ni-  refers  to  the  princi- 
pal clause,  which  is  thus  denied,  if  the  conditional  clause  is 
accepted  ;  hence  : 

1.  Nisi  adds  an  exception  or  restriction  to  the  leading 
statement.     Compare  the  general  use  of  nisi,  excepi  (r.  2). 

Nisi  molestumst,  paucis  percontarier  (130,  6)  volo  ego  ex  tg,  Pl.,  Rtid.y 
120;  if  it  is  not  disagreeable,  I  ivish  to  ask  you  a  few  questions. 

So  the  formulas  nisi  fallor  (ni  fallor  is  found  first  in  Ovid),  nisi  mS 
omnia  fallunt  (C,  Att.,  viii.  7,  1),  and  the  like. 

2.  Nisi  is  in  favorite  use  after  negatives. 

Parvl  {—  nihili)  sunt  foris  arma  nisi  est  consilium  domi,  C,  Off-,  i-  22, 
76  (411,  R.  2).  [Non]  possem  vivere  nisi  in  litteris  viverem,  C,  Fam.,  ix. 
26,  1 ;  /  co\dd  not  live  unless  I  lived  in  study.  Memoria  minuitur  nisi 
eam  exerceas,  C,  Oat.  31.,  7,  21;  memory  wanes  unless  (except)  you  exer- 
cise it.     (Si  non  exerceas,  in  case  you  fail  to  exercise  it.) 

So  more  often  than  si  n5n,  in  asseverations.  Peream  nisi  sollicitus 
sum,  C,  Fam.,  xv.  19,  4  ;  may  I  die  if  I  am  fiot  troubled. 

Remarks.— I.  Sometimes  the  difference  is  unessential  : 

Nisi  Curio  fuisset,  hodis  ts  muscae  comSdissent,  Cf.  Quint.,  xi.  3, 129; 

if  it  had  not  been  for  Curio,  the  flies  would  have  eaten  you  up  this  day. 

Si  non  fuisset  woidd  be  equally  correct. 

2.  Nisi  is  often  used  after  negative  sentences  or  equivalents  in  the 
signification  of  but,  except,  besides,  only  : 

inspice  quid  portem ;  nihil  liic  nisi  triste  vidgbis,  Ov.,  Tr.,  in.  i,  9; 
examine  ivhat  I  am  hringi7ig  ;  you  will  see  nothing  here  except  (what  is) 
sad.  Falsus  honor  iuvat  et  mendax  in^mia  tenet,  quem  nisi  mendSsum 
et  medicandum'?  ii.,Ep.,\.i(i,o^\  '^ false  honor  chartns  and  lying 
slander  scares,^'  tvhom  hut  the  faulty  and  the  fit  for  physic  9 

So  nisi  si,  except  in  case,  with  a  following  verb  ;  occasional  in  early 
Latin,  more  common  later,  but  not  in  Caes.  {B.  0.,\.  31, 14,  is  disputed), 
Sall.,  Verg.,  Iloii.     Nisi  ut,  except  on  condition  that,  is  post-classical. 

Necesse  est  CasilingnsSs  s@  dgdere  Hannibali ;  nisi  si  malunt  fam§  perire, 
C,  Inv.,  II.  57,  171;  the  people  of  Casilinum  must  needs  surrender  to 
Hannibal ;  unless  (except  in  case)  they  prefer  to  perish  by  hunger. 

3.  Nisi  quod  introduces  an  actual  limitation — with  the  exception,  that 
(525,  2,  N.  2)  ;  so  praeterquam  quod  ;  nisi  ut  (e.  g.  C,  Imp.,  23,  67). 


378  CONDITIONAL   SENTENCES. 

Nihil  acciderat  [PolycratI]  quod  noUet  nisi  quod  anulum  quo  dglectabatur 
in  mari  abiecerat,  C,  Fin.,  v.  30,  92  ;  nothing  had  happened  to  Poly- 
crates  that  he  could  7iot  have  loished,  except  that  he  had  thrown  into  the 
sea  a  ring  in  which  he  took  delight  {=  a  favorite  ring).  NiMl  peccat 
nisi  quod  nihil  peccat,  Plin.,  Ep.,  ix.  26,  1;  he  malces  no  blunder  except 
— that  he  makes  no  blunder  ("  faultily  faultless  '*). 

4.  Nisi  forte  (found  very  often  in  Cicero,  very  rarely  earlier),  unless, 
perhaps,  nisi  vgro  (peculiar  to  Cicero),  unless,  indeed,  with  the  Indie, 
either  limit  a  previous  statement,  or  make  an  ironical  concession  : 

N6m6  ferS  saltat  sobrius  nisi  forte  insanit,  C,  3Iur.,6,  13;  there  is 
scarce  any  one  that  dances  (when)  so6e/-,  unless  perhaps  he  is  cracked. 
Plgnum  forum  est  eorum  hominum,  .  .  .  nisi  vgro  paucos  fuisse  arbitramini, 
C,  Sull.,  9,  28;  the  forum  is  full  of  those  rnen;  unless,  indeed,  you 
think  they  were  (but)  few. 

Notes.— 1.  Nisi  is  sometimes  strengthened  by  tamen,  but,  yet. 
Nisi  etiam  hie  opperiar  tamen  paulisper,  Pl.,  Aid.,  805  ;  Cf.  C,  Att.,  v.  14, 3. 
Even  without  tamen  it  is  adversative  in  colloquial  Latin,  especially  after  nescio. 

2.  NI  is  found  mostly  in  early  Latin  and  the  poets,  and  in  legal  formuke  and  collo- 
quial phrases.    It  is  rare  in  Ciceko,  and  never  used  in  Caesar. 

Peream  ni  piscem  putavl  esse,  Varro,  E.R.,  hi.  3, 9  ;  may  I  die  if  I  did  not 
think  it  was  a  fish. 

3.  Nisi  forte  is  found  occasionally  with  the  Subjv.  from  Apuleius  on. 

592.  Two  Conditions  excluding  each  the  other. — When 
two  conditions  exclude  each  the  otheiv  si  is  used  for  the  first ; 
sin,  if  not  {hut  if),  for  the  second. 

Sin  is  further  strengthened  by  autem,  vero  (rare),  hut; 
minus,  less  (not);  secus  (rare),  otlierwise;  aliter,  else. 

Mercatura,  si  tenuis  est,  sordida  putanda  est ;  sin  magna  et  copiosa,  n5n 
est  admodum  vituperanda,  C,  Off.,  i.  42,  LjI;  mercantile  business,  if  it 
is  petty,  is  to  be  considered  dirty  (work);  if  {it  is)  not  {petty,  but)  great 
and  abundant  (=  conducted  on  a  large  scale),  it  is  not  to  be  found  fault 
with  much. 

Remark. — If  the  verb  or  predicate  is  to  he  supplied  from  the 
context,  si  minus,  if  less  {not),  sin  minus,  sin  aliter,  if  otherwise,  are 
commonly  used,  rarely  si  non  : 

Edfic  tecum  omngs  tuos  ;  si  minus,  quam  plurimQs,  C,  Cat.,  i.  5,  10; 
take  out  iviih  you  all  your  {followers) ;  if  not,  as  many  as  possible. 
Odero  si  pctero  ;  si  nOn,  invltus  amSbO,  Ov.,  Am.,  in.  11,  35  (243,  11.  2). 

Note.— Much  less  common  arc  simple  si,  or  si  strengthened  by  n6n,  nihil,  ntillus, 
minus,  or  by  autem,  v6r5 ;  or  sed  si,  at  si  (Col.),  sI  contra  (Hor.,  Pun.).  Sin  may 
also  be  followed  by  nOn,  but  commonly  only  when  one  or  more  words  intervene. 

PQma  cruda  si  sunt,  vix  Svelluntur ;  si  matura,  dScidunt,  C,  Cat.M,,  19,71.; 

if f nut  is  green  it  can  hardly  be  plucked,  f  ripe  il  fulls  ((f  itself). 


CON'DITIOJ^AL   SENTENCES.  379 

593.  other  Forms  of  the  Protasis. — i.  The  Protasis  may 
be  expressed  by  a  Relative. 

Qui  videret,  urbem  captam  diceret,  C,  Vetr.,  iv.  23,  52;  u'hoso  had  seen 
it,  had  said  that  the  city  was  taken.  Miraretur  qui  turn  cerneret,  L., 
XXXIV.  9,  4  (258). 

2.  The  Protasis  may  be  contained  in  a  Participle. 

Si  latet  ars,  prodest;  affert  dgprensa  pudorem,  Ov.,  A.A.,u.  213;  art, 
if  concealed,  does  good  ;  detected,  it  brings  shame.  Maximas  virtutes 
iacere  oinngs  necesse  est  voluptate  dominante,  C,  Fin.,  ir.  35,  117  ;  all  the 
greatest  virtues  must  necessarily  lie  prostrate,  if  the  pleasure  {of  tlie 
senses)  is  mistress.  Nihil  [potest]  Svenire  nisi  causa  antec6dente,  C,  Fat., 
15,  34;  nothing  can  happen,  unless  a  cause  jJrecede. 

3.  The  Protasis  may  be  involved  in  a  modifier. 

F6c6runt  id  servi  Milonis  quod  suos  quisque  servos  in  tali  rg  facere  volu- 
isset,  C,  3Jil.,  10,  29  ;  the  servants  of  llilo  did  ivhat  each  man  would 
have  wished  his  servants  to  do  in  such  case  (si  quid  tale  accidisset).  At 
bene  non  poterat  sine  puro  pectore  vivi,  Lucr.,  v.  18 ;  but  there  could  be  no 
good  living  icitliout  a  clean  heart  (nisi  purum  pectus  esset).  Neque  enim 
materiam  ipsam  (cgns6bant)  cohaergre  potuisse  si  nulla  vi  continergtur, 
neque  vim  sine  aliqua  materia,  C,  ^4c.,  i.  6,  24. 

4.  The  Protasis  may  be  expressed  by  an  Interrogative,  or, 
what  is  more  common,  by  an  Imperative  or  equivalent. 

Tristis  es  ?  indignor  quod  sum  tibi  causa  doloris,  Ov.,  Tr.,  iv.  3,  33  (542). 
Cgdit  amor  rgbus:  rgs  age,  tutus  eris,  Ov.,  Rem. Am.,  144  ;  love  yields  to 
business  ;  be  busy  (if  you  plunge  into  biLsiness),  you  will  be  safe.  Im- 
mtitai (verborum  collocationem),.perierit  totargs,  C,  Or.,  70,  232  (244,  r.  4). 

Classification  of  Conditional  Sentences. 

594.  Conditional  sentences  may  be  divided  into  three 
classes,  according  to  the  character  of  the  Protasis  : 

I.  Logical  Conditional  Sentences  :  si,  with  the  Indicative. 

II.  Ideal  Conditional  Sentences  :  si,  chiefly  with  Present 
and  Perfect  Subjunctive. 

III.  Unreal  Conditional  Sentences :  si,  w4th  Imperfect 
and  Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 

Notes.— 1.  In  some  grammars  of  Greek  and  Latin,  conditional  sentences,  and  sen- 
tences involving  conditional  relations,  have  been  divided  into  parlicidar  and  general. 
Whether  a  condition  be  particular  or  general  depends  simply  on  the  character  of  the 
Apodosis.  Any  form  of  the  Conditional  Sentence  may  be  general,  if  it  implies  a  rule  of 
action.    The  forms  for  Iterative  action  have  been  given  (566,  567). 


380  conditio:n"Al  sentences. 

2.  Conditional  Sentences  with  the  Subjunctive  (Ideal  and  Unreal)  are  best  understood 
by  comparing  the  forms  of  the  Ideal  and  Unreal  wish  which  have  the  same  mood  and 
the  same  tenses.  The  Unreal  wish  of  the  Past  is  the  Plupf.,  that  of  the  Present  is  the 
Impf.  Subjunctive.  The  Ideal  wish  is  the  Pr.  and  Pf.  Subjunctive.  The  same  tem- 
poral relations  appear  in  the  conditional. 


I.    LOGICAL  CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES. 

695.  The  Logical  Conditional  Sentence  simply  states  the 
elements  in  question^  according  to  the  formula  :  if  this  is  so, 
then  that  is  so  ;  if  this  is  not  so,  then  that  is  not  so. 

It  may  be  compared  with  the  Indicative  Question. 

The  Protasis  is  in  the  Indicative  :  the  Apodosis  is  generally 
in  the  Indicative ;  but  in  future  relations  any  equivalent  of 
the  Future  (Subjunctive,  Imperative)  may  be  used. 

PuoTASis.  Apodosis. 

Si  id  crSdis,  erras, 

If  you  believe  that,  you  are  (joing  wrong. 

Si  id  crSdSbas,  errabas, 

If  you  believed  that,  you  were  going  wrong. 

Si  id  crgdidisti,  errasti, 

If  you  (have)  believed  that,  you  went  (have  gone)  wrong. 

Si  id  crSdSs,  errabis, 

If  you  (shall)  believe  that,  you  ivill  (be)  goiing)  wrong  (234,  r.). 

Si  id  crgdideris,  erraveris, 

If  you  (shall  have)  believe(A)  that,  you  will  have  gone  (will  go)  wrong. 

SI  quid  crgdidisti,  erras, 

If  you  have  believed  anything 
(=•  when  you  believe  anything),  you  go  wrong.    Comp.  5G9. 

Si  quid  crgdideras,  errabas, 

If  you  had  believed  anything 
(=  when  you  believed  anything),  you  went  wrong. 

SI  splritum  ducit,  vivit,  C,  Inv.,  i.  46,  80;  if  he  is  drawing  (his)  hreath 
(breathing)  he  is  living.  Parvi  sunt  foris  arma  nisi  est  cSnsilium  domi, 
C,  Off.,  I.  22,  76  (411,  R.  2).  Si  occidi,  rgcte  feci ;  sed  non  occidi,  Quint., 
IV,  5,  13;  if  I  killed  him,  I  did  right ;  hut  1  did  not  kill  him.  [Natu- 
ram]  si  sequemur  ducem,  numquam  aberrabimus,  C,  Off.,  i.  28,  100;  if  we 
(sliall)  follow  nature  (as  our)  guide,  ive  shall  never  go  astray.  [Im- 
probos]  8l  meus  consulatus  sustulerit,  multa  saecula  prSpagarit  rei  publicae, 
C,  Cat.,  II.  5,  11;  if  my  consulship  shall  have  done  away  with  the  de- 
structives, it  ivill  have  added  many  ages  to  the  life  of  the  State.  Si  pSs 
condoluit,  si  dgns,  ferre  n5n  possumus,  C,  Tusc,  11.  22,  53  (567).  Stomacha- 
batur  senex,  si  quid  asperius  dixeram,  C,  N.D.,  i.  33,  93  (567).  Vivam,  si 
vivet ;  si  cadet  ilia,  cadam.  Prop.,  ii.  (in.)  28  (25),  42  (8);  let  me  live,  if 
she  lives ;  if  site  falls,  let  me  fall.  Nunc  si  forte  potes,  sed  nOn  potes, 
optima  cOnianx,  finitis  gauds  tot  miM  morte  malls,  Ov.,  Tr.,  111.  3,  55; 


COI^DITIOI^AL   SENTENCES.  38 1 

now,  if  haply  you  can,  but  you  cannot,  noble  wife,  rejoice  that  so  many 
evils  have  been  finished  for  me  by  death.  Flectere  si  nequeo  superos, 
Acheronta  movSbo,  V.,  A.,  vii.  312;  if  I  can't  berid  the  gods  above,  Til 
rouse  {all)  hell  behrw.  Si  tot  exempla  virttitis  non  movent,  nihil  umquam 
movebit ;  si  tanta  clades  vilem  vitam  non  fecit,  nulla  faciet,  L.,  xxii.  60, 
14;  if  so  many  examples  of  valor  stir  you  not,  7iothing  ivill  ever  do  it  ; 
if  so  great  a  disaster  has  not  made  life  cheap,  none  (ever)  will.  Dgsings 
timere,  si  sperare  dgsieris,  Sen.,  E.M.,  i.  5,  7  ;  you  will,  cease  to  fear,  if 
you  {shall  have)  ceasc(d)  to  hope.  Peream  male,  si  non  optimum  erat, 
H.,  /S'.,  ir.  I,  6  ;  inay  T  die  the  death  if  it  was  not  best.  Si  volebas  parti- 
cipari,  auferres  (=  auferre  debebas)  dimidium  domum,  Pl.,  True,  74S;  if 
you  wished  to  share  in  it,  you  should  have  taken  the  half  home.  Respi- 
raro  si  te  viderS,  C,  Att.,  11.  24,  5;  I  shall  breathe  again,  if  I  shall  have 
seen  you. 

Remarks. — i.  After  a  verb  of  Saying  or  Thinking  ((5rati5  Obliqua), 

the  Protasis  must  be  \)\\i  in  the  Subjv.,  accordhig  to  the  rule. 

(Si  id  credis,  erras.)  Dico,  t6,  si  id  crSdas,  errare. 

Dixi,  t§,  si  id  crSderes,  errare. 
(Si  id  crSdgs,  errabis.)        Dico,  te,  si  id  crSdas,  erraturum  esse. 

Dixi,  t6,  si  id  crgdergs,  erraturum  esse. 
(Si  id  crgdidisti,  errasti.)  Dico,  t6,  si  id  crgdideris,  errasse. 

Dixi,  tg,  si  id  crgdidisses,  errasse. 

For  examples,  see  Orati5  Obliqua,  657. 

2.  The  Subjv.  is  used  by  Attraction  : 

[Araneolae]  rete  texunt  ut  si  quid  inhaeserit  confidant,  C,  N.D.,  ir.  48, 
123(567).     (Si  quid  inhaesit  conficiunt.) 

3.  The  Ideal  Second  Person  takes  the  Subjv.  in  connection  with 
the  Universal  Present  : 

(Senectus)  plgna  est  voluptatis  si  ilia  solas  uti.  Sen.,  E.M.,  12,  4;  old 
age  is  full  of  pleasure  if  you  know  {if  one  knoivs)  how  to  enjoy  it. 
Memoria  minuitur  nisi  cam  exerceas,  C,  Cat. If.,  7,  21  (591,  b.  2). 

4.  Sive— sive  (seu — seu)  almost  invariably  takes  the  Logical  form. 
(496,  2.)  The  Subjv.  is  occasionally  used  by  Attraction  or  with  the 
Ideal  Second  Person. 

Seu  vicit,  ferociter  instat  victis  ;  seu  victus  est,  instaurat  cum  victSribus 
certamen,  L.,  xxvii.  14,  1  ;  if  he  vanquislies  (507),  he  presses  the  va?i- 
quished  furiously  ;  if  he  is  vanquished,  he  renews  the  struggle  with  the 
vanquishers. 

5.  Siquidem,  as  giving  the  basis  for  a  conclusion,  often  approaches 
the  causal  sense  (590,  n.  2).     In  this  case  the  Apodosis  precedes. 

Molesta  Veritas,  siquidem  ex  eai  nascitur  odium,  C,  Lael.,  24, 89; 
truth  is  burdensome,  if  indeed  {since)  hatred  arises  from  it. 

6.  Si  mode,  if  only,  serves  to  limit  the  preceding  statement. 


382  CONDITIONAL   SENTENCES. 

A  deo  tantuni  rationem  habemns,  si  modo  habSmus,  C,  N.D.,  iii.  28, 
71 ;  all  that  we  have  from  God  is  (bare)  reason,  if  only  we  have  it. 

Si  vgro  when  thus  used  is  ironical  (C,  Ph.,  viii.  8,  24).  Si  tamen 
seems  to  be  post-classical. 

Notes.— 1.  Phraseological  are  si  quaeris  (quaerimus)  in  a  sense  approaching  that 
of  profecto  (C,  Of.,  ni.  20,  80 ;  Tusc,  iii.  29, 73)  :  Si  dis  placet,  if  (he  gods  will, 
often  ironical  (Cf.  Teu.,  Eun.,  gig;  C,  Fin.,u.^io,Sl).  Si  foitef  peradvetdure  {C, 
Or.,  HI.  12,  47  ;  Mil.,  38, 104). 

2.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  tense  involved  depends  in  each  member  upon  the 
sense.  But  for  this  very  reason  certain  combinations  would  be  uncommon.  Thus 
Pr.— Impf.  and  Fut.— Pr.  are  rare ;  Pr.— Fut.  is  more  common  in  ante-classical  and 
post-classical  Latin  than  Fut. — Fut.,  the  Pres.  being  useil  by  anticipation.  Cicero 
prefers  Fut.— Fut.  Cicero  also  uses  frequently  Fut.  Pf.— Fut.  Pf.,  which  is  also  found 
elsewhere,  but  rarely.  Pf .— Fut.  is  found  first  in  Cicero,  and  is  never  common  ;  also 
Impf. — Impf.  Plupf.— Impf.  is  mostly  found  in  ante-classical  and  post-classical  Latin. 
The  Pf.,  by  anticipation  for  Fut.  Pf.,  is  not  unfrequent  in  early  Latin.  So  C,  Fam., 
XII.  6, 2 :  (Brutus)  si  conservatus  erit,  vicimus  (237) ;  Cf.  Sen.,  Ben.,  in.  62, 145. 
Also  the  Pr.  by  anticij)ation  for  the  Fut.  (228)  :  Pl.,  Poen.,  671 :  Rgx  sum,  Si  egO 
ilium  ad  me  adlexero. 

II.     IDEAL    CONDITIONAL    SENTENCES. 

596.  The  Ideal  Conditional  Sentence  represents  the  mat- 
ter as  still  in  suspense.  The  supposition  is  more  or  less  fanci- 
ful, and  no  real  test  is  to  be  applied.  There  is  often  a  wish 
for  or  against.     The  point  of  view  is  usually  the  Present. 

I.  The  Protasis  is  put  in  the  Present  Subjunctive  for  con- 
tinued action,  and  in  the  Perfect  Subjunctive  for  completion 
or  attainment. 

The  Apodosis  is  in  the  Present  or  Perfect  Subjunctive. 
The  Im.perative  and  Future  Indicative  or  equivalents  are 
often  found.  The  Universal  Present  is  frequently  used, 
especially  in  combination  with  the  Ideal  Second  Person  (595, 
E.  3  ;  663,  2). 

On  the  difference  between  Subjunctive  and  Future,  see  257. 

Protasis.  Apodosis. 

SI  id  crSdas,  errSs, 

Jf  you  should  (were  to)  believe  that,  you  wcfuld  he  going  wrong. 

Si  id  crSdas,  erraveris, 

//■  you  should  (were  to)  believe  that,  you  would  go  wrong. 

Si  id  crSdideris,  errSs, 

1.  If  you  sliauld   (prove  to)  have  believed 

that  (Perfect ;  Action  Past  or  Future),       you  wovid  be  going  wrong. 

2.  If  you  should  (come  to)  believe  that  (Aor. ; 

Action  Future),  you  would  be  going  wrong. 

SI  id  crSdideris,  erraveris  (rare). 

If  you  (should  have)  believe(A)  that.,  you  tcould  (have)  go(i\e)  wrong. 


CON-DITIONAL   SENTEiTCES.  383 

Si  vicinus  tuus  equum  meliorem  habeat  quam  tuus  est,  tuumne  equum 
malis  an  illius  1  C,  Inv.,  i.  31,  52;  if  your  neighbor  {were  to)  have  a 
better  horse  than  yours  is,  would  you  prefer  your  horse  or  his  ?  Si 
gladium  quis  apud  te  sana  mente  deposuerit,  repetat  insanigns,  reddere 
peccatum  sit,  officium  non  reddere,  C,  Off.,  iii.  25,  95  ;  if  a  man  in  sound 
mind  were  to  deposit  {to  have  deposited)  a  sword  with  you,  (and)  reclaim 
it  {when)  mad,  it  ivould  be  wrong  to  return  it,  right  not  to  return  it. 
Hanc  viam  si  asperam  esse  negem,  mentiar,  C,  Best.,  46,  100  ;  if  I  should 
say  that  this  way  is  not  rough,  J  shoidd  lie.  SI  nunc  mS  suspendam 
meam  operam  luserim,  et  meis  inimicis  voluptatem  creaverim,  Pl.,  Cas., 
424;  should  I  hang  myself  now,  I  should  (thereby)  {have)  fool{ed)  my 
work  away,  and  give{n)  to  my  enemies  a  charming  treat.  Ciceroni  nSmo 
ducentSs  nunc  dederit  nununos  nisi  fulserit  anulus  inggns,  Juv.,  vii.  139  ; 
no  one  would  give  Cicero  iwwadays  two  hundred  two-penaes  unless  a 
huge  ring  glittered  {on  his  hand).  Si  quis  furioso  praecepta  det,  erit  ipsQ 
quem  mongbit,  insanior.  Sen.,  E.M.,  94,  17;  if  one  should  give  advice  to  a 
madman,  he  ivill  be  more  out  of  his  mind  than  the  very  man  whom  he 
advises.  Si  valeant  homings,  ars  tua,  Phoebe,  iacet,  Ov.,  Tr.,  iv.  3,  78; 
should  men  keep  well,  your  art,  Phoebus,  is  naught.  Otia  si  tollas, 
perigre  Cupidinis  arcus,  Ov.,  Rem. Am.,  139  (204,  n.  6).  (Senectus)  est 
plgna  voluptatis,  si  ilia  scias  uti,  Sen.,  E.M.,  12,  4  (595,  r.  3).  Memoria 
minuitur  nisi  earn  exerceas,  C,  Cat.M.,  7,  21  (591,  b.  2).  Nulla  est  excu- 
satio  peccati,  si  amici  causa  peccaveris,  C,  Lael.,  11,  37;  it  is  no  excuse 
for  a  sin  to  have  si^med  for  the  sake  of  a  friend. 

2.  The  Point  of  View  may  be  the  Past.  In  that  case  the 
Protasis  is  found  in  the  Imperfect,  very  rarely  the  Pluper- 
fect Subjunctive,  and  the  Apodosis  has  corresponding  forms. 
This  usage,  however,  is  rare,  inasmuch  as  it  coincides  in 
form  with  the  Unreal  Condition,  from  which  it  is  distin- 
guishable only  by  a  careful  study  of  the  context.  When  found 
with  indefinite  persons,  the  construction  is  the  Potential  of 
the  Past. 

The  idea  of  Partial  Obliquity  frequently  enters,  in  which 
case  si  may  often  be  translated,  in  case  that. 

Quod  usu  non  veniebat  dg  eo  si  quis  Iggem  constitueret  non  tam  prohi- 
bgre  vidgretur  quam  admongre,  C,  TulL,  4,  9;  if  one  should  make  a  law 
about  that  which  was  not  customary,  he  would  seem  not  so  much  to  pre- 
vent as  to  warn.  (Present :  si  quis  constituat,  videatur.)  Si  Alfenus  turn 
iudicium  accipere  vellet,  dgnique  omnia  quae  postulargs  facere  voluisset,  quid 
agergs?  C,  Quiiict.,  26,  83  ;  in  case  Alfenus  was  willing  then  to  under- 
take the  trial,  and  should  have  been  willing  afterwards  to  do  all  that 
you  required,  ivhat  were  you  to  do  9    (See  the  whole  passage — Present: 


384  CONDITIONAL   SENTENCES. 

Si  nunc  velit,  .  .  .  voluerit,  agas.)  Si  tribuni  me  triumphare  prohiberent, 
Furium  et  Aemilium  testes  citaturus  fui,  L.,  xxxviir.  47;  should  the  tri- 
bunes prevent  me  from  triumphing,  I  was  going  to  su7nmon  Furius  and 
Aemilius  as  witnesses.  Quid  faceret  ?  si  vivere  vellet,  Seianus  rogandus 
erat,  Sen.,  Cons. Marc,  22,  6 ;  what  was  he  to  do  ?  if  he  'wished  to  live 
SejaniLS  wa£  (the  man)  to  he  asked.  See  Tag.,  Ann.,  iii.  13.  Erat  Quinc- 
tins,  si  cedergs,  placabilis,  L.,  xxxvi.  32,  5 ;  Quinctius  teas,  if  yoti 
yielded  to  him,  (sure  to  be)  placable.  (Est  si  cedas.)  Si  luxuriae  tem- 
peraret,  avaritiam  non  timergs,  Tag.,  //.,  11.  62  ;  if  he  were  to  control 
his  love  of  pleasure,  you  should  not  have  feared  avarice.  (Si  temperet, 
non  timeas.)  Cur  igitur  et  Camillus  doleret,  si  haec  .  .  .  eventura  putaret  ? 
et  ego  doleam  si. .  .putem'?  C,  Tusc,  1.  37,  90.    (Present:  doleatsi putet.) 

Remarks. — i.  The  Ideal  is  not  controlled  by  impossibility  or  im- 
probability, and  the  lively  fancy  of  the  Roman  often  employs  the  Ideal 
where  we  should  expect  the  Unreal.  (Comp.  250,  n.  2.)  This  is  more 
common  in  early  Latin. 

Tti  si  hie  sis,  aliter  sentias,  Ter.,  And.,  310;  if  yon  were  I  (put  your- 
self in  my  place),  you  woidd  think  differently.  Haec  si  tecum  patria 
loquatur,  nonne  impetrare  debeaf?  C,  Cat.,  i.  S,  19;  if  your  country 
shoidd  (were  to)  speak  thus  ivith  you,  ought  she  not  to  get  (what  she 
wants)  ?    So  C,  Fin.,  iv.  22,  61. 

2.  Sometimes  the  conception  shifts  in  the  course  of  a  long  sentence: 
SI  reviviscant  et  tecum  loquantur — quid  talibus  viris  respondgres  ?  C, 

Fin.,  IV.  22,  61:  if  they  shoidd  come  to  life  again,  and  speak  with  you 
— what  answer  ivould  you  make  to  such  men  9 

3.  When  non  possum  is  followed  by  nisi  (si  non),  the  Protasis  has 
the  Ideal  of  the  Past,  after  the  past  tense,  and  may  have  the  ideal 
of  the  Present  after  a  primary  tense. 

Neque  mtinitiongs  Caesaris  prohibgre  poterat,  nisi  proeliS  dgcertare  vellet, 
Caes.,  B.C.,  III.  44.     See  Madvig  on  C,  Fin.,  iii.  21,  70. 

4.  In  comparing  Ideal  and  Unreal  Conditionals,  exclude  future  verbs 
such  as  posse,  velle,  etc.  The  future  sense  of  such  Unreal  Conditionals 
comes  from  the  auxiliary. 

5.  In  Oratio  Obliqua  the  difference  between  Ideal  and  Logical  Future 
is  necessarily  effaced,  so  far  as  the  mood  is  concerned.     (656.) 

III.    UNREAL  CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES. 

597.  The  Unreal  Conditional  sentence  is  used  of  that 
which  is  Unfulfilled  or  Impossible,  and  is  expressed  by  the 
Imperfect  Subjunctive  for  continued  action — generally,  in 
opposition  to  the  Present ;  and  by  the  Pluperfect  Subjunc- 
tive— uniformly  in  opposition  to  the  Past. 


CONDITIONAL   SENTENCES.  385 

The  notion  of  Impossibility  comes  from  the  irreversible  character  of 
the  Past  Tense.  Compare  the  Periphrastic  Conjug.  Perfect  and  Im- 
perfect. Any  action  that  is  decided  is  considered  Past  (compare  C, 
Of.,  II.  21,  75).     (See 277,  3,  N.) 

Protasis.  Apodosis. 

SI  id  credergs,  errares, 

//■  you  believed  (were  believing)  that,  [you 
do  not,]  you  uvuhl  be  going  wrong. 

Si  id  crSdidissSs,  erravissSs, 

Jf  yon  had  believed  that,  [you  did  not,]  you  zvould  have  gone  wrong. 

Sapientia  n5n  expeterStur,  si  nihil  efficeret,  C,  Fin.,  i.  13,  42  ;  wisdom 
would  not  be  sought  after,  if  it  did  no  practical  good.  Caederem  t6,  nisi 
irascerer,  Sen.,  Ira,  i.  15,  3;  I  should  flog  you,  if  I  were  not  getting  angry. 
Si  ibi  t6  esse  scissem,  ad  tS  ipse  vgnissem,  C,  Fin.,  i.  8  ;  if  I  had  known 
you  u'cre  there,  I  should  have  co?ne  to  you  myself.  Hectora  quis  nosset, 
felix  si  Troia  fuisset  1  Ov.,  Tr.,  iv.  3,  75  ;  who  ivould  know  (of)  Hector,  if 
Troy  had  been  happy  ?  Nisi  ante  Roma  profectus  essSs,  nunc  earn  certS 
Tclinquergs,  C,  Fam.,  vii.  11,  1;  if  you  had  not  departed  from  Rome  be- 
fore, you  would  certainly  leave  it  now.  Ego  nisi  peperissem,  RSma  non 
oppUgnaretur ;  nisi  fllium  habgrem,  libera  in  libera  patria  mortua  essem, 
L.,  II.  40,  8  ;  had  I  not  become  a  mother,  Rome  would  not  be  besieged  ; 
had  I  not  a  son,  I  should  have  died  a  free  woman  in  a  free  land. 

Remarks. — i.  The  Impf.  Subjv.  is  sometimes  used  in  opposition  to 
continuance  from  a  point  in  the  Past  into  the  Present.  This  is  neces- 
sarily the  case  when  the  Protasis  is  in  the  Impf.,  and  the  Apodosis  in 
the  Plupf.,  except  when  the  Impf.  denotes  opposition  to  a  general 
statement,  which  holds  good  both  for  Past  and  for  Present  : 

Non  tarn  facile  opes  Carthaginis  tantae  concidissent,  nisi  Sicilia  classibus 
nostris  pateret,  Cf.  C,  Verr.,  11.  i,  3;  the  great  resources  of  Carthage  {Car- 
thage  with  her  great  resources)  ivould  not  have  fallen  so  readily,  if  Sicily 
had  not  been  (as  it  still  continues  to  be)  open  to  our  fleets.  Si  pudorem 
habgres,  tUtimam  mihi  pensionem  remisissgs,  Sen.,  E.M.,  29, 10  ;  if  you 
had  (=  you  had  not,  as  you  have  not)  any  delicacy,  you  ivould  have  let 
me  off  from'  the  last  payment.  Memoriam  ipsam  cum  voce  perdidissemus, 
si  tarn  in  nostra  potestate  esset  oblivisci  quam  tacgre,  Tac,  Agr.,  2,  4; 
we  sliould  have  lost  memory  itself,  together  with  utterance,  if  it  were  as 
much  in  our  poiver  to  forget  as  to  keep  silent. 

The  Impf.  in  both  members,  referring  to  the  Past,  always  admits  of 
another  explanation  than  that  of  the  Unreal  ;  thus  we  have  a  case 
of  Kepresentation  (654,  n.)  in 

Protogengs  si  lalysum  ilium  suum  caenS  oblitum  videretj  magnum,  credo, 
acciperet  dolorem,  C,  Att.,  11.  21,  4;  */  Protogejies  could  see  that  famous 
lalysus  of  his  besmeared  with  mud,  he  would  feel  a  mighty  pang.     See 
Pl.,  Aul.,  742. 
25 


386  CONDITIONAL   SENTENCES. 

2.  In  Unreal  Conditions,  after  a  negative  Protasis,  the  Apodosis  is 
sometimes  expressed  by  the  Tmpf.  Indie,  when  the  action  is  represented 
as  interrupted  (233);  by  the  Plupf.  and  Hist.  Pf.,  when  the  conclusion 
is  confidently  anticipated  (254,  r.  3). 

Labebar  longius,  nisi  me  retinuissera,  C,  Leg.,  i.  19,  52  (254,  r.  3). 

This  usage  after  a  positive  is  cited  first  in  the  post-Augustan  writers. 
Cases  like  C,  Verr.,  v.  42,  129;  L.,  xxii.  28, 13,  do  not  belong  here. 

Omnino  supervacua  erat  doctrina,  si  natura  sufficeret,  Quint,  11.  8,  8 
(254,  R.  3).  Peractum  erat  bellum,  si  Pompeium  Brundisii  oppriraere 
potuisset,  Flor.,  ii.  13,  19  ;  the  war  was  (had  been)  finished,  if  he  had 
been  able  to  crush  Po7npey  at  Brundusium. 

The  Impf.  Indie,  is  sometimes  found  in  the  Protasis  : 

Ipsam  tibi  epistolam  misissem,  nisi  {v. I. ,  sed)  tarn  subito  fratris  puer  profi- 
ciscebatur,  C,  Att.,  viii.  i,  2;  I  should  have  sent  you  the  letter  itself,  if 
my  brother's  .servant  was  not  starting  so  suddenly. 

3.  {a)  The  Indicative  is  the  regular  construction  in  the  Apodosis 
with  verbs  Avhich  signify  Possibility  or  Power,  Obligation  or  Necessity 
— so  with  the  active  and  passive  Periphrastic — vix,  paene,  scarcely, 
hardly,  and  the  like.  In  many  cases  it  is  diflicult  to  distinguish  this 
usage  from  that  of  the  Ideal  (590,  2). 

consul  esse  qui  potui,  nisi  eum  vitae  cursum  tenuissem  ?  C,  Rep.,  i.  6, 
10;  how  could  I  have  beeti  consul,  if  I  hud  not  kept  that  course  of  life  ? 
Antoni  gladios  potuit  contemnere,  si  sic  omnia  dixisset,  Juv.,  x.  123  ;  he 
might  have  despised  Antony's  swords,  if  he  had  thus  said  cdl  (that  he 
did  say).  Emendaturus,  si  licuisset,  eram,  Ov.,  Tr.,  i.  7,  40  ;  /  should 
have  removed  the  faults,  if  I  had  been  free  (to  do  it).  Pons  iter  paene 
hostibus  dedit  (paene  dedit  =  dabat  =  dattirus  erat),  ni  unus  vir  fuisset,  L., 
II.  10,  2;  the  bridge  well  nigh  gave  a  passage  to  the  enemy,  had  it  not 
been  for  one  ma7i. 

(b)  With  the  Indie,  the  Possibility  and  the  rest  are  stated  absolutely; 
when  the  Subjv.  is  used  the  Possibility  and  the  rest  are  conditioned  as 
in  any  other  Unreal  sentence. 

Compare  quid  facere  potuissem,  nisi  tum  consul  fuissem,  with  consul  esse 
qui  potui,  nisi  eum  vitae  cursum  tenuissem,  C,  Rep.,  i.  6,  10.  Qui  si  fuisset 
meliore  fortuna,  fortasse austerior  et  gravior  esse  potuisset,  C,  Pis.,  29,  71. 

4.  In  Oratio  Obliqua  the  Protasis  is  unchanged  ;  the  Apodosis  is 
formed  by  the  Periphrastic  Pr.  and  Pf.  Inf.  (149),  for  the  Active,  futU- 
rum  (fore)  ut,  futtirum  fuisse  ut  for  passive  and  Supineless  verbs. 

A.  Dic6  (dixl),  t6,  si  id  cr6der6s,  erraturum  esse. 

B.  Dico  (dixi),  t6,  si  id  credidisses,  erratUrum  fuisse. 

A.  Dico  (dixi),  si  id  cr6der6s,  fore  ut  dScipergris. 

B.  Died  (dixi),  si  id  credidisses,  futurum  fuisse  ut  dScipergris. 

A  is  very  rare ;  A,  theoretical.     For  the  long  form,  B,  the  simple 


Non  dubito, 

/  do  not  dmiht, 
Non  dubitabam, 

I  did  not  doubt. 


CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES.  387 

Perfect  Infinitive  is  found.      Examples,  see  659,  n.     In   B,  fuisse  is 
omitted  occasionally  in  later  Latin  ;  Tac,  Ann.,  1.  33,  etc. 

5.  {a)  When  the  Apodosis  of  an  Unreal  Conditional  is  made  to  de- 
pend on  a  sentence  which  requires  the  Subjv.,  the  Plupf.  is  turned 
into  the  Periphrastic  Pf.  Subjv. ;  the  Impf.  form  is  unchanged. 

quin,  si  id  credergs,  errargs, 

that,  if  you  believed  that,  you  would  be  going  tvrong. 
quin^  si  id  crSdidisses,  erraturus  fuerls, 

that,  if  you  had  believed  that,  you  would  have  gone  wrong. 

Honestum  tale  est  ut,  vel  si  ignorarent  id  homines,  esset  laudabile,  Cf. 
C,  Fin.,  II.  15,  49;  virtue  is  a  thing  to  deserve  praise,  even  if  men  did 
not  hiow  it.  Ea  res  tantum  tumultum  ac  fugam  praebuit  ut  nisi  castra 
Punica  extra  urbem  fuissent,  effusura  sg  omnis  pavida  multitudo  fuerit,  L., 
XXVI.  10,  7  ;  that  matter  caused  so  much  tumult  and  flight  (=  so  wild  a 
panic),  that  had  not  the  Funic  camp  been  outside  the  city  the  whole 
frightened  midtitude  icoidd  have  poured  forth.  Nee  dubium  erat  quin, 
si  tarn  pauci  simul  obire  omnia  possent,  terga  daturi  bostgs  fuerint,  L.,  iv. 
38,  5  ;  there  was  710  doubt  that,  if  it  had  been  possible  for  so  small  a 
number  to  manage  everything  at  the  same  time,  the  enemy  ivould  have 
turned  their  backs.  Die  quidnam  facturus  fueris,  si  eo  tempore  cgnsor 
fuissgs?  L.,  IX.  33,  7  ;  tell  (me)  what  you  ivould  have  done,  if  you  had 
been  censor  at  that  time  f    See  C. ,  Fis. ,  7,  14. 

(b)  The  Periphrastic  Plupf.  Subjv.  occurs  rarely,  and  then  only  in 
the  Dependent  Interrogative.    The  only  examples  cited  are  fi-om  Livy. 

Sublbat  cogitatio  animum,  quonam  modo  tolerabilis  futura  Etruria  fuisset 
si  quid  in  Samnio  adversi  gvgnisset,  L.,  x.  45,  8. 

(c)  Potui  (254,  R.  i)  commonly  becomes  potuerim,  and  fui  with  the 
Periphrastic  passive  in  -dus  becomes  fuerim,  after  all  tenses. 

Hand  dubium  fuit  quin,  nisi  ea  mora  intervgnisset,  castra  eo  die  Punica 
capi  potuerint,  L.,  xxiv.  42,  3;  th§re  tvas  no  doubt  that,  had  not  that  de- 
lay interfered,  the  Funic  camp  could  have  been  taken  on  that  day.  Quae 
(res)  sua  sponte  nefaria  est  ut  etiamsi  lex  non  esset,  magnopere  vitanda 
fuerit,  C,  Verr.,  i.  42,  108. 

(d)  The  passive  Conditional  is  unchanged  : 

Id  ille  si  repudiasset,  dubitatis  quin  ei  vis  esset  allata?  C,  Sest.,2g, 
62  ;  if  he  had  rejected  that,  do  you  doubt  that  force  ivould  have  been 
brought  (to  bear)  on  him  f 

The  active  form  is  rarely  unchanged  (L.,.ir.  33,  9).  In  the  absence 
of  the  Periphrastic  tense  the  Inf.  with  potuerim  is  often  a  sufficient 
substitute;  see  L.,  xxxii.  28,  0. 

Note.— In  Plautus  and  Terence,  absque  vvith  the  Abl.  and  esset  (foret)  is 
found  a  few  times  instead  of  nisi  (si  n5n)  with  Nom.,  and  esset  (fuisset)  in  the  sense 
if  it  were  not  {had  not  been)  for. 

Nam  absque  tg  esset,  bodig  numquam  ad  solem  occSsum  viverem,  Pl., 
Men.,  1022.     Cf.  Liv.,  11. 10, 2  (u.  3,  above). 


388  CONDITIOKAL   SEiq^TENCES. 


INCOMPLETE    CONDITIONAL    SENTENCES. 

698.  Omission  of  the  Conditional  Sign. — Occasionally  the 
members  of  a  Conditional  sentence  are  put  side  by  side  with- 
out a  Conditional  sign. 

An  ille  mihi  (351)  liber,  cui  mulier  imperat  ?  poscit,  dandum  est ;  vocat, 
veniendumest ;  eicit,  abeundum;  minatur,  extimescendum,  C,  Farad.,  5,  2; 
or  is  he  free  {tell)  me,  to  tvhom  a  woman  gives  orders  ?  she  asks,  he  must 
give  ;  she  calls,  he  must  come  ;  she  turns  out  {of  door),  he  must  go  ;  she 
threatens,  he  must  he  frightened.  Unum  cognoris,  omnis  noris,  Ter., 
Ph.,  265;  you  know  one,  you  know  all.  Dedisses  huic  animo  par  corpus, 
fScisset  quod  optabat,  Plin.,  Ep.,  i.  12,  8;  had  you  given  him  a  hody 
that  was  a  match  for  his  spirit,  he  would  have  accomplished  what  he 
desired. 

599.  Omission  of  tlie  Verb  of  the  Protasis.- — AVhen  the 
verb  of  the  Protasis  is  omitted,  either  the  precise  form  or  the 
general  idea  of  the  verb  is  to  be  supplied  from  the  Apodosis. 

Si  quisquam  (=  si  quisquam  fuit),  Cato  sapiens  fuit,  Cf.  C,  Lael.,  2,  9; 
if  any  one  ivas  ivise,  Cato  ivas.  Educ  tecum  omngs  tuos  ;  si  minus,  quam 
pltirimos,  C,  Cat.,  i.  5,  10  (592,  r.). 

600.  Total  Omission  of  the  Protasis. — i.  The  Protasis  is 
often  contained  in  a  participle  or  involved  in  the  context ; 
for  examples  see  593,  2  and  3. 

2.  The  Potential  Subjunctive  is  sometimes  mechanically 
explained  by  the  omission  of  an  indefinite  Protasis  (257,  n.  2). 

NimiO  plus  quam  velim  [Volscorum]  ingenia  sunt  mobilia,  L.,  11.  37,  4; 
the  dispositions  of  the  Volscians  are  {too)  much  moi-e  unstable  than  I 
should  like.  Tuam  mihi  dari  vellem  eloquentiam,  C,  N.  D.,  11.  59, 147;  I 
could  ivish  to  have  your  eloquence  given  me.  Tam  fglix  ess6s  quam  f3r- 
mSsissima  vellem,  Ov.,  Am.,  i.  8,  27  (302).     (TJtinam  ess6s !) 

601.  Omission  and  Involution  of  the  Apodosis. — The 
Apodosis  is  omitted  in  Wishes  (261),  and  implied  after  verbs 
and  phrases  denoting  Trial  (460,  2).  It  is  often  involved  in 
Oratid  Obliqua,  and  sometimes  consists  in  the  general  notion 
of  Result,  Ascertainment,  or  the  like. 

Si  vSrum  excutias,  faciSs  n6n  uxor  amStur,  Juv.,  vi.  143;  if  you  were  fa 
get  out  the  truth  (you  would  find  that)  it  is  the  face,  not  the  ivife,  that 


coxditio:n^al  sentences.  389 

is  loved.  (lugurtha)  timebat  iram  (=  ng  irascergtur)  senatus,  ni  paruisset 
Iggatis,  S.,  lug  ,  25,  7  ;  Jugurtha  ivas  afraid  of  tlie  anger  of  tJie  senate 
(that  the  senate  would  get  angry)  in  case  he  did  not  (should  not  have) 
obeyied)  the  legates. 

CONDITIONAL    SENTENCES    OF    COMPARISON. 

602.  The  Apodosis  is  omitted  in  comparisons  with  ut  si, 
velut  si,  ac  si,  quam  si  (rare),  tamquam  si,  quasi,  or  simply 
velut  and  tamquam,  as  if. 

The  verb  is  to  be  supplied  from  the  Protasis,  as  is  common 
in  correlative  sentences.     The  Mood  is  the  Subjunctive. 

The  tenses  follow  the  rule  of  sequence,  rather  than  the 
ordinary  use  of  the  conditional.  In  English,  the  translation 
implies  the  unreality  of  the  comparison. 

Noli  timgre  quasi  [=  quam  timeas  si]  assem  elephants  dgs,  Quint.,  vi. 
3,  59;  don't  he  afraid,  as  if  you  ivere  giving  a  penny  to  an  elephant. 
Parvi  primo  ortu  sic  iacent  tamquam  [=  iaceant  si]  omnino  sine  animo  sint, 
C,  Fin.,  V.  15,  42  ;  babies,  when  first  born,  lie  (there),  as  if  they  had  no 
mind  at  all.  Hie  est  obstandum,  militgs,  velut  si  ante  Romana  moenia 
ptignemus,  L.,  xxi.  41,  15;  here  (is  ivhere)  we  must  oppose  them,  soldiers, 
as  if  we  ivere  fighting  before  the  walls  of  Rome  (velut  obstgmus,  si  p" 
gngmus,  as  we  ivould  oppose  them,  if  we  were  to  fight).  Mg  iuvat,  v 
ipse  in  parte  labQris  ac  perlculi  fuerim,  ad  finem  belli  Punici  pervgnisse, 
XXXI.  I ;  I  am  delighted  to  hdrc  readied  the  end  of  the  Punic  ivar,  as  ij 
J  had  shared  in  the  toil  and  danger  (of  it).  Tantus  patrgs  metus  cgpit 
velut  si  iam  ad  portas  hostis  esset,  L.,  xxi.  16,  2  ;  a,  great  fear  took  hold 
of  the  senators,  as  if  the  enemy  were  already  at  their  gates.  Dgleta  (est) 
Ausonum  ggns  perinde  ac  si  internecivo  bello  certasset,  L.,  ix.  25,  9;  the 
Ausonian  race  ivas  blotted  out,  just  as  if  it  had  engaged  in  an  interne- 
cine war  (war  to  the  knife). 

Remarks. — i.  Occasionally  the  sequence  is  violated  out  of  regard  to 
the  Conditional: 

Massilignsgs  in  eo  bonore  audimus  apud  [Romanes]  esse  ac  si  medium 
umbilicum  Graeciae  incolerent,  L.,  xxxvii.  54,  21 ;  we  hear  that  the  people 
of  JlarseiUes  are  in  as  high  honor  with  the  Romans  as  if  they  inhabited 
the  mid-navel  (=  the  heart)  of  Greece.  Eius  negotium  sic  velim  suscipias, 
ut  si  esset  rgs  mea,  C,  Fam.,  11.  14, 1;  I  wish  you  would  undertake  his 
business  just  as  if  it  were  my  affair. 

2.  The  principal  clause  often  contains  correlatives,  as  :  ita,  sic, 
perinde,  proinde,  similiter,  nQn  (baud)  secus,  etc. 

Notes.-  1.  Tamquam  and  quasi  are  also  used  in  direct  comparison  with  the  Indie- 


390  CONCESSIVE   SENTENCES. 

ative.    Here  the  verbs  with  both  clauses  are  apt  to  l)e  the  same,  in  which  case  the  verb 
with  quasi  or  tamquam  is  usually  oruitted  in  model  prose. 

Quasi  poma  ex  arboribus,  cruda  si  sunt,  vix  6velluntur,  sic  vitam  adule- 
scentibus  vis  aufert,  c,  (Jat.M.,  19,  n. 

2.  Quasi  is  used  to  soften  or  apologize  for  a  single  word  {-  ut  ita  dicam). 
Mors  est  quaedam  quasi  migratio  commutatioque  vitae,  Cf.  c,  Tusc,  1. 12, 

27 ;  death  is  as  it  were  a  shifting  of  life's  quarters. 

3.  As  in  the  ordinary  Conditional  sentence,  so  in  the  Comparative  sentence,  the  Pro- 
tasis may  be  expressed  by  a  participle  : 

Gain  laeti  ut  explorata  victoria  ad  castra  Komanorum  pergunt,  Cf.  Caes., 
B.G.,  III.  18,8  ;  the  Gauls  iw  their  joy.,  as  ?/ (their)  victory  had  been  fully  ascertained., 
proceeded  to  the  camp  of  the  liomans.  Antiochus  securus  dg  bello  Eomano  erat 
tamquam  non  transituris  in  Asiam  Romanis,  L.,  xxxvi.  41, 1 ;  Aidiochus  teas  as 
unconcerned  about  the  war  with  Home  as  if  the  Romans  did  not  iiUend  to  cross  over 
hito  Asia  Minor. 

4.  In  Celsus,  Quintilian,  Juvenal,  Pliny  Min.,  and  especially  in  Tacitus 
and  Suetonius,  we  find  tamquam  used  almost  like  quod  (541),  to  indicate  an  as- 
sumed reason,  in  imitation  of  the  similar  Greek  use  of  w?  with  the  participle,  and 
occasionally  where  we  might  have  expected  the  Ace.  and  Infinitive. 

Pridem  invisus  tamquam  plus  quam  civilia  agitaret,  TAc.,^?m.,  1. 12,6; 
long  misliked  as  (in  Tiberius'  judgment)  j)lotting  high  treason.  Stispectus  tamquam 
ipse  suas  incenderit  aedes,  Juv.,  111.222  ;  suspected  of  having  {as  if  he  had)  set 
his  own  house  on  fire.  Vulgi  opinio  est  tamquam  (com6tes)  mtitationem  regni 
portendat,  Tac.  Ann.,  xiv.  22,  \\  it  is  the  popular  belief  that  a  comet  jwrtends  a 
change  in  the  kingdom. 

Other  particles,  quasi,  Sicut,  and  ut,  occur  much  more  rarely  and  are  cited  mainly 
from  Tacitus  (quasi  only  in  the  Annals).    Compare  Suet.,  Tit.,  5. 

5.  Ut  si  is  rare  in  early  Latin,  not  being  found  at  all  in  Plautus.  It  is  found  but 
once  in  Livy,  but  frequently  in  Cicero  and  later  Latin.  Yelut  si  is  found  first  in 
Caesar.  Velut  for  velut  si  is  found  first  in  Livy.  Ac  sI  is  equivalent  to  quasi  only 
in  late  Latin. 

CONCESSIVE    SENTENCES. 

603.  Concessive  Sentences  are  introduced  by  : 

1.  The  Conditional  particles,  etsi,  etiamsi,  tametsi  (tamen- 
etsi). 

2.  The  generic  relative,  quamquam. 

3.  The  compounds,  quamvis,  quantumvis. 

4.  The  verb  licet. 

5.  The  Final  particles,  ut  (ne). 

6.  Cum  (quom). 

These  all  answer  generally  to  the  notion  aUhough. 

Note.— Etsi  (et  +  si),  even  if;  etiamsi,  even  now  if ;  tametsi,  yet  even  if; 
quamquam  (quam  +  quam),  to  what  extent  soever ;  quamvis,  to  ivhat  extent  you 
choose ;  quantumvis,  to  what  amount  you  choose ;  licet,  it  is  left  free  (perhaps  in- 
trans.  of  linquo, /Yea?;e). 

604.  Etsi,  etiamsi,  and  tametsi,  take  the  Indicative  or  Sub- 
junctive, according  to  the  general  principles  which  regulate 


CONCESSIVE   SENTENCES. 


391 


the  use  of  si,  if.      The  Indicative  is  more  common,  espe- 
cially with  etsL 

D5  futuris  rebus  etsi  semper  difficile  est  dicere,  tamen  interdum  con- 
iectura  possis  accgdere,  C.  Fam.,  vi.  4,  1;  although  it  is  always  difficult 
to  tell  about  the  future,  nevertheless  you  can  sometimes  come  near  it  hy 
guessing.  [HamilcarJ  etsi  flagrabat  bellandi  cupiditate,  tamen  paci  servi- 
undum  putavit,  Ni.p.,  xxii.  i,  3  ;  although  Eamilcar  was  on  fire  with  the 
desire  of  war,  fievertheless  he  thought  that  he  ought  to  subserve  {to  imrh 
for)  peace.  Inops  ille  etiamsl  referre  gratiam  non  potest,  habere  certS 
potest,  C,  Off.,  II.  20,  69;  the  needy  man  {spoken  of),  if  he  cannot  return 
a  favor,  can  at  least  feel  it.  Mg  v6ra  pro  gratis  loqui,  etsi  meum  inge- 
nium  non  moneret,  neoessitas  cogit,  L.,  iii.  68, 1);  even  if  my  dispositioti 
did  not  hid  me,  necessity  compels  me  to  speak  what  is  true  instead  of 
ivhat  is  palatable. 

Remarks. — i.  Si  itself  is  often  concei^sive  (591,  2),  and  the  addition 
of  et,  etiam,  and  tamen  serves  merely  to  fix  the  idea. 

2.  Etiamsi  is  used  oftener  with  the  Siibjv.  than  with  the  Indie, 
and  seems  to  bo  found  only  in  conditional  sentences.  On  the  other 
hand,  etsi  is  also  used  like  quamquam  (005,  r.  2),  in  the  sense  ''and 
yet;"  virtutem  si  unam  amiseris — etsi  amitti  non  potest  virtus,  C, 
Tusc,  II.  14,  32  ;  so  too,  but  rarely,  tametsi.  Etsi  is  a  favorite  word 
with  Cicero,  but  does  not  occur  in  Quintilian  nor  in  Sallust,  the  lat- 
ter of  whom  prefers  tametsi.  Tametsi  is  not  found  in  the  Augustan 
poets  nor  in  Tacitus,  and  belongs  especially  to  familiar  speech. 

3.  Tamen  is  often  correlative  even  with  tametsi. 

605.  Quamquam,  to  ivliat  extent  soever,  falls  under  the  head 
of  generic  relatives  (254,  R.  4),  and,  in  the  best  authors,  is 
construed  with  the  Indicative. 

Medici  quamquam  intellegunt  saepe,  tamen  numquam  aegris  dicunt,  ill5 
morbo  eos  esse  morituros,  C,  Div.,  11.  25,  54;  although  physicians  often 
ktww,  nevertheless  they  never  tell  their  patients  that  they  will  die  of 
that  (particular)  disease.  ^ 

Remarks. — i.  The  Potential  Subjv.  (257,  n.  3)  is  sometimes  found 
with  quamquam :  Quamquam  exercitum  qui  in  Volscis  erat  mallet,  nihil 
rectisavit,  L.,  vi.  9,  6;  although  lie  might  well  have  preferred  the  army 
tvhich  was  in  the  Volscian  country,  nevertheless  he  made  no  objection. 

So  especially  with  the  Ideal  Second  Person. 

2.  Quamquam  is  often  used  like  etsi,  but  more  frequently,  at  the 
beginning  of  sentences,  in  the  same  way  as  the  English,  and  yet, 
although,  however,  in  order  to  limit  the  whole  preceding  sentence. 

3.  The  Indie,  with  etsi  and  quamquam,  is,  of  course,  liable  to  attrac- 
tion into  the  Subjv.  in  Oratio  Obliqua  (508). 


392  CONCESSIVE   SENTENCES. 

Note. — The  Subjv.  with  quamquam  (not  due  to  attraction)  is  first  cited  from  Cicero 
(perhaps  Tusc,  v,  30, 85),  Nepos  (xxv.  13,  6),  after  which,  following  the  development 
in  all  generic  sentences  in  Latin,  it  becomes  more  and  more  common  ;  thus,  in  post- 
Augustan  Latin,  Juvenal  uses  it  exclusively,  and  Pliny  Min.  and  Tacitus  regularly. 

606.  Quamvis  follows  the  analogy  of  void,  /  will,  with 
which  it  is  compounded,  and  takes  the  Subjunctive  (usually 
the  principal  tenses). 

Quantumvis  and  quamlibet  (as  conjunctions)  belong  to 
poetry  and  silver  prose. 

Quamv£s  sint  sub  aqua,  sub  aqua  maledicere  temptant,  Ov.,  31.,  vi.  376; 
although  they  he  under  the  water,  imder  the  water  they  try  to  revile. 
Quamvis  ille  niger,  quamvis  tu  candidus  essgs,  V.,  Ec,  11.  16;  although  he 
was  black,  although  you  were  fair.  [Vitia  mentis],  quamvis  exigua  sint, 
in  mains  exc6dunt,  Sen.,  E.M.,  85,  13  ;  mental  ailments  (=  passimis), 
no  matter  how  slight  they  he,  go  on,  increasing.  Quamvis  sis  molestus 
numquam  t6  esse  confitebor  malum,  C,  Tusc,  11.  25,  61 ;  although  you,  he 
trouhlesoinCy  I  shall  never  confess  that  you  are  an  evil. 

Notes.— 1.  The  Indie,  with  quamviS  is  cited  in  prose  first  from  C,  Bab. Post.,  2, 
4  ;  Nep.,  I.  2, 3  (except  in  fragments  of  Vaebo  and  Vatinius)  ;  in  poetry  it  appears 
first  in  Lucretius.  Then  it  grows^  so  that  in  the  post- Augustan  period  it  is  used  just 
like  quamquam  with  the  Indie,  though  the  Subjv.  is  also  common  : 

Quamvis  ingenio  non  valet,  arte  valet,  Ov.,  Am.,  1. 15, 14 ;  although  he  does  not 
tell  by  genius,  he  does  tell  by  art. 

2.  The  verb  of  quamvis  is  sometimes  inflected  :  Quam  volet  Epicurus  iocetur, 
tamen  numquam  me  movebit,  C,  N.D.,  11. 17, 46. 

607.  Licet  retains  its  verbal  nature,  and,  according  to  the 
Sequence  of  Tenses,  takes  only  the  Present  and  Perfect  Sub- 
junctive : 

Licet  irrldeat  si  qui  vult,  C,  Par  ad.,  i.  i,  8 ;  ?e^  any  one  laugh  who  will. 
Ardeat  ipsa  licet,  tormentis  gaudet  amantis,  Juv.,  vi.  209;  though  she  her- 
self is  aglow,  she  rejoices  in  the  tortures  of  her  lover.  Sim  Ucet  extrgmum, 
sicut  sum,  missus  in  orbem,  Ov.,  Tr.,  iv.  9,  9  ;  although  I  be  sent,  as  1 
have  been,  to  the  end  of  the  world. 

Notes.— 1.  Exceptions  are  extremely  rare  :  Juv.,xni.  56. 

2.  Quamvis  is  sometimes  combined  with  licet,  as  ;  quamvis  licet  insectSmur 
istos-metuo  ne  soli  philosophi  sint,  C,  Tusc.,  iv.  24, 53. 

;i.  Occasionally  licet  is  inliccted  ;  e.g.,^.,  Epod.,!^,!^ ;  S..,i\.  i,  59.  From  the 
tiuie  of  Apuleius  licet  is  construed  with  the  Indicative. 

608.  TJt  and  ne  are  also  used  concessively  for  the  sake  of 
argument ;  this  is  common  in  Cicero,  who  often  attaches  to 
it  sane ;  the  basis  of  this  is  the  Imperative  Subjunctive. 

Ut  dSsint  virSs,  tamen  est  laudanda  voluntas,  Ov.,  Pont.,  iii.  4,  79  ; 


RELATIVE   SENTENCES.  393 

granted  that  strength  he  lacking,  nevertheless  you  must  praise  {my) 
good  will.  NS  sit  summum  malum  dolor,  malum  certS  est,  C,  Tusc,  11. 
5,  14;  granted  that  pain  be  not  the  chief  evil,  an  evil  it  certainly  is. 

Remarks. — i.  TJt  non  can  be  used  on  the  principle  of  the  Specific 
Negative  :  Hie  dies  ultimus  est;  ut  non  sit,  prope  ab  ultimo  est, Sen., 
E.M.,  15, 12 ;  this  is  your  last  day  ;  granted  that  it  he  not,  it  is  near  the 
last. 

2,  Examples  with  past  tenses  are  rare:  C,  3Iil.,  17,  46;  L.,  xxxviii. 
46,  3,  etc. 

3.  On  ita — ut,  see  262  ;  on  ut— ita,  see  482,  4. 

609.  Concessive  Sentence  represented  hij  a  Participle  or 
Predicative  Attribute. — The  Concessive  sentence  may  be 
represented  by  a  Participle  or  Predicative  Attribute. 

[Risus]  interdum  ita  repente  erumpit,  ut  eum  cupientes  tengre  nequea- 
mus,  Cf.  C,  Or.,  11.  58,  235;  laughter  between  whiles  (occasionally)  breaks 
out  so  suddenly  that  we  cannot  keep  it  doivn,  although  ive  desire  to  do 
80.  Multorum  tS  ocull  et  aur5s  non  sentientem  custSdient,  C,  Cat.,  i.  2,  6; 
{of)  many  (the)  eyes  and  ears  ivill  keep  guard  over  you,  though  you  per- 
ceive it  not  (without  your  perceiving  it).  Quis  Aristldem  non  mortuum 
diligit  1  C,  Fin.,  v.  22,  62;  ivho  does  not  love  Aristides,  {though)  dead  9 

Notes.— 1.  Quamquam,  quamvis,  and  etsi  are  often  combined  with  the  parti- 
ciple.   Tliis,  however,  is  rare  in  classical  Latin,  but  becomes  more  common  later. 

(Caesar),  quamquam  obsidione  Massiliae  retardante,  brevi  tamen  omnia 
subggit,  Suet.,  lul,  34. 

2.  With  adjectives  and  adverbs  this  is  much  more  common,  so  especially  with 
quamvis,  which  is  used  with  a  positive  as  a  circumlocution  for  the  superlative.  With 
the  superlative  quamviS  is  rare. 

Etsi  non  iniquum,  cert6  triste  senattis  consultum,  L.,  xxv.  6, 2.  Cum  omnia 
per  populum  geruntur,  quamvis  iustum  atque  moderatum  tamen  ipsa  aequa- 
bilitas  est  iniqua,  c,  Rep.,  i.  27, 43. 

RELATIVE    SENTENCES. 

610.  The  Latin  language  uses  the  relative  construction  far 
more  than  the  English  :  so  in  the  beginning  of  sentences, 
and  in  combination  with  Conjunctions  and  other  Relatives. 

Remarks. — i.  Tlie  awkwardness,  or  impossibility,  of  a  literal  trans- 
lation may  generally  be  relieved  by  the  substitution  of  a  demonstra- 
tive with  an  appropriate  conjunction,  or  the  employment  of  an  abstract 
noun  : 

Quae  cum  ita  sint,  now  since  diese  things  are  so  (Ciceronian  formula^ 

Futtira  modo  exspectant ;  quae  quia  certa  esse  non  possunt,  conficiuntur 

et  angore  et  metu,  C,  Fin.,  i.  18,  60;    they  only  look  forward  to  the 

future  ;  and  because  that  cannot  be  certain,  they  wear  themselves  out 


394  RELATIVE   SENTENCES. 

with  distress  and  fear.  [Epicurus]  non  satis  politus  iis  artibus  quas  qui 
tenent,  6ruditl  appellantur,  C,  Fin.,  i.  7,  26;  Jilpicurus  is  7iot  sufficiently 
polished  by  those  accomplislimerits,  from  the  possession  of  which  people 
are  called  cultivated. 

2.  Notice  especially  quod  in  combination  with  si  and  its  compounds 
ubi,  quia,  quoniam,  ut  (poetic  and  post-class.),  utinam,  ne,  utinam  ng,  qui 
(rare),  in  which  quod  means  and  as  for  that,  and  is  sometimes  trans- 
lated by  and,  hut,  therefore,  whereas,  sometimes  not  at  all. 

Quod  ni  fuissem  incogitans  ita  eum  exspectarem  ut  par  fuit,  Ter.,  Ph., 
155  ;  ivhereas,  had  I  not  been  heedless,  1  should  be  aivaiting  him  in 
proper  mood. 

Notes.— 1.  The  use  of  the  Relative  to  connect  two  independent  clauses  instead  of  a 
demonstrative,  is  very  rare  in  Plautus,  more  common  in  Terence,  but  fully  devel- 
oped only  in  the  classical  period. 

2.  The  Relative  is  the  fertile  source  of  many  of  the  introductory  particles  of  the  com- 
pound sentence  (quom,  quia,  quoniam,  compounds  of  quam,  ut,  ubi,  etc.),  and  is 
therefore  treated  last  on  account  of  the  multiplicity  of  its  uses. 

611.  Relative  sentences  are  introduced  by  the  Relative 
pronouns  in  all  their  forms :  adjective,  substantive,  and 
adverbial.     (See  Tables  109  foil.) 

Remarks. — i.  The  Relative  adverbs  of  Place,  and  their  correlatives, 
may  be  used  instead  of  a  preposition  with  a  Relative.  Unde,  ivhence,  is 
frequently  used  of  persons,  but  the  others  rarely  ;  occasional  examples 
are  cited  for  ubi  and  quo,  the  others  less  frequently  :  ibi  =  in  eo,  etc.; 
ubi  =  in  quo,  etc.;  inde  —  ex  eo,  etc.;  unde  =  ex  quo,  etc  ;  eo  =  in  eum, 
etc.;  quo  =■  in  quem,  etc. 

Potest  fieri  ut  is,  unde  t5  audisse  dicis,  iratus  dixerit,  C,  Or.,  u.  70,  285; 
it  may  be  that  he,  from  whom  you  say  you  heard  (it),  said  it  in  anger. 
Quo  (=  quibus)  lubeat  nubant,  dum  dos  ne  fiat  comes,  Pl.,  Aul.,  491  (573). 

2.  The  Relative  is  not  to  be  confounded  with  the  Dependent  Inter- 
rogative sentence  (467,  R.  2). 

Quae  probat  populus  ego  nescio.  Sen.,  E.M.,  29,  10;  the  thiiigs  that  the 
people  approves,  I  do  not  know  (quid  probet,  ivhat  it  is  the  people  ap- 
proves). Et  quid  ego  te  velim,  et  tu  quod  quaeris,  sci5s,  Ter.,  And.,  536; 
you  shall  know  both  what  {it  is)  I  want  of  you,  and  what  (the  thing 
which)  you  are  asking  {—  the  ansiver  to  your  question). 

612.  Position  of  Relatives. — The  Relative  and  Relative 
forms  are  put  aft  the  beginning  of  sentences  and  clauses. 
The  preposition,  however,  generally,  though  not  invariably, 
precedes  its  Relative  (413). 

613.  Antecedent. — The  word  to  which  the  Relative  refers 


RELATIVE   SEN"TEN"CES.  395 

is  called  the  Antecedent,  because  it  precedes  in  thought  even 
when  it  does  not  in  expression. 

Remark. — The  close  connection  between  Relative  and  Antecedent 
is  shown  by  the  frequent  use  of  one  preposition  in  common  (414,  r.  i), 

CONCORD. 

614.  The  Relative  agrees  with  its  Antecedent  in  Gender, 
Number,  and  Person. 

Is  minimo  eget  mortalis,  qui  minimum  cupit,  Syrus,  286  (Fr.)  (308). 
Uxor  contenta  est  quae  bona  est  uno  viro,  Pl.,  Merc,  812  ;  a  wife,  ivho  is 
good  is  contented  with  one  husband.  Malum  est  consilium  quod  mutari 
non  potest,  Syrus,  362  (Fr.);  had  is  the  plan  that  cannot  {Jet  itself)  he 
changed.  Hoc  illis  narro  qui  m5  non  intellegunt,  Phaedr.,  3,  128;  I  tell 
this  tale  for  those  tvho  understand  me  not.  Ego  qui  tS  confirmo,  ipse  mS 
non  possum,  C.,Fam.,  xiv.  4,  5  ;  J  tvho  reassure  you,  cannot  reassure 
myself. 

Remarks, — i.  The  Relative  agrees  with  the  Person  of  the  true  Ante- 
cedent, even  when  a  predicate  intervenes  ;  exceptions  are  very  rare  : 

Tu  es  is,  qui  (mg)  summis  laudibus  ad  caelum  extulisti,  C,  Fam.,  xv.  4, 
11 ;  you  are  he  that  has{t)  jjraised  me  to  the  skies. 

The  Latin  rule  is  the  English  exception:  Acts,  xxi.  38;  Luke,  xvi.  15. 

2.  When  the  Relative  refers  to  a  sentence,  id  quod,  that  which,  is 
commonly  used  (parenthetically).  So  also  quae  rSs,  or  t;imple  quod,  and, 
if  reference  is  made  to  a  single  substantive,  is  qui  or  some  similar  form. 

Si  a  vobis  id  quod  non  spgro  deserar,  tamen  animo  non  dgficiam,  C, 
Rose.  Am.,  4,  10;  if  I  should  he  deserted  hy  you  {which  I  do  not  expect), 
nevertheless  I  should  not  hecome  faint-hearted.  Nee  audiendus  [Theo- 
phrasti]  auditor,  Strato,  is  qui  physicus  appellatur,  C,  N.D.,  i.  13,  35. 

3.  The  gender  and  number  of  the  Relative  may  be  determined  : 

{a)  By  the  sense,  and  not  by  the  form ;  that  is,  a  collective  noun  may 
be  followed  by  a  Plural  Relative,  a  neuter  numeral  by  a  masculine  Rela- 
tive, a  possessive  pronoun  by  a  Relative  in  the  person  indicated  by  the 
possessive,  etc. 

Caesa  sunt  ad  sex  milia  qui  Pydnam  perfugerant,  L.,  xliv.  42,  7  ;  there 
were  slain  up  to  six  thousand  who  had  fled  to  Pydna.  Equitatum  omnem 
praemittit,  qui  videant,  Caes.,  B.O.,i.  i^',  he  sent  all  the  cavalry  ahead, 
ivho  should  see  {that  they  might  see,  to  see). 

{h)  By  the  predicate  or  the  apposition,  and  not  by  the  antecedent; 
so  especially  when  the  Relative  is  combined  with  the  copula  or  with  a 
copulative  verb. 

Thebae,  quod  Boeotiae  caput  est,  L.,  xlii.  44,  8;  Thebes,  which  is  the 
capital  of  Boeofia.     Tlumen  Scaldis,  quod  influit  in  Mosam,  Caes.,  B.G., 


396  EELATIYE   SENTENCES. 

VI.  33,  3 ;  the  river  Scheldt,  which  empties  into  the  Maas.  lusta  gl5ria, 
qui  est  fructus  virtutis,  C,  Pis.,  24,  57  ;  i^eal  glory,  ivhich  is  the  fruit 
of  virtue. 

Exceptions  are  not  nnfrequent,  especially  when  the  preclicatiye  sub- 
stantive in  the  Relative  clause  is  a  foreign  word  or  a  proper  name. 

Stellae  quas  Graeci  cometas  vocant,  C,  jV.D.,  ii.  5,  14;  the  stars  which 
the  Oreeks  call  comets.  Est  genus  quoddam  hominum  quod  Helotae  voca- 
tur,  Nep.,  IV.  3,  6  ;  there  is  a  certain  class  of  men  called  Helots. 

4.  The  pronominal  apposition  may  be  taken  up  into  the  lielative  and 
disappear  : 

Testarum  sufiEragiis  quod  illi  ostracismum  vocant,  Nep.,  v.  3,  1;  hy  pot- 
sherd votes — (a  thing')  ivliicli  they  call  "  ostracism.^'' 

5.  When  the  Relative  refers  to  the  combined  antecedents  of  different 
gender,  the  strongest  gender  is  preferred,  according  to  28G  : 

Grandes  natti  matres  et  parvi  liberi,  quorum  utrumque  aetas  miseri- 
cordiam  vestram  requirit,  C,  Verr.,  v.  49,  129;  aged  jnatrons  and  infant 
cliildren,  ivhose  age  on  either  hand  demands  your  compassioji.  Otium 
afeque  divitiae,  quae  prima  mortales  putant,  S.,  C,  36,  4  ;  leisure  and 
motley,  which  mortals  reclw7i  as  the  prime  things. 

Or,  the  nearest  gender  may  be  preferred  : 

Eae  friiggs  atque  fructus  quos  terra  gignit,  C,  N.D.,  11.  14,  37  ;  those 
fruits  of  field  and  tree  which  earth  hears. 

6.  Combined  Persons  follow  the  rule,  287. 

Note. — A  noteworthy  peculiarity  is  found  in  early  Latin,  where  a  generic  Relative 
sentence  with  qui  is  made  the  subject  of  an  abstract  substantive  with  est,  and  repre- 
sented by  a  demonstrative  in  agreement  with  that  substantive. 

Istaec  virtus  est,  quando  usust,  qui  malum  fert  fortiter,  Pl.,  J5i«.,  323; 
thaVs  manhood  ivho  (if  one)  bears  evil  bravely,  when  there's. need. 

The  parallel  Greek  construction  suggests  Greek  influence. 

615.  Repetition  of  the  Antecedent. — The  Antecedent  of 
the  Relative  is  not  seldom  repeated  in  the  Relative  clause, 
with  the  Relative  as  its  attributive. 

(Caesar)  intellgxit  diem  instare,  quo  di§  frumentum  militibus  metiri  oportg- 
ret,  Caes.,  B.G.,  i.  16,  5  ;  Caesar  saw  that  tlie  day  was  at  hand,  on 
which  day  it  behooved  to  measure  corn  (corn  was  to  be  measured  out) 
to  the  soldiers. 

Note.— This  usage  belongs  to  the  formal  style  of  government  and  law.  Caesar  is 
very  fond  of  it,  especially  with  the  word  diSs.  It  is  occasional  in  Plautus  and  Ter- 
ence, and  not  uncommon  in  Ci<  ero  ;  but  after  Cicero  it  fades  out,  being  found  but 
rarely  in  Livy,  and  only  here  and  there  later. 

616.  Incorporation  of  the  Antecedent. — i.  The  Antece- 
dent  substantive   is   often   incorporated   into   the   Relative 


RELATIVE    SENTENCES.  397 

clause ;    sometimes   there    is   a   demonstrative   antecedent, 
sometimes  not. 

In  quern  primum  egressi  sunt  locum  Troia  vocatur,  L.,  i.  i,  3;  the  first 
place  they  landed  at  was  called  Troy.  Quam  quisque  norit  artem,  in  hac 
sS  exerceat,  [C],  Tusc,  i.  i8,  41;  what  trade  each  man  is  inaster  of,  {in) 
that  let  him  practise  (himself),  that  let  him  ply. 

Notes.— I.  Incorporation,  while  much  less  frequent  than  Repetition,  is  still  not 
unfrequently  met  with  in  Livy  ;  after  Livr  it  decays.  No  examples  are  cited  from 
Sallust  with  a  demonstrative  antecedent,  and  but  one  from  Caesar.  No  example 
is  cited  from  Caesar  without  a  demonstrative  antecedent. 

2.  Instead  of  a  principal  clause,  followed  by  a  consecutive  clause,  the  structure  is 
sometimes  reversed.  What  would  have  been  the  dependent  clause  becomes  the  prin- 
cipal clause,  and  an  incorporated  explanatory  Relative  takes  the  place  of  the  demon- 
strative. This  is  confined  to  certain  substantives,  and  is  found  a  number  of  times  in 
Cicero,  but  rarely  elsewhere  (Sall.,  IIor.,  Livy,  Ovid,  Sen.,  Tag.,  Pliny  Min.). 

Qua  enim  prudentia  es,  nihil  tg  fugiet  (=  ea  prudentia  es,  ut  nihil  t§ 
fagiat),  C,  Fam.,  xi.  13, 1.  Veils  tantummodo ;  quae  tua  virtus  (est),  expug- 
nabis,  H.,-s.,  1. 9,54. 

2.  An  appositional  substantive,  from  which  a  Relative 
clause  depends,  is  regularly  incorporated  into  the  Relative 
clause. 

[Amanus]  Syriam  a  Cilicia  dividit,  qui  mons  erat  hostium  plenus,  C, 
Alt.,  V.  20,  3  ;  Syria  is  divided  from  Cilicia  by  Amanus,  a  mountain 
which  was  full  of  enemies  =  tlie  enemy. 

Note.— This  usage  is  found  first  in  Cicero.  The  normal  English  position  ia  found 
first  in  Livy,  but  it  becomes  more  common  in  later  Latin. 

Priscus,  vir  ciiius  providentiam  in  r§  publica  ante  experta  civitas  erat, 
L.,  IV.  46, 10. 

3.  Adjectives,  especially  superlatives,  are  sometimes  trans- 
ferred from  the  substantive  in  the  principal  clause  and  made 
to  agree  with  the  Relative  in  the  Relative  clause. 

[Themistocles]  dS  servis  suis  quern  habuit  fidelissimum  ad  rggem  misit, 
]Nep.,  II.  4,  3;  Themistocles  sent  the  most  faithful  slave  he  had  to  the 
king.  Ngmini  crgdo,  qui  largg  blandust  dives  pauperi,  Vh.^AuL,  ig6;  I 
trust  no  rich  man  who  is  lavishly  kind  to  a  poor  man. 

617.  Attraction  of  the  Relative. — The  Accusative  of  the 
Relative  is  occasionally  attracted  into  the  Ablative  of  the 
antecedent,  rarely  into  any  other  case. 

Hoc  confirmamus  illo  augurio  quo  diximus,  C,  Alt.,  x.  8,  7;  we  confirm 
this  hy  the  augury  ivhich  we  mentioned. 

Notes.— L  This  attraction  takes  place  chiefly  when  the  verb  of  the  Relative  clause 
must  be  supplied  from  the  principal  sentence  ;  that  is,  with  auxiliary  verbs  like  velle, 
SOlSre,  iubgre  ;  and  after  verbs  of  Saying  and  the  like. 


398  RELATIVE   SENTENCES. 

It  is  rare  in  early  Latin,  but  common  from  Cicero  on. 

Quibus  poterat  sauciis  dnctis  secum  ad  urbem  pergit,  L.,  iv.  39, 9 ;  having 
taken  ivith  him  all  the  wounded  he  could,  hs  pi-oceeded  to  the  city. 

2.  Inserted  Attraction. — So-called  Inverted  Attraction  is  found  only  in  poetry,  and 
then  usually  in  the  Ace,  which  may  be  considered  as  an  object  of  thought  or  feeling. 

This  Ace.  stands  usually  for  a  Norn.,  sometimes,  but  only  in  Comedy,  for  the 
Gen.  Dat.  or  Abl.  A  strange  usage  is  the  Nom.  where  the  Ace.  would  be  expected. 
This  may  be  nominatlVUS  pendens,  a  form  of  anacduthcm  (697),  and  is  found  only 
in  early  Latin. 

XJrbem  qiiam  statuo,  vestra  est,  V.,  ^ .,  i.  573  ;  {as  for)  the  city  which  lam  rear- 
ing, (it)  is  yours.  Istum  quem  quaeris,  ego  sum,  Pl.,  Cure,  419 ;  (asfo?')  that  man 
tvhom  you  are  looking  for,  I  am  he.  Ille  qui  mandavit  eum  exturbasti  ex 
aedibus  %  Pl.,  Trin.,  137.    ("  He  that  hath  ears  to  hear,  let  him  hear.'") 

618.  Correlative  Use  of  the  Relative. — The  usual  Correl- 
ative of  qui  is  is,  more  rarely  hie,  ille. 

Is  minimo  eget  mortalis,  qui  minimum  cupit,  Syrus,  286  (Fr.)  (308). 
Hie  sapiens,  de  quo  loquor,  C,  Ac,  11.  33,  105  (305,  3).  Ilia  digs  veniet, 
mea  qua  lugubria  ponam,  Ov.,  Tr.,  iv.  2,  73  (307,  4). 

619.  Ahsorption  of  the  Correlative. — The  Correlative,  is, 
is  often  absorbed,  especially  when  it  would  stand  in  the  same 
case  as  the  Relative.     This  is  a  kind  of  Incorporation. 

Postume,  non  bene  olet,  qui  bene  semper  olet.  Mart.,  ir.  12,  4;  Postu- 
mus,  (he)  smells  7iot  siveet,  who  always  smells  sweet.  Quem  arma  n5n 
frggerant  vitia  vicgrunt,  Curt.,  vi.  2,  1 ;  (him)  whom  arms  had  not  crushed 
did  vices  overcome.  Quem  di  diligunt  adulescens  moritur,  Pl.,  5.,  816; 
(he)  whom  the  gods  love  dies  young.  Xerxes  praemium  proposuit  qui  [=  ei 
qui]  invgnisset  novam  voluptatem,  C,  Tusc,  v.  7,  20;  Xerxes  offered  a 
reivard  to  him  who  should  invent  a  new  pleasure.  Miseranda  vita  qui 
{=  eorum  qui]  sS  metui  quam  amari  malunt,  Nep.,  x.  9,  5;  pitiable  is  the 
life  of  those  ivho  would  prefer  being  feared  to  being  loved.  Discite 
sanari  per  quem  [=  per  eum,  per  quem]  didicistis  amare,  Ov.,  Rem. Am. ^ 
43  (401). 

Difficult  and  rare  are  cases  like  : 

Nunc  redeo  ad  quae  (for  ad  ea  quae)  mih!  mandas,  G.,Att.,\.ii,(i. 

620.  Position  of  the  Correlative  clause. — The  Relative 
clause  naturally  follows  its  Correlative,  but  it  often  precedes ; 
incorporation  also  is  common. 

Male  sg  rgs  habet  cum  quod  virtute  effici  dgbet  id  temptatur  pecunia,  C, 
Off.,  II.  6,  22;  it  is  a  bad  state  of  affairs  when  what  ought  to  be  accom- 
plished by  worth,  is  attempted  by  money.  Quod  vidgs  accidere  pueris  hOo 
nSbis  quoque  maiusculls  pueris  gvenit.  Sen.,  E.M.,  24,  13;  what  you  see 
befall  children  (this)  happens  to  us  also,  children  of  a  larger  growth. 
Quam  quisque  nOrit  artem,  in  hac  sg  exerceat,  [C],  These,  i.  18,  41  (616,  i). 


RELATIVE    SENTE]S^CES.  399 

The  Correlative  absorbed  : 

Quod  non  dedit  fortuna,  non  eripit,  Sen.,  E.31.,  59,  18;  ivhat  fortune 
has  not  given  (does  not  give),  she  does  ?iot  take  away.  Per  quas  nos 
petitis  saepe  fugatis  opes,  Ov.,  A.  A.,  iii.  132;  the  means  you  take  to  win 
us  often  scare  us  off. 

621.  Indefinite  Antecedent. — The  Indefinite  Antecedent  is 
generally  omitted. 

Elige  cui  dicas  :  tu  mihi  sola  places,  Ov.,  A.  A.,  i.  42;  choose  some  one 

to  whom  you  may  say  :   Yoic  atone  please  me. 

Remark. — Such  sentences  are  sometimes  liardly  to  be  distinguished 
from  the  Interrogative:  [CononJ  nOn  quaesivit ubi ipse  tuto  viveret, Nep., 
IX.  2,  1;  Conon  did  not  seek  a  place  to  live  in  safely  himself,  might  be 
either  Relative  or  Deliberative  (2(55). 

TENSES    IN     RELATIVE    SENTENCES. 

622.  Future  and  Future  Perfect. — The  Future  and 
Future  Perfect  are  used  with  greater  exactness  than  in  cur- 
rent English  (242,  244). 

Sit  liber,  dominus  qui  volet  esse  meus.  Mart.,  ii.  32,  8;  he  must  he  free 
who  unshes  (shall  wish)  to  be  my  master.  Qui  prior  strinxerit  ferrum, 
gius  victoria  erit,  Liv.  (244,  r.  2). 

623.  Iterative  Action. — Relative  sentences  follovi^  the  laws 
laid  down  for  Iterative  action  (5GG,  567). 

I.  Contemporaneous  action  : 

Ore  trahit  quodcumque  potest,  atque  addit  acervo,  H.,  S.,  i.  i,  34;  drags 
with  its  mouih  whatever  it  can,  and  adds  to  the  treasure  (heap).  Qua- 
cumque  incMSbat  agmen,  iSgati  occurrSbant,  L.,  xxxiv.  16,  6:  in  whatever 
direction  the  column  advanced,  ambassadors  catne  to  meet  them. 

II.  Prior  action  : 

[Terra]  numquam  sine  usura  reddit,  quod  accepit,  C,  Cat. 31.,  15,  51 ;  the 
earth  7iever  returns  without  interest  what  it  has  received  {receives).  Quod 
non  dedit  fortuna,  non  eripit,  Sen.,  F.M.,  59,  18  (620).  N5n  cgnat  quotigns 
ngmo  vocavit  eum.  Mart.,  v.  47,  2;  he  does  not  dine  as  often  as  (ivhen) 
no  one  has  invited  (invites)  him.  Haergbant  in  niemoria  quaecumque 
audierat  et  viderat  [Themistoclgs],  C,  vl^.,  ir.  i,  2  (507).  Sequentur  tg 
quocumque  pervgneris  vitia.  Sen.,  i^\.¥.,  28,  1 ;  vices  ivill  follow  you 
whithersoever  you  go.  Qui  timgre  dgsierint,  odisse  incipient.  Tag.,  Agr., 
32  (567). 

Remark. — On  the  Subjv.  in  Iterative  Sentences,  .see  567,  n. 


400  EELATIVE   SENTENCES. 

MOODS    IN    RELATIVE    SENTENCES. 

624.  The  Relative  clause,  as  such — that  is,  as  the  represen- 
tative of  an  adjective — takes  the  Indicative  mood. 

Uxor  quae  bona  est,  Pl.,  Merc,  812 ;  a  wife  who  is  good  (a  good  ivife). 

Remark. — The  Relative  in  this  use  often  serves  as  a  circumlocution 
for  a  substantive,  with  this  difference  :  that  the  substantive  expresses 
a  permanent  relation  ;  the  Relative  clause,  a  transient  relation  :  ii  qui 
decent  =  those  who  teach  =  the  teachers  (inasmuch  as  they  are  exercis- 
ing the  functions).  On  the  Relative  with  Subjv.  after  an  adj.  clause, 
see  438,  r. 

625.  hidefinite  and  Generic  Relatives. — i.  ftuicumque, 
quisquis,  and  the  like,  being  essentially  Iterative  Relatives, 
take  the  Indicative  according  to  the  principles  of  Iterative 
action  (254,  R.  4).  So  also  simple  Relatives  when  similarly 
used. 

Quacumque  incedSbat  agmen,  Iggati  occurrgbant,  Liv.,  xxxiv.  16,  6  (628). 

Remark. — According  to  567,  n.,  the  Subjv.  is  used  : 

(i)  In  Oratio  Obliqua  (Total  or  Partial)  : 

Marti  Galli  quae  bello  ceperint  (Pf.  Subjv.)  dgvovent  (=r  sg  daturSs 
vovent),  Cf.  Caes.,  B.  G.,  vi.  17,  3;  the  Gauls  devote  {promise  to  give)  to 
Mars  whatever  they  (shall)  take  in  war  (6.  E.,  Quae  cgperimus,  dabimus), 

(2)  By  Attraction  of  Mood  (Complementary  Clauses): 
Quis  eum  diligat  quern  metuat?  C,  Lael.,  15,  53  (629). 

(3)  In  the  Ideal  Second  Person : 

Bonus  sggnior  fit  ubi  neglegas,  S.,  lug.,  31,  28  (566). 

(4)  By  the  spread  of  the  Subjv.  in  post-classical  Latin: 

Qui  unum  gius  ordinis  offendisset  omngs  adversos  babgbat,  L.,  xxxiii. 
46, 1  (567). 

2.  Qui  =  si  quis,  if  any,  has  the  Indicative  when  the  Con- 
dition is  Logical. 

[Terra]  numquam  sine  usura  reddit,  quod  accgpit,  C.,Cat.M.,  15,  51 
(623).  (Si  quid  accgpit.)  Qui  mori  didicit,  servire  dgdidicit,  Sen.,  U.M., 
26, 10  (423). 

Remark. — Whtn  the  Condition  is  Ideal,  the  Subjv.  is  necessary  (596). 
In  post-classical  Latin  the  Subjv.  is  the  rule  with  all  conditionals. 

626.  Kvplanatonj  Relative. — Qui,  with  the  Indicative 
(=  is  emm,  for  he),  often  approaches  quod,  in  that. 

Habe5  senectuti  magnam    gratiam,   quae  mihi  sermonis    aviditatem 


RELATIVE   SENTENCES.  4OI 

auxit,  C,  Cat.M.,  14,  46;  I  am  very  iJiankfid  to  old  age,  tvMch  (for  it, 
in  that  it)  has  increased  me  {=  in  me)  the  appetite  for  talJc. 

Remark. — Qui  with  the  Subjv,  gives  a  ground,  =  cum  is  (086);  qui 
with  the  Indie,  a  fact ;  and  in  many  passages  the  causal  sense  seems  to 
be  inevitable : 

insanit  hie  quidem,  qui  ipse  male  dicit  sibi,  Pl.,  Men.,  309;  cracked  is 
this  man,  who  calls  (=  for  calling)  down  curses  on  himself.  Erraverim 
fortasse  qui  me  aliquid  putavi,  Plin.,  Ep.,  \.  23,  2;  /  may  have  erred  in 
thinking  myself  to  he  somethirig. 

Notes.— 1.  This  causal  sense  is  heightened  by  ut,  utpote,  as;  quippe,  namely. 
lit  qui  is  rare  in  early  Latin,  Caesar,  and  Cicero,  and  is  not  found  at  all  in  Terence 
and  Sallust.  Livy,  however,  is  fond  of  it.  The  mood  is  everywhere  the  Subjunc- 
tive. Utpote  is  found  only  here  and  there  in  Latin,  and  not  at  all  in  Terence, 
Caesar,  Livy  ;  but  once  in  Plautus.  The  mood  is  the  Subjv.  until  late  Latin. 
Quippe  qui  is  the  most  common  of  the  three,  but  does  not  occur  in  Caesar.  In  early 
Latin  the  mood  is  the  Indie,  (except  V\..,Pers.,  6gq) ;  also  in  Sallust.  Cicero  uses 
the  Subjv.  ;  Livy  uses  both  moods ;  later  the  Subjv.  is  the  rule  until  the  time  of 
Apuleius. 

2.  Simple  Explanatory  qui  has  the  Indie,  most  commonly  in  early  Latin,  and  in 
general  develops  on  the  same  line  that  cum  follows. 

627.  The  Subjunctive  is  employed  in  Relative  clauses 
when  it  would  be  used  in  a  simple  sentence. 

Potential  :  Habeo  quae  velim,  C. ,  Fin. ,  i.  8,  28 ;  /  have  ivhat  I  should 
like. 

Optative:  Quod  faustum  sit,  rggem  create,  L.,  i.  17,  10;  blessing  he 
on  your  choice,  make  ye  a  king. 

Remarks. — i.  Especially  to  be  noted  is  the  Subjv.  in  restrictive 
phrases.     Here  the  Relative  often  takes  quidem,  sometimes  modo. 

The  early  Latin  shows  only  quod  sciam(as  if  dum  aliquid  sciam),  «o/ar  as  I 
may  be  permitted  to  know  something  about  it  (=  quantum  scio,  as  far  as  I  know,  for 
all  I  know),  which  is  used  throughout  the  language,  and  quod  quidem  veniat  in 
mentem  (Pl.,^;;.,638).  Cicero,  however,  shows  a  great  variety.  Quantum  sciam 
is  found  first  in  Quintilian. 

Omnium  oratorum  quos  quidem  c5gnoverim  actitissimum  iudico  Serto- 
rium,  C,  Br.,  48, 180  ;  of  all  orators,  so  far  as  I  know  them,  I  consider  Sertorius  the 
most  acute.  Nullum  ornatum  qui  modo  non  obsctiret  subtrahendum  puto, 
Quint.,  V.  14,  33  ;  /  think  no  ornament  is  to  be  withdraion,  provided  that  it  do  not 
cause  obscurity. 

2.  Restrictions  involving  esse,  posse,  attinet,  are  regularly  in  the 
Indicative.  Cicero  and  Caesar,  however,  show  a  very  few  cases  of 
the  Subjv.,  especially  witli  possls. 

Prodidisti  et  te  et  illam,  quod  quidem  in  tg  fuit,  Ter.,  J.J.,  692;  you 
have  hetrayed  hoth  her  and  yourself,  so  far  as  in  you  lay.  Ego  quod  ad 
me  attinet,  iudicgs,  vici,  C,  Yerr.^  II.  i.  8,  21;  /,  judges,  so  far  as  per' 
tains  to  me,  have  conquered, 

16 


402  RELATIVE   SENTENCES. 

628.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  Kelative  clauses  whicK 
form  a  part  of  the  utterance  or  the  view  of  another  than  the 
narrator,  or  of  the  narrator  himself  when  indirectly  quoted 
(539,  R.).  So  especially  in  Oratio  Obliqua  and  Final  Sen- 
tences. 

Recte  Graeci  praecipiunt,  non  temptanda  quae  efl&ci  non  possint,  Quint., 

IV.  5, 17;  right  are  the  Greeks  in  teaching  that  those  things  are  not  to 
he  attempted  which  cannot  he  accomplished.  Apud  Hypanim  fluvium 
Aristoteles  ait,  bestiolas  quasdam  nasci  quae  unum  diem  vivant,  C,  Tusc, 
I.  39,  94  (650).  Virtus  facit  ut  eos  diligamus  in  quibus  ipsa  inesse  videatur, 
C,  Off.,  I.  17,  56;  virtue  makes  ns  love  those  in  whom  she  seems  to 
reside.  Postulatur  ab  hominibus  ut  ab  iis  se  abstineant  maximg  vitiis,  in 
quibus  alterum  reprehenderint,  C,  Verr.,  iii.  2,  4;  it  is  demanded  of  men 
that  they  refrain  from  those  f emits  most  of  all  as  to  u'hich  they  hate 
hlamed  another.  Senatus  censuit  uti  quicumque  Galliam  provinciam 
obtingret,  Haeduos  dgfenderet,  Caes.,  B.  G.,  i.  35 ;  the  senate  decreed  that 
ivhoever  ohtained  Gaul  as  his  province  shoidd  defend  the  Haedui. 
Paetus  omngs  libros  quos  frater  suus  reliquisset  mihi  donavit,  C,  Att.,  11. 
1,12;  (this  is  Paetus'  statement;  otherwise:  quos  frater  eius  (521)  reli- 
quit ;  compare  C,  Att.,  i.  20,  7).  Xerxgs  praemium  proposuit  qui  [=  eX 
qui]  invgnisset  novam  voluptatem,  C,  Tusc,  v.  7,  20  (619). 

Remark. — Even  in  Oratio  Obliqua  the  Indie,  is  retained  : 

(a)  In  explanations  of  the  narrator  : 

Nuntiatur  Afranio  magnos  commeattis  qui  iter  habgbant  ad  Caesarem  ad 
flumen  constitisse,  Cai;s.,  B.C.,  i.  51,  1;  it  is  (was)  announced  to  Afra- 
Quus  that  large  supplies  of  provisions  (which  were  on  their  way  to 
Caesar)  had  halted  at  the  river. 

In  the  historians  this  sometimes  occurs  where  the  Relative  clause  is 
an  integral  part  of  the  sentence,  especially  in  the  Impf.  and  Pluperfect; 
partly  for  clearness,  partly  for  liveliness.  For  shifting  Indie,  and 
Subjv.,  see  L.,  xxvi.  i. 

(h)  In  mere  circumlocutions: 

Quis  neget  haec  omnia  quae  vidgmus  deorum  potestate  administrari  ? 
Cf.  C,  Cat.,  III.  g,  21;  who  would  deny  that  this  whole  visihle  ivorld  is 
managed  hy  the  poiver  of  the  gods  f  Providendum  est  ng  quae  dicuntur 
ab  eo  qui  dicit  dissentiant,  Quint.,  iii.  8,- 48;  we  must  see  to  it  that  the 
speech  be  not  out  of  keeping  with  the  speaker. 

629.  Relative  sentences  which  depend  on  Infinitives  and 
Subjunctives,  and  form  an  integral  part  of  the  thought,  are 
put  in  the  Subjunctive  (Attraction  of  Mood). 

Pigrl  est  ingenil  contentum  esse  iis  quae  sint  ab  alils  inventa,  Quint.,  x. 


RELATIVE   SENTENCES. 


403 


2,  4;  it  is  the  mark  of  a  slow  genius  to  he  coiitent  ivith  what  has  been  found 
out  hy  others.  Quis  aut  eum  diligat  quern  metuat  aut  eum  a  quo  s6  metui 
putef?  C,  Lael.,  15.53;  who  could  love  a  nia7i  whom  he  fears,  or  by 
whom  he  deems  himself  feared  9  Nam  quod  emaspossis  iure  vocSre  tuum, 
Mart.,  ir.  20,  2;  for  ivhat  you  buy  you  may  rightly  call  your  oum.  Ab 
alio  exspectes  alter!  quod  feceris,  Syrus,  2  (Pr.)  (-319).  In  virtute  sunt  multi 
ascenstis,  ut  is  gloria  maxime  excellat,  qui  virtute  plurimum  praestet,  C, 
Plane,  25,  60  (552).  Si  solos  eos  dicer es  miseros  quibus  moriendum  esset, 
neminem  eorum  qui  viverent  exciperes  ;  moriendum  est  enim  omnibus,  C, 
Tusc,  I.  5,  0;  if  you  called  only  those  wretched  ivho  had  {have)  to  die^ 
you  would  except  none  who  lived  {live)  ;  for  all  have  to  die. 

liEMARK. — The  Indie,  is  used  : 

{a)  in  mere  circumlocutions  ;  so,  often  in  Consecutive  Sentences  : 

Necesse  est  facere  sumptum  qui  quaerit  lucrum,  Pl.,  J.s.,218  (535). 
Efficitur  aboratore,  ut  ii  qui  audiunt  ita  adficiantur  ut  orator  velit,  Cf.  C, 
Br.,  49,  185;  it  is  brought  about  by  the  orator  that  those  who  hear  him 
(=  his  auditors)  are  affected  as  he  wishes  {them  to  be). 

(b)  Of  individual  facts  : 

Et  quod  vid6s  perisse  perditum  diicas.  Cat.,  viii.  2;  and  ivhat  you  see 
(definite  tiling,  definite  person)  is  lost  for  aye,  for  aye  deem  lost.  (Quod 
videas,  anybody,  anything.) 

630.  Relative  Sentences  of  Design. — Optative  Relative  sen- 
tences are  put  in  the  Subjunctive  of  Design,  when  qui  —  utis. 

Sunt  multi  qui  gripiunt  aliis  quod  aliis  largiantur,  C,  Off.,  i.  14,  43; 
many  are  they  who  snatch  from  some  to  lavish  on  others.  [Senex]  serit 
arbores,  quae  alter!  saeclo  prosint,  Caecilius  (C,  Tusc,  i.  14,  31)  (545). 
Semper  hab6  Pyladgn  aliquem  qui  curet  Orestem,  Ov.,  Rem.Am.,  589(545). 
[Magnesiam  Themistocli  Artaxerxes]  urbem  donarat,  quae  ei  panem 
praeberet,  Ne p.,  11.  10,  3  (545). 

Notes.— 1.  The  basis  of  this  construction  is  the  characteristic  Siibjv.,  and  the  con- 
ception seems  Potential  rather  than  Optative  ;  but  in  many  cases  the  characteristic  force 
is  no  longer  felt. 

2.  After  mittere  there  are  a  few  cases  where  the  Impf.  Indie,  is  used  with  much  the 
same  force  a!?;  Uie  linpf.  Snbjv.,  but  the  purpose  is  merely  inferential  from  the  continu- 
ance ill  the  teiirfe.  Sjc  2:«.  So  (in  the  following  sentence)  invgstigabant  =  inves- 
tigatiirl  erant. 

Inmittgbantur  ill!  can6s,  qui  invSstigabant  omnia,  C,  Verr.,  iv.  21, 47. 

3.  By  attraction  simihir  to  that  with  quod  (541,  n.  3)  and  quom  (585,  n.  3),  the  Rela- 
tive is  sometimes  found  with  an  Inf.  and  diceret,  where  the  Subjv.  of  the  verb  in  the 
Inf.,  or  the  Indie,  with  a  parenthetical  ut  dixit,  is  to  be  expected. 

Litteras  quas  mS  sib!  misisse  diceret  (=  misisset,  or  miserat,  ut  dixit)  reci- 
tavit,  c.  Ph.,  II.  4, 7. 

631.  Relative  Sentences  of  Tendency. — Potential  Relative 
sentences  are  put  in  the  Subjunctive  of  Tendency^  v^^hen 
qui  =  ut  is. 


404  RELATIVE   SENTENCES. 

The  notion  is  generally  that  of  Character  and  Adaptation,  and  we 
distinguish  four  varieties  : 

1.  With  a  definite  antecedent,  when  the  character  is 
emphasized  ;  regularly  after  idoneus,  suitable  ;  aptus,  fit ; 
dignus,  worthy  ;  indignus,  umvortliy  ;  after  is,  talis,  eiusmodi, 
tarn,  tantus,  and  the  like  ;  after  tinus  and  solus. 

Est  innocentia  adfectio  talis  animi,  quae  noceat  nemini,  C,  Tusc,  iii.  8, 
16  ;  harmlessness  {ifinocence)  is  that  state  of  mind  that  does  harm  to  no 
one  {is  innocuous  to  any  one).  lUe  ego  sim  cuius  laniet  furiosa  capillos, 
Ov.,  A.A.yU.  451  ;  may  I  he  the  man  ivhose  hair  she  tears  in  her  seasons 
of  frenzy.  Solus  es,  C.  Caesar,  cuius  in  victoria  ceciderit  n6m3,  C,  Dei., 
12,  34;  thou  art  the  only  one,  Caesar,  i7i  whose  victory  no  one  has  fallen. 
Quern  mea  Calliope  laeserit  unus  ego,  Ov.,  Tr.,  it.  568;  /  am  the  only 
one  that  my  Calliope  {=  my  Muse)  has  hurt.  (Acadgmici)  mentem  solam 
censebant  idoneam  cui  crgderStur,  C,  ^c.,i.  8,  30;  the  Academics  held 
that  the  mi7id  alone  was  fit  to  be  believed  (trustworthy). 

Remarks. — i.  TJt  is  not  unfrequently  found  instead  of  qui  after  the 
correlatives. 

2.  Idoneus,  dignus,  etc.,  take  also  ut,  and  the  Infinitive  (552,  r.  2). 

2.  Witli  an  indefinite  antecedent ;  so  especially  after 
negatives  of  all  kinds,  and  their  equivalents,  and  in  com- 
binations of  multi,  quidam,  alii,  nonntilli,  etc.,  with  est,  sunt, 
exsistit,  etc. 

Est  qui,  sunt  qui,  there  is,  there  are  some  who  ;  ngmS  est  qui,  there  is 
none  to  ;  nihil  est  quod,  there  is  nothing  ;  habeo  quod,  I  liave  to  ;  reperi- 
untur  qui,  persons  are  found  who  {to)  .  .  .  ;  quis  est  qui  "i  who  is 
there  ivho  {to)  .  .  .  .  F  est  cur,  there  is  reason  for,  etc.  So,  alco, 
fuit  cum,  there  ivas  a  time  when  (580,  r.  i). 

Sunt  qui  disc6ssum  animi  a  corpore  putent  esse  mortem,  C,  Tusc.^i. 9, 
18  ;  there  are  some  who  (to)  thimk  that  death  is  the  departure  of  the  soul 
from  the  body.  Fuit  qui  suadSret  appellationem  m6nsis  August!  in  Sep- 
tembrem  transferendam.  Suet.,  Aug.,  100  ;  there  ivas  a  man  ivho  urged 
{--.  to  urge)  that  the  name  of  the  month  {of)  August  shoidd  be  trans- 
ferred to  September.  Multi  fu6runt  qui  tranquillitatem  expetentgs  a 
negotiis  publicis  s6  removerint,  C,  Off.,  i.  20,  09;  there  have  been  many 
ivho,  in  the  search  for  quiet,  have  withdraivn  themselves  from  public 
engagements.  OmninS  n6m6  HUius  rei  fuit  emptor  cui  dSfuerit  hie  vendi- 
tor, C,  Ph.,  II.  38,  97  (317,  i).  Post  mortem  in  morte  nihil  est  quod  metuam 
mali,  Pl.,  Capt.,  741;  after  death  there  is  no  ill  in  death  for  me  to 
dread.  Nee  mea  qui  digitis  lumina  condat  erit,  Ov.,  Her.,  10,  120  ;  and 
there  will  be  no  one  to  close  mine  eyes  with  his  fingers.     Miserrimus  est 


RELATIVE   SENTENCES.  405 

qui  quom  gsse  cupit  quod  edit  (172,  n.)  non  habet,  Pl.,  Capt.,  463^  he  is  a 
poor  wretch  who,  ivhen  he  waiits  to  eat,  has  not  anything  to  eat  (non 
habet  quid  edat  would  mean  does  not  Imow  what  to  eat).  Quotus  est 
quisque  qui  somniis  pareat,  C,  Div.,  11.  60,  135  ;  {how  many  men  in  the 
world),  the  fewest  men  in  the  woi'ld  obey  dreams. 

Remarks. — i.  The  Indie,  may  be  used  in  the  statements  of  definite 
facts,  and  not  of  general  characteristics  : 

Multi  sunt  qui  gripiant,  Multi  sunt  qui  eripiunt, 

There  are  matiy  to  snatch  away.  Many  are  they  ivlio  snatch  away. 

Of  course  this  happens  only  after  affirmative  sentences.  The  poets 
use  the  Indie,  more  freely  than  prose  writers  : 

Sunt-qui  (=  quidani)quod  sentiunt  non  audent  (so  mss.)  dicere,  C,  Off., 
1.  24,  84  ;  some  dare  not  say  what  they  think.  Sunt-quibus  ingrate  ti- 
mida  indulgentia  servit,  Ov.,  A. A.,  11.  435  ;  to  some  trembling  indul- 
gence plays  the  slave  all  thanklessly.  Sunt  qui  (indefinite)  non  habeant, 
est-qui  (definite)  non  curat  habSre,  11.,  Ep.,  11.  2,  182. 

2.  When  a  definite  predicate  is  negatived,  the  Indie,  may  stand  on 
account  of  the  defunte  statement,  the  Subjv.  on  account  of  the  negative: 

A.  Nihil  bonum  est  quod  non  eum  qui  id  possidet  meliorem  facit ;  or, 

B.  Nihil  bonum  est  quod  non  eum  qui  id  possideat  meliorem  faciat. 

A.  Nothing  that  does  not  make  its  owner  better  is  good. 

B,  lliere  is  nothing  good  that  does  not  make  its  oivner  better, 

3.  After  comparatives  with  quam  as  an  object  clause. 

Maiora  in  defectione  deliquerant,  quam  quibus  ignosci  posset,  L.,  xxvi. 

12,  6;  (m  that  revolt)  they  had  been  guilty  of  greater  crimes  than  could 
be  forgiven  {had  sinned  past  forgiveness).  Non  longius  host§s  aberant, 
quam  quo  t6lum  adici  posset,  Caes.,  B.O.,  11.  21,  3;  the  enemy  were  not 
more  than  a  javelin'' s  throiv  distant. 

Remarks. — i.  Classical  Latin  prefers  ut  after  comparatives. 

2.  Instead  of  quam  ut,  quam  is  not  unfrequently  found  alone,  espe- 
cially after  potius,  but  also  after  amplius,  celerius,  etc.;  in  which  case  the 
construction  resembles  that  of  antequam. 

4.  Parallel  with  a  descriptive  adjective  with  which  it  is 
connected  by  et  or  sed. 

Exierant  (duo)  adulescentes  et  Drusi  maximg  familiares,  et  in  quibus 
magnam  spem  maiorgs  coUocarent,  C,  Or.,  i.  7,  25  ;  two  young  men  had 
come  out  (who  were)  intimates  of  Drusus  and  in  whom  their  elders  were 
putting  great  hopes. 

632.  ftuin  in  Sentences  of  Character. — After  negative 
clauses^  usually  with  a  demonstrative  tarn,  ita,  etc.^  quin  is 


406  RELATIVE   SENTEK^CES. 

often  used  (556)  where  we  might  expect  qui  non,  and  some° 
times  where  we  should  expect  quae  non,  or  quod  non. 

Sunt  certa  vitia  quae  ngm5  est  quin  eifugere  cupiat,  C,  Or.,  in.  ii,  41; 
there  are  certain  faults  which  there  is  no  one  hut  (—  everybody)  desires 
to  escape.  Nfl  tarn  difficile  est  quin  quaerendo  invgstigari  possiet  (=  possit), 
TER.,^eaM^.,675(5o2). 

Remark. — That  quin  was  felt  not  as  qui  non,  but  rather  as  ut  n5n,  is 
shown  by  the  fact  that  the  demonstrative  may  be  expressed  : 

Non  cum  quSquam  arma  contuli  quin  is  mih!  succubuerit,  Nep.,  xviii. 
II,  5;  /  have  never  measured  swords  with  any  one  that  he  has  not  {hut 
he  has)  succumhed  to  me. 

633.  Relative  in  a  Causal  Sense. — When  qui  =  cum  is,  as 
he,  the  Subjunctive  is  employed.     (See  58G,  r.  i.) 

The  particles  ut,  utpote,  quippe,  as,  are  often  used  in  conjunction 
with  the  Relative  ;  for  their  range,  see  G26,  n.  1. 

(Caninius)  fuit  mirifica  vigilantia  qui  suo  toto  consulatu  somnum  non  vi- 
derit,  C,  Fam.,  vii.  30, 1 ;  Caniriius  has  shown  marvellous  ivatch fulness, 
not  to  have  seen  (=  taken  a  ivinh  of)  sleep  in  his  ivhole  consulship. 
5  fortunate  adulgscens,  qui  tuae  virtutis  Hom6rum  praeconem  inveneris ! 
C,  Arch.,  10,  24;  lucky  youth  !  to  have  found  a  crier  (=  truynpeter)  of 
your  valor  (in)  Homer  !  Maior  gloria  in  Scipione,  Quinctii  recentior  ut 
qui  e5  anno  triumphasset,  L.,  xxxv.  10,  5;  Scipio's  glory  ivas  greater, 
Quinctius'  was  fresher,  as  {was  to  he  expected  in)  a  man  who  {inasmuch 
as  he)  had  triumphed  in  that  year. 

Remark. — On  the  use  of  the  Indie,  after  quippe,  etc.,  see  626,  n.  1. 
On  the  sequence  of  tenses,  see  513,  n.  3. 

634.  Relative  m  a  Concessive  or  Adversative  Sense. — Qui 
is  sometimes  used  as  equivalent  to  cum  is  in  a  Concessive  or 
Adversative  Sense. 

Ego  qui  leviter  Graecas  litteras  attigissem,  tamen  cum  v6nissem  Athgnas 
complur63  ibi  digs  sum  commoratus,  C,  Or.,  i.  18,  82;  although  I  had 
dahhled  hut  slightly  in  Greek,  nevertheless,  having  come  to  Athens,  I 
stayed  there  several  days. 

Note.— The  Indie,  is  the  rule  for  this  conetruction  in  early  Latin  (580,  n.  1). 

635.  Relative  and  Infinitive. — The  Accusative  and  Infini- 
tive may  be  used  in  Orati5  Obliqua  after  a  Relative,  when 
the  Relative  is  to  be  resolved  into  a  Coordinating  Con- 
junction and  the  Demonstrative. 

(Philosophi  cgnsent)  unum  quemque  nostrum  mundl  esse  partem,  ex  qu5 
iUud  natura  consequi  ut  commUncm  utilitatem  nostrae  anteponamus,  C, 


RELATIVE   SENTEKCES.  40/ 

Fin.,  III.  19,  64;  philosophers  hold  that  every  one  of  us  is  apart  of  the 
universe,  and  that  the  natural  consequence  of  this  is  for  us  to  prefer 
the  common  welfare  to  our  own. 

Notes.— 1.  This  usage  is  not  cited  earlier  than  Cicero,  and  seems  to  be  found  prin- 
cipally there,  with  sporadic  examples  from  other  authors. 

2.  Occasional  examples  are  also  found  of  the  Inf.  after  etsi  (Livt),  quamquam 
(Tac),  in  the  sense  anri  yet ;  cum  interim  (Livy),  quia  (Sen.),  nisi  (Tac),  si  non 
(Livy)  ;  and  after  quem  admodum,  ut  (Cic,  Livy,  Tac),  in  comparative  sentences. 

636.  Comhination  of  Relative  Sentences, — Relative  Sen- 
tences are  combined  by  means  of  Copulative  Conjunctions 
only  luhen  they  are  actually  coordinate. 

When  the  second  Relative  would  stand  in  the  same  case  as 
the  first,  it  is  commonly  omitted  {a). 

When  it  would  stand  in  a  different  case  {h),  the  Demon- 
strative is  often  substituted  {c)  ;  or,  if  the  case  be  the  Nom- 
inative {d)  or  Accusative  {e),  the  Relative  may  be  omitted 
altogether. 

(a)  Dumnorix  qui  principatum  obtinSbat  ac  plebl  acceptus  erat  (Caes.,  B.O.^ 

1-3,5), 

J)ioniiorh%  icho  held  the  chieftaincy,  and  {ivJid)  was  acceptable  to  the  commons; 
ib)  Dumnorix  qui  principatum  obtinSbat  cuique  plgbs  fav6bat, 

Dumnoi'ix,  who  held  the  chieftaincy,  and  whom  the  conin tons f avoided  ; 
ifi)  Dumnorix  qui  principatum  obtinebat  eique  plebs  fav6bat, 

Dxwmorix,  who  held  tlic  chieftaincy,  and  ivhom  the  commons  favored  ; 
(d)  Dumnorix  quem  plgbs  diliggbat  et  principatum  obtingbat, 

Dumnorix,  whom  the  commons  loved,  and  {who)  held  the  chieftaincy  ; 
(6)  Dumnorix  qui  principatum  obtingbat  et  plgbs  diliggbat, 

Dumnorix,  who  held  the  chieftaincy,  and  {ivhom)  the  commons  loved. 
Examples  :  (a)  Caes.,  B.  6.,  iv.  34, 4  ;  (b)  C,  Lael.,  23, 87 ;  Tusc,  i.  30,  72  ;  {c)  C,  Br.^ 
74, 258  ;  Tusc,  v.  13,  38  ;  (e)  C,  Off.,  11.  6,  21  ;  L.,  x.  29,  3  ;  (d)  S.,  lug.,  loi,  5  ;  Teb., 
Ad.,  85. 

Notes.— 1.  The  insertion  of  a  demonstrative  is  almost  confined  to  early  Latin, 
LucuETirs,  and  Cicero.  Caesar  and  Sallust  have  no  examples,  and  Livy  very  few. 
On  the  other  hand,  the  use  of  a  relative  by  zeugma  (090)  in  connection  with  two  or 
more  verbs  governing  different  cases  is  found  at  all  periods. 

2.  (a)  The  Relative  is  not  combined  with  adversative  or  illative  conjunctions  (btU 
7c7u),  who  therefoi^e)  except  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  when  it  represents  afolloio- 
ing  demonstrative  or  anticipates  it  (020). 

Qui  fortis  est,  idem  fidgns  est ;  qui  autem  fSdgns  est,  is  n5n  extimgscit 
C,  7"nsc.,  III.  7, 14  ;  he  trho  is  brave  is  confident,  but  he  tcho  is  confident  is  not  afraid. 

{lA  Sed  qui,  qui  tamen,  can  ha  used  in  antithesis  to  adjectives. 

SopbrOn  mimorum  quidem  scriptor  sed  quem  PlatS  probavit.  Quint.,  i.  10, 
J  7  ;  Sophron,  a  wHler  of  mimes,  'tis  true,  but  (one)  that  Plato  approved. 

(c)  Qui  tamen  may  be  added  to  explain  a  foregoing  statement. 

Causam  tibl  exposuimus  Ephesi,  quam  tu  tamen  coram  facilius  cognosces, 
C,  Fafn.,  XIII.  55, 1. 

3.  Two  or  more  Relative  clauses  may  be  connected  with  the  same  antecedent  when 
the  one  serves  to  complete  the  idea  of  the  principal  clause,  the  other  to  roodify  it : 


408  COMPARATIVE   SENTEITCES. 

nia  vis  quae  inv6stigat  occulta,  quae  inventio  dicitur,  C,  Tusc,  i.  25, 61 ; 
the  faculty  that  tracks  (rut  hidden  things^  ivhich  is  called  (the  faculty  of)  research. 

4.  The  Relative  is  often  repeated  by  anaphmm  (682)  for  stylistic  reasons.  Compare 
C,  7'msc.,  I.  25,  62  ;  Plane.,  33,  81 ;  L.,  xxiii.  14,  3. 

637.  Relative  Se7itence  represented  by  a  Participle.— The 
Relative  sentence  is  sometimes  represented  by  a  Participle, 
but  generally  the  Participle  expresses  a  closer  connection 
than  the  mere  explanatory  Relative. 

Omnes  aliud  agentgs^  aliud  simulantes  perfidi  (sunt),  C,  Off.,  iii.  14,  60; 
all  who  are  driving  at  one  thing  and  pretending  another  are  treacherous. 
[Pisistratus]  Homgri  libros  confusos  antea  sic  disposuisse  dicitur  ut  nunc 
habemus,  C,  Or.,  in.  34,  137;  Pisistratus  is  said  to  have  arranged  the 
books  of  Homer,  which  were  (whereas  they  were)  in  confusio7i  before, 
as  we  have  them  now. 

COMPARATIVE    SENTENCES. 

638.  A  peculiar  phase  of  the  Relative  sentence  is  the  Com- 
parative, which  is  introduced  in  English  by  as  or  than,  in 
Latin  by  a  great  variety  of  relative  forms  : 

(a)  By  correlatives ;   (b)  by  atque  or  ac  ;    (6')  by  quam. 

639.  Moods  in  Comparative  Sentences. — The  mood  of  the 
Dependent  clause  is  the  Indicative,  unless  the  Subjunctive 
is  required  by  the  laws  of  oblique  relation,  or  by  the  condi- 
tional idea  (602). 

Remark.— On  potius  quam  with  the  Subjv.,  see  below,  644,  r.  3. 

640.  The  dependent  clause  often  borrows  its  verb  from  the 
leading  clause.     Compare  602. 

ignOratio  futurorum  malorum  utilior  est  quam  scientia,  C,  Biv.,  n.  9, 
23  (~'96).  Servi  moribus  isdem  erant  quibus  dominus,  Cf.  C,  Verr.,  in.  25, 
62  ;  the  servants  had  the  same  character  as  the  master. 

641.  When  the  dependent  clause  (or  standard  of  compari- 
son) borrows  its  verb  from  the  leading  clause,  the  depend- 
ent clause  is  treated  as  a  part  of  the  leading  clause  ;  and  if 
the  first  or  leading  clause  stands  in  the  Accusative  with  the 
Infinitive,  the  second  or  dependent  clause  must  have  the 
Accusative  likewise. 

Ita  sentid  Latlnam  linguam  locupl€ti5rem  esse  quam  Graecam,  C,  Fin., 
1.3,10;  it  is  my  opinion  that  the  Latin  language  is  richer  than  the 


COMPARATIVE   SENTENCES. 


409 


Greek.  Ego  Gaium  Caesarem  non  eadem  dg  r6  publica  sentiro  quae  mS  scio, 
C,  Pis.,  32,  79;  /  laiow  that  Gains  Caesar  has  not  the  same  poiitical 
views  that  I  (have). 


so  (as)  =  as. 


I.    Correlative  Comparative  Sentences. 

642.  Correlative  Sentences  ot*  Comparison  are  introduced 
by  Adjective  and  Adverbial  Correlatives  : 

1.  Adjective  correlatives  : 

tot,  totidem  quot,  (so)  as  many 

tantus  quantus,  (so)  as  great 

talis  qualis,  such 

Idem  qui,  the  same 

2.  Adverbial  correlatives  : 
tarn                            quam,  (so)  as  mucW] 
tantopere                   quantopere,             (so)  as  much 
totigns  (es)                quotiens  (6s),  as  often 
tamdiu                       quamdiu,  as  long 
ita,  sic                     fut,  uti,  sicut,  tamquam  (rare),"" 

J      quasi  (rare), 
item,  itidem  1  quemadmodum, 

I  quomodo, 

Quot  homings,  tot  sententiae,  {as)  many  men,  (so)  many  minds,  Ter., 
Ph.,  454.  Frumentum  tanti  fuit  quanti  iste  aestimavit,  C,  Vcrr.,  iii.  84, 
194  ;  corn  ivas  worth  as  much  as  he  valued  it.  Plgrique  habgre  amicum 
talem  volunt,  qualgs  ipsi  esse  n5ii  possunt,  C,  Lael.,  22,  82  ;  most  people 
wish  to  hare  a  friend  of  a  character  such  as  they  themselves  cannot 
possess.  CimSn  incidit  in  eandem  invidiam  quam  pater  suus,  Nep.  ,  v.  3,  1 
(310).  Nihil  est  tam  populare  quam  bonitas,  C,  Lig.,  12,  37;  nothing  is 
so  ivinyiing  as  kindness.  Sic  dg  ambitione  quomodo  dg  amica  queruntur, 
Sex.,  ^MT.,  22,  10;  they  complain  of  ambition  as  they  do  of  a  sweet- 
heart. Tamdiu  requigsco  quamdiu  ad  tg  8crib5,  C,  Alt.,  ix.  4, 1 ;  I  rest  as 
long  as  I  am  icriting  to  you.  Opto  ut  ita  cuique  gveniat,  ut  dg  rg  publica 
quisque  mereatur,  C,  P/i.,  11.  46, 119;  I  wish  each  one's  fortune  to  he 
such  as  he  deserves  of  the  state. 

3.  The  Correlative  is  sometimes  omitted. 

HomS,  non  quam  isti  sunt,  gloriSsus,  L.,  xxxv.  49,  7;  a  man,  7iot  (so) 
vainglorious  as  they  are.  Discgs  quamdiu  volgs,  C,  Off.,  i.  i,  2;  you  shall 
learn  (as  long)  as  you  wish. 

Remarks. — i.  Instead  of  idem  qui,  idem  ut  is  sometimes  found. 
Bisputationem  exponimus  eisdem  ferg  verbis  ut  actum  disputStumque 


4IO  COMPARATIVE   SE:NrTEi^-CES. 

est,  C,  Tusc.  II.  3,  9;  we  are  setting  forth  the  discussion  in  very  much 
the  same  words  in  ivhich  it  was  actually  carried  on. 

On  idem  with  atque,  ac,  et,  see  643 ;  on  idem  with  Dat.,  see  359,  n.  6  ; 
on  idem  with  cum,  see  310,  r.  2. 

2.  {a)  The  more — the  more,  m{\,j  be  translated  by  quo  (quisque) — eo,  and 
the  like,  with  the  comparatives  ;  but  usually  by  ut  (quisque),  quam—ita, 
tam,  etc.,  with  the  superlative,  especially  when  the  subj.  is  indefinite. 

Tanto  brevius  omne  quanto  felicius  tempus,  Pliny,  Ep.,  viii.  14, 10  ; 
time  is  the  shorter,  the  happier  it  is.  Quam  citissimg  confides,  tam 
maxime  expediet,  Cato,  J.^r. ,  64,  2 ;  the  quicker  the  better.  Ut  quisque 
sib!  plurimum  confidit,  ita  maxime  excellit,  C,  Lael.,g,30;  the  more  a 
man  trusts  himself,  the  more  he  excels. 

(b)  When  the  predicate  is  the  same,  one  member  of  ten  coalesces  with 
the  other  :  Optimum  quidque  rarissimum  est,  C,  Fin.,  11.  25,  81  (318,  2), 
=  ut  quidque  optimum  est,  ita  rarissimum. 

3.  Ut — ita  is  often  used  adversatively  (482,  4).  On  ita — ut,  in  assev- 
erations, see  2G2. 

4.  Ut  and  pro  eo  ut  are  frequently  used  in  a  limiting  or  causal  sense, 
so  far  as,  inasmuch  as;  pr5  eo  ut  temporum  difficultas  tulit(C,,  Verr., 
III.  54,  12G),  so  far  as  the  hard  times  permitted;  ut  tum  r6s  erant,  as 
things  ivere  then;  ut  temporibus  illis  (C,  Fern,  iii.  54,  125), /or  those 
times ;  ut  erat  foriosus  (C,  Rose. Am.,  12,  33),  stark  mad  as  he  was;  ut 
Siculi  (C.-,  Tusc,  1.  8,  15),  as  {is,  ivas,  to  be  expected  of)  Sicilians. 

Vir  ut  inter  Aetolos  facundus,  L.,  xxxii.  33,  9;  a  man  of  eloquence  for 
an  Aetolian.  Ut  sunt  htimana,  nihil  est  perpetuom  datum,  Pl.,  Cist.,  194; 
as  the  world  wags,  nothing  is  given  for  good  and  all. 

5.  On  quam,  quantus,  and  the  Superlative,  see  303. 

Notice  in  this  connection  quam  qui,  ut  qui,  and  the  like,  with  the 
Superlative  (usually  maximg)  : 

Tam  sum  amicus  rei  publicae  quam  qui  maxime  (=  est),  C,  Fam.,  v.  2, 
0;  /  am  as  devoted  a  friend  to  the  state  as  lie  ivho  is  most  {=2  as  any 
man).  Proelium,  ut  quod  maximg  umquam,  commissum  est,  L.,  vii.  33,  5. 
Domus  celebratur  ita,  ut  cum  maxime,  C,  Q.F.,  11.  4,  6. 

6.  The  Correlative  forms  do  not  always  correspond  exactly. 
Subeunda  dimicatio  totiSns,  quot  coniurati  superessent,  L.,  11. 13,  2. 

II.    Comparative  Sentences  with  ATQUE   (AC). 

643.  Adjectives  and  Adverbs  of  Likeness  and  Unlikeness 
may  take  atque  or  ac. 

Virttls  eadem  in  homine  ac  deS  est,  C,  Leg.,  i.  8,  25 ;  virtue  is  the  same 
in  man  as  in  god.  Date  operam  n6  simili  titamur  fortiina  aique  tisl 
sumus,  Ter.,  Ph.,  30;  do  your  endeavor  that  ire  have  not  {\\\)-luck  like 
that  we  had  before.     DissimulatiS  est  cum  alia  dicuntur  ac  sentias,  C, 


COMPAEATIYE  SEJ^^TEXCES.  4I I 

Or.,  II.  67,  269;  dissimulation  is  when  other  things  are  said  than  what 
you  mean  (sometliing  is  said  other  tlian  what  you  mean).  Similiter 
(602,  R.  2)  facis  ac  si  me  roges  ctir  te  duobus  contuear  oculis,  et  non  altero 
coniveam,  C,  N.D.,  iii.  3,  8;  you  are  acting  {like)  as  if  yon  were  to  ask 
me  ivhy  I  am  looking  at  you  with  two  eyes,  and  not  blinking  ivith  one. 
Non  dixi  secus  ac  sentiebam,  C,  Or.,  11.  6,  24  ;  /  did  not  speak  otherwise 
than  J  thought. 

Notes.— 1.  The  expression  is  commonly  explained  by  an  ellipsis  :  Alitor  dixi  at- 
que  [aliter]  sentiSbam,  I  sjwke  one  ivay  and  yet  I  was  thinking  another  ivaij. 

So  we  find  :  Timeo  ne  aliud  credam  atque  aliud  ntintigs,  TER.,Hec.,S44\  I 
fear  that  1  believe  one  thing,  and  you  are  telling  another. 

2.  Instead  of  atque,  et  is  sometimes  used  ;  this  is  not  common,  but  the  greater  pro- 
portion of  cases  occurs  ill  the  classical  period  :  Solet  enim  aliud  sentire  et  loqui, 
C,  Fam.,  VIII.  i,  3  ;  for  he  has  a  ivay  of  thinking  one  thing  and  saying  another. 

3.  These  words  are  principally  :  aequos,  par,  pariter,  idem,  iuxta  (from  the 
classical  period  on),  perinde,  proinde,  pro  eo ;  alius,  aliter,  secus  (usually  with  a 
negative),  contra,  contrarius,  similis,  dissimilis,  simul ;  and  rarely  item,  talis, 
totidem,  proximS,  and  a  few  others.  Plautus  uses  thus  some  words  which  involve 
a  similar  meaning,  as  (d6)mutare  {M.  G.,  1130).    Compare  also  M.  G.,  763  ;  B.,  725. 

4.  Alius  and  secus  have  quam  occasionally  at  all  periods.  On  the  other  hand,  nSn 
alius  and  other  negative  combinations  seldom  have  atque,  commonly  quam  or  nisi. 
After  negative  forms  of  alius  Cicero  has  regularly  nisi,  occasionally  praeter. 

Philosopbia  quid  est  aliud  (=  nihil  est  aliud)  nisi  dSnum  deOrum  ?  c,  Tnsc, 
1. 26,  C4  ;  ijkilosoimy--ivhat  elae  is  it  but  the  gift  of  the  gods? 

III.    Comparative  Sentences  with  QUAM. 

644.  Comparative  Sentences  with  quam  follow  the  com- 
parative degree  or  comparative  expressions. 

The  Verb  of  the  dependent  clause  is  commonly  to  be  sup- 
plied from  the  leading  clause,  according  to  640. 

In  Comparative  Sentences  quam  takes  the  same  case  after 
it  as  before  it. 

Melior  tutiorque  est  certa  pax  quam  spSrata  victoria,  L.,  xxx.  30,  19 
(307,  R.  i).  Potius  amicum  quam  dictum  perdidi,  Quint.,  vi.  3,  20;  I f)re- 
f erred  to  lose  my  friend  rather  than  my  joke.  Velim  existimSs  ngminem 
cuiquam  cariorem  umquam fuisse  quamtemibi,  C,  Fam.,  i.  9,  24  (546, 11.  i). 

Remarks. — i.  When  the  second  member  is  a  subj  ,  and  the  first 
member  an  oblique  case,  the  second  member  must  be  put  in  the  Xom. , 
with  the  proper  form  of  the  verb  esse,  unless  the  oblique  case  be  an 
Accusative  : 

Vicinus  tuus  equum  meliorem  habet  quam  tuus  est,  Cf.  C,  Inv.,  i.  31,  52 
(590).  Ego  hominem  callidiorem  vidi  nSminem  quam  Phormionem,  Ter., 
Ph.,  5QI ;  I  have  seen  710  shrewder  man  than  Phormio  (=  quam  PhormiS 
est).  Tibi,  multd  maiSri  quam  Africanus  fuit,  m6  nQn  multo  minorem  quam 
Laelium  adiunctum  esse  patere,  Cf.  C,  Fam.,  v.  7,  3. 


412  THE    ABRIDGED    SE^^TENCE. 

2.  On  quam  pro,  and  quam  qui,  see  298.  On  the  double  comparative, 
see  299. 

3.  (a)  When  two  clauses  are  compared  by  potius,  rather,  prius,  hefoj-e, 
citius,  quicker,  sooner,  the  second  clause  is  put  in  the  Pr.  or  Impf. 
Subjv.  (512),  with  or  (in  Cicero  regularly)  without  ut. 

Dgpugna  potius  quam  servias,  C,  Att.,  vii.  7,  7  (077,  n.  C),  (Dixerunt) 
se  miliens  morituros  potius  quam  ut  tantum  dedecoris  admitti  patiantur, 
L.,  IV.  2,  8;  they  said  that  they  would  rather  die  a  thousand  times  than 
(to)  suffer  such  a  disgrace  to  slip  in.  Morituros  sg  affirmabant  citius 
quam  in  alienos  mores  verterentur,  L.,  xxiv.  3,  12  ;  they  declared  that 
they  had  rather  die,  than  let  themselves  be  changed  to  foreign  ivays.     ' 

(b)  If  the  leading  clause  is  in  the  Inf.,  the  dependent  clause  may 
be  in  the  Inf.  likewise,  and  this  is  the  regular  construction  in  classical 
Latin  when  the  Inf.  follows  a  verb  of  Will  and  Desire  ;  Cicero  uses 
the  Inf.  regularly,  Caesar  generally,  though  examples  of  the  simple 
Subjv.  are  not  uncommon  in  both  ;  Livy  is  very  fond  of  the  Subjv,, 
especially  with  ut,  which  is  cited  first  from  him. 

Se  ab  omnibus  dSsertos  potius  quam  abs  tg  defenses  esse  malunt,  C,  Div. 
in  Caec,  6,  21;  they  prefer  to  be  deserted  by  all  rather  than  defended 
by  you. 

Notes. — 1.  Instead  of  tam— quam,  so — as,  the  Roman  prefers  the  combinations 
n5n  minus  quam-non  magis  quam  (by  LitotSe). 

(a)  Non  minus  quam  nieans  no  less  than  =  quite  as  much : 

Patria  hominibus  non  minus  quam  liberi  cara  esse  debet,  {Cf.  c.,)  Fam.,  iv. 
5,  2  ;  country  ought  to  be  no  less  dear  to  men  than  children  (=  quite  as  dear  as). 

The  meaning  as  little  as  is  cited  only  from  Ter.,  Ilec,  647  :  non  tibi  illud  factum 
minus  placet  quam  mihi,  where  7iot  less  than  =  quite  as  much  as  =  as  little  as. 

(b)  Non  magis  quam  means  quite  as  little,  or  qiiite  as  much  : 

Animus  non  magis  est  sanus  quam  corpus,  Cf.  C,  Tusc,  m.  5, 10  ;  the  mind 
is  no  more  sound  than  the  body  =  as  little  sound  as  the  body.  (Or  it  might  mean  :  The 
mind  is  no  more  sound  than  the  body  =  the  body  is  quite  as  sound  as  the  mind.) 

So  with  other  comparatives. 

Fabius  non  in  armis  praestantior  fuit  quam  in  togS,  Cf.c,  Cat. ]IL,  4,11; 
Fabius  was  not  more  distinguished  in  war  than  in  peace  {no  less  distinguished  in  peace 
than  in  ivar,  quite  as  distinguished  in  peace  as  in  war). 

2.  After  a  negative  comparative,  atque  is  occasionally  found  for  quam  in  Plautus, 
Tehence,  Catullus,  Vergil  ;  much  more  often  in  Horace  (nine  times  ia  tlio 
Satires,  twice  in  the  Epodes),  who  uses  it  also  after  a  positive. 

NOn  Apollinis  magis  vgrum  atque  hoc  resp5nsumst,  Ter.,  And.,  698.  111! 
nOn  minus  ac  tibi  pectore  uritur  intimo  flamma,  cat.,  lxi.  176.  Cf.  11.,  /S".,  n.  7,  oc. 


THE  ABRIDGED  SENTENCE. 

645.  The  compound  sentence  may  be  reduced  to  a  simpla 
sentence,  by  substituting  an  Infinitive  or  a  Participle  for  tlie 
dependent  clause. 


THE   ABRIDCxED   SENTEKCE.  4I3 

THE   INFINITIVE   AND   INFINITIVE   FORMS. 

646.  The  practical  uses  of  the  Infinitive  and  its  kindred 
forms,  as  equivalents  of  dependent  clauses,  have  already  been 
considered : 

Infinitive  after  Verbs  of  Creation  :  423. 

Gerund  and  Gerundive  :  425-433. 

Supine:  434-43G. 

Infinitive  in  Object  Sentences  :  526-531. 

Infinitive  in  Complementary  Final  Sentences  :  532. 

Infinitive  in  Relative  Sentences  :  635. 

Note.— Under  the  head  of  the  Abridged  Sentence  will  be  treated  the  Historical  In. 
finitlve  and  6rati5  Obllqna :  the  Hietorical  Infinitive,  because  it  is  a  compendious 
Imperfect :  6rati5  Obllqua,  because  it  foreshortens,  if  it  does  not  actually  abridge, 
and  effaces  the  finer  distinctions  of  Oratio  Recta. 

HISTORICAL   INFINITIVE. 

647.  The  Infinitive  of  the  Present  is  sometimes  used  by 
the  historians  to  give  a  rapid  sequence  of  events,  with  the 
subject  in  the  Xominative  ;  generally,  several  Infinitives  in 
succession. 

(Verrgs)  minitarl  Diodoro,  vociferarl  palam,  lacrimas  interdum  vix  tenSre, 

C,  Ver7\,  IV.  iS,  39  ;  Verres  threatened  (was  for  threatening)  Diodorus, 
bawled  out  before  everybody,  sometimes  coidd  hardly  restrain  Ms  tears. 

Notes.— 1.  The  ancient  assumption  of  an  ellipsis  of  coepit,  ft^g'an  (Quint.,  ix.  3, 
58),  serves  to  show  the  conception,  although  it  does  not  explain  the  construction,  which 
has  not  yet  received  a  convincing  explanation.  A  curious  parallel  is  de  with  Infinitive 
in  French.  The  Final  Infinitive  {to  be)  for,  may  help  the  conception,  as  it  sometimes 
does  the  translation.  It  takes  the  place  of  the  Imperfect,  is  used  chiefly  in  rapid  pas- 
sages, and  gives  the  outline  of  the  thought,  and  not  the  details  ;  it  biis  regularly  the 
sequence  of  a  Past  tense. 

2.  The  Historical  Infinitive  is  sometimes  found  after  cum,  ubi,  etc.  See  S.,  lug.^ 
q8,  2 ;  L.,  III.  37,  6  ;  Tac,  Ann.,  11.  4,  4  ;  //.,  in.  31 ;  Aim.,  iii.  26,  2.  No  examples  are 
cited  from  Ciceko  and  Caesar  ;  this  usage  is  characteristic  of  Tacitus, 

Oratio  oblTqua. 

648.  The  thoughts  of  the  narrator,  or  the  exact  words  of 
a  person,  as  reported  by  the  narrator,  are  called  Oratio  P^cta, 
or  Direct  Discourse. 

Indirect  Discourse,  or  Oratio  Obliqua,  reports  not  the  exact 
words  spoken,  but  the  general  impression  produced. 

Remaeks. — I.  Under  the  general  head  of  Gratis  Obllqua  arc  em- 


414  THE  ABRIDGED  SENTENCE. 

braced   also   those   clauses   which   imply  Indirect   Quotation  (Partial 
Obliquity).     See  508. 

2.  Inquam,  quoth  I,  is  used  in  citinc^  the  Oratio  Rgcta ;  aio,  I  say, 
generally  in  Oratio  Obliqua.  Inquam  never  precedes  the  Oratio  Obliqua, 
but  is  always  parenthetic;  aio  may  or  may  not  be  parenthetic.  Oratio 
Kecta  may  also  be  cited  by  a  parenthetic  "  ut  ait,"  "  ut  aiunt,"  rarely 
ait,  (as)  he  says,  {as)  they  say.  The  subject  of  inquit  often  precedes 
the  quotation,  but  when  it  is  mentioned  in  the  parenthesis  it  is  almost 
always  put  after  the  verb. 

Turn  Cotta  :  rumoribus  mecum,  inquit,  pugnas,  C,  N.D.,  in.  5,  13  (484). 
Aliquot  somnia  v6ra,  inquit  Ennius,  C,  Div.,  11.  62,  127;  "-some  dreams 
are  true,^'  quoth  Ennius. 

3.  The  lacking  forms  of  inquam  are  supplied  by  forms  of  dicere. 

649.  Oratio  Obliqua  differs  from  Oratio  Recta,  partly  in  the 
use  of  the  Moods  and  Tenses,  partly  in  the  use  of  tlie  pronouns. 

Notes.— 1.  It  must  be  remembered  that  as  a  rule  the  Roman  thought  immediately 
in  6.  0.,  and  did  not  thinli  first  in  0.  B.  and  then  transfer  to  6.  0. ;  also  that  0.  0.  is 
necessarily  less  accurate  in  its  conception  than  6.  B..,  and  hence  it  is  not  always  possible 
to  construct  the  0.  E.  from  the  0.  0.  with  perfect  certainty.  What  is  ideal  to  the 
speaker  may  become  unreal  to  the  narrator,  from  his  knowledge  of  the  result,  and  hence, 
when  accuracy  is  aimed  at,  the  narrator  takes  the  point  of  view  of  the  speaker,  and  in 
the  last  resort  passes  over  to  0.  IlScta. 

2.  0.  Obliqua  often  comes  in  without  any  formal  notice,  and  the  governing  verb  has 
often  to  be  supplied  from  the  context,  sometimes  from  a  preceding  negative. 

(Regulus)  sententiam  ne  diceret  reciisavit ;  (mying  ikal)  quam  diu  iure 
iurando  hostium  tengretur,  non  esse  sg  senatorem,  c.  Off.,  m.  27,  lOO. 

(idem  Rggulus)  reddi  captivos  negavit  esse  utile ;  (saying  that)  illos  enim 
adulescentes  esse,  s6  iam  confectum  senecttite,  /^. 

3.  Sometimes,  after  a  long  stretch  of  0.  Obliqua,  the  writer  suddenly  shifts  to  the 
0.  Kecta.    Examples  :  C,  Tusc.,  11.  25,  Gl  ;  L.,  11.  7,9,  etc. 

Moods  in  Oratio  Obliqua. 

650.  In  Oratio  Obliqua  the  princijyal  clauses  (except  In- 
terrogatives  and  Imperatives)  are  put  in  the  Infinitive,  the 
subordinate  clauses  in  the  Subjimctive. 

Oratie  E6cta  :      Apud  Hypanim  fiuvium,  inquit  Aristotel6s, 

Orati5  Obliqua :   Apud  Hypanim  fluvium  Aristoteles  ait 

0.  R. :  bgsticlae  quaedam  nascuntur, 

0.  0. :  bestiolas  quasdam  nasci, 

0.  S. :  quae  unum  diem  vivunt, 

0.  0. :  quae  unum  diem  vivant,  c,  Tusc,  i.  39,  M. 

0.  'K.—On  the  river  Bog,  says  Ainslotle,       \  little  creatures  are  born,  that  live  {.tmt\ 

6.  0,~AristoUe  says  that  on  the  river  Bog,  '     one  day. 

S5crat3s  dicere  solSbat : 

6.  E.  OmnSs  in  eo  quod  sciunt  satis  sunt  eioquentes, 

0.  0.  OmnSs  in  e5  quod  scirent  satis  esse  Sloquentes,  C,  Or.,  1. 14, 63. 


THE    ABRIDGED    SE]S"TEK^CE.  4I5 

6.  R.  Socrates  used  to  say :  "All  men  are  eloquent  enough  in  what  ^A^y  under- 
stand." 

0.  0.  Socrates  tised  to  say  thai  all  men  were  eloquent  enough  in  what  they  under- 
stood. 

Remark. — When  the  Principal  Clause,  or  Apodosis,  is  in  the  Indie., 
the  Inf.  is  used  according  to  the  rule  for  Verbs  of  Saying  and  Think- 
ing. When  the  Principal  Clause,  or  Apodosis,  is  in  the  Subjv.,  as  in 
the  Ideal  and  Unreal  Conditions,  special  rules  are  necessary  (05G). 

Otherwise,  Subjv.  in  0.  R.  continues  to  be  Subjv.  in  0.  0. 

Note.— In  Caesar,  ^.C.,iii.  73,  G,  where  a  principal  clause  is  apparently  put  in 
the  Subjv.,  instead  of  dStrimentum  in  bonum  verteret,  read  (fore  ut) . .  .  verte- 
ret,  with  Vossius,  Diibner,  Perrin,  Hoffmann.    Nep.,  ii.  7,  G,  is  disputed. 

651.  Interrogative  sentences  are  put  in  the  Subjunctive, 
according  to  467  ;  inasmuch  as  the  verb  of  Saying  involves 
the  verb  of  Asking. 

Ariovistus  respondit  sg  prius  in  Galliam  venisse  quam  populum  Roma- 
num:  quid  sibi  vellet  cur  in  suas  possessiones  veniret,  Caes.,  B.G.,  i.  44, 
7;  Ariovistus  replied  that  he  had  come  to  Gaul  before  the  Roman  peo- 
ple ;  what  did  he  (Caesar)  mea7i  by  coming  into  his  possessions  ?  (Quid 
tibi  vis  \) 

Remarks. — i.  Indicative  Rhetorical  Questions  (464),  being  substan- 
tially statements,  are  transferred  from  the  Indie,  of  6.  R.  to  the  Ace. 
and  Inf.  of  0.  0.  when  they  are  in  the  First  and  Third  Persons.  The 
Second  Person  goes  into  the  Subjunctive. 

6.  R.  Num  possum  \        Can  I  f  [^  o.]  6.  0.  HTum  posse  % 

Caes.,  B.G.,  I.  14;  Could  he  ? 
Quid  est  turpiua  %  WJiat  is  baser  9  [Nothing.]  Quid  esse  turpius  ? 

Caes.,  B.  G.,  v.  28,  G;   What  ivas  baser  9 

Qu5  86  repulsos  ab  Romanis  ituros?  L.,  xxxiv.  11,6;  whither  should 
they  go,  if  repelled  by  the  Romans  ?  (Quo  ibimus  ■?)  Cui  non  apparere 
ab  eo  qui  prior  arma  intulisset  iniuriam  ortaia  (esse)  %  L.,  xxxii.  10,  0;  to 
whom  is  it  not  evident  that  the  wrong  began  with  him,  who  had  been 
the  first  to  wage  war  9    (Cui  non  apparet  \) 

Examples  are  not  found  in  early  Latin,  are  rare  in  classical  period, 
but  are  especially  common  in  Livy. 

Si  bonum  diicerent,  quid  pro  noxio  damnassent?  L.,  xxvn.  34, 13;  */ 
they  thought  him  a  good  man,  uihy  had  they  condemned  him  as  guilty  9 
(Si  bonum  ducitis,  quid  pro  noxio  damnastis  %) 

The  Question  in  the  Second  Person  often  veils  an  Imperative.  Here 
from  Livy  on  the  Subjv.  is  the  rule. 

Nee  cessabant  Sabini  instaro  rogitantes  quid  tererent  tempus,  L.,  iil 
61, 13.     (0.  R.,  Quid  teritis  1) 


41 6  THE    ABRIDGED   SENTEJ^CE. 

Exceptions  are  rare  ;  Subjv.  with  Third  Person,  Caes.,  B.C.,  i.  32. 
3;  Inf.  with  Second  Person,  L.,  vi.  39,  10. 

2.  In  Subjv.  Rhetorical  Questions  the  Subjv.  is  either  retained  or 
transferred  to  the  Infinitive.    The  Deliberative  Subjv.  is  always  refained. 

Quis  sibi  persuaderet  sine  certa  re  Ambiorigem  ad  giusmodi  consilium 
descendisse  ?  Caes.,  5. 6^.,  v.  29,  5  ;  ivho  could  persuade  himself  that 
Ambiorix  had  proceeded  to  an  extreme  measur^e  like  that,  ivithout  (hav- 
ing made)  a  sure  thing  (of  it)  ?    (Quis  sib!  persuadeat  ?) 

The  Inf.  form  would  be  the  Future:  quern  sibi  persuasurum  1  (659), 
and  is  not  to  be  distinguished  from  the  Fut.  Indicative. 

652.  Imperative  sentences  are  put  in  the  Subjunctive, 
sometimes  with,  usually  without,  ut ;  the  ]S[egative  is,  of 
course,  ne  (never  ut  ne). 

Redditur  responsum :  nondum  tempus  pugnae  esse  ;  castris  sg  ten6rent, 

L.,  II.  45,  8;  there  was  returned  for  answer,  that  it  ivas  not  yet  time  to 
fight,  that  they  must  keep  witliin  the  camp.  (0.  R.,  castris  vos  tengte.) 
(Vercingetorix)  cohortatus  est :  ng  perturbarentur  incommodo,  Caes.,  B.  O., 
VII.  29,  1 ;  Vercingetorix  comforted  them  {by  saying)  that  they  must  not 
allow  themselves  to  he  disco7icerted  by  the  disaster.  (0.  R.,  nolite  per- 
turbari.) 

Remarks. — i.  Ut  can  be  used  according  to  540,  after  verbs  of  Will 
and  Desire  and  their  equivalents. 

Pythia  respondit  ut  moenibus  ligneis  sg  munlrent,  Nep.,ii.  2,  G  ;  the 
Pythia  answered  that  they  must  defend  themselves  with  walls  of  ivood. 

2.  Verbs  of  Will  and  Desire,  being  also  verba  dicendi,  frequently 
have  an  ut  clause  followed  by  an  Ace.  with  the  Inf.,  the  second  clause 
adding  a  statement  to  the  request. 

TJbii  5rabant  ut  sibi  auxilium  ferret ;  ad  auxilium  spemque  reliqui  tem- 
poris  satis  futurum,  Caes.,  ^.6^.,  iv.  r6,  5. 

Tenses  in    Oratio  Obliqua. 

653.  The  Tenses  of  the  Infinitive  follow  the  laws  already 
laid  down  (530)  : 

The  Present  Infinitive  expresses  contemporaneous  action  ; 
The  Perfect  Infinitive  expresses  prior  action  ; 
The  Future  Infinitive  expresses  future  action. 

Remark. — The  Impf.  Indie,  as  expressing  prior  coiitinuatice, 
becomes  the  Pf.  Inf.  in  0.  0.,  and  hence  loses  its  note  of  continuance. 

654.  The-  Tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  follow  the  law^^  of 


THE    ABRIDGED   SENTENCE.  ^l^ 

sequence  (510).  The  choice  is  regulated  by  the  point  of 
view  of  the  Reporter,  or  the  point  of  view  of  the  Speaker. 

Note. — By  assuming  the  point  of  view  of  tlie  speaker,  greater  liveliness  as  well  ae 
greater  accuracy  is  imparted  to  the  discourse.  This  form  is  technically  called  Reprae- 
sentatio.  In  Conditional  Sentences  Repraesentatio  often  serves  to  prevent  ambigu- 
ity. Tiie  point  of  view  not  unfreqnently  saiits  from  reporter  to  speaker,  sometimes  in 
the  same  sentence ;  this  has  the  effect  of  giving  additional  emphasis  to  the  primary 
verb,  and  is  therefore  common  in  commands  and  in  favorable  alternatives. 

Point  of  View  of  the  Reporter  : 

Lggationi  Ariovistus  respondit :  sib!  mirum  videri  quid  in  sua  Gallia 
quam  bello  vicisset,  Caesari  negotii  esset,  Caes.,  ^. 6^.,  i.  34,  4  ;  to  the 

embassy  Ariovistus  replied,  tJiat  it  seemed  strange  to  him  {he  wondered) 
what  business  Caesar  had  in  his  Gaul,  ivhich  he  had  conquered  in 
war. 

Point  of  View  of  the  Speaker  : 

[Legatis  Helvetiorum]  Caesar  respondit :  consuSsse  deos  immortales,  quo 
gravius  homines  ex  commutatione  rSrum  doleant,  quos  pro  scelere  eorum 
ulcisci  velint,  his  secundiores  interdum  r6s  concedere,  Caes.,  B.G.,  i.  14,  5; 

to  the  envoys  of  the  Helvetians  (Jaesar  replied,  that  the  gods  ivere  (are) 
ivont,  that  men  might  (may)  suffer  the  more  severely  from  change  in 
their  fortunes,  to  grant  occasional  increase  of  prosperity  to  those  whom 
they  wished  (wish)  to  punish  for  their  crime.  (A  long  passage  is  L., 
ixxviii.  32.) 

Point  of  View  shifted  : 

Ad  haec  Marcius  respondit :  SI  quid  ab  senatu  petere  vellent,  ab  armis 
discSdant,  S.,  C,  34,  1;  thereto  Marcius  replied :  If  they  wished  to  ask 
anything  of  the  senate,  they  must  lay  down  their  arms. 

Proinde  aut  cgderent  (undesired  alternative)  animo  atque  virtute  genti 
per  eos  dies  totiens  ab  se  victae,  aut  itineris  finem  spgrent  (desired  alterna- 
tive) campum  interiacentem  Tiber!  ac  moenibus  Romanis,  L.,  xxi.  30, 11 ; 
therefore  they  should  either  yield  in  spirit  and  courage  to  a  nation 
which  during  those  days  they  had  so  often  conquered,  or  they  must  hope 
as  the  end  of  their  march  the  plain  that  lies  between  the  Tiber  and  the 
walls  of  Rome. 

655.  Ot>ject,  Causal,  Temporal,  and  Relative  Clauses  fol- 
low the  general  laws  for  Subordinate  Clauses  in  Oratio 
Obliqua. 

For  examples  of  Object  Clauses,  see  525  ;  for  Causal,  see  541  ;  for 
Temporal,  see  501-564,  569-577;  for  Kelative,  see  628. 

Remarks. — i.  Coordinate  Relative  Clauses  are  put  in  the  Acq.  and 
Infinitive  (635). 
21 


41 8  THE    ABRIDGED    SENTEXCE. 

2.  Relative  Clauses  are  put  in  the  Indicative:  (a)  In  mere  circum- 
locutions,    (h)  In  explanations  of  the  narrator  (028,  r.). 

3.  Dum,  with  the  Indie,  is  often  retained  as  a  mere  circumlocution: 
Die,  hospes,  Spartae  nos  te  hie  vidisse  iaeentis,  dum  Sanctis  patriae  Iggi- 

bus  obsequimur,  C,  Tusc,  i.  42.  101 ;  tell  Sparta,  stranger,  that  thou  hast 
seen  us  lying  here  obeying  {in  obedience  to)  our  country  s  halloived 
laws. 

So  also  sometimes  cum ;  see  C,  Lael.,  3, 13. 

656.    Conditional  Sentences  in   Oratio  OblTqua,  Total  and 

Partial. 

1.  The  Protasis  follows  the  rule  for  subordinate  clauses 
(650). 

2.  The  Indicative  Apodosis  follows  the  rule,  hut  Present, 
Imperfect,  and  Perfect  Subjunctive  are  turned  into  the 
Future  Infinitive  or  its  periphrases. 

The  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  is  transferred  to  the  Perfect 
Infinitive  of  the  Active  Periphrastic  Conjugation. 

Passive  and  Supineless  Verbs  take  the  circumlocution 
with  MiLruin  fuisse  ut  .  .  .  .  248,  x.  3. 

Remark.— Posse  needs  no  Fut.  (248,  r.),  and  potuisse  no  Periphrastic 
Pf.  Inf.,  so  that  these  forms  are  often  used  to  lighten  the  construction. 

3.  Identical  Forms. — In  the  transfer  of  Conditions  to 
0.  0.,  the  difference  between  many  forms  disappears.  For 
instance, 

I.  1.  SI  id  cr6dis,  errabis.  1 

2.  Si  id  credgs,  errabis.  I  Dico  t6,  si  id  crgdas,  erraturum  esse. 

3.  Si  id  crgdas,  errgs.     J 

II.  1.  Si  id  crgdis,  errabis.     1 

I  liiaS,:S."'     |D«xitMndorMer5a.err««xumesse. 

4.  Si  id  crgdergs,  errargs.  J 
III.  1.  Si  id  crgdideris,  errabis.     "; 

2.  Siidcredideris,erres.         i  Dixit5,siidcrgdidissgs,erf5turume3se. 

3.  Si  id  ergdideris,  erraveris.  j  '  ' 

4.  Si  id  crgdidissgs,  errargs,  J 

Notes.— 1.  In  No.  I.  the  diiTercnce  is  not  vital,  though  exactness  is  lost. 

2.  (a)  In  No.  II.  the  ambiguity  lies  practically  between  2  and  3;  inasmuch  as 
Eepraesentatio  is  usually  employed  for  the  Logical  Condition,  and  the  Periphrastic 
Pf.  Inf.  is  employed  in  the  Unreal,  wherever  it  is  possible.  The  difference  between 
an  Unfulfilled  Present  and  an  Unfulfilled  Past  would  naturally  vanish  to  the  narrator, 
to  whom  both  are  Past. 

Ariovistus  respondit :  si  quid  ipsi  a  Caesare  opus  esset,  sgsg  ad  ilium  ven- 
tfirum  fuisse :  si  quid  ille  sg  velit,  ilium  ad  sg  venire  oportgre,  Caes.,  b.  (?.,  i. 


THE    ABRIDGED    SENTENCE. 


419 


34, 2  ;  Ariovistus  ansivered,  that  if  he  had  tvanted  anythviq  of  Caesar  he  would  have 
come  to  him  ;  if  he  (Caesar)  wanted,  anything  of  him,  he  ought  to  come  to  htm  (Ario- 
vistus). 0.  R. :  si  quid  mih!  a  Caesare  opus  esset,  ego  ad  ilium  venissem ;  si 
quid  ille  mg  vult,  ilium,  ad  me  venire  oportet. 

Fatentur  se  virtutis  causa,  nisi  ea  voluptatem  faceret,  ne  manum  quidem 
versuros  fuisse,  C  ,  Fin.^  v.  31, 93  ;  they  confess  that  for_viriite"s  o?rn  sa/ce,  if  it  did 
not  cause  jdeastire,  they  7i'ould  not  even  turn  a  hand.  0.  R. :  nisi  ea  voluptatem 
faceret  nS  manum  quidem  verteremus. 

{b)  Occasionally  in  the  Logical  Condition  the  Fut.  Indie,  is  changed  to  the  Fut. 
Periphrastic  Subjv.,  thus :  si  adsensurus  esset,  etiam  opinaturum  is  an  0.  0. 
quotation  for  si . . .  adsentietur,  opinabitur  in  C  ,  .Ic,  11  21, 67. 

3.  No.  Ill ,  like  No.  II.,  is  used  chiefly  of  the  future.  But  in  3  the  periphrases  with 
fore  (futurum  esse)  are  commonly  employed  for  the  active  and  the  Pf .  participle,  with 
fore  for  the  passive.  In  4  the  same  fading  out  of  the  difference  between  Unfulfilled 
Present  and  Past  occurs  as  in  II. 

657.  Logical  Conditions  in  Oratio  Obliqua, 

1.  Ad  haec  Ariovistus  respondit :  si  ipse  populo  Romano  non  praescri- 
beret  quemadmodum  suo  iure  utergtur,  non  oportere  sese  a  populo  Romano  in 
suo  iiire  impediri,  Caes.,  B.G.,  i.  36,  2  ;  to  this  Ariovistus  made  answer : 
If  he  did  not  prescribe  to  the  Roman  people  how  to  exercise  their  right, 
he  ought  not  to  he  hindered  hy  the  Roman  people  in  tlie  exercise  of  his 
right.     (6.  R. :  si  ego  non  praescribo,  non  oportet  me  impediri.) 

2.  Si  bonum  ducerent,  quid  pro  noxio  damnassent  ?  Si  noxium  com- 
perissent,  quid  alterum  (consulatum)  crederent "?  L  ,  xxvii.  34,  13 ;  if  they 
thought  lama  good  mail,  why  had  they  condemned  him  as  guilty  ;  if 
on  the  other  hand,  they  had  found  him  gnilfy,  why  did  they  intrust 
him  with  a  second  consulship  ?  (0.  R. :  si— ducitis,  quid  damnastis  ?  si — 
comperistis,  quid  creditis  ■?) 

3.  Titurius  clamitabat,  suam  sententiam  in  utramqus  partem  esse 
tutam  ;  si  nihil  esset  (0.  R. :  si  nihil  erit)  durius,  nulio  pericuio  ad  proxi- 
mam  legionem  perventiiroa  (0.  R. :  pervenietis)  ;  si  Gallia  omnis  cum  Ger- 
manis  conseatiret  (0.  R. :  si  consentit)  unam  esse  (0.  R. :  est)  in  celeritate 
positam  saliitem,  Caes.,  B.G.,  v.  29,  G;  Titurius  kept  crying  out  that 
his  resolution  ivas  safe  in  either  case:  if  there  were  (shoidd  be)  no 
especial  pressure,  they  would  get  to  the  next  legion  iviihout  danger  ;  if 
all  Gaul  ivas  m  league  with  the  Germans,  their  only  safety  lay  in  speed, 

4.  Eum  omnium  laborum  finem  fore  existimabant  si  hostem  Hibero 
intercltidere  potuissent,  Caes.,  B.C.,  i.  68,  3;  they  thought  that  would  be 
the  end  of  all  {their)  toils,  if  they  could  cut  off  the  enemy  from  the 
Ebro.  (0.  R. :  is  laborum  finis  erit  (or  fuerit)  si  hostem  intercludere 
potuerimus. 

5.  [Hi]  lugurthae  non  mediocrem  animum  pollicitando  accendebant  si 
Micipsa  rgx  occidisset,  fore  uti  solus  imperi  Numidiae  potiretur,  S.,  lug.,  8, 
1 ;  these  persons  kindled  no  little  courage  in  Jugurtha{'s  heart)  by  prom- 
ising over  and  over  that  if  Kitig  3Iicipsafell,  he  alone  should  possess  the 
rule  over  Numidia.     (0.  R. :  si  Micipsa  occiderit,  tu  solus  imperi  potigris.) 


420  THE  ABRIDGED  SENTENCE. 

6.  [FidSs  data  est]  si  lugurtham  vivom  aut  necatum  sib!  tradidisset 
fore  ut  illi  senatus  inpunitatem et  sua  omnia  concederet,  S.,  Ivg.,  6i,  5;  Ids 
word  was  pledged  that  if  he  delivered  to  him  Jugurtha,  alive  or  dead, 
the  senate  ivould  grant  him  impunity,  and  all  that  2i'as  his.  (0.  R. :  si 
milii  tradideris,  tibi  senatus  tua  omnia  concedet.) 

7.  Non  multo  ante  urbem  captam  exaudita  vox  est  .  .  .  futurum  esse, 
nisi  provisum  esset,  ut  Eoma  caperetur,  C,  Div.,  i.  45, 101 ;  not  long  before 
the  taking  of  the  city,  a  voice  was  heard  (saying),  that  unless  precau- 
tions were  adopted,  Borne  ivould  be  taken.  (0.  -R. :  nisi  provisum  erit, 
Roma  capietur.) 

8.  Ariovistus  respondit  si  quid  ille  se  velit  ilium  ad  sS  venire  oportgre, 
Caes.,  B.G.,  I.  34,  2  (GSr,,  3,  N.  2). 

9.  Ariovistus  respondit  nisi  decedat  [Caesar]  sese  ilium  pro  hoste  habi- 
turum  ;  quod  si  eum  interfecerit,  multis  ses6  nobilibus  principibusque  popull 
Romani  gratum  esse  facturum,  Caes.,  B.G.,  i.  44,  12;  Ariovistus  replied, 
that  unless  Caesar  ivithdrew,  he  should  regard  him  as  an  enemy,  and 
in  case  he  killed  him,  he  would  do  a  favor  to  many  men  of  the  highest 
position  among  the  Roman  peoj^le.  (0.  R. :  nisi  decedes  tg  pro  hoste 
habebQ  .  .  .  si  tg  interfgcero  gratum  fgcero;  244,  r.  4.) 

Remark. — Posse  is  usod  as  has  been  stated  (656,  2,  r.). 

Negarunt  dirimi  bellum  posse  nisi  Messeniis  Achaei  Pylum  redderent, 
L.,  XXVII.  30, 13;  they  said  that  the  war  could  not  be  stopped  unless  the 
Achaeans  restored  Pylos  to  the  Messenians.  (6.  R. :  bellum  dirimi  n5n 
potest  (poterit)  nisi  Pylum  reddent.) 

Decent,  si  turris  concidisset,  n5n  posse  militgs  contingri  quin  spe  praedae 
in  urbem  irrumperent,  Caes.,  B.C.,  11.  12,  4;  they  show  that  if  the  tower 
fell,  the  soldiers  could  not  be  kept  from  bursting  into  the  city  in  the  hope 
of  booty.     (0.  R. :  si  conciderit,  non  possunt  (poterunt)  contingri.) 

658.  Ideal  Conditions  in  Oratio  Obliqua. 

-  I.  Ait  sg  si  tiratur  "  Quam  hoc  suave  "  dicttirum,  C,  Fin.,  11.  27,  88;  he 
declares  that  if  he  were  to  be  burnt  he  would  say,  "  How  sweet  this  is." 
(0.  R. :  si  urar,  dicam,  same  form  as  Logical.) 

2.  Voluptatem  si  ipsa  pro  sg  loquatur  concgssuram  arbitror  DignitatI, 
C,  Fi?i.,  III.  I,  1 ;  /  think  that  if  Pleasure  were  to  speak  for  herself,  she 
would  yield  {the  palm)  to  Virtue.  The  context  shows  that  the  condi- 
tion is  Ideal,  not  Logical.     Si  loquatur,  concgdat.     Compare  596,  r.  i. 

659.  Unreal  Conditions  in  Oratio  Obliqua. 

I.  Titurius  clamitabat  EburSngs,  si  fCaesai]  adesset,  ad  castra  ventur53 
[nQn]  esse,  Caes.,  B.C.,  y.  2(),2  ;  Titurius  kept  crying  out  that  ij 
Caesar  ivere  there,  the  Eburones  would  not  be  coming  to  the  camp. 
(6.  R. :  si  Caesar  adesset,  EburSngs  n5n  venirent.)     On  the  rareness  of 


THE   ABRIDGED    SEKTENCB.  421 

this  form,  see  597,  r.  4;  and  even  this  passage  has  been  emended  into 
ventures  sese  (for  esse). 

2.  [Apparebat]  si  dititius  vixisset,  Hamilcare  duce  Poenos  arma  Italiae 
inlaturos  fuisse,  L.,  xxi.  2,  2;  it  was  evident  that  if  he  had  lived  longer, 
the  Funics  ivould  have  carried  their  arms  into  Italy  under  Hamilcar's 
conduct. 

3.  Nisi  80  ipso  tempore  nuntii  de  Caesaris  victoria  essent  allati  existima- 
bant  plerique  futtirum  fuisse  ut  (oppidum)  amitteretur,  Caes.,  ^.  C,  in. 
10 r,  3;  had  not  news  of  Caesar's  victory  been  brought  at  that  very  time, 
most  persons  thought  the  city  would  have  been  lost.  (0.  R. :  nisi  nuntii 
allati  essent,  oppidum  amissum  esset.) 

Note.— As  the  Plupf .  Indie,  is  Bometimes  used  (rhetorically)  for  the  Subjv.  (254,  r. 
3),  so  the  ordinary  Pf.  Inf.  is  sometimes  employed  instead  of  the  Periphrastic  : 

Nem5  mihl  persuadebit  multos  praestantgs  viros  tanta  esse  conatOs 
(=  conaturos  fuisse)  nisi  animo  cernerent  (597,  n.  i)  posteritatem  ad  se  perti- 
n@re,  C.,  C'a<.i/.,23, 82;  no  one  will  persuade  me  that  (so)  many  eminent  men  had 
made  such  mighty  endeavws,  had  they  not  seen  irith  their  minds'  (eye)  that  posterity 
belonged  to  them.  Agricola  solgbat  narrare  s6  prima  in  iuventa  studium 
philosophiae  acrius  hausisse  (0.  R. :  hauserat>,  ni  prudentia  matris  coercu- 
isset,  Cf.  Tac,  Agr.,  4, 5  ;  Agricola  used  to  relate  that  in  his  earliest  youth  he  would 
have  drunk  in  more  eagerly  the  study  oj  philosophy,  had  not  his  nfiother's  prudence 
restrained  him. 

So  witli  potuisse : 

(Pompeium)  plerique  existimant  si  acrius  Snsequi  voluisset  bellum  eS  diS 
potuisse  finire,  Caes.,  B.C.,  m.  51,  3  ;  ?nost  people  think  that  if  Ponipey  had  {but) 
determined  to  follow  up  more  energetically,  he  coxdd  have  finished  the  war  on  that  day. 
(0.  R. :  si  voluisset,  potuit,  597,  r.  3.)  Namque  ilia  multitudine  si  sana  mgns 
esset  (597,  R.  1)  Graeciae,  supplicium  Persas  dare  potuisse,  Nep.,  xvii.  5, 2 ;  /or 
with  that  number,  if  Greece  Itad  had  {had  been  in  her)  sound  mind,  the  Persians 
might  have  paid  the  penalty  (due).  (0.  R. :  si  Sana  mens  esset  Graeciae,  suppli- 
cium Persae  dare  potugrunt.) 

Pronouns  in   Oratio  OblTqua. 
660.   I.  The  Reflexive  is  used  according  to  the  principles 
laid  down  in  520  ff. 

2.  The  person  addressed  is  usually  ille ;  less  often  is. 

Ariovistus  respondit  nisi  decgdat  [Caesar]  sgsg  ilium  pro  hoste  habitH- 
rum :  quod  si  eum  interfecerit,  multis  sesg  nobilibus  principibusque  populi 
Romani  gratum  esse  facturum,  Caes.,  E.G.,  i.  44,  12  (657,  9). 

Of  course,  this  does  not  exclude  the  ordinary  demonstrative  use. 

3.  Hie  and  iste  are  commonly  changed  into  ille  or  is,  nunc 
is  changed  into  turn  and  tunc,  except  when  already  contrasted 
with  tunc,  when  it  is  retained  (S.,  lug.,  109,  3  ;  iii,  1). 

Diodorus  [respondit]  illud  argentum  se  paucis  illls  digbus  misisse  Lily- 
baeum,  C,  Verr.,  iv.  18,  39  (393,  r.  4). 


422 


THE   ABRIDGED    SENTENCE. 


4.  Nos  is  used  when  the  narrator's  party  is  referred  to  ; 
compare  Caes.,  E.G.,  i.  44,  below. 

5.  Ipse  seems  to  be  used  sometimes  in  0.  0.  with  reference 
to  the  principal  subject,  as  contrasted  with  the  person  ad- 
dressed. Usually,  however,  ipse  would  have  occurred  in  the 
0.  E.  as  well. 

Ariovistus  respondit :  Si  ipse  populo  Romano  non  praescriberet,  quemad- 
modum  suo  iure  uteretur,  non  oportere  sesg  a  populo  Eomano  in  suo  iure 
impediri,  Caes.,  E.G.,  i.  36,  2  (057). 

661.  Specimens  of  the  conversion  of  Oratio  Obliqua  into 
Oratio  Recta. 


Oratio  Obliqua. 

I.  Ariovistus  respondit  : 

Transi5se  R]i5nura  sese  non  sua 
sponte  sed  rogatum  et  arcessituw 
a  Gallis;  non  sine  magna  spe  mH- 
gnlsque  praeraiis  domum  propin- 
qiiosque  reliqiu'sse ;  sed5s  habere 
in  Gallia  ab  ipslsconcessas,  obsides 
ipsorum  voluntate  datOs  ;  stlpen- 
dium  capere  iure  belli,  quod  vic- 
torSs  victis  imponere  eonsn^r int. 
Non  sese  Gallis  sed  Gailos  sibi  bel- 
lum  intuU'sse;  omn5s  Galliae  civi- 
tates  ad  se  oppugnanduni  x^.nisse 
et  contra  se  castra  habiiissc  ;  eds 
omn5s  copies  a  se  uno  proelio  pul- 
sus iic  siiperiltas  esse.  Si  iterum 
experiri  velint,  se  iternra  paratum 
esse  decertare  ;  si  pace  uti  velint, 
iniqiumi  esse  d5  stipcndio  recusrirc, 
quod  sua  voluntate  ad  id  tempus 
pependeriw/.  Aniicitiam  populi 
liomani  sihi  ornamento  et  prae- 
sidio,  non  detrimento  esse  oportere 
idque  se  ca  spe  petisse.  Si  per 
populum  Koiiulnum  stipendiuin 
vc\\\\{.{dt}ir  et  dediticii  subtraha?i- 
tur,  non  minus  libenter  ses(?  reciisa- 
tfirtim  populi  Romani  amicitiara 
quam  uppetierit.  Quod  niultitti- 
dinem  GermanOrum  in  Galliam 
traduca^,  id  se  snl  muniendi,  non 
Galliae  impugnandae  causa,  facere  ; 
eius  rei  testimOnio  esse  (piod  nisi 
rogatus  non  venenV  et  quod  bellum 
non  intulerit  sed  defendenV. 

CAIiS.,  E.G.,  1.  44. 


Oratio  Eecta. 


Transu  Khenum  non  med  sponte 
sed  rogfitus  et  arcessitus  a  Gallis  ; 
non  sine  nulgna  sp5  magnisque 
praemiis  domum  propinquosque 
reliqu^;  s5des  habe5  in  Gallia  ab 
ipsis  concGssas,  obsid5s  ipsorum 
voluntate  datOs;  stipendium  capio 
iure  belli,  quod  victores  victis  im- 
ponere consn^rimt.  Non  ego  Gal- 
lis sed  Gain  mihi  bellum  intule- 
rimt  ;  omn5s  Galliae  civitates  ad 
me  oppiignandum  s'^werunt  et  con- 
tra me  castra  habueyw^i^ ;  e«e  om- 
n5s  copiae  il  me  uno  proelio  pulsae 
iic  superatae  sunt.  Si  iterum  ex- 
periri volunt,  iterum  paratus  sum 
decertare,  si  pace  uti  volunt,  ini- 
quum  est  de  stipendio  recusare, 
quod  sua  voluntate  ad  hoc  tempus 
pepem\erunt.  Amicitiam  populi 
liomani  mihi  ornamento  et  prae- 
sidio,  non  detrimento  esse  oporte^ 
idque  ea  sp5  petii.  Si  per  populum 
Romanum  stipendium  remitted?/?- 
et  dediticii  ^uhtvukheniur,  non  mi- 
nus libenter  recQsa^o  populi  Ro- 
mani amicitiam  quam  a|)pet/i. 
Quod  multitudinem  Germfinorum 
in  Galliam  tnlduca/w,*  id  uiei  mu- 
niendi, non  Galliae  impugnandae 
causa  fac^V};  Cius  rei  testimonio  est 
quod  nisi  rogatus  non  v5nl  et  quod 
bel  1  u m  non  intuit  sed  defend?. 

*  Allusion  to  the  precoding  speech, 
otherwise  tradQcO. 


THE   ABRIDGED   SENTENCE. 


423 


Oratio  Obliqua, 

2,  His  Caesar  ita  respondit : 

Eo  sihi  minus  dubitationis  darl 
quod  eas  rSs  quas  l5gati  HelvBtii 
conunexnoYOSsent  meuioria  tenere^ 
alque  eo  giavius  ferre  quo  minus 
meritd  populi  Ilomani  acQiiXissent ; 
qui  si  alieuius  iniuriae  sib! conscius 
fuisset  non  fnisse  difficile  cavere  ; 
sed  eo  deceptuw  quod  neque  com- 
missum  a  s5  intellegere^  quarB  ti- 
meret  neque  sine  causa  timendum 
ip\\idret.  Quod  si  veteris  contume- 
liae  oblivisci  vellet,  num  etiam  re- 
centium  iniuriSrum,  quod  eo  invito 
iter  per  provinciam  per  vim  temp- 
tdssent,  quod  Aeduds,  qutxl  Am- 
barrSs,  quod  Allobrogas  vcxdsseni 
memoriam  depdnere  posse F  Quod 
Slid  victoria  tarn  insolenter  glOriil- 
rentui\  quodque  tarn  diu  sS  impune 
tulisse  iniuriSs  admlvdrentur  eo- 
dem  pertinere.  Consut^sse  enim 
deds  immortales  quo  gravius  ho- 
mines ex  coramutritione  r5rum 
doleant,  quds  pro  scelere  corum 
ulcisci  velint,  his  secundiorGs  in- 
terdum  res  et  diuturnidrem  impu- 
nitatem  concedere.  Cum  ea  ita 
sint,  tamen  si  obsid5s  ab  its  sihi 
dentur,  uti  ea  quae  polliceaw/wr 
facturos  intelleg«/,  et  si  Aeduis  de 
iniuriis  quas  ipsis  sociis<:[UC  edrum 
inXwlerint,  item  si  Allobrogibus 
satisfaciaw/,  sese  cum  ils  pacem 
esse  facturum. 

Caes.,  B.G.,  I.  14. 


Oratio  EScta. 


Hoc  mihi  minus  dubitationis 
datur  quod  eas  r5s  quas  vos,  legati 
Helvgtil,  commemor«s^ts,  memi^ria 
teneo  atque  hoc  gravius  fero  quo 
minus  merito  populi  Rdmani  aeci- 
derunt ;  qui  si  alieuius  iniuriae 
sibi  conscius  fuisset,  non  tint  diffi- 
cile cavere  ;  sed  ed  d5eeptu«  quod 
neque  commissum  a  sS  intellegeJa^ 
quarg  timfiret  neque  sine  causii  ti- 
mendum piitdbat.  Quod  si  veteris 
contumeliae  oblivisci  void,  num 
etiam  recentium  iniuriarum,  quod 
me  invito  iter  per  provinciam  per 
vim  tempt«s/^s,  quod  Aeduos,  quod 
Ambarrds,  quod  Aliobrogas  vexa- 
stis,  memoriam  depdnere  possum? 
Quod  vestrd  victoria  tarn  insolenter 
glCmiiminl,  quodque  tam  diu  vds 
impune  tulisse  iniurias  diihim'dmini 
eodem  pertine/.  Cdnsuei'^rww^ 
enim  dl  immortal5s  quo  gravius 
homines  ex  commiitatidne  rerura 
doleant,  quOs  pro  scelere  eorum 
ulcisci  volunt,  his  secundidres  in- 
terdum  res  et  diuturnidrem  impu- 
nitatem  concedere.  Cum  haec  ita 
sint,  tamen  si  obsides  a  vohls  mihi 
dahuntur,  uti  ea,  quae  pollic^^wiw*, 
facturos  intellegam  et  si  Aeduis  de 
iniuriis  quiis  ipsis  sociisque  edrum 
intul^\s^^s,  item  si  Allobrogibus 
satisfaci^/f^s,  ego  vobisQum  pacem 
faciam. 


3.  Stdla  regl  patefecit : 

Quod  \)o\\\cecLtur,  senatum  et 
popnlu?/i  Kdmanum,  quoniam  am- 
plius  armis  valumewt,  non  in  gra- 
tiam  h&hiturds ;  faciundum  ali- 
quid,  quod  illdrum  magis  quam 
sad  retulisse  viderehtr;  id  ided  in 
prdmptu  esse,  quoniam  lugurthae 
cd[)iam  habere^,  quera  si  Romanis 
trfididisse^,  fore  ut  illl  plurimum 
d^hitrefur ;  amicitiam,  foedus,  Nu- 
midiae  partem,  quam  nunc  petered, 
tunc  dltro  adven/wram. 

S.,  lug.,  III. 


Quod  pollicms,  senatuset  popu- 
lus  Rdmanus  quoniam  amplius 
armis  valum^wt,  ndn  in  gratia m 
hahehunt;  faciundum  aliquid,  quod 
illdrum  magis  quam  iud  retulisse 
vide«^Mr;  id  ided  in  prdmptu  est, 
quoniam  lugurthae  cdpiam  hab^s, 
quem  si  Rdmanis  tradidem  tibl 
plurimum  debei*7wr;  amicitia,  foe- 
dus, Numidiae  pars,  quam  nunc 
pet*6s  tunc  ultrd  adveme^. 


424 


THE   ABRIDGED   SENTENCE. 


OrStid  Obliqua. 

4.  Athmienses  deplordverunt 
vastdtionem  populdtimemque  mi- 
ser abilem  agrorum.  Neque  se  id 
queri  quod  hostilia  ab  hoste  passi 
forent;  esse  enim  quaedam  belli 
iara  quae  ut  faeere  ita  pati  sit  fas. 
Sata  exurl,  dirui  tecta,  praediis 
hominnrn  peconimque  agl  raisera 
raag-is  quam  indisfna  patienti  esse  ; 
veram  enira  v5r5  id  se  quer*,  quod 
is,  qui  Romfinos  alieiiigentis  et  bar- 
baros  voce^  adeo  omnia  simul  di- 
vina  hamanaque  iQra  pollumif  ut 
priore  populatione  cum  infernis 
diis,  secunda  cum  superis  helium 
nefarium  gesserit.  Omnia  sepul- 
cra  monumentaque  diruta  esse  in 
finibus  sms,  omnium  nudatos 
manes,  niillius  ossa  terra,  tegl. 
Qualem  terram  Atticam  teQerit, 
exornatam  quondam  opulentam- 
que,  talem  eum  si  lice«^  Aetoliam 
Graeciamque  omnem  t'dctitnim. 
Urbis  quoque  suae  similem  defor- 
mitdtem  futuram  fuisse,  nisi  lio- 
miini  subvBnisseut. 

L.,  XXXI.  30. 


Oratio  Eecta. 


Non  id  querimur  quod  hostilia 
ab  hoste  passi  sumus.  Sunt  enira 
quaedam  belli  iura  quae  ut  faeere 
ita  pati  est  fas,  Sata  exiiri,  dirui 
tecta,  praedas  honiinum  peeorum- 
queagi  miseramagisquam  indlgna 
patienti  simt ;  veriim  enim  vero  id 
querimur  quod  is,  qui  Romiinos 
alienigenas  et  barbaros  voe«/,  adeo 
omnia  simul  divina  humanaque 
iiira  poliu?Y  ut  pridre  populatione 
cum  infernis  diis,  secunda  eum  su- 
peris bellum  nefarium  gesserit. 
Omnia  sepulcra  monumentaque  di- 
ruta stmt  in  finibus  nostras,  omni- 
um nudati  m lines,  nidllus  ossa  terra 
teguntiir.  Qualem  terram  Atticam 
fee^Y,  exornatam  quondam  opulen- 
tamque,  tiilem  is,  si  Vicebit  (or  : 
licea^)  Aetoliam  Graeciamque  om- 
nem ia,ciet  (or :  iiwiat).  Urbis 
quoque  nostrae  simiU's  deformitas 
fuisset^  nisi  Koraani  subvenissent. 


INVOLVED  ORATIO  OBLTQUA.    ATTRACTION   OF 
MOOD. 


662.  OratiS  Obliqua  proper  depends  on  some  verb  of  Thinking  or 
Saying,  expressed  or  understood.  In  a  more  general  sense  the  term  0. 
Obliqua  is  used  of  all  complementary  clauses  that  belong  to  ideal  rela- 
tions. The  principle  is  the  same  in  both  sets  of  sentences,  for  in  the 
one,  as  in  the  other,  the  Infinitive  takes  its  dependencies  in  the  Sul> 
junctive,  on  account  of  the  close  relation  between  the  Ideal  mood  and 
the  Substantive  Idea  of  the  verb.  Hence  the  favorite  combination  of 
the  Infinitive  and  the  Ideal  Second  person  : 

Difficile  eat  anucitiam  manSre  si  a  virtute  dSfSceris,  C,  Lael,  11,  37;  ^7 
is  hard  for  friendship  to  abide  if  you  (one)  have  fallen  away  from  vir- 
tue. Proprium  humani  ingenii  est  Sdisse  quern  laeserls,  Tag.,  Agr.,  42, 
4  ;  it  is  {peculiar  to)  human  nature  to  hate  whom  you  have  injured. 
(But  Qdisti  quern  laesisti.) 

The  so-called  attraction  of  mood,  by  which  clauses  originally  Indica- 
tive become  Subjunctive  in  dependence  on  Subjunctives,  is  another 
phase  of  the  same  general  principle. 


THE    ABRIDGED   SENTENCE.  425 

663.  I.  All  clauses  which  depend  on  Infinitives  and  Sub- 
junctives, and  form  an  integral  part  of  the  thought,  are  put 
in  the  Subjunctive  (Subjunctive  by  Attraction). 

Recordatione  nostrae  amicitiae  sic  fruor  ut  beat§  vixisse  videar  quia  cum 
Scipione  vixerim,  C,  Lael.  ,4,  lo :  /  enjoy  the  remembrance  of  our  friend- 
ship so  much  that  I  seem  to  have  lived  happily  because  I  lived  with 
Scipio.  Vereor  ne  dum  minuere  velim  laborem  augeam,  C,  Leg.,  i,  4, 12; 
I  fear  lest  while  I  am  wishing  to  lessen  the  toil  I  inay  increase  it  (dum 
minuere  volo,  augeo).  Isto  bono  utare  dum  adsit,  cum  absit,  nS  requiras, 
C,  Cat. 21.,  10,  33  (2G3,  2,  a).  Quarg  fiebat  ut  omnium  oculos  quotiescum- 
que  in  publicum  prodisset  ad  sg  conVerteret,  Xep.,  vii.  3,  5  (567;  quoties- 
cumque  prodierat  conrertebat).  Nescire  quid  antequam  natus  sis  acciderit, 
id  est  semper  esse  puerum,  C,  Or.,  34,  120  ;  not  to  know  what  happened 
before  you  were  born,  (that)  is  to  be  always  a  boy.  Fraus  fidem  in  parvis 
sib!  praestruit  ut  cum  operae  pretium  sit,  cum  mercSde  magna  fallat,  L., 
xxvni.  42,  7;  fraud  lays  itself  a  foundation  of  credit  in  small  things 
in  order  that  when  it  is  worth  while  it  may  'make  a  great  profit  by 
cheating.  [Araneolae]  rgte  texunt  ut  si  quid  inhaeserit  confieiant,  C, 
N.D.,  II.  48.  123  (567  ;  si  quid  inhaesit  conficiunt).  Abeunti  si  quid  popos- 
cerit  concSdere  mSris,  Tac,  G.,  21,  4  ;  to  tlie  departing  {guest)  it  is 
customary  to  grant  anything  that  he  asks  (si  quid  popOscit  concSdunt). 

Notes.— 1.  Dum  not  iinfrequently  resists  the  Attraction  both  in  prose  and  poetry  : 
Tantum  nS  noceas  dum  vis  prodesse  vidgto,  Ov.,  Tr.,  1. 1, 101  (548). 
2.  On  the  retention  of  the  Indie,  in  Relative  clauses,  see  628,  r. 

2,  Partial  Obliquity. — (a)  From  this  it  is  easy  to  see  how  the 
Subjunctive  came  to  be  used  in  a  Generic  or  Iterative  sense  after 
Tenses  of  Continuance.  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future  Indicative 
may  all  involve  the  Notion  of  Habit,  Will,  Inclination,  Endeavor,  and 
the  complementary  clauses  would  follow  the  sense  rather  than  the  form. 
For  examples,  see  567,  n. 

(b)  So  also  is  explained  the  use  of  the  Subjunctive  in  Causal  Sen- 
tences, and  especially  in  Conditional  Sentences,  where  the  Apodosis  is 
embodied  in  the  leading  verb. 

(lugurtha)  timSbat  Iram  senatus  (=  n6  irascergtur  senatus)  ni  paruisset 
legatis,  S.,  lug.,  25,  7(601).  [Ubiis]  auxilium  suum  (=  sg  auxiliatiirum) 
pollicitus  est,  si  ab  Suebis  premerentur,  Caes.,  B.G.,  iv.  19,  1.  Praetor 
aedem  (—  sg  aedificaturum)  Diovi  vovit  si  eo  dig  hostis  fudisset,  L.,  xxxi. 
21,  12. 

The  idea  of  6.  0.  is  shown  in  the  tense: 

Si  per  Metellum  licitum  esset  matrgs  venigbant  (=  venturae  erant),  C, 
Verr.,  v.  49, 129.  [Dictator]  ad  hostem  dticit  nullo  loco  nisi  necessitas 
cogeret  fortunae  sg  commissurus,  L.,  xxii.  12,  2  (438,  n.). 


426  PARTICIPIAL   SENTENCES. 


PARTICIPIAL   SENTENCES. 

664.  Participles  are  used  in  Latin  even  more  extensively 
than  in  English,  to  expj-ess  a  great  variety  of  subordinate 
relations,  such  as  Time  and  Circumstance,  Cause  and  Occa- 
sion, Condition  and  Concession.  The  classification  cannot 
always  be  exact,  as  one  kind  blends  with  another. 

Remarks.— I.  It  is  sometimes  convenient  to  translate  a  Participial 
Sentence  by  a  coordinate  clause,  but  the  Participle  itself  is  never  coor- 
dinate, and  such  clauses  are  never  equivalents.     (410,  r.  2.) 

Manlius  Galium  caesum  torque  spoliavit,  L.,  vi.  42,  5;  Mmilius  sleiv  the 
Gaul  and  stripped  him  of  his  neckcfiain  (after  slayinir  the  Gaul  stripped 
him  of  his  neckchain,  having  slain,  etc.).  (Miltiades)  capitis  absolutus, 
pecunia  multatus  est,  Nep.,  i.  7,  6;  Miltiades  (though)  acquitted/)/  a  cap- 
ital charge,  teas  mulcted  in  {a  sum  of)  money  {was  acquitted,  but  midcted). 

2.  A  common  translation  of  the  -Pai'tieiplc  is  an  abstract  substan- 
tive; see  325,  R.  3;  437,  n.  2. 

Nee  terra  mutata  miitavit  mores,  L.,  xxxvii.  54.  18  ;  nor  hath  the 
change  of  land  changed  the  character.  Teucer  Ulixen  reum  facit  Aiacis 
occisi,  Quint.,  iv.  2,  18;  Teucer  indicts  Ulysses  for  the  murder  of  Ajax. 
Inter  haec  parata  atque  decrSta,  S.,  C,  43,  3. 

3.  On  the  Participle  after  verbs  of  Perception  and  Representation, 
see  53G. 

665.  Participles  may  represent  Time  When, 

Alexander  morigns  anulum  suum  dederat  Perdiccae,  Nep.,  xviii.  2, 1; 

Alexander  (when  he  was)  dying,  had  given  his  ring  to  Perdiccas. 
Dionysius  tyrannus  Syracusis  expulsus  Corinthi  pueros  docSbat,  C,  Tusc, 
III.  12,  27;  Dionysius  the  tyrant,  (after  he  had  been)  exiled  from  Syra- 
cuse (after  his  exile  from  Syracuse),  taught  (a)  boys'  (school)  at  Corinth. 

Ablative  Absolute. 

(SolOn  et  Pisistratus)  Servio  TuUio  rSgnante  viguSrunt,  C,  Br.,  to,  39; 
Solon  and  Pisistratus  flourished  when  Sereins  Tullius  was  tnug  [in  the 
reign  of  Servius  2'ullius).  S5le  orto  Volsci  se  circumvallatos  viderunt, 
Cf.  h.,  IV.  g,  13;  when  the  sun  was  risen  (after  sunrise),  the  Volscians 
saw  that  they  were  surrounded  by  lines  of  intrenchment. 

Notes.— 1.  On  the  Abl.  Abs.  of  the  simple  Participle,  see  410,  n.  4. 

2.  Suetonius  uses  the  Abl.  Abs.  as  wuU  as  the  simple  Participle  with  ante  (prius) 
quam :  (Tiberius)  excfissum  AugustI  nSn  prius  palam  fgcit  quam  Agrippa 
iuvene  intergmptO,  Tib.,  22  ;  sec  also  Inl.,  s8. 


PARTICIPIAL    SENTENCES.  42/ 

666.  Participles  may  represent  Cause  Why. 

Areopagitae  damnav§runt  puerum   coturnicum   oculos    Sruentem,    Cf, 

Quint.,  v.  9.  lo;  the  court  of  Jlars^  Hill  condemned  a  boy  for  plucking 
out  (because  lie  plucked  out)  the  eyes  of  quails.  Athenienses  Alcibia- 
dem  corruptum  a  rege  Persarum  capere  noluisse  Cymen  arguebant,  Cf.  Nep.  , 
VII.  7,2;  the  Athenians  clim^ged  Alcihiades  with  having  been  unwill- 
ing to  take  Cyme  (because  he  had  been)  bribed  by  the  King  of  Persia. 

Ablative  Absolute. 

(Romani  veteres)  regnari  omngs  volebant  libertatis  dulcedine  nondum 
experts,  L.,  i.  17,  3 ;  the  old  Romans  all  wished  to  have  a  king  over  them 
(because  they  had)  not  yet  tried  the  sweetness  of  liberty. 

Note.— An  apparent  cause  is  given  by  ut,  as,  velut,  as,  for  instance,  tamquam, 
(so)  as,  quasi,  as  if,  see  602,  n.  3. 

In  this  usage  Cicero  and  Caesau  arc  very  careful,  employing  only  quasi,  ut. 
LivY  introduces  tamquam,  utpote,  velut,  and  tlie  tendency  grows  until  it  reaches 
its  culmination  in  Tacitus. 

667.  Participles  may  represent  Condition  and  Concession. 

SI  latet  ars  prodest,  affert  dSprSnsa  pudorem,  Ov.,  ^.^.,  11.  313  (593, 
2).  [Eisus]  interdum  ita  repents  erumpit  ut  eum  cupientes  tenere  nequea- 
mus,  Cf.  C,  Or.,  11.  58,  235  (GOO).  (Miltiades)  capitis  absolutus,  pecunia 
multatus  est,  Nep.,  i.  7,  6(6G4,  r.  i). 

Ablative  Absolute. 

Maximas  virtut6s  iacSre  omnSs  necesse  est  voluptate  dominants,  C,  Fin., 

II.  35,  117  (593,  2). 

Note.— On  the  combination  of  quamquam,  quamvis,  and  etsi  with  the  Particfple, 
see  e09,  n.  1  ;  nisi  also  is  not  uncommon  ;  tamsn  is  sometimes  added  in  the  principal 
clause. 

668.  Participles  may  represent  Relative  Clauses  (637). 

OmnSs  aliud  agsntSs,  aliud  simulantes,  perfidi  (sunt),  C,  Off.,  iii.  14,  60 
(637).  [Pisistratus]  Homeri  libros  confuses  antea  sic  disposuisse  dicitur  ut 
nunc  habgmus,  C,  Or.,  iii.  34,  137  (637). 

Remark. — So-called,  qui  dicitur,  vocatur,  quern  vocant ;  above-men- 
tioned, quem  antea,  supra  diximus. 

669.  Future  Participle  (Active). — The  Future  Participle  is  a  verbal 
adjective,  denoting  Capability  and  Tendency,  chiefly  employed  in  the 
older  language  with  sum,  I  am,  as  a  periphrastic  tense.  In  Later  Latin 
it  is  used  freely,  just  as  tlie  Present  and  Perfect  Participles,  to  express 
subordinate  relations. 

Peculiar  is  the  free  use  of  it  in  Sentences  of  Design,  and  especially 


428  ARRANGEMENT   OF    WORDS. 

noticeable  the  compactness  gained  by  the  employment  of  it  in  Condi- 
tional Relations. 

670.  In  later  Latin,  the  Future  Participle  (active)  is  used 
to  represent  subordinate  relations  (438,  N.)  : 

1.  Time  When. 

(Tiberius)  traiecturus  (=  cum  traiecturus  esset)  Ehgnum  commeatum  non 
transmisit,  Suet.,  Tib.,  18;  when  'Tiberius  was  about  to  cross  the  Rhine, 
he  did  not  send  over  the  provisions. 

2.  Cause  Why. 

DSridiculo  fuit  senex  foedissimae  adulationis  tantum  infamia  ustirus, 
Tag.,  Ann.,  ni.  57,  3;  a  butt  of  ridicule  was  the  old  man,  as  infamy 
was  the  only  gain  he  would  make  by  his  foul  fawning.  Antiochus  secti- 
rus  dg  bello  Bomano  erat  tamquam  nou  transituris  in  A.siam  Romanis, 
L.,  XXXVI.  41,  1  (602,  N.  3). 

3.  Purpose  (usually  after  a  verb  of  Motion). 

(Maroboduus)  misit  Iggatos  ad  Tiberium  oraturos  auxilia,  Tag.,  Ann.  11, 
46  (438,  N.).  Consul  Larisam  est  profectus,  ibi  de  summa  belli  consultatu- 
rus,  L.,  XXXVI.  14,  5. 

Note. — The  Pr.  Participle  is  sometimes  used  in  a  similar  sense,  but  the  Purpose  is 
only  an  inference  : 

LSgatl  v6n6runt  nuntiantes  Asiae  quoque  civitates  soUicitari,  L.,  xxxi.  2, 

1;  envoys  came  with  the  announcement  that  the  states  of  Asia  also  were  tampered  ivith. 

4.  Condition  and  Concession. 

(i)  Protasis. 

Dedituris  s5  Hannibal!  fuisse  accersendum  Romanorum  praesidium  "f  L., 
XXIII.  44,  2;  if  they  had  been  ready  to  surrender  to  Hannibal,  tvould 
they  have  had  to  send  for  a  Roman  garrison  9  (=  si  dgdittiri  fuissent, 
6.  R. :  si  dedituri  fufirunt.) 

(2)  Apodosis. 

Quatiunt  arma,  ruptiirl  imperium  ni  ducantur,  Tag.,  H.,  hi.  19,  3; 
they  clash  their  arms,  ready  to  break  orders,  if  they  be  not  led  forward. 
Librum  misi  exigent!  tibi,  missurus  etsi  non  exggissSs,  Plin.,  Ej).,  hi.  13, 
1 ;  /  have  sent  you  the  book,  as  you  exacted  it,  although  I  should  have 
sent  it  even  if  you  had  not  exacted  it. 

ARRANGEMENT    OF    WORDS. 

671.  The  Latin  language  allows  greater  freedom  in  the 
arrangement  of  words  than  the  English.  This  freedom  is, 
of  course,  due  to  its  greater  wealth  of  inflections. 


ARRANGEMENT   OF   WORDS.  429 

Two  elements  enter  into  the  composition  of  a  Latin  Sen- 
tencO;,  governing  to  some  extent  its  arrangement :  Gram- 
mar and  Rhetoric. 

672.  I.  Grammatical  arrangement  has  for  its  object  clear- 
ness. It  shows  the  ideas  in  the  order  of  development  in  the 
mind  of  the  speaker.  By  Grammatical  arrangement  the 
sentence  grows  under  the  view. 

2.  Rhetorical  arrangement  has  for  its  objects  Emphasis 
and  Rhythm.  It  presents  a  sentence  already  developed  in 
such  a  way  that  the  attention  is  directed  to  certain  parts  of 
it  especially. 

(a)  Emphasis  is  produced  ; 

1.  By  reversing  the  ordinary  position. 

2.  By  approximation  of  similars  or  opposites. 

3.  By  separation. 

In  all  sentences  Beginning  and  End  are  emphatic  points.  In  long 
sentences  the  Means  as  wpU  as  the  Extremes  are  the  points  of  emphasis. 

(b)  Rhythm. — Much  depends  on  the  rhythmical  order  of  words,  for 
which  the  treatises  of  the  ancients  are  to  be  consulted.  Especially 
avoided  are  poetic  rhythms.  So,  for  example,  the  Dactyl  and  Spondee, 
or  close  of  an  Hexameter  at  the  end  of  a  period. 

673.  Two  further  principles  seem  to  underlie  the  arrange- 
ment of  Latin  sentences  :  {a)  that  of  the  ascending  construc- 
tion ;  {b)  that  of  the  descending  construction.  In  the 
ascending  construction,  which  is  more  common,  the  prin- 
cipal word  is  placed  last,  and  the  subordinate  ones,  in  the 
order  of  their  importance,  precede.  In  the  descending  con- 
struction the  reverse  is  the  process.  The  descending  con- 
struction is  regular  in  definitions. 

674.  Rule  I. — The  most  simple  arrangement  of  a  sentence 
is  as  follows  : 

1.  The  Subject  and  its  Modifiers. 

2.  The  Predicate  and  its  Modifiers. 

I.  Dionysius  tyrannus,  SyracHsis  expulsus,  2.  Corinthl  puer5s  docSbat, 
C,  Tusc.,ui.  12,27(665). 

Rhetorical  positions  : 

Potentes  sequitur  invidia,  Quint.,  iv.  1,  14  (477,  n.  4).    N5bls  n9n  satis- 


430  ARRANGEMENT   OF    WORDS. 

facit  ipse  Dgmosthenes,  Cf.  C,  Or.,  29,  104  (552,  r.  i).  Discriptus  (erat) 
populus  cgnsu,  ordinibus,  aetatibus,  C,  Leg.,  in.  19,  44  (397).  Intra 
moenia  sunt  hostes,  S.,  C,  52,  35  (477). 

liiLMARK. — The  modifiers  of  the  predicate  stand  in  the  order  of  their 
importance.     The  following  arrangement  is  common  : 

I.  Place,  Time,  Cause,  or  Means.  2.  Indirect  Object.  3.  Direct 
Object.     4.  Adverb.     5.  Verb. 

Note.— The  postponement  of  the  subject  is  rare  and  always  for  definite  reasons  in 
the  classical  period  ;  later  it  becomes  a  mannerism,  especially  in  the  elder  Pliny  ;  to  a 
less  degree  in  Nepos  and  Livy. 

675.  Rule  II. — Interrogative  Sentences  begin  with  the 
interrogative,  subordinate  clauses  with  the  leading  particle 
or  relative. 

Quis  eum  diligat  quern  metuat  ?  C. ,  Lad. ,  1 5,  53  (629).  Postquam  Caesar 
pervSnit  obsides  poposcit,  Caes.,  E.G.,  i.  27,  3  (5()1).  Si  spiritum  ducit 
vivit,  C,  hiv.,  I.  46,  86  (595).  Qui  timgre  dSsierint  odisse  incipient,  Tac, 
Agr.,  32  (567). 

Rhetorical  position  : 

[Naturam]  si  sequSmur  ducem,  numquam  aberrabimus,  C,  Of.,  i.  28, 
100  (595).  D6  futtiris  rgbus  etsi  semper  difficile  est  dicere,  tamen  interdum 
coniectura  possis  accMere,  C,  Fam.,  vi.  4,  1  (604).  [Cato]  mirari  se  aiebat 
quod  nSn  ridgret  haruspex,  haruspicem  cum  vidisset,  C,  Du'.,  11.  24,  51 
(567). 

676.  Rule  III. — An  Adjective  usually  precedes,  but  often 
follows,  the  word  to  which  it  belongs  ;  a  dependent  Genitive 
usually  follows  the  governing  word  ;  so  too  does  a  word  in 
Apposition. 

Saepe  mSgna  indoles  virtutis  priusquam  rei  publicae  prodesse  potuisset  ex- 
stincta  est,  C,  Vh.,  v.  17,  47(577).  Sgnsum  ocul5rum  praecipit  animus, 
Quint., VI.  2,  6  (540). 

Rhetorical  position  ; 

[isocratSs]  queritur  plus  honoris  corporum  quam  animSrum  virttltibus 
dari,  Quint.,  in.  8,  9  (542,  h.).  [AgerJ,  cum  multos  annos  quievit,  uberiorgs 
efferre  frugSs  solet,  C,  Br.,  4,  16  (567).  VerSmur  n6  parum  hie  liber 
mellis  et  absinthii  multum  habe.-a  videatur,  Quint.,  hi.  i,  5  (550). 

Remarks.— I.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  regularly  precede;  the 
possessives  regularly  follow. 

VerSmur  n6  hic  liber  absinthii  multum  habere  videatur,  Quint.,  in. 
I,  5  (550).     Torquatus  fllium  suum  necari  ittssit,  S.,  C,  52,  30  (540). 


ARRANGEMENT   OF   WORDS.  43 1 

Rhetorical  position : 

Recordare  tempus  illud,  cum  pater  Curio  maerens  iacebat  in  lecto,  C, 
Ph.,  II.  i8,  45  (580).  Osculatur  tigrim  suus  custos,  Sex.,  E.M,,  85,  41 
(309,  2). 

2.  Ordinals  regularly  follow,  Cardinals  regularly  precede  the  sub- 
stantive. 

3.  Many  expressions  have  become  fixed  formulae :  so  titles,  proper 
names,  and  the  like;  see  288. 

Facinus  est  vincire  civem  Romanum,  C,  Verr.,  v.  66,  170  (535). 

4.  The  titles  rex,  imperator,  etc.,  frequently  precede  the  proper  name 
with  which  they  are  in  apposition. 

5.  New  modifiers  of  either  element  may  be  inserted,  prefixed,  or 
added : 

Catdnem  vidi  in  bibliotheca  sedentem  multis  circumfusum  Stoiconun 
libris,  C,  Fin.,  111.  2,  7  (5oG).  Saepe  magna  indoles  virtutis  priusquam 
rei  publicae  prodesse  potuisset  exstincta  est,  C,  Ph.,  v.  17,  47  (577).  At 
videte  hominis  intolerabilem  audaciam,  C,  Dom.,  44, 115  (488).  (Aristides) 
interfuit  ptignae  navali  apud  Salamina,  Nep.,  hi.  2, 1. 

Notes.— 1.  The  tendency  in  Latin  was  to  reverse  the  Indo-Germanic  rule  by  which 
an  attributive  adjective  and  a  dependent  Genitive  preceded  the  governing  word.  But  in 
early  Latin  the  adjective  still  holds  its  place  more  often  before  its  substantive,  while  the 
Genitive  has  already  succumbed  for  the  most  part  to  the  tendency.  In  the  classical 
period  the  adjective  is  more  often  used  after  ifs  subsUmtivc.  But  neither  position 
can  be  strictly  called  rhetorical.    The  same  is  true  of  the  possessive  pronoun. 

2.  The  original  force  of  a  following  adjective  or  Genitive  was  restrictive  or  appori- 
tional,  while,  when  it  preceded,  it  formed  a  close  compound  with  its  substantive  ;  thus, 
bonus  homo,  «  oood  man  (one  idea) ;  homo  bonus,  a  man  (one  idea)  %vho  is  good 
(another  idea).  In  classical  Latin  this  distinction  is  no  longer  inevitable,  though  it  is 
often  essential. 

677.  EuLE  IV. — Adverbs  are  commonly  put  next  to  their 
verb  (before  it  when  it  ends  a  sentence),  and  immediately 
before  their  adjective  or  adverb. 

Zenonem cum  Athenis  essem  audiebam  frequenter  . . .  .,C.,  i\^./>.,  i.  21,  50 
(585).  Caedi  discipulos  minimg  velim,  Quint.,  i.  3,  13  (257).  Vix  cuiquam 
persuadebatur  Graeciaomnicessuros  (Romanes),  L.,  xxxiir.  32,  3(546,  r.  i). 
[Risus]  interdum  ita  repente  grumpit  ut  eum  cupientSs  tenere  nequeamus, 
C,  Or.,11.58,  235(fi09). 

Rhetorical  positions  : 

[Iram]  bene  Ennius  initium  dixit  Insaniae,  C,  Tusc,  iv.  23,  52(440). 
Saepe  magna  indoles  virtutis  priusquam  rei  publicae  prodesse  potuisset  ex- 
stincta est,  C,  Ph.,  V.  17,  47  (577). 

Remarks. — i.  Ferg,  paene,  prope,  usually  follow: 

Nem5  fere  saltat  sobrius  nisi  forte  insanit,  C,  Mur.,  6,  13  (591,  R.  4). 

2.  Negatives  always  precede,  see  448. 


432  ARRANGEMENT   OF   WORDS. 

Note.  —The  separation  of  adverbs  from  their  adjectives  is  rare,  except  in  the  case  ol 
tain  and  quam,  which  Plautus,  Terence,  Cicero,  and  later  authors  often  separate, 
e.  ^.,  by  a  preposition  :  tam  ab  tenul  exitio.    Hyperbaton  with  other  adverbs  is  rare, 

678.  Rule  V. — Prepositions  regularly  precede  their  case 
(413). 

A  recta  conscientia  traversum  unguem  non  oportet  discedere,  C,  Ait,, 
XIII.  2o,  4  (328,  i). 

Remarks. — i.  On  versus,  tenus,  and  the  postposition  of  cum  in  com- 
bination with  the  personal  pronouns  and  the  relative,  see  418,  r.  i. 

2.  Monosyllabic  prepositions  are  not  unfrequently  put  between  the 
adjective  and  substantive  :  magna  cum  ctira.     See  413,  r.  2. 

Less  frequently  they  are  placed  between  the  Gen.  and  substantive; 
except  when  the  relative  is  employed. 

3.  Dissyllabic  prepositions  are  sometimes  put  after  their  case  (Ana- 
strophe),  especially  after  a  relative  or  demonstrative:  most  frequently 
contra,  inter,  propter.     So  also  adverbs.     See  413,  r.  i. 

4.  The  preposition  may  be  separated  from  its  case  by  a  Gen.  or  an 
adverb  (413,  r.  3)  :  ad  Appi  Claudi  senectiitem  accedebat  etiam  ut  caecus 
esset,  C,  Cat.M.,  6,  16  (553,  4). 

5.  Monosyllabic  prepositions,  such  as  cum,  ex,  de,  post,  sometimes  ap- 
pend the  enclitics  -que,  -ve,  -ne,  as,  exque  iis,  aiid  froyn  them.  Usually, 
however,  the  enclitics  join  the  dependent  substantive:  in  patriamque 
rediit,  and  returned  to  his  country.    See  413,  n.  3. 

On  the  position  of  per,  see  413,  n.  2. 

679.  Rule  VI. — Particles  vary. 

Enim  commonly  takes  the  second,  seldom  the  third  place;  nam  and 
namque  are  regularly  prepositive.     See  498,  n.  1. 

Ergo  in  the  syllogism  precedes,  elsewhere  follows ;  igitur  is  com- 
monly second  or  third;  itaque  regularly  first.     See  502,  n.  2;  500,  r. 

Tamen  is  first,  but  may  follow  an  emphatic  word.     See  490. 

Etiam  usually  precedes,  quoque  (dways  follows.     See  478,  479. 

ftuidem  and  dSmum  {at  length)  follow  the  word  to  which  they 
belong. 

680.  Rule  VII. — A  word  that  belongs  to  more  than  one 
word  regularly  stands  before  them  all,  or  after  them  all, 
sometimes  after  the  first  (291). 

Ariovistus  respondit  multls  s6s6  n5bilibus  principibusque  populi  R5manl 
gratum  esse  facturum,  Caes.,  B.O.,  i.  44,  12  (657,  9).  [Isocratgs]  queritur 
plus  honoris  corporum  quam  animorum  virtiitibus  dari.  Quint.,  hi.  8,  9  (542, 
R.).  Longum  est  mulSrum  persequi  utilitatSs  et  asinOrum,  C,  N.B.,  u. 
64,  159(254,  R.  I). 


ARRANGEMENT   OF   CLAUSES.  433 

681.  Rule  VIII. — Words  of  kindred  or  opposite  meaning 
are  often  put  side  by  side  for  the  sake  of  complement  or 
contrast. 

Manus  manum  lavat,  one  hand  ivashes  the  other.  [Cato]  mirari  se 
aiebat  quod  non  rideret  haruspex,  haruspicem  cum  vidisset,  C,  Z>ti'.,  ii. 
24,  51  (5G7).     Emit  morte  immortalitatem,  Quixt.,  ix.  3,  71  (40-1). 

682.  Rule  IX. — Contrasted  Pairs. — When  pairs  are  con- 
trasted, the  second  is  put  in  the  same  order  as  the  first,  but 
often  in  inverse  order.  The  employment  of  the  same  order 
is  called  Anaphora  (repetition).  The  inverse  order  is  called 
CJiiasmus,  or  crosswise  position,  and  gives  alternate  stress. 
The  principle  is  of  wide  application,  not  merely  in  the  sim- 
ple sentence  but  also  in  the  period. 

Same  order  (Anaphora). 

Fortuna  (i)  vestra  (2)  facit  ut  Irae  (i)  meae  (2)  temperem,  L.,  xxxvr. 
35,  3  (553,  i).  Malo  te  sapigns  (i)  hostis  (2)  metuat  quam  stulti  (i)  civ6s 
(2)  laudent,  L.,  xxir.  39,  20(546,  r.  2). 

Inverse  order  (Chiasmus). 

Ante  vidgmus  (i)  fulgorem  (2)  quam  sonum  (2)  audiamus  (r),  Sen.,  N.Q., 
II.  12,  G  (577).  Parvi  sunt  foris  (i)  arma  (2)  nisi  est  consilium  (2)  domi 
(I),  C,  O/..1.  22,  70(411,  R.  2). 

Remark. — Chiasmus  is  from  the  Greek  letter  X  (chi): 

1.  Foris  -^  2.  arma 

2.  consilium  ^'-    i.  domi. 

683.  Poetical  PecuUarities.~ln  the  poets  we  find  many  varieties 
of  arrangement  of  substantive  and  adjective,  designed  to  draw  especial 
attention  to  the  idea  or  to  color  the  verse.  These  occur  chiefly  in  the 
Hexameter  and  Pentameter,  but  to  a  lesser  degree  also  in  other  meas- 
ures. Thus  the  substantive  and  adjective  are  put  either  at  tiie  end  of 
each  hemistich,  or  at  the  beginning  of  each  hemistich,  or  one  is  at  the 
end  of  the  first  and  the  other  at  the  beginning  of  the  second. 

Cerberus  et  nullds  hodig  petat  improbus  umbras  \  et  iaceat  tacit  a  lapsa 
catena  sera,  Prop.,  iv.  (v.)  ii,  25.  PuniceO  stabis  suras  evincta  cothurnd, 
v.,  Ec,  7,  32.  Me  similem  vestrls  moribus  esseputasT  Prop.,  ii.  (in.) 
29  (27),  32. 

ARRANGEMENT   OF   CLAUSES. 

684.  A  period  is  a  compound  sentence  with  one  or  more 
subordinate  clauses,  in  which  sentence  the  meaning  is  kept 
suspended  to  the  close. 

28 


434  ARRANGEMENT    OF   CLAUSES. 

685.  Latin  periods  may  be  divided  into  two  classes  : 

1.  Responsive  or  Apodotic,  in  which  a  Protasis  has  an 
Apodosis. 

2.  Intercalary  or  Enthetic,  in  wdiicli  the  various  items  are 
inserted  in  their  proper  place  between  Subject  and  Predicate. 

Ut  saepe  homines  aegri  raorbo  gravl,  cam  aestu  febrique  iactantur, 
si  aquam  gelidam  bibenint,  prlino  releviirl  vidoiitur,  deinde  multo 
gravius  vehementiusque  afflictantur  :  sic  hie  morbus,  qui  est  in  re  piib- 
liea,  relevatus  istius  poena,  vehementius,  reliquis  vivis,  ingravescet, 
C,  Cat.,  I.  13,  31  (Apodotic). 

Catuvolcus,  rex  dimidiae  partis  Ebiironum,  qui  una  cum  Arabiorige 
consilium  inierat,  aetata  iam  confectus,  cum  labOrem  aut  belli  aut  fugae 
ferre  non  posset,  omnibus  precibus  detestiitus  Ambiorigem,  qui  eius 
consilii  auetor  fuisset,  taxo,  cuius  magna  in  Gallifi  Germaniaque  eopia 
est,  se  exanimavit,  Caes.,  B.O.,  vi.  31,  5  (Enthetic). 

686.  Nagelsbach's  careful  study  of  the  subject  has  led  to  the  fol- 
lowing results.  The  simplest  period  is  composed  of  one  subordinate  («) 
and  one  principal  {A)  clause  ;  the  principal  varieties  are  :  (1)  a  :  A, 
where  the  principal  clause  follows  the  subordinate  ;  (2)  ^1  (a)  A,  where 
the  subordinate  clause  is  inserted  within  the  principal  clause  ;  (3)  ^  |  a, 
where  the  principal  clause  precedes  the  subordinate  clause  ;  (4)  a  {A)  a, 
where  the  principal  clause  is  inserted  within  the  subordinate  clause. 
When  two  subordinate  clauses  {a,  h),  independent  of  each  other,  are 
used,  the  forms  are  :  (5)  a  :  A  \  h  ;  (6)  a  :  A  {h)a;  (7)  A  (a)  A  \  h ;  (8) 
A  {a)  A  (b)  A  ;  (9)  a :  {h  :  A).  If  the  dependent  clauses  are  of  diifei-ent 
degree  {a,  a.  A),  that  is,  one  depending  upon  the  other,  some  fifteen 
additional  forms  are  allowable. 

Some  examples  are  : 

a  ( .4)  a  :  illorum  vides  quam  niteat  oratio,  C,  Fin.,  rv.  3,  5.  a :  (h :  A) : 
cur  nolint,  etiamsi  taceant,  satis  dicunt,  C,  Dit\  in  Caec,  6,  31.  a:a  :  A: 
quid  agatur,  cum  aperuero,  facile  erit  statuere,  C,  Ph.,  v.  2,  G.  a  :  A  \  a: 
illud  quid  sit,  scire  cupio,  quod  iacis  obscure,  C,  Att.,  11.  7,  4.  a  \  a  (A)  a: 
nos  uti  exspectaremus  s6,  reliquit  qui  rogaret,  Varro,  i^. /<?.,  i.  2,  32. 
A  \  a{a)  a  :  mando  tibi  plane,  totum  ut  videas  cuius  modi  sit,  C,  Att.,  i. 

12,2. 

687.  Periods  are  also  divided  into  Historical  and  Oratorical.  The 
former  are,  as  a  rule,  simple.  The  most  common  form  is  a  :  A,  i.e., 
where  a  subordinate  clause  is  followed  by  a  leading  clau>e  :  Id  ubi 
dixisset  hastam  in  hostium  fines  6mitt6bat,  L.,  i.  42,  13.  Another  com- 
mon  period,  developed  and  much  liked  by  Livv,  and  later  by  Tacitus, 
was  cx:a:A,  consisting  of  (1)  a  participial  clause:  (2)  a  clause 
introduced  by  a  conjunction;  (3)  the  principal  clause.     Cf.  Tag.,  A7in., 


FIGURES.  435 

II.  69,  3,  dStentus  ubi  .  .  .  accgpit  plebem  proturbat.  Historians, 
having  much  occasion  for  desci'iption,  are  also  prone  to  use  the 
descending  period,  i.e.,  the  form  in  which  the  principal  clause  precedes. 
So  especially  Nepos.  Livy  likes  also  to  use  two  independent  sub- 
ordinate clauses  asyndetically. 

The  Oratorical  periods  are  much  more  diverse  and  complicated, 
owing  to  the  greater  variety  of  effects  at  which  they  aim.  We  find, 
however,  the  ascending  structure,  where  the  emphasis  is  continually 
ascending  until  it  culminates  at  the  end,  more  common. 

See  an  excellent  example  in  C,  Imp.,  5,  11  : 

Yds  eum  regem  inultum  esse  patiemini  qui  Iggatum  populi  Komani 
consularem  vinculis  ac  verberibus  atque  omni  supplicio  EXCliUCIA- 
TUM  XECAVIT  ? 

FIGURES  OF   SYNTAX   AND   RHETORIC. 

688.  Ellipsis  is  the  omission  of  some  integral  part  of  the 
thought,  such  as  the  substantive  of  the  adjective  (204,  N".  1), 
the  copula  of  the  predicate  (209),  the  verb  of  the  adverb. 

Unde  domo?  V.,  A.,  viii.  114  (391,  it.  2). 

UeiMark. — When  the  ellipsis  is  indefinite,  do  not  attempt  to  supply 
it.  The  figure  is  still  much  abused  by  commentators  in  the  explana-. 
tion  of  grammatical  phenomena. 

689.  Brachylogy  (breviloquentia)  is  a  failure  to  repeat  an 
element  which  is  often  to  be  supplied  in  a  more  or  less 
modified  form. 

Tarn felix esses qiiainform6sissiina(=es)  vellem,  Ov.,  Am.,  i.  8,  27(302). 

690.  Zeugma  or  Syllepsis  is  a  junction  of  two  words  under 
the  same  regimen,  or  with  the  same  modifier,  although  the 
common  factor  strictly  applies  but  to  one. 

Mantis  ac  supplices  vocgs  ad  Tiberium  tendgns,  Tag.,  Ann.,  11.  29,2; 
stretchinc)  out  hands  and  (uttering)  suppliant  cries  to  Tiberius. 

691.  Aposiopesis  is  a  rhetorical  breaking  off  before  the 
close  of  the  sentence,  as  in  the  famous  Vergilian  Quos 
ego 

692.  Pleonasm  is  the  use  of  superfluous  words. 

693.  Enallage  is  a  shift  from  one  form  to  another  :  vos  0 
Calliope  precor,  V.,  ^.,  ix.  525. 


436  FIGURES. 

Hypallage  is  an  interchange  in  the  relations  of  words : 
dare  classibus  austros,  V.,  A.,  iii.  6j. 

694.  Oxymoron  is  the  use  of  words  apparently  contradic- 
tory of  each  other  :  cum  tacent  clamant,  C,  Cat.,  i.  8,  21 
(582). 

696.,  Synecdoche  is  the  use  of  the  part  for  the  whole,  or  the 
reverse  :  tectum  for  domum,  puppis  for  navis,  mucro  for  gladius, 

eic. 

696.  Hyperbaton,  Trajection,  is  a  violent  displacement  of 
words.     Lydia  die  per  omnes  t§  decs  or 6,  H.,  0.,  i.  8,  1  (413, 

K.  2). 

697.  Anacoluthon,  or  tvant  of  sequence,  occurs  when  the 
scheme  of  a  sentence  is  changed  in  its  course. 

698.  Hendiadys  (tV  8ia  hvolv)  consists  in  giving  an  analysis 
instead  of  a  complex,  in  putting  two  substantives  connected 
by  a  copulative  conjunction,  instead  of  one  substantive  and 
an  adjective  or  attributive  genitive. 

Vulgus  et  multitude,  the  common  herd.  Via  et  ratio  (C,  Verr.,  i.  16, 
47),  scientific  method.     Vl  et  armis,  hy  force  of  arms. 

So  two  verbs  may  be  translated  by  an  adverb  and  a  verb  :  fundi 
fugarlque,  to  he  utterly  routed. 

699.  Consti'uctio  Praegnans.  So-called  constructio  prae- 
gnans  is  nothing  but  an  extended  application  of  the  accusa- 
tive of  the  Inner  Object  (Object  Effected).  The  result  is 
involved,  not  distinctly  stated. 

Exitium  inrltat,  Cf.  Tag.,  Ann.,  xin.  i,  1 ;  he  provokes  destruction  (ad 
exitium  inritat). 

.700.  Litotes,  or  Understatement,  is  the  use  of  an  expres- 
sion by  which  more  is  meant  than  meets  the  ear.  This  is 
especially  common  with  the  Negative. 

NSn  ludecorQ  pulvere  sordidl,  H.,  0.,  ii.  i,  22  (449,  r.  2). 


PRINCIPAL   RULES   OF   SYNTAX.  437 

PRINCIPAL    RULES    OF    SYNTAX. 

1.  The  Verb  agrees  with  its  subject  in  number  and  person  (211). 

2.  The  Adjective  agrees  with  its  subject  in  gender,  number,  and  ease 
(211). 

3.  The  common  Predicate  of  two  or  more  subjects  is  put  in  the 
Plural  (285);  when  the  genders  are  different,  it  takes  the  strongest 
gender  or  the  nearest  (28G);  when  the  persons  are  different,  it  takes 
the  first  in  preference  to  the  second,  the  second  in  preference  to  the 
third  (287). 

4.  The  common  Attribute  of  two  or  more  substantives  agrees  with 
tlie  nearest,  rarely  with  the  most  important  (290). 

5.  The  Predicate  substantive  agrees  with  its  subject  in  case  (211). 

6.  The  Appositive  agrees  with  its  subject  in  case;  if  possible,  also  in 
number  and  person  (321), 

7.  The  Relative  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in  gender,  number,  and 
person  (614). 

8.  Disproportion  is  indicated  by  the  comparative  with  quam  pr5, 
quam  ut,  quam  qui  (298). 

Q.  In  comparing  two  qualities,  use  either  magis  quam  with  the  posi- 
tive, or  a  double  comparative  (299). 

10.  Superlatives  denoting  order  and  sequence  are  often  used  parti- 
tively  and  then  usually  precede  their  substantive  (291,  r.  2). 

11.  The  Genitive  forms  mei,  tui,  sui,  nostri,  vestrl,  are  used  mainly 
as  objective  genitives  ;  nostrum  and  vestrum  as  partitive  (304,  2). 

12.  The  Reflexive  is  used  regularly  when  reference  is  made  to  the 
grammatical  subject;  frequently  when  reference  is  made  to  the  actual 
subject  (309). 

13.  The  Reflexive  is  used  of  the  principal  subject,  when  reference  is 
made  to  the  thought  or  will  of  that  subject;  hence,  in  Infinitive  clauses, 
or  Indirect  Questions,  in  Sentences  of  Design,  and  in  Oratio  Obliqua 
(521). 

14.  The  Possessive  Pronoun  is  used  instead  of  the  Possessive  or  Sub- 
jective Genitive  in  the  First  and  Second  Persons  (3G2,  364). 

15.  The  Appositive  to  a  possessive  pronoun  is  in  the  Genitive  (321, 

R.  2). 

16.  With  words  of  Inclination  and  Disinclination,  Knowledge  and 
Ignorance,  Order  and  Position,  Time  and  Season,  the  adjective  is  usu- 
ally employed  for  the  adverb  (325,  r.  6). 

17.  The  Indicative,  not  the  Subjunctive,  is  used  in  expressions  of 
Possibility,  Power,  Obligation,  and  Necessity  (254,  r.  i). 


438  PRIJvTCIPAL   RULES   OF   SYNTAX. 

1 8.  The  Potential  of  the  Present  or  Future  is  the  Present  or  Perfect 
Subjunctive  (257);  the  Potential  of  the  Past  is  the  Imperfect  Subjunc- 
tive (258). 

19.  The  Optative  Subjunctive  may  be  used  to  express  a  Wish  (200), 
an  xVsseveration  (262),  a  Command  (263),  or  a  Concession  (264). 

20.  The  First  Imperative  looks  forward  to  immediate,  the  Second 
to  contingent,  fulfilment  (268). 

21.  The  Negative  of  the  Imperative  is  regularly  noli  with  the  Infin- 
itive ;  sometimes  ne  with  the  Perfect  Subjunctive  (270,  11.  2),  or  cave 
with  the  Subjunctive  (271)  is  also  used. 

22.  The  Infinitive,  with  or  without  a  subject,  may  be  treated  as  a 
neuter  subject  (422),  object  (423),  or  predicate  (424). 

23.  The  Infinitive  is  used  as  the  object  of  verbs  of  Will,  Power, 
Duty,  Habit,  Inclination,  Resolve,  Continuance,  End,  etc.  (423). 

24.  The  Accusative  and  Infinitive  is  used  as  the  object  of  verbs  of 
Will  and  Desire  (532). 

25.  The  Accusative  and  Infinitive  is  used  as  the  object  of  verbs  of 
Emotion  (533). 

26.  The  Accusative  and  Infinitive  is  used  in  Exclamation  (534). 

27.  After  verbs  of  Saying,  Showing,  Believing,  and  Perceiving,  the 
Present  Infinitive  expresses  action  contemporary  with  that  of  the  gov- 
erning verb,  the  Perfect,  action  prior  to  it,  the  Future,  action  future  to 
it  (530). 

28.  Tlie  Genitive  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  is  used  cliiefly 
after  substantives  and  adjectives  that  require  a  complement  (428). 

29.  The  Dative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  is  used  mainly  in 
post-classical  Latin  after  words  of  Fitness  and  Function  ;  also  after 
words  of  Capacity  and  Adaptation,  and  to  express  Design  (429). 

30.  The  Accusative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  is  used  after  verbs 
of  Giving  and  Taking,  Sending  and  Leaving,  etc.,  to  indicate  Design 
(430). 

31.  Tiie  Ablative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  is  used  to  denote 
Means  and  Cause,  rarely  Manner  (431). 

32.  The  Supine  in  -um  is  used  chiefly  after  verbs  of  Motion  to 
express  Design  (435). 

33.  The  Supine  in  -ti  is  used  chiefly  with  adjectives  to  indicate 
Respect  (436). 

34.  The  Present  Participle  denotes  continuance,  the  Perfect,  comple- 
tion, at  the  time  of  the  leading  verb  (282). 

35.  The  Future  Participle  is  used  in  post-Ciceronian  Latin  to  express 
Design  (438,  n.). 


PRINCIPAL   RULES    OF   SYNTAX.  439 

36.  The  Participle  is  used  after  verbs  of  Perception  and  Represen- 
tation to  express  the  actual  condition  of  the  object  (536). 

37.  The  Perfect  Participle  passive  is  used  after  verbs  of  Causation 
and  Desire,  to  denote  impatience  of  anything  except  entire  fulfilment 
(537). 

38.  The  subject  of  a  finite  verb  is  in  the  Nominative  (203). 

39.  Verbs  of  Seeming,  Becoming,  with  the  passive  of  verbs  of  Mak- 
ing, Choosing,  Showing,  Thinking,  and  Calling,  take  two  Nomina- 
tives, one  of  the  subject,  one  of  the  predicate  (20G). 

40.  With  passive  verbs  of  Saying,  Showing,  Believing,  and  Per- 
ceiving, the  Accusative  subject  of  the  Infinitive  becomes  the  Nomina- 
tive subject  of  the  leading  verb  (528). 

41.  The  Appositional  Genitive  is  used  after  v5x,  n5men,  verbum, 
rSs,  etc.  (361,  i). 

42.  The  Epexegetical  Genitive  (or  Genitive  of  Explanation)  is  used 
after  genus,  vitium,  culpa,  etc.  (361,  2). 

43.  The  Possessive  Genitive  is  used  of  the  Third  Person  to  denote 
possession  (362). 

44.  The  Subjective  Genitive  is  used  of  the  subject  of  the  action  indi- 
cated by  the  substantive  (363,  i) ;  the  Objective  Genitive  of  the  object 
of  that  action  (363,  2). 

45.  Essential  or  permanent  qualities  are  put  in  the  Genitive, 
always  with  an  adjective  (365);  external  and  transient  qualities  in  the 
Ablative,  always  with  an  adjective  (400).     See  No.  82. 

46.  The  Genitives  of  Quality  and  Possession  may  be  used  as  predi- 
cates (306). 

47.  The  Partitive  Genitive  stands  for  the  whole  to  which  a  part 
belongs  (367). 

48.  Adjectives  of  Fulness  and  Want,  of  Knowledge  and  Ignorance, 
of  Desire  and  Disgust,  of  Participation  and  Power,  may  take  the  Gen- 
itive (374).  Also  some  present  participles  used  as  adjectives,  and  in 
later  Latin  some  verbals  in  -ax  (375). 

49.  Verbs  of  Reminding,  Remembering,  and  Forgetting  take  usu- 
ally the  Genitive  (376);  but  sometimes  the  Accusative,  especially  of 
things  (376,  r.). 

50.  Impersonal  verbs  of  Emotion  take  the  Accusative  of  the  Person 
Who  Feels,  and  the  Genitive  of  the  Exciting  Cause  (371). 

51.  Verbs  of  Accusing,  Convicting,  Condemning,  and  Acquitting, 
take  the  Genitive  of  the  Charge  (o78). 

52.  Verbs  of  Rating  and  Buying  take  the  Genitive  of  the  General, 
the  Ablative  of  the  Particular  Value  (379,  40-1).     See  No.  87. 


440  PRINCIPAL   RULES   OF   SYNTAX. 

53.  Interest  and  Rgfert  take  tlie  Genitive  of  the  Person,  rarely  of  the 
Thing  concerned  (381). 

54.  The  Indirect  Object  is  put  in  the  Dative  (345). 

55.  Verbs  of  Advantage  and  Disadvantage,  Bidding  and  Forbid- 
ding, Pleasure  and  Displeasure,  Yielding  and  Resisting,  take  the 
Dative  (346). 

56.  Many  intransitive  verbs  compounded  with  ad,  ante,  con,  in,  inter, 
ob,  post,  prae,  sub,  and  suner  may  take  a  Dative;  transitive  verbs  also 
an  Accusative  besides  (347).  See  No.  66. 

57.  Verbs  of  Giving  and  Putting  take  a  Dative  and  Accusative,  or 
an  Accusative  and  Ablative  (348). 

58.  The  Dative  is  used  with  esse  to  denote  possession  (349). 

59.  The  Dative  is  used  of  the  Person  Interested  in  the  action  (350). 

60.  The  Ethical  Dative  is  used  of  the  personal  pronouns  only  (351). 

61.  The  Dative  of  Reference  is  used  of  the  Person  to  whom  a  state- 
ment is  referred  (352). 

62.  The  Dative  of  Agent  is  used  with  the  Perfect  passive,  the 
Gerund,  and  the  Gerundive  (354). 

63.  The  Dative  may  denote  the  Object  For  Which  in  combination 
with  the  Person  To  Whom  (355). 

64.  Adjectives  of  Friendliness,  Fulness,  Likeness,  Nearness,  with 
their  opposites,  take  the  Dative  (359). 

65.  Active  transitive  verbs  take  the  Accusative  case  (330). 

66.  Many  intransitive  verbs,  mostly  those  of  Motion,  compounded 
with  ad,  ante,  circum,  con,  in,  inter,  ob,  per,  praeter,  sub,  subter,  super, 
and  trans,  take  the  Accusative ;  transitive  verbs  thus  compounded  may 
have  two  Accusatives  (331).  See  No.  56. 

67.  Intransitive  verbs  may  take  an  Accusative  of  similar  form  or 
meaning  (333,  2), . 

68.  The  Accusative  may  express  Extent  in  Degree,  Space,  or  Time 
(334-6). 

69.  Names  of  Towns  and  Small  Islands  are  put  in  the  Accusative  of 
Place  Whither;  so  also  domus  and  rus  (337).    See  No.  74  and  92. 

70.  Verbs  meaning  to  Inquire,  Require,  Teach,  and  Conceal,  take 
two  Accusatives,  one  of  the  Person,  one  of  the  Thing  (339). 

71.  Verbs  of  Naming,  Making,  Taking,  Choosing,  and  Showing, 
take  two  Accusatives  of  the  same  Person  or  Thing  (340). 

72.  The  subject  of  the  Infinitive  is  regularly  in  the  Accusative  (420), 

73.  The  Accusative  may  be  used  in  Exclamations  (343). 

74.  Place  Where  is  denoted  by  the  Ablative,  usually  with  in  (385); 


PRINCIPAL   RULES    OF    SYNTAX.  44I 

Place  Whence  by  the  Ablative,  usually  with  ex,  dS,  or  ab  (390). 
Names  of  Towns  and  Small  Islands  omit  the  prepositions  (386,  891). 
See  No.  69  and  92. 

75.  Attendance  is  denoted  by  the  Ablative  with  cum  (393). 

76.  Time  When  or  Within  Which  is  denoted  by  the  Ablative  (393). 

77.  Origin  or  Descent  is  denoted  by  the  Ablative  with  or  without 
ex  and  dg  (395). 

78.  Material  is  denoted  by  the  Ablative  with  ex  (396). 

79.  The  Point  of  View  or  Respect  is  denoted  by  the  Ablative  (397). 

80.  Comparatives  without  quam  are  followed  by  the  Ablative  (398). 

81.  Manner  is  denoted  by  the  Ablative  regularly  with  an  adjective 
or  cum  (399). 

82.  External  and  transient  qualities  are  denoted  by  the  Ablative, 
always  with  an  adjective  (400);  essential  and  permanent  qualities  by 
the  Genitive,  always  with  an  adjective  (365).     See  No.  45. 

83.  Cause,  Means,  and  Instrument,  are  denoted  by  the  Ablative 
(401,  408). 

84.  The  Agent  is  denoted  by  the  Ablative  with  a  (ab)  (401). 

85.  The  Standard  of  Measurement  is  denoted  by  the  Ablative  (402). 

86.  Measure  of  Difference  is  put  in  the  Ablative  (403). 

87.  Definite  Price  is  put  in  the  Ablative  (404);  General  Price  in  the 
Genitive  (379).     See  No.  52. 

88.  Verbs  of  Depriving  and  Filling,  of  Plenty  and  Want,  take  the 
Ablative  (405). 

89.  The  Ablative  is  used  with  opus  and  tisus  (406). 

90.  Utor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  and  vescor  take  the  Ablative  (407). 

91.  The  Ablative,  combined  with  a  participle,  serves  to  modify  the 
verbal  predicate  of  a  sentence :  Ablative  Absolute  (409). 

92.  Names  of  Towns  and  Small  Islands  of  the  First  and  Second 
Declensions  are  put  in  the  Locative  of  the  Place  Where  (411).  See 
No.  09  and  74. 

93.  Adverbs  qualify  verbs,  adjectives,  and  other  adverbs  (439). 

94.  A  question  for  information  merely  is  introduced  by  -ne  (454). 

95.  A  question  that  expects  the  answer  yes  is  introduced  by  ii5nne 
(455). 

96.  A  question  that  expects  the  answer  no  is  introduced  by  num 
(456). 

97.  The  Deliberative  Question  is  in  the  Subjunctive  (265). 

98.  The  Indirect  Question  is  in  the  Subjunctive  (467). 


442  PRINCIPAL   RULES   OF   SYNTAX. 

99.  Sequence  of  Tenses.  Principal  tenses  are  ordinarily  followed  by 
Principal  tenses,  Historical  by  Historical  (509). 

100.  After  a  Future  or  Future  Perfect,  the  Future  relation  is 
expressed  by  the  Present,  the  Future  Perfect  by  the  Perfect  Subjunc- 
tive (514).  After  other  tenses  the  Future  relation  is  expressed  by  the 
Active  Periphrastic  Present  and  Imperfect  Subjunctive  (515). 

loi.  In  Oratio  Obliqua  all  subordinate  tenses  follow  the  general  law 
of  sequence  (516). 

102.  Quod,  the  fact  that,  in  that,  is  used  with  the  Indicative  to 
introduce  explanatory  clauses  after  Verbs  of  Adding  and  Dropping, 
Doing  and  Happening,  and  demonstratives  (525). 

103.  Quod,  quia,  quoniam,  and  quando  take  the  Indicative  in  Direct 
Discourse,  the  Subjunctive  in  Indirect  Discourse,  to  express  Cause 
(540,  541). 

104.  Quod  is  used  after  verbs  of  Emotion  with  the  Indicative  in  Di- 
rect, the  Subjunctive  in  Indirect  Discourse,  to  give  the  Ground  (542). 

105.  Final  Sentences  have  the  Present  and  Imperfect  Subjunctive 
with  ut  or  n6  (545). 

106.  Complementary  Final  Clauses  are  used  after  verbs  of  Will  and 
Desire  (546). 

107.  Positive  verbs  of  Preventing,  Refusing,  Forbidding,  and  Be- 
waring, may  take  n5  with  the  Subjunctive  (548). 

108.  Verbs  of  Preventing  and  Refusing  may  take  quominus  with 
the  Subjunctive  (549).     See  No.  112. 

109.  Verbs  of  Fear  are  followed  by  n6  or  ut  (ng  non)  and  all  tenses 
of  the  Subjunctive  (550). 

no.  Consecutive  Sentences  have  the  Subjunctive  with  ut  and  utnOn 
(552). 

111.  Verbs  of  Effecting  have  the  Subjunctive  with  ut  and  nS,  or  ut 
n5n  (553). 

112.  Negatived  or  Questioned  verbs  of  Preventing,  Hindering,  etc., 
of  Doubt  and  Uncertainty,  may  be  followed  by  the  Subjunctive  with 
quin  (555).     See  No.  108. 

113.  A  Consecutive  Clause  with  ut  is  often  used  to  give  the  contents 
or  character  of  a  preceding  substantive,  adjective,  or  pronoun  (557). 

114.  Ut,  ut  primum,  cum,  cum  primum,  ubi,  ubi  primum,  simulac, 
simul  atque,  and  postquam  take  the  Perfect  Indicative,  in  the  sense  of 
as  soon  as;  but  the  Imperfect  of  Overlapping  Action,  and  the  Pluper- 
fect when  a  definite  interval  is  given  (561,  562,  563). 

115.  When  two  actions  are  repeated  contemporaneously,  both  are 
put  in  the  Indicative  in  tenses  of  continuance  (566). 


PRINCIPAL   RULES   OF   SYNTAX.  443 

116.  When  one  action  is  repeated  before  another,  the  antecedent 
action  is  put  in  the  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  or  Future  Perfect,  tlie  subse- 
quent in  the  Present,  Imperfect,  or  Future,  according  to  the  relation 
(567). 

117.  Dum,  donee,  quoad,  quamdiu,  so  long  as,  while,  take  the  Indica- 
tive of  all  tenses  (569). 

118.  Humytvhile,  while  yet,  takes  the  Present  Indicative  after  all 
tenses  (570). 

119.  Dum,  donee,  quoad,  imtil,  take  the  Present,  Historical  Present, 
Historical  Perfect,  and  Future  Perfect  Indicative  (571). 

120.  Dum,  donee,  quoad,  until,  take  the  Subjunctive  when  Suspense 
or  Design  is  involved  (572). 

121.  Dum,  modo,  and  dummod5,  if  only,  provided  only,  take  the 
Present  and  Imperfect  Subjunctive  in  Conditional  Wishes  (573). 

122.  Antequam  and  priusquam  take  the  Indicative  Present,  Perfect, 
and  Future  Perfect  when  the  limit  is  stated  as  a  fact;  the  Subjunctive 
when  the  action  is  expected,  contingent,  designed,  or  subordinate 
(574,  577). 

123.  Temporal  cum,  when,  is  used  with  all  tenses  of  the  Indicative 
to  designate  merely  temporal  relations  (580). 

124.  Historical  cum,  ivhen,  is  used  with  the  Imperfect  and  Pluper- 
fect Subjunctive  to  give  the  temporal  circumstances  under  which  an 
action  took  place  (585). 

125.  Causal  and  Concessive  cum,  when,  whereas,  although,  are  used 
with  all  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  (586,  587). 

126.  The  Logical  Condition  has  usually  some  form  of  the  Indica- 
tive in  both  Protasis  and  Apodosis  (595). 

127.  The  Ideal  Condition  has  usually  the  Present  or  Perfect 
Subjunctive,  less  often  the  Irapei-fect  or  Pluperfect,  in  both  clauses 
(596). 

128.  The  Unreal  Condition  has  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  of  oppo- 
sition to  present,  the  Pluperfect  of  opposition  to  past  fact  (597). 

129.  Ut  si,  ac  si,  quasi,  quam  si,  tamquam,  tamquam  si,  velut,  and 
velut  si,  introduce  a  comparison  in  the  Subjunctive.  The  tense  follows 
the  rule  of  sequence  (602). 

130.  Concessive  clauses  may  be  introduced  by  etsi,  etiamsi,  tametsi, 
with  the  Indicative  or  Sul)junctive  (604);  by  quamquam,  with  the 
Indicative  (605);  by  quamvis,  with  the  Subjunctive  (600). 

131.  Indefinite  and  generic  relatives  usually  have  the  Indicative 
(625);  so  explanatory  qui,  when  equivalent  to  quod  (626). 

132.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  Relative  Clauses  that  form  a  part 


444  PRINCIPAL   RULES   OF   SYNTAX. 

of  the  utterance  of  another ;  so  in  Oratio  Obliqua  and  Final  Clauses 
(628). 

133.  Relative  sentences  that  depend  on  Infinitives  or  Subjunctives, 
and  form  an  integral  part  of  the  thought,  are  put  in  the  Subjunctive 
by  Attraction  (629). 

134.  Relative  sentences  are  put  in  the  Subjunctive  of  Design  when 
qui  =  ut  (final)  is  (630). 

135.  Relative  sentences  are  put  in  the  Subjunctive  of  Tendency 
when  qui  —  ut  (consecutive)  is  ;  so  after  dignus,  indignus,  idoneus,  aptus, 
etc.;  after  an  indefinite  antecedent;  after  comparatives  with  quamiOBl). 

136.  Comparative  sentences  after  words  of  Likeness  and  Unlike- 
ness  may  be  introduced  by  atque  or  ac  (643). 

137.  Comparative  sentences  after  comparatives  are  introduced  by 
quam  (644). 

138.  In  Oratio  Obliqua,  Principal  Clauses  are  put  in  the  Infinitive, 
except  Interrogatives  and  Imperatives,  which  are  put  in  the  Subjunc- 
tive ;  Subordinate  clauses  are  put  in  the  Subjunctive  (650,  651,  652). 


PROSODY. 


701.  Prosody  treats  of  Quantity  and  Versification. 

Remarks. — i.  Prosody  originally  meant  Accent.  Latin  Accent  is 
regulated  by  Quantity,  and  as  classical  Latin  versification  is  also  quan- 
titative, Prosody  is  loosely  used  of  both  quantity  and  versification. 

2.  In  the  earliest  Latin  the  Accent  was  not  regulated  by  Quantity, 
but  was  on  the  initial  syllable  (15,  n.).     This  often  resulted  in 

(a)  The  disappearance  of  the  vowel  (8, 2)  in  the  antepenult  or  pro-antepenult ;  this 
occurs  especially  in  Greek  words,  but  also  in  some  common  Latin  words  :  Poludeuces, 
FoldeucSs,  FoUtices,  Pollux ;  balineion,  balineam,  balneiun,  bath ;  maximus, 
greatest,  for  magisimos ;  optumus,  best,  for  opitumus,  etc. 

(b)  The  shortening  of  a  lo?ig  j)enult  (8).  This  was  still  going  on  in  the  time  of 
PLAUTtrs,  and  occurs  here  and  there  in  the  poets  :  anchora,  anchor,  from  ankllra ;  so 
p6ier5, 1  swear  falsely,  for  peri1ir5 ;  chorea,  dance,  from  choreia,  etc. 

(c)  The  weakening  (8)  of  the  antepenult,  sometimes  also  of  the  penult,  both  in  Greek 
words  and  Latin  :  Massilia  from  Massalia ;  beni-  and  mail-  for  bene  and  male  in 
composition  ;  -hibeo  for  habeO  in  composition  ;  and  a  few  others,  as  -cld5  for  caed9 
in  composition,  etc. 

QUANTITY. 

702.  Rule  I. — A  syllable  is  said  to  be  long  hy  nature  when 
it  contains  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong  :  6,  vae,  leges,  saevae. 

Remarks. — i.  {a)  A  vowel  before  -gin,-gn,  -nf^  -ns  is  long  hy  nature; 
(b)  a  vowel  before  -nt,  -nd  is  short  by  nature. 

Exceptions  : 

(a)  Egnatius,  Theognis,  and  some  Greek  words  in  -egma,  as  phlegma, 
phlegm ;  but  pSgma. 

(b)  Contio  (for  coventiS),  assembly ;  igntaculum,  iSntatiS,  breakfast ; 
ntintius,  messenger;  quintus,  fifth;  and  Greek  substantives  in  -us,  -untis, 
-6n,  -ontis ;  Charondas,  EpaminSndas  ;  also  nundinae  (noven-d-),  market 
day;  nonium,  not  yet ;  pr6nd5, /sei^e  ;  (ivduiecim,  fifteen  ;  vBndSflsell; 
Gndecim,  eleven;  vindemia,  vintage. 

2.  Inchoative  verbs  have  vowel  before  -sc  long  by  nature  ;  dIscO,  / 
learn. 

3.  Noteworthy  are  the  following  :  quartus,  fourth  ;  qvdnqvLB,  five,  and 
its  derivatives  ;  viginti,  twenty ;  mllle,  thousand^  and  its  derivatives. 


44^  QUANTITY. 

4.  In  verbs  the  quantity  of  the  Present  Stem  is  generally  retained 
throughout  before  two  consonants  (except  -ns). 

Except  dico,  1  say ;  Supine,  dictum ;  duc5,  I  lead  ;  Supine,  ductum ; 
and  their  derivatives,  like  dictio,  etc. 

5.  Noteworthy  are  the  following  :  ago,  /  drive,  ggi,  actum ;  emo,  1 
huy,  gmi,  gmptum ;  frango,  /  brealc,  fregi,  fractum ;  fungor,  /  jjerform, 
functus  ;  iubeo,  /  order,  iussi,  iussum  ;  iungo,  1  join,  iunxi,  iunctum ;  lego, 
/  read,  l6gi,  I6ctum ;  pango,  /  fix,  pactum ;  rego,  /  govern,  rgxi,  rectum  ; 
sancio,  I  sanction,  sanxi,  sanctum,  sancitum ;  struo,  /  pile  up,  struxi, 
structum  ;  tango,  /  touch,  tactum;  tego,  /  cover,  tSxi,  tectum  ;  traho,  / 
draw,  traxi,  tractum;  ungo,  /  anoint,  tinxi,  ui).ctum;  vincOy  I  conquer, 
vici,  victum  ;  rumpo,  /  break,  rupi,  ruptum. 

6.  In  verbs,  a  vowel  resulting  from  syncope  is  long  before  ss,  st(131). 
Also,  perhaps,  i  before  s  and  t  in  syncopated  Pf.  forms  of  ire  and  peters. 

Note.— On  the  method  of  distinguishing  long  vowels  on  inscriptions,  see  12,  i,  n. 

703.  EuLE  II  — A  syllable  is  said  to  be  long  %  position 
(12,  2)  when  a  short  vowel  is  followed  by  two  or  more  con- 
sonants, or  a  double  consonant :  ars,  collum,  castra. 

Remarks. — i.  The  consonants  may  be  divided  between  two  words  : 
per  mare,  in  terrls ;  but  when  all  the  consonants  are  in  the  second  word, 
the  preceding  short  syllable  commonly  remains  short,  except  in  the 
Thesis  (739)  of  a  verse,  when  it  is  lengthened  :  praemia.  scribae. 

2.  Eveiy  vowel  sound  followed  by  i  consonant  (j)  is  long  (except  in 
the  compounds  of  iugmn,  yoke).  This  is  due  sometimes  to  natural 
length  of  the  vowel,  sometnnes  to  compensation  :  Gains  from  Gavius, 
p6ier5  for  periurO ;  but  biiugus,  two-horse. 

Note.— In  compounds  of  iacere,  to  throw,  the  i  is  often  omitted,  and  the  preceding 
vowel  lengthened  by  compensation  ;  so  c5nicere  ;  a  short  vowel  with  the  i  omitted  is 
not  found  until  Ovid's  time. 

3.  Final  s,  preceded  by  a  shore  vowel,  is  dropped  before  a  consonant 
in  the  older  poetry;  often  too  in  Lucretius  {Apocope). 

In  somnfs  vfdit  priu(s)  quamsam(=eam)  discere coepit. — Enn.,  A.,  225. 

Note.— In  comic  poetry,  a  short  fmal  syllable  in  s  blends  with  est,  and  sometimes 
with  es :  opnst  (=  opus  est) ;  simili's  (=  similis  es). 

704.  Rule  III. — A  syllable  ending  in  a  short  vowel  before 
a  mute,  followed  by  1  or  r,  is  common  (13)  :  tene-brae,  darh- 
ness.  In  early  Latin  it  is  regularly  short,  so,  too,  when  the 
mute  and  liquid  begin  a  word. 

Remarks. — i.  The  syllable  must  end  in  a  short  vowel  :  navi-fragns, 
ship-wreeMng  ;  melU-fluus,  floiving  with  honey  ;  but  in  ab-rumpo  the  a 
is  long  by  position. 


QUANTITY.  44/ 

2.  In  Greek  words  m  and  n  are  included  under  this  rule  :  Tg-cmgssa, 
Cy-cnus. 

Exception. — Derivative  substantives  in  abrum,  acrum,  atrum  fi-oni 
verbs  ;  as  flabra,  blasts.     Zmaragdos,  Mart., v.  i  i,l,  cannot  be  paralleled. 

705.  Rule  IV. — Every  diphthong,  and.  every  vowel  de- 
rived from  a  diphthong,  or  contracted  from  other  vowels,  is 
long  (14)  :  saevos,  cruel  j  conclwdo,  I  shut  ttp  (from  claudo)  ; 
in^qllOs,  unfair  (from  aequos) ;  cogo,  /  drive  together  (from 
coigo  =  con  +  ago). 

Exception. — Prae  in  composition  is  shortened  before  a  vowel  until 
the  time  of  Statius  ;  prae-ustus,  burnt  at  the 2^oint  (V.,  A.,  vii.  524). 

706.  Rule  V. — One  simple  vowel  before  another  vowel- 
sound,  or  h,  makes  a  short  syllable  :  deus,  God ;  puer,  boy  ; 
nihil,  nothing. 

Exceptions  : 

1.  a  in  the  old  Gen.  of  the  First  Declension  :  aural. 

2.  6  in  -ei  of  the  Fifth  Declen^jion,  when  a  vowel  precedes  :  di6I,  but 
fid6i  (63,  N.  I). 

3.  a  and  e  before  i  in  proper  names  in  -ius  :  Gai,  Pomp6i. 

4.  i  in  the  Gen.  form  -ius  (76,  r.  2).  Alterius  is  often  shortened, 
perhaps  even  in  prose  :  unius,  ullius,  nullius,  totius,  are  found  in  poetry. 
In  alius  the  i  is  never  shortened  (alius  for  aliius). 

5.  i  in  fiS  is  long,  except  before  er:  fio,  but  fieret  and  fieri. 

6.  eheu,  Diana,  ohS,  dius  (=  divus). 

7.  Many  Greek  words  :  a§r,  Menelaus,  museum,  M6d6a. 

8.  In  early  Latin  many  words  retain  the  original  length  of  the 
vowel  :  ais,  r6i;  all  forms  of  fio;  cltio ;  fui  and  its  forms  ;  pltiit,  luit, 
adnui,  etc.  Most  of  the  shortened  forms  also  occur,  and  are  more 
common. 

Quantity  of  Final  Syllables. 

A.    POLYSYLLABLES. 

707.  Rule  VI. — In  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  final 
a,  e,  and  y  are  short  ;  i,  0,  and  u  are  lo?ig. 

T.  a  is  short :  terra,  earth  ;  dona,  gifts  ;  capita,  heads. 

Exceptions  : 

1.  Abl.  of  the  First  Declension  :  terrS. 

2.  Voc.  of  words  in  as  (Aen6a),  and  Greek  Nom.  in  a  (Electra). 

3.  Impv.  of  First  Conjugation  :  ama. 


448  QUANTITY. 

4.  Most  uninflected  words  :  triginta,  iuxta,  but  itS.,  quia,  6i&.  With 
pat&,  for  instance,  compare  cav6  below. 

2.  e  is  short. 

Exceptions  : 

1.  Abl.  of  the  Fifth  Declension  :  diS. 

2.  Impv.  of  Second  Conjugation  :  mong  (but  see  Note). 

3.  Most  adverbs  of  Second  Declension  :  rSctg ;  but  ben6,  mal§,  infemS 
(LucR.),  maxume  (Plaut.),  probe  (Plaut.),  supem6  (Lucr.,  Hor.), 
temerg  (Plaut.,  Ter.). 

4.  Greek  words  in  6  (7?)  :  Temp6,  mel6. 

5.  Que  is  thought  to  be  not  unfrequently  long  in  the  Thesis  of  early 
Saturnians  ;  so  in  the  hexameter  of  the  classical  period  if  a  second 
que  follows  in  the  Arsis. 

Note.— Observe  that  in  Plautus  and  Terence  any  dissyllabic  Iambic  impv.  may 
have  the  last  6  shortened  ;  principally  cavS,  h.ab6,  iubl,  maiiS,  monS,  movS,  tacS, 
tenS,  valS,  vid6.  See  716.  Later  poets  also  shorten  sometimes  when  the  penult  is 
long ;  salve  (Mart.). 

3.  y  is  always  short,  except  in  contracted  forms :  imsj 
(Dative  misy  =  misyi). 

4.  i  is  long  :  domini,  viginti,  audi. 

Exceptions  : 

1.  Greek  Dat.  si:  TrSasi. 

2.  Greek  Nom.,  as  sinapi;  Voc,  as  Pari;  Dat.  Sing,  (rarely),  as 
HinSidi. 

3.  quasi,  nisi,  cui  (when  a  dissyllable). 

4.  i  is  common  in  mihl,  tibl,  sib!,  ibl,  ub!. 

Observe  the  compounds  :  ibidem,  ibique,  ubique,  ubinam,  ubivis,  ubi- 
cunque,  nScubi,  utinam,  utique,  sicuti ;  (but  uti). 

5.  0  is  long  :  bono,  tuto. 

Exceptions  : 

1.  Common  in  homO;  in  the  Augustan  times  in  le8  and  many  proper 
names  ;  as  ScIpiS ;  in  the  post- Augustan  times  in  many  common  sub-  , 
stantives  :  virgd.    N6m6  is  found  first  in  Ovid,  mentis  in  Horace. 

2.  Frequently  short  in  Iambic  words  in  early  Latin,  especially  in 
verbs,  many  of  which  remained  common  in  the  Augustan  times,  as 
V0I8,  vet8,  sci8,  pet5,  puts,  etc.;  so  less  often  nesci8,  d6sin5,  obsecrQ,  dixerS, 
CderS.     From  Seneca  on,  the  Gerund  may  be  shortened  :  amands. 

3.  0  is  usually  short  in  modd,  citd,  octd,  egd,  Hied,  Immo,  dud,  ambd 
(post-classical) ;  and  in  many  other  words  in  later  poetry. 

6.  u  is  always  long  :  coma,  fractu,  audltu. 


QUANTITY.  449 

708.  Rule  VII. — All  final  syllables  that  end  in  a  simple 
consonant  other  than  s  are  short. 

Exceptions  : 

1 .  all6c,  lien,  and  many  Greek  substantives. 

2.  The  adverbs  and   oblique   cases   of   illic,   illuc,  istic,  isttic,  can 
hardly  be  considered  exceptions,  as  -c  is  for  -ce,  and  is  merely  enclitic. 

3.  Compounds  of  par :  dispar,  impar. 

4.  iit,  petiit,  and  their  compounds. 

5.  Final  -at,  -et,  -it,  were  originally  long,  and  as  such  often  occur 
in  early  Latin,  and  occasionally  before  a  pause  in  the  classical  poets. 

709.  Rule  VIII. — Of  final  syllables  in  s:  as,  es,  os,  are 
long ;  is,  us,  ys,  short. 

I.  as  is  long  :  Aeneas,  servas,  amas. 

Exceptions  : 

1.  Greek  substantives  in  &s,  &dis :  Areas,  Arc&dis. 

2.  Greek  Ace.  PI.,  Third  Declension  :  hSro&s,  Arcad&s. 

3.  an&s,  an&tis. 

2.  es  is  long  :  rfiges,  dies,  mones. 

Exceptions  : 

1.  Nom.  and  Voc.  Sing.,  Third  Declension,  when  the  Gen.  has  fitis, 
Itis,  idis  :  seg6s,  miles,  obs6s ;  but  abigs,  ari6s,  paries. 

2.  Compounds  of  6s,  he  (long  syllable  in  Plautus)  :  ad6s,  pot6s. 

3.  penes  (Preposition). 

4.  Greek  words  in  6s  (f5) :  Nom.  PI.,  as  Arcades ;  Voc,  as  OSmoS' 
thenes ;  Neuter,  as  cacoethes. 

5.  Iambic  verbal  forms  in  Second  Person  Sing,  in  early  Latin. 

3.  OS  is  long :  deos,  nepos. 

Exceptions  : 

1.  Comp6s,  impOs,  exds ;  and  as  the  Nom.  ending  in  the  Second  Declen- 
sion. 

2.  Greek  words  in  68  (o?)  :  mel6s. 

4.  is  is  short :  canis,  legis. 

Exceptions  : 

1.  Dat.  and  Abl.  Plural  :  terris,  bonis. 

2.  Ace.  PI.  of  the  Third  Declension  :  omnis  =  onmSs. 

3.  In  the  Nom.  of  sundry  Proper  Names,  increasing  long  in  the 
Genitive  :  Quiris,  Quiritis. 

4.  Second  Person  Sing.   Pr.  Indie,   active,  Fourth  Conjugation  : 
audis. 


450  QUANTITY. 

5.  In  the  verbal  forms  from  vis,  sis,  fis,  and  velis :  n5-lis,  ma-lis, 
ad-sis,  cale-fis. 

6.  In  the  Second  Person  Sing.  Fut.  Pf.  Indie,  and  Pf.  Subjv.,  is 
is  common  :  videris. 

7.  Pulvis,  cinis,  sanguis,  occasionally  in  early  Latin. 

5.  US  is  short  :  servus,  currus. 

Exceptions  : 

1.  Gen.  Sing.,  Nom.  and  Ace.  PL,  Fourth  Declension  :  currus. 

2.  Nom.  Third  Declension,  when  the  Gen.  has  a  long  u  :  virtus, 
virtutis ;  incus,  incudis  ;  tellus,  telluris. 

3.  In  Greek  words  with  u  (ouS)  :  tripus,  Sapphus ;  but  Oedipus  and 
polypus. 

4.  Occasionally  the  Dat.  and  Abl.  PI.  of  the  Third  Declension,  the 
First  Person  PI.  active  of  verbs,  seem  to  be  long  in  early  Latin. 

6.  ys  is  short :   chlamys. 

B.    MONOSYLLABLES. 

710.  EuLE  IX. — All  monosyllables  that  end.  in  a  vowel 
are  long  :  a,  da,  me,  de,  hi,  si,  0,  do,  tii. 

Except  the  enclitics  :  -qu6,  -v6,  -116,  -c6,  -t6,  -ps6,  pt6. 

711.  Rule  X. — Declined  or  conjugated  monosyllables 
that  end  in  a  consonant  follow  the  rules  given :  das,  fles, 
scis,  dat,  flet,  is,  id,  quis,  his,  quis,  quos. 

hie,  this  one,  is  often  shortened;  die  and  due  have  the  quantity  of 
their  verbs;  es,  he,  is  short  in  classical  Latin,  long  in  early  Latin. 

712.  Rule  XI. — Monosyllabic  Nominatives  of  substan- 
tives and  adjectives  are  long  when  they  end  in  a  consonant, 
even  if  the  stem-syllable  be  short  :  6s,  mos,  ver,  sol,  far,  plus ; 
lar  (laris),  pes  (pedis),  bos  (bovis),  par  (paris). 

Exceptions  : 

vir  and  lac,  os  (ossis),  mel; 

Also  cor,  vas  (vadis),  fel.     Also  quot,  tot. 

713.  Rule  XII. — Monosyllabic  particles  that  end  in  a 
consonant  are  short :  an,  cis,  in,  nee,  p6r,  t^r. 

Excepting  Sn  and  n5n  and  quin ; 

And  also  eras  and  cur  and  sin ; 

Also  the  Adverbs  in  c :  hie,  hue,  hae,  sic ;  and  So  (atque). 


QUANTITY. 


451 


Quantity  of  Stem-Syllables. 

714.  EuLE  XIII. — The  quantity  of  stem-syllables,  when 
not  determined  by  the  general  rules,  is  fixed  by  the  usage  of 
the  poets  (long  or  short  by  authority). 

Remarks. — i.  The  changes  of  quantity  in,the  formation  of  tense- 
stems  have  been  set  forth  in  the  conjugation  of  tlie  verb  (153,  2). 

2.  The  occasional  differences  in  the  quantity  of  the  stem-syllables 
which  spring  from  the  same  radical  can  only  be  explained  by  reference 
to  the  history  of  each  word,  and  cannot  be  given  here.  Some  ex- 
amples are  : 


paciscor, 

pax,  pads. 

s6deo, 

s6dgs. 

macer, 

macero. 

fides, 

fido  (feido). 

lego, 

Igx,  legis. 

dux,  duels. 

duco  (douco). 

rfigo, 

r6x,  regis. 

v6co, 

vox. 

tego, 

tSgula. 

lucerna, 

luceo  (louceS). 

acer, 

acer  bus. 

suspicor, 

suspicio. 

moles, 

mdlestus. 

mOveo, 

mobilis  (=  movbiUs). 

Quantity  in  Compounds. 

715.  Rule  XIV. — Compounds  generally  keep  the  quan- 
tity of  their  constituent  parts :  (cedo)  ante-cedo,  de-cedo, 
pro-cedo  ;  (caedo),  occido  ;  (cado),  occido. 

Kemarks. — I.  Of  the  inseparable  prefixes,  di,  se,  and  vS  are  long, 
r6  slioit  :  diduco,  sSduco,  v6cors,  rSdtico ;  di,  in  disertus,  is  shortened  for 
dis,  Hiul  in  dirimo,  dir  stands  for  dis. 

2.  N6  is  short,  except  in  nSdum,  ngmS  (ne-hemS),  ngquam,  ngquiquam, 
nequaquam,  ngquitia,  neve. 

3.  Re  comes  from  red,  which  in  the  forms  redd,  recc,  repp,  rell,  rett, 
occurs  principally  in  poetry  before  many  consonantal  verb  forms  ;  but 
this  doubling  varies  at  different  periods,  and  is  found  throughout 
only  ill  reddo.  Re  by  compensation  for  the  loss  of  the  d  is  found, 
occasionally,  piineipally  in  Perfect  stems  and  in  dactylic  poetry, 
especially  in  reicere,  religio  (also  relligio  and  religio),  rgduco  (once  in 
Plaut.). 

4.  Pro  is  shortened  before  vowels,  and  in  many  words  before  con- 
sonants, especially  before  f :  prSavos,  prOhibeo,  prdinde,  prdfugio,  prdfu- 
gus,  prSfundus,  prdfiteor,  prOfari,  prfifanus,  prdficiscor,  prficella,  prQcul, 
prdnepos.  The  older  language  shortens  less  frequently  than  the  later. 
In  Greek  words  pro  (tt/jcI)  is  generally  short  :  prdpheta  ;  but  prologus. 

5.  The  second  part  of  the  compound  is  sometimes  shortened  :  dgigro, 


452  FIGURES   OF   PROSODY. 

(from  iOro),  c5gnitiis,  agnitus  (from  notus).  Notice  the  quantity  in 
the  compounds  of  -dicus :  fatidicus,  vgridicus  (dico),  and  innuba,  pronuba 
(niibS). 

6.  Mechanical  rules,  more  minute  than  those  given  above,  might  be 
multiplied  indefinitely,  but  they  are  all  open  to  so  many  exceptions  as 
to  be  of  little  practical  value.  A  correct  pronunciation  of  Latin  can- 
not be  acquired  except  by  constant  practice,  under  the  direction  of  a 
competent  teacher,  or  by  a  diligent  study  of  the  Latin  poets,  and  con- 
sequently of  Latin  versification. 

Peculiarities  of  Quantity  In  Early  Latin. 

716.  The  Iambic  (734)  Law.  Any  combination  of  short  and  long, 
having  an  accent  on  the  short,  or  immediately  preceding  or  following 
an  accented  syllable,  may  be  scanned  as  a  Pyrrhic.     This  applies  to 

(a)  Iambic  words,  especially  imperatives,  as  :  rogO,  vide,  mang ; 

(h)  Words  beginning  with  an  Iambus,  when  the  second  syllable  is 
long  by  position,  and  the  third  syllable  is  accented,  as  :  senSctutem, 
voluntatis  ; 

(c)  Two  monosyllables  closely  connected,  or  a  monosyllable  closely 
connected  with  a  following  long  initial  syllable,  as  :  quis  hie  est,  ut 
6cc6pi.     The  monosyllable  may  have  become  so  by  elision. 

{d)  Trochaic  words  following  a  short  accented  syllable,  as  :  quid  istuc. 

(e)  Cretic  words,  but  more  often  in  anapaestic  measure,  or  at  the 
beginning  of  a  hemistich,  as  vSnerant. 

Notes.— 1.  Before  quidem  a  monosyllable  is  shortened  ;  tu  quidem. 

2.  A  combination  like  voluptas  mea  is  looked  npon  as  a  single  word. 

3.  Authorities  are  not  agreed  as  to  the  shortening  :  in  polysyllabic  words,  when  the 
second  syllable  is  long  by  nature  and  the  third  syllable  accented  ;  in  trisyllables  which 
have  become  Iambic  by  elision ;  in  Cretics  at  Trochaic  and  Iambic  close  ;  in  poly- 
syllables like  simillumae. 

717.  Personal  pronouns  and  similar  words  of  common  occurrence 
forming  Trochees  (734)  may  shorten  the  initial  syllable  when  followed 
by  a  long  syllable  or  its  equivalent,  even  in  the  oblique  cases  :  ille 
mg,  dmniuni  mg,  unde  tibi. 

Notes.— 1.  The  words  involved  are  ille,  illic,  iste,  istic,  ipse,  ecquis,  omnis, 
nempe,  inde,  unde,  quippe,  immo,  and  a  few  others  that  are  disputed,  such  as  some 
dissyllabic  imperatives  like  mitte,  redde,  and  monosyllables  followed  by  -que,  -ne, 
-ve,  and  the  like. 

2.  Nempe,  inde,  unde,  quippe,  ille,  iste,  may  perhaps  suffer  syncope  and  be 
scanned  as  monosyllables. 

3.  Nempe  never  forms  a  whole  foot.  Proin,  dein,  exin  are  used  only  before  con- 
sonants :  proinde  only  before  vowels ;  deinde  usually  before  vowels,  rarely  Ixjfore 
consonants. 

4.  Trochees  also  come  under  the  operation  of  the  Iambic  Law  when  they  foMow  a 
short  accented  syllable. 


FIGUKES   OF   PROSODY.  453 


FIGURES   OF    PROSODY. 

718.  Poetry  often  preserves  the  older  forms  of  language, 
and  perpetuates  peculiarities  of  pronunciation,  both  of  which 
are  too  frequently  set  down  to  poetic  license. 

719.  I.  Elision. — When  one  word  ends  with  a  vowel  and 
another  begins  with  a  vowel,  or  h,  the  first  vowel  is  elided. 
Elision  is  not  a  total  omission,  but  rather  a  hurried  half- 
pronunciation,  similar  to  grace  notes  in  music. 

_  a  e 

0  fglix  fin(a)  ant(e)  alias  PriamSIa  virgS. — Verg. 

2.  Ecthlipsis. — In  like  manner  m  final  (a  faint  nasal 
sound)  is  elided  with  its  short  vowel  before  a  vowel  or  h. 

u  u  e 

M5n8tr(um),  horrend(um),  Inf5rm(e)  ingSns  cul  lumen  adSmptum. — Verg. 

Exception. — After  a  vowel  or.m  final,  the  word  est,  is,  drops  its  e 
and  joins  the  preceding  syllable  (Aphaeresis). 

SI  rixast  ubi  tfi  pulsas  ego  vapul6  tantum. — Juv, 
Aetemas  quoniam  poenas  in  morte  timendumst. — Lucr. 

720.  Hiatus. — Hiatus  is  the  meeting  of  two  vowels  in 
separate  syllables,  which  meeting  produces  an  almost  contin- 
uous opening  (yawning)  of  the  vocal  tube.  In  the  body  of 
a  word  this  hiatus,  or  yawning,  is  avoided  sometimes  by  con- 
traction, often  by  shortening  the  first  vowel  (13). 

Remarks. — i.  The  Hiatus  is  sometimes  allowed  :  a,  in  the  Thesis 
(729),  chiefly  when  the  first  vowel  is  long  ;  h,  in  an  Arsis  (729),  or  resolved 
Thesis,  when  a  long  vowel  is  shortened  (Semi-hiatus)  ;  c,  before  a  pause, 
chiefly  in  the  principal  Caesura  (750);  d,  in  early  Latin,  in  the  princi- 
pal Caesura,  before  a  change  of  speakers,  and  occasionally  elsewhere. 

{a)  Stant  et  iuniperi  (h)  et  castaneae  Qi)  hirsutae. — Verg. 

(b)  Credimus  T  an  qui  {h)  amant  ipsi  sibi  somnia  fingunt  % — Verg. 

(c)  Promissam  gripui  genero.     {h)  Arma  impia  stimpsi. — Verg, 

(d)  A.  Abi.  B.  Quid  abeam  T  A.  St!  abi  (/i).  B.  Abeam  (^)T  A.  Abl.— 
Plaut. 

2.  Monosyllabic  interjections  are  not  elided. 

3.  On  the  elision  of  e  in  -ne  %  see  45G,  r.  2. 

721.  Diastole. — Many  final  syllables,  which  were  originally 
long,  are  restored  to  their  rights  by  the  weight  of  the  Thesis. 


454  FIGURES   OF    PROSODY. 

"Uxor,  heus  uxor,  quamquam  tu  irata's  mihi. — Plaut. 
Dummodo  morata  recte  veniat  dotatast  satis. — Plaut. 
Perrupit  Acheronta  Herculeus  labor. — Hor. 
Sometimes,  however,  Diastole  arises   from   the   necessities  of  the 
verse  (as  in  proper  names),  or  is  owing  to  a  pause  (Punctuation). 
Nee  quas  Priamides  in  aquosis  vallibus  Idae. — Ov. 
Desine  pltira  pui'r— et  quod  nunc  instat  agamus. — Verg. 
Pectorib*7s  inhians  spirantia  consulit  exta. — Verg. 

Note.— The  extent  to  which  diastole  is  allowable  is  a  matter  of  dispute,  especially 
in  early  Latin. 

On  quS,  see  707,  2,  Ex.  5. 

722.  Systole. — Long  syllables  which  had  begun  to  shorten 
in  prose,  are  shortened  (Systole). 

Obstupui  steteruntque  comae  vox  faucibus  haesit. — Verg. 
E  terra  magn(uni)  alterms  spectare  laborem. — Lucr. 
Unius  ad  certam  formam  primordia  rerum. — Lucr. 
NtilUus  addictus  iurare  in  verba  magistrl. — Hor. 

Note.— The  short  penult  of  the  Pf .  in  stet6runt,  dedfirunt,  was  probably  original 
(dedro  in  inscriptions).    See  131,  4,  b,  5  and  6. 

723.  Hardening. — The  vowels  i  and  u  assert  their  half- 
consonant  nature  (Hardening) :  abiete  (abiete),  geiiz;a  (genua), 
teniia  (tenuis). 

Fluvi'Srum  r6x  Eridanus  camposque  per  omn6s. — Verg. 
Nam  quae  t6nda  sunt  hiscendist  nulla  potestas. — Lucr. 

724.  Dialysis. — The  consonants  1  and  v  assert  their  half- 
vowel  nature:  diss6l?Xd  (dissolvo),  GaMs  (Gains,  from  Gavins). 

Adulteretur  et  columba  miluo. — Hor. 
Stamina  non  uUi  dissoluenda  deo. — Tib. 

725.  Syncope. — Short  vowels  are  dropped  between  con- 
sonants, as  often  in  prose  :  calfacio  for  calefacio. 

Templorum  positor  templorum  sancte  repostor. — Ov. 

Quiddam  magnum  addens  unum  mS  surpite  (=  surripite)  raorti.— Hor. 

726.  Tmesis. — Compound  words  are  separated  into  their 
parts. 

Qu5  mS  cunque  (=  quocumque  m6)  rapit  tempestas  dgferor  hospes. — 
Hor. 

Note.— The  earlier  poets  carry  Tmesis  much  further,  in  unwise  emulation  of  the 
Greek.    Celebrated  is  :  SaxQ  cere  comminuit  brum.-ENNius. 


VERSIFICATION.  455 

727.  Synizesis. — Vowek  are  connected  by  a  slur,  as  often 
in  the  living  language  :  deinde,  deinceps. 

Quid  faciam  roger  anne  rogem  1  quid  deinde  rogabo  ? — Ov, 
So  even  vvlieii  h  intervenes,  as  dehinc : 

Eurum  ad  sg  Zephyrumque  vocat,  deEinc  talia  fatur.— Verg. 

Remark.— Synizesis  {settling  together)  in  also  called  Synaeresis  (/oA> 
ing  together),  as  opposed  to  Diaeresis  (5)  ;  but  Synaeresis  properly 
means  contraction,  as  in  c5gS  (for  coagS),  and  nSmS  (for  nehemd).  Syna- 
loepha  is  a  general  terra  embracing  all  methods  of  avoiding  Hiatus. 

Note.— 1.  Syiiizesis  is  very  common  in  early  Latin,  especially  in  pronominal  forms: 
ml  (miM),  metis,  and  its  forms,  dissyllabic  forms  like  eo,  eum,  etc. 

728.  Synapheia. — A  line  ends  in  a  short  vowel,  which  is 
elided  before  the  initial  vowel  of  a  following  line,  or  a  word 
is  divided  between  two  lines,  i.  e.,  the  two  lines  are  joined 
together. 

Sors  exitura  et  nos  in  aetern(um) 

Exilium  impositura  cumbae. — Hor.,  0.,  11.  3,  27. 
Gallicum  Rhen(um),  horribile  aequor,  ulti- 
mosque  Britannos. — Cat.,  11.  11. 


VERSIFICATION. 

729.  RJiyfhm. — Rhythm  means  harmonious  movement. 
In  language,  Rhythm  is  marked  by  the  stress  of  voice  (Ac- 
cent). The  accented  part  is  called  the  Thesis  ;*  the  unac- 
cented, the  Arsis.  The  Rhythmical  Accent  is  called  the 
Ictus  [bloiv,  beat). 

Remark. — Besides  the  dominant  Ictus,  there  is  a  subordinate  or 
secondary  Ictus,  just  as  there  is  a  dominant  and  a  secondary  Accent 
in  words. 

730.  Metre. — Rhythm,  when  represented  in  language,  is 
embodied  in  Metre  (Measure).  A  Metre  is  a  system  of  syl- 
lables standing  in  a  determined  order. 

*  Thesis  and  Arsis  are  Greek  terms,  meaning  the  putting  down  and  the  raising  of 
the  foot  in  marching.  The  Roman  Grammarians,  misunderstanding  the  Greek,  applied 
the  terms  to  the  lowering  and  raising  of  the  voice,  and  thus  reversed  the  significations. 
Modern  scholars  up  to  recent  times  followed  the  Roman  habit,  but  at  present  the  ten- 
dency is  to  use  the  terms  in  their  original  signification,  as  above. 


45<5 


VERSIFICATION-. 


731.  Uiiit  of  Measure. — The  Unit  of  Measure  is  the  short 
syllable,  (^),  and  is  called  Mora,  Tempus  {Time). 

The  value  in  music  is  J    =  |. 

The  long  (— )  is  the  double  of  the  short. 

The  value  in  music  \s  \  =  \. 

Remark. — An  irrational  syllable  is  one  which  is  not  an  exact  mul- 
tiple of  the  standard  unit.  Feet  containing  such  quantities  are  called 
irrational. 

732.  Resolution  and  Contraction. — In  some  verses,  two 
short  syllables  may  be  used  instead  of  a  long  (Resolution), 
or  a  long  instead  of  two  short  (Contraction). 


Resolution 


b 


Contraction, 


n 


733.  Feet. — As  elements  of  musical  strains,  Metres  are 
called  Bars.     As  elements  of  verses,  they  are  called  Feet. 

As  musical  strains  are  composed  of  equal  bars,  so  verses 
are  composed  of  equal  feet,  marked  as  in  music,  thus  |  . 

Remark. — Theoretically,  the  number  of  metres  is  unrestricted  ; 
practically,  only  those  metres  are  important  that  serve  to  embody  the 
principal  rhythms. 

734.  Names  of  the  Feet. — The  feet  in  use  are  the  follow- 
ing : 

Feet  of  Three  Times. 


Trochee, 

—  \j 

legit. 

Iambus, 

\j—' 

legunt. 

Tribrach, 

\j  \j  \j 

16git8. 

Feet  of  Four 

Times. 

Dactyl, 

KJ   KJ 

Iggimtls. 

Anapaest, 

<u»  KJ  — 

16g6rent. 

Spondee, 



isgi. 

ProceleusmatlcoB, 

\J  KJ  \J   \J 

relegitnr 

J  J 

nn 


VERSIFICATION". 

457 

Feet  of  Five 

Times. 

Cretic, 

—  w 

legdrint. 

J  /J 

First  PaeSn, 

^    KJ   \J 

legfiritis. 

J  :n 

Fourth  Paeon, 

\y    KJ    \J  

legimini. 

j^/j 

Baccliius, 

^  — 

Iggebant. 

j-j  J 

Antibacchius, 

v^ 

legistis. 

J  J  f 

Feet  of  Six 

Times. 

Knicus  a  maiore, 

WW 

coUggimtls. 

J  J  n 

lOnicus  a  minQre, 

\j  ^ 

reiegsbant. 

njj 

Choriambus, 

—  v^  v^ 

colligSrant. 

J  n  J 

Ditrochee, 

\J  —   K^ 

colliguntiir. 

j/jj- 

Diiambus, 

vy  —  w  — 

Iggamini. 

/J  jj 

Remarks. — i.  Other  feet  are  put  down  in  Latin  Grammars,  but  they 
do  not  occur  in  Latin  verse,  if  in  any,  such  as  : 


Antispast,        w ^  IfegSbaris. 

Dispondee,        s6lgg5runt. 

Second  Paeon,  ^^  —  ^^  Ifegentibus. 
Third  Paeon,  ^  w  —  v^  16gitot6. 
Molossus,         Igggrunt. 


Pyrrhic,  w  ^  16git. 

First  Epitrite,      ^ r6l6g6runt. 

Second  Epitrite,  —  o gligebant. 

Third  Epitrite, «^  —  s6l6g6rint. 

Fourth  Epitrite, w  coUggistis. 

2.  For  Irrational  Feet  see  743  and  744. 

735.  Asce^iding  and  Descending  Rhythms. — Rhythms  are 
divided  into  ascending  and  descending.  If  the  Thesis  fol- 
lows, the  Rhythm  is  called  ascending ;  if  it  precedes,  de- 
scending. So  the  Trochee  has  a  descending,  the  Iambus  an 
ascending,  rhythm. 

736.  Names  of  Rhythms. — Rhythms  are  commonly  called 
after  their  principal  metrical  representative.  So  the  Trochaic 
Rhythm,  the  Anapaestic  Rhythm,  the  Iambic  Rhythm,  the 
Dactylic  Rhythm,  the  Ionic  Rhythm. 

737.  Classes  of  Rhythms. — In  Latin,  the  musical  element 


458  VERSIFICATION. 

of  versification  is  subordinate,  and  the  principles  of  Greek 
rhythm  have  but  a  limited  application. 

The  Greek  classes  .ire  based  on  the  relation  of  Thesis  to  Arsis. 

1.  Equal  Class,  in  which  the  Thesis  is  equal  to  the  Arsis  (/fVo? 
i6oy).     This  may  be  called  the  Dactylico- Anapaestic  class. 

II.  Unequal  Class,  in  which  the  Thesis  is  double  of  the  Arsis  {yevoi 
di7tXa6Lov).     This  may  be  called  the  Trochaico-Iambie  class. 

III.  QuinquepartitG  or  Paeonian  Class  (Five-eighths  class),  of  which 
the  Cretic  and  Bacchlus  are  the  chief  representatives  (^fVoS  vuioA-ior). 

738.  Eliytlunical  Series. — A  Rhythmical  Series  is  an 
uninterrupted  succession  of  rhythmical  feet,  and  takes  its 
name  from  the  number  of  feet  that  compose  it. 

Dipody  =     two  feet.  Pentapody    ==     five  feet. 

Tripody        =     three  feet.  Hexapody     =     six  feet. 

Tetrapody     =     four  feet. 

Remarks. — i;  The  Dipody  is  the  ordinary  unit  of  measure  (-meter)  in 
Trochaic,  Iambic,  and  Anapaestic  verse.  In  these  rhythms  a  mono- 
meter  contains  two  feet,  a  dimeter  four,  a  trimeter  six,  a  tetrameter 
eight. 

2.  The  single  foot  is  the  ordinary  unit  of  measure  (-meter)  in  Dactyl- 
ic verse.  Thus,  a  verse  of  one  Dactyl  is  called  a  Monometer  ;  of  two, 
a  Dimeter  ;  of  three,  a  Trimeter  ;  of  four,  a  Tetrameter  ;  of  five,  a 
Pentameter  ;  of  six,  a  Hexameter. 

3.  There  are  limits  to  the  extension  of  series.  Four  feet  (in  Greek, 
five)  is  the  limit  of  the  Dactylic  and  Anapaestic,  six  of  the  Trochaic 
and  Iambic  series.     All  beyond  these  are  compounds. 

739.  The  Anacrustic  Scheme. — Ancient  Metric  discussed  the  colon, 
whether  in  Ascending  or  Descending  Rhythm,  according  to  the  feet  of 
which  it  was  composed.  Most  modern  critics,  since  the  time  of  Bent- 
LEY,  regard  the  first  Arsis  in  an  ascending  rhythm  as  taking  the  place 
of  an  upward  beat  in  music  (called  by  Hermann  Anacrusis  ;  i.  e., 
rpward  stroke,  signal-heat),  whereby  all  rhythms  become  descending. 

In  this  way  the  Iambus  is  regarded  as  an  Anacrustic  Trochee,  the 
Anapaest  as  an  Anacrustic  Dactyl,  the  lOnicus  a  minOre  as  an  Ana- 
crustic ISnicus  a  maiore.     The  sign  of  the  Anacrusis  is  : 

740.  Equality  of  the  Feet. — Every  rhythmical  series  is 
composed  of  equal  parts.  To  restore  this  equality,  when  it 
ifc^  violated  by  language,  there  are  four  methods  : 

1.  Syllaba  Anceps.  3.  Protraction. 

2.  Catalexis.  4.  Correption. 


TERSIiaCATIOK.  459 

741.  Syllaha  Anceps. — The  final  syllable  of  an  indepen- 
dent series  or  verse  may  be  short  or  long  indifferently.  It 
may  be  short  when  the  metre  demands  a  long  ;  long  when 
the  metre  demands  a  short.  Such  a  syllable  is  called  a  Syl- 
laha Anceps. 

742.  Catalexis  and  Pause. — A  complete  series  is  called 
Acatalectic  ;  an  incomplete  series  is  called  Catalectic.  A 
series  or  verse  is  said  to  be  Catalectic  in  syllaham,  iti  dissyl- 
labum,  m  trisyllabum,  according  to  the  number  of  syllables 
in  the  catalectic  foot. 

^  s^  v^  I  ^  ^  w  I  ^      Trimeter  dactylicus  catalecHcus  in  syllaham. 

j:.  ^  ^  I  JL  Kj  K^  I  jr.  ^     Trimeter  dactylicus  catalecticus  in  dissyllabum. 

The  time  is  made  up  by  Pause. 

The  omission  of  one  mora  is  marked  a   ;  of  two 

/\  A 

743.  Protraction  and  Sy7icope. — Protraction  [rovrf)  con- 
sists in  drawing  out  a  long  syllable  beyond  its  normal  quan- 
tity. It  occurs  in  the  body  of  a  verse,  and  serves  to  make 
up  for  the  omission  of  one  or  more  Arses,  which  omission  is 
called  Syncope. 

>—  =  3  =  J.  (triseme  long);  i_j  =  4  =  J  (tetraseme  long). 

744.  Correption. — Correption  is  the  shortening  of  a  sylla- 
ble to  suit  the  measure. 

1.  So  a  long  syllable  sometimes  takes  the  place  of  a  short,  and  is 
marked  >  ;  similarly,  two  short  syllables  often  seem  to  take  the  place 
of  one,  and  may  be  marked  >.>\^. 

2.  Wlien  a  Dactyl  is  used  as  a  substitute  for  a  Trochee,  the  approx- 
imate value  is  often  1^  +  ^  +  1=3  =  J  H  J  ;  which  may  be  indicated 
by  -^\j  (cyclic  Dactyl). 

The  following  line  illustrates  all  the  points  mentioned  : 
a  he  he  b  d  e 

—  >        I  -U  ^  I      1__     II         -vy  v^  I      L_     II       -^  O        I     —   ^       I     —  A 

Nullam  I  Vare  sa-  |  era  |  vite  pri-  j  us  ||  sgveris  |  arbo   j  -rem. — Hor. 

(a)  Irrational  trochee  (irrational  long).  (6)  Cyclic  dactyl,  (c)  Syncope  and  Protrac* 
tion  (triseme  long),    (cf)  Syllaba  anceps.    (e)  Catalgxis. 


460  VERSIFICATION. 

Remark. — Under  this  head,  notice  the  frequent  use  of  the  irrational 
long  in  Anacrusis. 

745.  Verse. — A  Simple  Rhythm  is  one  that  consists  of  a 
simple  series ;  a  Compound  Rhythm  is  one  that  consists  of 
two  or  more  series. 

A  Verse  is  a  simple  or  compound  rhythmical  series,  which 
forms  a  distinct  and  separate  unit.  The  end  of  a  verse  is 
marked 

1.  By  closing  with  a  full  word.  Two  verses  cannot  divide  a  word 
between  them,  except  very  rarely  by  Synapheia  (728). 

2.  By  the  Syllaba  Anceps,  which  can  stand  unconditionally. 

3.  By  the  Hiatus,  *'.  e.,  the  verse  may  end  with  a  vowel,  though  the 
next  verse  begin  with  one.  Occasionally  such  verses  are  joined  by 
Synapheia  (V.,  A,,  i.  332-3,  448-9  ;  11.  745-6). 

746.  Methods  of  Combining  Verses. — The  same  verse  may 
be  repeated  throughout  without  recurring  groups  (Stichic 
Composition) ;  such  as  the  Septenarius  and  Octonarius,  the 
Trochaic  Septenarius,  the  Heroic  Hexameter,  the  Iambic 
Senarius  (Trimeter).  Or  the  same  verse  or  different  verses 
may  be  grouped  in  pairs  (distichs),  triplets  (tristichs),  fours 
(tetrastichs).  Beyond  these  simple  stanzas  Latin  versifica- 
tion seldom  ventured. 

Larger  groups  of  series  are  called  Systems. 
Larger  groups  of  verses  are  called  Strophes,  a  name  some- 
times attached  to  the  Horatian  stanzas. 

747.  Cantica  and  Diverbia.- — In  the  Drama  there  is  a  broad  divis- 
ion between  that  part  of  the  [)lay  which  was  simply  spoken,  and  is 
called  Diverbium,  comprising  the  scenes  in  the  Iambic  Senarius,  and 
that  part  which  was  either  sung  or  recited  to  a  musical  accompani' 
raent  called  Canticum.  The  Canticum  is  subdivided  into  :  (1)  Those 
scenes  which  were  merely  recited  to  the  accompaniment  of  the  flute, 
and  were  written  in  Trochaic  and  Iambic  Septenarii  and  Iambic  Octo- 
narii  ;  and  (2)  tliose  parts  which  wore  written  in  varying  measures 
(mutatis  modis  cantica)  and  sung.  The  latter  division  is  also  called 
"  Cantica  in  the  narrow  sense,"  and  may  be  divided  into  monologues, 
dialogues,  etc.  The  greatest  variety  of  measures  is  found  in  the  mono- 
logues. 

748.  Union  of  Language  luith  Rhythm. — When  embodied 


VERSIFICATION.  461 

in  language,  rhythm  has  to  deal  with  rhythmical  groups 
already  in  existence.  Every  full  word  is  a  rhythmical  group 
Avith  its  accent,  is  a  metrical  group  with  its  long  or  short 
syllables,  is  a  word-foot.  Ictus  sometimes  conflicts  with 
accent ;  the  unity  of  the  verse-foot  breaks  up  the  unity  of 
the  word-foot. 

749.  Conflict  of  Ictus  and  Accent. — In  ordinary  Latin 
verse,  at  least  according  to  modern  pronunciation,  the  Ictus 
overrides  the  Accent ;  this  conflict  seems,  however,  to  have 
been  avoided  in  the  second  half  of  the  Dactylic  Hexameter, 
and  the  Ictus  made  to  coincide  with  the  Accent. 

Note.— The  extent  to  which  this  conflict  was  felt  by  the  Romans  themselves  is  a 
matter  of  uncertainty,  but  it  seems  liliely  that  the  dominant  accent  of  a  word  was  not 
so  sharp  as  in  modem  pronunciation,  and  consequently  the  conflict  would  not  be  serious. 

750.  Conflict  of  Word-foot  and  Verse  foot. — The  conflict 
of  word-foot  and  verse-foot  gives  rise  to  Caesura.  Caesura 
means  an  incision  produced  by  the  end  of  a  word  in  the 
middle  of  a  verse-foot,  and  is  marked  f . 

This  incision  serves  as  a  pause,  partly  to  rest  the  voice  for  a  more 
vigorous  effort,  partly  to  prevent  monotony  by  distributing  the  masses 
of  the  verse. 

Remarks. — i.  So  in  the  Heroic  Hexameter  the  great  Caesura  falls 
before  the  middle  of  the  verse,  to  give  the  voice  strength  for  the  first 
Arsis  of  the  second  half. 

—  v^w  I  -^  —  I  -^f—  |— —  1  -^^-'wl  ^  — 

Una  saltis    victis  f  nullam  spSrare     salutem. — Verg. 

It  does  not  occur  at  the  middle,  as  in  that  case  the  verse  would 
become  monotonous. 

2.  In  many  treatises  any  incision  in  a  verse  is  called  a  Caesura. 

751.    Varieties   of  Caesura.  —  Caesurae    have   different 
names  to  show  their  position  in  the  verse,  as  follows : 

ASemiter?idria,  after  the  third  half  foot,  i.e.,  in  the  second  foot. 
Semiqmndria,  after  the  fifth  half  foot,  i.e.,  in  the  third  foot. 
Semiseptendria,  after  the  seventh  half  foot,  i.e.,  in  the  fourth  foot. 
Seminovendria,  after  the  ninth  half  foot,  i.e.,  in  the  fifth  foot. 

Remark. — These  Caesurae  are  frequently  called  after  their  Greek 
names,  thus  :  trihemimeral,  penihemimeral,  hepthemimeral,  etc. 


462  TERSIFICATIOK. 

762.  Masculine  and  Feminine  Caesurae. — In  trisyllabic 
metres,  when  the  end  of  the  word  Avitliin  the  verse-foot  falls 
on  a  Thesis,  it  is  called  a  Masculine  Caesura ;  when  on  an 
Arsis,  a  Feminine  Caesura. 

_  a  h  c  d 

Una  sa  |  lus  f  vi  [  ctis  f  niil  |  lam  f  spe  |  rare  f  sa  ]  lutem. 

a,  5,  c,  are  Masculine  Caesurae  ;  <:<?,  a  Feminine  Caesura. 

Especially  noteworthy  is  the  Feminine  Caesura  of  the  third  foot  in 
the  Hexameter,  called  the  Third  Trochee  (783,  r.  2). 

753.  Diaeresis, — When  verse-foot  and  word-foot  coincide. 
Diaeresis  arises,  marked  || 

Ite  domum  saturae  f  venit  |  Hesperus  |  its  capellae. — Verg. 

Remarks. — i.  Diaeresis,  like  Caesura,  serves  to  distribute  the  masses 
of  the  verse  and  prevent  monotony.  What  is  Caesura  in  an  ascend- 
ing rhythm  becomes  Diaeresis  as  soon  as  the  rhythm  is  treated  ana- 
crustically. 

Suis  I  et  i  i  psa  f  Eo  I  ma  vi  I  ribus  |  ruit.     Iambic  Trimeter. 

Su  :  is  et  ||  ipsa  ||  Eoma  |  viri  |  bus  f  ru  |  it.  Troch.  Trimeter  Catal., 
with  Anacrusis. 

2.  Diaeresis  at  the  end  of  the  fourth  foot  of  a  Hexameter  is  called 
Bucolic  Caesura,  and  has  a  special  effect  (7*83,  r.  3). 

754.  Recitation. — When  the  word-foot  runs  over  into  the 
next  verse-foot,  a  more  energetic  recitation  is  required,  in 
order  to  preserve  the  sense,  and  hence  the  multiplication  of 
Caesurae  lends  vigor  to  the  verse. 

Remark. — The  ordinary  mode  of  scanning,  or  singing  out  the  ele- 
ments of  a  verse,  without  reference  to  signification,  cannot  be  too 
strongly  condemned,  as, 

Unasa,  lusvic,  tisnul,  lamspe,  raresa,  lutem ! 

Numerus  Italicus, 

755.  The  oldest  remains  of  Italian  poetiy  are  found  in  some  frag- 
ments of  ritualistic  and  sacred  songs,  and  seem  to  have  had  no  regard 
to  quantity.  No  definite  theory  can  be  formed  of  this  so-called  Numerus 
Italicus  in  which  they  were  composed,  but  they  seem  to  have  been  in 
series  of  four  Theses,  usually  united  in  pairs  or  triplets,  but  sometimes 
separate.     An  example  is  the  prayer  to  Mars,  from  Cato,  Agr.,  141. 

Mars  pater  tS  precor  |  quaes6que  uti  siSs  |  voldns  propitius 
Mib!  domd  |  familiaeque  nostrae,  etc. 


YERSIFICATION.  463 


Saturnian  Verse. 

766.  The  Saturnian  verse  is  an  old  Italian  rhythm  which  occurs  in 
the  earlier  monuments  of  Latin  literature.  It  divides  itself  into  two 
parts,  with  three  Theses  in  each  ;  but  the  exact  metrical  composition 
has  been  a  matter  of  much  dispute,  the  remains  not  being  sufficient  to 
admit  of  any  dogmatism.     The  two  principal  theories  nro  : 

1.  The  Quantitative  Theory. — The  Saturnian  is  a  six-foot  vei'se  wi  Ji 
Anacrusis,  and  a  Caesura  after  the  third  xYrsis,  or  more  rarely  af'.er 
the  third  Thesis. 

Dabunt  malum  Metelli  |  Naevio  poetae. 
Cornglius  Lucius  |  Scipio  Barbatus. 
Quoius  fSrma  virtutei  |  parisuma  fmt. 
Eorum  sectam  sequontur  |  multi  mort^lgs. 

Notes.— 1.  The  Thesis  is  formed  by  a  long  or  two  shorts  ;  the  Arsis  by  a  short,  a 
long,  or  two  shorts  (not  immediately  before  the  Caesura).  The  Arsis  may  be  wholly 
suppressed,  most  often  the  second  Arsis  of  the  second  hemistich.  Short  syllables  under 
the  Ictus  may  be  scanned  long.    ITiatus  occurs  everywhere,  but  usually  in  Caesura. 

2.  This  theory  is  held  by  many  scholars,  but  with  various  modifications.  Thus,  some 
do  not  accept  the  lengthening  of  the  short  syllables,  others  would  scan  by  protraction 
four  feet  in  each  half  verse,  etc. 

Dabunt  malum  Metelli  1  Naevi5  pogtae,  etc. 

2.  The  Accentual  Theory. — The  Saturnian  verse  falls  into  two  halves, 
the  first  of  which  has  three  Theses,  the  second  usually  three,  sometimes 
two,  in  which  case  there  is  usually  Anacrusis  in  the  second  hemistich. 
Quantity  is  not  considered. 

Dabunt  malum  Metelli  1  NaeviS  pogtae. 

Qudius  forma  virtlitei  |  parisuma  fdit. 

Notes. ^ — 1.  Two  accented  syllables  are  regularly  divided  b\'  a  single  unaccented 
syllable,  except  that  between  the  second  and  third  there  are  always  two.  Hiatus 
allowed  only  at  Caesura. 

2.  A  modification  of  this  theory  would  scan 

Dabunt  malum  Metelli !  Naevio  poStae. 

3.  Very  recently  a  modification  of  the  Accentual  Theory  has  been  proposet'.,  which 
has  much  in  its  favor  : 

(«)  The  accent  must  fall  on  the  beginning  of  each  line,  though  it  may  be  u  second- 
ary accent ;  the  first  hemistich  has  three,  the  second  has  but  two  Theses. 

(6)  The  first  hemistich  has  normally  seven  syllables,  the  second  six  ;  but  an  extra 
short  syllable  may  be  admitted  where  it  w  ould  be  wholly  or  partially  suppressed  in 
current  pronunciation. 

(c)  After  the  first  two  feet  there  is  an  alternation  between  words  accented  on  the  first 
and  those  accented  on  the  second  syllable. 

{d)  A  final  short  vowel  is  elided,  otherwise  semi-hiatus  is  the  rule  ;  but  there  may  be 
fall  Hiatus  at  the  Caesura. 

Dabunt  malum  Metelli  I  Naevio  poetae. 
Pr&n(a)  incedit  Cereris  1  Proserpina  puer. 


464  VERSIFICATION. 


Iambic    Rhythms. 

757.  The  Iambic  Rhythm  is  an  ascending  rhythm,  in 
which  the  Thesis  is  double  of  the  Arsis.     It  is  represented 

By  the  Iambus  :  w  ^  ; 

By  the  Tribrach  ;   wvL»v^; 

By  the  Spondee  :  —  ^  ; 

By  the  Dactyl  :  —  ^  ^  ; 

By  the  Anapaest  :   ^  ^  ^',  and 

By  the  Pi-oceleusniaticus  :  w^  ^b^. 

Remark. — The  Spondee,  Dactyl,  Anapaest,  and  Proceleusmaticus 
are  allirrational,  and  are  consequently  marked  on  the  schemes  thus: 
>  — ,  >wv^,  \.A^—,  \y^\^Kj\  see  744. 

758.  Iambic  Octondrius  {Tetrameter  Acatalectic). 

Itiss^i)  adpararl  prandium  |  aml- 

c(a)  exspectat    mS,   scio,   Pl., 

Jft'y^.,  599.  >^w  — >^wT7||w^>— >^w^ 

Hic  ^nis  est  iambe  salvS  f  vindi- 

cis  doctor  mali,  Servius.  >^w  —  w^v.^  —  >^  w— >^«^  — 

Anacmstic  Scheme  : 

>  :  .(»  I  ->  I  ^(»  I ->  I  .<»  I  ->  I  .  ^  1  -A 

Note.— This  verse  is  predominantly  a  comic  verse,  occurring  most  frequently  in 
Terence,  who  shows  five  hundred  lines,  while  Plautus  shows  but  three  hundred. 
The  substitutions  are  the  same  as  in  the  Senarius  (761,  n.  1).    There  are  two  varieties  : 

(a)  That  which  is  divided  into  two  equal  halves  by  Diaeresis  at  the  end  of  the  fourth 
foot.  In  this  case  the  fourth  foot  as  well  as  the  eighth  has  all  the  privileges  of  the  final 
foot  of  the  Senarius  (Hiatus,  Syllaba  Anceps),  and  conforms  also  to  its  rules,  so  that  the 
line  is  practically  a  distich  of  two  Quaternarii ;  but  Hiatus  after  the  fourth  foot  is 
denied  for  Terence. 

(6)  That  which  is  divided  into  two  unequal  halves  by  a  Caesura  after  the  fifth  Arsis. 
Here  the  rules  of  the  final  foot  apply  only  to  the  eighth,  and  the  fourth  may  be  a  Spon- 
dee. The  principle  which  governs  the  choice  of  words  after  the  slmiqulndria  in  the 
Senarius  applies  here  after  the  dividing  Caesura.  The  Hiatus  comes  under  the  general 
rules.  From  the  earliest  period  there  is  a  tendency  to  keep  the  even  feet  pure.  This 
variety  is  preferred  by  Terence  to  the  former.    Examples  of  the  two  forms  are  : 

0  TrOia,  6  patria,  6  Pergamum,  1!  6  Priame,  periisti  senex,  Plaut. 

Is  porr5  ni(e)  autem  verberat  II  incursat  pugnis  calcibus,  Pi.aut. 

Facil(e)  omnSs  quom  valSmus  rgcta  I  consilia  aegrOtis  damus,  Ter. 

759.  lamhic  Septendrius  {Tetrameter  Catalectic). 

Bemitte  pallium  mihl  i|  meum  quod 

involastl,  Cat.  \j  jl.  \j  —  kj  j-  \j  —  ||  \j  j.  ^  —  kj  x.  —  f\ 


VERSIFICATIOi^^.  465 

Anacrustic  Scheme  : 

Notes.— 1.  This  verse  is  confined  principally  to  Plautus  and  Terence  ;  it  is  to  be 
regarded  as  a  compound  of  Dimeter  +  Dimeter  Catalectic  :  hence  regular  Diaeresis  after 
the  fourtii  foot,  which  is  treated  as  a  final  foot.  The  same  rules,  in  regard  to  the  vari- 
ous word-feet  allowable,  apply  here  as  in  the  case  of  the  Senarins  (761,  N.  6).  Substitu- 
tions are  allowable  in  every  foot  except  in  the  fourth,  when  followed  by  a  Diaeresis. 

With  Syllaba  Anceps  : 

Si  abduxeris  celabitur  li  itidem  ut  celata  adhuc  est,  Plaut. 

With  Hiatus  : 

Sed  si  tibi  viginti  minae  i  argenti  proferuntur,  Plaut. 

2.  Exceptionally  in  Plautus,  more  often  in  Terence,  the  line  is  cut  by  Caesura  after 
the  fifth  Arsis.  In  this  case  the  fourth  foot  has  no  exceptional  laws  except  that  if  the 
seventh  foot  is  not  pure  the  fourth  should  be,  though  this  is  not  absolutely  necessary. 

760.  The  Iambic  Sendrius  (a  Stichic  measure).  This  is  an  imitation 
of  the  Iambic  Trimeter  of  the  Greeks,  but  differs  from  it  in  that  it 
is  a  line  of  six  separate  feet  and  not  of  three  dipodies.  In  the  early- 
Latin  there  is  no  distinction  between  the  odd  and  even  feet,  such  as 
prevails  in  the  Greek  Trimeter,  but  the  same  substitutions  were  allow- 
able in  the  one  as  in  the  other.  This  distinction  is  regained  in  Horace 
and  Seneca,  who  follow  the  Greek  treatment  closely,  and  with  whom 
the  line  may  be  with  some  degree  of  justice  called  the  Iambic  Trimeter, 
but  it  is  very  doubtful  whether  the  Roman  felt  the  Iambic  Trimeter  as 
did  the  Greek.  In  both  Senarius  and  Trimeter  the  last  foot  is  always 
pure. 

761.  The  Early  Use  {Sendrius). 

Any  substitution  is  allowed  in  any  foot  except  the  last. 

Quamvis  serm5n6sf  possunt  longi 

texier,  Pl.,  Trin.,  797.  >.^|>—   |    >^i>~    |>^lv^  — 

Qui  scire  possis  f  aut  ingenium 

noscere,  Ter.,  And.,  53.  >  ^  j  v^-  —   |    >  ^  |  >v^w  \  >  x.  \  w  — 

S(i)  ux6ris  f  propter  amoremf  nQ- 

lit  ducere,  Ter.,  And.,  155.  >.^|>—  |^^^|>—  i>^|w  — 
Di  fortiinabuiitf  vostra  consili(a). 

tta  volo,  Pl.,  Trin.,  576.  >^|>—  |>.^|vy—  |  v/^Ow  |  ^~ 
E!  r(ei)  operam  dare  tef  fuerat  ali- 

quant(o)  aequius,  Pl.,  Trin., 

Iig.  >  vl/v^  I   >^^w  I   >  Ovy  I    vy  WW  I   >  .^    I    w  — 

Notes.— 1.  In  the  Iambic  measure  two  shorts  at  the  end  of  a  polysyllabic  word 
cannot  stand  in  either  Thesis  or  Arsis  ;  hence  such  feet  as  genera,  ma  I  teria,  would 
not  be  allowable.  But  a  Dactyl  is  sometimes  found  in  the  first  foot  (Ter.,  Eun.,  348). 
The  two  sliorts  of  a  Thesis  cannot  be  divided  between  two  words,  when  the  second  word 
la  a  polysyllable  with  the  accent  on  the  second  syllable  ;  hence  fingit  amorem  is 

30 


466 


YERSIFICATIOIi. 


faulty.  The  two  shorts  of  an  Arsis  should  not  be  divided  between  two  words  if  the 
first  short  ends  a  word  ;  but  there  are  sundry  exceptions  ;  especially  the  case  where 
two  words  are  closely  connected,  as,  for  instance,  a  preposition  and  its  case  ;  propter 
amOreni. 

2.  The  most  frequent  Cajsura  is  the  semiqvindna.  ]Vext  comes  the  iemUeptehaiia, 
which  is  usually  accompar.ied  by  the  semiterndria  or  by  Diajresis  after  second  foot. 
Examples  above. 

3.  Elision  is  more  frequent  in  the  Iambic  Senarius  than  in  the  Dactylic  Hexameter, 
and  occurs  especially  before  the  last  and  fifth  Theses  ;  also  not  unfrequeiitly  in  tiie 
fouith  foot.  The  proportion  of  elision  varies  between  Terence  (four  elisions  in  every 
three  verses)  and  Horace  (one  in  five  stichic  verses,  and  one  in  seven  in  distichs). 

4.  Semi-hiatus  (720),  also  called  Graecdvicus  or  Legilimus,  is  very  common  both  in 
Thesis  and  Arsis  ;  Hiatus  is  also  admitted  at  a  cliange  of  speaker  ;  whether  it  is  admis- 
sible before  proper  names,  foreign  words,  and  in  the  principal  Caesura,  is  still  a  matter 
of  dispute. 

5.  If  the  line  is  divided  by  the  lemiqiiwdria  Caesura,  and  the  fifth  foot  is  formed  by 
a  single  word,  the  second  half  of  the  third  foot,  together  with  the  fourth,  may  be  formed 
by  a  single  word  only  when  that  is  a  Cretic  or  a  Fourth  Paeon  ;  as,  filius  bonan  fide 
(Pl.,  Mo^t.,  670).  Thufi  depinxti  verbis  prob§  would  not  be  allowable  for  verbis 
dgpinxti  probe  (Pl.,  Poeii.,  1114). 

6.  To  close  the  line  with  two  Iambic  feel  was  not  allowable,  except  as  follows  :  (1) 
When  the  line  ends  with  a  word  of  four  syllables  or  more.  (2)  When  the  line  ends  with 
a  Cretic  word.  (3)  When  the  line  ends  with  an  Iambic  word  preceded  by  an  anapaest 
or  Fourth  Pason.  (4)  When  a  change  of  person  precedes  the  sixth  foot.  (5)  When 
elision  occurs  in  the  fifth  or  sixth  foot. 

762.  The  Later  Use  (THme^er). 

Sufs  et  ipsa  f  Roma  viribus  ruit  ^  j-  ^  —  \  ^  j:.  ^  —  \  >^^w  — 
Heu  mg  per  urbem  f  nam  pudet 

tanti  mali  >    j-  ^  —    \  >  ^  ^  —    \    >_cw  — 

Dgripere  lunam  f  vScibus  possim 

meis  >vj/^w—    \  >  J.  ^  —    I    >.x.w  — 

InfSmis  Helenae  f  Castor  oSensus 

vicem  >^v^^,^|>^v^—    |    >^w  — 

Optat quietemf Pelopis infidl pater  >  ^w—  |>v^^w—  |  >^w  — 
Alitibus  atque  f  canibuc  homici- 

d(am)  Hectorem  >^vyw—  |  wv^ww^v.^  |  y  ^  ^^  — 

VectSbor  humerisftunc  eg(o)  ini- 

micis  eques  >    .awww|>^www|>^w  — 

Pavidumque  lepor;em)  et  f  adve- 

namlaque6  gpniem,  Hor.  ^-.^  -^v^ww|w^w  —    |  w^  -i.  w  — 

Anacrustic  Scheme  :  w:—  v./|— ^|— w|—       |— ^|— A 

Notes.— 1.  The  Iambic  Trimeter,  niien  kept  pure,  has  a  rapid  aggic  ssi\  e  movement. 
Hence,  it  is  thus  used  in  lampoons  and  invectives.  It  admits  the  yijoiidce  in  the  odd 
places  (first,  third,  fifth  foot);  the  Tribrach  in  any  but  the  h'.sl,  though  in  Horace  it  is 
excluded  from  the  fifth  foot ;  the  Dactyl  in  the  first  and  third.  The  Anapaest  is  rare. 
The  Proceleusmaticus  occurs  only  in  Seneca  and  Terentianiis.  When  carefully 
handled,  the  closing  part  of  the  verse  is  kept  light,  so  as  to  preserve  the  character.  The 


VERSIFICATION-.  467 

fifth  foot  is  pure  in  Catullus,  but  is  almost  always  a  Spondee  in    Seneca  and 
Petronius. 

2.  Diaeresis  at  the  middle  of  the  verse  is  avoided.  Short  particles,  which  adhere 
closely  to  the  following  word,  do  not  constitute  exceptions. 

Laboriosa neccohors Ulixei,  Hor. 
Adulteretur  etcolumba  miluo,  Hob, 
In  like  manner  oxpliun— 
Eefertque tanta  grexamicus  ubera,  Hor. 

3.  The  Caesura  is  usually  the  semujmndria,  but  the  sSmisepfSnaria  is  found  also, 
but  either  with  the  ^emiquwaria  or  with  Diaeresis  after  the  second  foot. 

4.  The  Sendrivs  2)urus,  composed  wholly  of  Iambi,  is  found  first  in  Catullus  (iv. 
and  XXIX.) ;  also  in  Horace  (E]X)d.,  xvi.),  Vergil  (Cat.,  3,  4,  8),  and  the  Priapea. 

5.  Of  course,  in  the  Anacrustic  Scheme,  the  Caesura  of  the  ordinary  scheme  becomes 
Diaeresis. 

Le :  vis  ere  I  pante  II  l3rDipha  II  desi  I  lit  pe  I  de. 

763.  Iambic  Trimeter  Cataledic. 

MeS  renidet  in  domo  lacunar  w.z.w    —  kj  ./.  kj  —  ^  jl\j 

ESgnmque  pueris  nee  satelles  Orel,  Hor.         >^^^w^^>^w  —  v^'-^^U 

Anacrustic  Scheme  :         :^w|— >j.2lw|— w|l^|— A    (with 

Syncope). 

Notes.— This  occurs  in  Horace  (0.,  i.  4;  11.  18).  No  resolutions  are  found  except  in 
the  second  line  quoted,  where  pneris  may  be  dissyllabic  (27),  and  the  Spondee  alone  is 
used  for  the  Iambus,  mainly  in  the  third  foot.    The  Caesura  is  always  fhniqnlndria. 

764.  Trimeter  lamhicus  Claudus  (Choliambus) ;  8cazon 
( =  Hobbler)  Hipponacteus. 

Miser  Catulle  dgsinas  ineptfre,  Cat.  w  -£.^  —  ^^v.^  —  wjl^v-^ 

FulsSre  quondam  eandidi  tibf  85l6s,  Oat.       >  ^w  —  >^w  —  wjl^  — 
Dominisparanturista;  serviunt  v5bIs,M  art.  v-a^  ^kj  —  ^jju-k^  —  ^^^  — 

Anacrustic  Scheme :  :^w|—      l^v^-l— v^|^-^|-a.    Tro- 

chaic Trimeter  with  Anacrusis,  Syncope,  and  Protraction. 

Notes.— 1.  In  the  Choliambus  the  rhythm  is  reversed  at  the  close,  by  putting  a  Tro- 
chee or  Spondee  in  the  sixth  foot.  The  lighter  the  first  part  of  the  verse,  the  greater  the 
surprise.    It  is  intended  to  express  comic  anger,  resentment,  disappointment. 

2.  This  metre,  introduced  into  Rome  by  Mattius,  was  used  frequently  by  Catullus 
and  Martial.    Persius  also  has  it  in  his  Prologue. 

3.  The  Dactyl  is  occasional  in  the  first  and  third  feet,  the  Tribrach  occurs  very  rarely 
in  the  first,  more  often  in  the  third  and  fourth,  frequently  in  the  second.  The  Spondee 
is  found  in  the  first  and  third  feet ;  the  Anapaest  only  in  the  first. 

4.  The  Caesura  is  usually  slmiqulndria,  sometimes  semiseptendHa,  which  is  regu- 
larly supported  by  Diaeresis  after  the  second  foot. 

765.  Iambic  Quaterndrius  {Dimeter). 
Inarsit  aestu5sius  v^^w  —  <^.^v_^  — 
Imbrgs  nivesque  eomparat         >  ^  v^  —  w^w  — 
Videre  properant6s  domum       w  jl  «^^^>^w  — 
Ast  ego  vicissim  risero,  Hon.    >  ^-^  w  —  >  ^  v^  — 


468  VERSIFICATIOIT. 

Anacrustic  Scheme : 

vy  •  -  w  1  -  v^  I  -  ^  I  -  A 

Note.— This  verse  is  constructed  according  to  the  principles  which  govern  the  Sena- 
riiis  and  Octonarius.  It  is  rare  in  systems  until  the  time  of  Seneca,  and  is  usually 
employed  as  a  Clausula  in  connection  with  Octonarii  and  Septenarii  (Plautus,  Ter- 
ence), Senarii  (Horace),  or  Dactylic  Hexameter  (Horace). 

766.  lamhlc  Terndrius  {Dimeter  Cataledic). 

Id  repperi  i(am)  exemplum        >.^v.y  —  >^—  or>  :  .z.w^>i-£ —  /\ 

Note.— This  verse  is  found  mainly  in  Plautus  and  Terence,  and  used  as  a  Clau- 
sula to  Bacchic  Tetrameters  (Plautus),  Iambic  Septenarii  (Plautus)  ;  but  twice  in 
Terence  (^And.,  485  ;  Hec,  731).    It  is  found  in  systems  first  in  Petronius. 

767.  The  lainhic  Tripody  Catalectic  and  the  Dipody  Aca- 

talectic  are  found  here  and  there. 

Inops  amStor,  Trin.,  256.  Bonu(s)  sit  bonis,  B.,  660. 

Trochaic  Rhythms. 

768.  The  Trochaic  Rhythm  is  a  descending  rhythm,  in 
which  the  Thesis  is  double  of  the  Arsis.     It  is  represented. 

By  the  Trochee  :      ^  w  ; 

By  the  Tribrach  :   o  w  w  ; 

By  the  Spondee  :   -^  —  ; 

By  the  Anapaest  :   >^w  —  ; 

By  the  Dactyl  -.    ^  kj  y^ . 

By  the  Proceleusmaticus  :   v!/ ^  «^^. 

Eemark. — The  Spondee,  Anapaest,  Dactyl,  and  Proceleusmaticus  are 
all  irrational  and  are  accordingly  measured  — >,  w<^>,^v^or— «^>^, 
Kj\j  Ky^  ;  see  744. 


769.   Trochaic  Octonarius  {Tetrameter  Acatalectic), 
Scheme:    ^  >  _>  ^  >_>  11  ^  >  _>  ^  >  _> 

KJ  ^  KJ  ^     »  \J  'U  Ky  \y 

Farce  iam  camoena  vati  ||  parce  iam  sacro  furSrl. — Servius. 

Date  viam  qua  fiigere  liceat,  ||  facite,  tStae  plateae  pateant,  Pl.  ,  Aul, ,  407. 

Note.— This  verse  belongs  to  the  cantica  of  early  Comedy.  It  is  properly  a  com- 
pound of  two  Quaternarii.  Hence  Hiatus  and  Syllaba  Anceps  are  admitteci  in  the 
Diaeresis.  A  fourth  or  sixth  Thesis,  formed  by  the  last  syllable  of  a  word  forming  or 
ending  in  a  Spondee  or  Anapaest,  was  avoided,  as  was  also  a  monosyllabic  close.  The 
Substitutions  were  allowed  in  all  feet  except  the  eighth,  where  the  Tribrach  is  rare. 


770.   Trochaic  Septendrius  { Tetrameter  Catalectic), 
\j     \j     ^     ^     ^     \j  /\ 


Scheme:    .^  > ->  ^  > ->  ^  >->  ^  ^- 


VERSiriCATIO]!^-.  469 

Cr&  timet  qui  ntiinqu(ain)  amavit  I  qiiiqu(e)  amavit  eras  amet. — Pervig. 
Yen. 

Tu  m(6)  amoris  magi'  qu(am)  honoris  ||  servavisti  gratia. — Ennius. 
Vapular(e)  ego  tS  vehementer  |  iubeo:  ng  me  territes. — Plaut. 

Notes.— 1.  This  is  usually  divided  by  a  Diaeresis  after  the  fourth  Arsis  into  two 
halves,  with  the  license  of  a  closing  verse  before  the  Diteresis ;  tliis  is  often  sup- 
ported by  Diaeresis  after  the  second  foot.  Not  unfrequently  the  line  is  divided  by 
Cuesura  after  the  fourth  Thesis,  which  may  in  this  case  be  Ancepe  or  have  Hiatus, 
though  not  in  Terence  ;  but  other  critics  refuse  to  admit  sucli  a  division,  and  prefer 
Diaeresis  after  the  fifth  foot.  The  substitutions  are  allowable  in  any  foot  except  the 
seventh,  which  is  regularly  kept  pure,  though  occasionally  in  early  Latin  a  Tribrach  or 
a  Dactyl  occurs  even  here.    But  the  Dactyl  is  rare  in  the  fourth  foot. 

2.  The  rule  for  the  words  allowable  after  the  shniqumaria  Caesura  in  the  Senarius 
(761,  N.  5)  apply  here  after  the  Diaeresis,  with  the  necessary  modifications  ;  that  is,  the 
second  hemistich  cannot  be  formed  by  a  word  occupying  the  fifth  and  the  Thesis  of  the 
sixth  foot,  followed  by  a  word  occupying  the  two  succeeding  half  feet,  unless  the  first 
word  is  a  Cretic  or  a  Fourth  Paeon. 

3.  In  regard  to  the  close  the  same  rules  apply  as  in  the  case  of  the  Iambic  Senarius 
(761,  N.  6) ;  in  regard  to  the  fourth  and  sixth  Theses  the  rules  are  the  same  as  for  the 
Octonarius  (769,  N.). 

4.  The  strict  Septenarius  of  the  later  poets  keeps  the  odd  feet  pure,  and  rigidly 
observes  th .  Diieresis. 

771.  IVochaic  Tetra?neter  Claudus. 

Hunc  Ceres,  cibi  ministra,  friigibus  suts 
porcet,  Varro.  .cw  —  \j  ^  k^  —  ^  jl.  \^  —  \^  a.  j^\j 

Note.— This  verse  is  found  only  in  the  Menippean  Satires  of  Vakbo,  and  is  formed, 
like  the  Iambic  Senarius  Claudus,  by  reversing  the  last  two  quantities. 

772.  Trochaic  Quaternarius  icitli  Anacrusis. 

Si  fractus  illabatur  orbis,  Hor.     w:.^w| |.^wl— U 

Note.— This  occurs  only  in  the  Alcaic  Strophe  of  Horace. 

773.  Trochaic  Terndrius  {Dimeter  Catalectic), 

Respice  vgro  Thespri5,  Pl.,  Ep.,  3.    -<^w  —  >  ^  w  —  /\ 
Non  ebur  nequ(e)  aureum,  Hor.         ^w  —  w^w  —  /\ 

Note.— An  uncommon  measure,  confined  mainly  to  early  poetry  and  to  Horace  ;  it 
is  used  as  a  Clausula  between  Tetrameters  (Plautus)  and  Iambic  Senarii  Catalectic 
(Horace),  or  in  series.  The  third  foot  was  kept  pure  ;  also  the  others  in  the  strict 
measure. 

774.  The  Trochaic  Tripody  Acatalectic  {Ithyphallic), 

Qu(om)  ^sus  est  ut  pudeat,  Plaut.,  ^kj  —  >^^^ 

Note.— This  is  rare,  and  appears  only  in  early  Latin  and  as  a  Clausula,  usually  with 
Cretics.    Substitutions  were  allowable  in  everv  foot. 


470  VERSIFICATION. 

776.   Trochaic  Tripody  CcUalectic. 
Ilheu,  qu(ain)  ego  mails  ||  perdidi  modis, 

Pl.,  Ps.,  259.  ^>v!/(^w^   I   ^  \j  ^  \j  X. 

Note.— This  is  found  occasionally  in  early  Latin  ;  usually  two  at  a  time,  otherwise 
as  a  Clausula.     When  the  first  word  is  a  Cretic  the  line  may  end  in  two  Iambi. 

776.  'rrocliaic  Dipodij  {Mononieter). 
Nimis  inepta's,  Pl.,  liud.,  681.     ^  ^^  ^  ^-^ 

NoTE.~Tl;ia  is  found  occasionally  as  a  Clausula  with  Cretic  Tetrameters. 

Anapaestic   Rhythms. 

777.  The  Anapaestic  Rhythm  is  an  ascending  rhythm,  in 
which  the  Thesis  is  to  the  Arsis  as  2  to  2.    It  is  represented, 

By  the  Anapaest  :   v.^  w  ^  ; 

By  the  Spondee  :  —  ^  ; 

By  the  Dactyl  :  -vi.^; 

By  the  Proceleusrnaticus  :   w  w  v!/>^. 

Notes.— 1.  The  Anapaestic  measure  is  not  uncommon  in  the  Cantica  of  Plautus  ; 
but  it  is  the  metre  most  subject  to  license  of  all  the  early  metres.  Notice  especially  the 
operation  of  the  Iambic  Law  (716,  717) ;  the  common  occurrence  of  Synizesis,  of  Dia- 
stole, and  les8  often  of  Syncope,  etc. 

2.  Strict  Anapaestic  lines  after  the  model  of  the  Greek  are  found  only  in  Varko, 
Seneca,  and  later  authors. 

778.  A napaestic  Octondrlus  ( Tetrameter  Acatalectic) ,  and 
Anapaestic  Sejjtendrius  {Tetrameter  Catalectic). 

Hostibus  victis,   civibiis  salvis  |j  rS  pla-    —^^ v^w | 

cida,  pacibus  perfectis,  Pers.,  753.  —  v!/-^ v^«^  ^ 

Septumas  ess(e)  aedis  a  porta  f  |]  ub(i)         — <^«^ j- | 

ai(e)  habitat  Igno  quoi  iussit,  Ps. ,  597.  v^v^vi/w jl 

Ait  illam  miseram,  crTiciar(i)   et  lacru-  ^  w  jl  —  <^w  —  o  w | 

mantem s(e) adfiictare,  Pl. ,  31. G. ,  1032.  v>'^^^ ^~~A 

Erit  et  tib(i)  6xoptat(um)  obtinget  |  bo-    w  ^  .^  w  w ^ || 

n(um)  hab(e)  animum  ne  formida,  Pl.,  w  w  ^^  — •  ^  —  T 

M.G.,  1 01 1. 

Notes.— 1.  These  have  regularly  the  Diaeresis  after  the  fourth  foot,  dividing  the 
line  into  Quaternarii.  Before  the  Diaeresis,  the  licenses  of  a  closing  foot  (Hiatus  and 
Syllaba  Anceps)  are  occasionally  found. 

2.  In  the  Septenarius  the  seventh  Thesis  may  be  resolved,  but  the  resolution  of  the 
eighth  in  the  Octonarius  is  avoided. 

779.  Anapaestic  Trimeter  Catalectic. 
Ferspicio  nihill  meam  v5s  gratiam  facere, 

Pl.,  Owrc,  155.  —^<u—^\j—^ '^\j—/\ 

Note.— This  vei-se  is  very  rare,  and  is  denied  by  some  critics  ;  it  has  the  same  treat- 
ment as  the  !Sc])tcnarius. 


VERSIFICATI01S-.  47  ^ 

780.  Ayiapaestic  Quaterndrius  {Dimeter  Acatalectic). 

Venient  annis  II  saecula  sgris  yj  k^  jl.    —   —  —  ^^ 

Quibus  Oceanus  jj  vincula  r6rum  ^  ^  x.  v^v^—   —  ^<^ 

Laxet  et  ingens  ||  pateat  tellus  —  vr/w  —   —  ^  w  ^ 

Tethysque  novos  I  detegat  orbes  —     ^ww—   —  vi'w 

Nee  sit  terns  II  ultima  Thul€.— Sen.  Trag.     —    ^    —   —   —  ^^ 

Note.— This  verse  avoids  resolution  of  the  fourth  Thesis ;  Syllaba  Anceps  aud 
Hiatus  are  rare. 

781.  Armpaestic  Dimeter  Catalectic  {Paroemiac). 
Volucer  pede  corpore  pulcher  v.yvy^«^«^  —  wvy./Lv^ 
Lingua  catus  ore  canSrus  —    j.^^  —  ^kj^\j 
Verum  memorare  magis  quam  —    -s^v^v^  —  ww.^v^ 
Functum  laudare  decebit. — Auson.                           —    jt.   —   —^^^\j 

Notes.— 1.  This  verse  is  not  common  except  as  the  close  of  a  system  of  Anapaestic 
Acatalectic  Dimeters.    It  allows  in  early  Latin  resolution  of  the  third  Thesis. 

2.  Latin  Anapaests,  as  found  in  later  writers,  are  mere  metrical  imitations  of  the 
Greek  Anapaests,  and  do  not  correspond  to  their  original  in  contents.  The  Greek 
Anapaest  was  an  anacrustic  dactylic  measure  or  march  (in  J  time).  Hence  the  use  of 
Pause  to  bring  out  the  four  bars. 

Paroemiacus :  Anaa^usiic  Scheme, 

Volucer  pede  corpore  pulcher  \j  ^  :  —y^  \j  j  — v^v^  ] |  — 

A 

Dimeter  Acatalectic  :  Anacnu-tic  Scheme, 

Quibus  Oceanus  vincula  rSrum  v/v^:— ww  | |  w^— |  — 

The  Arses  of  the  last  feet  are  supplied  by  the  Anacrusis  of  the  following  verse, 

782.  Anapaestic  Dipody  {Monometer  Acatalectic). 
Omne  paratumst,  Pl.,  Men.,  365  —  vj/^—  j- 

NoTE, — This  verse  is  found  in  anapaestic  systems  between  Anapaestic  Dimeters. 

Dactylic   Rhythms. 

783.  The  Dactylic  Rhythm  is  a  descending  rhythm,  in 
which  the  Thesis  is  equal  to  the  Arsis  (2  =  2). 

The  Dactylic  Rhythm  is  represented  by  the  Dactyl :  -^^^^ 
Often,  also,  by  the  Spondee  :  ^— • 

784.  Dactylic  {Heroic)  Hexameter. — The  Heroic  Hexameter  is  com- 
posed of  two  Dactylic  tripod ics,  the  second  of  which  ends  in  a  Spondee. 
Spondees  may  be  substituted  for  the  Dactyl  in  the  first  four  feet ;  in 
the  fifth  foot,  only  when  a  special  effect  is  to  be  produced.  Such 
verses  are  called  Spondaic.  The  longest  Hexameter  contains  five 
Dactyls  and  one  Spondee  (or  Trochee) — in  all,  seventeen  syllables ;  the 
shortest  in  use,  five  Spondees  and  one  Dactyl— in  all,  thirteen  sylla- 


472 


VERSIFICATION. 


bles.  This  variety  in  the  length  of  the  verse,  combined  with  the  great 
number  of  caesural  pauses,  gives  the  Hexameter  peculiar  advantages 
for  continuous  composition. 

_  _  __  (_) 

Scheme  :    — wv^|^ww|jlwv^[— ww|^v^v^|^  — 

1.  Ut  fugiunt  aquilas  t  timidissima  !1  turba  columbae.  Ov. 

2.  At  tuba  terribili  +  sonitu  I  procul  i!  aere  canoro.  Veko. 

3.  Quadrupedante  putrem  t  sonitu  i  quatit  I  ungula  campum. 

Verg.  J 

4.  Cum  medio  celeres  t  revolant  i  exaequore  mergi.  Verg.      i 

5.  Vastius  insurggns  +  decimae  I  ruit  11  impetus  undae.  Ov.       !-  Four  Dactyls. 

6.  Et  reboat  raucum  1  regio  1  cita  ii  barbara  i  bombum.  Lucb.  J 

7.  Muta  metu  terram  1  genibus  t  sumjnissa  petSbat.  Luck. 

8.  Inter  cunctantSs  t  cecidit  1  moribunda  ministr5s.  Verg. 

9.  N§  turbata  volent  1  rapidis  t  ludibria  ventis.  Verg. 


Five  Dactyls. 


Three  Dactyls. 


10.  Versaqu(e)  in  obnixSs  t  urgentur  1!  cornua  vasto.  Verg. 

11.  Proc6ssit  longg  1  flammantia  3  moenia  mundl.  Lucr. 

12.  Portam  vi  multa  t  converso  i  cardine  torquet.  Verg. 

13.  T6ct(um)  august(um)  ingens  t  centum  sublime  columnls. 

Verg. 

14.  OUi  respondit  t  RgxAlbai  Longai.  Ennius. 

15.  Aut  I6v5s  ocreas  t  lento  t  dticunt  argents.  Verg. 

16.  Sunt  apud  infernos  t  totjnilia  formSsarum.  Prop. 

17.  Aeriaeque  Alpes  +  etnubifer  !!  Appennlnus.  Ov. 

18.  PrScubuit  viridi- 1  qu(e)  injitore  II  conspicitur— sus.  Verg. 

19.  Parturiunt  months  1  nascgtur  II  ridiculus— mus.  Hor. 


Two  Dactyls. 

One  Dactyl. 
j-  No  Dactyl. 


Spondaic 
Verses. 


Verg. 


)  Monosyllabic 
'       ending. 

(  Semiquin.  and 
'  Bucolic. 
[Third  Trochee 
\  and 

i.     Semisept. 
1-  Split  in  half. 
\  Shivered, 
[-a  -  sound. 
I^e  -  sound. 
}-8  -  sound. 

Notes.— 1.  The  two  reigning  ictuses  are  the  first  and  fourth,  and  the  pauses  are  so 
arranged  as  to  give  special  prominence  to  them— the  first  by  the  pause  at  the  end  of  the 
preceding  verse,  the  fourth  by  pauses  within  the  verse,  both  before  and  after  the  Thesis. 

2.  The  principal  Caesura  is  the  shniqmndria  or  pen themimeral,  i.  e.,  after  the  Thesis 
of  the  third  foot,  or  Masculine  Caesura  of  the  third  foot ;  the  next  is  the  slmiseplinaria 
or  hepthemimeral^  after  the  Thesis  of  the  fourth  foot ;  but  usually  supplementetl  by  the 
simiterndna  in  the  Thesis  of  the  second  or  by  one  after  the  second  Trochee  ;  then 
the  Feminine  Caesura  of  the  third  foot,  the  so-called  Third  Trochee^  which  is  less  used 
among  the  Romans  than  among  the  Greeks.  As  Latin  poetry  is  largely  rhetorical, 
and  the  Caesura  is  of  more  importance  for  recitjition  than  for  singing,  the  Roman  poets 
are  very  exact  in  the  observance  of  these  pauses. 


10  +G  =  16  8 

20.  Nascere,  praeque  diem)  veni6ns  age,  iLucifer,almum. 

21.  inslgnem  pietate  t  virum  1  tot  adire  laborSs.  Verg. 


22.  Et  nigrae  violae  1  sunt  Ii  et  vaccinia  1  nigra.  Verg. 

23.  Sparsis  II  hastis  II  longis  II  campus  II  splendet  et  horret.  £n. 
%^.  Quamyis  sint  sub  aqua  sub  aqua  maledicere  tentant.  Ov. 

25.  Me  m(§)  adsum  qui  f5c(i)  in  m6  convertite  ferrum.  Verg. 

26.  Discissos  nudds  laniabant  dentibus  artus.  Verg. 


VERSIFICATIOK.  473 

In  verses  with  several  Cfesnrae,  the  semisepiendria  outranks  the  semigulndria,  if  it 
precedes  a  period,  and  tlie  latter  does  not,  or  if  it  is  perfect  and  the  latter  is  imperfect 
(i.e.,  formed  by  tmesis  or  bj'  elision) ;  it  also  as  a  masculine  Caesura  outranks  the  Third 
Trochee  as  a  feminine.    In  other  cr.ses  there  may  be  doubt  ae  to  the  principal  Caesura. 

3.  The  Diaeresis  which  is  most  carefully  avoided  is  the  one  after  the  third  foot, 
especially  if  that  foot  ends  in  a  Spondee,  and  the  verse  is  thereby  split  in  half. 

Examples  are  found  occasionally,  and  if  the  regular  Caesura  precedes,  the  verse  is 
not  positively  faulty. 

His  lacrimis  vitam  t  damus  !!  —  et  miser escimus  ultro.— Verg. 

It  is  abominable  wlien  no  otlier  Caesura  proj^er  is  combined  with  it. 

Poeni    pervortent§3  ::  omnia  II  circumcursant.— Pseudo-Ennius  (Mekula). 

On  the  other  hand  the  Diuiresis  at  the  end  of  the  fourth  foot  divides  the  verse  into 
proportionate  parts  (sixteen  and  eight  morae,  or  two  to  one),  and  gives  a  graceful  tro- 
chaic movement  to  the  hexameter.  This  is  called  the  Bucolic  Caesura,  and  while  com- 
mon in  Greek,  is  not  so  in  Latin  even  in  bucolic  poetry.  Juvenal,  however,  is  fond  of 
it,  showing  one  in  every  fifteen  verses. 

Ite  domum  saturae  I  venit  Hesperus  II  Ite  capellae.— Verg. 

4.  Verses  without  Caesura  are  very  rare  ;  a  few  are  found  in  Ennius  (see  No.  23)  and 
LuciLTus.    Horace  uses  one  designedly  in  A. P.,  263. 

5.  Elision  is  found  most  often  in  Vergil  (one  case  in  every  two  verses)  and  least 
often  in  Lucan  (leaving  out  Ennius  and  Claudian).  Catullus,  Juvenal,  Horace, 
Ovid  stand  about  midway  between  these  two  extremes.  It  is  very  rare  in  the  Thesis 
of  the  first  foot,  and  is  found  oftencst  in  the  following  order  :  the  Thesis  of  the  second 
foot,  the  Arsis  of  the  fourth,  the  Arsis  of  the  first,  the  Thesis  of  the  third. 

G.  Simple  Hiatus  is  very  rare  in  lines  composed  wholly  of  Latin  words,  except  at  the 
principal  Caesura  ;  it  is  found  after  a  final  short  syllable  (excluding  -m)  but  twice  (V., 
Ec,  II.  53  ;  A.,  I.  405) ;  after  a  long  monosyllable  (omitting  Interjections  0  and  a)  but 
once  (V.,  A.,  iv.  235).  But  before  the  principal  Caesura,  or  if  the  line  contains  a  Greek 
word,  examples  are  not  very  uncommon.  Vergil  has  altogether  about  forty  cases  ; 
Horace  shows  two  cases  {S.,  1. 1, 108  ;  Epod.^  13,  3) ;  Catullus  two  in  the  Hexameter 
of  the  Elegiac  Distich  (66,  11  ;  107, 1);  Propertius  one  (iii.  7,  49). 

7.  Of  Semi-hiatus  Vergil  shows  some  ten  examples  at  the  close  of  the  Dactyl,  but  all 
of  Greek  words  except  yl.,  iii.  211  ;  Ec.^  3,  79  ;  there  are  occasional  examples  elsewhere, 
as  in  Propertius,  Horace,  etc.  There  are  also  several  examples  of  Semi-hiatus  after  a 
monosyllable  in  the  first  short  of  the  Dactyl,  aa  :  Cat.,  xcvii.  i  ;  V.,  ^.,  vi.  507  ;  IIor., 
yS.,  1. 9,  38.    Hiatus  after  num  occurs  in  HoR.,  *S'.,  11.  2,  28. 

8.  Vergil  is  fond  of  Diastole,  showing  fifty-seven  cases,  all  except  three  (.4.,  iii. 
464, 702  ;  XII.  648)  of  syllables  ending  in  a  consonant ;  Horace,  in  Satires  and  Epistles, 
has  eleven,  once  only  of  a  vowel  (6'.,  11.  3,  22)  ;  Catullus,  three  ;  Propertius,  three  ; 
TiBULLUS,  four  ;  Martial  (in  the  Distich),  two  ;  Vergil  also  lengthens  que  sixteen 
times,  but  only  when  que  is  repeated  in  the  verse,  and  before  two  consonants  or  a 
double  consonant  (except  .1.,  iii.  91) ;  Ovid  exercises  no  such  care. 

9.  A  short  syllable  formed  by  a  final  short  vowel  remains  short  before  two  con- 
sonants, of  which  the  second  is  not  a  liquid  (mainly  sc,  sp,  St),  especially  in  the  fifth 
foot,  less  often  in  the  first.  Lucilius,  Lucretius,  and  Ennius  have  numerous  exam- 
ples of  this  ;  Vergil  but  one  case  (.4.,  xi.  309),  except  before  z ;  Horace  has  eight 
cases  in  the  Satires  ;  Propertius  six  ;  Tibullus  two  cases,  one  before  smaragdos. 

10.  A  Hexameter  should  close  (a)  with  a  dissyllable  preceded  by  a  polysyllable  of  at 
least  three  syllables,  or  (b)  with  a  trisyllable  preceded  by  a  word  of  at  least  two  syllables. 
The  preposition  is  proclitic  to  its  case.  Exceptions  to  this  rule  are  common  in  early 
Latin,  but  decrease  later.  Thus  Ennius  shows  fourteen  per  cent,  of  exceptional  lines. 
In  later  times  artistic  reasons  sometimes  caused  the  employmant  even  of  a  monosyllable 
at  the  end  (see  exs.  18, 19). 

11.  Spondaic  lines  are  exceptional  in  Ennius  and  Lucretius,  more  common  in 


474  VERSIFICATION". 

Catullus,  rare  in  Vergil,  Ovid,  Horace,  never  in  Tibullus.  The  stricter  poets 
required  that  in  this  case  the  fourth  foot  should  be  a  Dactyl,  and  then  the  two  last  feet 
were  usually  a  single  word.  Entirely  Spondaic  lines  are  found  in  Ennius  (three  cases, 
as  Ann.,  i.  66,  m.)  and  Cat.  (ii6,  3). 

12.  Ennius  shows  three  peculiar  cases  of  the  resolution  of  the  Thesis  in  the  Dactyl, 
Aim.,  267  ;  Sat.,  53  and  59. 

13.  Hypermetrical  verses  running  into  the  next  by  Synapheia  are  rare  ;  e.g..  Luck., 
V.  846  ;  Cat.,  64,  298  ;  115, 5.  Vergil  has  twenty  cases,  usually  involving  que  or  ve, 
but  twice  -m  {A.,  vii.  160  ;  G.,  i.,  295) ;  three  other  cases  are  doubtful.  Horace  hns 
two  cases  (in  the  Satii-es),  Ovid  three,  Valerius  Flaccus  one,  Horace  has  also 
four  cases  of  two  verses  united  by  tmesis  of  a  compound  word. 

14.  Pure  dactylic  lines  are  rare  ;  the  most  usual  forms  of  the  first  four  feet  of  the 
Btichic  measure  are  these  :  dsss,  15  per  cent.  ;  dsds,  11.8  per  cent.  ;  ddss,  11  per  cent.  ; 
SDss,  10  per  cent.  The  most  uncommon  are  ssdd,  1.9  per  cent.  ;  sddd,  2  per  cent.  The 
proportion  of  Spondee  to  Dactyl  in  the  first  four  feet  varies  from  65.8  per  cent,  of 
Spondee  in  Catullus  to  45.2  per  cent,  in  Ovid.  The  following  statements  are  from 
Drobisch  :  (a)  Excepting  Ennius,  Cicero,  and  Silius  Italicus,  Latin  poets  have 
more  Dactyls  than  Spondees  in  the  first  foot,  {b)  Excepting  Lucretius,  more  Spon- 
dees in  the  second,  (c)  Excepting  Valerius  Flaccus,  more  Spondees  in  the  third, 
(rf)  Without  exception,  more  Spondees  in  the  fourth. 

15.  Much  of  the  beauty  of  the  Hexameter  depends  on  the  selection  and  arrangement 
of  the  words,  considered  as  metrical  elements.  The  examples  given  above  have  been 
chosen  with  especial  reference  to  the  picturesque  effect  of  the  verse.  Monosyllables  at  the 
end  of  the  Hexameter  denote  surprise  ;  anapaestic  words,  rapid  movement,  and  the  like. 

Again,  the  Hexameter-  may  be  lowered  to  a  conversational  tone  by  large  masses  of 
Spondees,  and  free  handling  of  the  Caesura.  Compare  the  Hexameters  of  Horace  in 
the  Odes  with  those  in  the  Satires. 

785.  Elegiac  Pentameter  {Catalectic  Trimeter  repeated). 

The  Elegiac  Pentameter  consists  of  two  Catalectic  Trimeters  or  Pen- 
themimers,  the  first  of  which  admits  Spondees,  the  second  does  not. 
There  is  a  fixed  Diasresis  in  the  middle  of  the  verse,  as  marked  above, 
which  is  commonly  supplemented  by  the  semiterndria  Cassura.  The 
Pentameter  derives  its  name  from  the  old  measurement:  —  w  v.^,—  w  v^, 

,w>^— ,v^w—  ;  and  the  name  is  a  convenient  one,  because  the 

verse  consists  of  2^  +  2^  Dactyls.  The  Elegiac  Distich  is  used  in  sen- 
timental, amatory,  epigrammatic  poetry. 

The  musical  measurement  of  the  Pentameter  is  as  follows  : 

—  w>^    I    —  wv^    |i — I  II   —  v^w    I    WW    I 

A 
This  shows  why  neither  Syllaba  Anceps  nor  Hiatus  is  allowed  at  the 
Diaeresis,  and  explains  the  preference  for  length  by  nature  at  that  point. 
At  dolor  in  lacrimas  I  verterat  onine 

m.er'uiii,  Tib.  .z.  w  w  .^  w  w  -^ 

Ml   legat  et  lectd  ||  carmine  doctus 

amet,  Ov.  .^  w  w  -^  —  .^ 

At  nunc  barbarigs  ||  grandis   habere 

nihil,  Ov.  ^  —  ^  w  w  ^ 

Concessum  nulls  ||  lige  redibit  iter, 

Pkop.  X.  —  jl.  —  ^ 


jL.    \^   KJ   ^    <J   \J   JL 


VERSIFICATION".  475 

The  Elegiac  Pentameter  occurs  only  as  a  Clausula  to  the  Heroic 
Hexameter,  Avith  whicli  it  forms  the  Elegiac  Distich.    Consequently  the 
sense  should  not  run  into  the  following  Hexameter  (exceptions  rare)  : 
Saep(e)  ego  tentavi  curas  depellere  vino 

At  dolor  in  lacrimas  ||  verterat  onine  merum,  Tib. 
Ingenium  quondam  fuerat  pretiosius  auro 

At  nunc  barbaries  I  grandis  habere  nihil,  Ov. 
Par  erat  inferior  versus  :  risisse  Cupido 

Dicitur  atque  unum  \\  surripuisse  pedem,  Ov. 
Saep(e)  ego  cum  dominae  dulces  a  limine  duro 
Agnosco  voces  ||  haec  negat  esse  domi,  Tib. 

Notes.— 1.  In  the  first  two  feet  of  the  Pentameter,  which  alone  can  suffer  variation, 
the  forms  are  as  follows  :  ds,  46  per  cent. ;  dd,  24.5  per  cent. ;  ss,  16  per  cent, ;  sd,  13.5 
far  cent.    Catullus,  however,  has  ss,  34.5  per  cent. 

2.  Elision  is  rare,  especially  in  the  second  hemistich.  When  it  occurs  it  is  generally 
m  the  first  Arsis  or  second  Thesis,  and  usually  affects  a  short  vowel  or  -m.  Catullus 
shows  the  greatest  proportion  of  examples,  Ovid  the  smallest.  Except  in  Catullus  and 
Lygdamus  there  are  fewer  cases  of  Elision  in  the  Pentameter  than  in  the  Hexameter. 

3.  Elision  and  Diastole  in  the  Diiieresis  are  rare.  Catullus  especially,  and  Pro- 
PERTius  occasionally,  have  Elision.  Propertius  and  Martial  show  each  two  cases 
of  Diastole  (Prop.,  n.  8, 8  ;  ii.  24, 4  ;  Mart.,  ix.  ioi,  4  ;  xiv.  77, 2). 

4.  A  final  short  vowel  before  two  consonants,  one  of  which  is  a  liquid  or  s,  is 
lengthened  twice  in  Tibullus,  and  remains  short  once  in  Propertius  (Tib.,  1.5,  28  ; 
1.6,34;  Prop.,  IV.  4, 48). 

5.  Dialysis  occurs  in  compounds  of  solvo  and  volv5 ;  as.  Cat.,  66, 74  ;  Tib.,  i.  7,  2,  etc. 

6.  In  the  strict  handling  of  the  Pentameter  by  Ovid,  the  rule  was  that  it  g-hould 
close  with  a  dissyllable.  So  in  his  Amores^  Ovid  shows  no  example  of  any  other  end- 
ing ;  and  in  his  Tristia  the  proportion  is  one  in  one  hundred  and  forty  lines.  In  ear- 
lier times,  however,  there  was  no  especial  avoidance  of  polysyllabic  endings,  though 
more  are  found  in  Catullus  than  in  any  other  author.  Peculiar  is  Propertius,  who, 
while  almost  equalling  Catullus  in  his  disregard  of  the  law  of  the  dissyllabic  ending 
in  the  first  book,  equals  the  Tristia  of  Ovid  in  the  observance  of  it  in  his  fourth. 
With  dissyllabic  ending  the  prevailing  forms  of  the  second  Hemistich  are  —  "^  ^  y  —  ^  i 
^  — ,  and  —  >^ ,  ^  —  "-^ ,  ^  — ,  but  Tibullus  and  Ovid,  and  in  less  degree  Catul- 
lus, employ  quite  often  —  ^  "->'  —  "^ ,   "^  —  and  — ,   ^  "^  y  —  ^  j   ^  —. 

786.  Dactylic  Tetrameter  A  cat.  {metrum  Alcmdnium). 
Nunc  decet  aut  viridi  nitidum  caput  .^lv^v^.a-^v^^wv^^v^o- 
Pallida  mors  aequS  pulsat  pede                       ^^^  kj  j-—     ^—     j-^  kj 
Vitae  stimma  brevis  spem  n6s  vetat                ^—      ^  k^  •^  -c.—     ^^  ^ 
This  verse  occurs  mainly  in  combination  with  an  Ithyphallic  to  form  the  Greater 

Archilochian  verse  ;  occasionally  in  stichic  composition  in  Seneca  ;  also  in  Ter., 
And.,  625. 

787.  Dactylic  Tetrameter  Cat.  in  Dissyllaium  (Archi- 
lochium). 

Aut  Epheson  bimarisve  Corinthl  .s.  ^u  kj  m  k^  \^  ^  \j  '^  j:.Tj 

0  fortes  peiSraque  passi  ji.—     .z 


Mlusorem  cohibent  Archyta,  Hor 


.£.   \J   \J   ^    KJ 


.S.    \J    \J    .£.  -^    V^ 


476  VERSIFICATION". 

Note.— This  line,  which  only  occurs  in  the  Alcmardan  System,  may  also  Ix;  looked 
upon  as  an  Acatalectic  Tetrameter  with  a  spondaic  close. 

788.  Dactylic  Trifiieter  Gatalectic  in  Syllaham  {Lesser 
Arcliilocliian), 

Pulvis  et  umbra  sumus,  Hor.  ^  ku  kj  jh.  kj  kj  ^ 

Note.— This  line  occurs  mainly  in  the  first  three  Archilochian  Strophes. 

789.  Dactylic  Dimeter  Catalectic  in  DissyUabum  {Adonic). 

Temiit  urbem,  Hor.  .^  v^  ^  ^  »^ 

Note.— Though  generally  measured  thus,  this  verse  is  properly  logaoedic,  and  will 
recur  under  that  head  (792).  It  occurs  mainly  in  the  Sapphic  stanza,  and  at  the  close 
of  series  of  Sapphic  Hendecasyllabics  in  Seneca. 

Logaoedic  Rhythms. 

790.  The  Logaoedic  Rhythm  is  a  peculiar  form  of  the  Tro- 
chaic rhythm,  in  which  the  Arsis  has  a  stronger  secondary- 
ictus  than  the  ordinary  Trochee. 

Instead  of  the  Trochee,  the  cyclic  Dactyl  or  the  irrational 
Trochee  may  be  employed.  This  cyclic  Dactyl  is  represented 
in  morae  by  1|,  J,  1 ;  in  music,  by  J^  =  j\,  j\,  i. 

When  Dactyls  are  employed,  the  Trochee  preceding  is 
called  a  Basis,  or  Tread,  commonly  marked  x  .  If  the  basis 
is  double,  the  second  is  almost  always  irrational  in  Latin 
poetry.  Instead  of  the  Trochee,  an  Iambus  is  sometimes 
prefixed.     Anacrusis  and  Syncope  are  also  found. 

Remarks. — i.    Logaoedic  comes  from    Aoyo?,  prose,  and     aoihrj, 
song,  perhaps  because  the  rhythms  seem  to  vary  as  in  prose. 
2.  Dactyls  are  usually,  but  not  necessarily,  employed. 

No  Dactyl. 

791.  Alcaic  Enneasyllahic. 

Si  fractus  illabatur  orbis,  TTor.  ^:    m  k^  ^^  ^^  ^\j 

Note.— The  Anacrusis  should  be  long.  Horace  shows  no  exceptions  in  the  fourth 
book  and  very  few  in  the  first  three.    The  regular  Csesura  is  the  seniiq'uwdna. 

One  Dactyl. 

792.  Add7iic. 

Terruit  urbem,  Hor.  -<^  ^  |  ^  -^  [ 

Note.— Elision  is  not  allowed  in  this  verse.  As  far  as  its  formation  is  concerned,  it 
should  consist  either  of  a  dissyllable  +  a  trisyllable,  or  the  reverse.  Proclitics  and 
enclitics  go  with  their  principals. 


VERSIFICATIOIf.  477 

793.  Aristophanic  (Choriambic). 

Lydia  die  per  omnfe,  Hor.  ^<j  \  -^  ^  |  uz.  j  ^ 

Note.— ThiB  verse  occurs  mainly  in  the  lesser  Sapphic  Strophe  of  Hoeacb. 

One  Dactyl,  with  Basis. 

794.  Pherecratean. 

X 

Nigris  aequora  ventis,  Hor.  j:.  >  |  Ay  w  j  u^  |  — 

Note.— This  verse  occurs  in  the  fourth  Asclepiadlan  Strophe  of  Horace  ;  also  in 
Catullus  (xvii.)  and  the  Priapla.  No  Elision  is  allowed  by  Horace,  and  there  is  no 
regular  CiEsura. 

795.  Glyconic. 

llmirabitur  insol^ns,  Hor.  ■£->  \  -^^  \  j-kj  \  — 

Note.— This  occurs  in  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  AsdtpiaMan  strophes  of 
Horace  ;  also  in  Catullus  (xvii.)  and  the  Priap^a.  There  is  generally  the  shmtefi^- 
nana  Caesura  ;  occasionally  instead  of  it  a  Second  Trochee.  Elision  of  long  syllables 
is  very  rare  in  Horace  ;  Elision  of  a  short  before  the  long  of  the  Dactyl  more  often. 
Horace  also  shows  occasional  liberties,  such  ae  Diastole  (<?.,  iii.  24,  5),  Dialysis  (<?.,  i. 
23, 4),  and  lines  ending  with  monosyllables  ((?.,  i.  3, 19  ;  1. 19, 13 ;  iv.  i,  33). 


796.  Phaldecean  {Hendecasyllabic). 


X 


Passer  mortuus  est  meae  puellae.         ^ 

Arida  mode  pdniic(e)  expolltum  ^     >''      ^^  \  j^  ^  \  ^  ^  \ 

Tuae  Lesbia  sint  satis  superque.  Cat.  v^  :  1— 

Notes.— 1.  This  verse,  introduced  into  Latin  by  Laevius,  was  used  very  often  by 
Catullus,  Martial,  Pliny  Minor,  Petronius,  and  Statius,  as  well  as  in  the  PtiH- 
pia  and  elsewhere. 

2.  In  Greek  the  Basis  was  not  unfreqnently  an  Iambus.  So,  too,  in  Catullus, 
but  the  tendency  in  Latin  was  to  make  it  a  Spondee  ;  thus,  in  the  Pi'iapSa,  Petronius, 
and  Martial  it  is  always  so,  while  Statius  has  but  one  case  of  a  Trochee,  and  AusoNiua 
but  one  of  an  Iambus. 

3.  The  principal  Ca^ura  is  the  slmiguind.na;  but  Catullus  uses  also  almost  as  fre- 
quently Diaeresis  after  the  second  foot.  Occasionally  there  is  a  Diaeresis  after  the  third 
foot,  supplemented  by  a  Second  Trochee  Caesura. 

.  4.  Elision  is  very  common  in  Catullus  ;  in  the  Pfiapia,  Martial,  and  later  it  is 
very  rare,  if  we  exclude  Aphaeresis  from  consideration.  Hardening  (723)  is  occasional, 
and  Catullus  shows  a  few  cases  of  Semi-hiatus.  A  monosyllabic  ending  is  very  rare, 
with  the  exception  of  es  and  est- 

5.  Catullus,  in  55,  apparently  shows  a  mixture  of  regular  Phalaeceana  and  spurious 
Phalaeceans  in  which  the  Dactyl  is  supplanted  by  a  Spondee.  The  poem  is  still  under 
discussion. 

One  Dactyl,  with  Double  Basis- 
797.  Sapphic  {Hendecasyllahic). 

X  X 

Audiet  Gives  f  acuisse  ferrum,  Hor.  — »-^  j  — >  j  —  \  ^.a^  \  —\j\—\j 


Notes. — 1.  In  the  Greek  measure,  often  retained  in  Catullus,  the  Dactyl  is 
ured  -»^  o- ;  in  Horace,  owing  to  a  strong  Ciesura  after  the  long  it  Is  regularly v-a^. 


478  VERSIFICATION. 

Further,  Catullus,  like  the  Greeks,  employed  occasionally  a  Trochee  in  the  second 
foot  ;  Horace  made  it  a  rule  to  employ  bn\y  a  Spondee  there. 

2.  The  regular  Caesura  in  Latin  is  the  shmquindria  ;  but  the  Third  Trochee  (784, 
N.  2)  is  found  not  unfrequently  in  Catullus  and  Horace,  but  not  later.  The  usage 
of  Horace  is  peculiar  in  this  respect :  In  the  first  and  second  books  there  are  seven 
cases  in  two  hundred  and  eighty-five  verses  ;  in  the  third  none  at  all  ;  in  the  fourth 
twenty-two  in  one  hundred  and  five  verses  ;  in  the  Carmen  Scecitlare  nineteen  in 
fifty-seven  verses. 

3.  Elision  is  very  common  in  Catullus,  but  occurs  in  Horace  only  in  about  one 
verse  in  ten.  Later  usage  tends  to  restrict  Elision.  Licenses  are  extremely  rare  in  the 
classical  period.  So  Horace  shows  one  example  of  Diastole  (0.,  ii.  6, 14).  Mono- 
syllabic endings  are  not  common,  but  the  word  is  usually  attached  closely  with  what 
precedes.    The  last  syllable  is  regularly  long. 

4.  Seneca  shows  some  peculiarities  :  occasionally  a  Dactyl  in  the  second  foot,  or  a 
Spondee  in  the  third  ;  occasionally  also  Dialysis. 


One  Dactyl  with  Double  Basis  and  Anacrusis. 

798.  Alcaic  (Greater)  Hendeeasyllahic. 

Vides  nt  alta  |  stet  nive  candidum     >:^v^  [  ^>  \  ^k^  |  ^w  |  jl  /\ 
Soracte  nee  iaiu  ||  sustineaut  onus,  Hor. 

Notes.— 1.  The  second  Basis  is  always  a  Spondee  ;  the  few  exceptions  having  been 
emended.  The  Anacrusis  is  regularly  long  ;  Horace  shows  no  exception  in  the  fourth 
book  and  very  few  in  the  first  three.    The  last  syllable  may  be  long  or  short. 

2.  The  regular  Caesura  is  a  Diaeresis  after  the  second  foot ;  Horace  shows  but  two 
exceptions  in  six  hundred  and  thirty-four  verses  (O.,  i.  37, 14  ;  iv.  14, 17).  A  few  others 
show  imperfect  Csesurae,  as  O.,  1. 16,  21  ;  i.  37,  5  ;  11. 17,  21. 

3.  In  regard  to  Elision,  the  facts  are  the  same  as  in  the  case  of  the  Sapphic. 

4.  Licenses  are  not  common  :  Diastole  occurs  in  H.,  0.,  in.  5, 17  ;  Hardening 
(72S)  occurs  in  H.,  6>.,  iii.  4,  41  ;  iii.  6,6.  Tmesis  is  not  unfrequent  in  forms  of 
quicunic[ue  (H.,  0.,i.  9, 14  ;  1. 16, 2  ;  i.  27, 14). 

Two  Dactyls. 

799.  -Alcaic  (Lesser)  or  Decasyllabic. 

Vertere funeribns  trinmphos,  Hor.  a^«^  \  -^y^  \  j-\j  \  s.^' 

NoTB.— The  Caeenra  is  regularly  the  shniternaria,  occasionally  the  Second  Trochee. 
Elision  occurs  a  little  less  often  in  this  measure  than  in  the  Hendeeasyllahic.  The  last 
syllable  is  usually  long.    Diastold  occurs  in  H.,  0.,  11.  13,  16. 

In  all  these,  the  Dactyl  has  a  diminished  value.  More  questionable 
is  the  iogaoedic  character  of  the  Greater  Archilochian  : 

800.  Archilochian  (Greater)  =  Dactylic  Tetrameter  and 
Trochaic  Tripody. 

Solvitur    ^cris    hiems    gratS    vice  |  v^is    et    Fav^nl,  Hok, 


VERSIFICATIOIS'.  479 

If  measured  logaoedically,  the  two  shorts  of  the  Dactyl  must  be  re- 
duced in  value  to  one  {y.^  =  w),  and  the  logaoedic  scheme  is 

Logaoedic  tetrapody  +  Logaoedic  tetrapody  with  Syncope. 

Note.— Diaeresis  is  always  found  after  the  fourth  foot,  which  is  always  Dactylic. 
The  principal  Caesura  is  the  semiqianaria.  In  the  third  foot  a  Spondee  is  preferred, 
whereas  the  Greek  model  has  more  often  the  Dactyl. 

801.  Chorimnhic   Rhythms.  —When  a  logaoedic  series  is 
syncopated,  apparent  choriambi  arise.     Wiiat  is   [  -^^  |  l_  | 
seems  to  be  —  ww— .     Genuine  choriambi  do   not  exist  in 
Latin,  except,  perhaps,  in  the  single  line  Pl.,  Men.,  no. 

802.  Asclepiadean  (Lesser). 

This  verse  is  formed  by  a  Catalectic  Pherecratean  followed  by  a 
Catalectie  Aristophanic. 

MaecSnSs  atavis  ||  Sdite  regjbos,     ^ 

HOR,  — >    l^v^    |i_^[|Aj,^    I    ^v^    [    ^. 

Notes.— 1.  There  should  he  Diaeresis,  complete  or  incomplete  (i.e.,  weakened  hy 
Elision),  between  the  two  halves.  Only  two  exceptions  are  cited  (H.,  0.,  ii.  12,  25  ;  iv. 
8, 17).  The  Caesura  is  regularly  the  sSmUer?td?ia  in  Horace,  less  often  the  Second 
Trochee. 

2.  Elision  occurs  about  as  often  as  in  the  Elegiac  Pentameter.  It  occurs  most  often 
in  the  first  Dactyl  and  in  the  stichic  measure.  The  final  syllable  may  be  short  or 
long ;  but  a  monosyllable  is  rare.  Licenses  are  likewise  rare,  as  Diastole  (H.,  0.,  i. 
3,36). 

803.  Asclepiadean  {Greater). 

Niillani  Vare  sacra  \\  vfte  prius  f  s^veris  arborem,  Hor. 

X 

Note.— This  verse  differs  from  the  preceding  by  having  a  Catalectic  Adonic  (792) 
inserted  between  the  two  halves.  Diaeresis  always  separates  the  parts  in  Horace.  The 
rules  of  Elision  are  the  same  as  in  the  preceding  verse. 

804.  Sapphic  {Greater). 

Ti  deQs   orS  Sybarin  \  cur  properas  amando,  Hor. 

X  X 

^  \^    I    .z.>    |Ayw    |i-^||-^v.y    I    ^w    ji-^l    —  A 

Note.— This  verse  differs  from  the  lesser  Sapphic  by  the  insertion  of  a  catalectic 
Adonic.  It  is  found  only  in  Horace  (0.,  i.  8).  Diaeresis  always  occurs  after  the  fourth 
foot,  and  there  is  also  a  semiquindria  Caesura. 


480  VERSIFICATION. 

805.  Pridpean  {Glyconic  +  Pherecratean). 

Hunc  lucum  tibi  dedico  j]  consecroque  Priape,  Cat. 

X  X 

Note.— Diaeresis  always  follows  the  Glyconic,  but  neither  Hiatus  nor  Syllaba  Anceps 
is  allowable.    The  verse  occurs  in  Cat.  17  and  Pj^iap.  85. 

Cretic  and  Bacchic  Rhythms. 

806.  These  passionate  rhythms  are  found  notunfrequently 
in  Plautus  and  occasionally  elsewhere.  They  both  belong 
to  the  Quinqnepartite  or  Five-Eighths  class. 

The  distribution  of  the  Creticus  is  3  +  2  morae. 
The  metrical  value  of  the  Creticus  is  —  ^  -  (Amphimacer). 
For  it  may  be  substituted  the  First  Paeon,  —  ^  ^  w,  or  the 
Fourth  Paeon,  v-^  w  ^— . 

Note.— Double  resolution  in  the  same  foot  is  not  allowable,  and  there  is  rarely  more 
than  one  resolution  in  a  verse.  Instead  of  the  middle  short  an  irrational  long  is  some- 
times found. 

807.  I'etrameter  Acatalectic.  j-i>  j-  \  j.  ^  ^  \  ^  ^^  jl  |  ^  kj  ^ 
Ex  boni3  p8ssum(i)  et  fraudulentissumi,  Pl.,  Capt.,  235. 

Note.— Resolution  is  not  allowed  at  the  end  nor  in  the  second  foot  immediately  be- 
fore a  Ciesura.  The  Arsis  immediately  preceding  (i.e.,  of  the  second  and  fourth  foot) 
is  regularly  pure. 

808.  Tetrameter  Catalectic.  ^  kj  j-  \  ^kj  j-  \  ^kj  ^  \  ^  — 

Da  ini(lii)  h6c  mel  meum  si  in(g)  amgs  s(i)aud6s,  Pl.,  Trin.,  244. 

Note.— The  existence  of  such  lines  is  disputed,  but  the  balance  of  authority  seema 
to  be  in  favor  of  recognizing  them. 

809.  Dimeter  Acatalectic. 

Iir6sce  salt(eni)  hunc  quis  est,  Pl.,  Ps.,  262.  jc  ^  jl  \  ^kj  j. 

Note.— This  vei-se  is  found  usually  at  the  close  of  a  Cretic  system,  or  with  Trochaic 
Septenarii.  It  follows  the  same  rules  as  the  Tetrameter,  that  is,  the  last  long  is  not 
resolved  and  the  second  Arsis  is  kept  pure. 

810.  Acatalectic  Cretic  Trimeters  are  rare  and  not  always  certain. 

Compare  Pl.,  Trin.,  267,  269,  271  ;  Ps.,  1119  ;  Most.,  338  ;  Cata- 
lectic Trimeters  and  Dimeters  are  even  more  uncertain.  Compare  Pl., 
Trin.,  275  ;  True,  121. 

811.  The  Bacchius  has  the  following  measure  :  v^  ^  ^,  =  1  + 
2  +  2  morae  (J"J  J),  or  if  the  descending  form  -^  ^  w  be  re- 
garded as  the  normal  one  2+2  +  1  morae  (jj/^). 


VERSIFICATION".  48 1 

Fcr  the  long  two  shorts  are  sometimes  siibstituted.  On  the  other 
hand,  an  irrational  long  may  be  used  for  the  short,  and  occasionally 
two  shorts  are  also  thus  used. 

812.  Bacchic  Tetrameter. 

Quibus  nee  locust  ullu'  nee  spgs  parata  ^  ^  j.  \  \j  j-  j-  \  kj  j.  jl  |  ^^6 
Misericordior  nulla  mist  fgminanim  \^  o  \j  j.  |  kj  x.  ^  \  ^  x.  ^  \  ^^6 

Note.— In  this  verse  there  is  usaally  a  Caesura  after  either  the  second  or  third 
Iambus  ;  rarely  Diairesis  after  the  second  Bacchius.  The  Arsis  is  kept  pure  in  the 
second  and  fourth  feet  if  the  following  long  closes  a  word.  Not  more  than  one  dissyl- 
labic Arsis  is  allowable.  Usually  there  is  only  one  resolved  Thesis,  very  rarely  two, 
never  more  than  three. 

813.  Dimeter  Acatalectic. 

Ad  aetat(em)  agundam,  Pl.,  Trin,,  232.  \j  x.  x.  \  kj  x.  x. 

Note.— This  is  rare  except  at  the  close  of  a  Bacchic  series,  to  form  the  transition 
to  another  rhythm. 

814.  Bacchic  Hexameter  oceuvs  in  nine  lines  in  a  monologue  in  Pl., 
Am.,  633-642.  Hypennetric  combination  into  systems  is  found  in  Pl,, 
3Ie7i.,  571  ff,  and  Varro,  Sat.,  p.  195  (r.). 


Ionic  Rhythm. 

815.  The  Ionic  Rliytlim  is  represented  by  lonicus  a  mfiiore 

^  ^  J  J  jj      For  the  lonicus  a  maiore  may  be  substituted 

the  Ditrochaeus  —  w  — v./.    This  is  called  Anaclasis  {hreaJcing- 
up). 

The  verse  is  commonly  anacrustic,  so  that  it  begins  with 
the  thesis  ^  w  .-  — .     Such  verses  are  called  Ionic!  a  minore. 
The  second  long  has  a  strong  secondary  ictus. 

In  the  early  Latin,  beginning  with  Ennius,  the  verse  was  used  with 
much  license.  Resolution  of  the  long  syllables  was  common  as  well  as 
the  use  of  irrational  long,  and  the  contraction  of  two  short  syllables 
into  a  long.     Horace  alone  shows  the  pure  Ionic. 

The  lonicus  is  an  excited  measure,  and  serves  to  express  the  frenzy 
of  distress  as  well  as  the  madness  of  triumph. 

816.  Tetrameter  Catalectic  Ionic  a  maiore  (Sotadean). 

This  measure,  introduced  by  Ennius,  Avas  used  with  great  freedom 
by  the  earlier  poets  ;  but  a  stricter  handling  is  found  in  later  Latin 
poets,  as  Petronius,  Martial,  etc. 

31 


482  VERSIFICATION. 

Nam  quam  varia  sint  genera 

poematorum,  Baebi,  ^  —  v^  v^w  |  j-  ^kj  wv^  |  .^.w  —  >  I  ^  /\ 

Quamque  longe  discinct(a)  ali(a) 

ab  aliis,  sic  nSsce. — Accius.  ^w  —  >  |  ^  —  v^w  |  ^wv^  —  >  1  ^a 

Later  Latin  : 

The  most  common  scheme  is  the  pure  Ionic  with  Anaclasis,  espe- 
cially in  the  third  foot.  Irrational  longs  are  not  used,  and  there  is 
rarely  more  tlian  one  resolution,  as  :  ^^^—  w  w  or  — v_/v^  w  w. 

Molles  vetergs  DeliacI  manu  recisi  ^  —  ww^  —  ww^^^v^^  — 

ter  corripui  terribilem  manu  bipennem.  ^  —  ww^— wv^^w^^w^  — 
— Prop. 

817.  A  combination  of  the  Ionic  a  mciidre  into  systems  is  found  in 
Laevius,  who  has  a  system  of  ten  followed  by  a  system  of  nine.  Some 
traces  of  similar  arrangement  have  been  observed  in  the  Satires  of 
Varro. 

818.  Tetrameter  Cataledic  Ionic  a  mitiore  {Galliamhic). 

This  verse  was  introduced  by  Varro  in  his  Me?iippea?i  Satires,  and 
appears  also  in  Catullus,  63,  and  in  some  fragments  of  Maecenas. 

In  Catullus  the  two  short  syllables  may  be  contracted  (ten  times 
in  the  first  foot,  six  times  in  the  third),  and  the  long  may  be  resolved, 
but  not  twice  in  the  same  Dimeter  (except  63),  and  very  rarely  in  the 
first  foot  of  the  second  Dimeter  (once  in  91),  but  almost  regularly  in 
the  penultimate  long.  Diaeresis  between  the  two  Dimeters  is  regular. 
Anaclasis  is  found  in  the  majority  of  the  lines  ;  regularly  in  the  first 
Dimeter  (except  18,  54,  75). 

The  frequent  resolutions  and  conversions  give  this  verse  a  peculiarly 
wild  character. 

Ordinary  Scheme  : 

Without  Anaclasis  : 

With  Anaclasis  : 

Anacrustic  ScJie'^e : 

Without  Anaclasis  :  kj  kj  :  ^  —  kj  ^  |  ^— f«^w  |  j:.  —  kj^  (r,._j 

With  Anaclasis  :         w  -^  :  ^  w  —  ^  |  ^--\^  w  |  ^  v^  —  v  j  ixj  —  j| 

Et  ear(um)  omni(a)  adirem  furi- 

bunda  latibula  v^o-^  —  kj  kj  ^  —  wv^^v^\^<^v^^ 

Qu5  nCs  decet  citatis  celerare  tri- 

pUdiis  —  -^  ^  —  w^  —  wvy^vyvyv^w.^ 

ItaqTi(e)  ut  domum  Cyb6b6s  teti- 

gere  lassulae  ^^^>^^v^  —  \j  ^  —  <^  v^jlw  —  w-c 


:  \j  \j  ^  —  Kj  Kj  JL  —  \j  \j  J.  —  \j  Kj  x. 

'U  \J  ^  \J  \J  ^  \^  \J  ^  \J  <J  ^ . 


VERSIFICATION".  483 

Super  alta  vectus  Attis  celeri  rate 

maria  ^  ^  jl  kj  —  \j  ^  —  kj\j^kj\^\j\j.c 

lam  iam  dolet  quod  eg!  iam  iam- 

que  paeuitet. — Cat.  — ^v^  —  <^^ jl  kj  —  ^  j^ 

819.  Dimeter  Catalectic  Ionic  a  minare  (Anacreotitic). 

This  verse  is  found  first  in  Laevius,  then  in  Seneca,  Petronius, 
and  later.  Anaclasis  is  regular  in  the  first  foot.  The  long  syllable 
may  be  resolved,  or  the  two  shorts  at  the  beginning  may  be  contracted. 
The  verse  may  end  in  a  Syllaba  Anceps. 

Vener(em)  igitur  alm(um)  adSrans  wwvi/»^w^w^  — 

Seu  fgnun(a)  isve  mas  est  —  ^  w  ^  vy  ^  — 

It(a)  ut  alba  Noctilucast.  wv^-^v^^iw^  — 

Note.— Owing  to  the  similarity  of  the  verse  to  the  Iambic  Quaternarius  Catiilectic  it 
is  also  called  the  Ilemiambic. 

Compound  Verses. 

820.  lambelegus  {Iambic  Dimeter  and  Dactylic  Trimeter  Cat.). 
This  verse  occurs  only   in   the  second  Archilochian    Strophe  of 

Horace,  and  is  often  scanned  as  two  verses  : 

Tu  vina  Torquatd  mov3  {{  consule  pressa  mc6. — Hor. 

821.  Elegiamhus  {Dactylic  Trimeter  Cat.  and  Iambic  Dimeter). 
This  verse  occurs  only  in  the  third  Archilochian  Strophe  of  Horace, 

and  is  often  scanned  as  two  verses  : 

Dgsinet  imparibus  ||  certare  submStuspudor.— Hor. 


A 

> 


Ji.  w 


I -.11 


822.    yersus  Reizianus  {Iambic  Dimeter  and  Ariapaestic  Tripody 
Catalectic). 

Redi,  qu6  fugis  nunc  ?  ten6  tenS.  ||  Quid  stolidg  clamas  1 
Qui(a)  ad  tris  viros  i(am)  ego  dsferam  ||  Nomen  ttiOm.    Qu(am)  obrem  1 
Pl.,  Aul.,  415. 

K.KJ  JL   'U  >       \1/  \^  \J  —    II    ^  \J  ^  — 

V-A^   ^    <^  KJ    KJ    ^  \J   II     ^  ^  — 

Note.— From  the  time  of  Reiz,  after  whom  this  verse  has  been  named,  it  has  l>een 
the  subject  of  a  great  deal  of  discussion.     In  regard  to  the  first  part  of  the  verse  there 


484      .  VERSIFICATION". 

is  considerable  unanimity,  in  regard  to  the  second  opinions  differ.  Some  regard  It  as 
an  Iambic  Dimeter  Catalectic  Syncopated  (^^  j^  ^ l^  jl  >u ) ;  others  as  an  Iambic 
Tripody  Catalectic  (v^^w^  —  /\).  Spengel  regards  it  as  a  Hypercatalectic  Ana- 
paestic Monometer,  and  he  has  been  followed  with  a  variation  in  the  nomenclature  in 
the  above  scheme.  Leo  regards  it  as  Logaoedic.  The  most  recent  view  (Ivlotz) 
regards  it  as  sometimes  Logaoedic,  and  sometimes  Anapaestic. 

823.  I-  Plautus  shows  several  verses  compounded  of  a  Cretie  Di- 
meter and  a  Catalectic  Trochaic  Tripody.  These  verses  are  usually, 
but  not  always,  separated  by  Diaeresis.     Examples  :  Ps.,  1285,  12S7. 

2.  Some  authorities  consider  verses  like  Pl.,  3Iost.,  693,  Bud.,  209, 
compounded  of  a  Cretie  Dimeter  and  a  Clausula.  Others  regard  them 
as  Catalectic  Cretie  Tetrameters. 


The  Cantica  of  Early  Latin. 

824.  The  construction  of  the  Cantica  (in  the  narrow  sense)  of 
Plautus  and  Terence  is  still  a  matter  of  dispute.  Three  opinions 
have  been  advanced.  One  looks  at  them  as  antistrophic,  following 
the  scheme  a.b.b.  ;  others  hold  that  the  scheme  is  a.b.a.  The  third 
view  is  that  with  some  exceptions  the  Cantica  are  irregular  composi- 
tions, without  a  fixed  principle  of  responsion. 

In  Terence,  Trochaic  Octonarii  are  always  followed  by  Trochaic 
Septenarii,  and  very  frequently  the  Trochaic  Septenarii  are  followed 
by  Iambic  Octonarii.  In  Plautus  there  are  long  series  of  Cretie  and 
Bacchic  verses,  and  sometimes  these  alternate,  without,  however,  any 
regular  scheme,  with  other  verses. 

A  Bacchic  Trochaic  Canticum  is  found  in  Pl., -Sferc,  335-363,  as 
follows  :  I.  2  Bacc.  Tetram. ;  II.  4  Anap.  Dim.;  III.  i  Troch.  Octon.; 
IV,  13  Bacc.  Tetram.;  V.  i  Troch.  Octon.;  VI.  2  Bacc.  Tetram.;  VII. 

1  Troch.  Octon. ;  VIII.  2  Bacc.  Tetram. ;  IX.  2  Troch.  Octon. 

A  Trochaic  Iambic  Canticum  is  Ter.,  Ph.,  153-163.     A.  153-157: 

2  Troch.  Octon.;  i  Troch.  Sept.;  i  Iamb.  Octon.  B.  158-163;  i  Troch. 
Octon. ;  2  Troch.  Sept. ;  3  Iamb.  Octon. ;  i  Iamb.  Quater.  (Clausula). 

The  Cantica  of  Later  Latin. 

825.  I-  The  Cantica  of  Seneca  are  composed  mostly  in  Anapaestic 
Dimeters,  closed  frequently,  though  not  necessarily,  by  a  Monometer. 
A  Dactyl  is  common  in  the  first  and  third  feet.  The  Spondee  is  like- 
wise very  common,  a  favorite  close  being  —  v^  »^  —  ji .  The  Diaeresis 
between  the  Dimeters  is  regular.  Examples  :  fferc.  Fur.,  125-203. 
In  Ag.,  310-407,  Dimeters  and  Monometers  alternate. 

2.  Iambic  Dimeters,  occasionally  alternating  with  Trimeters,  but 
usually  stichic,  are  found  occasionally  ;  as  Med.,  771-786. 


VERSIFICATION".  485 

3.  Peculiar  to  Seneca  is  the  use  of  a  large  variety  of  Logaoedic 
measures  in  his  Cantica.  So  we  find  not  unfrequently  the  following 
in  stichic  repetition:  Lesser  AsclepiadSans,  Glyconics,  Sapphic  Hen- 
decasyllabics,  Adonics,  and  other  imitations  of  lioratian  measures  ; 
but  there  are  few  traces  of  antistrophic  arrangement. 

Lyric   Metres  of  Horace. 

826.  In  the  schemes  that  follow,  the  Roman  numerals  refer  to 
periods,  the  Arabic  to  the  number  of  feet  or  bars,  the  dots  indicate 
the  end  of  a  line. 

I.  Asclepiadean  Strophe  No.  1.  Lesser  Asclepiadean  Verse  (803 
repeated  in  tetrastichs. 

X 

—  >    I   ^v^    (  l_  I  -xy^    I   -w    I    -^    II  3 


->    1-^^    l^ll-^w    1-^    I    -^    11 


3 


->    I  -^w   |._1|^^   I  -^   I   -^    I  3 


->   l-^l-i-w   I-..   1-^11 

0.,i.  i;  III.  30;  IV.  8. 


3 


II.  Asclepiadean    Strophe    No.   2.      Glyconics  (795)    and    Lesser 
Asclepiadean  (802)  alternat?ing,  and  so  forming  tetrastichs. 


->  i---  I'- II---  I—  i  -/^ll  I 

->    I  ^w    I  -w    I    -^   I  4 

->  1-^- 1 -i--- 1 -- 1-/^11    i 

0.,  1.  3,  13,  19,  36;  III.  9,  15,  19,  24,  25,  28;  IV.  I,  3. 

III.  Asclepiadean  Strophe  No.  3.     Three  Lesser  Asclepiadean  Verses 
(802)  followed  by  a  Glyconic  (795).  * 

X 

—  >     l^v.^     |l-_||-«.^v_/     I     —  v^ 


A     3 

'-  I  -w  I  - 


~>    I--W    |l_  |-u^   I   -w   I   -^     3 


A 
O.y  I.  6,  15,  24,  33;  n-  12;  III.  10,  16;  IV.  5,  12 


486  VERSIFICATION".' 

IV.  Asclepiadean  Strophe  No.  4.     Two  Lesser  Asclepiadean  Verses 
(802),  a  Pherecratean  (794),  and  a  Glyconic  (795). 

I.   ->    l^w    i^i-^w    l-w    I-      I    1.3 

^^  3 

->    1  -^w    I  ^Ij-...^    I   -^   I   _^||         • 

xL ->  i-^^  I- I -.11  n.' 

A  4 

->  j-^^  I -w  I -^11  ; 

0.,  I.  5,  14,  21,  23;  III.  7,  13;  IV.  13. 

V.  AscUpiadeari  Strophe  No.    5.     Greater  Asclepiadean  (803),  re- 
peated in  fours. 

^^  2 

3 

->  1-^^  l^ll--..  |l_||-^w  I-^  I  _^||  3 


->!--  I-11--  l-ll--)--  I 


A"  I 


0.,  I.  II,  18;  IV.  10. 

VI.  Sapphic  Strophe.  Three  Lesser  Sapphics  (797),  and  an  Adonic 
(792),  which  is  merely  a  Clausula.  In  the  Sapphic  Horace  regularly 
breaks  the  Dactyl. 

X  X 

-w  I  ->  I  -t^  I  -^  I  -^  I       5 

X  X 

-^  I  ->   I  -f^A^  I  -w   I  -w  II       5 
XX  g 

—  w  I  —  >  I  ~  t  ^--^  I  —  ^  I  —  '^  i 

O.,  I.  2,  10,  12,  20,  22,  25,  30,  32,  38;  II.  2,  4,  6,  8,  10,  16;  III.  8,  II, 
14,  18,  20,  22,  27;  IV.  2,  6,  11;  Carmen  Saeculare. 

NoTK.— In  Greek  the  third  and  fourth  verses  run  together  to  form  a  single  verse. 
In  Latin  tliis  is  rare  ;  one  case  is  found  in  Catullus,  ii,  11,  and  three  in  Horace,  0., 
1.  2, 19  ;  25, 11  ;  II.  16,  7  ;  but  the  occurrence  of  Hiatus  between  the  two  lines  in  Horace 
(0.,  I.  2,  47  ;  12,  7  ;  12,  31  :  22,  15,  etc.)  may  be  considered  as  indicating  that  the  verses 
were  conceived  as  separate.  Elision  and  Hiatus  are  also  occasionally  found  in  the 
lines.  Elision,  second  and  third:  Cat.,  11,  22;  H.,  (5.,  11.  2, 18  ;  16,  34;  iv.  2,22; 
third  and  fourth:  Cat.,  11, 19;  H.,  0.,  iv.  2,23;  C..S'.,47.  Hiatus,  first  and  second: 
H.,  O.,  I.  2,  41  ;  12,  25  ;  11. 16,  5  ;  iii.  11,  29  ;  27,  33  ;  second  and  third  :  H.,  (?.,  i.  a,  6  ; 
12,  6  ;  25, 18  ;  30,  6  ;  n.  2, 6  ;  4, 6  ;  in.  n,  50  ;  27, 10. 


VERSIFICATION^.  48/ 

VII,  Lesser  Sapphic  Strophe.  Aristophanic  (793),  and  Greater 
Sapphic  (804).     Two  pairs  are  combined  into  a  tetrastich. 

-^   I   ->    I  -^w   l^l^w   I  -w   Iu_l   -^  I       I 

-^^      i     -^      j     L_     I      -^     j  ^ 

-o  I  ->  1  -^^  Jl_|i-^^  j  -^  |._l  _     J    J 

O.,  I.  8.  ^^ 

VIII.  Alcaic  Stroplie.  Two  Alcaic  verses  of  eleven  syllables  (798), 
a  Trochaic  Quaternarius  with  Anacrusis  (772),  and  one  Alcaic  verse  of 
ten  (799). 


I.^--l-^|--l--l-Al 


X  X 

>  .       .  .  I       > 


I---1--  1-/^8 


:  —  w        —  —  vy    I    —         i 


I.   5 

5 

IL 
4 

4 


0.,  T.  9,  16,  17,  26,  27,  29,  31,  34,  35,  37  ;  ir.  I,  3,  5,  7,  9,  II,  13,  14, 
15,  17,  19,  20;  III.  I,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  17,  21,  23,  26,  29;  IV.  4,  9,  15,  17. 

Note.— Elision  between  the  verses  is  much  more  rare  than  in  tlie  Sapphic  strophe  ; 
it  occurs  but  twice  :  O.,  n.  3,  27  ;  in.  29, 35.    Hiatus,  on  the  other  hand,  is  very  common. 

IX.  Archilochian  Strophe  No.  1.  A  Dactylic  Hexameter  (784),  and 
a  Lesser  Archilochian  (788),  two  pairs  to  a  tetrastich- 


1    —  '-'  v^    j 
—  v^  \_/    1 

1 -t -- 1 

—  ^  ^   I 

—  \^  1^    J 

—  1 

3 
3 

3 

W  w    j 

_  t  Jl.  1 

—  vy  w    1 

-w^   1 

1 I 

3 
3 

3 

O.,  IV.  7. 

X.  ArcJdlocliian  Strophe  No.  2.     A  Dactylic  Hexameter  (784),  and 
an  lambelegus  (820). 

—  o'v_/    I    —  vyvy    j    —  vyvy    j    —  Kj  Kj    j   —  Kj  \j    J 11 

>  .        i     > 


i-"|-A« 


WW    I    —  <J  \J 


|-A« 
Epod.,  13. 


488  VERSincATioK. 

XI.  Archiloehian  Strophe  No.  3.     An  Iambic  Trimeter  (762),  fol- 
lowed by  an  Elegiambus  (821). 


>  :_^  I  _>  {  _^  1  _      II 
\j  '       w  '  A 

Epod.,  II. 

XII.  Archiloehian  Strophe  No.  4.  A  Greater  Archiloehian  (800), 
and  a  Trimeter  Iambic  Catalectic  (763).  Two  pairs  combined  to  form 
a  tetrastich. 

^^w»V_;^v..^^^>^^^V>'^v>'<^    [j    JL  \J  —  \J  —  <-/ 
\J  jH.  \J  —  ^  ^  <U  —  O^VJ 

a,  I.  4. 

This  verse  may  be  considered  as  Logaoedic,  thus  (800)  : 
>    1       >    1       > 


«^X-»     ■  v>>^     '  V-*>V 


-^^  i  -^  1  -^  I  •- 1  -A 


>:-^|->|-^|-^I^|_/,ft  6 


> 


v>\-/ 


XIII.  Alcmanian  Strophe.     A  Dactylic  Hexameter  (784),  followed 
by  a  Catalectic  Dactylic  Tetrameter  (787). 

O.,  I.  7,  28;  JEpod.,  12. 

Note.— The  Tetrameter  may  be  con&idered  acatalectic  with  a  Spondee  in  the  fourth 
place  (787,  n.). 

XIV.  lamUc  Trimeter  repeated  (762). 

>:--|-tl  —  l-^l  —  l-A 
Epod.,  17. 

XV.  lamUc  Strophe.     Iambic  Trimeter  (702),  and  Dimeter  (765), 


>  . 

--I 

-^1 

--I 

-^1 

—  K^ 

>  . 

:--  1 

-l\ 

--  1 

!-A 

Epoil., 

l-IO. 

VERSIFICATION".  489 

XVI.  Pythiambic  Strophe  No.  1.  A  Dactylic  Hexameter  (784),  or 
Versus  Pythius,  and  an  Iambic  Dimeter  (705). 

^Kj\j  ^\^\^  -^'^\j  j:-^  \j  ^  \j  \j  ^  \j 
\j  J-  \j  —  \j  J-  ^  — 

Epod.^  14,  15. 

XVII.  Pythiamhic  Strophe  No.  2.  A  Dactylic  Hexameter  (784),  and 
an  Iambic  Trimeter  (7C0). 

J-   KJ\^  .Z.  V^'^  -t-  V^W  -i-  \-/^J  .£-    \J    \J    -i-    ^J 
t^^V^   \J    ^    \J  \^    ^    \J  — 

Epod.,  16. 

XVIII.  Trochaic  Strophe.  A  Catalectic  Trochaic  Dimeter  (772), 
and  a  Catalectic  Iambic  Trimeter  (763).  Two  pairs  make  a  tetra- 
stich. 


JL   vy  —  <^   -£.   W  — 

\J  ^  \y  —  \J  JL  'U  —  ^^-^.^-' 


a,  II.  18. 


XIX.  The  Ionic  System  is  found  once  in  Horace  ;  it  consists  of  ten 
lonici  a  mindre  feet,  variously  arranged  by  metrists.  Some  regard  the 
system  as  comi)Oscd  of  ten  Tetrameters  followed  by  a  Dimeter.  Others, 
with  more  probability,  divide  into  two  Dimeters  followed  by  two  Tri- 
meters.    The  scheme  may  be  made  a  maiore  by  Anacrusis. 

Joniciis  a  mindre  scheme  : 


KJ  \J   JL  KJ  \J  ^ 


Miserarum  (e)st  neque  amorl 

dare  ludum  neque  dulci  ^^<^-^  —  ^^w-^—  ]| 

mala  vino  laver(e)  aut  exanimari  v^v^.^  —  w^^  —  ww^—  | 

metuentes  patruae  verbera  linguae  kj^j^  —  ^^^^  —  ^^x.—  | 

Imiicus  d  maiore  scheme  : 

\^  \y  : wv^l I  I,      2 

A 
^«^: v^^l II  '  2 

A 

\J    ^      : V-y«^| WV^I II.  g 

A 

v^\^: wv-/| ww| _ 

A 
0.,  III.  12. 


490 


VERSIFICATION". 


827.     Index  of  Horatian  Odes  and  Metres. 


Book.  Ode.           Metre,  i 
I.     1 i.  I 

8 ii.l 

4 xii.  I 

5 iv.  I 

G lii. 

7 xiii. 

8  vii. 

9 viii. 

10 vi. 

11 V. 

12 vi. 

13 ii. 

14 iv. 

15 iii. 

16 viii. 

17 viii. 

18 V. 

19 ii. 

20 vi. 

21 iv. 

22 vi. 

23 iv. 

24 iii. 

25 vi. 

26 viii. 

27 viii. 

28 ...  xiii. 

29 viii. 

30 vi. 

81 viii. 

33 vi. 

33 iii. 

34 viii. 

35 viii. 

36 ii. 

37 viii. 

38 vi. 


Book.  Ode.  Metre. 

II.     1 viii. 

2  vi. 

3 viii. 

4 vi. 

5 viii. 

6 vi. 

7 viii. 

8 vi. 

9 viii. 

10 vi. 

11 viii. 

12 iii. 

13 viii. 

14 viii. 

15 .-  viii. 

16 vi. 

17 viii. 

18 xviii. 

19 viii. 

20 viii. 

III.     1 viii. 

2 viii. 

3 viii. 

4 . .  viii. 

5 viii, 

6  viii. 

7 iv. 

8 vi. 

9 ii. 

10 iii. 

11 ■    vi. 

12 xix. 

13 iv. 

14 vi. 

15 ii. 

16 iii. 

17 viii. 


Book.  Ode.  Metre. 

III.  18 vi. 

19 ii. 

20 vi. 

21 viii. 

22 vi. 

23 viii. 

24 ii. 

25 ii. 

26 viii. 

27. vi. 

28 ii. 

29 viii. 

30 i. 

IV.  1 ii. 

2 vi. 

3 ii. 

4 viii. 

5 iii. 

6 vi. 

7 ix. 

8 i. 

9 viii. 

10 V. 

11 vi. 

12 iii. 

13 iv. 

14 viii. 

15 viii. 

Carmen  Saeculare  vi. 
Epod.  1-10 XV. 

11 xi. 

12 xiii. 

13 x. 

14 xvi. 

15 xvi. 

16. xvii. 

17 xiv. 


APPENDIX. 


ROMAN    CALENDAR. 

The  names  of  the  Roman  months  were  originally  adjectives.  The 
substantive  mensis,  month,  may  or  may  not  be  expressed  :  (mensis) 
lanuarius,  Februarius,  and  so  on.  Before  vVngustus,  the  months  July 
and  August  were  called,  not  lulius  and  Augustus,  but.  Quintilis  and 
Sextflis. 

The  Romans  counted  backward  from  three  points  in  the  month, 
Calends  (Kalendao),  Xones  (Nonae),  and  Ides  (Idtis),  to  which  the  names 
of  the  months  are  added  as  adjectives  :  Kalendae  lanuariae,  Nonae  Fe- 
bruariae,  Idus  Martiae.  The  Calends  are  the  first  day,  the  Nones  the 
fifth,  the  Ides  the  thirteenth.  In  March,  May,  July,  and  October  the 
Nones  and  Ides  are  two  days  later.     Or  thus: 

In  March,  July,  October,  May, 
The  Ides  are  on  the  fifteenth  day, 
The  Nones  the  seventh ;  but  all  besides 
Have  two  days  less  for  Nones  and  Ides. 

In  counting  backward  ('*  come  next  Calends,  next  Nones,  next  Ides  ") 
the  Romans  used  for  "the  day  before"  pridig  with  the  Ace:  pridig 
Kalendas  lanuarias,  Dec.  31 ;  pridie  N5nas  Ian.  =  Jan.  4 ;  pridig  Idus  Ian. 
=  Jan.  12. 

The  longer  intervals  are  expressed  by  ante  diem  tertium,  quartum, 
etc.,  before  the  Accusative,  so  that  ante  diem  tertium  Kal.  Ian.  means 
"  two  days  before  the  Calends  of  Janiuiry ;  "  ante  diem  quartum,  or  a.  d. 
iv.,  or  iv.  Kal.  Ian.,  "three  days  before,"  and  so  on.  This  remarkable 
combination  is  treated  as  one  word,  so  that  it  can  be  used  with  the 
prepositions  ex  and  in  :  ex  ante  diem  iii.  Nonas  lunias  usque  ad  pridig 
Kal.  Septembres,  from  June  3  to  xVugust  31 ;  differre  aliquid  in  ante  diem 
XV.  Kal.  Nov.,  to  postpone  a  7natter  to  the  ISth  of  October. 

Leap  Year. — In  leap  year  the  intercalary  day  was  counted  between 
a.  d.  vi.  Kal.  Mart,  and  a.  d.  vii.  Kal.  Mart.  It  was  called  a.  d.  bis  sex- 
tum  Kal.  Mart.,  so  that  a.  d.  vii.  Kal.  Mart,  corresponded  to  our  February 
23,  just  as  in  the  ordinary  year. 

To  turn   Roman   Dates  into  Englisli. 

For  Nones  and  Ides. — I.  Add  one  to  the  date  of  the  Nones  and  Ides, 
and  subtract  the  given  number. 


492 


ROMAX    SYSTEMS    OF    MEASURE    A^Ti    WEIGHT. 


For  Calends. — II.  Add  two  to  the  days  of  the  preceding  month,  and 
subtract  the  given  luimber. 

Examples:  a.  d.  viii.  Id.  Ian.  (13  +  1  —  8)  =  Jan.  6  ;  a.  d.  iv.  Non. 
Apr.  (o  +  1  -  4)  =:  Apr.  2 ;  a.  d.  xiv.  Kal.  Oct.  (30  +  2  -  14)  =  Sept.  18. 

Fecrr. — To  obtain  the  year  B.C.,  subtract  the  given  date  from  754 
(7o3  B.C.  being  the  assumed  date  of  the  founding  of  Rome,  anno  urbis 
conditae).     To  obtain  the  year  a.d.,  subtract  753. 

Thus  :  Cicero  was  horn  648,  a.  u.  c.  =  106  B.C. 
Augustus  died  767,  a.  u.  c.  =  14  a.d. 

Note.— Before  the  reform  of  the  Calendar  by  Julius  Coesar  in  b.c.  46,  the  year 
consisted  of  355  days,  divided  into  twelve  months,  of  which  March,  May,  Quintliis 
(July),  and  October  had  31  days,  February  28,  the  remainder  29.  To  rectify  the 
Calendar,  every  second  year,  at  the  discretion  of  the  Pcntif.ccs,  a  month  of  varying 
length,  called  mSnsis  intercalaris,  was  inserted  after  the  23d  of  February. 


ROMAN    SYSTEMS   OF   MEASUREMENT. 

Square  Measure. 


Long  Measure. 
4    digit!  =   I  palmus.  loo    pedes, 

4    palmi  =   i  p6s  (11.65  in.).  quadrat! 


I  scripulum. 


6    palmi, 
i\  pedgs 



I  cubitus. 

36    scripula     =  i  clima. 

4    climata      =  i  actus. 

2i  pedes 

= 

1  gradus. 

2    actus          =  1  iugerum  (acre). 

2    gradus,  ) 
5    pedes      ) 

= 

I  passus. 

The  iugerum  contains  28,800 

125    passus 

= 

I  stadium. 

sq.  ft.  Eom.; 

8    stadia 

^^ 

I  mille  passuum 

(mile). 

Eng.  acre  —  43,560  sq.  ft. 

Dry  Measure. 

Liquid  Measure. 

i\  cyathi 

= 

I  acetabulum. 

i^  cyathi         =  i  acetabulum. 

2    acetabula 

= 

I  quartarius. 

2    acetabula  =   i  quartarius. 

2    quartarii 

T= 

1  hemina. 

2    quartarii    =  i  hgmina. 

2    hSmlnae 

= 

I  sextarius. 

2    heminae     =  i  sextarius  (pint). 

8    sextarii 

— 

I  semodius. 

6    sextarii     —   i  congius. 

2    semodil 

I  modius  (peck). 

4    congii        =  I  tirna. 
2    urnae         =  i  amphora. 
20    amphorae  =   i  cuUeus. 

ROMAN 

WEIGHTS. 

3    siliquae 

•=. 

I  obolus. 

2    sicilici        =  T  semuncia. 

2    oboll 

= 

I  scripulum. 

2    semtlnciae  =  i  uncia. 

2    acripula 

= 

I  drachma. 

12    unciae        =  i  libra  (pound). 

2    drachmae 

= 

I  sicilicus, 

ROM  AX    MONEY    AND    NAMES. 


493 


Notes.— 1.  The  multiples  of  the  Uncia  were  sSsctincia  (1?),  sextans  (2),  qua- 
drans  (3),  trigns  (4),  quincunx  (5),  sgmis  ((5),  septunx  (t),  bes  (8),  dodrans  (0),  dex- 
tans  (10),  deunx  (H). 

2.  The  libra  wag  also  called  as  (see  below),  which  latter  is  taken  as  the  unit  in  all 
Tiieasures,  and  the  foregoing  divisions  applied  to  it.  Iler.ce,  by  substituting  as  for 
iugerum,  we  have  deiinx  as  ||  of  a  iugerum,  dextans  as  1§,  etc. 

ROMAN    MONEY. 

The  unit  was  originally  the  as  (which  was  about  a  pound  of  copper), 
with  its  fractional  divisions.  This  gradually  depreciated,  until,  after 
tlie  second  Punic  war,  the  unit  had  become  a  sSstertius,  which  was 
nominally  2^  ass5s. 


2^  asses        =   I  sestertius  (about 
4  cts.). 
2    sestertii  =   i  quinarius. 
2    quinarii  =   i  dinarius. 


25  denarii    =:  i  aureus  (nummus). 
1000  sestertii  =  i  s6stertium 

(I42.94  to  Augustus's  time). 


Note.— Sestertium.  (which  may  be  a  fossilized  Gen.  PI.  =  sestertiOrum)  was 
modified  by  distributives  (rarely  by  cardinals),  thus  :  blna  sestertia,  2000  sesterces. 
But  in  multiples  of  a  million  (deci6ns  centena  milia  sestertium,  ?.  e.,  sester- 
tiOrum),  centena  milia  was  regularly  omitted,  and  sestertium  declined  as  a  neuter 
singular.  HS  stands  as  well  for  sestertius  as  sestertium ;  and  the  meaning  is  regti- 
lated  by  the  form  of  the  numeral ;  thus  HS  viginti  (XX)  =  20  sestertii  J  HS  vicena 
(XX)  =  20  sestertia,  i.e.,  20,000  sestertii. 

ROMAN    NAMES. 

The  Roman  usually  had  three  names  ;  a  nOmen,  indicating  the  gfins, 
a  cSgnomen,  indicating  the  familia  in  the  gens,  and  the  praenQmen,  indi- 
cating the  individual  in  the  familia. 

The  nomina  all  end  in  ius.  The  cognSmina  have  various  forms,  in 
accordance  with  their  derivation.  For  example  :  Q.  Mucins  Scaevola 
(from  scaevos,  Jeff  hand). 

The  praenomina  are  as  follows,  with  Iheir  abbreviations: 


Aulus, 

A. 

Lucius, 

L. 

Quintus, 

Q. 

Appius, 

App. 

Marcus, 

M. 

Servius, 

Ser. 

Gaius, 

C. 

Manius, 

M'. 

Sextus, 

Sex. 

Gnaeus, 

Cn. 

Mamercus, 

Mam. 

Spur  ius, 

Sp. 

Decimus, 

D. 

Numerius, 

Num. 

Titus, 

T. 

Kaes5, 

K. 

Publius. 

P. 

Tiberius, 

Ti..  Tib 

Notes.— 1.  Adoption  from  one  ggns  into  another  was  indicated  by  the  termination 
-ianus.  From  the  fourth  century  a.d.  a  second  c5gn5men  was  also  called  an 
agnomen. 

2.  T3aughters  had  no  peculiar  praenSmina,  but  were  called  by  the  name  of  the  gBns 
in  which  they  were  born.  If  there  were  two,  they  were  distinguished  as  maior  and 
minor ;  if  naore  than  two,  by  the  numerals  tertia,  quarta,  etc. 


INDEX    OF   VERBS. 


INDEX    OF    VERBS. 


[The  References  are  to  the  Sections] 


Ab-(Io,  ero,  -didl,  -ditum,  151,  i, 
ab-ii^o    (ago),    ere,    -i^gi,    -actum, 

160,  I. 
ab-ieio  (iacio),  ere,  -ieci,  -ieetum, 

160,  3. 
ab-luo,  ere,  -lul,  -lutiim,  162. 
ab-nuo,  ere,  -nul  (-nuituriis),  163. 
ab-oleo,  ere,  evi,  itum,  137,  b. 
ab-olesco,  -ere,  -olevi,  -olitum.  140. 
ab-ripio  (rapio),  -ere,  -ripui,  -rep- 

tum,  146. 
abs-condo   (do),    ere,    -di    (-didi), 

ditura,  151,  I. 
ab-sisto,  -ere,  -stiti,  154,  i. 
ab-sum,  -esse,  ab-ful,  a-ful,  117. 
ac-cendo,    -ere,    -ceiidi,   -censum, 

160,  2. 
ac-eido  (cado),  ere,  -cidi,  165,  a. 
ac-cipio  (capio),  ere,  -cepi,    -cep- 

turn,  160,  3. 
ac-colo  (coLo),  ero,  -colul,  -cultum, 

152,  3. 
ac-cumbo,  ere,  -cubui,  -cubitum, 

144. 
ac-curro,    ere,   ac-curri,    -cursum, 

155,  184,  III. 
aceo,  ere,  aeui,  to  be  sow. 
acesco,  ere,  acuI,  to  get  sour. 
ac-quiro    (quaero),    ere,    -quisivl, 

-quisltum,  137,  c. 
acuo,  ere,  acui,  acutura,  162. 
ad-do,  ere,  -did!,  -ditura,  151,  i. 
ad-imo  (emo),  ere,  -emi,  -Cmptum, 

160,  1. 
ad-iplscor,  I,  ad-eptus  sum,  165. 
ad-iuvo,  lire,  -iavi,  -liitum,  158. 
ad-ol(~sco,  ere,  -olevi,  -iiltum,  140. 
ad-orior,  -orirl,  -ortus  sum,  166. 
ad-sclsco,  ere,  -scivl,  -scTtiun,  140. 
ad-sisto,  ere,  -stiti,  154,  i. 
ad-spicio,    ere,    -spexl,    -spectum, 

150,  I. 
ad-sto,  -stare,  -stiti,  151,  2. 
ad-sum,    ad-esse,    ad-ful    (af-fui), 

117. 
ad-vcsperasco,  ere.  avi,  140. 
aegresco,  ere,  to  fall  sick. 
af-fero,    -ferre,    at-tull,    nl-lalum, 

171. 
af-fllgo,  ere,  -flixi,  -flictum,  147,  2. 


ag-gredior,  -gredi,  -gressus,  165. 

a-gnosco,    ere,  a-gnovi,   a-guitum 

(agnoturus),  140. 

ago,  ere,  egi,  actum,  160,  i. 

aio,  175,  I. 

albeo.  Ore,  to  be  ivMte. 

algeo,  ere,  alsi,  147,  i. 

-lexi 
al-licio,  ere,/ j-^  '.X -lectum,  150,  r. 

al-luo,  ere.  -lui.  -latum,  162. 
alo,  ere,  alui,  al(i)tum,  142,  3. 
amb-igd  (ago),  ere,  172,  i. 
amb-io  (eo),  ire,  ivi  (ii),  itum,  160, 
2,  R.   I. 

._    .         /amicui,\         .  . 
amicio,   ire,    (  amixi,  /    ainictum, 

142,  4,  161. 
amplector,  i,  amplexus,  165. 
ango,  ere,  anxi,  140,  b. 
an-nuo,  ere,  annul  (annutum),  163. 
ante-cello,  ere,  154. 
ante-sto,  -stare,  -steti,  151,  2. 
a-perio,    -Ire,     aperui,     apertum, 

142,  4. 
apiscor,  i,  aptus  sum,  105, 
ap-peto,  ere,  ivi,  itum,  147,  c. 

^■  -    -       -plicui,  -plicitum, 
ap-phco,  are,  (IpHeaVi/.plieatum), 

152,  2. 
ap-pond,    ere,    -posui,     -positum, 

139,  A. 

arceo,  ere,  arcui  ]  ;j;:;;^f(;j .  ^ 

arcesso    (accerso),    ere,    arcessivi, 

-itum,  137,  e. 
ardeo,  ere,  arsi,  arsum,  147,  i. 
arescd,  ere,  ilrui,  to  become  dry. 

arguO,ero,nrgu1,(;;'|[;[,"';';,^^162. 

ar-ripid  (rapio),  ere,  ui,  -reptum, 

146. 
a  scendf)  (scanuo),  ero,  i,  scensum, 

160,  2 
a-spicid,  ere,  fi-spexl,    a-spoctum, 

150,  I. 
as-sentior,  iri,  assensus  sum,  166. 
as-sided   (sedeo),    ere,  -sedi,  -ses- 

sum,  159. 
as-suescd,  ere,  -suevi,-suctum,140. 
at-tendd,  ere,  -tendi,  -tentum,  155, 


INDEX   OF   VERBS. 


495 


at-texd,  ere, -texiiT,  -textum,  152,3. 
at-tineo  (teneo),  ere,  ui,  -tentum, 

135,  I.  a. 
at-tingo  (tango),  ere,  attigl,  attac- 

tiun,  155. 
at-loUo,  ere,  to  raise  up. 
auded,  ere,  ausus  sum,  107. 
audio,  ire,  ivi,  itum.     See  127. 
au-fero,  -ferre,    abstull,  ablatum, 

171. 
augeo,  ere,  auxi,  auctum,  147,  i. 
ay,e,  175,  4. 

Balbutio,  ire,  to  stutter. 

batuo,  ere,  ui,  162. 

bibo,  ere,  bibi,  (bibitura),  154,  2. 

Cado,  ere,  cecidi,  easum,  153. 
caecutio,  ire,  to  be  blind. 
caedo,  ere,  cecidi,  caesum,  153. 
calefacio,  ere,  -feci,  -factum,  160, 

3;  173,  N.  2. 
calesco,  ere,  calui,  to  get  warm. 
calleo,  ere,  ui,  to  be  sMlled. 
calveo,  ere,  to  be  bald. 
candeo,  ere,  ui,  to  shine. 
caiieo,  ere,  to  be  gray. 
cano,  ere,  cecini,  eantum,  153. 
capesso,  ere,  ivi,  itum,  137,  c. 
capio,    ere,    cepi,    captum,    12G; 

160,  3. 

carpo,  ere,  carpsi,  carptum,  147,  2. 

caveo,  ere,  cavi,  cautuui,  159. 

cede,  175,  6. 

cedo,  ere,  cessi,  cessum,  147,  2. 

cenatus,  167,  n.  1. 

_       _    _         -  cBnsum,     10-  . 

censeo,  ere,  ui,  /  _     -,     x  13;),  \.a. 

'        '      '  (censitus), 

cernd,  ere,  crevi,  (eretum),  139. 

cingd,  ere.  cinxi,  cinctum,  149,  b. 
circum-do,   -dare,   -dcdi,  -datum, 

151,  I. 
circum-sisto,  ere,  stetl,  154,  i. 
circum-sto,  stare,  stetl,  151,  2. 
claudo,  ere,  clausi,  clausum,  147,  2. 

ciepd,  ere,  J^^J^P^i'  clcptum,  147,  2. 

co-alGsco,  ere,  -alui,  (-alitum),  140, 

145. 
co-arguo,  ere,  ui,  162. 
co-emo,     ere,     -5mi,     -em(p)tum, 

160,  I. 
coepi,  coepisse,  175,  5,  a. 


cd-gndscd,    ere,   -gnovi,   -gnitum, 

140. 
co-go  (ago),  ere,  co-egi,  co-iictum, 

160,  I. 
col-lido  (LAEDcl),  ere,  -lisl,  lisuni, 

147,  2. 
col-ligo  (lego),  ere,  -iGgI,  -lectuui, 

160,  I. 
col-luceo,  Cre,  -luxi,  157,  i. 
colo,  ere,  colui,  cultuin,  142,  3. 
com-burd,  ere,  -ussi,  -ustum,147,2. 
com-edd,  ere,  -Gdi,  -esum  (estum), 

172. 
coraitiitus,  167,  n.  1. 
comminiscor,  i,  commentus  sum, 

165. 
corn-moved,    ere,  -mcvi,  -mdtur.i, 

159. 
cd-uid   (emo),  ere,   cdmpsi,  cdmp- 

tum,  147,  2. 
eom-parcd,ere,-parsi,-parsum,153. 
com-pelld,  ere,  com-puli,  -pulsum, 

155. 
com-perid   (pario),    ire,  com-peri, 

com-per-tum,  161,  166. 
comp5scd,  cre,  ul,  145. 
com-pingd,    ere,    -p5gi,    -pHctum, 

10!),  2. 
com-plector,  i,  com-plexus,  165. 
com-pled,  ere,  Bvi,  5tum,  147. 
com-primd   (premo),    ere,    -pressi, 

■pressum,  147,  2. 
com-pungd,  ere,  -punxi,  -punctum, 

155. 
con-cidd  (cado),  ere,  -cidi,  153,  a. 
con-cidd  (CAED07,  ere,  -cidi,-cisum, 

153,  a. 
cou-cind  (cano),  ere,  -cinui,  142,  3. 
concitus  (ciEo),  137,  b. 
cou-cludd    (CLAUDo),    ere,    -clusl, 

-clusum,  147,  2. 
con-cumbd,  ere,  -cubui,  -cubitum, 

144. 
con-cupisco,  ere,  -cupivi,  cupitum, 

140. 
con-cutid  (quatio),  ere,  -cussi,  -cus- 

sum,  147,  2. 
cou-dd,  ere,  -didi,  -ditum,  151,  i. 
con-dormiscd,  -ere,  -ivi,  itum,  140. 
cdn-fercid  (farcio),  ire  (fersi),  fer- 

tum,  150,  2. 
cdn-ferd,    -ferre,    -tuli,    colhltum, 

171. 
cdn-ficid  (FACio),ere,  -feci,-fectum, 

160,  3. 


496 


INDEX   OF   VERBS. 


con-fiteor    (fateor),   eri,    -fessus, 

104. 
con-fligo,     ere,     -fiixi,     -flictum, 

147,  2. 
cOn-fringo   (frango),    ere,   -fregi, 

-fnlctum,  160,  2. 
coii-grno,  ere,  congriii,  162. 
con-icio  (iacio),  ere,  -ieci,  -ieetum, 

160,  3. 
eoniuratus,  167,  N.  1. 

co-„!veO,  ..-e,  --;?J:^_  147,  r. 

coii-quird  (quaero),  ere,  -quisivi, 

-quisltum,  137,  c. 
con-sero,     ere,     -serui,     -sertum, 

152,  3. 
con-sero,  ere,  -s5vi,  -situm,  138. 
con-sideratiis,  167,  N.  1. 
coii-sido,    ere,    consedl,    -sessum, 

160,  I. 
con-sisto,  ere,  -stiti,  -stitum,  154,  i. 
cdii-spergo,  ere,  -spersi,  -spersum, 

147,  2. 
con-spicio,  ere,  -spexi,  -spectum, 

150,  I. 
con-stituo  (sTATUo),  ere,  ul,  -stitu- 

tiim,  162. 
con-sto,    -stare,   -stitI,    (constatu- 

riis),  151,  2. 
con-suesco,    ere,    -suevi,    suStiim, 

140;  175,  5. 
consulo,    ere,    consului,    -sultiim, 

142,  3. 
con-temno,  ere,  -tera(p)si,  -tem(p)- 

tiim,  149,  c.        » 
con-tendo,    ere,    -tend!,    -tentum, 

155. 
con-texo,  ere,-texui,-textum,152,3. 
con-tineo  (teneo),  5re,  ui,  -tentum, 

135,  I.  a. 
con-tingo    (tango),    ere,    contigi, 

contactum,  155. 
convalesce,   ere,  -valul,  -valitum, 

145. 
coquo,  ere,  coxi,  coctum,  147,  2, 

168,  I. 
cor-ripio  (rapio),  ere,  -ripul,  -rep- 

tum,  146. 
cor-ruo,  ere,  corrui,  162. 
cr5bresco,  ere,  crebrul,  to  get  fre- 
quent. 
cre-dd,  ere,  -did!,  -dituni,  151,  i. 
crepo,  are,  crepui,crepitum,  142,  2. 
crGscO,  ere,  crevi,  cretuin,  140. 
cubO,  are,  cubui,  cubitum,  142,  2. 


cudO,  ere,  cudi,  cusum,  160,  i, 
cupid,  ere,  ciipivi,  cupitum,  141. 
currd,  ere,  cucurri,  ciirsura,  155. 

De-cernd,  ere,  -crSvI,  -cretum,  139. 
de-cerpd  (carpo),  ere,  si,  turn,  147, 

2. 

de-dd,    dedere,    dedidi,    deditum, 

151,  I. 
de-fendo,  ere,  -fendl,  -fensiim,  160, 

2. 

defetiscor,  I,  to  he  icorn  out. 
de-go  (ago),  ere,  160,  i. 
deleo.     See  Paradigm,  123,  124. 
de-libuo,  iiere,  ui,  iitura,  162. 
dedigo,  ere,  -legl,  -lectnm,  160,  i. 
de-mo  (emo),   ere,  dempsi,  demp- 

tum,  147,  2. 
depelld,  ere,  depiili,  depulsiini,  155. 
dC-prinid     (premo),     ere,    -press!, 

pressum,  147,  2. 
depso,  ere,  depsu!,  depstum,  142,  3. 
de-scendd   (scando),    ere,   -scendi, 

-scensum,  160,  2. 
de-sero,  ere,  -serul,  -sertum,  142,  3. 

de-silid  (sALio).  Ire.Jjp'j^^^f^"^^^™)' 

de-si  no,  ere,  jggJJ^'  desitum,  139. 

de-sipid  (sapio),  -ere,  141. 
d5-sisto,  ere,  -stiti,  -stitum.  154,  i. 
de-spicid,    ere,    -spexl,    -spectum, 

150.  I. 
de-su5scd,  -ere,  -evi,  -5tum,  140. 
de-sum,  -esse,  -fui,  117. 
de-tendo,  ere,  -tend!,  -tentum.  155. 
de-tined  (teneo),  ere,  -ui,  -tentum, 

135,  I.  a. 
dC-vei'tor,  -i,  167. 
died,  ere,  dixl,  dictum,  147,  2. 
dii'-l'ero,   -ferre,    distuli,    dilatum, 

171. 
dl-gndscd  (nosco),  ere,  -gnovi,  140. 
di-ligd,  ere,  -lex!,  -lectum,  147,  2. 
di-mico,  are,  avi,  atum,  142,  2. 
dl-rigd,  ere,  -rexl,  -rectum,  147,  2. 
dir-imd  (emo),  ere,  -Gml,  -emplum, 

160,  I. 
discd,  ere,  didici,  156. 
dis-crepd,  are,  -crepu!  (avi),  142,  2. 
dis-cumbd,  ere,  -cubui,  -cubitum, 

144. 
dis-pescO,  ere,  -pescul,  to  divide^ 

145 
dis-sided  (sedeo),  ere,  -s5di,  159. 


INDEX    OF   VERBS. 


497 


di-stinguo,  ere,  -stinxi,  -stinctum, 

119,  h. 
di-sto.  -stare,  151,  2. 
ditesco,  ere,  io  grow  rich. 
dividd,  ere,  divisi,  di visum,  147,  2. 
do,  dare,  dedi,  datum,  151,  i. 
doceo,  ere,  docui,  doctum,  185,  i,  a. 
domo,  are,  ui,  itum,  142,  2. 
duco,  ere,  duxl,  ductum,  147,  2 
duleescO,  ere,  to  grow  sweet. 
duresco,  ere,  diirul,  to  grow  hard. 

Edo,  ere,  edi,  esum,  160,  i,  172. 
e-do   (do),    edere,    5didi,    editum, 

151,  I. 
e-dormisco,  -ere,  -Ivi,  -itum,  140. 
ef-fero,  -ferre,  extull,  elatum,  171. 
egeo,  ere,  egul,  to  ivant. 
e-licio,  ere,  -licui,  -licitum,  150,  i. 
e-ligO  (lego),  ere,   -leg],  -lectum, 

160,  I. 
e-mico,  are,  ui  (aturus),  142,  2. 
eiiiineo,  ere,  ui,  to  stand  out. 
emo,  ere,  emi,  emptum,  160,  i. 
enuingd,  ere,  emuiixl,  emunctum, 

149,  h. 

e-neco,    are,    ['"^"^^'avi),    ^^ectum, 

142,  2. 
eO,  ire,  Ivi,  itum,  1C9,  2. 
e-vado,  ere,  Gvilsi,  evasum,  147,  2. 
e-vanesco,  ere,  evflnui,  145. 
ex-iirdesco,  ere,  exarsi,  exSrsum, 

147,  I. 
ex-celld,  ere,  ui  (excelsus),  144. 
excitus,  137. 
ex-cludd  (cLAUDo),  ere,  -si,  -sum, 

147,  2. 
ex-curro,    ere,    ex(cu)curri,   -cur- 
sum,  155. 
ex-imo,  ere,  emi,  -emptum,  160.  i. 
ex-olescd,  ere,  -olevi,  -oletum,  140. 
ex-pello,  ere,  -puli,  -pulsum,  155. 
experglscor,   i,   experrectus  sum, 

165. 
ex-perior,    iri,    -pertus  suin,   1G6. 
ex-pleo,  ere,  evi,  etum,   124,  137, 

h. 
ex-plico,  are,  ul  (avi),  itum  (iitum), 

142. 
ex-plodo  (PLAUDo),  ere,  -si,  -sum, 

147,  2. 
exsecratus,  167,  n.  2. 
ex-stinguo,  ere,  -stinxi,  -stinctum, 

149,  I. 

32 


ex-sisto,  ere,  -stiti,  -stitum,  154,  i. 
ex-sto,  are  (exstaturus),  151,  2. 
ex-tendd,  ere,  dl,  -sum  (-tum),  155. 
ex-tolld,  ere,  155. 
ex-ud,  ere,  -ui,  -utum,  1G2. 

Facessd,  ere,  ivi  (-i),  itum.,  137,  c, 

facid,  ere,  feci,  factum,  1(50,  3. 

fallo,  ere,  fefelli,  falsum,  155. 

farcid,  ire,  farsi,  fartum,  150,  2. 

fari,  175,  3. 

fateor,  Sri,  fassus  sum,  1G4. 

fatlscd,  ere,  to  fall  apart. 

fatiscor,  i  (fessus,  adj.). 

faved,  ere,  fjivi,  fautum,  159. 

ferid,  ire,  to  strike. 

fero,  ferre,  tuli,  Ifitum,  171. 

ferved,  ere,  fervi  (ferbui),  159, 

fido,  ere,  fisus  sum,  167. 

figd,  ere,  fixi,  fixum,  147,  2. 

findd,  ere,  fidi,  fissum,  160,  3. 

fingd,  ere,  finxi,  fictum,  149,  a. 

fid,  fieri,  factus  sum.  173. 

fleetd,  ere,  flexi,  flexum,  148. 

fled,  ere,  evi,  etum,  137,  b. 

liigo,  ere,  flixi,  flictum,  147,  2. 

fldred,  ere,  ui,  to  bloom 

flud,  ere,  fiuxi  (fluxus.  adj.),  147,2. 

fodid,  ere,  fddi,  fossum,  100,  3. 

forem,  116. 

foved,  ere,  fovi.  fdtum,  159. 

frangd,  ere,  fregi,  frSctum,  160,  2. 

fremd,  ere,  ui,  142,  3. 

frendd  (eo),  ere  (ui),  fresum,  fres- 

sum,  144. 
fried,  are,  ul,  f rictum  (atum),  142, ' 

2. 
friged,  5re  (frixl),  147,  i. 
frigd,  ere,  frixi,  frictum,  147,  2. 
frouded,  ere,  ul,  to  be  leafy. 
fruor,  i,  fructus  (fruitus)  sum,  165. 
fugid,  ere,  fug!,  fugitum,  ICO,  3. 
falcid,  ire,  fulsl,  fultum,  150,  2. 
fulged,  ere,  fulsi.  147,  i. 
fundd,  ere,  fudi,  fusum,  160,  2. 
f ungor,  i,  functus  sum,  165. 
(turd,  def),  furere,  to  rare. 

Gannid,  ire,  to  yelp. 

gauded,  ere,  gfivisus  sum,  167. 

gemd,  ere,  ui,  142   3. 

gerd,  ere,  gessi,  gestum,  147,  2. 

gignd,  ere,  genui,  genitum,  143, 

gliscd,  ere,  to  swell. 

gradior,  i,  gressus  sum,  165. 


498 


IN-DEX   OF   VERBS. 


Haereo,  ere,  haesi,  (haesum),  147, 

I. 
haurio,  ire,  hausi,  haustum  (hau- 

surus,  haustiirus),  150,  2. 
have,  175,  4. 
hisco,  ere,  to  yawn. 
liorred,  5re,  ul,  to  stand  on  end 
hortor,  ari,  atus  sum,  128. 

laceo,  ere,  iacul,  to  lie. 
iacio,  ere,  i5ci,  iactum,  160,  3. 
ico,  ere,  ici,  ietiim,  IGO,  i. 
i-ijnosco,    ere,    -giiovi,    -gnotiim, 

l40. 
il-licio,  ere,  -lexi,  -lectum,  150,  i. 
il-lido  (laedo),  ere,  -llsl,  -llsum, 

147,  2. 
imbuo,  ere,  ui,  titum,  162. 
imitatus,  167,  n.  2. 
immiiieo,  ere,  to  overhang. 
im-pingo  (pango),  ere,  peg!,  pac- 
tum, 160,  2. 
in-cal5sco,  ere,  -calu!,  145. 
iii-cendo,    ere,     -cendT,    -cSnsum, 

160,  2. 
incessd,  ere,  ivi  (i),  187,  c. 
in-eido  (cado),  ere,  -eidi,  -casum, 

152. 
in-cido  (caedo),  ere,  -cidl,  cisum, 

153. 
in-cipio  (capio),   ere,   -cep!,  -ccp- 

tum,  160,  3. 
in-crepd,  are,  ui,  itum,  142,  2. 
in-curabo,  ere,    -cubul,  -cubitum, 

144. 
in-cutio  (quatio),  ere,  -cussi,  -cus- 

sum,  147,  2. 
ind-igeo  (egeo),  ere,  ui,  to  ivant. 
ind-iplseor,  i,  indeptus  sum,  105. 
iri-do,  ere,  -didi,  -ditum,  151,  i. 
indulgeo,  ere,  indulsi  (iiidultum), 

147,  I. 
in-du<~),  ere,    dul,  -dutum,  162. 
ineptio,  ire,  to  he  silly. 
in-fllgo,  ere,  -flixi,  -flietum,  147,  2. 
iiigemlseo,  ere,  ingemui,  115. 
ingruo,  ere,  ul.    See  cougruo,  102. 
in-notesco,  ere,  ndtui,  145. 
in-olGsco,  ere,  -ol5vI,  140. 
iiiquam,  175,  2. 
in-sideo    (sedeo),    Sre,  -sedl,  -ses- 

sum.  159. 
in-sistd,  ere,  -stiti,  154,  i. 
in-spicio,    ere,    -spexl,    -spectum, 

150.   I. 


inter-ficio,  ere,  -feci,  -fectum,  160, 

3;  173,  N.  2. 
in-sto,  are, -stiti  (instaturus),151,2. 
in-sum,  -esse,  -fui,  117. 
intel-legd,  ere,  -lexI,  -lectum,  147, 2. 
iriter-inio  (emo),  ere,  -emi,  -emp- 

tum,  160,  I. 
iiiter-pungo,   ere,   -punxl,    -punc- 

tum,  155. 
inler-sto,  are,  -stetl,  151,  2. 
inter-sum,  -esse,  -fuI,  117. 
inveterasco,  ere,  -avi,  140, 
in-vado,  ere,  invasi,  -vasum,147,  2. 
!i"ascor,  I,  iratussum,  to  get  angry. 
iubeo,  ere,  iussi,  iussum,  147,  i. 
iungo,  ere,  iunxl,  iunctum,  149,  &. 
iuratus,  167,  n.  1. 
iuvo,  are,  iiivl,  iCitum  (iuvaturus), 

158. 

Labor,  i,  lapsus  sum,  165. 

lacessS,  ere,  lacessivi,  -itum,  187,  c. 

Iacio,  150. 

laedo,  ere,  laesi.  laesum,  147,  2. 

lambo,  ere,  i,  160,  2. 

laugiieo,  ere,  i,  to  he  languid. 

largior,  ii'i,  itus  sum,  166. 

lateo,  ere,  ui,  to  lie  hid. 

laA'-d,   are  (ere),   Ifivi,   lautum,  lo- 

tum,  lavatum,  158. 
lego,  ere,  l5gi.  lectum,  160,  i. 
libet,  libere,  libuit  (libitum  est),  it 

pleases. 
liceor,  Crl,  itus  sum,  164. 
licet,  licere,  licuit  (licitum  est),  it 

is  permitted. 
lingo,  ere,  linxi,  linctum,  149,  &. 
lino,  ere,  levi  (livi),  litum,  189. 
linquo,  ere,  liqui,  160,  2, 
liqued,  ere,  licui,  to  he  clear. 
liveo,  ere,  to  he  livid. 
loquor,  i,  locutus  sum,  128,  2;  165. 
liiceo,  ere,  luxi,  147,  i. 
ludo,  ere,  lusi,  lusum,  147,  2. 
lugeo,  ere,  luxi,  147,  i. 

(  lutum,  to  wash, 
luo,ere,  lui,  \  luitum,  to  atone  for, 
(      162. 

Maered,  Ore,  to  grieve. 

maid,  malle,  mJIlui,  142,  3;  174. 

mandd,     ere,     mandi,     mansnm 

160,  2. 
maned,  ere,  mansi,  mansum,147,  i, 
mansuBscd,  -ere,  -Cvi,  -etum,  140. 


INDEX    OF    VERBS. 


499 


mecleor,  Pvl,  to  heal. 

meminl,  175,  5,  h. 

meiitior,  Iri,  itus,  128,  2;  16G. 

mereor,  5rl,  meritus  sum,  164. 

mergo,  ere,  mersi,  raersum,  147,  2. 

m5tior,  iri,  meiisus  sum,  160. 

meto,  ere,  messui  (rare),  messum, 

142,  3. 
metuo,  ere,  ui,  162. 
mico,  are,  ui,  142,  2. 
mingo,  ere,  minxi,  mictum,  149,  a. 
minuo,  ere,  minui,  minutum,  162, 
misceo,  ere,  ui,  mixtum  (mistum). 
misereor,  eri,  miseritus  (misertus) 

sum,  164. 
mitto,  ere,  misi,  missum,  147,  2. 
molo,  ere,  molui,  molitum,  142,  3. 
moneo,  5re,  ui,  itum,  131. 
mordeo,  5re,  momordi,  morsum, 

152. 
morior,  mori,  mortuus  sum  (rnori- 

turus),  165. 
moveo,  ere,  movi,  motum,  159. 
mulceo,  ere,  mulsi,  mulsum,  147, 

I. 
mulgeo,     5re,      mulsi,     mulsum 

(ctum),  157,  I. 
mungo,    ere,    munxi,    munctum, 

160. 

Nanciscor,  i,  nactus(nanctus),165. 
nascor,  i,  niitus  sum  (nascitiirus), 

165. 
neco,  are,  avi,  Stum,  142,  2. 
necto,   ere,  nexi  (nexui),  nexum, 

148. 
neg-lego,  ere,  -lexi,  -lectum,147,2. 
necopinatus,  167,  n.  2. 
ned,  nere,  nevi,  netum,  137,  h. 
nequeo,  ire^l70. 
ningo,  ere,  ninxi,  149,  h. 
niteo,  ere,  ui,  to  slii?ie. 
nitor,  1,  iiixus  (nisus)  sum,  165. 
nolo,  nolle,  nOluI,  142,  3;  174. 
noceo,   ere,  ui   (noeifurus),    to  be 

hurtful. 
nosco,  ere,  novi,  notuni,  140;  175, 

notesco,  ere,  notui,  145. 

niibo,  ere,  nupsi,  nuptum,  147,  2. 

Ob-do,  ere,  -didi,  -ditum,  151,  i. 
ob-dormisco,  ere,  -dormivi,   -dor- 

mituui,  140. 
obliviscor,  i,  oblitus  sum,  165, 


ob-sideo  (sedeo),  5re,   -sedi,  -ses- 

sum,  159. 
ob-sisto,  ere,  -stiti,  -stitum,  154,  i. 
obs-olesco,    ere,    -olevi,    -oletum, 

140. 
ob-sto,    stilre,    stiti    (obstatiirus), 

151,  2. 
obtineo  (teneo),  ere,  -tinui,  -ten- 

tum,  135,  T,  a. 
oc-cido  (cADo),  ere,  -cidi,  -casum, 

153. 
oc-cido  (caedo),  ere,  -cidi,  -cisum, 

153. 
oc-cino  (cANo),  ere,  -cinui,  142,  3; 

153. 
oc-cipio  (cAPio),  ere,  -cepi,  -ceptum, 

160,  3. 
occuld,    ere,    occului,     occultum, 

142,  3. 
odi,  def.,  175,  5,  a. 
of-fendo,  ere,-fendi,-f5nsum,160,2. 
of-fero,   -ferre,    obtuli,    oblatum, 

171. 
oleo,  ere,  ui,  to  smell. 
operid,  ire,  operui,  opertum,  142,  4. 
opinatus,  167,  n.  2. 
opperior,    iri,  oppertus   (or  itus), 

166. 
ordior,  iri,  orsus  siun,  166. 
orior,  iri,  ortus  sum  (oriturus),  166. 
os-tendd,     ere,     -tendi,     -tensum 

(-tentus),  155. 

Paeiscor,  i,  pactus  sum,  165,  167, 
N.  2. 

palleo,  -ere,  -ui,  to  be  pale. 

pan  do,  ere,  pandi,  passum  (pan- 
sum),  160,  2. 

pango,  ere  ^  ^^^^.^  ^^^^  ^^  ^  ^^^^ 

parco,    ere,    peperci    (parsi),    par- 

surus,  153. 
pario,   ere,   peperl,   partum  (pari- 

turus),  157. 
partior,  iri,  itus,  166. 
pasco,  ere,  pavi,  pastum,  140. 
pate-facio,  ere,  -feci,  -factum,  173, 

N.  2. 
pated,  Sre,  ui,  to  be  open. 
patior,  i,  passus  sum,  165. 
paved,  ere,  pavi,  159. 
pectd,  ere,  pexi,  pexum,  148. 

pel-licio,  -licere,  Jifi^^X     -lectnm, 


150,  I. 


(licui), 


500 


II^DEX    OF   VERBS. 


pells,  ere,  pepull,  pulsiira,  155. 
pendeo,  ere,  pependi,  152. 
pendo,  ere,  pependi,  pensiim,  155. 
per-cello,  ere,  perculi,  perculsum, 

144. 
percSnseo   (censeo),    5re,   -censui, 

-ceiisiiin,  135,  i,  a. 
percitus  (cieo),  137. 
per-do,  ere,  -didl,  -ditum,  169,  2, 

R.  i;  151,  I. 
per-eo,  ire,  perli,  itiim,  169,  2,  r.  t 
per-licio,  ere,  -feci,  -fectiim,  100,  3. 
per-fringo,  ere,   -fregi,  -frilctum, 

160,  2. 
pergo  (REGO),  ere,  perr5xi,  perrec- 

tum,'l47,  2. 
per-petior    (patior),   i,    perpessus 

sum,  165. 
per-spicio,   ere,   -spexi,   -spectum, 

150,  I. 

per-sto,  -stare,  -stiti,  151,  2, 
per-tiueo  (teneo),  Bre,  iii,  135,  i,  a. 
pessum-do,   -dure,   -dedi,  -datum, 

151,  I. 

peto,  ere,  ivi  (ii),  itum,  137,  c. 
piget,  pigere,  piguit,  pigitura  est, 

it  irks. 
pingo,  ere,  pinxi,  pictum,  149,  a. 
pinso,ere,  ui  (i),  pinsitum  (pistum, 

pinsum),  142,  3. 
plango,    ere,    planxi,     planctum, 

149,  h. 
plaudo.ere,  plausi,  plausum,147,  2. 
plecto,  ere,  (plexi),.plexum,  148. 
plector,  i,  to  be  punished. 
-pleo,  137,  h. 
plico,  are,  ui  (avi),  itum  (atum), 

142,  2. 

polleo,  ere,  to  be  potent. 
polliceor,  eri,  itus  sum,  164. 
pono,  ere,  posui,  positura,  139. 
posco,  ere,  poposcl,  150. 
pos-sideo  (sedeo),  ere,  -sedi,  -ses- 

sum,  159. 
pos-sum,  posse,  potui,  119. 
potior,  iri,  itus  sum,  166. 
poto.  are,   iivl,  potum,  potatum, 

136,  4.  c. 
potus,  167,  N.  1. 
prae-cello,  ere,  -cellui,  144. 
prae-cino,  ere,  -einui,  142,  3. 
prae-curro,  ere,  -cucurri,  -cursum, 

155. 


prae -sided  (sedeo),  ere,  -s5di,  159. 
prae-sum,  -esse,  -ful,  117. 
prae-sto,  -stare,  -stiti  (-staturus), 

151,  2. 
prandeo,    Gre,    prandi,    prunsum, 

159. 
prehendo,  ere,  prehendi,  prchen- 

sum,  160,  2. 
premo,  ere,  press!,  pressum,  147,  2. 
prOd-igo  (ago),  ere,  -egi,  160,  i. 
pro-do,  ere,  -didi,  -ditum,  151,  i. 
pro-fieiscor,  I,  profectus  sum,  105. 
pro-fiteor    (fateor),    eri,    -fessus 

sum,  164. 
prouir)(EMo),  ere,  prompsi,  promp- 

tum,  147,  2 
pro-sum,  prodesse,  profui,  118. 
pro-tendo    (tendo),     ere,     -tendi, 

-tentum,  tensum,  155. 
psallo,  ere,  i,  160,  2. 
pudet,  5re,  puduit,  puditum   est, 

it  shames. 
puerasco,  ere,  to  become  a  boy. 
pungo,  ere,  pupugi,  punctum,  155. 
pimior,  iri,  Itus  sum,  166. 

Quaero,  ere,  quaesivi,  quaesitura, 

137,  c. 
quaeso,  175,  0. 
quatio,    ere,    (quassi),    quassum, 

147,  2. 
queo,  quire,  170. 
queior,  qucrl,  questus  sum,  167. 
quiesco,  ere,  quievi,  quietum,  140. 

Rado,  ere,  rasi,  rasum,  147,  2. 
rapio,  ere,  rapui,  raptum,  146. 
raucio,  ire,  rausi,  rausum,  150,  2. 
re-eSnseo    (censeo),    ere,    -censui, 

-censu.m  (receiisitum),  135,  1,  a. 
re-cido,  ere,  reccidi,  recasum,  153. 
recrudesod,    ere,  -crudui,    to    get 

raiu  again. 
re-cumbo,  ere,  -cuhui,  144. 
red-arguo,  ere,  -argui,  102. 
red-dd,  ere,  -didl,  -ditum,  151,  i. 
red-igd   (ago),  ere,   -egl,   -actum, 

160,  I. 
red-imd,  -ere,  160,  i. 
re-felld  (.fallo),  ere,  refelli,  155. 
re-ferd,  -ferre,  -tull,  -latum,  171. 
rego,  ere,  rexi,  rectum,  147,  2. 
re-linqud,     ere,     -llqui,    -lictum, 

160,  2. 
rerainlscor,  I,  to  recollect. 


INDEX    OF   VERBS. 


501 


renideo,  5re,  to  gliiter. 
reor,  rerl,  rat  us  sum,  164. 
re-pello,  ere,  reppuli,  pulsum,  155. 
re-perio,    ire,    repperi,    repertum, 

157,  161. 
repo,  ere,  rBpsi,  reptum,  147,  2. 
re-sipisco,  ere,  -sipivi  (sipui),  140. 
re-sisto,  ere,  -stiti,  -stitum,  154,  i. 
re-spondeo,  ere,  -s'jondi,  -sponsura, 

152. 
re-sto,  stfire,  -stiti,  151,  2. 
re-stinguo,  ere,  -stinxl,  -stinctum, 

149,  b. 
re-tineo  (teneo),  ere,  ui,  -tentum, 

135,  I,  a. 
re-vertor,     i,    reverti,    reversCiin, 

160,  I ;  107. 
re-vivisco,   ere,  vixi,   victuin,    to 

revive. 
rideo,  ere,  risl,  risum,  147,  i. 
rigeO,  ere,  ui,  to  he  stiff. 
rodo,  ere,  rosi,  rosum,  147,  2. 
rubeo,  Cre,  ui,  to  be  red. 
rudo,  ere,  rudlvi,  ituin,  137,  c. 
rumpo,  ere,  rupi,  ruptum,  160,  2. 
ruo,  ere,  rui,  rutura  (ruiturus),  162. 

Saepio,  Ire,  saepsi,  saeptuiii,  150, 2. 

salio,  ire,^g^\\^l'^  saltum,  142,  4. 

sallo,  ere,  (salli),  salsum,  160,  2. 
salve,  def.,  175,  4. 

sancio,->ro,sanxl.^j^;;^!™;)_150,2. 

sapio,  ere  (.saplvi),  sapui,  141. 
sarcid,  ire,  sarsi,  sartum,  150,  2. 
satis-do,  -dare,  -dedi,  -datum,  151,  i. 
seabo,  ere,  scabi,  to  scratch,  100,  i. 
scalpo,     ere,     sealpsi,    scalptum, 

147,  2. 
scando,     ere,     scandi,     scansum, 

100,  2. 
seated,  ere,  to  gush  forth. 
scindO,  ere,  scidi,  seissum,  160,  3. 
seised,  ere,  scivi,  scitura,  140. 
serlbd,  ere,  scrips!,  scriptura,  147, 

2, 
sculpd,     ere,    sculpsi,    seulptum. 

147,  2. 

seed,  are,  seeui,  ^^^^™'      142,  2. 
'        '  '  secaturus,        ' 

seded,  5re,  sedi,  sessum,  159. 

selig^d  (lego),  ere,  -iGgi,  -l5etum. 

160,  1. 

sentid,  ire,  sensi,  sensum,  150,  2. 


sepelid,  ire,  ivi,  sepultum,  137,  a. 
sequor,  i,  secutus  sum,  165. 
serd,  ere,  142,  3. 
sero,  ere,  sevi,  satum,  138. 
serpd,  ere,  serpsl,  serptum,  147,  2. 
sidd,  ere,  sidl,  160,  i. 
siled,  ere,  ul,  to  he  siient. 
smo,  ere,  sivi,  sit  urn,  139. 
sistd,  ere,  (stiti),  statum,  154,  i. 
sitid,  ire,  ivi,  to  t/iirst. 
soled,  ere,  solitus  sum,  167, 
solvd,  ere,  solvi,  solutum,  160,  i. 

sond,  are,  sonui,  ^^^itum,     -^^^  ^^ 

'  '  sonaturus,        ' 

sorbed,  ere(sorp  si),  sorbui,  142,  i. 
sorded,  ere,  ui,  to  be  dirty. 
sortior,  iri,  sortitus  sum,  166. 
spargd,  ere,  sparsi,  sparsum,  147, 

2. 
spernd,  ere,  sprevi,  spretum,  139. 
-spicid,  150,  I. 
splended,  5re,  ui,  to  shine. 
spondeo,  ere,  spopondl,  spdnsum, 

152. 
spud,  ere,  spui,  sputum,  162. 
squaled,  ere,  to  he  rough,  foul. 
statud,  ere,  statui,  statutum,  162. 
sternd,  ere,  stravi,  stratum,  139. 
sternud,  ere,  sternui,  102. 
stertd,  ere,  stertui,  142,  3. 
-stingud,  ere,  149,  h. 
std,  stare,  steti,  statum,  151,  2. 
strepd,    ere,    strepul,     strepitum, 

142,  3. 
strlded,  Gre  (ere),  stridi,  159. 
stringd,     ere,     strinxi,    strictum, 

149,  a. 
strud,  ere,  struxl.  striietum,  147,  2. 
studed,  ere,  ui,  to  he  zealous. 
stuped,  ere,  ui,  to  he  astounded. 
sujided,  ere,  suasi,  suasum,  147,  i. 
sub-dd,  ere,  -didi,  -ditum,  151,  i. 
sub-igd  (ago),  ere,  -egi,   -iictum, 

100,  I. 
suc-cedd  (cEDo),   ere,  -cessi,  -ces- 

sum,  147. 
suc-cendd,   ere,    -cendT,  -censum, 

100,  2. 
sue  censed,  ere,  ui,  -censum,  135, 

I,  a. 
suc-currd,  ere,  -eurri,-cursum,155. 
.suescd,  ere,  suevi,  suetum,  140. 
suf-ferd,  -ferre,  sus-tinui,  171,  n.  2. 
suf-ficid  (FACio),  ere,  -feci,  -fectum, 

100,  3. 


502 


INDEX   OF  VERBS. 


suf-fodio,     ere,     -fodi,     -fossum, 

IGO,  3. 
sug-gero,  ere,  -gessi,  -gestum,  147, 

2. 
sugo,  ere,  suxi,  suctura,  147,  2. 
sum,  esse,  fui,  IIC, 
sumo   (emo),  ere,    sumpsi,   sump- 

tum,  147,  2. 
suo,  ere,  sul,  sutum,  162. 
superbio,  ire,  to  he  haughty. 
super-sto,  -stare,  -steti,  151,  2. 
super-sum,  -esse,  -I'm,  117. 
sup-pono,    ere,   -posui,    -positum, 

139,  A. 
surgo  (^REGo),  ere,  surrexi,  surr5c- 

tum,  147,  2. 
surripio,  ere,  ul  (surpul),  -reptum, 

140. 

Taedet,  pertaesum  est,  it  tires. 
tango,  ere,  tetigi,  tilctum,  155. 
tego,  ere,  t5xi,  tectum,  147,  2. 
temno,  ere,  149,  c. 
tendo,  ere,  tetendl,  tensum  (-tum), 

155. 
teneo,  ore,  tenui,  (tentum),185,  i,  a. 
tergeo,  ere,  tersi,  tersum,  147,  i. 
terd,  ere,  trivl,  tritum,  137,  c. 
texo,  ere,  texui,  textum,  142,  3. 
timeo,  ere,  uI,  to  fear. 
ting(u)o,  ere,  tinxi,  tinctum,  149,6. 
tollo,  ere  (sustull,  sublfitum),  155. 
tondco,  ere,  totondl,  tonsum,  152. 
tono,  are,  ul,  142,  2. 
torpeo,  ere,  ui,  to  he  torpid. 
torqued,  ere,  torsi,  tortum,  147,  i. 
torreo,  ere,  torrui,  tostum,  135,i,a. 
tra-do,  ere,  -didi,  -ditum,  151,  i. 
traho,  ere,  traxi,  triictum,  147,  2. 
tremo,  ere,  ui,  to  tremhle. 
tribuo,  ere,  ui,  tributum,  162. 
triido,  ere,  triisi,  trusum,  147,  2. 


tueor,  eri  ^^^^^^^  ttitatus  sum,  164. 

tumeo,  Cre,  ui,  to  swell. 

tundo,    ere,   tutudi,    tunsum,    tu- 

sum,  155. 
turgeo,  ere,  tursi,  147,  i. 

Ulciscor,  1,  ultus  sum,  165. 
ungo,  ere,  tinxi,  Unctum   149,  h. 
urgeo,  ere,  ursi,  147,  i. 
tiro,  ere,  tissi,  ustum,  147,  2. 
titor,  i,  usus  sum,  165. 

Vado,  ere,  147,  2. 

vale,  175,  4. 

veho,  ere,  vexi,  vectura,  147,2;  165, 

vello,    ere,    velli    (vulsi),  vulsum, 

160,  2. 
ven-do,  ere,  -didi,  -ditum,  151,  i; 

169,  2,  R.  I. 
ven-eo,  ire,  ivi  (ii),  169,  2,  r.  i. 
venid,  ire,  veni,  ventum,  16!. 
vBnum-do,    -dare,    -dedi,  -datum. 

151,  1. 
vereor,  eri,  veritus  sum,  164. 
verro,  ere,  verri,  versum,  160,  i. 
verto,  ere,  verti,  versum,  160,  i. 
vescoi',  i,  165. 
vesperasco,  ere,  avi,  140. 
veto,  are,  vetui,  vetitum,  142,  2. 
video,  ere,  vidi,  visum,  159. 
vieo,    ere,    etum,    to   plait.      Sec 

137,  h. 
vigeo,  ere,  ui,  to  flourish. 
vincio,  ire,  vinxi,  vinetum,  150,  2. 
vinco,  ere,  vici,  victum,  100,  2. 
viso,  ere,  visi,  160,  i. 
vivo,  ere,  vixi,  victum,  147,  2. 
volo,  velle,  volui,  142,  3;  174. 
volvo,  ere,  volvi,  voliitum,  160,  r, 
vomo,  ere,  vomui,  vomitura,  142, 3 
voved,  ere,  vovi,  votum,  159. 


GENERAL  INDEX. 


Abbreviations. —Abl.,  ablative;  Abs., absolute;  Ace,  accusative;  act.,  active;  adj., 
adjective;  adv.,  adverb;  attrib.,  attributive,  attribution  ;  app.,appositive, appositiou; 
Comp.,  comparisoD,  comparative;  coustr.,  construction;  cop.,  copula,  copulative; 
cpd.,  compound,  compounded;  Dat.,  dative;  decl.,  declension;  def.,  definite;  dem., 
demonstrative;  fem.,  feminine;  Fut.,  future;  Tut.  PI'.,  future  perfect;  Gen.,  geni- 
tive; Ger.,  gerund,  gerundive;  Impf.,  imperfect ;  Imp  v.,  imperative;  indef.,  indefi- 
nite; Indie,  indicative;  Inf.,  infinitive;  interrog.,  interrogative;  Loc,  locative; 
masc,  masculine;  neg.,  negative;  neut.,  neuter;  Nom.,  nominative;  obj.,  object; 
Part.,  partitive;  part.,  participle;  pass.,  passive ;  PL,  plural;  poss.,  possessive,  pos- 
session; pred.,  predicate;  prep.,  preposition;  pron.,  pronoun  ;  rel.,  relative;  Sg., 
singular;  subj.,  subject;  Subjv.,  subjunctive;  subst.,  substantive;  Sup., supine;  vb., 
verb ;  Vuc,  vocative. 


A— Sound  of,  3;  weakening  of,  8,1;  length 
of  final,  707,1.    See  ab. 

ab  (a)— la  composition,  9,4;  varies  witb  a 
as  prep.,  9,4;  syntax  of  as  prep  ,  417,1; 
position  of  413, k.1;  Dat.  after  vbs  cpd. 
witb,  347,R.5;  gives  Point  of  Reference, 
335,N. :  with  Abl.  takes  place  of  second 
Ace,  339, N. 2;  with  Abl.  of  Separation, 
390:  with  Abl.  of  Point  of  View,  ^6.2,N.6; 
with  Towns,  391,R.l ;  with  Abl.  ofOrigin, 
395;  witb  Abl.  of  Respect,  397,  nI  with 
Abl.  of  Agent,  401;  to  express  Cause, 
408,N.3;  with  Abl.  Ger.,  433- 

abdicare— with  s6a»d  Abl.,  390,n.3. 

abesse  -with  Ace.  of  Extent,  or  a  and 
Abl.,  335, R. 2;  with  Dat..  349,r4;  with 
Abl.  of  Measure,  403,N.l;  of  Place,  390, 
N.3;  tantum  abest  ut,— ut,  652,r.i. 

abhinc-with  Ace,  336, r  :j. 

abhorrgre— with  Abl.  of  Place,  390, n.3. 

ability— adis.  of,  with  Inf.,  423, N  I.e. 

abire— with  Abl.  of  Place,  390,  n  3. 

ABL.A.TIVE— defined,  23,6:  1st  docl.  Sg.  in 
ad,  PI-  in  eiS,  29,n.4;  Pi.  in  abus,  29,R  4; 
2d  decl.  Sg.  in  od,  33,n.3;  Pi.  in  eiS,  33, 
N.5;  3d  decl.  Sg.  in  ei,  I,  6,  37,4;  mute 
stems  witb  i,54:  sporadic  cases  in  i^  54, 
N.2  ;  vowel  stems  in  i^  67,R  2  ;  adjs. 
used  as  substs.  in  i,  57,R  2,n  ;  4th 
decl.  in  ubus,  61,u  1:  adjs.  in  d,  75,N.3; 
PI.  in  is  (for  iig)  and  abus,  75,N.6;  adjs. 
of  three  endings  in  e,  79,R  1:  adjs.  and 
parts,  in  i  and  e,  82;  adjs.  iu  e  and  f^ 


83:  Comp.  of  part.,  89,R  1;  forms  ad  vs., 
91,2. 

With  act.  vb.  cannot  be  subj.  of  pass., 
217,R.l;  with  vbs.  involving  comparison, 
296,N.l;  prepositional  uses  instead.  26. 
N.3;  with  pro  *'f  Disproportion,  298;  for 
inner  obj.,  333,2,n.4.  with  abesse  and 
distare,  335,R.2;  of  Point  of  Reference, 
z&.  N  ;  with  Ago.  after  vbs.  of  Giving  and 
Putting,  3i8;  with  preps  instead  of 
Part.  Gen.,  372,R  2  Scheme  of  Syntax, 
384;  of  Place  where  385.  of  Towns,  386; 
of  Place  whence,  390;  with  vbs  of  Ab- 
staining, 390,2.  with  Adjs.,  390  3,  of 
Towns,  391;  props,  with  Towns,  z/>  R.l; 
of  Attendance,  392,  of  Time,  393;  preps., 
394;  of  Origin,  395,  preps.,  ib.  n.2;  of 
Material,  396,  of  Respect,  397:  with 
words  of  Eminence,  tb.  N  2,  with  Comp., 
398,  298,  and  rr1,2;  of  Manner,  399; 
of  Quality.  400,  and  r.I;  with  cum  <»f 
unnatural  productions,  ^6.  N.2;  of  In- 
strument, 401.  of  Agent,  314,  and  r.2. 
401  and  rr  1,2,  with  special  vbs.,  401, 
NN  1  7;  of  Standard,  402,  of  Difference, 
403,  of  Price,  404,  with  vbs.  of  Plenty 
and  Want  405.  with  opus  and  usus, 
408;  with  utor,  fruor,  e/c  ,  407,  of  Cause, 
403  and  nn  2  6;  of  Ger.,  431;  of  Ger. 
with  preps.,  433;  of  Sup. ,  436. 

iBLATIVE    ABSOLUTE— concord     VVitll     tWO 

subjs.,  286,N.3;  syntax  of.  409,10;  with 
Interrog.,  469,N.;  of  part.,  665,N.2. 


504 


GENEEAL  INDEX 


abmmpere— with  Abl.  of  place,  390, n.3. 

absiste— with  luf.  for  Impv.,  271,2,N.2. 

absolvere— with  Abl.  of  Place,  390,N.3. 

absonus— with  Abl.,  359,N.2. 

Absorption  of  Correlative— 619. 

absque — 417,2;  with  Subjv.,  597, N. 

abstaining— \hs.  of,  with  Abl.,  390,2. 

abstinere— with  Abl.  of  Place,  390,N.3. 

abstract — relations  expressed  by  Indie, 
254,B.l;  substs.  become  concrete  in  PL, 
204,N.5;  formation  of,  181,2,6. 

abundantia — 84. 

abundare— with  Gen.,  383,1,n.2. 

abunde— wery,  439,n.3. 

abuti— with  Abl.,  407  and  N.2,a. 

ac— see  atque ;   ac  si  with  Subjv.  of 

Comparison,  602;  aCSi=  quasi,  ib.if.5. 

accedere— with  Dat.,  etc.,  347, R. 2;  with 
quod,  625;  with  ut,  653,4. 

accent— in  early  Latin,  701,k.2  ;  in  mu- 
sic, 729;  conflict  with  Ictus,  749. 

accentuation— 15;  effect  of  enclitics,  ib. 
B.l;  in  cpds.,  i6.  B.2;  in  Voc.td.E.S; 
early,  i6.n. 

accidit— with  Dat.,  346,E.2 ;  sequence 
after,  613,  R.  2;  with  ut,  653,3. 

accipere— with  inf.,  527,e1. 

aCCOmmodatUS— with  Dat.  Ger.,429,N.l. 

accumbere— with  Dat.,  etc.,  347,R.2. 

ACCUSATIVE— definition,  23,4.  3d  decl.  38; 
in  im,  37,3;  54  n.1;  in  eis,  38,3;  of  vowel 
stems,  57, k1  and  5;  PI.  in  is  and  6s,  67, 
R.5;  in  Greek  substs.,  66,  nn.  3  and  4;  of 
adjs.  of  three  endings  in  is^  eiS,  79,N.2; 
iiiIS,83,N.l;  ofComp.  iuis,  eiS,89,B.2; 
forms  ad  vs.,  91,1. 

Becomes  subj.  of  pass.,  216;  syntax  of, 
328-343;  general  view,  328,  329;  direct 
obj.,  330;  with  vbs.  of  Emotion,  ifi.E.  and 
N.2;  333,1, N.l;  with  verbal  substs.,  330, 
N.3;  with  adjs.  in  undus,  i6N.4;  with 
cpd.  vbs.,  331.  Inner  obj..  332,  333;  ueut. 
pron  and  adj.,  333,1;  Cognate,  tb.2:  Abl. 
instead,  i6.2,N.4;  with  vbs  of  Taste  and 
Smell,  i6.2,N.5;  extension  of  Coguate 
idea,  i6.2,NN.2  and  6.  Double  Ace.  333, 
1;  of  Extent,  334-336;  in  Degree,  334,  in 
Space.  335,  in  Time,  336;  with  abesse 
and  distare,  3o5,r.2;  with  abhinc,  336, 
R.3;  with  natUS,  i^&  R.4;  with  adjs.,  iTj. 
N.l;  of  Extent  as  subj.  of  pass.,  ib.s.3- 
of  Local  Object,  337;  prep,  with  Large 
Towns,  ib.  Ru.l  and  2;  domum  and  in 
domum,  ii>-  r.3;    force  of  ad,  i(^-  b-4; 


with  usque,  '■&.N.4;  with  verbal  substB., 
i6.  N.5;  of  Respect,  338:  with  vbs.  of 
Clothing,  etc.,  and  passives,  ib.  n.2; 
Greek  Ace.  or  Abl.  instead,  ib.  n.1. 
Double  Ace,  339-342;  with  vbs.  of  In- 
quiring, etc.,  339;  special  vbs.,  ib.nn., 
NN.;  pass,  form,  ib.  N.4;  with  vbs.  of 
Naming,  Making,  etc.,  340;  pass,  form, 
ib.  R.l;  End  by  ad  or  Dat.,  ib.  R.2:  one 
Ace.  is  cognate,  341  and  n.2;  one  Ace. 
forms  a  phrase,  342;  as  a  general  objec- 
tive case,  343,  with  Interjections,  ib.  1: 
Ace.  and  Inf.,  ib.  2:  and  Dat.  with  vbs. 
of  Giving  and  Putting,  348;  with  prepa. 
for  Part.  Gen.,  372, R.2:  for  Abl.  of 
Standard,  403,N.2:  subj.  of  Inf.,  203,R.l; 
420;  after  impersonal  Ger.,  427,n.2;  of 
Ger.,  430;  of  Ger.  with  preps.,  432;  of 
Sup.,  436;  with  Inf.  as  object  clause, 
626-536;  with  Inf.  as  subj.,  536;  with 
Inf.  after  vbs.  of  Emotion,  542,R. ;  with 
Inf.  in  rel.  clause,  635;  with  Inf.  in 
dependent  comparative  clause,  641. 

accusing -\h8.  of,  with  Gen.,  378;  with 
other  constr.,  ib.  rr.2  and  5. 

acquiescere— with  Abl.,  401,n.6. 

acquUtivg— \hs.  of,  with  Gen.,  378;  with 
other  constr.,  ib.  er.2  and  3. 

action,  activity— suffixes  for,  181,2;  182,1. 

active  voice— 112,2  ;  213  ;  Inf.  as  pass., 
532,N.2;  of  something  caused  to  be 
done,  219;  periphrastic,  247. 

ad — Jn  composition,  9,4;  vbs.  cpd.  with, 
take  Ace,  331;  with  Towns  and  Coun- 
tries, 337,RB.l  and  4;  with  Ace  of  End 
after  vbs.  of  Taking,  etc.,  340, E.2;  with 
Ace  for  Dat.,  345,R.2;  vbs.  cpd.  with, 
take  Dat.,  347;  in  the  neighborhood  of,  386, 
R.2;  //ence,403,N.4,e;  position  of,  413. R.l; 
as  adv.,  415;  as  prep.,  416,1;  with  Ace. 
Ger.,  429,2;  428,R.2:  432  and  r.:  alter 
vbs.  of  Hindering,  432,R. ;  with  Ger.  for 
Abl.  Sup.,  436,N.3;  ad  id  quod,  525,2, 

N.2. 

adaequS— with  Abl.,  296,n.1;  398,N.2. 
adaplation—worda   of,    with    Dat.    Ger., 

429.2. 
addere— with  operamaud  Dat.  Ger.,  429, 

1;  with  quod,  625,1, N.l,  with  ut,653,4. 
adding'- vbs.  of,  with   quod,  ^26,1  ;   list 

of,  ib.  N.l:  with  ut,  it>-  N.5;  653,4. 
adductus— with  Abl.  of  Cause.  408,N.3. 
adeo-with  ut,  662. 

-with  Dat.,  etc.,  347, R.2. 


GENERAL  IIS^DEX. 


505 


adfatiin--v'''*y,  4S9,n.3. 

adferre— ^vith  ut,  653,1. 

adhaerescere— with  Dat.,  etc.,  347,k.2. 

adhortari— with  ut,  546,n.i. 

adkiic— strengthens  Comp.,  301,  as  yet, 
siill,  478,N.l. 

adicere— with  quod,  525,1, n  1. 

adigere-with  ut,  663,1. 

adipisci— with  ut,  553,1. 

adire— with  Ace.  or  ad,  331,K.3. 

adiuvare— with  ut,  553,1. 

ADJECTIVE— 16,2  ;  and  subst.,  i6.b.1,k.1; 
decl.  of,  17,  defined,  72;  1st  and  2d  decl., 
73;  Gen.  and  Vo(^,  73;  stems  in  ro,  74; 
witli  Nom.  wanting.  743.2;  Prononnnal, 
75;  3d  decl.,  77;  two  endings,  78;  stems 
in  ri,  78,2;  in  all  ainl  Sri,  78  R.;  one 
ending,  80:  case  peculiarities,  83;  abuu- 
dantia,  84,  varying  decl.,  84,2;  defective 
and  indeelinable.  85;  comparison  of,  86; 
correlative.  109:  formation  of,  182. 

As  subst.,  204, NN, 1-4;  agreement  of 
pred.,  211:  excepticms,  j6.  im. :  altrib. 
agrees  in  Gendej-,  286.  ueut.  with  fern., 
ib.  3;  concord  of,  289;  with  two  snbjs., 
290:  position,  290  N  2,  291;  meaning 
varies  with  position,  ib.  Kl;  676; 
superlatives  of  Order  and  Sequence, 
291,1, R.2;  numerals,  292-295;  compara- 
tives, 296-301;  superlatives,  302,  303;  of 
Inclination.  Knowledge,  etc.,  in  pred., 
325,R-fi,  verbal  with  Ace,  330,N  3;  ueut 
in  Cognate  Ace.  333,1  ;  of  Extent  in 
Degree,  334  and  r.1;  or  Time,  336,n.1; 
with  Gen.  of  Quality.  365,R.2,  of  3d 
decl.  as  pred.,  366, R. 2 ;  with  Abl.  of 
Separation,  390,3;  with  Abl.  of  Atten- 
dance, 392,R  1,  with  Abl.  of  Quality,  400; 
in  Abl.  Abs.,  410,nn.4,5;  with  Inf.,  421, 
N.l,c;  with  Inf.  for  Gen.  of  Ger.,  428,N.3; 
with  Abl.  Ger.,  431,N.l;  with  Abl.  Sup., 
436,N.2;  neut.  with  ut,  553,4,  and  r.2. 

adligare— with  se  and  Gen.,  378,R.l. 

admirari-with  inf.,  633,r.i. 

admodum— lerj/,  439,n.3;  with  quam 
and  ludic,  467,N.;  yes,  471,1. 

admonere— with  two  Aces.,  341,  n. 2 ;  with 
ut,  546,N.l. 

Adonic— measure,  789,  792. 

adoriri— with  inf.,  423,2.n.2. 

adorning~\hs.  of,  with  Abl.,  401,n.1. 

adstringere— with  s5  and  Gen.,378,R  l. 

adulescSns— 437  n.1. 

advantage—yhs.  of,  with  Dat. ,  346. 


ADVERB — defined,  16,5,  and  r.3;  discussion 
of,  91,  92:  from  Ace,  91,1;  from  Abl.,  ib. 
2;  from  Loc,  ib.3;  imcertain,  ib.  4;  by 
terminations,  92,1-5;  syntactical  aud 
miscellaneous,  9?, 6  ;  comparison  of,  93; 
numeral,  98:  pron.,  110:  with  Dat.,  359, 
N.7,  with  Part.  Gen.,  372,N.3  :  general 
use  of,  439;  position  of,  440;  for  rel. 
with  prep.,  611,u.l.  position  of,  677. 

adversari-with  Dat.,  346,r.2. 

adversative- sentences,  483-491;  parti- 
cles, 483 ;  cum,  SSO.nn.I  and  2,  587; 
qui,  634. 

ad  versus— gives  obj.  toward  which,  359j 
R.2;  as  adv  ,  415:  as  prep.,  416,2. 

advertere-animum,  with  Ace,  342. 
ae— pronunciation  of,  1  aud  n.;  weaken-^ 

ing  of,  8,1. 
aed§S— omitted,  with  Gen.,  362,R.3. 
aequalis— with  Gen.  or  Dat..  359,R.l. 
aequare— with  Dat.  or  Aco.,  346. n.3. 
aequum— with  est  instead  of  sit,  254,R.l? 

aeque  with  Abl.,  296,n.1;  aequo  after 

Comp.,  398,N  I ;   with  atque,  643,N.3  ; 

aeque    aequS,  482,3. 
aes— d^cl.  of,  47, G. 
aestimare— with  Gen.,  379;  with  Abl,, 

380  N.l;  with  Abl.  and  ex,  402,R.2. 
aetas— in  Abl.  of  Time,  393, R.5  ;  idaeta* 

tis,  336,N  2. 
aeternum-as  adv  ,  336, n  1 
alficere— with  Abl,  of  Means,  401,N.3, 
afflnis— with  Dat.  or  Ace,  359,R.l;  with 

Geu  ,  374,N.2 
affirmare— with  Inf ,  627.R.2. 
age— with  PI ,  211,N.2;  with  Impv.,  269; 

age  vSro,  487,n,3  ;  id  ago,  with  ut, 

546,N  1. 
agency— suffixes  for,  181, 1  ■ 
agent— in  Abl.  with  ab,214,  401:   in  Abl  , 

214,R  2;  in  Dat.,  215,  354,  366;  and  In- 
strument, 401,R.l. 
aggredi— with  Inf  ,  423,2,n.2. 
aio— 175,1;   supplied  from  negO,  447,R. 

introduces  O.R.,  648,R.2 ;  with  Inf.,  52'  , 

R.2. 

alaris— and  alarius,  84,2, 
Alcaic— measure,  791,  799. 
Alcmanian— measure,  786. 
ali— forms  indef.  prons,,  111,1. 
alignus— poss,  of  alius,  108;  with  Gea. 

or  Dat..  359,R.l  and  n.2. 
aliquando— aliquando,  482, n.i. 
aiiquantum— with  ante,  403,n»#. 


5o6 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


aliquis  and  aliqui— 107;  with  PI.  vrb., 
211,N.2;  syntax  1)1,  314:  with  numerals, 
314,K.2,i;  lor  quis  aud  qui,  107,N.l,  and 
315, N.  1  :   with  two  negs.,  316, n.  1  ;  per 

aliquem  stare,  with  ne,  quominus, 
648,N.l. 
alius— d  eel.  of,  76,  108;  reciprocal  alius 
alium,  221,K.l;  with  Abl.,  319;  lor 
alter,  Ceteri,  ib.  n.I  ;  besides,  ib.  N.2; 
alia  as  Ace.  of  Respect,  338,2;  aliter 
with  Abl.  of  Mea.sure,  403  n. 3;  aliuS 
atque  alius,  477,  n.9  ;  alias— alias,  482, 
1  ;  turn- alias,  alias— plerumque, 
interdum— alias,  ib.  n.2  ;  alio— alio, 
alibi— alibi,  ib.  2  :  aliter— aliter,  ib. 

3;  aliter  strengthens  sin,  592;  followed 

by  quam,  nisi,  praeter,  643, N.i ;  with 
atque,  643,^.3. 

all6c-decl.  of,  68,12. 

alphabet— 1.     Sounds    of  letters,  ib.  kr. 

1-3;  names  of  letters,  ib.  n. 
alter—deci.  of,  76,  108;  for  secundus, 

96,5  ;  alter  alterum,  reciprocal,  221,  R. 
1;  and  alius,  319. 
alteruter— (leci.  of,  76, 108. 

altitude -with  Ace.  of  Extent,  335, R.l. 
altus  -with  Ace.  of  Extent,  335,R.l. 
amare— 122;  amabo,  with  impv.,  269; 

amans,  437,n.1  ;  with  Gen.,  375,K.2. 
amb— ill  composition,  9,4. 

ambire— conj.  of,  169,2,r.i. 

ambo— decl.  of.,  73,R., 95,108;  and  uter- 
que,  292. 

arnicas- with  Gen.  or  Dat.,  369,R.l. 

amplius— with  quam  omitted,  296,r.4. 

an -in  disjunctive  questions,  457,1  ;  in 
phrases,  ib.  2  ;  strengthened  by  ne,  ib. 
l,xN.2;  as  a  simple  interrog.  particle,  ib. 
1,N  3;  in  second  part  of  a  disjunctive 
question,  458 ;  anne,  ib.-.  and  aut,  ''^• 
N.4  ;  annon  and  necne,  459;  for  num 
or  ne  ill  indirect  question,  460,1,n1; 
or  497. 

auacoluthou  — 697. 

Anacreontic — measure,  819. 

anacrusis— and  anacrustic  scheme,  739 

anapaestic— foot,  734;  rhythm,  736;  va- 
rieties of,  777-782:  substitutes  for,  777. 

anaphora— 485. N.2;  636, n. 4:  682. 

angi— with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  633. r.1. 

angiportus-<h^c].  of,  68  5. 
animadvertere-with  ir;f.,  527.K.1. 
animals—as  iustrumeuts  or  agents,  214, 
S.2. 


animus— with  ut,  646, n.2  ;  animum  ad- 
vertere,  with  Acc,  342:  animi  as  Loc, 

374, X. 7;  in  animo  esse,  with  Inf.    422, 

N.5. 

Anio-decl.  of,  41,4. 
annuere— with  Dat.,  etc.,  347,r.2. 

ante— in  composition,  9,4  ;  vbs.  cpd.  will 
take  Acc.  or  Dat.,  331,  347;  with  Abl.  of 
Standard  or  Acc.  of  Extent,  i03,N.4 ; 
position  of,  413,  R.l  and  k.3;  as  adv., 
415  ;  as  prep.,  416,3  :  Mith  Acc.  Ger., 
432  and  n.I;  with  part.,  437,n.2. 

anteaquam— see  antequam. 

antecedent  —  action,  661-567  :  definite, 
613  ;  repetition  of,  616  ;  incorporation 
of,  616  ;  indefinite,  621 ;  def.  or  iudef. 
with  Indie,  or  Siibjv.,  631,1,  and  2. 

antecedere— with  Dat.,  etc.,  347,r.2. 

antecellere-with  Dat.,  etc.,  347,r.2;  with 

Abl.  of  Respect,  397,n.2. 

anteire— with  Dat.,  etc.,  347,R.2. 

antepenult— 11. 

antequam— with  Indic,  574-576  ;  with 
Pr.,  575  ;  with  Pf.  and  Fut.  Pf.,  576 ; 
M-ith  Subjv.,  577. 

anterior— 87.8. 

aphaeresis-719,2,EX. 

apocope- 703.  R.  3. 

aorist— forms  on  sO,  sim,  131,4,^.;  defi- 
nition, 224  ;  Pure  Pf.  as  Aor  ,  236,n.  ; 
Hist.  Pf.,  ,^39;  Plupf,  241, n.  1  ;  Pf.  as 
Potential  of  Past.  258  n  2. 

apodosis — 589;  omission  of,  601;  in  com- 
parative sentences,  602  ;  in  Indic.  in 
Unreal  Conditions,  597.R.3  ;  alter  vrb. 
requiring  Subjv.,  ib.u  5. 

apo8iopesis~691. 

apparere— as  cop.  vb.,  20S,n.1  ;  with 
Nom.  and  Inf.,  628.N.2  ;  with  ut,  653,4, 

appellare — with  two  Acxs.,  340;  with  two 
Nonis.,  206. 

appointing— \ha.  of,  with  Dat.  of  Ger., 
429,2. 

apposition — 320;  concord  in,  321;  excep- 
tions, ib.  KR.,NN.  ;  Partitive,  322,  323; 
Restrictive,  322  ;  Distributive,  323  ; 
whole  and  part,  ib.  n.2  ;  to  sentence, 
324  ;  predicate,  325  ;  Gen.  of,  361 ;  to 
names  of  Towns,  386,R.l  :  to  Loc,  ill, 
R.3;  prou.  incorporated,  614,  R.4;  subst, 
incorporated,  616,2. 

aDpropinquare— witli  Dat.,  346,h.2. 

aptUS— constr.,  652,R.2;  with  qui,  631,?.. 

apud— 418.4. 


GENERAL   IXDEX. 


507 


arbitrari— with  Inf..  627,r.2. 

arbitratti— as  Abl.  ot  Cause.  408,n'.1. 

arbor    ti«'"i-  <'f.  45,n. 

arcere— with  Abl.  ot  Separation,  390,"2,n.2. 
Archilochiau— measure,  788,  800. 
arcus— decl.  of,  68,5. 
ardere— with  int.,  423,2,n.2  ;  ardens,  to 

express  cause,  403,x.2. 

ardor— with  ut,  54:6.n.2. 

arguere— with  Gen.,  378,u.l;  with  Inf., 
628,N.l. 

Aristophanic— measure,  793. 

arranj^ement— of  words,  671-683 ;  of 
clauses,  684-687  ;  grammatical  or  rhe- 
torical, 672  ;  ascending  and  descending, 
673  ;  of  simple  sentences,  674  ;  of  inter- 
rog.  sentences,  675  ;  of  adj.  and  Gen., 
676:  of  alvs.,  677;  of  preps.,  678:  of  par- 
ticles, 679  :  of  attributes,  680  ;  of  oppo- 
sites,  681;  of  pairs,  682  :  anaphoric  and 
chiastic,  682 ;  poetical,  683  :  periods, 
685;  historical  and  oratorical,  687. 

arridere— with  Dat.,  ejc,  347,r.2. 

artisan — suffixes  for,  181, :3. 

as — decl.  of,48,R. 

Asclepiadeau— measure,  802,  803. 

asking — vbs.  of,  with  two  Aces.,  339  and 
K.l.N.l;  with  Inf.  or  ut,  546  and  r  3. 

aspergere— with  Dat.  and  Ace,  or  Ace. 
and  Abl.,348,R.l. 

aspicere— with  inf.,  627,r.i  ;  aspectu, 
436,N.l. 

aspirates — 6,2,B. 

assentiri— with  Dat.,  346,r.2;  347,R.2. 

assequi-with  ut,  663,1. 

-assere— as  inf.  ending,  131,4,^.4. 

asseverations — in  Subjv.,  262  ;  in  Fut. 
Indic,  ib.  N.;  with  nisi,  591,/>.2. 

assidgre— with  Dat.,  e.ic,  347,R.2. 

assimilations — of  vowels,  8,4;  of  conso- 
nants, 91,2,3;  of  preps.,  9,4;  of  Yoc, 
211,R.3. 

assaefacere— with  Abi.  or  Dat.,  401,n.2  ; 
with  Inf..d23.2,N.2. 

assTiescere-with  Abl.  or  Dat.,  401,n.2; 
with  Inf.,  423,-i,N.2. 

asttl — in  Abl.  of  Manner,  399,N.l. 

asyndeton  —  after  demonstrative,  307, 
K.4;  in  coordination,  473, N.,  474,n.,  483, 
N.,  492, N. 

at— use  of,  488  and  nn.:  ast,  488,n.1. 

atque— for  quam,  296,n.4  ;  syntax  of, 
477  and  notes  :  adds  a  third  member, 
481,N.;  with  adjs.  of  Likeness,  etc.,  643; 


for    quam    after    neg.    Comp.,    344, n. 

2. 

atqui— 489;  atquin,  ib.  n.i. 

attendance  -Abl.  of,  392  ;  with  cum,  i&. 
R  1:  instrumental,  ib.  r.2. 

attinet  w'ith  inf.,  422,n.4;  restrictions 
witli,  627,R.2. 

attraction  in  Gender,  211,R.5  ;  in  mood, 
508,4,  629:  of  vb.  of  Saying  into  Subjv., 
6il,N.3,  586,N.3,  630,N.3  ;  of  Eel.,  617  ; 
inverse,  617, N. 2  ;  of  mood  in  general, 
662,  653. 

attributive~288  ;  concord  of  adj.,  289  ; 
with  two  or  more  substs.,  290:  po.sition 
of,  291  ;  superlatives  of  Order  and  Se- 
quence, 291,1,R  2  :  pred.,  325  ;  various 
peculiarities  of,  ib.  rr.  ;  omitted  with 
cognate  Ace,  333,2,N.l  ;  with  Abl.  of 
Time,  393,R.5 ;  omitted  with  Abl.  of 
Manner,  399, n.I;  with  Inf.,  421,n.2;  with 
part.,  437,R. 

au— pi'onunciation  of,  4  ;  weakening  of, 
8,1. 

auctorem  esse,  with  Dat.,  346,n.5  :  with 
Inf.,  527,R.2  ;  with  ut,  646,n.1. 

auctoritas-with  ut,  546,n.i  ;  auctori- 

tate  as  Abl.  of  Cause,  408,N.l. 

audere— with  Inf.,  423,2,n.'2. 

audire-iike  Gr.  aKoveif,  206,N.2:  audi- 
6ns,  with  Dat.,  346. n. 5  ;  with  cum  and 
Subjv.,  680,r2;  with  Inf.  and  part., 
627,R.l,  and  n.I  ;  with  rel.  and  Indic, 
467.N.;  audita,  436,N.l. 

auscultare— with  Dat.,  346,r.2. 

aut— t^istinguished  from  an,  468. N.4;  use 
of.  493  and  notes;  aut— aut  with  PI., 
236,N.l:  subdivides  a  neg.,  445. 

autem— position  of,  413,N.3,  484  R.;  syn- 
tax of,  484;  in  lively  questions,  ib.  N.I  ; 
strengthens  ged,  485, N. 3,  592. 

auxiliari -with  Dat.,  346,r.2. 

auxiliaris— and  auxiliarius,  84,2. 

auxiliary— vbs.  with  Inf.,  280,1,6. 

avSre— with  inf.,  423,2,x.2. 

a  versus— with  Dat.,  359,R.5. 

Baccar— 68,12. 

Bacchic— foot,  734 ;  measures,  811-814. 

balneum— 68,3. 

becomhig—vhs.  of,  with  two  Noms.,  206. 

beginning— yhs.  of,  with  Inf.,  423,  and  n.2. 

believing— whs.  of,  with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  626 

and  627;  with  Nom.,  528. 
bellare-with  Dat.,  346,n.6. 


5o8 


GENERAL   IXDEX. 


bellum-in  Abl.  of  Time,   394,B  ;  belli 

as  Loc,  411,B.2. 
belonging— suffixes  for,  182,5. 
benev  olus— t-ompared,  87,4. 
heseecluiig—\h8.  of,  witti  ut,  54.6. 
bewaring — vbs.  of,  witli  n6,  648. 

bibere— with  dare,  421,n.i,6. 

bidding -\ha.  ot,  witli  Dat.,  346. 

biiugus— and  biiugis,  84,1. 

bimatris— 86,1. 

bini-for  duo,  348,r.2. 

blandiri— with  Dat.,  346,u.2, 

boards— with  Dat.  Ger.,  429,1. 

bonus -comparison,  90  ;  cui  bono,  356, 

R.l  ;  bene,  as  adv.  of  Degree,  439,n.2, 

and  3. 
books— omit  in  with  Abl.,  387. 
bos— decl.  of,  62.7. 
brachylogy— 689. 
breathings— 6, 2,  A. 
bi/ying—.vhs.  of,  with  Gen.    or  Abl.,  379, 


C— sound  of,  l,B.l;  name  of,  1,n. 
cadere— with  Abl.  of  Separation,  390,2,N. 

2. 
caesura— defined,    750  ;    varieties,    751  ; 

masc.  and  fern.,  752  ;  bucolic,  753,k.2  ; 

in  Iamb.  Sen.,  769,n.2;  in  lam.  Trim. 

Cat.,  761,N.;  in  lam.  Trim.  Claud.,  762, 

N.4  ;    in    lam.   Oct.,   763,N.6.  ;  in  lam. 

Sept.,  764, N.2  ;  in  Troch.  Sept.,  770,N.2; 

in  Dae.  Hex.,  784,N.2  :   in  alcaic,  791, 

798,  799,N.l ;  in  Glyconic,  795;  in  Plialae- 

cean,  796,n.3  ;  in  Sapphic,  797,N.2,  804  ; 

in  Archilochian,   800,N.  ;    in  Asclepia- 

dean,  802,n.1. 
calling— \hs.  of,  with  two  Aces.,  340;  with 

two  Noras.,  206. 
calx— decl.  ol,  70,D. 
campi-as  Loc,  411,R.2. 
cantica— defined,   747;    in    early    Latin, 

824;  in  later  Latin,  826. 
capability— adja.  of,  with  Inf.,  421,N.l,c. 
capacity— acijs.  of,  with  Dat.  Ger.,  429,2  ; 

suffixes  for,  182,2. 
capx—with  Gen,  of  Charge,  378,r.1. 
capital— decl.  of,  78,  b. 
caput— decl.  of,  63.8;  est  with  Inf.,  422, 

N.2. 

cardinal  numbers— 94 ;  Gen.  Pi.  of,  95, 
K.2 ;  collective  Sg.  of,  ib. ;  duO  and 
ambO,  292  ;  with  singull,  295:  for  Dis- 
tributive, 295.N.;  position  of,  676,k.2. 


carere-  with  Abl.,  406;  with  Gten.,  383,1, 

n.2. 
Caro— decl.  of,  41,4;  gender  of,  43,1. 
Carthagini— as  Loc,  411,e.1. 
carus—with  Abl.  of  Price,  404,n.2. 
cases— defined,    23 ;    strong    and    weak, 

recti  and  obliqui,  24 ;  case-lorms,  25  ; 

endings,  26,2. 
cassis— decl.  of,  68,12. 
Casu    as  Abl.  of  Manner,  399,n.1. 
catalexis    742. 
causa— with  Gen.,  373;  with  poss.  pron., 

ib.  R.2;  with  Gen.  Ger.,  428.E.2;  causa, 

in  phrases  with   ut,  646,n.2;    causam 

vincere,  333,  2,b. 

CAUSAL  skntences— coordinate,  498  ;  par- 
ticles, 498  ;  syntax  of  subordinate,  538- 
642  ;  general  division,  638,  539 ;  with 
quod,  cte.,  and  Indie,  640  :  with  quod, 
etc.,  and  Subjv.,  541;  with  quia,  ib. 
N.l ;  rejected  reason,  ib.  n.2  ;  with 
quandoque,  il>-  N-5  ;  with  vbs.  of  Emo- 
tion, 642  ;  si  for  quod,  i^-  n.1  ;  with 
cum,  580,RR.l  and  2,  586 ;  with  tam- 
quam,  etc.,  541.N.4,  602,n.4  ;  relative, 
634  ;     clauses  in  O.O.,  655. 

causation— \hs,.  of,  with  part.,  637;  with 
ut,  553,1;  pass,  with  ut,  ib.  3. 

causative  verbs— formation  of,  191,4. 

cause— Abl.  of,  408  ;  various  expressions 
for,  ib.  NN.  ;  preventing,  ib.  n.4  ;  exter- 
nal, ib.  N.6;  represented  by  part.,  666, 
670,2. 

cav  ere— with  Subjv.  for  imp  v.,  271,2; 
with  Dat.,  346,N.2;  constructions  with, 
548,kn.  1  and  3. 

ce— appended  to  iste,  104,3,N.2  ;  to  iHe, 
ib.  N.3. 

C6dere— with  Dat.,  346.R.2  ;  with  Abl.  of 
Separation,  390,2,n.2. 

cedo— clefective,  176,6. 

celare— with  two  Aces.,  or  dS,  339  and  r. 
1  and  3,N.l. 

celer— comparison  of,  87,1,  and  n. 

Cgnsgre-with  inf.,  627,b.2  ;  with  ut,  646, 
N.l ;  c§nseo,  yes,  471,2. 

centimanus— defective,  86,2. 

cernere— with  Inf.,  627,r.i. 

certare— with  Dat.,  346,n.6;  rem  cer- 

tare,  333, 2,B. 
certus— strengthens    quidam,    313,R.3  ; 

with  Gen.,  374.N.9 ;  certg,  certo,  yes. 

471,1;  certe,  strengthens  at,  488, n.2, 

oertius  (quam),  with  inf.,  422, n.3; 


GENERAL  INDEX. 


509 


Certum  est,  with  inf..  423,2,n.2;  cer- 
tiorem  facere,  with  inf.,  627, r. 2. 

C6SSare— with  inf.,  423,2,n.2. 

(ceterus)— Nom.  masc  wanting,  74,R.2, 
85,1;  use  of  cgterum,  4il:  cetera  "sed 
partitively,  2913.2;  alius  instead,  319, 
N.l:  as  Ace.  of  Respect,  338,2. 

charge— in  Gen.  with  Judicial  verbs, 
378  ;  with  nomine,  i&-  R-2 ;  iu  Abl.,  ib. 

K.3. 

chiasmus— 682  and  n. 

choosing— vhs.  of,  with  two  Noms.,  206  ; 

with  two  Aces.,  340  ;  End  with  Dat.  or 

ad,  i^-  R-2  ;  vbs.  of,  with  Final  Dat., 

356,N.2. 
choriambic— feet,  734  ;  rhythms,  801- 
cingi— with  Ace,  338,N.2. 
circa— position  of,  413, R.l  ;  as  adv.,  415  ; 

as  prep.,  416,5  ;  with  Ace.  Ger.,  432  and 

N.l. 

Circiter— as  prep..  416.6. 

circum— iu  composition,  9,4  ;  vbs.  cpd. 

witli,  take  Ace,  331;  never  repeated,  ife. 

11.2;  as  adv.,  415;  as  prep.,  416,5. 
circumdare— with  Dat.  and  Ace,  or  Ace. 

and  Abl.,  348, K.l. 
circumfundere— with  Ace.  and  Dat  ,or 

Ace.  and  Abl.,  348,R.l. 
Circumspice— with  direct  question,  467, 

N. 

circumstantial  cum — 585  588. 

Cis— as  prep.,  416,7. 

citerior-87,2  and  7. 

Citius  quam— coustr.  after,  644,u.3. 

citra— as  adv.,  415:  as  prep.,  416,7. 

Civitas — concord  of,  in  pred.,  211,e.6. 

clam -as  adv.,  415;  as  prep.,  416,8. 

Clanculum— as  prep.,  416,8. 

cliVUS-decL  of.  67,2. 

clothing— vhs.   of,  with  Ace.  of  Respect, 

338  N.2;  with  Abl.  of  Means,  401. N.l. 
cluere— with  Nora,  and  Iuf.,623,N.l. 
COepi— 175,5,a,  and  n.  ;    with  Inf.,  423, 

N.a. 

COgere— with  Inf.,423,2,N.2;  withut,S53, 
2;  conclude,  with  Inf.,  546,R.l,  653,2,n. 

cogitare— with  inf.,  423,2,n  2. 

COgitatio— iu  phrases  with  ut,  5S7,b. 

Cognate  Accusative —  333,2  ;  similar 
phrases,  ib.  r.  :  with  second  Ace,  341  ; 

with  proliibere,  iubgre,  ii>.  n.2. 

COgnatUS— ^yith  Gen.  or  Dat.,  359, R-l. 
COgnitio— in  phrases  with  ut,  657,R. 

cognomen  esse— with  Dat.,  349, b.5. 


cognoscere— with  inf.,627.R.l;  cognitu 

as  Sup.,  436,N.l. 
coincidence— constr.  with,  513,^.3. 
COire— with  Dat.,  346,N.6. 
coUigere— with  inf.,  627, e.2. 
COllocare— with    in    and  Abl.,  385,E.l ; 

with  in  and  Ace,  ib.  N.3- 
COlus— decl.  of,  61,N.5. 
comitari— with  Dat.,  346,n.2. 
COmitiis— as  Abl.  of  Time,  393,R.5. 
commiserari— with  Ace,  377,n.2. 
COmmittere— with    Ace.    Cter.,  430,N.l; 

with  ut,  648  N.l. 

commovSre— with  ut,  653,2;  commotus, 

to  express  cause,  408,N.2. 

commune— as  subst  ,  211, R.*:  iu  phrases 
with  ut,  657,R. ;  communis,  w'ith  Gen. 
or  Dat ,  359,B.l. 

comparative— in  lor,  86;  in  entior,  87,4,5; 
lacking,  87,9;  with  quam  or  Abl.,  296 
and  RR. ;  omission  of  quam,  ib.  r.4;  age 
with  natus,  ib.  R  5;  with  opiniSne,  lb. 
E.6;  of  Disproportion,  298,  omission  of 
ut  alter  quam,  ib.  R.2;  restriction  of, 
300;  strengthened,  301:  doubled,  ib.; 
with  Part.  Gen.,  372  and  tt.2;  with  Abl. 
of  Respect,  398  and  b.;  with  Abl.  of 
Measure,  403,n.1;  with  Abl.  Ger.,431,N. 
2;  with  quam  qui,  631,3. 

coMPARATivK  SENTENCES— 638-644 ;  divis- 
ion of,  638;  moods  in,  639;  vb.  omitted 
in,  640  ;  in  dependent  clauses,  641;  cor- 
relatives in,  642;  the  more— the  more,  ib. 
R.2;  with  atque,643;  with  quam,  644. 

comparison— of  adjectives,  86 ;  peculiar- 
ities, 87:  by  magis  and  maxim§,  ib.Q; 
by  plus  and  plurimum,  ib.  r),N.2:  de- 
fective, 87,2,7,9.  of  participles,  68,89;  of 
advs.,  93;  irregular,  90;  standard  of, 
omitted,  297;  of  qualities.  299;  condi- 
tional eentenceg  of.  602- 

compelling— vhs.  of,  with  ut,  553,2. 

compensatory  lengtheninpr— 9,6,«. 

COmperee— with  luf  forImpv.,271,2,ir.a^ 

comperire— with  Gen,,  378,e.1;  with  Inf., 
527,  R.l. 

compesce— with  laf.  for  Impv.,  271,2, 

N.2. 

complere— with  Gen.,  383,1. 
COmpleXUS— as  a  Present,  282.>f. 
compos— with  Gen.,  374,N.3. 
composition— of   words,   193-200 ;  dlvlg. 
ions,  193;  of  Bubats.,  194-198;  oi  vbs.. 


510 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


compounds— attrib.,  197,1 ;  dependent, 
lb.  2  ;  poss.,  198  ;  quantity  in,  716. 

con— »ee  cmn. 

COnarl— with  inf.,  423,2,n.2. 

COnatUS— defective,  68,5. 

COncgdere— «sed  personally  in  pass.,  217, 

N.2;  with  Dat.,  346,e.2;  with  Inf.,  423,2, 

N.2;  532,N.l;   with  Ace.  Ger.,  430,n.1; 

with  ut,  548,N.l. 
conceiving— \hs.  of,  Avith  obj.  clause,  523. 
concessive— Snbj v.,   264  :   CUm,  580,nn.1 

and  2,  587;  qui,  634;  part..  009,667,670,4. 
CONCESSTVE     SENTENCES— 603-609 ;      With 

etsi,  etc.,  604 ;  with  quamquam,  605 ; 
■with  quamvis,  etc.,  606;   with  licet, 
607;  with  ut,  608;  representatives  of, 
609. 
concltidere— with  inf.,  627,k.2. 

concord — 210;  pred.  with  subj.,  211;  vio- 
lations of,  ib.  KB.l-6,HN.l-3;  of  subj.  and 
pred.  multiplied,  285-287;  of  app.,321; 
neut.  for  persons,  323, n  2;  of  rel.,  614. 

concupiens— with  Gen.,  375,n.2. 

concurrere— with  Dat.,  346, n.6. 

condecet— with  inf.,  422, n. 4. 

vondemning — vbs.  of,  with  Gen.,  378;  with 
other  constrs.,  ib.  r.2;  with  Abl.,  ib.  r. 
3;  enforced  destination,  ib.  r.4. 

COndiciS— in  phrases  with  nt,  546, N.2. 

condition— suflBxes  for,  181,8;  indicated 
by  a  question,  453,n.3;  represented  by 
part.,  667,670,4. 

conditional  cum — 583- 

CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES— 58^602  ;  divis- 
ion of,  589;  sigfl.  590;  negatives,  691; 
two  excluding,  592;  equivalents  of  Pro- 
tasis, 593;  classilication  of.  594.  Logical, 
696;  in  O.O.,  it.R.l;  withSubjv.,  ib.  rr. 

2,3;  sive— sive,»fc  R  *;  siquidem,  »&  k. 
6;  simodO,»6B.6,  phrases,  ife.N.l:  range 
of  tenses,  »6.N.2.  Ideal,  596;  for  un- 
real, ii.R.l;  shift  to  unreal,  »6.B.2;  after 

non  possum,  »6  k-3;  in  6.O.,  ib.  r.5. 

Unreal,  597;  Impf.  of  Past,  ib.  B.l;  In- 
die, iu  Apodosis,  xb.  rr  2,3;  in  0  0.,  ib, 
B.4:  after  a  vb.  requiring  Subjv.,  t6.  r. 
5  absque,  »fr-N.l.  Incomplete,  698-601; 
omission  of  sign,  698;  of  vb.  of  Prot., 
699;  of  Prot.,  600;_of  Apotl.,  601;  of  Com- 
parison, 6(K;  in  O.O.  general  consider- 
ation, 656;  Logical,  657;  Ideal,  658;  Un- 
real, 659;  Pf.  Inf.  and  potuisse,  *6.  N. 
COndiicit— with  Dat.,  346, R.2;  with  Gen., 
379;  with  Ace.  Qer.,  430,k.1. 


confici-with    Inf.,    633,e.1;    with   ttl, 

553,3. 
COnfidere— with  Dat.,   346,r.2  and  n.2; 

with  Abl.,  401,N.6;  with  Inf.,  627,R.2. 

confirmare— with  inf.,  627,r.-2. 

congruere— with  Dat ,  etc.,  347,r.2. 

conjugation— defined,  17;  systems  of,  120; 
first.  122;  second,  123,  irregular  si^coiid, 
124;  third,  125;  third  in  io,  126.  fourth, 
127;  deponents,  128;  periphrastic,  129; 
notes  on;  130,131;  change  iu.  136. 

conjunction— defined,  16.7,  and  r.3. 

coniungere— with  Dat.  or  cum,  359,n.3. 

CONSECUTIVE  SENTENCES— exceptional  se- 
quence in,  613;  syntax  of,  651-558;  gen- 
eral division,  551 ;  Pure,  552";  tantum 
abest  nt,  ^&. «.!;  with  dignus,  etc.,  ib. 

R,2 ;  with  idea  of  Design,  ib.  r.3:  ut 
non,  tvithout,  ib.  R.4  ;  Complementary, 
553;  vbs,  of  Effecting,  553;  vbs.  of  Cau- 
sation, ib.l;  of  Compelling,  etc.,ib.  2; 
Happening,  etc.,  ib.  3;  impersonals,  ib.i: 
vbs.  of  Hindering,  554-656;  quin  with 
vbs.  of  Preventing,  555,1;  with  vbs.  of 
Doubt,  ib.  2;  quin  =  ut  non,  656;  non 

dubitO  qnin,  ib.  rr.1,2  ;  Explanatury 
ut,  657;  Exclamatory  question ,  568:  rel. 
sentences,  631;  withdef.  antecedent,  ib. 
1;  with  indef.  antecedent,  ib.  2;  with 
Comp.,  ib.  3;  with  adj.,i6.  4;  with  quin, 
632;  Indic.  for  Subjv.,  ib.  2,rr.1,2. 

consentaneum— with  inf.,  422,n.3. 

consentire — with  Dat.,  etc..  347,r.2. 

consequi— and  cSnsequSns,  with  ut,  663, 

1  and  4. 

considere— with  in  and  Abi.,  385,r.i. 

consilium— in  Abl.  of  Cause,  408,n.1  ;  in 
phrases,  with  Inf.,  422,N.2,  and  428,n.2; 
with  dare  and  ut,  546,nn.1  and  2. 

COnsistere— with  Abl.  of  Material,  396, 

N.l. 

consonants— 6;  double,  tb.3;  sounds  of,  7; 

phonetic  variations  in,  9;  combinations 

of,  10,R.l. 
COnsors— with  Gen.,  374,N.2. 
cSnspicari— with  inf.,  627,r.1. 
conspicere— with  inf.,  527,r.i. 
COnstare— with  Dat..  etc..  347,R.2;  with 

Gen.,  379;  with  Abl.  of  Material,  396,n. 

1:  with  Nom,  and  Inf.,  628,n,2, 
c5nstituera— with  in  and  Abl.,  386,r.i  ; 

with  Inf.,  423,2,n.2;  with  ut,  546,n.1. 
lOnsti-uctiO—ad  s?nswn,  211,r.1,n,3;  prae- 

gn&ns,  699. 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


511 


c5nsuescere  -  with  Inf.,  423,2,n.2;  con- 

suetus,  witU  Inf.,  421,N.l,c. 
COnsuetudo— in  Abl.  of  Mauuer,  399. n  1; 

iu  phrases,  with  Iuf.,422,N.2,  or  ut,557, 

R. 

consulere— with  two  Aces  ,  339  ami  n  1; 
with  Dat.,  346. R  2  aud  n.2;   boni  COn- 

sulere,  380,N  2. 

coutemporaueous  action— 638-573;  in  Ex- 
tent, 569,570;  in  Limit,  571  573. 

contendere -with  Dat.,  346,n.G;  with 
l!il ,  423,'.i,N.2;  with  ut,  546,N.l. 

COntineri— with  x\bl  of  Material,  396,N  1, 
contentus,  with  Abl.,  401,n  e. 

contingit— with  ut,  553,3;  contigit, 
with  Dat.,  346,R.2;  sequence  after,  513, 
N.2;  attraction  of  pred.  after,  535,R-3. 

continuance  -\hs.  of,  with  Inf.,  423,  and 
n2. 

contra— position  of,  413,Rl;  as  adv.,  416,- 
as  prep.,  416,9;  with  atque,  643,n.3. 

contrac(ing—\hs.  of,  with  Ace.  Ger.,  430. 

contraction—  of  shorts,  732. 

contrarius— with  Gen.  or  Dat.,  359,R.l; 
with  atque,  643,n.3. 

contrasts— with  hiC— ille,  307,RR.1.2  ; 
with  ipse,  311,R.l;  with  aliquis,  314; 
alter-alter,  etc.,  323. 

convenire— iiidic.  for  Subjv.,  254,r1; 
with  Dat.,  346,N.2,  347,R.2. 

comnc(ing—\'hs.  of,  with  Gen.,  378;  other 
coustr.,  ib.  r.2. 

coordination — defined,  472;  without  con- 
junction, 472,R.  ;  syntax  of,  473-503; 
copulative,  474-482:  adversative,  483- 
491 ;  disjunctive,  492-497  ;  causal  and 
illative,  498-503. 

COpia— with  Inf.,  428,N.2. 

copula— with  pred.,  205;  itself  a  pred.,  ib. 
N.:  omitted,  209;  agrees  with  pred., 
211.R  l,EX.c. 

copulative— vbs.,  206;  with  Nom.  and  Inf., 
ib.  R.3.  Particles,  474  ;  omitted,  ib.  n., 
481.  Sentences,  474-482 ;  nse  of  neg.  to 
connect,  480. 

cor— tied,  of,  63,8;  cordi  est,  with  Inf., 
422.N.5. 

coram— as  adv. ,  415;  as  prep.,  417,3. 

cornus— dticl.  of,  68,5. 

corpus— <3ecl.  of,  48. 

correlatives— 109-111  ;  pronominal  adjs., 
109;  advs.,  110;  cpds..  Ill;  coordinating 
particles,  as  tum— tum,  alias— alias, 
etc.,  482;  of  Eel.,  618;  absorption  of,  619, 


621;  position  of,  620;  in  comparative 
sentences,  642;  omitted,  642,3. 

correptiou — 744. 

COS    defective,  70,D. 

countries— in  Ace,  with  prep.,  337, R.l ; 
without,  ib.  N  1;  in  Abl.,  391,N. 

crassitudo  -with  Ace.  of  Extent,  335,B.l. 

crassus— with  Acc.  of  Extent,  335,R.1. 

crastini— as  Loc,  411,n.1. 

creare-  with  two  Accs.,  340 ;  with  two 
]SIoms.,206. 

creation— \bs.  of,  with  Inf.,  280,1, ft. 

Crgdere— personal  in  pass.,  217,N.l;  with 
Dat ,  346,R.2  ;  with  Inf.,  627,R.2  ;  cr6di- 
tur,  with  Inf.,  628,R.2. 

cretic— foot,  734  ,  substitutions  for,  806; 
rhythms,  806-810. 

cruciari— with  Inf ,  633,r.1. 

cuius— as  poss.  pron.,  106,N.4. 

culpa— witli  Epexegetical  Gen.,  361,2. 

cum— and  quom,  7  ;  iu  composition,  9,4 ; 
with  subst.  to  form  cpd  subj.,  285, N.2; 
vbs.  cpd.  with  take  Acc,  or  Dat.,  331. 
347  ;  with  Abl.  of  Attendance,  392.  and 
R.l;  to  indicate  Time,  394, n.2,  with  Abl. 
of  Manner,  399;  with  unnatural  produc- 
tions, 400,R.2:  position  of.  413,R.l;  with 
Abl.  Ger..  433  ;  as  prep.,  417,4  ;  with  eo 
and  quod,  525, 2, N  2  ;  (primum).  as 
soon  as,  561-663 ;  Causal.  664,n.2  ;  with 
Iterative  action,  666,  567  ;  with  Subjv., 
lb.  N.;  derivation  of,  578  ;  general  view 
of,  579  ;  Temporal,  580;  fuit  CUm,  ib. 
R.l ;  memini  cum,  ib.  r.2;  witli  Lapses 
of  Time,  ib.  r.3;  in  early  Latin,  ib.  n.1  ; 
Inverse,  581  ;  Explicative,  682  ;  Condi- 
tional, 583,  590,N  3;  Iterative,  584;  with 
Subjv.,  ib.  R. ;  Circumstantial,  685-588; 
Historical,  685;  Causal,  686;  Concessive 
and  Adversative,  687:  Cum  non  =  ivilh- 
out,  ib.  R.2;  Cum— tum,  688;  mood.  ib. 
2;  cum  interim,  with  inf.,  635, n.2;  with 
Indie,  retained  in  0  0.,  655,R.3. 

-CUmque— makes  general  relatives.  111,2. 

CUncta— Aee.  of  Respect,  338,2:  may  omit 
in  with  Abl.  of  Place,  388. 

cunetari— with  inf.,  423.2,n.2. 

CUpere— with  Pf.  inf.,  280,2  e,N.  :  with 
Dat.,  346,R.2:  cupienti  est,  353  n.2; 
with  Inf.,  423,2.N.L>;  638.N.4  ;  cupiSus, 
with  Gen.,  376,N.2. 

cupiditas-with  ut,  646.N.2. 

Cupidus-with  Gen.,374,N.5. 

CUpresSUS- decl.  of,  68,5. 


512 


GENERAL    INDEX. 


ctira— with  ut,  546.N.2;  ctirae  est,  \vith 

Inf.,  422.N.5. 
curare— with  I;:f.,  423,2,n.2-,  with  Ace. 

Ger.,  430,N,1  ;  with  part.,  637,n  2;  with 

ut,  54:6.N.l;  cura  ut  for  Impv.,  271,1. 

and  2,N.2. 
CUrriculO— as  Abl.  of  Manner,  399,n.1. 

Dactylic— foot,  734  ;  substitutions,  783  ; 
rhythm,  736  ;  riiythms,  783-789. 

damnas— indeclinable,  85,C. 

daps— defective,  70,D. 

dare-Pf.  dedrot,  131,6;  Pr.  danunt, 
133,iv.,N.2  ;  with  ad  or  Dat.,  345,ii.2  ; 
with  Final  Dat.,  3i6,R  2.  operam,  with 
Dat.  Ger.,  429,n.1,  or  ut,  546.N.1  ;  with 
Ace.  Ger.,  430,N.l  ;  nuptum,  e^c-,  435, 
N.l;  with  Pf.  part.,  537.N.2;  permit,  with 
Ut,  563.2. 

DATIVE— defined,  23,3  ;  1st  decl.  in  ai,  a, 
abus,  as,  eiS,  29,nn.3,4;  3d  decl.  in  ei, 
e,  37,2;  4th  decl.  in  ubus,  uei,  U,  61,R., 
and  N.2  ;  5th  decl.,  uncommon,  63,R.l ; 
in  g,  i,  ih.  N.2;  in  Greek  substs.,  66,n.2; 
in  adjs.  in  ai,  a,  abus,  is  (for  iis),  75, 
NN.2,6  ;  in  i  of  pron.  adjs.,  76,2;  with 
act.  vb.  unchanged  in  pass.,  217,  346, 
R.l;  gives  End  with  vbs.  of  Taking,  etc., 
340,E.2  ;  with  ei  and  vae,  343,1, N.2;  of 
Indirect  Obj.,  344  ;  with  trans,  vbs., 
345  ;  with  vbs.  of  Taking  Away,  ib.  k.1  ; 
and  pro,  ib-  R.2  ;  with  iutrans.  vbs., 
346;  with  cpd.  vbs.,  347;  vdth  vbs.  cpd. 
with  de,  ex,  ab,  ib.  e.5  ;  and  Ace.  with 
vbs.  of  Giving  and  Putting,  348;  of  Pos- 
sessor, 349;  of  Personal  Interest,  350; 
Ethical,  351 ;  of  Eeference,  352,  353  ; 
with  participles,  353 ;  of  Agent,  216, 
354;  Double,  356;  with  substs.,  357;  Lo- 
cal, 358  ;  vvitli  adjs.,  359  ;  with  cpds.  of 
di,  dis,  390,2.N.5;  of  Ger.,  429. 

flg_\vith  Abl.  for  second  Ace,  339,nn  2,3; 
vbs.  cpd.  with  take  Dat.,  347,R,5  ;  with 
Abl.  of  Separation,  390,1,  and  2  ;  to  indi- 
cate Time,  394.N.2;  with  Abl.  of  Origin, 
396,and  n.2  ;  with  Abl.  of  Respect,  397, 
N.l:  with  Abl.  of  Cause,  408, n. 3:  position 
of,  413, R.l  ;  as  prep.,  416.5  ;  with  Abl, 
Ger..  433  ;  with  part.,  437,N.2  ;  dg  e3 
quod,  626,2  N.2. 

death— deponent  vb.  of  as  act.  in  Abl.  Abs., 
410.N.1. 

debSre— Indie,  for  Subjv.,  254,  R.l:  Impf. 
as   tense  of  Disappointment,  ib.  b.2  ; 


with  Pf.  Inf ,  283,2,6,  and  n.3;  with  Inf., 
423,2,N.2 

decgre—with  Pf.  Inf ,  280,2,ft,R.l  ;  with 
Dat  ,  34S,n.3  ;  with  Abl.  of  Respect, 
397  n.2 

decernere-with  inf ,  423,2,n.2,  and  546, 
R.l  ;  with  ut,  646,N  1. 

declension— defined,  17  ;  varieties  of,  27  : 
rules  for,  28;  1st,  29.  30.  2d,  31-33:  stems 
in  -ro  and  -ero,  32;  3d,  35-60:  stems  of, 
35;  formation  of  Nom.  Sg.,  36  ;  liquid 
stems,  39-46;  sibilant,  47-49;  mute,  50- 
55;  vowel,  56-59;  4th,  61,  62;  5th,  63,  64; 
vary  between  5th  and  3d,  63, R.2  ;  of 
Greek  substs..  65  ;  adjs.  of  Ist  and  2d, 
73  ;  of  pron.  adjs.,  76  ;  parts.,  80- 

decorus— with  Abl  ,  397,N.2. 

decreeing— \hs..  of,  with  Dat.  Ger.,  429,2. 

dedecet-with  inf.,  422,n.4. 

deesse-rwith  Dat  ,  349. r.4. 

deferre— with  Gen.  of  charge,  378,R.l. 

defessus— with  inf.,  421,N.l,c. 

deficere— with  Acc,  346,n.3. 

defigere— with  in  and  Abl.,  385,r.1. 

degree— ad  vs.  of,  modify  other  advs.,  469, 

'  N.2. 

deicere— with  Abl.,  390.2.N.3. 
delectari— with  acc,  346,n.3. 
deliberative    questions— 265  ;    Subjv.  in 

O.O.,  651.R.2. 
deliberatum  est-with  inf.,  423,2,n.2. 
dglicium-deci.  of,  68,3. 
deligere— with  two  Aces.,  340  ;  w-ith  two 

Noms.,  206. 
demanding— vhs.  of,  with  ut,  546. 

demergere— with  in  and  Abl.,  385.R.1. 

demirari-^nth  inf.,  533.R.1. 

demonstrare— with  inf.,  627,r.2. 

demonstratives— 104  :  attracted  in  Gen- 
der, 211, R  5,  and  n.3  ;  syntax  of,  305- 
307  ;  hie,  305  ;  iste,  306;  ille,  307  ;  hie 
— ille,  il>-  Rr1,2  ;  advs.  similarly  used, 
lb.  R'3;  strengthened  by  quidem,  ib. 
R  4  ;  reflexive  of,  521, I4. 5  ;  followed  by 
quod,  525,2  ;  continue  a  rel.  clause, 
638  N  I;  position  of,  676  R.l. 

dSmovgre— with  Abl.,  390.2,n.3. 

denominative -179,2,  and  n.;  Pf.  of  vba., 
134, v.;  formation  of  vbs.,  192. 

dense  growths— suffixes  for,  181,11. 

dentals— 6,1;  suffixes  with,  186. 

dgpellere— with  Abi.,  390,2,n.3. 

deponent— 113  ;  conjugation,  128;  list  of, 
163-166;  semi-,  167;  how  used,  220- 


GENERAL    INDEX, 


513 


dSprecari- with  ng,548,N.l. 
deprehendi-with  Geu.  of  Charge,  378, 

n.l. 
depriving— \hs.  of,  with  Abl.,  405, N. 
derivative  words— 179,2. 
descent— suffixes  for,  182,11. 
desiderare-with  luf.,  423,2,n.2. 
desidcrative  verbs — foriuatiou  of,  191,3. 
desinere— with  luf.,  423,2,nn.2,3. 
desire ~-a.d]s.  of,  with  Geu.,  374  ;  vbs.  of, 

with  luf.,  281,c.;  423,2,NN.2,4;  sequence 

after,  615.K.3  ;  with  Ace.  and  Int.,  632  ; 

with  Tit.  i^-  N.1-4  ;  with  part.,  537, N.l  ; 

with  complemeutary  Final  clause,  546. 
dgsistere— with  Abl.,  390,2,n.3. 
desperare— with  Dat.,  346,R.2  ;  with  Inf., 

527,11.2. 
determinative  pronouus— 103  ;  syntax  of, 

308. 
deterrere-with  Inf..  423,2.n.2  ;  with  ng, 

548,N.i ;  with  quominus,  549,n.i. 
deturbare— with  Abl.,  390,2,n,3. 

deus— decl.  of,  33.R.6 

dexter— decl.  of,  74,b.1;  Comp.  of,  87,1, 

K.l ;  if).  2  and  7, 
diaeresis — 5,  753. 
dialysis — 724. 
diastole — 721. 
dica— defective,  70,I>. 
dicere— with  two  Noms.  in  pass.,  206 ; 

omission  of,  209, n. 5  ;  dixerat  as  Aor., 

241,N.i ;  dicat,  dixerit  aliquis,  257,2  ; 

with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  527,R.l ;  with  Nom. 

and  Inf.,  528,   aad  N.l  ;    dicitur  and 

dictum  est,  ib.  R  2  ;  not  confined  to  3d 

person,  ib.  N.4 ;  with  ut,  546,n.1  ;  dlC, 

with  Indie,  question,  467.N.;  dictu,  iu 

Sup.,436,N. 
[dicio]— defective,  70,I>. 
di§— as  Loc,  91,3;  as  Abl.  of  Time.  393, 

R.o  ;  din,  '>y  '?«.'/,  91.2./. 
ditference — measure  of,  403  ;  vbs.  of,  with 

Abl.,  ib.  N.l. 
difFerre-with  Dat.,  346,n.6. 
difficile— comparison  of,  87,3;  with  est 

forSubjv.,  254  B.l:  with  Inf.,  421  N.l, c. 
dijficulty—adis.  of,  with  Abl.  Sup.,  436,n.2. 
dilfldere— with   Dat.,   346,R.2,  and  n.2  ; 

not  Abl.,  401,N.6. 
dignari— with  Abl.  of  Respect,  397,n.2. 
dignus— with  Gen.,  374,N.10  ;  with  Abl. 

of  Respect,  397,n.2  ;  constr.  alter,  652, 

R  2  ;  qui  or  Ut,  with  Subjv.,  631,1,  and 

B.2. 

33 


diluvium-  beteroclite,  68,6. 
diminutive— suffixes  for,  181,12,  182,12  : 

vbs.,  192,2. 
diphthongs— 4  and    n.  ;    length  of.   14  : 

quantity  of,  705. 
dis— ill  composition,  9.4. 
disagreement— vhs.  of,  with  Dat.,  346,n.G. 

discere— pass,  of  docere,  339,n.4;  with 
Iuf.,527,R.l. 

discrepare— with  Dat.,  346,n.6. 

discruciari— with  inf.,  533,r  1. 

disousl—a,dis.  of,  with  Gen.,  374. 

disinclination — adj.  of,  for  advs.,  325,R.6. 

disjunctive— particles,  492 ,  sentences, 
492-497;  particles  omitted,  492,n.  ;  ques- 
tions, 452;  forms  of,  458;  mdirect,  460,2. 

displeasure — vbs.  of,  with  Dat.,  346  ;  adjs. 
of,  with  Abl.  Sup.,  436,N.2. 

displicere— with  Dat.,  346,r.2  ;  displi- 
Cet,  withIuf.,422,N.4. 

disproportion— by  quam  pro,  qui,  ut, 
etc.,  298  ;  by  positive,  with  preps.,  ib. 
R. ;  omission  of  ut  after  quam,  ib-  n.2. 

dispudet— with  Gen.,  377,n.1  ;  with  Inf., 
422,N.4. 

dissentire— with  Dat.,  346,n.6. 

dissimilation — of  Consonants,  9,5, 

dissimilis— Comp.  of,  87,3. 
dissimulare— with  inf.,  627,r.2. 
distaedet— with  Gen.,  377,n.1. 
dlstare — with  Acc.  or  a  and  Abl.,  335,R. 

2  ;   with   Dat.,    346,  n.6  ;    with  Abl.   ol 

Measure,  403, N.l. 
distributives— 97 ;   with  pluralia  tan- 

tum,  ib.  R.3  :  for  cardinals,  ib.  N.l,  295, 

N.  ;  syntax  of,  295;  iu  apposition,  323. 
cnve?'biii?n—7iT. 
dives— Comp.  of,  87,10. 
divinam    rem    facere— with  Abl.  of 

Means,  401,N.4. 
docere— with  two  Aces.,  or  dg,  339,  and  r. 

1;  with  ab,  ib.  R.2;  doctus,  ib.  R.2,  and 

N.4;  discere  as  pass.,  ib.  n.4  ;  constr. 

after,  423, n.6. 
doing— vhs.  of,  take  obj.  clause,  623,  and 

625,1,  and  n.4. 
dolere— with  inf.,  533,r.1  ;  dolet,  with 

Dat.,  346,N.l ;  with  Dat.  and  Inf.,  633, 

R.l. 

dolo— as  Abl.  of  Manner,  399,N.l. 

domus— decl.,  61,R.2,  68,5;  Acc.  as  Limit 
of  Motion,  337:  Abl.  of  Separation,  390, 
2;  domi,  411,R.2;  with  Geu,  of  ijoss. 
pron.,  411,R.4:. 


514 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


dSnare— ■^vith  Dat.  aud  Ace,  or  Ace.  and 
Abl..  348, K.l. 

donee— <^lerivation,  568  aud  k.  :  of  com- 
plete coextension,  with  Indie,  569 ; 
until,  with  ludic,  571;  inverse,  ib.  N.6; 
with  Subjv.,  572;  to  express  subordina- 
tion, ib.  R. 

donicum— 568;  range  of,  571, n.4. 

donique— range  of,  571,n.4. 

doubt~\hs.  of,  with  quin,  555,2. 

dropping — vbs.  of,  with  quod  clause,  626, 
1;  with  ut,  ib.  N.4. 

dubitare-an,  457,2;  with  inf.,  423,2,n. 
2  ;  non  dubito,  with  quin,  555,2, r.1; 
with  Interrog.,  ib.  r.2  ;  with  Inf.,  ib. 
R.3,  and  n. 

dubium— with  an  and  Subjv.,  457,2. 

ducere— with  pred.  Nom.  or  phrase,  206, 
R.l;  with  Final  Dat.,  356,R.2;  with  Gen. 
of  Price,  379;  pgnsi  ducere,  380,1, N.2; 
deem,  with  Ace.  aud  Inf.,  527,R.2;  feaci, 
with  ut,  563,2. 

dum— fiichtic,  with  Impv.,  269;  with  Pr. 
ludic,  229,R. ;  force  of,  568,R. ;  of  com- 
plete coextension,  569;  of  partial  coex- 
tension, 570;  until,  with  Indie.,  571;  with 
Subjv.,  672;  to  express  subordination, 
i6.  R. ;  provided  that,  573;  with  modo, 
ib.;  with  Pr.  for  participle,  570,nn.1 
and  2  ;  ca\^sal,  ib. ;  retained,  with  Indie. 
inO.O.,  655,r3,  683,1, n.1. 

dUTWXlOdO —provided  that,  673. 

duo— dec] .  of,  73,  R.,  95,  and  amb5,  uter- 

que,  292. 
duritia— heteroclite,  68,2. 
duty— wbs.  of,  with  Inf.,  423  and  n.2. 

E — sound  of,  3;  weakening  of,  8,1;  length 

of  final,  707,2:  gand  ex  in  coinp.,  9,4. 
ease— adjs.  of,  with  Abl.  Sup.,  436,N.2. 
ebur— decl.  of,  44,5. 
ecastor— strengthens  atque,  477, N.2. 
ecce— with  Ace.  aud  Nom.,  343,1, N.2. 
ecquis-106  and  n.5. 
eetblipsis — 719,2. 
edere— conjugation  of,  172, N. 
edicere-with  inf.,  627,R.2;  with  ut,  646, 

N.l. 

edlicere— with  Abl.,  390,2,n.3. 
effecting — vbs.  of,    liave   Final   Sequeuce, 
643,R-1,  and  N.2;  constr.  of,  553. 

efferre— with  Abl.,  390,2, n. a. 

efiicere— with  Subjv.  and  ut,  663,1  aud  3; 
with  Inf.,  627,H.2,  563,2,N. 


egSnus— Comp.  of,  8~,5  ;    with   Gen.   or 

Abl.,  405, N. 3. 
egere— with  Gen.  or  Ace.,  383,1,  405,n.2. 
ego— tied,  of,  100;  Gen.  PL,  nostrum, 

nOStri,  100,R.2,  304,2  and  ?,:  poss.  pron. 

instead,  ib.  2, N.2;  nOS  hi  O.O..  660,4. 
ggredi  -with  Abl.,  390,2. x. 3. 
egregie— adv.  of  Degree,  439,N.2. 
ei— with  Dat.  in  exclamations,  343,1,N.2. 
gicere— with  Abl.,  390,2,n.3. 
glabi— with  Abl.,  390,2,N.3. 
Elegiambus— 821. 
elision— 719,1 ;  in    lam.  Sen.,  759,n.3  ;  in 

Dae.  Hex.,  784,n.5;  in  Pent.,  786,n.2;  in 

Sapphic,  797,  N.3;  in  Asclepiadean,  802, 

N.2. 

ellipsis — 688;  see  Omission. 

em— with    Ace.    of   Exclamation,    343,1, 

N.2. 

emere— with  Gen.,  379;  beneemere,  380, 

2,R. 

eminence— words  of,  with  Abl.,  397,N.2. 

emittere— with  Abl.,  390.2,n.3. 

emotion — vbs.  of,  with  Ace.,  330,R-  and  n, 
2,  333,1,  N.l;  vbs.  of,  with  Abl.  of  Cause, 
408;  with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  633;  in  Nom.  of 
Part.,  536, N.2;  Causal  sentences  after, 
542  and  r.  ;  perplexing,  with  indirect 
question  or  si,  542,N.l, 

emphasis— in  arrangement,  672,2, a. 

gn— in  exclamations,  343,1,N.2. 

enallage— 693. 

enclitics- effect  of,  on  pronunciation,  15, 

R.l. 

endeavor— vhs.  of,  with  ut,  646,1. 
ending— vhs.    of,    with    Inf.,    423,2     and 

N.2. 
endings — of  cases,  26,2.  27. 
endoiving—\hs.   of,  with  Abl.  of  Means, 

401,N.l. 
enim— position  of.  413,n.3,  484,r.,  498,n.1; 

yes  for,  i71,Ji-;  strengthens  sed,  485, N. 

3,493;  nsseverative,  498,n.2;  cojnbina- 

tions  of,  ib.  n.6;  after  quia,  if>-  n.7. 
enimvgrO— strengthens  sed,  485,n.3. 
gniti-with  Inf.,  423,2,N.2. 
enumerations— in  Abl.  without  in,  387. 
epanorthosis— 484,R  1. 
cpenthesis— of  vowels,  8,3;  of  consonants, 

9,7. 
epicene  substantives— 21,3- 
epulum— heteroclite,  68,3. 
ergS— use  of,  416,10;  with  Ace.  Ger.,432, 

N.l. 


GENERAL    INDEX. 


515 


ergS-vvith  Geu.,  373;  as  adv.,  3S9,n.1  ; 
with  Gen.  Ger.,  428,k.2  :  usage  of,  502 
and  N.l  ;  position  of,  16.  n.2  ;  combina- 
tions of,  ih.  X.3. 

gripere-with  Abi.,  390,2,n.3. 

erudire— with  Abl.  or  de,  339, u. 2  and  N. 
3;  with  in  or  Abl.,  401,N-1. 

esse— conjugation  of,  116;  early  forms,  ib. 
fiN.:  cpils.,  117;  as  copula,205 ;  esse  pro, 
in  numero,  etc.,  206, b  i;  omitted,  209 
and  NN.,  280,2,a,R.2  and  c  ;  with  Fut. 
part,  to  form  periphrastic,  247  ;  cpd. 
tenses  with  ful,  etc.,  ib.  R.l  ;  forem 
tor  essem,  Hj-  n.1,  250,n.2,  251,n.2; 
with  Pr.  part.,  247,n.2  ;  futUTum 
esse  Ut,  2i8-.  other  forms,  ib.  nn.;  in 
eo  est  ut,  249;  with  Pf.  part.,  2^0: 
variations,  ib.  ku.,nn.;  with  Ger.,  251  1; 
with  Final  Dat.,  356,R.2;  with  Double 
Dal.,  ib.  R.3  ;  with  Geu,,  379  ;  with  in 
and  Ace,  385, n. 3  ;  with  Abl.,  401,n.7; 
with  Geu.  Ger.,  423,R  2:  with  Dat.  Ger., 
429,1  ;  futurus  as  adj  ,  437,n.  ;  esse 
quod,  525,1, N.2;  est,  it  is  the  case,  with 
Ut,  553,3  ;  fuit  cum,  with  Subjv.,  680, 
R.l  ;  restrictions  with,  627,R.2  ;  sunt 
qui,  with  Subjv.,  631.2. 

esseda— tieteroclite,  68,1. 

et— iu  numerals,  96,4.  97,4;  et— et,  with 
PI.,  235,N.;  usage  of,  475;  =  et  tamen, 
ib.ii.l;  tor  etiam,  ib-  N-2,  482, 5. n.2: 
omitted,  481,2,n.  and  3  ;  with  adjs.  of 
Likeness  and  Unlikeness,  643,n.2. 

etenim  -use  of,  498  and  NN. 

Ethical  Dative— 361. 

etiam— strengthens  comparative,  301  ; 
syntax  of,  473  and  nn.;  yes,  471.1:  and 
quoque,  479  R.  and  N.l;  with  tum,  478, 
N.l:  after  sed,  verum,  48.2,5.  and  N.l. 

etiamsi— 603a:id  n.;  syntax  of,  604  and 

RK. 

etSi— 603;  with  Indic.  or  Subjv.,  604:  a^ul 
yet,  ib.  Ti.2;  with  part.,  609, N.l,  667, n.  ; 
with  adj.  or  adv.,  ih.  n.2;  with  Inf.,  635, 

N.2. 

evadere— with  two  Noms.,  203. 

evenit— with  Dat.,  316, r.2  ;  with  ut, 
553,3. 

event— suffixes  for,  181,2. 

evertere— with  Abl.,  390,2,n.3. 

ex— iu  comp..  9,4;  vbs.  c])d.  with,  take 
Dat.,  347,R..'5;  with  Abl.  of  Separation, 
390,1  and  2;  with  Towns,  391, R.l;  with 
Abl.  of  Origin.  395  and  n.2;  with  Abl.  of 


Material,  396:  with  Abl.  of  Respect,  397, 
N.l:  with  Abl.  of  Measure,  402  R.2;  with 
Abl.  of  Cause,  408,n.3,  413,r1;  use  as 
prep.,  417,0;  with  Abl.  Ger.,  433;  ex  eo 
quod,  525,2,N.2. 

exadversus— use  of.  416,2. 
excedere-with  Abl.,  390,2,n.3. 

eXCellere— vvith  Dat.,  347, R. 4:  with  Abl. 
of  Respect,  337,N.2;  with  Abl.  of  Meas- 
ure, 403,  N  1, 

excepto -with  quod,  625,2,N.2. 

exclamations— in  Ace,  343,1;  in  Gen., 
383,3;  in  Ace.  and  Inf.,  534;  exclamatory 
questions,  558. 

excltidere— with  Abl.,  390,2,n.3. 

excluding — vbs.  of,  with  Abl.,  390,2. 
exemplum— iu  phrases  with  ut,  546,N.2. 
exigere— with    ordinal,   294  ;    with  two 

Aces.,  339  and  n.1, 
exire— with  Abl.,  390,2,n.3. 
existimare— with  Geu.,  379;  with  ex  and 

Abl.,  402,R.2;  with  Norn,  and  Inf.,  528, 

N  1;  with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  527,R.2. 
exlex-tlfci'ective,  86,2. 
exorare— with  ut,  553,2. 
exordiri— with  inf.,  423.2,n.2. 
expedit— with  Dat.,  346.R.2. 
expellere-with  Abl.,  390  2,n.3. 
expers-with  Gen.,  374,n.2  ;    with  Abl., 

390,3,N.l. 
expetere— with  Pf,  inf.  pass  ,  280  2, c  N. 
explere— with    Gen.,  383,1,n  2  ;    explg- 

nunt,  133.  IV.  N.2. 
explicative  cum  -580,nn.1,2,  582. 

expQnere— with  in  and  acc,  385,n.-2. 

expOSCere— with  two  Accs.,  339  g.nd  n.I. 

exprimere— with  ut,  553,1. 
expugnare-with  ut,  553,1. 
exsequias— with  ire,  333,2,r. 
exsistere— with  Abl.,  390,2,n.3. 
exsolvere  -with  Abl.,  390,2,n.3. 
cxspectare— constr.  of,  672. 
exspectatione  -as  Abl.  of  Respect,  398, 

N.l. 

exspes— defective,  85,2. 

extent— iu  Degree,  334;  in  Space.  336;  iu 

Time,  336;  Acc.  of,   as  subj.  of  pass., 

336,N.3. 
exterior— Comp.  of  87,2  and  7. 
extorqugre— with  ut,  553,1. 

extra -as  adv.,  415;  as  prep.,  416,11. 
extremum— Comp.  of,  87,2  ;  with  masc. 
subj.,  211, R. 4  ;  with  ut,  553,4. 

exturbare -with  Abl.,  390,2,n.3. 


5i6 


GEl^ERAL  INDEX. 


exui— with  Ace.  of  Respect,  338,N.2;  with 
Dat.  aud  Ace,  or  Ace.  aud  Abl.,  348,R.l. 

facere-early  Pf.,  feced,  ISl.^'' ;  omission 
of,  209, N. 5  ;  mirum  factum,  209,n  2  ; 
fac  (Ut)  for  Impv.,  271,1  ;  ludOS  aud 
secoud  Ace,  342  ;  with  pred.  Geu.,  366, 

K.i ;  nihil  reliqui,  339, b. 2  ;  quod  fa- 
cere  possum,  373,N.3  ;  with  reum  and 
Geu.,  378.n.l  ;  with  Geu.  of  Price,  379  ; 

boni,  ib.  1  N.2  ;  (sacrum)  facere,  with 
Abl.,  40l.NN.4,7 ;  finem  facere,  with 

Dat.  Ger..  429,N.l :  represent,  wiih  Kcc. 

andluf.,  527,R.2;  with  Pf.  part.,  537,n  2; 

with  cousecutive    clause,   663,1  ;   with 

luf.,  653,2.N.;  facere  (faxo)  ut  as  pe- 

riphrasis,  ib.  1 ;  non  possum  (facere) 

quia,  556  ;  Sup.  of,  436, n. 
facilis— comparison  of,  87,3;  with  Inf., 

421,N,l.c. 
facinUS— with  est  and  Inf.,  422,N.2. 
faex— decl.  of,  52,7,  70,C. 
fagUS— heteroclite,  68,5. 
falsus— without   Comp.,  87,9  ;    with  ut, 

563.4. 
fama— with  est  aud  inf.,  627.R,2. 
fames- heteroclite,  68,8. 
fari— conj.  of,  176,3,  andN. 
fas— 70,B. ;  with  luf.,  422,N.2. 428.N.2;  with 

Abl.  Sup.,  436,N.2. 
fastening—yhs.  of,  with  ex,  ab,  d§,  385, 

B.2. 
fastidiosus— with  Gen.,  374,N.5. 
fateri— with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  627,R.2. 
fatum— with  est  and   Inf.,  422,n.2,  and 

428,N.2. 
[fauxl-decl.  of,  62.7. 
fav§re  -with  Dat.,  346,r.2. 
/^ar— sequence    after    vbs.    of,    616, R. 3  ; 

clauses  of,  and  Final  Clauses,  643. R. 3  ; 

syntax  of  clause  of,  650;  Inf.  or  Indirect 

question  after,  ib.  nn.4,5. 

femur— dpci.  of,  44  5,  68,12. 

fere— position  of,  677,R.l. 
ferire-withfoedus,  333,2,r. 

ferOX— with  est  and  Inf.,  633, R.l. 

ferre-conj.  of.  171 ;  legem  with  ut, 

646,N.l  ;    in    phrases    with    ut,  653.1 

and  2. 
fBstinare-with  inf.,  423,2,n.2. 
ficus— heteroclite,  68,5. 
fidem— habere  with  Dat,,  346.N.  5. 
fidere— with  Dat.,  346,a.2  aud  n.2  ;  vitl: 

Abl.,40l.N.6. 


fieri— conjugation  of,  173  and  nn.  ;  with 
two  Noms.,  206,  304,R.l  :  with  Gen.  of 
Price.  379  :  with  ex  or  dS,  396,n.2  ;  =  to 
be  sacrificed,  with  Abl.,  401. nn.. 5,7:  with 

Ut,  553.3;  fieri  potis  est  ut,  ib.  n. 

figure— Whole  and  Part.  323, n.2;  Figures 
of  Syntax  and  Rhetoric,  688-700  ;  of 
Prosody,  718  728. 

fllia— t^ecl.  of,  29,R.4. 

Jilling—\hs.  of,  with  Abl.,  406. 

ilium— heterogeneous,  67.2,6. 

FINAL  SENTENCES — With  luterrogatlve 
particle,  470  ;  general  view,  643,  644 ; 
Pure,  645;  ut  ne,  or  ut  non,  ib.  br  1,2; 
Coraplemeutary,  646-549  ;  with  vbs.  of 
Will  and  Desire,  646  ;  Inf.  instead,  ib. 
R.l ;  with  vbs.  of  Hindering,  647-649 ; 
Subjv.  without  ut,  ib.  E.2  ;  ut  ne,  ib. 
R,3  ;  with  Substantives,  ib.  N.2  ;  Inf. 
instead,  ib.  n.3  ;  n6  with  vbs.  of  Pre- 
venting, 648;  quominus,  649:  with  vbs. 
of  Fear,  650;  eight  circumlocutions  for, 
644, R- 2  ;  sequence  in,  612. 

final  syllables— quantity  of,  711-713. 

fine— in  Gen.  or  Abl.,  378,R.3. 

fine(i)-as  prep.,  417,7. 

fitness— aajs.  of,  with  Dat.,  359;  with  Dat. 
Ger.,429. 

flagitare— with  Abl.  or  a,  339,r.1,  and 
N.l;  with  ut,  646,NN.1,3. 

flagitium  hominis-  369.N.1,  361,n.3. 

flamen— flefective,  70,D. 

floCCi— as  Gen.  of  Price,  380,1. 

fluere— with  Abl.  of  Means,  401, n,.'). 

flumen— with  Gen.  of  App.,  361,N.l. 

foedus— with  ferire,  333,2,R.;  in  phrases 
with  ut,  646,N.a. 

following ~\hs.  of,  with  ut,  653,3. 

foot— in  Metre,  733  ;  names  of,  734  ;  equal- 
ity of,  740  ;  conflict  of  Word  and  Verse, 
750. 

foras-91,l,(f. 

forbidding— \hs.  of.  With  Dat.,  346  ;  with 
ne,  548. 

forgetting — vbs.  of,  with  Gen.  or  Ace,  376 
and  R.2. 

FORMATION  OF  WORDS— 176  200  ;  Simple 
words.  179-192;  primitives  and  deriva- 
tives, 179  ;  suffixes,  180  ;  formation  of 
substs.,  181  :  of  adjs.,  182:  with  suf- 
fixes, 183.  Suffixes  in  detail— vowels, 
184;  gutturals,  136:  dentals,  186;  la- 
bials, 187 ;  s,  188  ;  liquids,  189  ;  lorma- 
tiou    of    vbs.,   190;    verbalia,  191; 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


517 


frequentatives  or  intensives,  ib.  1 ;  iu- 
choatives,  ib.  2  ;  desideratives,  ib.  3  ; 
causatives,  ib.  4;  meditatives,  ib.  5; 
denominativa,  192 ;  cpd.  words,  193- 
200;  substs.,  191-198  ;  vbs.,199,  200;  see 
compounds. 
formidare— with  inf.,  423,2,n.2,  aud  533. 

R.l. 

forsitan— 457,2,N. 

forte  nisi— 591,R.4,  and  n.3. 

fortiter— w?-?/,  439,n.3. 

forum— defective,  70,D. 

fraude— as  Abl.  of  Manner,  399,n.1. 

fremere— with  Acc  and  Inf.,633,R.l. 

frequ6ns— in  pred.  attribution,  325, u.6  ; 
with  Abl.,  406,N.3. 

frequentative  verbs— formation  of,  191,1. 

fretum— heteroclite,  68,5. 

frgtus— with  Abl.,  401,N.G. 

friendlitiess—adis.  of,  withDat.,  359. 

frugi-86,C.;  Comp.  of,90. 

frui— with  Abl.,  i07,  and  ^. 2,6  ;  personal 
Ger.,  427,N.5. 

frunisci— with  Abl.,  407,n.2,6. 

[frux] —defective,  70,D. 

fugere— with  inf.  for  Impv.,  271,2,N.2; 
fugit  mg,  with  Pr.  Inf.,  281.2,N. 

fugitans— with  Gcu.,  375,n.2. 

fulmentum— heteroclite,  68,3. 

fulness— suffixes  for,  182,10. 

fulness— adjs.  of,  with  Gen.,  374;  vbs.  of, 
with  Gen.,  383,1. 

function— suffixes  for,  181,9;  in  Dat.  Ger., 
429. 

fungi— with  Abl.,  403  and  k.2,c;  personal 
Ger.,  427,N.5. 

fustis- heteroclite,  68,5. 

FUTURE— 112,3 ;  formation  of,  114,115; 
early  forms,  130,3  ;  part,  in  urum  f^r 
fem.,  211.N.1;  definition  of,  223;  usatfe 
of,  243;  of  volo  and  possum,  ^b.  r.2;  as 
gnomic,  ib.  n.1  ;  in  Impv.  sense,  243; 
periphrasticact.,  247;  Indie,  for  Deliber- 
ative Subj.v.,  254,n2;  part,  act.,  283; 
part,  as  subst.,  437,n.1  ;  part,  as  an 
adj.,  438,N. ;  representation  of  in  O.  O., 
614,  515;  periphrastic  in  Unreal  Cond., 
ib.  R.l;  Inf.,  630;  in  rel.  sentences,  622; 
syntax  of  part.,  669,  670. 

FUTURE  PERFECT — 112,3  :  formation  of, 
114,115;  in  so,  131,4.6.1;  defined.  223; 
syntax  of,  244;  as  Fut..  ib.  R.l;  with 
nolo,  volo,  possum,  etc.,  ib.  R.3;  in 
both  clauses,  ib.  b.4  ;  independent  use 


of,  ib.s.l;  periphrastic,  with  habeO, 
ib.  N.2  ;  as  Impv.,  245  ;  Representation 
of.  iaO.  O.,  514,515;  Pf.  and  Plupt.  peri- 
phrastic in  Unreal  Condition,  515,R.l; 
in  rel.  sentences,  622. 

Galliambic  Verse— 818. 

gaudere— with  si,  542,n.1  ;  gavisus  as 
Pr.,282,N. 

geuder--19  ;  common,  21,1;  epicene,  t6.  3; 
substantiva  mobilia,  ib.  2 ;  of  1st 
Decl.,  30;  of  2d  Decl.,  34;  of  3d  Decl.,  39, 
43,46,49,55,58  ;  of  4th  Decl ,  62;  of  .5tii 
Decl.,  64;  concord  in,  286,  ueut.  PI.  with 
feniiuines,  tb.  3. 

GENITIVE— defined,  23,2  ;  of  1st  Decl.  in 
as,  ai,  um,  29,RR.,nn.;  of  2d  Decl.  in  J 
(from  stems  in  io),  in  um,  iu  ei,  33,r.R., 
NN.;  of  3d  Decl.  in  us,  es,  37,1  ;  in  um, 
ium,  38,2.  54,  57, R.3;  of  4th  Decl.  in  os, 
is,  i,  UUm,  61,N.l,  of  5th  Cccl.  in  gs, 
ei,  e,  63,N.l  ;  of  Greek  substs.  in  5n, 
eon,  65,R.l;  oes,  66,n.1;  of  adjs.,  73  ;  in 
i,  ai,  aes,  es,  um,  76,nn,  ;  of  pron.  adjs. 
iu  ius,  76,1:  of  adjs.  of  three  endings  in 
um,  ium,  79,r.2,  82,  83,n.2;  of  Comp.  of 
part.,  89,r.3  ;  of  Cardinals,  £'5,R.2  ;  of 
Distributives,  97,R.l. 

uotsubj.  of  pass.,  217,R.l;  with  miUe, 
293  and  k.;  with  Comp.  for  Abl..  296,n.2; 
mei,e/c.,  as  objective,  304,2;  nostrum  as 
Part.,  ib.3;  poss.  pron.  for  Gen.,  304,2, N. 
2;  in  app.  to  poss.  pron.,  321,R.2;  Part. 
Gen.  for  Part  App.,  323,R  ;  with  nomen 
est,  349,R.r>;  general  view. 360;  translated 
by  abstract  snbst.,  ib.  R-2;  Adnominal, 
Appositive,381;  Epexogetical,  361;  Pos- 
sessive, 362;  flagitium  hominis,  361, 
N.l,  Family,  362,Nl;  Chorographic,  e6. 
N.2;  Subjective  and  Objective,  363;  two 
with  one  subst ,  ib  R  2  ,  1st  and  8d  per- 
sons as  possessive,  361;  of  Quality  365; 

as  Pred  ,  366 ,  with  facere,  ib-  R.l; 
auctoris,  ib  ,  generis,  368  k.  ;  with 
I)repositional  subst.,  373-  with  adjs  , 
374  and  NN  ;  with  participles  and  ver- 
bals, 375,  with  vbs.  of  Memory,  376; 
with  vbs.  of  Emotion,  377;  with  Judicial 
vbs..  378;  with  vbs.  of  Eating  and  Buy- 
ing, 379,380 ;  with  interest  and  refert, 
381;  with  vbs.  of  Fulness,  383,1;  with 
vbs.  of  Separation,  ib.  2;  in  Exclama- 
tions, ib.  3;  pred.  with  Inf.,  422,n.5; 
Ger.,  428  ;  with  esse,.causa,  etc.,  ib.  B, 


Si8 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


2;  Ger.   with  PI.   subst.,  ib.  n.1  ;  Ger. 
with  vb.,  lb.  N.4  ;  position  of,  676  aud 

NN.12. 

genus- <^ecl.  of,  48;  id  genus,  336, n. 2; 
witlj  Epexojretical  Gen..  361,2. 

gerens-  with  Geu.,  376.N.2. 

GEKUND  aud  GEiiUNDiVE— 112,.5  ;  forma- 
tion of,  115,3 ;  early  forms,  130,8  ;  Agent 
of.  in  Dat.,  215,2;  with  essC  to  form 
periphrasis,  251 ;  force  of  Gerundive, 
ib-  N.l;  syntax  of,  425-433;  and  Inf., 
425;  and  vb.,  428;  Gervmdive  for 
Gerund,  427;  impersonal  Gerundive, 
i/^.N.2;  from  intraus.  vbs.,  ib.  N.4  ;  Gen. 
of,  428;  luf-  instead,  ib.  N.2;  depend- 
ing on  vb.,  ib.  N.4;  Dat.  instead,  ib  n.5; 
Dat.  of,  429;  Ace.  of,  430  ;  Abl.  of,  431 ; 
paralleled  by  part.,  ^6.  n.3;  Acc.  of, 
with  preps.,  432;  with  ad  after  vbs.  of 
Hindering,  ib.i\..l ;  Abl.  of,  with  preps., 
433. 

gestire-^vithInf.,  423,2,n.2,  533,R.1. 

gignere-(genitus),  with  Abl.  of  Origin, 
385, N.l. 

gioing— vbs.  of,  v^'ith  Dat.  and  Acc,  or 
Acc.  and  Abl.,  348;  with  Inf.,  423,n.1.Z>.; 
witli  Acc.  Ger.,  430. 

gloriari  -v.itli  Acc.  and  Inf.,  527,R.2. 

gloriosum— with  est  and  Inf.,  422,N.3. 

Glycouio  verse— 795. 

gracilis— Comp.  ci,  87,3. 

gratia— \\ith  Gen.,  373;  withposs.  pron., 
ib.  R.2;  with  Gen.  Ger.,  428,K.2;  gra- 
tiis,  as  Abl.  of  Manner,  399,N.l. 

gratificari— witii  Dat.,  346,e.2. 

gratulari-witii  Dat.,  316, r  2. 

gravari— vvit'i  Inf.,  423,2.n.2. 

Greek  subslantives— decl.  of,  65:  Greek 
Acc,  338. 

growth— vbs.  of,  in  Abl.  Abs.,  410,N.l. 

guttural— vowels,  2,1  ;  consonants,  6,1  ; 
suffixes  with,  185. 

habere— with,  two  Noms.  in  pass.,  206; 
with  Pf.  part,  to  denote  Maintcnauceof 
the  Result,  238,241,n.2,  214,n  2  ;  first 
Impv.  wanting,  267,R. ;  with  two  Aces  , 
340,R.i;  with  pro,  loco,  numero,  and 
a  second  Acc,  ib. ;  with  Final  Dat.,  356, 
E.2:  with  Gen.  of  Price,  370;  pensi 
habSre,  H^-  I.N.2;  with  in  and  Acc, 
285,N.3;  with  Acc.  Ger..  430,n1;  habeo 
dicendum,  ^t-  n.2;  be  able,  with  Inf., 
423,2,n.2. 


habit— \hfi  of,  with  Inf.,  423 and  n.2. 

haerere— with  Dat.,  346,n.6. 

hanging— \bs.  of,  with  ex,  ab,  de,  385,R.2= 

/m^j^y^.'/i?^ -sequence  alter  vbs.  of,  513p 
R.2;  vbs.  of,  with  quod  clause,  525,1; 
Ut  instead,  ib.  n.5:  vbs.  of,  with  con- 
secutive clause,  653.3. 

hardening— in  a  verse,  723. 

haud— 441  and  443,  with  nn.;  scio  an, 
457,2. 

ai)av6re-l76,4. 

helluari— with  Abl.,  407,N.2,e. 

heiuliadys— 698. 

heteroclites — 68- 

heterogeneous  substantives—  67. 

heterologa — 69,  c. 

hiatus— defined,  720  ;  in  lam.  Oct.,  763, 
n.  ;  in  Anap.  Oct.,  778,N.l ;  in  Dact. 
Hex.,  784:,NN.C,7  ,  in  Sapphic,  726,n. 

hie— 104,  laudNN.;  syntax  of,  305;  con. 
temptuons  character  of,  306,n.  ;  and 
ille,  307,RR.1,2;  strengthened  by  qui- 
dem,  ib.  E.4  ;  two  forms  of,  refer  to 
dilierent  substs.,  ib.  n.3  :    hic— illlC, 

hinc— hinc,  hinc— inde,  hinc— illinc, 
illinc  —  hinc,  inde— hinc,  482,2 ;  hoc 

with  ut,  657, R  ,  huius,  i'l  Gen.  of  Price, 
380,1 ;    with  Abl.  of  Time,  393,R.4  ;  in 
O.  O.,  660,3  ;  hinc  aa  coiirdinating  con- 
junction, 603. 
hiems— (led.  of,  40  ;  in  Abl.  of  Time,  393, 

R.5. 
/ti?7de?-inj7— sequence  after   vl)s.    of,    543, 

E.2  and  N.2 ;  vbs.  of,  with  ne,  648  ;  with 

quin,  554-556  ;  and  vbs.  of  Preventing, 

555;  and  vbs.  of  Doubt,  ib.  2. 
Historical  cum— 585  and  nn. 
HISTORICAL      INFINITIVK— parallel      with 

Impf.,  254,R. ;  syntax  of ,  647  ;  conjunc- 
•  tions  with,  ib,  n.2. 
HISTORICAL  PERFKCT— 224  ;  forcc  of,  239  ; 

and  Pure  Pf.,  235;  and  Impf.,  231,  240; 

for  Plupf.,  239,N.;  a.s  Potential  of  Past, 

258,  N.2. 
HISTORICAL  PRESENT— 224  and  229;   with 

dum,  229,N.,  570. 
historical  tenses— 225- 
hodiernUS— in  prcd.  Attrib.,  325,R.6. 
homS- in  early  Latin,  42, N. 
honor— and  honos,  45, n. 
hope— constr.  of,  vbs.  of,423,N.5;  sequence 

alter,  vbs.  of,  615,R.3;  vbs.  of,  withAcc 

and  Inf.,  627, R  4. 
HORACE— Lyric  Metres  of,  826. 


GENERAL   INDEX, 


519 


horrere— with  Inf.,  423.2,n.2. 

horrescere— with  Inf.,  423,2,n.-2. 

hortari— with  luf.,  423,2,n.2;  with  ut, 
646,N.l ;  hortatus,  a«  Pi.,  232,N.;  hor- 
tatu,a3  Abl.  of  Cause,  408,N.l. 

humilis— Comp.  of,  87,3. 

humus -in  Abi.  of  Separation,  390,2,n.4; 
humi,  as  Loc,  411,B  2- 

bypallage-693- 

hyperbaton— 693. 

hypotaxis— 172. 

I— and  J.,  l,it.2;  sound  of,  3;  weakening 
of,  8,1 ;  effect  of,  on  preceding  vowel, 
12,R.2  ;  I-clas3  of  vb.  stems,  133,vi.; 
length  of  final.  707,4. 

iam— with  Pr.  Indie,  230;  iamdlu,  iam 
pridem,  ii>- ;  with  Impf.  indic,  234  ; 
iam— iam,  482.1,  and  n.i  ;  iam  vero, 
487.N.3  ;  iam  dudum,  with  Impv.,  269. 

lambtlogna  verse — 820. 

Iambic— law,  716,  717  ;  foot,  734;  rhythm, 
736;  rhythms,  757-767, 

ictus— conflict  cf ,  with  Accent,  749. 

IDEAL.  coN'DiTiOTf— from  present  point  of 
view,  596,1;  from  pa.st  point  of  view,  ib. 
2;  =  Unreal,  ih.  r.1  :  Bhift  to  Unreal, 
ib.  K.2;  after  non  possum,  ib-  K.3;  in 
0.O.,i&.  R.5,658. 

idem— <5ecl,  of,  103,2,  and  nn  ;  syntax  of, 
310 ;  with  que,  et,  atque,  ib.  r.i  ;  the 
same  as,  with  qui,  ut,  atque,  cum, 
or  Dat.,  310,u.3.  359.N.0,  642,k.1;  not 
used  with  is,  310,B.3  ;  in  pred,  attrib., 
325,R.2. 

idoneus  — conetrs.  with,  652,k2;  with 
qui  and  Subjv. .  631,1. 

iecur— decl.  of,  44,5,  68,12. 

ieitinus-  with  Gen.,  374,N.l. 

igitur — position  of,  484, R.;  usage  of,  601; 
with  ergo,  502,n.3;  coriel.  of gi,  690.N.1. 

ignorance— -Adis.  of,  in  pred.  app.,  325,  R. 
G  :  witli  Gen,,  374. 

ignorare— with  inf.,  627,r  1. 

ignoscere— with  Dat.,  S46,r.2. 

ILL.\TIVE   SENTENCE.S— 499,  600- 

ille  decl.  of,  104,3,  and  nn.;  forms  from 
olio,  ib.  N.I  :  Syntax  of,  307  ;  and  hic, 
ib.  rr.1,2  ;  et  ille,  i^-  R-2  ;  strength- 
ened by  quidem,  ib-  r.-I  ;  repeats  a 
snbst.,  ib-  n.2:  two  forms  with  different 
antecedents,  ib-  n3;  refers  to  oblique 
case  of  is,  ib.  N.4  :  with  Abl.  of  Time, 

393,R4;  illinc-hinc,    hinc— illinc. 


hiC-illic,  482.2:  iUud  with  ut,667,B.: 

in  O.  O.,  660,2. 
iiludere-wifch  Dat..  elc-,  347,u.2. 
illustris— witii  Abl.  of  Respect,  397, N.2. 

imbecillus-aiid  imbeciilis.  84.1. 
imber— dec],  ot,  44.2,  45. ul. 
imberbis-and  imberbus,  84,2. 
immane— with  quantum  and    indic, 

467,N. 
immgnsum- with  quantum  and  indic, 

467.N. 
immo— nseof,  471,c;  scansion  of,  717,si.l. 
immolarc— with  Abl.  of  Means,  401,N.4. 
immunis— witii  Abl.  of  S-p  ,  390,3,n.i. 
impediments- with  esse  and  ng,  548, 

N.l. 

impedire— with  Inf.,423,2,N,2;  withnS, 
648,N.l;  with  qu6minus,649.N.l. 

impellere— with  ut,  553,2;  impulsus, 
impulsu,  of  Cause,  408,  nn.  1  and  2. 

impendio— tv)-2^.  439,n.3. 

impendere— with  Dat.,  etc.,  347,b.2. 

impensg— w?-y.  439,n.3. 

imperare— with  Dat.,  346,R.2  ;  with  Inf., 
423,2,n.2,  632,n  1;  with  ut,  546.N.1. 

IMPERATIVE— 112,4  ;  early  forms,  130,5  ; 
Subjv.  for,  263  ;  answers  deliberative 
question,  265,n.;  usage,  266-275  ;  First 
and  Second,  267  ;  strengthening  words, 
269;  negative  of,  270;  pronouns  with, 
267,N'.  ;  concord  with,  811,n.2  ;  periph- 
rases of,  271:  representatives  of,  272: 
of  Past,  272,3 ;  tenses  of.  278 ;  for  Pro- 
tasis, 593,4  ;  in  Subjv.  with  O.  O.,  652 
and  R.I. 

IMPERFECT  — 112,3  ;  early  forms,  130,2; 
force  of,  223.  231:  and  Hist.  Pf.,  232;  of 
Endeavor,  Disappointment,  and  Resist- 
ance to  Pressure,  233  ;  a  tense  ot  Evolu- 
tion, ib.  N.l ;  overlapping,  ib.  n.2  582  ; 
of  Awakening,  ib.  N.3 ;  with  iam,  *'tC; 
234;  of  opposition  to  Present,  254,u.2; 
in  Apodosis  of  Action  begun,  ib.  k.3, 
597,R.2;  as  Potential  of  Past,  858;  i» 
Wish,  260;  with  vellem,  «6.  R.;  Subjv. 
as  Concessive,  264  :  Subjv.  as  Impv.  of 
Pa«t,  272,3  ;  tense  relations  of  Subjv., 
277:  in  Sequence,  610,R-;  in  Coincidence, 
613.N  3  ;  Subjv.  as  Principal  Tense,  517. 

R.2. 

impersonal  verbs— £08,1  and  2  ;  divine 
Agt.  expressed,  ib.  1,n.;  vbs.  of  Saying, 
elc,  208.2,N.2,  528;  in  Ger.  con8tr.,427, 
N.4;  with  ut,  553,4, 


$20 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


impertire— with  Dat.  and  Ace,  or  Ace. 

and  Abl.,  348,R.l  ;  laborem,  with  Dat. 

Ger.,  429,1. 
impetrare— with  nt,  653,1. 
implere— with  Gen.,  383,1. 
implorare— with  ut  only,  646,n.3. 
imponere-with  in  and  Ace,  385,n.2. 
impOS— with  Gen.,  374.N.3. 

imprimere— with  in  and  Abl.,  385,k.1. 

imprudens— in  pred.  attrib.,  325,R.6. 

impulsu— as  Abl,  oiCause,  408, N.l. 

in— ill  composition,  9,4;  vbs.  cpd.  with 
take  Ace.  or  Dat., 331,347;  with  Countries 
and  Towns,  337,r1  ;  with  Ace.  for  Dat , 
345,R.2 ;  with  app.  to  Towns,  386,R.l ; 
with  books,  387;  throughout,  388,R;  with 
recipere,  389  ;  with  Abl.  of  Time,  394, 
E.  and  N.2;  with  Abl.  of  Cause,  408,n  3; 
position  of,  413,R  1  ;  as  prep.,  418,1 ; 
with  Ace.  Ger.,  432,  and  n  1 ;  with  Abl. 
Ger.,  433  and  n  1  ;  with  part.,  437,N.2  ; 

in  eo  quod,  625,2,n.2. 
inanis-with  Gen.,  374,N.l. 
incMere— with  Dat.,  e<c.,347,R.2. 
incendl-with  ira  a"d  inf.,  533,r.1  ;  in- 

C§n3US,  of  Moving  Cause,  408,N.2. 
incertum— with  an  and  Subjv.,467,2. 
inchoative  verbs— 133,v.,  191,2. 
incidere— with  Dat.,  e/c,  347,R.2. 
incidere— with  in  and  Abl.,  385,r.1. 
incipere-with  inf.,  423.2,n.2;  with  Or- 
dinal, 294,N. 
incitatU5—i>f  Moving  Cause,  408,N.2. 
inclination— suffixes  for,  182,2. 
inclination~-»(\}9.  of,  in  pred.  attr.,  325,R. 

6  ;  vbs,  of,  with  Inf.»423aud  n.2. 
includere-with  in  and  Abl.,  385,r.  1. 
incommodare— with  Dat..  346,n  l. 
incovi^oration— of  antecedent,  616  ;  qua 

prudentiaes,  616,1,n.2;  of  correlative, 

619 
incrgdibile  — with  inf.,  422,n.3;   with 

quantum  a'^d  Indic,  467,N. 
inca:epare~c/< argy?,  with  Gen.,  378,r.1. 
increpitSre— c/(«rpe,  with  Gen.,  378,r.i. 
incubare— with  Dat.,  etc  ,  347,R.2. 
incuinbere— with  Dat.,  e<c.,347,  b.2. 

iindagO]— defective,  70, D. 
ind©— as  coordinating  couj.,  603  ;  in  con- 
trast with  bine,  482,2. 

indecorua-and  indecoris,  84, i. 

tndefiniie  pronouns — 107;  syntax  of,  313 
319  ;  quidam,  313  :  aliquis,  314 ;  quis, 
315;  quispiam,  316;  quisquam  and 


ullus,  317 ;  quisque,  318  ;  alter  and 
alius,  319  ;  rel.  with  ludic,  254,R.4, 
625. 

INDICATIVE— 112,4 ;  early  forms  of,  130,1-4; 
meaning  of,  254;  in  Apodosis,  254,R  3  ; 
with  iudef.  rel.,  ib.  r.4  ;  Pr.  for  Delib- 
erative Subjv.,  ib.  N.2;  tense  relations 
of,  276;  neg.  of,  257  ;  in  questions.  463, 
464;  after  nescio  quis,  «'c.,  467,R.1;  in 
Relative  Sentences,  ib.  r  2  ;  in  Tem- 
poral Sentences,  660,1  ;  to  express  De- 
sign, 630,N  2. 

indiggre— with  Gen..  383,1,  406,N.2. 

indignari- with  inf.,  533,r.i  ;  with  si, 

542,N.l. 
indignus— with  Gen  ,  374,n.10  ;  with  qui, 

nt,  oi'  Inf.  552,r2;     with    qui   and 

Subjv  ,  631,1  and  r  I. 
indigUS— with  Abl.  or  Gen.,  405,n.3. 
induere— with  Dat.  and  Ace  ,or  Acc.and 

Abl.,  348,Bl  ;  indui,  with  Ace.  of  Re- 

Bpect,  338,N  2, 
indulgere— with  Dat  ,  346,R  2  and  N.2. 

inermis-aud  inermus,  84,3. 

inesse— with  Dat.,  etc.,  347,r  2. 

inferior— 87,2;  with  Dat ,  296, N. 3. 

INFINITIVE— 112.5;  formation  of,  115,3; 
early  forms,  130,6  :  aor.  in  -xe,  etc., 
131,4,fc,4;  Fut.  in  assere,  ^'^-J  act.  for 
pass,  213,  R,c  ;  usage  of,  279,  assubst., 
280;  after  debeo,  ib.  2,^,n.3;  after 
decuit,  oportuit,  ib-  2,6,Rland2;  as 
representative  of  Indic,  281;  after 
memini,  e/c,  ib-  2,n.  ;  syntax  of,  419- 
424;  with  Ace.  as  subj.,420;  assubst., 
421 ;  traces  of  Locative  nature,  ib.  N.l ; 
as  subj.,422;  as  obj,,  423;  ut  instead, 
ib.ii.4;  as  pred.  with  esse,  425;  with 
preps.,  ib.  N.;  Fut.  pass.,  435,N.4;  se- 
quence after,  618;  Ace.  and  Inf.  after 
vbs.  of  Saying  and  Thinking,  527 ;  part, 
instead,  ib.  N.l;  tenses  after  these  vbs., 
629-531 ;  after  posse,  velle,  ib.  n.3; 
after  spgrare,  zb.  n.4;  with  vbs.  of 
Will  and  Desire,  632  ;  with  vbs.  of  Emo- 
tion, 633;  ut  instead,  532,nn.3,4  ;  in 
Exclamations,  634;  and  quod,  ib'R.l; 
Ace.  and  Inf.  as  subj.,  635;  .A''c.  and 
Inf.  after  vbs.  of  Emotion,  642;  with 
vbs.  of  Will  and  Desire,  546,N. 3  ;  with 
vbs.  of  Fear,  660,N.5 ;  with  dignus,  etc,, 
652,R.2  ;  Ace.  and  Inf.  in  Relative  Sen- 
tences, 635  ;  after  potius,  <^tc..  644,B.3. 
646  ;  in  O.  O.,  660.    See  Hist.  Inf. 


GENERAL    IXDEX. 


521 


Infinitum— with  est  instead  of  sit.  254, 
R.l ;  with  quantum  and  ludic,  467,N. 

Infitias- TO,A.;  ire,  333,-2,r. 

infl(>cti(>ii  -IT. 

infra—with  Abl.  of  Measure,  4:03,N.l  ;  as 
adv.,  415  ;  as  prep.,  ^16,1'2. 

infrenus— and  infrgnis,  84, 1. 

ingratiiS— as  Abl.  ol  Manner,  399,n  1. 
ingenii-as  Loc,  with  adjs.,  374.N.7. 
ingredi— with  Ir.f.,  423,2,n.2. 
inhaerere— with  Dat.,  etc.,  347,e.2. 
iniiiare— with  Dat.,  dr.,  34:7. r.2. 
inicere  manum-  with  Aec,  342. 
initiria— as  Abl.  of  Manner,  399,n.1. 
innatus— with  Dat.,  347, r  2. 
Inner  Object— Ace.  of,  328,  330,  S32:  Abl. 

instead,  333,2,N.4;  after  vbs.  of  Taste 

and  Smell,  H).  '2,n.5. 
inops— with   Gen.,   374,N.l;    with  Abl., 

405,  N.  3. 
inquam— 175,2  ;  inquit,  Jnipersonal,  208, 

2,N.2;  inciting  O.  It..  648,R.2;  lacking 

forms  supplied  by  dicere,  ib.  U.3. 
i!;quinng  -\hs.   of,  with  two  Aces.,  339, 

and  R.l.NN.l  and  2. 

Inscrlbere— with  in  and  Abl.,  385,r.i. 
insculpere— with  in  and  Abl.,  386,k  l. 
inservire-with  Dat.,  347,r.2. 
insignis  -  with  Abl.  of  Itespect,  S97,n.2  ; 
insigniter  as  adv.  of  Degree,  439,N.2. 
insidiari-with  Dat ,  346  r.2. 
Insinuare-with  Dat.,  347,r.2. 
insistere-with  Dat.,  347,u.2. 

instar— 70,B  ;  with  Gen.,  373. 
instare— with  Dat.,  347, k.2;    with  Inf., 
423,2,N.2. 

instruere— with  dg,  u30,n  ?. 

instrument— suffixes  uy,lSlS>;  in  Abl., 
214,  401;  with  ab,  2j.4,r.2  ;  Abl.  of  con- 
trasted with  Abl.  of  Attendance,  392. R.2. 

instrumental -case,  23, n. 

insugtus— with  Gen.,  374,N.4. 

integrum— with  Inf.,  422,n.3. 

intsUegere-with  inf.,  527.R.1;    intel- 

lectU  as  Sup.,  436, N. 

intendere-with  inf.,  423,2.n.2;  inten- 
tUS,  with  Abl.,  etc.,  359, N. 5. 

intensive  verbs — formation  of,  191,1. 

inter — with  reflexive  to  express  recip- 
rocal action,  221;  vbs.  cpd.  with,  take 
Ace.  or  Dat.,  331,347  ;  to  designate  Tizne, 
394,N.2:  position  of,  413,R.l;  as  prep., 
416,13;  with  Ace,  G.r.,  432  and  N.l:  with 
part.,  437, N. 2. 


intercalaris— and  intercalarius,  84,2. 
intercgdere— with  Dat.,  347,r2;  with 

ne,  548,N.l:  with  quin,  555,1. 
intercludere— with  Dat.  and  Acc,  or 

Ace.  and  Abl.,  348,1;.!;  with  Abl..  390,2, 

N.3;  with  ne,  548,N.i;  with  quin,  £55,1. 
intercurrere— with  Dat.,  3i7,ii.2. 
interdicere-with  Abl.,  390,2.n.:3  ;  with 

ng,  648,N.l;  with  quin,  555,1. 
interdum— coordinates  with  alias,  4  2, 

l.N.l. 

interesse— with  Dat.,  347,r.2  :  interest, 

with  Gen.  and  Abl.,  381:  with  Nom., 
lb.  N.3  ;  constr.  of  Object  of  Concern, 
382,1  and  2  ;  constr.  of  Thing  Involved, 
ih.  3  :  with  ut,  653,4. 

Interest— Dat.  of  Personal,  350. 

interior— 87,2  and  8. 

interjection — 16,b.2;  no  syijtax,  201, R.l. 

intermittere— with  inf.,  423,2  n. 2. 

internecio— citfet-tive.  70,b. 

interpellare— w'ith  ne,  548, n.1. 

interponere— with  ng,  548,n.i. 

interrogare— with  two  accs.,  or  dS,  339, 

R.  I  and  N.l:  with  Indic,  467,N. 
interrogative     pronouns —106  ;     distin- 
guished from  rel.,  467,R.2;   with  part., 
469;  in  Final  Sentence,  470;  doubling 
of,  ib.  R. 

INTERROGATIVE         SENTENCES  —  460   -  470  ; 

simple  and  cpd.,  462  ;  particles  in,  454- 
467;  moods  in,  462-467:  Indic,  463,464; 
Subjv.,  435,466  ;  alter  vb.  of  Wonder, 
542, N. I ;  after  vb.  of  Fear,  550, n. 4  ;  for 
Protasis,  593,4:  in  O.  O.,  651  and  ru. 

intervenire— with  Dat.,  347,r.2. 

intra— to  designate  Time,  394,N.2;  posi- 
tion of,  413,R.l;  as  adv.,  415;  as  prep., 
416,14. 

intransitive  verbs— used  impersonally, 
208,2;  used  transitively,  213,^.6 ;  con- 
strued as  pass.,  214, B.  1  ;  with  neut. 
subj.  in  pass.,  217;  with  personal  Ger., 
217,R.2;  with  Pf.  part.  pass,  used  active- 
ly, 220,n.1;  Gerund  of,  used  imperson- 
ally, 251,2. 

inusitatum— with  ut,  553,4. 

invadere— with  Dat.,  347,r.2. 

inveniri— with  Nom.  and  Inf.,  528,N.l; 
inventu  in  Sup.,  436,N. 

inverse— donee,  571,N.6;  cum,  681 ;  at- 
traction of  rel..  617,N.2. 

invicem— to  indicate  reciprocality,  221, 

K.2. 


522 


GENERAL  INDEX. 


invidgre— with  personal  pass.,  E17,n.1; 

with  Drft.,  346,R.2  and  n.2;  with  Inf., 

533,  K.l. 
invidus— «"iistr.  of,  359,n.5. 
invitUS-iu  pred.  app.,  325, k. 6  ;  invito 

est,  353,N.2. 
ioculo— a!<  Abi.  of  Manner,  399,N.l. 
iocus  —heterogeneous,  67,2. 
iouic— loot,  734:;   rhythm,  736;    rhythms, 

816-819  ;  substitutions  lor,  815. 
ipse— decl.  of,  103,3  and  n.;  ipsus,  i5.N.2; 

syntax  of,  311;  et  ipse,  lb.  1,k.2:  em- 

pLasizes  reflexive,  ib.  2  ;  used  indediu- 

ably,  ib.  2,N.;  in  O.  O.,  660,5. 

Ira— ot  Moving  Cause,  408,n.2  ;  incendor 
ira  with  Int.,  533,u.l. 

irasci-vvith  Dat.,  346,R.2. 

ire— 169,2;  omission  of,  209,N.5;  with 
Dat.,  368,N.2:  with  Sup.,  435,N.l;  with 
infitias,  eic,  333, 2,r, 

is— decl.  of,  103,1  and  N.;  strengthened  by 
quidam,  307, R.4  ;  talien  np  by  ille,  ib. 
N.4;  two  forms  with  different  ante- 
cedent, ib.  N.3;  syntax  of.  3C3;  =  talis, 
ib.  K.l ;  with  et,  atque,  que,  i^-  R-2  ;  for 
reflexive,  309,N.l;  id  temporis,  aeta- 
tis,  336,N.2;  eo  as  coordinating  conj., 
503;  ideo,  idcirco,  ib.;  with  qui  and 
Subjv.,  631,1;  with  ut, '/>•  R-L  657,R.; 
in  O.  O.,  660,2. 

islands— in  Local  Ace,  337 ;  witli  in,  ib. 
ii.l  and  N.3;  prep,  omitted  with  Large 
Islands,  ib.  N.l. 

iste— decl.  of,  104,11.  and  nn.;  syntax  of, 
306  ;  contemptuous  character  of,  ib.  N. ; 
streiigtliened  by  quidem,  307,R.4;  in 
O.  O.,  680,3. 

ita— with  ut,  482,4 ;    correlative  of  gl, 

_  £90,N.l ;  yes.  471,a.l. 

Jlalicus  Aumfrus—7B6. 

itaque— usage  of,  500 ;  position  of,  ib.  r.; 
witii  ergo,  502,N.3, 

iter— decl.  of,  44,5. 

Iterative  action— 566,  667;  Subjv.  in.ib. 
N.  ;  with  cum,  584;  iu  Relative  Sen- 
tences, 623. 

Ithyphallic— verse,  774. 

iubfire- with  two  Accs.,  341,n.2;  with 
Ace.  and  Dat.,  346,n3;  con.str.  after, 
423,N.C  ;  with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  528  and  n.1; 
with  Inf.,  423,2,N.2,  532,NN.1,2;  with 
Subjv.,  646,b.2;  iussu,  defective,  68,5; 
iussu  as  Abl.  of  Cause,  408,n.1. 

iadicftre    with  inf.,  423.2.N.2. 


[iuger]— decl.  of,  68,7. 

iunctUS— with  Dat.,  etc.,  369.N.3. 

itis— with  Inf.,  422  N.2,  428,N.2 ;  with 
respondere,  333,2  n.  ;  in  phrases  with 
ut,  546  N.2;  iure,  399,n.1;  iure  in  Abl. 
of  Respect.  397. 

iUstO— as  Abl.  of  Respect,  398,N.l. 

iuvare— with  Ace,  343,N.3. 

iuvenis-Comp.  of,  87,9. 

itixta— as  adv  ,  415  ;  as  prep  ,  416,15. 

Jialgment—\hs.  of,  with  Abl.  of  Standard, 
402. 

K— sounds  of,  l,R.l  ;  name  of,  ib.  N. 
knoiuledge  —  adia.  of,  in  pred.  attrib.,  326, 
E.6  ;  adjs.  of,  with  Gen.,  374. 

Labials— 6,1  ;  sufhxes  with,  187. 

laboreni— with  impertireaud  Dat.  Ger,, 

429.1. 
laborare— with  inf.,  423,2,n.2  ;  with  ut, 

546,  N.l. 
lac— decl.  of,  53,8 ;  68,12. 

laedere— with  Acc,  346,n.3. 

laetari  — \vith  Acc.  and  Inf.,  533,R.l. 

lamentari— with  Acc.  and  Inf.,  533,R.l. 

largiri-  with  ut,  563,2. 

later— defective.  70,D. 

latitiidine— with  Acc  of  Extent,  335,R.l. 

latUS— with  Acc.  of  Extent,  335,R.l. 

laurus— heteroclite,  68,5. 

leaving — vbs.  of,  with  Acc.  Ger.,  430. 

lectUS— heteroclite,  68,5. 

length— by  nature,  12,1,  and  n.;  by  poai- 
tioii,  iO.  2;  representation  of  long  vow- 
els, lb-  n. 

lengthening — compensatory,  9,C,a. 

letters — tenses  in,  262;  advs.  in,  ib.;  dated 
from  a  place,  391,R.3. 

letting— \i^.  of,  with  .'\cc.  Ger.,  430. 

levare— with  Abl.,  390.2  n.2. 

lex— i»  phrases  with  ut,  546,nn.1  and  2; 

lege,  397  and  N.l,  389,N.l. 
liberalis— with  Gen.,  374  n1. 
lifcerare— with  Abl.,  390.2.N.2. 

-libet— added  to  rels.,  111.3  :    exact  use 

of  libuerit,  244,u.3;  libens,  i"  pi'«d. 

attrib.,  325, R.O;  with  Dat.,  346  R.2. 
licgre -<ixuct  use  of  Fut.  Pi  ,  244, R  3;  with 

Dat.,   346,R.2  ;   with  Gen.,  379;  licet, 

although,  603-607:  with  quamvis,  ib.  N. 

2;  with  Indie,  ib.  N..3. 
likeness— suffixes  for,  188,4. 


GENERAL    INDEX. 


523 


KA:e??^ss  -adjs.    of,  with    Dat.,  349  ;   with 

atquelacj,  643. 
Unguals— 6,1, N. 
linter-deci.  of,  44,2,  45,R  1. 
liquids— 6,2,  A  ;  3d  Decl.  stems  in,  39-46  , 

suffixes  with,  189. 
litare— witii  Abl.  of  Means,  401,n.4. 
litotes -644,N  1,  700. 
litterae— in  phrases  with  ut,  546,n.2. 
living — vbs.  of,  with  Abl.,  401,N.l. 
Local  Dative    368. 
locality— suffixes  for,  181,5,  182,9. 
locare— with  Gen.,  379;  within  and  Abl., 

386,R.l ;  with  Ace.  Geu.,  430- 
LOCATIVE^  23, N. ;  of  1st  Decl.,  29.R.2;  of  ^d 

Decl.,  33,RR.3,5  ;  3d  Decl.,  37,5  ;  forms 

advs.,  91,3:  syntax  of,  411:  in  3d  Decl., 

ib.  R.l  ;  other  Locs.,  ib.  u.2  ;  app.  to,  in 

Abl.,  ib.  n  3  ,  domi,  with  poss.  prou., 

ib.  K  4. 
locus -67,2  ;   in  loco  habere,  340, rI; 

Abl.  without  in,  385,N.l. 
logaoedic  rhythms -790  805. 
LOGICAL  CONDITION— 595  ;  with  Subjv.  by 

Attraction,  ib.  K,2;  with  Ideal  2dPerson, 

lb.  R.3;  sive-  sive,  ^^-  r-4:  si  quidem, 
ib.  R.5  ;  si  modo,  vero,  tamen,  ib.  r.O; 
tenses  in,  ib-  n.2  ;  iu  0.  O.,  657,  695, 

R.l. 

longinquus    Comp.  of.  87.9. 
longitudine— with  Ace  of  Extent,  335, 

Bl. 

longum-with  est  for  Subjv.,  254,r1: 
long6  strengthens  Comp.  or  Superla- 
lativf,  301,  303  ;  with  Ace,  335,r1. 

loqui- with  Ace.  and  Int.,  527,R.2  ;  with 
Indie,  question,  467,N. 

lubido— ill  phrases  with  Inf.,  422,N.2. 

ludos  facere-with  Acc  ,  342. 

lugere-'Vith  luf ,  533,r  l. 

lux— 70,D;  iu  Abl.  of  Time,  393,R.5. 

M— final  omitted,  27,N. 

macte-85,c,  325,r.1. 

maerere— with  inf.,  533,r.1. 

magnificus— Comp.  of,  87,4. 

magnitudine— with  Acc.  of  Extent,  335, 
ii.l. 

magnus  —  comparison  of,  90  :  coustr. 
with  maior,  296,R.5;  magis,  in  com- 
parison of  Qualities,  299 ;  magni,  as 
Gen.  of  Price,  380,1  ;  maius,  with  Inf., 
422.N.3 ;  maximi,  as  Gen.  of  Price,  380, 
1;  nSn  magis  quam,  644,n.1. 


makivg  -vha.  of,  with   two  Noms.,   206; 

with  two  Aces.,  340- 
maledicere -with  Dat.,  346,r.2. 
maledicus-Comp.  of,  87,4. 
malle  -conj.  of,  174  and  N.3;  malueram, 

could  haie  preferred,  254,n.1;  malim, 

mallem,  us  Potential,   257,2,  258. n  1  : 

iu  Unreal  Wish,  261. R.  :  with  Abl.,  296, 

N.l;    with  Abl.    of   Measure,   403  N.l ; 

with  Inl 

546,  N.l. 
malus— comparison  of,  90;  male  as  ueg., 

439,  N.2. 
manare— with  Abl.  of  Means,  401,N.5. 
mandare— with  ut,  546, n.i. 
manere— as  copulative  vb.,206,N.l  ;  with 

Abl  ,  401,N  6. 
mani— as  Loc,  411,n.1. 
manifgstUS— with    Gen.,   374, N. 2  ;    with 

luf .  421,N.l,c. 
Manner— Abl.  of,  399  and  nn. 
manus  inicere— with  Acc,  342. 
mare — in  Abl.  without  in,  386,n.1. 
margarita— heteroclite,  68,1. 
materia— heteroclite,  68,2. 
Material— Abl   of,  396,   indicated  by  adj., 

ib.\  suffixes  for,  182,4. 

maturare— with  inf.,  423,2,n.2. 

maturus— Comp  of,  87,i,r.2. 

matutinus— in  pred.  Attr. ,  325,R.6. 

Means-  Abl.  of,  401,  and  ur  ,nn. ;  suffixes 
for,  131,6. 

measure — vbs.  of,  take  Abl  ,  402. 

Measure— Abl,  of,  402;  of  Difference,  403; 
Abl.  of,  with  vbs.  involving  Difference, 
lb.  N.l;  with  ante  and  post,  ib.  n.4. 

medgri— with  Dat..  346, R  2  and  n.4. 

medioximus— 87,y,N. 
meditari— with  inf.,  423,2, n.2. 

meditative  verbs — formation,  191,5. 

medium— 8uffi?:es  for,  182,6. 

medius— in  pred.  attrib.,  325,R.6  ;  used 

partitively,  291, R. 2 ;  Abl.  used  without 

in,  388. 
memini— 175,5,&;   First  Impv.  vi^anting, 

267,R. ;  with  Pr.  Inf.,  281,2,n.  :  with  Acc. 

376,r2;    with    Inf.,  423,2,n.2,  G27,R.2 ; 

with  cum  and  Indie,  580,R.2. 

memoratu— as  Abl.  Sup.,  436, n. 
memoria  teneo— with  Pr.  inf.,  281,2,n. 
mendum— heteroclite,  68,3. 
mens— ill  phrases  with  ut,  557,R.;    in 

mentem  venire,  with  Gen.,  376,r.3; 

in  mentem  venire,  with  inf.,  422, n  5. 


524 


GENERAL    TXDEX. 


meritus— Comp.  of,  87,9  ;  merits  as  Abi. 

ol  Manner,  399,N.l. 
-met— added  to  pereonal  pvon.,  102,N.2; 

to  ipse,  103, 3, N. 5. 
metaplasts— 68. 

metathesis — of  coiisoiiauts,  9,8. 
metre— 730;  unit  of,  731. 
metuere— with   Dat.,  346,n.2  ;    with  ut, 

ne,  or  Inf.,  550  aud  n.1  ;  with  Inf.,  423, 

2.N.2. 
metUS— with  Inf.,  550,N.5. 
meus— 73,R-,  76  ;    Vuc,   of,  100,R.l;  early 

lorms  of,  ii».N.2;  syuizesis  in,  ib.n.3,  727, 

N. ;  mea  mihl,  309,n.2.  mei  with  Geu. 

Ger.,  428,Rl;  wit:i  ut,  657.ii. 
middle  voice  — 212,11.,  218;  with  Ace,  of 

Ilespect,  338,N.2. 
militia— in  Abl.  of  Time,  393,R  5,  inLoa, 

411,  u.  2. 
mille— a  subst.   in  PI.,  95,R.3  ;  inscrip- 

tioual   forma  of,    ibni,    milia,  with 

masc.  vb.,  211,k  l,Ex.G  ;   use  of,  in  Sg. 

aud  PL,  293  ;  as  subst.  with  Part.  Gen., 

293,N. ;  milia  i<>r  distributive,  295,N. 
minari,  minitari— with  Dat.,  346,r.2; 

withluf  ,627,u.2. 
minor— quam    omitted    with,   296,R.4:  ; 

with  vbs.  of  Rating  aud  Buying,  380,1; 

minoris,  minimi,  as  Gen.  of  Price,  lb.; 

minus,  "o,  47i,«^.i.  minime,  no,  ib.^ 

sin  minus,  592 ;  si  minus,  ib  r.  ;  non 

minus  quam,  644,n.i 
mirari-with  inf.,  423,2,n.2,  533,R.1;  with 

quod,  642  ;  with  si,  ib.  N.l. 
mirum  -with  factum  and  ni,  quantum, 

quin,  209,N  2,  467,N.  ;  with  quod,  648; 

with  si,  642,N.l,  with  ni,  i^- N.2  ;  with 

Inf.,  422,N  3  ;  with  quam    and    Indie, 

467,N.:  with  ut,  553,4. 
miSCgre— Se,    with   Dat.,   346,n.6;    with 

Dat.  and  Ace,  or  Ace.  aud  Abl.,  348,u  1. 
miserari-with  acc,  377,n.2. 
misergre-with  Geu.,  377,n1;  miseret, 

with  Gen.,  377;  misereoi,  with  Gen., 

lb.  •  misergsc5,  with  Gen.,  tb.  N.l. 
mittere—mitte,  with  inf.  for  impv., 

271,2,N.2;  with  Inf.,  422,N.3;  withquod, 
525,l,N.l  ;  followed  by  Impf.  Indic.  to 
give  Design,  630, N  2  ;  missil,  of  Moving 
Cause,  408,N.l. 

mixed  class  of  Verbs — 133,  vii. 

moderari— with  Dat..  346,R.2  and  N.2. 

modo-strengtheus  Impv.,  269  ;  modo— 
modo,    482,1  ;    contrasted  with   tum, 


vicissim,  482,i.N.2:    non  modo— sed 
etiam,  482,5  :   non  modo  non,   sed 

ne— quidem,  Hj.    r1  ;    pronded  only, 

573 ;  modo  ne,  i^>-  n.2. 
moliri— with  inf.,  423,2,n.2. 
monere-  with  Geu.  or  Acc,  376  and  r.1; 

with  Inf  ,  423,'-i,N.2  ;  with  ut,  646,n.1. 
mood    112.4,   253;    Indic,  254;    Subjv.. 

255  265;  liupv.,  2G8275  ;  Inf ,  279  281; 

attraction  of.508,4;  in  TemporalClauses, 

560  .  in  Relative  Senteuces,  624-635;  in 

Comparative  Sentences,  633  ;  in  O.  O., 

650  652. 
morari    with  ne,  548.  n.  l 
morigerari— with  Dat.,  348,r.2. 

mOS-'moris)  with  inf.,  422, nn. 2  and  5  ; 
with  ut,  557, r;  moribus,  399  n.I. 

motion-  \h.  of,  with  Inf  ,  421,n  l,a;  vb.  of, 
with  Sup.,  435  ;  vb.  of,  with  Fut.  part., 
438,N  ;  vb  of,  with  quod,  625,1, n.O,  end 
of,  conceived  as  Rest,  412. u.l 

movere  syucoi)e  in  Pf,  1313;  with 
Abl.  of  Separation,  390,n  1  ;  with  ut, 
553,2,  motUS,  of  Moving  Cause,  408. n. 2. 

Mulciber— heteroclite,  68, i 

multare— with  Abl ,  378, r  3. 

multitude  —  8\xhiiiB.  ol',  with  PL,  211,R  1. 

E.K.a. 
multitudO  -with  PL  vb  ,  211.R.l,Ex.a. 
multum    for  Abl.  of  Measure,  403  n. 2; 

very,  439, N  3  ;  multO  with  Couip.,  301 ; 

with  Superl  ,  303. 
munus-  with  Inf.,  422,N.2  ;  with  ut,  646. 

n2. 
mutare-with  Abl.. 404.N.1. 

mutes— 6,2, B. 

mutUO— of  reciprocal  action.  221,K.2. 

myrtus— heteroclite,  68,5. 

Nam  -  usage  of,  498  and  ns.  ;  position  of, 

ib-,  N.l  ;  asseverative,  ib.  n.2  ;  yes  for 

471,  R- 
naming—\h&  of,  with  two  Aces.,  340. 
namque-498;  position  of,  ib.  n.I. 
narrare— with  luf .  527, r.2 
nasals    6,2  A.;  nasal  class  of  vbs  .  133, iv. 
nasci    with   two   Nonis.,   206;   natus, 

constr.  of,  296,n-'5;  with  Acc,  336,u.4; 

with  Abl.  of  Origin,  395,nn.1,3;  natti 

in  Abl.  Sup.,  436,N. 
natura— ii>  phvases  with  ut,  557. K. 
naucum -defective,    70,B.;    nauci,    aa 

Gen.  of  Price,  380,1- 
n6  -iieg.  of  Opt.  Subjv  ,  260;  of  Impv., 


GENERAL    INDEX. 


525 


270;  continued  by  neque,  260;  by 
neve,  270,444.2;  with  Pt.  Subjv.,  270, 
R.2;  syntax  ol,  441,  444;  =  non,  4-44,1, 
N.2;  ne-quidem,  ib-  i,n.2.  445,448. n. 2, 

432,5  and  it.l  ;  in  Final  Sente')ceR,  543, 
4;  ut  ne,  545. R.l;  quo  ne,  H>-;  paren- 
thetii-al,  ib.  r.3  ;  after  vbs.  of  Hiuder- 
iug.  548;  after  vbs.  of  Fear,  650;  n6 
non,  i/>.  N.l;  with  dum,  673;  as  Con- 
cessive, 608. 

ne— added  to  hie,  104,1. n. 3  ;  to  iste,  il'- 
2,N.3;  to  ille,  103,3, N.4;  as  interroga- 
tive, 454;  asseverative,  ib.  N.2;  added 
to  interrogatives,  ib.  K.3  ;  =  nonnc,  it*- 
a. 5:  added  to  nuni,456,N.;  strengthens 
an,  457,1, N.2  ;  to  introduce  double 
questions,  458;  necne  or  annon,  459; 
to  introduce  second  member  (if  au  indi- 
rect question,  460  2. 

nearness -&djs   of,  with  Dat.,  359. 

nec  =  non,  442,n.3  ;  see  neque. 

necessarium— with  ut,  563,4. 

necesse — 85,C.;  withestiustoadofSubjv., 
264  K.l;  with  Inf.,  638;  with  ut  omit- 
ted, 538  R  2,  553,4,u  1  :  with  pred.  at- 
tracted, 538  R.3;  with  ut,  553,4;  with 
habeoandlnf.,  423.2.N2, 

necessity— ad js.  of,  with  Inf.,  421,n.1,c  ; 
expressed  by  ludic,  254,R.l,  256, R. 

neduni-482,5,R.2. 

nefas— 70.B.  ;    with   inf.,    428.N.2;    with 

Abl.  Sup.,  436,N.2;  with  Inf.,  422,N.2. 
negare— '^se  of,  444,1.n.2;  continued  by 

neque— neque,  445.N.;  =  dic6  non, 
447:  with  Inf.,  627.U.2. 

negative— of  Potential,  257;  of  Opt.,  260; 
of  Impv.,  270;  non  with  Oi)t..  260; 
non  with  Impv.,  270  R.l  ;  noll  with 
Iuf.,270,R.2;  acl vs.,  441-449;  non,  442; 
haud,  443  ;  nec  =  non,  442,n.3  ;  ne, 
444;  subdivision  of,  445;  combinations, 
446;  resolution  of,  ib.  n.2;  positive 
supplied  from,  447,R  ;  position  of,  44\ 
449;  two,  449;  nec  non  loi'  et,  ib  R-3; 
in  Copulative  Sentences,  430  ;  in  Final 
aud  (Consecutive  Sentences,  543,4. 

negotium— in  phrases  with  ut,  546. n.2; 
with  Inf.,  422,N.5. 

neniB-dech  of,  70  D.  ;  and  ntxllus,  108; 
with  PI.  vb.,  211, R.l, Ex. a;  with  Impv. 
Subjv.,  270,^■.;  and  quisquam,  317,2; 
as  adj.,  ifj  ;  et  nSmS,  ib.  2, N.l; 
strengthened  by  unus  ;  -  nequis,  446, 
N.3. 


nequam— 85,C  ;  comparison  of,  90. 
neque— with  opt.  Subjv.  for  ne,  260;  adds 
Impv..  270,N.;  neque— neque  with  pi., 

285, N.l;  subdivides  a  general  neg.,  or 
nego,  445  and  N.l;  nec  non,  449,r3; 
for  et  non,  480  and  R.l;  for  nectamen, 
ib.  R.3  ;  for  ne — quidem,  ib-  n.I  ;  com- 
pared with  nec,  ib.  N.2  ;  for  non,  ib.  n. 
4;  for  neve,  543,N.3. 

nequire— conj.  of,  170,5 ;  nequinont, 
133,iv.N.2:  with  Inf.,  423,2,n.2. 

Neri6-(i<("i.  of,  41,4. 

nescio-an,  457,2  ;  quis,  467.R.1 ;  quo- 
modo,  '6.N.;  with  Inf.,  423,2,N.2,527.R.l. 

neu,  neve— 444,2  ;  adds  Final  Clause, 
543,4;  neque  instead,  ib.  n.3. 

neuter— tied,  of,  76,  108;  neutiquam, 
442,N.2. 

neuter  —  adj.  with  masc.  subj,,  211,R.4  ; 
demonstrative  whensubst.  is  expected, 
ib.  n.3;  Sg.  sums  up  PI.,  ib.;  PI.  pred. 
to  two  ferns.,  286,3  ;  in  app.  to  persons, 
321,n.2  ;  pron.  and  adj.  in  Cognate  Ace, 
333,1,  S41,N.2  ;  pron.  and  adj.  with  Part. 
Gen.,  360  ;  pron.  and  adj.  not  attracted 
to  Ger.,427,N.3. 

neve— see  neu. 

ni— witli  mlrum,  209,n.2;  range  of,  591, 

N.2. 

nihil— for  nulius,  108 ;  with  impv. 
Subjv.,2  0,N.;  neg.  of  quisquam,  317, 
2;  no,  471,'';, 1  ;  nihil!  as  Gen.  of  Price, 
380,1;  for  non,  442  N.2. 

nihilominus— 490,  r. 

nimis— with  quaxn  and  Indic,  467,N. 

nimium-witii  quantum,  209, N.2, 467,N.; 

very,  435, N.3;  nimio  as  Abl.  of  Stan- 
dard, 403,n.3. 

nisi— witli  quod,  525,2  n.2,591,6,r.3;  with 
ut,  557,N.2,  591i',R.4;  and  si  non,  691,6; 
but.  except,  ib.  R.2 ;  si,  ib. ;  nisi  forte, 
vero,  ib.  r.4;  nisi  tamen,  e&-  n.I;  in 
asseverations,  691,6,2  ;  with  Inf.,  635, 
n.2;  vvith  participle,  667,N. 

niti— with  Abl.,  401.N.6  ;  with  Inf.,  423,2, 
N.2;  withut,  546.N.1. 

nix  -clfii;!.  of,  62,7. 

no— hov>'  translated,  478,6  and  c. 

nocere-with  Dat.,  346. 

nolle— t-onj.  of,  174;  exact  use  of  nolue- 
rit,  244,r.3  ;  nolim,  nollem,  as  Poteu- 
tinl,  257,2,  258;  not  in  Unreal  Wish,  261. 
R-;  noli,  with  Inf.  for  Impv.,  ?70.N.2, 
271,2  ;   nolim,  with  Subjv.  for   Impv., 


526 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


271,2,N.2  :  withPf.  Inf.  pass.,  280,2,c.n.; 
nolens,  in  pred.  app.,  325, K. 6  ;  with 
Iuf.,423,2,N.2:  with  nt,  646,n.1  ;  with 
Inf.  or  ut,  538  and  n.3. 

nomen  — with  esse  and  Dat.,  349.R5; 
with  Appositioiial  Gfen.,  361,1  ;  with 
Gen.  of  Charge,  378,R.2. 

nominari— witii  two  Noms.,  206. 

NOMINATIVE— deiined,  23,1 ;  of  1st  Dec!., 
E9ana  n.1  ;  of  2d  Decl.,  31.33,N.-1 ;  of  Sd 
Decl.,  36  1  and  2.  38.1,  57.R.4:  of  Greek 
Kubstantivos,  66,N.4;  ofadjs.,  75.n.4,79, 
N.l;  of  PavticiiMes,  89.K.2;  for  Voc,  201, 
K.2;  .syntax  of,  203;  two  Nonis.,  206; 
with  Inf.  alter  copulative  vb.,  jb.  R.3; 
for  Voc.  in  app.,  321. N.l ;  with  6  and 
gn,  or  eCCe,  343.1,n1;  with  lui.  by 
attraction,  527, n. 2;  alter  pass.  vbs!.  of 
Saying  and  Thinking,  528;  nOminativus 
pendens,  627,n.2. 

non— ueg.  of  Potential,  257;  neg.  of  Wj.sh, 
260;  with  Impv.,  270,R.l;  syntax  of.  441, 
442;  with  ullus  for  nuUus,  446,n.2; 
nSn  possum  non,  449,n.i ;  nee  non  = 
et,  ib.  K.3;  no,  471, i>  1 ;  non  modo-sed 
etiam,  482.5  and  n.i  -,  non  mode— sed 
ne-quidem,  ih.  k.  i ;  for  ne,  573. n. 2. 

nonne— syntax  of,  455  ;  with  indirect 
question,  460,1,n.2;  with  rhetorical 
question,  4G4,R. 

n5nnullus— 108. 

noscere— syncope  in   Pf,  131,3;   novi, 

175,5.c;. 
nOStri— with  Gen.  Ger.,  428,K.l. 
noun— defined,  16;  inflection  of,  17 ;  and 

pronoun,  16, N. 2. 
nourishing— yh^.  of,  with  Abl.,  401, N.l. 
nOVUS— Corap.  of,  87.9;  with  Inf.,  422, n. 

3;  with  ut,  653,4. 
nOX— flecl.  of,  63.8;  with  Abl.    of  Time, 

393.R.5. 
nnbere— with  Dat.,  346,R.2  and  N.4. 
nudus— with  Gen.,  374,n,8. 
nullus— decl.  of,  76,90;  and  n6ni6, 108; 

with  Impv.  Subjv.,270,N  ;  and  ullus, 

317,2;  for  non,  i6.  n.2. 
num— 456;  with  ne  and  nam,  "!>  n.;  i» 

indirect  questions,  460, 1 .« ;  in  rhetorical 

questions,  464,R. 
numbtir— Sg.  and  PI..  22.  Dual,  ih.  u.  and 

112,1;  concord  of,  285  and  nn.;  violation 

of  Concord  in  app..  321,k.1  ;  substs.  of. 

with   Gon.,   368  ;   dchuitc   numbers   in 

Abl.  of  Time,  393,R.2. 


numerals— cardinals,  94:  ordinals,  95  and 
294:  cpd.,  96:  omission  of  cent6na 
milia,  ii>.  6;  insertion  of  et,  »'>•  5;  frac- 
tious, ib.  7;  signs,  96,ii.;  distributives, 
97  and  295;  multiplicatives,  97  ;  propor- 
tionals, 97;  advs.,  98 ;  duo,  ambo,  uter- 
que,  292;  mille,  293;  singuli,  295: 
distributives  for  cardinals,  ib.  n.  ;  ali- 
quis  with,  314,R  2  ;  quisque  with,  318, 
2;  with  Part.  Gen.,  370. 

numero-as  adv.,  399, n.i  ;  (in)  numero 

habere,  340  r1 
nunc— strengthens  etiam,  478,  N.  1 ;  nunc 

—nunc,  482,1  and  N.l. 
nuntiare— with  inf..  627,R.2;  with  Nom. 

and  Inf.,  528, N.l. 
nuperum— defective,  86  1. 

0— sound  of,  3;  weakening  of,  8,1;  as 
interjection,  201,R.2,  343,n.1;  o  Si  in 
Wishes,  261;  length  of  final,  707,5. 

Ob — in  composition,  9,4;  vbs.  cpd.  with, 
take  Ace.  or  Dat.,  331,347;  to  give  the 
Cause,  408,N.3;  a.s  prep..  416,16:  with 
Ace.  Ger.,  428,B  2,  432  and  k.I. 

Obesse— with  Dat,  346,  R.  2,347,  r.  2:  with 
Inf.,  422,N.4. 

Obicere— with  Ace  Ger  ,  430, N.l. 

object — direct,  becomes  subj.  of  pass., 
216;  indirect  retained  in  pass.,  217; 
direct,  330;  inner.  330,332,333:  outer, 
338  ;  indirect,  344  ;  of  Ger.,  427,2;  after 
Dat.  Ger.,  429, n. 2  ;  after  Ace.  Sup.,  435, 
N.3;   after  Abl.   Sup..  436. 

OBJECT  SENTENCES— 523 -537 ;  with  quod, 
524,525  :  with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  526.527  ; 
with  Nom.  and  luf ,  628:  alter  vbs.  of 
Will  and  Desire,  532;  after  vbs.  of  Emo- 
tion, 533;  ill  exclamations.  534;  as  subj., 
535;  in  part.,  536,  537;  in  O.  O.,  655. 

Objective  Genitive— 363:  of  pers.  pron.. 
364,N.2. 

Obligare — with  se  and  Gen.  of  Charge, 
378,R.l. 

obligation— expressed  by  Indie,  254, B.l, 
255.R. 

oboed ire- with  Dat.,  346,r.2. 

obrgpere— with  Dat.,  347,r.2. 

obsaturare— with  Gen.,  383,1. n. 2. 

obsecrS— strengthens  Impv.,  269;  with- 
out Inf ,  646,N.3;  with  ut,  546,N.l. 

obsequi— with  Dat.,  346,R.2. 

obsistere— with  Dat.,  347. r. 2  ;  with  n6, 
648,N.l  ;  with  quin,  555,1. 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


527 


obstare— with  Dat.,  347.R.2  ;    with  ng, 

5i8.N.l  ;  with  f^uin,  555.1. 
obstrepere— with  Dat.,  347,r.2. 
obtemperare— with  Dat.,  346,r.2. 
obtestor— with  inf.,  546,N.3. 
obtingere— with  Dat.,  347. r  2. 
obtrectare— with  Dat.,  346,r.2  and  N.2. 
obvenire— witii  Dat.,  347,r.2. 
obversari-w'ith  Dat.,  347,r.2. 
occurrere-with  Dat.,  347, r.2. 
occursare-with  Dat.,  347, r.2. 
ocior-87,7. 
odi— coiyugation  of,  176,5, c ;  odio  esse  as 

pass,  of,  ib.  N. 
office— suffixes  for,  181.10 
officere— with  Dat.,  346,R.2. 
ofRcium  -  iu  phrases  with  luf.,  422,N  2; 

withut,  646,  N.  2 
olle-for  iUe,  104  3.N.I. 
oruissiou— of    vowels,    8,2,  701,R  2.a  ;    of 

consonauts,  9,6;  of  subj..  207;  of  copula, 

209;   of  other  vbs.,  tb.  N  5,   of  esse  m 

Pf.  Inf.  pass.,  280,2  a,K.2  and  c  ;  of  cou- 

junctioD.    474,N.,  481,483.N  .492N  ;    of 

non,  482,5, R  l ;  of  vb.  of  Kav  lu-,',  645  R  3; 

of  vb.  with  sin,  592, R  ;  of  si  698.  of  vb. 

of  Protasis,   699;   of  Protasis,  600;  of 

Apodusis,  601 ;  of  vb.  aft(-r  quasi  a^d 

tamquam,  602,n  l ;  of  vb.  of  compara 

tive  clausf,  640. 
omittere— with  quod,  625,1  n.1  ;   with 

Inf.,  423,2,N.2;    oiuitte,  with   luf.   fur 

Impv.,  271,2,N.2. 
oinitting~\hs.  of,   with  quod,  655,1;  vbs. 

of,  with  Inf.,  423,2. 
omnin6-2/es.  471,a,i. 
omnis— iu  Abi.,  without  in,  388 ;  omnia, 

as  Ace.  of  Respect,  338,2. 
onus— with  Inf.,  422,N.2. 
Onustus— with  Gen.,  374,N.l ;  with  Abl., 

405.N.3. 
operam— iu  phrases  with  Dat.  Ger.,  429, 

1  and  N.l ;  with  luf.,  422,N.5  ;  with  ut, 

646  NN.l  and  2. 
opinio— in    phrases  with    Inf.,  627, R.2; 

with  ut,  557,R.;    opinione  aa  Abl.   of 

Respect,  398  N.l. 
opitulari— with  Dat.,  346  r.2. 
oportet— Iiidic.  for  Subjv,,  264. R.i ;  with 

Pf.  part,  pass.,  280.2,6.R.2;  with  Inf.  or 

Subjv.,  636,R.2;  with  ut,  553,4. R.I. 
Oppido— «er?/,  439,N.3;   with    quantum. 

467  N, 
Oppidum— bas  pred.   adj.  in  agreement. 


211,R.6;  requires  prep.,  337,R.l.;  with 
Epexegetical  Gen.,  336,N.l;  in  app.  to 
Town  in  Abl.,  356, R  1,  391, R.I ;  m  app. 
to  Loc,  411,R.3. 

[ops]— defective,  70, D. 

Optare— with  inf.,  423,2, n  2  ;  with  ut,  ib. 
>f.:t,646,N.l;  optato,  as  Abl.  of  Manner, 
3S9,N.l. 

OPTATIVE  SUB.TUNCTIVE  — 250-266  ;  ia 
Wishes,  230 ;  particles  witli,  261 ;  in 
Asseverations,  232;  as  Impv,  263;  as 
concessive,  264;  lu  Deliberative  Ques- 
tions, 266. 

optimum  -with  luf  ,  422,n  3. 

opus  -with  Abl.,  406  ;  with  Gen.,  ib.  N  3  ; 
with  Nom..  ib.  N.4  ;  with  part ,  437,N  2; 
with  Inf.,  422,N  2;  with  ut,657,R. ;  with 
Nom.  and  Inf ,  528, n. 2. 

5rare— with  two  Accs  ,  339  and  n  1,  with 
Inf.,  648,N.3  ;  with  ut,  t^-  n L 

ORATio  OBLIQUA— 608.2.  partial,  ib M,  ibA; 
sequence  in,  616;  in  Relative  Sentences, 
626,R  ,  628,R-.  629,R  ,  648,649  ;  comes  iu 
without  notice.  649, n  2;  shift  to,  ib.  n.3, 
moods  in,  650-652 ;  Interrogative  iu, 
661;  Impv  in,  C63  ;  tenses  in,  663-665; 
iu  Causal  Sentences,  666;  Conditional 
Stutences  in,  666-659;  Logical,  695, R  1, 
C57  ;  Ideal  596, R. 5  658  ;  Unreal  697,r  4, 
669.  pronouns  iu,  660  ;  by  Attraction, 
508,4,682;  partial.  603,3  663;  Represeu- 
tation,  654  and  N. 

Orbus— with  Abl..  405,N.3. 

order— -M^s.  of,  iu  pred.  attrib.,  325,R  6. 

ordiual3-94;  early  forms,  96, n. 5;  alter 
for  secundus,  96,5;  lu  dates,  234;  for 
cardinals,  ib.  and  336,r1;  with  quis- 
que,2^.  N-, 318,2;  position  of,  676,R.2. 

Ordine— as  Abl.  of  Manner,  399,N.l. 

Origin— Abl.  of,  396  ;  preps,  with  Abl.  of, 
ib.  NN.2  and  3  ;  suffixes  of,  182,7. 

oriri— 166,169,1 :  ortus,  with  Abl.  of 
Grigiu,  396,N  1. 

oriundus  -with  Abl,  of  Origin,  395,N.l. 

OS— bone,  decl.  of,  48.R.;  mouth,  defective, 
70  D. 

OStendere— with  Ace  aud  Inf.,  537,R.2. 

OStrea  -heteroclite,  68,1. 

overlapping  action— 662,571, N.l. 

oxymoron  -694. 

Paene— with  in  die.  in  Apod,  of  Unreal 

Condition,  697,R.3  .  position  of,  677,R  1. 

paenitet— with  Geu.,   377  ;    with    ueut. 


528 


GENERAL  INDEX. 


siibj.,  lb.  R.3  ;  with  Inf.,  422,n.4  ;  with 

quod,  642. 
palam— fis  prep.,  417,8. 
palatals — vowels,  2;  consonants,  6,1,n. 
palumbes— heteroclite,  68,7. 
panis— heteroclite,  68,12. 
par— with  est  instead  of  Subjv.,  254,R.l; 

with  Geu.  or  Dat.,  359,R.l;  with  Dat. 

Ger.,429,N.l. 
parare— with  inf.,  423,2,n.2;  paratus, 

with  Inf.,  421,N.l,c. 
parataxis— 472. 
parcere— with  Dat.,  346,r.2;  parce,  with 

Inf.  lor  Impv.,  271,2,n.2. 
parenthetical  ut  and  ne— 646,K.3. 
pargre— with  Dat.,  346,r.2. 
pariter— pariter,  482,3. 

pars— with  PI.  vb.,  211,R.l,Ex.a  ;  in  Abl. 

without  in,  385,N.l;  tuam  partem, 
334,R.2. 

Part  Affected— iu  Ace,  338,1. 

partial  obliquity— 508,3,  663. 

particeps— with  Gen.,  374,N.2. 

participation — adjs.  of,  with  Gen.,  374. 

PARTICIPIAL  SENTENCES— 664-670  ;  to  ex- 
press  Time,  665;  Cause,  666;  Condition 
and  Concession,  667  ;  relative  clauses, 
668  ;  Future  similarly  used,  669,670. 

PARTICIPLE— decl.  of,  80,82;  Abl.  of,  83; 
Nom.  and  Ace.  PI.  of,  ib.  N.l ;  compar- 
ison of,  88,89;  Abl.  of  Comp.,  i6.  r.1  ; 
Nom.  PI.  of.  ib.R.2  ;  Geu.  PI.  of,  ib.  E.3; 
defined,  112,5;  formation  of,  115,3; 
early  forma  of,  130,7;  Pf.  pass.,  135,1.; 
Fut.  Act.,  tb.  II  ;  Pf.  pass,  of  Deponents 
as  act.,  167,n1;  Pf.  pass,  of  intrans. 
vba.  used  as  act.,  220,n.1;  Pf.  with 
hateoand  teneo,  238;  Fut.  periphras- 
tic, 247;  Pr.  periphrastic  with  esse,  ib. 
N.'i;  Pf.  with  fui,  260;  as  al.j.,  ib.y  2; 
as  pred.,  261,N.l ;  usage  of  Pr.  and  Pf,, 
282;  usage  of  Fut.  act.,  283:  concord 
with  two  subjs.  in  Abl.  Abs.,  286,N.3; 
Pr.  with  Gen.,  375,  contrasted  with  adj., 
ib.  N.l;  Coiup.  of,  with  Gen.,  ib.  N.2  ;  of 
Birth  with  Abl.,  395;  Pf.  pass,  with 
opus  and  usus,  406;  in  Abl.  Abs.,  4G9, 
410,  and  nn.;  Pf.  pass  parallel  with 
Gcr.,  426,N.2,  427,N.l ;  as  subst.,  437; 
Fut.  as  subst.,  i^i.  N.l  ;  as  adj.,  438; 
Fut.  as  adj.,  ii.  N.l;  ])arallel  with  rel. 
and  Subjv.,  ib.  R.:  with  interro;,'.,  469  ; 
sequence  after,  518;  after  vbs.  of  Percep- 
tion, etc.,   627,N. 1,636;    alter    vba.    of 


Causation,  etc.,  637;  equiv.  to  cum,686 
R  ;  for  Prot.,  593,2  ;  for  Prot.  iu  Com- 
parative Sentence,  602,N.3;  Concessive, 
609  ;  for  rel.,  637. 

particles— copulative,  474  ;  adversative, 
483  ;  disjunctive,  492;  causal,  498  ;  illa- 
tive, 499;  position  of,  679. 

partitive  apposition— 322. 

Partitive  Genitive— 367-372;  with  substs. 
of  Quantity,  etc.,  368;  with  ncut.  Sp., 
369;  with  numerals,  370;  with  pronouns, 
371 ;  with  comparatives  and  superla- 
tives 372  ;  preps,  instead,  ib.  E.2  ;  with 
uterque,  371, r.I  ;  extensions  of,  372, 
NN.;  contrasted  with  Geu.  of  Character- 
istic, 369,N.l. 

parts  of  speech— 16. 

parvus— Comp,  of,  90 ;  iu  Gen.  of  Price, 
3301. 

passive — voice,  112,2 ;  vbs.  with  two 
Noms  ,  206;  vb.  agrees  with  pred.,  211, 
R.I,  Ex.  b  ;  defined,  214  ;  Pf.  with  Dat. 
of  Agent,  215,1  ;  as  reflexive,  218  ;  of 
something  endured,  219  ;  periphrastic 
forms  of,  243-251:  with  Ace.  of  Respect, 
338,N.2  ;  impersonal,  346,R  1. 

pati— with  Tit,  663,2  ;  wilh  Inf.,  tfc.N. 

patronymics— 182,11. 

paulo,  paulum— with  ante  and  post, 

403.N.4,6. 
pause— in  Verse,  742. 
pavSre— constr.  ol,  560  and  N.l. 
pax— i^ecl.  of,  70,D  ;  in  Abl.  of  Time,  393, 

R  5,  394,R.l. 
peculiaris— with  Gen.  or  Dat.,  369,k.1. 
peCUS— heteroclite,  68,12. 
pellere— with  Abl.   of   Separation,    390. 

N  1. 
pendgre— with  Gen.,  379. 
penes — position  of,   413,R-1  ;   use  of,  as 

prep.,  416,17. 
pentameter— elegiac,  785;  Pf.  Inf.  in,  280, 

2, ft, N.2;  position  of  words  in,  683. 
penult— 11. 

penus— beteroclite,  68,11. 
per— vbs.  cpd.  with  take  Ace.,  331 ;  with 

Ace.   of  Extent,    335,  336  ;  to  express 

Time  Within  Which,    ib.  R.2,  393,R.l  ; 

here  and  there  in,   386. R.3;  for  Abl.  of 

Manner,  399,N.l:  with  Person  Through 

Whom,  401  ;  position  of,  413,R.l,  and  n. 

2  :  use  as  prep.,  416,18, 
per cei ring— whs.    of,  with   Object   Clause. 

623  ;  with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  526,  527  ;  with 


GENERAL    IXDEX. 


529 


Norn.,  528:  with  part.,  627. n.1,  536; 
Noin.  after,  538,N.2. 

percontari— with  two  Aces.,  339  and  n.1. 

perdius— tlotvt'tive,  85.2. 

PERFECT— defined.  112,3  :  System,  114,2 
andS./v:  forniation  of,  lU,  115,  121,2; 
syucopated  forms  of,  131,  13;  early 
forms  of,  131,4  :  Stem,  134  ;  part,  pass., 
135.1.  ;  liart.  as  subst.,  167,n  1  ;  pass, 
with  Dat.  of  Agent,  215,1;  part,  used  as 
act.,  220, N.1  ;  defined,  223;  Historical, 
225  ;  Pure  and  Historical,  235  ;  force  of, 
236  ;  trans,  by  Eug.  Pr  ,  ib.  r.  ;  with 
Aor.  force,  ib. ;  Gnomic,  ib.  N, ,  ior  Fut. 

Pf.,237:  part,  with  habeo  aiui  teneo, 

238:  pass,  with  fui,  250;  Snbjv.  as 
Potential,  257,2  and  N.1  ;  in  wishes, 
260  ;  Subjv.  as  Impv  ,  263,2,/',  270, R. 2, 
tense  relations  in  Snbjv  ,  277  ;  Ii>f. 
as  subj.  or  obj.,  280,2  ;  alter  decuit, 
ib.  a,  R.  1  ;  Emotional,  ib.  ;  alter 
Oportuit,  ^f^■  r.  2;  after  velle,  280. 
2.fj  and  N.1;  after  p03Se,  2'^.  :  after 
debeo,  ib.  n.3  ;  alter  vbs.  of  "Will  and 
Desire,  280. 2, t"  ;  use  of  part  ,  282  and 
N.;  part,  as  subj.,  437,n.1  ,  Se<|uence 
after,  611,RR.3,4  ;  S:ibjv  in  Final 
Sentences,  512,n  1  ;  in  Cnnsecutive  Seu- 
tences.  513  and  nn,  .  Inf..  630,  laf.  iu 
0.0. .  659,N 

perficere- witii  ut  553,1. 

pergere— with  inf ,  423. 2. n  2. 

perhibere  —  as    copulative    vb  ,     2O6, 

N.l  ;    with     Norn,    and    Inf.,   528    and 

N.1. 
period— Responsive  and  Apodrtic,   685: 

forms    distinguished    by    Niigelsbach, 

686  :  Historical  and  Oratorical,  687. 
periphrasis     for   Impv.,   271:    for    Fut 

periphrastic,  515,R  2  ;  for  Fut..  531  and 

N.l  :    for  Apod,    in   Unreal  Condition, 

597.U.5. 

PEKIPHR.\STIC     CONJUGATION  —  129  .    act  , 

247  :  pass.,  251 ;  with  fui,  247, R.l:  with 
forem,  ib.  N.I  ;  Pr.  part,  with  esSe,  ib. 
N.2:  with  futtirura  esse  ut,  248  :  with 
in  eo  est,  249 ;  with  po3se,  velie,  243, 
R. :  Pf.  part,  with  sum  and  fui, 250  and 
R.l ;  with  forem  for  essem,  ib.  n.2  ; 
withGer.,  251 ;  Fut.  act..  283. 
perire— pass,  of  perdere,  169,2  r.i. 

peritUS— with  Gen.,  374,N.4. 

permangre— with  two  Noms^  20o,n,i. 
permittere— used  personally   iu    pass.. 
34 


217,N.2  ;    with   Inf.,    423,2,N.2,  532,N.l, 

653,2.N. ;  with  ut,  553,2. 
permuting  —  vbs.    of,    with    Consecutive 

Clause,  553,2. 
pernox— ilefective,  85,2. 
perperum— defective,  85,1. 
perpetuus  —  and    perpes,  84, i  ;    per- 

petuum,  as  adv.  Ace,  336,N.l. 
perquam— with  indic,  467. n. 
persequens-with  Gen.,  375,n.2. 
perseverare— with  inf.,  423.2, n.2. 
persons-iu  conjugation  of   vb.,    112,1  ; 

concord  of,  287  ;  order  of,  ib.  n. 
personal  endings— 114. 
personal  pronouns— 304  ;  omitted,  ib.  1  ; 

Geu  of,as  objective,  ib.  2  364,n  2;  poss. 

for,  ib.  2,N.2;  Gen.  of,  as  Partitive,  ib.  3; 

for  poss  ,  lb.  3,N.l  ;  circumlocution  for 

third  personal  pronoun,  ib.  3,N.2. 

perspicere— ^vith  Acc.  aud  inf.,  627. r.i. 
perstare-with  inf.,  423,2,n.2. 
persuadere— used   personally   in   pass., 

217.N.1:  with  Dat.,  346. u.2.  and  nnT2,4"  ; 

with  Inf.,  423  2,n2,    527,r.2,  546, r.  1 ; 

with  tit,  646,N.l. 
pertaesum  est -with  Gen.,  377. 
pessum— defective,  70.A  ;  with  ire,  435, 

N  1. 

petere — with  a  and  Abl.,  339,R.1  and  n.1; 
with  Acc.  Ger.,  430,N.l:  with  Inf.,  423. 
2,N.2;  with  ut,  546.N  I. 

Phalaeccan— verse,  796. 

Pherecrateau— verse,  794. 

phonetic  variations— in  vowels,  8;  in  con- 
sonants, 9  ;  in  consonant  stem-charac- 
teristic, 121. R. 

piget— with  Gen.,  377;  with  subj.,  ib.  k.2. 

pili-  as  Gen.  of  Price,  380,1. 

pinus— Ijeteroclite,  68,5. 

plus— Conip.  of,  87,G,N. 

\Aa,ce— where,  in  Abl.,  385;  with  vbs.  of 
Placing,  ib.  R.l  ;  with  Towns,  386  :  as 
Cause,  Means,  etc.,  389  ;  with  Books, 
dc,  387  ;  with  totus,  etc.,  388  ;  iu  Loc, 
411:  whence,  in  Abl  ,  390,  391  ;  with 
Towns,  391;  of  origin,  395.N.2  ;  whither, 
in  Acc,  337. 

placgre— with  Dat.,  346, R.2;  use  of  Fut. 
Pf.,  244,R.3. 

}}leasure~wh's,.  of,  with  Dat.,  343;  adjs.  of, 
with  Abl.  Sup..  436, N.2. 

plebs— decl.  of,  63.N.1,  68,8. 

plenty— \hs.  of,  with  Abl.,  406  ;  adjs.  of, 
with  Geu.  or  Abl.,  ib.  N.  3. 


530 


GENERAL    INDEX. 


plenus— with  Gen  ,  374. nI  :  with  Abl., 
405N.3. 

pleonasm  -692. 

pleraque— as  Ace  of  Respect,  338,2. 

pluere — witli  Abl.  of  Means,  401, >. 5. 

PLUPERFECT— 112,3  ;  formation  of,  114, 
115  ;  Aor.  forms  of,  131,4, ?;,3  ;  defined, 
2^3  ;  force  of,  241;  translated  by  Impf., 
ib.  R.;  used  as  Aor.,  ib.  N.l;  periphras- 
tic, with  habeo,  ib.  n.2  ;  Sub]v  as  Po- 
tential of  Past,  258,N.2  :  in  Wish,  260; 
with  vellem,  231,u. ;  Subjv.  as  Conces- 
sive, ib.  N.;  Subjv.  as  Impv.  of  Past, 
273,3 ;  tense  force  in  Subjv.,  277  ;  In 
Final  Sentences,  512,n.1  ;  to  express 
Eesnltiug  Condition,  663,1  ;  Indie,  in 
Apod,  of  Unreal  Condition,  697, n  2. 

plural— of  abstracts,  204,n.5  ;  used  for 
Sg.,  ib.  NN.6,7  ;  pred.  with  two  snbjs., 
285;  neut.  pred.  to  two  ferns.,  286,3. 

plus— quam  omitted  with,  296,R.4  ,  plu- 
ris,  with  vbs.  of  Rating  and  Buying, 
380,1 ;  plurimum,  with  quantum,  467, 
N.  ;  plurimi,  as  Gen.  of  Price,  380,1 

poema— litteroclite,  68,7. 

pollere- with  Inf.,  423  2,n.2. 

poUiceri— with  inf.,  627. h.2,  531, n. 4. 

pollis  — tlecl.  of,  41,4. 

pondo— defective,  70, A. 

pone— usage  of,  416,19. 

ponere— with  in  and  Abl.,  386,R.l  and  n. 
2  ;  suppose,  with  Inf.,  627,R.2. 

poscere— with  two  Aces., 339andK  1;  with 
a  and  Abl.,  ib.  R.l ;  with  Inf.  or  ut,  546, 

NN.1,3. 

position— adjs.  of,  iu  pred.  attrib.,  325, r. 
6;  of  advs.,  440  ;  of  neg.,  448  and  nn.;  of 
rel.,  612;  of  correlative  clause,  620; 
poetical  peculiarities  iu,  683. 

positive— degree  lacking,  87,2,7,8,  and  9; 
with  prep,  to  express  disproportion, 
298,  R.;  in  comparing  qualities,  299;  Mith 
quam  after Comp.,  299,n.2;  with  Part. 
Gen.,  372.N.2;  supplied  Irom  nc  g.,  417, 

R. 

posse-conj.  of,  119;  potisf'>i'  posse,  209, 

N.2;  use  of  Fut.  and  Fiit.  Pf.  of,  2i2  n  2, 
244,R.3;  ueed.<  no  periphrasis,  248, R.  ; 
Indie,  for  Subjv.,  254,R.l  ;  Impf-  ludie. 
of  Disappointment,  ib.  R  2  ;  with  Pf. 
Inf.  act.,  280,2,^),  and  N.l  :  with  quam, 
etc.,  to  strengthen  superlative,  303  ; 
omitted,  with  quam,  ib.  R.l;  with  Inf., 
423,2,N.2  ;  n5n  possum  non,  449,r.1  ; 


in  simple  questions,  453,N.l  :  for  peri- 
phrastic, 513. R.3, 531, N. 3  and  4;  in  Apod, 
of  Unreal  Condition,  597,R.5.c  ;  restric- 
tions with,  627,R.2  ,  in  Logical  Condi- 
tion, 657,R.  ;  in  Unreal  Condition  in 
0.0  .659,N. 

Possession— Dat.  of,  349:  compared  with 
Gen.,  ib  R.2;  of  qualities,  ib.  r.3;  Gen. 
oi",  36S;  in  1st  and  2d  person,  ib.  R.l  ; 
omission  of  governing  word,  ib-  R  3. 

possessive  pron.ouiis  —  100  102,  106,N  4  ; 
usage  of  suus,  309,4  and  nn  ;  syntax  of, 
312;  intense  use  of,  ?/>  r  1  ;  for  Gen.  of 
personal  pron.,  304,2  n.2  ;  with  Gen  in 
app.,  321,R.2;  for  1st  and  2d  persons  in 
Subjective  Gen,,  364  ;  as  pred.,  366,R.3  ; 
with  interest  and  refert,  381 ;  with 
domi,  411,R  4;  position  of,  676,R  1. 

possibility— in  Indie,  rather  than  Subjv., 
254,Rl.255,R. 

post— vbs.  cpd.  with,  take  Dut..  347;  with 
Abl.  or  Ace.  of  Measure,  403,N.4;  posi- 
tion of,  403, N  4.6,  413, R.l  :  omission  of, 
with  rel.,  403,N  4 ;  as  adv.,  415  ;  as 
prep  ,416,20;  with  Pf,  part,  pass.,  437, 
N.2. 

posteaquam— see  postquam. 

pOSterum— defective,  74,R.2;  Comp.  of, 
87,2  and  7. 

postquam— with  Ili.st.  Pf.  or  Pr..  561; 
with  Impf  ,562  ;  vvith  Plupf.,563  ;  range 
of  tenses  with,  ib.  nn.1-3;  with  Subjv., 
ib.  N.4.  Causal  with  Pr.  and  Pf.,564  and 
N.l  ;  in  Iterative  action,  566,567. 

postridie  quam— 577,n.5. 

pOStulare— with  a  and  Abl.,  339,R.l  and 
N.l;  with  Inf.,423,2,N.2,  546,N.3;  with 
ut,  <&•  N.3. 

potens— with  Gen.,  374  n. 3. 

POTENTIAL  SUBJUNCTIVE— 257-259;  for  Pr. 
and  Fut.,  257  ;  for  Past,  258  ;  in  ques- 
tions, 259;  for  Indie,  257,n.;{  ;  not  con- 
ditional, 257,n  2,  600,i?;  ofPast  coincides 
with  Unreal  of  Present,  258,n.2. 

pOtiri— with  Abl.,  407  and  N.2, tZ  ;  with 
personal  Ger.,  427,n..'>. 

potis,  e— 85,C;   potior,   87,7;  potius 

strengthens  comparative,  301  :  potiuS 
quam,  with  Subjv.  or  Inf.,  577,N.O,  631, 
3,R  2,  644, R- 3  ;  see  posse, 
poiwr— adjs.  of,  with  Gen.,  374;  vbs.  of, 
with  Inf.,  423  and  N.2;  sequence  after 
vb.  of,  516,R.3  ;  in  Indie,  rather  than 
Subjv.,  254, R.l,  256,R. 


GENERAL    IXDEX. 


531 


prae— to  express  disproportion,  296,n.3; 
vbs.  cpd.  with  take  Uat.,  347;  gives 
rreveuting  Causo,  403,N.4;  as  adv.,  415, 
as  prep.,  417,9  ;  prae  quod,  625,2. 
N.2. 

praecellere— with  A1)1.  of  Respect,  397, 

N.2. 

praecipere— with  luf ,  (iS3,2.N  2;   with 

Ut,  6i5,Nl;  used  personally  in  pass, 

217,N.2  ,  praeceptum,  with  ut,546,N  2. 

praecipitare-with  Abi ,  390,2.n  3. 

praecipuum    witii  ut,  557,r 

praeesse -with  Dat.  Ger.,  ^9,1 

praeficere-with  Dat.  Ger.,  429,1 

praegestire— with  inf.,  423,2,n  2. 

(in)  praesentia— Z-^''  the  present,  394, r. 

praesidere— with  Dat.,  347,ii.2. 

praestare— with  Dat.,  347, r.2  ;  with  Abi. 
of  liespect,  397,N.2;  with  Abi.  of  Meas- 
ure, 403,N  1;  with  ut,  653,1. 

praestolari— with  Dat.,  346,n.2. 

praeter— to  express  disproportion,  296, 
N.3;  vbs.  cpd.  with,  take  Ace,  331;  posi- 
tiou  of,  413,N-3;  use  as  prep.,  416,21; 
with  Pt.  part,  pass.,  437,N.2  ;  id  quod, 
quam  quod,  quod,  625.2  n. 2. 

praeterire— with  quod,  626,1,n.1. 

precari-with  ut,  646,n.1. 

predicate— and  copula,  205;  with  copula- 
tive vbs.,  206;  concord  of,  211  ;  viola- 
tion of  concord  of,  i6.  RR.l-G.NN.1-3  ;  iu 
PI.  with  two  subjs.,  285  ;  iu  PI.  with 
neque— neque, ''>•  n.i  ;  concord  of,  in 
Gender,  283;  iu  Person,  287;  Attribu- 
tion, 325;  Apposition,  ib.  and  r.G;  with 
Ahl.  Abs.,  410,n.G;  after  Inf.,  538. 

prepositions— assiniilatiou  of  in  composi- 
tion, 9,4  :  defined.  16,G  ;  repeated  with 
cpd.  vbs.,  331,RR.2,3  ;  with  Countries 
and  Towns,  337, RU- 1-4:  withdoniuni,^^- 
R.3:  omitted  with  Countriesand  Towns, 
337.NN1-3;  in.stead  of  D::t.,  347,r1; 
omittel  with  vbs.  and  adjs.  of  Separa- 
tion, 390,2  and  3;  with  Abi.  of  Origin, 
395,NN.^\3 ;  syntax  of,  412-416  ;  origin  of, 
412;  positio;i of, 4:3,678;  repetition  and 
omission  of,  411;  as  advs.,  dl5  ;  with 
Ace. ,  416  ;  with  Abi.,  417 ;  with  Ace.  and 
Abi.,  418  ;  two  with  same  case,  414,  r.4; 
improper,  412,N. ;  with  participles  for 
abstract  substantives,  437,N.2. 

PRESENT— 112,3  ;  System,  114  3, a  ;  rules 
lor  formation  of,  121,1  ;  notes  on  Sys- 
tem, 130  ;  formation  of  Stem,  133  ;  de- 


fined, 223  ;  Historical,  224,  229  ;  Spe- 
cific or  Universal,  227  ;  Progressive,  Vu. 
N.I  ;  of  Eudeavor,  ib.  N.2  ;  of  llesist- 
ance  to  Pressure,  ib.  N.  3  ;  anticipates 
Fut.,  228  ;  with  iam,  etc.,  £30  ;  con- 
trasted with^f.  to  give  Eflfect  iu  Ver- 
gil, lb.  N.3  :  part,  with  esse,  247,N.2  ; 
Indie  for  Deliberative  Subjv.,  254. n.2  ; 
Subjv.  as  Potential.  287.2:  Subjv.  in 
Wishes,  280;  Subjv.  as  liupv.,  263,  270, 
r2,  Subjv  as  Concessive,  2^4 ;  tense 
relations  in  Snbjv  ,  277  ;  Int.  as  subj.  or 

obj .  280.  1 ,  Inf.  after  memini,  281,2. 

N.,  part.,  232  ,  part,  as  subst.,  437,N.l  : 

Hist  sequence  alter,  511, R.l  ;  Inf.  after 

vbs.  of  Saying  and  Thinking,  530  ;  Inf. 

for  Fut  ,531,NN  3aud4. 
presenting -\hB.   of,  with  ne,  quominus, 

or  quin,  648  549.655,1. 
previous  condition— given  by  ex  or  ab, 

and  .\bl.,206,R.2,  396,N.2. 
Priapean  -  verse,  805 
Price- Gen.  of,  370;  Abi.  of,  404. 
pridiequam  -usage  of,  677,n.5. 

piiniitive  words— 179,  1. 

primoris    '1'  feetive,  85,i. 

primus- with  quisque,  318,n,3  ;  primo, 
primum,  325, R.7  ;  in  pred.  attrib.,  325, 
R.6  ;  used  partitively,  291 ;  prior, 
87,8. 

principal  parts — 120. 

principal  tenses— 225. 

priusquam— with  Indic,,  574,  676  ;  with 
Pr.,  575;  with  pure  Vi.,ib-  n.I  ;  with 
Pf.  or  Fut.,  676;  non  priusquam  = 
dum,  ib.  R.;  with  Subjv.,  577  ;  with  ut 
orInf.,644,R.3. 

pro— to  express  disproportion,  298;  with 
habere,  340, R-I  ;  "with  Nom.  or  Acc.  iu 
Exclamations,  343,1, n.I  ;  for,  compared 
with  Dat.,  34.5,R  2  ;  position  of,  413, R.l ; 
as  prep.,  417,10;  with  Abi.  Ger  ,  433  : 
pro  eo  quod,  625, 2,n  2 ;  pro  eo  ut,  642, 

r4. 

probare— with  Inf ,  527, r  2. 

prOCreatUS— with  Abi.  of  Origin,  335,n.1. 
prOCUl  -with  Abi.  of  Separation,  330, 3,N. 

2  :  as  prep.,  417,11. 
prodesse— conj.  of,  lis ;  with  Dat,.  346, 

R  2;  with  Inf.,  422. N, 4. 
prSdigUS— with  Gen  ,  374.N.1. 
profectO— strengthens  atque,  477,N.2. 
proficere— with  ut,  663,1. 
profundus— never  with  Acc,  335,R.l. 


532 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


profusus— with  Gen.,  374,N.  1. 
prOgnatUS— with  Abl.  of  Orlgiu,  S95,n  1. 
prohibere-wit]itwoAccs.,341,N.2 ;  with 
Abl.,  390.2, N. 3;    with    Inf.,    423.2,n.2  ; 

with  ne,  548,  and  n.1  .  with  quoniinus, 

549,  and  n  1  ;  with  Inf.,  632,N.l.  54D,n.1. 
prohilnting—yhs.  of,  with  Dat.,  345. R.l. 
proinde— strengthens    Impv.,    269;    as 

coordinating  conj.,  603  ;  and  proin,  H^- 
proleppis — of  subj.  of  leading  clause,  4:68- 
prmnisiiig — vbs.   of,     with    Inf.,    423,N.o, 

527,  R.4;  531,N.4. 
promittere-with  Pr,  Inf  ,  527,k  2,  631, 

N.4. 

PRONOUNS— defined,  16,3  ;  compared  with 
noiuLS,  lb.  N.2 ;  decl.  of,  17 ;  Personal, 
100-102;  Determinative,  103;  Demon- 
strative, 104  ;  Relative,  105  ;  Interroga- 
tive, 105  ;  Indefinite,  107  ;  Pronominal 
Adjectives,  108;  Possessive,  100-102; 
omitted,  207  ;  with  Impv.,  267,n.;  syn- 
tax of,  304-319 ;  Personal,  304;  Demon- 
strative, 305  307  ;  hlc,  305  ;  iste,  306 ; 
ille,  307  ;  Determinative  is,  308  ;  Ke- 
flexive,309  ;  idem,  310  ;  ipse,  311  ;  Pos- 
sessive, 312  ;  Indefinite,  313-319  ;  qui- 
dam,  313 ;  aliquis,  314 ;  quis,  315  ; 
quispiam,  316 ;  quisquam  and  ullus, 
317;  quisque,  318;  alter  and  alius, 
319;  with  Part.  Gen.,  371 ;  iuO.  O.,660. 

pronuntiare— used  personally  in  pass., 
217,N.2. 

pronus— constr.  of,  359,  n.  5. 

prope— as  adv.,  415;  as  prep.,  416,22; 
position  of,  678, k.1  ;  propior  and  prox- 
imus,  87,8  ;  with  Ace.  or  ab,  359,N.l. 

proper  are— with  inf.,  423,2,n.2. 
prSpinare— with  Acc.  Ger.,  430, n.I. 
propinquus— Comp.  of,  87,9. 
proponere— with  Acc.  Ger.,  430,N.l. 
propOSitum— est,    with    inf.,  423,2,n.2; 

with  ut,  546.N.2. 
proprius— with  Gen.   or  Dat.,   359, R.l  ; 

with  ut,  557,  R. 
propter— compared  with  Abl.  of  Cause, 

408, N. 3  ;   position  of,  413,K.l ;  as  adv., 

415;   as  prep.,  416,23;  with  Acc.  Ger., 

432  and  n.1. 

propterea— 503. 

prosody— 701-823. 

prospicere  — with    Dat.,    346,u.2  ;    with 

Inf..  527,11.1 ;  with  ut,  546,n.1. 
prOstare— with  Gen.  of  Price,  379. 
protasis  —  defined,  589;  equivalents   of, 


593 ;    omission    of   vb.    of,  599 ;   total 
omission  of,  600. 
protraction — 743. 

providere— with  ut,  546,n.i. 

pro  riding— xba.  of,  with  Abl.,  401,N.l. 
providus-Comp.  of,  87,5. 
prcximum-  in  phrases  with  ut,  557,R. 
prudens— in  prc^a.  uttrib.,  325,11.6;   with 

Gen.,  374,N.l. 
-pte -added  to  personal  pronouns,  102,N. 

3. 
pudet— with    Gen.,   377  and    ii.l  ;    with 

subj.,  ib.  n.2. 
puer— Voc.  of,  33, N.2, 
pugnare— with  Dat..   346.N6;  with  ut, 

546,N.l. 
purpose— in  Inf  ,  423,n.1  ;  in  Dat.  Ger., 

429,2;  in  Sup.,  435;  in  Fut.  part.,  438,n.; 

sequence  in  clauses  of,  612;  reflexive  in 

clauses  of,  521 ;  rel.  clauses  of,  630  ;  see 

Final  Sentences. 
ptirus— with  Abl.  of  Sep.,  390,3,N. 
putare— with  Gen.  of  Price,  379;  with  two 

Noms.  in  pass.,  206.  (non) putaveram, 

254,N.l  ;    puta,   ut  puta,  /w  example, 
274;  with  Inf., 627. u. 2. 
putUng~\hs.  of,   with  Diit.  and  Acc,  or 
Acc.  and  Abl.,  348. 

Qua— qua,  482,3. 

quaerere— with  a,  de,  ex,  339,r.i  ;  with 

luf.,  423,2,N.2  ;  with  Direct  Question, 
467,N. 

quaeso— 175,C  ;  with  impv.,  269;  without 
Inf..  646.N.3. 

qualis— "1  phrases  instead  of  Compara- 
tive, 296,N.3. 

Quality— possession  of.  349,R.3;  Gen.  of, 
365  and  R.l  ;  Gen.  and  Abl.  of,  ih.  r.2, 
400,R.1  ;  Gen.  of,  as  pred.,  366;  Abl.  of, 
400;  personified  quality  as  person,  if). 
R.2  ;  Comparison  of  qualities,  299. 

quam— after  comparatives,  296  and  r.1  ; 
omission  of,  it),  r.4  ;  preps,  instead,  ib. 
N.3;  atque  instead,  ib.  N  4  :  with  pro, 
ut,  qui,  to  express  disproportion,  298  ; 
with  positive  lor  comparative,  299, n.2  : 
in  comparison  of  qualities,  299:  with  po- 
tuit  and  superlative,  303;  with  qui  and 
superlative,  ib.  R.2;  magis,  non  allter, 
quam  ut,  667,n.2  ;  quam  si,  with 
Subjv.  of  Comparison,  602  ;  with  qui 
or  ut  after  comparatives,  631,3  :  with 
quam    qui    and    superlative,   842,R.5; 


GENERAL    INDEX. 


533 


after  alius  or  secus,  643,n.4:  with  Com 

parative  Seuteui'es,  614;  with  potius, 

prius,  etc.,  B.3. 
quamdiu— 668;  with  Indic.  569;  rauge 

of,  ib.  N.l. 
quamlibet-606. 
quamquam— 603  and  n.;    with    Indic, 

605;  with  Subjv.,  ib.  kr.1,2,  and  n:  ajid 

ypt.  it).  R.3  ;  with  part.,  609,N  1,  667,N.  ; 

with  Inf.,  635,N.2. 
quamvis— 603  and  n.  ;  with  Snbjv..  606; 

with  Indic,  ib.  N.l;  inflpction  of  vb.  of. 

i&.  N.2;  with  licet,  607, N. 2;  with  part., 

609.N.1,  667,N.  ;  with  adj.  or  adv.,  609, 

N.2. 

qaandS— with  Causal  Indic,  540;  with 
Subjv., 641 ;  early  use,  538,N.4,  680. N.3; 
conditional  nse,  690,n.3. 

quandoque— ■with  causal  clause,  641,N.5; 
quandoque— quandoque,  482,i,n.1. 

quantity— rules  for,  702-706  :  of  final 
syllables,  707-713;  ol  polysyllables,  707- 
709;  of  monosyllables,  710-713  ;  of  stem 
syllables.  714;  of  cpds.,  715  ;  in  early 
Latin,  716,  717. 

quantity— 12:  substs.  of.  witliGen..  368- 

quantum— with  mirum,  nimium,  ftc., 

209,N.2,  467. N.  ;    with    maximus    and 

potuit  to  .strengthen  superlative,  303  ; 

quantum  qui,  with  superlative,  Uj.  r. 

2;   quanti,   with   vbs.  of  Rating  and 

Buying,  380;    with  advs.   and  Indic, 

467,N. 
quantumvis-603and  n.,  606- 
quasi  -with  subst.,  439. n. 4;  with  Subjv. 

of  Comparison.  602;  with  Indic,  ib-  N.l; 

to  apologize,  i/>.N.2;  to  give  an  Assumed 

Reason, i/A  n.4,658.n. 
quateuus— as  a  Causal  particle.  538,N.5. 
quattuor— early  forms  of,  95, n.3. 
que— Abided  to  rels.,    111,2;    syntax  of, 

476  and  nn.;  for  quoque,  479,n.2  ;  adds 

third  member,  481, n. 
quemadmodum— sic,  482,3,n. 
queri- with  Ace.  and  IiiL,  633,R.l. 
questions — with    Potential    Subjv.,  259; 

deliberative,  265,465  ;  passionate  equiv. 

to  command,   273,  453,N.2  ;    predicate 

and  nominal,  451  ;    rhetorical    265,  451, 

R.2,  464,466;    direct  simple,  453  457; 

equiv.  to  Condition,  453,N.3;  with  ne, 

454 ;  with  n5nne,  455-;  with  num,  456; 

with  an,  457  :  direct  disjunctive,  458  ; 

neg.  of,  459;  particles  in  indirect,  460  ; 


moods  in,  462-467  ;  Indic  in,  463,  464; 
Subjv.  in,  465,  468  ;  indirect,  467  ;  gen- 
uine, 463;  disconnected,  467, n.  ;  ex- 
clamatory, 558. 

qui  iuterrogative--106  and  r. 

qui  relative— 105  and  nn.:  with  quam 
and  Subjv.  to  express  disproportion, 
298;  after  dignus,  el's..  652,R. 2;  equiv. 
to  si  quis,  625,2;  explicative,  62G ; 
strengthened  by  ut,  utpote,  quippe, 
ib.  N.l;  quod  SCiam,  627  R  l ;  equiv.  to 
cum  is,  626,R.,  633. 634 ;  equiv  to  ut  is, 
630,  631;  after  comparatives  with 
quam,  631.3;  equiv.  to  adj.,  ib.  i  ;  sed 
qui,  qui  tamen,  636,n2;  quo  quis- 
que,  with  comparative,  642,R.2;  see 
quo  and  qua. 

quia— after  vbs.  of  Doing  and  Happening, 
525.1.N-4;  origin  of  and,  correlatives 
with,  538,NN.1,2  ;  with  Causal  Indic, 
540;  vvith  Subjv.,  641;  alter  vbs.  of 
Emotion,  642. R.;  with  Inf.,  635,n.2 

quicumque— 105  and  n.5;  witli  Indic, 
254.4,  625. 

quidam -107.2;  syntax  of,  313;  with 
quasi,  319.r2;  strengthened  by  cer- 
tus,  unus,  313  R.3. 

quidem— with  demonstrative  pron.,  307, 
R  4;  position  of,  413,N.3,  679  ;  yes,  with 
sang,  471,  a,  1. 

quilibet— 107  and  n. 

quin— with  mirum,  209  n  2;  strength- 
ens Impv.,  269;  non  quin  as  Causal, 
541,N.2;  Ibrce  of,  647;  in  Consecutive 
Sentences,  652,3  ;  with  vbs  of  Prevent- 
ing, 656,1 ;  with  vbs.  of  Doubt  and  Un- 
certainty, ib.  2;  after  nOn  dubito,  ib.  2. 

.  R.l  ;  equiv.  to  ut  non,  656  .  atter  vbs. 
of  Saying,  etc.,  555,2  ;  in  Relative  Sen- 
tences of  Character,  632  and  r.  ;  facere 

non  possum  quin,  556. 
quippe— 498, N. 8;  with  qui,  623,n  l. 
quiqui— lOSand  N  4. 
quire— conjugation  t>f,  170,a;  with  Inf., 

433,2,N.2. 
quis  indefinite— and  qui,  107,1;  for  ali- 

quis,  ib.  R.  and  n  1  ;    syntax  of,   315; 

aliquis  instead,  ^i.  Nl ;  familiar  usage 

of.  317, -^.N. 2. 
quis  "iterrogative    106;  and  qui,  V6.  R.; 

old  forms  of,  ib-  nn.1,'_>  ;  qui  in  ^Yishes, 

261;  foruter,  300,N. 
quisnam— 106  and  N.r,. 
quispiam— 107,3,  and  n.1  ;  syntax  of,  316. 


534 


GEN^ERAL   INDEX. 


quisquam— 107,3,audN.2;  syntax  of.Si"; 
strengthened  by  unus,  i')-  l.N.l;  nega- 
tive of,  ib-  2;  as  adj.,  iO.  1,n.3. 

quisque— 107,5,and  n.;  quisquisiiistoad, 
105,N.-1;  with  PI.  vb..  211,R.l.Ex.a;  with 
ordinal,  294,n.,  318,2;  syntax  of,  318; 
with  superlatives,  ^('>.  2;  with  reflexives, 
ib.  3;  attraction  of,  ib.  n.2;  suumquis- 
qUG,  i'>-  N.4;  with  quo  and  compara- 
tive, 642,K.2;  ut  quisque,  with  super- 
lative, ib. 

quisquis— 105 ;  as  adj.,  ib.s.i;  with 
Indie,  254,4,  625. 

qui  vis-  107,4  and  n. 

quo — as  Causal  conjunction,  64'., n. 2 ;  non 
quo  ill  Final  Clauses,  545,2 ;  quone,  '*• 
Ki;  quo  setius,  549,N.4. 

quoad — force  of,  668 ;  of  complete  coex 
teusion,  569;  ureii^,  with  Indic,  671:  with 
Snbjv.,  673;  until,  with  Subjv.,  i/j.  n.o. 

quod— iuI'iiierObj..  333  l.N.l  ;introduce3 
Object  Sentences,  524:  after  vbs.  of  Add- 
ing and  Dropping,  525,1  :  after  demon- 
stratives, ib.  2;  and  ut,  ib-  I.n..*)  ;   quid 

est  quod,  ii^-  1n.2;  after  verba  senti- 
endi,  ^l^-  n.T;  after  demonstratives, 
with  preps.,  ib.  2, N.2;  as  to  the  fad  that, 
with  Subjv.,  j'6.  2,N.3;  with  Snbjv.  in 
O.  O.,  ib.  3;  after  vbs.  of  Motion,  ib.l, 
N.G;  gives  Ground  in  Exclamations,  634, 
K.l ;  with  Causal  Sentence  in  Indie  , 
540;  with  Cansal  Sentence  in  Subjv., 
641;  after  vbs.  of  Emotion,  541;  with 
diceret,  i(^-  n.3;  n5n  quod,  «'>.  n.2; 

magis  quod,  541,n.2  ;  correlatives  of, 
638,  Ni  ;  and  quia,  ib.  n.2;  nisi  quod, 
691.  u.  3  ;  quod  si,  610, B  2. 

quom— see  cum. 

quominus— ft>rce  of,  647;  with  vbs.  of 

Preventing,  e^c,  649;   for  ne,  548,N.2; 

and  quin,  549,N.3. 
quomodo— with  Direct  Question,  487,n, 
quoniam— with  Causal  Indic,  640;  with 

Subjv.,  641;  original  force  of,  538,N.3; 

early  usage  of,  580, N.3. 
quoque— syntax  of,  479  ;  and  etiam,  479, 

K.  and  N.l  ;  que  instead,  ib.  n.2;  with 

ced  and  v§rum,  482,5  and  N.l. 

JRafing—vhB.  of,  with  Gen.  and  Abl..  379, 

380. 
ratio— i'»  Abl.  of  Manner,  399,N.l  ;  with 

ut,  546, N.2. 
recgns— with  Abl.,  390,3,n.1, 


recipere-  with  Abl.  or  in,  389. 

reciprocal  relations — given  by  inter  *6r 
5221;  by  alter  alterum,  efc,  ib.  kI  ;  by 
invicem,  mutuo,  dc.  ib.  k.2. 

recitation  of  verses— 754. 

recordari— with  Pr.  inf.,  281,2,n.;  with 
Ace,  376,R.2. 

rectum— with  inf.,  422,h.3. 

rectisare— with  inf.,  423,2,n.2;  with  nS, 
648,N.l;  with  quominus,  549andN.l; 
constr.  with,  649,n.1. 

red  -iu  composition,  9,4,  715,R.3. 

reddere-with  Pf.  part.,  537,n2;  red^I 
andfierl,  206,Nl.  340,R.l. 

reduplication -in  Pr.  stem,  133,11.:  in 
Pf.  stem,  134,111  ;  omitted  in  Pf  o* 
cpd.  vbs.,  ib. 

Reference— Dat.  of,  352 

rgfert— with  Gen.  and  Abl.,  381,382- 
Nom.  with,  381, N.3  ;  origin  of,  ib.  N.5; 
expression  of  Degree  of  Concern,  382,1 
and  2  ;  expression  of  'i  hing  Involved, 
ib.  3. 

refertus— with  Gen.,  374,N.l. 

reflexive- 218;  passive  used  for,  218; 
approaches  deponent,  218,R.;  pronouns, 
309;  is  retained  instead  of  reflexive,  ib. 
N.l;  strengthened,  ib.  N.2  ;  SUUm  quis- 
que,  318,N.3  ;  with  ipse,  311,2  ;  with 
Ace.  of  Respect,  338,N  2;  in  subordinate 
clauses,  620-522 ;  not  in  Consecutive 
Sentences,  621,R.l  ;  refers  to  realsubj., 
309,2,  521,R.2;  free  use  of.ib.n.3;  Indic* 
Relative  Sentences,  ib.  R.4;  ambiguity 
in,  ib.  N.3;  demonstrative  instead  of, 
ib.  R.I, N.3. 

reformidare— with  inf.,  423,2.n.2. 

refragari-with  Dat.,  346,r.2. 

refraining— \hs.  of,  with  quin,  555,1. 

irfusing—vha.  of,  witli  n6,  648  ;  with 
quominus, 549;  with  Inf.,  548,R.2;  with 
quin,  555,1. 

Rcizidyius  Versus— 82Z. 

regis  -in  Abl.  without  in,  385,n.1. 

relation— suffixes  for.  181,8. 

relationship— suffixes  for.  181,7.182,11. 

relative  pronouns— 105  ;  nia<le  indefinite, 
111,1  ;  or  universal,  ib-  2,  in  Inner  Obj., 
333,1, N. 2  ;  instead  of  app.  with  rgfert, 
381, N.2;  contrastfid  with  interrogative, 
467,R.2,  611,R.2;  indefinite  with  Indic, 
354,R.4;  with  Subjv.,  667,n. ;  advs.  in- 
stead, 611,R  1;  continued  bydemonstrsi- 
live,  836,N.l ;  repetition  oJ,  615. 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


535 


RKLATivE  SENTENCES- 610-637;  for  Pro- 
tasis, 593,1;  general  consideration  of, 
610;  liow  introduced,  611;  position  of, 
612;  antecedent  in,  613  ;  concord  in,  614 
and  BR.;  id  quod,  e/c,  in  app,  to  a  sen- 
teuee,  ib.  P..2  ;  incorporation  of  app  ,  ib. 
R.4  :  repetition  of  antecedent,  615;  in- 
corporation  of  antecedent,  616;  attrac- 
tion of,  617 ;  correlative  of,  618 ;  absoriv 
tiou  of  correlative,  619;  position  of 
correlative,  620;  indefinite  antecedent, 
621;  tenses  in,  622,623;  in  Iterative 
action,  623;  moods  in,  624-635;  indefi- 
nite and  generic  relatives  with  Indie, 
254, u. 4,  625,1;  or  Subjv.,  t6.  B.;  condi- 
tional, 625,2  ;  explanatory,  628  ;  Subjv. 
in  explanatory,  627  ;  quod  SCiam,  etc. , 
ib.  K.l;  restrictions  with  esse,  pOSSe. 
attiliet,ift-K-2;  with  Subjv.  by  Partial 
Obliquity,  628 ;  with  Subjv.  by  Attrac- 
tion, 629;  Final,  630;  attraction  of 
diceret,  if)-  n.3  ;  Consecwtive,  631 ;  after 
definite  antecedent,  ib.  1;  after  indefi- 
nite antecedent,  2&.2  ;  after  conipai-a 
tive,  ib,  3 ;  parallel  to  adj  ,  ib  4  ;  with 
qnin,  632;  Causal,  633;  C  ucessiveand 
Adversative,  634;  in  Int  ,  635  ;  ecnibina- 
tion  of,  636;  iJarticiple  instead,  637,668, 
in  O.  O.,  655  and  ku. 

relatu-asSup.,438,N. 

relieving— vhs.  ot,  with  Abl  ,  S9D,2. 

relinquere— with  acc  Gor  ,  430,n.1. 

reliquum  est— with  ut,  553,4 

reliquus — used  ^Mirtitively  with  Subst., 

291,11.2  ;  alius  for,  319,n.i  ;  reliqua, 

as  Acc.  of  Respect,  338,2. 
rememberittg — vba.    of,    with  Gen.,  378; 

with  Acc,  ib.  n.  2. 
rgmex— defective,  70,  D. 
reminding— \l)s.  of,  with  Gen.,  376;  with 

Abl.  or  Acc.,  ib.  kr.1,2. 
removing— vbs.  of,  with  Abl.,  390,2. 
rendering — vba.  o{,  with  Inf  ,  421, N. 1,6. 
reperiri— with  Nom.  and  Inf  ,  528,N.l. 
repetition  of  relative,  615- 
repl§tus— with  Gen.,  374,N.l. 
reponere— with  in  aud  Acc,  385, n. 2. 
repOSCere— with  two  Aces.,  339  and  n.  1, 
reprexentdtio—^^i  Ami  n.,  656,n  1. 
rcpreientaUion—ybs.  of,  with  Acc.  and  Inf., 

526,  627  ;  with  part.,  527,n.1,  536. 
reprimere— with  ne,  548,n.i. 
repugnare— with  Dat., 346, B.2  ;  withnfi, 

548.  N.i. 


requiSs— heteroclite,  68,8. 

requiring— vh^.  of,  with  two  Aces.,  339 
and  K.l, N.I  ;  with  ab,  i*.  N.2. 

r6ri— l>art.  of,  with  Tr.  force,  282,  n. 

r6s— fov  neut.,  204, n. 4  ;  construed  like 
neut.,  211,N.2  ;  with  AppositionalGen., 
361,1  ;   in   phrases   with  Inf.,  422,N.2  : 

divinam  rem  facere,  with  Abl.,  401,n. 
4  ;  rem  certare,  333, 2. u. 

resistere— with  Dat.,  346, r.2  :  with  n6, 
54S,N.l;  with  qufn,  555,1. 

resisting— \hQ.  of,  with  Dat  ,  346. 

resolution— of  long  syllable  732. 

resolving— vhs.  of,  with  Inf.  423  and  n  2  ; 
with  ut,  546. 

Respect -Acc.  of,  338;  with  vbs  of  Cloth- 
ing, etc.,  ib.  N.  2  ;  Abl.  of,  387 ;  Abl.  of, 
with  comparatives,  398  ;  Abl.  of,  with 
words  of  Eminence  or  Superiority,  397, 
N.2  ;  prei)8.  instead,  tb.  s.l. 

respice— with  Direct  Question,  467,N. 

responde— witli  Direct  Question,  467,N.; 

ius  respondere,  333,2  a. 
rest—oouceivod  as  end   of  Motion,  412, 

r2. 
restat— with  ut,  563.4. 

restrictions— in  Relative  Sentences,  627, 
ru.1,2, 

result— for  Sentences  of,  see  Consecutive 
Sentences. 

rete-heteroclite,  68,12. 

retingre— with  n6,  548,n.1. 

reus— with  Gen.,  374,N.2  ;  378,R.l. 

ridSre  -with  Acc.  and  Inf.,  533,R.l. 

rhotacism— 47. 

rhythm — in  arrangement,  627,2,6  ;  de- 
fined, 739  ;  ascending  or  descending. 
735  ;  names  of,  736 ;  classes  of,  737 ; 
rhythmical  series,  738;  union  of  lan- 
guage with,  748. 

robur-decl.  of,  44,5,  45,R.2. 

rogare  — with  two  Accs.,  339,and  n.1  ;  with 
Acc.  Ger.,  430,N.l  ;  with  ut,  546,n.1  ; 
with  Direct  Question,  467,N. ;  rogatu, 
of  Moving  Cause,  408,M.l.;  with  Inf.  or 
Ut,  546,N.3. 

root— defined,  25,1, N.,  177. 

rudis— with  Gen.,  374, n. 4. 

rus— as  limit  of  Motion,  337  ;  in  Abl. 
ofSeparatiou,  390,2;  rurl  i"  Loc,  411, 

E.2. 

S— final  omitted,  27,N.,  703,b.3  ;  suffixes 
with,  188, 


536 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


Sacer— with  Gen.  or  Dat.,  369, k.  1 ;   sa- 
crum facere,  with  Abi.,  401,n.4. 
sacraments— as  Abl.    of    Manner,    399, 

N.l. 

sacrificaro— with  Abl.,  401,n.4. 

sacrificing— \hs.  of,  with  Abl.,  401,N.4. 

saepe— as  attrib.  to  snbst,,  439,N-4. 

saltern— strengthens  at,  488,n.2. 

saltitaris— has  no  s^iperlative,  87,9. 

salv§re— conjugation  of,  175,4. 

sane— strengthens  Impv.,  269  ;  very,  439, 
N.3 ;  with  concessive  ng,  608 ;  with 
quamand  Inilic,,  467,n.;  yes,  471,a. 

sanguis— decl.  of,  41,4. 

sapiens— as  subst.,  437,n  1. 

sapientia— in  phrases  with  Inf  ,  422,N. 
•2  ;  with  ut,  657,R. 

Sapphic — verse,  797,  804. 

satias— heteroclite,  68,8  and  12. 

satis— ^■^''■J',  439,N.3  ;  attraction  of  pred. 
after  satius  est,  535,K.3. 

saturare— with  Gen.,  383,i,n.2. 

Satnrnian— verse,  755- 

satUS— ^>'>*h  Abl.  of  Origin,  395, N  1. 

sa'kjing—vhs.  of,  with  Object  Clause,  523  ; 
vbs.  of,  with  quod,  525,1.N.7;  vbs.  of, 
with  Aec.  and  Inf.,  626,527;  ybs.  of, 
with  Norn,  in  pass.,  528  ;  vbs.  of,  at- 
tracted into  Snbjv.  after  quod,  641,n. 
3  ;  vbs.  of,  omitted,  645,b.3;  vbs.  of, 
withquin,  555,2. 

8Cat§re— with  Gen.,  383,1, N.2. 

scazon— verse,  764. 

BCientia— in  phrases  with  ut,  667,B. 

scilicet— ?/«s.  471.a,2. 

scire— first  Impv,  wanting,  267,R.:  SCiSns 
in  pred.  attrib.,  325,R.6  ;  quod  SCiam, 
quantum  scio,  627,e1  ;  witli  Inf, 
423,2,N.2,  627,b.1  ;  followed  by  direct 
question,  467,n.  ;  sci6ns,  wth  Gen,, 
375,N.2;  scitU  as  Sup.,  436,n. 

BCribere-witb  Acc.  and  inf.,  527,R.2; 
withut,646,N,l. 

leasoft— adjs.  of,  in  pred.  attrib.,  325,R  6. 

secondary  words— see  Derivatives. 

secundum— as  prep.,  416,24  ;  alter  for 
secundus. 

secus  -70,  B ;  sequius,  87,8  ;  strengthens 
sin,  694;  with  quam,  643,n.4. 

86d— in  composition,  9,4,  715, R.l. 

Bed— introduces  contrast  to  demonstra- 
tive, 307,n.4 ;  with  etiam,  quoque, 
after  nSn  modo,  482,5  and  n.1  ;  with 
n.6— quidem,  tfa-  RI;  omitted,  ib.TH.'Z; 


with  et,  ib.  N.2;  syntax  of,  485  ;  repeat 
ed,  ib.  N.2  ;  strengthened,  ib.  n.3. 

see?dng—\h&.  of,  with  Final  Dat.,  356,N.2, 

seeming—yhs.  of,  with  two  Noma.,  206. 

semi-deponents— 167. 

semi-hiatus— 720,R.l. 

semi- vowels—  6,2,  A. 

sempiternum— as  adv.  Acc,  338,n.1, 

senatus— dec],  of,  ei,  68,5. 

sending— \h».  of,  with  Acc.  Ger.,  430. 

senex— decl.  of,  66,5;  Comp.  of,  87,9. 

sentence— simple  or  cpd.,  201 ;  syntax  of 
simple,  202,ff.  r  simplest  form  of,  202; 
simple  expanded,  284,ff-  ;  incomplete, 
450-470  ;  coordination  of,  473 ;  Copula- 
tive, 474-482;  Adversative, 483-491;  Dis- 
junctive, 492-497  ;  Causal  and  Illative, 
498-503  ;  Object,  523-537  ;  Causal.  538- 
542  ;  Final,  643-650  ;  Consecutive,  551- 
658;  Temporal,  559  588  ;  Conditional, 
689-602;  Concessive,  603-609  ;  Relative, 
610-637;  Abridged,  645-663;  Partici- 
pial, 664  670. 

sententia  in  phrases  with  ut,  646,K.2. 
567.R. 

sentire— with  Acc.  and  Inf.,  527,R.2. 

Separation— Gen.  of,  374,n.8,  383,2  ;  Abl. 
of,  390. 

SEQUENCE  OF  TENSES- 609-519 ;  Txiie  and 
modifjcations,  609;  general  con.sidera- 
tious,  610  ;  shift  from  primary  to  sec- 
ondary sequence,  511, R. 2;  in  sentences 
of  Design,  512  ;  in  sentences  of  Kesult, 
613;  in  coincident  sentences,  ib.  n.S; 
representation  of  Subjv.  in,  514,  615 ; 
in  O.  O,  516;  after  other  mooils,  617; 
after  Inf.  or  part . ,  618 ;  original  Subj  vs. 
in,  619  ;  derangement  of,  ib-  R. ;  in  Com- 
parative Sentences,  602, R  1 ;  after  Hist. 
Pr.,511,  Rl;  after  Pure  Pf,  ?7>,  r.3, 
613,R.l  ;  alter  Hist.  Pf  .  511. R  4  ;  after 
accidit,  etc.ib.  b2;  alter  vb.  with 
future  character,  616, R  3. 

sequester— iieteroclite,  68,4. 

sequitur-with  ut,  553,3. 
sertum— heteroclite,  68,3. 

servire— with  Dat.,  346,r  2. 
servus— omitted,  362,N.l. 

shortening— of  penult,  701,R.2,&;  of  vow- 
els. 716,  717. 
showing— \\)s.  of,  with  two  Noms.,  206; 
with  two  Aces..  340;  with  Acc.  and  Inf., 
626,  627  ;  with  Nom,  an(J  Inf..  628- 
Sl-with  5  in  Wishes,  261  and  N.l  ;  with- 


GEN'ERAL   INDEX. 


537 


out  5  in  Wishes,  ih  N  1 ;  siS,  s6d§S, 
SUltis,  with  Impv  ,  269  ;  m  Indirect 
Question  after  vbs.  ol'Irial,  460,17^  ;  m 
Iterative  action,  666,  567  .  cign  of  Coii 
dition.  590 and  N  1 ;  siquidem,  t>  n  2, 
695,r5;  si  non  and  nisi  591;  sin.  692; 
Si  modo,  tamen,  vero,  695,r(J;  si 
forte,  ib.  N  1,  Concessive,  604, u  1 ;  with 
Inf.,  635,N  2. 

sibilants— 6,2, A;  suffixes  with,  188 

sic— coordinate  with  other  particles,  482, 
4,N.;  correlative  of  si,  690,N.l. 

Sicut— gives  Assumed  Ileason,  602,n.4. 

significare    with  inf.,  527.K.2. 

Signum— ill  phrases  with  ut,  546, n  2. 

silentiS— as  Abl.  of  Manner,  399,n  1. 

similis— compared,  87,3  ;  with  Gen.  or 
Dat.,  359,11.  land  n  4. 

simul— as  prep.,  417.12;  simul— simul, 
482,1  and  n1;  Temporal,  with  atque 
(ac),  as  soon  as,  661  563  ;  Causal  with 
Pr.  and  Pf.,  664  and  n.;  with  Fut.  and 
Fnt  Pf.,  565  and  n. 

simulare -with  inf.,627,R2. 

sin— "se  of,  592.  strengthened  by  minus, 
etc.,  ib.  R 

sine  position  of, 413,11 1  ;  as  prep.,  417. 
13:  with  Abl.  Ger.,433,N.2. 

Sinere— with  Inf ,  423,n.6,  653,2,n.;  with 
Ut,632.N  1,653,2. 

Blngular— in  collective  sense  for  PI,  204, 
N.8  ;  Voc.  with  PI.  vb.,  211,N.2 ;  neut. 
sums  up  preceding  PI.,  ib.  n3;  as  a 
subj..  combined  with  cum  and  another 
word,  285, N. 2. 

singulare— in  phrases  with  luf,  422,N  3; 
in  phrases  with  ut,  553,4. 

singulus—witli  numerals,  295. 

siquidem-  590,  n  2,  695,  u  5. 

sinister— Comp.  of,  87,i,r  i. 

sis— strengthens  imp  v.,  269 
sisti— as  copulative  vb  ,  206,n.1. 
sive-use  of,  496;  sive— sive,  ib.  2,695, 

R.4  ;  or  iZ>.  N.l  ;  and  seu,  ib.  n  3. 
smell— \hB.  of,  with  Inner  Object,  333,2, 

N.5. 

socer— and  socerus,  32,i.n. 

SOdSs — strengthens  Impv.,  269- 
80l6re— with  Inf.,  423,2. N. 2;    solitO,  as 

Abl.  of  Respect,  398,n.1. 
SOllicitari— with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  633,R.l. 
solus— (led.  of..  76  ;  in  pred.  attrib.,  325, 

B.6 ;  non  S51um  sed,  etc.,  482,5,  and  R.l; 

with  qui  and  Subjv.,  631,1. 


solvere  -with  Abl ,  390,2,n.2. 

somniare  -  with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  627,R.l. 
sonants— 6,2, B. 

SOrtitO— as  Abl.  of  Manner,  399,n.1. 

Sotadean— verse,  816. 

sricnl—\hs.  of,  with  neut.  Ace.  of  Inner 
Object,  333.2,n.G. 

Specification— Gen.  of,  361. 

spectare    with  ex  and  aw.,  402,r.2. 

specus— heteroclite,  68,91 

sperare-with  inf.,  627.R.2;  with  Pr. 
Iuf,531.N.4. 

spgs-with  est  ancl  Pr.  Inf.,  631,n.4;  in 
phrases  with  Inf,  627,R.2;  with  ut, 
646.N2;  in  Abl.  of  Respect,  398.N. I. 

spinter— defective,  70,B. 

Sponte    defective, 70,A. 

Standard— Abl.  of,  402,  403;  exand  Abl. 
instead  of  Abl.,  402,R.2  :  Abl.  of,  with 
ante  or  post,  403,n.4;  Acc.  of  Extent 
for  Abl  ,  i{j.  N.  3  ;  of  comparison  omit- 
ted, 297. 

stare— with  Gen.  of  Price,  379;  to  abide 
by,  with  Abl.,  401,N.6  ;  to  persist  in,  with 
Inf  ,  423,2  N.2, 

Statuere— with  in  and  Abl.,  385,R.1  ;  with 
Inf.,  423.2,N.2  ;  with  ut,  646,n.1. 

Status  -in  phrases  with  ut,  557.R. 

stem— 25,1  132;  Present,  114,3,rt,  133; 
Perfect,  114,3,6,  134  ;  Supine,  114,3,c, 
136;  Formation  of  Verb  stem.  132-135; 
varies  between  Conjugations,  136; 
quantity  of  stem  syllables,  714. 

stem-characteristic — 26,  120;  euphonic 
changes  in,  121,R 

stillare— with  Abl..  401, n.5. 

Studere- with  Dat ,  346,R  2  ;  with  Dat. 
Ger.  4294  and  N.l  ;  with  Inf..  423.2,n. 
2  ;  withut,  546,N.l. 

Studiosus— with  Gen.,  374. N.5. 

Stultitia— in  phrases  with  Inf.,  422, n.2. 

SUadere— with  Dat.,  346. r2,  and  n.2; 
with  Inf.,  423,2, N.2  ;  with  ut,646,N.l. 

sub — in  composition,  9,4;  vbs.  cpd. 
with,  take  Acc.  or  Dat.,  331,  347;  with 
COndicione,  etc.,  399, n. 3  ;  usage  of,  a.s 
prep.,  418,2. 

subesse— with  Dat,  347,R.2 ;  timorem, 
with  Acc.  and  Inf.,  633. Rl- 

subject— 201 ;  in  Nom.,  203 ;  in  Acc.  with 
Inf.,  ib.  R.l;  forms  of,  204;  omitted. 
207;  of  impersonal  vbs.,  208,1, n.  and 
2,N.l;  Multiplication  of,  286,ff.;  Qualifi- 
cation of,  288,ff.;  prolepsis  of  subj.  of 


538 


GENERAL    INDEX. 


dependent  clause,  468;  of  Inf.  omitted. 
627,R  3,  532,  R  2  and  n.2;  Acc.  and  Inf. 
as,  535  ;  attraction  of  pred.  alter  Acc. 
an (1  Inf.,  ih.  R.3. 

Subjective— Genitive,  363,  364;  poss.  pron. 
instead,  364. 

SUBJUNCTIVK— 112,4  ;  early  forms  of,  130,4; 
Aorist  forms  of  Pf.  and  Plupf.,  131,4,6, 
2,3;  Indie,  for  Deliberative.  254,N.2 ; 
witli  generic  relatives,  ih.  r.C,625,R-; 
force  of,  255  ;  Indie,  with  vbs  of  Possi- 
bility, e<c.,io.R.:  Idealand  Unreal,  256,1; 
Potential  and  Opt.,  ib.  2  Potential 
of  Pr.  and  Fut.,  257-259  ;  Potential  for 
Indie.  i6.  N.3;  Potential  of  Past,  268; 
Potential  of  Past  with  vellem,  efc,  ih. 
N.l;  Opt.,  260;  negs.  of  Opt.,  iT;,  parti- 
cles with  Opt.,  261 ;  Impf.  for  Unreal 
wish,  ib.  N.2:  in  Asseverations,  262; 
as  Impv.,  263,  267,  270,  v..,  272;  as  con- 
cessive, 264  and  n.;  tense  relations  of, 
277 ;  with  quam  ut  or  quam  qui  to 
express  disproportion,  298;  in  Delib- 
erative or  Ilhetorical  questions,  265, 
465,  466,  in  Indirect  questions,  467; 
after  vb.  with  Fut.  character,  515, 
B.3 ;  Original  in  dependence,  519  ; 
with  quod,  as  to  the  fact  that,  525,2,n  3  ; 
in  Final  and  Consecutive  Sentences,  643, 
4  ;  with  ut  tor  Inf ,  567, N.l  ;  in  Tem- 
poral Clauses,  560,2,  563. nn  4, .5  ;  in  Iter- 
ative action,  567,N  ;  in  Contemporane- 
ous action,  572,  673 ;  iu  Subsequent 
action,  677  ;  with  cum,  586,  688 ;  in 
Relative  Sentences,  627, 628  ;  by  Attrac- 
tion, 509,4,  629  ;  after  potius,  644,R.3 ; 
inO.  O.,660  652. 

Sublimis— iii  pred.  attrib.,  325,K.6. 

SUbolet-with  Inf.,  422,N.4. 

subordination— defined,  472;  syntax  of 
Subordinate  Clauses,  604,tf. ;  division 
of,  605-507;  moods  in,  508;  Sequence 
of  Tenses  in,  509  519. 

subsequent  action— syntax  of  Sentences 
of,  574-577  ;  with  ludic,  674-676;  with 
Subjv..  677. 

substantives— defined,  16,1,  and  r.I.n.I  ; 
inflection  of,  17;  division  of,  18;  gender 
of,  19,  20^  mobilia,  21,2;  epicene,  ib. 
3 ;  irregular,  67  71  ;  heterogeneous, 
67  ;  heteroclites,  68  ;  metaplasts,  ib, ; 
defective,  69  ;  singularia  tantum,^*- 
A  ;  pluraiia  tantum,  ib.  B ;  hetero- 
loga,  ib.  C  ;    tormatiou  of,   180,  181 ; 


without  suffixes,  183;  adjs.  and  parts. 
u.'jed  as,  204,nn.  ;  PI.  of  abstracts,  ih. 
NN.5,0;  agreement  of  pred.,  211  and 
RR.,NN.;  with  several  adjs.  iu  Sg.,  290. 
R.2;  common  surname  in  PL,  290, 
N.l  ;  verbal  with  Acc,  330, N.3,  337. N.5  ; 
verbal  with  Dat.,  366,n.3,  357,  358,n.2  ; 
in  Abl.  Abs.,  410,n.5  ;  with  Dat.  Ger., 
428,N.5  ;  with  Inf.  for  Gen.  Ger.,  ib.  n. 
4  ;  in  phrases  with  Final  Sentence,  546, 
R.2 ;  iu  i)hra<e3  with  Consecutive  Sen- 
tence, 557  and  r. 

subter— vbs,  cpd.  with  take  Acc  ,  331 ; 
as  adv.,  415  ;  as  prep.,  418,2. 

sub  venire— with  Dat.,  347,r.2. 

succedere— with  Dat ,  347,r.2. 

succrescere  -  with  Dat..  347,r.2. 

succumbere— with  Dat.,  347,r.2. 

succurrere— with  Dat.,  347,r.2. 

sudare— with  Abl.  of  Means,  401,n.5. 

sufferre-Pf.  of,  171,n.2. 

sulTixes — 180 ;  primai-y  and  secondary,  ib. 
N.l;  of  substantives,  181;  of  adjs.,  182: 
forming  diminutives,  181,12,  182,12;  in 
detail,  184-189 ;  with  vowels,  184  ;  with 
gutturals,  186  ;  with  dentals,  186  ;  with 
labials,  187;  with  s,  188;  with  liquids, 
189. 

suflfragari— with  Dat.,  346,r.2. 

SUi— t^ecl.  of,  102  and  N.l ;  with  -met, 
ib.  N  2;  witli  -pte,  ih.  N.3;  circumlocu- 
tion for  Part.  Gen.,  304,3  N.2;  usage  of, 
309,  520-622 ;  complement  of  Inf.,  309,3; 
is  instead,  ib.  N.l ;  with  SUUS,  ih.  N.2. 

sultis— strengthens  Impv.,  269. 

sum— see  esse. 

Summus— comparison  of,  87,2 ;  used  par- 
titively,  291,R.2. 

SUpellSx- clecl.  of,  44,5. 

super — vbs.  cpd.  with,  take  Acc.  or  Dat., 
331,  347;  as  adv.,  415;  as  prep.,  418,4; 
with  Acc.  Ger.,432,N.l  ;  with  Abl.  Ger., 
433 ;  id  quod,  quam  quod,  526,2,n.2. 

SUperare-with  Abl.  of  Respect,  397,N.2. 

superesse— with  Dat.,  347,R.2. 

superior— 87,2  and  7. 

superiority — vbs.  of,  with  Acc.  of  Re- 
spect, 397,n.2. 

Buperlative— in  issimus,  86;  in  rimuS- 
87,1;  in  limus,  H>-  3;  in  entissimus, 
ib.  4  and  5;  lacking,  ib.  9;  of  parts.,  89; 
of  advs.,  93;  meaning  of,  varies  with 
position,  291,R.2,302;  strengthened.  303; 
with  quam,  quantum,  qui,  lb.  r.2, 642, 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


539 


B.5;   with   quisque,  318,2;   with  Part. 
Gen.,  372;   with  preps.,  i6.  r.2;  with 
Ut,  642,11.2. 
supersedere— with  Abi.,  390,2.n.3. 

Superstes— with  Gen.  or  Dat.,  359, n  1. 

HTpiNE— 112,5;  s5-stem,114,3,c;  formation 
of,  115,3,  121,3;  stem.  135;  iu  Abl.  of 
Sep.,  390,3, N.3,  436, n  4  ;  iu  Abl.  of  Ke- 
spect,  397,1;  with  opuS,  406,N.5;  de- 
fined, 434;  Ace.  of,  435;  Abl.  of,  436. 

SUppetiae— defective,  70,B. 

SUppleX — with  Dat.,  346,N.5. 

SUpplicare — with  Dat.,  346,r  2  and  n.4. 

supra— with  quam  after  a  comparative, 
296,  N.3;  with  Abl.  of  Measure,  403,N.l; 
as  adv.,  415:  as  prep  ,  416,25. 

surds— 6,2, B. 

surname — common,  in  PI,,  290,N.l. 

SUS — decl.  of,  59. 

suscens6re— with  Dat.,  346,r.2. 

suscipere — with  Acc.  Ger.,  430,N.l. 

SUspicari— with  Acc.  and  Inf.,  627,R.2. 

SUSpicere — with  Acc.  and  Inf.,  627,R.l. 

SUSpirare — with  Acc.  and  Inf.,  633,R.l. 

sustinere— with  Inf.,  423,2, n. 2. 

SUUS  (os)— 102  ;  syntax  of.  309;  emphatic, 
ib.  2  ;  with  prep,  phrases,  ib.  4;  is  in- 
stead, ib.  N.l;  suum  quisque,  ib.  n  3; 
SU5  tempore,  ib.  4;  with  Gen.  Ger., 
428,R.l ;  in  dependent  clauses,  621 ; 
SUOm  with  ut,  657,  R. 

syllaba  anceps~-741. 

syllables— division  of,  IQ  ;  names  for,  H; 
open,  11,R.;  close,  ib.;  length  of,  12; 
common,  13;  quantity  of  final,  707-713  ; 
of  polysyllables,  707-709  ;  of  monosyl- 
lables, 710-713. 

syllepsis — 690. 

syuapheia— 728. 

syncope— 725-743  ;  in  Pf.  forms,  131,  S. 

synecdoche— 695. 

synizesis— 727. 

syntax — defined,  201. 

systole— 722. 

T— sound  of,  7  ;  t-f^^ass  of  vbs.,  133,in. 

tabes— heteroclite,  68,H. 

tabo— defective,  70, A. 

taedet— with  Geu.,  377;  with  pronoun  as 

sub.i.,  377,  R.2. 
taking — vbs.  of,  with  two  Aces..,  340;  End 

For  Which  given  by  Dat.  or  ad,  ib.  R.2; 

vbs.  of  Taking  Away,  with  Dat.,  347,R.5 ; 

with  Acc.  Ger,,  430. 


talaris -and  talarius,  84,2. 

talis— with   qui  or  ut  and  Subjv.,  631,1 

and  R.l. 
tarn— with  quam,  quantum,  qui,  and 

superlative,  303,  u,2;  with  qui  or  ut  aiid 
Subjv.,  631,1  ami  r.1. 
tamen  —  introduces  contrast,  307,R.4; 
position  of,  413,N.3;  with  sed,  485,N.3; 
syntax  of,  490;  with  at,  488. n. 2  ;  em- 
phasizes adversative  relation,  587,R.l ; 

with  tametsi,  604,r.3. 

tametsi— form,  603  and  n  ;  usage,  604 
and  RR. 

tamquam— with  subst  .  439,n  4  ;  with 
Subjv.  of  Comparison,  602;  with  Indie, 
ib.  N.l;  to  give  an  Assumed  Reason,  ib. 
N.4  ;  with  part.,  666,N.  ;  tamquam  si, 
602.N  4;  coordinate  with  sic,  482,3, n. 

tanti-asGen.  of  Price,  380,1. 

tantidem— as  Gen.  of  Price  380,1. 

tantUS— with  quiorut"'"''  Subjv.,  631,1 
and  R.l;  tanti,  with  vbs.  of  Rating  and 
Buying,  380  ;  tantl  est,  it  ^^  wortli  wJiile, 

lb.  R 1;  tantum,  with  quam,  quan- 
tum, qui,  and  superlative,  303,R.2  ; 
tantum,  for  Abl.  of  Measure.  413, N. 2  ; 

non  tantum  sed,  etc.,  482, 5 ;  tantum 

quod,  525,2,N.2;  tantum  abest  ut, 

562,  R.l. 
taste— whs.  of,  with  Inner  Obj.,  333,2,N.5. 
teaching— \ha.  of,  with  two  Aces.,  339  and 

nn.2,3. 
temperare— with  Dat.,  346,r.2  and  n.2  ; 

with  ng,  648,N.l ;  temperans,  with 

Gen.,  375,n.2. 

templum— omitted,  362,r  3. 

TEMPOU.vL  SENTENCES— 569  688  :  division 
of,  559  ;  moods  in,  860;  Antecedent  Ac- 
tion, 661-667;  Iterative  Action,  666,  567; 
Contemporaneous  Action,  668-673;  Sub- 
sequent Action,  674-677;  with  cum, 
678-588  ;  general  view  of,  579  ;  Temporal 
cum,  580;  cum  inversum,  681 ,  Explic- 
ative cum,  582  ;  Conditional  cum,  583  ; 
Iterative  cum,  584 ;  Circumstantial 
cum,  685  588;  Historical  cum,  685; 
Causal  cum,  586  ;  Concessive  cum,  587; 
cum-tum,  588  ;  in  6.  O.,  655. 

temptare— with  inf.,  423,2. n.2. 

tempus— with  Inf.  or  Ger.',  428, N.2  tem- 
pore or  in  tempore,  394,r.;  id  tem- 
poris,  336,N.2  ;  with  Inf.,  422,N.2 ; 
temper!,  411,n.1. 

teudeucy— suflBxes  for,  182,3. 


54© 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


tendere  mantis— with  Dat.,  358,n.3. 

tenere— with  Pf.  part,  to  deuote  Main- 
teuauce  of  Result,  238  ;  memoria 
teneO,witli  Pr.  inf.,  281, 2,N.:  (se)  with 
n6,  548,N.l;  with  quominus,  549; 
with  quin,  565,1;  with  ut,  553,1;  teneri, 
with  Gen.  of  Charge,  378,b  1. 

tenses— 112,3;  signs  of,  114,2;  formation 
of,  lU,  115,  121;  syutax  of,  222-252; 
definitions,  223;  of  continuance,  attain- 
ment, or  completion,  224  ;  Pr.,  227-230; 
Impf.,  231  234 ;  Pure  Pf.,  236-238 ;  Hist. 
Pf.,  239,  240 ;  Plupf.,  241 ;  Fut.,  242, 
243;  Fut.  Pf.,  244,  245;  periphrastic, 
246-251;  in  Letters,  252;  of  Indie,  276; 
of  Impv.,  278;  Sequence  of,  609;  in 
Final  and  Consecutive  Sentences,  543, 
3;  in  Relative  Sentences,  622,623;  in 
O.  O.,  663-655;  in  Inf.,  279,  653;  of 
Subjv.,  277,  654,  665 ;  RepresantatiO, 
654,N. 

tenus— position  of,  413,R.l  ;  usage  of,  as 
prep.,  417,14. 

terminations  of  cases— 27. 

terra— ill  Abl.  without  in,  386,n.i  ;  ter- 
rae  as  Loc,  411,b  2. 

tertium— est  with  ut,  553,4. 

testis  est— with  Acc.  and  Inf.,  627,R.2. 

thematic  class  of  verbs— 133,1. 

thickness — how  expressed,  335,u.l. 

thinking— \ha.  of,  with  two  Noms.,  206; 
with  Object  Sentence  and  quod,  523, 
628,1,  N.7;  with  Inf.,  627;  vbs.  of,  at- 
tracted into  Siibjv.  after  quod,  641,N.3; 
vbs.  of,  with  quin,  656,2. 

threat— vhs.  of,  with  Inf.,  423,N.5. 

Tiburl— as  Loc,  411,r.1. 

time— adjs.  of,  in  pred.  attrib.,  325,R.6  ; 
suffixes  lor,  182,8;  when,  in  Abl.,  393; 
how  long,  in  Acc,  336;  within  lohich,  in 
Abl.,  393;  with  per,  336,  393,R.l  ;  with 
tOtUS,  ii>-  R-2;  when  =i  for  which,  ib.  r.3; 
with  hie,  ille,  ib.  R.4;  preps,  for  Abl., 
394  ;  lapses  of,  with  cum,  680,R.3;  given 
by  part.,  666,  670,1. 

timfire— constr.  of,  660  and  N.l;  with 
Inf.,  423,2,N.2. 

timor— est,  with  Inf.,  660,n..5  ;  tim5rem 
SUbesse,  with  inf.,  633, H.l. 

titles— position  of,  676,  u. 4. 

tmesis— 726. 

tOtUS— decl.  of,  76;  in  pred.  atti'ib.,  326, 
R.6;  with  Abl.  of  Place  Where,  388;  with 
Time  How  Long,  393,R.2. 


towns -with  Acc,  337;  in  Abl.  of  Place 
Where,  386;  in  Abl,  of  Place  Whence,  391 ; 
in  Loc,  411 ;  with  preps.,  337,n  3.  391, 
R  1  ;  with  appositives,  337,R.2,  386,R.l, 
391,  R.  1,411,  R.3. 

tractatu-asSup.,  436,n. 

trade— suffixes  for,  181,4. 

tradere— with  Acc  Ger.,  430,n.1  ;  with 
Acc.  and  Inf.,  527, R. 2. 

tradesman— suffixes  for,  181,3. 

training— \h8.  of,  with  Abl.,,  401,N.l. 

trajection— 696. 

trans— in  composition,  9,4  ;  vbs.  cpd. 
with  take  Acc,  331 ;  as  prep.,  416,20. 

transitive  verb— defined,  213  ;  used  iu- 
traus.,  ib  n.a. 

transposition- of  consonants,  9,8. 

trgS— decl.  of,  95. 

^•mZ— vbs.  of,  with  si,  460,1, i>;  with  im- 
plied protasis,  601. 

tribes— in  Abl.  of  Origin,  396,N.2. 

tribuere— with  ut,  553,2. 

tributum— heteroclite,  68,5. 

tricorporis— defective,  86,1. 

trini— 97,R.3. 

tritum— with  Inf.,  422,N.3. 

trochee- shortened  by  Iambic  Law,  717; 

trochaic     foot,    734;      rhythm,    736; 

rhythms,  768-776. 
tu— tied,  of,  101  and  n  1;  synizesis  in,  ib. 

N.4;  with  met  and  -pte,  102,nn.2,3;  ves- 

tri  and  vestrum,  304,2  and  3,  364,  R.; 

poss.  pron.  for,  304,2,n.2;  tui,  vestri, 

with  Ger.,  428,R  1. 
tuSri— with  Acc.  and  Inf  ,  627,R.l. 
turn— with  subst.,  439,N.4  ;  with  etiam, 

478,N.l ;  as  coordinating  particle,  482,1 

and  Nl;    tum— tum,   482,1  and   N.l; 

cum— turn,  588;    correlative  of  si,  590, 

N.l. 
tUUS  (OS)-IOI  and  N  3 ;  tuum  with  ut, 
657,r;  tui  with  Gen.  Ger.,  428.R.1. 

U— length  of  Final -707,6. 

ubi— «s   soon   as,   with  Indie,  661-663  ; 

Causal,  with  Indie,  664,n.1  665  and  N.l; 

with   Iterative  action,  666,  567  ;    with 

Subjv  ,  667,N.  ;  Conditional,  690,n.3. 
alius— decl.  of,  76 ;  and  quisquam,  107, 

3, N. 2,  108;  syntax  of,  317. 
ais-416,27. 
ulterior-87,8 ;  ultimusiu  pred.  attrib., 

325,  R.6. 
ultimate — defined,  11. 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


541 


ultra— with  Abl.  of  Measure,  403,n.1; 
position  of,  413,n.l;  as  adv.,  416;  as 
prep.,  416,27. 

uncertainty— \hs.  of,  with  quin,  555,2. 

understatement— defiuition  ol,  700. 

undertaking— \hs.  of,  with  Ace.  Ger.,430. 

unimanus— defective,  85,2. 

unlike.n€ss—a.dis.  ol,  with  atque  (ac),  643. 

UNHEAL  CONDITION— 597;  with  Impf.  of 
opposition  to  Past,  ib.  u.l ;  with  ludic, 
in  Apod.,  ib-  iiii  2,3  ;  in  6  O  ,  ib.  R.4, 
659 ;  Apod,  in,  after  vb.  requiring 
Subjv.,  597,  R.5;  with  absque,  ib.  n. 

Unus— tied,  of,  76,  95,N  1  ;  PI.  with  plQ- 
ralia  tantum,  95, r1  ;  as  distributive, 
97,u  3;  with  superlative,  303 ;  with 
quidam,  313,k.3;  with  quisquam,  317, 
i.N.i;  with  nSmd,  ntillus,  317,2,n  3  ;  in 
pred.  attrib.,  325,K.6 ;  with  prep,  for 
Part.  Gen.,  372,R.2 ;  with  qui  and 
Snbjv.,  631,1. 

unusquisque— 107,5. 

urbs— with  name  of  Town,  requires 
prep.,  337,R.2,  386,r.1,  391,R.1,  411,R.3; 
with  Appositioual  Sen.,  361,N.l. 

UTggri— with  Gen.  of  Charge,  378.R.1. 

urging— vhs.  ol,  with  ut,  546- 

usque— with  Ace.  of  Motion  Whither,  337, 
N.4  ;  usage  of,  as  prep.,  416,28. 

iiSUS— with  Abl.,  406  ;  with  other  constr., 
ib.s.5;  as  pred.,  ib.;  with  Pf.  part.,  406, 
437,N.2  :  in  phrases  with  ut,  557, R.; 
usu  venit,  with  ut,  553,3. 

ut— 1»  wishes,  261 ;  witli  quam,  to  ex- 
press disproportion,  298,  631,3,R  1 ; 
omitted,  298,n.2  ;  with  potuit,  to 
strengthen  superlative,  303  ;  ut— ita, 
482,4  ;  alter  vbs.  of  Adding  and  Hap- 
pening, 525,1,N.5  ;  in  Final  and  Con- 
secutive Sentences,  643  ;  ut  UOn,  ib.  4, 
545,R.2,  552;  parenthetical,  ib.  r3; 
ut  ne,  645,  R.l,  546,r  3  ;  after  vbs.  of 
Fear,  650  and  N.l  ;  to  add  restriction, 
652.R  3  ;  after  vb.  of  Causation,  553,1  ; 
alter  vbs.  of  Compelling  and  Permit- 
ting, ib.  2  ;  alter  vbs.  of  Happening,  ib. 
3  ;  after  impersonals,  ib.  4  ;  E.xplaua- 
tory,  557  ;  Exclaniatovy,  658 ;  with 
magis  quam,  557,n  2  :  ut  primum,  as 
soon  as,  with  Indie,  561-563  ;  Causal, 
664, N.;  with  Iterative  sentences,  563, 
667  ;  nisi  ut,  557,n.2,  591  R  3  ;  with  si 
and  Subjv.,  602  ;  witli  Subjv.,  to  give 
an  Assumed  Reason,  iO.  n.4  ;    Conces- 


sive, 608  and  r.1  ;  with  qui,  626.R.1; 
alter  comparatives.  631,3,r.1;  with 
quisque  and  superlative,  642,R  2;  pr5 
eo  ut,  as  Causal,  ib.  r.4  ;  ut  qui,  with 
superlative,  ib.  r.5  ;  introduces  O.  O. 
after  vbs.  of  Will  and  Desire,  652,R.l; 
with  part,  to  give  Assumed  Reason, 
666,  N. 

Uter,  bag-iiecl.  of,  44.2,  46,Rl. 

Uter,  which— dec\.  of,  76,  106;  quis  for, 
300,N.;  utruui  as  interrogative  parti- 
cle, 468  ;  iu  Indirect  Question,  460,2,N. 
3  ;  utrum,  whether  or  no,  459,N.2. 

uterlibet-108. 

Uterque— ilecl.  of,  IO8 ;  with  Pi.  vb.,  211, 
R.l,Ex.rt,  292, R-;  to  express  reciprocal 
action, -221, R.l  and  2;  force  of,  292; 
with  Part.  Gen.,  371,R.l. 

Uterum— heterogeneous,  32,1, n. 

utervis— 108. 

Utl— with  Abl.,  407  and  N.2,a ;  other 
coustrs.  of,  lb.  N.3 ;  with  personal  Ger., 
427,  N.5. 

Utinam— ill  wishes,  261  and  N.  1. 

utpote— with  qui,  626.N.1. 

V— and  u,  1,R.2  ;  pronunciation  of,  7. 

Vacare— with  Dat.,  346, n.2  ;  attraction 
of  pred.  after,  535,R.3. 

vacuus— with  Gen.,  374,N.8. 

vae— with  Dat..  343,1  N.l. 

vedd^—verij,  439,N.3;  with  quam  and 
Indie,  467,N. 

valere— with  inf.,  423,2,n.2;  with  ut, 
553,1. 

validus-  with  Abl.  or  Gen,  405, N.3. 

vas— heteroclite,  68,7. 

ve— "sage  of,  495  :  ve— ve,  ib.  n.2. 

vehementer— 'ery,  439,n  3. 

vel— with  superlative,  303;  usage  of,  494; 
vel — vel,  i^-  2  ;  for  example,  ib.  N.l ;  a* 
xvelL  as,  ib.  N.3. 

velle  — conjugation  of,  174  ;  exact  use  of 
Fut.  or  Fut.  Pf.,  242,N.2  and  r.3  :  has 
no  periphrasis,  248, R,  631,N.3  ;  velim, 
257,2  ;  vellem,  as  Potential,  258,N.  1  ; 
vellem,  as  Unreal,  261,R. ;  with  Subjv. 
for  Impv.,  270,N.2  ;  with  Pf.  Inf.  act., 
280,2  6,  and  N.l;  with  PI.  Inf.  pass., 
280,2,c,N.;     volens    i»    pred.    attrib., 

325,u.O;  sili  velle,  351,n.2;  volenti 

est,  353,n.2:  with  Inf.  or  ut,  532,  and 
N.3,  646.  R.l  ;  with  Inf.,423,2,N.2;  with 
Ut,  546,N.l. 


542 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


velut— 'With  Subjv.,  602  ;  with  part,   to 

give  Assumed  Reason,  666,n. 
velutSi— with  Subjv.,  602 
vgnalis— with  Abl.,  404,N.4. 
vSndere— with  Gen.  of  Price,  379 ;  bene 

vendere,  380,2,r. 
venire-omitted,  209,n  5 ;   venit  mihi 

in  mentem,  with  Gen.,  376,k.3;  with 
Sup.,  435,N.l;  venturus  as  adj.,  438, 
N.;  in  SUSpicionem,  with  Nom.  and 
Inf.,  528,N.2;  with  Inf.,  422,n  5  ;  USU 
venit,  with  ut,  553  3. 

venire— pass,  oi  vendere,  169,2,u.i;  with 
Geu.  of  Price,  379. 

venter— decl.  of,  44,2,  45,k  l. 

verbals— defined,  179,1;  prod,  agreement 
of,  211;  subst.  with  Ace,  330,i<.3,  337, 
K.5;  adj.  with  Ace,  ib.  n.4;  in  bilis, 
with  Dat.,  355,N.  ;  in  ax,  with  Geu., 
376  ;  formation  of  verbdlia,  191. 

VERBS— defined,  16,4  ;  conjugation  of,  17 ; 
inflection  of,  114 ;  deponents,  113 ;  per- 
sonal endings,  114;  regular,  120, if.  ; 
classes  of,  133  ;  Stem  or  Thematic  class, 
133,1.;  Eeduplicated  Class,  ih.  II.; 
T-class,  ih.  Ill- ;  Nasal  class,  ib.  IV. ;  In- 
choative class,  [b.  v.;  i-class,  ih.  VI.  ; 
mixed  class,  2/!;.  VII.;hstof,  137-162;  De- 
ponents, 163  166  ;  Semi-deponents,  167; 
Irregular,  168-174;  Defective,  175  ;  form- 
ation of.  190  200:  division  of,  190  ;  Ver- 
balia,  191 ;  Denominative,  192  ;  com- 
position of,  199,  203;  Impersonal,  203; 
iutrans.  used  personally,  ib.  2;  Concord 
of,  210,  211,  235-287  ;  trans,  and  iu- 
trans., 213  ;  trans,  used  as  intrans., 
ib.  -R.a ;    intrans.   vised    as    trans.,  ib. 

R.fc. 

verbum — with  Appositional  Gen.,  361,1  ; 

in  phrases  with  ut,  546, N. 2. 
ver§ri— constr.  with,  650  and  n.1  ;  Veri- 
tas as  Pr.,  232, N.  ;  with  Inf.,423,2,N  2, 

533,R.l. 
V6risimile— in  phrases  with  Inf.,  422,N. 

3  ;  in  phrases  with  ut,  653,4. 
V6r5— position  of,  413,N.«3  ;  ys,  471,a,l  ; 

with  atque,  477, n.2  ;  with  sed,  485  N. 3  ; 

syntax  of,  487  ;  with  nisi,  591, n.4  ;  with 

Sin,  592. 
verse— 745  ;  methods  of  combiuiug,  746  ; 

Italic,  765  ;  Saturuian,  756  ;  compound, 

820,  823. 
versification— 729-823;  anacrustic  scheme 

of,  739. 


versus— position  of,  413,R.l ;  usage  as 
prep.,  416,29  ;  versus  Jtalicus—755. 

vertere— with  Final  Dat.,  356,K.2. 

Verum— introduces  contrast  to  demon- 
strative, 307,R.4  ;  yes,  471.a,l;  with 
etiam,  482,5  and  N.l ;  syntax  of.  488  ; 
with  Inf  ,  422,N.3  ;  with  ut,  553,4. 

?'e?-)/— translations  of,  439,n.3. 

veSCi— with  Abl.,  407  and  N.2,<i  ;  with 
personal  Ger,  427,N,5. 

vesper  decl.  oi,  68,10  ;  in  Abl.  of  Time, 
393,11  5;  vesperi-37,5,  411,n  1. 

vester— 101  and  k.3. 

vetare— w'ith  Ace  ,  346,n.3  ;  with  Inf., 
423,2,NN.3  and  G,  532,n  1  and  2. 

vetUS— decl.  of,  82,2;  comp.  of,  87,1,B.2. 

via— as  Abl.  of  Manner,  399,n.1. 

vicissim— gives  reciprocal  relation,  221. 
11.2  ;   as  coordinating    particle,    482,1, 

vid§re— with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  527,R.2;  with 
ut,  546,N  I ;  Avith  ng,  648,n.1  ;  with 
Direct  Question,  467,n.  ;  with  two 
Noms.  in  pass.,  206  ;  videri,  and  vi- 
detur,  528,R.2  ;  vide,  with  Subjy.  for 
Impv.,  271,N.2,  648,  n.3  ;  videris,  as 
In:ipv.,  245,N. 

Vilis— with  Abl.  of  Price,  404.N.2. 

Vincere— with  Abl.  of  Respect,  397,n.2  ; 
causam,  333,2  u. 

violentus— and  viol6ns,  84, i. 

virus— <^ieiective,  70, C. 

ViS-70,D;  with  PI.  vb..  211,R.l,Ex.a;  vi, 
as  Abl.  of  Manner,  399,n  1. 

-vis— with  relatives,  111,3. 

vitium— with  Epexegetical  Gen.,  361,2; 
with  Inf.,  422,N.2  ;  vitio  as  Abl.  of 
Manner,  399,N.l.  . 

Vivere— with  Abl.,  407,N.2,e. 

[vix]-70,D;  tuam  vicem,  334.R.2. 

VOCATIVE— defined,  23,5;  in  i,  33,R.2  ;  in 
adjs.  of  1st  and  2d  Decl.,  73 ;  no  syntax 
of,  201,R  1  ;  Nom.  instead,  ib.  e.2  ;  in 
app.,  ib.  R.3  ;  in  pred.,  211,R.3 ;  Sg. 
with  PI.  vb.,i6.  n.2;  Nom.  instead,  321, 
N.l ;  in  pred.  app.,  325,u.l  ;  with  Q  or 
pr5,343,l.N.l. 

voice-112  2,  212;  act.,  213;  pass.,  214; 
middle,  212,N. 

voluntas— in  phrases  with  ut,  546,n.2; 
VOluntateas  Abl.  of  Manner,  399,N.l. 

volup— indeclinable,  86,C. 

v6mer— decl.  of,  46,r.2. 

vowels — 2  ;  sounds  of,  3  ;  phonetic  varia- 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


543 


tions  in,  8 ;  weakening  of,  ib-  1 ;  omis- 
sion of,  ib.  2;  epouthesis  of,  tb.  3; 
assimilation  of,  ib.  4  ;  quantity  of  final, 
707  ;  suffixes  with,  184. 

VOX — with  Appositional  Gen.,  361,1. 

VulgO— as  Abl.  of  Manner,  399,N.l. 

VultUS— heteroclite,  68,5. 

Want— \ha.  of,  with  Abl  ,  405  ;  adjs.  of. 
with  Gen.  and  Abl.,  ibm.3. 

warning— vhs.  of,  with  ut,  546. 

weakening  of  vowels— 8,1,  701,R.2. 

weight — snbsts.  of,  with  Gen.,  369. 

w;j7^vbs.  of,  with  Inf.,  280,2, c,  423,2,  632; 
sequence  after  vbs.  of,  515, u- 3  ;  ut  in- 
stead of  luf.  after,  532,N. 1-4;  with  Final 


sentence,  546  ;  with  Inf.  instead,  ib.  R.l; 

with  simple  Subjv.,  ib.  k.2. 
wishes— in     Subjv.,    260,  261 ;    apodosis 

omitted  with,  601. 
wt7/(0Mi— translated  by  ut  non,  5£2,r4; 

quin,  556  ;  cum  non,  587,ii.2. 
wonder — coustr.  with  vbs.  of,  542.N.1, 
words— Formation  of,  176-200. 

Y-1,R.3;  length  of  final.  707,3, 
2/es— trans,  of,  471,aand  c. 
yielding— \hs.  of,  with  Dat.,  346. 


Z— when 

ib.  N. 
zeugma  - 


introduced,    1,b.3  ;    sound    of. 


SYNTAX   OF   INDIVIDUAL   AUTHORS. 

The  syntactical  usage  of  individual  authors  is  treated  as  follows: 


AcciiTS— 358,N.l;  625,l,N.l. 
Afranius — 498,N.l. 
Apuleius— 336.N.1 ;  365,n.;  406,n. 
N.l ;  691,N.3;  607, n. 3 ;  626.N.1. 


I;  498, 


Caelius— 574.N. 

Caesar— 208. 2,N. 2  ;  209. n.5  ;  228.N.1  ;  239. 
N.;  250,N.land  2;  260;  280.2,c,N.;  285. 
N.2;  286  3,N.;  311,1,R.2  ;  323,N.l ;  324; 
335,N.;  336,N.2;  337,N.l;  341.N.2;  349,R.5; 
354  N.2;  356N.2and3;358,N.3;  359,N.l; 
369, N.2;  372. N.2  and  3  ;  374,n.1  and  9; 

'  375,N.2;  381.N.4;  386.N.;  391,n.;£9j,n  2; 
401.N.7;  407,N.-2,d;  410,N.4:  413.R.1:  415; 
416,2,3,8  15,10,19,22,  and  24  ;  418,2;  422, 
N.2;  423,N.2  and  3;  427,N.2:  429,N.l;  432, 
N.l;  435,N.2;  436,N.l;  443  n. 3;  458,n1; 
460,2,N.l  and  2;  467,N  ;  476. n. 3;  476, n.^; 
478.N.2  ;  480  N.2  and  3;  482.3;  482.5,r.2 
and  N.l;  496,N.l;  603;  512,n.1  ;  513,n.1 
and  2;  525,2,n.3;  527,R.3;  528,n.1  ;  638, 
N.4;  641,N.l and 3;  542,n.1  ;  546,u.l ;  549.N. 


I  and  2  ;  663,n.2  and  3  ;  567.N. ;  669,N.l ; 

571  N.3;  591,R  2  and  n.2;  602,n.5;  615.N.; 

616.1  N.l;  626,n.1:  627,R.2;  636.N.1;  644. 

n.3:  647,n.2;660n  ;  666.N. 

B.  Hisp.-i07,N.2,d;  416,8. 

/?.  yl/r.-407.N.2,r? ;  417,7. 
Cato— 286,N.2;  394,3.N.l:  401,N.7;  407,N.2; 

417  7;  418,4;  437,n.2;  477.N.5;  648.N.3; 

574.N. 
Catullu.s- 207,N.;  236  n.:  380;  417.3:  454, 

n.2;  455,N.;  458,N  1 ;  477,N.5;  480,n.3: 

646,n.3;667,n;644n2. 
Celsus    602.N.4. 
Cicero- 204, N. 7  ;  206. n. 1 ;  209,N.3and5; 

211,R  4  and  N.3  ,  214, R. 2  ;  228,n.1  ;  239, 

N. :  242,R  3  ;  245,n.  :  250,n.1  and  2  ;  252, 

N  ;  254,R.(;  and  nn  1,2  ;  257,n.1  ;   261 ; 

269;    271,2,n2;     280,2.c,n.;    285,  n.2; 

293,N.  ,     298,N.l;    299.N.1 ;    301;     311, 

1,R.2;  318,N.l;  319,n.2  ;  323,n.1  ;  324; 

336,N.2;     337n.1,2,    and    4;    341,n.2  ; 

343  N.l  ;  346,N.l   and  2  ;  347,R.2  ;  349, 


544 


GENERAL   INDEX. 


R.5;  361.N.1  ;  352.N.:  354.N  2  ;  356. r  3 
and  N.3  ;  357;  358,n.3  and  5  ;  361. n.1  ; 
362,N.l ;  364,N.l;  369, N. 2  ;  372,n.2  ai)d3  ; 
374,N. 1.2,4,  aud  5  ;  376. N.2  aud  3  ;  376,k. 
1,2,  and  3;  380.1, N.l  and  4;  383,N.l.  386, 
N.l;  386.N.;  390,2,n.2  and  3;  391,n.;  395, 
N.l  and  2;  396,N.l:  398,n.1;  403. n. 4;  406. 
N.5  ;  407,N.2,d  ;  410,N.4  ;  411,k.1  and  2, 
and  N.l  ;  413,R.l  ;  416,1,2.3,5,7.13.14,15, 
16,19,24,25.28,  and  29  ;  417,1,N.3  and  14  ; 
418,4;  422,N.2,3,  and  5  ;  423. N.2  and  3  ; 
427  N.2  and  5  ;  428-R  2  and  N.l;  429,N.l; 
432.N.1  ;  435, N.l  ;  436,N.l;  438,N.;  439,N. 
2,3  aud  4  ;  443,N.3  ;  463,N.l  ;  467  1,n  1 
aud  2,  2  and  n.;  458,n.1  ;  459,n.1  ;  460,1, 
N.2  ;  467, N. ;  476,N.5  ;  477,n.4  and  5;  478. 
N.2  ;  480,E.l  aud  N.3  ;  481, N.;  482,l,N.l 
and  2,  2,  3,  and  5.  r.2  and  N.l  ;  484,N.l 
and  2;  485,n.1  and  2;  486,N.;  488,N.laud 
2;  489.N.1  ;  491.N.;  493, n.  1  ;  494,N.l; 
495;  496,N.l;  497;  498,n.3.4,6  aud  8;  601; 
503  ;  611,R.4  ;  613,r.1  and  nn.1.2  ;  525,1, 
N.l  aud  4,  2,N.2  and  3  ;  627,R.l  and  3, 
and  N.2  ;  528,n.1  aud  2  ;  632,n.1  aud  3; 
633,R.l;  536,N.l;  538,n.4;  541,n.1,2.3  aud 
5;  542,R.  and  n.1  ;  543,n.3  ;  648, n.3  ;  649. 
N.1,2  and  4;  650,n.1,2  and  5;  653,1;  565, 
R.l ;  563,N.2.3,4  and  5  ;  567,N.;  569,N.l; 
671,N.2  aud  3  ;  573,n.2  ;  674,n.;  576,n.1; 
677,N.4  and  5  ;  580,n.3  ;  690,n.1;  591,R.4 
and  N.2;  602,N.5  ;  604,R.2;  606,n.;  606,n. 
1;  608;  615,n.;  616,1,n.2,  aud  2,  n.;  617, 
N.l;  626,N.l;  627,u.land2;  636,N.l  aud 
2  ;  636,n.1  ;  643,n.4  ;  644,R.3  ;  647,n.2; 
666,N.;  677  N. 

Columella— 592, N. 

CoRNiFicius— 439.N.3  ;  500,R.;  649,n.4. 

CuRTius— 418,16;  632,N.l. 

DicTYs— 546,R.l. 
Ennius— 411,r.2  ;  476.N.5. 
Florus— 467.N  ;  626,2,N.2. 

rBONTO-626,2,N.3. 


and  2  ;  460,2.N.3  ;  477,N.8  ;  480,n.1  ;  482, 
3;  498,n.1  ;  500,R.;  526.1, N.l,  2,n.2  ;  633. 
R.l  ;  636  N.l ;  638. N.5  :  541,n.5  ;  563,n  3; 
569,N.l  ;  691,R.2  ;  592,N.  ;  616,1,n.2  ;  644, 

n2. 

Juvenal-602,n  4 ;  606,n. 

LivY— 204,N.8  ;  209,N.3;  211,R.l,Ex.rt,N. ; 
247,Nl  ;  249.N.;  250,N.land2;  286,  Ex. 
3  and  N  2;  2^3  N.  ;  311,1,R.2,  2.N.:  317,n. 
1;  319  N.l;  323.N.1;  336,n.  ;  337,n.4; 
338,N.l;  346,N.2;  3i7.i!.2  ;  360.1,n.;  351. 
N.l  ;  353,N.2  ;  356. N  2  ;  359,N.l  and  4  ; 
363,R.l  ;  366,R  1 ;  371,n.;  372,N.laud  4  ; 
373, R  1  ;  374, N  2  and  3  ;  383, n.1  ;  386, n. 

1  ;  390,2  N.3  ;  391,R  1  and  n.;  396,n.1  ; 
399,N.l  and  3;  401,N.2and  6;  403.N.3  ; 
406,N.3;  410,n2.3,  and  4;  411,R.l  and 
N.l  ;  413, N.l  ;  415  ;  416,2,7,15,16,22.23. 
24.  aud  28;  417,1,8.10,11,  and  14  ;  418,2, 
and  4  ;  423,N.2  ;  427,n.2  ;  429,2  and  n.1; 
430,N.l ;  436,N  2  ;  436,n  1  ;  437,n.2  ;  438, 
N.  ;  439,N3and4;  442.N.3  ;  443,N.4 ; 
467,1,N.3  ;  458,N.l ;  460,2,N.3  ;  467,n.  ; 
477,N.4,5  and  9  ;  478,n.1  aud  2  ;  480,n.3  ; 
482,1, N.1,2  and  5,r.2  aud  n.1;  497  ;  498, 
N.1.3,and8;  502,N.3  ;  503-;  513,n.1  and 

2  ;  626,1, N.l  aud  7  and  2,n.2  ;  632,n.1  ; 
536,n.1  ;  641,N.  2  and  5  ;  542,R  aud  n.2; 
643,n.3  ;  546,R.l  ;  649  n  I ;  660,n.5  ;  555, 
2,n.;  657.R.  and  n.2  ;  663,n.2,  3,  and  5  : 
667,n.;  669,N.l  ;  570.N  4  ;  671,n.6  ;  576, 
N.'2  ;  577,N.3,4,  and  5  ;  697,R.5  ;  602,N.5; 
616,N.  ;  616,l,N.l  and  2,  aud  2,N.;  626,N. 
1  ;  635,N.2  ;  636,n.1  ;  644,R.3  ;  651,R.l ; 
666,  N.  ;  687. 

LucAN— 254,N  1  ;  458, n.1. 

LuciLiL's— 383,1,N.2;  4S6.N.1. 

LucRETirs-372,N  2  ;  383.1, n.2  ;  405,N.3  ; 
406.N.6 ;  422,N  4  ;  469,n.1  ;  480,n.2  ;  482, 
l.N.l ;  496,N.l  ;  600,R.  ;  626,1,n.1  ;  633, 
R.l ;  664,N.l  ;  671,n.4  ;  606,n.I  ;  636,n.1. 

Martial— 280,2,6,n.1. 


Gaius— 525,2, N.3. 
Gellius— 680,N.3. 

HiRTius-423,N.2  :  632,n.1. 

Horace— 211,R.l,  Ex.a.N.;  271,2,N  2  ;  301 ; 

346,n2;   361, n.  1  ;   416,5.17,19.   and  21; 

417.8;  418,4  ;  421,N.l,c;  422.N.4  ;  427,n. 

2;   439,N.3;    454,N.2;    457  N.2 ;    468,N.l 


Naevius— 533,N.l. 

Nepos— 249,N. ;  260,N.2  ;  356,R.3  ;  408,N.2, 

c  ;  416,10  ;  513,n.1  ;  •536.N.1  ;   656,2.N.  ; 

671,N.4  ;  605,n.  ;  606,N.l  ;  687. 

OVTD-270,N.;  280,2,6,N.l  ;  349.R.5;  384. 
N.1;401,N.7;  411.R.2  ;  416,7;  417,7;  427, 
N.2;  494,N,3;  626,1,N.;  646,R.l;  616,n.2. 


GENERAL    INDEX. 


545 


Petronius— 207,N.;  625,1,n.1. 
Plautus— 206,N.l  ;  211,R.l,  Ex.a,N.;  270, 

N.l  ;  330,N.3  ;  336,n.1  ;  347, k. 2  ;    357,n  ; 

3S8,N.l  ;    361,N.l;    374,n. 1,2,3,  and    5; 

375,N.3  ;  383,1,n.2,  aud  3  ,  398,N.2  ;  406, 

N.6;407,N.2;   411.ii.l ;   415;  416,6,7,16, 

19,21,  aud  2i  ■  417,7;.  418,4  ;   422,n  2  ; 

439,N.3  ;  454,N.2  ;  455,n  ;  467,n.;'476,n. 

3  aud  5  ;  477,N.  1  and  G  ;  478,N  2  ;  487, 

N.l  ;  494,N.l  and  C  ;   496,N  1  ;   498,n  3  ; 

502,N.3;    525,1,N  4  and  2,n  2  ;  533,u  1  ; 

638,N.l   aud  3;   541,n  1  ;  645.R  1 ;    546, 

N.3  ;  648,N.3  ;  649,n.2  ;    563,N,3  ;   569,n. 

1;671,N.5;   576,Nl;    677,n.5  ;   680,n  1 

aud  3  ;  697,n.;  602,n  5  ;  610,N  1  ;  616  n.; 

626,N.l  ;  643,N  3  ;  677,N. 
Pliny  Maiou-381.n  3  ;  398,n  2,  460,2,n  3; 

467,N.;  482,2;  498.1.N.1 ;  592,n. 
Pliny  MiNOK-209,N.5  ;  252,n.;  418,4;  460, 

2,N.3;  638,N.5;  648,N.3;  602,N  4;  605,n  ; 

616,1,N.2. 

POLLIO— 410,N.3. 

Pkopertius— 406,N.3;  421,n.1,c  ;  467,1,N  2, 
458,N.l;  480,N.2aud3;  498,N,l. 

QUADUIGARIUS— 407,N.2,6. 

QuiNTiLiAN— 359,N.5  ;     406,N  3;    612,n  1 ; 

625,2.N.2;     538,N.5  ;     602,N.4;     604.R2; 

627,R.l. 

Sallust— 207,N.;  208,2.N.2  ;  247,Nl;  250, 
N.l;  280,2,c,N.;  286.N.2;  286,3,N  ;  311,1, 
R.2;  323,N.l;  338,N.l ;  rj47,R.2  ;  349,R.4; 
353,N.2  ;  356,N.3  ;  359,N.l  aud  6  ;  369,N. 
2  ;  372,N.2  aud  3 ;  374,N.1,3,  aud  8 ;  390, 
3,N.l;  391,N.;  407,N.2  ti;  410,N.l,2and  4; 
416,2,4,7,16,20  aud  24  ;  417,7;  418,4;  423, 
N.2;  428,R.2;  435,N.2  ;  436,N  1 ;  437,N.2; 
439.N.3;  460,2,N.l;  467.N.;  475,N.3;  476. 
N.5;  478,N.2;480,N3;482,3and5,R.2aud 
N.1;488,N.2;  491,N.;  496,N.l  ;  501;  603; 
612,N.l;  513,N.l;  625,2,n  2,  632,n.1  ;  536, 
N.l;  638,N.l;  641,n.  2and3,  642,n  1;  646, 
R.l;  548,N.3  ;  563,n.2  ;  669,N.l ;  691, R  2  ; 
604.R.2;  616,1, N.l  aud  2  ;  626,N  1  ;  636, 

N.l. 

Seneca— 374, N.3  ;  616,1, n  2  ,  636, n  2. 

Seneca  Rhetor — 446,N. 

Suetonius  — 349,r.5;    407,n.2,c  ;    416,22; 

613,n.1;  642,R. ;   546,n.3;  577  n.5  ;  602, 

N.4;  665,N.2. 

Tacitus -208,2,N. 2;  209,n.3;  211,r.1,Ex. 
o,N.;  254,N.l;  285,Ex.3  aud  n.2;  346,n. 


3;  353,N.2;  354,n.2;  356,n.2;  359,n.5;  364, 
N.l ;  372,N.2  ;  376,R.l ;  390,3,n.1  ;  401.N.6 
and  7  ;  407,N.2,a  ;  410,N.2  and  4  ;  411,n. 
1;  416,10,16.23  aud  24;  417,3  and  12; 
423,N.3;  428,R.2  aud  n.4  ;  432,N.l;  437, 
N.2;  442,  N.3;  443, n.4  ;  460,2,N.3;  476, 
N.l;  476,N..'5;  477,n.4  ;  480.N.3  ;  482,2.3 
and  5,N.l ;  484,N.2  ;  493,n  2  ;  496,n.1  ; 
497  ;  513,n.1  ;  525,1,n.7,  aud  2,N.2and3; 
532,n.1  ;  638,N.5  ;  642,R.  and  n  1 ;  645, 
n3;  563,n2,3  and  5;  567,n.  ;  569,n1; 
571,N.laud  3;  573,n.1;  675,n.2  ;  676,n. 
1 ;  602,n  4  ;  604,r  2  ,  605,n.  ;  616,1,n.2; 
635,n2;  647,n2;  666,n  ;  687. 

Terence-211,R  l,Ex  a,N  ;  271,N  2  ;  286, 
N.2  .  337,N  4  :  368,N.l ;  361,n  1  ;  383,1, 
N  2,  399,n.1  ;  407,n.2  ;  411,r  2  ;  415;  416, 
1,8,  aud  28;  423  n  2  ;  428,r2;  439,R  3  ; 
454,N  2  ;  455,N. ;  482  5  r  2  ;  487,n  1 ;  489, 
N.;  494,N.l ;  496.N  1  and  2  ;  498,n.3  ;  502, 
N.3  ;  626,l,N.l ;  533,R.l ;  541,n  1  ;  645, 
R.l ;  549,N  2  ;  569,n  1  ;  571,n  4  ;  574,n.  ; 
676,N.l ;  578,N. ;  580,n  1  aud  3  ;  697, 
N.  ;  610,N  1  ;  615,N.  ;  626,N  1 ;  644,n.2  ; 
677,N. 

TiBULLUs  —  465,N. :  457,1,n  2  ;  468,n  1 : 
498,n.1. 

Valerius    Maximus  —  285,n  2  ;    432,n.1  ; 

460,2,N.3  ;  538.N  5  ;  577,n.5. 
Varuo— 416,7,15,  and  23  ;  422,n.4  ;  427,n. 

2  ;  437,N.2  ;  449,R.3  ;  674,n.  ;  606,n.1. 
Vatinius— 606,N .  I . 
Velleius— 209,N.5  ;  286,n.2  ;  349,R.5  ;  391, 

N.;  460,2,N.3;  613,n.2. 
Vergil  — 211  R.l,Ex.a,N.;  230,n.2  ;   269; 

276,2,N.2  ;  301 ;  336,n.1  ;   346, n  2  ;  374, 

N.3;  383.1,n.2  and  3;  390,2,N  4  ;  411.R. 

2  ;  417,3  ;   421,n.1,c  ;   422,N  4  ;   442,n.3  ; 

443,N.l ;  458,n.3  ;  477,n.5  ;  480,N.2  ;  482, 

1,N  I  aud  2  ;   485,N  3  ;  525,1,n  1 ;  542,n 

1 ,  546,N.3  ;  563,N.2  ;  691,R  2  ,  644,n  2. 
ViTRUVius-353,N  1  ;  386,n  ,  416,5  aud  25; 

418,3  ;  439.N.3  ;   636,n.1  ;   549,N.2  ;   671, 

N.4. 

The  Historians— 209,n. 5;  211,R  l,Ex.i> ; 
214,R  2  ;  363,R.1  ;  391,N.  ;  484,n.2  ;  486, 
Nl;  487,Nl;  491;  501,N.;  667,n.;  628,R. 

The  Poets— 211,R.l,Ex.a,N.  and  r.4;  217, 
N.l  and  2;  230,N.2  ;  241, N  1  ;  261 ;  269  ; 
270;  271,2,N.2  ;  280,2,6  and  N.2;  290,N. 
2  ;  295,N.;  296,N.1,3,  aud  4  ;  321, N.l;  332, 
2,N.2aud  3;  333,2,N.6  ;  336,N.3;  337,N. 


546 


GENERAL    INDEX. 


1  and  2  ;  338,N.l  and  2  ;  346,n.6  ;  350,1, 
N.;  351,N.l  ;  362,N.  ;  354,n.2  ;  358;  361, 
N.l ;  362,N.l  ;  373,R.l  ;  374,n.1,3,(),8,  and 
10  ;  375  ;  383,1,n.1  ;  385,n.1  ;  386,n.  ;  390, 
3,N.l  and  2  ;  391,N  ;  394,3,n.1  ;  396,n.1 
and  3;  397,N.2  ;  401.N.4aua6:  404,n.1; 
407,N.2,e;  413,k.1  and  3,  and  n1  ;  416, 
14,  and  20  ;  417,5,12,  and  24  ;  418,3  and 
4;  421. N.l;  427,n.5  ;  428,N.2  and  3; 
435,N  1  ;  436,N.l  and  3 ;  437,n  1  ;  439,n. 
2;  440,R.;  446,N.2;  449,R.3  ;  454,N  3  ; 
457,1,N.3;  460,2,N.2;  467,N.;  476.N.2,3, 
and  5  ;  477,n.4  ;  482,3  ;  488,n.1  and  2; 
495,N.2  ;  496,N.l  ;  498,n.1  and  5  ;  502,N. 
1;  525,l,N.7;  627,n  2  ;  532,n.1  and  G; 
535,R.3  ;  636,N.2  ;  538,n.5  ;  546,u.2  and 
N.3  ;  552.n  2  ;  691,n.2  ;  604,u.2  ;  617,n. 
2 :  631,2,N.l  ,  683 

The  Comic  Poets— 211, r  1, Ex. a,N.;  228, 
N.l;  242,N.2;  243;  244,n.1  ;  247,n.2; 
263,2.N.;  267,N.;  269;  280, 2,c  n.;  346,n  1; 
361,N.l;  406,N.2;  416,4;  443,N.4 ;  453, 
N.l  and  2;  467,N.;  468,n.;  477,n.3  ;  553,1; 
617,N.2. 

Later  Prose— 211,r.1, Ex. a,N  ;  217,n.1 
and  2;  221,R.2  ;  269;  361,n.1  ;  372,N.3; 
374,N.l  and  3;  375;  386,n.;  390,2,n.3; 
404,N.l ;  413,N.l ;  415 ;  416,  20,  23, 25,  and 
27:  417,5;  427,N.5;  428,n.1,  2.  and  3; 
449,R.3;  460,l,a;  467,n.;  476,n.5;  477,n. 
4;  528,R.2  and  n.4;  535,R.3;  538,n.5; 
646, r.2;  555,2,n.;  569,n.1. 

Anteclassical  Latin— 211,n.1  and  2;  220, 
N.2;  221,R.2;  241,N.l;  248,N.l ;  254,N.2; 
257,N.l;  260;  261.N.2;  271,1,n  1  and  2, 
and  2,N.l  and  2;  272,3,n.;  280,2,a.B.2; 
293,n.;  296,n.1;  301;  303;  309,n.2;  319. 
N.l;  330, N.2;  339,N.l;  341,n.  2;  346, n.2; 
347,R.l;  350,1,N.;  373,R.l;  374,n.4;376, 
N.2;  383,1, N.2;  385,N.2;  390,2,n1;  390, 
n.3;  391,R.2  and  n.;  395  n.2;  397. n.2; 
393,N.l;  403.N.3;  407.N.2;  408,N.G;  410. 
N.1,4,  and  5;  413,R.l;  416, 10.  12,  IC,  23. 
24.  and  27;  417,2,9,  and  10;  421,N.l; 
422,N.2and4;  423,  n.2  and  3;  427,N.2; 
428  N.l;  429,N.l;  430,n.1;  432,n.1;  433, 
N.2;  436,N.l  and  4;  437,N.2;  439,N.3;  442, 
N.3;  443,N.l  and  4;  444,1,n.2;  454,n.1  and 
5;456,N.;457,1,N.1,2,  and  3,  and  2,n.; 
469,N.2;  475,N.l;  476,N.1,2,  and  5;  479, 
N.l;  480,N.l;  482,1,n.1,  and  5,n.1;  487, 
N.2;  488,N.l;  496,N.l;  498,N.5,C,and  7; 
600;  503;  613,n.1;  626,l,N.2,G,and7,  and 
2,N.2,  and3;  627,R.3;   528,N.l;   636,N.l; 


537,N.2;  541,N.5;  642,r.  and  n.2;  646,' 
N.3;  649,N.4;  650,n.1  and  2;  663,3,n.; 
557,R.;  563,N,1,2,  and  5;  564,n.1:  571, 
N.2,3,  and  5;  574,n.;  576,n.1;  577,n.1; 
580,N.3;  591,R.2  and  n.2;  602,n.5;  614, 
N.;  617,N.land2;  626,n1.  and  2;  627, 
R.l;634,N.;636,N.l;  651,R.l. 

Classical  Latin— 220,n.1  ;  241,N.l  ;  260  ; 
263,2.N.;  269  ;  270,n.  ;  282,n  ;  285,  Ex.3  ; 
301:303;  309,n.2;  318,n.2  ;330,n.2;  339. 
N.l  and  4;  342;  343,N.l:  346,N.2:  347,R.l; 
348,R.2;  356,R.2;  359,N.4;  363,n.;  374, 
N. 1,2,3,4,  5,  and  9  ;  381.N.1 ;  383,1 ;  385, 
R  I  and  N.1,2,  and  3  ;  390,2,N.l,  and  2  ; 
391,R.l ;  393,R  5  ;  394,n.1  ;  398  ;  399,N.l; 
401,N.2  and  6  ;  403,n.3  and  4  ;  407,n.2: 
408,N.G  ;  410,N  1,2,5  and  6;  413,R.3;  418, 
9,12,16,23,  and  29  ;  417,9  and  11 ;  421.N. 
1  and  2  ;  422.N.4  ;  423,N.4  ;  429,1  and  2; 
430,Nl;  432,N.l;  437,1;  438,n.;  439.N.3; 
442,n3;  444,1,n.2;  449, R. 3  ;  460,1,n.1, 
and  2,  n.3;  467,n.;  475,n.2:  477.N.8;  479, 
N.l;  482,4,N  ;  494,N.2and8;498.N.3and 
4;  500,R.;  501,n.;  602,n.1;  503;  Sll.R.l; 
525,1, N.l ;  528,R.2,  and  N.l  ;  632,N.1,3, 
and  4;  535,R.3;  537,N.2;  638,N.  2  and  3  ; 
541,Nland2;  545.R.1;  546,n.3;  549,n.1; 
556;  571,N.2;  602.N.1;  610,n.1  ;  631,3,h. 
1;  643,N.3;  644,R.3;  651, R.l. 

Post-classical  Latin— 211, r.2  ;  239,n.; 
241,N.2;  247,N.l;  251,n.2;  254, r. 6,  and 
N.2  ;  257,N.l ;  271,2,N.2  ;  292,n.;  296.N. 
land  2;  298,n.1;  299,n.2  ;  301;  309, 
N.2  ;  319.N.1 ;  330,n.4  ;  333,2,n.6  ;  337, 
N.l  and  2 ;  338,N.2  ;  339,N.l  and  3 ; 
346,  N.2;  349,R.5;  365,N.  ;  356,R.3; 
362.N.1  and  2;  366,R.2  ;  374,N.2and  3; 
378,R.4  ;  380,1,N.2  ;  390,3,n.1  ;  391. n.  ; 
393,r5;  397,N.2;  398,n.1:  399,n.2:  403, 
N.4;  405,N.3;  407,N.2;  408,N.6 ;  410,N.l, 
2,3,  and  5  ;  411,R.l;  415  ;  416,7,10,12,14, 
16.17,18.  and  22;  417,7;  418,4;  422,N.2,4, 
and  5  ;  423,n.2  and  3  ;  431,n.1  and  3; 
432,N.l;  433;  435,n.1;  436,n.1;  437.N.1; 
438,N.;  439,N.2  and  3;  479,N.l  and  2; 
480,N.l  ;  482,l,N.l  and  2,  3,4,n.,  and 5. 
N.l  and  2  ;  494,N.2  ;  498,n. 1,3,6,  and  8 ; 
603  ;  513,  n.2  ;  625,1, N. 7,  and  2.N.2:  628, 
R.2;  532,N.l;  541,n.1;  543,n.3;  545,R.l; 
646,n.3;  549,n.2  ;  653, 2,n.  and  4,r.2  ; 
667,N.2;  5f3,N.4and5;  573,n.2  ;  676,N. 
2;  690,n.1  ;  595, R. C. ;  602,n.5  ;  606,N.; 
606,n.1  ;  616,2,n.;  626,1, R.  aud2,R.;  626, 
N.l;  669;  677,N. 


PAKALLEL  KEFEEENCES   OF   THE  OLD    AND 
NEW   EDITIONS. 


1-7 

1-7 

8 

10 

9 

11 

10 

12,1  and 

n 

13 

12 

14 

13 

12,3 

14 

15 

15 

16 

10 

17 

17 

18 

18 

19 

19 

20 

20 

21 

21 

23 

22 

24,2 

23 

24,1 

24 

25 

25 

26 

26,1 

26,R. 

26,2 

28 

"7 

29 

28 

30 

29 

31.33 

30 

34 

81 

31,33 

32 

32,2,  74 

33,34 

73 

35 

76 

36,  37 

35 

38,39 

36 

40 

39 

41 

40 

42 

41 

43 

42 

44 

43 

45 

44 

45,  R. 

44,N. 

46 

44,2 

47 

46 

48 

47 

49 

48 

50 

49 

51 

50 

52 

51 

53 

52 

54 

52,6 

54,  R. 

54 

55 

53,1-6 

56 

53,7  fin^^ 

57 

55' 

58,59 

56 

60 

57 

61 

58 

62 

59 

63-66 

60 

67 

61 

70 

64 

149,  150 

129 

71,72 

65 

151 

131 

73 

65,R.i  and  2. 

152 

133 

74 

67,68 

153 

134 

75 

69 

154 

135 

76 

70 

155 

121,R, 

77 

68 

156 

136 

78 

67 

157-181 

137-162 

79 

68 

182 

167 

80 

71 

183 

168 

81 

72 

184 

169,1 

82 

78 

1&5 

169,2,  17 

83 

82 

186 

171 

84 

80 

187 

172 

85,1-3 

82 

188 

173 

85,4 

83,N.l  and  2. 

189 

174 

86 

86 

190 

175 

87 

89 

191 

130,  131 

88 

87 

192 

201 

89 

90 

193 

202 

90 

91 

194 

203 

90,1 

91,2,6 

194,R.2 

201,R.2 

90,2 

92,1 

195 

204 

90,3 

91,2,C 

196 

205 

90,4 

91,i,c 

197 

206 

91 

93 

198 

207 

92 

95 

199 

208 

93 

94 

200 

209 

94 

96 

201 

210 

95 

97 

202 

211 

96 

98 

203 

212 

97 

99 

204 

213 

98 

100 

205 

214 

99 

101 

206 

215 

100 

102 

207 

210 

101 

103 

208 

217 

102 

104 

209 

218 

103 

105 

210 

219 

104 

106 

211 

220 

105 

107 

212 

221 

106 

109 

213 

222 

107 

110 

214 

223 

108 

111 

215 

224 

109 

112,1-4 

216 

225 

110 

112,5 

217 

226 

111 

114^ 

218 

227 

112 

116 

219 

228 

113 

117 

220 

229 

114 

118 

221 

230 

115 

119 

222 

231 

116-118 

120 

223 

232 

119-122 

122 

224 

233 

123-126 

123 

225,  226 

234 

127,129,130  124 

227 

235 

128 

135,La 

228 

236 

131-134 

125 

229 

237 

135-138 

127 

230 

238 

139,  140 

126 

231 

239 

141-148 

128 

232 

240 

548 


PARALLEL   REFEREN'CES. 


OLD 

NEW 

OLD 

NEW 

OLD 

NEW 

233 

241 

301 

314 

367 

368 

234 

242 

302 

314 

368 

370 

235 

243 

303 

316 

369 

371 

236 

244 

304 

317 

370 

372 

237 

245 

305 

318 

371 

369 

238 

246 

306 

819 

372 

373 

239 

247 

307 

292 

373 

374 

240 

248 

308 

293 

374 

375 

241 

249 

309 

294 

375 

376 

242 

250 

310 

295 

376 

377 

243 

251 

311 

296 

377 

378 

244 

252 

312 

297 

378 

379 

245 

253 

313 

298 

379 

380,1 

246 

254 

314 

299 

380 

380,2 

247 

255 

315 

300 

381,  382 

381,  382 

248 

256.1 

316 

302 

383 

384 

249 

256,2 

317 

303 

384 

385 

250 

257 

318 

320 

385 

387 

251 

259 

319 

321 

386 

388 

252 

258 

320 

322 

387 

389 

252,R.i 

257,N.2  and  3 

321 

323 

388 

390 

and 

3 

322 

349,R.5 

389 

405 

253 

260 

333 

324 

390 

406 

254 

261 

324 

325 

391 

392 

255 

262 

325 

326 

392 

393 

256 

263 

326 

327 

393 

394 

257 

264 

327 

328 

394 

omitted 

258 

265 

328 

329 

395,  396 

395,  396 

259 

266 

329 

330 

397,  398 

397,  402 

260 

267 

330 

331 

399 

398 

261 

268,1 

331 

332,  333,2 

400 

403 

262 

268,2 

a31,R.2 

3.33,1 

401 

399 

263 

270 

331, R.  3 

334 

402 

400 

264 

271 

331,R.4 

333,2,N.4 

403, 

401 

265 

272,1 

332 

338 

404 

404 

266 

27'2,2 

333 

339 

405 

407 

266,R.3 

272,3 

334 

340 

406 

408,N.7 

267 

263,2,a 

335 

335 

407 

408 

268 

273 

336 

335,R.i 

408 

409 

269 

275 

337 

336 

409 

410 

270 

276 

338 

336,R.4 

410 

337 

271 

277 

339 

343 

411 

391 

272 

278 

340 

343,1 

412 

386,  411 

273 

279 

341 

343,2 

413 

412 

274 

280,1 

342 

omitted 

414 

413 

275 

280,2 

343 

344 

415 

413,R.2  and  3 

276 

281 

343,R.2 

350,1 

416 

414 

277 

281,1  and  2 

344 

345 

416,R. 

415 

278 

282 

344,  R.  3 

358 

417 

416 

279 

283 

345 

346 

418 

417 

280 

284 

346 

347 

419 

418 

281 

285 

347 

346,N.2 

420 

419 

282 

286 

348 

348 

421 

420 

283 

287 

349 

349 

422 

421 

284 

288 

350 

356 

423 

422 

2m 

289 

351 

351 

424 

423 

286 

290 

352 

354 

425 

424 

287 

291,1 

353 

355 

426 

425 

288 

291,2 

354 

353 

427 

426 

289 

omitted 

355 

357 

428 

427 

290 

305 

356 

369 

429 

428 

291 

306 

357 

360,1 

4d0 

429 

292 

307 

358 

360,2 

431 

480 

293 

308 

359 

361 

432 

431 

294 

309 

360 

362 

433 

432 

295 

309,1  and  2 

361 

363 

434 

433 

296 

310 

362 

304,2  ;  364,N.2 

435 

434 

297 

311,1 

363 

364 

436 

435 

298 

311,2 

364 

365 

437 

436 

299 

312 

365 

366 

438 

437 

300 

313 

866 

367 

489 

438 

PARALLEL   REFEREN^CES. 


549 


OLD 

ITEW 

OLD 

NEW 

OLD 

NEW 

440 

439 

509 

508 

615 

613 

441 

440 

510-518 

510-518 

616 

614 

442 

441 

518,Ex. 

518 

G17 

615 

443,1 

442 

519-549 

519-549 

618 

616 

443,2 

443 

550 

554 

618,B. 

616,i,N.2 

444 

445 

551 

555 

619 

617 

445 

446 

552 

550 

620 

618 

446 

447 

553 

551 

621 

619 

447 

448 

554 

552 

622 

620 

448 

449 

555 

553 

623 

621 

449 

444,1 

556 

552 

624 

622 

450 

444,2 

557 

553,1 

625 

623 

451 

450 

558 

553,3  and  4 

626 

624 

452 

451 

559 

557 

627 

626 

453 

452,1 

560 

558 

628 

625,2 

454 

452,2 

561 

559 

629 

627 

455 

453 

562 

560 

630 

628 

456 

•  454 

563 

561 

631 

629 

457 

455 

564 

562 

632 

630 

458 

456 

565 

563,1 

633 

631,1 

459  " 

457,1 

566 

563,2 

634 

631,2 

459,B. 

457,2 

567 

564 

635 

632 

460' 

458 

568 

566 

636 

633 

461 

459 

569 

567 

637 

634 

462 

460 

570 

568 

638 

635 

463 

461 

571 

569 

639 

C36 

464 

462 

572 

570 

640 

637 

465 

463 

573 

571 

641 

638 

466 

464 

574 

572 

G42 

639 

467 

465 

575 

573 

643 

640 

468 

466 

576 

574 

644 

641 

469 

467 

577 

575 

645 

642 

470 

468 

578 

576 

646 

643 

471 

469 

579 

577 

647 

644 

472 

470 

580 

578 

648 

645 

473 

471 

581 

579 

649 

646 

474 

472 

581,R. 

581 

650 

647 

475 

473 

582 

580 

651 

648 

476 

474 

583 

582 

652 

649 

477 

475 

584 

583 

653 

650 

478 

476 

585 

584 

654 

651 

479 

477 

586 

585 

655 

652 

480 

478 

587 

586 

656 

653 

481 

479 

588 

587 

657 

654 

482 

480 

589 

588 

658 

655 

483 

481      1 

590 

589 

659 

656 

484 

482 

591 

590 

660 

657 

485 

483 

592 

591 

661 

658 

486 

484 

593 

592 

662 

659 

487 

485 

594 

593 

663 

660 

488 

486 

595 

590,N.l 

664 

661 

489 

487 

596 

594 

665 

662 

490 

483  . 

597 

595 

666 

663,1 

491 

489 

598 

596,1 

666,R.i 

663,2 

492 

490 

599 

597 

667 

664 

493 

491 

599,R.3 

596,2  ;  597,R.3 

668 

665 

494 

492 

600 

598 

669 

666 

495 

493 

601 

599 

670 

667 

496 

494 

602 

600 

671 

668 

497 

495 

603 

601 

672 

669 

498 

496,1 

604 

602 

673 

670 

499 

496,2 

605 

603 

674 

671 

500 

498 

606 

604 

675 

672 

501 

499 

607 

605 

676 

674 

502 

500 

608 

606 

677 

675 

503 

501 

609 

607 

678 

676 

504 

502 

610 

608 

679 

677 

505 

504 

611 

609 

680 

678  . 

506 

505 

612 

610 

681 

679 

507 

506 

613 

611 

682 

680 

508 

507 

614 

612 

883 

681 

S50 


PARALLEL    REFERENCES. 


OLD 

NEW 

OLD 

NEW 

OLD 

NBW 

68* 

682 

724 

730 

761 

784 

am 

684 

725 

731 

762 

785 

(58G 

685 

726 

732 

768 

777,  780,  781 

t587 

omitted 

727 

7;33 

764 

790-793 

t88-692 

688-692 

728 

734 

765 

794-796 

693 

696 

729 

735,  739 

766 

797 

694 

697 

730 

736 

767 

798 

695 

698 

731 

737 

768 

799 

696 

699 

732 

738 

769 

800 

697 

700 

733 

740 

770 

801-«05 

698 

701 

734 

741 

771 

806-814 

699 

702 

735 

742 

772 

815 

700 

703 

736 

743 

778 

823,19 

701 

704 

737 

744 

774 

818 

702 

705 

738 

745 

775 

820 

703 

706 

739 

746 

776 

821 

704 

707 

740 

748 

777 

756 

705 

708 

741 

749 

778 

826 

700 

709 

742 

750 

779 

827 

707 

710 

743 

752 

780 

176 

708 

711 

744 

753 

781 

177 

709 

712 

745 

754 

782 

178 

710 

713 

746 

768 

783 

179 

711 

714 

747 

774,  778,  772,  791 

784 

180 

712 

715 

748 

769 

7&5,  786 

184-189 

713 

718 

749 

770 

787 

191 

714 

719,  720 

750,  751 

757 

788 

192 

715 

721 

752 

705 

789 

193 

716 

722 

753 

763 

790 

194,  195 

717 

723 

754 

760-762 

791 

194,N. 

718 

724 

755 

764 

792 

199 

719 

725 

756 

758 

793,  794 

200 

720 

726 

757 

759 

795 

196 

721 

727 

758 

783 

796 

197,2  ;  108 

722 

703,R.3 

759 

789 

797 

197,1 

723 

729 

760 

788,  787,  786 

THE  GILDERSLEEYE-L0D6E  LATIN  SERIES 

UNDER    THE    EDITORIAL    SUPERVISION    OF 

BASIL  L.  QILDERSLEEVE      AND      GONZALEZ  LODGE 

PROFESSOR    OF    GREEK  PROFESSOR    OF    LATIN 

JOHNS    HOPKINS    UNIVERSITY  TEACHERS    COLLEGE,    COLUMBIA    UNIVERSITY 

WITH    THE    COOPERATION    OF 

MOSES  S.  SLAUGHTER        and        THOMAS   FITZ-HUGH 

PROFESSOR    OF    LATIN  PROFESSOR    OF    LATIN 

UNIVERSITY    OF    WISCONSIN  UNIVERSITY    OF   VIRGINIA 


THE  PREPARATORY  SERIES 

Gildersleeve's  Latin  Grammar.  (School  Edition.)  By  Professors 
GiLDERSLEEVE  and  Lodge.    vi  + 330  pages.     Price  80  cents. 

A  First  Book  in  Latin,  by   Charles    W.    Bain,    late    Head  Master 

of    the    Sewanee    Grammar   School    in   the    University  of    the  South, 

Professor    in    South    Carolina    College.       Cloth,    344    pages.  Price 
75  cents. 

Selections  from  Ovid,  by  James  N.  Anderson,  A.M.,  Ph.D., 
Instructor  in  Vanderbilt  University.     Cloth,  270  pages.     Price  $1.00. 

Eleven  Orations  of  Cicero,  by  Robert  W.  Tunstall,  Professor  of 
Latin  in  Jacob  Tome  Institute,  Maryland.  Cloth,  xxxiv+ 585  pages. 
Price  $1.20.  

A  Latin  Exercise=Book,  by  J.  Edmund  Barss,  Professor  in  the 
Hotchkiss  School,  Lakeville,  Conn. 

Caesar's  Commentaries  on  the  Gallic  War,  by  H.  F.  Towle, 
Professor  in  the  Boys'  High  School,  Brooklyn. 

NepOS,  by  Alexander  L.  Bondurant,  Professor  in  the  University  of 
Mississippi. 

Sallust,  Catilina,  by  D.  A.  Penick,  Instructor  in  the  University  of 
Texas. 

Vergil's  Aeneid,  by  Thomas  Fitz-Hugh,  Professor  elect  in  the 
University  of  Virginia. 


THE  COLLEGIATE  SERIES 

Gildersleeve's  Latin  Grammar.  (Third  Edition,  1894.)  Revised  and 
enlarged.  By  Professors  Gildersleeve  and  Lodge,  x  +  550  pages. 
Price  $1.20. 

Latin  Composition,  intended  mainly  for  the  first  year  in  College,  or  for 
highest  classes  in  secondary  schools.  By  Professors  Gildersleeve 
and  Lodge.     Cloth.     Price  75  cents.     Key,  price  60  cents. 

Exercises  for  Translation  into  Latin  Prose,  by  J.  Leverett  Moore, 
Professor  in  Vassar  College,  and  Beatrice  Reynolds,  Los  Angeles. 
Cloth,  80  pages.     Price  50  cents. 


THE  COLLEGIATE  SERIES  (continued) 

Cicero,  De  Officiis,  Book  I.,  by  F.  E.  Rockwood,  Professor  in  Bucknell 
University.     Cloth,  xxviii  +  155  pages.     Price  90  cents. 

Cicero,  the   Second   Philippic,  by*E.  G.  Sihler,  Professor  in  New 
York  University.     Cloth,  xxxvi  + 124  pages.     Price  80  cents. 

Selections  from  the  Elegiac  Poets,  by  Jesse  B.  Carter,  Assistant  Pro- 
fessor in  Princeton  University.     Cloth,  xlvii  +  283  pages.    Price  $1.40. 

Selections  from  the  Latin  Literature,  by  Kirby  F.  Smith,  Asso- 
ciate Professor  in  Johns  Hopkins  University. 

Catullus,  by  Professor  Kirby  F.  Smith. 

Cicero,  De  Amicitia  and  De  Senectute,  by  Tom  F.  Kane,  Professor 
in  the  University  of  Washington. 

Cicero,  Tusculan  Disputations,  by  Frank  M.  Johnson,  Professor  in 
the  University  of  Nebraska. 

Cicero's  Letters,  by  George  H.  Denny,  Professor  in  "Washington  and 
Lee  University. 

Horace,  by  Professor  Moses  S.  Slaughter. 

Juvenal,  by  H.  L.  Wilson,  Associate  in  Johns  Hopkins  University. 

Livy,  Books  XXL  and  XXII.,  by  Dr.  Emory  B.  Lease,  College  of  the 
City  of  New  York. 

Lucan,  by  Dr.  Willard  K.  Clement,  of  the  University  of  Chicago. 

Lucretius,  by  W.  A.  Heidel,  Professor  in  Iowa  College. 

Martial,  by  Fred.  B.  R.  Hellems,  Professor  in  the  University  of  Colorado. 

Plautus,  by  Professor  Lodge. 

Pliny's  Letters,  by  Willis  H.  Bocock,  Professor  in  the  University  of 
Georgia. 

Quintilian,  Inst.  Orat.,  Liber  X.,  by  Henry  F.  Linscott,  Professor  in 
the  University  of  North  Carolina. 

Seneca's  Plays,  by  Gordon  J.  Laing,  Instructor  in  the  University  of 

Chicago. 
Seneca,  Moral  Essays,  by  James  H.  Dillard,  Professor  in  the  Tulane 

University  of  Louisiana. 
Tacitus,   Histories,  by  Wm.   Hamilton    Kirk,  Professor   in   Rutgers 

College. 
Terence,  by  J.  Leverett  Moore,  Professor  in  Vassar  College. 


Correspondence  invited. 

UNIVERSITY  PUBLISHING  COMPANY 

43-47  East  Tenth  Street,  New  York 


RETURN    EDUCATION-PSYCHOLOGY  LIBRARY 

TO— ►    2600  Tolman  Hall                   642-4209 

LOAN  PERIOD  1 
SEMESTER 

2                      : 

3 

4 

5                                     ( 

5 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

2-hour  books  must  be  renewed  in  person 

Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

1  PM 

i 

REC'D  Jl)L29  Uv 

■  j_  rni 

1 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 
FORM  NO.  DDIO                               BERKELEY,  CA  94720             ^  -^ 

LD  21-100m-2,'55 
(B139s22)476 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


4 


m  35650 


0745 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


II  |-|IIIIIWil«llllli  lilllll    III   liillilllll  ilillMiiilliiiilllliillilliaii-tlllllllMM^ 


